The general design and duties of the Bureau of Labor Statistics shall be to acquire and diffuse among the people of the United States useful information on subjects connected with labor, in the most general and comprehensive sense of that word, and especially upon its relation to capital, the hours of labor, the earnings of laboring men and women, and the means of promoting their material, social, intellectual, and moral prosperity.

(June 13, 1888, ch. 389, §1, 25 Stat. 182; Feb. 14, 1903, ch. 552, §4, 32 Stat. 826; Mar. 18, 1904, ch. 716, 33 Stat. 136; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737.)

Act June 27, 1884, created Bureau of Labor in Department of the Interior.

Section 1 of act June 13, 1888, created Department of Labor and outlined its general design and duties, and section 9 of that act transferred Bureau of Labor to Department of Labor.

Act Feb. 14, 1903, placed Department of Labor under jurisdiction and made it a part of Department of Commerce and Labor.

Act Mar. 18, 1904, changed name of Department of Labor to Bureau of Labor in Department of Commerce and Labor.

Act Mar. 4, 1913, created Department of Labor and transferred Bureau of Labor from Department of Commerce and Labor to newly created Department of Labor, redesignating such transferred Bureau as Bureau of Labor Statistics.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics, under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, shall collect, collate, and report at least once each year, or oftener if necessary, full and complete statistics of the conditions of labor and the products and distribution of the products of the same, and to this end said Secretary shall have power to employ any or either of the bureaus provided for his department and to rearrange such statistical work, and to distribute or consolidate the same as may be deemed desirable in the public interests; and said Secretary shall also have authority to call upon other departments of the Government for statistical data and results obtained by them; and said Secretary of Labor may collate, arrange, and publish such statistical information so obtained in such manner as to him may seem wise.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics shall also collect, collate, report, and publish at least once each month full and complete statistics of the volume of and changes in employment, as indicated by the number of persons employed, the total wages paid, and the total hours of employment, in the service of the Federal Government, the States and political subdivisions thereof, and in the following industries and their principal branches: (1) Manufacturing; (2) mining, quarrying, and crude petroleum production; (3) building construction; (4) agriculture and lumbering; (5) transportation, communication, and other public utilities; (6) the retail and wholesale trades; and such other industries as the Secretary of Labor may deem it in the public interest to include. Such statistics shall be reported for all such industries and their principal branches throughout the United States and also by States and/or Federal reserve districts and by such smaller geographical subdivisions as the said Secretary may from time to time prescribe. The said Secretary is authorized to arrange with any Federal, State, or municipal bureau or other governmental agency for the collection of such statistics in such manner as he may deem satisfactory, and may assign special agents of the Department of Labor to any such bureau or agency to assist in such collection.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §4, 37 Stat. 737; July 7, 1930, ch. 873, 46 Stat. 1019.)

1930—Act July 7, 1930, inserted second par.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For provisions requiring Bureaus of Labor Statistics and the Census to include certain data on women-owned businesses in census reports, and requiring a study and report on the most cost effective and accurate means to gather and present such data, see section 501 of Pub. L. 100–533, set out as a note under section 131 of Title 13, Census.

Pub. L. 100–175, title I, §191, Nov. 29, 1987, 101 Stat. 967, provided that: “The Secretary of Labor shall, through the Bureau of Labor Statistics, develop, from existing data sources, a reweighted index of consumer prices which reflects the expenditures for consumption by Americans 62 years of age and older. The Secretary shall furnish to the Congress the index within 180 days after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 29, 1987]. The Secretary shall include with the index furnished a report which explains the characteristics of the reweighted index, the research necessary to develop and measure accurately the rate of inflation affecting such Americans, and provides estimates of time and cost required for additional activities necessary to carry out the objectives of this section.”

Joint Res. June 17, 1940, ch. 389, 54 Stat. 401, authorized Bureau of Labor Statistics to furnish a report to Congress before May 1, 1941, on kind, amount, and value of all goods produced in State and Federal prisons.

Transfer of duties as to ascertaining cost of production in foreign countries, etc., see Codification note set out under section 4 of this title.

Section, act Feb. 24, 1927, ch. 189, title IV, 44 Stat. 1222, which related to collection of statistical reports through local special agents, was from an appropriations act for the Departments of State, Justice, the Judiciary, and Departments of Commerce and Labor for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1928, and was not repeated in subsequent appropriation acts.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics of the United States Department of Labor is authorized and directed to make continuing studies of productivity and labor costs in the manufacturing, mining, transportation, distribution, and other industries.

(June 7, 1940, ch. 267, 54 Stat. 249; Aug. 30, 1954, ch. 1076, §1(27), 68 Stat. 968.)

Provision of this section authorizing appropriations of up to $100,000 for studies by the bureau in the first fiscal year was omitted.

1954—Act Aug. 30, 1954, repealed second par. which required Secretary of Labor to submit annually to Congress reports of findings under this section.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics shall be under the charge of a Commissioner of Labor Statistics, who shall be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate; he shall hold his office for four years, unless sooner removed, and shall receive a salary.

(June 27, 1884, ch. 127, 23 Stat. 60; June 13, 1888, ch. 389, §2, 25 Stat. 182; Mar. 18, 1904, ch. 716, 33 Stat. 136; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737.)

Act June 13, 1888, raised salary from $3,000 to $5,000 per annum.

Act Mar. 18, 1904, changed name of Department of Labor to Bureau of Labor.

Act Mar. 4, 1913, authorized the substitution of “Commissioner of Labor Statistics” and “Bureau of Labor Statistics” for “Commissioner of Labor” and “Bureau of Labor”, respectively.

Words “of five thousand dollars per annum” at end of section were omitted as superseded by the Classification Acts. See sections 5101 et seq. and 5331 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

It shall be the duty of the Commissioner of Labor Statistics to ascertain the effect of the customs laws, and the effect thereon of the state of the currency, in the United States, on the agricultural industry, especially as to its effect on mortgage indebtedness of farmers. He shall also establish a system of reports by which, at intervals of not less than two years, he can report the general condition, so far as production is concerned, of the leading industries of the country. He is also specially charged to investigate the causes of, and facts relating to, all controversies and disputes between employers and employees as they may occur, and which may tend to interfere with the welfare of the people of the different States. He shall also obtain such information upon the various subjects committed to him as he may deem desirable from different foreign nations, and what, if any, convict-made goods are imported into this country, and if so from whence.

(June 13, 1888, ch. 389, §7, 25 Stat. 183; Aug. 23, 1912, ch. 350, §1, 37 Stat. 407; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737; May 29, 1928, ch. 901, §1(110), (111), 45 Stat. 994.)

The customs laws, referred to in text, are classified generally to Title 19, Customs Duties.

Section is from act June 13, 1888. Act June 13, 1888, also contained other provisions relating to duties of former Commissioner of Labor to ascertain cost of producing, in leading countries, articles dutiable in United States, comparative cost of living, etc., which have been omitted from this section because of act Aug. 23, 1912, transferring those duties to Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce.

Act Aug. 23, 1912, transferred the duty of former Commissioner of Labor to ascertain the cost of producing, in leading countries, articles dutiable in the United States, the profits of the manufacturers and producers of such articles, the comparative cost of such articles, comparative cost of living in such countries, what articles are controlled by trusts and the effect they have on prices and production, to the Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce. Text of said act is set out as section 172 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

Act Mar. 4, 1913, authorized the substitution of “Commissioner of Labor Statistics” for “Commissioner of Labor”.

1928—Act May 29, 1928, repealed provisions requiring reports to Congress on investigations required by this section, and is authority for omission of “and report as to” after “ascertain” in first sentence and “and report thereon to Congress” at end of third sentence relating to information from foreign nations, and convict made goods.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Commissioner of Labor Statistics is authorized to prepare and publish a bulletin of the Bureau of Labor Statistics, as to the condition of labor in this and other countries, condensations of State and foreign labor reports, facts as to conditions of employment, and such other facts as may be deemed of value to the industrial interests of the country.

(Mar. 2, 1895, ch. 177, §1, 28 Stat. 805; Mar. 18, 1904, ch. 716, 33 Stat. 136; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737.)

Provision of act Mar. 2, 1895, as to printing of the bulletin for distribution is covered by section 1324 of Title 44, Public Printing and Documents.

Act Mar. 18, 1904, changed name of Department of Labor to Bureau of Labor.

Act Mar. 4, 1913, authorized substitution of “Commissioner of Labor Statistics” and “Bureau of Labor Statistics” for “Commissioner of Labor” and “Bureau of Labor”, respectively.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Commissioner authorized to compile, as part of bulletin of Department, an abstract of main features of official statistics of cities having over 30,000 population, by a provision of act July 1, 1898, ch. 546, §1, 30 Stat. 648.

This section is referred to in title 44 section 1324.

The Commissioner of Labor Statistics shall annually make a report in writing to the President and Congress, of the information collected and collated by him, and containing such recommendations as he may deem calculated to promote the efficiency of the department. He is also authorized to make special reports on particular subjects whenever required to do so by the President or either House of Congress, or when he shall think the subjects in his charge require it. He shall, on or before the 15th day of March in each year, make a report in detail to Congress of all moneys expended under his direction during the preceding fiscal year.

(June 13, 1888, ch. 389, §8, 25 Stat. 183; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737; Pub. L. 94–273, §5(3), Apr. 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 377.)

Act Mar. 4, 1913, authorized substitution of “Commissioner of Labor Statistics” for “Commissioner of Labor”.

1976—Pub. L. 94–273 substituted “March” for “December”.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Congressional Record, bound copy to Department of Labor, see section 906 of Title 44, Public Printing and Documents.

Printing of reports, see section 1325 of Title 44.

Section, acts Apr. 30, 1900, ch. 339, §76, 31 Stat. 155; Apr. 8, 1904, ch. 948, 33 Stat. 164; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737, directed United States Commissioner of Labor Statistics to assemble and report on statistical details relating to all departments of labor in Territory of Hawaii.

The Department of Labor, in cooperation with the Department of Commerce, shall develop methods for improving and expanding the collection, analysis, and publication of unemployment data relating to Americans of Spanish origin or descent.

(Pub. L. 94–311, §1, June 16, 1976, 90 Stat. 688.)

The Department of Labor is authorized, within the discretion of the Secretary of Labor, upon the written request of any person, to make special statistical studies relating to employment, hours of work, wages, and other conditions of employment; to prepare from its records special statistical compilations; and to furnish transcripts of its studies, tables, and other records, upon the payment of the actual cost of such work by the person requesting it.

(Apr. 13, 1934, ch. 118, §1, 48 Stat. 582; Apr. 11, 1935, ch. 59, 49 Stat. 154; June 15, 1937, ch. 349, 50 Stat. 259; Apr. 15, 1939, ch. 71, 53 Stat. 581.)

This section and sections 9a and 9b of this title comprised sections 1 to 3 of act Apr. 13, 1934. Section 4 of that act provided as follows: “This Act shall cease to be effective one year after the date of its enactment.” The act was temporarily extended by acts Apr. 11, 1935, and June 15, 1937, and was made permanent by act Apr. 15, 1939.

This section is referred to in section 9b of this title.

All moneys hereinafter 1 received by the Department of Labor in payment of the cost of such work shall be deposited to the credit of the appropriation of that bureau, service, office, division, or other agency of the Department of Labor which supervised such work, and may be used, in the discretion of the Secretary of Labor, and notwithstanding any other provision of law, for the ordinary expenses of such agency and/or to secure the special services of persons who are neither officers nor employees of the United States.

(Apr. 13, 1934, ch. 118, §2, 48 Stat. 582; Apr. 11, 1935, ch. 59, 49 Stat. 154; June 15, 1937, ch. 349, 50 Stat. 259; Apr. 15, 1939, ch. 71, 53 Stat. 581.)

This section and sections 9 and 9b of this title comprised sections 1 to 3 of act Apr. 13, 1934, which were to terminate one year after Apr. 13, 1934, pursuant to section 4 of act Apr. 13, 1934, set out as a Codification note under section 9 of this title. Such sections were temporarily extended by acts Apr. 11, 1935, and June 15, 1937, and were made permanent by act Apr. 15, 1939.

This section is referred to in sections 9b, 216 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “hereafter”.

The Secretary of Labor shall prescribe rules and regulations for the enforcement of sections 9 and 9a of this title.

(Apr. 13, 1934, ch. 118, §3, 48 Stat. 583; Apr. 11, 1935, ch. 59, 49 Stat. 154; June 15, 1937, ch. 349, 50 Stat. 259; Apr. 15, 1939, ch. 71, 53 Stat. 581; Aug. 7, 1946, ch. 770, §1(16), 60 Stat. 867.)

This section and sections 9 and 9a of this title comprised sections 1 to 3 of act Apr. 13, 1934, which were to terminate one year after Apr. 13, 1934, pursuant to section 4 of act Apr. 13, 1934, set out as a Codification note under section 9 of this title. Such sections were temporarily extended by acts Apr. 11, 1935, and June 15, 1937, and were made permanent by act Apr. 15, 1939.

1946—Act Aug. 7, 1946, repealed provisions requiring Secretary of the Interior to make annual reports to Congress.


There shall be established in the Department of Labor a bureau to be known as the Women's Bureau.

(June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §1, 41 Stat. 987.)

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Women's Bureau shall be in charge of a director, a woman, to be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate.

(June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §2, 41 Stat. 987.)

Part of section 2 of act June 5, 1920, constitutes section 13 of this title.

Words “who shall receive an annual compensation of $5,000” were omitted in view of the Classification Acts. See sections 5101 et seq. and 5331 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

It shall be the duty of the Women's Bureau to formulate standards and policies which shall promote the welfare of wage-earning women, improve their working conditions, increase their efficiency, and advance their opportunities for profitable employment. The said bureau shall have authority to investigate and report to the Department of Labor upon all matters pertaining to the welfare of women in industry. The director of said bureau may from time to time publish the results of these investigations in such a manner and to such extent as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe.

(June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §2, 41 Stat. 987.)

Part of section 2 of act June 5, 1920, constitutes section 12 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There shall be in the Women's Bureau an assistant director, to be appointed by the Secretary of Labor, who shall perform such duties as shall be prescribed by the director and approved by the Secretary of Labor.

(June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §3, 41 Stat. 987.)

Words “who shall receive an annual compensation of $5,000 and” were omitted in view of the Classification Acts. See sections 5101 et seq. and 5331 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section, act June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §4, 41 Stat. 987, authorized employment by Woman's Bureau of Department of Labor of such employees at such rates of compensation as Congress may provide by appropriation.

Section, act June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §5, 41 Stat. 987, related to quarters for bureau.

Section 18, acts Apr. 9, 1912, ch. 73, §1, 37 Stat. 79; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737, which established a Children's Bureau in Department of Labor, was transferred to section 191 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section 18a, acts Apr. 9, 1912, ch. 73, §2, 37 Stat. 79; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §§3, 6, 37 Stat. 737, 738; Feb. 27, 1925, ch. 364, title IV, 43 Stat. 1050, which created office of chief of Children's Bureau, and enumerated powers and duties of said Bureau, was transferred to section 192 of Title 42.

Section 18b, acts Apr. 9, 1912, ch. 73, §3, 37 Stat. 80; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §§3, 6, 37 Stat. 737, 738, which created office of Assistant Chief of Children's Bureau, was transferred to section 193 of Title 42.

Section 18c, acts Apr. 9, 1912, ch. 73, §4, 37 Stat. 80; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737, which related to quarters for Children's Bureau, was transferred to section 194 of Title 42.

Section 21, act June 29, 1886, ch. 567, §1, 24 Stat. 86, defined a National Trade Union for purposes of this chapter.

Section 22, act June 29, 1886, ch. 567, §2, 24 Stat. 86, related to rights of a National Trade Union upon incorporation in the office of the recorder of the District of Columbia.

Section 23, act June 29, 1886, ch. 567, §3, 24 Stat. 86, related to power of an incorporated National Trade Union to establish and amend its own constitution, rules, and by-laws.

Section 24, act June 29, 1886, ch. 567, §4, 24 Stat. 86, related to power of an incorporated National Trade Union to establish and grant powers to its own officers.

Section 25, act June 29, 1886, ch. 567, §5, 24 Stat. 86, related to establishment of a headquarters of a National Trade Union in District of Columbia.

Section 31, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §1, 41 Stat. 735; June 5, 1924, ch. 265, 43 Stat. 431; June 9, 1930, ch. 414, §1, 46 Stat. 524; June 30, 1932, ch. 324, §1, 47 Stat. 448; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 374; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 652; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §2(a), 79 Stat. 1282; Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §2, 81 Stat. 250; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §§2, 7(c), 82 Stat. 298, 300; Dec. 31, 1970, Pub. L. 91–610, §1, 84 Stat. 1817, related to grants to assist in rehabilitating handicapped individuals, providing in subsec. (a) authorization to make grants and a statement of purpose and in subsec. (b) authorization of appropriations.

Section 32, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §2, 41 Stat. 735; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 374; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 652; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §2(a), 79 Stat. 1282; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §§3, 4, 5, 82 Stat. 298, related to grants to States for vocational rehabilitation services, providing in: subsec. (a) for computation of allotments; subsec. (b) for amount of payments and adjusted Federal shares; and subsec. (c) for private contributions for construction or establishment of facilities.

Section 33, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §3, 41 Stat. 736; June 5, 1924, ch. 265, 43 Stat. 431; June 9, 1930, ch. 414, §2, 46 Stat. 524; June 30, 1932, ch. 324, §2, 47 Stat. 449; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 376; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 654; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §2(a), 79 Stat. 1283; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §6, 82 Stat. 299, related to grants for innovation of vocational rehabilitation services, providing in: subsec. (a) for the basis of allotments; subsec. (b) for duration of payments; subsec. (c) for restriction on payments; and subsec. (d) for additional amounts.

Section 34, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §4, 41 Stat. 736; June 9, 1930, ch. 414, §3, 46 Stat. 525; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 377; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 655; Aug. 3, 1956, ch. 903, 70 Stat. 956; Aug. 28, 1957, Pub. L. 85–198, §1, 71 Stat. 473; Aug. 28, 1957, Pub. L. 85–213, 71 Stat. 488; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §§4(a), 5(a), 12(a), (b)(1), (2), 79 Stat. 1289, 1290, 1293; Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §3, 81 Stat. 251; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §7(a), (b), (d), 82 Stat. 299, 300; Dec. 31, 1970, Pub. L. 91–610, §2, 84 Stat. 1817, related to grants for special projects, providing in: subsec. (a) general provisions; subsec. (b) for payments; and subsec. (c) for National Advisory Council on Vocational Rehabilitation.

Section 35, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §5, 41 Stat. 736; June 30, 1932, ch. 324, §3, 47 Stat. 450; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 377; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 656; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §§8(a), 12(b)(1), 79 Stat. 1291, 1293; Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §6, 81 Stat. 253; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §8, 82 Stat. 300, related to State plans, providing in: subsec. (a) for requirements for approval; subsec. (b) for approval; subsec. (c) for withholding or limitation of payments; and subsec. (d) for judicial review.

Section 36, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §6, 41 Stat. 737; June 5, 1924, ch. 265, 43 Stat. 432; June 9, 1930, ch. 414, §4, 46 Stat. 526; June 30, 1932, ch. 324, §4, 47 Stat. 450; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 378; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 658, related to method of computing and making payments.

Pub. L. 89–554, §8(a), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 644, repealed section 36 of this title, insofar as section 36 authorized an appropriation to finance the operation of the Federal Board for Vocational Education, and insofar as it provided for certain salary restrictions.

Section 37, acts June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §7, 41 Stat. 737; July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 378; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 658; Aug. 28, 1957, Pub. L. 85–198, §2, 71 Stat. 474; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §§5(b), 7, 12(b)(1), 79 Stat. 1290, 1291, 1293; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §9, 82 Stat. 301, related to administration, providing in: subsec. (a) general provisions; subsec. (b) for rules and regulations; subsec. (c) for research and dissemination of information; subsec. (d) for authorization of appropriations; and subsec. (e) for evaluation of vocational rehabilitation program.

Section 38, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §8, as added July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 379; amended Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 659; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §12(b)(3), 79 Stat. 1293, related to promotion of employment opportunities.

Section 39, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §9, as added July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 379; amended Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 659, related to annual reports to Congress.

Section 40, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §10, as added July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 379; amended Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 659, related to appropriations for administration.

Section 41, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §11, as added July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §1, 57 Stat. 379; amended Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 659; Aug. 1, 1956, ch. 852, §16, 70 Stat. 910; June 25, 1959, Pub. L. 86–70, §24, 73 Stat. 147; July 12, 1960, Pub. L. 86–624, §20, 74 Stat. 416; Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §§6(a), 9, 10(a), 11, 12(b)(1), (c), (d), 13, 79 Stat. 1291–1294, Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §7, 81 Stat. 253; July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §10, 82 Stat. 301, related to definitions.

Section 41a, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §12, as added Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §3, 79 Stat. 1284; amended July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §11, 82 Stat. 303; Dec. 31, 1970, Pub. L. 91–610, §3, 84 Stat. 1817, related to grants for construction and staffing of rehabilitation facilities, providing in: subsec. (a) for authorization to make grants; subsec. (b) for project requirements, assurances, plans and specifications, and labor standards; subsec. (c) for percentage shares; subsec. (d) for reservation of grant funds, payment, and additional payments; subsec. (e) for recovery of Federal share upon cessation of public or non-profit character of rehabilitation facilities; subsec. (f) for grants for staffing facilities with professional or technical personnel and limitation on Federal share; subsec. (g) for planning grants; subsec. (h) for adjustments for overpayments or underpayments; subsec. (i) for authorization of appropriations; and subsec. (j) for definitions of “construction”, “cost” of construction, and what a project for construction of a rehabilitation facility which is primarily a workshop, may include.

Section 41b, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §13, as added Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §3, 79 Stat. 1286; amended July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §12, 82 Stat. 303; Dec. 31, 1970, Pub. L. 91–610, §4, 84 Stat. 1817, related to rehabilitation facility improvement, providing in: subsec. (a) for grants for projects for training services, authorization, definition of training services, allowances, and payments; subsec. (b) for rehabilitation facility improvement grants; authorization, improvement of service capability, and payments; subsec. (c) for technical assistance to rehabilitation facilities, and compensation of experts and consultants; subsec. (d) for National Policy and Performance Council, its establishment, membership, function, and compensation of members; subsec. (e) for labor standards; and subsec. (f) for authorization of appropriations.

Section 41c, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §14, as added Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §3, 79 Stat. 1288, related to waiver in the case of locally financed activity of requirement that plan be statewide.

Sections 31 to 41c, referred to above, and sections 42–1 to 42b of this title, were known as the Vocational Rehabilitation Act. Section 500(a) of Pub. L. 93–112, which repealed that Act, also provided that references to such Vocational Rehabilitation Act in any other provision of law would, ninety days after Sept. 26, 1973, be deemed to be references to the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, which is classified generally to chapter 15 (§701 et seq.) of this title.

Such former provisions are covered by various sections as follows:

Former sections | Present sections |
---|---|

31(a) | 701(1), 720(a) |

31(b)(1), (2) | 720(b)(1), (2) |

31(b)(3)(A) | 761(a), 774(a) |

31(b)(3)(B) | 720(b)(2) |

31(b)(3)(C), (D) | 774(a)(1) |

31(b)(4) | See 720(b), 761(a), 774(a) |

32(a) | 730(a) |

32(b) | 731(a) |

32(c) | 724 |

33(a)(1) | 740(a)(1) |

33(a)(2) | 741(a) |

33(b) | 741(b) |

33(c) | 709 |

33(d) | 740(b) |

34(a) | 762(a), (b), 763, 774(b), 776(h) |

34(a)(1) | 762(a), (b) |

34(a)(2)(A) | 741(a), (b) |

34(a)(2)(B) | 774(d) |

34(a)(2)(C) | 763(b), 774(b) |

34(a)(2)(D) | 723(a)(7) |

34(b) | 741(c) |

34(c) | Repealed |

35(a) | 721(a) |

35(a), (1), (2) | 721(a)(1), (2) |

35(a)(3) | 721(a)(3), (4) |

35(a)(4) | 721(a)(5)(A)(i) |

35(a)(5), (6) | 721(a)(5), (6) |

35(a)(7) | 723(a)(1), (2) |

35(a)(8), (9) | 721(a)(10), (11) |

35(a)(10) | 721(a)(11), (12) |

35(a)(11) | 721(a)(13)(A) |

35(a)(12), (13) | 721(a)(14), (15) |

35(a)(14) | 721(a)(17) |

35(b)–(d) | 721(b)–(d) |

36 | 731(b) |

37(a), (b) | 780(a), (b) |

37(c)(1) | 780(c) |

37(c)(2) | 785(a)(5) |

37(d) | See 780(d) |

37(e) | 783 |

38 | See 791, 791(f)(1) |

39 | 784 |

40 | 780(d) |

41(a)(1) | 706(14), 723(a)(1) |

41(a)(1)(A)–(C) | 723(a)(1)–(3) |

41(a)(1)(D), (E) | 723(a)(6), (7) |

41(a)(2) | 723(b) |

41(a)(2)(A)(i)–(iv) | 723(a)(4)(A)–(D) |

41(a)(2)(B) | 723(a)(5) |

41(a)(2)(C) | 723(a)(9) |

41(a)(2)(D), (E) | 723(b)(1), (2) |

41(a)(2)(F) | 723(a)(10) |

41(a)(2)(G) | 723(a) |

41(a)(2)(H) | 723(a)(3) |

41(b) | 706(4)(G), (6) |

41(c) | 706(10) |

41(d) | See 706(L) |

41(e) | 706(8) |

41(f) | 706(3) |

41(g) | 706(13) |

41(h) | 707(a) |

41(i) | 706(5) |

41(j) | 707(b) |

41(k) | 706(11) |

41(l) |
706(1) |

41a(a) | 771(b)(1) |

41a(b) | 771(b)(2), 776 |

41a(b)(1)(A)–(C) | 776(b)(1)(A)–(C) |

41a(b)(2) | 776(b)(4) |

41a(b)(3) | See 780(b) |

41a(b)(4) | 776(b)(5) |

41a(c) | 771(b)(3) |

41a(d), (e) | 776(c), (d) |

41a(f), (g) | 771(c), (d) |

41a(h) | 776(e) |

41a(i) | 771(a) |

41a(j)(1), (2) | 706(1) |

41a(j)(3) | 776(f) |

41b(a)(1)–(3) | 772(b)(1)–(3) |

41b(a)(4) | 776(e) |

41b(1), (2) | 772(c)(1), (2) |

41b(b)(3) | 776(e) |

41b(c) | 774(e) |

41b(d)(1)–(4) | Repealed |

41b(e) | 776(b)(4) |

41b(f) | 772(a), 774 |

41c | 721(a)(4) |


Repeal effective 90 days after Sept. 26, 1973, see section 500(a) of Pub. L. 93–112, which is classified to section 790(a) of this title.

Pub. L. 86–624, §47(g), July 12, 1960, 74 Stat. 424, provided that the allotment percentage determined for Alaska under section 41(h) of this title for the first to fourth years for which such percentage was based on the per capita income data for Alaska was to be increased by varying amounts each of those four years, that the Federal share for Alaska determined under section 41(i) of this title, for the first year for which such share was based on per capita income data for Alaska, was to be increased, and that where the first year for which such Federal share was based on per capital income data for Alaska was a fiscal year ending prior to July 1, 1962, the adjusted Federal share for Alaska for such year for purposes of section 32(b) of this title was to be the Federal share determined pursuant to section 41(i) of this title.

Act Aug. 1, 1955, ch. 437, title II, 69 Stat. 403, provided in part that not more than $2 of the funds made available for special projects under section 34(a)(2) of this title was to be expended for any project for each $1 that the grantee, or the grantee and the State, expended for the same purpose.

Act Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §3, 68 Stat. 662, provided that materials which the Director of the Bureau of the Budget [now the Director of the Office of Management and Budget] determined related to the provision of vocational rehabilitation services in the District of Columbia or the performance of certain functions by State licensing agencies were to be transferred within ninety days after Aug. 3, 1954, from the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare to the municipal government of the District of Columbia, authorized the Board of Commissioners of the District of Columbia [now the Mayor of the District of Columbia] to take the necessary steps to secure the benefits of act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 735, and also authorized the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare to continue the performance of certain functions relating to rehabilitation services in the District of Columbia until the completion of the transfer of responsibility.

Act Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §7, 68 Stat. 665, required the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare to make a thorough study of existing programs for teaching and training handicapped persons, commonly known as shut-ins, whose disabilities confine them to their homes or beds, for the purpose of ascertaining whether additional or supplementary programs or services are necessary, particularly in rural areas, in order to provide adequate general ameliorative and vocational training for such handicapped persons, and provided that the Secretary shall report to the Congress not later than six months after Aug. 3, 1954, the results of such study, together with such recommendations as may be desirable.

Act July 6, 1943, ch. 190, §3(b), 57 Stat. 380, authorized particular States which were unable to comply with the preconditions of act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 735, on July 6, 1943, to secure the benefits of such act, for a period of sixty days after their particular State legislatures meet for the first time after such date.

Act June 26, 1940, ch. 428, 54 Stat. 583, making appropriations for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1941, made certain appropriations for cooperative vocational rehabilitation, and expenses connected therewith, with provisions for apportionment to the States to be computed in accordance with act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 735, and other acts.

Section 41d, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §15, as added Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §3, 79 Stat. 1289, established a National Commission on Architectural Barriers to Rehabilitation of the Handicapped in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, and provided for its membership and functions, appointment of experts and consultants, technical and administrative assistance, compensation of Commission members, interim and final reports, and authorization of appropriations.

Section 42, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §16, formerly §12, as added Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §2, 68 Stat. 662; amended Sept. 10, 1965, Pub. L. 89–178, §2, 79 Stat. 676 and renumbered Nov. 8, 1965, Pub. L. 89–333, §3, 79 Stat. 1284, authorized grants for special projects in correctional rehabilitation, prescribed conditions thereof, defined “organization”, established a National Advisory Council on Correctional Manpower and Training in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, and provided for its composition, selection of members, functions, compensation and travel expenses, appropriations, terms of grant, and additional financial support.

Pub. L. 91–6, Mar. 28, 1969, 83 Stat. 6, provided that the date by which the research and study initiated and the final report required by section 42 of this title (as in effect prior to July 7, 1968) was to be completed was July 31, 1969.

Section 42–1, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §15, as added July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §13, 82 Stat. 304; amended Dec. 31, 1970, Pub. L. 91–610, §5, 84 Stat. 1817, related to vocational evaluation and work adjustment program, providing in: subsec. (a) for computation of allotments, authorization of appropriations, Federal payments, restriction on payments, evaluation and work adjustment services, and disadvantaged individuals; subsec. (b) for restriction on payments; subsec. (c) for State plans and requirements for approval; subsec. (d) for withholding of payments and judicial review; and subsec. (e) for payments to States adjustments, advances or reimbursement, installments, and conditions.

Section 42a, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §16, formerly §17, as added Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §4, 81 Stat. 251; renumbered July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §13, 82 Stat. 304, related to National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, providing in: subsec. (a) for statement of purpose, agreement for establishment and operation of the National Center, and its designation; subsec. (b) for proposals and preference; subsec. (c) for terms and conditions of agreement; subsec. (d) for recovery of funds for non-user of facilities for contemplated purposes or termination of agreement, and cause for release from obligation; and subsec. (e) for definition of “construction” for determination pursuant to regulations of the Secretary of who are both deaf and blind. Subsections (c)(2) to (4) of section 42a were amended by Pub. L. 93–608, §1(8), Jan. 2, 1975, 88 Stat. 1968, without reference to the repeal of this section by Pub. L. 93–112. The purported amendment would have eliminated the annual report of the National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, through the Secretary of the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, to the Congress with comments and recommendations as the Secretary deemed appropriate.

Section 42b, act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, §17, formerly §18, as added Oct. 3, 1967, Pub. L. 90–99, §5, 81 Stat. 252; renumbered July 7, 1968, Pub. L. 90–391, §13, 82 Stat. 304, related to grants for services for migratory agricultural workers, authorization, payments, and other related provisions.

Sections 42–1 to 42b, referred to above, and sections 31 to 41c of this title, were known as the Vocational Rehabilitation Act. Section 500(a) of Pub. L. 93–112, which repealed that Act, also provided that references to such Vocational Rehabilitation Act in any other provision of law would, ninety days after Sept. 26, 1973, be deemed to be references to the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, which is classified generally to chapter 15 (§701 et seq.) of this title.

Such former provisions are covered by various sections as follows:

Former sections | Present sections |
---|---|

42–1(a)(1) | See 730(a), 740(a) |

42–1(a)(2) | 720(b)(1) |

42–1(a)(3) | Repealed |

42–1(a)(4)(A)–(F) | 706(4)(A)–(F) |

42–1(a), last sentence | Repealed |

42–1(b) | 709 |

42–1(c) | See 721(a) |

42–1(c)(1) | 721(a)(1) |

42–1(c)(2) | 721(a)(3) |

42–1(c)(3) | 721(a)(5)(A) |

42–1(c)(4), (5) | 721(a)(6), (7) |

42–1(c)(6) | Repealed |

42–1(c)(7) | 721(a)(10) |

42–1(c)(8) | See 721(a)(11) |

42–1(d) | See 721(c), (d) |

42–1(e) | See 776(e) |

42a(a), (b) | 775(b), (c) |

42a(c)(1)–(3) | 776(b)(2), (3), (5) |

42a(c)(4) | Repealed |

42a(d) | 776(d) |

42a(e)(1) | 706(1) |

42a(e)(2) | See 723(a)(6) |

42b | 774(c) |


Repeal effective 90 days after Sept. 26, 1973, see section 500(a) of Pub. L. 93–112, which is classified to section 790(a) of this title.

Section 43, formerly constituting part of section 7 of act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 737, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 6166, §15, June 10, 1933; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§201, 204, eff. July 1, 1939, related to report, by Federal Security Agency, of gifts or donations. Act June 2, 1920, was amended generally by act July 6, 1943, ch. 190, 57 Stat. 374, which did not contain similar provisions.

Section 44, formerly constituting part of section 7 of act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 737, related to prohibition of discrimination for or against persons entitled to benefits of act of June 2, 1920. Act June 2, 1920, was amended generally by act July 6, 1943, ch. 190, 57 Stat. 374, which did not contain similar provisions.

Section 45, act Mar. 10, 1924, ch. 46, §5, 43 Stat. 18, related to extension of provisions of sections 31 to 44 of this title to the Territory of Hawaii and appropriation authorization for allotment.

Section 45a, acts Mar. 3, 1931, ch. 404, §2, 46 Stat. 1489; May 17, 1932, ch. 190, 47 Stat. 158, related to extension of provisions of sections 31 to 44 of this title upon the same terms and conditions as any of the several states.

Section 45b, acts Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, title V, §531, 49 Stat. 633; Aug. 10, 1939, ch. 666, title V, §508, 53 Stat. 1381, related to an authorization of appropriations for each fiscal year after fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, and appropriations therefor together with apportionment of appropriations to the states and to the Territory of Hawaii.

A prior chapter 4A, consisting of sections 47 to 47f, act Feb. 23, 1929, ch. 303, §§1–7, 45 Stat. 1260, related to vocational rehabilitation of disabled residents of the District of Columbia.

Sections 48 to 48g of this title comprised the Employment Stabilization Act of 1931, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §§1–8, 46 Stat. 1084–1086, which became obsolete upon the abolition of the National Resources Planning Board effective Aug. 31, 1943, by act June 26, 1943, ch. 145, title I, §1, 57 Stat. 170.

Section 48, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §1, 46 Stat. 1084, related to citation of “Employment Stabilization Act of 1931”.

Section 48a, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §2, 46 Stat. 1084; Ex. Ord. No. 6623, Mar. 1, 1934; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§4, 6 eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2727, 53 Stat. 1423; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. II, §4(e), (f), eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2731, 53 Stat. 1433; 1940 Reorg. Plan No. III, §3, eff. June 30, 1940, 5 F.R. 2108, 54 Stat. 1232, related to definitions of terms used in this chapter.

Section, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §3, 46 Stat. 1085, Ex. Ord. No. 6623, Mar. 1, 1934; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§4, 6, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2727, 53 Stat. 1423, related to powers and duties of the National Resources Planning Board, which was abolished by act June 26, 1943, ch. 145, title I, §1, 57 Stat. 170.

Section 48c, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §4, 46 Stat. 1085; Ex. Ord. No. 6623, Mar. 1, 1934; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§4, 6, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2727, 53 Stat. 1423, related to basis of action of the National Resources Planning Board which was abolished. See note below.

Section 48d, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §5, 46 Stat. 1086; Ex. Ord. No. 6623, Mar. 1, 1934; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§4, 6, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2727, 53 Stat. 1423, related to public works emergency appropriations during existence of depression periods.

Section 48e, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §6, 46 Stat. 1086, related to use of emergency appropriations authorized by section 48d of this title.

Section 48f, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §7, 46 Stat. 1086, related to acceleration of emergency construction work.

Section 48g, act Feb. 10, 1931, ch. 117, §8, 46 Stat. 1086; Ex. Ord. No. 6623, Mar. 1, 1934; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§4, 6, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2727, 53 Stat. 1423, related to advance planning by construction agencies of the government and submission of programs, plans, and estimates to the National Resources Planning Board which was abolished. See note below.

The National Resources Planning Board was abolished August 31, 1943, by act June 26, 1943, ch. 145, title I, §1, 57 Stat. 170, and it was expressly provided that its functions were not to be transferred to any other agency, that the Director should exercise until January 1, 1944, such authority as was necessary to effectuate the discontinuance of the Board, and that the records and files of the Board should be transferred to the national archives.


National Policy on Employment, see sections 1021 to 1025 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

This chapter is referred to in sections 1532, 1535, 1605, 1645, 1661c, 1732, 1735, 1751, 1792, 1811 of this title; title 20 sections 2403, 2468; title 26 section 51; title 38 sections 4101, 4104; title 39 section 3202; title 42 sections 1101, 4728.

In order to promote the establishment and maintenance of a national system of public employment offices, the United States Employment Service shall be established and maintained within the Department of Labor.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §1, 48 Stat. 113; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(a), formerly title V, §501(a), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1392; renumbered title VI, §601(a), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

1982—Pub. L. 97–300 substituted “the United States Employment Service shall be established and maintained within the Department of Labor” for “there is created in the Department of Labor a bureau to be known as the United States Employment Service”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

Act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §15, as added by Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(h), formerly title V, §501(h), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1397; renumbered title VI, §601(h), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248, provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Wagner-Peyser Act’.”

Functions, powers, and duties of Secretary of Labor under this chapter, insofar as relates to prescription of personnel standards on a merit basis, transferred to Office of Personnel Management, see section 4728(a)(2)(A) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department were, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (see sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by such Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

United States Employment Service transferred to Department of Labor, functions of Federal Security Administrator with respect to employment services, and Bureau of Employment Security transferred to Secretary of Labor by Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1949, §1, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, 14 F.R. 5225, 63 Stat. 1065, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Section 1 of Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1949, also provided that functions transferred by this section shall be performed by Secretary of Labor or, subject to his direction and control, by such officers, agencies, and employees of Department of Labor as he shall designate.

Act June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, 62 Stat. 446, provided in part that: “Effective July 1, 1948, the United States Employment Service, including its functions under title IV of the Servicemen's Readjustment Act of 1944, is transferred to the Federal Security Agency, and on and after such date the functions of the Secretary of Labor with respect to the United States Employment Service are transferred to the Federal Security Administrator and shall be performed by him or, under his direction and control, by such officers and employees of the Federal Security Agency as he may designate. There are transferred to the Federal Security Agency, for use in connection with the functions transferred by the provisions of this paragraph, the personnel, property, and records of the Department of Labor related to the United States Employment Service, and the balances of such prior appropriations, allocations, and other funds available to the United States Employment Service as the Director of the Bureau of the Budget may determine. The provisions of section 9 of the Reorganization Act of 1945 (Public Law 263, Seventy-ninth Congress) shall apply to the transfer effected by this paragraph in like manner as if such transfer were a reorganization of the agencies and functions concerned under the provisions of that Act.”

United States Employment Service and all functions of Social Security Board in Federal Security Agency relating to employment service transferred to War Manpower Commission by Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, 7 F.R. 7379. That Commission was terminated by Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, 10 F.R. 11929, and the United States Employment Service transferred to the Department of Labor.

Reorg. Plan No. I of 1939, §201, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2728, 53 Stat. 1424, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, consolidated United States Employment Service in Department of Labor and its functions and personnel, with other offices and agencies, under one agency to be known as Federal Security Agency with a Federal Security Administrator at head thereof.

Section 203 of Reorg. Plan No. I of 1939, provided that functions of United States Employment Service should be consolidated with unemployment compensation functions of Social Security Board and should be administered in Social Security Board in connection with unemployment compensation functions under direction and supervision of Federal Security Administrator.

Section 203 of Reorg. Plan No. I of 1939, further, abolished office of Director of United States Employment Service and transferred all functions of that office to Social Security Board, to be exercised by Board, and provided that functions of Secretary of Labor relating to administration of United States Employment Service should be transferred to, and exercised by, Federal Security Administrator.

Pub. L. 93–198, title II, §204(a), Dec. 24, 1973, 87 Stat. 783, provided that: “All functions of the Secretary of Labor (hereafter in this section referred to as the Secretary) under section 3 of the Act [section 49b of this title] entitled ‘An Act to provide for the establishment of a national employment system and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such system, and for other purposes’, approved June 6, 1933 (29 U.S.C. 49–49k), with respect to the maintenance of a public employment service for the District [of Columbia], are transferred [effective July 1, 1974] to the Commissioner [of the District of Columbia established under Reorg. Plan No. 3 of 1967 (now the Mayor)]. After the effective date of this transfer [July 1, 1974], the Secretary shall maintain with the District the same relationship with respect to a public employment service in the District, including the financing of such service, as he has with the States (with respect to a public employment service in the States) generally.”

Act July 3, 1948, ch. 823, §1, 62 Stat. 1238, authorized the Federal Security Administrator to recruit foreign workers within the Western Hemisphere and workers in Puerto Rico for temporary agricultural employment in the continental United States and to direct, supervise, coordinate, and provide for the transportation of those workers from such places of recruitment to and between places of employment within the continental United States and return to the places of recruitment not later than June 30, 1949.

Section 2 of act July 3, 1948, appropriated $2,500,000, for fiscal year ending June 30, 1949, to carry out the purposes of section 1 of act July 3, 1948.

Act Apr. 28, 1947, ch. 43, §2, 61 Stat. 55, provided:

“(a) The provisions of the Farm Labor Supply Appropriation Act, 1944 (Public Law 229, Seventy-eighth Congress, second session, title I [sections 1351 to 1355 of Appendix to Title 50, War and National Defense]), as amended and supplemented, and as extended by this Act, shall not be construed to limit or interfere with any of the functions of the United States Employment Service or State public employment services with respect to maintaining a farm placement service as authorized under the Act of June 6, 1933 (48 Stat. 113) [this chapter].

“(b) The Secretary of Agriculture and the Secretary of Labor shall take such action as may be necessary to assure maximum cooperation between the agricultural extension services of the land-grant colleges and the State public employment agencies in the recruitment and placement of domestic farm labor and in the keeping of such records and information with respect thereto as may be necessary for the proper and efficient administration of the State unemployment compensation laws and of title V of the Servicemen's Readjustment Act of 1944, as amended (58 Stat. 295).”

This section is referred to in title 39 section 3202.

For purposes of this chapter—

(1) the term “chief elected official or officials” has the same meaning given that term under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.];

(2) the term “private industry council” has the same meaning given that term under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.];

(3) the term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor;

(4) the term “service delivery area” has the same meaning given that term under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.]; and

(5) the term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, and the Virgin Islands.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §2, 48 Stat. 114; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(a), formerly title V, §501(a), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1392; renumbered title VI, §601(a), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which was classified to this chapter and section 338 of former Title 39, The Postal Service. Section 338 of former title 39 was repealed and reenacted as section 4152 of former Title 39, The Postal Service, by Pub. L. 86–682, Sept. 2, 1960, 74 Stat. 578. Section 4152 of former title 39 was repealed and reenacted as section 3202 of Title 39, Postal Service, by Pub. L. 91–375, Aug. 12, 1970, 84 Stat. 719.

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in pars. (1), (2), and (4), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 19 (§1501 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

1982—Pub. L. 97–300 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to definitions for provisions which authorized appointment of personnel and payment of office expenses.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 39 section 3202.

(a) The United States Employment Service shall assist in coordinating the State public employment services throughout the country and in increasing their usefulness by developing and prescribing minimum standards of efficiency, assisting them in meeting problems peculiar to their localities, promoting uniformity in their administrative and statistical procedure, furnishing and publishing information as to opportunities for employment and other information of value in the operation of the system, and maintaining a system for clearing labor between the States.

(b) It shall be the duty of the Secretary of Labor to assure that unemployment insurance and employment service offices in each State, as appropriate, upon request of a public agency administering or supervising the administration of a State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.], of a public agency charged with any duty or responsibility under any program or activity authorized or required under part D of title IV of such Act [42 U.S.C. 651 et seq.], or of a State agency charged with the administration of the food stamp program in a State under the Food Stamp Act of 1977 (7 U.S.C. 2011 et seq.), shall (and, notwithstanding any other provision of law, is authorized to) furnish to such agency making the request, from any data contained in the files of any such office, information with respect to any individual specified in the request as to (1) whether such individual is receiving, has received, or has made application for, unemployment compensation, and the amount of any such compensation being received by such individual, (2) the current (or most recent) home address of such individual, and (3) whether such individual has refused an offer of employment and, if so, a description of the employment so offered and the terms, conditions, and rate of pay therefor.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §3, 48 Stat. 114; Sept. 8, 1950, ch. 933, §1, 64 Stat. 822; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §6(a), 68 Stat. 665; Aug. 1, 1956, ch. 852, §17(a), 70 Stat. 910; Pub. L. 86–624, §21(a), July 12, 1960, 74 Stat. 417; Pub. L. 93–198, title II, §204(c), Dec. 24, 1973, 87 Stat. 783; Pub. L. 94–566, title V, §508(a), Oct. 20, 1976, 90 Stat. 2689; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(a), formerly title V, §501(a), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1392; renumbered title VI, §601(a), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; Pub. L. 99–198, title XV, §1535(b)(2), Dec. 23, 1985, 99 Stat. 1584; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(m), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2173.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Social Security Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Part D of title IV of such Act is classified generally to part D (§651 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Food Stamp Act of 1977, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 88–525, Aug. 31, 1964, 78 Stat. 703, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§2011 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2011 of Title 7 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “State program funded under part A of title IV” for “State plan approved under part A of title IV”.

1985—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–198 inserted reference to a State agency charged with the administration of the food stamp program in a State under the Food Stamp Act.

1982—Pub. L. 97–300, amended section generally, substituting provisions which set out functions of the Service and duties of the Secretary of Labor for provisions which had stated the purposes of the Service, including services to veterans and supplying of data for the administration of programs in aid of families with dependent children, and defined “State”.

1976—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 94–566 provided that the bureau has a further duty to assure that the employment offices in each State, upon request of a public agency administering or supervising the administration of a State plan approved under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act or of a public agency charged with any duty or responsibility under any program or activity authorized or required under part D of title IV of such Act, furnish to such agency making the request, from any data contained in the files of any such employment office, information with respect to any individual specified in the request as to whether such individual is receiving, has received, or has made application for, unemployment compensation, and the amount of any such compensation being received by such individual, the current (or most recent) home address of such individual, and whether such individual has refused an offer of employment and, if so, a description of the employment so offered and terms, conditions, and rate of pay therefor.

1973—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–198, §204(c)(1), struck out function of maintaining a public employment service for the District of Columbia from the functions of the bureau.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–198, §204(c)(2), included District of Columbia in definition of “State” or “States”.

1960—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 86–624 struck out “Hawaii, Alaska,” before “Puerto Rico”.

1956—Subsec. (b). Act Aug. 1, 1956, inserted “Guam” after “Puerto Rico”.

1954—Subsec. (a). Act Aug. 3, 1954, inserted provisions relating to employment counseling and placement services for handicapped persons.

1950—Subsec. (b). Act Sept. 8, 1950, included Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands in definition of “State” or “States”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

Section 771(b) of Pub. L. 93–198 provided in part that title II of Pub. L. 93–198 [amending this section and section 50 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under section 49 of this title and section 8101 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees], shall take effect on July 1, 1974.

Section 8 of act Aug. 3, 1954, provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [enacting section 107e–1 of Title 20, Education, and amending this section, sections 31 to 41, 42, and 49g of this title, sections 107, 107a, 107b, 107e, and 107f of Title 20, and section 155a of Title 36, Patriotic Societies and Observances] shall become effective July 1, 1954.”

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 49a of this title; title 7 section 2022; title 39 section 3202; title 42 section 603a.

In order to obtain the benefits of appropriations apportioned under section 49d of this title, a State shall, through its legislature, accept the provisions of this chapter and designate or authorize the creation of a State agency vested with all powers necessary to cooperate with the United States Employment Service under this chapter.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §4, 48 Stat. 114.)

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

Act July 26, 1946, ch. 672, title I, 60 Stat. 684, provided in part: “On November 15, 1946, the Secretary of Labor shall transfer, to the State agency in each State designated under section 4 of the Act of Congress approved June 6, 1933, as amended [this section], as the agency to administer the State-wide system of public employment offices in cooperation with the United States Employment Service under said Act [this chapter], the operation of State and local public employment office facilities and properties which were transferred by such State to the Federal Government in 1942 to promote the national war effort. The Secretary of Labor shall, on request of the State agency, also provide for the transfer and assignment to such State, without reimbursement therefor, of any other public employment office facilities and properties within such State, including records, files, and office equipment: *Provided*, That as a condition to such transfer and assignment of Federal properties, the Secretary may require the recipient State to waive any claim which may then exist or thereafter arise out of the use made by the Federal Government of, or for the loss of or damage to, property and facilities transferred to the Federal Government as hereinabove described.”

Transfer of Federal property to States, see section 49c–1 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 49c–1 of this title; title 39 section 3202.

For the purpose of assisting the State employment services established and maintained in accordance with the terms of this chapter, the Secretary of Labor is authorized without payment of compensation to transfer and assign to the States in which it is located all property, including records, files, and office equipment, used by the United States Employment Service in its administrative and local employment offices in the respective States, except the records, files, and property used in the Veterans’ Service and in the Farm Placement Service maintained under this chapter, as soon as such States establish and maintain systems of public employment offices, in accordance with the terms of sections 49c, 49d, and 49g of this title and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

(Aug. 11, 1939, ch. 693, 53 Stat. 1409; Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, 7 F.R. 7379; Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, 10 F.R. 11929; June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, 62 Stat. 446; 1949 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, 14 F.R. 5225, 63 Stat. 1065.)

This section was not enacted as part of the Wagner-Peyser Act which comprises this chapter.

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service to Secretary of Labor, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

Section, act July 26, 1946, ch. 672, title I, 60 Stat. 684, 685, which authorized transfer to and retention in State system of public employment offices of Federal employees, was from the Department of Labor Act, 1947, and was not repeated in subsequent appropriation acts.

Section, act July 26, 1946, ch. 672, title I, 60 Stat. 685, provided for refund of retirement deductions and interest to members of Social Security Boards returning to State employment.

Section, Pub. L. 88–136, title I, Oct. 11, 1963, 77 Stat. 226, which related to personnel standards, was transferred to section 49n of this title and subsequently omitted from the Code.

Section, act July 8, 1947, ch. 210, title I, 61 Stat. 263, which related to a joint budget, was from the Department of Labor Appropriation Act, 1948, and was not repeated in subsequent appropriation acts. Similar provisions were contained in act July 26, 1946, ch. 672, title I, §101, 60 Stat. 686.

There is authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, such amounts from time to time as the Congress may deem necessary to carry out the purposes of this chapter.

The Secretary shall from time to time certify to the Secretary of the Treasury for payment to each State which—

(1) except in the case of Guam, has an unemployment compensation law approved by the Secretary under the Federal Unemployment Tax Act [26 U.S.C. 3301 et seq.] and is found to be in compliance with section 503 of title 42,

(2) is found to have coordinated the public employment services with the provision of unemployment insurance claimant services, and

(3) is found to be in compliance with this chapter,

such amounts as the Secretary determines to be necessary for allotment in accordance with section 49e of this title.

(1) Beginning with fiscal year 1985 and thereafter appropriations for any fiscal year for programs and activities assisted or conducted under this chapter shall be available for obligation only on the basis of a program year. The program year shall begin on July 1 in the fiscal year for which the appropriation is made.

(2) Funds obligated for any program year may be expended by the State during that program year and the two succeeding program years and no amount shall be deobligated on account of a rate of expenditure which is consistent with the program plan.

(3)(A) Appropriations for fiscal year 1984 shall be available both to fund activities for the period between October 1, 1983, and July 1, 1984, and for the program year beginning July 1, 1984.

(B) There are authorized to be appropriated such additional sums as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this paragraph for the transition to program year funding.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §5, 48 Stat. 114; May 10, 1935, ch. 102, 49 Stat. 216; June 29, 1938, ch. 816, 52 Stat. 1244; Sept. 8, 1950, ch. 933, §2, 64 Stat. 822; Aug. 1, 1956, ch. 852, §17(b), 70 Stat. 910; Pub. L. 86–778, title V, §543(c), Sept. 13, 1960, 74 Stat. 987; Pub. L. 94–566, title I, §116(c), Oct. 20, 1976, 90 Stat. 2672; Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §702, Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 521; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(b), formerly title V, §501(b), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1392; renumbered title VI, §601(b), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

The Federal Unemployment Tax Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), is act Aug. 16, 1954, ch. 736, §§3301 to 3311, 68A Stat. 454, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 23 (§3301 et seq.) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 3311 of Title 26 and Tables.

1982—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–300 added subsec. (b). Former subsec. (b), which related to certification of compliance by the Secretary to the Secretary of the Treasury with regard to the Federal Unemployment Tax Act by State programs and payment of monies for the operation of the State systems, was struck out.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 97–300 added subsec. (c).

1981—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–35 inserted provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal year beginning Oct. 1, 1981, and definition of “proper and efficient administration of its public employment offices”.

1976—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 94–566 substituted “Guam” for “Guam and the Virgin Islands”.

1960—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 86–778 substituted “Guam and the Virgin Islands” for “Puerto Rico, Guam, and the Virgin Islands”.

1956—Subsec. (b). Act Aug. 1, 1956, inserted “Guam” after “Puerto Rico”.

1950—Subsec. (a). Act, Sept. 8, 1950, struck out apportionment formula and requirement that States match the funds granted them.

1938—Subsec. (a). Act June 29, 1938, substituted “The annual appropriation under this chapter shall designate the amount to” for “Seventy-five per centum of the amounts appropriated under this chapter shall”, at beginning of second sentence, and “the said amount among the several States” for “said 75 per centum of amounts appropriated after January 1, 1935, under this chapter” in proviso.

1935—Subsec. (a). Act May 10, 1935, inserted proviso.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 94–566 effective on later of Oct. 1, 1976, or day after day on which Secretary of Labor approves under section 3304(a) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, an unemployment compensation law submitted to him by Virgin Islands for approval, see section 116(f)(1) of Pub. L. 94–566, set out as a note under section 3304 of Title 26.

Section 543(c) of Pub. L. 86–778 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective on and after Jan. 1, 1961.

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

Act Sept. 6, 1950, ch. 896, Ch. V, title I, 64 Stat. 643, provided in part that: “No State shall be required to make any appropriation as provided in section 5(a) of said Act of June 6, 1933 [subsec. (a) of this section], prior to July 1, 1952.”

Similar provisions suspending the requirement until July 1, 1950 were contained in acts June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, 62 Stat. 445; June 29, 1949, ch. 275, title II, 63 Stat. 284.

Transfer of Federal property to States, see section 49c–1 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 49c, 49c–1, 49e of this title; title 39 section 3202.

Section, act June 16, 1937, ch. 359, title IV, 50 Stat. 302, provided for reapportionment of unexpended appropriations.

(a) From the amounts appropriated pursuant to section 49d of this title for each fiscal year, the Secretary shall first allot to Guam and the Virgin Islands an amount which, in relation to the total amount available for the fiscal year, is equal to the allotment percentage which each received of amounts available under this chapter in fiscal year 1983.

(b)(1) Subject to paragraphs (2), (3), and (4) of this subsection, the Secretary shall allot the remainder of the sums appropriated and certified pursuant to section 49d of this title for each fiscal year among the States as follows:

(A) two-thirds of such sums shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of individuals in the civilian labor force in each State as compared to the total number of such individuals in all States; and

(B) one-third of such sums shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals in each State as compared to the total number of such individuals in all States.

For purposes of this paragraph, the number of individuals in the civilian labor force and the number of unemployed individuals shall be based on data for the most recent calendar year available, as determined by the Secretary of Labor.

(2) No State's allotment under this section for any fiscal year shall be less than 90 percent of its allotment percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made. For the purpose of this section, the Secretary shall determine the allotment percentage for each State (including Guam and the Virgin Islands) for fiscal year 1984 which is the percentage that the State received under this chapter for fiscal year 1983 of the total amounts available for payments to all States for such fiscal year. For each succeeding fiscal year, the allotment percentage for each such State shall be the percentage that the State received under this chapter for the preceding fiscal year of the total amounts available for allotments for all States for such fiscal year.

(3) For each fiscal year, no State shall receive a total allotment under paragraphs (1) and (2) which is less than 0.28 percent of the total amount available for allotments for all States.

(4) The Secretary shall reserve such amount, not to exceed 3 percent of the sums available for allotments under this section for each fiscal year, as shall be necessary to assure that each State will have a total allotment under this section sufficient to provide staff and other resources necessary to carry out employment service activities and related administrative and support functions on a statewide basis.

(5) The Secretary shall, not later than March 15 of fiscal year 1983 and each succeeding fiscal year, provide preliminary planning estimates and shall, not later than May 15 of each such fiscal year, provide final planning estimates, showing each State's projected allocation for the following year.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §6, as added Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(c), formerly title V, §501(c), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1393; renumbered title VI, §601(c), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

A prior section 49e, act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §6, 48 Stat. 115, related to apportionment of appropriations, and certification to Secretary of the Treasury, prior to repeal by act Sept. 8, 1950, ch. 933, §3, 64 Stat. 823.

Section effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of section, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 49d, 49f of this title.

Ninety percent of the sums allotted to each State pursuant to section 49e of this title may be used—

(1) for job search and placement services to job seekers including counseling, testing, occupational and labor market information, assessment, and referral to employers;

(2) for appropriate recruitment services and special technical services for employers; and

(3) for any of the following activities:

(A) evaluation of programs;

(B) developing linkages between services funded under this chapter and related Federal or State legislation, including the provision of labor exchange services at education sites;

(C) providing services for workers who have received notice of permanent layoff or impending layoff, or workers in occupations which are experiencing limited demand due to technological change, impact of imports, or plant closures;

(D) developing and providing labor market and occupational information;

(E) developing a management information system and compiling and analyzing reports therefrom; and

(F) administering the work test for the State unemployment compensation system and providing job finding and placement services for unemployment insurance claimants.

Ten percent of the sums allotted to each State pursuant to section 49e of this title shall be reserved for use in accordance with this subsection by the Governor of each such State to provide—

(1) performance incentives for public employment service offices and programs, consistent with performance standards established by the Secretary, taking into account direct or indirect placements (including those resulting from self-directed job search or group job search activities assisted by such offices or programs), wages on entered employment, retention, and other appropriate factors;

(2) services for groups with special needs, carried out pursuant to joint agreements between the employment service and the appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials or other public agencies or private nonprofit organizations; and

(3) the extra costs of exemplary models for delivering services of the types described in subsection (a) of this section.

(1) Funds made available to States under this section may be used to provide additional funds under an applicable program if—

(A) such program otherwise meets the requirements of this chapter and the requirements of the applicable program;

(B) such program serves the same individuals that are served under this chapter;

(C) such program provides services in a coordinated manner with services provided under this chapter; and

(D) such funds would be used to supplement, and not supplant, funds provided from non-Federal sources.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the term “applicable program” means any program under any of the following provisions of law:

(A) The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.].

(B) Section 123 [29 U.S.C. 1533], title II [29 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.], and title III [29 U.S.C. 1651 et seq.] of the Job Training Partnership Act.

In addition to the services and activities otherwise authorized by this chapter, the United States Employment Service or any State agency designated under this chapter may perform such other services and activities as shall be specified in contracts for payment or reimbursement of the costs thereof made with the Secretary of Labor or with any Federal, State, or local public agency, or administrative entity under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.], or private nonprofit organization.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §7, as added Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(c), formerly title V, §501(c), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1394; renumbered title VI, §601(c), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; amended Pub. L. 101–392, §5(b), Sept. 25, 1990, 104 Stat. 759.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(A), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in subsecs. (c)(2)(B) and (d), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 19 (§1501 et seq.) of this title. Titles II and III of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§1601 et seq.) and III (§1651 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 19 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

A prior section 49f, act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §7, 48 Stat. 115, related to ascertainment of amounts due to States, and certification to the Secretary of the Treasury, prior to repeal by act Sept. 8, 1950, ch. 933, §3, 64 Stat. 823.

1990—Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 101–392 added subsec. (c) and redesignated former subsec. (c) as (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–392 effective July 1, 1991, see section 702(a) of Pub. L. 101–392, set out as a note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

Section effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of section, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

Any State desiring to receive the benefits of this chapter shall, by the agency designated to cooperate with the United States Employment Service, submit to the Secretary of Labor detailed plans for carrying out the provisions of this chapter within such State.

Prior to submission of such plans to the Secretary—

(1) the employment service shall develop jointly with each appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials for the service delivery area (designated under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.]) those components of such plans applicable to such area;

(2) such plans shall be developed taking into consideration proposals developed jointly by the appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials in the service delivery area affected;

(3) such plans shall be transmitted to the State job training coordinating council (established under such Act) which shall certify such plans if it determines (A) that the components of such plans have been jointly agreed to by the employment service and appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials; and (B) that such plans are consistent with the Governor's coordination and special services plan under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.];

(4) if the State job training coordinating council does not certify that such plans meet the requirements of clauses (A) and (B) of paragraph (3), such plans shall be returned to the employment service for a period of thirty days for it to consider, jointly with the appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials, the council's recommendations for modifying such plans; and

(5) if the employment service and the appropriate private industry council and chief elected official or officials fail to reach agreement upon such components of such plans to be submitted finally to the Secretary, such plans submitted by the State agency shall be accompanied by such proposed modifications as may be recommended by any appropriate disagreeing private industry council and chief elected official or officials affected, and the State job training coordinating council shall transmit to the Secretary its recommendations for resolution thereof.

The Governor of the State shall be afforded the opportunity to review and transmit to the Secretary proposed modifications of such plans submitted.

Such plans shall include provision for the promotion and development of employment opportunities for handicapped persons and for job counseling and placement of such persons, and for the designation of at least one person in each State or Federal employment office, whose duties shall include the effectuation of such purposes. In those States where a State board, department, or agency exists which is charged with the administration of State laws for vocational rehabilitation of physically handicapped persons, such plans shall include provision for cooperation between such board, department, or agency and the agency designated to cooperate with the United States Employment Service under this chapter.

If such plans are in conformity with the provisions of this chapter and reasonably appropriate and adequate to carry out its purposes, they shall be approved by the Secretary and due notice of such approval shall be given to the State agency.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §8, 48 Stat. 115; Aug. 3, 1954, ch. 655, §6(b), 68 Stat. 665; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(d), formerly title V, §501(d), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1395; renumbered title VI, §601(d), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), (3), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 19 (§1501 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

1982—Pub. L. 97–300, §601(d)(1), substituted “Secretary of Labor” for “Director” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 97–300, §601(d)(2), designated provisions relating to the submission of a plan to the Secretary by any State desiring to receive benefits under certain sections of this chapter as subsec. (a).

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 97–300, §601(d)(5), added subsecs. (b) and (c).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 97–300, §601(d)(3), designated provisions relating to the inclusion in State plans of provision for handicapped persons employment opportunities and coordination with State agencies similarly concerned as subsec. (d).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 97–300, §601(d)(4), designated provisions relating to approval and notice by the Secretary of the State plans as subsec. (e).

1954—Act Aug. 3, 1954, inserted provisions relating to promotion and development of employment opportunities and for job counseling and placement of handicapped persons.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

Amendment by act Aug. 3, 1954, effective July 1, 1954, see section 8 of act Aug. 3, 1954, set out as a note under section 49b of this title.

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service to Secretary of Labor, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

Transfer of Federal property to States, see section 49c–1 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 49c–1, 1531 of this title; title 39 section 3202.

(1) Each State shall establish such fiscal control and fund accounting procedures as may be necessary to assure the proper disbursal of, and accounting for, Federal funds paid to the recipient under this chapter. The Director of the Office of Management and Budget, in consultation with the Comptroller General of the United States, shall establish guidance for the proper performance of audits. Such guidance shall include a review of fiscal controls and fund accounting procedures established by States under this section.

(2) At least once every two years, the State shall prepare or have prepared an independent financial and compliance audit of funds received under this chapter.

(3) Each audit shall be conducted in accordance with applicable auditing standards set forth in the financial and compliance element of the Standards for Audit of Governmental Organizations, Programs, Activities, and Functions issued by the Comptroller General of the United States.

(1) The Comptroller General of the United States shall evaluate the expenditures by States of funds received under this chapter in order to assure that expenditures are consistent with the provisions of this chapter and to determine the effectiveness of the State in accomplishing the purposes of this chapter. The Comptroller General shall conduct evaluations whenever determined necessary and shall periodically report to the Congress on the findings of such evaluations.

(2) Nothing in this chapter shall be deemed to relieve the Inspector General of the Department of Labor of his responsibilities under the Inspector General Act.

(3) For the purpose of evaluating and reviewing programs established or provided for by this chapter, the Comptroller General shall have access to and the right to copy any books, accounts, records, correspondence, or other documents pertinent to such programs that are in the possession, custody, or control of the State.

Each State shall repay to the United States amounts found not to have been expended in accordance with this chapter. No such finding shall be made except after notice and opportunity for a fair hearing. The Secretary may offset such amounts against any other amount to which the recipient is or may be entitled under this chapter.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §9, 48 Stat. 116; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(e), formerly title V, §501(e), Oct. 18, 1982, 96 Stat. 1396; renumbered title VI, §601(e), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

The Inspector General Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), probably means the Inspector General Act of 1978, Pub. L. 95–452, Oct. 12, 1978, 92 Stat. 1101, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1982—Pub. L. 97–300 amended section generally, substituting provisions requiring the States to prepare accounting procedures under Federal guidance, to submit to biennial audit with evaluation of expenditures by the Comptroller General and providing for repayment of improperly expended funds, for provisions requiring reports on expenditures to the Secretary under his regulations and giving him authority to revoke State certification.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

This section is referred to in title 39 section 3202.

Each State shall keep records that are sufficient to permit the preparation of reports required by this chapter and to permit the tracing of funds to a level of expenditure adequate to insure that the funds have not been spent unlawfully.

(1) The Secretary may investigate such facts, conditions, practices, or other matters which the Secretary finds necessary to determine whether any State receiving funds under this chapter or any official of such State has violated any provision of this chapter.

(2)(A) In order to evaluate compliance with the provisions of this chapter, the Secretary shall conduct investigations of the use of funds received by States under this chapter.

(B) In order to insure compliance with the provisions of this chapter, the Comptroller General of the United States may conduct investigations of the use of funds received under this chapter by any State.

(3) In conducting any investigation under this chapter, the Secretary or the Comptroller General of the United States may not request new compilation of information not readily available to such State.

Each State receiving funds under this chapter shall—

(1) make such reports concerning its operations and expenditures in such form and containing such information as shall be prescribed by the Secretary, and

(2) establish and maintain a management information system in accordance with guidelines established by the Secretary designed to facilitate the compilation and analysis of programmatic and financial data necessary for reporting, monitoring, and evaluating purposes.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §10, 48 Stat. 116; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(f), formerly title V, §501(f), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1396; renumbered title VI, §601(f), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

1982—Pub. L. 97–300 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to State maintenance of records and investigations by the Secretary and Comptroller General for provisions which limited expenditures in States prior to adoption of State systems to the current fiscal year and two fiscal years thereafter.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

(a) The Secretary of Labor shall establish a Federal Advisory Council composed of men and women representing employers and employees in equal numbers and the public for the purpose of formulating policies and discussing problems relating to employment and insuring impartiality, neutrality, and freedom from political influence in the solution of such problems. Members of such council shall be selected from time to time in such manner as the Secretary shall prescribe and shall serve without compensation, but when attending meetings of the council they shall be allowed necessary traveling and subsistence expenses, or per diem allowance in lieu thereof, within the limitations prescribed by law for civilian employees in the executive branch of the Government. The council shall have access to all files and records of the United States Employment Service. The Secretary shall also require the organization of similar State advisory councils composed of men and women representing employers and employees in equal numbers and the public. Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the Governor from carrying out functions of such State advisory council through the State job training coordinating council in accordance with section 1532(c) of this title.

(b) In carrying out the provisions of this chapter the Secretary is authorized and directed to provide for the giving of notice of strikes or lockouts to applicants before they are referred to employment.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, § 11, 48 Stat. 116; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§ 201, 203, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2728, 53 Stat. 1424, 1425; Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, 7 F.R. 7379; Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, 10 F.R. 11929; June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, § 101, 62 Stat. 446; 1949 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §§1, 3, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, 14 F.R. 5225, 63 Stat. 1065; Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(g), formerly title V, §501(g), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1397; renumbered title VI, §601(g), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

1982—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 97–300 inserted provision that nothing in this section should be construed to prohibit the Governor from carrying out functions of the State advisory council through the State job training coordinating council in accordance with section 1532(c) of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–300 effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of amendment, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service to Secretary of Labor, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

Federal Advisory Council established pursuant to this chapter transferred to Department of Labor by section 3 of Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1949.

Advisory councils in existence on Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period following Jan. 5, 1973, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided for by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in title 39 section 3202.

The Secretary of Labor is authorized to make such rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this chapter.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §12, 48 Stat. 117; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§ 201, 203, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2728, 53 Stat. 1424, 1425; Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, 7 F.R. 7379; Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, 10 F.R. 11929; June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, § 101, 62 Stat. 446; 1949 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, 14 F.R. 5225, 63 Stat. 1065.)

For history of transfer of functions of United States Employment Service to Secretary of Labor, see note set out under section 49 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 39 section 3202.

(a) The Secretary is authorized to establish performance standards for activities under this chapter which shall take into account the differences in priorities reflected in State plans.

(b)(1) Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the referral of any applicant to private agencies as long as the applicant is not charged a fee.

(2) No funds paid under this chapter may be used by any State for advertising in newspapers for high paying jobs unless such State submits an annual report to the Secretary beginning in December 1984 concerning such advertising and the justifications therefor, and the justification may include that such jobs are part of a State industrial development effort.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §13, as added Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(h), formerly title V, §501(h), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1397; renumbered title VI, §601(h), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; amended Pub. L. 97–404, §5, Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2027.)

A prior section 49*l*, act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §13, 48 Stat. 117, relating to mail franking privileges to employment systems, was transferred to section 338 of former Title 39, The Postal Service. Section 338 of former Title 39 was repealed and reenacted as section 4152 of former Title 39, The Postal Service by Pub. L. 86–682, Sept. 2, 1960, 74 Stat. 578. Section 4152 of former Title 39 was repealed and reenacted as section 3202 of Title 39, Postal Service, by Pub. L. 91–375, Aug. 12, 1970, 84 Stat. 719.

1982—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–404 designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Section effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of section, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary to enable the Secretary to provide funds through reimburseable 1 agreements with the States to operate statistical programs which are essential for development of estimates of the gross national product and other national statistical series, including those related to employment and unemployment.

(June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §14, as added Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §601(h), formerly title V, §501(h), Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1397; renumbered title VI, §601(h), Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

Section effective Oct. 1, 1983, but with Secretary authorized to use funds appropriated for fiscal 1983 to plan for orderly implementation of section, see section 181(i) of Pub. L. 97–300, which is classified to section 1591(i) of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “reimbursable”.

Section 49m, Pub. L. 88–136, title I, Oct. 11, 1963, 77 Stat. 225, relating to payments to States for administrative expenses for their unemployment compensation law and their public employment offices, was from the Department of Labor Appropriation Act, 1964, and was not repeated in the Department of Labor Appropriation Act of 1965. Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Aug. 14, 1962, Pub. L. 87–582, title I, 76 Stat. 363.

Sept. 22, 1961, Pub. L. 87–290, title I, 75 Stat. 591.

Sept. 2, 1960, Pub. L. 86–703, title I, 74 Stat. 757.

Aug. 14, 1959, Pub. L. 86–158, title I, 73 Stat. 341.

Aug. 1, 1958, Pub. L. 85–580, title I, 72 Stat. 458.

June 29, 1957, Pub. L. 85–67, title I, 71 Stat. 212.

June 29, 1956, ch. 477, title I, 70 Stat. 424.

June 29, 1956, ch. 437, title I, 69 Stat. 398.

July 2, 1954, ch. 457, title I, 68 Stat. 435.

July 31, 1953, ch. 296, title I, 67 Stat. 246.

July 5, 1952, ch. 575, title I, 66 Stat. 369.

Aug. 31, 1951, ch. 373, title I, 65 Stat. 210.

Sept. 6, 1950, ch. 896, ch. V, title I, 64 Stat. 643.

June 29, 1949, ch. 275, title II, 63 Stat. 284.

June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, 62 Stat. 445.

Section 49n, Pub. L. 88–136, title I, Oct. 11, 1963, 77 Stat. 226, relating to personnel standards, was from the Department of Labor Appropriation Act, 1964, and was not repeated in the Department of Labor Appropriation Act of 1965. Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriations acts:

Aug. 14, 1962, Pub. L. 87–582, title I, 76 Stat. 363.

Sept. 22, 1961, Pub. L. 87–290, title I, 75 Stat. 591.

Sept. 2, 1960, Pub. L. 86–703, title I, 74 Stat. 757.

Aug. 14, 1959, Pub. L. 86–158, title I, 73 Stat. 341.

Aug. 1, 1958, Pub. L. 85–580, title I, 72 Stat. 458.

June 29, 1957, Pub. L. 85–67, title I, 71 Stat. 212.

June 29, 1956, ch. 477, title I, 70 Stat. 425.

Aug. 1, 1955, ch. 437, title I, 69 Stat. 398.

July 2, 1954, ch. 457, title I, 68 Stat. 435.

July 31, 1953, ch. 296, title I, 67 Stat. 246.

July 5, 1952, ch. 575, title I, 66 Stat. 359.

Aug. 31, 1951, ch. 273, title I, 65 Stat. 210.

Sept. 6, 1950, ch. 896, ch. V, title I, 64 Stat. 644.

June 29, 1949, ch. 275, title II, 63 Stat. 284.

June 16, 1948, ch. 472, title I, 62 Stat. 445.

July 8, 1947, ch. 210, title I, 61 Stat. 263.

July 26, 1946, ch. 672, title I, 60 Stat. 685.


This chapter is referred to in sections 1605, 1645, 1732 of this title; title 20 sections 1211b, 2382, 2403, 2471, 5934, 6143; title 38 sections 3452, 3501.

The Secretary of Labor is authorized and directed to formulate and promote the furtherance of labor standards necessary to safeguard the welfare of apprentices, to extend the application of such standards by encouraging the inclusion thereof in contracts of apprenticeship, to bring together employers and labor for the formulation of programs of apprenticeship, to cooperate with State agencies engaged in the formulation and promotion of standards of apprenticeship, and to cooperate with the Secretary of Education in accordance with section 17 of title 20. For the purposes of this chapter the term “State” shall include the District of Columbia.

(Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, §1, 50 Stat. 664; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §§ 201, 204, 206, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2728, 53 Stat. 1424, 1425; July 12, 1943, ch. 221, title VII, 57 Stat. 518; 1953 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §§5, 8, eff. Apr. 11, 1953, 18 F.R. 2053, 67 Stat. 631; Pub. L. 93–198, title II, § 204(h), Dec. 24, 1973, 87 Stat. 784; Pub. L. 96–88, title III, §301(a)(1), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 677.)

Section 17 of title 20, referred to in text, was repealed by Pub. L. 89–554, §8(a), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 643.

Words “with the National Youth Administration” were omitted from text in view of abolition of National Youth Administration by act July 12, 1943.

1973—Pub. L. 93–198 inserted provision that “State” includes the District of Columbia.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–198 effective July 1, 1974, see section 771(b) of Pub. L. 93–198, set out in part as a note under section 49b of this title.

The act of Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, 50 Stat. 664, which enacted this chapter, is popularly known as the “National Apprenticeship Act”.

“Secretary of Education” substituted in text for “Office of Education under the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”, pursuant to section 301(a)(1) of Pub. L. 96–88, which is classified to section 3441(a)(1) of Title 20, Education, and which transferred all functions of Office of Education to Secretary of Education.

Functions of Federal Security Administrator transferred to Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare and all agencies of Federal Security Agency transferred to Department of Health, Education, and Welfare by section 5 of Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1953, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. Federal Security Agency and office of Administrator abolished by section 8 of Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1953.

Reorg. Plan No. I of 1939, consolidated National Youth Administration and Office of Education, with other agencies, into Federal Security Agency under supervision and direction of Federal Security Administrator.

The Secretary of Labor may publish information relating to existing and proposed labor standards of apprenticeship, and may appoint national advisory committees to serve without compensation. Such committees shall include representatives of employers, representatives of labor, educators, and officers of other executive departments, with the consent of the head of any such department.

(Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, §2, 50 Stat. 665.)

This section is referred to in title 38 sections 3672, 3687.

The Secretary of Labor is authorized to appoint such employees as he may from time to time find necessary for the administration of this chapter, with regard to existing laws applicable to the appointment and compensation of employees of the United States.

(Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, §3, 50 Stat. 665; July 12, 1943, ch. 221, title VII, 57 Stat. 518.)

Proviso authorizing employment of certain persons in the division of apprentice training of National Youth Administration, was omitted in view of abolition of that agency by act July 12, 1943.

Provision formerly in this section relieved National Youth Administration, after August 16, 1937, of responsibility for promotion of labor standards of apprenticeship, and directed transfer of records and papers to Department of Labor.


Section, act Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §8, 37 Stat. 738, related to mediation in labor disputes and the appointment of commissioners of conciliation. See section 172 of this title.

No restraining order or injunction shall be granted by any court of the United States, or a judge or the judges thereof, in any case between an employer and employees, or between employers and employees, or between employees, or between persons employed and persons seeking employment, involving, or growing out of, a dispute concerning terms or conditions of employment, unless necessary to prevent irreparable injury to property, or to a property right, of the party making the application, for which injury there is no adequate remedy at law, and such property or property right must be described with particularity in the application, which must be in writing and sworn to by the applicant or by his agent or attorney.

And no such restraining order or injunction shall prohibit any person or persons, whether singly or in concert, from terminating any relation of employment, or from ceasing to perform any work or labor, or from recommending, advising, or persuading others by peaceful means so to do; or from attending at any place where any such person or persons may lawfully be, for the purpose of peacefully obtaining or communicating information, or from peacefully persuading any person to work or to abstain from working; or from ceasing to patronize or to employ any party to such dispute, or from recommending, advising, or persuading others by peaceful and lawful means so to do; or from paying or giving to, or withholding from, any person engaged in such dispute, any strike benefits or other moneys or things of value; or from peaceably assembling in a lawful manner, and for lawful purposes; or from doing any act or thing which might lawfully be done in the absence of such dispute by any party thereto; nor shall any of the acts specified in this paragraph be considered or held to be violations of any law of the United States.

(Oct. 15, 1914, ch. 323, §20, 38 Stat. 738.)

Injunctions, see rule 65, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Applicability of this section and section 53 of this title to the insurance business, see sections 1011 to 1015 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

District courts to have jurisdiction to issue writs of injunction to compel compliance or restrain violation of an order of Interstate Commerce Commission, see sections 1336, 2321 et seq. of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Jurisdiction of courts in matters affecting employer and employee, see section 101 et seq. of this title.

Transporting strikebreakers, penalty, see section 1231 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 53, 186 of this title; title 18 section 1951; title 42 section 2135; title 47 section 606.

The word “person” or “persons” wherever used in section 52 of this title shall be deemed to include corporations and associations existing under or authorized by the laws of either the United States, the laws of any of the Territories, the laws of any State, or the laws of any foreign country.

(Oct. 15, 1914, ch. 323, §1, 38 Stat. 730.)

Section is based on the 3d par. of section 1(a) of the Clayton Act (Oct. 15, 1914, ch. 323, as amended by section 305(b) of Pub. L. 94–435, Sept. 30, 1976). Section 1 of the Clayton Act is classified in its entirety to section 12 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

Injunctions, see rule 65, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in title 42 section 2135.


This chapter is referred to in sections 160, 178, 186 of this title; title 18 section 1951; title 42 section 2000e–5; title 49 section 14103.

No court of the United States, as defined in this chapter, shall have jurisdiction to issue any restraining order or temporary or permanent injunction in a case involving or growing out of a labor dispute, except in a strict conformity with the provisions of this chapter; nor shall any such restraining order or temporary or permanent injunction be issued contrary to the public policy declared in this chapter.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §1, 47 Stat. 70.)

Act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, 47 Stat. 70, which enacted this chapter, is popularly known as the “Norris-LaGuardia Act”.

Injunctions, see rule 65, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Civil actions for prevention of unlawful employment practices, provisions of this chapter not applicable to, see section 2000e–5 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Labor-Management Relations, see section 141 et seq. of this title.

Orders of National Labor Relations Board, see section 160 of this title.

Public policy, see section 102 of this title.

Strikes subject to injunction, inapplicability of this chapter, see section 178 of this title.

In the interpretation of this chapter and in determining the jurisdiction and authority of the courts of the United States, as such jurisdiction and authority are defined and limited in this chapter, the public policy of the United States is declared as follows:

Whereas under prevailing economic conditions, developed with the aid of governmental authority for owners of property to organize in the corporate and other forms of ownership association, the individual unorganized worker is commonly helpless to exercise actual liberty of contract and to protect his freedom of labor, and thereby to obtain acceptable terms and conditions of employment, wherefore, though he should be free to decline to associate with his fellows, it is necessary that he have full freedom of association, self-organization, and designation of representatives of his own choosing, to negotiate the terms and conditions of his employment, and that he shall be free from the interference, restraint, or coercion of employers of labor, or their agents, in the designation of such representatives or in self-organization or in other concerted activities for the purpose of collective bargaining or other mutual aid or protection; therefore, the following definitions of and limitations upon the jurisdiction and authority of the courts of the United States are enacted.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §2, 47 Stat. 70.)

This section is referred to in section 103 of this title.

Any undertaking or promise, such as is described in this section, or any other undertaking or promise in conflict with the public policy declared in section 102 of this title, is declared to be contrary to the public policy of the United States, shall not be enforceable in any court of the United States and shall not afford any basis for the granting of legal or equitable relief by any such court, including specifically the following:

Every undertaking or promise hereafter made, whether written or oral, express or implied, constituting or contained in any contract or agreement of hiring or employment between any individual, firm, company, association, or corporation, and any employee or prospective employee of the same, whereby

(a) Either party to such contract or agreement undertakes or promises not to join, become, or remain a member of any labor organization or of any employer organization; or

(b) Either party to such contract or agreement undertakes or promises that he will withdraw from an employment relation in the event that he joins, becomes, or remains a member of any labor organization or of any employer organization.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §3, 47 Stat. 70.)

This section is referred to in section 104 of this title.

No court of the United States shall have jurisdiction to issue any restraining order or temporary or permanent injunction in any case involving or growing out of any labor dispute to prohibit any person or persons participating or interested in such dispute (as these terms are herein defined) from doing, whether singly or in concert, any of the following acts:

(a) Ceasing or refusing to perform any work or to remain in any relation of employment;

(b) Becoming or remaining a member of any labor organization or of any employer organization, regardless of any such undertaking or promise as is described in section 103 of this title;

(c) Paying or giving to, or withholding from, any person participating or interested in such labor dispute, any strike or unemployment benefits or insurance, or other moneys or things of value;

(d) By all lawful means aiding any person participating or interested in any labor dispute who is being proceeded against in, or is prosecuting, any action or suit in any court of the United States or of any State;

(e) Giving publicity to the existence of, or the facts involved in, any labor dispute, whether by advertising, speaking, patrolling, or by any other method not involving fraud or violence;

(f) Assembling peaceably to act or to organize to act in promotion of their interests in a labor dispute;

(g) Advising or notifying any person of an intention to do any of the acts heretofore specified;

(h) Agreeing with other persons to do or not to do any of the acts heretofore specified; and

(i) Advising, urging, or otherwise causing or inducing without fraud or violence the acts heretofore specified, regardless of any such undertaking or promise as is described in section 103 of this title.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §4, 47 Stat. 70.)

This section is referred to in section 105 of this title.

No court of the United States shall have jurisdiction to issue a restraining order or temporary or permanent injunction upon the ground that any of the persons participating or interested in a labor dispute constitute or are engaged in an unlawful combination or conspiracy because of the doing in concert of the acts enumerated in section 104 of this title.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §5, 47 Stat. 71.)

No officer or member of any association or organization, and no association or organization participating or interested in a labor dispute, shall be held responsible or liable in any court of the United States for the unlawful acts of individual officers, members, or agents, except upon clear proof of actual participation in, or actual authorization of, such acts, or of ratification of such acts after actual knowledge thereof.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §6, 47 Stat. 71.)

No court of the United States shall have jurisdiction to issue a temporary or permanent injunction in any case involving or growing out of a labor dispute, as defined in this chapter, except after hearing the testimony of witnesses in open court (with opportunity for cross-examination) in support of the allegations of a complaint made under oath, and testimony in opposition thereto, if offered, and except after findings of fact by the court, to the effect—

(a) That unlawful acts have been threatened and will be committed unless restrained or have been committed and will be continued unless restrained, but no injunction or temporary restraining order shall be issued on account of any threat or unlawful act excepting against the person or persons, association, or organization making the threat or committing the unlawful act or actually authorizing or ratifying the same after actual knowledge thereof;

(b) That substantial and irreparable injury to complainant's property will follow;

(c) That as to each item of relief granted greater injury will be inflicted upon complainant by the denial of relief then will be inflicted upon defendants by the granting of relief;

(d) That complainant has no adequate remedy at law; and

(e) That the public officers charged with the duty to protect complainant's property are unable or unwilling to furnish adequate protection.

Such hearing shall be held after due and personal notice thereof has been given, in such manner as the court shall direct, to all known persons against whom relief is sought, and also to the chief of those public officials of the county and city within which the unlawful acts have been threatened or committed charged with the duty to protect complainant's property: *Provided, however*, That if a complainant shall also allege that, unless a temporary restraining order shall be issued without notice, a substantial and irreparable injury to complainant's property will be unavoidable, such a temporary restraining order may be issued upon testimony under oath, sufficient, if sustained, to justify the court in issuing a temporary injunction upon a hearing after notice. Such a temporary restraining order shall be effective for no longer than five days and shall become void at the expiration of said five days. No temporary restraining order or temporary injunction shall be issued except on condition that complainant shall first file an undertaking with adequate security in an amount to be fixed by the court sufficient to recompense those enjoined for any loss, expense, or damage caused by the improvident or erroneous issuance of such order or injunction, including all reasonable costs (together with a reasonable attorney's fee) and expense of defense against the order or against the granting of any injunctive relief sought in the same proceeding and subsequently denied by the court.

The undertaking mentioned in this section shall be understood to signify an agreement entered into by the complainant and the surety upon which a decree may be rendered in the same suit or proceeding against said complainant and surety, upon a hearing to assess damages of which hearing complainant and surety shall have reasonable notice, the said complainant and surety submitting themselves to the jurisdiction of the court for that purpose. But nothing in this section contained shall deprive any party having a claim or cause of action under or upon such undertaking from electing to pursue his ordinary remedy by suit at law or in equity.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §7, 47 Stat. 71.)

Appeal to court of appeals, see rule 73, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Continuation of section under Rule 73, see note by Advisory Committee under rule 73.

No restraining order or injunctive relief shall be granted to any complainant who has failed to comply with any obligation imposed by law which is involved in the labor dispute in question, or who has failed to make every reasonable effort to settle such dispute either by negotiation or with the aid of any available governmental machinery of mediation or voluntary arbitration.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §8, 47 Stat. 72.)

No restraining order or temporary or permanent injunction shall be granted in a case involving or growing out of a labor dispute, except on the basis of findings of fact made and filed by the court in the record of the case prior to the issuance of such restraining order or injunction; and every restraining order or injunction granted in a case involving or growing out of a labor dispute shall include only a prohibition of such specific act or acts as may be expressly complained of in the bill of complaint or petition filed in such case and as shall be expressly included in said findings of fact made and filed by the court as provided in this chapter.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §9, 47 Stat. 72.)

Whenever any court of the United States shall issue or deny any temporary injunction in a case involving or growing out of a labor dispute, the court shall, upon the request of any party to the proceedings and on his filing the usual bond for costs, forthwith certify as in ordinary cases the record of the case to the court of appeals for its review. Upon the filing of such record in the court of appeals, the appeal shall be heard and the temporary injunctive order affirmed, modified, or set aside expeditiously.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §10, 47 Stat. 72; June 25, 1948, ch. 646, §32(a), 62 Stat. 991; May 24, 1949, ch. 139, §127, 63 Stat. 107; Pub. L. 98–620, title IV, §402(30), Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3359.)

1984—Pub. L. 98–620 substituted “expeditiously” for “with the greatest possible expedition, giving the proceedings precedence over all other matters except older matters of the same character”.

Act June 25, 1948, eff. Sept. 1, 1948, as amended by act May 24, 1949, substituted “court of appeals” for “circuit court of appeals”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–620 not applicable to cases pending on Nov. 8, 1984, see section 403 of Pub. L. 98–620, set out as a note under section 1657 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Section 111, act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §11, 47 Stat. 72, related to contempts, speedy and public trial, and jury. See section 3692 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Section 112, act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §12, 47 Stat. 73, related to contempts and demand for retirement of sitting judge. See rule 42 of the Federal Rules of Criminal Procedure, set out in the Appendix to Title 18.

When used in this chapter, and for the purposes of this chapter—

(a) A case shall be held to involve or to grow out of a labor dispute when the case involves persons who are engaged in the same industry, trade, craft, or occupation; or have direct or indirect interests therein; or who are employees of the same employer; or who are members of the same or an affiliated organization of employers or employees; whether such dispute is (1) between one or more employers or associations of employers and one or more employees or associations of employees; (2) between one or more employers or associations of employers and one or more employers or associations of employers; or (3) between one or more employees or associations of employees and one or more employees or associations of employees; or when the case involves any conflicting or competing interests in a “labor dispute” (as defined in this section) of “persons participating or interested” therein (as defined in this section).

(b) A person or association shall be held to be a person participating or interested in a labor dispute if relief is sought against him or it, and if he or it is engaged in the same industry, trade, craft, or occupation in which such dispute occurs, or has a direct or indirect interest therein, or is a member, officer, or agent of any association composed in whole or in part of employers or employees engaged in such industry, trade, craft, or occupation.

(c) The term “labor dispute” includes any controversy concerning terms or conditions of employment, or concerning the association or representation of persons in negotiating, fixing, maintaining, changing, or seeking to arrange terms or conditions of employment, regardless of whether or not the disputants stand in the proximate relation of employer and employee.

(d) The term “court of the United States” means any court of the United States whose jurisdiction has been or may be conferred or defined or limited by Act of Congress, including the courts of the District of Columbia.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §13, 47 Stat. 73.)

This section is referred to in title 18 sections 37, 2280, 2281.

If any provision of this chapter or the application thereof to any person or circumstance is held unconstitutional or otherwise invalid, the remaining provisions of this chapter and the application of such provisions to other persons or circumstances shall not be affected thereby.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §14, 47 Stat. 73.)

All acts and parts of acts in conflict with the provisions of this chapter are repealed.

(Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, §15, 47 Stat. 73.)






This chapter is referred to in sections 401, 402, 1002, 1415, 1803 of this title; title 20 section 76k.

(a) This chapter may be cited as the “Labor Management Relations Act, 1947”.

(b) Industrial strife which interferes with the normal flow of commerce and with the full production of articles and commodities for commerce, can be avoided or substantially minimized if employers, employees, and labor organizations each recognize under law one another's legitimate rights in their relations with each other, and above all recognize under law that neither party has any right in its relations with any other to engage in acts or practices which jeopardize the public health, safety, or interest.

It is the purpose and policy of this chapter, in order to promote the full flow of commerce, to prescribe the legitimate rights of both employees and employers in their relations affecting commerce, to provide orderly and peaceful procedures for preventing the interference by either with the legitimate rights of the other, to protect the rights of individual employees in their relations with labor organizations whose activities affect commerce, to define and proscribe practices on the part of labor and management which affect commerce and are inimical to the general welfare, and to protect the rights of the public in connection with labor disputes affecting commerce.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, §1, 61 Stat. 136.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “This Act” meaning act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to this subchapter and subchapters III (§171 et seq.) and IV (§185 et seq.) of this chapter. For complete classification of this act to the Code, see Tables.

Pub. L. 95–524, §6(a), Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2020, provided that: “This section [enacting section 175a of this title, amending sections 173 and 186 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under section 175a of this title] may be cited as the ‘Labor Management Cooperation Act of 1978’.”

Pub. L. 88–444, Aug. 19, 1964, 78 Stat. 462, established the National Commission on Technology, Automation, and Economic Progress, to make a comprehensive and impartial study and make recommendations from time to time as needed for constructive action. The Commission was directed to submit a final report of its findings and recommendations to the President and the Congress by January 1, 1966, and ceased 30 days after submitting its final report.

Ex. Ord. No. 10918, Feb. 16, 1961, 26 F.R. 1427, which established the President's Advisory Committee on Labor-Management Policy, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 11710, Apr. 4, 1973, 38 F.R. 9071, formerly set out below.

Ex. Ord. No. 11710, Apr. 4, 1973, 38 F.R. 9071, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 11729, July 12, 1973, 38 F.R. 18863, which established the National Commission for Industrial Peace, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 11823, Dec. 12, 1974, 39 F.R. 43529.

Ex. Ord. No. 11809, Sept. 30, 1974, 39 F.R. 35565, which established the President's Labor-Management Committee, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 11948, Dec. 20, 1976, 41 F.R. 55705, set out as a note under section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

When used in this chapter—

(1) The term “industry affecting commerce” means any industry or activity in commerce or in which a labor dispute would burden or obstruct commerce or tend to burden or obstruct commerce or the free flow of commerce.

(2) The term “strike” includes any strike or other concerted stoppage of work by employees (including a stoppage by reason of the expiration of a collective-bargaining agreement) and any concerted slowdown or other concerted interruption of operations by employees.

(3) The terms “commerce”, “labor disputes”, “employer”, “employee”, “labor organization”, “representative”, “person”, and “supervisor” shall have the same meaning as when used in subchapter II of this chapter.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title V, §501, 61 Stat. 161.)

Subchapter II of this chapter, referred to in par. (3), was in the original “the National Labor Relations Act as amended by this Act” [29 U.S.C. §151 et seq.].

This section is referred to in section 2611 of this title; title 7 section 2015.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to require an individual employee to render labor or service without his consent, nor shall anything in this chapter be construed to make the quitting of his labor by an individual employee an illegal act; nor shall any court issue any process to compel the performance by an individual employee of such labor or service, without his consent; nor shall the quitting of labor by an employee or employees in good faith because of abnormally dangerous conditions for work at the place of employment of such employee or employees be deemed a strike under this chapter.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title V, §502, 61 Stat. 162.)

If any provision of this chapter, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstance, shall be held invalid, the remainder of this chapter, or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid, shall not be affected thereby.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title V, §503, 61 Stat. 162.)

This subchapter is comprised of the National Labor Relations Act, and is not part of the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, which comprises this chapter.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 142, 186, 402, 524a, 2103, 2108 of this title; title 8 section 1288; title 15 section 1014; title 18 section 1951; title 20 section 76k; title 39 section 1209; title 42 sections 300t–12, 2000e, 2297b–4, 2297h–8; title 43 section 1333; title 49 section 14103.

The denial by some employers of the right of employees to organize and the refusal by some employers to accept the procedure of collective bargaining lead to strikes and other forms of industrial strife or unrest, which have the intent or the necessary effect of burdening or obstructing commerce by (a) impairing the efficiency, safety, or operation of the instrumentalities of commerce; (b) occurring in the current of commerce; (c) materially affecting, restraining, or controlling the flow of raw materials or manufactured or processed goods from or into the channels of commerce, or the prices of such materials or goods in commerce; or (d) causing diminution of employment and wages in such volume as substantially to impair or disrupt the market for goods flowing from or into the channels of commerce.

The inequality of bargaining power between employees who do not possess full freedom of association or actual liberty of contract, and employers who are organized in the corporate or other forms of ownership association substantially burdens and affects the flow of commerce, and tends to aggravate recurrent business depressions, by depressing wage rates and the purchasing power of wage earners in industry and by preventing the stabilization of competitive wage rates and working conditions within and between industries.

Experience has proved that protection by law of the right of employees to organize and bargain collectively safeguards commerce from injury, impairment, or interruption, and promotes the flow of commerce by removing certain recognized sources of industrial strife and unrest, by encouraging practices fundamental to the friendly adjustment of industrial disputes arising out of differences as to wages, hours, or other working conditions, and by restoring equality of bargaining power between employers and employees.

Experience has further demonstrated that certain practices by some labor organizations, their officers, and members have the intent or the necessary effect of burdening or obstructing commerce by preventing the free flow of goods in such commerce through strikes and other forms of industrial unrest or through concerted activities which impair the interest of the public in the free flow of such commerce. The elimination of such practices is a necessary condition to the assurance of the rights herein guaranteed.

It is declared hereby to be the policy of the United States to eliminate the causes of certain substantial obstructions to the free flow of commerce and to mitigate and eliminate these obstructions when they have occurred by encouraging the practice and procedure of collective bargaining and by protecting the exercise by workers of full freedom of association, self-organization, and designation of representatives of their own choosing, for the purpose of negotiating the terms and conditions of their employment or other mutual aid or protection.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §1, 49 Stat. 449; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 136.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally to restate the declaration of policy and to make the finding and policy of this subchapter “two-sided”.

Section 104 of title I of act June 23, 1947, provided: “The amendments made by this title [amending this subchapter] shall take effect sixty days after the date of the enactment of this Act [June 23, 1947], except that the authority of the President to appoint certain officers conferred upon him by section 3 of the National Labor Relations Act as amended by this title [section 153 of this title] may be exercised forthwith.”

When used in this subchapter—

(1) The term “person” includes one or more individuals, labor organizations, partnerships, associations, corporations, legal representatives, trustees, trustees in cases under title 11, or receivers.

(2) The term “employer” includes any person acting as an agent of an employer, directly or indirectly, but shall not include the United States or any wholly owned Government corporation, or any Federal Reserve Bank, or any State or political subdivision thereof, or any person subject to the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], as amended from time to time, or any labor organization (other than when acting as an employer), or anyone acting in the capacity of officer or agent of such labor organization.

(3) The term “employee” shall include any employee, and shall not be limited to the employees of a particular employer, unless this subchapter explicitly states otherwise, and shall include any individual whose work has ceased as a consequence of, or in connection with, any current labor dispute or because of any unfair labor practice, and who has not obtained any other regular and substantially equivalent employment, but shall not include any individual employed as an agricultural laborer, or in the domestic service of any family or person at his home, or any individual employed by his parent or spouse, or any individual having the status of an independent contractor, or any individual employed as a supervisor, or any individual employed by an employer subject to the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], as amended from time to time, or by any other person who is not an employer as herein defined.

(4) The term “representatives” includes any individual or labor organization.

(5) The term “labor organization” means any organization of any kind, or any agency or employee representation committee or plan, in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning grievances, labor disputes, wages, rates of pay, hours of employment, or conditions of work.

(6) The term “commerce” means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication among the several States, or between the District of Columbia or any Territory of the United States and any State or other Territory, or between any foreign country and any State, Territory, or the District of Columbia, or within the District of Columbia or any Territory, or between points in the same State but through any other State or any Territory or the District of Columbia or any foreign country.

(7) The term “affecting commerce” means in commerce, or burdening or obstructing commerce or the free flow of commerce, or having led or tending to lead to a labor dispute burdening or obstructing commerce or the free flow of commerce.

(8) The term “unfair labor practice” means any unfair labor practice listed in section 158 of this title.

(9) The term “labor dispute” includes any controversy concerning terms, tenure or conditions of employment, or concerning the association or representation of persons in negotiating, fixing, maintaining, changing, or seeking to arrange terms or conditions of employment, regardless of whether the disputants stand in the proximate relation of employer and employee.

(10) The term “National Labor Relations Board” means the National Labor Relations Board provided for in section 153 of this title.

(11) The term “supervisor” means any individual having authority, in the interest of the employer, to hire, transfer, suspend, lay off, recall, promote, discharge, assign, reward, or discipline other employees, or responsibly to direct them, or to adjust their grievances, or effectively to recommend such action, if in connection with the foregoing the exercise of such authority is not of a merely routine or clerical nature, but requires the use of independent judgment.

(12) The term “professional employee” means—

(a) any employee engaged in work (i) predominantly intellectual and varied in character as opposed to routine mental, manual, mechanical, or physical work; (ii) involving the consistent exercise of discretion and judgment in its performance; (iii) of such a character that the output produced or the result accomplished cannot be standardized in relation to a given period of time; (iv) requiring knowledge of an advanced type in a field of science or learning customarily acquired by a prolonged course of specialized intellectual instruction and study in an institution of higher learning or a hospital, as distinguished from a general academic education or from an apprenticeship or from training in the performance of routine mental, manual, or physical processes; or

(b) any employee, who (i) has completed the courses of specialized intellectual instruction and study described in clause (iv) of paragraph (a), and (ii) is performing related work under the supervision of a professional person to qualify himself to become a professional employee as defined in paragraph (a).

(13) In determining whether any person is acting as an “agent” of another person so as to make such other person responsible for his acts, the question of whether the specific acts performed were actually authorized or subsequently ratified shall not be controlling.

(14) The term “health care institution” shall include any hospital, convalescent hospital, health maintenance organization, health clinic, nursing home, extended care facility, or other institution devoted to the care of sick, infirm, or aged person.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §2, 49 Stat. 450; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 137; Pub. L. 93–360, §1(a), (b), July 26, 1974, 88 Stat. 395; Pub. L. 95–598, title III, §319, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2678.)

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in pars. (2) and (3), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

1978—Par. (1). Pub. L. 95–598 substituted “cases under title 11” for “bankruptcy”.

1974—Par. (2). Pub. L. 93–360, §1(a), struck out provisions which had excepted from definition of “employer” corporations and associations operating hospitals if no part of the net earnings inured to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual.

Par. (14). Pub. L. 93–360, §1(b), added par. (14).

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally to redefine terms used in this subchapter and to define several new terms.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–598 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 402(a) of Pub. L. 95–598, set out as an Effective Date note preceding section 101 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–360 effective on thirtieth day after July 26, 1974, see section 4 of Pub. L. 93–360, set out as an Effective Date note under section 169 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Prohibitions placed on Communist organizations, and members thereof, with respect to labor, see section 781 et seq. of Title 50, War and National Defense, particularly sections 782(4A), 784, 792a, and 841 to 844 of that title.

This section is referred to in section 1803 of this title; title 7 section 2015; title 20 section 76k.

The National Labor Relations Board (hereinafter called the “Board”) created by this subchapter prior to its amendment by the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947 [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.], is continued as an agency of the United States, except that the Board shall consist of five instead of three members, appointed by the President by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. Of the two additional members so provided for, one shall be appointed for a term of five years and the other for a term of two years. Their successors, and the successors of the other members, shall be appointed for terms of five years each, excepting that any individual chosen to fill a vacancy shall be appointed only for the unexpired term of the member whom he shall succeed. The President shall designate one member to serve as Chairman of the Board. Any member of the Board may be removed by the President, upon notice and hearing, for neglect of duty or malfeasance in office, but for no other cause.

The Board is authorized to delegate to any group of three or more members any or all of the powers which it may itself exercise. The Board is also authorized to delegate to its regional directors its powers under section 159 of this title to determine the unit appropriate for the purpose of collective bargaining, to investigate and provide for hearings, and determine whether a question of representation exists, and to direct an election or take a secret ballot under subsection (c) or (e) of section 159 of this title and certify the results thereof, except that upon the filing of a request therefor with the Board by any interested person, the Board may review any action of a regional director delegated to him under this paragraph, but such a review shall not, unless specifically ordered by the Board, operate as a stay of any action taken by the regional director. A vacancy in the Board shall not impair the right of the remaining members to exercise all of the powers of the Board, and three members of the Board shall, at all times, constitute a quorum of the Board, except that two members shall constitute a quorum of any group designated pursuant to the first sentence hereof. The Board shall have an official seal which shall be judicially noticed.

The Board shall at the close of each fiscal year make a report in writing to Congress and to the President summarizing significant case activities and operations for that fiscal year.

There shall be a General Counsel of the Board who shall be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate, for a term of four years. The General Counsel of the Board shall exercise general supervision over all attorneys employed by the Board (other than administrative law judges and legal assistants to Board members) and over the officers and employees in the regional offices. He shall have final authority, on behalf of the Board, in respect of the investigation of charges and issuance of complaints under section 160 of this title, and in respect of the prosecution of such complaints before the Board, and shall have such other duties as the Board may prescribe or as may be provided by law. In case of a vacancy in the office of the General Counsel the President is authorized to designate the officer or employee who shall act as General Counsel during such vacancy, but no person or persons so designated shall so act (1) for more than forty days when the Congress is in session unless a nomination to fill such vacancy shall have been submitted to the Senate, or (2) after the adjournment sine die of the session of the Senate in which such nomination was submitted.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §3, 49 Stat. 451; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 139; Pub. L. 86–257, title VII, §§701(b), 703, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 542; Pub. L. 93–608, §3(3), Jan. 2, 1975, 88 Stat. 1972; Pub. L. 95–251, §3, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184; Pub. L. 97–375, title II, §213, Dec. 21, 1982, 96 Stat. 1826.)

The Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, referred to in subsec. (a), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

In subsec. (d), “administrative law judges” substituted for “trial examiners” pursuant to section 3105 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and section 3 of Pub. L. 95–251, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184, which is set out as a note under section 3105 of Title 5.

1982—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 97–375 substituted “summarizing significant case activities and operations for that fiscal year” for “stating in detail the cases it has heard, the decisions it has rendered, and an account of all moneys it has disbursed”.

1975—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 93–608 struck out requirement that report contain the names, salaries, and duties of all employees and officers employed or supervised by the Board.

1959—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 86–257, §701(b), authorized the Board to delegate to its regional directors its powers under section 159 of this title to determine the unit appropriate for the purpose of collective bargaining, to investigate and provide for hearings, and determine whether a question of representation exists, and to direct an election or take a secret ballot under section 159(c) or 159(e) of this title and certify the results thereof.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 86–257, §703, authorized the President to designate the officer or employee who shall act as General Counsel in the case of a vacancy in the office of the General Counsel.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by increasing membership from three to five, delegating its powers and duties to a quorum of any three members, and by appointing a General Counsel and outlining his powers and duties.

Section 707 of title VII of Pub. L. 86–257 provided that: “The amendments made by this title [amending this section and sections 158, 159, and 160 of this title] shall take effect sixty days after the date of the enactment of this Act [Sept. 14, 1959] and no provision of this title shall be deemed to make an unfair labor practice, any act which is performed prior to such effective date which did not constitute an unfair labor practice prior thereto.”

This section is referred to in section 152 of this title.

(a) Each member of the Board and the General Counsel of the Board shall be eligible for reappointment, and shall not engage in any other business, vocation, or employment. The Board shall appoint an executive secretary, and such attorneys, examiners, and regional directors, and such other employees as it may from time to time find necessary for the proper performance of its duties. The Board may not employ any attorneys for the purpose of reviewing transcripts of hearings or preparing drafts of opinions except that any attorney employed for assignment as a legal assistant to any Board member may for such Board member review such transcripts and prepare such drafts. No administrative law judge's report shall be reviewed, either before or after its publication, by any person other than a member of the Board or his legal assistant, and no administrative law judge shall advise or consult with the Board with respect to exceptions taken to his findings, rulings, or recommendations. The Board may establish or utilize such regional, local, or other agencies, and utilize such voluntary and uncompensated services, as may from time to time be needed. Attorneys appointed under this section may, at the direction of the Board, appear for and represent the Board in any case in court. Nothing in this subchapter shall be construed to authorize the Board to appoint individuals for the purpose of conciliation or mediation, or for economic analysis.

(b) All of the expenses of the Board, including all necessary traveling and subsistence expenses outside the District of Columbia incurred by the members or employees of the Board under its orders, shall be allowed and paid on the presentation of itemized vouchers therefor approved by the Board or by any individual it designates for that purpose.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §4, 49 Stat. 451; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 139; Pub. L. 95–251, §3, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184.)

Provisions of subsec. (a) which prescribed the basic compensation of members of the Board and the General Counsel were omitted to conform to the provisions of the Executive Schedule. See sections 5314 and 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In subsec. (a), “administrative law judge's” and “administrative law judge” substituted for “trial examiner's” and “trial examiner”, respectively, pursuant to section 3105 of Title 5, and section 3 of Pub. L. 95–251, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184, which is set out as a note under section 3105 of Title 5.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by increasing Board members’ salaries from $10,000 to $12,000 per annum, by providing a salary of $12,000 per annum for the General Counsel, striking out former subsec. (b) relating to termination of “Old Board”, and redesignating subsec. (c) relating to payment of expenses of Board as subsec. (b).

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

The principal office of the Board shall be in the District of Columbia, but it may meet and exercise any or all of its powers at any other place. The Board may, by one or more of its members or by such agents or agencies as it may designate, prosecute any inquiry necessary to its functions in any part of the United States. A member who participates in such an inquiry shall not be disqualified from subsequently participating in a decision of the Board in the same case.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §5, 49 Stat. 452; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 140.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, reenacted section without change.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

The Board shall have authority from time to time to make, amend, and rescind, in the manner prescribed by subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5, such rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this subchapter.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §6, 49 Stat. 452; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 140.)

“Subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5” substituted in text for “the Administrative Procedure Act” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally to provide that the rules and regulations issued by the Board should be in the manner prescribed by the Administrative Procedure Act.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 158 of this title.

Employees shall have the right to self-organization, to form, join, or assist labor organizations, to bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing, and to engage in other concerted activities for the purpose of collective bargaining or other mutual aid or protection, and shall also have the right to refrain from any or all of such activities except to the extent that such right may be affected by an agreement requiring membership in a labor organization as a condition of employment as authorized in section 158(a)(3) of this title.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §7, 49 Stat. 452; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 140.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, restated rights of employees to bargain collectively and inserted provision that they have right to refrain from joining in concerted activities with their fellow employees.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Prohibitions placed on Communist organizations, and members thereof, with respect to labor, see section 781 et seq. of Title 50, War and National Defense, particularly sections 782(4A), 784, 792a, and 841 to 844 of that title.

This section is referred to in sections 158, 158a, 175a, 433 of this title; title 18 section 1951.

It shall be an unfair labor practice for an employer—

(1) to interfere with, restrain, or coerce employees in the exercise of the rights guaranteed in section 157 of this title;

(2) to dominate or interfere with the formation or administration of any labor organization or contribute financial or other support to it: *Provided*, That subject to rules and regulations made and published by the Board pursuant to section 156 of this title, an employer shall not be prohibited from permitting employees to confer with him during working hours without loss of time or pay;

(3) by discrimination in regard to hire or tenure of employment or any term or condition of employment to encourage or discourage membership in any labor organization: *Provided*, That nothing in this subchapter, or in any other statute of the United States, shall preclude an employer from making an agreement with a labor organization (not established, maintained, or assisted by any action defined in this subsection as an unfair labor practice) to require as a condition of employment membership therein on or after the thirtieth day following the beginning of such employment or the effective date of such agreement, whichever is the later, (i) if such labor organization is the representative of the employees as provided in section 159(a) of this title, in the appropriate collective-bargaining unit covered by such agreement when made, and (ii) unless following an election held as provided in section 159(e) of this title within one year preceding the effective date of such agreement, the Board shall have certified that at least a majority of the employees eligible to vote in such election have voted to rescind the authority of such labor organization to make such an agreement: *Provided further*, That no employer shall justify any discrimination against an employee for nonmembership in a labor organization (A) if he has reasonable grounds for believing that such membership was not available to the employee on the same terms and conditions generally applicable to other members, or (B) if he has reasonable grounds for believing that membership was denied or terminated for reasons other than the failure of the employee to tender the periodic dues and the initiation fees uniformly required as a condition of acquiring or retaining membership;

(4) to discharge or otherwise discriminate against an employee because he has filed charges or given testimony under this subchapter;

(5) to refuse to bargain collectively with the representatives of his employees, subject to the provisions of section 159(a) of this title.

It shall be an unfair labor practice for a labor organization or its agents—

(1) to restrain or coerce (A) employees in the exercise of the rights guaranteed in section 157 of this title: *Provided*, That this paragraph shall not impair the right of a labor organization to prescribe its own rules with respect to the acquisition or retention of membership therein; or (B) an employer in the selection of his representatives for the purposes of collective bargaining or the adjustment of grievances;

(2) to cause or attempt to cause an employer to discriminate against an employee in violation of subsection (a)(3) of this section or to discriminate against an employee with respect to whom membership in such organization has been denied or terminated on some ground other than his failure to tender the periodic dues and the initiation fees uniformly required as a condition of acquiring or retaining membership;

(3) to refuse to bargain collectively with an employer, provided it is the representative of his employees subject to the provisions of section 159(a) of this title;

(4)(i) to engage in, or to induce or encourage any individual employed by any person engaged in commerce or in an industry affecting commerce to engage in, a strike or a refusal in the course of his employment to use, manufacture, process, transport, or otherwise handle or work on any goods, articles, materials, or commodities or to perform any services; or (ii) to threaten, coerce, or restrain any person engaged in commerce or in an industry affecting commerce, where in either case an object thereof is—

(A) forcing or requiring any employer or selfemployed person to join any labor or employer organization or to enter into any agreement which is prohibited by subsection (e) of this section;

(B) forcing or requiring any person to cease using, selling, handling, transporting, or otherwise dealing in the products of any other producer, processor, or manufacturer, or to cease doing business with any other person, or forcing or requiring any other employer to recognize or bargain with a labor organization as the representative of his employees unless such labor organization has been certified as the representative of such employees under the provisions of section 159 of this title: *Provided*, That nothing contained in this clause (B) shall be construed to make unlawful, where not otherwise unlawful, any primary strike or primary picketing;

(C) forcing or requiring any employer to recognize or bargain with a particular labor organization as the representative of his employees if another labor organization has been certified as the representative of such employees under the provisions of section 159 of this title;

(D) forcing or requiring any employer to assign particular work to employees in a particular labor organization or in a particular trade, craft, or class rather than to employees in another labor organization or in another trade, craft, or class, unless such employer is failing to conform to an order or certification of the Board determining the bargaining representative for employees performing such work:

*Provided*, That nothing contained in this subsection shall be construed to make unlawful a refusal by any person to enter upon the premises of any employer (other than his own employer), if the employees of such employer are engaged in a strike ratified or approved by a representative of such employees whom such employer is required to recognize under this subchapter: *Provided further*, That for the purposes of this paragraph (4) only, nothing contained in such paragraph shall be construed to prohibit publicity, other than picketing, for the purpose of truthfully advising the public, including consumers and members of a labor organization, that a product or products are produced by an employer with whom the labor organization has a primary dispute and are distributed by another employer, as long as such publicity does not have an effect of inducing any individual employed by any person other than the primary employer in the course of his employment to refuse to pick up, deliver, or transport any goods, or not to perform any services, at the establishment of the employer engaged in such distribution;

(5) to require of employees covered by an agreement authorized under subsection (a)(3) of this section the payment, as a condition precedent to becoming a member of such organization, of a fee in an amount which the Board finds excessive or discriminatory under all the circumstances. In making such a finding, the Board shall consider, among other relevant factors, the practices and customs of labor organizations in the particular industry, and the wages currently paid to the employees affected;

(6) to cause or attempt to cause an employer to pay or deliver or agree to pay or deliver any money or other thing of value, in the nature of an exaction, for services which are not performed or not to be performed; and

(7) to picket or cause to be picketed, or threaten to picket or cause to be picketed, any employer where an object thereof is forcing or requiring an employer to recognize or bargain with a labor organization as the representative of his employees, or forcing or requiring the employees of an employer to accept or select such labor organization as their collective bargaining representative, unless such labor organization is currently certified as the representative of such employees:

(A) where the employer has lawfully recognized in accordance with this subchapter any other labor organization and a question concerning representation may not appropriately be raised under section 159(c) of this title,

(B) where within the preceding twelve months a valid election under section 159(c) of this title has been conducted, or

(C) where such picketing has been conducted without a petition under section 159(c) of this title being filed within a reasonable period of time not to exceed thirty days from the commencement of such picketing: *Provided*, That when such a petition has been filed the Board shall forthwith, without regard to the provisions of section 159(c)(1) of this title or the absence of a showing of a substantial interest on the part of the labor organization, direct an election in such unit as the Board finds to be appropriate and shall certify the results thereof: *Provided further*, That nothing in this subparagraph (C) shall be construed to prohibit any picketing or other publicity for the purpose of truthfully advising the public (including consumers) that an employer does not employ members of, or have a contract with, a labor organization, unless an effect of such picketing is to induce any individual employed by any other person in the course of his employment, not to pick up, deliver or transport any goods or not to perform any services.

Nothing in this paragraph (7) shall be construed to permit any act which would otherwise be an unfair labor practice under this subsection.

The expressing of any views, argument, or opinion, or the dissemination thereof, whether in written, printed, graphic, or visual form, shall not constitute or be evidence of an unfair labor practice under any of the provisions of this subchapter, if such expression contains no threat of reprisal or force or promise of benefit.

For the purposes of this section, to bargain collectively is the performance of the mutual obligation of the employer and the representative of the employees to meet at reasonable times and confer in good faith with respect to wages, hours, and other terms and conditions of employment, or the negotiation of an agreement, or any question arising thereunder, and the execution of a written contract incorporating any agreement reached if requested by either party, but such obligation does not compel either party to agree to a proposal or require the making of a concession: *Provided*, That where there is in effect a collective-bargaining contract covering employees in an industry affecting commerce, the duty to bargain collectively shall also mean that no party to such contract shall terminate or modify such contract, unless the party desiring such termination or modification—

(1) serves a written notice upon the other party to the contract of the proposed termination or modification sixty days prior to the expiration date thereof, or in the event such contract contains no expiration date, sixty days prior to the time it is proposed to make such termination or modification;

(2) offers to meet and confer with the other party for the purpose of negotiating a new contract or a contract containing the proposed modifications;

(3) notifies the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service within thirty days after such notice of the existence of a dispute, and simultaneously therewith notifies any State or Territorial agency established to mediate and conciliate disputes within the State or Territory where the dispute occurred, provided no agreement has been reached by that time; and

(4) continues in full force and effect, without resorting to strike or lock-out, all the terms and conditions of the existing contract for a period of sixty days after such notice is given or until the expiration date of such contract, whichever occurs later:

The duties imposed upon employers, employees, and labor organizations by paragraphs (2) to (4) of this subsection shall become inapplicable upon an intervening certification of the Board, under which the labor organization or individual, which is a party to the contract, has been superseded as or ceased to be the representative of the employees subject to the provisions of section 159(a) of this title, and the duties so imposed shall not be construed as requiring either party to discuss or agree to any modification of the terms and conditions contained in a contract for a fixed period, if such modification is to become effective before such terms and conditions can be reopened under the provisions of the contract. Any employee who engages in a strike within any notice period specified in this subsection, or who engages in any strike within the appropriate period specified in subsection (g) of this section, shall lose his status as an employee of the employer engaged in the particular labor dispute, for the purposes of sections 158, 159, and 160 of this title, but such loss of status for such employee shall terminate if and when he is reemployed by such employer. Whenever the collective bargaining involves employees of a health care institution, the provisions of this subsection shall be modified as follows:

(A) The notice of paragraph (1) of this subsection shall be ninety days; the notice of paragraph (3) of this subsection shall be sixty days; and the contract period of paragraph (4) of this subsection shall be ninety days.

(B) Where the bargaining is for an initial agreement following certification or recognition, at least thirty days’ notice of the existence of a dispute shall be given by the labor organization to the agencies set forth in paragraph (3) of this subsection.

(C) After notice is given to the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service under either clause (A) or (B) of this sentence, the Service shall promptly communicate with the parties and use its best efforts, by mediation and conciliation, to bring them to agreement. The parties shall participate fully and promptly in such meetings as may be undertaken by the Service for the purpose of aiding in a settlement of the dispute.

It shall be an unfair labor practice for any labor organization and any employer to enter into any contract or agreement, express or implied, whereby such employer ceases or refrains or agrees to cease or refrain from handling, using, selling, transporting or otherwise dealing in any of the products of any other employer, or to cease doing business with any other person, and any contract or agreement entered into heretofore or hereafter containing such an agreement shall be to such extent unenforcible 1 and void: *Provided*, That nothing in this subsection shall apply to an agreement between a labor organization and an employer in the construction industry relating to the contracting or subcontracting of work to be done at the site of the construction, alteration, painting, or repair of a building, structure, or other work: *Provided further*, That for the purposes of this subsection and subsection (b)(4)(B) of this section the terms “any employer”, “any person engaged in commerce or an industry affecting commerce”, and “any person” when used in relation to the terms “any other producer, processor, or manufacturer”, “any other employer”, or “any other person” shall not include persons in the relation of a jobber, manufacturer, contractor, or subcontractor working on the goods or premises of the jobber or manufacturer or performing parts of an integrated process of production in the apparel and clothing industry: *Provided further*, That nothing in this subchapter shall prohibit the enforcement of any agreement which is within the foregoing exception.

It shall not be an unfair labor practice under subsections (a) and (b) of this section for an employer engaged primarily in the building and construction industry to make an agreement covering employees engaged (or who, upon their employment, will be engaged) in the building and construction industry with a labor organization of which building and construction employees are members (not established, maintained, or assisted by any action defined in subsection (a) of this section as an unfair labor practice) because (1) the majority status of such labor organization has not been established under the provisions of section 159 of this title prior to the making of such agreement, or (2) such agreement requires as a condition of employment, membership in such labor organization after the seventh day following the beginning of such employment or the effective date of the agreement, whichever is later, or (3) such agreement requires the employer to notify such labor organization of opportunities for employment with such employer, or gives such labor organization an opportunity to refer qualified applicants for such employment, or (4) such agreement specifies minimum training or experience qualifications for employment or provides for priority in opportunities for employment based upon length of service with such employer, in the industry or in the particular geographical area: *Provided*, That nothing in this subsection shall set aside the final proviso to subsection (a)(3) of this section: *Provided further*, That any agreement which would be invalid, but for clause (1) of this subsection, shall not be a bar to a petition filed pursuant to section 159(c) or 159(e) of this title.

A labor organization before engaging in any strike, picketing, or other concerted refusal to work at any health care institution shall, not less than ten days prior to such action, notify the institution in writing and the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service of that intention, except that in the case of bargaining for an initial agreement following certification or recognition the notice required by this subsection shall not be given until the expiration of the period specified in clause (B) of the last sentence of subsection (d) of this section. The notice shall state the date and time that such action will commence. The notice, once given, may be extended by the written agreement of both parties.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §8, 49 Stat. 452; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 140; Oct. 22, 1951, ch. 534, §1(b), 65 Stat. 601; Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §201(e), title VII, §§704(a)–(c), 705(a), Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 525, 542–545; Pub. L. 93–360, §1(c)–(e), July 26, 1974, 88 Stat. 395, 396.)

1974—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–360, §1(c), (d), substituted “any notice” for “the sixty-day” and inserted “, or who engages in any strike within the appropriate period specified in subsection (g) of this section,” in loss-of-employee-status provision and inserted enumeration of modifications to this subsection which are to be applied whenever the collective bargaining involves employees of a health care institution.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 93–360, §1(e), added subsec. (g).

1959—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 86–257, §201(e), struck out “and has at the time the agreement was made or within the preceding twelve months received from the Board a notice of compliance with sections 159(f), (g), (h) of this title” after “such agreement when made” in cl. (i).

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 86–257, §704(a), among other changes, substituted “induce or encourage any individual employed by any person engaged in commerce or in an industry affecting commerce to engage in, a strike or a refusal in the course of his employment” for “induce or encourage the employees of any employer to engage in, a strike or a concerted refusal in the course of their employment” in cl. (i), added cl. (ii), and inserted provisions relating to agreements prohibited by subsection (e) of this section in cl. (A), the proviso relating to primary strikes and primary picketing in cl. (B), and the last proviso relating to publicity.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 86–257, §704(c), added par. (7).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 86–257, §704(b), added subsec. (e).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 86–257, §705(a), added subsec. (f).

1951—Subsec. (a)(3). Act Oct. 22, 1951, substituted “and has at the time the agreement was made or within the preceding twelve months received from the Board a notice of compliance with section 159(f), (g), (h) of this title, and (ii) unless following an election held as provided in section 159(e) of this title within one year preceding the effective date of such agreement, the Board shall have certified that at least a majority of the employees eligible to vote in such election have voted to rescind the authority of such labor organization to make such an agreement:” for “; and (ii) if, following the most recent election held as provided in section 159(e) of this title the Board shall have certified that at least a majority of the employees eligible to vote in such election have voted to authorize such labor organization to make such an agreement:”.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by stating what were unfair labor practices by a union as well as by an employer, and by inserting provisions protecting the right of free speech for both employers and unions.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–360 effective on thirtieth day after July 26, 1974, see section 4 of Pub. L. 93–360, set out as an Effective Date note under section 169 of this title.

Amendment by sections 704(a)–(c) and 705(a) of Pub. L. 86–257 effective sixty days after Sept. 14, 1959, see section 707 of Pub. L. 86–257, set out as a note under section 153 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Section 705(b) of Pub. L. 86–257 provided that: “Nothing contained in the amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall be construed as authorizing the execution or application of agreements requiring membership in a labor organization as a condition of employment in any State or Territory in which such execution or application is prohibited by State or Territorial Law.”

Section 102 of title I of act June 23, 1947, provided that: “No provision of this title [amending this subchapter] shall be deemed to make an unfair labor practice any act which was performed prior to the date of the enactment of this act [June 23, 1947] which did not constitute an unfair labor practice prior thereto, and the provisions of section 8(a)(3) and section 8(b)(2) of the National Labor Relations Act as amended by this title [subsecs. (a)(3) and (b)(2) of this section] shall not make an unfair labor practice the performance of any obligation under a collective-bargaining agreement entered into prior to the date of the enactment of this Act [June 23, 1947], or (in the case of an agreement for a period of not more than one year) entered into on or after such date of enactment, but prior to the effective date of this title, if the performance of such obligation would not have constituted an unfair labor practice under section 8(3) [see subsec. (a)(3) of this section] of the National Labor Relations Act prior to the effective date of this title [sixty days after June 23, 1947] unless such agreement was renewed or extended subsequent thereto.”

Actions by and against labor organizations, see section 185 of this title.

Boycotts and other unlawful combinations, right to sue, see section 187 of this title.

Federal Credit Unions, providing facilities for operations of, see section 158a of this title.

Federal employment denied persons who assert right to strike against Government, see section 7311 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and section 1918 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Injunctive relief granted to Board against unfair labor practices and boycotts, see section 160 of this title.

Restrictions on payments and loans to employee representatives, see section 186 of this title.

Right to strike preserved, see section 163 of this title.

Strikes subject to injunction, see section 178 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 158a, 159, 160, 183, 187, 433, 2101 of this title; title 18 section 1951; title 42 section 2297h–8.

1 So in original. Probably should be “unenforceable”.

Provision by an employer of facilities for the operations of a Federal Credit Union on the premises of such employer shall not be deemed to be intimidation, coercion, interference, restraint or discrimination within the provisions of sections 157 and 158 of this title, or acts amendatory thereof.

(Dec. 6, 1937, ch. 3, §5, 51 Stat. 5.)

This section was not enacted either as part of the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, which comprises this chapter, or as part of the National Labor Relations Act, which comprises this subchapter.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

Representatives designated or selected for the purposes of collective bargaining by the majority of the employees in a unit appropriate for such purposes, shall be the exclusive representatives of all the employees in such unit for the purposes of collective bargaining in respect to rates of pay, wages, hours of employment, or other conditions of employment: *Provided*, That any individual employee or a group of employees shall have the right at any time to present grievances to their employer and to have such grievances adjusted, without the intervention of the bargaining representative, as long as the adjustment is not inconsistent with the terms of a collective-bargaining contract or agreement then in effect: *Provided further*, That the bargaining representative has been given opportunity to be present at such adjustment.

The Board shall decide in each case whether, in order to assure to employees the fullest freedom in exercising the rights guaranteed by this subchapter, the unit appropriate for the purposes of collective bargaining shall be the employer unit, craft unit, plant unit, or subdivision thereof: *Provided*, That the Board shall not (1) decide that any unit is appropriate for such purposes if such unit includes both professional employees and employees who are not professional employees unless a majority of such professional employees vote for inclusion in such unit; or (2) decide that any craft unit is inappropriate for such purposes on the ground that a different unit has been established by a prior Board determination, unless a majority of the employees in the proposed craft unit vote against separate representation or (3) decide that any unit is appropriate for such purposes if it includes, together with other employees, any individual employed as a guard to enforce against employees and other persons rules to protect property of the employer or to protect the safety of persons on the employer's premises; but no labor organization shall be certified as the representative of employees in a bargaining unit of guards if such organization admits to membership, or is affiliated directly or indirectly with an organization which admits to membership, employees other than guards.

(1) Whenever a petition shall have been filed, in accordance with such regulations as may be prescribed by the Board—

(A) by an employee or group of employees or any individual or labor organization acting in their behalf alleging that a substantial number of employees (i) wish to be represented for collective bargaining and that their employer declines to recognize their representative as the representative defined in subsection (a) of this section, or (ii) assert that the individual or labor organization, which has been certified or is being currently recognized by their employer as the bargaining representative, is no longer a representative as defined in subsection (a) of this section; or

(B) by an employer, alleging that one or more individuals or labor organizations have presented to him a claim to be recognized as the representative defined in subsection (a) of this section;

the Board shall investigate such petition and if it has reasonable cause to believe that a question of representation affecting commerce exists shall provide for an appropriate hearing upon due notice. Such hearing may be conducted by an officer or employee of the regional office, who shall not make any recommendations with respect thereto. If the Board finds upon the record of such hearing that such a question of representation exists, it shall direct an election by secret ballot and shall certify the results thereof.

(2) In determining whether or not a question of representation affecting commerce exists, the same regulations and rules of decision shall apply irrespective of the identity of the persons filing the petition or the kind of relief sought and in no case shall the Board deny a labor organization a place on the ballot by reason of an order with respect to such labor organization or its predecessor not issued in conformity with section 160(c) of this title.

(3) No election shall be directed in any bargaining unit or any subdivision within which in the preceding twelve-month period, a valid election shall have been held. Employees engaged in an economic strike who are not entitled to reinstatement shall be eligible to vote under such regulations as the Board shall find are consistent with the purposes and provisions of this subchapter in any election conducted within twelve months after the commencement of the strike. In any election where none of the choices on the ballot receives a majority, a run-off shall be conducted, the ballot providing for a selection between the two choices receiving the largest and second largest number of valid votes cast in the election.

(4) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the waiving of hearings by stipulation for the purpose of a consent election in conformity with regulations and rules of decision of the Board.

(5) In determining whether a unit is appropriate for the purposes specified in subsection (b) of this section the extent to which the employees have organized shall not be controlling.

Whenever an order of the Board made pursuant to section 160(c) of this title is based in whole or in part upon facts certified following an investigation pursuant to subsection (c) of this section and there is a petition for the enforcement or review of such order, such certification and the record of such investigation shall be included in the transcript of the entire record required to be filed under subsection (e) or (f) of section 160 of this title, and thereupon the decree of the court enforcing, modifying, or setting aside in whole or in part the order of the Board shall be made and entered upon the pleadings, testimony, and proceedings set forth in such transcript.

(1) Upon the filing with the Board, by 30 per centum or more of the employees in a bargaining unit covered by an agreement between their employer and a labor organization made pursuant to section 158(a)(3) of this title, of a petition alleging they desire that such authority be rescinded, the Board shall take a secret ballot of the employees in such unit and certify the results thereof to such labor organization and to the employer.

(2) No election shall be conducted pursuant to this subsection in any bargaining unit or any subdivision within which, in the preceding twelve-month period, a valid election shall have been held.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §9, 49 Stat. 453; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 143; Oct. 22, 1951, ch. 534, §1(c), (d), 65 Stat. 601; Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §201(d), title VII, §702, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 525, 542.)

1959—Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 86–257, §702, substituted “Employees engaged in an economic strike who are not entitled to reinstatement shall be eligible to vote under such regulations as the Board shall find are consistent with the purposes and provisions of this subchapter in any election conducted within twelve months after the commencement of the strike” for “Employees on strike who are not entitled to reinstatement shall not be eligible to vote.”

Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 86–257, §201(d), repealed subsecs. (f) and (g) which required unions to file their constitutions, bylaws and a report, prescribed the contents of the report and directed the filing of annual financial reports, and are now covered by section 431 of this title.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 86–257, §201(d), repealed subsec. (h) which related to affidavits showing union's officers free from Communist Party affiliation or belief.

1951—Subsec. (e). Act Oct. 22, 1951, §1(c), struck out par. (1) and renumbered pars. (2) and (3) as (1) and (2).

Subsecs. (f) to (h). Act Oct. 22, 1951, §1(d), struck out “No petition under section 159(e)(1) shall be entertained” wherever appearing.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally to allow employees to carry their grievances directly to the employer, to circumscribe certain powers of the Board, to make the union file with the Secretary of Labor its constitution, bylaws, and report before being certified as a bargaining agent, to require annual reports by labor unions, and to require labor unions to file affidavits with the Board showing that none of its officers are affiliated with or believe in the Communist Party.

Amendment by section 702 of Pub. L. 86–257 effective sixty days after Sept. 14, 1959, see section 707 of Pub. L. 86–257, set out as a note under section 153 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Section 103 of title I of act June 23, 1947, provided that: “No provisions of this title [amending this subchapter] shall affect any certification of representatives or any determination as to the appropriate collective-bargaining unit, which was made under section 9 of the National Labor Relations Act [this section] prior to the effective date of this title [sixty days after June 23, 1947] until one year after the date of such certification or if, in respect of any such certification, a collective-bargaining contract was entered into prior to the effective date of this title [sixty days after June 23, 1947], until the end of the contract period or until one year after such date, whichever first occurs.”

Prohibitions placed on Communist organizations, and members thereof, with respect to labor, see section 781 et seq. of Title 50, War and National Defense, particularly sections 782(4A), 784, 792a, and 841 to 844 of that title.

Application of rules, see rule 81, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 153, 158, 161, 168, 1403, 2101 of this title; title 18 section 1951.

The Board is empowered, as hereinafter provided, to prevent any person from engaging in any unfair labor practice (listed in section 158 of this title) affecting commerce. This power shall not be affected by any other means of adjustment or prevention that has been or may be established by agreement, law, or otherwise: *Provided*, That the Board is empowered by agreement with any agency of any State or Territory to cede to such agency jurisdiction over any cases in any industry (other than mining, manufacturing, communications, and transportation except where predominantly local in character) even though such cases may involve labor disputes affecting commerce, unless the provision of the State or Territorial statute applicable to the determination of such cases by such agency is inconsistent with the corresponding provision of this subchapter or has received a construction inconsistent therewith.

Whenever it is charged that any person has engaged in or is engaging in any such unfair labor practice, the Board, or any agent or agency designated by the Board for such purposes, shall have power to issue and cause to be served upon such person a complaint stating the charges in that respect, and containing a notice of hearing before the Board or a member thereof, or before a designated agent or agency, at a place therein fixed, not less than five days after the serving of said complaint: *Provided*, That no complaint shall issue based upon any unfair labor practice occurring more than six months prior to the filing of the charge with the Board and the service of a copy thereof upon the person against whom such charge is made, unless the person aggrieved thereby was prevented from filing such charge by reason of service in the armed forces, in which event the six-month period shall be computed from the day of his discharge. Any such complaint may be amended by the member, agent, or agency conducting the hearing or the Board in its discretion at any time prior to the issuance of an order based thereon. The person so complained of shall have the right to file an answer to the original or amended complaint and to appear in person or otherwise and give testimony at the place and time fixed in the complaint. In the discretion of the member, agent, or agency conducting the hearing or the Board, any other person may be allowed to intervene in the said proceeding and to present testimony. Any such proceeding shall, so far as practicable, be conducted in accordance with the rules of evidence applicable in the district courts of the United States under the rules of civil procedure for the district courts of the United States, adopted by the Supreme Court of the United States pursuant to section 2072 of title 28.

The testimony taken by such member, agent, or agency or the Board shall be reduced to writing and filed with the Board. Thereafter, in its discretion, the Board upon notice may take further testimony or hear argument. If upon the preponderance of the testimony taken the Board shall be of the opinion that any person named in the complaint has engaged in or is engaging in any such unfair labor practice, then the Board shall state its findings of fact and shall issue and cause to be served on such person an order requiring such person to cease and desist from such unfair labor practice, and to take such affirmative action including reinstatement of employees with or without back pay, as will effectuate the policies of this subchapter: *Provided*, That where an order directs reinstatement of an employee, back pay may be required of the employer or labor organization, as the case may be, responsible for the discrimination suffered by him: *And provided further*, That in determining whether a complaint shall issue alleging a violation of subsection (a)(1) or (a)(2) of section 158 of this title, and in deciding such cases, the same regulations and rules of decision shall apply irrespective of whether or not the labor organization affected is affiliated with a labor organization national or international in scope. Such order may further require such person to make reports from time to time showing the extent to which it has complied with the order. If upon the preponderance of the testimony taken the Board shall not be of the opinion that the person named in the complaint has engaged in or is engaging in any such unfair labor practice, then the Board shall state its findings of fact and shall issue an order dismissing the said complaint. No order of the Board shall require the reinstatement of any individual as an employee who has been suspended or discharged, or the payment to him of any back pay, if such individual was suspended or discharged for cause. In case the evidence is presented before a member of the Board, or before an administrative law judge or judges thereof, such member, or such judge or judges as the case may be, shall issue and cause to be served on the parties to the proceeding a proposed report, together with a recommended order, which shall be filed with the Board, and if no exceptions are filed within twenty days after service thereof upon such parties, or within such further period as the Board may authorize, such recommended order shall become the order of the Board and become effective as therein prescribed.

Until the record in a case shall have been filed in a court, as hereinafter provided, the Board may at any time upon reasonable notice and in such manner as it shall deem proper, modify or set aside, in whole or in part, any finding or order made or issued by it.

The Board shall have power to petition any court of appeals of the United States, or if all the courts of appeals to which application may be made are in vacation, any district court of the United States, within any circuit or district, respectively, wherein the unfair labor practice in question occurred or wherein such person resides or transacts business, for the enforcement of such order and for appropriate temporary relief or restraining order, and shall file in the court the record in the proceedings, as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Upon the filing of such petition, the court shall cause notice thereof to be served upon such person, and thereupon shall have jurisdiction of the proceeding and of the question determined therein, and shall have power to grant such temporary relief or restraining order as it deems just and proper, and to make and enter a decree enforcing, modifying and enforcing as so modified, or setting aside in whole or in part the order of the Board. No objection that has not been urged before the Board, its member, agent, or agency, shall be considered by the court, unless the failure or neglect to urge such objection shall be excused because of extraordinary circumstances. The findings of the Board with respect to questions of fact if supported by substantial evidence on the record considered as a whole shall be conclusive. If either party shall apply to the court for leave to adduce additional evidence and shall show to the satisfaction of the court that such additional evidence is material and that there were reasonable grounds for the failure to adduce such evidence in the hearing before the Board, its member, agent, or agency, the court may order such additional evidence to be taken before the Board, its member, agent, or agency, and to be made a part of the record. The Board may modify its findings as to the facts, or make new findings by reason of additional evidence so taken and filed, and it shall file such modified or new findings, which findings with respect to questions of fact if supported by substantial evidence on the record considered as a whole shall be conclusive, and shall file its recommendations, if any, for the modification or setting aside of its original order. Upon the filing of the record with it the jurisdiction of the court shall be exclusive and its judgment and decree shall be final, except that the same shall be subject to review by the appropriate United States court of appeals if application was made to the district court as hereinabove provided, and by the Supreme Court of the United States upon writ of certiorari or certification as provided in section 1254 of title 28.

Any person aggrieved by a final order of the Board granting or denying in whole or in part the relief sought may obtain a review of such order in any United States court of appeals in the circuit wherein the unfair labor practice in question was alleged to have been engaged in or wherein such person resides or transacts business, or in the United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia, by filing in such a court a written petition praying that the order of the Board be modified or set aside. A copy of such petition shall be forthwith transmitted by the clerk of the court to the Board, and thereupon the aggrieved party shall file in the court the record in the proceeding, certified by the Board, as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Upon the filing of such petition, the court shall proceed in the same manner as in the case of an application by the Board under subsection (e) of this section, and shall have the same jurisdiction to grant to the Board such temporary relief or restraining order as it deems just and proper, and in like manner to make and enter a decree enforcing, modifying, and enforcing as so modified, or setting aside in whole or in part the order of the Board; the findings of the Board with respect to questions of fact if supported by substantial evidence on the record considered as a whole shall in like manner be conclusive.

The commencement of proceedings under subsection (e) or (f) of this section shall not, unless specifically ordered by the court, operate as a stay of the Board's order.

When granting appropriate temporary relief or a restraining order, or making and entering a decree enforcing, modifying, and enforcing as so modified or setting aside in whole or in part an order of the Board, as provided in this section, the jurisdiction of courts sitting in equity shall not be limited by chapter 6 of this title.

The Board shall have power, upon issuance of a complaint as provided in subsection (b) of this section charging that any person has engaged in or is engaging in an unfair labor practice, to petition any United States district court, within any district wherein the unfair labor practice in question is alleged to have occurred or wherein such person resides or transacts business, for appropriate temporary relief or restraining order. Upon the filing of any such petition the court shall cause notice thereof to be served upon such person, and thereupon shall have jurisdiction to grant to the Board such temporary relief or restraining order as it deems just and proper.

Whenever it is charged that any person has engaged in an unfair labor practice within the meaning of paragraph (4)(D) of section 158(b) of this title, the Board is empowered and directed to hear and determine the dispute out of which such unfair labor practice shall have arisen, unless, within ten days after notice that such charge has been filed, the parties to such dispute submit to the Board satisfactory evidence that they have adjusted, or agreed upon methods for the voluntary adjustment of, the dispute. Upon compliance by the parties to the dispute with the decision of the Board or upon such voluntary adjustment of the dispute, such charge shall be dismissed.

Whenever it is charged that any person has engaged in an unfair labor practice within the meaning of paragraph (4)(A), (B), or (C) of section 158(b) of this title, or section 158(e) of this title or section 158(b)(7) of this title, the preliminary investigation of such charge shall be made forthwith and given priority over all other cases except cases of like character in the office where it is filed or to which it is referred. If, after such investigation, the officer or regional attorney to whom the matter may be referred has reasonable cause to believe such charge is true and that a complaint should issue, he shall, on behalf of the Board, petition any United States district court within any district where the unfair labor practice in question has occurred, is alleged to have occurred, or wherein such person resides or transacts business, for appropriate injunctive relief pending the final adjudication of the Board with respect to such matter. Upon the filing of any such petition the district court shall have jurisdiction to grant such injunctive relief or temporary restraining order as it deems just and proper, notwithstanding any other provision of law: *Provided further*, That no temporary restraining order shall be issued without notice unless a petition alleges that substantial and irreparable injury to the charging party will be unavoidable and such temporary restraining order shall be effective for no longer than five days and will become void at the expiration of such period: *Provided further*, That such officer or regional attorney shall not apply for any restraining order under section 158(b)(7) of this title if a charge against the employer under section 158(a)(2) of this title has been filed and after the preliminary investigation, he has reasonable cause to believe that such charge is true and that a complaint should issue. Upon filing of any such petition the courts shall cause notice thereof to be served upon any person involved in the charge and such person, including the charging party, shall be given an opportunity to appear by counsel and present any relevant testimony: *Provided further*, That for the purposes of this subsection district courts shall be deemed to have jurisdiction of a labor organization (1) in the district in which such organization maintains its principal office, or (2) in any district in which its duly authorized officers or agents are engaged in promoting or protecting the interests of employee members. The service of legal process upon such officer or agent shall constitute service upon the labor organization and make such organization a party to the suit. In situations where such relief is appropriate the procedure specified herein shall apply to charges with respect to section 158(b)(4)(D) of this title.

Whenever it is charged that any person has engaged in an unfair labor practice within the meaning of subsection (a)(3) or (b)(2) of section 158 of this title, such charge shall be given priority over all other cases except cases of like character in the office where it is filed or to which it is referred and cases given priority under subsection (*l*) of this section.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §10, 49 Stat. 453; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 146; June 25, 1948, ch. 646, §32(a), (b), 62 Stat. 991; May 24, 1949, ch. 139, §127, 63 Stat. 107; Pub. L. 85–791, §13, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 945; Pub. L. 86–257, title VII, §§704(d), 706, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 544; Pub. L. 95–251, §3, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184; Pub. L. 98–620, title IV, §402(31), Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3360.)

The rules of evidence applicable in the district courts of the United States, referred to in subsec. (b), are set out in the Appendix to Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

The rules of civil procedure for the district courts of the United States, referred to in subsec. (b), are set out in the Appendix to Title 28.

Chapter 6 (§101 et seq.) of this title, referred to in subsec. (h), is a reference to act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, 47 Stat. 70, popularly known as the Norris-LaGuardia Act.

In subsec. (b), “section 2072 of title 28” substituted for “the Act of June 19, 1934 (U.S.C., title 28, secs. 723-B, 723–C)” on authority of act June 25, 1948, ch. 646, 62 Stat. 869, section 1 of which enacted Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

In subsec. (c), “administrative law judge or judges” and “such judge or judges” substituted for “examiner or examiners” and “such examiner or examiners”, respectively, pursuant to section 3105 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and section 3 of Pub. L. 95–251, Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 184, which is set out as a note under section 3105 of Title 5.

In subsec. (f), “United States court of appeals” substituted for “circuit court of appeals of the United States” on authority of act June 25, 1948, as amended by act May 24, 1949.

As originally enacted subsecs. (j) and (*l*) contained references to the District Court of the United States for the District of Columbia. Act June 25, 1948, as amended by act May 24, 1949, substituted “United States District Court for the District of Columbia” for “District Court of the United States for the District of Columbia”. However, the words “United States District Court for the District of Columbia” have now been deleted entirely as superfluous in view of section 132(a) of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure, which states that “There shall be in each judicial district a district court which shall be a court of record known as the United States District Court for the district”, and section 88 of Title 28 which states that “the District of Columbia constitutes one judicial district”.

1984—Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 98–620 struck out subsec. (i) which provided for expeditious hearings on petitions.

1959—Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 86–257, §704(d), included unfair labor practices within the meaning of sections 158(e) and 158(b)(7) of this title, and inserted proviso prohibiting the officer or regional attorney from applying for any restraining order under section 158(b)(7) of this title if a charge against the employer under section 158(a)(2) of this title has been filed and after the preliminary investigation, he has reasonable cause to believe that such charge is true and that a complaint should issue.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 86–257, §706, added subsec. (m).

1958—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 85–791, §13(a), struck out “a transcript of” after “until”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 85–791, §13(b), struck out “(including the United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia)” before “, or if all the courts”, and substituted “file in the court the record in the proceedings, as provided in section 2112 of title 28” for “certify and file in the court a transcript of the entire record in the proceedings including the pleadings and testimony upon which such order was entered and the findings and order of the Board” in first sentence, in second sentence substituted “the filing of such petition” for “such filing of” and struck out “upon the pleadings, testimony and proceedings set forth in such transcript” after “make and enter”, in fifth sentence substituted “member” for “members” after “before the Board, its”, and substituted “record” for “transcript”, and in seventh sentence, substituted “Upon the filing of the record with it the” for “The”, and “section 1254 of title 28” for “sections 346 and 347 of title 28”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 85–791, §13(c), substituted “transmitted by the clerk of the court to” for “served upon” and “the record in the proceeding, certified by the Board, as provided in section 2112 of title 28” for “a transcript of the entire record in the proceeding, certified by the Board including the pleading and testimony upon which the order complained of was entered, and the findings and order of the Board” in second sentence, and in third sentence substituted “the filing of such petition,” for “such filing”, and struck out “exclusive” before “jurisdiction”.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally and added subsecs. (j) to (*l*) which gives the Board general power to petition district court for temporary relief or restraining order, directs Board to hear and determine jurisdictional strikes, and to investigate boycotts and strikes to force recognition of an uncertified labor union and to petition district court for injunctive relief.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–620 not applicable to cases pending on Nov. 8, 1984, see section 403 of Pub. L. 98–620, set out as a note under section 1657 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Amendment by Pub. L. 86–257 effective sixty days after Sept. 14, 1959, see section 707 of Pub. L. 86–257, set out as a note under section 153 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Prohibitions placed on Communist organizations and members thereof, with respect to labor, see section 781 et seq. of Title 50, War and National Defense, particularly sections 782(4A), 784, 792a, and 841 to 844 of that title.

Application of rules, see rule 81, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 153, 158, 159, 161, 168 of this title; title 18 section 1951; title 42 section 2297h–8.

For the purpose of all hearings and investigations, which, in the opinion of the Board, are necessary and proper for the exercise of the powers vested in it by sections 159 and 160 of this title—

The Board, or its duly authorized agents or agencies, shall at all reasonable times have access to, for the purpose of examination, and the right to copy any evidence of any person being investigated or proceeded against that relates to any matter under investigation or in question. The Board, or any member thereof, shall upon application of any party to such proceedings, forthwith issue to such party subpenas requiring the attendance and testimony of witnesses or the production of any evidence in such proceedings or investigation requested in such application. Within five days after the service of a subpena on any person requiring the production of any evidence in his possession or under his control, such person may petition the Board to revoke, and the Board shall revoke, such subpena if in its opinion the evidence whose production is required does not relate to any matter under investigation, or any matter in question in such proceedings, or if in its opinion such subpena does not describe with sufficient particularity the evidence whose production is required. Any member of the Board, or any agent or agency designated by the Board for such purposes, may administer oaths and affirmations, examine witnesses, and receive evidence. Such attendance of witnesses and the production of such evidence may be required from any place in the United States or any Territory or possession thereof, at any designated place of hearing.

In case of contumacy or refusal to obey a subpena issued to any person, any district court of the United States or the United States courts of any Territory or possession, within the jurisdiction of which the inquiry is carried on or within the jurisdiction of which said person guilty of contumacy or refusal to obey is found or resides or transacts business, upon application by the Board shall have jurisdiction to issue to such person an order requiring such person to appear before the Board, its member, agent, or agency, there to produce evidence if so ordered, or there to give testimony touching the matter under investigation or in question; and any failure to obey such order of the court may be punished by said court as a contempt thereof.

Complaints, orders, and other process and papers of the Board, its member, agent, or agency, may be served either personally or by registered or certified mail or by telegraph or by leaving a copy thereof at the principal office or place of business of the person required to be served. The verified return by the individual so serving the same setting forth the manner of such service shall be proof of the same, and the return post office receipt or telegraph receipt therefore when registered or certified and mailed or when telegraphed as aforesaid shall be proof of service of the same. Witnesses summoned before the Board, its member, agent, or agency, shall be paid the same fees and mileage that are paid witnesses in the courts of the United States, and witnesses whose depositions are taken and the persons taking the same shall severally be entitled to the same fees as are paid for like services in the courts of the United States.

All process of any court to which application may be made under this subchapter may be served in the judicial district wherein the defendant or other person required to be served resides or may be found.

The several departments and agencies of the Government, when directed by the President, shall furnish the Board, upon its request, all records, papers, and information in their possession relating to any matter before the Board.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §11, 49 Stat. 455; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 150; June 25, 1948, ch. 646, §32(b), 62 Stat. 991; May 24, 1949, ch. 139, §127, 63 Stat. 107; Pub. L. 91–452, title II, §234, Oct. 15, 1970, 84 Stat. 930; Pub. L. 86–507, §1(57), June 11, 1960, as added Pub. L. 96–245, May 21, 1980, 94 Stat. 347.)

The original text of par. (2) contained a reference to the District Court of the United States for the District of Columbia. Act June 25, 1948, as amended by act May 24, 1949, substituted “United States District Court for the District of Columbia” for “District Court of the United States for the District of Columbia”. However, the words “United States District Court for the District of Columbia” have now been deleted entirely as superfluous in view of section 132(a) of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure, which states that “There shall be in each judicial district a district court which shall be a court of record known as the United States District Court for the district”, and section 88 of Title 28 which states that “the District of Columbia constitutes one judicial district”.

1980—Par. (4). Pub. L. 96–245 inserted provisions authorizing service by certified mail.

1970—Par. (3). Pub. L. 91–452 struck out par. (3) which related to the immunity from prosecution of any individual compelled to testify or produce evidence after claiming his privilege against self-incrimination.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, restated section with addition of provisions requiring the issuance of subpenas as a matter of course on the request of any party.

Amendment by Pub. L. 91–452 effective on sixtieth day following Oct. 15, 1970, and not to affect any immunity to which any individual is entitled under this section by reason of any testimony given before sixtieth day following Oct. 15, 1970, see section 260 of Pub. L. 91–452, set out as an Effective Date; Savings Provisions note under section 6001 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

Subpena, see rule 45, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Immunity of witnesses, see section 6001 et seq. of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

This section is referred to in section 661 of this title; title 18 section 1951; title 42 section 2000e–9.

Any person who shall willfully resist, prevent, impede, or interfere with any member of the Board or any of its agents or agencies in the performance of duties pursuant to this subchapter shall be punished by a fine of not more than $5,000 or by imprisonment for not more than one year, or both.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §12, 49 Stat. 456; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 151.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, reenacted section without change.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

Nothing in this subchapter, except as specifically provided for herein, shall be construed so as either to interfere with or impede or diminish in any way the right to strike, or to affect the limitations or qualifications on that right.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §13, 49 Stat. 457; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 151.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section so as to provide that except as specifically provided for in this subchapter nothing shall interfere with or diminish the right to strike and that nothing was to be construed to affect the limitations or qualifications on the right to strike, thus recognizing that the right to strike is not an unlimited and unqualified right.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

Nothing herein shall prohibit any individual employed as a supervisor from becoming or remaining a member of a labor organization, but no employer subject to this subchapter shall be compelled to deem individuals defined herein as supervisors as employees for the purpose of any law, either national or local, relating to collective bargaining.

Nothing in this subchapter shall be construed as authorizing the execution or application of agreements requiring membership in a labor organization as a condition of employment in any State or Territory in which such execution or application is prohibited by State or Territorial law.

(1) The Board, in its discretion, may, by rule of decision or by published rules adopted pursuant to subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5, decline to assert jurisdiction over any labor dispute involving any class or category of employers, where, in the opinion of the Board, the effect of such labor dispute on commerce is not sufficiently substantial to warrant the exercise of its jurisdiction: *Provided*, That the Board shall not decline to assert jurisdiction over any labor dispute over which it would assert jurisdiction under the standards prevailing upon August 1, 1959.

(2) Nothing in this subchapter shall be deemed to prevent or bar any agency or the courts of any State or Territory (including the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, and the Virgin Islands), from assuming and asserting jurisdiction over labor disputes over which the Board declines, pursuant to paragraph (1) of this subsection, to assert jurisdiction.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §14, 49 Stat. 457; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 151; Pub. L. 86–257, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 541.)

In subsec. (a)(1), “subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5” substituted for “the Administrative Procedure Act” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1959—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 86–257 added subsec. (c).

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by inserting new subject matter. Section formerly referred to conflict of laws, see section 165 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

Wherever the application of the provisions of section 272 of chapter 10 of the Act entitled “An Act to establish a uniform system of bankruptcy throughout the United States”, approved July 1, 1898, and Acts amendatory thereof and supplementary thereto (U.S.C., title 11, sec. 672), conflicts with the application of the provisions of this subchapter, this subchapter shall prevail: *Provided*, That in any situation where the provisions of this subchapter cannot be validly enforced, the provisions of such other Acts shall remain in full force and effect.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §15, 49 Stat. 457; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 151.)

The Act approved July 1, 1898, referred to in text, popularly known as the Bankruptcy Act, was classified generally to former Title 11, Bankruptcy, and was repealed effective Oct. 1, 1979, by Pub. L. 95–598, §§401(a), 402(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2682, section 101 of which enacted revised Title 11.

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by inserting new subject matter which was formerly covered by section 164 of this title. Section formerly referred to separability provisions, see section 166 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

If any provision of this subchapter, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstances, shall be held invalid, the remainder of this subchapter, or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid, shall not be affected thereby.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §16, 49 Stat. 457; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 151.)

1947—Act June 23, 1947, amended section generally by inserting new subject matter which was formerly covered by section 165 of this title. Section formerly referred to short title of chapter, see section 167 of this title.

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 18 section 1951.

This subchapter may be cited as the “National Labor Relations Act”.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §17, as added June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title I, §101, 61 Stat. 152.)

For effective date of amendment by act June 23, 1947, see section 104 of act June 23, 1947, set out as a note under section 151 of this title.

No petition entertained, no investigation made, no election held, and no certification issued by the National Labor Relations Board, under any of the provisions of section 159 of this title, shall be invalid by reason of the failure of the Congress of Industrial Organizations to have complied with the requirements of section 159(f), (g), or (h) of this title prior to December 22, 1949, or by reason of the failure of the American Federation of Labor to have complied with the provisions of section 159(f), (g), or (h) of this title prior to November 7, 1947: *Provided*, That no liability shall be imposed under any provision of this chapter upon any person for failure to honor any election or certificate referred to above, prior to October 22, 1951: *Provided, however*, That this proviso shall not have the effect of setting aside or in any way affecting judgments or decrees heretofore entered under section 160(e) or (f) of this title and which have become final.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §18, as added Oct. 22, 1951, ch. 534, §1(a), 65 Stat. 601.)

Section 159(f), (g), or (h) of this title, referred to in text, was repealed by Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §201(d), 73 Stat. 525. See section 431 of this title.

Any employee who is a member of and adheres to established and traditional tenets or teachings of a bona fide religion, body, or sect which has historically held conscientious objections to joining or financially supporting labor organizations shall not be required to join or financially support any labor organization as a condition of employment; except that such employee may be required in a contract between such employees’ employer and a labor organization in lieu of periodic dues and initiation fees, to pay sums equal to such dues and initiation fees to a nonreligious, nonlabor organization charitable fund exempt from taxation under section 501(c)(3) of title 26, chosen by such employee from a list of at least three such funds, designated in such contract or if the contract fails to designate such funds, then to any such fund chosen by the employee. If such employee who holds conscientious objections pursuant to this section requests the labor organization to use the grievance-arbitration procedure on the employee's behalf, the labor organization is authorized to charge the employee for the reasonable cost of using such procedure.

(July 5, 1935, ch. 372, §19, as added Pub. L. 93–360, §3, July 26, 1974, 88 Stat. 397; amended Pub. L. 96–593, Dec. 24, 1980, 94 Stat. 3452.)

1980—Pub. L. 96–593 inserted reference to nonlabor organization and provisions respecting charges to employee for use of grievance-arbitration procedure, and struck out applicability of provisions to employees of health care institutions only.

Section 4 of Pub. L. 93–360 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [enacting this section and section 183 of this title and amending sections 152 and 158 of this title] shall become effective on the thirtieth day after its date of enactment [July 26, 1974].”

It is the policy of the United States that—

(a) sound and stable industrial peace and the advancement of the general welfare, health, and safety of the Nation and of the best interests of employers and employees can most satisfactorily be secured by the settlement of issues between employers and employees through the processes of conference and collective bargaining between employers and the representatives of their employees;

(b) the settlement of issues between employers and employees through collective bargaining may be advanced by making available full and adequate governmental facilities for conciliation, mediation, and voluntary arbitration to aid and encourage employers and the representatives of their employees to reach and maintain agreements concerning rates of pay, hours, and working conditions, and to make all reasonable efforts to settle their differences by mutual agreement reached through conferences and collective bargaining or by such methods as may be provided for in any applicable agreement for the settlement of disputes; and

(c) certain controversies which arise between parties to collective-bargaining agreements may be avoided or minimized by making available full and adequate governmental facilities for furnishing assistance to employers and the representatives of their employees in formulating for inclusion within such agreements provision for adequate notice of any proposed changes in the terms of such agreements, for the final adjustment of grievances or questions regarding the application or interpretation of such agreements, and other provisions designed to prevent the subsequent arising of such controversies.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §201, 61 Stat. 152.)

Ex. Ord. No. 11482, Sept. 22, 1969, 34 F.R. 14723, which related to the Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12110, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1069, set out as a note under section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Ex. Ord. No. 11849, Apr. 1, 1975, 40 F.R. 14887, which related to the Collective Bargaining Committee in Construction, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12110, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1069, set out as a note under section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There is created an independent agency to be known as the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (herein referred to as the “Service”, except that for sixty days after June 23, 1947, such term shall refer to the Conciliation Service of the Department of Labor). The Service shall be under the direction of a Federal Mediation and Conciliation Director (hereinafter referred to as the “Director”), who shall be appointed by the President by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. The Director shall not engage in any other business, vocation, or employment.

The Director is authorized, subject to the civil service laws, to appoint such clerical and other personnel as may be necessary for the execution of the functions of the Service, and shall fix their compensation in accordance with chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5, and may, without regard to the provisions of the civil service laws, appoint such conciliators and mediators as may be necessary to carry out the functions of the Service. The Director is authorized to make such expenditures for supplies, facilities, and services as he deems necessary. Such expenditures shall be allowed and paid upon presentation of itemized vouchers therefor approved by the Director or by any employee designated by him for that purpose.

The principal office of the Service shall be in the District of Columbia, but the Director may establish regional offices convenient to localities in which labor controversies are likely to arise. The Director may by order, subject to revocation at any time, delegate any authority and discretion conferred upon him by this chapter to any regional director, or other officer or employee of the Service. The Director may establish suitable procedures for cooperation with State and local mediation agencies. The Director shall make an annual report in writing to Congress at the end of the fiscal year.

All mediation and conciliation functions of the Secretary of Labor or the United States Conciliation Service under section 51 of this title, and all functions of the United States Conciliation Service under any other law are transferred to the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service, together with the personnel and records of the United States Conciliation Service. Such transfer shall take effect upon the sixtieth day after June 23, 1947. Such transfer shall not affect any proceedings pending before the United States Conciliation Service or any certification, order, rule, or regulation theretofore made by it or by the Secretary of Labor. The Director and the Service shall not be subject in any way to the jurisdiction or authority of the Secretary of Labor or any official or division of the Department of Labor.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §202, 61 Stat. 153; Oct. 28, 1949, ch. 782, title XI, §1106(a), 63 Stat. 972.)

The civil service laws, referred to in subsec. (b), are set forth in Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. See, particularly, section 3301 et seq. of Title 5.

Section 51 of this title, referred to in subsec. (d), was repealed by Pub. L. 89–554, §8(a), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 642.

Provisions of subsec. (a) which prescribed the basic annual compensation of the Director were omitted to conform to the provisions of the Executive Schedule. See section 5314 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In subsec. (b), “chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5” substituted for “the Classification Act of 1949, as amended” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5.

Provisions of subsec. (b) that authorized the Director to fix the compensation of conciliators and mediators without regard to the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, have been omitted as obsolete. Sections 1202 and 1204 of the Classification Act of 1949, 63 Stat. 972, 973, repealed the Classification Act of 1923 and all other laws or parts of laws inconsistent with the 1949 Act. While section 1106(a) of the 1949 Act provided that references in other laws to the 1923 Act should be held and considered to mean the 1949 Act, it did not have the effect of continuing the exceptions contained in this section because of section 1106(b) which provided that the application of the 1949 Act to any position, officer, or employee shall not be affected by section 1106(a). The Classification Act of 1949 was repealed by Pub. L. 89–554, Sept. 6, 1966, §8(a), 80 Stat. 632 (of which section 1 revised and enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, into law). Section 5102 of Title 5 contains the applicability provisions of the 1949 Act, and section 5103 of Title 5 authorizes the Office of Personnel Management to determine the applicability to specific positions and employees.

1949—Subsec. (b). Act Oct. 28, 1949, substituted “Classification Act of 1949” for “Classification Act of 1923”.

Act Oct. 28, 1949, ch. 782, cited as a credit to this section, was repealed (subject to a savings clause) by Pub. L. 89–554, Sept. 6, 1966, §8, 80 Stat. 632, 655.

It shall be the duty of the Service, in order to prevent or minimize interruptions of the free flow of commerce growing out of labor disputes, to assist parties to labor disputes in industries affecting commerce to settle such disputes through conciliation and mediation.

The Service may proffer its services in any labor dispute in any industry affecting commerce, either upon its own motion or upon the request of one or more of the parties to the dispute, whenever in its judgment such dispute threatens to cause a substantial interruption of commerce. The Director and the Service are directed to avoid attempting to mediate disputes which would have only a minor effect on interstate commerce if State or other conciliation services are available to the parties. Whenever the Service does proffer its services in any dispute, it shall be the duty of the Service promptly to put itself in communication with the parties and to use its best efforts, by mediation and conciliation, to bring them to agreement.

If the Director is not able to bring the parties to agreement by conciliation within a reasonable time, he shall seek to induce the parties voluntarily to seek other means of settling the dispute without resort to strike, lock-out, or other coercion, including submission to the employees in the bargaining unit of the employer's last offer of settlement for approval or rejection in a secret ballot. The failure or refusal of either party to agree to any procedure suggested by the Director shall not be deemed a violation of any duty or obligation imposed by this chapter.

Final adjustment by a method agreed upon by the parties is declared to be the desirable method for settlement of grievance disputes arising over the application or interpretation of an existing collective-bargaining agreement. The Service is directed to make its conciliation and mediation services available in the settlement of such grievance disputes only as a last resort and in exceptional cases.

The Service is authorized and directed to encourage and support the establishment and operation of joint labor management activities conducted by plant, area, and industrywide committees designed to improve labor management relationships, job security and organizational effectiveness, in accordance with the provisions of section 175a of this title.

The Service may make its services available to Federal agencies to aid in the resolution of disputes under the provisions of subchapter IV of chapter 5 of title 5. Functions performed by the Service may include assisting parties to disputes related to administrative programs, training persons in skills and procedures employed in alternative means of dispute resolution, and furnishing officers and employees of the Service to act as neutrals. Only officers and employees who are qualified in accordance with section 573 of title 5 may be assigned to act as neutrals. The Service shall consult with the agency designated by, or the interagency committee designated or established by, the President under section 573 of title 5 in maintaining rosters of neutrals and arbitrators, and to adopt such procedures and rules as are necessary to carry out the services authorized in this subsection.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §203, 61 Stat. 153; Pub. L. 95–524, §6(c)(1), Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2020; Pub. L. 101–552, §7, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2746; Pub. L. 102–354, §5(b)(5), Aug. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 946; Pub. L. 104–320, §4(c), Oct. 19, 1996, 110 Stat. 3871.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (c), was in the original “this Act” meaning act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, known as the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, which is classified principally to this subchapter and subchapters III (§171 et seq.) and IV (§185 et seq.) of this chapter. For complete classification of this act to the Code, see Tables.

1996—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 104–320 substituted “the agency designated by, or the interagency committee designated or established by, the President under section 573 of title 5” for “the Administrative Conference of the United States and other agencies”.

1992—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–354 substituted “section 573” for “section 583”.

1990—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–552 added subsec. (f).

1978—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 95–524 added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–524 not to affect terms and conditions of any collective bargaining agreement whether in effect prior to or entered into after Oct. 27, 1978, see section 6(e) of Pub. L. 95–524, set out as a note under section 175a of this title.

(a) 1 In order to prevent or minimize interruptions of the free flow of commerce growing out of labor disputes, employers and employees and their representatives, in any industry affecting commerce, shall—

(1) exert every reasonable effort to make and maintain agreements concerning rates of pay, hours, and working conditions, including provision for adequate notice of any proposed change in the terms of such agreements;

(2) whenever a dispute arises over the terms or application of a collective-bargaining agreement and a conference is requested by a party or prospective party thereto, arrange promptly for such a conference to be held and endeavor in such conference to settle such dispute expeditiously; and

(3) in case such dispute is not settled by conference, participate fully and promptly in such meetings as may be undertaken by the Service under this chapter for the purpose of aiding in a settlement of the dispute.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §204, 61 Stat. 154.)

1 So in original. No subsec. (b) has been enacted.

(a) There is created a National Labor-Management Panel which shall be composed of twelve members appointed by the President, six of whom shall be selected from among persons outstanding in the field of management and six of whom shall be selected from among persons outstanding in the field of labor. Each member shall hold office for a term of three years, except that any member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which his predecessor was appointed shall be appointed for the remainder of such term, and the terms of office of the members first taking office shall expire, as designated by the President at the time of appointment, four at the end of the first year, four at the end of the second year, and four at the end of the third year after the date of appointment. Members of the panel, when serving on business of the panel, shall be paid compensation at the rate of $25 per day, and shall also be entitled to receive an allowance for actual and necessary travel and subsistence expenses while so serving away from their places of residence.

(b) It shall be the duty of the panel, at the request of the Director, to advise in the avoidance of industrial controversies and the manner in which mediation and voluntary adjustment shall be administered, particularly with reference to controversies affecting the general welfare of the country.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §205, 61 Stat. 154.)

(1) The Service is authorized and directed to provide assistance in the establishment and operation of plant, area and industrywide labor management committees which—

(A) have been organized jointly by employers and labor organizations representing employees in that plant, area, or industry; and

(B) are established for the purpose of improving labor management relationships, job security, organizational effectiveness, enhancing economic development or involving workers in decisions affecting their jobs including improving communication with respect to subjects of mutual interest and concern.

(2) The Service is authorized and directed to enter into contracts and to make grants, where necessary or appropriate, to fulfill its responsibilities under this section.

(1) No grant may be made, no contract may be entered into and no other assistance may be provided under the provisions of this section to a plant labor management committee unless the employees in that plant are represented by a labor organization and there is in effect at that plant a collective bargaining agreement.

(2) No grant may be made, no contract may be entered into and no other assistance may be provided under the provisions of this section to an area or industrywide labor management committee unless its participants include any labor organizations certified or recognized as the representative of the employees of an employer participating in such committee. Nothing in this clause shall prohibit participation in an area or industrywide committee by an employer whose employees are not represented by a labor organization.

(3) No grant may be made under the provisions of this section to any labor management committee which the Service finds to have as one of its purposes the discouragement of the exercise of rights contained in section 157 of this title, or the interference with collective bargaining in any plant, or industry.

The Service shall carry out the provisions of this section through an office established for that purpose.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this section $10,000,000 for the fiscal year 1979, and such sums as may be necessary thereafter.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §205A, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §6(c)(2), Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2020.)

For short title of section 6 of Pub. L. 95–524 as the Labor Management Cooperation Act of 1978, see Short Title of 1978 Amendment note set out under section 141 of this title.

Section 6(b) of Pub. L. 95–524 provided that: “It is the purpose of this section [enacting this section and amending sections 173 and 186 of this title]—

“(1) to improve communication between representatives of labor and management;

“(2) to provide workers and employers with opportunities to study and explore new and innovative joint approaches to achieving organizational effectiveness;

“(3) to assist workers and employers in solving problems of mutual concern not susceptible to resolution within the collective bargaining process;

“(4) to study and explore ways of eliminating potential problems which reduce the competitiveness and inhibit the economic development of the plant, area or industry;

“(5) to enhance the involvement of workers in making decisions that affect their working lives;

“(6) to expand and improve working relationships between workers and managers; and

“(7) to encourage free collective bargaining by establishing continuing mechanisms for communication between employers and their employees through Federal assistance to the formation and operation of labor management committees.”

Section 6(e) of Pub. L. 95–524 provided that: “Nothing in this section or the amendments made by this section [enacting this section, amending sections 173 and 186 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section] shall affect the terms and conditions of any collective bargaining agreement whether in effect prior to or entered into after the date of enactment of this section [Oct. 27, 1978].”

This section is referred to in section 173 of this title.

Whenever in the opinion of the President of the United States, a threatened or actual strike or lockout affecting an entire industry or a substantial part thereof engaged in trade, commerce, transportation, transmission, or communication among the several States or with foreign nations, or engaged in the production of goods for commerce, will, if permitted to occur or to continue, imperil the national health or safety, he may appoint a board of inquiry to inquire into the issues involved in the dispute and to make a written report to him within such time as he shall prescribe. Such report shall include a statement of the facts with respect to the dispute, including each party's statement of its position but shall not contain any recommendations. The President shall file a copy of such report with the Service and shall make its contents available to the public.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §206, 61 Stat. 155.)

Ex. Ord. No. 11621, Oct. 4, 1971, 36 F.R. 19435, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 11622, Oct. 5, 1971, 36 F.R. 19491, which created a Board of Inquiry to inquire into issues involved in certain labor disputes, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12553, Feb. 25, 1986, 51 F.R. 7237.

A board of inquiry shall be composed of a chairman and such other members as the President shall determine, and shall have power to sit and act in any place within the United States and to conduct such hearings either in public or in private, as it may deem necessary or proper, to ascertain the facts with respect to the causes and circumstances of the dispute.

Members of a board of inquiry shall receive compensation at the rate of $50 for each day actually spent by them in the work of the board, together with necessary travel and subsistence expenses.

For the purpose of any hearing or inquiry conducted by any board appointed under this title, the provisions of sections 49 and 50 of title 15 (relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, papers, and documents) are made applicable to the powers and duties of such board.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §207, 61 Stat. 155.)

Upon receiving a report from a board of inquiry the President may direct the Attorney General to petition any district court of the United States having jurisdiction of the parties to enjoin such strike or lock-out or the continuing thereof, and if the court finds that such threatened or actual strike or lock-out—

(i) affects an entire industry or a substantial part thereof engaged in trade, commerce, transportation, transmission, or communication among the several States or with foreign nations, or engaged in the production of goods for commerce; and

(ii) if permitted to occur or to continue, will imperil the national health or safety, it shall have jurisdiction to enjoin any such strike or lockout, or the continuing thereof, and to make such other orders as may be appropriate.

In any case, the provisions of chapter 6 of this title shall not be applicable.

The order or orders of the court shall be subject to review by the appropriate United States court of appeals and by the Supreme Court upon writ of certiorari or certification as provided in section 1254 of title 28.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §208, 61 Stat. 155; June 25, 1948, ch. 646, §32(a), 62 Stat. 991; May 24, 1949, ch. 139, §127, 63 Stat. 107.)

Chapter 6 (§101 et seq.) of this title, referred to in subsec. (b), is a reference to act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, 47 Stat. 70, popularly known as the Norris-LaGuardia Act.

In subsec. (c), “court of appeals” substituted for “circuit court of appeals” on authority of act June 25, 1948, as amended by act May 24, 1949. The words “United States” immediately preceding “Court of appeals” were inserted on authority of section 43 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

In subsec. (c), “section 1254 of title 28” substituted for “sections 239 and 240 of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S.C. title 28, secs. 346 and 347)” on authority of act June 25, 1948, ch. 646, 62 Stat. 869, section 1 of which enacted Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in section 179 of this title.

Whenever a district court has issued an order under section 178 of this title enjoining acts or practices which imperil or threaten to imperil the national health or safety, it shall be the duty of the parties to the labor dispute giving rise to such order to make every effort to adjust and settle their differences, with the assistance of the Service created by this chapter. Neither party shall be under any duty to accept, in whole or in part, any proposal of settlement made by the Service.

Upon the issuance of such order, the President shall reconvene the board of inquiry which has previously reported with respect to the dispute. At the end of a sixty-day period (unless the dispute has been settled by that time), the board of inquiry shall report to the President the current position of the parties and the efforts which have been made for settlement, and shall include a statement by each party of its position and a statement of the employer's last offer of settlement. The President shall make such report available to the public. The National Labor Relations Board, within the succeeding fifteen days, shall take a secret ballot of the employees of each employer involved in the dispute on the question of whether they wish to accept the final offer of settlement made by their employer as stated by him and shall certify the results thereof to the Attorney General within five days thereafter.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §209, 61 Stat. 155.)

Upon the certification of the results of such ballot or upon a settlement being reached, whichever happens sooner, the Attorney General shall move the court to discharge the injunction, which motion shall then be granted and the injunction discharged. When such motion is granted, the President shall submit to the Congress a full and comprehensive report of the proceedings, including the findings of the board of inquiry and the ballot taken by the National Labor Relations Board, together with such recommendations as he may see fit to make for consideration and appropriate action.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §210, 61 Stat. 156.)

(a) For the guidance and information of interested representatives of employers, employees, and the general public, the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor shall maintain a file of copies of all available collective bargaining agreements and other available agreements and actions thereunder settling or adjusting labor disputes. Such file shall be open to inspection under appropriate conditions prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, except that no specific information submitted in confidence shall be disclosed.

(b) The Bureau of Labor Statistics in the Department of labor is authorized to furnish upon request of the Service, or employers, employees, or their representatives, all available data and factual information which may aid in the settlement of any labor dispute, except that no specific information submitted in confidence shall be disclosed.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §211, 61 Stat. 156.)

The provisions of this subchapter shall not be applicable with respect to any matter which is subject to the provisions of the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], as amended from time to time.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §212, 61 Stat. 156.)

The Railway Labor Act, as amended, referred to in text, is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

If, in the opinion of the Director of the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service, a threatened or actual strike or lockout affecting a health care institution will, if permitted to occur or to continue, substantially interrupt the delivery of health care in the locality concerned, the Director may further assist in the resolution of the impasse by establishing within 30 days after the notice to the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service under clause (A) of the last sentence of section 158(d) of this title (which is required by clause (3) of such section 158(d) of this title), or within 10 days after the notice under clause (B), an impartial Board of Inquiry to investigate the issues involved in the dispute and to make a written report thereon to the parties within fifteen (15) days after the establishment of such a Board. The written report shall contain the findings of fact together with the Board's recommendations for settling the dispute, with the objective of achieving a prompt, peaceful and just settlement of the dispute. Each such Board shall be composed of such number of individuals as the Director may deem desirable. No member appointed under this section shall have any interest or involvement in the health care institutions or the employee organizations involved in the dispute.

(1) Members of any board established under this section who are otherwise employed by the Federal Government shall serve without compensation but shall be reimbursed for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred by them in carrying out its duties under this section.

(2) Members of any board established under this section who are not subject to paragraph (1) shall receive compensation at a rate prescribed by the Director but not to exceed the daily rate prescribed for GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332 of title 5, including travel for each day they are engaged in the performance of their duties under this section and shall be entitled to reimbursement for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred by them in carrying out their duties under this section.

After the establishment of a board under subsection (a) of this section and for 15 days after any such board has issued its report, no change in the status quo in effect prior to the expiration of the contract in the case of negotiations for a contract renewal, or in effect prior to the time of the impasse in the case of an initial beginning negotiation, except by agreement, shall be made by the parties to the controversy.

There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this section.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §213, as added Pub. L. 93–360, §2, July 26, 1974, 88 Stat. 396.)

Section effective on thirtieth day after July 26, 1974, see section 4 of Pub. L. 93–360, set out as a note under section 169 of this title.

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

Suits for violation of contracts between an employer and a labor organization representing employees in an industry affecting commerce as defined in this chapter, or between any such labor organizations, may be brought in any district court of the United States having jurisdiction of the parties, without respect to the amount in controversy or without regard to the citizenship of the parties.

Any labor organization which represents employees in an industry affecting commerce as defined in this chapter and any employer whose activities affect commerce as defined in this chapter shall be bound by the acts of its agents. Any such labor organization may sue or be sued as an entity and in behalf of the employees whom it represents in the courts of the United States. Any money judgment against a labor organization in a district court of the United States shall be enforceable only against the organization as an entity and against its assets, and shall not be enforceable against any individual member or his assets.

For the purposes of actions and proceedings by or against labor organizations in the district courts of the United States, district courts shall be deemed to have jurisdiction of a labor organization (1) in the district in which such organization maintains its principal office, or (2) in any district in which its duly authorized officers or agents are engaged in representing or acting for employee members.

The service of summons, subpena, or other legal process of any court of the United States upon an officer or agent of a labor organization, in his capacity as such, shall constitute service upon the labor organization.

For the purposes of this section, in determining whether any person is acting as an “agent” of another person so as to make such other person responsible for his acts, the question of whether the specific acts performed were actually authorized or subsequently ratified shall not be controlling.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title III, §301, 61 Stat. 156.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b), was in the original “this Act” meaning act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, known as the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, which is classified principally to this subchapter and subchapters III (§171 et seq.) and IV (§185 et seq.) of this chapter. For complete classification of this act to the Code, see Tables.

This section is referred to in section 187 of this title; title 42 section 2297h–8.

It shall be unlawful for any employer or association of employers or any person who acts as a labor relations expert, adviser, or consultant to an employer or who acts in the interest of an employer to pay, lend, or deliver, or agree to pay, lend, or deliver, any money or other thing of value—

(1) to any representative of any of his employees who are employed in an industry affecting commerce; or

(2) to any labor organization, or any officer or employee thereof, which represents, seeks to represent, or would admit to membership, any of the employees of such employer who are employed in an industry affecting commerce; or

(3) to any employee or group or committee of employees of such employer employed in an industry affecting commerce in excess of their normal compensation for the purpose of causing such employee or group or committee directly or indirectly to influence any other employees in the exercise of the right to organize and bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing; or

(4) to any officer or employee of a labor organization engaged in an industry affecting commerce with intent to influence him in respect to any of his actions, decisions, or duties as a representative of employees or as such officer or employee of such labor organization.

(1) It shall be unlawful for any person to request, demand, receive, or accept, or agree to receive or accept, any payment, loan, or delivery of any money or other thing of value prohibited by subsection (a) of this section.

(2) It shall be unlawful for any labor organization, or for any person acting as an officer, agent, representative, or employee of such labor organization, to demand or accept from the operator of any motor vehicle (as defined in section 13102 of title 49) employed in the transportation of property in commerce, or the employer of any such operator, any money or other thing of value payable to such organization or to an officer, agent, representative or employee thereof as a fee or charge for the unloading, or in connection with the unloading, of the cargo of such vehicle: *Provided*, That nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to make unlawful any payment by an employer to any of his employees as compensation for their services as employees.

The provisions of this section shall not be applicable (1) in respect to any money or other thing of value payable by an employer to any of his employees whose established duties include acting openly for such employer in matters of labor relations or personnel administration or to any representative of his employees, or to any officer or employee of a labor organization, who is also an employee or former employee of such employer, as compensation for, or by reason of, his service as an employee of such employer; (2) with respect to the payment or delivery of any money or other thing of value in satisfaction of a judgment of any court or a decision or award of an arbitrator or impartial chairman or in compromise, adjustment, settlement, or release of any claim, complaint, grievance, or dispute in the absence of fraud or duress; (3) with respect to the sale or purchase of an article or commodity at the prevailing market price in the regular course of business; (4) with respect to money deducted from the wages of employees in payment of membership dues in a labor organization: *Provided*, That the employer has received from each employee, on whose account such deductions are made, a written assignment which shall not be irrevocable for a period of more than one year, or beyond the termination date of the applicable collective agreement, whichever occurs sooner; (5) with respect to money or other thing of value paid to a trust fund established by such representative, for the sole and exclusive benefit of the employees of such employer, and their families and dependents (or of such employees, families, and dependents jointly with the employees of other employers making similar payments, and their families and dependents): *Provided*, That (A) such payments are held in trust for the purpose of paying, either from principal or income or both, for the benefit of employees, their families and dependents, for medical or hospital care, pensions on retirement or death of employees, compensation for injuries or illness resulting from occupational activity or insurance to provide any of the foregoing, or unemployment benefits or life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, or accident insurance; (B) the detailed basis on which such payments are to be made is specified in a written agreement with the employer, and employees and employers are equally represented in the administration of such fund, together with such neutral persons as the representatives of the employers and the representatives of employees may agree upon and in the event the employer and employee groups deadlock on the administration of such fund and there are no neutral persons empowered to break such deadlock, such agreement provides that the two groups shall agree on an impartial umpire to decide such dispute, or in event of their failure to agree within a reasonable length of time, an impartial umpire to decide such dispute shall, on petition of either group, be appointed by the district court of the United States for the district where the trust fund has its principal office, and shall also contain provisions for an annual audit of the trust fund, a statement of the results of which shall be available for inspection by interested persons at the principal office of the trust fund and at such other places as may be designated in such written agreement; and (C) such payments as are intended to be used for the purpose of providing pensions or annuities for employees are made to a separate trust which provides that the funds held therein cannot be used for any purpose other than paying such pensions or annuities; (6) with respect to money or other thing of value paid by any employer to a trust fund established by such representative for the purpose of pooled vacation, holiday, severance or similar benefits, or defraying costs of apprenticeship or other training programs: *Provided*, That the requirements of clause (B) of the proviso to clause (5) of this subsection shall apply to such trust funds; (7) with respect to money or other thing of value paid by any employer to a pooled or individual trust fund established by such representative for the purpose of (A) scholarships for the benefit of employees, their families, and dependents for study at educational institutions, (B) child care centers for preschool and school age dependents of employees, or (C) financial assistance for employee housing: *Provided*, That no labor organization or employer shall be required to bargain on the establishment of any such trust fund, and refusal to do so shall not constitute an unfair labor practice: *Provided further*, That the requirements of clause (B) of the proviso to clause (5) of this subsection shall apply to such trust funds; (8) with respect to money or any other thing of value paid by any employer to a trust fund established by such representative for the purpose of defraying the costs of legal services for employees, their families, and dependents for counsel or plan of their choice: *Provided*, That the requirements of clause (B) of the proviso to clause (5) of this subsection shall apply to such trust funds: *Provided further*, That no such legal services shall be furnished: (A) to initiate any proceeding directed (i) against any such employer or its officers or agents except in workman's compensation cases, or (ii) against such labor organization, or its parent or subordinate bodies, or their officers or agents, or (iii) against any other employer or labor organization, or their officers or agents, in any matter arising under subchapter II of this chapter or this chapter; and (B) in any proceeding where a labor organization would be prohibited from defraying the costs of legal services by the provisions of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 [29 U.S.C. 401 et seq.]; or (9) with respect to money or other things of value paid by an employer to a plant, area or industrywide labor management committee established for one or more of the purposes set forth in section 5(b) of the Labor Management Cooperation Act of 1978.

(1) Any person who participates in a transaction involving a payment, loan, or delivery of money or other thing of value to a labor organization in payment of membership dues or to a joint labor-management trust fund as defined by clause (B) of the proviso to clause (5) of subsection (c) of this section or to a plant, area, or industry-wide labor-management committee that is received and used by such labor organization, trust fund, or committee, which transaction does not satisfy all the applicable requirements of subsections (c)(4) through (c)(9) of this section, and willfully and with intent to benefit himself or to benefit other persons he knows are not permitted to receive a payment, loan, money, or other thing of value under subsections (c)(4) through (c)(9) violates this subsection, shall, upon conviction thereof, be guilty of a felony and be subject to a fine of not more than $15,000, or imprisoned for not more than five years, or both; but if the value of the amount of money or thing of value involved in any violation of the provisions of this section does not exceed $1,000, such person shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and be subject to a fine of not more than $10,000, or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(2) Except for violations involving transactions covered by subsection (d)(1) of this section, any person who willfully violates this section shall, upon conviction thereof, be guilty of a felony and be subject to a fine of not more than $15,000, or imprisoned for not more than five years, or both; but if the value of the amount of money or thing of value involved in any violation of the provisions of this section does not exceed $1,000, such person shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and be subject to a fine of not more than $10,000, or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

The district courts of the United States and the United States courts of the Territories and possessions shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown, and subject to the provisions of section 381 of title 28 (relating to notice to opposite party) to restrain violations of this section, without regard to the provisions of section 17 of title 15 and section 52 of this title, and the provisions of chapter 6 of this title.

This section shall not apply to any contract in force on June 23, 1947, until the expiration of such contract, or until July 1, 1948, whichever first occurs.

Compliance with the restrictions contained in subsection (c)(5)(B) of this section upon contributions to trust funds, otherwise lawful, shall not be applicable to contributions to such trust funds established by collective agreement prior to January 1, 1946, nor shall subsection (c)(5)(A) of this section be construed as prohibiting contributions to such trust funds if prior to January 1, 1947, such funds contained provisions for pooled vacation benefits.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title III, §302, 61 Stat. 157; Pub. L. 86–257, title V, §505, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 537; Pub. L. 91–86, Oct. 14, 1969, 83 Stat. 133; Pub. L. 93–95, Aug. 15, 1973, 87 Stat. 314; Pub. L. 95–524, §6(d), Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2021; Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §801, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2131; Pub. L. 101–273, §1, Apr. 18, 1990, 104 Stat. 138; Pub. L. 104–88, title III, §337, Dec. 29, 1995, 109 Stat. 954.)

The Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, referred to in subsec. (c)(8), is Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 11 (§401 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title and Tables.

Section 5(b) of the Labor Management Cooperation Act of 1978, referred to in subsec. (c)(9), probably means section 6(b) of Pub. L. 95–524, which is set out as a note under section 175a of this title.

Section 381 of title 28, referred to in subsec. (e), was omitted from the revision of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure, by act June 25, 1948, ch. 646, 62 Stat. 869. See rule 65 of Federal Rules of Civil Procedure set out in the Appendix to Title 28.

Chapter 6 (§101 et seq.) of this title, referred to in subsec. (e), is a reference to act Mar. 23, 1932, ch. 90, 47 Stat. 70, popularly known as the Norris-LaGuardia Act.

1995—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 104–88 substituted “(as defined in section 13102 of title 49)” for “(as defined in part II of the Interstate Commerce Act)”.

1990—Subsec. (c)(7)(C). Pub. L. 101–273 added subcl. (C).

1984—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–473, in amending subsec. (d) generally, added par. (1), designated existing provisions as par. (2), inserted reference to par. (1), and inserted provisions relating to commission of a felony.

1978—Subsec. (c)(9). Pub. L. 95–524 added cl. (9).

1973—Subsec. (c)(8). Pub. L. 93–95 added cl. (8).

1969—Subsec. (c)(7). Pub. L. 91–86 added cl. (7).

1959—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 86–257 amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment subsec. (a) read as follows: “It shall be unlawful for any employer to pay or deliver, or to agree to pay or deliver, any money or other thing of value to any representative of any of his employees who are employed in an industry affecting commerce.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 86–257 amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment subsec. (b) read as follows: “It shall be unlawful for any representative of any employees who are employed in an industry affecting commerce to receive or accept, or to agree to receive or accept, from the employer of such employees any money or other thing of value.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 86–257 substituted “in respect to any money or other thing of value payable by an employer to any of his employees whose established duties include acting openly for such employer in matters of labor relations or personnel administration or to any representative of his employees, or to any officer or employee of a labor organization, who is also an employee or former employee of such employer, as compensation for, or by reason of, his service as an employee of such employer” for “with respect to any money or other thing of value payable by an employer to any representative who is an employee or former employee of such employer, as compensation for, or by reason of, his services as an employee of such employer” in cl. (1), and added cl. (6).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–88 effective Jan. 1, 1996, see section 2 of Pub. L. 104–88, set out as an Effective Date note under section 701 of Title 49, Transportation.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–524 not to affect terms and conditions of any collective bargaining agreement whether in effect prior to or entered into after Oct. 27, 1978, see section 6(e) of Pub. L. 95–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 175a of this title.

Wire or oral communications, authorization for interception, to provide evidence of violations of this section dealing with restrictions on payments and loans to labor organizations, see section 2516 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 432, 433, 523, 1002, 1111 of this title; title 18 section 2516; title 26 sections 9702, 9712; title 33 section 917.

(a) It shall be unlawful, for the purpose of this section only, in an industry or activity affecting commerce, for any labor organization to engage in any activity or conduct defined as an unfair labor practice in section 158(b)(4) of this title.

(b) Whoever shall be injured in his business or property by reason or 1 any violation of subsection (a) of this section may sue therefor in any district court of the United States subject to the limitations and provisions of section 185 of this title without respect to the amount in controversy, or in any other court having jurisdiction of the parties, and shall recover the damages by him sustained and the cost of the suit.

(June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title III, §303, 61 Stat. 158; Pub. L. 86–257, title VII, §704(e), Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 545.)

1959—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 86–257 struck out provisions which specified particular practices that were unlawful, and inserted reference to practices defined in section 158(b)(4) of this title, which section defines the unfair labor practices formerly enumerated in this subsection.

1 So in original. Probably should be “of”.

Section, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title III, §305, 61 Stat. 160, forbade striking by Government employees, required discharge of striking employee and forfeiture of his civil-service status, and made him ineligible for employment for three years. See sections 3333 and 7311 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and section 1918 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Section 191, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §401, 61 Stat. 160, related to establishment and composition of Joint Committee on Labor-Management Relations.

Section 192, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §402, 61 Stat. 160, related to a study by committee of the entire field of labor-management relations.

Section 193, acts June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §403, 61 Stat. 160; Aug. 10, 1948, ch. 833, 62 Stat. 1286, related to a final report to Congress to be submitted no later than March 1, 1949.

Section 194, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §404, 61 Stat. 161, related to employment and compensation of experts and other personnel.

Section 195, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §405, 61 Stat. 161, related to hearings, calling of witnesses, production of evidence.

Section 196, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §406, 61 Stat. 161, related to reimbursement of committee members for expenses.

Section 197, act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title IV, §407, 61 Stat. 161, related to appropriation of funds.


This chapter is referred to in sections 251 to 262, 795, 1802 of this title; title 2 sections 60k, 1302, 1313, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 413; title 5 section 2105; title 7 sections 2015, 2026, 2029; title 15 sections 1014, 3152; title 38 section 1718; title 41 section 355; title 42 sections 1437t, 3056, 5044, 8009, 8011, 12655*l.*

This chapter may be cited as the “Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938”.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §1, 52 Stat. 1060.)

Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2104(a), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1928, provided that: “This section [amending section 206 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Minimum Wage Increase Act of 1996’.”

Pub. L. 104–26, §1, Sept. 6, 1995, 109 Stat. 264, provided that: “This Act [amending section 207 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 207 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Court Reporter Fair Labor Amendments of 1995’.”

Pub. L. 101–157, §1(a), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 938, provided that: “This Act [enacting section 60k of Title 2, The Congress, amending sections 203, 205 to 208, 213, 214, and 216 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 203 and 206 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1989’.”

Pub. L. 99–150, §1(a), Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 787, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 203, 207, and 211 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 203, 207, 215, and 216 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1985’.”

Pub. L. 95–151, §1(a), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1245, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 203, 206, 208, 213, 214, and 216 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 203, 204, and 213 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1977’.”

Pub. L. 93–259, §1(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 55, provided that: “This Act [enacting section 633a of this title, amending sections 202 to 208, 210, 212 to 214, 216, 255, 260, 630, and 634 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 202, 206, 207, 213, and 621 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974’.”

Pub. L. 89–601, §1, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 830, provided: “That this Act [amending sections 203, 206, 207, 213, 214, 216, 218, and 255 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 207 and 214 of this title, section 1082 of former Title 5, Executive Departments and Government Officers and Employees, and section 2000e–14 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966’.”

Pub. L. 88–38, §1, June 10, 1963, 77 Stat. 56, provided: “That this Act [amending section 206 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under section 206 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Equal Pay Act of 1963’.”

Pub. L. 87–30, §1, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 65, provided: “That this Act [amending sections 203 to 208, 212 to 214, 216, and 217 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 213 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1961’.”

Act Aug. 8, 1956, ch. 1035, §1, 70 Stat. 1118, provided: “That this Act [amending sections 206, 213, and 216 of this title] may be cited as the ‘American Samoa Labor Standards Amendments of 1956’.”

Act Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §1, 69 Stat. 711, provided: “That this Act [amending sections 204–206, 208, and 210 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 204, 206, and 208 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1955’.”

Act Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §1, 63 Stat. 910, provided: “That this Act [enacting section 216b of this title, amending sections 202 to 208, 211 to 216, and 217 of this title, and repealing section 216a of this title] may be cited as the ‘Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1949’.”

(a) The Congress finds that the existence, in industries engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, of labor conditions detrimental to the maintenance of the minimum standard of living necessary for health, efficiency, and general well-being of workers (1) causes commerce and the channels and instrumentalities of commerce to be used to spread and perpetuate such labor conditions among the workers of the several States; (2) burdens commerce and the free flow of goods in commerce; (3) constitutes an unfair method of competition in commerce; (4) leads to labor disputes burdening and obstructing commerce and the free flow of goods in commerce; and (5) interferes with the orderly and fair marketing of goods in commerce. That Congress further finds that the employment of persons in domestic service in households affects commerce.

(b) It is declared to be the policy of this chapter, through the exercise by Congress of its power to regulate commerce among the several States and with foreign nations, to correct and as rapidly as practicable to eliminate the conditions above referred to in such industries without substantially curtailing employment or earning power.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §2, 52 Stat. 1060; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §2, 63 Stat. 910; Pub. L. 93–259, §7(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 62.)

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–259 inserted finding of Congress that employment of persons in domestic service in households affects commerce.

1949—Subsec. (b). Act Oct. 26, 1949, inserted reference to regulation of commerce with foreign nations.

Section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that: “Except as otherwise specifically provided, the amendments made by this Act [see Short Title of 1974 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title] shall take effect on May 1, 1974.”

Section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [enacting section 216b of this title, amending this section and sections 203 to 208, 211 to 216, and 217 of this title, and repealing section 216a of this title] shall take effect upon the expiration of ninety days from the date of its enactment [Oct. 26, 1947]; except that the amendment made by section 4 [amending section 204 of this title] shall take effect on the date of its enactment [Oct. 26, 1949].”

Section 29(b) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that: “Notwithstanding subsection (a) [set out as an Effective Date of 1974 Amendment note above], on and after the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 8, 1974] the Secretary of Labor is authorized to prescribe necessary rules, regulations, and orders with regard to the amendments made by this Act [see Short Title of 1974 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title].”

As used in this chapter—

(a) “Person” means an individual, partnership, association, corporation, business trust, legal representative, or any organized group of persons.

(b) “Commerce” means trade, commerce, transportation, transmission, or communication among the several States or between any State and any place outside thereof.

(c) “State” means any State of the United States or the District of Columbia or any Territory or possession of the United States.

(d) “Employer” includes any person acting directly or indirectly in the interest of an employer in relation to an employee and includes a public agency, but does not include any labor organization (other than when acting as an employer) or anyone acting in the capacity of officer or agent of such labor organization.

(e)(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (2), (3), and (4), the term “employee” means any individual employed by an employer.

(2) In the case of an individual employed by a public agency, such term means—

(A) any individual employed by the Government of the United States—

(i) as a civilian in the military departments (as defined in section 102 of title 5),

(ii) in any executive agency (as defined in section 105 of such title),

(iii) in any unit of the judicial branch of the Government which has positions in the competitive service,

(iv) in a nonappropriated fund instrumentality under the jurisdiction of the Armed Forces,

(v) in the Library of Congress, or

(vi) the 1 Government Printing Office;

(B) any individual employed by the United States Postal Service or the Postal Rate Commission; and

(C) any individual employed by a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency, other than such an individual—

(i) who is not subject to the civil service laws of the State, political subdivision, or agency which employes him; and

(ii) who—

(I) holds a public elective office of that State, political subdivision, or agency,

(II) is selected by the holder of such an office to be a member of his personal staff,

(III) is appointed by such an officeholder to serve on a policymaking level,

(IV) is an immediate adviser to such an officeholder with respect to the constitutional or legal powers of his office, or

(V) is an employee in the legislative branch or legislative body of that State, political subdivision, or agency and is not employed by the legislative library of such State, political subdivision, or agency.

(3) For purposes of subsection (u) of this section, such term does not include any individual employed by an employer engaged in agriculture if such individual is the parent, spouse, child, or other member of the employer's immediate family.

(4)(A) The term “employee” does not include any individual who volunteers to perform services for a public agency which is a State, a political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency, if—

(i) the individual receives no compensation or is paid expenses, reasonable benefits, or a nominal fee to perform the services for which the individual volunteered; and

(ii) such services are not the same type of services which the individual is employed to perform for such public agency.

(B) An employee of a public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency may volunteer to perform services for any other State, political subdivision, or interstate governmental agency, including a State, political subdivision or agency with which the employing State, political subdivision, or agency has a mutual aid agreement.

(f) “Agriculture” includes farming in all its branches and among other things includes the cultivation and tillage of the soil, dairying, the production, cultivation, growing, and harvesting of any agricultural or horticultural commodities (including commodities defined as agricultural commodities in section 1141j(g) of title 12), the raising of livestock, bees, fur-bearing animals, or poultry, and any practices (including any forestry or lumbering operations) performed by a farmer or on a farm as an incident to or in conjunction with such farming operations, including preparation for market, delivery to storage or to market or to carriers for transportation to market.

(g) “Employ” includes to suffer or permit to work.

(h) “Industry” means a trade, business, industry, or other activity, or branch or group thereof, in which individuals are gainfully employed.

(i) “Goods” means goods (including ships and marine equipment), wares, products, commodities, merchandise, or articles or subjects of commerce of any character, or any part or ingredient thereof, but does not include goods after their delivery into the actual physical possession of the ultimate consumer thereof other than a producer, manufacturer, or processor thereof.

(j) “Produced” means produced, manufactured, mined, handled, or in any other manner worked on in any State; and for the purposes of this chapter an employee shall be deemed to have been engaged in the production of goods if such employee was employed in producing, manufacturing, mining, handling, transporting, or in any other manner working on such goods, or in any closely related process or occupation directly essential to the production thereof, in any State,

(k) “Sale” or “sell” includes any sale, exchange, contract to sell, consignment for sale, shipment for sale, or other disposition.

(*l*) “Oppressive child labor” means a condition of employment under which (1) any employee under the age of sixteen years is employed by an employer (other than a parent or a person standing in place of a parent employing his own child or a child in his custody under the age of sixteen years in an occupation other than manufacturing or mining or an occupation found by the Secretary of Labor to be particularly hazardous for the employment of children between the ages of sixteen and eighteen years or detrimental to their health or well-being) in any occupation, or (2) any employee between the ages of sixteen and eighteen years is employed by an employer in any occupation which the Secretary of Labor shall find and by order declare to be particularly hazardous for the employment of children between such ages or detrimental to their health or well-being; but oppressive child labor shall not be deemed to exist by virtue of the employment in any occupation of any person with respect to whom the employer shall have on file an unexpired certificate issued and held pursuant to regulations of the Secretary of Labor certifying that such person is above the oppressive child-labor age. The Secretary of Labor shall provide by regulation or by order that the employment of employees between the ages of fourteen and sixteen years in occupations other than manufacturing and mining shall not be deemed to constitute oppressive child labor if and to the extent that the Secretary of Labor determines that such employment is confined to periods which will not interfere with their schooling and to conditions which will not interfere with their health and well-being.

(m) “Wage” paid to any employee includes the reasonable cost, as determined by the Administrator, to the employer of furnishing such employee with board, lodging, or other facilities, if such board, lodging or other facilities are customarily furnished by such employer to his employees: *Provided*, That the cost of board, lodging, or other facilities shall not be included as a part of the wage paid to any employee to the extent it is excluded therefrom under the terms of a bona fide collective-bargaining agreement applicable to the particular employee: *Provided further*, That the Secretary is authorized to determine the fair value of such board, lodging, or other facilities for defined classes of employees and in defined areas, based on average cost to the employer or to groups of employers similarly situated, or average value to groups of employees, or other appropriate measures of fair value. Such evaluations, where applicable and pertinent, shall be used in lieu of actual measure of cost in determining the wage paid to any employee. In determining the wage an employer is required to pay a tipped employee, the amount paid such employee by the employee's employer shall be an amount equal to—

(1) the cash wage paid such employee which for purposes of such determination shall be not less than the cash wage required to be paid such an employee on August 20, 1996; and

(2) an additional amount on account of the tips received by such employee which amount is equal to the difference between the wage specified in paragraph (1) and the wage in effect under section 206(a)(1) of this title.

The additional amount on account of tips may not exceed the value of the tips actually received by an employee. The preceding 2 sentences shall not apply with respect to any tipped employee unless such employee has been informed by the employer of the provisions of this subsection, and all tips received by such employee have been retained by the employee, except that this subsection shall not be construed to prohibit the pooling of tips among employees who customarily and regularly receive tips.

(n) “Resale” shall not include the sale of goods to be used in residential or farm building construction, repair, or maintenance: *Provided*, That the sale is recognized as a bona fide retail sale in the industry.

(*o*) Hours Worked.—In determining for the purposes of sections 206 and 207 of this title the hours for which an employee is employed, there shall be excluded any time spent in changing clothes or washing at the beginning or end of each workday which was excluded from measured working time during the week involved by the express terms of or by custom or practice under a bona fide collective-bargaining agreement applicable to the particular employee.

(p) “American vessel” includes any vessel which is documented or numbered under the laws of the United States.

(q) “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(r)(1) “Enterprise” means the related activities performed (either through unified operation or common control) by any person or persons for a common business purpose, and includes all such activities whether performed in one or more establishments or by one or more corporate or other organizational units including departments of an establishment operated through leasing arrangements, but shall not include the related activities performed for such enterprise by an independent contractor. Within the meaning of this subsection, a retail or service establishment which is under independent ownership shall not be deemed to be so operated or controlled as to be other than a separate and distinct enterprise by reason of any arrangement, which includes, but is not necessarily limited to, and agreement, (A) that it will sell, or sell only, certain goods specified by a particular manufacturer, distributor, or advertiser, or (B) that it will join with other such establishments in the same industry for the purpose of collective purchasing, or (C) that it will have the exclusive right to sell the goods or use the brand name of a manufacturer, distributor, or advertiser within a specified area, or by reason of the fact that it occupies premises leased to it by a person who also leases premises to other retail or service establishments.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the activities performed by any person or persons—

(A) in connection with the operation of a hospital, an institution primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, the mentally ill or defective who reside on the premises of such institution, a school for mentally or physically handicapped or gifted children, a preschool, elementary or secondary school, or an institution of higher education (regardless of whether or not such hospital, institution, or school is operated for profit or not for profit), or

(B) in connection with the operation of a street, suburban or interurban electric railway, or local trolley or motorbus carrier, if the rates and services of such railway or carrier are subject to regulation by a State or local agency (regardless of whether or not such railway or carrier is public or private or operated for profit or not for profit), or

(C) in connection with the activities of a public agency,

shall be deemed to be activities performed for a business purpose.

(s)(1) “Enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce” means an enterprise that—

(A)(i) has employees engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, or that has employees handling, selling, or otherwise working on goods or materials that have been moved in or produced for commerce by any person; and

(ii) is an enterprise whose annual gross volume of sales made or business done is not less than $500,000 (exclusive of excise taxes at the retail level that are separately stated);

(B) is engaged in the operation of a hospital, an institution primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, or the mentally ill or defective who reside on the premises of such institution, a school for mentally or physically handicapped or gifted children, a preschool, elementary or secondary school, or an institution of higher education (regardless of whether or not such hospital, institution, or school is public or private or operated for profit or not for profit); or

(C) is an activity of a public agency.

(2) Any establishment that has as its only regular employees the owner thereof or the parent, spouse, child, or other member of the immediate family of such owner shall not be considered to be an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or a part of such an enterprise. The sales of such an establishment shall not be included for the purpose of determining the annual gross volume of sales of any enterprise for the purpose of this subsection.

(t) “Tipped employee” means any employee engaged in an occupation in which he customarily and regularly receives more than $30 a month in tips.

(u) “Man-day” means any day during which an employee performs any agricultural labor for not less than one hour.

(v) “Elementary school” means a day or residential school which provides elementary education, as determined under State law.

(w) “Secondary school” means a day or residential school which provides secondary education, as determined under State law.

(x) “Public agency” means the Government of the United States; the government of a State or political subdivision thereof; any agency of the United States (including the United States Postal Service and Postal Rate Commission), a State, or a political subdivision of a State; or any interstate governmental agency.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §3, 52 Stat. 1060; 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1(b), eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §3, 63 Stat. 911; Pub. L. 87–30, §2, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 65; Pub. L. 89–601, title I, §§101–103, title II, §215(a), Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 830–832, 837; Pub. L. 92–318, title IX, §906(b)(2), (3), June 23, 1972, 86 Stat. 375; Pub. L. 93–259, §§6(a), 13(e), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 58, 64; Pub. L. 95–151, §§3(a), (b), 9(a)–(c), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1249, 1251; Pub. L. 99–150, §§4(a), 5, Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 790; Pub. L. 101–157, §§3(a), (d), 5, Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 938, 939, 941; Pub. L. 104–1, title II, §203(d), Jan. 23, 1995, 109 Stat. 10; Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2105(b), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1929.)

1996—Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 104–188 inserted “In determining the wage an employer is required to pay a tipped employee, the amount paid such employee by the employee's employer shall be an amount equal to—

“(1) the cash wage paid such employee which for purposes of such determination shall be not less than the cash wage required to be paid such an employee on August 20, 1996; and

“(2) an additional amount on account of the tips received by such employee which amount is equal to the difference between the wage specified in paragraph (1) and the wage in effect under section 206(a)(1) of this title.

The additional amount on account of tips may not exceed the value of the tips actually received by an employee.”, and struck out former penultimate sentence which read as follows: “In determining the wage of a tipped employee, the amount paid such employee by his employer shall be deemed to be increased on account of tips by an amount determined by the employer, but not by an amount in excess of (1) 45 percent of the applicable minimum wage rate during the year beginning April 1, 1990, and (2) 50 percent of the applicable minimum wage rate after March 31, 1991, except that the amount of the increase on account of tips determined by the employer may not exceed the value of tips actually received by the employee.”

Pub. L. 104–188 in last sentence substituted “preceding 2 sentences” for “previous sentence” and struck out “(1)” after “employee unless” and “(2)” after “subsection, and”.

1995—Subsec. (e)(2)(A). Pub. L. 104–1 struck out “legislative or” before “judicial branch” in cl. (iii) and added cl. (vi).

1989—Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 101–157, §5, substituted “in excess of (1) 45 percent of the applicable minimum wage rate during the year beginning April 1, 1990, and (2) 50 percent of the applicable minimum wage rate after March 31, 1991,” for “in excess of 40 per centum of the applicable minimum wage rate,”.

Subsec. (r). Pub. L. 101–157, §3(d), designated first sentence as par. (1), made a separate sentence out of the existing proviso and redesignated cls. (1), (2), and (3) as (A), (B), and (C), respectively, designated second sentence as par. (2), in par. (2) as so designated, redesignated existing pars. (1), (2), and (3) as subpars. (A), (B), and (C), respectively, and, in subpar. (A) as so redesignated, substituted “school is operated” for “school is public or private or operated”.

Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 101–157, §3(a), amended subsec. (s) generally, completely revising definition of “enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce”.

1985—Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 99–150, §4(a)(1), substituted “paragraphs (2), (3), and (4)” for “paragraphs (2) and (3)”.

Subsec. (e)(2)(C)(ii). Pub. L. 99–150, §5, struck out “or” at end of subcl. (III), struck out “who” in subcl. (IV) before “is an”, substituted “, or” for period at end of subcl. (IV), and added subcl. (V).

Subsec. (e)(4). Pub. L. 99–150, §4(a)(2), added par. (4).

1977—Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 95–151, §3(b), substituted “45 per centum” for “50 per centum”, effective Jan. 1, 1979, and “40 per centum” for “45 per centum”, effective Jan. 1, 1980.

Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 95–151, §9(a)–(c), in par. (1) inserted exception for enterprises comprised exclusively of retail or service establishments and described in par. (2), added par. (2), redesignated former pars. (2) to (5) as (3) to (6), respectively, and in text following par. (6), as so redesignated, inserted provisions relating to coverage of retail or service establishments subject to section 206(a)(1) of this title on June 30, 1978, and provisions relating to violations of such coverage requirements.

Subsec. (t). Pub. L. 95–151, §3(a), substituted “$30” for “$20”.

1974—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(1), redefined “employer” to include a public agency and struck out text which excluded from such term the United States or any State or political subdivision of a State (except with respect to employees of a State, or a political subdivision thereof, employed (1) in a hospital, institution, or school referred to in last sentence of subsec. (r) of this section, or (2) in the operation of a railway or carrier referred to in such sentence).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(2), in revising definition of “employee”, incorporated existing introductory text in provisions designated as par. (1), inserting exception provision; added par. (2); incorporated existing cl. (1) in provisions designated as par. (3); and struck out former cl. (2) excepting from “employee”, “any individual who is employed by an employer engaged in agriculture if such individual (A) is employed as a hand harvest laborer and is paid on a piece rate basis in an operation which has been, and is customarily and generally recognized as having been, paid on a piece rate basis in the region of employment, (B) commutes daily from his permanent residence to the farm on which he is so employed, and (C) has been engaged in agriculture less than thirteen weeks during the preceding calendar year”.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(3), substituted “other activity, or branch or group thereof” for “branch thereof, or group of industries”.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 93–259, §13(e), substituted in provision respecting wage of tipped employee “the amount of the increase on account of tips determined by the employer may not exceed the value of tips actually received by the employee” for “in the case of an employee who (either himself or acting through his representative) shows to the satisfaction of the Secretary that the actual amount of tips received by him was less than the amount determined by the employer as the amount by which the wage paid him was deemed to be increased under this sentence, the amount paid such employee by his employer shall be deemed to have been increased by such lesser amount” and inserted “The previous sentence shall not apply with respect to any tipped employee unless (1) such employee has been informed by the employer of the provisions of this subsection, and (2) all tips received by such employee have been retained by the employee, except that this subsection shall not be construed to prohibit the pooling of tips among employees who customarily and regularly receive tips.”

Subsec. (r)(3). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(4), added par. (3).

Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(5), in first sentence substituted preceding par. (1) “or employees handling, selling, or otherwise working on goods or materials” for “including employees handling, selling, or otherwise working on goods” and added par. (5), and inserted third sentence deeming employees of an enterprise which is a public agency to be employees engaged in commerce, or in production of goods for commerce, or employees handling, selling, or otherwise working on goods or materials that have been moved in or produced for commerce.

Subsec. (x). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(a)(6), added subsec. (x).

1972—Subsecs. (r)(1), (s)(4). Pub. L. 92–318, §906(b)(2), (3), inserted reference to a preschool.

1966—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 89–601, §102(b), expanded definition of employer to include a State or a political subdivision thereof with respect to employees in a hospital, institution, or school referred to in last sentence of subsec. (r) of this section, or in the operation of a railway or carrier referred to in such sentence.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 89–601, §103(a), excluded from definition of “employee,” when that term is used in definition of “man-day,” any agricultural employee who is the parent, spouse, child, or other member of his employer's immediate family and any agricultural hand harvest laborer, paid on a piece rate basis, who commutes daily from his permanent residence to the farm on which he is so employed, and who has been employed in agriculture less than 13 weeks during the preceding calendar year.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 89–601, §101(a), inserted provisions for determining the wage of a tipped employee.

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(a), struck out provision which directed that definition of “resale” was not applicable when “resale” was used in subsection (s)(1) of this section.

Subsec. (r). Pub. L. 89–601, §102(a), extended activities performed for a business purpose to include activities in the operation of hospitals, institutions for the sick, aged, or mentally ill or defective, schools for the handicapped, elementary and secondary schools, institutions of higher learning, or street, suburban, or interurban electric railway or local trolley or motorbus carriers if subject to regulation by a State or local agency regardless of whether public or private or whether operated for profit or not for profit.

Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 89–601, §102(c), removed gross annual business level tests of $1,000,000 for retail and service enterprises, street, suburban, or interurban electric railways or local trolley or motorbus carriers, and brought within the coverage of the gross annual business test all enterprises having employees engaged in commerce in the production of goods for commerce, including employees handling, selling, or otherwise working on goods that have been moved in or produced for commerce, lowered the minimum gross annual volume test for covered enterprises from $1,000,000 to $500,000 for the period from Feb. 1, 1967, through Jan. 31, 1969, and to $250,000 for the period after Jan. 31, 1969, retained the $250,000 annual gross volume test for coverage of gasoline service establishments, and expanded coverage to include laundering or cleaning services, construction or reconstruction activities, or operation of hospitals, certain institutions for the care of the sick, aged, or mentally ill, certain special schools, and institutions of higher learning regardless of annual gross volume.

Subsec. (t). Pub. L. 89–601, §101(b), added subsec. (t).

Subsec. (u). Pub. L. 89–601, §103(b), added subsec. (u).

Subsecs. (v), (w). Pub. L. 89–601, §102(d), added subsecs. (v) and (w).

1961—Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 87–30, §2(a), provided for exclusion from wages under a collective-bargaining agreement the cost of board, lodging, or other facilities and authorized the Secretary to determine the fair value of board, lodging, or other facilities for defined classes of employees in defined areas to be used in lieu of actual cost.

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 87–30, §2(b), inserted “, except as used in subsection (s)(1) of this section,”.

Subsecs. (p) to (s). Pub. L. 87–30, §2(c), added subsecs. (p) to (s).

1949—Subsec. (b). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §3(a), substituted “between” for “from” after “States or”, and “and” for “to” before “any place”.

Subsec. (j). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §3(b), inserted “closely related” before “process” and substituted “directly essential” for “necessary” after “occupation”.

Subsec. (*l*)(1). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §3(c), included parental employment of a child under 16 years of age in an occupation found by the Secretary of Labor to be hazardous for children between the ages of 16 and 18 years, in definition of oppressive child labor.

Subsecs. (n), (*o*). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §3(d), added subsecs. (n) and (*o*).

Section 3(e) of Pub. L. 101–157 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and section 213 of this title] shall become effective on April 1, 1990.”

Section 5 of Pub. L. 101–157 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Apr. 1, 1990.

Section 6 of Pub. L. 99–150 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section and sections 207 and 211 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 201, 207, 215, and 216 of this title] shall take effect April 15, 1986. The Secretary of Labor shall before such date promulgate such regulations as may be required to implement such amendments.”

Section 3(a) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Jan. 1, 1978.

Section 3(b)(1) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that the amendment made by that section, reducing the maximum percentage of the minimum wage used in determining tips as wages from 50 to 45 per centum, is effective Jan. 1, 1979.

Section 3(b)(2) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that the amendment made by that section, reducing the maximum percentage of the minimum wage used in determining tips as wages from 45 to 40 per centum, is effective Jan. 1, 1980.

Section 15(a), (b) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that:

“(a) Except as provided in sections 3, 14, and subsection (b) of this section, the amendments made by this Act [amending sections 206, 208, 213, and 216 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 204 of this title] shall take effect January 1, 1978.

“(b) The amendments made by sections 8, 9, 11, 12, and 13 [amending this section and sections 213 and 214 of this title] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 1, 1977].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601 provided in part that: “Except as otherwise provided in this Act, the amendments made by this Act [amending this section and sections 206, 207, 213, 214, 216, 218, and 255 of this title] shall take effect on February 1, 1967.”

Section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section and sections 204 to 208, 212 to 214, 216, and 217 of this title] shall take effect upon the expiration of one hundred and twenty days after the date of its enactment [May 5, 1961], except as otherwise provided in such amendments and except that the authority to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders with regard to amendments made by this Act, under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 and amendments thereto [this chapter], including amendments made by this Act, may be exercised by the Secretary on and after the date of enactment of this Act [May 5, 1961].”

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

In subsec. (*l*), “Secretary of Labor” substituted for “Chief of the Children's Bureau in the Department of Labor” and for “Chief of the Children's Bureau” pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1946, §1(b), eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred functions of Children's Bureau and its Chief under sections 201 to 216 and 217 to 219 of this title to Secretary of Labor to be performed under his direction and control by such officers and employees of Department of Labor as he designates.

Section 3(b) of Pub. L. 101–157 provided that:

“(1)

“(A) pay its employees not less than the minimum wage in effect under such section on March 31, 1990;

“(B) pay its employees in accordance with section 7 of such Act (29 U.S.C. 207); and

“(C) remain subject to section 12 of such Act (29 U.S.C. 212).

“(2)

Section 4(b) of Pub. L. 99–150 provided that: “Not later than March 15, 1986, the Secretary of Labor shall issue regulations to carry out paragraph (4) of section 3(e) (as amended by subsection (a) of this section) [29 U.S.C. 203(e)(4)].”

Section 4(c) of Pub. L. 99–150 provided that: “If, before April 15, 1986, the practice of a public agency was to treat certain individuals as volunteers, such individuals shall until April 15, 1986, be considered, for purposes of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [this chapter], as volunteers and not as employees. No public agency which is a State, a political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency shall be liable for a violation of section 6 [29 U.S.C. 206] occurring before April 15, 1986, with respect to services deemed by that agency to have been performed for it by an individual on a voluntary basis.”

Pub. L. 95–485, title VIII, §819, Oct. 20, 1978, 92 Stat. 1626, provided that: “Notwithstanding any other provision of law, an individual who performs bagger or carryout service for patrons of a commissary of a military department may not be considered to be an employee for purposes of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [this chapter] by virtue of such service if the sole compensation of such individual for such service is derived from tips.”

Section 15(c) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that: “On and after the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 1, 1977], the Secretary of Labor shall take such administrative action as may be necessary for the implementation of the amendments made by this Act [See Short Title of 1977 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title].”

Section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601 provided in part that: “On and after the date of the enactment of this Act [Sept. 23, 1966] the Secretary is authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders with regard to the amendments made by this Act [see Short Title of 1966 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title].”

Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947, sections 251 to 262 of this title, as affected by subsec. (*o*), see section 216 note of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1802, 2001, 2611 of this title; title 8 sections 1101, 1186; title 26 section 45B; title 49 sections 3101, 31501.

1 So in original. Probably should be preceded by “in”.

There is created in the Department of Labor a Wage and Hour Division which shall be under the direction of an Administrator, to be known as the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division (in this chapter referred to as the “Administrator”). The Administrator shall be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate.

The Administrator may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such employees as he deems necessary to carry out his functions and duties under this chapter and shall fix their compensation in accordance with chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5. The Administrator may establish and utilize such regional, local, or other agencies, and utilize such voluntary and uncompensated services, as may from time to time be needed. Attorneys appointed under this section may appear for and represent the Administrator in any litigation, but all such litigation shall be subject to the direction and control of the Attorney General. In the appointment, selection, classification, and promotion of officers and employees of the Administrator, no political test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on the basis of merit and efficiency.

The principal office of the Administrator shall be in the District of Columbia, but he or his duly authorized representative may exercise any or all of his powers in any place.

(1) The Secretary shall submit biennially in January a report to the Congress covering his activities for the preceding two years and including such information, data, and recommendations for further legislation in connection with the matters covered by this chapter as he may find advisable. Such report shall contain an evaluation and appraisal by the Secretary of the minimum wages and overtime coverage established by this chapter, together with his recommendations to the Congress. In making such evaluation and appraisal, the Secretary shall take into consideration any changes which may have occurred in the cost of living and in productivity and the level of wages in manufacturing, the ability of employers to absorb wage increases, and such other factors as he may deem pertinent. Such report shall also include a summary of the special certificates issued under section 214(b) of this title.

(2) The Secretary shall conduct studies on the justification or lack thereof for each of the special exemptions set forth in section 213 of this title, and the extent to which such exemptions apply to employees of establishments described in subsection (g) of such section and the economic effects of the application of such exemptions to such employees. The Secretary shall submit a report of his findings and recommendations to the Congress with respect to the studies conducted under this paragraph not later than January 1, 1976.

(3) The Secretary shall conduct a continuing study on means to prevent curtailment of employment opportunities for manpower groups which have had historically high incidences of unemployment (such as disadvantaged minorities, youth, elderly, and such other groups as the Secretary may designate). The first report of the results of such study shall be transmitted to the Congress not later than one year after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974. Subsequent reports on such study shall be transmitted to the Congress at two-year intervals after such effective date. Each such report shall include suggestions respecting the Secretary's authority under section 214 of this title.

Whenever the Secretary has reason to believe that in any industry under this chapter the competition of foreign producers in United States markets or in markets abroad, or both, has resulted, or is likely to result, in increased unemployment in the United States, he shall undertake an investigation to gain full information with respect to the matter. If he determines such increased unemployment has in fact resulted, or is in fact likely to result, from such competition, he shall make a full and complete report of his findings and determinations to the President and to the Congress: *Provided*, That he may also include in such report information on the increased employment resulting from additional exports in any industry under this chapter as he may determine to be pertinent to such report.

The Secretary is authorized to enter into an agreement with the Librarian of Congress with respect to individuals employed in the Library of Congress to provide for the carrying out of the Secretary's functions under this chapter with respect to such individuals. Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, or any other law, the Director of the Office of Personnel Management is authorized to administer the provisions of this chapter with respect to any individual employed by the United States (other than an individual employed in the Library of Congress, United States Postal Service, Postal Rate Commission, or the Tennessee Valley Authority). Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to affect the right of an employee to bring an action for unpaid minimum wages, or unpaid overtime compensation, and liquidated damages under section 216(b) of this title.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §4, 52 Stat. 1061; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §4, 63 Stat. 911; Oct. 28, 1949, ch. 782, title XI, §1106(a), 63 Stat. 972; Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §2, 69 Stat. 711; Pub. L. 87–30, §3, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 66; Pub. L. 93–259, §§6(b), 24(c), 27, Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 60, 72, 73; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §102, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 36037, 92 Stat. 3783; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1102(a), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 722.)

The civil service laws, referred to in subsec. (b), are set forth in Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. See, particularly, section 3301 et seq. of Title 5.

The effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), is the effective date of Pub. L. 93–259, which is May 1, 1974, except as otherwise specifically provided, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as an Effective Date of 1974 Amendment note under section 202 of this title.

In subsec. (a), provisions that prescribed the compensation of the Administrator were omitted to conform to the provisions of the Executive Schedule. See section 5316 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In subsec. (b), “chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5” substituted for “the Classification Act of 1949, as amended” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5.

1995—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 104–66 in first sentence substituted “biennially” and “preceding two years” for “annually” and “preceding year”, respectively.

1974—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 93–259, §§24(c), 27(1), (2), inserted provision at end of subsec. (d) requiring the report to Congress to include a summary of the special certificates issued under section 214(b) of this title, designated subsec. (d) provisions as subsec. (d)(1), and required the report to contain an evaluation and appraisal of overtime coverage established by this chapter, respectively.

Subsec. (d)(2), (3). Pub. L. 93–259, §27(3), added pars. (2) and (3).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(b), added subsec. (f).

1961—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 87–30 added subsec. (e).

1955—Subsec. (d). Act Aug. 12, 1955, required an evaluation and appraisal by the Secretary of the minimum wages, together with his recommendations to Congress, to be included in the annual report.

1949—Subsec. (b). Act Oct. 28, 1949, substituted “Classification Act of 1949” for “Classification Act of 1923”.

Subsec. (a). Act Oct. 26, 1949, increased compensation of Administrator to $15,000.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Acts Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §4, 63 Stat. 911, and Oct. 28, 1949, ch. 782, cited as a credit to this section, were repealed (subject to a savings clause) by Pub. L. 89–554, Sept. 6, 1966, §8, 80 Stat. 632, 655.

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by subsecs. (d)(1) and (f) of this section in Secretary of Labor and Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

“Director of the Office of Personnel Management” substituted for “Civil Service Commission” in subsec. (f), pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1978, §102, 43 F.R. 36037, 92 Stat. 3783, set out under section 1101 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by statute in United States Civil Service Commission to Director of the Office of Personnel Management (except as otherwise specified), effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–102 of Ex. Ord. No. 12107, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1055, set out under section 1101 of Title 5.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Pub. L. 95–151, §2(e), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1246, provided for the establishment, purposes, composition, etc., of the Minimum Wage Study Commission, the submission of reports, with the latest report being submitted to the President and Congress thirty six months after the date of the appointment of the members of the Commission and such appointments being made within 180 days after Nov. 1, 1977, and the Commission to cease to exist thirty days after submission of the report.

Section 6 of act Aug. 12, 1955, provided that: “The term ‘Secretary’ as used in this Act and in amendments made by this Act [amending this section and sections 205, 206, 208, and 210 of this title] means the Secretary of Labor.”

The Administrator shall as soon as practicable appoint a special industry committee to recommend the minimum rate or rates of wages to be paid under section 206 of this title to employees in American Samoa engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or employed in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or the Administrator may appoint separate industry committees to recommend the minimum rate or rates of wages to be paid under said section to employees therein engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or employed in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce in particular industries. An industry committee appointed under this subsection shall be composed of residents of American Samoa where the employees with respect to whom such committee was appointed are employed and residents of the United States outside of American Samoa. In determining the minimum rate or rates of wages to be paid, and in determining classifications, such industry committees shall be subject to the provisions of section 208 of this title.

An industry committee shall be appointed by the Administrator without regard to any other provisions of law regarding the appointment and compensation of employees of the United States. It shall include a number of disinterested persons representing the public, one of whom the Administrator shall designate as chairman, a like number of persons representing employees in the industry, and a like number representing employers in the industry. In the appointment of the persons representing each group, the Administrator shall give due regard to the geographical regions in which the industry is carried on.

Two-thirds of the members of an industry committee shall constitute a quorum, and the decision of the committee shall require a vote of not less than a majority of all its members. Members of an industry committee shall receive as compensation for their services a reasonable per diem, which the Administrator shall by rules and regulations prescribe, for each day actually spent in the work of the committee, and shall in addition be reimbursed for their necessary traveling and other expenses. The Administrator shall furnish the committee with adequate legal, stenographic, clerical, and other assistance, and shall by rules and regulations prescribe the procedure to be followed by the committee.

The Administrator shall submit to an industry committee from time to time such data as he may have available on the matters referred to it, and shall cause to be brought before it in connection with such matters any witnesses whom he deems material. An industry committee may summon other witnesses or call upon the Administrator to furnish additional information to aid it in its deliberations.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §5, 52 Stat. 1062; June 26, 1940, ch. 432, §3(c), 54 Stat. 615; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §5, 63 Stat. 911; Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §5(a), 69 Stat. 711; Pub. L. 87–30, §4, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 67; Pub. L. 93–259, §5(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 56; Pub. L. 101–157, §4(a), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 939.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–157, §4(a)(4), substituted “American Samoa” for “Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(a)(1), (2), substituted “American Samoa engaged” for “Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, or in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands, engaged”, “American Samoa where” for “such island or islands where”, and “American Samoa.” for “Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.”

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(a)(3), struck out subsec. (e) which related to the application of sections 206 and 208 to employees in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands.

1974—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 93–259 added subsec. (e).

1961—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 87–30 inserted “or employed in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce” after “production of goods for commerce” in two places.

1955—Subsec. (a). Act Aug. 12, 1955, struck out provisions which subjected the Administrator to provisions of section 208 of this title in determination of minimum rates of wages and classifications.

1949—Act Oct. 26, 1949, amended section generally, making it applicable only to Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

1940—Subsec. (e). Joint Res. June 26, 1940, added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 206, 208 of this title.

Every employer shall pay to each of his employees who in any workweek is engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, or is employed in an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, wages at the following rates:

(1) except as otherwise provided in this section, not less than $4.25 an hour during the period ending on September 30, 1996, not less than $4.75 an hour during the year beginning on October 1, 1996, and not less than $5.15 an hour beginning September 1, 1997;

(2) if such employee is a home worker in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, not less than the minimum piece rate prescribed by regulation or order; or, if no such minimum piece rate is in effect, any piece rate adopted by such employer which shall yield, to the proportion or class of employees prescribed by regulation or order, not less than the applicable minimum hourly wage rate. Such minimum piece rates or employer piece rates shall be commensurate with, and shall be paid in lieu of, the minimum hourly wage rate applicable under the provisions of this section. The Administrator, or his authorized representative, shall have power to make such regulations or orders as are necessary or appropriate to carry out any of the provisions of this paragraph, including the power without limiting the generality of the foregoing, to define any operation or occupation which is performed by such home work employees in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands; to establish minimum piece rates for any operation or occupation so defined; to prescribe the method and procedure for ascertaining and promulgating minimum piece rates; to prescribe standards for employer piece rates, including the proportion or class of employees who shall receive not less than the minimum hourly wage rate; to define the term “home worker”; and to prescribe the conditions under which employers, agents, contractors, and subcontractors shall cause goods to be produced by home workers;

(3) if such employee is employed in American Samoa, in lieu of the rate or rates provided by this subsection or subsection (b) of this section, not less than the applicable rate established by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with recommendations of a special industry committee or committees which he shall appoint pursuant to sections 205 and 208 of this title. The minimum wage rate thus established shall not exceed the rate prescribed in paragraph (1) of this subsection;

(4) if such employee is employed as a seaman on an American vessel, not less than the rate which will provide to the employee, for the period covered by the wage payment, wages equal to compensation at the hourly rate prescribed by paragraph (1) of this subsection for all hours during such period when he was actually on duty (including periods aboard ship when the employee was on watch or was, at the direction of a superior officer, performing work or standing by, but not including off-duty periods which are provided pursuant to the employment agreement); or

(5) if such employee is employed in agriculture, not less than the minimum wage rate in effect under paragraph (1) after December 31, 1977.

Every employer shall pay to each of his employees (other than an employee to whom subsection (a)(5) of this section applies) who in any workweek is engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, or is employed in an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, and who in such workweek is brought within the purview of this section by the amendments made to this chapter by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966; title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 [20 U.S.C. 1681 et seq.], or the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, wages at the following rate: Effective after December 31, 1977, not less than the minimum wage rate in effect under subsection (a)(1) of this section.

(1) No employer having employees subject to any provisions of this section shall discriminate, within any establishment in which such employees are employed, between employees on the basis of sex by paying wages to employees in such establishment at a rate less than the rate at which he pays wages to employees of the opposite sex in such establishment for equal work on jobs the performance of which requires equal skill, effort, and responsibility, and which are performed under similar working conditions, except where such payment is made pursuant to (i) a seniority system; (ii) a merit system; (iii) a system which measures earnings by quantity or quality of production; or (iv) a differential based on any other factor other than sex: *Provided*, That an employer who is paying a wage rate differential in violation of this subsection shall not, in order to comply with the provisions of this subsection, reduce the wage rate of any employee.

(2) No labor organization, or its agents, representing employees of an employer having employees subject to any provisions of this section shall cause or attempt to cause such an employer to discriminate against an employee in violation of paragraph (1) of this subsection.

(3) For purposes of administration and enforcement, any amounts owing to any employee which have been withheld in violation of this subsection shall be deemed to be unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation under this chapter.

(4) As used in this subsection, the term “labor organization” means any organization of any kind, or any agency or employee representation committee or plan, in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning grievances, labor disputes, wages, rates of pay, hours of employment, or conditions of work.

(1) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 213 of this title (except subsections (a)(1) and (f) thereof), every employer providing any contract services (other than linen supply services) under a contract with the United States or any subcontract thereunder shall pay to each of his employees whose rate of pay is not governed by the Service Contract Act of 1965 (41 U.S.C. 351–357) or to whom subsection (a)(1) of this section is not applicable, wages at rates not less than the rates provided for in subsection (b) of this section.

(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of section 213 of this title (except subsections (a)(1) and (f) thereof) and the provisions of the Service Contract Act of 1965 [41 U.S.C. 351 et seq.] every employer in an establishment providing linen supply services to the United States under a contract with the United States or any subcontract thereunder shall pay to each of his employees in such establishment wages at rates not less than those prescribed in subsection (b) of this section, except that if more than 50 per centum of the gross annual dollar volume of sales made or business done by such establishment is derived from providing such linen supply services under any such contracts or subcontracts, such employer shall pay to each of his employees in such establishment wages at rates not less than those prescribed in subsection (a)(1) of this section.

Any employee—

(1) who in any workweek is employed in domestic service in a household shall be paid wages at a rate not less than the wage rate in effect under subsection (b) of this section unless such employee's compensation for such service would not because of section 209(a)(6) of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 409(a)(6)] constitute wages for the purposes of title II of such Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.], or

(2) who in any workweek—

(A) is employed in domestic service in one or more households, and

(B) is so employed for more than 8 hours in the aggregate,

shall be paid wages for such employment in such workweek at a rate not less than the wage rate in effect under subsection (b) of this section.

(1) In lieu of the rate prescribed by subsection (a)(1) of this section, any employer may pay any employee of such employer, during the first 90 consecutive calendar days after such employee is initially employed by such employer, a wage which is not less than $4.25 an hour.

(2) No employer may take any action to displace employees (including partial displacements such as reduction in hours, wages, or employment benefits) for purposes of hiring individuals at the wage authorized in paragraph (1).

(3) Any employer who violates this subsection shall be considered to have violated section 215(a)(3) of this title.

(4) This subsection shall only apply to an employee who has not attained the age of 20 years.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §6, 52 Stat. 1062; June 26, 1940, ch. 432, §3(e), (f), 54 Stat. 616; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §6, 63 Stat. 912; Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §3, 69 Stat. 711; Aug. 8, 1956, ch. 1035, §2, 70 Stat. 1118; Pub. L. 87–30, §5, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 67; Pub. L. 88–38, §3, June 10, 1963, 77 Stat. 56; Pub. L. 89–601, title III, §§301–305, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 838, 839, 841; Pub. L. 93–259, §§2–4, 5(b), 7(b)(1), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 55, 56, 62; Pub. L. 95–151, §2(a)–(d)(2), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1245, 1246; Pub. L. 101–157, §§2, 4(b), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 938, 940; Pub. L. 101–239, title X, §10208(d)(2)(B)(i), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2481; Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §§2104(b), (c), 2105(c), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1928, 1929.)

The Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 830. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1966 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Education Amendments of 1972, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 92–318, June 23, 1972, 86 Stat. 235, as amended, Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 is classified principally to chapter 38 (§1681 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1972 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 93–259, Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 55. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1974 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Service Contract Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (e)(1), (2), is Pub. L. 89–286, Oct. 22, 1965, 79 Stat. 1034, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 6 (§351 et seq.) of Title 41, Public Contracts. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 351 of Title 41 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (f)(1), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of such Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 104–188, §2104(b), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “except as otherwise provided in this section, not less than $3.35 an hour during the period ending March 31, 1990, not less than $3.80 an hour during the year beginning April 1, 1990, and not less than $4.25 an hour after March 31, 1991;”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–188, §2104(c), struck out subsec. (c) which related to employees in Puerto Rico.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 104–188, §2105(c), added subsec. (g).

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–157, §2, amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “not less than $2.65 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1978, not less than $2.90 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1979, not less than $3.10 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1980, and not less than $3.35 an hour after December 31, 1980, except as otherwise provided in this section;”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(b)(1), substituted “pursuant to sections 205 and 208 of this title” for “in the same manner and pursuant to the same provisions as are applicable to the special industry committees provided for Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands by this chapter as amended from time to time. Each such committee shall have the same powers and duties and shall apply the same standards with respect to the application of the provisions of this chapter to employees employed in American Samoa as pertain to special industry committees established under section 205 of this title with respect to employees employed in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(b)(2), amended subsec. (c) generally, substituting provisions relating to the application of wage rates under subsec. (a)(1) to employees in Puerto Rico for provisions relating to the superseding of subsec. (a)(1) wage rates by wage orders of a special industry committee for employees in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “209(a)(6)” for “209(g)”.

1977—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(a), substituted “not less than $2.65 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1978, not less than $2.90 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1979, not less than $3.10 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1980, and not less than $3.35 an hour after December 1, 1980” for “not less than $2 an hour during the period ending December 31, 1974, not less than $2.10 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1975, and not less than $2.30 an hour after December 31, 1975”.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(b), substituted provisions for a minimum wage rate of not less than the minimum wage rate in effect under par. (1) after Dec. 31, 1977, for provisions for a minimum wage rate of not less than $1.60 an hour during the period ending Dec. 31, 1974, $1.80 an hour during the year beginning Jan. 1, 1975, $2 an hour during the year beginning Jan. 1, 1976, $2.20 an hour during the year beginning Jan. 1, 1977, and $2.30 an hour after Dec. 31, 1977.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(c), substituted provisions for a minimum wage rate, effective after Dec. 31, 1977, of not less than the minimum wage rate in effect under subsec. (a)(1) of this section, for provisions for a minimum wage rate of not less than $1.90 an hour during the period ending Dec. 31, 1974, not less than $2 an hour during the year beginning Jan. 1, 1975, not less than $2.20 an hour during the year beginning Jan. 1, 1976, and not less than $2.30 an hour after Dec. 31, 1976.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(2)(A), inserted “(A)” before “heretofore” and cl. (B), and substituted “subsection (a)(1)” for “subsections (a) and (b)”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(1), added par. (2). Former par. (2), relating to applicability, etc., of wage rate orders effective on the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, and effective on the first day of the second and each subsequent year after such date, was struck out.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(1), (2)(B), (C), redesignated par. (5) as (3) and substituted references to subsec. (a)(1) of this section, for references to subsec. (a) or (b) of this section. Former par. (3), relating to appointment of a special industry committee for recommendations with respect to highest minimum wage rates for employees employed in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands subject to the amendments to this chapter by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, was struck out.

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(1), (2)(B), (D), redesignated par. (6) as (4) and struck out “or (3)” after “(2)”. Former par. (4), relating to wage rates of employees in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands subject to the former provisions of subsec. (c)(2)(A) or (3) of this section, was struck out.

Subsec. (c)(5), (6). Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(2)(B), redesignated pars. (5) and (6) as (3) and (4), respectively.

1974—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 93–259, §2, substituted “not less than $2 an hour during the period ending December 31, 1974, not less than $2.10 an hour during the year beginning January 1, 1975, and not less than $2.30 an hour after December 31, 1975” for “not less than $1.40 an hour during the first year from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 and not less than $1.60 an hour thereafter”.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 93–259, §4, substituted provisions for a minimum wage rate not less than: $1.60 an hour during period ending Dec. 31, 1974; $1.80, $2, and $2.20 an hour during years beginning Jan. 1, 1975, 1976, and 1977, respectively; and $2.30 an hour after Dec. 31, 1977 for former provisions for a minimum wage rate not less than $1 an hour during first year from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, not less than $1.15 an hour during second year from such date, and not less than $1.30 an hour thereafter.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–259, §3, inserted references to “title II of the Education Amendments of 1972” and “Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974” and substituted provisions for a minimum wage rate not less than $1.90 an hour during period ending Dec. 31, 1974; $2 and $2.20 an hour during years beginning Jan. 1, 1975, and 1976, respectively; and $2.30 an hour after Dec. 31, 1976 for former provisions for a minimum wage rate not less than: $1 an hour during first year from effective date of Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966; $1.15, $1.30, and $1.45 an hour during second, third, and fourth years from such date; and $1.60 an hour thereafter.

Subsec. (c)(2) to (6). Pub. L. 93–259, §5(b), added pars. (2) to (6) and struck out former pars. (2) to (4) which had provided:

“(2) In the case of any such employee who is covered by such a wage order and to whom the rate or rates prescribed by subsection (a) of this section would otherwise apply, the following rates shall apply:

“(A) The rate or rates applicable under the most recent wage order issued by the Secretary prior to the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, increased by 12 per centum, unless such rate or rates are superseded by the rate or rates prescribed in a wage order issued by the Secretary pursuant to the recommendations of a review committee appointed under paragraph (C). Such rate or rates shall become effective sixty days after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 or one year from the effective date of the most recent wage order applicable to such employee therefore issued by the Secretary pursuant to the recommendations of a special industry committee appointed under section 205 of this title, whichever is later.

“(B) Beginning one year after the applicable effective date under paragraph (A), not less than the rate or rates prescribed by paragraph (A), increased by an amount equal to 16 per centum of the rate or rates applicable under the most recent wage order issued by the Secretary prior to the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, unless such rate or rates are superseded by the rate or rates prescribed in a wage order issued by the Secretary pursuant to the recommendations of a review committee appointed under paragraph (C).

“(C) Any employer, or group of employers, employing a majority of the employees in an industry in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, may apply to the Secretary in writing for the appointment of a review committee to recommend the minimum rate or rates to be paid such employees in lieu of the rate or rates provided by paragraph (A) or (B). Any such application with respect to any rate or rates provided for under paragraph (A) shall be filed within sixty days following the enactment of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 and any such application with respect to any rate or rates provided for under paragraph (B) shall be filed not more than one hundred and twenty days and not less than sixty days prior to the effective date of the applicable rate or rates under paragraph (B). The Secretary shall promptly consider such application and may appoint a review committee if he has reasonable cause to believe, on the basis of financial and other information contained in the application, that compliance with any applicable rate or rates prescribed by paragraph (A) or (B) will substantially curtail employment in such industry. The Secretary's decision upon any such application shall be final. Any wage order issued pursuant to the recommendations of a review committee appointed under this paragraph shall take effect on the applicable effective date provided in paragraph (A) or (B).

“(D) In the event a wage order has not been issued pursuant to the recommendation of a review committee prior to the applicable effective date under paragraph (A) or (B), the applicable percentage increase provided by any such paragraph shall take effect on the effective date prescribed therein, except with respect to the employees of an employer who filed an application under paragraph (C) and who files with the Secretary an undertaking with a surety or sureties satisfactory to the Secretary for payment to his employees of an amount sufficient to compensate such employees for the difference between the wages they actually receive and the wages to which they are entitled under this subsection. The Secretary shall be empowered to enforce such undertaking and any sums recovered by him shall be held on a special deposit account and shall be paid, on order of the Secretary, directly to the employee or employees affected. Any such sum not paid to an employee because of inability to do so within a period of three years shall be covered into the Treasury of the United States as miscellaneous receipts.

“(3) In the case of any such employee to whom subsection (a)(5) or subsection (b) of this section would otherwise apply, the Secretary shall within sixty days after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 appoint a special industry committee in accordance with section 205 of this title to recommend the highest minimum wage rate or rates in accordance with the standards prescribed by section 208 of this title, but not in excess of the applicable rate provided by subsection (a)(5) or subsection (b) of this section, to be applicable to such employee in lieu of the rate or rates prescribed by subsection (a)(5) or subsection (b) of this section, as the case may be. The rate or rates recommended by the special industry committee shall be effective with respect to such employee upon the effective date of the wage order issued pursuant to such recommendation but not before sixty days after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966.

“(4) The provisions of sections 205 and 208 of this title, relating to special industry committees, shall be applicable to review committees appointed under this subsection. The appointment of a review committee shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any special industry committee required to be appointed pursuant to the provisions of subsection (a) of section 208 of this title, except that no special industry committee shall hold any hearing within one year after a minimum wage rate or rates for such industry shall have been recommended to the Secretary by a review committee to be paid in lieu of the rate or rates provided for under paragraph (A) or (B). The minimum wage rate or rates prescribed by this subsection shall be in effect only for so long as and insofar as such minimum wage rate or rates have not been superseded by a wage order fixing a higher minimum wage rate or rates (but not in excess of the applicable rate prescribed in subsection (a) or subsection (b) of this section) hereafter issued by the Secretary pursuant to the recommendation of a special industry committee.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 93–259, §7(b)(1), added subsec. (f).

1966—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 89–601, §301(a), inserted “, or is employed in an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce,” in opening provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 89–601, §301(a), raised minimum wage to not less than $1.40 an hour during first year from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, and not less than $1.60 thereafter, except as otherwise provided in this section.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 89–601, §301(b), added par. (4).

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 89–601, §302, added par. (5).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 89–601, §303, substituted provisions for a minimum wage for employees covered for first time by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 (other than newly covered agricultural employees) at not less than $1 an hour during first year from the effective date of the 1966 amendments, not less than $1.15 an hour during second year from such date, not less than $1.30 an hour during third year from such date, not less than $1.45 an hour during fourth year from such date, and not less than $1.60 an hour thereafter, for provisions setting a timetable for increases in the minimum wage of employees first covered by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1961.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 89–601, §304, provided for a percentage minimum wage increase for employees in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands who are covered by wage orders already in effect as the equivalent of the percentage increase on the mainland, provided for minimum wages for employees brought within coverage of this chapter for the first time by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 at rates to be set by special industry committees so as to reach as rapidly as is economically feasible without substantially curtailing employment the objectives of the minimum wage prescribed for mainland employees, and eliminated the review committees that has been established by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1961.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 89–601, §305, added subsec. (e).

1963—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 88–38 added subsec. (d).

1961—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 87–30, §5(a)(1), inserted “in any workweek” in opening provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 87–30, §5(a)(2), increased minimum wage from not less than $1 an hour to not less than $1.15 an hour during first two years from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1961, and not less than $1.25 an hour thereafter.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 87–30, §5(a)(3), inserted “in lieu of the rate or rates provided by this subsection or subsection (b) of this section” and “as amended from time to time” and struck out “now” before “applicable to”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 87–30, §5(b), added subsec. (b). Former subsec. (b) had provided that “This section shall take effect upon the expiration of one hundred and twenty days from June 25, 1938.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 87–30, §5(c), added subsec. (c). Former subsec. (c) had provided for wage orders recommended by special industrial committees and covering employees in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands to supersede minimum wages of $1 an hour and for continuance of wage orders in effect prior to effective date of this chapter until superseded by wage orders recommended by the special industrial committees.

1956—Subsec. (a)(3). Act Aug. 8, 1956, added par. (3).

1955—Subsec. (a)(1). Act Aug. 12, 1955, increased minimum wage from not less than 75 cents an hour to not less than $1 an hour.

1949—Subsec. (a). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §6(a), (b), struck out subpars. (1), (2), (3), and (4), inserted subpar. (1) fixing the minimum wage rate at not less than 75 cents an hour, and redesignated subpar. (5) as (2).

Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §6(c), continued existing minimum wage rates in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands until superseded by special industry committee wage orders.

1940—Subsec. (a)(5). Act June 26, 1940, added par. (5).

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–151 effective Jan. 1, 1978, see section 15(a) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by sections 2 to 4 and 7(b)(1) of Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Section 5(b) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Apr. 8, 1974.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 4 of Pub. L. 88–38 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section and enacting provisions set out below] shall take effect upon the expiration of one year from the date of its enactment [June 10, 1963]: *Provided*, That in the case of employees covered by a bona fide collective bargaining agreement in effect at least thirty days prior to the date of enactment of this Act [June 10, 1963], entered into by a labor organization as defined in section 6(d)(4) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [subsec. (d)(4) of this section], the amendments made by this Act shall take effect upon the termination of such collective bargaining agreement or upon the expiration of two years from the date of enactment of this Act [June 10, 1963], whichever shall first occur.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 3 of act Aug. 12, 1955, provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Mar. 1, 1956.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor and Administrator of Wage and Hour Division of Department of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Section 6 of Pub. L. 101–157 provided that:

“(a)

“(1)

“(A) while such employee is employed for the period authorized by subsection (g)(1)(B)(i), or

“(B) while such employee is engaged in on-the-job training for the period authorized by subsection (g)(1)(B)(ii).

“(2)

“(A) of not less than $3.35 an hour during the year beginning April 1, 1990; and

“(B) beginning April 1, 1991, of not less than $3.35 an hour or 85 percent of the wage prescribed by section 6 of such Act, whichever is greater.

“(b)

“(1) begins on or after April 1, 1990;

“(2) does not exceed the maximum period during which an employee may be paid such wage as determined under subsection (g)(1)(B); and

“(3) ends before April 1, 1993.

“(c)

“(1) any other individual has been laid off by such employer from the position to be filled by such eligible employee or from any substantially equivalent position; or

“(2) such employer has terminated the employment of any regular employee or otherwise reduced the number of employees with the intention of filling the vacancy so created by hiring an employee to be paid such wage.

“(d)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A)

“(B)

“(e)

“(f)

“(g)

“(1)

“(A)

“(i) is not a migrant agricultural worker or a seasonal agricultural worker (as defined in paragraphs (8) and (10) of section 3 of the Migrant and Seasonal Agricultural Worker Protection Act (29 U.S.C. 1802(8) and (10)) without regard to subparagraph (B) of such paragraphs and is not a nonimmigrant described in section 101(a)(15)(H)(ii)(a) of the Immigration and Nationality Act (8 U.S.C. 1101(a)(15)(H)(ii)(a));

“(ii) has not attained the age of 20 years; and

“(iii) is eligible to be paid the wage authorized by subsection (a) as determined under subparagraph (B).

“(B)

“(i) An employee shall initially be eligible to be paid the wage authorized by subsection (a) until the employee has been employed a cumulative total of 90 days at such wage.

“(ii) An employee who has been employed by an employer at the wage authorized by subsection (a) for the period authorized by clause (i) may be employed by any other employer for an additional 90 days if the employer meets the requirements of subsection (h).

“(iii) The total period, as authorized by clauses (i) and (ii), that an employee may be paid the wage authorized by subsection (a) may not exceed 180 days.

“(iv) For purposes of this subparagraph, the term ‘employer’ means with respect to an employee an employer who is required to withhold payroll taxes for such employee.

“(C)

“(i)

“(ii)

“(2)

“(h)

“(1) notify the Secretary annually of the positions at which such employees are to be employed at such wage,

“(2) provide on-the-job training to such employees which meets general criteria of the Secretary issued by regulation after consultation with the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate and the Committee on Education and Labor [now Committee on Education and the Workforce] of the House of Representatives and other interested persons,

“(3) keep on file a copy of the training program which the employer will provide such employees,

“(4) provide a copy of the training program to the employees,

“(5) post in a conspicuous place in places of employment a notice of the types of jobs for which the employer is providing on-the-job training, and

“(6) send to the Secretary on an annual basis a copy of such notice.

The Secretary shall make available to the public upon request notices provided to the Secretary by employers in accordance with paragraph (6).

“(i)

“(1) an analysis of the impact of such wage on employment opportunities for inexperienced workers;

“(2) any reduction in employment opportunities for experienced workers resulting from the employment of employees under such wage;

“(3) the nature and duration of the training provided under such wage; and

“(4) the degree to which employers used the authority to pay such wage.”

Certain public agencies not to be liable for violations of this section occurring before Apr. 15, 1986, with respect to services deemed by that agency to have been performed for it by an individual on a voluntary basis, see section 4(c) of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–150 not to affect liability of certain public agencies under section 216 of this title for violation of this section occurring before Apr. 15, 1986, see section 7 of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 216 of this title.

Pursuant to section 503(c) of the Covenant to Establish a Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands with the United States of America, as set forth in Pub. L. 94–241, Mar. 24, 1976, 90 Stat. 263, set out as a note under section 1801 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions, this section is inapplicable to the Northern Mariana Islands.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 2 of Pub. L. 88–38 provided that:

“(a) The Congress hereby finds that the existence in industries engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce of wage differentials based on sex—

“(1) depresses wages and living standards for employees necessary for their health and efficiency;

“(2) prevents the maximum utilization of the available labor resources;

“(3) tends to cause labor disputes, thereby burdening, affecting, and obstructing commerce;

“(4) burdens commerce and the free flow of goods in commerce; and

“(5) constitutes an unfair method of competition.

“(b) It is hereby declared to be the policy of this Act [amending this section, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section], through exercise by Congress of its power to regulate commerce among the several States and with foreign nations, to correct the conditions above referred to in such industries.”

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

Action by employee to recover unpaid minimum wages and liquidated damages, see section 216 of this title.

Employees performing services within foreign country or certain territory under jurisdiction of United States as not subject to provisions of this section, see section 213 of this title.

Hours worked defined, see section 203 of this title.

Minimum wages for employees covered by Walsh-Healey Act, see section 35 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Minimum wages of employees of Government contractors prescribed by Davis-Bacon Act, see section 276a of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works.

Overtime pay, see section 207 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 203, 205, 207, 208, 213, 214, 215, 216, 218, 1552, 2617 of this title; title 2 sections 60k, 1313; title 3 section 413; title 5 sections 2302, 5343, 5349, 7702; title 7 sections 2015, 2026; title 10 section 1588; title 15 section 1673; title 20 sections 1078–10, 1085; title 21 section 849; title 22 sections 2506, 3905, 3967, 3968, 3969, 4131; title 24 section 422; title 26 section 45B; title 38 sections 1720, 3485; title 41 section 351; title 42 sections 300e–9, 431, 1437t, 2000e–2, 2753, 3056, 8009, 8011, 9848.

(1) Except as otherwise provided in this section, no employer shall employ any of his employees who in any workweek is engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, or is employed in an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, for a workweek longer than forty hours unless such employee receives compensation for his employment in excess of the hours above specified at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

(2) No employer shall employ any of his employees who in any workweek is engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, or is employed in an enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce, and who in such workweek is brought within the purview of this subsection by the amendments made to this chapter by the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966—

(A) for a workweek longer than forty-four hours during the first year from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966,

(B) for a workweek longer than forty-two hours during the second year from such date, or

(C) for a workweek longer than forty hours after the expiration of the second year from such date,

unless such employee receives compensation for his employment in excess of the hours above specified at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

No employer shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section by employing any employee for a workweek in excess of that specified in such subsection without paying the compensation for overtime employment prescribed therein if such employee is so employed—

(1) in pursuance of an agreement, made as a result of collective bargaining by representatives of employees certified as bona fide by the National Labor Relations Board, which provides that no employee shall be employed more than one thousand and forty hours during any period of twenty-six consecutive weeks; or

(2) in pursuance of an agreement, made as a result of collective bargaining by representatives of employees certified as bona fide by the National Labor Relations Board, which provides that during a specified period of fifty-two consecutive weeks the employee shall be employed not more than two thousand two hundred and forty hours and shall be guaranteed not less than one thousand eight hundred and forty-hours (or not less than forty-six weeks at the normal number of hours worked per week, but not less than thirty hours per week) and not more than two thousand and eighty hours of employment for which he shall receive compensation for all hours guaranteed or worked at rates not less than those applicable under the agreement to the work performed and for all hours in excess of the guaranty which are also in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section or two thousand and eighty in such period at rates not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed; or

(3) by an independently owned and controlled local enterprise (including an enterprise with more than one bulk storage establishment) engaged in the wholesale or bulk distribution of petroleum products if—

(A) the annual gross volume of sales of such enterprise is less than $1,000,000 exclusive of excise taxes,

(B) more than 75 per centum of such enterprise's annual dollar volume of sales is made within the State in which such enterprise is located, and

(C) not more than 25 per centum of the annual dollar volume of sales of such enterprise is to customers who are engaged in the bulk distribution of such products for resale,

and such employee receives compensation for employment in excess of forty hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the minimum wage rate applicable to him under section 206 of this title,

and if such employee receives compensation for employment in excess of twelve hours in any workday, or for employment in excess of fifty-six hours in any workweek, as the case may be, at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

As used in this section the “regular rate” at which an employee is employed shall be deemed to include all remuneration for employment paid to, or on behalf of, the employee, but shall not be deemed to include—

(1) sums paid as gifts; payments in the nature of gifts made at Christmas time or on other special occasions, as a reward for service, the amounts of which are not measured by or dependent on hours worked, production, or efficiency;

(2) payments made for occasional periods when no work is performed due to vacation, holiday, illness, failure of the employer to provide sufficient work, or other similar cause; reasonable payments for traveling expenses, or other expenses, incurred by an employee in the furtherance of his employer's interests and properly reimbursable by the employer; and other similar payments to an employee which are not made as compensation for his hours of employment;

(3) Sums 1 paid in recognition of services performed during a given period if either, (a) both the fact that payment is to be made and the amount of the payment are determined at the sole discretion of the employer at or near the end of the period and not pursuant to any prior contract, agreement, or promise causing the employee to expect such payments regularly; or (b) the payments are made pursuant to a bona fide profit-sharing plan or trust or bona fide thrift or savings plan, meeting the requirements of the Administrator set forth in appropriate regulations which he shall issue, having due regard among other relevant factors, to the extent to which the amounts paid to the employee are determined without regard to hours of work, production, or efficiency; or (c) the payments are talent fees (as such talent fees are defined and delimited by regulations of the Administrator) paid to performers, including announcers, on radio and television programs;

(4) contributions irrevocably made by an employer to a trustee or third person pursuant to a bona fide plan for providing old-age, retirement, life, accident, or health insurance or similar benefits for employees;

(5) extra compensation provided by a premium rate paid for certain hours worked by the employee in any day of workweek because such hours are hours worked in excess of eight in a day or in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section or in excess of the employee's normal working hours or regular working hours, as the case may be;

(6) extra compensation provided by a premium rate paid for work by the employee on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, or regular days of rest, or on the sixth or seventh day of the workweek, where such premium rate is not less than one and one-half times the rate established in good faith for like work performed in nonovertime hours on other days; or

(7) extra compensation provided by a premium rate paid to the employee, in pursuance of an applicable employment contract or collective-bargaining agreement, for work outside of the hours established in good faith by the contract or agreement as the basic, normal, or regular workday (not exceeding eight hours) or workweek (not exceeding the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section,2 where such premium rate is not less than one and one-half times the rate established in good faith by the contract or agreement for like work performed during such workday or workweek.

No employer shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section by employing any employee for a workweek in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section if such employee is employed pursuant to a bona fide individual contract, or pursuant to an agreement made as a result of collective bargaining by representatives of employees, if the duties of such employee necessitate irregular hours of work, and the contract or agreement (1) specifies a regular rate of pay of not less than the minimum hourly rate provided in subsection (a) or (b) of section 206 of this title (whichever may be applicable) and compensation at not less than one and one-half times such rate for all hours worked in excess of such maximum workweek, and (2) provides a weekly guaranty of pay for not more than sixty hours based on the rates so specified.

No employer shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section by employing any employee for a workweek in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under such subsection if, pursuant to an agreement or understanding arrived at between the employer and the employee before performance of the work, the amount paid to the employee for the number of hours worked by him in such workweek in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under such subsection—

(1) in the case of an employee employed at piece rates, is computed at piece rates not less than one and one-half times the bona fide piece rates applicable to the same work when performed during nonovertime hours; or

(2) in the case of an employee performing two or more kinds of work for which different hourly or piece rates have been established, is computed at rates not less than one and one-half times such bona fide rates applicable to the same work when performed during nonovertime hours; or

(3) is computed at a rate not less than one and one-half times the rate established by such agreement or understanding as the basic rate to be used in computing overtime compensation thereunder: *Provided*, That the rate so established shall be authorized by regulation by the Administrator as being substantially equivalent to the average hourly earnings of the employee, exclusive of overtime premiums, in the particular work over a representative period of time;

and if (i) the employee's average hourly earnings for the workweek exclusive of payments described in paragraphs (1) through (7) of subsection (e) of this section are not less than the minimum hourly rate required by applicable law, and (ii) extra overtime compensation is properly computed and paid on other forms of additional pay required to be included in computing the regular rate.

Extra compensation paid as described in paragraphs (5), (6), and (7) of subsection (e) of this section shall be creditable toward overtime compensation payable pursuant to this section.

No employer shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section by employing any employee of a retail or service establishment for a workweek in excess of the applicable workweek specified therein, if (1) the regular rate of pay of such employee is in excess of one and one-half times the minimum hourly rate applicable to him under section 206 of this title, and (2) more than half his compensation for a representative period (not less than one month) represents commissions on goods or services. In determining the proportion of compensation representing commissions, all earnings resulting from the application of a bona fide commission rate shall be deemed commissions on goods or services without regard to whether the computed commissions exceed the draw or guarantee.

No employer engaged in the operation of a hospital or an establishment which is an institution primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, or the mentally ill or defective who reside on the premises shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section if, pursuant to an agreement or understanding arrived at between the employer and the employee before performance of the work, a work period of fourteen consecutive days is accepted in lieu of the workweek of seven consecutive days for purposes of overtime computation and if, for his employment in excess of eight hours in any workday and in excess of eighty hours in such fourteen-day period, the employee receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

No public agency shall be deemed to have violated subsection (a) of this section with respect to the employment of any employee in fire protection activities or any employee in law enforcement activities (including security personnel in correctional institutions) if—

(1) in a work period of 28 consecutive days the employee receives for tours of duty which in the aggregate exceed the lesser of (A) 216 hours, or (B) the average number of hours (as determined by the Secretary pursuant to section 6(c)(3) of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974) in tours of duty of employees engaged in such activities in work periods of 28 consecutive days in calendar year 1975; or

(2) in the case of such an employee to whom a work period of at least 7 but less than 28 days applies, in his work period the employee receives for tours of duty which in the aggregate exceed a number of hours which bears the same ratio to the number of consecutive days in his work period as 216 hours (or if lower, the number of hours referred to in clause (B) of paragraph (1)) bears to 28 days,

compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

No employer shall employ any employee in domestic service in one or more households for a workweek longer than forty hours unless such employee receives compensation for such employment in accordance with subsection (a) of this section.

For a period or periods of not more than fourteen workweeks in the aggregate in any calendar year, any employer may employ any employee for a workweek in excess of that specified in subsection (a) of this section without paying the compensation for overtime employment prescribed in such subsection, if such employee—

(1) is employed by such employer—

(A) to provide services (including stripping and grading) necessary and incidental to the sale at auction of green leaf tobacco of type 11, 12, 13, 14, 21, 22, 23, 24, 31, 35, 36, or 37 (as such types are defined by the Secretary of Agriculture), or in auction sale, buying, handling, stemming, redrying, packing, and storing of such tobacco,

(B) in auction sale, buying, handling, sorting, grading, packing, or storing green leaf tobacco of type 32 (as such type is defined by the Secretary of Agriculture), or

(C) in auction sale, buying, handling, stripping, sorting, grading, sizing, packing, or stemming prior to packing, of perishable cigar leaf tobacco of type 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 61, or 62 (as such types are defined by the Secretary of Agriculture); and

(2) receives for—

(A) such employment by such employer which is in excess of ten hours in any workday, and

(B) such employment by such employer which is in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek,

compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

An employer who receives an exemption under this subsection shall not be eligible for any other exemption under this section.

In the case of an employee of an employer engaged in the business of operating a street, suburban or interurban electric railway, or local trolley or motorbus carrier (regardless of whether or not such railway or carrier is public or private or operated for profit or not for profit), in determining the hours of employment of such an employee to which the rate prescribed by subsection (a) of this section applies there shall be excluded the hours such employee was employed in charter activities by such employer if (1) the employee's employment in such activities was pursuant to an agreement or understanding with his employer arrived at before engaging in such employment, and (2) if employment in such activities is not part of such employee's regular employment.

(1) Employees of a public agency which is a State, a political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency may receive, in accordance with this subsection and in lieu of overtime compensation, compensatory time off at a rate not less than one and one-half hours for each hour of employment for which overtime compensation is required by this section.

(2) A public agency may provide compensatory time under paragraph (1) only—

(A) pursuant to—

(i) applicable provisions of a collective bargaining agreement, memorandum of understanding, or any other agreement between the public agency and representatives of such employees; or

(ii) in the case of employees not covered by subclause (i), an agreement or understanding arrived at between the employer and employee before the performance of the work; and

(B) if the employee has not accrued compensatory time in excess of the limit applicable to the employee prescribed by paragraph (3).

In the case of employees described in clause (A)(ii) hired prior to April 15, 1986, the regular practice in effect on April 15, 1986, with respect to compensatory time off for such employees in lieu of the receipt of overtime compensation, shall constitute an agreement or understanding under such clause (A)(ii). Except as provided in the previous sentence, the provision of compensatory time off to such employees for hours worked after April 14, 1986, shall be in accordance with this subsection.

(3)(A) If the work of an employee for which compensatory time may be provided included work in a public safety activity, an emergency response activity, or a seasonal activity, the employee engaged in such work may accrue not more than 480 hours of compensatory time for hours worked after April 15, 1986. If such work was any other work, the employee engaged in such work may accrue not more than 240 hours of compensatory time for hours worked after April 15, 1986. Any such employee who, after April 15, 1986, has accrued 480 or 240 hours, as the case may be, of compensatory time off shall, for additional overtime hours of work, be paid overtime compensation.

(B) If compensation is paid to an employee for accrued compensatory time off, such compensation shall be paid at the regular rate earned by the employee at the time the employee receives such payment.

(4) An employee who has accrued compensatory time off authorized to be provided under paragraph (1) shall, upon termination of employment, be paid for the unused compensatory time at a rate of compensation not less than—

(A) the average regular rate received by such employee during the last 3 years of the employee's employment, or

(B) the final regular rate received by such employee,

whichever is higher 3

(5) An employee of a public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency—

(A) who has accrued compensatory time off authorized to be provided under paragraph (1), and

(B) who has requested the use of such compensatory time,

shall be permitted by the employee's employer to use such time within a reasonable period after making the request if the use of the compensatory time does not unduly disrupt the operations of the public agency.

(6) The hours an employee of a public agency performs court reporting transcript preparation duties shall not be considered as hours worked for the purposes of subsection (a) of this section if—

(A) such employee is paid at a per-page rate which is not less than—

(i) the maximum rate established by State law or local ordinance for the jurisdiction of such public agency,

(ii) the maximum rate otherwise established by a judicial or administrative officer and in effect on July 1, 1995, or

(iii) the rate freely negotiated between the employee and the party requesting the transcript, other than the judge who presided over the proceedings being transcribed, and

(B) the hours spent performing such duties are outside of the hours such employee performs other work (including hours for which the agency requires the employee's attendance) pursuant to the employment relationship with such public agency.

For purposes of this section, the amount paid such employee in accordance with subparagraph (A) for the performance of court reporting transcript preparation duties, shall not be considered in the calculation of the regular rate at which such employee is employed.

(7) For purposes of this subsection—

(A) the term “overtime compensation” means the compensation required by subsection (a), and

(B) the terms “compensatory time” and “compensatory time off” mean hours during which an employee is not working, which are not counted as hours worked during the applicable workweek or other work period for purposes of overtime compensation, and for which the employee is compensated at the employee's regular rate.

(1) If an individual who is employed by a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency in fire protection or law enforcement activities (including activities of security personnel in correctional institutions) and who, solely at such individual's option, agrees to be employed on a special detail by a separate or independent employer in fire protection, law enforcement, or related activities, the hours such individual was employed by such separate and independent employer shall be excluded by the public agency employing such individual in the calculation of the hours for which the employee is entitled to overtime compensation under this section if the public agency—

(A) requires that its employees engaged in fire protection, law enforcement, or security activities be hired by a separate and independent employer to perform the special detail,

(B) facilitates the employment of such employees by a separate and independent employer, or

(C) otherwise affects the condition of employment of such employees by a separate and independent employer.

(2) If an employee of a public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency undertakes, on an occasional or sporadic basis and solely at the employee's option, part-time employment for the public agency which is in a different capacity from any capacity in which the employee is regularly employed with the public agency, the hours such employee was employed in performing the different employment shall be excluded by the public agency in the calculation of the hours for which the employee is entitled to overtime compensation under this section.

(3) If an individual who is employed in any capacity by a public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency, agrees, with the approval of the public agency and solely at the option of such individual, to substitute during scheduled work hours for another individual who is employed by such agency in the same capacity, the hours such employee worked as a substitute shall be excluded by the public agency in the calculation of the hours for which the employee is entitled to overtime compensation under this section.

Any employer may employ any employee for a period or periods of not more than 10 hours in the aggregate in any workweek in excess of the maximum workweek specified in subsection (a) of this section without paying the compensation for overtime employment prescribed in such subsection, if during such period or periods the employee is receiving remedial education that is—

(1) provided to employees who lack a high school diploma or educational attainment at the eighth grade level;

(2) designed to provide reading and other basic skills at an eighth grade level or below; and

(3) does not include job specific training.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §7, 52 Stat. 1063; Oct. 29, 1941, ch. 461, 55 Stat. 756; July 20, 1949, ch. 352, §1, 63 Stat. 446; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §7, 63 Stat. 912; Pub. L. 87–30, §6, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 69; Pub. L. 89–601, title II, §§204(c), (d), 212(b), title IV, §§401–403, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 835–837, 841, 842; Pub. L. 93–259, §§6(c)(1), 7(b)(2), 9(a), 12(b), 19, 21(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 60, 62, 64, 66, 68; Pub. L. 99–150, §§2(a), 3(a)–(c)(1), Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 787, 789; Pub. L. 101–157, §7, Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 944; Pub. L. 104–26, §2, Sept. 6, 1995, 109 Stat. 264.)

The Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 830. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1966 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title and Tables.

The effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(A), means the effective date of Pub. L. 89–601, which is Feb. 1, 1967 except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as an Effective Date of 1966 Amendment note under section 203 of this title.

Section 6(c)(3) of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, referred to in subsec. (k)(1), is Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(3), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 61, which is set out as a note under section 213 of this title.

1995—Subsec. (*o*)(6), (7). Pub. L. 104–26 added par. (6) and redesignated former par. (6) as (7).

1989—Subsec. (q). Pub. L. 101–157 added subsec. (q).

1985—Subsec. (*o*). Pub. L. 99–150, §2(a), added subsec. (*o*).

Subsec. (p). Pub. L. 99–150, §3(a)–(c)(1), added subsec. (p).

1974—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 93–259, §19(a), (b), substituted “seven workweeks” for “ten workweeks”, “ten workweeks” for “fourteen workweeks” and “forty-eight hours” for “fifty hours” effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(c), substituted “five workweeks” for “seven workweeks” and “seven workweeks” for “ten workweeks” effective Jan. 1, 1975. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(d), substituted “three workweeks” for “five workweeks” and “five workweeks” for “seven workweeks” effective Jan. 1, 1976. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(e), repealed subsec. (c) effective Dec. 31, 1976.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–259, §19(a), (b), substituted “seven workweeks” for “ten workweeks”, “ten workweeks” for “fourteen workweeks” and “forty-eight hours” for “fifty hours” effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(c), substituted “five workweeks” for “seven workweeks” and “seven workweeks” for “ten workweeks” effective Jan. 1, 1975. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(d), substituted “three workweeks” for “five workweeks” and “five workweeks” for “seven workweeks” effective Jan. 1, 1976. Pub. L. 93–259, §19(e), repealed subsec. (d) effective Dec. 31, 1976.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 93–259, §12(b), extended provision excepting from being considered a subsec. (a) violation agreements or undertakings between employers and employees respecting consecutive work period and overtime compensation to agreements between employers engaged in operation of an establishment which is an institution primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, or the mentally ill or defective who reside on the premises and employees respecting consecutive work period and overtime compensation.

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(1)(D), effective Jan. 1, 1978, substituted in par. (1) “exceed the lesser of (A) 216 hours, or (B) the average number of hours (as determined by the Secretary pursuant to section 6(c)(3) of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974) in tours of duty of employees engaged in such activities in work periods of 28 consecutive days in calendar year 1975” for “exceed 216 hours” and inserted in par. (2) “(or if lower, the number of hours referred to in clause (B) of paragraph (1)”.

Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(1)(C), substituted “216 hours” for “232 hours”, wherever appearing, effective Jan. 1, 1977.

Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(1)(B), substituted “232 hours” for “240 hours”, wherever appearing, effective Jan. 1, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(1)(A), added subsec. (k), effective Jan. 1, 1975.

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 93–259, §7(b)(2), added subsec. (*l*).

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 93–259, §9(a), added subsec. (m).

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 93–259, §21(a), added subsec. (n).

1966—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 89–601, §401, retained provision for 40-hour workweek and compensation for employment in excess of 40 hours at not less than one and one-half times the regular rate of pay and substituted provisions setting out a phased timetable for the workweek in the case of employees covered by the overtime provisions for the first time under the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966 beginning at 44 hours during the first year from the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, 42 hours during the second year from such date, and 40 hours after the expiration of the second year from such date, for provisions giving a phased timetable for workweeks in the case of employees first covered under the provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1961.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 89–601, §212(b), substituted provisions granting an overtime exemption for petroleum distribution employees if they receive compensation for the hours of employment in excess of 40 hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the applicable minimum wage rate and if the enterprises do an annual gross sales volume of less than $1,000,000, if more than 75 per centum of such enterprise's annual dollar volume of sales is made within the state in which the enterprise is located, and not more than 25 per centum of the annual dollar volume is to customers who are engaged in the bulk distribution of such products for resale for provisions covering employees for a period of not more than 14 workweeks in the aggregate in any calendar year in an industry found to be of a seasonal nature.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(c), substituted provisions for an overtime exemption of 10 weeks in any calendar year or 14 weeks in the case of an employer not qualifying for the exemption in subsec. (d) of this section, limited to 10 hours a day and 50 hours a week, applicable to employees employed in seasonal industries which are not engaged in agricultural processing, for provisions granting a year-round unlimited exemption applicable to employees of employers engaged in first processing of milk into dairy products, cotton compressing and ginning, cottonseed processing, and the processing of certain farm products into sugar, and granting a 14-week unlimited exemption applicable to employees of employers engaged in first processing of perishable or seasonal fresh fruits or vegetables first processing within the area of production of any agricultural commodity during a seasonal operation, or the handling or slaughtering of livestock and poultry.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(c), added subsec. (d). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (e).

Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(d)(1), redesignated former subsecs. (d) and (e) as (e) and (f) respectively. Former subsec. (f) redesignated (g).

Subsecs. (g), (h). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(d)(1), (2), redesignated former subsecs. (f) and (g) as subsecs. (g) and (h) respectively, and in subsecs. (g) and (h) as so redesignated, substituted reference to “subsection (e)” for reference to “subsection (d).” Former subsec. (h) redesignated (i).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 89–601, §§204(d)(1), 402, redesignated former subsec. (h) as (i) and inserted provision that, in determining the proportion of compensation representing commissions, all earnings resulting from the application of a bona fide commission rate shall be deemed commissions on goods or services without regard to whether the computed commissions exceed the draw or guarantee.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 89–601, §403, added subsec. (j).

1961—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(a), designated existing provisions as par. (1), inserted “in any workweek”, and added par. (2).

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(b), substituted “in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section” for “in excess of forty hours in the workweek”.

Subsec. (d)(5), (7). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(c), (d), substituted “in excess of the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section” for “forty in a workweek” in par. (5) and “the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section” for “forty hours” in par. (7).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(e), substituted “the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection (a) of this section”, “subsection (a) or (b) of section 206 of this title (whichever may be applicable” and “such maximum” for “forty hours”, “section 206(a) of this title” and “forty in any”, respectively.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(f), substituted “the maximum workweek applicable to such employee under subsection” for “forty hours” in two places.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 87–30, §6(g), added subsec. (h).

1949—Subsec. (a). Act Oct. 26, 1949, continued requirement that employment in excess of 40 hours in a workweek be compensated at rate not less than 11/2 times regular rate except as to employees specifically exempted.

Subsec. (b)(1). Act Oct. 26, 1949, increased employment period limitation from one thousand hours to one thousand and forty hours in semi-annual agreements.

Subsec. (b)(2). Act Oct. 26, 1949, increased employment period limitation from two thousand and eighty hours to two thousand two hundred and forty hours in annual agreements, fixed minimum and maximum guaranteed employment periods, and provided for overtime rate for hours worked in excess of the guaranty.

Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added buttermilk to commodities listed for first processing.

Subsec. (d). Act Oct. 26, 1949, struck out former subsec. (d) and inserted a new subsec. (d) defining regular rate with certain specified types of payments excepted.

Subsec. (e) added by act July 20, 1949, and amended by act Oct. 26, 1949, which determined compensation to be paid for irregular hours of work.

Subsecs. (f) and (g). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added subsecs. (f) and (g).

1941—Subsec. (b)(2) amended by act Oct. 29, 1941.

Section 3 of Pub. L. 104–26 provided that: “The amendments made by section 2 [amending this section] shall apply after the date of the enactment of this Act [Sept. 6, 1995] and with respect to actions brought in a court after the date of the enactment of this Act.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–150 effective Apr. 15, 1986, see section 6 of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 6(c)(1)(A)–(D) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1975, 1976, 1977, and 1978, respectively.

Amendment by sections 7(b)(2), 9(a), 12(b), 19(a), (b), and 21(a) of Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Section 19(c)–(e) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments and repeals made by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1975, Jan. 1, 1976, and Dec. 31, 1976, respectively.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Section 2(b) of Pub. L. 99–150 provided that: “A collective bargaining agreement which is in effect on April 15, 1986, and which permits compensatory time off in lieu of overtime compensation shall remain in effect until its expiration date unless otherwise modified, except that compensatory time shall be provided after April 14, 1986, in accordance with section 7(*o*) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (as added by subsection (a)) [29 U.S.C. 207(*o*)].”

Section 2(c)(2) of Pub. L. 99–150 provided that: “A State, political subdivision of a State, or interstate governmental agency may defer until August 1, 1986, the payment of monetary overtime compensation under section 7 of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 207] for hours worked after April 14, 1986.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–150 not to affect liability of certain public agencies under section 216 of this title for violation of this section occurring before Apr. 15, 1986, see section 7 of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 216 of this title.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Pub. L. 89–601, title VI, §603, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 844, directed Secretary of Labor to make a complete study of practices dealing with overtime payments for work in excess of forty hours per week and the extent to which such overtime work impeded the creation of new job opportunities in American industry and instructed him to report to the Congress by July 1, 1967, the findings of such survey with appropriate recommendations.

Ex. Ord. No. 9607, Aug. 30, 1945, 10 F.R. 11191, provided:

By virtue of the authority vested in me by the Constitution and statutes as President of the United States it is ordered that Executive Order 9301 of February 9, 1943 [8 F.R. 1825] (formerly set out as note under this section), establishing a minimum wartime workweek of forty-eight hours, be, and it is hereby, revoked.

Harry S Truman.

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

Action by employee to recover unpaid overtime compensation and liquidated damages, see section 216 of this title.

American Samoa employees not subject to provisions of this section, see section 213 of this title.

Employees performing services within foreign country or certain territory under jurisdiction of United States as not subject to provisions of this section, see section 213 of this title.

Forty-hour workweek for employees covered by Walsh-Healey Act, see section 35 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Hours of labor on public works, see section 327 et seq. of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works.

Hours worked defined, see section 203 of this title.

Liability for overtime work performed prior to July 20, 1949, see section 216b of this title.

Preliminary and post-liminary activities not compensable, see section 254 of this title.

Rate of overtime for employees covered by Walsh-Healey Act, see section 40 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Walsh-Healey Act inapplicable to employees entering into agreements with employees under paragraphs 1 or 2 of subsection (b) of this section, see section 35 of Title 41.

This section is referred to in sections 203, 211, 213, 214, 215, 216, 216b, 218, 2611, 2617 of this title; title 2 section 1313; title 3 section 413; title 5 sections 5542, 5543, 5544, 6123, 6128; title 41 sections 35, 355.

1 So in original. Probably should not be capitalized.

2 So in original. The comma probably should be preceded by a closing parenthesis.

3 So in original. Probably should be followed by a period.

The policy of this chapter with respect to industries or enterprises in American Samoa engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce is to reach as rapidly as is economically feasible without substantially curtailing employment the objective of the minimum wage rate which would apply in each such industry under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title but for section 206(c) 1 of this title. The Administrator shall from time to time convene an industry committee or committees, appointed pursuant to section 205 of this title, and any such industry committee shall from time to time recommend the minimum rate or rates of wages to be paid under section 206 of this title by employers in American Samoa engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce in any such industry or classifications therein, and who but for section 206(a)(3) of this title would be subject to the minimum wage requirements of section 206(a)(1) of this title. Minimum rates of wages established in accordance with this section which are not equal to the otherwise applicable minimum wage rate in effect under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title shall be reviewed by such a Committee once during each biennial period, beginning with the biennial period commencing July 1, 1958, except that the Secretary, in his discretion, may order an additional review during any such biennial period.

Upon the convening of any such industry committee, the Administrator shall refer to it the question of the minimum wage rate or rates to be fixed for such industry. The industry committee shall investigate conditions in the industry and the committee, or any authorized subcommittee thereof, shall after due notice hear such witnesses and receive such evidence as may be necessary or appropriate to enable the committee to perform its duties and functions under this chapter. The committee shall recommend to the Administrator the highest minimum wage rates for the industry which it determines, having due regard to economic and competitive conditions, will not substantially curtail employment in the industry, and will not give any industry in American Samoa a competitive advantage over any industry in the United States outside of American Samoa; except that the committee shall recommend to the Secretary the minimum wage rate prescribed in section 206(a) or 206(b) of this title, which would be applicable but for section 206(a)(3) of this title, unless there is evidence in the record which establishes that the industry, or a predominant portion thereof, is unable to pay that wage due to such economic and competitive conditions.

The industry committee shall recommend such reasonable classifications within any industry as it determines to be necessary for the purpose of fixing for each classification within such industry the highest minimum wage rate (not in excess of that in effect under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title (as the case may be)) which (1) will not substantially curtail employment in such classification and (2) will not give a competitive advantage to any group in the industry, and shall recommend for each classification in the industry the highest minimum wage rate which the committee determines will not substantially curtail employment in such classification. In determining whether such classification should be made in any industry, in making such classifications, and in determining the minimum wage rates for such classifications, no classifications shall be made, and no minimum wage rate shall be fixed, solely on a regional basis, but the industry committee shall consider among other relevant factors the following:

(1) competitive conditions as affected by transportation, living, and production costs;

(2) the wages established for work of like or comparable character by collective labor agreements negotiated between employers and employees by representatives of their own choosing; and

(3) the wages paid for work of like or comparable character by employers who voluntarily maintain minimum wage standards in the industry.

No classification shall be made under this section on the basis of age or sex.

The industry committee shall file with the Secretary a report containing its findings of fact and recommendations with respect to the matters referred to it. Upon the filing of such report, the Secretary shall publish such recommendations in the Federal Register and shall provide by order that the recommendations contained in such report shall take effect upon the expiration of 15 days after the date of such publication.

Orders issued under this section shall define the industries and classifications therein to which they are to apply, and shall contain such terms and conditions as the Administrator finds necessary to carry out the purposes of such orders, to prevent the circumvention or evasion thereof, and to safeguard the minimum wage rates established therein.

Due notice of any hearing provided for in this section shall be given by publication in the Federal Register and by such other means as the Administrator deems reasonably calculated to give general notice to interested persons.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §8, 52 Stat. 1064; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §8, 63 Stat. 915; Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §§4, 5(b)–(e), 69 Stat. 711, 712; Pub. L. 85–750, Aug. 25, 1958, 72 Stat. 844; Pub. L. 87–30, §7, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 70; Pub. L. 93–259, §5(c)(1), (d), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 58; Pub. L. 95–151, §2(d)(3), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1246; Pub. L. 101–157, §4(c), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 940; Pub. L. 101–583, §1, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2871.)

Section 206(c) of this title, referred to in subsec. (a), was repealed by Pub. L. 104–188, title II, §2104(c), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1929.

1990—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–583, which directed the substitution of “unless there is evidence in the record which establishes that the industry, or a predominant portion thereof, is unable to pay that wage due to such economic and competitive conditions” for “unless there is substantial documentary evidence, including pertinent unabridged profit and loss statements and balance sheets for a representative period of years or in the case of employees of public agencies other appropriate information, in the record which establishes that the industry, or a predominant portion thereof, is unable to pay that wage” in “section 8(b) (29 U.S.C. 208(b))”, was executed by making the substitution in section 8(b) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, which is classified to subsec. (b) of this section, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1989—Pub. L. 101–157, §4(c)(5), substituted “American Samoa” for “Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(c), substituted “American Samoa engaged” for “Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands engaged”, struck out “The Secretary shall, from time to time, convene an industry committee or committees, appointed pursuant to section 205 of this title, and any such industry committee—

“(1) shall, from time to time, recommend the minimum wage rates to be paid by employers who are in Puerto Rico, in the Virgin Islands, or in both places and who but for section 206(c) of this title would be subject to the minimum wage requirements of section 206(a)(1) of this title, and

“(2) may, from time to time, recommend increases in the incremental increases authorized by section 206(c)(2) of this title.”

after “section 206(c) of this title.”, substituted “American Samoa engaged” for “Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, or in Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands, engaged” and inserted “, and who but for section 206(a)(3) of this title would be subject to the minimum wage requirements of section 206(a)(1) of this title”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–157, §4(c)(4), substituted “American Samoa a competitive” for “Puerto Rico or in the Virgin Islands a competitive”, “American Samoa; except” for “Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands; except”, and “section 206(a)(3) of this title” for “section 206(c) of this title”.

1977—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–151 inserted provisions relating to appointment of industry committees by the Secretary and functions of such industry committees.

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–259, §5(d)(1), (2), substituted in first sentence “the minimum wage rate which would apply in each such industry under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title but for section 206(c) of this title” for “the minimum wage prescribed in paragraph (1) of section 206(a) of this title in each such industry” and in third sentence “the otherwise applicable minimum wage rate in effect under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title” for “the minimum wage rate prescribed in paragraph (1) of section 206(a) of this title”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–259, §5(c)(1), required committee to recommend minimum wage rate prescribed in section 206(a) or 206(b) of this title, which would be applicable but for section 206(c) of this title, unless industry is unable to pay that wage as established by substantial documentary evidence or in case of employees of public agencies other appropriate information in the record.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 93–259, §5(d)(3), substituted “in effect under paragraph (1) or (5) of section 206(a) of this title (as the case may be)” for “prescribed in paragraph (1) of section 206(a) of this title”.

1961—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 87–30 inserted “or enterprises” after “industries” in first sentence and “or in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce” after “production of goods for commerce” in second sentence.

1958—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 85–750 provided for biennial instead of an annual review of rates and for additional review, in Secretary's discretion, during any biennial period.

1955—Subsec. (a). Act Aug. 12, 1955, §4, required review of minimum wage rates at least once each fiscal year.

Subsec. (b). Act Aug. 12, 1955, §5(b), permitted industry committee or any authorized subcommittee to hear witnesses and receive evidence only after due notice.

Subsec. (c). Act Aug. 12, 1955, §5(c), struck out provisions which applied to Administrator in determining classifications and minimum wage rates.

Subsec. (d). Act Aug. 12, 1955, §5(d), struck out provisions which required hearings to be held on recommendations of industry committee, and inserted provisions requiring publication of recommendations and providing that such recommendations should take effect 15 days after date of publication.

Subsec. (e). Act Aug. 12, 1955, §5(e), struck out provisions which required due notice of orders by publication in Federal Register and by other means as Administrator deemed reasonably calculated to give general notice to interested persons.

1949—Subsec. (a). Act Oct. 26, 1949, stated policy of chapter with regard to minimum wage rate of industries in Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands and limited application of section to such industries.

Subsec. (b). Act Oct. 26, 1949, required an industry committee in fixing minimum wage rates not to give a competitive advantage to industries in Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands over United States industries.

Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, struck out “for any industry” before “shall recommend” and substituted “that prescribed in paragraph (1) of section 206(a) of this title” for “40 cents an hour” within parenthesis in first sentence.

Subsec. (d). Act Oct. 26, 1949, reenacted subsec. (d) without change.

Subsecs. (e) to (g). Act Oct. 26, 1949, struck out subsec. (e) and redesignated subsecs. (f) and (g) as (e) and (f), respectively.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–151 effective Jan. 1, 1978, see section 15(a) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 4 of act Aug. 12, 1955, provided that the amendment made by that section is effective July 1, 1956.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Section 16(c) of act Oct. 26, 1949, provided that: “Any order, regulation, or interpretation of the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division or of the Secretary of Labor, and any agreement entered into by the Administrator or the Secretary, in effect under the provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [this chapter], on the effective date of this Act [ninety days from Oct. 26, 1949], shall remain in effect as an order, regulation, interpretation, or agreement of the Administrator or the Secretary, as the case may be, pursuant to this Act, except to the extent that any such order, regulation, interpretation, or agreement may be inconsistent with the provisions of this Act, or may from time to time be amended, modified, or rescinded by the Administrator or the Secretary, as the case may be, in accordance with the provisions of this Act.”

Joint Res. June 26, 1940, ch. 432, §3(d), 54 Stat. 616, provided as follows: “No wage orders issued by the Administrator pursuant to the recommendations of an industry committee made prior to the enactment of this joint resolution pursuant to section 8 (this section) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 shall after such enactment be applicable with respect to any employees engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands.”

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

The term “Secretary” as meaning the Secretary of Labor, see section 6 of act Aug. 12, 1955, set out as a note under section 204 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 205, 206, 210 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

For the purpose of any hearing or investigation provided for in this chapter, the provisions of sections 49 and 50 of title 15 (relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, papers, and documents), are made applicable to the jurisdiction, powers, and duties of the Administrator, the Secretary of Labor, and the industry committees.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §9, 52 Stat. 1065; 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1(b), eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095.)

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor and Administrator of Wage and Hour Division of Department of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Functions of all other officers of Department of Labor and functions of all agencies and employees of that Department, with exception of functions vested by Administrative Procedure Act (now covered by sections 551 et seq. and 701 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees) in hearing examiners employed by Department, transferred to Secretary of Labor, with power vested in him to authorize their performance or performance of any of his functions by any of those officers, agencies, and employees, by Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

“Secretary of Labor” substituted in text for “Chief of the Children's Bureau” by 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2. See Transfer of Functions note set out under section 203 of this title.

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 626, 2616 of this title.

(a) Any person aggrieved by an order of the Secretary issued under section 208 of this title may obtain a review of such order in the United States Court of Appeals for any circuit wherein such person resides or has his principal place of business, or in the United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia, by filing in such court, within 60 days after the entry of such order a written petition praying that the order of the Secretary be modified or set aside in whole or in part. A copy of such petition shall forthwith be transmitted by the clerk of the court to the Secretary, and thereupon the Secretary shall file in the court the record of the industry committee upon which the order complained of was entered, as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Upon the filing of such petition such court shall have exclusive jurisdiction to affirm, modify (including provision for the payment of an appropriate minimum wage rate), or set aside such order in whole or in part, so far as it is applicable to the petitioner. The review by the court shall be limited to questions of law, and findings of fact by such industry committee when supported by substantial evidence shall be conclusive. No objection to the order of the Secretary shall be considered by the court unless such objection shall have been urged before such industry committee or unless there were reasonable grounds for failure so to do. If application is made to the court for leave to adduce additional evidence, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the court that such additional evidence may materially affect the result of the proceeding and that there were reasonable grounds for failure to adduce such evidence in the proceedings before such industry committee, the court may order such additional evidence to be taken before an industry committee and to be adduced upon the hearing in such manner and upon such terms and conditions as to the court may seem proper. Such industry committee may modify the initial findings by reason of the additional evidence so taken, and shall file with the court such modified or new findings which if supported by substantial evidence shall be conclusive, and shall also file its recommendation, if any, for the modification or setting aside of the original order. The judgment and decree of the court shall be final, subject to review by the Supreme Court of the United States upon certiorari or certification as provided in section 1254 of title 28.

(b) The commencement of proceedings under subsection (a) of this section shall not, unless specifically ordered by the court, operate as a stay of the Administrator's order. The court shall not grant any stay of the order unless the person complaining of such order shall file in court an undertaking with a surety or sureties satisfactory to the court for the payment to the employees affected by the order, in the event such order is affirmed, of the amount by which the compensation such employees are entitled to receive under the order exceeds the compensation they actually receive while such stay is in effect.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §10, 52 Stat. 1065; Aug. 12, 1955, ch. 867, §5(f), 69 Stat. 712; Pub. L. 85–791, §22, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 948; Pub. L. 93–259, §5(c)(2), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 58.)

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–259 inserted “(including provision for the payment of an appropriate minimum wage rate)” in third sentence after “modify”.

1958—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 85–791 substituted “transmitted by the clerk of the court to the Secretary, and thereupon the Secretary shall file in the court the record of the industry committee” for “served upon the Secretary, and thereupon the Secretary shall certify and file in the court a transcript of the record” in second sentence, and inserted “as provided in section 2112 of title 28”, and substituted “petition” for “transcript” in third sentence.

1955—Subsec. (a). Act Aug. 12, 1955, amended subsec. (a) generally to make subsection conform to new procedure applicable to Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

The term “Secretary” as meaning the Secretary of Labor, see section 6 of act Aug. 12, 1955, set out as a note under section 204 of this title.

Employees performing services within foreign country or certain territory under jurisdiction of United States as not subject to provisions of this section, see section 213 of this title.

The Administrator or his designated representatives may investigate and gather data regarding the wages, hours, and other conditions and practices of employment in any industry subject to this chapter, and may enter and inspect such places and such records (and make such transcriptions thereof), question such employees, and investigate such facts, conditions, practices, or matters as he may deem necessary or appropriate to determine whether any person has violated any provision of this chapter, or which may aid in the enforcement of the provisions of this chapter. Except as provided in section 212 of this title and in subsection (b) of this section, the Administrator shall utilize the bureaus and divisions of the Department of Labor for all the investigations and inspections necessary under this section. Except as provided in section 212 of this title, the Administrator shall bring all actions under section 217 of this title to restrain violations of this chapter.

With the consent and cooperation of State agencies charged with the administration of State labor laws, the Administrator and the Secretary of Labor may, for the purpose of carrying out their respective functions and duties under this chapter, utilize the services of State and local agencies and their employees and, notwithstanding any other provision of law, may reimburse such State and local agencies and their employees for services rendered for such purposes.

Every employer subject to any provision of this chapter or of any order issued under this chapter shall make, keep, and preserve such records of the persons employed by him and of the wages, hours, and other conditions and practices of employment maintained by him, and shall preserve such records for such periods of time, and shall make such reports therefrom to the Administrator as he shall prescribe by regulation or order as necessary or appropriate for the enforcement of the provisions of this chapter or the regulations or orders thereunder. The employer of an employee who performs substitute work described in section 207(p)(3) of this title may not be required under this subsection to keep a record of the hours of the substitute work.

The Administrator is authorized to make such regulations and orders regulating, restricting, or prohibiting industrial homework as are necessary or appropriate to prevent the circumvention or evasion of and to safeguard the minimum wage rate prescribed in this chapter, and all existing regulations or orders of the Administrator relating to industrial homework are continued in full force and effect.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §11, 52 Stat. 1066; 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1(b), eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §9, 63 Stat. 916; Pub. L. 99–150, §3(c)(2), Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 789.)

1985—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–150 inserted “The employer of an employee who performs substitute work described in section 207(p)(3) of this title may not be required under this subsection to keep a record of the hours of the substitute work.”

1949—Subsec. (d). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added subsec. (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–150 effective Apr. 15, 1986, see section 6 of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by subsecs. (a), (b), and (c) of this section in Secretary of Labor and Administrator of Wage and Hour Division of Department of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

“Secretary of Labor” substituted for “Chief of the Children's Bureau” in subsec. (b) by 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2. See note set out under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–150 not to affect liability of certain public agencies under section 216 of this title for violation of this section occurring before Apr. 15, 1986, see section 7 of Pub. L. 99–150, set out as a note under section 216 of this title.

The term “Administrator” as meaning the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, see section 204 of this title.

Attendance of witnesses and production of books, papers, and documents, see section 209 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 212, 215, 626, 2616 of this title.

No producer, manufacturer, or dealer shall ship or deliver for shipment in commerce any goods produced in an establishment situated in the United States in or about which within thirty days prior to the removal of such goods therefrom any oppressive child labor has been employed: *Provided*, That any such shipment or delivery for shipment of such goods by a purchaser who acquired them in good faith in reliance on written assurance from the producer, manufacturer, or dealer that the goods were produced in compliance with the requirements of this section, and who acquired such goods for value without notice of any such violation, shall not be deemed prohibited by this subsection: *And provided further*, That a prosecution and conviction of a defendant for the shipment or delivery for shipment of any goods under the conditions herein prohibited shall be a bar to any further prosecution against the same defendant for shipments or deliveries for shipment of any such goods before the beginning of said prosecution.

The Secretary of Labor or any of his authorized representatives, shall make all investigations and inspections under section 211(a) of this title with respect to the employment of minors, and, subject to the direction and control of the Attorney General, shall bring all actions under section 217 of this title to enjoin any act or practice which is unlawful by reason of the existence of oppressive child labor, and shall administer all other provisions of this chapter relating to oppressive child labor.

No employer shall employ any oppressive child labor in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce or in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce.

In order to carry out the objectives of this section, the Secretary may by regulation require employers to obtain from any employee proof of age.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §12, 52 Stat. 1067; 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1(b), eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §10, 63 Stat. 917; Pub. L. 87–30, §8, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 70; Pub. L. 93–259, §25(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 72.)

1974—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–259 added subsec. (d).

1961—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 87–30 inserted “or in any enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce”.

1949—Subsec. (a). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §10(a), struck out effective date at beginning of subsection and inserted proviso excepting good faith purchaser of goods produced by oppressive child labor.

Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §10(b), added subsec. (c).

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

“Secretary of Labor” substituted for “Chief of the Children's Bureau in the Department of Labor” in subsec. (b) by 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2. See note set out under section 203 of this title.

Employees performing services within foreign country or certain territory under jurisdiction of United States as not subject to provisions of this section, see section 213 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 211, 213, 215, 216 of this title; title 2 section 1313; title 3 section 413.

The provisions of sections 206 (except subsection (d) in the case of paragraph (1) of this subsection) and section 207 of this title shall not apply with respect to—

(1) any employee employed in a bona fide executive, administrative, or professional capacity (including any employee employed in the capacity of academic administrative personnel or teacher in elementary or secondary schools), or in the capacity of outside salesman (as such terms are defined and delimited from time to time by regulations of the Secretary, subject to the provisions of subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5, except that an employee of a retail or service establishment shall not be excluded from the definition of employee employed in a bona fide executive or administrative capacity because of the number of hours in his workweek which he devotes to activities not directly or closely related to the performance of executive or administrative activities, if less than 40 per centum of his hours worked in the workweek are devoted to such activities); or

(2) Repealed. Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c)(1), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 939.

(3) any employee employed by an establishment which is an amusement or recreational establishment organized camp, or religious or non-profit educational conference center, if (A) it does not operate for more than seven months in any calendar year, or (B) during the preceding calendar year, its average receipts for any six months of such year were not more than 331/3 per centum of its average receipts for the other six months of such year, except that the exemption from sections 206 and 207 of this title provided by this paragraph does not apply with respect to any employee of a private entity engaged in providing services or facilities (other than, in the case of the exemption from section 206 of this title, a private entity engaged in providing services and facilities directly related to skiing) in a national park or a national forest, or on land in the National Wildlife Refuge System, under a contract with the Secretary of the Interior or the Secretary of Agriculture; or

(4) Repealed. Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c)(1), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 939.

(5) any employee employed in the catching, taking, propagating, harvesting, cultivating, or farming of any kind of fish, shellfish, crustacea, sponges, seaweeds, or other aquatic forms of animal and vegetable life, or in the first processing, canning or packing such marine products at sea as an incident to, or in conjunction with, such fishing operations, including the going to and returning from work and loading and unloading when performed by any such employee; or

(6) any employee employed in agriculture (A) if such employee is employed by an employer who did not, during any calendar quarter during the preceding calendar year, use more than five hundred man-days of agricultural labor, (B) if such employee is the parent, spouse, child, or other member of his employer's immediate family, (C) if such employee (i) is employed as a hand harvest laborer and is paid on a piece rate basis in an operation which has been, and is customarily and generally recognized as having been, paid on a piece rate basis in the region of employment, (ii) commutes daily from his permanent residence to the farm on which he is so employed, and (iii) has been employed in agriculture less than thirteen weeks during the preceding calendar year, (D) if such employee (other than an employee described in clause (C) of this subsection) (i) is sixteen years of age or under and is employed as a hand harvest laborer, is paid on a piece rate basis in an operation which has been, and is customarily and generally recognized as having been, paid on a piece rate basis in the region of employment, (ii) is employed on the same farm as his parent or person standing in the place of his parent, and (iii) is paid at the same piece rate as employees over age sixteen are paid on the same farm, or (E) if such employee is principally engaged in the range production of livestock; or

(7) any employee to the extent that such employee is exempted by regulations, order, or certificate of the Secretary issued under section 214 of this title; or

(8) any employee employed in connection with the publication of any weekly, semiweekly, or daily newspaper with a circulation of less than four thousand the major part of which circulation is within the county where published or counties contiguous thereto; or

(9) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §23(a)(1), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 69.

(10) any switchboard operator employed by an independently owned public telephone company which has not more than seven hundred and fifty stations; or

(11) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §10(a), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 63.

(12) any employee employed as a seaman on a vessel other than an American vessel; or

(13), (14) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §§9(b)(1), 23(b)(1), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 63, 69.

(15) any employee employed on a casual basis in domestic service employment to provide babysitting services or any employee employed in domestic service employment to provide companionship services for individuals who (because of age or infirmity) are unable to care for themselves (as such terms are defined and delimited by regulations of the Secretary); or

(16) a criminal investigator who is paid availability pay under section 5545a of title 5; or

(17) any employee who is a computer systems analyst, computer programmer, software engineer, or other similarly skilled worker, whose primary duty is—

(A) the application of systems analysis techniques and procedures, including consulting with users, to determine hardware, software, or system functional specifications;

(B) the design, development, documentation, analysis, creation, testing, or modification of computer systems or programs, including prototypes, based on and related to user or system design specifications;

(C) the design, documentation, testing, creation, or modification of computer programs related to machine operating systems; or

(D) a combination of duties described in subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) the performance of which requires the same level of skills, and

who, in the case of an employee who is compensated on an hourly basis, is compensated at a rate of not less than $27.63 an hour.

The provisions of section 207 of this title shall not apply with respect to—

(1) any employee with respect to whom the Secretary of Transportation has power to establish qualifications and maximum hours of service pursuant to the provisions of section 31502 of title 49; or

(2) any employee of an employer engaged in the operation of a rail carrier subject to part A of subtitle IV of title 49; or

(3) any employee of a carrier by air subject to the provisions of title II of the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 181 et seq.]; or

(4) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §11(c), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 64.

(5) any individual employed as an outside buyer of poultry, eggs, cream, or milk, in their raw or natural state; or

(6) any employee employed as a seaman; or

(7) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §21(b)(3), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 68.

(8) Repealed. Pub. L. 95–151, §14(b), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1252.

(9) any employee employed as an announcer, news editor, or chief engineer by a radio or television station the major studio of which is located (A) in a city or town of one hundred thousand population or less, according to the latest available decennial census figures as compiled by the Bureau of the Census, except where such city or town is part of a standard metropolitan statistical area, as defined and designated by the Office of Management and Budget, which has a total population in excess of one hundred thousand, or (B) in a city or town of twenty-five thousand population or less, which is part of such an area but is at least 40 airline miles from the principal city in such area; or

(10)(A) any salesman, partsman, or mechanic primarily engaged in selling or servicing automobiles, trucks, or farm implements, if he is employed by a nonmanufacturing establishment primarily engaged in the business of selling such vehicles or implements to ultimate purchasers; or

(B) any salesman primarily engaged in selling trailers, boats, or aircraft, if he is employed by a nonmanufacturing establishment primarily engaged in the business of selling trailers, boats, or aircraft to ultimate purchasers; or

(11) any employee employed as a driver or driver's helper making local deliveries, who is compensated for such employment on the basis of trip rates, or other delivery payment plan, if the Secretary shall find that such plan has the general purpose and effect of reducing hours worked by such employees to, or below, the maximum workweek applicable to them under section 207(a) of this title; or

(12) any employee employed in agriculture or in connection with the operation or maintenance of ditches, canals, reservoirs, or waterways, not owned or operated for profit, or operated on a sharecrop basis, and which are used exclusively for supply and storing of water, at least 90 percent of which was ultimately delivered for agricultural purposes during the preceding calendar year; or

(13) any employee with respect to his employment in agriculture by a farmer, notwithstanding other employment of such employee in connection with livestock auction operations in which such farmer is engaged as an adjunct to the raising of livestock, either on his own account or in conjunction with other farmers, if such employee (A) is primarily employed during his workweek in agriculture by such farmer, and (B) is paid for his employment in connection with such livestock auction operations at a wage rate not less than that prescribed by section 206(a)(1) of this title; or

(14) any employee employed within the area of production (as defined by the Secretary) by an establishment commonly recognized as a country elevator, including such an establishment which sells products and services used in the operation of a farm, if no more than five employees are employed in the establishment in such operations; or

(15) any employee engaged in the processing of maple sap into sugar (other than refined sugar) or syrup; or

(16) any employee engaged (A) in the transportation and preparation for transportation of fruits or vegetables, whether or not performed by the farmer, from the farm to a place of first processing or first marketing within the same State, or (B) in transportation, whether or not performed by the farmer, between the farm and any point within the same State of persons employed or to be employed in the harvesting of fruits or vegetables; or

(17) any driver employed by an employer engaged in the business of operating taxicabs; or

(18), (19) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §§15(c), 16(b), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 65.

(20) any employee of a public agency who in any workweek is employed in fire protection activities or any employee of a public agency who in any workweek is employed in law enforcement activities (including security personnel in correctional institutions), if the public agency employs during the workweek less than 5 employees in fire protection or law enforcement activities, as the case may be; or

(21) any employee who is employed in domestic service in a household and who resides in such household; or

(22) Repealed. Pub. L. 95–151, §5, Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1249.

(23) Repealed. Pub. L. 93–259, §10(b)(3), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 64.

(24) any employee who is employed with his spouse by a nonprofit educational institution to serve as the parents of children—

(A) who are orphans or one of whose natural parents is deceased, or

(B) who are enrolled in such institution and reside in residential facilities of the institution,

while such children are in residence at such institution, if such employee and his spouse reside in such facilities, receive, without cost, board and lodging from such institution, and are together compensated, on a cash basis, at an annual rate of not less than $10,000; or

(25), (26) Repealed. Pub. L. 95–151, §§6(a), 7(a), Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1249, 1250.

(27) any employee employed by an establishment which is a motion picture theater; or

(28) any employee employed in planting or tending trees, cruising, surveying, or felling timber, or in preparing or transporting logs or other forestry products to the mill, processing plant, railroad, or other transportation terminal, if the number of employees employed by his employer in such forestry or lumbering operations does not exceed eight;

(29) any employee of an amusement or recreational establishment located in a national park or national forest or on land in the National Wildlife Refuge System if such employee (A) is an employee of a private entity engaged in providing services or facilities in a national park or national forest, or on land in the National Wildlife Refuge System, under a contract with the Secretary of the Interior or the Secretary of Agriculture, and (B) receives compensation for employment in excess of fifty-six hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed; or

(30) a criminal investigator who is paid availability pay under section 5545a of title 5.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2) or (4), the provisions of section 212 of this title relating to child labor shall not apply to any employee employed in agriculture outside of school hours for the school district where such employee is living while he is so employed, if such employee—

(A) is less than twelve years of age and (i) is employed by his parent, or by a person standing in the place of his parent, on a farm owned or operated by such parent or person, or (ii) is employed, with the consent of his parent or person standing in the place of his parent, on a farm, none of the employees of which are (because of subsection (a)(6)(A) of this section) required to be paid at the wage rate prescribed by section 206(a)(5) of this title,

(B) is twelve years or thirteen years of age and (i) such employment is with the consent of his parent or person standing in the place of his parent, or (ii) his parent or such person is employed on the same farm as such employee, or

(C) is fourteen years of age or older.

(2) The provisions of section 212 of this title relating to child labor shall apply to an employee below the age of sixteen employed in agriculture in an occupation that the Secretary of Labor finds and declares to be particularly hazardous for the employment of children below the age of sixteen, except where such employee is employed by his parent or by a person standing in the place of his parent on a farm owned or operated by such parent or person.

(3) The provisions of section 212 of this title relating to child labor shall not apply to any child employed as an actor or performer in motion pictures or theatrical productions, or in radio or television productions.

(4)(A) An employer or group of employers may apply to the Secretary for a waiver of the application of section 212 of this title to the employment for not more than eight weeks in any calendar year of individuals who are less than twelve years of age, but not less than ten years of age, as hand harvest laborers in an agricultural operation which has been, and is customarily and generally recognized as being, paid on a piece rate basis in the region in which such individuals would be employed. The Secretary may not grant such a waiver unless he finds, based on objective data submitted by the applicant, that—

(i) the crop to be harvested is one with a particularly short harvesting season and the application of section 212 of this title would cause severe economic disruption in the industry of the employer or group of employers applying for the waiver;

(ii) the employment of the individuals to whom the waiver would apply would not be deleterious to their health or well-being;

(iii) the level and type of pesticides and other chemicals used would not have an adverse effect on the health or well-being of the individuals to whom the waiver would apply;

(iv) individuals age twelve and above are not available for such employment; and

(v) the industry of such employer or group of employers has traditionally and substantially employed individuals under twelve years of age without displacing substantial job opportunities for individuals over sixteen years of age.

(B) Any waiver granted by the Secretary under subparagraph (A) shall require that—

(i) the individuals employed under such waiver be employed outside of school hours for the school district where they are living while so employed;

(ii) such individuals while so employed commute daily from their permanent residence to the farm on which they are so employed; and

(iii) such individuals be employed under such waiver (I) for not more than eight weeks between June 1 and October 15 of any calendar year, and (II) in accordance with such other terms and conditions as the Secretary shall prescribe for such individuals’ protection.

(5)(A) In the administration and enforcement of the child labor provisions of this chapter, employees who are 16 and 17 years of age shall be permitted to load materials into, but not operate or unload materials from, scrap paper balers and paper box compactors—

(i) that are safe for 16- and 17-year-old employees loading the scrap paper balers or paper box compactors; and

(ii) that cannot be operated while being loaded.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), scrap paper balers and paper box compactors shall be considered safe for 16- or 17-year-old employees to load only if—

(i)(I) the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors meet the American National Standards Institute's Standard ANSI Z245.5–1990 for scrap paper balers and Standard ANSI Z245.2–1992 for paper box compactors; or

(II) the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors meet an applicable standard that is adopted by the American National Standards Institute after August 6, 1996, and that is certified by the Secretary to be at least as protective of the safety of minors as the standard described in subclause (I);

(ii) the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors include an on-off switch incorporating a key-lock or other system and the control of the system is maintained in the custody of employees who are 18 years of age or older;

(iii) the on-off switch of the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors is maintained in an off position when the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors are not in operation; and

(iv) the employer of 16- and 17-year-old employees provides notice, and posts a notice, on the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors stating that—

(I) the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors meet the applicable standard described in clause (i);

(II) 16- and 17-year-old employees may only load the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors; and

(III) any employee under the age of 18 may not operate or unload the scrap paper balers and paper box compactors.

The Secretary shall publish in the Federal Register a standard that is adopted by the American National Standards Institute for scrap paper balers or paper box compactors and certified by the Secretary to be protective of the safety of minors under clause (i)(II).

(C)(i) Employers shall prepare and submit to the Secretary reports—

(I) on any injury to an employee under the age of 18 that requires medical treatment (other than first aid) resulting from the employee's contact with a scrap paper baler or paper box compactor during the loading, operation, or unloading of the baler or compactor; and

(II) on any fatality of an employee under the age of 18 resulting from the employee's contact with a scrap paper baler or paper box compactor during the loading, operation, or unloading of the baler or compactor.

(ii) The reports described in clause (i) shall be used by the Secretary to determine whether or not the implementation of subparagraph (A) has had any effect on the safety of children.

(iii) The reports described in clause (i) shall provide—

(I) the name, telephone number, and address of the employer and the address of the place of employment where the incident occurred;

(II) the name, telephone number, and address of the employee who suffered an injury or death as a result of the incident;

(III) the date of the incident;

(IV) a description of the injury and a narrative describing how the incident occurred; and

(V) the name of the manufacturer and the model number of the scrap paper baler or paper box compactor involved in the incident.

(iv) The reports described in clause (i) shall be submitted to the Secretary promptly, but not later than 10 days after the date on which an incident relating to an injury or death occurred.

(v) The Secretary may not rely solely on the reports described in clause (i) as the basis for making a determination that any of the employers described in clause (i) has violated a provision of section 212 of this title relating to oppressive child labor or a regulation or order issued pursuant to section 212 of this title. The Secretary shall, prior to making such a determination, conduct an investigation and inspection in accordance with section 212(b) of this title.

(vi) The reporting requirements of this subparagraph shall expire 2 years after August 6, 1996.

The provisions of sections 206, 207, and 212 of this title shall not apply with respect to any employee engaged in the delivery of newspapers to the consumer or to any homeworker engaged in the making of wreaths composed principally of natural holly, pine, cedar, or other evergreens (including the harvesting of the evergreens or other forest products used in making such wreaths).

The provisions of section 207 of this title shall not apply with respect to employees for whom the Secretary of Labor is authorized to establish minimum wage rates as provided in section 206(a)(3) of this title, except with respect to employees for whom such rates are in effect; and with respect to such employees the Secretary may make rules and regulations providing reasonable limitations and allowing reasonable variations, tolerances, and exemptions to and from any or all of the provisions of section 207 of this title if he shall find, after a public hearing on the matter, and taking into account the factors set forth in section 206(a)(3) of this title, that economic conditions warrant such action.

The provisions of sections 206, 207, 211, and 212 of this title shall not apply with respect to any employee whose services during the workweek are performed in a workplace within a foreign country or within territory under the jurisdiction of the United States other than the following: a State of the United States; the District of Columbia; Puerto Rico; the Virgin Islands; outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462) [43 U.S.C. 1331 et seq.]; American Samoa; Guam; Wake Island; Eniwetok Atoll; Kwajalein Atoll; and Johnston Island.

The exemption from section 206 of this title provided by paragraph (6) of subsection (a) of this section shall not apply with respect to any employee employed by an establishment (1) which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, another establishment the activities of which are not related for a common business purpose to, but materially support the activities of the establishment employing such employee; and (2) whose annual gross volume of sales made or business done, when combined with the annual gross volume of sales made or business done by each establishment which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the establishment employing such employee, exceeds $10,000,000 (exclusive of excise taxes at the retail level which are separately stated).

The provisions of section 207 of this title shall not apply for a period or periods of not more than fourteen workweeks in the aggregate in any calendar year to any employee who—

(1) is employed by such employer—

(A) exclusively to provide services necessary and incidental to the ginning of cotton in an establishment primarily engaged in the ginning of cotton;

(B) exclusively to provide services necessary and incidental to the receiving, handling, and storing of raw cotton and the compressing of raw cotton when performed at a cotton warehouse or compress-warehouse facility, other than one operated in conjunction with a cotton mill, primarily engaged in storing and compressing;

(C) exclusively to provide services necessary and incidental to the receiving, handling, storing, and processing of cottonseed in an establishment primarily engaged in the receiving, handling, storing, and processing of cottonseed; or

(D) exclusively to provide services necessary and incidental to the processing of sugar cane or sugar beets in an establishment primarily engaged in the processing of sugar cane or sugar beets; and

(2) receives for—

(A) such employment by such employer which is in excess of ten hours in any workday, and

(B) such employment by such employer which is in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek,

compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.

Any employer who receives an exemption under this subsection shall not be eligible for any other exemption under this section or section 207 of this title.

The provisions of section 207 of this title shall not apply for a period or periods of not more than fourteen workweeks in the aggregate in any period of fifty-two consecutive weeks to any employee who—

(1) is engaged in the ginning of cotton for market in any place of employment located in a county where cotton is grown in commercial quantities; and

(2) receives for any such employment during such workweeks—

(A) in excess of ten hours in any workday, and

(B) in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek,

compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed. No week included in any fifty-two week period for purposes of the preceding sentence may be included for such purposes in any other fifty-two week period.

The provisions of section 207 of this title shall not apply for a period or periods of not more than fourteen workweeks in the aggregate in any period of fifty-two consecutive weeks to any employee who—

(1) is engaged in the processing of sugar beets, sugar beet molasses, or sugar cane into sugar (other than refined sugar) or syrup; and

(2) receives for any such employment during such workweeks—

(A) in excess of ten hours in any workday, and

(B) in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek,

compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed. No week included in any fifty-two week period for purposes of the preceding sentence may be included for such purposes in any other fifty-two week period.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §13, 52 Stat. 1067; Aug. 9, 1939, ch. 605, 53 Stat. 1266; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §11, 63 Stat. 917; Aug. 8, 1956, ch. 1035, §3, 70 Stat. 1118; Pub. L. 85–231, §1(1), Aug. 30, 1957, 71 Stat. 514; Pub. L. 86–624, §21(b), July 12, 1960, 74 Stat. 417; Pub. L. 87–30, §§9, 10, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 71, 74; Pub. L. 89–601, title II, §§201–204(a), (b), 205–212(a), 213, 214, 215(b), (c), Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 833–838; Pub. L. 89–670, §8(e), Oct. 15, 1966, 80 Stat. 943; 1970 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §102, eff. July 1, 1970, 35 F.R. 7959, 84 Stat. 2085; Pub. L. 92–318, title IX, §906(b)(1), June 23, 1972, 86 Stat. 375; Pub. L. 93–259, §§6(c)(2), 7(b)(3), (4), 8, 9(b), 10, 11, 12(a), 13(a)–(d), 14–18, 20(a)–(c), 21(b), 22, 23, 25(b), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 61–69, 72; Pub. L. 95–151, §§4–8, 9(d), 11, 14, Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1249, 1250–1252; Pub. L. 96–70, title I, §1225(a), Sept. 27, 1979, 93 Stat. 468; Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 939; Pub. L. 103–329, title VI, §633(d), Sept. 30, 1994, 108 Stat. 2428; Pub. L. 104–88, title III, §340, Dec. 29, 1995, 109 Stat. 955; Pub. L. 104–174, §1, Aug. 6, 1996, 110 Stat. 1553; Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2105(a), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1929; Pub. L. 105–78, title I, §105, Nov. 13, 1997, 111 Stat. 1477.)

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(3), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended. Title II of the Railway Labor Act was added by act Apr. 10, 1936, ch. 166, 49 Stat. 1189, and is classified generally to subchapter II (§181 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, referred to in subsec. (f), is act Aug. 7, 1953, ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter III (§1331 et seq.) of chapter 29 of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1331 of Title 43 and Tables.

In subsec. (a)(1), “subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5” substituted for “the Administrative Procedure Act” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In subsec. (b)(1), “section 31502 of title 49” substituted for “section 3102 of title 49” on authority of Pub. L. 103–272, §§1(c), (e), 6(b), July 5, 1994, 108 Stat. 745, 862, 1029, 1378. Previously, “section 3102 of title 49” substituted for “section 204 of the Motor Carrier Act, 1935 [49 U.S.C. 304]”, on authority of Pub. L. 97–449, §6(b), Jan. 12, 1983, 96 Stat. 2443, the first section of which enacted subtitle I (§101 et seq.) and chapter 31 (§3101 et seq.) of subtitle II of Title 49, Transportation.

1997—Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 105–78 substituted “water, at least 90 percent of which was ultimately delivered for agricultural purposes during the preceding calendar year” for “water for agricultural purposes”.

1996—Subsec. (a)(17). Pub. L. 104–188 added par. (17).

Subsec. (c)(5). Pub. L. 104–174 added par. (5).

1995—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 104–88 substituted “rail carrier subject to part A of subtitle IV of title 49” for “common carrier by rail and subject to the provisions of part I of the Interstate Commerce Act”.

1994—Subsec. (a)(16). Pub. L. 103–329, §633(d)(1), added par. (16).

Subsec. (b)(30). Pub. L. 103–329, §633(d)(2), added par. (30).

1989—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c)(1), struck out par. (2) which related to employees employed by a retail or service establishment.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c)(1), struck out par. (4) which related to employees employed by an establishment which qualified as an exempt retail establishment under clause (2) of this subsection and was recognized as a retail establishment in the particular industry notwithstanding that such establishment made or processed at the retail establishment the goods that it sold.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 101–157, §3(c)(2), substituted “provided by paragraph (6) of subsection (a) of this section” for “provided by paragraphs (2) and (6) of subsection (a) of this section” and struck out before period at end “, except that the exemption from section 206 of this title provided by paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section shall apply with respect to any establishment described in this subsection which has an annual dollar volume of sales which would permit it to qualify for the exemption provided in paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section if it were in an enterprise described in section 203(s) of this title”.

1979—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 96–70 struck out “; and the Canal Zone” after “Johnston Island”.

1977—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 95–151, §9(d), substituted “section 203(s)(5)” for “section 203(s)(4)”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 95–151, §§4(a), 11, inserted “organized camp, or religious or non-profit educational conference center,” after “recreational establishment,”, and inserted provisions relating to applicability of exemption from sections 206 and 207 of this title authorized by this paragraph for private employees in national parks, etc.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 95–151, §14(a), substituted “forty-four” for “forty-six”.

Pub. L. 95–151, §14(b), struck out par. (8) which related to exemption of hotel, motel, and restaurant employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979.

Subsec. (b)(22). Pub. L. 95–151, §5, struck out par. (22) which related to exemption of shade-grown tobacco employees.

Subsec. (b)(25). Pub. L. 95–151, §6(a), struck out par. (25) which related to exemption of cotton ginning employees. See subsec. (i) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(26). Pub. L. 95–151, §7(a), struck out par. (26) which related to exemption of sugar employees. See subsec. (j) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(29). Pub. L. 95–151, §4(b), added par. (29).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–151, §8, in par. (1) inserted reference to par. (4), and added par. (4).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 95–151, §6(b), added subsec. (i).

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 95–151, §7(b), added subsec. (j).

1974—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 93–259, §8(a), substituted “$225,000” for “$250,000” effective Jan. 1, 1975, Pub. L. 93–259, §8(b), substituted “$200,000” for “$225,000” effective Jan. 1, 1976. Pub. L. 93–259, §8(c), struck out “or such establishment has an annual dollar volume of sales which is less than $200,000 (exclusive of excise taxes at the retail level which are separately stated)” after “section 203(s) of this title” effective Jan. 1, 1977.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 93–259, §23(a)(1), repealed exemption provision respecting any employee employed by an establishment which is a motion picture theater. See subsec. (b)(27) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 93–259, §10(a), repealed exemption provision respecting any employee or proprietor in a retail or service establishment which qualifies as an exempt retail or service establishment under former par. (2) of subsec. (a) with respect to whom provisions of sections 206 and 207 of this title would not otherwise apply, engaged in handling telegraphic messages for public under an agency or contract arrangement with a telegraph company where telegraph message revenue of such agency does not exceed $500 a month.

Subsec. (a)(13). Pub. L. 93–259, §23(b)(1), repealed exemption provision respecting any employee employed in planting or tending trees, cruising, surveying, or felling timber, or in preparing or transporting logs or other forestry products to mill, processing plant, railroad, or other transportation terminal, if number of employees employed by his employer in such forestry or lumbering operations does not exceed eight. See subsec. (b)(28) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(14). Pub. L. 93–259, §9(b)(1), repealed exemption provision respecting any agricultural employee employed in the growing and harvesting of shade-grown tobacco who is engaged in processing (including, but not limited to, drying, curing, fermenting, bulking, rebulking, sorting, grading, aging, and baling) of such tobacco, prior to the stemming process, for use as cigar wrapper tobacco. See subsec. (b)(22) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 93–259, §7(b)(3), added par. (15).

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 93–259, §23(c), amended par. (2) (insofar as it relates to pipeline employees), inserting “engaged in the operation of a common carrier by rail and” after “employer”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 93–259, §11(a), effective May 1, 1974, inserted “who is” after “employee” and “, and who receives compensation for employment in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed” before the semi-colon. Pub. L. 93–259, §11(b), substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-eight hours” effective one year after May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §11(c), repealed subsec. (b)(4) effective two years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 93–259, §21(b)(1), substituted “(regardless of whether or not such railway or carrier is public or private or operated for profit or not for profit), if such employee receives compensation for employment in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed” for “, if the rates and services of such railway or carrier are subject to regulation by a State or local agency” effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §21(b)(2), substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-eight hours” effective one year after May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §21(b)(3) repealed subsec. (b)(7) effective two years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 93–259, §§12(a), 13(a), effective May 1, 1974, insofar as relating to nursing home employees, struck out exemption provision respecting any employee who is employed by an establishment which is an institution (other than a hospital) primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, or the mentally ill or defective who reside on the premises, and receives compensation for employment in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed, and insofar as relating to a hotel, motel, and restaurant employees, substituted “(A) any employee (other than an employee of a hotel or motel who performs maid or custodial services) who is” for “any employee”, inserted before the semicolon “and who receives compensation for employment in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed”, and added subpar. (B). Pub. L. 93–259, §13(b), effective one year after May 1, 1974, substituted “forty-six hours” for “forty-eight hours” in subparas. (A) and (B). Pub. L. 93–259, §13(c), effective two years after May 1, 1974, substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-six hours” in subpar. (B). Pub. L. 93–259, §13(d), repealed subsec. (b)(8)(B) and eliminated the designation (A), effective three years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(10). Pub. L. 93–259, §14, incorporated existing paragraph in provisions designated as subpar. (A), struck out from the list references to trailers and aircraft, inserted reference to implements, and added subpar. (B) incorporating references to trailers and aircraft.

Subsec. (b)(15). Pub. L. 93–259, §20(a), struck out exemption provision respecting any employee engaged in ginning of cotton for market, in any place of employment located in a county where cotton is grown in commercial quantities or in the processing of sugar beets, sugar-beet molasses, and sugarcane into sugar. See subsec. (b)(25) and (26) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(18). Pub. L. 93–259, §15(a), effective May 1, 1974, inserted “and who receives compensation for employment in excess of forty-eight hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed.” Pub. L. 93–259, §15(b), effective one year after May 1, 1974, substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-eight hours.” Pub. L. 93–259, §15(c), repealed par. (18) effective two years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(19). Pub. L. 93–259, §16(a), effective one year after May 1, 1974, substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-eight hours”. Pub. L. 93–259, §16(b), repealed par. (19), effective two years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(20). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(2)(A), added par. (20) effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §6(c)(2)(B), effective Jan. 1, 1975, made maximum hours provisions inapplicable during any workweek to any employee of a public agency employing during the workweek less than 5 employees.

Subsec. (b)(21). Pub. L. 93–259, §7(b)(4), added par. (21).

Subsec. (b)(22). Pub. L. 93–259, §9(b)(2), added par. (22).

Subsec. (b)(23). Pub. L. 93–259, §10(b)(1), added par. (23), effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §10(b)(2), substituted “forty-four hours” for “forty-eight hours” effective one year after May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §10(b)(3), repealed par. (23) effective two years after May 1, 1974.

Subsec. (b)(24). Pub. L. 93–259, §17, added par. (24).

Subsec. (b)(25). Pub. L. 93–259, §20(b)(1), added par. (25) effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §20(b)(2), effective Jan. 1, 1975, substituted “sixty-six” for “seventy-two” in subpar. (A), “sixty” for “sixty-four” in subpar. (B), and “forty-six hours in any workweek for not more than two workweeks in that year, and” for “forty-eight hours in any other workweek in that year,” in subpar. (D), and added subpar. (E). Pub. L. 93–259, §20(b)(3), effective Jan. 1, 1976, substituted “sixty” for “sixty-six”, “fifty-six” for “sixty”, “forty-eight” for “fifty”, “forty-four” for “forty-six”, and “forty” for “forty-four”.

Subsec. (b)(26). Pub. L. 93–259, §20(c)(1), added par. (26) effective May 1, 1974. Pub. L. 93–259, §20(c)(2), effective Jan. 1, 1975, substituted “sixty-six” for “seventy-two” in subpar. (A), “sixty” for “sixty-four” in subpar. (B), and “forty-six hours in any workweek for not more than two workweeks in that year, and” for “forty-eight hours in any other workweek in that year,” in subpar. (D), and added subpar. (E). Pub. L. 93–259, §20(c)(3), effective Jan. 1, 1976, substituted “sixty” for “sixty-six”, “fifty-six” for “sixty”, “forty-eight” for “fifty”, “forty-four” for “forty-six”, and “forty” for “forty-four”.

Subsec. (b)(27). Pub. L. 93–259, §23(a)(2), added par. (27).

Subsec. (b)(28). Pub. L. 93–259, §23(b)(2), added par. (28).

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 93–259, §25(b), amended par. (1) generally, striking out “with respect” after “shall not apply”, inserting “, if such employee—”, and adding subpars. (A) to (C).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 93–259, §18, added subsec. (g).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 93–259, §22, added subsec. (h).

1972—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 92–318 inserted “(except subsection (d) in the case of paragraph (1) of this subsection)” after introductory text “sections 206”.

1966—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 89–601, §214, inserted “(including any employee employed in the capacity of academic administrative personnel or teacher in elementary or secondary schools)” after “professional capacity”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 89–601, §201(a), revised the retail or service establishment exemption so as to exempt employees of a retail or service establishment (other than an establishment or employee engaged in laundering or drycleaning or an establishment engaged in the operation of a hospital, school, or institution specifically included in the definition of the term “enterprise engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce”) if more than 50 per centum of the establishment's annual dollar volume of sales of goods or services is made within the state in which the establishment is located and the establishment is not an enterprise described in section 203(s) of this title or the establishment has an annual dollar volume of sales which is less than $250,000.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 89–601, §§201(b)(2), 202, repealed par. (3) relating to employees of laundry, cleaning, and fabric or clothing repair establishments doing more than 50 per centum of their annual dollar volume of business within the state in which the establishment is located and enacted a new par. (3) relating to employees of amusement or recreational establishments which do not operate for more than seven months in any calendar year or which had receipts over a six-month period which were not more than 331/3 per centum of its average receipts for the other six months of such year.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 89–601, §203(a), limited the provisions exempting agricultural employees from application of sections 206 and 207 of this title by narrowing the class of exempted agricultural employees to include only an employee employed by an employer who did not, during any calendar quarter during the preceding calendar year, use more than 500 man-days of agricultural labor, an employee who is the spouse, parent, child, or other member of his employer's immediate family, certain hand harvest laborers, or an employee principally engaged in the range production of livestock. See subsec. (b)(12) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(c), extended coverage to include employees exempted by a certificate of the Secretary.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 89–601, §205, substituted “where published” for “where printed and published”.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 89–601, §§206(a), 207, repealed par. (9) relating to employees of street, suburban, or interurban electric railways, or local trolleys or motor bus carriers not in a section 203(s) enterprise and enacted a new par. (9) relating to employees employed by motion picture theaters. See subsec. (b)(7) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 89–601, §§204(a), 215(b)(1), repealed par. (10) relating to employees engaged in handling and processing of agricultural, horticultural, and dairy products and redesignated par. (11) as (10). See section 207(d) of this title.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(b)(1), redesignated par. (13) as (11). Former par. (11) redesignated (10).

Subsec. (a)(12). Pub. L. 89–601, §§206(b)(1), 215(b)(1), repealed par. (12) relating to employees of employers engaged in the business of operating taxicabs and redesignated par. (14) as (12). See subsec. (b)(17) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(13). Pub. L. 89–601, §§208, 215(b)(1), redesignated par. (15) as (13) and substituted “eight” for “twelve”. Former par. (13) redesignated (11).

Subsec. (a)(14). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(b), redesignated par. (21) as (14) and substituted a period for “; or” at end. Former par. (14) redesignated (12).

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(b)(1), redesignated par. (15) as (13).

Subsec. (a)(16). Pub. L. 89–601, §203(b), repealed par. (16) relating to agricultural employees employed in livestock auctions. See subsec. (b)(13) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(17). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(a), repealed par. (17) relating to country elevator operators. See subsec. (b)(14) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(18). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(a), repealed par. (18) relating to cotton ginning employees. See subsec. (b)(15) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(19). Pub. L. 89–601, §209(a), repealed par. (19) relating to employees of retail and service establishments that are primarily engaged in the business of selling automobiles, trucks, or farm implements. See subsec. (b)(10) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(20). Pub. L. 89–601, §210(a), repealed par. (20) relating to employees of food retail or service establishments. See subsec. (b)(18) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(21). Pub. L. 89–601, §215(b)(1), redesignated par. (21) as (14).

Subsec. (a)(22). Pub. L. 89–601, §204(a), repealed par. (22) relating to fruit and vegetable transportation employees. See subsec. (b)(16) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 89–670 substituted “Secretary of Transportation” for “Interstate Commerce Commission”.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 89–601, §206(c), narrowed the scope of the exemption from any employee of the covered transportation companies to drivers, operators, and conductors only and narrowed the range of covered transportation companies from any street, suburban, or interurban electric railway, or local trolley or motorbus carrier to only those of such named enterprises as have their rates and service subject to regulation by a state or local agency.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 89–601, §§201(b)(1), 211, repealed par. (8) which named employees of gasoline service stations as a group to which section 207 of this title shall not apply and enacted a new par. (8) providing that section 207 of this title shall not apply with respect to hotel, motel, or restaurant employees and employees who receive compensation for employment in excess 48 hours in any workweek at a rate not less than one and one-half times the regular rate at which he is employed and who is employed by an institution other than a hospital primarily engaged in the care of the sick, the aged, or the mentally ill or defective residing on the premises.

Subsec. (b)(10). Pub. L. 89–601, §§209(b), 212(a), repealed par. (10) which granted an unlimited overtime exemption relating to petroleum distribution employees and enacted a new par. (10) relating to salesmen, partsmen, or mechanics primarily engaged in selling or servicing automobiles, trailers, trucks, farm implements, or aircraft if employed by a nonmanufacturing establishment primarily engaged in the business of selling such vehicles to ultimate purchasers. See subsec. (b)(3) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(12) to (19). Pub. L. 89–601, §§203(c)(B), 204(b), 206(b)(2), 210(b), added pars. (12) to (19).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 89–601, §203(d), inserted provision making section 212 of this title relating to child labor applicable to an employee below the age of sixteen employed in agriculture in an occupation that the Secretary of Labor finds and declares to be particularly hazardous for the employment of children below the age of sixteen, except where such employee is employed by his parent or by a person standing in the place of his parent on a farm owned or operated by such parent or person.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 89–601, §213, inserted reference to Eniwetok Atoll, Kwajalein Atoll, and Johnston Island.

1961—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “any employee employed in a bona fide executive, administrative, or professional capacity, or in the capacity of outside salesman (as such terms are defined and delimited from time to time by regulations of the Secretary, subject to, the provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act” and exception provision for “any employee employed in a bona fide executive, administrative, professional, or local retailing capacity, or in the capacity of outside salesman (as such terms are defined and delimited by regulations of the Administrator)”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, inserted conditional provision, including subclauses (i) to (iv).

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, inserted “propagating” and “or in the first processing, canning or packing such marine products at sea as an incident to, or in conjunction with, such fishing operations” after “taking” and “life”, respectively, and substituted “loading and unloading when performed by any such employee” for “including employment in the loading, unloading, or packing of such products for shipment or in propagating, processing (other than canning), marketing, freezing, curing, storing, or distributing the above products or byproducts thereof”. See subsec. (b)(4) of this section.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “Secretary” for “Administrator”.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “not in an enterprise described in section 203(s)(2) of this title” for “not included in other exemptions contained in this section.”.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “Secretary” for “Administrator” and struck out “ginning” after “storing”.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “by an independently owned public telephone company” for “in a public telephone exchange”.

Subsec. (a)(13). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, substituted “which qualifies as an exempt retail or service establishment under clause (2) of this subsection” for “as defined in clause (2) of this subsection”.

Subsec. (a)(14). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, inserted “on a vessel other than an American vessel”.

Subsec. (a)(16) to (22). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, added pars. (16) to (22).

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, extended exemption to any employee in the processing, marketing, freezing, curing, storing, packing for shipment, or distributing of aquatic forms of life, formerly contained in subsec. (a)(5) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(6) to (11). Pub. L. 87–30, §9, added pars. (6) to (11).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 87–30, §10, extended the nonapplicability of sections 206, 207, and 212 of this title to any homeworker engaged in the making of evergreen wreaths.

1960—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 86–624 struck out “Alaska; Hawaii;” before “Puerto Rico”.

1957—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 85–231 added subsec. (f).

1956—Subsec. (e). Act Aug. 8, 1956, added subsec. (b).

1949—Subsec. (a)(2). Act Oct. 26, 1949, clarified exemption by defining term “retail or service establishment” and stated conditions under which exemption shall apply.

Subsec. (a)(3). Act Oct. 26, 1949, redesignated par. (3) as (14) and added par. (3) providing a limited exemption to employees of laundries and establishments engaged in laundering, cleaning, or repairing clothing of fabrics.

Subsec. (a)(4). Act Oct. 26, 1949, redesignated par. (4) as subsec. (b)(3) and added par. (4) providing limited exemption to employees of retail establishments making or processing goods.

Subsec. (a)(5). Act Oct. 26, 1949, struck out canning of fish, shellfish, etc. See subsec. (b)(4).

Subsec. (a)(6). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added irrigation workers to the exemption.

Subsec. (a)(8). Act Oct. 26, 1949, extended exemption to employees of newspapers published daily, increased circulation limitation from 3,000 to 4,000, and increased circulation area to include counties contiguous to county of publication.

Subsec. (a)(10). Act Oct. 26, 1949, struck out “to” before “any individual”.

Subsec. (a)(11). Act Oct. 26, 1949, increased number of stations from, less than 500, to, not more than 750.

Subsec. (a)(12), (13). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added pars. (12) and (13).

Subsec. (a)(14). Act Oct. 26, 1949, redesignated par. (3) as (14).

Subsec. (a)(15). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added par. (15).

Subsec. (b)(3) to (5). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added pars. (3) to (5).

Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, substituted “outside of school hours for the school district where such employee is living while he is so employed” for prior provision relating to school attendance following “in agricultural”, and added radio or television productions to the exemption.

Subsec. (d). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added par. (d).

1939—Subsec. (a)(11). Act Aug. 9, 1939, added par. (11).

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–329 effective on first day of first applicable pay period beginning on or after 30th day following Sept. 30, 1994, with exceptions relating to criminal investigators employed in Offices of Inspectors General, see section 633(e) of Pub. L. 103–329, set out as an Effective Date note under section 5545a of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–157 effective Apr. 1, 1990, see section 3(e) of Pub. L. 101–157, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–70 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 3304 of Pub. L. 96–70, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3601 of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

Section 14(a), (b) of Pub. L. 95–151 provided that the amendments by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1978, and Jan. 1, 1979, respectively.

Amendment by sections 4 to 7 of Pub. L. 95–151 effective Jan. 1, 1978, see section 15(a) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by sections 8, 9(d), and 11 of Pub. L. 95–151 effective on Nov. 1, 1977, see section 15(b) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 6(c)(2)(A), (B) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective May 1, 1974, and Jan. 1, 1975, respectively.

Section 8(a)–(c) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1975, 1976, and 1977, respectively.

Section 10(b)(2), (3) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment and repeal made by that section are effective one year and two years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Section 11(b), (c) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment and repeal made by that section are effective one year and two years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Section 13(b)–(d) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective one year, two years, and three years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Section 15(b), (c) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment and repeal made by that section are effective one year and two years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Section 16(a), (b) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment and repeal made by that section are effective one year and two years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Section 20(b)(2), (3) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1975, and 1976, respectively.

Section 20(c)(2), (3) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendments made by that section are effective Jan. 1, 1975, and 1976, respectively.

Section 21(b)(2), (3) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided that the amendment and repeal made by that section are effective one year and two years after May 1, 1974, respectively.

Amendment by sections 7(b)(3), (4), 9(b), 10(a), (b)(1), 11(a), 12(a), 13(a), 14, 15(a), 17, 18, 20(a), (b)(1), (c)(1), 21(b)(1), 22, 23, and 25(b) of Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–88 effective Jan. 1, 1996, see section 2 of Pub. L. 104–88, set out as an Effective Date note under section 701 of Title 49, Transportation.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–670 effective Apr. 1, 1967, as prescribed by President and published in Federal Register, see section 16(a), formerly §15(a), of Pub. L. 89–670 and Ex. Ord. No. 11340, Mar. 30, 1967, 32 F.R. 5453.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Pub. L. 85–231, §2, provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section and sections 216 and 217 of this title] shall take effect upon the expiration of ninety days from the date of its enactment [Aug. 30, 1957].”

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions vested by law (including reorganization plans) in Bureau of the Budget or Director of Bureau of the Budget transferred to President of the United States by section 101 of Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1970, eff. July 1, 1970, 35 F.R. 7959, 84 Stat. 2085, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. Section 102 of Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1970 redesignated Bureau of the Budget as Office of Management and Budget.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Section 3 of Pub. L. 104–174 provided that: “Section 1 [amending this section] shall not be construed as affecting the exemption for apprentices and student learners published in section 570.63 of title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.”

Pub. L. 101–583, §2, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2871, provided that: “Not later than 90 days after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 15, 1990], the Secretary of Labor shall promulgate regulations that permit computer systems analysts, computer programmers, software engineers, and other similarly skilled professional workers as defined in such regulations to qualify as exempt executive, administrative, or professional employees under section 13(a)(1) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 213(a)(1)). Such regulations shall provide that if such employees are paid on an hourly basis they shall be exempt only if their hourly rate of pay is at least 61/2 times greater than the applicable minimum wage rate under section 6 of such Act (29 U.S.C. 206).”

Section 6(c)(3) of Pub. L. 93–259 authorized Secretary of Labor to conduct a study in 1976 of average number of hours in tours of duty in work periods in 1975 of certain employees of public agencies employed in fire protection and law enforcement activities, and publish results of such studies in Federal Register.

Section 23(c) of Pub. L. 93–259 provided in part for amendment of subsec. (b)(2) of this section “insofar as it relates to pipeline employees”.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 13 of Pub. L. 87–30 directed Secretary of Labor to study complicated system of exemptions available for handling and processing agricultural products under this chapter and complex problems involving rates of pay of certain employees exempted from provisions of this chapter, and submit results of his studies along with his recommendations for proposed legislation to second session of Eighty-seventh Congress.

Section 3 of act Aug. 3, 1956, provided that: “Section 13(b)(1) of the Fair Labor Standards Act, as amended [subsec. (b)(1) of this section] shall not apply in the case of any employee with respect to whom the Interstate Commerce Commission [now Secretary of Transportation] has power to establish qualifications and maximum hours of service solely by virtue of section 204(a)(3a) of the Interstate Commerce Act [now 49 U.S.C. 31502].”

This section is referred to in sections 206, 216, 218, 795, 1803, 2612 of this title; title 5 sections 5343, 5349, 5545a; title 42 sections 300e–9, 1437t, 3056, 8009, 8011.

The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by regulations or by orders provide for the employment of learners, of apprentices, and of messengers employed primarily in delivering letters and messages, under special certificates issued pursuant to regulations of the Secretary, at such wages lower than the minimum wage applicable under section 206 of this title and subject to such limitations as to time, number, proportion, and length of service as the Secretary shall prescribe.

(1)(A) The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by special certificate issued under a regulation or order provide, in accordance with subparagraph (B), for the employment, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the otherwise applicable wage rate in effect under section 206 of this title or not less than $1.60 an hour, whichever is the higher, of full-time students (regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws) in retail or service establishments.

(B) Except as provided in paragraph (4)(B), during any month in which full-time students are to be employed in any retail or service establishment under certificates issued under this subsection the proportion of student hours of employment to the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment may not exceed—

(i) in the case of a retail or service establishment whose employees (other than employees engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce) were covered by this chapter before the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974—

(I) the proportion of student hours of employment to the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment for the corresponding month of the immediately preceding twelve-month period,

(II) the maximum proportion for any corresponding month of student hours of employment to the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment applicable to the issuance of certificates under this section at any time before the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974 for the employment of students by such employer, or

(III) a proportion equal to one-tenth of the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment,

whichever is greater;

(ii) in the case of retail or service establishment whose employees (other than employees engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce) are covered for the first time on or after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974—

(I) the proportion of hours of employment of students in such establishment to the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment for the corresponding month of the twelve-month period immediately prior to the effective date of such Amendments,

(II) the proportion of student hours of employment to the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment for the corresponding month of the immediately preceding twelve-month period, or

(III) a proportion equal to one-tenth of the total hours of employment of all employees in such establishment,

whichever is greater; or

(iii) in the case of a retail or service establishment for which records of student hours worked are not available, the proportion of student hours of employment to the total hours of employment of all employees based on the practice during the immediately preceding twelve-month period in (I) similar establishments of the same employer in the same general metropolitan area in which such establishment is located, (II) similar establishments of the same or nearby communities if such establishment is not in a metropolitan area, or (III) other establishments of the same general character operating in the community or the nearest comparable community.

For purpose of clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of this subparagraph, the term “student hours of employment” means hours during which students are employed in a retail or service establishment under certificates issued under this subsection.

(2) The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by special certificate issued under a regulation or order provide for the employment, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the wage rate in effect under section 206(a)(5) of this title or not less than $1.30 an hour, whichever is the higher, of full-time students (regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws) in any occupation in agriculture.

(3) The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by special certificate issued under a regulation or order provide for the employment by an institution of higher education, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the otherwise applicable wage rate in effect under section 206 of this title or not less than $1.60 an hour, whichever is the higher, of full-time students (regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws) who are enrolled in such institution. The Secretary shall by regulation prescribe standards and requirements to insure that this paragraph will not create a substantial probability of reducing the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than those to whom the minimum wage rate authorized by this paragraph is applicable.

(4)(A) A special certificate issued under paragraph (1), (2), or (3) shall provide that the student or students for whom it is issued shall, except during vacation periods, be employed on a part-time basis and not in excess of twenty hours in any workweek.

(B) If the issuance of a special certificate under paragraph (1) or (2) for an employer will cause the number of students employed by such employer under special certificates issued under this subsection to exceed six, the Secretary may not issue such a special certificate for the employment of a student by such employer unless the Secretary finds employment of such student will not create a substantial probability of reducing the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than those employed under special certificates issued under this subsection. If the issuance of a special certificate under paragraph (1) or (2) for an employer will not cause the number of students employed by such employer under special certificates issued under this subsection to exceed six—

(i) the Secretary may issue a special certificate under paragraph (1) or (2) for the employment of a student by such employer if such employer certifies to the Secretary that the employment of such student will not reduce the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than those employed under special certificates issued under this subsection, and

(ii) in the case of an employer which is a retail or service establishment, subparagraph (B) of paragraph (1) shall not apply with respect to the issuance of special certificates for such employer under such paragraph.

The requirement of this subparagraph shall not apply in the case of the issuance of special certificates under paragraph (3) for the employment of full-time students by institutions of higher education; except that if the Secretary determines that an institution of higher education is employing students under certificates issued under paragraph (3) but in violation of the requirements of that paragraph or of regulations issued thereunder, the requirements of this subparagraph shall apply with respect to the issuance of special certificates under paragraph (3) for the employment of students by such institution.

(C) No special certificate may be issued under this subsection unless the employer for whom the certificate is to be issued provides evidence satisfactory to the Secretary of the student status of the employees to be employed under such special certificate.

(D) To minimize paperwork for, and to encourage, small businesses to employ students under special certificates issued under paragraphs (1) and (2), the Secretary shall, by regulation or order, prescribe a simplified application form to be used by employers in applying for such a certificate for the employment of not more than six full-time students. Such an application shall require only—

(i) a listing of the name, address, and business of the applicant employer,

(ii) a listing of the date the applicant began business, and

(iii) the certification that the employment of such full-time students will not reduce the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than persons employed under special certificates.

(1) The Secretary, to the extent necessary to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by regulation or order provide for the employment, under special certificates, of individuals (including individuals employed in agriculture) whose earning or productive capacity is impaired by age, physical or mental deficiency, or injury, at wages which are—

(A) lower than the minimum wage applicable under section 206 of this title,

(B) commensurate with those paid to nonhandicapped workers, employed in the vicinity in which the individuals under the certificates are employed, for essentially the same type, quality, and quantity of work, and

(C) related to the individual's productivity.

(2) The Secretary shall not issue a certificate under paragraph (1) unless the employer provides written assurances to the Secretary that—

(A) in the case of individuals paid on an hourly rate basis, wages paid in accordance with paragraph (1) will be reviewed by the employer at periodic intervals at least once every six months, and

(B) wages paid in accordance with paragraph (1) will be adjusted by the employer at periodic intervals, at least once each year, to reflect changes in the prevailing wage paid to experienced nonhandicapped individuals employed in the locality for essentially the same type of work.

(3) Notwithstanding paragraph (1), no employer shall be permitted to reduce the hourly wage rate prescribed by certificate under this subsection in effect on June 1, 1986, of any handicapped individual for a period of two years from such date without prior authorization of the Secretary.

(4) Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to prohibit an employer from maintaining or establishing work activities centers to provide therapeutic activities for handicapped clients.

(5)(A) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subsection, any employee receiving a special minimum wage at a rate specified pursuant to this subsection or the parent or guardian of such an employee may petition the Secretary to obtain a review of such special minimum wage rate. An employee or the employee's parent or guardian may file such a petition for and in behalf of the employee or in behalf of the employee and other employees similarly situated. No employee may be a party to any such action unless the employee or the employee's parent or guardian gives consent in writing to become such a party and such consent is filed with the Secretary.

(B) Upon receipt of a petition filed in accordance with subparagraph (A), the Secretary within ten days shall assign the petition to an administrative law judge appointed pursuant to section 3105 of title 5. The administrative law judge shall conduct a hearing on the record in accordance with section 554 of title 5 with respect to such petition within thirty days after assignment.

(C) In any such proceeding, the employer shall have the burden of demonstrating that the special minimum wage rate is justified as necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment.

(D) In determining whether any special minimum wage rate is justified pursuant to subparagraph (C), the administrative law judge shall consider—

(i) the productivity of the employee or employees identified in the petition and the conditions under which such productivity was measured; and

(ii) the productivity of other employees performing work of essentially the same type and quality for other employers in the same vicinity.

(E) The administrative law judge shall issue a decision within thirty days after the hearing provided for in subparagraph (B). Such action shall be deemed to be a final agency action unless within thirty days the Secretary grants a request to review the decision of the administrative law judge. Either the petitioner or the employer may request review by the Secretary within fifteen days of the date of issuance of the decision by the administrative law judge.

(F) The Secretary, within thirty days after receiving a request for review, shall review the record and either adopt the decision of the administrative law judge or issue exceptions. The decision of the administrative law judge, together with any exceptions, shall be deemed to be a final agency action.

(G) A final agency action shall be subject to judicial review pursuant to chapter 7 of title 5. An action seeking such review shall be brought within thirty days of a final agency action described in subparagraph (F).

The Secretary may by regulation or order provide that sections 206 and 207 of this title shall not apply with respect to the employment by any elementary or secondary school of its students if such employment constitutes, as determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, an integral part of the regular education program provided by such school and such employment is in accordance with applicable child labor laws.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §14, 52 Stat. 1068; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §12, 63 Stat. 918; Pub. L. 87–30, §11, May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 74; Pub. L. 89–601, title V, §501, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 842; Pub. L. 93–259, §24(a), (b), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 69, 72; Pub. L. 95–151, §§12, 13, Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1252; Pub. L. 99–486, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1229; Pub. L. 101–157, §4(d), Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 941.)

Effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, referred to in subsec. (b)(1)(B)(i), (ii), means May 1, 1974, except as otherwise specifically provided, under provisions of section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as an Effective Date of 1974 Amendment note under section 202 of this title.

1989—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 101–157 struck out “(or in the case of employment in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands not described in section 205(e) of this title, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the otherwise applicable wage rate in effect under section 206(c) of this title)” after “whichever is the higher”.

Subsec. (b)(2), (3). Pub. L. 101–157 struck out “(or in the case of employment in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands not described in section 205(e) of this title, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the wage rate in effect under section 206(c) of this title)” after “whichever is the higher”.

1986—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–486 amended subsec. (c) generally, revising and restating as pars. (1) to (5) provisions formerly contained in pars. (1) to (3).

1977—Subsec. (b)(4)(B). Pub. L. 95–151, §12(a), substituted “six” for “four” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(4)(D). Pub. L. 95–151, §13, added subpar. (D).

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–259, §24(a), added subsec. (a) and struck out former subsec. (a) which had provided: “The Secretary of Labor, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by regulations or by orders provide for the employment of learners, of apprentices, and of messengers employed primarily in delivery letters and messages, under special certificates issued pursuant to regulations of the Secretary, at such wages lower than the minimum wage applicable under section 206 of this title and subject to such limitations as to time, number, proportion, and length of service as the Secretary shall prescribe.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–259, §24(a), added subsec. (b) and struck out former subsec. (b) which had provided: “The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by regulation or order provide for the employment of full-time students, regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws, on a part-time basis in retail or service establishments (not to exceed twenty hours in any workweek) or on a part-time or full-time basis in such establishments during school vacations, under special certificates issued pursuant to regulations of the Secretary, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the minimum wage applicable under section 206 of this title, except that the proportion of student hours of employment to total hours of employment of all employees in any establishment may not exceed (1) such proportion for the corresponding month of the twelve-month period preceding May 1, 1961, (2) in the case of a retail or service establishment whose employees (other than employees engaged in commerce or in the production of goods for commerce) are covered by this chapter for the first time on or after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1966, such proportion for the corresponding month of the twelve-month period immediately prior to such date, or (3) in the case of a retail or service establishment coming into existence after May 1, 1961, or a retail or service establishment for which records of student hours worked are not available, a proportion of student hours of employment to total hours of employment of all employees based on the practice during the twelve-month period preceding May 1, 1961, in (A) similar establishments of the same employer in the same general metropolitan area in which the new establishment is located, (B) similar establishments of the same employer in the same or nearby counties if the new establishment is not in a metropolitan area, or (C) other establishments of the same general character operating in the community or the nearest comparable community. Before the Secretary may issue a certificate under this subsection he must find that such employment will not create a substantial probability of reducing the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than those employed under this subsection.”

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 93–259, §24(a), (b), struck out subsec. (c) and redesignated subsec. (d) as (c). Former subsec. (c) had provided: “The Secretary, to the extent necessary in order to prevent curtailment of opportunities for employment, shall by certificate or order provide for the employment of full-time students, regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws, on a part-time basis in agriculture (not to exceed twenty hours in any workweek) or on a part-time or full-time basis in agriculture during school vacations, at a wage rate not less than 85 per centum of the minimum wage applicable under section 206 of this title. Before the Secretary may issue a certificate or order under this subsection he must find that such employment will not create a substantial probability of reducing the full-time employment opportunities of persons other than those employed under this subsection.”

1966—Pub. L. 89–601 provided for employment of full-time students regardless of age but in compliance with applicable child labor laws outside of their school hours in retail or service establishments or in agriculture at not less than 85 percent of the minimum wage in full-time positions during school vacations or in part-time positions not to exceed 20 hours in any workweek under certificates issued by the Secretary, set out the formula for the allowable proportion of student hours of employment to total hours of employment, provided for the employment of handicapped workers at rates down to 50 percent of the applicable minimum wage and at even lower rates for persons suffering severe impairment, authorized the establishment of special rates for handicapped workers employed in work activities centers, and defined work activity centers.

1961—Pub. L. 87–30 provided for employment of students in cl. (1).

1949—Act Oct. 26, 1949, substituted “primarily” for “exclusively” after “messengers employed”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–151 effective Nov. 1, 1977, see section 15(b) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 605 of Pub. L. 89–601 instructed Secretary of Labor to commence a complete study of wage payments to handicapped clients of sheltered workshops and of feasibility of raising existing wage standards in such workshops. The Secretary was directed to report to Congress by July 1, 1967, findings of such study with appropriate recommendations.

This section is referred to in sections 215, 721, 795 of this title.

(a) After the expiration of one hundred and twenty days from June 25, 1938, it shall be unlawful for any person—

(1) to transport, offer for transportation, ship, deliver, or sell in commerce, or to ship, deliver, or sell with knowledge that shipment or delivery or sale thereof in commerce is intended, any goods in the production of which any employee was employed in violation of section 206 or section 207 of this title, or in violation of any regulation or order of the Secretary issued under section 214 of this title; except that no provision of this chapter shall impose any liability upon any common carrier for the transportation in commerce in the regular course of its business of any goods not produced by such common carrier, and no provision of this chapter shall excuse any common carrier from its obligation to accept any goods for transportation; and except that any such transportation, offer, shipment, delivery, or sale of such goods by a purchaser who acquired them in good faith in reliance on written assurance from the producer that the goods were produced in compliance with the requirements of this chapter, and who acquired such goods for value without notice of any such violation, shall not be deemed unlawful;

(2) to violate any of the provisions of section 206 or section 207 of this title, or any of the provisions of any regulation or order of the Secretary issued under section 214 of this title;

(3) to discharge or in any other manner discriminate against any employee because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding under or related to this chapter, or has testified or is about to testify in any such proceeding, or has served or is about to serve on an industry committee;

(4) to violate any of the provisions of section 212 of this title;

(5) to violate any of the provisions of section 211(c) of this title, or any regulation or order made or continued in effect under the provisions of section 211(d) of this title, or to make any statement, report, or record filed or kept pursuant to the provisions of such section or of any regulation or order thereunder, knowing such statement, report, or record to be false in a material respect.

(b) For the purposes of subsection (a)(1) of this section proof that any employee was employed in any place of employment where goods shipped or sold in commerce were produced, within ninety days prior to the removal of the goods from such place of employment, shall be prima facie evidence that such employee was engaged in the production of such goods.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §15, 52 Stat. 1068; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §13, 63 Stat. 919; 1950 Reorg. Plan No. 6, §§1, 2, eff. May 24, 1950, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263.)

1949—Subsec. (a)(1). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §13(a), inserted provision protecting purchaser in good faith in sale of goods produced in violation of this chapter.

Subsec. (a)(5). Act Oct. 26, 1949, §13(b), inserted “or any regulation or order made or continued in effect under the provisions of section 211(d) of this title” after “211(c) of this title”.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 99–150, §8, Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 791, provided that: “A public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency and which discriminates or has discriminated against an employee with respect to the employee's wages or other terms or conditions of employment because on or after February 19, 1985, the employee asserted coverage under section 7 of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 207] shall be held to have violated section 15(a)(3) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 215(a)(3)]. The protection against discrimination afforded by the preceding sentence shall be available after August 1, 1986, only for an employee who takes an action described in section 15(a)(3) of such Act.”

Prohibition of age discrimination under this section, see section 626 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 206, 216, 217, 626 of this title.

Any person who willfully violates any of the provisions of section 215 of this title shall upon conviction thereof be subject to a fine of not more than $10,000, or to imprisonment for not more than six months, or both. No person shall be imprisoned under this subsection except for an offense committed after the conviction of such person for a prior offense under this subsection.

Any employer who violates the provisions of section 206 or section 207 of this title shall be liable to the employee or employees affected in the amount of their unpaid minimum wages, or their unpaid overtime compensation, as the case may be, and in an additional equal amount as liquidated damages. Any employer who violates the provisions of section 215(a)(3) of this title shall be liable for such legal or equitable relief as may be appropriate to effectuate the purposes of section 215(a)(3) of this title, including without limitation employment, reinstatement, promotion, and the payment of wages lost and an additional equal amount as liquidated damages. An action to recover the liability prescribed in either of the preceding sentences may be maintained against any employer (including a public agency) in any Federal or State court of competent jurisdiction by any one or more employees for and in behalf of himself or themselves and other employees similarly situated. No employee shall be a party plaintiff to any such action unless he gives his consent in writing to become such a party and such consent is filed in the court in which such action is brought. The court in such action shall, in addition to any judgment awarded to the plaintiff or plaintiffs, allow a reasonable attorney's fee to be paid by the defendant, and costs of the action. The right provided by this subsection to bring an action by or on behalf of any employee, and the right of any employee to become a party plaintiff to any such action, shall terminate upon the filing of a complaint by the Secretary of Labor in an action under section 217 of this title in which (1) restraint is sought of any further delay in the payment of unpaid minimum wages, or the amount of unpaid overtime compensation, as the case may be, owing to such employee under section 206 or section 207 of this title by an employer liable therefor under the provisions of this subsection or (2) legal or equitable relief is sought as a result of alleged violations of section 215(a)(3) of this title.

The Secretary is authorized to supervise the payment of the unpaid minimum wages or the unpaid overtime compensation owing to any employee or employees under section 206 or section 207 of this title, and the agreement of any employee to accept such payment shall upon payment in full constitute a waiver by such employee of any right he may have under subsection (b) of this section to such unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation and an additional equal amount as liquidated damages. The Secretary may bring an action in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover the amount of unpaid minimum wages or overtime compensation and an equal amount as liquidated damages. The right provided by subsection (b) of this section to bring an action by or on behalf of any employee to recover the liability specified in the first sentence of such subsection and of any employee to become a party plaintiff to any such action shall terminate upon the filing of a complaint by the Secretary in an action under this subsection in which a recovery is sought of unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation under sections 206 and 207 of this title or liquidated or other damages provided by this subsection owing to such employee by an employer liable under the provisions of subsection (b) of this section, unless such action is dismissed without prejudice on motion of the Secretary. Any sums thus recovered by the Secretary of Labor on behalf of an employee pursuant to this subsection shall be held in a special deposit account and shall be paid, on order of the Secretary of Labor, directly to the employee or employees affected. Any such sums not paid to an employee because of inability to do so within a period of three years shall be covered into the Treasury of the United States as miscellaneous receipts. In determining when an action is commenced by the Secretary of Labor under this subsection for the purposes of the statutes of limitations provided in section 255(a) of this title, it shall be considered to be commenced in the case of any individual claimant on the date when the complaint is filed if he is specifically named as a party plaintiff in the complaint, or if his name did not so appear, on the subsequent date on which his name is added as a party plaintiff in such action.

In any action or proceeding commenced prior to, on, or after August 8, 1956, no employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment under this chapter or the Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947 [29 U.S.C. 251 et seq.] on account of his failure to comply with any provision or provisions of this chapter or such Act (1) with respect to work heretofore or hereafter performed in a workplace to which the exemption in section 213(f) of this title is applicable, (2) with respect to work performed in Guam, the Canal Zone or Wake Island before the effective date of this amendment of subsection (d), or (3) with respect to work performed in a possession named in section 206(a)(3) of this title at any time prior to the establishment by the Secretary, as provided therein, of a minimum wage rate applicable to such work.

Any person who violates the provisions of section 212 of this title or section 213(c)(5) of this title, relating to child labor, or any regulation issued under section 212 of this title or section 213(c)(5) of this title, shall be subject to a civil penalty of not to exceed $10,000 for each employee who was the subject of such a violation. Any person who repeatedly or willfully violates section 206 or 207 of this title shall be subject to a civil penalty of not to exceed $1,000 for each such violation. In determining the amount of any penalty under this subsection, the appropriateness of such penalty to the size of the business of the person charged and the gravity of the violation shall be considered. The amount of any penalty under this subsection, when finally determined, may be—

(1) deducted from any sums owing by the United States to the person charged;

(2) recovered in a civil action brought by the Secretary in any court of competent jurisdiction, in which litigation the Secretary shall be represented by the Solicitor of Labor; or

(3) ordered by the court, in an action brought for a violation of section 215(a)(4) of this title or a repeated or willful violation of section 215(a)(2) of this title, to be paid to the Secretary.

Any administrative determination by the Secretary of the amount of any penalty under this subsection shall be final, unless within fifteen days after receipt of notice thereof by certified mail the person charged with the violation takes exception to the determination that the violations for which the penalty is imposed occurred, in which event final determination of the penalty shall be made in an administrative proceeding after opportunity for hearing in accordance with section 554 of title 5, and regulations to be promulgated by the Secretary. Except for civil penalties collected for violations of section 212 of this title, sums collected as penalties pursuant to this section shall be applied toward reimbursement of the costs of determining the violations and assessing and collecting such penalties, in accordance with the provisions of section 9a of this title. Civil penalties collected for violations of section 212 of this title shall be deposited in the general fund of the Treasury.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §16, 52 Stat. 1069; May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §5(a), 61 Stat. 87; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §14, 63 Stat. 919; 1950 Reorg. Plan No. 6, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263; Aug. 8, 1956, ch. 1035, §4, 70 Stat. 1118; Pub. L. 85–231, §1(2), Aug. 30, 1957, 71 Stat. 514; Pub. L. 87–30, §12(a), May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 74; Pub. L. 89–601, title VI, §601(a), Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 844; Pub. L. 93–259, §§ 6(d)(1), 25(c), 26, Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 61, 72, 73; Pub. L. 95–151, §10, Nov. 1, 1977, 91 Stat. 1252; Pub. L. 101–157, §9, Nov. 17, 1989, 103 Stat. 945; Pub. L. 101–508, title III, §3103, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–29; Pub. L. 104–174, §2, Aug. 6, 1996, 110 Stat. 1554.)

The Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947, referred to in subsec. (d), is act May 14, 1947, ch. 52, 61 Stat. 84, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 9 (§251 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 251 of this title and Tables.

The effective date of this amendment of subsection (d), referred to in subsec. (d), occurred upon the expiration of 90 days after Aug. 30, 1957. See section 2 of Pub. L. 85–231, set out as an Effective Date of 1957 Amendment note under section 213 of this title.

1996—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 104–174 in first sentence substituted “of section 212 of this title or section 213(c)(5) of this title” for “of section 212 of this title” and “under section 212 of this title or section 213(c)(5) of this title” for “under that section”.

1990—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 101–508 struck out “or any person who repeatedly or willfully violates section 206 or 207 of this title” after “issued under that section,” in first sentence, substituted “not to exceed $10,000 for each employee who was the subject of such a violation” for “not to exceed $1,000 for each such violation” in first sentence, inserted after first sentence “Any person who repeatedly or willfully violates section 206 or 207 of this title shall be subject to a civil penalty of not to exceed $1,000 for each such violation.”, substituted “any penalty under this subsection” for “such penalty” wherever appearing except after “appropriateness of”, substituted “Except for civil penalties collected for violations of section 212 of this title, sums” for “Sums” in last sentence, and inserted at end “Civil penalties collected for violations of section 212 of this title shall be deposited in the general fund of the Treasury.”

1989—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 101–157 inserted “or any person who repeatedly or willfully violates section 206 or 207 of this title” in introductory provisions and inserted “or a repeated or willful violation of section 215(a)(2) of this title” in par. (3).

1977—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–151, §10(a), (b), inserted provisions relating to violations of section 215(a)(3) of this title by employers, “(1)” after “section 217 of this title in which”, and cl. (2), and substituted “An action to recover the liability prescribed in either of the preceding sentences” for “Action to recover such liability”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–151, §10(c), inserted “to recover the liability specified in the first sentence of such subsection” after “an action by or on behalf of any employee”.

1974—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–259, §6(d)(1), substituted in second sentence “maintained against any employer (including a public agency) in any Federal or State court” for “maintained in any court”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 93–259, §26, in revising first three sentences, reenacted first sentence, substituting “Secretary” for “Secretary of Labor”; included in second sentence provision for an action by the Secretary for liquidated damaged and deleted requirement of a written request by an employee claiming unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation with the Secretary of Labor prior to an action by the Secretary and proviso prohibiting any action in any case involving an issue of law not settled finally by the courts and depriving courts of jurisdiction of any action or proceeding involving the issue of law not settled finally; and substituted third sentence “The right provided by subsection (b) of this section to bring by or on behalf of any employee and of any employees to become a party plaintiff to any such action shall terminate upon the filing of a complaint by the Secretary in an action under this subsection in which a recovery is sought of unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation under sections 206 and 207 of this title or liquidated or other damages provided by this subsection owing to such employee by an employer liable under the provisions of subsection (b) of this section, unless such action is dismissed without prejudice on motion of the Secretary.” for “The consent of any employee to the bringing of any such action by the Secretary of Labor, unless such action is dismissed without prejudice on motion of the Secretary of Labor, shall constitute a waiver by such employee of any right of action he may have under subsection (b) of this section for such unpaid wages or unpaid overtime compensation and an additional equal amount as liquidated damages.”

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 93–259, §25(c), added subsec. (e).

1966—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 89–601 substituted “statutes of limitations” for “two-year statute of limitations”.

1961—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 87–30 provided for termination of right of action upon commencement of injunction proceedings by the Secretary of Labor.

1957—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 85–231 added cls. (1) and (2) and designated existing provisions as cl. (3).

1956—Subsec. (d). Act Aug. 8, 1956, added subsec. (d).

1949—Subsec. (c). Act Oct. 26, 1949, added subsec. (c).

1947—Subsec. (b). Act May 14, 1947, struck out provisions relating to the designation by employee or employees of an agent or representative to maintain an action under this section for and on behalf of all employees similarly situated and inserted provisions relating to the requirement that no employee shall be a party plaintiff unless he gives his consent in writing and such consent is filed with the court.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–151 effective Jan. 1, 1978, see section 15(a) of Pub. L. 95–151, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 85–231 effective upon expiration of ninety days from Aug. 30, 1957, see section 2 of Pub. L. 85–231, set out as a note under section 213 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Section 5(b) of act May 14, 1947, provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) of this section [amending this section] shall be applicable only with respect to actions commenced under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [this chapter], on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [May 14, 1947].”

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by subsecs. (b) and (c) of this section in Secretary of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6 of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

Pub. L. 99–150, §2(c)(1), Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 788, provided that: “No State, political subdivision of a State, or interstate governmental agency shall be liable under section 16 of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 216] for a violation of section 6 [29 U.S.C. 206] (in the case of a territory or possession of the United States), 7 [29 U.S.C. 207], or 11(c) [29 U.S.C. 211(c)] (as it relates to section 7) of such Act occurring before April 15, 1986, with respect to any employee of the State, political subdivision, or agency who would not have been covered by such Act [this chapter] under the Secretary of Labor's special enforcement policy on January 1, 1985, and published in sections 775.2 and 775.4 of title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations.”

Pub. L. 99–150, §7, Nov. 13, 1985, 99 Stat. 791, provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [see Short Title of 1985 Amendment note set out under section 201 of this title] shall not affect whether a public agency which is a State, political subdivision of a State, or an interstate governmental agency is liable under section 16 of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 216] for a violation of section 6, 7, or 11 of such Act [29 U.S.C. 206, 207, 211] occurring before April 15, 1986, with respect to any employee of such public agency who would have been covered by such Act [this chapter] under the Secretary of Labor's special enforcement policy on January 1, 1985, and published in section 775.3 of title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations.”

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Section 16(b) of act Oct. 26, 1949, provided that: “Except as provided in section 3(*o*) [section 203(*o*) of this title] and in the last sentence of section 16(c) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [section 216(e) of this title], no amendment made by this Act [amending sections 202, 208, 211 to 217 of this title] shall be construed as amending, modifying, or repealing any provisions of the Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947.”

Section 16(d) of act Oct. 26, 1949, provided that actions based upon acts or omissions occurring prior to the effective date of act Oct. 26, 1949, which was to be effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, were not prevented by the amendments made to sections 202 to 208, and 211 to 217 of this title by such act, so long as such actions were instituted within two years from such effective date.

Amount in controversy immaterial in action arising under act of Congress regulating commerce, see Historical and Revision Notes set out under section 1331 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Applicability of “area of production” regulations to employers, see section 261 of this title.

Determination of commencement of future actions, see section 256 of this title.

Extra compensation creditable toward overtime compensation, see section 207 of this title.

Injunction by Secretary of Labor to restrain violations of section 215 of this title, see section 217 of this title.

Jurisdiction of actions arising under act of Congress regulating commerce, see section 1337 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Jurisdiction of claims compensable by contract or custom, see section 252 of this title.

Liability for overtime work performed prior to July 20, 1949, see section 216b of this title.

Liability of employers to United States for violation of Walsh-Healey Act, see section 36 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Limitation of action under this section, commenced on or after May 14, 1947, see section 255 of this title.

Liquidated damages denied where employer establishes defense of good faith, see section 260 of this title.

Minimum wages payable to employees, see section 206 of this title.

Rate of compensation for overtime, see section 207 of this title.

Reliance by employer in future on administrative rulings as defense, see section 259 of this title.

Reliance by employer on past administrative rulings as defense, see section 258 of this title.

Removal of actions from State courts, see section 1441 et seq. of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Venue of action not founded on diversity of citizenship, see section 1391 of Title 28.

This section is referred to in sections 255, 260, 626 of this title; title 2 section 1313; title 3 section 413; title 5 sections 7702, 7703.

Section, act July 20, 1949, ch. 352, §2, 63 Stat. 446, related to liability for overtime work performed prior to July 20, 1949. See section 216b of this title.

No employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment under this chapter (in any action or proceeding commenced prior to or on or after January 24, 1950), on account of the failure of said employer to pay an employee compensation for any period of overtime work performed prior to July 20, 1949, if the compensation paid prior to July 20, 1949, for such work was at least equal to the compensation which would have been payable for such work had subsections (d)(6), (7) and (g) of section 207 of this title been in effect at the time of such payment.

(Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §16(e), 63 Stat. 920.)

Section was enacted as part of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1949, and not as part of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 which comprises this chapter.

“January 24, 1950” substituted in text for “the effective date of this Act”. See Effective Date of 1949 Amendment note set out under section 202 of this title.

The district courts, together with the United States District Court for the District of the Canal Zone, the District Court of the Virgin Islands, and the District Court of Guam shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown, to restrain violations of section 215 of this title, including in the case of violations of section 215(a)(2) of this title the restraint of any withholding of payment of minimum wages or overtime compensation found by the court to be due to employees under this chapter (except sums which employees are barred from recovering, at the time of the commencement of the action to restrain the violations, by virtue of the provisions of section 255 of this title).

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §17, 52 Stat. 1069; Oct. 26, 1949, ch. 736, §15, 63 Stat. 919; Pub. L. 85–231, §1(3), Aug. 30, 1957, 71 Stat. 514; Pub. L. 86–624, §21(c), July 12, 1960, 74 Stat. 417; Pub. L. 87–30, §12(b), May 5, 1961, 75 Stat. 74.)

1961—Pub. L. 87–30 substituted “, including in the case of violations of section 215(a)(2) of this title the restraint of any withholding of payment of minimum wages or overtime compensation found by the court to be due to employees under this chapter (except sums which employees are barred from recovering, at the time of the commencement of the action to restrain the violations, by virtue of the provisions of section 255 of this title” for “: *Provided*, That no court shall have jurisdiction, in any action brought by the Administrator to restrain such violations, to order the payment to employees of unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation or an additional equal amount as liquidated damages in such action”.

1960—Pub. L. 86–624 struck out reference to the District Court for Territory of Alaska.

1957—Pub. L. 85–231 included the District Court of Guam within the enumeration of courts having jurisdiction of injunction proceedings.

1949—Act Oct. 26, 1949, included a more precise description of United States courts having jurisdiction to restrain violations and inserted proviso denying jurisdiction to order payment of unpaid minimum wages, overtime, and liquidated damages in injunction proceedings.

Amendment by Pub. L. 87–30 effective upon expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 5, 1961, except as otherwise provided, see section 14 of Pub. L. 87–30, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 85–231 effective upon expiration of ninety days from Aug. 30, 1957, see section 2 of Pub. L. 85–231, set out as a note under section 213 of this title.

Amendment by act Oct. 26, 1949, effective ninety days after Oct. 26, 1949, see section 16(a) of act Oct. 26, 1949, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

For termination of the United States District Court for the District of the Canal Zone at end of the “transition period”, being the 30-month period beginning Oct. 1, 1979, and ending midnight Mar. 31, 1982, see Paragraph 5 of Article XI of the Panama Canal Treaty of 1977 and sections 2101 and 2201 to 2203 of Pub. L. 96–70, title II, Sept. 27, 1979, 93 Stat. 493, formerly classified to sections 3831 and 3841 to 3843, respectively, of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Action by employee to recover unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation and liquidated damages, see section 216 of this title.

Action by Secretary of Labor to recover unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation and liquidated damages, see section 216 of this title.

Child labor provisions, see section 212 of this title.

Criminal penalty for violation of section 215 of this title, see section 216 of this title.

Duty of employer to keep and preserve employment records, see section 211 of this title.

Prohibited acts; prima facie evidence, see section 215 of this title.

Secretary of Labor authorized to bring all actions under this section to enjoin unlawful child labor acts or practices, see section 212 of this title.

Secretary of Labor authorized to bring all injunctive actions under this section to restrain violations of this chapter, see section 211 of this title.

Venue of action not founded on diversity of citizenship, see section 1391 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 212, 216, 626 of this title.

(a) No provision of this chapter or of any order thereunder shall excuse noncompliance with any Federal or State law or municipal ordinance establishing a minimum wage higher than the minimum wage established under this chapter or a maximum work week lower than the maximum workweek established under this chapter, and no provision of this chapter relating to the employment of child labor shall justify noncompliance with any Federal or State law or municipal ordinance establishing a higher standard than the standard established under this chapter. No provision of this chapter shall justify any employer in reducing a wage paid by him which is in excess of the applicable minimum wage under this chapter, or justify any employer in increasing hours of employment maintained by him which are shorter than the maximum hours applicable under this chapter.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter (other than section 213(f) of this title) or any other law—

(1) any Federal employee in the Canal Zone engaged in employment of the kind described in section 5102(c)(7) of title 5, or

(2) any employee employed in a nonappropriated fund instrumentality under the jurisdiction of the Armed Forces,

shall have his basic compensation fixed or adjusted at a wage rate that is not less than the appropriate wage rate provided for in section 206(a)(1) of this title (except that the wage rate provided for in section 206(b) of this title shall apply to any employee who performed services during the workweek in a work place within the Canal Zone), and shall have his overtime compensation set at an hourly rate not less than the overtime rate provided for in section 207(a)(1) of this title.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §18, 52 Stat. 1069; Pub. L. 89–601, title III, §306, Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 841; Pub. L. 90–83, §8, Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 222.)

For definition of Canal Zone, referred to in subsec. (b), see section 3602(b) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

1967—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 90–83 substituted reference to section 5102(c)(7) of title 5 for reference to par. (7) of section 202 of the Classification Act of 1949 to reflect the amendment of section 5341(a) of title 5 by section 1(97) of Pub. L. 90–83 and struck out provision covering employees described in section 7474 of title 10 in view of the repeal of section 7474 of title 10 by Pub. L. 89–554.

1966—Pub. L. 89–601 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a) and added subsec. (b).

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

If any provision of this chapter or the application of such provision to any person or circumstance is held invalid, the remainder of this chapter and the application of such provision to other persons or circumstances shall not be affected thereby.

(June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §19, 52 Stat. 1069.)


(a) The Congress finds that the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], has been interpreted judicially in disregard of long-established customs, practices, and contracts between employers and employees, thereby creating wholly unexpected liabilities, immense in amount and retroactive in operation, upon employers with the results that, if said Act as so interpreted or claims arising under such interpretations were permitted to stand, (1) the payment of such liabilities would bring about financial ruin of many employers and seriously impair the capital resources of many others, thereby resulting in the reduction of industrial operations, halting of expansion and development, curtailing employment, and the earning power of employees; (2) the credit of many employers would be seriously impaired; (3) there would be created both an extended and continuous uncertainty on the part of industry, both employer and employee, as to the financial condition of productive establishments and a gross inequality of competitive conditions between employers and between industries; (4) employees would receive windfall payments, including liquidated damages, of sums for activities performed by them without any expectation of reward beyond that included in their agreed rates of pay; (5) there would occur the promotion of increasing demands for payment to employees for engaging in activities no compensation for which had been contemplated by either the employer or employee at the time they were engaged in; (6) voluntary collective bargaining would be interfered with and industrial disputes between employees and employers and between employees and employees would be created; (7) the courts of the country would be burdened with excessive and needless litigation and champertous practices would be encouraged; (8) the Public Treasury would be deprived of large sums of revenues and public finances would be seriously deranged by claims against the Public Treasury for refunds of taxes already paid; (9) the cost to the Government of goods and services heretofore and hereafter purchased by its various departments and agencies would be unreasonably increased and the Public Treasury would be seriously affected by consequent increased cost of war contracts; and (10) serious and adverse effects upon the revenues of Federal, State, and local governments would occur.

The Congress further finds that all of the foregoing constitutes a substantial burden on commerce and a substantial obstruction to the free flow of goods in commerce.

The Congress, therefore, further finds and declares that it is in the national public interest and for the general welfare, essential to national defense, and necessary to aid, protect, and foster commerce, that this chapter be enacted.

The Congress further finds that the varying and extended periods of time for which, under the laws of the several States, potential retroactive liability may be imposed upon employers, have given and will give rise to great difficulties in the sound and orderly conduct of business and industry.

The Congress further finds and declares that all of the results which have arisen or may arise under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, as aforesaid, may (except as to liability for liquidated damages) arise with respect to the Walsh-Healey [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.] and Bacon-Davis [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.] Acts and that it is, therefore, in the national public interest and for the general welfare, essential to national defense, and necessary to aid, protect, and foster commerce, that this chapter shall apply to the Walsh-Healey Act and the Bacon-Davis Act.

(b) It is declared to be the policy of the Congress in order to meet the existing emergency and to correct existing evils (1) to relieve and protect interstate commerce from practices which burden and obstruct it; (2) to protect the right of collective bargaining; and (3) to define and limit the jurisdiction of the courts.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §1, 61 Stat. 84.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsec. (a), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act”, meaning act May 14, 1947, ch. 52, 61 Stat. 84, as amended, known as the Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947, which enacted this chapter and amended section 216 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out below and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in subsec. (a), are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2101, Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1928, provided that: “This section and sections 2102 [amending section 254 of this title] and 2103 [enacting provisions set out as a note under section 254 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Employee Commuting Flexibility Act of 1996’.”

Section 15 of act May 14, 1947, provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter and amending section 216 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947’.”

Section 14 of act May 14, 1947, provided: “If any provision of this Act [see Short Title note above] or the application of such provision to any person or circumstance is held invalid, the remainder of this Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circumstances shall not be affected thereby.”

No employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.] the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.] (in any action or proceeding commenced prior to or on or after May 14, 1947), on account of the failure of such employer to pay an employee minimum wages, or to pay an employee overtime compensation, for or on account of any activity of an employee engaged in prior to May 14, 1947, except an activity which was compensable by either—

(1) an express provision of a written or nonwritten contract in effect, at the time of such activity, between such employee, his agent, or collective-bargaining representative and his employer; or

(2) a custom or practice in effect, at the time of such activity, at the establishment or other place where such employee was employed, covering such activity, not inconsistent with a written or nonwritten contract, in effect at the time of such activity, between such employee, his agent, or collective-bargaining representative and his employer.

For the purposes of subsection (a) of this section, an activity shall be considered as compensable under such contract provision or such custom or practice only when it was engaged in during the portion of the day with respect to which it was so made compensable.

In the application of the minimum wage and overtime compensation provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], of the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or of the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], in determining the time for which an employer employed an employee there shall be counted all that time, but only that time, during which the employee engaged in activities which were compensable within the meaning of subsections (a) and (b) of this section.

No court of the United States, of any State, Territory, or possession of the United States, or of the District of Columbia, shall have jurisdiction of any action or proceeding, whether instituted prior to or on or after May 14, 1947, to enforce liability or impose punishment for or on account of the failure of the employer to pay minimum wages or overtime compensation under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], under the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or under the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], to the extent that such action or proceeding seeks to enforce any liability or impose any punishment with respect to an activity which was not compensable under subsections (a) and (b) of this section.

No cause of action based on unpaid minimum wages, unpaid overtime compensation, or liquidated damages, under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], which accrued prior to May 14, 1947, or any interest in such cause of action, shall hereafter be assignable, in whole or in part, to the extent that such cause of action is based on an activity which was not compensable within the meaning of subsections (a) and (b) of this section.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §2, 61 Stat. 85.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsecs. (a), (c) to (e), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in subsecs. (a), (c) to (e), are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

Action by employee for recovery of unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation and liquidated damages under Fair Labor Standards Act, see section 216 of this title.

Action by employee of Government contractor under Bacon-Davis Act for wages against contractor and sureties, see section 276a–2 of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works.

Action by Secretary of Labor for recovery of unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation and liquidated damages under Fair Labor Standards Act, see section 216 of this title.

Action by United States against contractor for liquidated damages for violation of Walsh-Healey Act, see section 36 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Liability of employer for activities compensable by express contract or custom or practice, see section 254 of this title.

Maximum hours—

Fair Labor Standards Act, see section 207 of this title.

Walsh-Healey Act, see section 35 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Minimum wages—

Bacon-Davis Act, see section 276a of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works.

Fair Labor Standards Act, see section 216 of this title.

Walsh-Healey Act, see section 35 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Rate of overtime compensation—

Fair Labor Standards Act, see section 207 of this title.

Walsh-Healey Act, see section 40 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Any cause of action under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], which accrued prior to May 14, 1947, or any action (whether instituted prior to or on or after May 14, 1947) to enforce such a cause of action, may hereafter be compromised in whole or in part, if there exists a bona fide dispute as to the amount payable by the employer to his employee; except that no such action or cause of action may be so compromised to the extent that such compromise is based on an hourly wage rate less than the minimum required under such Act, or on a payment for overtime at a rate less than one and one-half times such minimum hourly wage rate.

Any employee may hereafter waive his right under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], to liquidated damages, in whole or in part, with respect to activities engaged in prior to May 14, 1947.

Any such compromise or waiver, in the absence of fraud or duress, shall, according to the terms thereof, be a complete satisfaction of such cause of action and a complete bar to any action based on such cause of action.

The provisions of this section shall also be applicable to any compromise or waiver heretofore so made or given.

As used in this section, the term “compromise” includes “adjustment”, “settlement”, and “release”.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §3, 61 Stat. 86.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in subsec. (a), are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, no employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], on account of the failure of such employer to pay an employee minimum wages, or to pay an employee overtime compensation, for or on account of any of the following activities of such employee engaged in on or after May 14, 1947—

(1) walking, riding, or traveling to and from the actual place of performance of the principal activity or activities which such employee is employed to perform, and

(2) activities which are preliminary to or postliminary to said principal activity or activities,

which occur either prior to the time on any particular workday at which such employee commences, or subsequent to the time on any particular workday at which he ceases, such principal activity or activities. For purposes of this subsection, the use of an employer's vehicle for travel by an employee and activities performed by an employee which are incidental to the use of such vehicle for commuting shall not be considered part of the employee's principal activities if the use of such vehicle for travel is within the normal commuting area for the employer's business or establishment and the use of the employer's vehicle is subject to an agreement on the part of the employer and the employee or representative of such employee.

Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this section which relieve an employer from liability and punishment with respect to any activity, the employer shall not be so relieved if such activity is compensable by either—

(1) an express provision of a written or nonwritten contract in effect, at the time of such activity, between such employee, his agent, or collective-bargaining representative and his employer; or

(2) a custom or practice in effect, at the time of such activity, at the establishment or other place where such employee is employed, covering such activity, not inconsistent with a written or nonwritten contract, in effect at the time of such activity, between such employee, his agent, or collective-bargaining representative and his employer.

For the purposes of subsection (b) of this section, an activity shall be considered as compensable under such contract provision or such custom or practice only when it is engaged in during the portion of the day with respect to which it is so made compensable.

In the application of the minimum wage and overtime compensation provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], of the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or of the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], in determining the time for which an employer employs an employee with respect to walking, riding, traveling, or other preliminary or postliminary activities described in subsection (a) of this section, there shall be counted all that time, but only that time, during which the employee engages in any such activity which is compensable within the meaning of subsections (b) and (c) of this section.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §4, 61 Stat. 86; Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2102, Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1928.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (d), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (d), are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

1996—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 104–188 in closing provisions inserted at end “For purposes of this subsection, the use of an employer's vehicle for travel by an employee and activities performed by an employee which are incidental to the use of such vehicle for commuting shall not be considered part of the employee's principal activities if the use of such vehicle for travel is within the normal commuting area for the employer's business or establishment and the use of the employer's vehicle is subject to an agreement on the part of the employer and the employee or representative of such employee.”

Section 2103 of Pub. L. 104–188 provided that: “The amendment made by section 2101 [probably means section 2102 of Pub. L. 104–188, amending this section] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 20, 1996] and shall apply in determining the application of section 4 of the Portal-to-Portal Act of 1947 [this section] to an employee in any civil action brought before such date of enactment but pending on such date.”

Exclusion from hours worked of time spent changing clothes or washing up, see section 203 of this title.

Any action commenced on or after May 14, 1947, to enforce any cause of action for unpaid minimum wages, unpaid overtime compensation, or liquidated damages, under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.]—

(a) if the cause of action accrues on or after May 14, 1947—may be commenced within two years after the cause of action accrued, and every such action shall be forever barred unless commenced within two years after the cause of action accrued, except that a cause of action arising out of a willful violation may be commenced within three years after the cause of action accrued;

(b) if the cause of action accrued prior to May 14, 1947—may be commenced within whichever of the following periods is the shorter: (1) two years after the cause of action accrued, or (2) the period prescribed by the applicable State statute of limitations; and, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, every such action shall be forever barred unless commenced within the shorter of such two periods;

(c) if the cause of action accrued prior to May 14, 1947, the action shall not be barred by paragraph (b) of this section if it is commenced within one hundred and twenty days after May 14, 1947 unless at the time commenced it is barred by an applicable State statute of limitations;

(d) with respect to any cause of action brought under section 216(b) of this title against a State or a political subdivision of a State in a district court of the United States on or before April 18, 1973, the running of the statutory periods of limitation shall be deemed suspended during the period beginning with the commencement of any such action and ending one hundred and eighty days after the effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, except that such suspension shall not be applicable if in such action judgment has been entered for the defendant on the grounds other than State immunity from Federal jurisdiction.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §6, 61 Stat. 87; Pub. L. 89–601, title VI, §601(b), Sept. 23, 1966, 80 Stat. 844; Pub. L. 93–259, §6(d)(2)(A), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 61.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (d), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in subsec. (a), are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

Effective date of the Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1974, referred to in subsec. (d), means May 1, 1974, except as otherwise specifically provided, under provisions of section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as an Effective Date of 1974 Amendment note under section 202 of this title.

1974—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–259 added subsec. (d).

1966—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 89–601 inserted provision allowing causes of action arising out of willful violations to be commenced within three years after the cause of action accrued.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 89–601 effective Feb. 1, 1967, except as otherwise provided, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Secretary authorized to promulgate necessary rules, regulations, or orders on and after the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 89–601, Sept. 23, 1966, with regard to the amendments made by Pub. L. 89–601, see section 602 of Pub. L. 89–601, set out as a note under section 203 of this title.

Time when action by Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division is deemed to be commenced for purposes of subsec. (a) of this section, see section 216 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 216, 217, 256, 257, 262 of this title.

In determining when an action is commenced for the purposes of section 255 of this title, an action commenced on or after May 14, 1947 under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], shall be considered to be commenced on the date when the complaint is filed; except that in the case of a collective or class action instituted under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, or the Bacon-Davis Act, it shall be considered to be commenced in the case of any individual claimant—

(a) on the date when the complaint is filed, if he is specifically named as a party plaintiff in the complaint and his written consent to become a party plaintiff is filed on such date in the court in which the action is brought; or

(b) if such written consent was not so filed or if his name did not so appear—on the subsequent date on which such written consent is filed in the court in which the action was commenced.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §7, 61 Stat. 88.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in text, are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

The statute of limitations prescribed in section 255(b) of this title shall also be applicable (in the case of a collective or representative action commenced prior to May 14, 1947 under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.]) to an individual claimant who has not been specifically named as a party plaintiff to the action prior to the expiration of one hundred and twenty days after May 14, 1947. In the application of such statute of limitations such action shall be considered to have been commenced as to him when, and only when, his written consent to become a party plaintiff to the action is filed in the court in which the action was brought.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §8, 61 Stat. 88.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

In any action or proceeding commenced prior to or on or after May 14, 1947 based on any act or omission prior to May 14, 1947, no employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment for or on account of the failure of the employer to pay minimum wages or overtime compensation under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], if he pleads and proves that the act or omission complained of was in good faith in conformity with and in reliance on any administrative regulation, order, ruling, approval, or interpretation, of any agency of the United States, or any administrative practice or enforcement policy of any such agency with respect to the class of employers to which he belonged. Such a defense, if established, shall be a bar to the action or proceeding, notwithstanding that after such act or omission, such administrative regulation, order, ruling, approval, interpretation, practice, or enforcement policy is modified or rescinded or is determined by judicial authority to be invalid or of no legal effect.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §9, 61 Stat. 88.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in text, are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

(a) In any action or proceeding based on any act or omission on or after May 14, 1947, no employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment for or on account of the failure of the employer to pay minimum wages or overtime compensation under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.], if he pleads and proves that the act or omission complained of was in good faith in conformity with and in reliance on any written administrative regulation, order, ruling, approval, or interpretation, of the agency of the United States specified in subsection (b) of this section, or any administrative practice or enforcement policy of such agency with respect to the class of employers to which he belonged. Such a defense, if established, shall be a bar to the action or proceeding, notwithstanding that after such act or omission, such administrative regulation, order, ruling, approval, interpretation, practice, or enforcement policy is modified or rescinded or is determined by judicial authority to be invalid or of no legal effect.

(b) The agency referred to in subsection (a) of this section shall be—

(1) in the case of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.]—the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor;

(2) in the case of the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.]—the Secretary of Labor, or any Federal officer utilized by him in the administration of such Act; and

(3) in the case of the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.]—the Secretary of Labor.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §10, 61 Stat. 89.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The Walsh-Healey and Bacon-Davis Acts, referred to in text, are defined for purposes of this chapter in section 262 of this title.

Functions relating to enforcement and administration of equal pay provisions vested by subsec. (b)(1) of this section in Administrator of Wage and Hour Division of Department of Labor transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §1, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

This section is referred to in section 626 of this title.

In any action commenced prior to or on or after May 14, 1947 to recover unpaid minimum wages, unpaid overtime compensation, or liquidated damages, under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], if the employer shows to the satisfaction of the court that the act or omission giving rise to such action was in good faith and that he had reasonable grounds for believing that his act or omission was not a violation of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, the court may, in its sound discretion, award no liquidated damages or award any amount thereof not to exceed the amount specified in section 216 of this title.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §11, 61 Stat. 89; Pub. L. 93–259, §6(d)(2)(B), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 62.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

1974—Pub. L. 93–259 substituted “section 216 of this title” for “section 216(b) of this title”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

No employer shall be subject to any liability or punishment under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], on account of the failure of such employer to pay an employee minimum wages, or to pay an employee overtime compensation, for or on account of an activity engaged in by such employee prior to December 26, 1946, if such employer—

(1) was not so subject by reason of the definition of an “area of production”, by a regulation of the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor, which regulation was applicable at the time of performance of the activity even though at that time the regulation was invalid; or

(2) would not have been so subject if the regulation signed on December 18, 1946 (Federal Register, Vol. 11, p. 14648) had been in force on and after October 24, 1938.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §12, 61 Stat. 89.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in text, is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

(a) When the terms “employer”, “employee”, and “wage” are used in this chapter in relation to the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.], they shall have the same meaning as when used in such Act of 1938.

(b) When the term “employer” is used in this chapter in relation to the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.] or Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.] it shall mean the contractor or subcontractor covered by such Act.

(c) When the term “employee” is used in this chapter in relation to the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.] or the Bacon-Davis Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.] it shall mean any individual employed by the contractor or subcontractor covered by such Act in the performance of his contract or subcontract.

(d) The term “Wash-Healey Act” 1 means the Act entitled “An Act to provide conditions for the purchase of supplies and the making of contracts by the United States, and for other purposes”, approved June 30, 1936 (49 Stat. 2036), as amended [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.]; and the term “Bacon-Davis Act” means the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public buildings”, approved August 30, 1935 (49 Stat. 1011), as amended [40 U.S.C. §276a et seq.].

(e) As used in section 255 of this title the term “State” means any State of the United States or the District of Columbia or any Territory or possession of the United States.

(May 14, 1947, ch. 52, §13, 61 Stat. 90.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, referred to in subsec. (a), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see see section 201 of this title and Tables.

The “Bacon-Davis Act”, which is defined for purposes of this chapter in subsec. (d), is generally known as the “Davis-Bacon Act”. See Short Title note set out under section 276a of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works.

1 So in original. Probably should be “Walsh-Healey Act”.

Section 301, Pub. L. 85–836, §2, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 997, set forth Congressional findings and policy with respect to welfare and pension plan disclosure. See section 1001 of this title.

Section 302, Pub. L. 85–836, §3, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 997; Pub. L. 86–624, §21(d), July 12, 1960, 74 Stat. 417; Pub. L. 87–420, §§2–5, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 35, provided definitions for this chapter. See section 1002 of this title.

Section 303, Pub. L. 85–836, §4, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 998; Pub. L. 87–420, §6, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 35, related to plans covered within chapter. See section 1003 of this title.

Section 304, Pub. L. 85–836, §5, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 998; Pub. L. 87–420, §7, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 36, related to duties of administrator and definition of “administrator”. See sections 1002(16)(A) and 1021 of this title.

Section 305, Pub. L. 85–836, §6, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 999; Pub. L. 87–420, §8, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 36, related to time for publication and contents of plan. See section 1022 of this title.

Section 306, Pub. L. 85–836, §7, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 1000; Pub. L. 87–420, §§9–13, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 36, 37, related to time for publication, contents, etc., of annual reports. See section 1023 of this title.

Section 307, Pub. L. 85–836, §8, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 1002; Pub. L. 87–420, §§14, 18, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 37, 43, related to publication of description of plan and annual report. See section 1024 of this title.

Section 308, Pub. L. 85–836, §9, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 1002; Pub. L. 87–420, §15, Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 37, related to enforcement provisions. See section 1131 et seq. of this title.

Section 308a, Pub. L. 85–836, §10, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 38, related to reports as public information. See section 1026 of this title.

Section 308b, Pub. L. 85–836, §11, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 38, related to retention of records. See section 1027 of this title.

Section 308c, Pub. L. 85–836, §12, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 38, related to reliance on administrative interpretations and forms. See section 1028 of this title.

Section 308d, Pub. L. 85–836, §13, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 39, related to bonding requirements. See section 1112 of this title.

Section 308e, Pub. L. 85–836, §14, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 40, related to establishment, membership, duties, etc., of Advisory Council on Employee Welfare and Pension Benefit Plans. See section 1142 of this title.

Section 308f, Pub. L. 85–836, §15, as added Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 41, related to administration of provisions of chapter. See section 1137 of this title.

Section 309, Pub. L. 85–836, §16, formerly §10, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 1002, renumbered and amended Pub. L. 87–420, §16(a), (b), Mar. 20, 1962, 76 Stat. 38, 41, related to effect of other laws on provisions of this chapter. See section 1144 of this title.

Repeal effective Jan. 1, 1975, except that chapter to remain applicable to any conduct and events which occurred before Jan. 1, 1975, see section 1031 of this title.

The Secretary of Labor was empowered, in the case of a plan which has a plan year which begins before Jan. 1, 1975, and ends after Dec. 31, 1974, to postpone by regulation the effective date of the repeal of any provision of this chapter until the beginning of the first plan year of such plan which begins after Jan. 1, 1975, pursuant to section 1031(b)(2) of this title.








This chapter is referred to in sections 186, 1111 of this title; title 39 section 1209; title 42 section 2000e.

The Congress finds that, in the public interest, it continues to be the responsibility of the Federal Government to protect employees’ rights to organize, choose their own representatives, bargain collectively, and otherwise engage in concerted activities for their mutual aid or protection; that the relations between employers and labor organizations and the millions of workers they represent have a substantial impact on the commerce of the Nation; and that in order to accomplish the objective of a free flow of commerce it is essential that labor organizations, employers, and their officials adhere to the highest standards of responsibility and ethical conduct in administering the affairs of their organizations, particularly as they affect labor-management relations.

The Congress further finds, from recent investigations in the labor and management fields, that there have been a number of instances of breach of trust, corruption, disregard of the rights of individual employees, and other failures to observe high standards of responsibility and ethical conduct which require further and supplementary legislation that will afford necessary protection of the rights and interests of employees and the public generally as they relate to the activities of labor organizations, employers, labor relations consultants, and their officers and representatives.

The Congress, therefore, further finds and declares that the enactment of this chapter is necessary to eliminate or prevent improper practices on the part of labor organizations, employers, labor relations consultants, and their officers and representatives which distort and defeat the policies of the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, as amended [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.], and the Railway Labor Act, as amended [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], and have the tendency or necessary effect of burdening or obstructing commerce by (1) impairing the efficiency, safety, or operation of the instrumentalities of commerce; (2) occurring in the current of commerce; (3) materially affecting, restraining, or controlling the flow of raw materials or manufactured or processed goods into or from the channels of commerce, or the prices of such materials or goods in commerce; or (4) causing diminution of employment and wages in such volume as substantially to impair or disrupt the market for goods flowing into or from the channels of commerce.

(Pub. L. 86–257, §2, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (c), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, known as the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, which enacted this chapter, amended sections 153, 158, 159, 160, 164, 186, and 187 of this title, and enacted provisions set out as notes under sections 153, 158, and 481 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out below and Tables.

The Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, referred to in subsec. (c), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 7 (§141 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

Section 1 of Pub. L. 86–257 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter, amending sections 153, 158, 159, 160, 164, 186, and 187 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 153, 158, and 481 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959’.”

For the purposes of this chapter—

(a) “Commerce” means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, transmission, or communication among the several States or between any State and any place outside thereof.

(b) “State” includes any State of the United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, Wake Island, the Canal Zone, and Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act [43 U.S.C. 1331 et seq.].

(c) “Industry affecting commerce” means any activity, business, or industry in commerce or in which a labor dispute would hinder or obstruct commerce or the free flow of commerce and includes any activity or industry “affecting commerce” within the meaning of the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, as amended [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.], or the Railway Labor Act, as amended [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.].

(d) “Person” includes one or more individuals, labor organizations, partnerships, associations, corporations, legal representatives, mutual companies, joint-stock companies, trusts, unincorporated organizations, trustees, trustees in cases under title 11, or receivers.

(e) “Employer” means any employer or any group or association of employers engaged in an industry affecting commerce (1) which is, with respect to employees engaged in an industry affecting commerce, an employer within the meaning of any law of the United States relating to the employment of any employees or (2) which may deal with any labor organization concerning grievances, labor disputes, wages, rates of pay, hours of employment, or conditions of work, and includes any person acting directly or indirectly as an employer or as an agent of an employer in relation to an employee but does not include the United States or any corporation wholly owned by the Government of the United States or any State or political subdivision thereof.

(f) “Employee” means any individual employed by an employer, and includes any individual whose work has ceased as a consequence of, or in connection with, any current labor dispute or because of any unfair labor practice or because of exclusion or expulsion from a labor organization in any manner or for any reason inconsistent with the requirements of this chapter.

(g) “Labor dispute” includes any controversy concerning terms, tenure, or conditions of employment, or concerning the association or representation of persons in negotiating, fixing, maintaining, changing, or seeking to arrange terms or conditions of employment, regardless of whether the disputants stand in the proximate relation of employer and employee.

(h) “Trusteeship” means any receivership, trusteeship, or other method of supervision or control whereby a labor organization suspends the autonomy otherwise available to a subordinate body under its constitution or bylaws.

(i) “Labor organization” means a labor organization engaged in an industry affecting commerce and includes any organization of any kind, any agency, or employee representation committee, group, association, or plan so engaged in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning grievances, labor disputes, wages, rates of pay, hours, or other terms or conditions of employment, and any conference, general committee, joint or system board, or joint council so engaged which is subordinate to a national or international labor organization, other than a State or local central body.

(j) A labor organization shall be deemed to be engaged in an industry affecting commerce if it—

(1) is the certified representative of employees under the provisions of the National Labor Relations Act, as amended [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], or the Railway Labor Act, as amended [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.]; or

(2) although not certified, is a national or international labor organization or a local labor organization recognized or acting as the representative of employees of an employer or employers engaged in an industry affecting commerce; or

(3) has chartered a local labor organization or subsidiary body which is representing or actively seeking to represent employees of employers within the meaning of paragraph (1) or (2); or

(4) has been chartered by a labor organization representing or actively seeking to represent employees within the meaning of paragraph (1) or (2) as the local or subordinate body through which such employees may enjoy membership or become affiliated with such labor organization; or

(5) is a conference, general committee, joint or system board, or joint council, subordinate to a national or international labor organization, which includes a labor organization engaged in an industry affecting commerce within the meaning of any of the preceding paragraphs of this subsection, other than a State or local central body.

(k) “Secret ballot” means the expression by ballot, voting machine, or otherwise, but in no event by proxy, of a choice with respect to any election or vote taken upon any matter, which is cast in such a manner that the person expressing such choice cannot be identified with the choice expressed.

(*l*) “Trust in which a labor organization is interested” means a trust or other fund or organization (1) which was created or established by a labor organization, or one or more of the trustees or one or more members of the governing body of which is selected or appointed by a labor organization, and (2) a primary purpose of which is to provide benefits for the members of such labor organization or their beneficiaries.

(m) “Labor relations consultant” means any person who, for compensation, advises or represents an employer, employer organization, or labor organization concerning employee organizing, concerted activities, or collective bargaining activities.

(n) “Officer” means any constitutional officer, any person authorized to perform the functions of president, vice president, secretary, treasurer, or other executive functions of a labor organization, and any member of its executive board or similar governing body.

(*o*) “Member” or “member in good standing”, when used in reference to a labor organization, includes any person who has fulfilled the requirements for membership in such organization, and who neither has voluntarily withdrawn from membership nor has been expelled or suspended from membership after appropriate proceedings consistent with lawful provisions of the constitution and bylaws of such organization.

(p) “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(q) “Officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative,” when used with respect to a labor organization, includes elected officials and key administrative personnel, whether elected or appointed (such as business agents, heads of departments or major units, and organizers who exercise substantial independent authority), but does not include salaried nonsupervisory professional staff, stenographic, and service personnel.

(r) “District court of the United States” means a United States district court and a United States court of any place subject to the jurisdiction of the United States.

(Pub. L. 86–257, §3, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 520; Pub. L. 95–598, title III, §320, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2678.)

This chapter, referred to in the opening phrase, was in the original “titles I, II, III, IV, V (except section 505), and VI of this Act”, which reference includes those sections of the Act which are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of such titles to the Code, see Tables.

For definition of Canal Zone, referred to in subsec. (b), see section 3602(b) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 7, 1953, ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter III (§1331 et seq.) of chapter 29 of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1331 of Title 43 and Tables.

The Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, referred to in subsec. (c), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 7 (§141 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (f), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, known as the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, which enacted this chapter, amended sections 153, 158, 159, 160, 164, 186, and 187 of this title, and enacted provisions set out as notes under sections 153, 158, and 481 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsecs. (c) and (j)(1), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in subsec. (j)(1), is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 452, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

1978—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 95–598 substituted “cases under title 11” for “bankruptcy”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–598 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 402(a) of Pub. L. 95–598, set out as an Effective Date note preceding section 101 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

This section is referred to in title 39 section 1209.

Every member of a labor organization shall have equal rights and privileges within such organization to nominate candidates, to vote in elections or referendums of the labor organization, to attend membership meetings, and to participate in the deliberations and voting upon the business of such meetings, subject to reasonable rules and regulations in such organization's constitution and bylaws.

Every member of any labor organization shall have the right to meet and assemble freely with other members; and to express any views, arguments, or opinions; and to express at meetings of the labor organization his views, upon candidates in an election of the labor organization or upon any business properly before the meeting, subject to the organization's established and reasonable rules pertaining to the conduct of meetings: *Provided*, That nothing herein shall be construed to impair the right of a labor organization to adopt and enforce reasonable rules as to the responsibility of every member toward the organization as an institution and to his refraining from conduct that would interfere with its performance of its legal or contractual obligations.

Except in the case of a federation of national or international labor organizations, the rates of dues and initiation fees payable by members of any labor organization in effect on September 14, 1959 shall not be increased, and no general or special assessment shall be levied upon such members, except—

(A) in the case of a local labor organization, (i) by majority vote by secret ballot of the members in good standing voting at a general or special membership meeting, after reasonable notice of the intention to vote upon such question, or (ii) by majority vote of the members in good standing voting in a membership referendum conducted by secret ballot; or

(B) in the case of a labor organization, other than a local labor organization or a federation of national or international labor organizations, (i) by majority vote of the delegates voting at a regular convention, or at a special convention of such labor organization held upon not less than thirty days’ written notice to the principal office of each local or constituent labor organization entitled to such notice, or (ii) by majority vote of the members in good standing of such labor organization voting in a membership referendum conducted by secret ballot, or (iii) by majority vote of the members of the executive board or similar governing body of such labor organization, pursuant to express authority contained in the constitution and bylaws of such labor organization: *Provided*, That such action on the part of the executive board or similar governing body shall be effective only until the next regular convention of such labor organization.

No labor organization shall limit the right of any member thereof to institute an action in any court, or in a proceeding before any administrative agency, irrespective of whether or not the labor organization or its officers are named as defendants or respondents in such action or proceeding, or the right of any member of a labor organization to appear as a witness in any judicial, administrative, or legislative proceeding, or to petition any legislature or to communicate with any legislator: *Provided*, That any such member may be required to exhaust reasonable hearing procedures (but not to exceed a four-month lapse of time) within such organization, before instituting legal or administrative proceedings against such organizations or any officer thereof: *And provided further*, That no interested employer or employer association shall directly or indirectly finance, encourage, or participate in, except as a party, any such action, proceeding, appearance, or petition.

No member of any labor organization may be fined, suspended, expelled, or otherwise disciplined except for nonpayment of dues by such organization or by any officer thereof unless such member has been (A) served with written specific charges; (B) given a reasonable time to prepare his defense; (C) afforded a full and fair hearing.

Any provision of the constitution and bylaws of any labor organization which is inconsistent with the provisions of this section shall be of no force or effect.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title I, §101, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 522.)

Any person whose rights secured by the provisions of this subchapter have been infringed by any violation of this subchapter may bring a civil action in a district court of the United States for such relief (including injunctions) as may be appropriate. Any such action against a labor organization shall be brought in the district court of the United States for the district where the alleged violation occurred, or where the principal office of such labor organization is located.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title I, §102, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 523.)

This section is referred to in section 529 of this title.

Nothing contained in this subchapter shall limit the rights and remedies of any member of a labor organization under any State or Federal law or before any court or other tribunal, or under the constitution and bylaws of any labor organization.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title I, §103, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 523.)

It shall be the duty of the secretary or corresponding principal officer of each labor organization, in the case of a local labor organization, to forward a copy of each collective bargaining agreement made by such labor organization with any employer to any employee who requests such a copy and whose rights as such employee are directly affected by such agreement, and in the case of a labor organization other than a local labor organization, to forward a copy of any such agreement to each constituent unit which has members directly affected by such agreement; and such officer shall maintain at the principal office of the labor organization of which he is an officer copies of any such agreement made or received by such labor organization, which copies shall be available for inspection by any member or by any employee whose rights are affected by such agreement. The provisions of section 440 of this title shall be applicable in the enforcement of this section.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title I, §104, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 523.)

Every labor organization shall inform its members concerning the provisions of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title I, §105, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 523.)

Every labor organization shall adopt a constitution and bylaws and shall file a copy thereof with the Secretary, together with a report, signed by its president and secretary or corresponding principal officers, containing the following information—

(1) the name of the labor organization, its mailing address, and any other address at which it maintains its principal office or at which it keeps the records referred to in this subchapter;

(2) the name and title of each of its officers;

(3) the initiation fee or fees required from a new or transferred member and fees for work permits required by the reporting labor organization;

(4) the regular dues or fees or other periodic payments required to remain a member of the reporting labor organization; and

(5) detailed statements, or references to specific provisions of documents filed under this subsection which contain such statements, showing the provision made and procedures followed with respect to each of the following: (A) qualifications for or restrictions on membership, (B) levying of assessments, (C) participation in insurance or other benefit plans, (D) authorization for disbursement of funds of the labor organization, (E) audit of financial transactions of the labor organization, (F) the calling of regular and special meetings, (G) the selection of officers and stewards and of any representatives to other bodies composed of labor organizations’ representatives, with a specific statement of the manner in which each officer was elected, appointed, or otherwise selected, (H) discipline or removal of officers or agents for breaches of their trust, (I) imposition of fines, suspensions, and expulsions of members, including the grounds for such action and any provision made for notice, hearing, judgment on the evidence, and appeal procedures, (J) authorization for bargaining demands, (K) ratification of contract terms, (L) authorization for strikes, and (M) issuance of work permits. Any change in the information required by this subsection shall be reported to the Secretary at the time the reporting labor organization files with the Secretary the annual financial report required by subsection (b) of this section.

Every labor organization shall file annually with the Secretary a financial report signed by its president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers containing the following information in such detail as may be necessary accurately to disclose its financial condition and operations for its preceding fiscal year—

(1) assets and liabilities at the beginning and end of the fiscal year;

(2) receipts of any kind and the sources thereof;

(3) salary, allowances, and other direct or indirect disbursements (including reimbursed expenses) to each officer and also to each employee who, during such fiscal year, received more than $10,000 in the aggregate from such labor organization and any other labor organization affiliated with it or with which it is affiliated, or which is affiliated with the same national or international labor organization;

(4) direct and indirect loans made to any officer, employee, or member, which aggregated more than $250 during the fiscal year, together with a statement of the purpose, security, if any, and arrangements for repayment;

(5) direct and indirect loans to any business enterprise, together with a statement of the purpose, security, if any, and arrangements for repayment; and

(6) other disbursements made by it including the purposes thereof;

all in such categories as the Secretary may prescribe.

Every labor organization required to submit a report under this subchapter shall make available the information required to be contained in such report to all of its members, and every such labor organization and its officers shall be under a duty enforceable at the suit of any member of such organization in any State court of competent jurisdiction or in the district court of the United States for the district in which such labor organization maintains its principal office, to permit such member for just cause to examine any books, records, and accounts necessary to verify such report. The court in such action may, in its discretion, in addition to any judgment awarded to the plaintiff or plaintiffs, allow a reasonable attorney's fee to be paid by the defendant, and costs of the action.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §201(a)–(c), Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 524, 525.)

Section is comprised of subsecs. (a) to (c) of section 201 of Pub. L. 86–257. Subsec. (d) of section 201 repealed subsecs. (f) to (h) of section 159 of this title, and subsec. (e) of section 201 amended section 158(a)(3)(i) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 435, 437, 439, 461 of this title.

Every officer of a labor organization and every employee of a labor organization (other than an employee performing exclusively clerical or custodial services) shall file with the Secretary a signed report listing and describing for his preceding fiscal year—

(1) any stock, bond, security, or other interest, legal or equitable, which he or his spouse or minor child directly or indirectly held in, and any income or any other benefit with monetary value (including reimbursed expenses) which he or his spouse or minor child derived directly or indirectly from, an employer whose employees such labor organization represents or is actively seeking to represent, except payments and other benefits received as a bona fide employee of such employer;

(2) any transaction in which he or his spouse or minor child engaged, directly or indirectly, involving any stock, bond, security, or loan to or from, or other legal or equitable interest in the business of an employer whose employees such labor organization represents or is actively seeking to represent;

(3) any stock, bond, security, or other interest, legal or equitable, which he or his spouse or minor child directly or indirectly held in, and any income or any other benefit with monetary value (including reimbursed expenses) which he or his spouse or minor child directly or indirectly derived from, any business a substantial part of which consists of buying from, selling or leasing to, or otherwise dealing with, the business of an employer whose employees such labor organization represents or is actively seeking to represent;

(4) any stock, bond, security, or other interest, legal or equitable, which he or his spouse or minor child directly or indirectly held in, and any income or any other benefit with monetary value (including reimbursed expenses) which he or his spouse or minor child directly or indirectly derived from, a business any part of which consists of buying from, or selling or leasing directly or indirectly to, or otherwise dealing with such labor organization;

(5) any direct or indirect business transaction or arrangement between him or his spouse or minor child and any employer whose employees his organization represents or is actively seeking to represent, except work performed and payments and benefits received as a bona fide employee of such employer and except purchases and sales of goods or services in the regular course of business at prices generally available to any employee of such employer; and

(6) any payment of money or other thing of value (including reimbursed expenses) which he or his spouse or minor child received directly or indirectly from any employer or any person who acts as a labor relations consultant to an employer, except payments of the kinds referred to in section 186(c) of this title.

The provisions of paragraphs (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) of subsection (a) of this section shall not be construed to require any such officer or employee to report his bona fide investments in securities traded on a securities exchange registered as a national securities exchange under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 [15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.], in shares in an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 [15 U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.], or in securities of a public utility holding company registered under the Public Utility Holding Company Act of 1935 [15 U.S.C. 79 et seq.], or to report any income derived therefrom.

Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to require any officer or employee of a labor organization to file a report under subsection (a) of this section unless he or his spouse or minor child holds or has held an interest, has received income or any other benefit with monetary value or a loan, or has engaged in a transaction described therein.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §202, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 525.)

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934, referred to in subsec. (b), is act June 6, 1934, ch. 404, 48 Stat. 881, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 2B (§78a et seq.) of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 78a of Title 15 and Tables.

The Investment Company Act of 1940, referred to in subsec. (b), is title I of act Aug. 22, 1940, ch. 686, 54 Stat. 789, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter I (§80a–1 et seq.) of chapter 2D of Title 15. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 80a–51 of Title 15 and Tables.

The Public Utility Holding Company Act of 1935, referred to in subsec. (b), is title I of act Aug. 26, 1935, ch. 687, 49 Stat. 838, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 20 (§79 et seq.) of Title 15. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 79 of Title 15 and Tables.

This section is referred to in sections 435, 437 of this title.

Every employer who in any fiscal year made—

(1) any payment or loan, direct or indirect, of money or other thing of value (including reimbursed expenses), or any promise or agreement therefor, to any labor organization or officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative of a labor organization, or employee of any labor organization, except (A) payments or loans made by any national or State bank, credit union, insurance company, savings and loan association or other credit institution and (B) payments of the kind referred to in section 186(c) of this title;

(2) any payment (including reimbursed expenses) to any of his employees, or any group or committee of such employees, for the purpose of causing such employee or group or committee of employees to persuade other employees to exercise or not to exercise, or as the manner of exercising, the right to organize and bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing unless such payments were contemporaneously or previously disclosed to such other employees;

(3) any expenditure, during the fiscal year, where an object thereof, directly or indirectly, is to interfere with, restrain, or coerce employees in the exercise of the right to organize and bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing, or is to obtain information concerning the activities of employees or a labor organization in connection with a labor dispute involving such employer, except for use solely in conjunction with an administrative or arbitral proceeding or a criminal or civil judicial proceeding;

(4) any agreement or arrangement with a labor relations consultant or other independent contractor or organization pursuant to which such person undertakes activities where an object thereof, directly or indirectly, is to persuade employees to exercise or not to exercise, or persuade employees as to the manner of exercising, the right to organize and bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing, or undertakes to supply such employer with information concerning the activities of employees or a labor organization in connection with a labor dispute involving such employer, except information for use solely in conjunction with an administrative or arbitral proceeding or a criminal or civil judicial proceeding; or

(5) any payment (including reimbursed expenses) pursuant to an agreement or arrangement described in subdivision (4);

shall file with the Secretary a report, in a form prescribed by him, signed by its president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers showing in detail the date and amount of each such payment, loan, promise, agreement, or arrangement and the name, address, and position, if any, in any firm or labor organization of the person to whom it was made and a full explanation of the circumstances of all such payments, including the terms of any agreement or understanding pursuant to which they were made.

Every person who pursuant to any agreement or arrangement with an employer undertakes activities where an object thereof is, directly or indirectly—

(1) to persuade employees to exercise or not to exercise, or persuade employees as to the manner of exercising, the right to organize and bargain collectively through representatives of their own choosing; or

(2) to supply an employer with information concerning the activities of employees or a labor organization in connection with a labor dispute involving such employer, except information for use solely in conjunction with an administrative or arbitral proceeding or a criminal or civil judicial proceeding;

shall file within thirty days after entering into such agreement or arrangement a report with the Secretary, signed by its president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers, containing the name under which such person is engaged in doing business and the address of its principal office, and a detailed statement of the terms and conditions of such agreement or arrangement. Every such person shall file annually, with respect to each fiscal year during which payments were made as a result of such an agreement or arrangement, a report with the Secretary, signed by its president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers, containing a statement (A) of its receipts of any kind from employers on account of labor relations advice or services, designating the sources thereof, and (B) of its disbursements of any kind, in connection with such services and the purposes thereof. In each such case such information shall be set forth in such categories as the Secretary may prescribe.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to require any employer or other person to file a report covering the services of such person by reason of his giving or agreeing to give advice to such employer or representing or agreeing to represent such employer before any court, administrative agency, or tribunal of arbitration or engaging or agreeing to engage in collective bargaining on behalf of such employer with respect to wages, hours, or other terms or conditions of employment or the negotiation of an agreement or any question arising thereunder.

Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to require an employer to file a report under subsection (a) of this section unless he has made an expenditure, payment, loan, agreement, or arrangement of the kind described therein. Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to require any other person to file a report under subsection (b) of this section unless he was a party to an agreement or arrangement of the kind described therein.

Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to require any regular officer, supervisor, or employee of an employer to file a report in connection with services rendered to such employer nor shall any employer be required to file a report covering expenditures made to any regular officer, supervisor, or employee of an employer as compensation for service as a regular officer, supervisor, or employee of such employer.

Nothing contained in this section shall be construed as an amendment to, or modification of the rights protected by, section 158(c) of this title.

The term “interfere with, restrain, or coerce” as used in this section means interference, restraint, and coercion which, if done with respect to the exercise of rights guaranteed in section 157 of this title, would, under section 158(a) of this title, constitute an unfair labor practice.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §203, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 526.)

This section is referred to in sections 435, 437, 439 of this title.

Nothing contained in this chapter shall be construed to require an attorney who is a member in good standing of the bar of any State, to include in any report required to be filed pursuant to the provisions of this chapter any information which was lawfully communicated to such attorney by any of his clients in the course of a legitimate attorney-client relationship.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §204, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 528.)

The contents of the reports and documents filed with the Secretary pursuant to sections 431, 432, 433, and 441 of this title shall be public information, and the Secretary may publish any information and data which he obtains pursuant to the provisions of this subchapter. The Secretary may use the information and data for statistical and research purposes, and compile and publish such studies, analyses, reports, and surveys based thereon as he may deem appropriate.

The Secretary shall by regulation make reasonable provision for the inspection and examination, on the request of any person, of the information and data contained in any report or other document filed with him pursuant to section 431, 432, 433, or 441 of this title.

The Secretary shall by regulation provide for the furnishing by the Department of Labor of copies of reports or other documents filed with the Secretary pursuant to this subchapter, upon payment of a charge based upon the cost of the service. The Secretary shall make available without payment of a charge, or require any person to furnish, to such State agency as is designated by law or by the Governor of the State in which such person has his principal place of business or headquarters, upon request of the Governor of such State, copies of any reports and documents filed by such person with the Secretary pursuant to section 431, 432, 433, or 441 of this title, or of information and data contained therein. No person shall be required by reason of any law of any State to furnish to any officer or agency of such State any information included in a report filed by such person with the Secretary pursuant to the provisions of this subchapter, if a copy of such report, or of the portion thereof containing such information, is furnished to such officer or agency. All moneys received in payment of such charges fixed by the Secretary pursuant to this subsection shall be deposited in the general fund of the Treasury.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §205, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 528; Pub. L. 89–216, §2(a)–(c), Sept. 29, 1965, 79 Stat. 888.)

1965—Pub. L. 89–216 inserted references to section 441 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 461 of this title.

Every person required to file any report under this subchapter shall maintain records on the matters required to be reported which will provide in sufficient detail the necessary basic information and data from which the documents filed with the Secretary may be verified, explained, or clarified, and checked for accuracy and completeness, and shall include vouchers, worksheets, receipts, and applicable resolutions, and shall keep such records available for examination for a period of not less than five years after the filing of the documents based on the information which they contain.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §206, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 529.)

This section is referred to in section 461 of this title.

(a) Each labor organization shall file the initial report required under section 431(a) of this title within ninety days after the date on which it first becomes subject to this chapter.

(b) Each person required to file a report under section 431(b), 432, 433(a), the second sentence of 433(b), or section 441 of this title shall file such report within ninety days after the end of each of its fiscal years; except that where such person is subject to section 431(b), 432, 433(a), the second sentence of 433(b), or section 441 of this title, as the case may be, for only a portion of such a fiscal year (because September 14, 1959, occurs during such person's fiscal year or such person becomes subject to this chapter during its fiscal year or such person may consider that portion as the entire fiscal year in making such report.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §207, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 529; Pub. L. 89–216, §2(d), Sept. 29, 1965, 79 Stat. 888.)

1965—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 89–216 inserted reference to section 441 of this title in two places.

The Secretary shall have authority to issue, amend, and rescind rules and regulations prescribing the form and publication of reports required to be filed under this subchapter and such other reasonable rules and regulations (including rules prescribing reports concerning trusts in which a labor organization is interested) as he may find necessary to prevent the circumvention or evasion of such reporting requirements. In exercising his power under this section the Secretary shall prescribe by general rule simplified reports for labor organizations or employers for whom he finds that by virtue of their size a detailed report would be unduly burdensome, but the Secretary may revoke such provision for simplified forms of any labor organization or employer if he determines, after such investigation as he deems proper and due notice and opportunity for a hearing, that the purposes of this section would be served thereby.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §208, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 529.)

This section is referred to in section 461 of this title; title 39 section 1209.

Any person who willfully violates this subchapter shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

Any person who makes a false statement or representation of a material fact, knowing it to be false, or who knowingly fails to disclose a material fact, in any document, report, or other information required under the provisions of this subchapter shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

Any person who willfully makes a false entry in or willfully conceals, withholds, or destroys any books, records, reports, or statements required to be kept by any provision of this subchapter shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

Each individual required to sign reports under sections 431 and 433 of this title shall be personally responsible for the filing of such reports and for any statement contained therein which he knows to be false.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §209, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 529.)

Whenever it shall appear that any person has violated or is about to violate any of the provisions of this subchapter, the Secretary may bring a civil action for such relief (including injunctions) as may be appropriate. Any such action may be brought in the district court of the United States where the violation occurred or, at the option of the parties, in the United States District Court for the District of Columbia.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §210, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 530.)

This section is referred to in sections 414, 461 of this title.

Each surety company which issues any bond required by this chapter or the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1001 et seq.] shall file annually with the Secretary, with respect to each fiscal year during which any such bond was in force, a report, in such form and detail as he may prescribe by regulation, filed by the president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers of the surety company, describing its bond experience under each such chapter or Act, including information as to the premiums received, total claims paid, amounts recovered by way of subrogation, administrative and legal expenses and such related data and information as the Secretary shall determine to be necessary in the public interest and to carry out the policy of the chapter. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the Secretary finds that any such specific information cannot be practicably ascertained or would be uninformative, the Secretary may modify or waive the requirement for such information.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title II, §211, as added Pub. L. 89–216, §3, Sept. 29, 1965, 79 Stat. 888; amended Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §111(a)(2)(D), Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 852.)

The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 93–406, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 832, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 18 (§1001 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1974—Pub. L. 93–406 substituted “Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974” for “Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–406 effective Jan. 1, 1975, except as provided in section 1031(b)(2) of this title, see section 1031(b)(1) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 435, 437, 1031 of this title.

Every labor organization which has or assumes trusteeship over any subordinate labor organization shall file with the Secretary within thirty days after September 14, 1959 or the imposition of any such trusteeship, and semiannually thereafter, a report, signed by its president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers, as well as by the trustees of such subordinate labor organization, containing the following information: (1) the name and address of the subordinate organization; (2) the date of establishing the trusteeship; (3) a detailed statement of the reason or reasons for establishing or continuing the trusteeship; and (4) the nature and extent of participation by the membership of the subordinate organization in the selection of delegates to represent such organization in regular or special conventions or other policy-determining bodies and in the election of officers of the labor organization which has assumed trusteeship over such subordinate organization. The initial report shall also include a full and complete account of the financial condition of such subordinate organization as of the time trusteeship was assumed over it. During the continuance of a trusteeship the labor organization which has assumed trusteeship over a subordinate labor organization shall file on behalf of the subordinate labor organization the annual financial report required by section 431(b) of this title signed by the president and treasurer or corresponding principal officers of the labor organization which has assumed such trusteeship and the trustees of the subordinate labor organization.

The provisions of sections 431(c), 435, 436, 438, and 440 of this title shall be applicable to reports filed under this subchapter.

Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

Any person who makes a false statement or representation of a material fact, knowing it to be false, or who knowingly fails to disclose a material fact, in any report required under the provisions of this section or willfully makes any false entry in or willfully withholds, conceals, or destroys any documents, books, records, reports, or statements upon which such report is based, shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

Each individual required to sign a report under this section shall be personally responsible for the filing of such report and for any statement contained therein which he knows to be false.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §301, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 530.)

This section is referred to in section 464 of this title.

Trusteeships shall be established and administered by a labor organization over a subordinate body only in accordance with the constitution and bylaws of the organization which has assumed trusteeship over the subordinate body and for the purpose of correcting corruption or financial malpractice, assuring the performance of collective bargaining agreements or other duties of a bargaining representative, restoring democratic procedures, or otherwise carrying out the legitimate objects of such labor organization.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §302, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 531.)

This section is referred to in section 464 of this title.

(a) During any period when a subordinate body of a labor organization is in trusteeship, it shall be unlawful (1) to count the vote of delegates from such body in any convention or election of officers of the labor organization unless the delegates have been chosen by secret ballot in an election in which all the members in good standing of such subordinate body were eligible to participate, or (2) to transfer to such organization any current receipts or other funds of the subordinate body except the normal per capital tax and assessments payable by subordinate bodies not in trusteeship: *Provided*, That nothing herein contained shall prevent the distribution of the assets of a labor organization in accordance with its constitution and bylaws upon the bona fide dissolution thereof.

(b) Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §303, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 531.)

Upon the written complaint of any member or subordinate body of a labor organization alleging that such organization has violated the provisions of this subchapter (except section 461 of this title) the Secretary shall investigate the complaint and if the Secretary finds probable cause to believe that such violation has occurred and has not been remedied he shall, without disclosing the identity of the complainant, bring a civil action in any district court of the United States having jurisdiction of the labor organization for such relief (including injunctions) as may be appropriate. Any member or subordinate body of a labor organization affected by any violation of this subchapter (except section 461 of this title) may bring a civil action in any district court of the United States having jurisdiction of the labor organization for such relief (including injunctions) as may be appropriate.

For the purpose of actions under this section, district courts of the United States shall be deemed to have jurisdiction of a labor organization (1) in the district in which the principal office of such labor organization is located, or (2) in any district in which its duly authorized officers or agents are engaged in conducting the affairs of the trusteeship.

In any proceeding pursuant to this section a trusteeship established by a labor organization in conformity with the procedural requirements of its constitution and bylaws and authorized or ratified after a fair hearing either before the executive board or before such other body as may be provided in accordance with its constitution or bylaws shall be presumed valid for a period of eighteen months from the date of its establishment and shall not be subject to attack during such period except upon clear and convincing proof that the trusteeship was not established or maintained in good faith for a purpose allowable under section 462 of this title. After the expiration of eighteen months the trusteeship shall be presumed invalid in any such proceeding and its discontinuance shall be decreed unless the labor organization shall show by clear and convincing proof that the continuation of the trusteeship is necessary for a purpose allowable under section 462 of this title. In the latter event the court may dismiss the complaint or retain jurisdiction of the cause on such conditions and for such period as it deems appropriate.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §304, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 531.)

The Secretary shall submit to the Congress at the expiration of three years from September 14, 1959, a report upon the operation of this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §305, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 532.)

The rights and remedies provided by this subchapter shall be in addition to any and all other rights and remedies at law or in equity: *Provided*, That upon the filing of a complaint by the Secretary the jurisdiction of the district court over such trusteeship shall be exclusive and the final judgment shall be res judicata.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title III, §306, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 532.)

Every national or international labor organization, except a federation of national or international labor organizations, shall elect its officers not less often than once every five years either by secret ballot among the members in good standing or at a convention of delegates chosen by secret ballot.

Every local labor organization shall elect its officers not less often than once every three years by secret ballot among the members in good standing.

Every national or international labor organization, except a federation of national or international labor organizations, and every local labor organization, and its officers, shall be under a duty, enforceable at the suit of any bona fide candidate for office in such labor organization in the district court of the United States in which such labor organization maintains its principal office, to comply with all reasonable requests of any candidate to distribute by mail or otherwise at the candidate's expense campaign literature in aid of such person's candidacy to all members in good standing of such labor organization and to refrain from discrimination in favor of or against any candidate with respect to the use of lists of members, and whenever such labor organizations or its officers authorize the distribution by mail or otherwise to members of campaign literature on behalf of any candidate or of the labor organization itself with reference to such election, similar distribution at the request of any other bona fide candidate shall be made by such labor organization and its officers, with equal treatment as to the expense of such distribution. Every bona fide candidate shall have the right, once within 30 days prior to an election of a labor organization in which he is a candidate, to inspect a list containing the names and last known addresses of all members of the labor organization who are subject to a collective bargaining agreement requiring membership therein as a condition of employment, which list shall be maintained and kept at the principal office of such labor organization by a designated official thereof. Adequate safeguards to insure a fair election shall be provided, including the right of any candidate to have an observer at the polls and at the counting of the ballots.

Officers of intermediate bodies, such as general committees, system boards, joint boards, or joint councils, shall be elected not less often than once every four years by secret ballot among the members in good standing or by labor organization officers representative of such members who have been elected by secret ballot.

In any election required by this section which is to be held by secret ballot a reasonable opportunity shall be given for the nomination of candidates and every member in good standing shall be eligible to be a candidate and to hold office (subject to section 504 of this title and to reasonable qualifications uniformly imposed) and shall have the right to vote for or otherwise support the candidate or candidates of his choice, without being subject to penalty, discipline, or improper interference or reprisal of any kind by such organization or any member thereof. Not less than fifteen days prior to the election notice thereof shall be mailed to each member at his last known home address. Each member in good standing shall be entitled to one vote. No member whose dues have been withheld by his employer for payment to such organization pursuant to his voluntary authorization provided for in a collective bargaining agreement shall be declared ineligible to vote or be a candidate for office in such organization by reason of alleged delay or default in the payment of dues. The votes cast by members of each local labor organization shall be counted, and the results published, separately. The election officials designated in the constitution and bylaws or the secretary, if no other official is designated, shall preserve for one year the ballots and all other records pertaining to the election. The election shall be conducted in accordance with the constitution and bylaws of such organization insofar as they are not inconsistent with the provisions of this subchapter.

When officers are chosen by a convention of delegates elected by secret ballot, the convention shall be conducted in accordance with the constitution and bylaws of the labor organization insofar as they are not inconsistent with the provisions of this subchapter. The officials designated in the constitution and bylaws or the secretary, if no other is designated, shall preserve for one year the credentials of the delegates and all minutes and other records of the convention pertaining to the election of officers.

No moneys received by any labor organization by way of dues, assessment, or similar levy, and no moneys of an employer shall be contributed or applied to promote the candidacy of any person in any election subject to the provisions of this subchapter. Such moneys of a labor organization may be utilized for notices, factual statements of issues not involving candidates, and other expenses necessary for the holding of an election.

If the Secretary, upon application of any member of a local labor organization, finds after hearing in accordance with subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5 that the constitution and bylaws of such labor organization do not provide an adequate procedure for the removal of an elected officer guilty of serious misconduct, such officer may be removed, for cause shown and after notice and hearing, by the members in good standing voting in a secret ballot, conducted by the officers of such labor organization in accordance with its constitution and bylaws insofar as they are not inconsistent with the provisions of this subchapter.

The Secretary shall promulgate rules and regulations prescribing minimum standards and procedures for determining the adequacy of the removal procedures to which reference is made in subsection (h) of this section.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title IV, §401, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 532.)

In subsec. (h), “subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5” substituted for “the Administrative Procedure Act” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section 404 of Pub. L. 86–257 provided that: “The provisions of this title [enacting this subchapter] shall become applicable—

“(1) ninety days after the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 14, 1959] in the case of a labor organization whose constitution and bylaws can lawfully be modified or amended by action of its constitutional officers or governing body, or

“(2) where such modification can only be made by a constitutional convention of the labor organization, not later than the next constitutional convention of such labor organization after the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 14, 1959], or one year after such date, whichever is sooner. If no such convention is held within such one-year period, the executive board or similar governing body empowered to act for such labor organization between conventions is empowered to make such interim constitutional changes as are necessary to carry out the provisions of this title [enacting this subchapter].”

This section is referred to in section 482 of this title.

A member of a labor organization—

(1) who has exhausted the remedies available under the constitution and bylaws of such organization and of any parent body, or

(2) who has invoked such available remedies without obtaining a final decision within three calendar months after their invocation,

may file a complaint with the Secretary within one calendar month thereafter alleging the violation of any provision of section 481 of this title (including violation of the constitution and bylaws of the labor organization pertaining to the election and removal of officers). The challenged election shall be presumed valid pending a final decision thereon (as hereinafter provided) and in the interim the affairs of the organization shall be conducted by the officers elected or in such other manner as its constitution and bylaws may provide.

The Secretary shall investigate such complaint and, if he finds probable cause to believe that a violation of this subchapter has occurred and has not been remedied, he shall, within sixty days after the filing of such complaint, bring a civil action against the labor organization as an entity in the district court of the United States in which such labor organization maintains its principal office to set aside the invalid election, if any, and to direct the conduct of an election or hearing and vote upon the removal of officers under the supervision of the Secretary and in accordance with the provisions of this subchapter and such rules and regulations as the Secretary may prescribe. The court shall have power to take such action as it deems proper to preserve the assets of the labor organization.

If, upon a preponderance of the evidence after a trial upon the merits, the court finds—

(1) that an election has not been held within the time prescribed by section 481 of this title, or

(2) that the violation of section 481 of this title may have affected the outcome of an election,

the court shall declare the election, if any, to be void and direct the conduct of a new election under supervision of the Secretary and, so far as lawful and practicable, in conformity with the constitution and bylaws of the labor organization. The Secretary shall promptly certify to the court the names of the persons elected, and the court shall thereupon enter a decree declaring such persons to be the officers of the labor organization. If the proceeding is for the removal of officers pursuant to subsection (h) of section 481 of this title, the Secretary shall certify the results of the vote and the court shall enter a decree declaring whether such persons have been removed as officers of the labor organization.

An order directing an election, dismissing a complaint, or designating elected officers of a labor organization shall be appealable in the same manner as the final judgment in a civil action, but an order directing an election shall not be stayed pending appeal.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title IV, §402, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 534.)

No labor organization shall be required by law to conduct elections of officers with greater frequency or in a different form or manner than is required by its own constitution or bylaws, except as otherwise provided by this subchapter. Existing rights and remedies to enforce the constitution and bylaws of a labor organization with respect to elections prior to the conduct thereof shall not be affected by the provisions of this subchapter. The remedy provided by this subchapter for challenging an election already conducted shall be exclusive.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title IV, §403, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 534.)

The officers, agents, shop stewards, and other representatives of a labor organization occupy positions of trust in relation to such organization and its members as a group. It is, therefore, the duty of each such person, taking into account the special problems and functions of a labor organization, to hold its money and property solely for the benefit of the organization and its members and to manage, invest, and expend the same in accordance with its constitution and bylaws and any resolutions of the governing bodies adopted thereunder, to refrain from dealing with such organization as an adverse party or in behalf of an adverse party in any matter connected with his duties and from holding or acquiring any pecuniary or personal interest which conflicts with the interests of such organization, and to account to the organization for any profit received by him in whatever capacity in connection with transactions conducted by him or under his direction on behalf of the organization. A general exculpatory provision in the constitution and bylaws of such a labor organization or a general exculpatory resolution of a governing body purporting to relieve any such person of liability for breach of the duties declared by this section shall be void as against public policy.

When any officer, agent, shop steward, or representative of any labor organization is alleged to have violated the duties declared in subsection (a) of this section and the labor organization or its governing board or officers refuse or fail to sue or recover damages or secure an accounting or other appropriate relief within a reasonable time after being requested to do so by any member of the labor organization, such member may sue such officer, agent, shop steward, or representative in any district court of the United States or in any State court of competent jurisdiction to recover damages or secure an accounting or other appropriate relief for the benefit of the labor organization. No such proceeding shall be brought except upon leave of the court obtained upon verified application and for good cause shown, which application may be made ex parte. The trial judge may allot a reasonable part of the recovery in any action under this subsection to pay the fees of counsel prosecuting the suit at the instance of the member of the labor organization and to compensate such member for any expenses necessarily paid or incurred by him in connection with the litigation.

Any person who embezzles, steals, or unlawfully and willfully abstracts or converts to his own use, or the use of another, any of the moneys, funds, securities, property, or other assets of a labor organization of which he is an officer, or by which he is employed, directly or indirectly, shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than five years, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title V, §501, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 535.)

Wire or oral communications, authorization for interception, to provide evidence of violations of subsec. (c) of this section dealing with restrictions on payments and loans to labor organizations, see section 2516 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

This section is referred to in title 18 sections 1961, 2516.

(a) Every officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative or employee of any labor organization (other than a labor organization whose property and annual financial receipts do not exceed $5,000 in value), or of a trust in which a labor organization is interested, who handles funds or other property thereof shall be bonded to provide protection against loss by reason of acts of fraud or dishonesty on his part directly or through connivance with others. The bond of each such person shall be fixed at the beginning of the organization's fiscal year and shall be in an amount not less than 10 per centum of the funds handled by him and his predecessor or predecessors, if any, during the preceding fiscal year, but in no case more than $500,000. If the labor organization or the trust in which a labor organization is interested does not have a preceding fiscal year, the amount of the bond shall be, in the case of a local labor organization, not less than $1,000, and in the case of any other labor organization or of a trust in which a labor organization is interested, not less than $10,000. Such bonds shall be individual or schedule in form, and shall have a corporate surety company as surety thereon. Any person who is not covered by such bonds shall not be permitted to receive, handle, disburse, or otherwise exercise custody or control of the funds or other property of a labor organization or of a trust in which a labor organization is interested. No such bond shall be placed through an agent or broker or with a surety company in which any labor organization or any officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative of a labor organization has any direct or indirect interest. Such surety company shall be a corporate surety which holds a grant of authority from the Secretary of the Treasury under sections 9304–9308 of title 31, as an acceptable surety on Federal bonds: *Provided*, That when in the opinion of the Secretary a labor organization has made other bonding arrangements which would provide the protection required by this section at comparable cost or less, he may exempt such labor organization from placing a bond through a surety company holding such grant of authority.

(b) Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title V, §502, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 536; Pub. L. 89–216, §1, Sept. 29, 1965, 79 Stat. 888.)

In subsec. (a), “sections 9304–9308 of title 31” substituted for “the Act of July 30, 1947 (6 U.S.C. 6–13)” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

1965—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 89–216 substituted “to provide protection against loss by reason of act of fraud or dishonesty on his part directly or through connivance with others” for “for the faithful discharge of his duties” in first sentence and inserted proviso allowing Secretary to permit other arrangements to provide necessary protection.

No labor organization shall make directly or indirectly any loan or loans to any officer or employee of such organization which results in a total indebtedness on the part of such officer or employee to the labor organization in excess of $2,000.

No labor organization or employer shall directly or indirectly pay the fine of any officer or employee convicted of any willful violation of this chapter.

Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title V, §503, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 536.)

No person who is or has been a member of the Communist Party or who has been convicted of, or served any part of a prison term resulting from his conviction of, robbery, bribery, extortion, embezzlement, grand larceny, burglary, arson, violation of narcotics laws, murder, rape, assault with intent to kill, assault which inflicts grievous bodily injury, or a violation of subchapter III or IV of this chapter 1 any felony involving abuse or misuse of such person's position or employment in a labor organization or employee benefit plan to seek or obtain an illegal gain at the expense of the members of the labor organization or the beneficiaries of the employee benefit plan, or conspiracy to commit any such crimes or attempt to commit any such crimes, or a crime in which any of the foregoing crimes is an element, shall serve or be permitted to serve—

(1) as a consultant or adviser to any labor organization,

(2) as an officer, director, trustee, member of any executive board or similar governing body, business agent, manager, organizer, employee, or representative in any capacity of any labor organization,

(3) as a labor relations consultant or adviser to a person engaged in an industry or activity affecting commerce, or as an officer, director, agent, or employee of any group or association of employers dealing with any labor organization, or in a position having specific collective bargaining authority or direct responsibility in the area of labor-management relations in any corporation or association engaged in an industry or activity affecting commerce, or

(4) in a position which entitles its occupant to a share of the proceeds of, or as an officer or executive or administrative employee of, any entity whose activities are in whole or substantial part devoted to providing goods or services to any labor organization, or

(5) in any capacity, other than in his capacity as a member of such labor organization, that involves decisionmaking authority concerning, or decisionmaking authority over, or custody of, or control of the moneys, funds, assets, or property of any labor organization,

during or for the period of thirteen years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, unless the sentencing court on the motion of the person convicted sets a lesser period of at least three years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, or unless prior to the end of such period, in the case of a person so convicted or imprisoned, (A) his citizenship rights, having been revoked as a result of such conviction, have been fully restored, or (B) if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, the United States district court for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements under section 994(a) of title 28, determines that such person's service in any capacity referred to in clauses (1) through (5) would not be contrary to the purposes of this chapter. Prior to making any such determination the court shall hold a hearing and shall give notice of such proceeding by certified mail to the Secretary of Labor and to State, county, and Federal prosecuting officials in the jurisdiction or jurisdictions in which such person was convicted. The court's determination in any such proceeding shall be final. No person shall knowingly hire, retain, employ, or otherwise place any other person to serve in any capacity in violation of this subsection.

Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than five years, or both.

For the purpose of this section—

(1) A person shall be deemed to have been “convicted” and under the disability of “conviction” from the date of the judgment of the trial court, regardless of whether that judgment remains under appeal.

(2) A period of parole shall not be considered as part of a period of imprisonment.

Whenever any person—

(1) by operation of this section, has been barred from office or other position in a labor organization as a result of a conviction, and

(2) has filed an appeal of that conviction,

any salary which would be otherwise due such person by virtue of such office or position, shall be placed in escrow by the individual employer or organization responsible for payment of such salary. Payment of such salary into escrow shall continue for the duration of the appeal or for the period of time during which such salary would be otherwise due, whichever period is shorter. Upon the final reversal of such person's conviction on appeal, the amounts in escrow shall be paid to such person. Upon the final sustaining of such person's conviction on appeal, the amounts in escrow shall be returned to the individual employer or organization responsible for payments of those amounts. Upon final reversal of such person's conviction, such person shall no longer be barred by this statute 2 from assuming any position from which such person was previously barred.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title V, §504, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 536; Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §§229, 803, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2031, 2133; Pub. L. 100–182, §15(a), Dec. 7, 1987, 101 Stat. 1269.)

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–182, in concluding provisions, substituted “if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, the United States district court for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements under section 994(a) of title 28,” for “the United States Parole Commission”, “court” and “court's” for “Commission” and “Commission's”, respectively, and “a hearing” for “an administrative hearing”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–473, §229, which directed substitution of “if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, on motion of the United States Department of Justice, the district court of the United States for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements issued pursuant to section 994(a) of title 28,” for “the Board of Parole of the United States Justice Department”, “court” and “court's” for “Board” and “Board's”, respectively, and “a” for “an administrative”, was (except for the last substitution) incapable of execution in view of the previous amendment by section 803(a) of Pub. L. 98–473 which became effective prior to the effective date of the amendment by section 229. See note below.

Pub. L. 98–473, §803(a), in amending provisions after “or a violation of subchapter III or IV of the chapter” generally, inserted provisions relating to abuse or misuse of employment in a labor organization or employee benefit plan, substituted “conspiracy to commit any such crimes or attempt to commit any such crimes, or a crime in which any of the foregoing crimes is an element” for “conspiracy to commit any such crimes”, added par. (1), redesignated former par. (1) as (2) and in par. (2) as so redesignated substituted “employee, or representative in any capacity of any labor organization” for “or other employee (other than as an employee performing exclusively clerical or custodial duties) of any labor organization, or”, redesignated former par. (2) as (3) and in par. (3) as so redesignated inserted “or advisor” after “consultant”, struck out “(other than as an employee performing exclusively clerical or custodial duties)” after “employee”, and inserted “or in a position having specific collective bargaining authority or direct responsibility in the area of labor-management relations in any corporation or association engaged in an industry or activity affecting commerce, or”, added pars. (4) and (5), struck out “or for five years after the termination of his membership in the Communist Party,” substituted “the period of thirteen years” for “five years”, inserted “whichever is later, unless the sentencing court on the motion of the person convicted sets a lesser period of at least three years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, or”, substituted in cl. (B) “United States Parole Commission” for “Board of Parole of the United States Department of Justice”, and in the provisions following cl. (B) substituted “Commission” and “Commission's” for “Board” and “Board's”, respectively, inserted provision of notice to the Secretary of Labor, and substituted “No person shall knowingly hire, retain, employ, or otherwise place any other person to serve in any capacity in violation of this subsection” for “No labor organization or officer thereof shall knowingly permit any person to assume or hold any office or paid position in violation of this subsection”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–473, §803(b), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting “five years” for “one year”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–473, §803(c), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted provisions defining conviction as from date of judgment of trial court, regardless of appeal, for former provisions defining it as from date of judgment of trial court or date of final sustaining of judgment on appeal, whichever is later, regardless of whether such conviction occurred before or after Sept. 14, 1959, and added par. (2).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–473, §803(d), added subsec. (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–182 applicable with respect to offenses committed after Dec. 7, 1987, see section 26 of Pub. L. 100–182, set out as a note under section 3006A of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Amendment by section 229 of Pub. L. 98–473 effective Nov. 1, 1987, and applicable only to offenses committed after the taking effect of such amendment, see section 235(a)(1) of Pub. L. 98–473, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3551 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Section 804 of title II of Pub. L. 98–473 provided that:

“(a) The amendments made by section 802 [amending section 1111 of this title] and section 803 [amending this section] of this title shall take effect with respect to any judgment of conviction entered by the trial court after the date of enactment of this title [Oct. 12, 1984], except that that portion of such amendments relating to the commencement of the period of disability shall apply to any judgment of conviction entered prior to the date of enactment of this title if a right of appeal or an appeal from such judgment is pending on the date of enactment of this title.

“(b) Subject to subsection (a) the amendments made by sections 803 and 804 [probably should be sections 802 and 803] shall not affect any disability under section 411 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [section 1111 of this title] or under section 504 of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 [this section] in effect on the date of enactment of this title [Oct. 12, 1984].”

This section is referred to in section 481 of this title; title 31 section 6711.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a comma.

2 So in original. Probably should be “section”.

(a) The Secretary shall have power when he believes it necessary in order to determine whether any person has violated or is about to violate any provision of this chapter (except subchapter II of this chapter) to make an investigation and in connection therewith he may enter such places and inspect such records and accounts and question such persons as he may deem necessary to enable him to determine the facts relative thereto. The Secretary may report to interested persons or officials concerning the facts required to be shown in any report required by this chapter and concerning the reasons for failure or refusal to file such a report or any other matter which he deems to be appropriate as a result of such an investigation.

(b) For the purpose of any investigation provided for in this chapter, the provisions of sections 49 and 50 of title 15 (relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, papers, and documents), are made applicable to the jurisdiction, powers, and duties of the Secretary or any officers designated by him.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §601, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 539.)

The phrase “this chapter (except subchapter II of this chapter)”, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act (except title I or amendments made by this Act to other statutes)”. “This chapter”, referred to later in subsec. (a) and also in subsec. (b), was in the original “this Act”. “This Act” is Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, known as the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, which enacted this chapter, amended sections 153, 158, 159, 160, 164, 186, and 187 of this title, and enacted provisions set out as notes under sections 153, 158, and 481 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title and Tables.

(a) It shall be unlawful to carry on picketing on or about the premises of any employer for the purpose of, or as part of any conspiracy or in furtherance of any plan or purpose for, the personal profit or enrichment of any individual (except a bona fide increase in wages or other employee benefits) by taking or obtaining any money or other thing of value from such employer against his will or with his consent.

(b) Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned not more than twenty years, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §602, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 539.)

(a) Except as explicitly provided to the contrary, nothing in this chapter shall reduce or limit the responsibilities of any labor organization or any officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative of a labor organization, or of any trust in which a labor organization is interested, under any other Federal law or under the laws of any State, and, except as explicitly provided to the contrary, nothing in this chapter shall take away any right or bar any remedy to which members of a labor organization are entitled under such other Federal law or law of any State.

(b) Nothing contained in this chapter and section 186(a)–(c) of this title shall be construed to supersede or impair or otherwise affect the provisions of the Railway Labor Act, as amended [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], or any of the obligations, rights, benefits, privileges, or immunities of any carrier, employee, organization, representative, or person subject thereto; nor shall anything contained in this chapter be construed to confer any rights, privileges, immunities, or defenses upon employers, or to impair or otherwise affect the rights of any person under the National Labor Relations Act, as amended [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §603, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 540.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, known as the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, which enacted this chapter, amended sections 153, 158, 159, 160, 164, 186, and 187 of this title, and enacted provisions set out as notes under sections 153, 158, and 481 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title and Tables.

The phrase “this chapter and section 186(a)–(c) of this title”, referred to in subsec. (b), was in original “titles I, II, III, IV, V, or VI of this Act”. The phrase “this chapter” later appearing in subsec. (b), was in original “said titles (except section 505) of this Act”. Original text reference, in both instances, includes those sections of the Act which are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of such titles to the Code, see Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 452, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to impair or diminish the authority of any State to enact and enforce general criminal laws with respect to robbery, bribery, extortion, embezzlement, grand larceny, burglary, arson, violation of narcotics laws, murder, rape, assault with intent to kill, or assault which inflicts grievous bodily injury, or conspiracy to commit any of such crimes.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §604, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 540.)

Notwithstanding this or any other Act regulating labor-management relations, each State shall have the authority to enact and enforce, as part of a comprehensive statutory system to eliminate the threat of pervasive racketeering activity in an industry that is, or over time has been, affected by such activity, a provision of law that applies equally to employers, employees, and collective bargaining representatives, which provision of law governs service in any position in a local labor organization which acts or seeks to act in that State as a collective bargaining representative pursuant to the National Labor Relations Act [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], in the industry that is subject to that program.

(Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §2201, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2192.)

This Act, referred to in text, probably means title II of Pub. L. 98–473, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 1976, known as the Comprehensive Crime Control Act of 1984. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1984 Amendments note set out under section 1 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and Tables.

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in text, is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 449, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

Section was not enacted as part of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, which comprises this chapter.

For the purposes of this chapter, service of summons, subpena, or other legal process of a court of the United States upon an officer or agent of a labor organization in his capacity as such shall constitute service upon the labor organization.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §605, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 540.)

The provisions of subchapter II of chapter 5, and chapter 7, of title 5 shall be applicable to the issuance, amendment, or rescission of any rules or regulations, or any adjudication authorized or required pursuant to the provisions of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §606, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 540.)

“Subchapter II of chapter 5, and chapter 7, of title 5” substituted in text for “the Administrative Procedure Act” on authority of Pub. L. 89–554, §7(b), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 631, the first section of which enacted Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In order to avoid unnecessary expense and duplication of functions among Government agencies, the Secretary may make such arrangements or agreements for cooperation or mutual assistance in the performance of his functions under this chapter and the functions of any such agency as he may find to be practicable and consistent with law. The Secretary may utilize the facilities or services of any department, agency, or establishment of the United States or of any State or political subdivision of a State, including the services of any of its employees, with the lawful consent of such department, agency, or establishment; and each department, agency, or establishment of the United States is authorized and directed to cooperate with the Secretary and, to the extent permitted by law, to provide such information and facilities as he may request for his assistance in the performance of his functions under this chapter. The Attorney General or his representative shall receive from the Secretary for appropriate action such evidence developed in the performance of his functions under this chapter as may be found to warrant consideration for criminal prosecution under the provisions of this chapter or other Federal law.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §607, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 540.)

No person shall be punished for any criminal contempt allegedly committed outside the immediate presence of the court in connection with any civil action prosecuted by the Secretary or any other person in any court of the United States under the provisions of this chapter unless the facts constituting such criminal contempt are established by the verdict of the jury in a proceeding in the district court of the United States, which jury shall be chosen and empaneled in the manner prescribed by the law governing trial juries in criminal prosecutions in the district courts of the United States.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §608, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 541.)

Criminal contempt, see Rule 42, Federal Rules of Criminal Procedure, Title 18, Appendix.

It shall be unlawful for any labor organization, or any officer, agent, shop steward, or other representative of a labor organization, or any employee thereof to fine, suspend, expel, or otherwise discipline any of its members for exercising any right to which he is entitled under the provisions of this chapter. The provisions of section 412 of this title shall be applicable in the enforcement of this section.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §609, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 541.)

It shall be unlawful for any person through the use of force or violence, or threat of the use of force or violence, to restrain, coerce, or intimidate, or attempt to restrain, coerce, or intimidate any member of a labor organization for the purpose of interfering with or preventing the exercise of any right to which he is entitled under the provisions of this chapter. Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined not more than $1,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §610, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 541.)

If any provision of this chapter, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstances, shall be held invalid, the remainder of this chapter or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid, shall not be affected thereby.

(Pub. L. 86–257, title VI, §611, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 541.)


This chapter is referred to in title 20 section 6104.

There shall be an executive department in the Government to be called the Department of Labor, with a Secretary of Labor, who shall be the head thereof, to be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate, and whose tenure of office shall be like that of the heads of the other executive departments. The provisions of title 4 of the Revised Statutes, including all amendments thereto, shall be applicable to said department. The purpose of the Department of Labor shall be to foster, promote, and develop the welfare of the wage earners of the United States, to improve their working conditions, and to advance their opportunities for profitable employment. The said Secretary shall cause a seal of office to be made for the said department of such device as the President shall approve and judicial notice shall be taken of the said seal.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §1, 37 Stat. 736; Mar. 4, 1925, ch. 549, §4, 43 Stat. 1301.)

Title 4 of the Revised Statutes, referred to in text, was entitled “Provisions Applicable to All Executive Departments”, and consisted of R.S. §§158 to 198. For provisions of the Code derived from such title 4, see sections 101, 301, 303, 304, 503, 2952, 3101, 3106, 3341, 3345 to 3349, 5535, 5536 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees; section 207 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure; sections 514, 520 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure; section 3321 of Title 31, Money and Finance.

Section was formerly classified to section 611 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

Pub. L. 99–619, §1, Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3491, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 552 and 553 of this title and sections 5313 to 5316 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, repealing section 3 of Reorganization Plan No. 6 of 1950, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 552 and 553 of this title and section 5316 of Title 5] may be cited as the ‘Department of Labor Executive Level Conforming Amendments of 1986’.”

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For assignment of certain emergency preparedness functions to Secretary of Labor, see Parts 1, 2, and 12 of Ex. Ord. No. 12656, Nov. 18, 1988, 53 F.R. 47491, set out as a note under section 5195 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

A Department of Labor under the charge of a Commissioner of Labor was first established by act June 13, 1888, ch. 389, 25 Stat. 182. That Department was placed under the jurisdiction and made a part of a new department, called the Department of Commerce and Labor, by act Feb. 14, 1903, ch. 552, §4, 32 Stat. 827. The name Department of Labor was changed to Bureau of Labor by act Mar. 18, 1904, ch. 716, 33 Stat. 136. The present Department of Labor was created by act Mar. 4, 1913. The Bureau of Labor in the Department of Commerce and Labor was transferred to the present Department of Labor by said act.

For order of succession in case of absence, sickness, resignation, or death of Secretary and Under Secretary, see Ex. Ord. No. 10513, Jan. 19, 1954, 19 F.R. 369, set out as a note under section 3347 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Compensation of Secretary, see section 5312 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There is established in the Department of Labor the office of Deputy Secretary of Labor, which shall be filled by appointment by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. The Deputy Secretary shall perform such duties as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor or required by law. The Deputy Secretary shall (1) in case of the death, resignation, or removal from office of the Secretary, perform the duties of the Secretary until a successor is appointed, and (2) in case of the absence or sickness of the Secretary, perform the duties of the Secretary until such absence or sickness shall terminate.

(Apr. 17, 1946, ch. 140, §1, 60 Stat. 91; Pub. L. 99–619, §2(a)(1), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3491.)

Provisions of this section which prescribed the basic annual compensation of the Under [Deputy] Secretary were omitted to conform to the provisions of the Executive Schedule. See section 5314 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section was formerly classified to section 611a of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

1986—Pub. L. 99–619 substituted “Deputy Secretary” for “Under Secretary” in three places.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section 2(a)(4) of Pub. L. 99–619 provided that: “Any reference to the Under Secretary of Labor in any law, rule, regulation, certificate, directive, or other document in force on the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 6, 1986] shall be deemed to refer and apply to the Deputy Secretary of Labor.”

Section 2(f)(1) of Pub. L. 99–619 provided that: “The incumbent in the position of Under Secretary of Labor on the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 6, 1986] may serve as Deputy Secretary of Labor at the pleasure of the President after such date and the amendments made by subsection (a)(2) [amending section 5313 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees] shall apply to such incumbent.”

For order of succession in case of absence, sickness, resignation, or death of Secretary and Under Secretary, see Ex. Ord. No. 10513, Jan. 19, 1954, 19 F.R. 369 set out as a note under section 3347 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There are established in the Department of Labor nine offices of Assistant Secretary of Labor, which shall be filled by appointment by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. Each of the Assistant Secretaries of Labor shall perform such duties as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor or required by law. One of such Assistant Secretaries shall be an Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health.

(Apr. 17, 1946, ch. 140, §2, 60 Stat. 91; Pub. L. 87–137, §1, Aug. 11, 1961, 75 Stat. 338; Pub. L. 91–596, §29(a), Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1618; Pub. L. 99–619, §2(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3491.)

Provisions of this section which prescribed the basic annual compensation of the Assistant Secretaries were omitted to conform to the provisions of the Executive Schedule. See section 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section was formerly classified to section 611b of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

1986—Pub. L. 99–619 substituted “nine offices” for “five offices”.

1970—Pub. L. 91–596 increased the number of Assistant Secretaries of Labor from four to five and inserted provision that one of such Assistant Secretaries be an Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health.

1961—Pub. L. 87–137 increased the number of Assistant Secretaries of Labor from three to four.

Amendment by Pub. L. 91–596 effective 120 days after Dec. 29, 1970 see section 34 of Pub. L. 91–596, set out as an Effective Date note under section 651 of this title.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Section 2(b)(3) of Pub. L. 99–619 provided that: “Any reference in any law, regulation, certificate, directive, or other document to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Veterans’ Employment in force on the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 6, 1986] shall be deemed to be a reference to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Veterans’ Employment and Training.”

Section 2(f)(2) of Pub. L. 99–619 provided that: “The incumbent in the position of Assistant Secretary of Labor for Veterans’ Employment on the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 6, 1986] may serve as Assistant Secretary of Labor for Veterans’ Employment and Training at the pleasure of the President after such date and the amendments made by subsection (b)(2) [amending section 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees] shall apply to such incumbent.”

Designation of officers to act as Secretary of Labor, see Ex. Ord. No. 10513, set out as a note under section 3347 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There shall be in the Department of Labor not more than two assistants to the Secretary, who shall be appointed by the President and shall perform such duties as may be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor or required by law.

(Mar. 4, 1927, ch. 498, 44 Stat. 1415.)

Section was formerly classified to section 613a of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There shall be a solicitor for the Department of Labor.

(Mar. 18, 1904, ch. 716, §1, 33 Stat. 135; Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §7, 37 Stat. 738; Ex. Ord. No. 6166, §7, June 10, 1933.)

The words “of the Department of Justice” were omitted from text on authority of section 7 of Ex. Ord. No. 6166, which transferred the Solicitor for the Department of Labor from the Department of Justice to the Department of Labor.

Section was formerly classified to section 613b of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Compensation of solicitor, see section 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Solicitor to act as Secretary of Labor, see Ex. Ord. No. 10513, set out as a note under section 3347 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There shall be in said department a chief clerk and such other clerical assistants, inspectors, and special agents as may from time to time be provided for by Congress.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §2, 37 Stat. 736; Ex. Ord. No. 6166, §4, June 10, 1933.)

The words “a disbursing clerk” were omitted from text on authority of Ex. Ord. No. 6166, which transferred all functions relating to the disbursement of moneys of the United States to the Treasury Department. See section 3321 of Title 31, Money and Finance.

Section was formerly classified to section 615 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The following-named offices, bureaus, divisions, and branches of the public service, and all that pertains to the same, shall be under the jurisdiction and supervision of the Department of Labor:

1. Bureau of Employees’ Compensation.

2. Bureau of Labor Standards.

3. Bureau of Labor Statistics.

4. Division of Public Contracts.

5. Employees’ Compensation Appeals Board.

6. United States Employment Service.

7. Wage and Hour Division.

8. Women's Bureau.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §3, 37 Stat. 737; June 5, 1920, ch. 248, §1, 41 Stat. 987; June 6, 1933, ch. 49, §1, 48 Stat. 113; Ex. Ord. No. 6166, §14, June 10, 1933; June 30, 1936, ch. 881, §4, 49 Stat. 2038; June 25, 1938, ch. 676, §4, 52 Stat. 1061; 1939 Reorg. Plan No. I, §201, eff. July 1, 1939, 4 F.R. 2728, 53 Stat. 1424; 1940 Reorg. Plan No. V, §1, eff. June 4, 1940, 5 F.R. 2223, 54 Stat. 1238; Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, 7 F.R. 7379; Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, 10 F.R. 11929; 1946 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1, eff. July 16, 1946, 11 F.R. 7873, 60 Stat. 1095; June 23, 1947, ch. 120, title II, §202, 61 Stat. 153; 1949 Reorg. Plan No. 2, §1, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, 14 F.R. 5225, 63 Stat. 1065; 1950 Reorg. Plan No. 19, §§1, 2, eff. May 24, 1952, 15 F.R. 3178, 64 Stat. 1271, 1272.)

Section was formerly classified to section 616 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Bureau of Employees’ Compensation transferred to Department of Labor from Federal Security Agency by Reorg. Plan No. 19 of 1950, §1, which was repealed by Pub. L. 89–554, §8(a), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 662, the subject matter of which is covered by section 8101 et seq. of Title 5. Subsequently, Bureau of Compensation absorbed by Employment Standards Administration in Department of Labor.

Bureau of Labor Standards established in Department of Labor by departmental order in 1934, and its functions absorbed by Occupational Safety and Health Administration in May 1971.

Division of Public Contracts established in Department of Labor by virtue of act June 30, 1936, and was consolidated with Wage and Hour Division by order of Secretary of Labor on Aug. 21, 1942. Subsequently, by order of Secretary of Labor in May 1971, Division of Public Contracts absorbed by Wage and Hour Division.

Employees’ Compensation Appeals Board transferred to Department of Labor from Federal Security Agency by Reorg. Plan No. 19 of 1950, §2, which was repealed by Pub. L. 89–554, §8(a), Sept. 6, 1966, 80 Stat. 662, the subject matter of which is covered by section 8101 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

United States Employment Service created in Department of Labor by act June 6, 1933. Service transferred to Federal Security Agency by Reorg. Plan No. I of 1939, and its functions consolidated with unemployment compensation functions of Social Security Board in Bureau of Employment Security. Ex. Ord. No. 9247, Sept. 17, 1942, transferred United States Employment Service from Social Security Board to War Manpower Commission and became a part of Bureau of Placement. Service transferred to Department of Labor by Ex. Ord. No. 9617, Sept. 19, 1945, to be administered as an organizational entity. Act June 16, 1948, ch. 472, 62 Stat. 443, transferred Service to Federal Security Agency to function as a part of Bureau of Employment Security in Social Security Administration. Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1949, eff. Aug. 20, 1949, transferred Bureau of Employment Security, including United States Employment Service, to Department of Labor.

Wage and Hour Division established in Department of Labor by act June 25, 1938, and consolidated with Division of Public Contracts by order of Secretary of Labor on Aug. 21, 1942.

Women's Bureau established in Department of Labor by act June 5, 1920.

Bureau of Immigration and Bureau of Naturalization, placed under jurisdiction of Department of Labor upon its creation by act Mar. 4, 1913, consolidated as Immigration and Naturalization Service by Ex. Ord. No. 6166, §14. Immigration and Naturalization Service of Department of Labor, including Office of Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization, transferred to Department of Justice by Reorg. Plan No. V of 1940, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Children's Bureau transferred from Department of Labor to Federal Security Agency by Reorg. Plan No. 2 of 1946, set out in the Appendix to Title 5. For status of Children's Bureau, see note under section 191 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

United States Conciliation Service established in Department of Labor by virtue of act Mar. 4, 1913, §8, formerly set out as section 619 of former Title 5, Executive Departments and Government Officers and Employees, and section 51 of this title, but was discontinued in view of act June 23, 1947, §202, and set out as section 172 of this title, which transferred to Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service, an independent agency, all powers and functions vested in Secretary of Labor by act Mar. 4, 1913, §8, formerly cited as a credit to this section.

There is established in the Department of Labor a Mine Safety and Health Administration to be headed by an Assistant Secretary of Labor for Mine Safety and Health appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. The Secretary, acting through the Assistant Secretary for Mine Safety and Health, shall have authority to appoint, subject to the civil service laws, such officers and employees as he may deem necessary for the administration of this Act, and to prescribe powers, duties, and responsibilities of all officers and employees engaged in the administration of this Act. The Secretary is authorized and directed, except as specifically provided otherwise to carry out his functions under the Federal Mine Safety and Health Act of 1977 [30 U.S.C. 801 et seq.] through the Mine Safety and Health Administration.

(Pub. L. 95–164, title III, §302(a), Nov. 9, 1977, 91 Stat. 1319.)

The civil service laws, referred to in text, are set out in Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. See particularly section 3301 et seq. of Title 5.

This Act, referred to in text, means Pub. L. 95–164, Nov. 9, 1977, 91 Stat. 1290, as amended, known as the Federal Mine Safety and Health Amendments Act of 1977, which enacted this section, sections 822 to 825 and 961 of Title 30, Mineral Lands and Mining, amended sections 5314 and 5315 of Title 5, and sections 801 to 804, 811 to 821, 842, 861, 878, 951 to 955, 958 and 959 of Title 30, repealed sections 721 to 740 of Title 30 and section 1456a of Title 43, Public Lands, and enacted provisions set out as notes under sections 801 and 954 of Title 30 and section 11 of former Title 31, Money and Finance. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1977 Amendment note set out under section 801 of Title 30 and Tables.

The Federal Mine Safety and Health Act of 1977, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 91–173, Dec. 30, 1969, 83 Stat. 742, as amended by Pub. L. 95–164, title I, §101, Nov. 9, 1977, 91 Stat. 1290, which is classified principally to chapter 22 (§801 et seq.) of Title 30. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 801 of Title 30 and Tables.

Section effective 120 days after Nov. 9, 1977, see section 307 of Pub. L. 95–164, set out as an Effective Date of 1977 Amendment note under section 801 of Title 30, Mineral Lands and Mining.

Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission, see section 823 of Title 30, Mineral Lands and Mining.

This section is referred to in section 952 of this title.

The Secretary of Labor shall have charge in the buildings or premises occupied by or appropriated to the Department of Labor, of the library, furniture, fixtures, records, and other property pertaining to it or acquired for use in its business. He shall be allowed to expend for periodicals and the purposes of the library and for rental of appropriate quarters for the accommodation of the Department of Labor within the District of Columbia, and for all other incidental expenses, such sums as Congress may provide from time to time.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §6, 37 Stat. 738.)

Section was formerly classified to section 617 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Where any office, bureau, or branch of the public service transferred to the Department of Labor by this Act is occupying rented buildings or premises, it may continue to do so until other suitable quarters are provided for its use.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §6, 37 Stat. 738.)

This Act, referred to in text, is act Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, 37 Stat. 736, as amended, which is classified principally to sections 2, 551, and 555 to 562 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Section was formerly classified to section 618 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Secretary of Labor shall annually, at the close of each fiscal year, prepare and submit to Congress the financial statements of the Department that have been audited. He shall also, from time to time, make such special investigations and reports as he may be required to do by the President, or by Congress, or which he himself may deem necessary.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §9, 37 Stat. 738; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1102(c), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 723.)

Section was formerly classified to section 620 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

1995—Pub. L. 104–66 in first sentence substituted “prepare and submit to Congress the financial statements of the Department that have been audited” for “make a report in writing to Congress, giving an account of all moneys received and disbursed by him and his department and describing the work done by the department”.

The official records and papers on file in and pertaining exclusively to the business of any bureau, office, department, or branch of the public service in this Act transferred to the Department of Labor, together with the furniture in use in such bureau, office, department, or branch of the public service, are transferred to the Department of Labor.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §5, 37 Stat. 737.)

This Act, referred to in text, is act Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, 37 Stat. 736, as amended, which is classified principally to sections 2, 551, and 555 to 562 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Section was formerly classified to section 621 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

All laws prescribing the work and defining the duties of the several bureaus, offices, departments, or branches of the public service by this Act transferred to and made a part of the Department of Labor shall, so far as the same are not in conflict with the provisions of this Act, remain in full force and effect, to be executed under the direction of the Secretary of Labor.

(Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, §6, 37 Stat. 738.)

This Act, referred to in text, is act Mar. 4, 1913, ch. 141, 37 Stat. 736, as amended, which is classified principally to sections 2, 551, and 555 to 562 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Section was formerly classified to section 622 of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

For transfer of functions of other officers, employees, and agencies of Department of Labor, with certain exceptions, to Secretary of Labor, with power to delegate, see Reorg. Plan No. 6, of 1950, §§1, 2, 15 F.R. 3174, 64 Stat. 1263, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There is established a working capital fund, to be available without fiscal year limitation, for expenses necessary for the maintenance and operation of (1) a central reproduction service; (2) a central visual exhibit service; (3) a central supply service for supplies and equipment for which adequate stocks may be maintained to meet in whole or in part the requirements of the Department; (4) a central tabulating service; (5) telephone, mail and messenger services; (6) a central accounting and payroll service; and (7) a central laborers’ service: *Provided*, That any stocks of supplies and equipment on hand or on order shall be used to capitalize such fund: *Provided further*, That such fund shall be reimbursed in advance from funds available to bureaus, offices, and agencies for which such centralized services are performed at rates which will return in full all expenses of operation, including reserves for accrued annual leave and depreciation of equipment: *Provided further*, That within the Working Capital Fund, there is established an Investment in Reinvention Fund (IRF), which shall be available to invest in projects of the Department designed to produce measurable improvements in agency efficiency and significant taxpayer savings. Notwithstanding any other provision of law, the Secretary of Labor may retain up to $3,900,000 of the unobligated balances in the Department's annual Salaries and Expenses accounts as of September 30, 1995, and transfer those amounts to the IRF to provide the initial capital for the IRF, to remain available until expended, to make loans to agencies of the Department for projects designed to enhance productivity and generate cost savings. Such loans shall be repaid to the IRF no later than September 30 of the fiscal year following the fiscal year in which the project is completed. Such repayments shall be deposited in the IRF, to be available without further appropriation action: *Provided further*, That the Secretary of Labor may transfer annually an amount not to exceed $3,000,000 from unobligated balances in the Department's salaries and expenses accounts, to the unobligated balance of the Working Capital Fund, to be merged with such Fund and used for the acquisition of capital equipment and the improvement of financial management, information technology and other support systems, and to remain available until expended: *Provided further*, That the unobligated balance of the Fund shall not exceed $20,000,000..1

(Pub. L. 85–67, title I, §101, June 29, 1957, 71 Stat. 210; Pub. L. 86–703, title I, §101, Sept. 2, 1960, 74 Stat. 755; Pub. L. 104–134, title I, §101(d) [title I], Apr. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 1321–211, 1321–219; renumbered title I, Pub. L. 104–140, §1(a), May 2, 1996, 110 Stat. 1327; Pub. L. 105–78, title I, Nov. 13, 1997, 111 Stat. 1476.)

Section was formerly classified to section 622a of Title 5 prior to the general revision and enactment of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, by Pub. L. 89–554, §1, Sept. 1, 1966, 80 Stat. 378.

1997—Pub. L. 105–78 struck out period at end and inserted “: *Provided further*, That the Secretary of Labor may transfer annually an amount not to exceed $3,000,000 from unobligated balances in the Department's salaries and expenses accounts, to the unobligated balance of the Working Capital Fund, to be merged with such Fund and used for the acquisition of capital equipment and the improvement of financial management, information technology and other support systems, and to remain available until expended: *Provided further*, That the unobligated balance of the Fund shall not exceed $20,000,000.” after “appropriation action”.

1996—Pub. L. 104–134 inserted before period at end “: *Provided further*, That within the Working Capital Fund, there is established an Investment in Reinvention Fund (IRF), which shall be available to invest in projects of the Department designed to produce measurable improvements in agency efficiency and significant taxpayer savings. Notwithstanding any other provision of law, the Secretary of Labor may retain up to $3,900,000 of the unobligated balances in the Department's annual Salaries and Expenses accounts as of September 30, 1995, and transfer those amounts to the IRF to provide the initial capital for the IRF, to remain available until expended, to make loans to agencies of the Department for projects designed to enhance productivity and generate cost savings. Such loans shall be repaid to the IRF no later than September 30 of the fiscal year following the fiscal year in which the project is completed. Such repayments shall be deposited in the IRF, to be available without further appropriation action.”

1960—Pub. L. 86–703 made fund available for maintenance and operation of a central tabulating service, a central accounting and payroll service, and a central laborers’ service.

There is appropriated for expenses necessary during the fiscal year ending September 30, 1994, and each fiscal year thereafter, for the maintenance and operation of a comprehensive program of centralized services which the Secretary of Labor may prescribe and deem appropriate and advantageous to provide on a reimbursable basis under the provisions of sections 1535 and 1536 of title 31 (subject to prior notice to OMB) in the national office and field: *Provided*, That such fund shall be reimbursed in advance from funds available to agencies, bureaus, and offices for which such centralized services are performed at rates which will return in full cost of operations including services obtained through cooperative administrative services units under sections 1535 and 1536 of title 31, including reserves for accrued annual leave, worker's compensation, depreciation of capitalized equipment, and amortization of ADP software and systems (either acquired or donated): *Provided further*, That funds received for services rendered to any entity or person for use of Departmental facilities, including associated utilities and security services, shall be credited to and merged with this fund.

(Pub. L. 103–112, title I, Oct. 21, 1993, 107 Stat. 1088.)

Section is based on paragraph under headings “

“Sections 1535 and 1536 of title 31” was substituted in text for “the Economy Act” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

The Working Capital Fund of the Department of Labor shall be available on and after March 5, 1970, for expenses necessary for personnel functions in regional administrative offices.

(Pub. L. 91–204, title I, §100, Mar. 5, 1970, 84 Stat. 26.)

Section, Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6306(b), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1541, related to study and report respecting failure to provide internationally recognized worker rights.

The Secretary of Labor shall establish a program through which the Secretary shall provide grants to, or enter into contracts with, employers to enable such employers to develop employee drug and alcohol abuse assistance programs.

Employers desiring to receive a grant or contract under this section shall submit to the Secretary of Labor, an application, in such form and containing such information as the Secretary may require.

The Secretary of Labor shall promulgate regulations necessary to carry out this section.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section, $4,000,000 for fiscal year 1989, and $5,000,000 for each of the fiscal years 1990 and 1991.

(Pub. L. 100–690, title II, §2101, Nov. 18, 1988, 102 Stat. 4216.)

Appropriations in this Act or subsequent Departments of Labor, Health and Human Services, and Education, and Related Agencies Appropriations Acts available for salaries and expenses shall be available for supplies, services, and rental of conference space within the District of Columbia, as the Secretary of Labor shall deem necessary for settlement of labor-management disputes.

(Pub. L. 102–394, title I, §101, Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1798.)

Provisions similar to those in this section were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Pub. L. 102–170, title I, §101, Nov. 26, 1991, 105 Stat. 1114.

Pub. L. 101–517, title I, §101, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 2196.

Pub. L. 101–166, title I, §101, Nov. 21, 1989, 103 Stat. 1165.

Pub. L. 100–202, §101(h) [title I, §101], Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1329–256, 1329–263.

Pub. L. 99–500, §101(i) [H.R. 5233, title I, §101], Oct. 18, 1986, 100 Stat. 1783–287, and Pub. L. 99–591, §101(i) [H.R. 5233, title I, §101], Oct. 30, 1986, 100 Stat. 3341–287.

Pub. L. 99–178, title I, §101, Dec. 12, 1985, 99 Stat. 1108.

Pub. L. 98–619, title I, §101, Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3311.

Pub. L. 98–139, title I, §101, Oct. 31, 1983, 97 Stat. 877.

Pub. L. 97–377, title I, §101(e)(1) [title I, §101], Dec. 21, 1982, 96 Stat. 1878, 1884.

The Secretary of Labor is authorized to accept, in the name of the Department of Labor, and employ or dispose of in furtherance of authorized activities of the Department of Labor, during the fiscal year ending September 30, 1995, and each fiscal year thereafter, any money or property, real, personal, or mixed, tangible or intangible, received by gift, devise, bequest, or otherwise.

(Pub. L. 103–333, title I, §105, Sept. 30, 1994, 108 Stat. 2548.)

Provisions similar to those in this section were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Pub. L. 103–112, title I, §101, Oct. 21, 1993, 107 Stat. 1089.

Pub. L. 102–394, title I, §105, Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1799.

Section 601, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(a), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, provided that Secretary of Labor act on any application for an Exemplary Rehabilitation Certificate received under this chapter from any person discharged or dismissed under conditions other than honorable, or who received a general discharge, at least three years before date of receipt of such application.

Section 602, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(b), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, provided criteria for issuance of an Exemplary Rehabilitation Certificate and required notification of issuance of such certificate to Secretary of Defense and placement of certificate in military personnel file of person to whom it is issued.

Section 603, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(c), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, specified certain types of notarized statements that might be used in support of an application for an Exemplary Rehabilitation Certificate, and provided for independent investigations by Secretary of Labor and personal appearances by applicant or appearance by counsel before Secretary.

Section 604, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(d), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, provided that no benefits under any laws of United States (including but not limited to those relating to pensions, compensation, hospitalization, military pay and allowances, education, loan guarantees, retired pay, or other benefits based on military service) accrue to any person to whom an Exemplary Rehabilitation Certificate was issued under section 602 of this title unless he would have been entitled to those benefits under his original discharge or dismissal.

Section 605, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(e), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, provided that Secretary of Labor require national system of public employment offices established under chapter 4B of this title to accord special counseling and job development assistance to any person who had been discharged or dismissed under conditions other than honorable but who had been issued an Exemplary Rehabilitation Certificate.

Section, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(f), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, directed Secretary of Labor to report to Congress not later than Jan. 15 of each year the number of cases reviewed under this chapter and the number of certificates issued.

Section, Pub. L. 90–83, §6(g), Sept. 11, 1967, 81 Stat. 221, provided that in carrying out provisions of this chapter Secretary of Labor was authorized to issued regulations, delegate authority, and utilize services of the Civil Service Commission for making such investigations as might have been mutually agreeable.


Age discrimination in federally assisted programs, see section 6101 et seq. of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Civil rights, Federally assisted programs, see section 2000d et seq. of Title 42.

This chapter is referred to in title 2 sections 1302, 1311, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 411; title 42 sections 3012, 3056a, 6103.

(a) The Congress hereby finds and declares that—

(1) in the face of rising productivity and affluence, older workers find themselves disadvantaged in their efforts to retain employment, and especially to regain employment when displaced from jobs;

(2) the setting of arbitrary age limits regardless of potential for job performance has become a common practice, and certain otherwise desirable practices may work to the disadvantage of older persons;

(3) the incidence of unemployment, especially long-term unemployment with resultant deterioration of skill, morale, and employer acceptability is, relative to the younger ages, high among older workers; their numbers are great and growing; and their employment problems grave;

(4) the existence in industries affecting commerce, of arbitrary discrimination in employment because of age, burdens commerce and the free flow of goods in commerce.

(b) It is therefore the purpose of this chapter to promote employment of older persons based on their ability rather than age; to prohibit arbitrary age discrimination in employment; to help employers and workers find ways of meeting problems arising from the impact of age on employment.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §2, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 602.)

Section 16, formerly §15, of Pub. L. 90–202, renumbered by Pub. L. 93–259, §28(b)(1), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 74, provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] shall become effective one hundred and eighty days after enactment [Dec. 15, 1967], except (a) that the Secretary of Labor may extend the delay in effective date of any provision of this Act up to and additional ninety days thereafter if he finds that such time is necessary in permitting adjustments to the provisions hereof, and (b) that on or after the date of enactment [Dec. 15, 1967] the Secretary of Labor is authorized to issue such rules and regulations as may be necessary to carry out its provisions.”

Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(a) [title I, §119], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009, 3009–23, provided in part that: “This section [amending section 623 of this title, enacting provisions set out as notes under section 623 of this title, and repealing provisions set out as a note under section 623 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1996’.”

Pub. L. 101–433, §1, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 978, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 623, 626, and 630 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 623 and 626 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Older Workers Benefit Protection Act’.”

Pub. L. 99–592, §1, Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3342, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 623, 630, and 631 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 622 to 624 and 631 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1986’.”

Pub. L. 95–256, §1, Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 189, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 623, 624, 626, 631, 633a, and 634 of this title and sections 8335 and 8339 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, repealing section 3322 of Title 5, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 623, 626, 631, and 633a of this title] may be cited as the ‘Age Discrimination in Employment Act Amendments of 1978’.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 90–202 provided: “That this Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967’.”

Functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Pub. L. 101–433, title III, §301, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 984, provided that: “If any provision of this Act [see Short Title of 1990 Amendment note above], or an amendment made by this Act, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstances is held to be invalid, the remainder of this Act and the amendments made by this Act, and the application of such provision to other persons and circumstances, shall not be affected thereby.”

Pub. L. 101–433, title I, §101, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 978, provided that: “The Congress finds that, as a result of the decision of the Supreme Court in Public Employees Retirement System of Ohio v. Betts, 109 S.Ct. 256 (1989), legislative action is necessary to restore the original congressional intent in passing and amending the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 621 et seq.), which was to prohibit discrimination against older workers in all employee benefits except when age-based reductions in employee benefit plans are justified by significant cost considerations.”

(a) The Secretary of Labor shall undertake studies and provide information to labor unions, management, and the general public concerning the needs and abilities of older workers, and their potentials for continued employment and contribution to the economy. In order to achieve the purposes of this chapter, the Secretary of Labor shall carry on a continuing program of education and information, under which he may, among other measures—

(1) undertake research, and promote research, with a view to reducing barriers to the employment of older persons, and the promotion of measures for utilizing their skills;

(2) publish and otherwise make available to employers, professional societies, the various media of communication, and other interested persons the findings of studies and other materials for the promotion of employment;

(3) foster through the public employment service system and through cooperative effort the development of facilities of public and private agencies for expanding the opportunities and potentials of older persons;

(4) sponsor and assist State and community informational and educational programs.

(b) Not later than six months after the effective date of this chapter, the Secretary shall recommend to the Congress any measures he may deem desirable to change the lower or upper age limits set forth in section 631 of this title.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §3, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 602.)

The effective date of this chapter, referred to in subsec. (b), means the effective date of Pub. L. 90–202, which is one hundred and eighty days after the enactment of this chapter, except that the Secretary of Labor may extend the delay in effective date an additional ninety days thereafter for any provision to permit adjustments to such provisions. See section 16 of Pub. L. 90–202, set out as a note under section 621 of this title.

Pub. L. 99–592, §5, Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3343, provided that:

“(a)

“(1) conduct a study—

“(A) to determine whether physical and mental fitness tests are valid measurements of the ability and competency of police officers and firefighters to perform the requirements of their jobs,

“(B) if such tests are found to be valid measurements of such ability and competency, to determine which particular types of tests most effectively measure such ability and competency, and

“(C) to develop recommendations with respect to specific standards that such tests, and the administration of such tests should satisfy, and

“(2) submit a report to the Speaker of the House of Representatives and the President pro tempore of the Senate that includes—

“(A) a description of the results of such study, and

“(B) a statement of the recommendations developed under paragraph (1)(C).

“(b)

“(c)

It shall be unlawful for an employer—

(1) to fail or refuse to hire or to discharge any individual or otherwise discriminate against any individual with respect to his compensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment, because of such individual's age;

(2) to limit, segregate, or classify his employees in any way which would deprive or tend to deprive any individual of employment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect his status as an employee, because of such individual's age; or

(3) to reduce the wage rate of any employee in order to comply with this chapter.

It shall be unlawful for an employment agency to fail or refuse to refer for employment, or otherwise to discriminate against, any individual because of such individual's age, or to classify or refer for employment any individual on the basis of such individual's age.

It shall be unlawful for a labor organization—

(1) to exclude or to expel from its membership, or otherwise to discriminate against, any individual because of his age;

(2) to limit, segregate, or classify its membership, or to classify or fail or refuse to refer for employment any individual, in any way which would deprive or tend to deprive any individual of employment opportunities, or would limit such employment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect his status as an employee or as an applicant for employment, because of such individual's age;

(3) to cause or attempt to cause an employer to discriminate against an individual in violation of this section.

It shall be unlawful for an employer to discriminate against any of his employees or applicants for employment, for an employment agency to discriminate against any individual, or for a labor organization to discriminate against any member thereof or applicant for membership, because such individual, member or applicant for membership has opposed any practice made unlawful by this section, or because such individual, member or applicant for membership has made a charge, testified, assisted, or participated in any manner in an investigation, proceeding, or litigation under this chapter.

It shall be unlawful for an employer, labor organization, or employment agency to print or publish, or cause to be printed or published, any notice or advertisement relating to employment by such an employer or membership in or any classification or referral for employment by such a labor organization, or relating to any classification or referral for employment by such an employment agency, indicating any preference, limitation, specification, or discrimination, based on age.

It shall not be unlawful for an employer, employment agency, or labor organization—

(1) to take any action otherwise prohibited under subsections (a), (b), (c), or (e) of this section where age is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the particular business, or where the differentiation is based on reasonable factors other than age, or where such practices involve an employee in a workplace in a foreign country, and compliance with such subsections would cause such employer, or a corporation controlled by such employer, to violate the laws of the country in which such workplace is located;

(2) to take any action otherwise prohibited under subsection (a), (b), (c), or (e) of this section—

(A) to observe the terms of a bona fide seniority system that is not intended to evade the purposes of this chapter, except that no such seniority system shall require or permit the involuntary retirement of any individual specified by section 631(a) of this title because of the age of such individual; or

(B) to observe the terms of a bona fide employee benefit plan—

(i) where, for each benefit or benefit package, the actual amount of payment made or cost incurred on behalf of an older worker is no less than that made or incurred on behalf of a younger worker, as permissible under section 1625.10, title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (as in effect on June 22, 1989); or

(ii) that is a voluntary early retirement incentive plan consistent with the relevant purpose or purposes of this chapter.

Notwithstanding clause (i) or (ii) of subparagraph (B), no such employee benefit plan or voluntary early retirement incentive plan shall excuse the failure to hire any individual, and no such employee benefit plan shall require or permit the involuntary retirement of any individual specified by section 631(a) of this title, because of the age of such individual. An employer, employment agency, or labor organization acting under subparagraph (A), or under clause (i) or (ii) of subparagraph (B), shall have the burden of proving that such actions are lawful in any civil enforcement proceeding brought under this chapter; or

(3) to discharge or otherwise discipline an individual for good cause.

(1) If an employer controls a corporation whose place of incorporation is in a foreign country, any practice by such corporation prohibited under this section shall be presumed to be such practice by such employer.

(2) The prohibitions of this section shall not apply where the employer is a foreign person not controlled by an American employer.

(3) For the purpose of this subsection the determination of whether an employer controls a corporation shall be based upon the—

(A) interrelation of operations,

(B) common management,

(C) centralized control of labor relations, and

(D) common ownership or financial control,

of the employer and the corporation.

(1) Except as otherwise provided in this subsection, it shall be unlawful for an employer, an employment agency, a labor organization, or any combination thereof to establish or maintain an employee pension benefit plan which requires or permits—

(A) in the case of a defined benefit plan, the cessation of an employee's benefit accrual, or the reduction of the rate of an employee's benefit accrual, because of age, or

(B) in the case of a defined contribution plan, the cessation of allocations to an employee's account, or the reduction of the rate at which amounts are allocated to an employee's account, because of age.

(2) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit an employer, employment agency, or labor organization from observing any provision of an employee pension benefit plan to the extent that such provision imposes (without regard to age) a limitation on the amount of benefits that the plan provides or a limitation on the number of years of service or years of participation which are taken into account for purposes of determining benefit accrual under the plan.

(3) In the case of any employee who, as of the end of any plan year under a defined benefit plan, has attained normal retirement age under such plan—

(A) if distribution of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee has commenced as of the end of such plan year, then any requirement of this subsection for continued accrual of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee during such plan year shall be treated as satisfied to the extent of the actuarial equivalent of in-service distribution of benefits, and

(B) if distribution of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee has not commenced as of the end of such year in accordance with section 1056(a)(3) of this title and section 401(a)(14)(C) of title 26, and the payment of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee is not suspended during such plan year pursuant to section 1053(a)(3)(B) of this title or section 411(a)(3)(B) of title 26, then any requirement of this subsection for continued accrual of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee during such plan year shall be treated as satisfied to the extent of any adjustment in the benefit payable under the plan during such plan year attributable to the delay in the distribution of benefits after the attainment of normal retirement age.

The provisions of this paragraph shall apply in accordance with regulations of the Secretary of the Treasury. Such regulations shall provide for the application of the preceding provisions of this paragraph to all employee pension benefit plans subject to this subsection and may provide for the application of such provisions, in the case of any such employee, with respect to any period of time within a plan year.

(4) Compliance with the requirements of this subsection with respect to an employee pension benefit plan shall constitute compliance with the requirements of this section relating to benefit accrual under such plan.

(5) Paragraph (1) shall not apply with respect to any employee who is a highly compensated employee (within the meaning of section 414(q) of title 26) to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury for purposes of precluding discrimination in favor of highly compensated employees within the meaning of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26.

(6) A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of paragraph (1) solely because the subsidized portion of any early retirement benefit is disregarded in determining benefit accruals.

(7) Any regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to clause (v) of section 411(b)(1)(H) of title 26 and subparagraphs (C) and (D) 1 of section 411(b)(2) of title 26 shall apply with respect to the requirements of this subsection in the same manner and to the same extent as such regulations apply with respect to the requirements of such sections 411(b)(1)(H) and 411(b)(2).

(8) A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of this section solely because such plan provides a normal retirement age described in section 1002(24)(B) of this title and section 411(a)(8)(B) of title 26.

(9) For purposes of this subsection—

(A) The terms “employee pension benefit plan”, “defined benefit plan”, “defined contribution plan”, and “normal retirement age” have the meanings provided such terms in section 1002 of this title.

(B) The term “compensation” has the meaning provided by section 414(s) of title 26.

It shall not be unlawful for an employer which is a State, a political subdivision of a State, an agency or instrumentality of a State or a political subdivision of a State, or an interstate agency to fail or refuse to hire or to discharge any individual because of such individual's age if such action is taken—

(1) with respect to the employment of an individual as a firefighter or as a law enforcement officer, the employer has complied with section 3(d)(2) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1996 1 if the individual was discharged after the date described in such section, and the individual has attained—

(A) the age of hiring or retirement, respectively, in effect under applicable State or local law on March 3, 1983; or

(B)(i) if the individual was not hired, the age of hiring in effect on the date of such failure or refusal to hire under applicable State or local law enacted after September 30, 1996; or

(ii) if applicable State or local law was enacted after September 30, 1996, and the individual was discharged, the higher of—

(I) the age of retirement in effect on the date of such discharge under such law; and

(II) age 55; and

(2) pursuant to a bona fide hiring or retirement plan that is not a subterfuge to evade the purposes of this chapter.

A seniority system or employee benefit plan shall comply with this chapter regardless of the date of adoption of such system or plan.

Notwithstanding clause (i) or (ii) of subsection (f)(2)(B) of this section—

(1) It shall not be a violation of subsection (a), (b), (c), or (e) of this section solely because—

(A) an employee pension benefit plan (as defined in section 1002(2) of this title) provides for the attainment of a minimum age as a condition of eligibility for normal or early retirement benefits; or

(B) a defined benefit plan (as defined in section 1002(35) of this title) provides for—

(i) payments that constitute the subsidized portion of an early retirement benefit; or

(ii) social security supplements for plan participants that commence before the age and terminate at the age (specified by the plan) when participants are eligible to receive reduced or unreduced old-age insurance benefits under title II of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.), and that do not exceed such old-age insurance benefits.

(2)(A) It shall not be a violation of subsection (a), (b), (c), or (e) of this section solely because following a contingent event unrelated to age—

(i) the value of any retiree health benefits received by an individual eligible for an immediate pension;

(ii) the value of any additional pension benefits that are made available solely as a result of the contingent event unrelated to age and following which the individual is eligible for not less than an immediate and unreduced pension; or

(iii) the values described in both clauses (i) and (ii);

are deducted from severance pay made available as a result of the contingent event unrelated to age.

(B) For an individual who receives immediate pension benefits that are actuarially reduced under subparagraph (A)(i), the amount of the deduction available pursuant to subparagraph (A)(i) shall be reduced by the same percentage as the reduction in the pension benefits.

(C) For purposes of this paragraph, severance pay shall include that portion of supplemental unemployment compensation benefits (as described in section 501(c)(17) of title 26) that—

(i) constitutes additional benefits of up to 52 weeks;

(ii) has the primary purpose and effect of continuing benefits until an individual becomes eligible for an immediate and unreduced pension; and

(iii) is discontinued once the individual becomes eligible for an immediate and unreduced pension.

(D) For purposes of this paragraph and solely in order to make the deduction authorized under this paragraph, the term “retiree health benefits” means benefits provided pursuant to a group health plan covering retirees, for which (determined as of the contingent event unrelated to age)—

(i) the package of benefits provided by the employer for the retirees who are below age 65 is at least comparable to benefits provided under title XVIII of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1395 et seq.);

(ii) the package of benefits provided by the employer for the retirees who are age 65 and above is at least comparable to that offered under a plan that provides a benefit package with one-fourth the value of benefits provided under title XVIII of such Act; or

(iii) the package of benefits provided by the employer is as described in clauses (i) and (ii).

(E)(i) If the obligation of the employer to provide retiree health benefits is of limited duration, the value for each individual shall be calculated at a rate of $3,000 per year for benefit years before age 65, and $750 per year for benefit years beginning at age 65 and above.

(ii) If the obligation of the employer to provide retiree health benefits is of unlimited duration, the value for each individual shall be calculated at a rate of $48,000 for individuals below age 65, and $24,000 for individuals age 65 and above.

(iii) The values described in clauses (i) and (ii) shall be calculated based on the age of the individual as of the date of the contingent event unrelated to age. The values are effective on October 16, 1990, and shall be adjusted on an annual basis, with respect to a contingent event that occurs subsequent to the first year after October 16, 1990, based on the medical component of the Consumer Price Index for all-urban consumers published by the Department of Labor.

(iv) If an individual is required to pay a premium for retiree health benefits, the value calculated pursuant to this subparagraph shall be reduced by whatever percentage of the overall premium the individual is required to pay.

(F) If an employer that has implemented a deduction pursuant to subparagraph (A) fails to fulfill the obligation described in subparagraph (E), any aggrieved individual may bring an action for specific performance of the obligation described in subparagraph (E). The relief shall be in addition to any other remedies provided under Federal or State law.

(3) It shall not be a violation of subsection (a), (b), (c), or (e) of this section solely because an employer provides a bona fide employee benefit plan or plans under which long-term disability benefits received by an individual are reduced by any pension benefits (other than those attributable to employee contributions)—

(A) paid to the individual that the individual voluntarily elects to receive; or

(B) for which an individual who has attained the later of age 62 or normal retirement age is eligible.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §4, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 603; Pub. L. 95–256, §2(a), Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 189; Pub. L. 97–248, title I, §116(a), Sept. 3, 1982, 96 Stat. 353; Pub. L. 98–369, div. B, title III, §2301(b), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 1063; Pub. L. 98–459, title VIII, §802(b), Oct. 9, 1984, 98 Stat. 1792; Pub. L. 99–272, title IX, §9201(b)(1), (3), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 171; Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9201, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1973; Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095; Pub. L. 99–592, §§2(a), (b), 3(a), Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3342; Pub. L. 101–239, title VI, §6202(b)(3)(C)(i), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2233; Pub. L. 101–433, title I, §103, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 978; Pub. L. 101–521, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 2287; Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(a) [title I, §119[1(b)]], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009, 3009–23.)

Subparagraphs (C) and (D) of section 411(b)(2) of title 26, referred to in subsec. (i)(7), were redesignated subpars. (B) and (C) of section 411(b)(2) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7871(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2435.

Section 3(d)(2) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1996, referred to in subsec. (j)(1), probably means Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(a) [title I, §119[2(d)(2)]], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009, 3009–23, 3009–25, which is set out as a note under this section.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (*l*)(1)(B)(ii), (2)(D)(i), (ii), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II and XVIII of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVIII (§1395 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 104–208, §101(a) [title I, §119[1(b)(1)]], reenacted subsec. (j) of this section, as in effect immediately before Dec. 31, 1993.

Subsec. (j)(1). Pub. L. 104–208, §101(a) [title I, §119[1(b)(2)]], substituted “, the employer has complied with section 3(d)(2) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1996 if the individual was discharged after the date described in such section, and the individual has attained—

“(A) the age of hiring or retirement, respectively, in effect under applicable State or local law on March 3, 1983; or

“(B)(i) if the individual was not hired, the age of hiring in effect on the date of such failure or refusal to hire under applicable State or local law enacted after September 30, 1996; or

“(ii) if applicable State or local law was enacted after September 30, 1996, and the individual was discharged, the higher of—

“(I) the age of retirement in effect on the date of such discharge under such law; and

“(II) age 55; and” for “and the individual has attained the age of hiring or retirement in effect under applicable State or local law on March 3, 1983, and”.

1990—Subsec. (f)(2). Pub. L. 101–433, §103(1), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “to observe the terms of a bona fide seniority system or any bona fide employee benefit plan such as a retirement, pension, or insurance plan, which is not a subterfuge to evade the purposes of this chapter, except that no such employee benefit plan shall excuse the failure to hire any individual, and no such seniority system or employee benefit plan shall require or permit the involuntary retirement of any individual specified by section 631(a) of this title because of the age of such individual; or”.

Subsecs. (i), (j). Pub. L. 101–433, §103(2), redesignated subsec. (i), relating to employment as firefighter or law enforcement officer, as (j).

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 101–433, §103(3), added subsec. (k).

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 101–521 added cl. (iii) in par. (2)(A), and in par. (2)(D) inserted “and solely in order to make the deduction authorized under this paragraph” after “For purposes of this paragraph” and added cl. (iii).

Pub. L. 101–433, §103(3), added subsec. (*l*).

1989—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 101–239 struck out subsec. (g) which read as follows:

“(1) For purposes of this section, any employer must provide that any employee aged 65 or older, and any employee's spouse aged 65 or older, shall be entitled to coverage under any group health plan offered to such employees under the same conditions as any employee, and the spouse of such employee, under age 65.

“(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term ‘group health plan’ has the meaning given to such term in section 162(i)(2) of title 26.”

1986—Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 99–272, §9201(b)(1), and Pub. L. 99–592, §2(a), made identical amendments, substituting “or older” for “through 69” in two places.

Subsec. (g)(2). Pub. L. 99–514 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 99–272, §9201(b)(3), and Pub. L. 99–592, §2(b), made identical amendments, redesignating subsec. (g), relating to practices of foreign corporations controlled by American employers, as (h).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 99–592, §3, temporarily added subsec. (i) which read as follows: “It shall not be unlawful for an employer which is a State, a political subdivision of a State, an agency or instrumentality of a State or a political subdivision of a State, or an interstate agency to fail or refuse to hire or to discharge any individual because of such individual's age if such action is taken—

“(1) with respect to the employment of an individual as a firefighter or as a law enforcement officer and the individual has attained the age of hiring or retirement in effect under applicable State or local law on March 3, 1983, and

“(2) pursuant to a bona fide hiring or retirement plan that is not a subterfuge to evade the purposes of this chapter.”

See Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendments note below.

Pub. L. 99–509 added subsec. (i) relating to employee pension benefit plans.

1984—Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 98–459, §802(b)(1), inserted “, or where such practices involve an employee in a workplace in a foreign country, and compliance with such subsections would cause such employer, or a corporation controlled by such employer, to violate the laws of the country in which such workplace is located”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 98–459, §802(b)(2), added subsec. (g) relating to practices of foreign corporations controlled by American employers.

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 98–369 inserted “, and any employee's spouse aged 65 through 69,” after “aged 65 through 69” and “, and the spouse of such employee,” after “as any employee”, in subsec. (g) relating to entitlement to coverage under group health plan.

1982—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 97–248 added subsec. (g) relating to entitlement to coverage under group health plans.

1978—Subsec. (f)(2). Pub. L. 95–256 provided that no seniority system or employee benefit plan require or permit the involuntary retirement of any individual specified by section 631(a) of this title because of the age of the individual.

Section 101(a) [title I, §119[3]] of Pub. L. 104–208 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

Section 105 of title I of Pub. L. 101–433, as amended by Pub. L. 102–236, §9, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1816, provided that:

“(a)

“(1) any employee benefit established or modified on or after the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990]; and

“(2) other conduct occurring more than 180 days after the date of enactment of this Act.

“(b)

“(1) that is in effect as of the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990]; or that is a result of pattern collective bargaining in an industry where the agreement setting the pattern was ratified after September 20, 1990, but prior to the date of enactment, and the final agreement in the industry adhering to the pattern was ratified after the date of enactment, but not later than November 20, 1990;

“(2) that terminates after such date of enactment;

“(3) any provision of which was entered into by a labor organization (as defined by section 6(d)(4) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 206(d)(4))); and

“(4) that contains any provision that would be superseded (in whole or part) by this title [amending this section and section 630 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 621 of this title] and the amendments made by this title, but for the operation of this section,

this title and the amendments made by this title shall not apply until the termination of such collective bargaining agreement or June 1, 1992, whichever occurs first.

“(c)

“(1)

“(A) that is a State or political subdivision of a State or any agency or instrumentality of a State or political subdivision of a State; and

“(B) that maintained an employee benefit plan at any time between June 23, 1989, and the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990] that would be superseded (in whole or part) by this title [amending this section and section 630 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 621 of this title] and the amendments made by this title but for the operation of this subsection, and which plan may be modified only through a change in applicable State or local law,

this title and the amendments made by this title shall not apply until the date that is 2 years after the date of enactment of this Act.

“(2)

“(A)

“(i) following reasonable notice to all employees, implement new disability benefits that satisfy the requirements of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 [29 U.S.C. 621 et seq.] (as amended by this title); and

“(ii) then offer to each employee covered by a plan described in paragraph (1)(B) the option to elect such new disability benefits in lieu of the existing disability benefits, if—

“(I) the offer is made and reasonable notice provided no later than the date that is 2 years after the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990]; and

“(II) the employee is given up to 180 days after the offer in which to make the election.

“(B)

“(C)

“(3)

“(4)

“(A)

“(B)

“(C)

“(i) is sufficiently accurate and comprehensive to appraise the employee of the terms and conditions of the disability benefits, including whether the employee is immediately eligible for such benefits; and

“(ii) is written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average employee eligible to participate.

“(d)

“(e)

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to items and services furnished after Dec. 19, 1989, see section 6202(b)(5) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 7 of Pub. L. 99–592 provided that:

“(a)

“(1) which is in effect on June 30, 1986,

“(2) which terminates after January 1, 1987,

“(3) any provision of which was entered into by a labor organization (as defined by section 6(d)(4) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 206(d)(4)), and

“(4) which contains any provision that would be superseded by such amendments, but for the operation of this section,

such amendments shall not apply until the termination of such collective bargaining agreement or January 1, 1990, whichever occurs first.

“(b)

Section 3(b) of Pub. L. 99–592 which provided that the amendment made by section 3(a) of Pub. L. 99–592, which amended this section, was repealed Dec. 31, 1993, was itself repealed, effective Dec. 31, 1993, by Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(a) [title I, §119[1(a)]], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009, 3009–23.

Section 9204 of subtitle C (§§9201–9204) of title IX of Pub. L. 99–509 provided that:

“(a)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) the later of—

“(i) January 1, 1988, or

“(ii) the date on which the last of such collective bargaining agreements terminate (determined without regard to any extension thereof after February 28, 1986), or

“(B) January 1, 1990.

“(b)

“(c)

“(1) during the period after such amendment takes effect and before such first plan year, the plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of such amendment, and

“(2) such plan amendment applies retroactively to the period after such amendment takes effect and such first plan year.

A pension plan shall not be treated as failing to provide definitely determinable benefits or contributions, or to be operated in accordance with the provisions of the plan, merely because it operates in accordance with this subsection.

“(d)

“(e)

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective May 1, 1986, see section 9201(d)(2) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1395p of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section 2301(c)(2) of Pub. L. 98–369 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (b) [amending this section] shall become effective on January 1, 1985.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–459 effective Oct. 9, 1984, see section 803(a) of Pub. L. 98–459, set out as a note under section 3001 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section 116(c) of Pub. L. 97–248 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall become effective on January 1, 1983, and the amendment made by subsection (b) [enacting section 1395y(b)(3) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare] shall apply with respect to items and services furnished on or after such date.”

Section 2(b) of Pub. L. 95–256 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) of this section [amending this section] shall take effect on the date of enactment of this Act [Apr. 6, 1978], except that, in the case of employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement which is in effect on September 1, 1977, which was entered into by a labor organization (as defined by section 6(d)(4) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [section 206(d)(4) of this title]), and which would otherwise be prohibited by the amendment made by section 3(a) of this Act [amending section 631 of this title], the amendment made by subsection (a) of this section [amending this section] shall take effect upon the termination of such agreement or on January 1, 1980, whichever occurs first.”

Section 104 of title I of Pub. L. 101–433 provided that: “Notwithstanding section 9 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 628), the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission may issue such rules and regulations as the Commission may consider necessary or appropriate for carrying out this title [amending this section and section 630 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 621 of this title], and the amendments made by this title, only after consultation with the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor.”

Section 101(a) [title I, §119[1(c)]] of Pub. L. 104–208 provided that: “Nothing in the repeal, reenactment, and amendment made by subsections (a) and (b) [section 101(a) [title I, §119[1(a), (b)]] of Pub. L. 104–208, amending this section and repealing provisions set out as a note under this section] shall be construed to make lawful the failure or refusal to hire, or the discharge of, an individual pursuant to a law that—

“(1) was enacted after March 3, 1983 and before the date of enactment of the Age Discrimination in Employment Amendments of 1996 [Sept. 30, 1996]; and

“(2) lowered the age of hiring or retirement, respectively, for firefighters or law enforcement officers that was in effect under applicable State or local law on March 3, 1983.”

Functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Section 101(a) [title I, §119[2]] of Pub. L. 104–208 provided that:

“(a)

“(1) a list and description of all tests available for the assessment of abilities important for the completion of public safety tasks performed by law enforcement officers and firefighters;

“(2) a list of the public safety tasks for which adequate tests described in paragraph (1) do not exist;

“(3) a description of the technical characteristics that the tests shall meet to be in compliance with applicable Federal civil rights law and policies;

“(4) a description of the alternative methods that are available for determining minimally acceptable performance standards on the tests;

“(5) a description of the administrative standards that should be met in the administration, scoring, and score interpretation of the tests; and

“(6) an examination of the extent to which the tests are cost-effective, are safe, and comply with the Federal civil rights law and policies.

“(b)

“(1)

“(A) the Deputy Administrator of the United States Fire Administration;

“(B) the Director of the Federal Emergency Management Agency;

“(C) organizations that represent law enforcement officers, firefighters, and employers of the officers and firefighters; and

“(D) organizations that represent older individuals.

“(2)

“(c)

“(d)

“(1)

“(2)

“(e)

“(f)

This section is referred to in section 626 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

(a)(1) The Secretary of Labor is directed to undertake an appropriate study of institutional and other arrangements giving rise to involuntary retirement, and report his findings and any appropriate legislative recommendations to the President and to the Congress. Such study shall include—

(A) an examination of the effect of the amendment made by section 3(a) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act Amendments of 1978 in raising the upper age limitation established by section 631(a) of this title to 70 years of age;

(B) a determination of the feasibility of eliminating such limitation;

(C) a determination of the feasibility of raising such limitation above 70 years of age; and

(D) an examination of the effect of the exemption contained in section 631(c) of this title, relating to certain executive employees, and the exemption contained in section 631(d) of this title, relating to tenured teaching personnel.

(2) The Secretary may undertake the study required by paragraph (1) of this subsection directly or by contract or other arrangement.

(b) The report required by subsection (a) of this section shall be transmitted to the President and to the Congress as an interim report not later than January 1, 1981, and in final form not later than January 1, 1982.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §5, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 604; Pub. L. 95–256, §6, Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 192.)

Section 3(a) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act Amendments of 1978, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(A), is section 3(a) of Pub. L. 95–256, Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 189, which amended section 631 of this title.

1978—Pub. L. 95–256 designated existing provisions as par. (1), added cls. (A) to (D), added par. (2), and added subsec. (b).

Pub. L. 99–592, §6(c), Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3344, provided that:

“(1) The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall, not later than 12 months after the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 31, 1986], enter into an agreement with the National Academy of Sciences for the conduct of a study to analyze the potential consequences of the elimination of mandatory retirement on institutions of higher education.

“(2) The study required by paragraph (1) of this subsection shall be conducted under the general supervision of the National Academy of Sciences by a study panel composed of 9 members. The study panel shall consist of—

“(A) 4 members who shall be administrators at institutions of higher education selected by the National Academy of Sciences after consultation with the American Council of Education, the Association of American Universities, and the National Association of State Universities and Land Grant Colleges;

“(B) 4 members who shall be teachers or retired teachers at institutions of higher education (who do not serve in an administrative capacity at such institutions), selected by the National Academy of Sciences after consultation with the American Federation of Teachers, the National Education Association, the American Association of University Professors, and the American Association of Retired Persons; and

“(C) one member selected by the National Academy of Sciences.

“(3) The results of the study shall be reported, with recommendations, to the President and to the Congress not later than 5 years after the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 31, 1986].

“(4) The expenses of the study required by this subsection shall be paid from funds available to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.”

The Secretary shall have the power—

to make delegations, to appoint such agents and employees, and to pay for technical assistance on a fee for service basis, as he deems necessary to assist him in the performance of his functions under this chapter;

to cooperate with regional, State, local, and other agencies, and to cooperate with and furnish technical assistance to employers, labor organizations, and employment agencies to aid in effectuating the purposes of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §6, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 604.)

Functions relating to age discrimination administration and enforcement vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall have the power to make investigations and require the keeping of records necessary or appropriate for the administration of this chapter in accordance with the powers and procedures provided in sections 209 and 211 of this title.

The provisions of this chapter shall be enforced in accordance with the powers, remedies, and procedures provided in sections 211(b), 216 (except for subsection (a) thereof), and 217 of this title, and subsection (c) of this section. Any act prohibited under section 623 of this title shall be deemed to be a prohibited act under section 215 of this title. Amounts owing to a person as a result of a violation of this chapter shall be deemed to be unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation for purposes of sections 216 and 217 of this title: *Provided*, That liquidated damages shall be payable only in cases of willful violations of this chapter. In any action brought to enforce this chapter the court shall have jurisdiction to grant such legal or equitable relief as may be appropriate to effectuate the purposes of this chapter, including without limitation judgments compelling employment, reinstatement or promotion, or enforcing the liability for amounts deemed to be unpaid minimum wages or unpaid overtime compensation under this section. Before instituting any action under this section, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall attempt to eliminate the discriminatory practice or practices alleged, and to effect voluntary compliance with the requirements of this chapter through informal methods of conciliation, conference, and persuasion.

(1) Any person aggrieved may bring a civil action in any court of competent jurisdiction for such legal or equitable relief as will effectuate the purposes of this chapter: *Provided*, That the right of any person to bring such action shall terminate upon the commencement of an action by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission to enforce the right of such employee under this chapter.

(2) In an action brought under paragraph (1), a person shall be entitled to a trial by jury of any issue of fact in any such action for recovery of amounts owing as a result of a violation of this chapter, regardless of whether equitable relief is sought by any party in such action.

No civil action may be commenced by an individual under this section until 60 days after a charge alleging unlawful discrimination has been filed with the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. Such a charge shall be filed—

(1) within 180 days after the alleged unlawful practice occurred; or

(2) in a case to which section 633(b) of this title applies, within 300 days after the alleged unlawful practice occurred, or within 30 days after receipt by the individual of notice of termination of proceedings under State law, whichever is earlier.

Upon receiving such a charge, the Commission shall promptly notify all persons named in such charge as prospective defendants in the action and shall promptly seek to eliminate any alleged unlawful practice by informal methods of conciliation, conference, and persuasion.

Section 259 of this title shall apply to actions under this chapter. If a charge filed with the Commission under this chapter is dismissed or the proceedings of the Commission are otherwise terminated by the Commission, the Commission shall notify the person aggrieved. A civil action may be brought under this section by a person defined in section 630(a) of this title against the respondent named in the charge within 90 days after the date of the receipt of such notice.

(1) An individual may not waive any right or claim under this chapter unless the waiver is knowing and voluntary. Except as provided in paragraph (2), a waiver may not be considered knowing and voluntary unless at a minimum—

(A) the waiver is part of an agreement between the individual and the employer that is written in a manner calculated to be understood by such individual, or by the average individual eligible to participate;

(B) the waiver specifically refers to rights or claims arising under this chapter;

(C) the individual does not waive rights or claims that may arise after the date the waiver is executed;

(D) the individual waives rights or claims only in exchange for consideration in addition to anything of value to which the individual already is entitled;

(E) the individual is advised in writing to consult with an attorney prior to executing the agreement;

(F)(i) the individual is given a period of at least 21 days within which to consider the agreement; or

(ii) if a waiver is requested in connection with an exit incentive or other employment termination program offered to a group or class of employees, the individual is given a period of at least 45 days within which to consider the agreement;

(G) the agreement provides that for a period of at least 7 days following the execution of such agreement, the individual may revoke the agreement, and the agreement shall not become effective or enforceable until the revocation period has expired;

(H) if a waiver is requested in connection with an exit incentive or other employment termination program offered to a group or class of employees, the employer (at the commencement of the period specified in subparagraph (F)) informs the individual in writing in a manner calculated to be understood by the average individual eligible to participate, as to—

(i) any class, unit, or group of individuals covered by such program, any eligibility factors for such program, and any time limits applicable to such program; and

(ii) the job titles and ages of all individuals eligible or selected for the program, and the ages of all individuals in the same job classification or organizational unit who are not eligible or selected for the program.

(2) A waiver in settlement of a charge filed with the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, or an action filed in court by the individual or the individual's representative, alleging age discrimination of a kind prohibited under section 623 or 633a of this title may not be considered knowing and voluntary unless at a minimum—

(A) subparagraphs (A) through (E) of paragraph (1) have been met; and

(B) the individual is given a reasonable period of time within which to consider the settlement agreement.

(3) In any dispute that may arise over whether any of the requirements, conditions, and circumstances set forth in subparagraph (A), (B), (C), (D), (E), (F), (G), or (H) of paragraph (1), or subparagraph (A) or (B) of paragraph (2), have been met, the party asserting the validity of a waiver shall have the burden of proving in a court of competent jurisdiction that a waiver was knowing and voluntary pursuant to paragraph (1) or (2).

(4) No waiver agreement may affect the Commission's rights and responsibilities to enforce this chapter. No waiver may be used to justify interfering with the protected right of an employee to file a charge or participate in an investigation or proceeding conducted by the Commission.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §7, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 604; Pub. L. 95–256, §4(a), (b)(1), (c)(1), Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 190, 191; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781; Pub. L. 101–433, title II, §201, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 983; Pub. L. 102–166, title I, §115, Nov. 21, 1991, 105 Stat. 1079.)

1991—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–166 struck out par. (1) designation, substituted “Section” for “Sections 255 and”, inserted at end “If a charge filed with the Commission under this chapter is dismissed or the proceedings of the Commission are otherwise terminated by the Commission, the Commission shall notify the person aggrieved. A civil action may be brought under this section by a person defined in section 630(a) of this title against the respondent named in the charge within 90 days after the date of the receipt of such notice.”, and struck out par. (2) which read as follows: “For the period during which the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission is attempting to effect voluntary compliance with requirements of this chapter through informal methods of conciliation, conference, and persuasion pursuant to subsection (b) of this section, the statute of limitations as provided in section 255 of this title shall be tolled, but in no event for a period in excess of one year.”

1990—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–433 added subsec. (f).

1978—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–256, §4(a), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 95–256, §4(b)(1), substituted references to the filing of a charge with the Secretary alleging unlawful discrimination for references to the filing with the Secretary of notice of intent to sue.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 95–256, §4(c)(1), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–166 effective Nov. 21, 1991, except as otherwise provided, see section 402 of Pub. L. 102–166, set out as a note under section 1981 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section 202(a) of Pub. L. 101–433 provided that: “The amendment made by section 201 [amending this section] shall not apply with respect to waivers that occur before the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990].”

Section 4(b)(2) of Pub. L. 95–256 provided that: “The amendment made by paragraph (1) of this subsection [amending this section] shall take effect with respect to civil actions brought after the date of enactment of this Act [Apr. 6, 1978].”

Section 4(c)(2) of Pub. L. 95–256 provided that: “The amendment made by paragraph (1) of this subsection [amending this section] shall take effect with respect to conciliations commenced by the Secretary of Labor after the date of enactment of this Act [Apr. 6, 1978].”

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” and “Commission” substituted for “Secretary”, meaning Secretary of Labor, pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Section 202(b) of Pub. L. 101–433 provided that: “Effective on the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 16, 1990], the rule on waivers issued by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission and contained in section 1627.16(c) of title 29, Code of Federal Regulations, shall have no force and effect.”

Pub. L. 100–283, Apr. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 78, as amended by Pub. L. 101–504, §2, Nov. 3, 1990, 104 Stat. 1298, provided extension period for filing civil actions under this section, such period consisting of 450 days beginning on Apr. 7, 1988, in cases where a charge was timely filed with the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission after Dec. 31, 1983, and 450 days beginning on Nov. 3, 1990, in cases where a charge was timely filed after Apr. 6, 1985, but the Commission did not, within the applicable period set forth in subsec. (e) of this section either eliminate the alleged unlawful practice or notify the complainant, in writing, of the disposition of the charge and of right of such person to bring civil action on such claim; required the Commission to provide notice regarding claims for which extension period was applicable; and required the Commission to submit reports to Congress containing, among other things, information as to number of persons eligible for extension period and number of persons who were provided notice regarding claims for which extension period was provided.

This section is referred to in section 633 of this title; title 2 section 1311; title 3 section 411.

Every employer, employment agency, and labor organization shall post and keep posted in conspicuous places upon its premises a notice to be prepared or approved by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission setting forth information as the Commission deems appropriate to effectuate the purposes of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §8, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 605; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781.)

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” and “Commission” substituted in text for “Secretary”, meaning Secretary of Labor, pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

In accordance with the provisions of subchapter II of chapter 5 of title 5, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission may issue such rules and regulations as it may consider necessary or appropriate for carrying out this chapter, and may establish such reasonable exemptions to and from any or all provisions of this chapter as it may find necessary and proper in the public interest.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §9, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 605; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781.)

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” and “it” substituted in text for “Secretary of Labor” and “he”, respectively, pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Whoever shall forcibly resist, oppose, impede, intimidate or interfere with a duly authorized representative of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission while it is engaged in the performance of duties under this chapter shall be punished by a fine of not more than $500 or by imprisonment for not more than one year, or by both: *Provided, however*, That no person shall be imprisoned under this section except when there has been a prior conviction hereunder.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §10, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 605; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781.)

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” and “it” substituted in text for “Secretary”, meaning Secretary of Labor, and “he”, respectively, pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

For the purposes of this chapter—

(a) The term “person” means one or more individuals, partnerships, associations, labor organizations, corporations, business trust, legal representatives, or any organized groups of persons.

(b) The term “employer” means a person engaged in an industry affecting commerce who has twenty or more employees for each working day in each of twenty or more calendar weeks in the current or preceding calendar year: *Provided*, That prior to June 30, 1968, employers having fewer than fifty employees shall not be considered employers. The term also means (1) any agent of such a person, and (2) a State or political subdivision of a State and any agency or instrumentality of a State or a political subdivision of a State, and any interstate agency, but such term does not include the United States, or a corporation wholly owned by the Government of the United States.

(c) The term “employment agency” means any person regularly undertaking with or without compensation to procure employees for an employer and includes an agent of such a person; but shall not include an agency of the United States.

(d) The term “labor organization” means a labor organization engaged in an industry affecting commerce, and any agent of such an organization, and includes any organization of any kind, any agency, or employee representation committee, group, association, or plan so engaged in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning grievances, labor disputes, wages, rates of pay, hours, or other terms or conditions of employment, and any conference, general committee, joint or system board, or joint council so engaged which is subordinate to a national or international labor organization.

(e) A labor organization shall be deemed to be engaged in an industry affecting commerce if (1) it maintains or operates a hiring hall or hiring office which procures employees for an employer or procures for employees opportunities to work for an employer, or (2) the number of its members (or, where it is a labor organization composed of other labor organizations or their representatives, if the aggregate number of the members of such other labor organization) is fifty or more prior to July 1, 1968, or twenty-five or more on or after July 1, 1968, and such labor organization—

(1) is the certified representative of employees under the provisions of the National Labor Relations Act, as amended [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.], or the Railway Labor Act, as amended [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.]; or

(2) although not certified, is a national or international labor organization or a local labor organization recognized or acting as the representative of employees of an employer or employers engaged in an industry affecting commerce; or

(3) has chartered a local labor organization or subsidiary body which is representing or actively seeking to represent employees of employers within the meaning of paragraph (1) or (2); or

(4) has been chartered by a labor organization representing or actively seeking to represent employees within the meaning of paragraph (1) or (2) as the local or subordinate body through which such employees may enjoy membership or become affiliated with such labor organization; or

(5) is a conference, general committee, joint or system board, or joint council subordinate to a national or international labor organization, which includes a labor organization engaged in an industry affecting commerce within the meaning of any of the preceding paragraphs of this subsection.

(f) The term “employee” means an individual employed by any employer except that the term “employee” shall not include any person elected to public office in any State or political subdivision of any State by the qualified voters thereof, or any person chosen by such officer to be on such officer's personal staff, or an appointee on the policymaking level or an immediate adviser with respect to the exercise of the constitutional or legal powers of the office. The exemption set forth in the preceding sentence shall not include employees subject to the civil service laws of a State government, governmental agency, or political subdivision. The term “employee” includes any individual who is a citizen of the United States employed by an employer in a workplace in a foreign country.

(g) The term “commerce” means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, transmission, or communication among the several States; or between a State and any place outside thereof; or within the District of Columbia, or a possession of the United States; or between points in the same State but through a point outside thereof.

(h) The term “industry affecting commerce” means any activity, business, or industry in commerce or in which a labor dispute would hinder or obstruct commerce or the free flow of commerce and includes any activity or industry “affecting commerce” within the meaning of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 [29 U.S.C. 401 et seq.].

(i) The term “State” includes a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, Wake Island, the Canal Zone, and Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act [43 U.S.C. 1331 et seq.].

(j) The term “firefighter” means an employee, the duties of whose position are primarily to perform work directly connected with the control and extinguishment of fires or the maintenance and use of firefighting apparatus and equipment, including an employee engaged in this activity who is transferred to a supervisory or administrative position.

(k) The term “law enforcement officer” means an employee, the duties of whose position are primarily the investigation, apprehension, or detention of individuals suspected or convicted of offenses against the criminal laws of a State, including an employee engaged in this activity who is transferred to a supervisory or administrative position. For the purpose of this subsection, “detention” includes the duties of employees assigned to guard individuals incarcerated in any penal institution.

(*l*) The term “compensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment” encompasses all employee benefits, including such benefits provided pursuant to a bona fide employee benefit plan.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §11, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 605; Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(1)–(4), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 74; Pub. L. 98–459, title VIII, §802(a), Oct. 9, 1984, 98 Stat. 1792; Pub. L. 99–592, §4, Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3343; Pub. L. 101–433, title I, §102, Oct. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 978.)

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in subsec. (e)(1), is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 452, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsec. (e)(1), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

The Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, referred to in subsec. (h), is Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 11 (§401 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title, and Tables.

For definition of Canal Zone, referred to in subsec. (i), see section 3602(b) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, referred to in subsec. (i), is act Aug. 7, 1953, ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter III (§1331 et seq.) of chapter 29 of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1331 of Title 43 and Tables.

1990—Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 101–433 added subsec. (*l*).

1986—Subsecs. (j), (k). Pub. L. 99–592 added subsecs. (j) and (k).

1984—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 98–459 inserted provision defining “employee” as including any individual who is a citizen of the United States employed by an employer in a workplace in a foreign country.

1974—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(1), (2), substituted in first sentence “twenty” for “twenty-five” and, in second sentence, defined term “employer” to include a State or political subdivision of a State and any agency or instrumentality of a State or a political subdivision of a State, and any interstate agency, and deleted text excluding from such term a State or political subdivision thereof.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(3), struck out text excluding from term “employment agency” an agency of a State or political subdivision of a State, but including the United States Employment Service and the system of State and local employment services receiving Federal assistance.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(4), excepted from the term “employee” elected public officials, persons chosen by such officials for such officials’ personal staff, appointees on policymaking level, and immediate advisers with respect to exercise of constitutional or legal powers of the public office but excluded from such exemption employees subject to civil laws of a State government, governmental agency, or political subdivision.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–433 applicable only to any employee benefit established or modified on or after Oct. 16, 1990, and other conduct occurring more than 180 days after Oct. 16, 1990, except as otherwise provided, see section 105 of Pub. L. 101–433, set out as a note under section 623 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–592 effective Jan. 1, 1987, with certain exceptions, but not applicable with respect to any cause of action arising under this chapter as in effect before Jan. 1, 1987, see section 7 of Pub. L. 99–592, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–459 effective Oct. 9, 1984, see section 803(a) of Pub. L. 98–459, set out as a note under section 3001 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Industry affecting commerce, see section 402 of this title.

Outer Continental Shelf, see section 1331 of Title 43, Public Lands.

This section is referred to in section 626 of this title.

The prohibitions in this chapter shall be limited to individuals who are at least 40 years of age.

In the case of any personnel action affecting employees or applicants for employment which is subject to the provisions of section 633a of this title, the prohibitions established in section 633a of this title shall be limited to individuals who are at least 40 years of age.

(1) Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit compulsory retirement of any employee who has attained 65 years of age and who, for the 2-year period immediately before retirement, is employed in a bona fide executive or a high policymaking position, if such employee is entitled to an immediate nonforfeitable annual retirement benefit from a pension, profit-sharing, savings, or deferred compensation plan, or any combination of such plans, of the employer of such employee, which equals, in the aggregate, at least $44,000.

(2) In applying the retirement benefit test of paragraph (1) of this subsection, if any such retirement benefit is in a form other than a straight life annuity (with no ancillary benefits), or if employees contribute to any such plan or make rollover contributions, such benefit shall be adjusted in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, after consultation with the Secretary of the Treasury, so that the benefit is the equivalent of a straight life annuity (with no ancillary benefits) under a plan to which employees do not contribute and under which no rollover contributions are made.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §12, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 607; Pub. L. 95–256, §3(a), (b)(3), Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 189, 190; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781; Pub. L. 98–459, title VIII, §802(c)(1), Oct. 9, 1984, 98 Stat. 1792; Pub. L. 99–272, title IX, §9201(b)(2), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 171; Pub. L. 99–592, §§2(c), 6(a), Oct. 31, 1986, 100 Stat. 3342, 3344; Pub. L. 101–239, title VI, §6202(b)(3)(C)(ii), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2233.)

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239 struck out “(except the provisions of section 623(g) of this title)” after “in this chapter”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–592, §2(c)(1), which directed that “but less than seventy years of age” be struck out was executed by striking out “but less than 70 years of age” after “40 years of age” as the probable intent of Congress.

Pub. L. 99–272 inserted “(except the provisions of section 623(g) of this title)” after “this chapter”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–592, §2(c)(2), which directed that “but not seventy years of age,” be struck out was executed by striking out “but not 70 years of age,” after “65 years of age” as the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–592, §6(a), (b), temporarily added subsec. (d) which read as follows: “Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit compulsory retirement of any employee who has attained 70 years of age, and who is serving under a contract of unlimited tenure (or similar arrangement providing for unlimited tenure) at an institution of higher education (as defined by section 1141(a) of title 20).” See Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendments note below.

1984—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 98–459 substituted “$44,000” for “$27,000”.

Pub. L. 95–256, §3(a), designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), substituted “40 years of age but less than 70 years of age” for “forty years of age but less than sixty-five years of age”, added subsecs. (b) and (c), and temporarily added subsec. (d). See Effective and Termination Dates of 1978 Amendment note below.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to items and services furnished after Dec. 19, 1989, see section 6202(b)(5) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–592 effective Jan. 1, 1987, with certain exceptions, see section 7(a) of Pub. L. 99–592 set out as a note under section 623 of this title.

Section 6(b) of Pub. L. 99–592 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) of this section [amending this section] is repealed December 31, 1993.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective May 1, 1986, see section 9201(d)(2) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1395p of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section 802(c)(2) of Pub. L. 98–459 provided that: “The amendment made by paragraph (1) of this subsection [amending this section] shall not apply with respect to any individual who retires, or is compelled to retire, before the date of the enactment of this Act [Oct. 9, 1984].”

Section 3(b) of Pub. L. 95–256 provided that:

“(1) Sections 12(a), 12(c), and 12(d) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended by subsection (a) of this section [subsecs. (a), (c), and (d) of this section] shall take effect on January 1, 1979.

“(2) Section 12(b) of such Act, as amended by subsection (a) of this section [subsec. (b) of this section], shall take effect on September 30, 1978.

“(3) Section 12(d) of such Act, as amended by subsection (a) of this section [enacting subsec. (d) of this section], is repealed on July 1, 1982.”

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” substituted for “Secretary”, meaning Secretary of Labor, in subsec. (c)(2) pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

This section is referred to in sections 622, 623, 624, 633a of this title; title 5 sections 2302, 7702; title 22 sections 3905, 4131.

The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall submit annually in January a report to the Congress covering its activities for the preceding year and including such information, data and recommendations for further legislation in connection with the matters covered by this chapter as it may find advisable. Such report shall contain an evaluation and appraisal by the Commission of the effect of the minimum and maximum ages established by this chapter, together with its recommendations to the Congress. In making such evaluation and appraisal, the Commission shall take into consideration any changes which may have occurred in the general age level of the population, the effect of the chapter upon workers not covered by its provisions, and such other factors as it may deem pertinent.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §13, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 607; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, §2, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781.)

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission”, “Commission”, “it”, and “its” substituted in text for “Secretary”, meaning Secretary of Labor, “he”, and “his”, respectively, pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Nothing in this chapter shall affect the jurisdiction of any agency of any State performing like functions with regard to discriminatory employment practices on account of age except that upon commencement of action under this chapter such action shall supersede any State action.

In the case of an alleged unlawful practice occurring in a State which has a law prohibiting discrimination in employment because of age and establishing or authorizing a State authority to grant or seek relief from such discriminatory practice, no suit may be brought under section 626 of this title before the expiration of sixty days after proceedings have been commenced under the State law, unless such proceedings have been earlier terminated: *Provided*, That such sixty-day period shall be extended to one hundred and twenty days during the first year after the effective date of such State law. If any requirement for the commencement of such proceedings is imposed by a State authority other than a requirement of the filing of a written and signed statement of the facts upon which the proceeding is based, the proceeding shall be deemed to have been commenced for the purposes of this subsection at the time such statement is sent by registered mail to the appropriate State authority.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §14, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 607.)

Functions vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

This section is referred to in section 626 of this title.

All personnel actions affecting employees or applicants for employment who are at least 40 years of age (except personnel actions with regard to aliens employed outside the limits of the United States) in military departments as defined in section 102 of title 5, in executive agencies as defined in section 105 of title 5 (including employees and applicants for employment who are paid from nonappropriated funds), in the United States Postal Service and the Postal Rate Commission, in those units in the government of the District of Columbia having positions in the competitive service, and in those units of the judicial branch of the Federal Government having positions in the competitive service, and in the Government Printing Office, the General Accounting Office, and the Library of Congress shall be made free from any discrimination based on age.

Except as otherwise provided in this subsection, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission is authorized to enforce the provisions of subsection (a) of this section through appropriate remedies, including reinstatement or hiring of employees with or without backpay, as will effectuate the policies of this section. The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall issue such rules, regulations, orders, and instructions as it deems necessary and appropriate to carry out its responsibilities under this section. The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall—

(1) be responsible for the review and evaluation of the operation of all agency programs designed to carry out the policy of this section, periodically obtaining and publishing (on at least a semiannual basis) progress reports from each department, agency, or unit referred to in subsection (a) of this section;

(2) consult with and solicit the recommendations of interested individuals, groups, and organizations relating to nondiscrimination in employment on account of age; and

(3) provide for the acceptance and processing of complaints of discrimination in Federal employment on account of age.

The head of each such department, agency, or unit shall comply with such rules, regulations, orders, and instructions of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission which shall include a provision that an employee or applicant for employment shall be notified of any final action taken on any complaint of discrimination filed by him thereunder. Reasonable exemptions to the provisions of this section may be established by the Commission but only when the Commission has established a maximum age requirement on the basis of a determination that age is a bona fide occupational qualification necessary to the performance of the duties of the position. With respect to employment in the Library of Congress, authorities granted in this subsection to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall be exercised by the Librarian of Congress.

Any person aggrieved may bring a civil action in any Federal district court of competent jurisdiction for such legal or equitable relief as will effectuate the purposes of this chapter.

When the individual has not filed a complaint concerning age discrimination with the Commission, no civil action may be commenced by any individual under this section until the individual has given the Commission not less than thirty days’ notice of an intent to file such action. Such notice shall be filed within one hundred and eighty days after the alleged unlawful practice occurred. Upon receiving a notice of intent to sue, the Commission shall promptly notify all persons named therein as prospective defendants in the action and take any appropriate action to assure the elimination of any unlawful practice.

Nothing contained in this section shall relieve any Government agency or official of the responsibility to assure nondiscrimination on account of age in employment as required under any provision of Federal law.

Any personnel action of any department, agency, or other entity referred to in subsection (a) of this section shall not be subject to, or affected by, any provision of this chapter, other than the provisions of section 631(b) of this title and the provisions of this section.

(1) The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall undertake a study relating to the effects of the amendments made to this section by the Age Discrimination in Employment Act Amendments of 1978, and the effects of section 631(b) of this title.

(2) The Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall transmit a report to the President and to the Congress containing the findings of the Commission resulting from the study of the Commission under paragraph (1) of this subsection. Such report shall be transmitted no later than January 1, 1980.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §15, as added Pub. L. 93–259, §28(b)(2), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 74; amended Pub. L. 95–256, §5(a), (e), Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 191; 1978 Reorg. Plan No. 1, eff. Jan. 1, 1979, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781; Pub. L. 104–1, title II, §201(c)(2), Jan. 23, 1995, 109 Stat. 8.)

The amendments made to this section by the Age Discrimination in Employment Act Amendments of 1978, referred to in subsec. (g)(1), are amendments by section 5(a) and (e) of Pub. L. 95–256, which amended subsecs. (a), (f), and (g) of this section.

1995—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 104–1 substituted “units of the judicial branch” for “units of the legislative and judicial branches” and inserted “Government Printing Office, the General Accounting Office, and the” before “Library of Congress”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–256, §5(a), inserted age requirement of at least 40 years of age, and “personnel actions” after “except”.

Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 95–256, §5(e), added subsecs. (f) and (g).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–1 effective 1 year after Jan. 23, 1995, see section 1311(d) of Title 2, The Congress.

Section 5(f) of Pub. L. 95–256 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and sections 8335 and 8339 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and repealing section 3322 of Title 5] shall take effect on September 30, 1978, except that section 15(g) of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended by subsection (e) of this section [subsec. (g) of this section], shall take effect on the date of enactment of this Act [Apr. 6, 1978].”

Section effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as an Effective Date of 1974 Amendment note under section 202 of this title.

“Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” substituted for “Civil Service Commission” in subsecs. (b) and (g) pursuant to Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, which transferred all functions vested by this section in Civil Service Commission to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.

Equal employment opportunities for Federal employees without discrimination because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin, see section 7201 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in sections 626, 631 of this title; title 2 sections 1202, 1311; title 3 section 411; title 5 sections 2302, 7702, 7703; title 22 sections 3905, 4131.

There are hereby authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary to carry out this chapter.

(Pub. L. 90–202, §17, formerly §16, Dec. 15, 1967, 81 Stat. 608; renumbered and amended Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(5), (b)(1), Apr. 8, 1974, 88 Stat. 74; Pub. L. 95–256, §7, Apr. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 193.)

1978—Pub. L. 95–256 struck out “, not in excess of $5,000,000 for any fiscal year,” after “sums”.

1974—Pub. L. 93–259, §28(a)(5), increased appropriations authorization to $5,000,000 from $3,000,000.

Amendment by Pub. L. 93–259 effective May 1, 1974, see section 29(a) of Pub. L. 93–259, set out as a note under section 202 of this title.

Functions relating to age discrimination administration and enforcement vested by this section in Secretary of Labor or Civil Service Commission transferred to Equal Employment Opportunity Commission by Reorg. Plan No. 1 of 1978, §2, 43 F.R. 19807, 92 Stat. 3781, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, effective Jan. 1, 1979, as provided by section 1–101 of Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053.


This chapter is referred to in sections 671a, 1553 of this title; title 2 sections 1302, 1341, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 425; title 15 sections 2080, 2603; title 25 section 450m; title 30 section 951; title 31 section 1105; title 42 sections 280b–1, 300ee–2, 2297b–11, 2297h–13, 4853a, 6971, 7412, 11021, 11022.

(a) The Congress finds that personal injuries and illnesses arising out of work situations impose a substantial burden upon, and are a hindrance to, interstate commerce in terms of lost production, wage loss, medical expenses, and disability compensation payments.

(b) The Congress declares it to be its purpose and policy, through the exercise of its powers to regulate commerce among the several States and with foreign nations and to provide for the general welfare, to assure so far as possible every working man and woman in the Nation safe and healthful working conditions and to preserve our human resources—

(1) by encouraging employers and employees in their efforts to reduce the number of occupational safety and health hazards at their places of employment, and to stimulate employers and employees to institute new and to perfect existing programs for providing safe and healthful working conditions;

(2) by providing that employers and employees have separate but dependent responsibilities and rights with respect to achieving safe and healthful working conditions;

(3) by authorizing the Secretary of Labor to set mandatory occupational safety and health standards applicable to businesses affecting interstate commerce, and by creating an Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission for carrying out adjudicatory functions under this chapter;

(4) by building upon advances already made through employer and employee initiative for providing safe and healthful working conditions;

(5) by providing for research in the field of occupational safety and health, including the psychological factors involved, and by developing innovative methods, techniques, and approaches for dealing with occupational safety and health problems;

(6) by exploring ways to discover latent diseases, establishing causal connections between diseases and work in environmental conditions, and conducting other research relating to health problems, in recognition of the fact that occupational health standards present problems often different from those involved in occupational safety;

(7) by providing medical criteria which will assure insofar as practicable that no employee will suffer diminished health, functional capacity, or life expectancy as a result of his work experience;

(8) by providing for training programs to increase the number and competence of personnel engaged in the field of occupational safety and health;

(9) by providing for the development and promulgation of occupational safety and health standards;

(10) by providing an effective enforcement program which shall include a prohibition against giving advance notice of any inspection and sanctions for any individual violating this prohibition;

(11) by encouraging the States to assume the fullest responsibility for the administration and enforcement of their occupational safety and health laws by providing grants to the States to assist in identifying their needs and responsibilities in the area of occupational safety and health, to develop plans in accordance with the provisions of this chapter, to improve the administration and enforcement of State occupational safety and health laws, and to conduct experimental and demonstration projects in connection therewith;

(12) by providing for appropriate reporting procedures with respect to occupational safety and health which procedures will help achieve the objectives of this chapter and accurately describe the nature of the occupational safety and health problem;

(13) by encouraging joint labor-management efforts to reduce injuries and disease arising out of employment.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §2, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (b)(3), (11), and (12), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 91–596, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590, as amended. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under this section and Tables.

Section 34 of Pub. L. 91–596 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter and section 3142–1 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, amending section 553 of this title, sections 5108, 5314, 5315, and 7902 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, sections 633 and 636 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade, section 1114 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and section 1421 of former Title 49, Transportation, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 1114 of Title 18] shall take effect one hundred and twenty days after the date of its enactment [Dec. 29, 1970].”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 91–596 provided: “That this Act [enacting this chapter and section 3142–1 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, amending section 553 of this title, sections 5108, 5314, 5315, and 7902 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, sections 633 and 636 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade, section 1114 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and section 1421 of former Title 49, Transportation, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 1114 of Title 18] may be cited as the ‘Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970’.”

This section is referred to in section 671 of this title.

For the purposes of this chapter—

(1) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(2) The term “Commission” means the Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission established under this chapter.

(3) The term “commerce” means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication among the several States, or between a State and any place outside thereof, or within the District of Columbia, or a possession of the United States (other than the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands), or between points in the same State but through a point outside thereof.

(4) The term “person” means one or more individuals, partnerships, associations, corporations, business trusts, legal representatives, or any organized group of persons.

(5) The term “employer” means a person engaged in a business affecting commerce who has employees, but does not include the United States or any State or political subdivision of a State.

(6) The term “employee” means an employee of an employer who is employed in a business of his employer which affects commerce.

(7) The term “State” includes a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands.

(8) The term “occupational safety and health standard” means a standard which requires conditions, or the adoption or use of one or more practices, means, methods, operations, or processes, reasonably necessary or appropriate to provide safe or healthful employment and places of employment.

(9) The term “national consensus standard” means any occupational safety and health standard or modification thereof which (1), has been adopted and promulgated by a nationally recognized standards-producing organization under procedures whereby it can be determined by the Secretary that persons interested and affected by the scope or provisions of the standard have reached substantial agreement on its adoption, (2) was formulated in a manner which afforded an opportunity for diverse views to be considered and (3) has been designated as such a standard by the Secretary, after consultation with other appropriate Federal agencies.

(10) The term “established Federal standard” means any operative occupational safety and health standard established by any agency of the United States and presently in effect, or contained in any Act of Congress in force on December 29, 1970.

(11) The term “Committee” means the National Advisory Committee on Occupational Safety and Health established under this chapter.

(12) The term “Director” means the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

(13) The term “Institute” means the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health established under this chapter.

(14) The term “Workmen's Compensation Commission” means the National Commission on State Workmen's Compensation Laws established under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §3, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1591.)

For termination of Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, see note set out preceding section 1681 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

Advisory committees in existence on January 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period following January 5, 1973, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such committee is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a committee established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in title 42 section 2297b–11.

(a) This chapter shall apply with respect to employment performed in a workplace in a State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Lake Island, Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act [43 U.S.C. 1331 et seq.], Johnston Island, and the Canal Zone. The Secretary of the Interior shall, by regulation, provide for judicial enforcement of this chapter by the courts established for areas in which there are no United States district courts having jurisdiction.

(b)(1) Nothing in this chapter shall apply to working conditions of employees with respect to which other Federal agencies, and State agencies acting under section 2021 of title 42, exercise statutory authority to prescribe or enforce standards or regulations affecting occupational safety or health.

(2) The safety and health standards promulgated under the Act of June 30, 1936, commonly known as the Walsh-Healey Act [41 U.S.C. 35 et seq.], the Service Contract Act of 1965 [41 U.S.C. 351 et seq.], Public Law 91–54, Act of August 9, 1969, Public Law 85–742, Act of August 23, 1958, and the National Foundation on Arts and Humanities Act [20 U.S.C. 951 et seq.] are superseded on the effective date of corresponding standards, promulgated under this chapter, which are determined by the Secretary to be more effective. Standards issued under the laws listed in this paragraph and in effect on or after the effective date of this chapter shall be deemed to be occupational safety and health standards issued under this chapter, as well as under such other Acts.

(3) The Secretary shall, within three years after the effective date of this chapter, report to the Congress his recommendations for legislation to avoid unnecessary duplication and to achieve coordination between this chapter and other Federal laws.

(4) Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to supersede or in any manner affect any workmen's compensation law or to enlarge or diminish or affect in any other manner the common law or statutory rights, duties, or liabilities of employers and employees under any law with respect to injuries, diseases, or death of employees arising out of, or in the course of, employment.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §4, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1592.)

The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, referred to in subsec. (a), is act Aug. 7, 1953, ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter III (§1331 et seq.) of chapter 29 of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1331 of Title 43 and Tables.

For definition of Canal Zone, referred to in subsec. (a), see section 3602(b) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse.

Act of June 30, 1936, commonly known as the Walsh-Healey Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is act June 30, 1936, ch. 881, 49 Stat. 2036, as amended, which is classified generally to section 35 et seq. of Title 41, Public Contracts. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 35 of Title 41 and Tables. See section 262 of this title.

The Service Contract Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 89–286, Oct. 22, 1965, 79 Stat. 1034, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 6 (§351 et seq.) of Title 41. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 351 of Title 41 and Tables.

Public Law 91–54, Act of August 9, 1969, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 91–54, Aug. 9, 1969, 83 Stat. 96, which enacted section 333 of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works, and amended section 2 of Pub. L. 87–581, Aug. 13, 1962, 76 Stat. 357, set out as a note under section 327 of Title 40. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Public Law 85–742, Act of August 23, 1958, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 85–742, Aug. 23, 1958, 72 Stat. 835, which amended section 941 of Title 33, Navigation and Navigable Waters, and enacted provisions set out as a note under section 941 of Title 33. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

The National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 89–209, Sept. 29, 1965, 79 Stat. 845, as amended, known as the National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities Act of 1965, which is classified principally to subchapter I (§951 et seq.) of chapter 26 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 951 of Title 20 and Tables.

The effective date of this chapter, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), (3), is the effective date of Pub. L. 91–596, which is 120 days after Dec. 29, 1970, see section 34 of Pub. L. 91–596, set out as an Effective Date note under section 651 of this title.

For termination of Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, see note set out preceding section 1681 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

In exercising any authority under the Toxic Substances Control Act (15 U.S.C. 2601 et seq.) in connection with amendment made by section 15(a) of Pub. L. 101–637, the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency not, for purposes of subsection (b)(1) of this section, to be considered to be exercising statutory authority to prescribe or enforce standards or regulations affecting occupational safety and health, see section 15(b) of Pub. L. 101–637, set out as a note under section 2646 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

This section is referred to in section 673 of this title; title 15 section 2608; title 42 sections 2297b–11, 7412; title 49 section 5107.

(a) Each employer—

(1) shall furnish to each of his employees employment and a place of employment which are free from recognized hazards that are causing or are likely to cause death or serious physical harm to his employees;

(2) shall comply with occupational safety and health standards promulgated under this chapter.

(b) Each employee shall comply with occupational safety and health standards and all rules, regulations, and orders issued pursuant to this chapter which are applicable to his own actions and conduct.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §5, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1593.)

This section is referred to in sections 658, 666 of this title; title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425; title 42 section 7412.

Without regard to chapter 5 of title 5 or to the other subsections of this section, the Secretary shall, as soon as practicable during the period beginning with the effective date of this chapter and ending two years after such date, by rule promulgate as an occupational safety or health standard any national consensus standard, and any established Federal standard, unless he determines that the promulgation of such a standard would not result in improved safety or health for specifically designated employees. In the event of conflict among any such standards, the Secretary shall promulgate the standard which assures the greatest protection of the safety or health of the affected employees.

The Secretary may by rule promulgate, modify, or revoke any occupational safety or health standard in the following manner:

(1) Whenever the Secretary, upon the basis of information submitted to him in writing by an interested person, a representative of any organization of employers or employees, a nationally recognized standards-producing organization, the Secretary of Health and Human Services, the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, or a State or political subdivision, or on the basis of information developed by the Secretary or otherwise available to him, determines that a rule should be promulgated in order to serve the objectives of this chapter, the Secretary may request the recommendations of an advisory committee appointed under section 656 of this title. The Secretary shall provide such an advisory committee with any proposals of his own or of the Secretary of Health and Human Services, together with all pertinent factual information developed by the Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services, or otherwise available, including the results of research, demonstrations, and experiments. An advisory committee shall submit to the Secretary its recommendations regarding the rule to be promulgated within ninety days from the date of its appointment or within such longer or shorter period as may be prescribed by the Secretary, but in no event for a period which is longer than two hundred and seventy days.

(2) The Secretary shall publish a proposed rule promulgating, modifying, or revoking an occupational safety or health standard in the Federal Register and shall afford interested persons a period of thirty days after publication to submit written data or comments. Where an advisory committee is appointed and the Secretary determines that a rule should be issued, he shall publish the proposed rule within sixty days after the submission of the advisory committee's recommendations or the expiration of the period prescribed by the Secretary for such submission.

(3) On on before the last day of the period provided for the submission of written data or comments under paragraph (2), any interested person may file with the Secretary written objections to the proposed rule, stating the grounds therefor and requesting a public hearing on such objections. Within thirty days after the last day for filing such objections, the Secretary shall publish in the Federal Register a notice specifying the occupational safety or health standard to which objections have been filed and a hearing requested, and specifying a time and place for such hearing.

(4) Within sixty days after the expiration of the period provided for the submission of written data or comments under paragraph (2), or within sixty days after the completion of any hearing held under paragraph (3), the Secretary shall issue a rule promulgating, modifying, or revoking an occupational safety or health standard or make a determination that a rule should not be issued. Such a rule may contain a provision delaying its effective date for such period (not in excess of ninety days) as the Secretary determines may be necessary to insure that affected employers and employees will be informed of the existence of the standard and of its terms and that employers affected are given an opportunity to familiarize themselves and their employees with the existence of the requirements of the standard.

(5) The Secretary, in promulgating standards dealing with toxic materials or harmful physical agents under this subsection, shall set the standard which most adequately assures, to the extent feasible, on the basis of the best available evidence, that no employee will suffer material impairment of health or functional capacity even if such employee has regular exposure to the hazard dealt with by such standard for the period of his working life. Development of standards under this subsection shall be based upon research, demonstrations, experiments, and such other information as may be appropriate. In addition to the attainment of the highest degree of health and safety protection for the employee, other considerations shall be the latest available scientific data in the field, the feasibility of the standards, and experience gained under this and other health and safety laws. Whenever practicable, the standard promulgated shall be expressed in terms of objective criteria and of the performance desired.

(6)(A) Any employer may apply to the Secretary for a temporary order granting a variance from a standard or any provision thereof promulgated under this section. Such temporary order shall be granted only if the employer files an application which meets the requirements of clause (B) and establishes that (i) he is unable to comply with a standard by its effective date because of unavailability of professional or technical personnel or of materials and equipment needed to come into compliance with the standard or because necessary construction or alteration of facilities cannot be completed by the effective date, (ii) he is taking all available steps to safeguard his employees against the hazards covered by the standard, and (iii) he has an effective program for coming into compliance with the standard as quickly as practicable. Any temporary order issued under this paragraph shall prescribe the practices, means, methods, operations, and processes which the employer must adopt and use while the order is in effect and state in detail his program for coming into compliance with the standard. Such a temporary order may be granted only after notice to employees and an opportunity for a hearing: *Provided*, That the Secretary may issue one interim order to be effective until a decision is made on the basis of the hearing. No temporary order may be in effect for longer than the period needed by the employer to achieve compliance with the standard or one year, whichever is shorter, except that such an order may be renewed not more than twice (I) so long as the requirements of this paragraph are met and (II) if an application for renewal is filed at least 90 days prior to the expiration date of the order. No interim renewal of an order may remain in effect for longer than 180 days.

(B) An application for a temporary order under this paragraph (6) shall contain:

(i) a specification of the standard or portion thereof from which the employer seeks a variance,

(ii) a representation by the employer, supported by representations from qualified persons having firsthand knowledge of the facts represented, that he is unable to comply with the standard or portion thereof and a detailed statement of the reasons therefor,

(iii) a statement of the steps he has taken and will take (with specific dates) to protect employees against the hazard covered by the standard,

(iv) a statement of when he expects to be able to comply with the standard and what steps he has taken and what steps he will take (with dates specified) to come into compliance with the standard, and

(v) a certification that he has informed his employees of the application by giving a copy thereof to their authorized representative, posting a statement giving a summary of the application and specifying where a copy may be examined at the place or places where notices to employees are normally posted, and by other appropriate means.

A description of how employees have been informed shall be contained in the certification. The information to employees shall also inform them of their right to petition the Secretary for a hearing.

(C) The Secretary is authorized to grant a variance from any standard or portion thereof whenever he determines, or the Secretary of Health and Human Services certifies, that such variance is necessary to permit an employer to participate in an experiment approved by him or the Secretary of Health and Human Services designed to demonstrate or validate new and improved techniques to safeguard the health or safety of workers.

(7) Any standard promulgated under this subsection shall prescribe the use of labels or other appropriate forms of warning as are necessary to insure that employees are apprised of all hazards to which they are exposed, relevant symptoms and appropriate emergency treatment, and proper conditions and precautions of safe use or exposure. Where appropriate, such standard shall also prescribe suitable protective equipment and control or technological procedures to be used in connection with such hazards and shall provide for monitoring or measuring employee exposure at such locations and intervals, and in such manner as may be necessary for the protection of employees. In addition, where appropriate, any such standard shall prescribe the type and frequency of medical examinations or other tests which shall be made available, by the employer or at his cost, to employees exposed to such hazards in order to most effectively determine whether the health of such employees is adversely affected by such exposure. In the event such medical examinations are in the nature of research, as determined by the Secretary of Health and Human Services, such examinations may be furnished at the expense of the Secretary of Health and Human Services. The results of such examinations or tests shall be furnished only to the Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and, at the request of the employee, to his physician. The Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, may by rule promulgated pursuant to section 553 of title 5, make appropriate modifications in the foregoing requirements relating to the use of labels or other forms of warning, monitoring or measuring, and medical examinations, as may be warranted by experience, information, or medical or technological developments acquired subsequent to the promulgation of the relevant standard.

(8) Whenever a rule promulgated by the Secretary differs substantially from an existing national consensus standard, the Secretary shall, at the same time, publish in the Federal Register a statement of the reasons why the rule as adopted will better effectuate the purposes of this chapter than the national consensus standard.

(1) The Secretary shall provide, without regard to the requirements of chapter 5 of title 5, for an emergency temporary standard to take immediate effect upon publication in the Federal Register if he determines (A) that employees are exposed to grave danger from exposure to substances or agents determined to be toxic or physically harmful or from new hazards, and (B) that such emergency standard is necessary to protect employees from such danger.

(2) Such standard shall be effective until superseded by a standard promulgated in accordance with the procedures prescribed in paragraph (3) of this subsection.

(3) Upon publication of such standard in the Federal Register the Secretary shall commence a proceeding in accordance with subsection (b) of this section, and the standard as published shall also serve as a proposed rule for the proceeding. The Secretary shall promulgate a standard under this paragraph no later than six months after publication of the emergency standard as provided in paragraph (2) of this subsection.

Any affected employer may apply to the Secretary for a rule or order for a variance from a standard promulgated under this section. Affected employees shall be given notice of each such application and an opportunity to participate in a hearing. The Secretary shall issue such rule or order if he determines on the record, after opportunity for an inspection where appropriate and a hearing, that the proponent of the variance has demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that the conditions, practices, means, methods, operations, or processes used or proposed to be used by an employer will provide employment and places of employment to his employees which are as safe and healthful as those which would prevail if he complied with the standard. The rule or order so issued shall prescribe the conditions the employer must maintain, and the practices, means, methods, operations, and processes which he must adopt and utilize to the extent they differ from the standard in question. Such a rule or order may be modified or revoked upon application by an employer, employees, or by the Secretary on his own motion, in the manner prescribed for its issuance under this subsection at any time after six months from its issuance.

Whenever the Secretary promulgates any standard, makes any rule, order, or decision, grants any exemption or extension of time, or compromises, mitigates, or settles any penalty assessed under this chapter, he shall include a statement of the reasons for such action, which shall be published in the Federal Register.

Any person who may be adversely affected by a standard issued under this section may at any time prior to the sixtieth day after such standard is promulgated file a petition challenging the validity of such standard with the United States court of appeals for the circuit wherein such person resides or has his principal place of business, for a judicial review of such standard. A copy of the petition shall be forthwith transmitted by the clerk of the court to the Secretary. The filing of such petition shall not, unless otherwise ordered by the court, operate as a stay of the standard. The determinations of the Secretary shall be conclusive if supported by substantial evidence in the record considered as a whole.

In determining the priority for establishing standards under this section, the Secretary shall give due regard to the urgency of the need for mandatory safety and health standards for particular industries, trades, crafts, occupations, businesses, workplaces or work environments. The Secretary shall also give due regard to the recommendations of the Secretary of Health and Human Services regarding the need for mandatory standards in determining the priority for establishing such standards.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §6, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1593; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

The effective date of this chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), is the effective date of Pub. L. 91–596, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590, which is 120 days after Dec. 29, 1970, see section 34 of Pub. L. 91–596, set out as an Effective Date note under section 651 of this title.

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsecs. (b)(1), (6)(C), (7), and (g) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Advisory committees in existence on January 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period following January 5, 1973, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such committee is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a committee established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Pub. L. 102–394, title I, §102, Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1799, provided that: “None of the funds appropriated under this Act or subsequent Departments of Labor, Health and Human Services, and Education, and Related Agencies Appropriations Acts shall be used to grant variances, interim orders or letters of clarification to employers which will allow exposure of workers to chemicals or other workplace hazards in excess of existing Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards for the purpose of conducting experiments on workers’ health or safety.”

Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Pub. L. 102–170, title I, §102, Nov. 26, 1991, 105 Stat. 1114.

Pub. L. 101–517, title I, §102, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 2196.

Pub. L. 101–166, title I, §102, Nov. 21, 1989, 103 Stat. 1165.

Pub. L. 100–202, §101(h) [title I, §102], Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1329–256, 1329–263.

Pub. L. 99–500, §101(i) [H.R. 5233, title I, §102], Oct. 18, 1986, 100 Stat. 1783–287, and Pub. L. 99–591, §101(i) [H.R. 5233, title I, §102], Oct. 30, 1986, 100 Stat. 3341–287.

Pub. L. 99–178, title I, §102, Dec. 12, 1985, 99 Stat. 1109.

Pub. L. 98–619, title I, §102, Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3311.

Pub. L. 102–170, title I, §100, Nov. 26, 1991, 105 Stat. 1113, provided that:

“(a) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, on or before December 1, 1991, the Secretary of Labor, acting under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 [29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.], shall promulgate a final occupational health standard concerning occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens. The final standard shall be based on the proposed standard as published in the Federal Register on May 30, 1989 (54 FR 23042), concerning occupational exposures to the hepatitis B virus, the human immunodeficiency virus and other bloodborne pathogens.

“(b) In the event that the final standard referred to in subsection (a) is not promulgated by the date required under such subsection, the proposed standard on occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens as published in the Federal Register on May 30, 1989 (54 FR 23042) shall become effective as if such proposed standard had been promulgated as a final standard by the Secretary of Labor, and remain in effect until the date on which such Secretary promulgates the final standard referred to in subsection (a).

“(c) Nothing in this Act [enacting section 962 of Title 30, Mineral Lands and Mining, amending section 290b of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, enacting provisions set out as notes under section 1070a of Title 20, Education and section 1383 of Title 42, and amending provisions set out as notes under section 1255a of Title 8, Aliens and Nationality, and section 1221–1 of Title 20] shall be construed to require the Secretary of Labor (acting through the Occupational Safety and Health Administration) to revise the employment accident reporting regulations published at 29 C.F.R. 1904.8.”

Pub. L. 101–615, §29, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3277, provided that: “Not later than 18 months after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 16, 1990], the Secretary of Labor, in consultation with the Secretary of Transportation and the Secretary of the Treasury, shall issue under section 6(b) of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 655(b)) standards requiring any employer who receives a package, container, motor vehicle, rail freight car, aircraft, or vessel which contains a hazardous material and which is required to be marked, placarded, or labeled in accordance with regulations issued under the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act [former 49 U.S.C. 1801 et seq.] to retain the markings, placards, and labels, and any other information as may be required by such regulations on the package, container, motor vehicle, rail freight car, aircraft, or vessel, until the hazardous materials have been removed therefrom.”

Pub. L. 101–549, title III, §304, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2576, provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(c)

“(1) develop and maintain written safety information identifying workplace chemical and process hazards, equipment used in the processes, and technology used in the processes;

“(2) perform a workplace hazard assessment, including, as appropriate, identification of potential sources of accidental releases, an identification of any previous release within the facility which had a likely potential for catastrophic consequences in the workplace, estimation of workplace effects of a range of releases, estimation of the health and safety effects of such range on employees;

“(3) consult with employees and their representatives on the development and conduct of hazard assessments and the development of chemical accident prevention plans and provide access to these and other records required under the standard;

“(4) establish a system to respond to the workplace hazard assessment findings, which shall address prevention, mitigation, and emergency responses;

“(5) periodically review the workplace hazard assessment and response system;

“(6) develop and implement written operating procedures for the chemical process including procedures for each operating phase, operating limitations, and safety and health considerations;

“(7) provide written safety and operating information to employees and train employees in operating procedures, emphasizing hazards and safe practices;

“(8) ensure contractors and contract employees are provided appropriate information and training;

“(9) train and educate employees and contractors in emergency response in a manner as comprehensive and effective as that required by the regulation promulgated pursuant to section 126(d) of the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act [of 1986] [Pub. L. 99–499, set out in a note below];

“(10) establish a quality assurance program to ensure that initial process related equipment, maintenance materials, and spare parts are fabricated and installed consistent with design specifications;

“(11) establish maintenance systems for critical process related equipment including written procedures, employee training, appropriate inspections, and testing of such equipment to ensure ongoing mechanical integrity;

“(12) conduct pre-start-up safety reviews of all newly installed or modified equipment;

“(13) establish and implement written procedures to manage change to process chemicals, technology, equipment and facilities; and

“(14) investigate every incident which results in or could have resulted in a major accident in the workplace, with any findings to be reviewed by operating personnel and modifications made if appropriate.

“(d)

Pub. L. 99–499, title I, §126(a)–(f), Oct. 17, 1986, 100 Stat. 1690–1692, as amended by Pub. L. 100–202, §101(f) [title II, §201], Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1329–187, 1329–198, provided:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1)

“(2)

“(3)

“(4)

“(5)

“(6)

“(7)

“(8)

“(9)

“(10)

“(11)

“(c)

“(d)

“(1)

“(2)

“(3)

“(4)

“(e)

“(f)

This section is referred to in sections 656, 657, 658, 666, 667, 668, 669 of this title; title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425; title 7 section 1942; title 42 section 4853.

(1) There is hereby established a National Advisory Committee on Occupational Safety and Health consisting of twelve members appointed by the Secretary, four of whom are to be designated by the Secretary of Health and Human Services, without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, and composed of representatives of management, labor, occupational safety and occupational health professions, and of the public. The Secretary shall designate one of the public members as Chairman. The members shall be selected upon the basis of their experience and competence in the field of occupational safety and health.

(2) The Committee shall advise, consult with, and make recommendations to the Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services on matters relating to the administration of this chapter. The Committee shall hold no fewer than two meetings during each calendar year. All meetings of the Committee shall be open to the public and a transcript shall be kept and made available for public inspection.

(3) The members of the Committee shall be compensated in accordance with the provisions of section 3109 of title 5.

(4) The Secretary shall furnish to the Committee an executive secretary and such secretarial, clerical, and other services as are deemed necessary to the conduct of its business.

An advisory committee may be appointed by the Secretary to assist him in his standard-setting functions under section 655 of this title. Each such committee shall consist of not more than fifteen members and shall include as a member one or more designees of the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and shall include among its members an equal number of persons qualified by experience and affiliation to present the viewpoint of the employers involved, and of persons similarly qualified to present the viewpoint of the workers involved, as well as one or more representatives of health and safety agencies of the States. An advisory committee may also include such other persons as the Secretary may appoint who are qualified by knowledge and experience to make a useful contribution to the work of such committee, including one or more representatives of professional organizations of technicians or professionals specializing in occupational safety or health, and one or more representatives of nationally recognized standards-producing organizations, but the number of persons so appointed to any such advisory committee shall not exceed the number appointed to such committee as representatives of Federal and State agencies. Persons appointed to advisory committees from private life shall be compensated in the same manner as consultants or experts under section 3109 of title 5. The Secretary shall pay to any State which is the employer of a member of such a committee who is a representative of the health or safety agency of that State, reimbursement sufficient to cover the actual cost to the State resulting from such representative's membership on such committee. Any meeting of such committee shall be open to the public and an accurate record shall be kept and made available to the public. No member of such committee (other than representatives of employers and employees) shall have an economic interest in any proposed rule.

In carrying out his responsibilities under this chapter, the Secretary is authorized to—

(1) use, with the consent of any Federal agency, the services, facilities, and personnel of such agency, with or without reimbursement, and with the consent of any State or political subdivision thereof, accept and use the services, facilities, and personnel of any agency of such State or subdivision with reimbursement; and

(2) employ experts and consultants or organizations thereof as authorized by section 3109 of title 5, except that contracts for such employment may be renewed annually; compensate individuals so employed at rates not in excess of the rate specified at the time of service for grade GS–18 under section 5332 of title 5, including traveltime, and allow them while away from their homes or regular places of business, travel expenses (including per diem in lieu of subsistence) as authorized by section 5703 of title 5 for persons in the Government service employed intermittently, while so employed.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §7, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1597; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsecs. (a)(1), (2) and (b) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Advisory committees in existence on January 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period following January 5, 1973, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such committee is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a committee established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

This section is referred to in section 655 of this title.

In order to carry out the purposes of this chapter, the Secretary, upon presenting appropriate credentials to the owner, operator, or agent in charge, is authorized—

(1) to enter without delay and at reasonable times any factory, plant, establishment, construction site, or other area, workplace or environment where work is performed by an employee of an employer; and

(2) to inspect and investigate during regular working hours and at other reasonable times, and within reasonable limits and in a reasonable manner, any such place of employment and all pertinent conditions, structures, machines, apparatus, devices, equipment, and materials therein, and to question privately any such employer, owner, operator, agent, or employee.

In making his inspections and investigations under this chapter the Secretary may require the attendance and testimony of witnesses and the production of evidence under oath. Witnesses shall be paid the same fees and mileage that are paid witnesses in the courts of the United States. In case of a contumacy, failure, or refusal of any person to obey such an order, any district court of the United States or the United States courts of any territory or possession, within the jurisdiction of which such person is found, or resides or transacts business, upon the application by the Secretary, shall have jurisdiction to issue to such person an order requiring such person to appear to produce evidence if, as, and when so ordered, and to give testimony relating to the matter under investigation or in question, and any failure to obey such order of the court may be punished by said court as a contempt thereof.

(1) Each employer shall make, keep and preserve, and make available to the Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services, such records regarding his activities relating to this chapter as the Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, may prescribe by regulation as necessary or appropriate for the enforcement of this chapter or for developing information regarding the causes and prevention of occupational accidents and illnesses. In order to carry out the provisions of this paragraph such regulations may include provisions requiring employers to conduct periodic inspections. The Secretary shall also issue regulations requiring that employers, through posting of notices or other appropriate means, keep their employees informed of their protections and obligations under this chapter, including the provisions of applicable standards.

(2) The Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, shall prescribe regulations requiring employers to maintain accurate records of, and to make periodic reports on, work-related deaths, injuries and illnesses other than minor injuries requiring only first aid treatment and which do not involve medical treatment, loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job.

(3) The Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, shall issue regulations requiring employers to maintain accurate records of employee exposures to potentially toxic materials or harmful physical agents which are required to be monitored or measured under section 655 of this title. Such regulations shall provide employees or their representatives with an opportunity to observe such monitoring or measuring, and to have access to the records thereof. Such regulations shall also make appropriate provision for each employee or former employee to have access to such records as will indicate his own exposure to toxic materials or harmful physical agents. Each employer shall promptly notify any employee who has been or is being exposed to toxic materials or harmful physical agents in concentrations or at levels which exceed those prescribed by an applicable occupational safety and health standard promulgated under section 655 of this title, and shall inform any employee who is being thus exposed of the corrective action being taken.

Any information obtained by the Secretary, the Secretary of Health and Human Services, or a State agency under this chapter shall be obtained with a minimum burden upon employers, especially those operating small businesses. Unnecessary duplication of efforts in obtaining information shall be reduced to the maximum extent feasible.

Subject to regulations issued by the Secretary, a representative of the employer and a representative authorized by his employees shall be given an opportunity to accompany the Secretary or his authorized representative during the physical inspection of any workplace under subsection (a) of this section for the purpose of aiding such inspection. Where there is no authorized employee representative, the Secretary or his authorized representative shall consult with a reasonable number of employees concerning matters of health and safety in the workplace.

(1) Any employees or representative of employees who believe that a violation of a safety or health standard exists that threatens physical harm, or that an imminent danger exists, may request an inspection by giving notice to the Secretary or his authorized representative of such violation or danger. Any such notice shall be reduced to writing, shall set forth with reasonable particularity the grounds for the notice, and shall be signed by the employees or representative of employees, and a copy shall be provided the employer or his agent no later than at the time of inspection, except that, upon the request of the person giving such notice, his name and the names of individual employees referred to therein shall not appear in such copy or on any record published, released, or made available pursuant to subsection (g) of this section. If upon receipt of such notification the Secretary determines there are reasonable grounds to believe that such violation or danger exists, he shall make a special inspection in accordance with the provisions of this section as soon as practicable, to determine if such violation or danger exists. If the Secretary determines there are no reasonable grounds to believe that a violation or danger exists he shall notify the employees or representative of the employees in writing of such determination.

(2) Prior to or during any inspection of a workplace, any employees or representative of employees employed in such workplace may notify the Secretary or any representative of the Secretary responsible for conducting the inspection, in writing, of any violation of this chapter which they have reason to believe exists in such workplace. The Secretary shall, by regulation, establish procedures for informal review of any refusal by a representative of the Secretary to issue a citation with respect to any such alleged violation and shall furnish the employees or representative of employees requesting such review a written statement of the reasons for the Secretary's final disposition of the case.

(1) The Secretary and Secretary of Health and Human Services are authorized to compile, analyze, and publish, either in summary or detailed form, all reports or information obtained under this section.

(2) The Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall each prescribe such rules and regulations as he may deem necessary to carry out their responsibilities under this chapter, including rules and regulations dealing with the inspection of an employer's establishment.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §8, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1598; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsecs. (c), (d), and (g) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 667, 669, 673 of this title; title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425.

If, upon inspection or investigation, the Secretary or his authorized representative believes that an employer has violated a requirement of section 654 of this title, of any standard, rule or order promulgated pursuant to section 655 of this title, or of any regulations prescribed pursuant to this chapter, he shall with reasonable promptness issue a citation to the employer. Each citation shall be in writing and shall describe with particularity the nature of the violation, including a reference to the provision of the chapter, standard, rule, regulation, or order alleged to have been violated. In addition, the citation shall fix a reasonable time for the abatement of the violation. The Secretary may prescribe procedures for the issuance of a notice in lieu of a citation with respect to de minimis violations which have no direct or immediate relationship to safety or health.

Each citation issued under this section, or a copy or copies thereof, shall be prominently posted, as prescribed in regulations issued by the Secretary, at or near each place a violation referred to in the citation occurred.

No citation may be issued under this section after the expiration of six months following the occurrence of any violation.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §9, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1601.)

This section is referred to in sections 659, 666, 667 of this title; title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425.

If, after an inspection or investigation, the Secretary issues a citation under section 658(a) of this title, he shall, within a reasonable time after the termination of such inspection or investigation, notify the employer by certified mail of the penalty, if any, proposed to be assessed under section 666 of this title and that the employer has fifteen working days within which to notify the Secretary that he wishes to contest the citation or proposed assessment of penalty. If, within fifteen working days from the receipt of the notice issued by the Secretary the employer fails to notify the Secretary that he intends to contest the citation or proposed assessment of penalty, and no notice is filed by any employee or representative of employees under subsection (c) of this section within such time, the citation and the assessment, as proposed, shall be deemed a final order of the Commission and not subject to review by any court or agency.

If the Secretary has reason to believe that an employer has failed to correct a violation for which a citation has been issued within the period permitted for its correction (which period shall not begin to run until the entry of a final order by the Commission in the case of any review proceedings under this section initiated by the employer in good faith and not solely for delay or avoidance of penalties), the Secretary shall notify the employer by certified mail of such failure and of the penalty proposed to be assessed under section 666 of this title by reason of such failure, and that the employer has fifteen working days within which to notify the Secretary that he wishes to contest the Secretary's notification or the proposed assessment of penalty. If, within fifteen working days from the receipt of notification issued by the Secretary, the employer fails to notify the Secretary that he intends to contest the notification or proposed assessment of penalty, the notification or proposed assessment of penalty, the notification and assessment, as proposed, shall be deemed a final order of the Commission and not subject to review by any court or agency.

If an employer notifies the Secretary that he intends to contest a citation issued under section 658(a) of this title or notification issued under subsection (a) or (b) of this section, or if, within fifteen working days of the issuance of a citation under section 658(a) of this title, any employee or representative of employees files a notice with the Secretary alleging that the period of time fixed in the citation for the abatement of the violation is unreasonable, the Secretary shall immediately advise the Commission of such notification, and the Commission shall afford an opportunity for a hearing (in accordance with section 554 of title 5 but without regard to subsection (a)(3) of such section). The Commission shall thereafter issue an order, based on findings of fact, affirming, modifying, or vacating the Secretary's citation or proposed penalty, or directing other appropriate relief, and such order shall become final thirty days after its issuance. Upon a showing by an employer of a good faith effort to comply with the abatement requirements of a citation, and that abatement has not been completed because of factors beyond his reasonable control, the Secretary, after an opportunity for a hearing as provided in this subsection, shall issue an order affirming or modifying the abatement requirements in such citation. The rules of procedure prescribed by the Commission shall provide affected employees or representatives of affected employees an opportunity to participate as parties to hearings under this subsection.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §10, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1601.)

This section is referred to in sections 660, 666, 667 of this title; title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425.

Any person adversely affected or aggrieved by an order of the Commission issued under subsection (c) of section 659 of this title may obtain a review of such order in any United States court of appeals for the circuit in which the violation is alleged to have occurred or where the employer has its principal office, or in the Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit, by filing in such court within sixty days following the issuance of such order a written petition praying that the order be modified or set aside. A copy of such petition shall be forthwith transmitted by the clerk of the court to the Commission and to the other parties, and thereupon the Commission shall file in the court the record in the proceeding as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Upon such filing, the court shall have jurisdiction of the proceeding and of the question determined therein, and shall have power to grant such temporary relief or restraining order as it deems just and proper, and to make and enter upon the pleadings, testimony, and proceedings set forth in such record a decree affirming, modifying, or setting aside in whole or in part, the order of the Commission and enforcing the same to the extent that such order is affirmed or modified. The commencement of proceedings under this subsection shall not, unless ordered by the court, operate as a stay of the order of the Commission. No objection that has not been urged before the Commission shall be considered by the court, unless the failure or neglect to urge such objection shall be excused because of extraordinary circumstances. The findings of the Commission with respect to questions of fact, if supported by substantial evidence on the record considered as a whole, shall be conclusive. If any party shall apply to the court for leave to adduce additional evidence and shall show to the satisfaction of the court that such additional evidence is material and that there were reasonable grounds for the failure to adduce such evidence in the hearing before the Commission, the court may order such additional evidence to be taken before the Commission and to be made a part of the record. The Commission may modify its findings as to the facts, or make new findings, by reason of additional evidence so taken and filed, and it shall file such modified or new findings, which findings with respect to questions of fact, if supported by substantial evidence on the record considered as a whole, shall be conclusive, and its recommendations, if any, for the modification or setting aside of its original order. Upon the filing of the record with it, the jurisdiction of the court shall be exclusive and its judgment and decree shall be final, except that the same shall be subject to review by the Supreme Court of the United States, as provided in section 1254 of title 28.

The Secretary may also obtain review or enforcement of any final order of the Commission by filing a petition for such relief in the United States court of appeals for the circuit in which the alleged violation occurred or in which the employer has its principal office, and the provisions of subsection (a) of this section shall govern such proceedings to the extent applicable. If no petition for review, as provided in subsection (a) of this section, is filed within sixty days after service of the Commission's order, the Commission's findings of fact and order shall be conclusive in connection with any petition for enforcement which is filed by the Secretary after the expiration of such sixty-day period. In any such case, as well as in the case of a noncontested citation or notification by the Secretary which has become a final order of the Commission under subsection (a) or (b) of section 659 of this title, the clerk of the court, unless otherwise ordered by the court, shall forthwith enter a decree enforcing the order and shall transmit a copy of such decree to the Secretary and the employer named in the petition. In any contempt proceeding brought to enforce a decree of a court of appeals entered pursuant to this subsection or subsection (a) of this section, the court of appeals may assess the penalties provided in section 666 of this title, in addition to invoking any other available remedies.

(1) No person shall discharge or in any manner discriminate against any employee because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding under or related to this chapter or has testified or is about to testify in any such proceeding or because of the exercise by such employee on behalf of himself or others of any right afforded by this chapter.

(2) Any employee who believes that he has been discharged or otherwise discriminated against by any person in violation of this subsection may, within thirty days after such violation occurs, file a complaint with the Secretary alleging such discrimination. Upon receipt of such complaint, the Secretary shall cause such investigation to be made as he deems appropriate. If upon such investigation, the Secretary determines that the provisions of this subsection have been violated, he shall bring an action in any appropriate United States district court against such person. In any such action the United States district courts shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown to restrain violations of paragraph (1) of this subsection and order all appropriate relief including rehiring or reinstatement of the employee to his former position with back pay.

(3) Within 90 days of the receipt of a complaint filed under this subsection the Secretary shall notify the complainant of his determination under paragraph (2) of this subsection.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §11, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1602; Pub. L. 98–620, title IV, §402(32), Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3360.)

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–620 struck out provision requiring expeditious hearing of petitions filed under this subsection.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–620 not applicable to cases pending on Nov. 8, 1984, see section 403 of Pub. L. 98–620, set out as a note under section 1657 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in title 15 section 2651.

The Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission is hereby established. The Commission shall be composed of three members who shall be appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate, from among persons who by reason of training, education, or experience are qualified to carry out the functions of the Commission under this chapter. The President shall designate one of the members of the Commission to serve as Chairman.

The terms of members of the Commission shall be six years except that (1) the members of the Commission first taking office shall serve, as designated by the President at the time of appointment, one for a term of two years, one for a term of four years, and one for a term of six years, and (2) a vacancy caused by the death, resignation, or removal of a member prior to the expiration of the term for which he was appointed shall be filled only for the remainder of such unexpired term. A member of the Commission may be removed by the President for inefficiency, neglect of duty, or malfeasance in office.

The principal office of the Commission shall be in the District of Columbia. Whenever the Commission deems that the convenience of the public or of the parties may be promoted, or delay or expense may be minimized, it may hold hearings or conduct other proceedings at any other place.

The Chairman shall be responsible on behalf of the Commission for the administrative operations of the Commission and shall appoint such administrative law judges and other employees as he deems necessary to assist in the performance of the Commission's functions and to fix their compensation in accordance with the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5 relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates: *Provided*, That assignment, removal and compensation of administrative law judges shall be in accordance with sections 3105, 3344, 5372, and 7521 of title 5.

For the purpose of carrying out its functions under this chapter, two members of the Commission shall constitute a quorum and official action can be taken only on the affirmative vote of at least two members.

Every official act of the Commission shall be entered of record, and its hearings and records shall be open to the public. The Commission is authorized to make such rules as are necessary for the orderly transaction of its proceedings. Unless the Commission has adopted a different rule, its proceedings shall be in accordance with the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure.

The Commission may order testimony to be taken by deposition in any proceeding pending before it at any state of such proceeding. Any person may be compelled to appear and depose, and to produce books, papers, or documents, in the same manner as witnesses may be compelled to appear and testify and produce like documentary evidence before the Commission. Witnesses whose depositions are taken under this subsection, and the persons taking such depositions, shall be entitled to the same fees as are paid for like services in the courts of the United States.

For the purpose of any proceeding before the Commission, the provisions of section 161 of this title are hereby made applicable to the jurisdiction and powers of the Commission.

A1 administrative law judge appointed by the Commission shall hear, and make a determination upon, any proceeding instituted before the Commission and any motion in connection therewith, assigned to such administrative law judge by the Chairman of the Commission, and shall make a report of any such determination which constitutes his final disposition of the proceedings. The report of the administrative law judge shall become the final order of the Commission within thirty days after such report by the administrative law judge, unless within such period any Commission member has directed that such report shall be reviewed by the Commission.

Except as otherwise provided in this chapter, the administrative law judges shall be subject to the laws governing employees in the classified civil service, except that appointments shall be made without regard to section 5108 of title 5. Each administrative law judge shall receive compensation at a rate not less than that prescribed for GS–16 under section 5332 of title 5.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §12, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1603; Pub. L. 95–251, §2(a)(7), Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 183.)

The General Schedule, referred to in subsec. (e), is set out under section 5332 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, referred to in subsec. (g), are set out in the Appendix to Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Subsec. (c) of this section amended sections 5314 and 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

In subsec. (e), reference to section 5372 of title 5 was substituted for section 5362 on authority of Pub. L. 95–454, §801(a)(3)(A)(ii), Oct. 13, 1978, 92 Stat. 1221, which redesignated sections 5361 through 5365 of title 5 as sections 5371 through 5375.

1978—Subsecs. (e), (j), (k). Pub. L. 95–251 substituted “administrative law judge” and “administrative law judges” for “hearing examiner” and “hearing examiners”, respectively, wherever appearing.

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

1 So in original. Probably should be “An”.

The United States district courts shall have jurisdiction, upon petition of the Secretary, to restrain any conditions or practices in any place of employment which are such that a danger exists which could reasonably be expected to cause death or serious physical harm immediately or before the imminence of such danger can be eliminated through the enforcement procedures otherwise provided by this chapter. Any order issued under this section may require such steps to be taken as may be necessary to avoid, correct, or remove such imminent danger and prohibit the employment or presence of any individual in locations or under conditions where such imminent danger exists, except individuals whose presence is necessary to avoid, correct, or remove such imminent danger or to maintain the capacity of a continuous process operation to resume normal operations without a complete cessation of operations, or where a cessation of operations is necessary, to permit such to be accomplished in a safe and orderly manner.

Upon the filing of any such petition the district court shall have jurisdiction to grant such injunctive relief or temporary restraining order pending the outcome of an enforcement proceeding pursuant to this chapter. The proceeding shall be as provided by Rule 65 of the Federal Rules, Civil Procedure, except that no temporary restraining order issued without notice shall be effective for a period longer than five days.

Whenever and as soon as an inspector concludes that conditions or practices described in subsection (a) of this section exist in any place of employment, he shall inform the affected employees and employers of the danger and that he is recommending to the Secretary that relief be sought.

If the Secretary arbitrarily or capriciously fails to seek relief under this section, any employee who may be injured by reason of such failure, or the representative of such employees, might bring an action against the Secretary in the United States district court for the district in which the imminent danger is alleged to exist or the employer has its principal office, or for the District of Columbia, for a writ of mandamus to compel the Secretary to seek such an order and for such further relief as may be appropriate.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §13, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1605.)

Rule 65 of the Federal Rules of Civil Procedures, referred to in subsec. (b), is set out in the Appendix to Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Writ of mandamus abolished in United States district courts, but relief available by appropriate action or motion, see rule 81, Title 28, Appendix, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1341; title 3 section 425.

Except as provided in section 518(a) of title 28 relating to litigation before the Supreme Court, the Solicitor of Labor may appear for and represent the Secretary in any civil litigation brought under this chapter but all such litigations shall be subject to the direction and control of the Attorney General.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §14, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1606.)

All information reported to or otherwise obtained by the Secretary or his representative in connection with any inspection or proceeding under this chapter which contains or which might reveal a trade secret referred to in section 1905 of title 18 shall be considered confidential for the purpose of that section, except that such information may be disclosed to other officers or employees concerned with carrying out this chapter or when relevant in any proceeding under this chapter. In any such proceeding the Secretary, the Commission, or the court shall issue such orders as may be appropriate to protect the confidentiality of trade secrets.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §15, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1606.)

The Secretary, on the record, after notice and opportunity for a hearing may provide such reasonable limitations and may make such rules and regulations allowing reasonable variations, tolerances, and exemptions to and from any or all provisions of this chapter as he may find necessary and proper to avoid serious impairment of the national defense. Such action shall not be in effect for more than six months without notification to affected employees and an opportunity being afforded for a hearing.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §16, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1606.)

Any employer who willfully or repeatedly violates the requirements of section 654 of this title, any standard, rule, or order promulgated pursuant to section 655 of this title, or regulations prescribed pursuant to this chapter may be assessed a civil penalty of not more than $70,000 for each violation, but not less than $5,000 for each willful violation.

Any employer who has received a citation for a serious violation of the requirements of section 654 of this title, of any standard, rule, or order promulgated pursuant to section 655 of this title, or of any regulations prescribed pursuant to this chapter, shall be assessed a civil penalty of up to $7,000 for each such violation.

Any employer who has received a citation for a violation of the requirements of section 654 of this title, of any standard, rule, or order promulgated pursuant to section 655 of this title, or of regulations prescribed pursuant to this chapter, and such violation is specifically determined not to be of a serious nature, may be assessed a civil penalty of up to $7,000 for each such violation.

Any employer who fails to correct a violation for which a citation has been issued under section 658(a) of this title within the period permitted for its correction (which period shall not begin to run until the date of the final order of the Commission in the case of any review proceeding under section 659 of this title initiated by the employer in good faith and not solely for delay or avoidance of penalties), may be assessed a civil penalty of not more than $7,000 for each day during which such failure or violation continues.

Any employer who willfully violates any standard, rule, or order promulgated pursuant to section 655 of this title, or of any regulations prescribed pursuant to this chapter, and that violation caused death to any employee, shall, upon conviction, be punished by a fine of not more than $10,000 or by imprisonment for not more than six months, or by both; except that if the conviction is for a violation committed after a first conviction of such person, punishment shall be by a fine of not more than $20,000 or by imprisonment for not more than one year, or by both.

Any person who gives advance notice of any inspection to be conducted under this chapter, without authority from the Secretary or his designees, shall, upon conviction, be punished by a fine of not more than $1,000 or by imprisonment for not more than six months, or by both.

Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or certification in any application, record, report, plan, or other document filed or required to be maintained pursuant to this chapter shall, upon conviction, be punished by a fine of not more than $10,000, or by imprisonment for not more than six months, or by both.

Any employer who violates any of the posting requirements, as prescribed under the provisions of this chapter, shall be assessed a civil penalty of up to $7,000 for each violation.

The Commission shall have authority to assess all civil penalties provided in this section, giving due consideration to the appropriateness of the penalty with respect to the size of the business of the employer being charged, the gravity of the violation, the good faith of the employer, and the history of previous violations.

For purposes of this section, a serious violation shall be deemed to exist in a place of employment if there is a substantial probability that death or serious physical harm could result from a condition which exists, or from one or more practices, means, methods, operations, or processes which have been adopted or are in use, in such place of employment unless the employer did not, and could not with the exercise of reasonable diligence, know of the presence of the violation.

Civil penalties owned under this chapter shall be paid to the Secretary for deposit into the Treasury of the United States and shall accrue to the United States and may be recovered in a civil action in the name of the United States brought in the United States district court for the district where the violation is alleged to have occurred or where the employer has its principal office.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §17, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1606, 1607; Pub. L. 101–508, title III, §3101, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–29.)

Subsec. (h) of this section amended section 1114 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and enacted note set out thereunder.

1990—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–508, §3101(1), substituted “$70,000 for each violation, but not less than $5,000 for each willful violation” for “$10,000 for each violation”.

Subsecs. (b) to (d), (i). Pub. L. 101–508, §3101(2), substituted “$7,000” for “$1,000”.

This section is referred to in sections 659, 660, 667 of this title.

Nothing in this chapter shall prevent any State agency or court from asserting jurisdiction under State law over any occupational safety or health issue with respect to which no standard is in effect under section 655 of this title.

Any State which, at any time, desires to assume responsibility for development and enforcement therein of occupational safety and health standards relating to any occupational safety or health issue with respect to which a Federal standard has been promulgated under section 655 of this title shall submit a State plan for the development of such standards and their enforcement.

The Secretary shall approve the plan submitted by a State under subsection (b) of this section, or any modification thereof, if such plan in his judgment—

(1) designates a State agency or agencies as the agency or agencies responsible for administering the plan throughout the State,

(2) provides for the development and enforcement of safety and health standards relating to one or more safety or health issues, which standards (and the enforcement of which standards) are or will be at least as effective in providing safe and healthful employment and places of employment as the standards promulgated under section 655 of this title which relate to the same issues, and which standards, when applicable to products which are distributed or used in interstate commerce, are required by compelling local conditions and do not unduly burden interstate commerce,

(3) provides for a right of entry and inspection of all workplaces subject to this chapter which is at least as effective as that provided in section 657 of this title, and includes a prohibition on advance notice of inspections,

(4) contains satisfactory assurances that such agency or agencies have or will have the legal authority and qualified personnel necessary for the enforcement of such standards,

(5) gives satisfactory assurances that such State will devote adequate funds to the administration and enforcement of such standards,

(6) contains satisfactory assurances that such State will, to the extent permitted by its law, establish and maintain an effective and comprehensive occupational safety and health program applicable to all employees of public agencies of the State and its political subdivisions, which program is as effective as the standards contained in an approved plan,

(7) requires employers in the State to make reports to the Secretary in the same manner and to the same extent as if the plan were not in effect, and

(8) provides that the State agency will make such reports to the Secretary in such form and containing such information, as the Secretary shall from time to time require.

If the Secretary rejects a plan submitted under subsection (b) of this section, he shall afford the State submitting the plan due notice and opportunity for a hearing before so doing.

After the Secretary approves a State plan submitted under subsection (b) of this section, he may, but shall not be required to, exercise his authority under sections 657, 658, 659, 662, and 666 of this title with respect to comparable standards promulgated under section 655 of this title, for the period specified in the next sentence. The Secretary may exercise the authority referred to above until he determines, on the basis of actual operations under the State plan, that the criteria set forth in subsection (c) of this section are being applied, but he shall not make such determination for at least three years after the plan's approval under subsection (c) of this section. Upon making the determination referred to in the preceding sentence, the provisions of sections 654(a)(2), 657 (except for the purpose of carrying out subsection (f) of this section), 658, 659, 662, and 666 of this title, and standards promulgated under section 655 of this title, shall not apply with respect to any occupational safety or health issues covered under the plan, but the Secretary may retain jurisdiction under the above provisions in any proceeding commenced under section 658 or 659 of this title before the date of determination.

The Secretary shall, on the basis of reports submitted by the State agency and his own inspections make a continuing evaluation of the manner in which each State having a plan approved under this section is carrying out such plan. Whenever the Secretary finds, after affording due notice and opportunity for a hearing, that in the administration of the State plan there is a failure to comply substantially with any provision of the State plan (or any assurance contained therein), he shall notify the State agency of his withdrawal of approval of such plan and upon receipt of such notice such plan shall cease to be in effect, but the State may retain jurisdiction in any case commenced before the withdrawal of the plan in order to enforce standards under the plan whenever the issues involved do not relate to the reasons for the withdrawal of the plan.

The State may obtain a review of a decision of the Secretary withdrawing approval of or rejecting its plan by the United States court of appeals for the circuit in which the State is located by filing in such court within thirty days following receipt of notice of such decision a petition to modify or set aside in whole or in part the action of the Secretary. A copy of such petition shall forthwith be served upon the Secretary, and thereupon the Secretary shall certify and file in the court the record upon which the decision complained of was issued as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Unless the court finds that the Secretary's decision in rejecting a proposed State plan or withdrawing his approval of such a plan is not supported by substantial evidence the court shall affirm the Secretary's decision. The judgment of the court shall be subject to review by the Supreme Court of the United States upon certiorari or certification as provided in section 1254 of title 28.

The Secretary may enter into an agreement with a State under which the State will be permitted to continue to enforce one or more occupational health and safety standards in effect in such State until final action is taken by the Secretary with respect to a plan submitted by a State under subsection (b) of this section, or two years from December 29, 1970, whichever is earlier.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §18, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1608.)

This section is referred to in sections 671a, 672 of this title; title 7 section 1942.

It shall be the responsibility of the head of each Federal agency to establish and maintain an effective and comprehensive occupational safety and health program which is consistent with the standards promulgated under section 655 of this title. The head of each agency shall (after consultation with representatives of the employees thereof)—

(1) provide safe and healthful places and conditions of employment, consistent with the standards set under section 655 of this title;

(2) acquire, maintain, and require the use of safety equipment, personal protective equipment, and devices reasonably necessary to protect employees;

(3) keep adequate records of all occupational accidents and illnesses for proper evaluation and necessary corrective action;

(4) consult with the Secretary with regard to the adequacy as to form and content of records kept pursuant to subsection (a)(3) of this section; and

(5) make an annual report to the Secretary with respect to occupational accidents and injuries and the agency's program under this section. Such report shall include any report submitted under section 7902(e)(2) of title 5.

The Secretary shall report to the President a summary or digest of reports submitted to him under subsection (a)(5) of this section, together with his evaluations of and recommendations derived from such reports.

The Secretary shall have access to records and reports kept and filed by Federal agencies pursuant to subsections (a)(3) and (5) of this section unless those records and reports are specifically required by Executive order to be kept secret in the interest of the national defense or foreign policy, in which case the Secretary shall have access to such information as will not jeopardize national defense or foreign policy.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §19, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1609; Pub. L. 97–375, title I, §110(c), Dec. 21, 1982, 96 Stat. 1821.)

Subsec. (c) of this section amended section 7902 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1982—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–375 struck out direction that the President transmit annually to the Senate and House a report of the activities of Federal agencies under this section.

Occupational safety and health programs for Federal employees and continuation of Federal Advisory Council on Occupational Safety and Health, see Ex. Ord. No. 12196, Feb. 26, 1980, 45 F.R. 12769, set out as a note under section 7902 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in title 3 section 425; title 39 section 410; title 42 section 2297b–11.

(1) The Secretary of Health and Human Services, after consultation with the Secretary and with other appropriate Federal departments or agencies, shall conduct (directly or by grants or contracts) research, experiments, and demonstrations relating to occupational safety and health, including studies of psychological factors involved, and relating to innovative methods, techniques, and approaches for dealing with occupational safety and health problems.

(2) The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall from time to time consult with the Secretary in order to develop specific plans for such research, demonstrations, and experiments as are necessary to produce criteria, including criteria identifying toxic substances, enabling the Secretary to meet his responsibility for the formulation of safety and health standards under this chapter; and the Secretary of Health and Human Services, on the basis of such research, demonstrations, and experiments and any other information available to him, shall develop and publish at least annually such criteria as will effectuate the purposes of this chapter.

(3) The Secretary of Health and Human Services, on the basis of such research, demonstrations, and experiments, and any other information available to him, shall develop criteria dealing with toxic materials and harmful physical agents and substances which will describe exposure levels that are safe for various periods of employment, including but not limited to the exposure levels at which no employee will suffer impaired health or functional capacities or diminished life expectancy as a result of his work experience.

(4) The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall also conduct special research, experiments, and demonstrations relating to occupational safety and health as are necessary to explore new problems, including those created by new technology in occupational safety and health, which may require ameliorative action beyond that which is otherwise provided for in the operating provisions of this chapter. The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall also conduct research into the motivational and behavioral factors relating to the field of occupational safety and health.

(5) The Secretary of Health and Human Services, in order to comply with his responsibilities under paragraph (2), and in order to develop needed information regarding potentially toxic substances or harmful physical agents, may prescribe regulations requiring employers to measure, record, and make reports on the exposure of employees to substances or physical agents which the Secretary of Health and Human Services reasonably believes may endanger the health or safety of employees. The Secretary of Health and Human Services also is authorized to establish such programs of medical examinations and tests as may be necessary for determining the incidence of occupational illnesses and the susceptibility of employees to such illnesses. Nothing in this or any other provision of this chapter shall be deemed to authorize or require medical examination, immunization, or treatment for those who object thereto on religious grounds, except where such is necessary for the protection of the health or safety of others. Upon the request of any employer who is required to measure and record exposure of employees to substances or physical agents as provided under this subsection, the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall furnish full financial or other assistance to such employer for the purpose of defraying any additional expense incurred by him in carrying out the measuring and recording as provided in this subsection.

(6) The Secretary of Health and Human Services shall publish within six months of December 29, 1970, and thereafter as needed but at least annually a list of all known toxic substances by generic family or other useful grouping, and the concentrations at which such toxicity is known to occur. He shall determine following a written request by any employer or authorized representative of employees, specifying with reasonable particularity the grounds on which the request is made, whether any substance normally found in the place of employment has potentially toxic effects in such concentrations as used or found; and shall submit such determination both to employers and affected employees as soon as possible. If the Secretary of Health and Human Services determines that any substance is potentially toxic at the concentrations in which it is used or found in a place of employment, and such substance is not covered by an occupational safety or health standard promulgated under section 655 of this title, the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall immediately submit such determination to the Secretary, together with all pertinent criteria.

(7) Within two years of December 29, 1970, and annually thereafter the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall conduct and publish industrywide studies of the effect of chronic or low-level exposure to industrial materials, processes, and stresses on the potential for illness, disease, or loss of functional capacity in aging adults.

The Secretary of Health and Human Services is authorized to make inspections and question employers and employees as provided in section 657 of this title in order to carry out his functions and responsibilities under this section.

The Secretary is authorized to enter into contracts, agreements, or other arrangements with appropriate public agencies or private organizations for the purpose of conducting studies relating to his responsibilities under this chapter. In carrying out his responsibilities under this subsection, the Secretary shall cooperate with the Secretary of Health and Human Services in order to avoid any duplication of efforts under this section.

Information obtained by the Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services under this section shall be disseminated by the Secretary to employers and employees and organizations thereof.

The functions of the Secretary of Health and Human Services under this chapter shall, to the extent feasible, be delegated to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health established by section 671 of this title.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §20, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1610; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted in text for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in section 671 of this title.

The Secretary of Health and Human Services, after consultation with the Secretary and with other appropriate Federal departments and agencies, shall conduct, directly or by grants or contracts (1) education programs to provide an adequate supply of qualified personnel to carry out the purposes of this chapter, and (2) informational programs on the importance of and proper use of adequate safety and health equipment.

The Secretary is also authorized to conduct, directly or by grants or contracts, short-term training of personnel engaged in work related to his responsibilities under this chapter.

The Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, shall (1) provide for the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employers and employees in the recognition, avoidance, and prevention of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions in employments covered by this chapter, and (2) consult with and advise employers and employees, and organizations representing employers and employees as to effective means of preventing occupational injuries and illnesses.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §21, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1612; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsecs. (a) and (c) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Pub. L. 105–78, title I, Nov. 13, 1997, 111 Stat. 1474, provided in part that: “notwithstanding 31 U.S.C. 3302, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration may retain up to $750,000 per fiscal year of training institute course tuition fees, otherwise authorized by law to be collected, and may utilize such sums for occupational safety and health training and education grants”.

Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriation acts:

Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(e) [title I], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009–233, 3009–239.

Pub. L. 104–134, title I, §101(d) [title I], Apr. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 1321–211, 1321–217; renumbered title I, Pub. L. 104–140, §1(a), May 2, 1996, 110 Stat. 1327.

Pub. L. 103–333, title I, Sept. 30, 1994, 108 Stat. 2544.

This section is referred to in section 671 of this title.

It is the purpose of this section to establish a National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health in the Department of Health and Human Services in order to carry out the policy set forth in section 651 of this title and to perform the functions of the Secretary of Health and Human Services under sections 669 and 670 of this title.

There is hereby established in the Department of Health and Human Services a National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. The Institute shall be headed by a Director who shall be appointed by the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and who shall serve for a term of six years unless previously removed by the Secretary of Health and Human Services.

The Institute is authorized to—

(1) develop and establish recommended occupational safety and health standards; and

(2) perform all functions of the Secretary of Health and Human Services under sections 669 and 670 of this title.

Upon his own initiative, or upon the request of the Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services, the Director is authorized (1) to conduct such research and experimental programs as he determines are necessary for the development of criteria for new and improved occupational safety and health standards, and (2) after consideration of the results of such research and experimental programs make recommendations concerning new or improved occupational safety and health standards. Any occupational safety and health standard recommended pursuant to this section shall immediately be forwarded to the Secretary of Labor, and to the Secretary of Health and Human Services.

In addition to any authority vested in the Institute by other provisions of this section, the Director, in carrying out the functions of the Institute, is authorized to—

(1) prescribe such regulations as he deems necessary governing the manner in which its functions shall be carried out;

(2) receive money and other property donated, bequeathed, or devised, without condition or restriction other than that it be used for the purposes of the Institute and to use, sell, or otherwise dispose of such property for the purpose of carrying out its functions;

(3) receive (and use, sell, or otherwise dispose of, in accordance with paragraph (2)), money and other property donated, bequeathed or devised to the Institute with a condition or restriction, including a condition that the Institute use other funds of the Institute for the purposes of the gift;

(4) in accordance with the civil service laws, appoint and fix the compensation of such personnel as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this section;

(5) obtain the services of experts and consultants in accordance with the provisions of section 3109 of title 5;

(6) accept and utilize the services of voluntary and noncompensated personnel and reimburse them for travel expenses, including per diem, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5;

(7) enter into contracts, grants or other arrangements, or modifications thereof to carry out the provisions of this section, and such contracts or modifications thereof may be entered into without performance or other bonds, and without regard to section 5 of title 41, or any other provision of law relating to competitive bidding;

(8) make advance, progress, and other payments which the Director deems necessary under this title without regard to the provisions of section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31; and

(9) make other necessary expenditures.

The Director shall submit to the Secretary of Health and Human Services, to the President, and to the Congress an annual report of the operations of the Institute under this chapter, which shall include a detailed statement of all private and public funds received and expended by it, and such recommendations as he deems appropriate.

(A) The Institute, in conjunction with the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency, may make grants for the training and education of workers and supervisors who are or may be directly engaged in lead-based paint activities.

(B) Grants referred to in subparagraph (A) shall be awarded to nonprofit organizations (including colleges and universities, joint labor-management trust funds, States, and nonprofit government employee organizations)—

(i) which are engaged in the training and education of workers and supervisors who are or who may be directly engaged in lead-based paint activities (as defined in title IV of the Toxic Substances Control Act [15 U.S.C. 2681 et seq.]),

(ii) which have demonstrated experience in implementing and operating health and safety training and education programs, and

(iii) with a demonstrated ability to reach, and involve in lead-based paint training programs, target populations of individuals who are or will be engaged in lead-based paint activities.

Grants under this subsection shall be awarded only to those organizations that fund at least 30 percent of their lead-based paint activities training programs from non-Federal sources, excluding in-kind contributions. Grants may also be made to local governments to carry out such training and education for their employees.

(C) There are authorized to be appropriated, at a minimum, $10,000,000 to the Institute for each of the fiscal years 1994 through 1997 to make grants under this paragraph.

The Institute shall conduct periodic and comprehensive assessments of the efficacy of the worker and supervisor training programs developed and offered by those receiving grants under this section. The Director shall prepare reports on the results of these assessments addressed to the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency to include recommendations as may be appropriate for the revision of these programs. The sum of $500,000 is authorized to be appropriated to the Institute for each of the fiscal years 1994 through 1997 to carry out this paragraph.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §22, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1612; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695; Pub. L. 102–550, title X, §1033, Oct. 28, 1992, 106 Stat. 3924.)

The civil service laws, referred to in subsec. (e)(4), are set forth in Title 5, Government Organization and Employees. See, particularly, section 3301 et seq. of Title 5.

The Toxic Substances Control Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(1)(B)(i), is Pub. L. 94–469, Oct. 11, 1976, 90 Stat. 2003, as amended. Title IV of the Act is classified generally to subchapter IV (§2681 et seq.) of chapter 53 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2601 of Title 15 and Tables.

In subsec. (e)(8), “section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31” substituted for “section 3648 of the Revised Statutes, as amended (31 U.S.C. 529)” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

1992—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–550 added subsec. (g).

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsecs. (a) to (d) and (f) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in section 669 of this title.

This section may be cited as the “Workers’ Family Protection Act”.

Congress finds that—

(A) hazardous chemicals and substances that can threaten the health and safety of workers are being transported out of industries on workers’ clothing and persons;

(B) these chemicals and substances have the potential to pose an additional threat to the health and welfare of workers and their families;

(C) additional information is needed concerning issues related to employee transported contaminant releases; and

(D) additional regulations may be needed to prevent future releases of this type.

It is the purpose of this section to—

(A) increase understanding and awareness concerning the extent and possible health impacts of the problems and incidents described in paragraph (1);

(B) prevent or mitigate future incidents of home contamination that could adversely affect the health and safety of workers and their families;

(C) clarify regulatory authority for preventing and responding to such incidents; and

(D) assist workers in redressing and responding to such incidents when they occur.

Not later than 18 months after October 26, 1992, the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (hereafter in this section referred to as the “Director”), in cooperation with the Secretary of Labor, the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency, the Administrator of the Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry, and the heads of other Federal Government agencies as determined to be appropriate by the Director, shall conduct a study to evaluate the potential for, the prevalence of, and the issues related to the contamination of workers’ homes with hazardous chemicals and substances, including infectious agents, transported from the workplaces of such workers.

In conducting the study and evaluation under subparagraph (A), the Director shall—

(i) conduct a review of past incidents of home contamination through the utilization of literature and of records concerning past investigations and enforcement actions undertaken by—

(I) the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health;

(II) the Secretary of Labor to enforce the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.);

(III) States to enforce occupational safety and health standards in accordance with section 18 of such Act (29 U.S.C. 667); and

(IV) other government agencies (including the Department of Energy and the Environmental Protection Agency), as the Director may determine to be appropriate;

(ii) evaluate current statutory, regulatory, and voluntary industrial hygiene or other measures used by small, medium and large employers to prevent or remediate home contamination;

(iii) compile a summary of the existing research and case histories conducted on incidents of employee transported contaminant releases, including—

(I) the effectiveness of workplace housekeeping practices and personal protective equipment in preventing such incidents;

(II) the health effects, if any, of the resulting exposure on workers and their families;

(III) the effectiveness of normal house cleaning and laundry procedures for removing hazardous materials and agents from workers’ homes and personal clothing;

(IV) indoor air quality, as the research concerning such pertains to the fate of chemicals transported from a workplace into the home environment; and

(V) methods for differentiating exposure health effects and relative risks associated with specific agents from other sources of exposure inside and outside the home;

(iv) identify the role of Federal and State agencies in responding to incidents of home contamination;

(v) prepare and submit to the Task Force established under paragraph (2) and to the appropriate committees of Congress, a report concerning the results of the matters studied or evaluated under clauses (i) through (iv); and

(vi) study home contamination incidents and issues and worker and family protection policies and practices related to the special circumstances of firefighters and prepare and submit to the appropriate committees of Congress a report concerning the findings with respect to such study.

Not later than 12 months after October 26, 1992, the Director shall establish a working group, to be known as the “Workers’ Family Protection Task Force”. The Task Force shall—

(i) be composed of not more than 15 individuals to be appointed by the Director from among individuals who are representative of workers, industry, scientists, industrial hygienists, the National Research Council, and government agencies, except that not more than one such individual shall be from each appropriate government agency and the number of individuals appointed to represent industry and workers shall be equal in number;

(ii) review the report submitted under paragraph (1)(B)(v);

(iii) determine, with respect to such report, the additional data needs, if any, and the need for additional evaluation of the scientific issues related to and the feasibility of developing such additional data; and

(iv) if additional data are determined by the Task Force to be needed, develop a recommended investigative strategy for use in obtaining such information.

The investigative strategy developed under subparagraph (A)(iv) shall identify data gaps that can and cannot be filled, assumptions and uncertainties associated with various components of such strategy, a timetable for the implementation of such strategy, and methodologies used to gather any required data.

The Director shall publish the proposed investigative strategy under subparagraph (A)(iv) for public comment and utilize other methods, including technical conferences or seminars, for the purpose of obtaining comments concerning the proposed strategy.

After the peer review and public comment is conducted under clause (ii), the Director, in consultation with the heads of other government agencies, shall propose a final strategy for investigating issues related to home contamination that shall be implemented by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health and other Federal agencies for the period of time necessary to enable such agencies to obtain the information identified under subparagraph (A)(iii).

Nothing in this section shall be construed as precluding any government agency from investigating issues related to home contamination using existing procedures until such time as a final strategy is developed or from taking actions in addition to those proposed in the strategy after its completion.

Upon completion of the investigative strategy under subparagraph (B)(iii), each Federal agency or department shall fulfill the role assigned to it by the strategy.

Not later than 4 years after October 26, 1992, and periodically thereafter, the Secretary of Labor, based on the information developed under subsection (c) of this section and on other information available to the Secretary, shall—

(A) determine if additional education about, emphasis on, or enforcement of existing regulations or standards is needed and will be sufficient, or if additional regulations or standards are needed with regard to employee transported releases of hazardous materials; and

(B) prepare and submit to the appropriate committees of Congress a report concerning the result of such determination.

If the Secretary of Labor determines that additional regulations or standards are needed under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall promulgate, pursuant to the Secretary's authority under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.), such regulations or standards as determined to be appropriate not later than 3 years after such determination.

There are authorized to be appropriated from sums otherwise authorized to be appropriated, for each fiscal year such sums as may be necessary to carry out this section.

(Pub. L. 102–522, title II, §209, Oct. 26, 1992, 106 Stat. 3420.)

The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, referred to in subsecs. (c)(1)(B)(i)(II) and (d)(2), is Pub. L. 91–596, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590, as amended, which is classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 651 of this title and Tables.

Section was enacted as part of the Fire Administration Authorization Act of 1992, and not as part of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 which comprises this chapter.

The Secretary is authorized, during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1971, and the two succeeding fiscal years, to make grants to the States which have designated a State agency under section 667 of this title to assist them—

(1) in identifying their needs and responsibilities in the area of occupational safety and health,

(2) in developing State plans under section 667 of this title, or

(3) in developing plans for—

(A) establishing systems for the collection of information concerning the nature and frequency of occupational injuries and diseases;

(B) increasing the expertise and enforcement capabilities of their personnel engaged in occupational safety and health programs; or

(C) otherwise improving the administration and enforcement of State occupational safety and health laws, including standards thereunder, consistent with the objectives of this chapter.

The Secretary is authorized, during the fiscal year ending June 30, 1971, and the two succeeding fiscal years, to make grants to the States for experimental and demonstration projects consistent with the objectives set forth in subsection (a) of this section.

The Governor of the State shall designate the appropriate State agency for receipt of any grant made by the Secretary under this section.

Any State agency designated by the Governor of the State desiring a grant under this section shall submit an application therefor to the Secretary.

The Secretary shall review the application, and shall, after consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, approve or reject such application.

The Federal share for each State grant under subsection (a) or (b) of this section may not exceed 90 per centum of the total cost of the application. In the event the Federal share for all States under either such subsection is not the same, the differences among the States shall be established on the basis of objective criteria.

The Secretary is authorized to make grants to the States to assist them in administering and enforcing programs for occupational safety and health contained in State plans approved by the Secretary pursuant to section 667 of this title. The Federal share for each State grant under this subsection may not exceed 50 per centum of the total cost to the State of such a program. The last sentence of subsection (f) of this section shall be applicable in determining the Federal share under this subsection.

Prior to June 30, 1973, the Secretary shall, after consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, transmit a report to the President and to the Congress, describing the experience under the grant programs authorized by this section and making any recommendations he may deem appropriate.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §23, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1613; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsec. (c), pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

In order to further the purposes of this chapter, the Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, shall develop and maintain an effective program of collection, compilation, and analysis of occupational safety and health statistics. Such program may cover all employments whether or not subject to any other provisions of this chapter but shall not cover employments excluded by section 653 of this title. The Secretary shall compile accurate statistics on work injuries and illnesses which shall include all disabling, serious, or significant injuries and illnesses, whether or not involving loss of time from work, other than minor injuries requiring only first aid treatment and which do not involve medical treatment, loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job.

To carry out his duties under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary may—

(1) promote, encourage, or directly engage in programs of studies, information and communication concerning occupational safety and health statistics;

(2) make grants to States or political subdivisions thereof in order to assist them in developing and administering programs dealing with occupational safety and health statistics; and

(3) arrange, through grants or contracts, for the conduct of such research and investigations as give promise of furthering the objectives of this section.

The Federal share for each grant under subsection (b) of this section may be up to 50 per centum of the State's total cost.

The Secretary may, with the consent of any State or political subdivision thereof, accept and use the services, facilities, and employees of the agencies of such State or political subdivision, with or without reimbursement, in order to assist him in carrying out his functions under this section.

On the basis of the records made and kept pursuant to section 657(c) of this title, employers shall file such reports with the Secretary as he shall prescribe by regulation, as necessary to carry out his functions under this chapter.

Agreements between the Department of Labor and States pertaining to the collection of occupational safety and health statistics already in effect on the effective date of this chapter shall remain in effect until superseded by grants or contracts made under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §24, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1614; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

The effective date of this chapter, referred to in subsec. (f), means the effective date of Pub. L. 91–596, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590, which is 120 days after Dec. 29, 1970, see section 34 of Pub. L. 91–596, set out as an Effective Date note under section 651 of this title.

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in subsec. (a) pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

(a) Each recipient of a grant under this chapter shall keep such records as the Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall prescribe, including records which fully disclose the amount and disposition by such recipient of the proceeds of such grant, the total cost of the project or undertaking in connection with which such grant is made or used, and the amount of that portion of the cost of the project or undertaking supplied by other sources, and such other records as will facilitate an effective audit.

(b) The Secretary or the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives, shall have access for the purpose of audit and examination to any books, documents, papers, and records of the recipients of any grant under this chapter that are pertinent to any such grant.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §25, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1615; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted in text for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Within one hundred and twenty days following the convening of each regular session of each Congress, the Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall each prepare and submit to the President for transmittal to the Congress a report upon the subject matter of this chapter, the progress toward achievement of the purpose of this chapter, the needs and requirements in the field of occupational safety and health, and any other relevant information. Such reports shall include information regarding occupational safety and health standards, and criteria for such standards, developed during the preceding year; evaluation of standards and criteria previously developed under this chapter, defining areas of emphasis for new criteria and standards; an evaluation of the degree of observance of applicable occupational safety and health standards, and a summary of inspection and enforcement activity undertaken; analysis and evaluation of research activities for which results have been obtained under governmental and nongovernmental sponsorship; an analysis of major occupational diseases; evaluation of available control and measurement technology for hazards for which standards or criteria have been developed during the preceding year; description of cooperative efforts undertaken between Government agencies and other interested parties in the implementation of this chapter during the preceding year; a progress report on the development of an adequate supply of trained manpower in the field of occupational safety and health, including estimates of future needs and the efforts being made by Government and others to meet those needs; listing of all toxic substances in industrial usage for which labeling requirements, criteria, or standards have not yet been established; and such recommendations for additional legislation as are deemed necessary to protect the safety and health of the worker and improve the administration of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §26, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1615; Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §509(b), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 695.)

“Secretary of Health and Human Services” substituted in text for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” in text pursuant to section 509(b) of Pub. L. 96–88 which is classified to section 3508(b) of Title 20, Education.

Pub. L. 95–239, §17, Mar. 1, 1978, 92 Stat. 105, authorized Secretary of Labor, in cooperation with Director of National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, to conduct a study of occupationally related pulmonary and respiratory diseases and to complete such study and report findings to President and Congress not later than 18 months after Mar. 1, 1978.

Section, Pub. L. 91–596, §27, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1616, provided for establishment of a National Commission on State Workmen's Compensation Laws to make an effective study and evaluation of State workmen's compensation laws to determine whether such laws provide an adequate, prompt, and equitable system of compensation for injury or death, with a final report to be transmitted to President and Congress not later than July 31, 1972, ninety days after which the Commission ceased to exist.

If any provision of this chapter, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstance, shall be held invalid, the remainder of this chapter, or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid, shall not be affected thereby.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §32, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1619.)

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this chapter for each fiscal year such sums as the Congress shall deem necessary.

(Pub. L. 91–596, §33, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1620.)






















This chapter is referred to in sections 762a, 780a, 1533, 1605, 1792 of this title; title 2 sections 1302, 1311, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 411; title 5 section 8104; title 20 sections 107a, 107d–4, 1142, 1203a, 1206a, 1453, 2323, 2403, 3441, 4356, 6143; title 22 section 2102; title 26 section 51; title 38 sections 3117, 3118, 7462; title 42 sections 290dd, 1320b–6, 3013, 3026, 5116, 6008, 6024, 6042, 6705, 11701, 12117, 12592.

Congress finds that—

(1) millions of Americans have one or more physical or mental disabilities and the number of Americans with such disabilities is increasing;

(2) individuals with disabilities constitute one of the most disadvantaged groups in society;

(3) disability is a natural part of the human experience and in no way diminishes the right of individuals to—

(A) live independently;

(B) enjoy self-determination;

(C) make choices;

(D) contribute to society;

(E) pursue meaningful careers; and

(F) enjoy full inclusion and integration in the economic, political, social, cultural, and educational mainstream of American society;

(4) increased employment of individuals with disabilities can be achieved through the provision of individualized training, independent living services, educational and support services, and meaningful opportunities for employment in integrated work settings through the provision of reasonable accommodations;

(5) individuals with disabilities continually encounter various forms of discrimination in such critical areas as employment, housing, public accommodations, education, transportation, communication, recreation, institutionalization, health services, voting, and public services; and

(6) the goals of the Nation properly include the goal of providing individuals with disabilities with the tools necessary to—

(A) make informed choices and decisions; and

(B) achieve equality of opportunity, full inclusion and integration in society, employment, independent living, and economic and social self-sufficiency, for such individuals.

The purposes of this chapter are—

(1) to empower individuals with disabilities to maximize employment, economic self-sufficiency, independence, and inclusion and integration into society, through—

(A) comprehensive and coordinated state-of-the-art programs of vocational rehabilitation;

(B) independent living centers and services;

(C) research;

(D) training;

(E) demonstration projects; and

(F) the guarantee of equal opportunity; and

(2) to ensure that the Federal Government plays a leadership role in promoting the employment of individuals with disabilities, especially individuals with severe disabilities, and in assisting States and providers of services in fulfilling the aspirations of such individuals with disabilities for meaningful and gainful employment and independent living.

It is the policy of the United States that all programs, projects, and activities receiving assistance under this chapter shall be carried out in a manner consistent with the principles of—

(1) respect for individual dignity, personal responsibility, self-determination, and pursuit of meaningful careers, based on informed choice, of individuals with disabilities;

(2) respect for the privacy, rights, and equal access (including the use of accessible formats), of the individuals;

(3) inclusion, integration, and full participation of the individuals;

(4) support for the involvement of a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative if an individual with a disability requests, desires, or needs such support; and

(5) support for individual and systemic advocacy and community involvement.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §2, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 357; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2984; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §101, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1808; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §101, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4346.)

The content of Pub. L. 93–516, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1617, including provisions thereof which amended various sections of this chapter and enacted provisions set out as notes under this section, was originally contained in H.R. 14225, 93rd Congress, Second Session, which was pocket-vetoed during the 31-day intrasession adjournment of the 93rd Congress for the Congressional elections in November, 1974.

Pursuant to an order of the United States District Court for the District of Columbia (*Kennedy v. Jones*, D.C.D.C. 1976, 412 F.Supp. 353), H.R. 14225 was deemed to have become law without the approval of the President on Nov. 21, 1974, and was given the designation Pub. L. 93–651. Therefore, for purposes of codification, this chapter should be deemed to have been amended by Pub. L. 93–651, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3, in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1617.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 31 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows: “The purpose of this chapter is to develop and implement, through research, training, services, and the guarantee of equal opportunity, comprehensive and coordinated programs of vocational rehabilitation and independent living, for individuals with handicaps in order to maximize their employability, independence, and integration into the workplace and the community.”

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 inserted “, for individuals with handicaps in order to maximize their employability, independence, and integration into the workplace and the community”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted provision declaring that the purpose of this chapter is to develop and implement, through research, training, services, and equal opportunity guarantee, comprehensive and coordinated programs of vocational rehabilitation and independent living for provision declaring the purpose of this chapter was to provide a statutory basis for the Rehabilitation Services Administration and to authorize a wide range of programs designed to improve rehabilitation methods, services, and facilities, increase the number and skill of trained personnel, and provide employment opportunities for the handicapped.

Section 138 of title I of Pub. L. 102–569, as amended by Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §102(3), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 718, provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

Section 1006 of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that: “Except as otherwise provided in this Act [see Short Title of 1986 Amendment note below], this Act shall take effect on the date of its enactment [Oct. 21, 1986].”

Pub. L. 103–73, §1, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 718, provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 753 and 753a of this title, amending sections 706, 718 to 718b, 721 to 723, 725, 730 to 732, 744, 761a, 762, 771a, 777, 777a, 777f, 783, 791, 792, 794e, 795*l*, 796, 796c, 796d to 796e–2, 796f to 796f–4, and 796k of this title, sections 1431, 4301 to 4305, 4331, 4332, 4351, 4353 to 4357, 4359, 4359a, and 4360 of Title 20, Education, and section 46 of Title 41, Public Contracts, enacting provisions set out as notes under section 725 of this title and section 4301 of Title 20, and amending provisions set out as a note under this section] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1993’.”

Section 1(a) of Pub. L. 102–569 provided that: “This Act [see Tables for classification] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992’.”

Pub. L. 102–52, §1, June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 260, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 720, 732, 741, 761, 771, 772, 774, 775, 777, 777a, 777f, 785, 792, 795f, 795i, 795q, 796i, and 1904 of this title and section 1475 of Title 20, Education] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1991’.”

Section 1(a) of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 716, 717, 752, 794d, 795j to 795q, and 796d–1 of this title and section 2000d–7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, amending this section and sections 702, 705, 706, 711 to 715, 720 to 724, 730 to 732, 740, 741, 750, 751, 760 to 761b, 762, 762a, 770 to 777b, 777f, 780, 781, 783, 785, 791 to 794, 794c, 795, 795d to 795i, 796a, 796b, 796d to 796i, and 1904 of this title, and section 155a of Title 36, Patriotic Societies and Observances, repealing section 751 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 706, 730, 761a, and 795m of this title and section 1414 of Title 20, Education] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1986’.”

Pub. L. 98–221, §1, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 17, provided: “That this Act [enacting sections 780a and 1901 to 1906 of this title, amending sections 706, 712 to 714, 720 to 722, 730, 732, 741, 761 to 762a, 771, 772, 774, 775, 777, 777a, 777f, 780, 781, 783, 791, 792, 794c, 795a, 795c, 795f, 795g, 795i, 796e, and 796i of this title and sections 6001, 6012, 6033, 6061, and 6081 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, repealing section 777c of this title, enacting provisions set out as a note under section 1901 of this title and amending provisions set out as a note under section 713 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Amendments of 1984’.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 95–602 provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 710 to 715, 751, 761a, 761b, 762a, 775, 777 to 777f, 780 to 785, 794a to 794c, 795 to 795i, and 796 to 796i of this title and section 6000 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, amending this section, sections 702, 706, 709, 720 to 724, 730 to 732, 740, 741, 750, 760 to 762, 770 to 774, 776, and 792 to 794 of this title, section 1904 [now 3904] of Title 38, Veterans’ Benefits, and sections 6001, 6008 to 6012, 6031 to 6033, 6061 to 6065, 6067, 6081, and 6862 of Title 42, repealing sections 764, 786, and 787 of this title and section 6007 of Title 42, omitting sections 6041 to 6043 of Title 42, enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 713 and 795 of this title and sections 6000 and 6001 of Title 42, and repealing a provision set out as a note under section 6001 of Title 42] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and Developmental Disabilities Amendments of 1978’.”

Pub. L. 94–230, §1, Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211, provided that: “This Act [amending sections 720, 732, 741, 761, 771, 772, 774, 775, 783, 785, and 792 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 720 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Extension of 1976’.”

Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §100, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1617, provided that: “This title [amending sections 702, 706, 720 to 722, 732, 741, 750, 761, 762, 771, 772, 774 to 776, 783, 785, and 792 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 702 of this title] shall be known as the ‘Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1974’.”

An identical provision is contained in Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §100, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3. See Codification note above.

Section 1 of Pub. L. 93–112 provided that Pub. L. 93–112, which enacted this chapter and repealed sections 31 to 41c and 42–1 to 42b of this title, may be cited as the “Rehabilitation Act of 1973”.

Section 601 of title VI of Pub. L. 93–112, as added by Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2989, and amended by Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(34), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, provided that: “This title [adding subchapter VI of this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Employment Opportunities for Handicapped Individuals Act’.”

[Section 102(p)(34) of Pub. L. 102–569 which directed the substitution of “Disabilities” for “Handicaps” in section 601 of Pub. L. 93–112, set out above, could not be executed because the word “Handicaps” did not appear.]

Pub. L. 93–516, title III, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1631, as amended by Pub. L. 94–224, §§1, 2, Feb. 27, 1976, 90 Stat. 201, authorized the President to call a White House Conference on Handicapped Individuals not later than Dec. 7, 1977, to develop recommendations and stimulate a national assessment of problems, and solutions to such problems, facing individuals with handicaps, and established a National Planning Advisory Council to provide guidance and planning for the Conference which Council would cease to exist 120 days after submission of a final report to the President, such report to be submitted not later than 120 days following the date on which the Conference was called.

Identical provisions are contained in Pub. L. 93–651, title III, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–16. See Codification note above.

Ex. Ord. No. 11758, Jan. 15, 1974, 39 F.R. 2075, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 11784, May 30, 1974, 39 F.R. 19443; Ex. Ord. No. 11867, June 19, 1975, 40 F.R. 26253; Ex. Ord. No. 12608, Sept. 9, 1987, 52 F.R. 34617, provided:

By virtue of the authority vested in me by section 301 of title 3 of the United States Code and as President of the United States of America, it is hereby ordered as follows:

Ex. Ord. No. 13078, Mar. 13, 1998, 63 F.R. 13111, provided:

By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, and in order to increase the employment of adults with disabilities to a rate that is as close as possible to the employment rate of the general adult population and to support the goals articulated in the findings and purpose section of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.], it is hereby ordered as follows:

(a) There is established the “National Task Force on Employment of Adults with Disabilities” (“Task Force”). The Task Force shall comprise the Secretary of Labor, Secretary of Education, Secretary of Veterans Affairs, Secretary of Health and Human Services, Commissioner of Social Security, Secretary of the Treasury, Secretary of Commerce, Secretary of Transportation, Director of the Office of Personnel Management, Administrator of the Small Business Administration, the Chair of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, the Chairperson of the National Council on Disability, the Chair of the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities, and such other senior executive branch officials as may be determined by the Chair of the Task Force.

(b) The Secretary of Labor shall be the Chair of the Task Force; the Chair of the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities shall be the Vice Chair of the Task Force.

(c) The purpose of the Task Force is to create a coordinated and aggressive national policy to bring adults with disabilities into gainful employment at a rate that is as close as possible to that of the general adult population. The Task Force shall develop and recommend to the President, through the Chair of the Task Force, a coordinated Federal policy to reduce employment barriers for persons with disabilities. Policy recommendations may cover such areas as discrimination, reasonable accommodations, inadequate access to health care, lack of consumer-driven, long-term supports and services, transportation, accessible and integrated housing, telecommunications, assistive technology, community services, child care, education, vocational rehabilitation, training services, job retention, on-the-job supports, and economic incentives to work. Specifically, the Task Force shall:

(1) analyze the existing programs and policies of Task Force member agencies to determine what changes, modifications, and innovations may be necessary to remove barriers to work faced by people with disabilities;

(2) develop and recommend options to address health insurance coverage as a barrier to employment for people with disabilities;

(3) subject to the availability of appropriations, analyze State and private disability systems (e.g., workers’ compensation, unemployment insurance, private insurance, and State mental health and mental retardation systems) and their effect on Federal programs and employment of adults with disabilities;

(4) consider statistical and data analysis, cost data, research, and policy studies on public subsidies, employment, employment discrimination, and rates of return-to-work for individuals with disabilities;

(5) evaluate and, where appropriate, coordinate and collaborate on, research and demonstration priorities of Task Force member agencies related to employment of adults with disabilities;

(6) evaluate whether Federal studies related to employment and training can, and should, include a statistically significant sample of adults with disabilities;

(7) subject to the availability of appropriations, analyze youth programs related to employment (e.g., Employment and Training Administration programs, special education, vocational rehabilitation, school-to-work transition, vocational education, and Social Security Administration work incentives and other programs, as may be determined by the Chair and Vice Chair of the Task Force) and the outcomes of those programs for young people with disabilities;

(8) evaluate whether a single governmental entity or program should be established to provide computer and electronic accommodations for Federal employees with disabilities;

(9) consult with the President's Committee on Mental Retardation on policies to increase the employment of people with mental retardation and cognitive disabilities; and

(10) recommend to the President any additional steps that can be taken to advance the employment of adults with disabilities, including legislative proposals, regulatory changes, and program and budget initiatives.

(d)(1) The members of the Task Force shall make the activities and initiatives set forth in this order a high priority within their respective agencies within the levels provided in the President's budget.

(2) The Task Force shall issue its first report to the President by November 15, 1998. The Task Force shall issue a report to the President on November 15, 1999, November 15, 2000, and a final report on July 26, 2002, the 10th anniversary of the initial implementation of the employment provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.]. The reports shall describe the actions taken by, and progress of, each member of the Task Force in carrying out this order. The Task Force shall terminate 30 days after submitting its final report.

(e) As used herein, an adult with a disability is a person with a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits at least one major life activity.

(a) To ensure that the Federal Government is a model employer of adults with disabilities, by November 15, 1998, the Office of Personnel Management, the Department of Labor, and the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission shall submit to the Task Force a review of Federal Government personnel laws, regulations, and policies and, as appropriate, shall recommend or implement changes necessary to improve Federal employment policy for adults with disabilities. This review shall include personnel practices and actions such as: hiring, promotion, benefits, retirement, workers’ compensation, retention, accessible facilities, job accommodations, layoffs, and reductions in force.

(b) The Departments of Justice, Labor, Education, and Health and Human Services shall report to the Task Force by November 15, 1998, on their work with the States and others to ensure that the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act [probably means the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act of 1996, Pub. L. 104–193, see Tables for classification] is carried out in accordance with section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 [29 U.S.C. 794], as amended, and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.], so that individuals with disabilities and their families can realize the full promise of welfare reform by having an equal opportunity for employment.

(c) The Departments of Education, Labor, Commerce, and Health and Human Services, the Small Business Administration, and the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities shall work together and report to the Task Force by November 15, 1998, on their work to develop small business and entrepreneurial opportunities for adults with disabilities and strategies for assisting low-income adults, including those with disabilities[,] to create small businesses and micro-enterprises. These same agencies, in consultation with the Committee for Purchase from People Who Are Blind or Severely Disabled, shall assess the impact of the Randolph-Sheppard Act [20 U.S.C. 107 et seq.] vending program and the Javits-Wagner-O'Day Act [41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.] on employment and small business opportunities for people with disabilities.

(d) The Departments of Transportation and Housing and Urban Development shall report to the Task Force by November 15, 1998, on their examination of their programs to see if they can be used to create new work incentives and to remove barriers to work for adults with disabilities.

(e) The Departments of Justice, Education, and Labor, the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, and the Social Security Administration shall work together and report to the Task Force by November 15, 1998, on their work to propose remedies to the prevention of people with disabilities from successfully exercising their employment rights under the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.] because of the receipt of monetary benefits based on their disability and lack of gainful employment.

(f) The Bureau of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor and the Census Bureau of the Department of Commerce, in cooperation with the Departments of Education and Health and Human Services, the National Council on Disability, and the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities shall design and implement a statistically reliable and accurate method to measure the employment rate of adults with disabilities as soon as possible, but no later than the date of termination of the Task Force. Data derived from this methodology shall be published on as frequent a basis as possible.

(g) All executive agencies that are not members of the Task Force shall: (1) coordinate and cooperate with the Task Force; and (2) review their programs and policies to ensure that they are being conducted and delivered in a manner that facilitates and promotes the employment of adults with disabilities. Each agency shall file a report with the Task Force on the results of its review on November 15, 1998.

William J. Clinton.

This section is referred to in section 706 of this title.

There is established in the Office of the Secretary a Rehabilitation Services Administration which shall be headed by a Commissioner (hereinafter in this chapter referred to as the “Commissioner”) appointed by the President by and with the advice and consent of the Senate. Except for subchapters IV and V and part A of subchapter VI of this chapter and as otherwise specifically provided in this chapter, such Administration shall be the principal agency, and the Commissioner shall be the principal officer, of such Department for carrying out this chapter. The Commissioner shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in rehabilitation program management. In the performance of the functions of the office, the Commissioner shall be directly responsible to the Secretary or to the Under Secretary or an appropriate Assistant Secretary of such Department, as designated by the Secretary. The functions of the Commissioner shall not be delegated to any officer not directly responsible, both with respect to program operation and administration, to the Commissioner. Any reference in this chapter to duties to be carried out by the Commissioner shall be considered to be a reference to duties to be carried out by the Secretary acting through the Commissioner. In carrying out any of the functions of the office under this chapter, the Commissioner shall be guided by general policies of the National Council on Disability established under subchapter IV of this chapter.

The Secretary shall take whatever action is necessary to insure that funds appropriated pursuant to this chapter, as well as unexpended appropriations for carrying out the Vocational Rehabilitation Act, are expended only for the programs, personnel, and administration of programs carried out under this chapter.

The Secretary shall take such action as necessary to ensure that—

(1) the staffing of the Rehabilitation Services Administration shall be in sufficient numbers to meet program needs and at levels which will attract and maintain the most qualified personnel; and

(2) such staff includes individuals who have training and experience in the provision of rehabilitation services and that staff competencies meet professional standards.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §3, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 357; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §101(a), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1617; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §101(a), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(2), (3), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2984; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §102, title X, §1001(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1808, 1841; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3303.)

The Vocational Rehabilitation Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 735, which was classified generally to chapter 4 (§31 et seq.) of this title and was repealed by section 500(a) of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 357. The Rehabilitation Act of 1973 is classified generally to this chapter. Section 500(a), which was classified to section 790 of this title, provided in part that references to the Vocational Rehabilitation Act in any other provision of law be deemed references to the Rehabilitation Act of 1973.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “National Council on Disability” for “National Council on the Handicapped”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(a)(1), which directed the substitution of “the functions of the office” for “his functions” in third and sixth sentences was executed to fourth and seventh sentences in view of amendment by section 102(a) of Pub. L. 99–506.

Pub. L. 99–506, §102(a), which directed the insertion after second sentence of provision that the Commissioner shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in rehabilitation program management, was executed by inserting that provision after second sentence of subsec. (a) as the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §102(b), added subsec. (c).

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(2), inserted “and part A of subchapter VI of this chapter” after “subchapters IV and V of this chapter” and provision deeming any reference in this chapter to the duties carried out by the Commissioner to be a reference to the duties carried out by the Secretary through the Commissioner and requiring the Commissioner to be guided by the policies of the National Council on the Handicapped.

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(3), redesignated subsec. (c) as (b). Former subsec. (b), which required the Secretary, through coordination with appropriate programs in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare and consultation with the National Science Foundation and National Academy of Science, to develop innovative methods of applying advanced medical, scientific, psychological, and social knowledge to solve rehabilitation problems, and made the Secretary responsible for establishment of rehabilitation engineering research centers, was struck out.

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516 substantially reenacted existing provisions, and in subsec. (a) as so reenacted, substituted reference to Office of the Secretary for reference to the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, inserted requirement that the appointment of Commissioner be approved by the Senate, inserted provisions that the Commissioner shall be the principal officer of the Department for carrying out provisions of this chapter, that the Commissioner shall be directly responsible to the Secretary, Under Secretary, or Assistant Secretary, as the case may be, and that the functions of the Commissioner shall not be delegated to any officer not directly responsible to the Commissioner both with respect to program operation and administration, and struck out provisions relating to procedure for delegation of functions of the Commissioner to other officers.

Pub. L. 93–651 made identical amendment as made by Pub. L. 93–516.

Section 101(b) of Pub. L. 93–651 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall be effective sixty days after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 21, 1974].”

Section 101(b) of Pub. L. 93–516 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) of this section [amending this section] shall be effective sixty days after the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 7, 1974].”

For transfer of functions and offices of Secretary and Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, including Rehabilitation Services Administration and Commissioner thereof, under this chapter to Secretary and Department of Education, and for delegation of certain functions of Secretary of Education under this chapter to Assistant Secretary for Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, see sections 3417 and 3441 of Title 20, Education.

Section 208(a) of Pub. L. 93–516 provided that: “The Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare [now Secretary of Education] is directed to assign to the Office for the Blind and Visually Handicapped of the Rehabilitation Services Administration of the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare [now Department of Education] ten additional full-time personnel (or their equivalent), five of whom shall be supportive personnel, to carry out duties related to the administration of the Randolph-Sheppard Act [section 107 et seq. of Title 20, Education].”

An identical provision is contained in section 208(a) of Pub. L. 93–651.

Section 208(c) of Pub. L. 93–516 provided that: “In selecting personnel to fill any position under this section [authorizing assignment of 11 additional full-time personnel to the Office for the Blind and Visually Handicapped of the Rehabilitation Service Administration of the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare under subsecs. (a) and (b) of Pub. L. 93–516], the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare [now Secretary of Education] shall give preference to blind individuals.”

An identical provision is contained in section 208(c) of Pub. L. 93–651.

This section is referred to in section 761a of this title.

(a) For the purpose of affording adequate notice of funding available under this chapter, appropriations under this chapter are authorized to be included in the appropriation Act for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which they are available for obligation.

(b) In order to effect a transition to the advance funding method of timing appropriation action, the authority provided by subsection (a) of this section shall apply notwithstanding that its initial application will result in the enactment in the same year (whether in the same appropriation Act or otherwise) of two separate appropriations, one for the then current fiscal year and one for the succeeding fiscal year.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §4, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 358.)

Pursuant to regulations prescribed by the President, and to the extent consistent with the other provisions of this chapter, where funds are provided for a single project by more than one Federal agency to an agency or organization assisted under this chapter, the Federal agency principally involved may be designated to act for all in administering the funds provided, and, in such cases, a single non-Federal share requirement may be established according to the proportion of funds advanced by each agency. When the principal agency involved is the Rehabilitation Services Administration, it may waive any grant or contract requirement (as defined by such regulations) under or pursuant to any law other than this chapter, which requirement is inconsistent with the similar requirements of the administering agency under or pursuant to this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §5, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 359.)

Authority of the President under this section delegated to Director of Office of Management and Budget by section 1 of Ex. Ord. No. 11893, Dec. 31, 1975, 41 F.R. 1040, set out as a note under section 7103 of Title 31, Money and Finance.

In order to secure increased flexibility to respond to the varying needs and local conditions within the State, and in order to permit more effective and interrelated planning and operation of its rehabilitation programs, the State may submit a consolidated rehabilitation plan which includes the State's plan under section 721(a) of this title and its program for persons with developmental disabilities under the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act [42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.]: *Provided*, That the agency administering such State's program under such Act concurs in the submission of such a consolidated rehabilitation plan.

Such a consolidated rehabilitation plan must comply with, and be administered in accordance with, all the requirements of this chapter and the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act [42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.]. If the Secretary finds that all such requirements are satisfied, the Secretary may—

(1) approve the plan to serve in all respects as the substitute for the separate plans which would otherwise be required with respect to each of the programs included therein; or

(2) advise the State to submit separate plans for such programs.

Findings of noncompliance in the administration of an approved consolidated rehabilitation plan, and any reductions, suspensions, or terminations of assistance as a result thereof, shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures set forth in subsections (c) and (d) of section 727 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §6, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 359; Pub. L. 99–506, title X, §1001(a)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1841; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3303; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §128(b)(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4388.)

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, and amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “727” for “721”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(b)(1), substituted “Assistance and Bill of Rights Act” for “Services and Facilities Construction Amendments of 1970”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(b)(2), substituted “Assistance and Bill of Rights Act” for “Services and Facilities Construction Amendments of 1970” and “the Secretary may—” for “the Secretary may” in introductory provisions and substituted pars. (1) and (2) for “approve the plan to serve in all respects as the substitute for the separate plans which would otherwise be required with respect to each of the programs included therein, or may advise the State to submit separate plans for such programs”.

1986—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “the Secretary may approve” for “he may approve” and “or may advise” for “or he may advise”.

For the purposes of this chapter:

(1) The term “construction” means the construction of new buildings, the acquisition, expansion, remodeling, alteration, and renovation of existing buildings, and initial equipment of such buildings, and the term “cost of construction” includes architects’ fees and acquisition of land in connection with construction but does not include the cost of offsite improvements.

(2) The term “criminal act” means any crime, including an act, omission, or possession under the laws of the United States or a State or unit of general local government, which poses a substantial threat of personal injury, notwithstanding that by reason of age, insanity, intoxication or otherwise the person engaging in the act, omission, or possession was legally incapable of committing a crime.

(3)(A) The term “designated State agency” means an agency designated under section 721(a)(1)(A) of this title.

(B) The term “designated State unit” means (i) any State agency unit required under section 721(a)(2)(A) of this title, or (ii) in cases in which no such unit is so required, the State agency described in section 721(a)(1)(B)(i) of this title.

(4)(A) The term “drug” means a controlled substance, as defined in schedules I through V of section 202 of the Controlled Substances Act (21 U.S.C. 812).

(B) The term “illegal use of drugs” means the use of drugs, the possession or distribution of which is unlawful under the Controlled Substances Act [21 U.S.C. 801 et seq.]. Such term does not include the use of a drug taken under supervision by a licensed health care professional, or other uses authorized by the Controlled Substances Act or other provisions of Federal law.

(5) The term “employment outcome” means, with respect to an individual, entering or retaining full-time or, if appropriate, part-time competitive employment in the integrated labor market (including satisfying the vocational outcome of supported employment) or satisfying any other vocational outcome the Secretary may determine, consistent with this chapter.

(6) The term “establishment of a community rehabilitation program” includes the acquisition, expansion, remodeling, or alteration of existing buildings necessary to adapt them to community rehabilitation program purposes or to increase their effectiveness for such purposes (subject, however, to such limitations as the Secretary may determine, in accordance with regulations the Secretary shall prescribe, in order to prevent impairment of the objectives of, or duplication of, other Federal laws providing Federal assistance in the construction of facilities for community rehabilitation programs), and may include such additional equipment and staffing as the Commissioner considers appropriate.

(7)(A) Subject to subparagraphs (B) and (C), the term “Federal share” means 78.7 percent.

(B) The term “Federal share” means 90 percent for the purposes of part C of subchapter I of this chapter and as specifically set forth in section 731(a)(3) of this title, except that with respect to payments pursuant to part B of subchapter I of this chapter to any State which are used to meet the costs of construction of those rehabilitation facilities identified in section 723(b)(2) of this title in such State, the Federal share shall be the percentages determined in accordance with the provisions of section 731(a)(3) of this title applicable with respect to the State.

(C) For the purpose of determining the non-Federal share with respect to a State, expenditures by a political subdivision thereof or by a local agency shall be regarded as expenditures by such State, subject to such limitations and conditions as the Secretary shall by regulation prescribe.

(8)(A) Except as otherwise provided in subparagraph (B), the term “individual with a disability” means any individual who (i) has a physical or mental impairment which for such individual constitutes or results in a substantial impediment to employment and (ii) can benefit in terms of an employment outcome from vocational rehabilitation services provided pursuant to subchapter I, III, VI, or VIII of this chapter.

(B) Subject to subparagraphs (C), (D), (E), and (F), the term “individual with a disability” means, for purposes of sections 701, 713, and 714 of this title, and subchapters II, IV, V, and VII of this chapter, any person who (i) has a physical or mental impairment which substantially limits one or more of such person's major life activities, (ii) has a record of such an impairment, or (iii) is regarded as having such an impairment.

(C)(i) For purposes of subchapter V of this chapter, the term “individual with a disability” does not include an individual who is currently engaging in the illegal use of drugs, when a covered entity acts on the basis of such use.

(ii) Nothing in clause (i) shall be construed to exclude as an individual with a disability an individual who—

(I) has successfully completed a supervised drug rehabilitation program and is no longer engaging in the illegal use of drugs, or has otherwise been rehabilitated successfully and is no longer engaging in such use;

(II) is participating in a supervised rehabilitation program and is no longer engaging in such use; or

(III) is erroneously regarded as engaging in such use, but is not engaging in such use;

except that it shall not be a violation of this chapter for a covered entity to adopt or administer reasonable policies or procedures, including but not limited to drug testing, designed to ensure that an individual described in subclause (I) or (II) is no longer engaging in the illegal use of drugs.

(iii) Notwithstanding clause (i), for purposes of programs and activities providing health services and services provided under subchapters I, II and III of this chapter, an individual shall not be excluded from the benefits of such programs or activities on the basis of his or her current illegal use of drugs if he or she is otherwise entitled to such services.

(iv) For purposes of programs and activities providing educational services, local educational agencies may take disciplinary action pertaining to the use or possession of illegal drugs or alcohol against any student who is an individual with a disability and who currently is engaging in the illegal use of drugs or in the use of alcohol to the same extent that such disciplinary action is taken against students who are not individuals with disabilities. Furthermore, the due process procedures at 34 CFR 104.36 shall not apply to such disciplinary actions.

(v) For purposes of sections 793 and 794 of this title as such sections relate to employment, the term “individual with a disability” does not include any individual who is an alcoholic whose current use of alcohol prevents such individual from performing the duties of the job in question or whose employment, by reason of such current alcohol abuse, would constitute a direct threat to property or the safety of others.

(D) For the purpose of sections 793 and 794 of this title, as such sections relate to employment, such term does not include an individual who has a currently contagious disease or infection and who, by reason of such disease or infection, would constitute a direct threat to the health or safety of other individuals or who, by reason of the currently contagious disease or infection, is unable to perform the duties of the job.

(E) For the purposes of sections 791, 793 and 794 of this title—

(i) for purposes of the application of subparagraph (B) to such sections, the term “impairment” does not include homosexuality or bisexuality; and

(ii) therefore the term “individual with a disability” does not include an individual on the basis of homosexuality or bisexuality.

(F) For the purposes of sections 791, 793, and 794 of this title, the term “individual with a disability” does not include an individual on the basis of—

(i) transvestism, transsexualism, pedophilia, exhibitionism, voyeurism, gender identity disorders not resulting from physical impairments, or other sexual behavior disorders;

(ii) compulsive gambling, kleptomania, or pyromania; or

(iii) psychoactive substance use disorders resulting from current illegal use of drugs.

(9) The term “local agency” means an agency of a unit of general local government or of an Indian tribe (or combination of such units or tribes) which has an agreement with the State agency designated pursuant to section 721(a)(1) of this title to conduct a vocational rehabilitation program under the supervision of such State agency in accordance with the State plan approved under section 721 of this title. Nothing in the preceding sentence of this paragraph or in section 721 of this title shall be construed to prevent the local agency from utilizing another local public or nonprofit agency to provide vocational rehabilitation services: *Provided*, That such an arrangement is made part of the agreement specified in this paragraph.

(10) The term “nonprofit”, when used with respect to a community rehabilitation program, means a community rehabilitation program carried out by a corporation or association, no part of the net earnings of which inures, or may lawfully inure, to the benefit of any private shareholder or individual and the income of which is exempt from taxation under section 501(c)(3) of title 26.

(11) The term “personal assistance services” means a range of services, provided by one or more persons, designed to assist an individual with a disability to perform daily living activities on or off the job that the individual would typically perform if the individual did not have a disability. Such services shall be designed to increase the individual's control in life and ability to perform everyday activities on or off the job.

(12) The term “public safety officer” means a person serving the United States or a State or unit of general local government, with or without compensation, in any activity pertaining to—

(A) the enforcement of the criminal laws, including highway patrol, or the maintenance of civil peace by the National Guard or the Armed Forces,

(B) a correctional program, facility, or institution where the activity is potentially dangerous because of contact with criminal suspects, defendants, prisoners, probationers, or parolees,

(C) a court having criminal or juvenile delinquent jurisdiction where the activity is potentially dangerous because of contact with criminal suspects, defendants, prisoners, probationers, or parolees, or

(D) firefighting, fire prevention, or emergency rescue missions.

(13) The term “rehabilitation technology” means the systematic application of technologies, engineering methodologies, or scientific principles to meet the needs of and address the barriers confronted by individuals with disabilities in areas which include education, rehabilitation, employment, transportation, independent living, and recreation. The term includes rehabilitation engineering, assistive technology devices, and assistive technology services.

(14) The term “Secretary”, except when the context otherwise requires, means the Secretary of Education.

(15)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B) or (C), the term “individual with a severe disability” means an individual with a disability—

(i) who has a severe physical or mental impairment which seriously limits one or more functional capacities (such as mobility, communication, self-care, self-direction, interpersonal skills, work tolerance, or work skills) in terms of an employment outcome;

(ii) whose vocational rehabilitation can be expected to require multiple vocational rehabilitation services over an extended period of time; and

(iii) who has one or more physical or mental disabilities resulting from amputation, arthritis, autism, blindness, burn injury, cancer, cerebral palsy, cystic fibrosis, deafness, head injury, heart disease, hemiplegia, hemophilia, respiratory or pulmonary dysfunction, mental retardation, mental illness, multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, musculo-skeletal disorders, neurological disorders (including stroke and epilepsy), paraplegia, quadriplegia, and other spinal cord conditions, sickle cell anemia, specific learning disability, end-stage renal disease, or another disability or combination of disabilities determined on the basis of an assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in subparagraphs (A) and (C) of paragraph (22) to cause comparable substantial functional limitation.

(B) For purposes of subchapter VII of this chapter, the term “individual with a severe disability” means an individual with a severe physical or mental impairment whose ability to function independently in the family or community or whose ability to obtain, maintain, or advance in employment is substantially limited and for whom the delivery of independent living services will improve the ability to function, continue functioning, or move towards functioning independently in the family or community or to continue in employment, respectively.

(C) For purposes of section 712 of this title and subchapter II of this chapter, the term “individual with a severe disability” includes an individual described in subparagraph (A) or (B).

(16) The term “State” includes, in addition to each of the several States of the United States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the United States Virgin Islands, Guam, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect).

(17) The term “vocational rehabilitation services” means those services identified in section 723 of this title which are provided to individuals with disabilities under this chapter.

(18)(A) The term “supported employment” means competitive work in integrated work settings for individuals with the most severe disabilities—

(i)(I) for whom competitive employment has not traditionally occurred; or

(II) for whom competitive employment has been interrupted or intermittent as a result of a severe disability; and

(ii) who, because of the nature and severity of their disability, need intensive supported employment services for the period, and any extension, described in paragraph (34)(C) and extended services after the transition described in paragraph (27)(C) in order to perform such work.

(B) Such term includes transitional employment for persons who are individuals with the most severe disabilities due to mental illness.

(19) The term “public or nonprofit”, with respect to an agency or organization, includes an Indian tribe.

(20) The terms “Indian”, “American Indian”, and “Indian American” mean an individual who is a member of an Indian tribe.

(21) The term “Indian tribe” means any Federal or State Indian tribe, band, rancheria, pueblo, colony, or community, including any Alaskan native village or regional village corporation (as defined in or established pursuant to the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act [43 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.]).

(22) The term “assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs” means, as appropriate in each case—

(A)(i) a review of existing data—

(I) to determine whether an individual is eligible for vocational rehabilitation services; and

(II) to assign the priority described in section 721(a)(5)(A) of this title in the States that use an order of selection pursuant to section 721(a)(5)(A) of this title; and

(ii) to the extent additional data is necessary to make such determination and assignment, a preliminary assessment of such data (including the provision of goods and services during such assessment);

(B) to the extent additional data is necessary, a comprehensive assessment (including the administration of the assessment) of the unique strengths, resources, priorities, interests, and needs, including the need for supported employment, of an eligible individual to make a determination of the goals, objectives, nature, and scope of vocational rehabilitation services to be included in the individualized written rehabilitation program of the individual, which comprehensive assessment—

(i) is limited to information that is necessary to identify the rehabilitation needs of the individual and to develop the rehabilitation program of the individual;

(ii) uses, as a primary source of such information, to the maximum extent possible and appropriate and in accordance with confidentiality requirements—

(I) existing information; and

(II) such information as can be provided by the individual and, where appropriate, by the family of the individual;

(iii) may include, to the degree needed to make such a determination, an assessment of the personality, interests, interpersonal skills, intelligence and related functional capacities, educational achievements, work experience, vocational aptitudes, personal and social adjustments, and employment opportunities of the individual, and the medical, psychiatric, psychological, and other pertinent vocational, educational, cultural, social, recreational, and environmental factors, that affect the employment and rehabilitation needs of the individual; and

(iv) may include an appraisal of the patterns of work behavior of the individual and services needed for the individual to acquire occupational skills, and to develop work attitudes, work habits, work tolerance, and social and behavior patterns necessary for successful job performance, including the utilization of work in real job situations to assess and develop the capacities of the individual to perform adequately in a work environment; and

(C)(i) referral;

(ii) where appropriate, the provision of rehabilitation technology services to an individual with a disability to assess and develop the capacities of the individual to perform in a work environment; and

(iii)(I) the provision of vocational rehabilitation services to an individual for a total period not in excess of 18 months for the limited purpose of making determinations regarding whether an individual is eligible for vocational rehabilitation services and regarding the nature and scope of vocational rehabilitation services needed for such individual; and

(II) an assessment at least once in every 90-day period during which such services are provided, of the results of the provision of such services to an individual to ascertain whether any of the determinations described in subclause (I) may be made.

(23) The term “assistive technology device” has the meaning given such term in section 2202(2) of this title, except that the reference in such section to the term “individuals with disabilities” shall be deemed to mean more than one individual with a disability as defined in paragraph (8)(A).

(24) The term “assistive technology service” has the meaning given such term in section 2202(3) of this title, except that the reference in such section—

(A) to the term “individual with a disability” shall be deemed to mean an individual with a disability, as defined in paragraph (8)(A); and

(B) to the term “individuals with disabilities” shall be deemed to mean more than one such individual.

(25) The term “community rehabilitation program” means a program that provides directly or facilitates the provision of vocational rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities, and that provides, singly or in combination, for an individual with a disability to enable the individual to maximize opportunities for employment, including career advancement—

(A) medical, psychiatric, psychological, social, and vocational services that are provided under one management;

(B) testing, fitting, or training in the use of prosthetic and orthotic devices;

(C) recreational therapy;

(D) physical and occupational therapy;

(E) speech, language, and hearing therapy;

(F) psychiatric, psychological, and social services, including positive behavior management;

(G) assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs;

(H) rehabilitation technology;

(I) job development, placement, and retention services;

(J) evaluation or control of specific disabilities;

(K) orientation and mobility services for individuals who are blind;

(L) extended employment;

(M) psychosocial rehabilitation services;

(N) supported employment services and extended services;

(O) services to family members when necessary to the vocational rehabilitation of the individual;

(P) personal assistance services; or

(Q) services similar to the services described in one of subparagraphs (A) through (P).

(26) The term “disability” means—

(A) except as otherwise provided in subparagraph (B), a physical or mental impairment that constitutes or results in a substantial impediment to employment; or

(B) for purposes of sections 701, 713, and 714 of this title, and subchapters II, IV, V, and VII of this chapter, a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more major life activities.

(27) The term “extended services” means ongoing support services and other appropriate services, needed to support and maintain an individual with the most severe disability in supported employment, that—

(A) are provided singly or in combination and are organized and made available in such a way as to assist an eligible individual in maintaining integrated, competitive employment;

(B) are based on a determination of the needs of an eligible individual, as specified in an individualized written rehabilitation program; and

(C) are provided by a State agency, a nonprofit private organization, employer, or any other appropriate resource, after an individual has made the transition from support provided by the designated State unit.

(28)(A) The term “impartial hearing officer” means an individual—

(i) who is not an employee of a public agency (other than an administrative law judge, hearing examiner, or employee of an institution of higher education);

(ii) who is not a member of the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council described in section 725 of this title;

(iii) who has not been involved in previous decisions regarding the vocational rehabilitation of the applicant or client;

(iv) who has knowledge of the delivery of vocational rehabilitation services, the State plan under section 721 of this title, and the Federal and State rules governing the provision of such services and training with respect to the performance of official duties; and

(v) who has no personal or financial interest that would be in conflict with the objectivity of the individual.

(B) An individual shall not be considered to be an employee of a public agency for purposes of subparagraph (A)(i) solely because the individual is paid by the agency to serve as a hearing officer.

(29) The term “independent living core services” means—

(A) information and referral services;

(B) independent living skills training;

(C) peer counseling (including cross-disability peer counseling); and

(D) individual and systems advocacy.

(30) The term “independent living services” includes—

(A) independent living core services; and

(B)(i) counseling services, including psychological, psychotherapeutic, and related services;

(ii) services related to securing housing or shelter, including services related to community group living, and supportive of the purposes of this chapter and of the subchapters of this chapter, and adaptive housing services (including appropriate accommodations to and modifications of any space used to serve, or occupied by, individuals with disabilities);

(iii) rehabilitation technology;

(iv) mobility training;

(v) services and training for individuals with cognitive and sensory disabilities, including life skills training, and interpreter and reader services;

(vi) personal assistance services, including attendant care and the training of personnel providing such services;

(vii) surveys, directories, and other activities to identify appropriate housing, recreation opportunities, and accessible transportation, and other support services;

(viii) consumer information programs on rehabilitation and independent living services available under this chapter, especially for minorities and other individuals with disabilities who have traditionally been unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter;

(ix) education and training necessary for living in a community and participating in community activities;

(x) supported living;

(xi) transportation, including referral and assistance for such transportation;

(xii) physical rehabilitation;

(xiii) therapeutic treatment;

(xiv) provision of needed prostheses and other appliances and devices;

(xv) individual and group social and recreational services;

(xvi) training to develop skills specifically designed for youths who are individuals with disabilities to promote self-awareness and esteem, develop advocacy and self-empowerment skills, and explore career options;

(xvii) services for children;

(xviii) services under other Federal, State, or local programs designed to provide resources, training, counseling, or other assistance, of substantial benefit in enhancing the independence, productivity, and quality of life of individuals with disabilities;

(xix) appropriate preventive services to decrease the need of individuals assisted under this chapter for similar services in the future;

(xx) community awareness programs to enhance the understanding and integration into society of individuals with disabilities; and

(xxi) such other services as may be necessary and not inconsistent with the provisions of this chapter.

(31)(A) The term “individuals with disabilities” means more than one individual with a disability.

(B) The term “individuals with severe disabilities” means more than one individual with a severe disability.

(C) The term “individuals with the most severe disabilities” means more than one individual with the most severe disability.

(32) The term “institution of higher education” has the meaning given the term in section 1141(a) of title 20.

(33) The term “ongoing support services” means services—

(A) provided to individuals with the most severe disabilities;

(B) provided, at a minimum, twice monthly—

(i) to make an assessment, regarding the employment situation, at the worksite of each such individual in supported employment, or, under special circumstances, especially at the request of the client, off site; and

(ii) based on the assessment, to provide for the coordination or provision of specific intensive services, at or away from the worksite, that are needed to maintain employment stability; and

(C) consisting of—

(i) a particularized assessment supplementary to the comprehensive assessment described in paragraph (22)(B);

(ii) the provision of skilled job trainers who accompany the individual for intensive job skill training at the work site; 1

(iii) job development and placement;

(iv) social skills training;

(v) regular observation or supervision of the individual;

(vi) followup services such as regular contact with the employers, the individuals, the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, and other suitable professional and informed advisors, in order to reinforce and stabilize the job placement;

(vii) facilitation of natural supports at the worksite;

(viii) any other service identified in section 723 of this title; or

(ix) a service similar to another service described in this subparagraph.

(34) The term “supported employment services” means ongoing support services and other appropriate services needed to support and maintain an individual with the most severe disability in supported employment, that—

(A) are provided singly or in combination and are organized and made available in such a way to assist an eligible individual in entering or maintaining integrated, competitive employment;

(B) are based on a determination of the needs of an eligible individual, as specified in an individualized written rehabilitation program; and

(C) are provided by the designated State unit for a period of time not to extend beyond 18 months, unless under special circumstances the eligible individual and the rehabilitation counselor or coordinator jointly agree to extend the time in order to achieve the rehabilitation objectives identified in the individualized written rehabilitation program.

(35) The term “transition services” means a coordinated set of activities for a student, designed within an outcome-oriented process, that promotes movement from school to post school activities, including post secondary education, vocational training, integrated employment (including supported employment), continuing and adult education, adult services, independent living, or community participation. The coordinated set of activities shall be based upon the individual student's needs, taking into account the student's preferences and interests, and shall include instruction, community experiences, the development of employment and other post school adult living objectives, and, when appropriate, acquisition of daily living skills and functional vocational evaluation.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §7, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 359; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(a), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(a), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–5; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(4)–(8), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2984, 2985; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §101, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 17; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(a), (b), (c)(1), (d)(1), (2)(A), (C), (e)–(h)(1), (i), (j), title X, §§1001(a)(3), 1002(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1809–1811, 1841, 1844; Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095; Pub. L. 100–259, §9, Mar. 22, 1988, 102 Stat. 31; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3303; Pub. L. 101–336, title V, §512, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 376; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(a)–(n), (p)(3), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4347–4350, 4356; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §§102(1), 103, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 718; Pub. L. 103–218, title IV, §404, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 97.)

Section 721(a)(B)(i) of this title, referred to in par. (3), was in the original “section 101(a)(B)(i) of this Act”. As enacted the citation omitted a paragraph designation but is probably a reference to section 721(a)(1)(B)(i) of this title.

The Controlled Substances Act, referred to in par. (4)(B), is title II of Pub. L. 91–513, Oct. 27, 1970, 84 Stat. 1242, as amended, which is classified principally to subchapter I (§801 et seq.) of chapter 13 of Title 21, Food and Drugs. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 801 of Title 21 and Tables.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in par. (16), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

The Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, referred to in par. (21), is Pub. L. 92–203, Dec. 18, 1971, 85 Stat. 688, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1601 et seq.) of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1601 of Title 43 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see note set out under section 701 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 41, 41a, 42–1, and 42a of this title.

1994—Par. (23). Pub. L. 103–218, §404(a), substituted “2202(2)” for “2202(1)”.

Par. (24). Pub. L. 103–218, §404(b), substituted “2202(3)” for “2202(2)”.

1993—Par. (3). Pub. L. 103–73, §102(1), made technical correction to Pub. L. 102–569, §102(a). See 1992 Amendment note below.

Pub. L. 103–73, §103(1), designated second sentence of subpar. (A) as subpar. (B), and in cl. (ii) substituted “section 721(a)(1)(B)(i)” for “section 721(a)(B)(i)”.

Par. (8)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §103(2)(A), substituted “subchapter I, III, VI, or VIII” for “subchapters I, II, III, VI, and VIII”.

Par. (8)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §103(2)(B), substituted “subchapters II, IV, V, and VII” for “subchapters IV and V”.

Subsec. (15)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §103(3), which directed amendment of introductory provisions by inserting a comma after “subparagraph (C)”, was executed by making the insertion after “subparagraph (B) or (C)”, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Par. (18)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 103–73, §103(4), substituted “employment services for the period, and any extension, described in paragraph (34)(C) and extended services after the transition described in paragraph (27)(C)” for “employment services or extended services”.

Par. (26)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §103(5), substituted “II, IV, V, and VII” for “II, III, IV, V, and VIII”.

1992—Par. (3). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(a), as amended by Pub. L. 103–73, §102(1), substituted “(3)(A) The term ‘designated State agency’ means an agency designated under section 721(a)(1)(A) of this title.” for “(3)” and redesignated former subpars. (A) and (B) as cls. (i) and (ii), respectively.

Par. (4). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(d)(4), (5), redesignated par. (22) as (4) and inserted it after par. (3). Former par. (4) redesignated (6).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(b), substituted “community rehabilitation program” for “rehabilitation facility” in two places, “includes the acquisition” for “means the acquisition”, and “facilities for community rehabilitation programs)” for “such facilities)”.

Par. (5). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(d)(1), (2), redesignated par. (6) as (5) and struck out former par. (5) which defined “evaluation of rehabilitation potential”.

Par. (6). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(d)(2), (3), redesignated par. (4) as (6) and inserted it before par. (7). Former par. (6) redesignated (5).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(c), amended par. (6) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (6) read as follows: “The term ‘employability’, with respect to an individual, means a determination that, with the provision of vocational rehabilitation services, the individual is likely to enter or retain, as a primary objective, full-time employment, and when appropriate, part-time employment, consistent with the capacities or abilities of the individual in the competitive labor market or any other vocational outcome the Secretary may determine consistent with this chapter.”

Par. (7). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(e), substituted “78.7 percent” for “80 percent” in subpar. (A), redesignated subpar. (C) as (B) and substituted “section 731(a)(3)” for “section 771(b)(3)” in two places, struck out former subpar. (B) which read as follows: “For any fiscal year for which payments to a State under section 731(a) of this title exceed such payments for fiscal year 1988, the Federal share for those payments in excess of the fiscal year 1988 amount shall be 79 percent for fiscal year 1989, 78 percent for fiscal year 1990, 77 percent for fiscal year 1991, 76 percent for fiscal year 1992, and 75 percent for fiscal year 1993.”, and redesignated subpar. (D) as (C).

Par. (8)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(f)(1), in introductory provisions, substituted “a disability” for “handicaps”, in cl. (i), substituted “impairment” for “disability” and “impediment” for “handicap”, and in cl. (ii), substituted “can benefit” for “can reasonably be expected to benefit”, “an employment outcome” for “employability”, and “subchapters I, II, III, VI, and VIII” for “subchapters I and III”.

Par. (8)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(f)(2), substituted “(C), (D), (E), and (F)” for “(C) and (D)” and “a disability” for “handicaps”, and inserted references to sections 701, 713, and 714 of this title.

Par. (8)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(f)(3), in cls. (i) and (ii), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps”, in cl. (iv), substituted “student who is an individual with a disability and” for “handicapped student” and “students who are not individuals with disabilities” for “nonhandicapped students”, and in cl. (v), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps”.

Par. (8)(E), (F). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(f)(4), added subpars. (E) and (F).

Par. (10). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(g), substituted “with respect to a community rehabilitation program, means a community rehabilitation program carried out by” for “with respect to a rehabilitation facility, means a rehabilitation facility owned and operated by”.

Pars. (11), (12). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(h)(2), (3), added par. (11) and redesignated former pars. (11) and (12) as (12) and (13), respectively.

Par. (13). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(h)(1), (2), (i), (p)(3)(A), redesignated par. (12) as (13), substituted “rehabilitation technology” for “rehabilitation engineering” and “disabilities” for “handicaps”, inserted at end “The term includes rehabilitation engineering, assistive technology devices, and assistive technology services.”, and struck out former par. (13) which defined “rehabilitation facility”.

Par. (15)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(j)(1), (p)(3)(B), in introductory provisions, substituted “subparagraph (B) or (C)” for “subparagraph (B)”, “a severe disability” for “severe handicaps”, and “a disability” for “handicaps (as defined in paragraph (8))”, in cl. (i), substituted “impairment” for “disability” and “an employment outcome” for “employability”, and in cl. (iii), substituted “assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in subparagraphs (A) and (C) of paragraph (22)” for “evaluation of rehabilitation potential”.

Par. (15)(B), (C). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(j)(2), added subpars. (B) and (C) and struck out former subpar. (B) which read as follows: “For purposes of subchapter VII of this chapter the term ‘individual with severe handicaps’ means an individual whose ability to function independently in family or community or whose ability to engage or continue in employment is so limited by the severity of his or her physical or mental disability that independent living rehabilitation services are required in order to achieve a greater level of independence in functioning in family or community or engaging or continuing in employment.”

Par. (16). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(k), amended par. (16) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (16) read as follows: “The term ‘State’ includes the District of Columbia, the Virgin Islands, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, and for the purposes of American Samoa and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, the appropriate State agency designated as provided in section 721(a)(1) of this title shall be the Governor of American Samoa or the High Commissioner of the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, as the case may be.”

Par. (17). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(3)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Par. (18). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*l*), amended par. (18) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (18) read as follows: “The term ‘supported employment’ means competitive work in integrated work settings—

“(A) for individuals with severe handicaps for whom competitive employment has not traditionally occurred, or

“(B) for individuals for whom competitive employment has been interrupted or intermittent as a result of a severe disability, and

who, because of their handicap, need on-going support services to perform such work. Such term includes transitional employment for individuals with chronic mental illness. For the purpose of this chapter, supported employment as defined in this paragraph may be considered an acceptable outcome for employability.”

Par. (19). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(m), amended par. (19) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (19) read as follows: “The term ‘public or nonprofit agency or organization’ shall include an Indian tribe.”

Pars. (22) to (35). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(n), added pars. (22) to (35). Former par. (22) redesignated (4).

1990—Par. (8)(B). Pub. L. 101–336, §512(c), substituted “Subject to subparagraphs (C) and (D)” for “Subject to the second sentence of this subparagraph” in first sentence and struck out at end “For purposes of sections 793 and 794 of this title as such sections relate to employment, such term does not include any individual who is an alcoholic or drug abuser whose current use of alcohol or drugs prevents such individual from performing the duties of the job in question or whose employment, by reason of such current alcohol or drug abuse, would constitute a direct threat to property or the safety of others.”

Par. (8)(C), (D). Pub. L. 101–336, §512(a), added subpar. (C) and redesignated former subpar. (C) as (D).

Par. (22). Pub. L. 101–336, §512(b), added par. (22).

1988—Par. (2). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(1), inserted comma after “local government”.

Par. (5)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(2), inserted comma after “employability”.

Par. (5)(C). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(3), substituted “skills” for “skill”.

Par. (5)(G)(i). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(4), substituted “neither” for “neither such individual”.

Par. (8)(C). Pub. L. 100–259 added subpar. (C).

Par. (13)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(5), reenacted cl. (B). See 1986 Amendment note below.

Par. (13)(F). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(6), amended cl. (F) generally, inserting a comma after “psychological”. See 1986 Amendment note below.

Par. (13)(L). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(7), which directed the substitution of “provision” for “provisions”, could not be executed because the word “provisions” did not appear.

Par. (15)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(c)(8), struck out “, for purposes of this chapter” before “the term” in introductory provisions.

1986—Par. (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(a)(1), substituted “designated State unit” for “designated State units”.

Par. (4). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(a)(3), substituted “the Secretary shall prescribe” for “he shall prescribe”.

Par. (5)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(a)(1), (2), inserted “recreational,” after “cultural, social,” and “employability” after “an evaluation of the individual's”.

Par. (5)(G). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(A), substituted “an individual with handicaps” for “a handicapped individual” in two places.

Par. (5)(H). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(a)(3)–(5), added subpar. (H).

Par. (6). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), added par. (6) and redesignated former par. (6) as (7).

Par. (7). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(c)(1), amended par. (7) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (7) read as follows: “The term ‘Federal share’ means 80 per centum, except that it shall mean 90 per centum for the purposes of part C of subchapter I of this chapter and as specifically set forth in section 771(b)(3) of this title: *Provided*, That with respect to payments pursuant to part B of subchapter I of this chapter to any State which are used to meet the costs of construction of those rehabilitation facilities identified in section 723(b)(2) of this title in such State, the Federal share shall be the percentages determined in accordance with the provisions of section 771(b)(3) of this title applicable with respect to that State and that, for the purpose of determining the non-Federal share with respect to any State, expenditures by a political subdivision thereof or by a local agency shall, subject to such limitations and conditions as the Secretary shall by regulation prescribe, be regarded as expenditures by such State.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), redesignated former par. (6) as (7). Former par. (7) redesignated (8).

Par. (8). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), (d)(1), redesignated former par. (7) as (8) and substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” in subpars. (A) and (B). Former par. (8) redesignated (9).

Par. (9). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), (e), redesignated former par. (8) as (9) and substituted “Indian tribe (or combination of such units or tribes)” for “Indian tribal organization (or combination of such units or organizations)”. Former par. (9) redesignated (10).

Par. (10). Pub. L. 99–514 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), redesignated former par. (9) as (10). Former par. (10) redesignated (11).

Par. (11). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(b), redesignated former par. (10) as (11). Former par. (11) redesignated (13).

Par. (12). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(f), added par. (12). Former par. (12) redesignated (14).

Par. (13). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(a)(2), which provided for the reenactment of cl. (B) of par. (11), and the amendment of cl. (F) of par. (11) by inserting “psychiatric,” before “psychological”, to correct amendment made by section 122(a)(7)(B) of Pub. L. 95–602 (see 1978 Amendment note below), was executed to cls. (B) and (F) of par. (13) to reflect the probable intent of Congress and the intervening redesignation of par. (11) as par. (13) by section 103(f) of Pub. L. 99–506. See note below.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), (f), (g), redesignated former par. (11) as (13) and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in three places and added cl. (M). Former par. (13) redesignated (15).

Par. (14). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(f), redesignated former par. (12) as (14). Former par. (14) redesignated (16).

Par. (15). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(f), (h)(1), redesignated former par. (13) as (15) and amended it generally, substituting definition of term “individual with severe handicaps” for definition of term “severe handicap”. Former par. (15) redesignated (17).

Par. (16). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(i)(1), redesignated former par. (14) as (16).

Par. (17). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), (i)(1), redesignated former par. (15) as (17) and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Pars. (18) to (21). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(i)(2), (j), added pars. (18) to (21).

1984—Par. (12). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Secretary of Education” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

1978—Par. (3). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(8), added par. (3). Former par. (3) redesignated (4).

Par. (4). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(4), (8), redesignated former par. (3) as (4) and substituted “and may include such additional equipment and staffing as the Commissioner considers appropriate” for “and the initial equipment for such buildings, and may include the initial staffing thereof”. Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Par. (5). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(5), (8), redesignated former par. (4) as (5) and inserted in subpar. (B), “psychiatric” after “medical”. Former par. (5) redesignated (6).

Par. (6). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(8), redesignated former par. (5) as (6). Former par. (6) redesignated (7).

Par. (7). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(6), (8), redesignated former par. (6) as (7), substituted “(A) Except as otherwise provided in subparagraph (B), the term” for “The term”, redesignated cls. (A) and (B) as cls. (i) and (ii), respectively, struck out provision defining “handicapped individual” for purposes of subchapters IV and V of this chapter as any person who has a physical or mental impairment which substantially limits one or more major life activities, has a record of such impairment, or is regarded as having such impairment, and added subpar. (B). Former par. (7) redesignated (8).

Pars. (8) to (10). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(8), redesignated former pars. (7) to (9) as (8) to (10), respectively.

Par. (11). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(7), (8), redesignated former par. (10) as (11) and inserted in cl. (A), “, psychiatric” after “medical” and in cl. (F), “psychiatric” before “psychological”. Notwithstanding directory language that amendment be made to cl. (B) of par. (11), amendment was executed to cl. (F) of par. (11) to reflect the probable intent of Congress. Former par. (11) redesignated (12).

Pars. (12) to (15). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(a)(8), redesignated former pars. (11) to (14) as (12) to (15), respectively.

1974—Par. (6). Pub. L. 93–516 expanded definition of handicapped individual to include for the purposes of subchapters IV and V of this chapter any person who has a physical or mental impairment which substantially limits one or more of such person's major life activities, has a record of such as impairment, or is regarded as having such an impairment.

Pub. L. 93–651 made identical amendment as made by Pub. L. 93–516.

Section 103(c)(1) of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Oct. 1, 1988.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–259 not to be construed to extend application of this chapter to ultimate beneficiaries of Federal financial assistance excluded from coverage before Mar. 22, 1988, see section 7 of Pub. L. 100–259, set out as a Construction note under section 1687 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–259 not to be construed to force or require any individual or hospital or any other institution, program, or activity receiving Federal funds to perform or pay for an abortion, see section 8 of Pub. L. 100–259, set out as a note under section 1688 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 722, 725, 794, 795, 795g, 796b, 796d, 796f–4, 796k, 797a, 1503, 1583, 2211 of this title; title 42 sections 1769h, 5061, 6862, 12511.

1 So in original. Probably should be “worksite;”.

(1) For purposes of section 730 of this title, the allotment percentage for any State shall be 100 per centum less that percentage which bears the same ratio to 50 per centum as the per capita income of such State bears to the per capita income of the United States, except that (A) the allotment percentage shall in no case be more than 75 per centum or less than 331/3 per centum, and (B) the allotment percentage for the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, and the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect) shall be 75 per centum.

(2) The allotment percentages shall be promulgated by the Secretary between October 1 and December 31 of each even-numbered year, on the basis of the average of the per capita incomes of the States and of the United States for the three most recent consecutive years for which satisfactory data are available from the Department of Commerce. Such promulgation shall be conclusive for each of the two fiscal years in the period beginning on the October 1 next succeeding such promulgation.

(3) The term “United States” means (but only for purposes of this subsection) the fifty States and the District of Columbia.

The population of the several States and of the United States shall be determined on the basis of the most recent data available, to be furnished by the Department of Commerce by October 1 of the year preceding the fiscal year for which funds are appropriated pursuant to statutory authorizations.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §8, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 362; Pub. L. 94–273, §10, Apr. 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 378; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §103, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4361.)

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 41 of this title.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “For purposes of section 730 of this title, the” for “The” and “and the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect)” for “and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

1976—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 94–273 substituted “October” for “July” wherever appearing, and “December 31” for “September 30”.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, §9, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 362, related to audit and examination of records, scope of disclosure, and access to representatives.

In determining the amount of any State's Federal share of expenditures for planning, administration, and services incurred by it under a State plan approved in accordance with section 721 of this title, there shall be disregarded (1) any portion of such expenditures which are financed by Federal funds provided under any other provision of law, and (2) the amount of any non-Federal funds required to be expended as a condition of receipt of such Federal funds. No payment may be made from funds provided under one provision of this chapter relating to any cost with respect to which any payment is made under any other provision of this chapter, except that this section shall not be construed to limit or reduce fees for services rendered by community rehabilitation programs.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §10, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 363; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(9), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2985; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §104, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4361.)

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 33 and 42–1 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities” in second sentence.

1988—Pub. L. 100–630 inserted comma after “any other provision of this chapter”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 provided that this section not be construed to limit or reduce fees for services rendered by rehabilitation facilities.

The provisions of chapter 71 of title 31 and of section 1469a of title 48 shall not apply to the administration of the provisions of this chapter or to the administration of any program or activity under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §11, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §121, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2984.)

“Chapter 71 of title 31” substituted in text for “the Act of December 5, 1974 (Public Law 93–510) [42 U.S.C. 4251 et seq.]” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

In carrying out the purposes of this chapter, the Commissioner may—

(1) provide consultative services and technical assistance to public or nonprofit private agencies and organizations;

(2) provide short-term training and technical instruction, including training for the personnel of community rehabilitation programs, centers for independent living, and other providers of services (including job coaches);

(3) conduct special projects and demonstrations;

(4) collect, prepare, publish, and disseminate special educational or informational materials, including reports of the projects for which funds are provided under this chapter; and

(5) provide monitoring and conduct evaluations.

(1) In carrying out the duties under this chapter, the Commissioner may utilize the services and facilities of any agency of the Federal Government and of any other public or nonprofit agency or organization, in accordance with agreements between the Commissioner and the head thereof, and may pay therefor, in advance or by way of reimbursement, as may be provided in the agreement.

(2) In carrying out the provisions of this chapter, the Commissioner shall appoint such task forces as may be necessary to collect and disseminate information in order to improve the ability of the Commissioner to carry out the provisions of this chapter.

The Commissioner may promulgate such regulations as are considered appropriate to carry out the Commissioner's duties under this chapter.

The Secretary shall promulgate regulations regarding the requirements for the implementation of an order of selection for vocational rehabilitation services under section 721(a)(5)(A) of this title if such services cannot be provided to all eligible individuals with disabilities who apply for such services.

(1) Not later than 120 days after October 29, 1992, the Secretary shall receive public comment and promulgate regulations establishing criteria pertaining to the selection of vocational rehabilitation services, and of vocational rehabilitation services providers, by an individual with a disability, consistent with the individualized written rehabilitation program of the individual under section 722 of this title.

(2) Regulations under paragraph (1) shall include the following:

(A) Procedures that States must adopt to ensure that the services provided under this chapter are of sufficient scope and quality, that the costs of such services and the length of time such services are provided are reasonable, and that such services are available in a timely manner.

(B) Procedures that prevent fraud, waste, and abuse.

(C) Procedures to assure that services are provided in the most integrated settings.

(D) Procedures to assure that rehabilitation providers comply with State guarantees, such as—

(i) affirmative action procedures with respect to the employment of individuals with disabilities;

(ii) standards governing community rehabilitation programs and qualified personnel utilized for the provision of vocational rehabilitation services; and

(iii) minimum standards to ensure the availability of personnel, to the maximum extent feasible, trained to communicate in the native language or mode of communication of the client.

(E) Standards to be adhered to by providers to help ensure the integrity of services.

(F) Guidelines for assisting individuals with disabilities and for providing information about available vocational rehabilitation service providers, especially for assisting—

(i) individuals with cognitive and other disabilities who, due to the nature of the disability, require support and assistance in fully implementing the selection and procurement of services; and

(ii) the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §12, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(10), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2985; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §104, title X, §1001(a)(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1811, 1841; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §105, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4361.)

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 780 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2977.

1992—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §105(a), inserted before semicolon at end “, including training for the personnel of community rehabilitation programs, centers for independent living, and other providers of services (including job coaches)”.

Subsecs. (d) to (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §105(b), added subsecs. (d) and (e) and redesignated former subsec. (d) as (f).

1988—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “the Commissioner's” for “his”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 99–506, §104(a), substituted “provide monitoring and conduct evaluations” for “provide staff and other technical assistance to the National Council on the Handicapped”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §§104(b), 1001(a)(4)(A), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted “the duties” for “his duties”, and added par. (2).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(a)(4)(B), substituted “as are considered” for “as he considers”.

Not later than one hundred and eighty days after the close of each fiscal year, the Commissioner shall prepare and submit to the President and to the Congress a full and complete report on the activities carried out under this chapter, including the activities and staffing of the information clearinghouse under section 714 of this title. The Commissioner shall annually collect information on each client whose case is closed out in the preceding fiscal year and include the information in the report required by this section. The information shall set forth a complete count of such cases in a manner permitting the greatest possible cross-classification of data. The data elements shall include, but not be limited to, age, sex, race, ethnicity, education, type of disability, severity of disability, key rehabilitation process dates, earnings at time of entry into program and at closure, work status, occupation, cost of case services, types of services provided, including types of rehabilitation technology services provided, types of facilities or agencies which furnished services and whether each such facility or agency is public or private, and reasons for closure. The Commissioner shall take whatever action is necessary to assure that the identity of each client for which information is supplied under this subsection is confidential. Such annual reports shall also include statistical data reflecting services and activities provided individuals during the preceding fiscal year. The annual report shall include an evaluation of the status of individuals with severe disabilities participating in programs under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §13, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(10), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2985; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §102, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 17; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §105, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1812; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(p)(4), 106, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4356, 4362; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1042(c), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 715.)

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 784 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2977.

1995—Pub. L. 104–66 substituted “eighty” for “twenty” before “days after” in first sentence.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 inserted “including types of rehabilitation technology services provided,” after “provided,” in fourth sentence and substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in last sentence.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “to the President and to the Congress” for “to the President for transmittal to the Congress”, inserted “, including the activities and staffing of the information clearinghouse under section 714 of this title”, and inserted “The annual report shall include an evaluation of the status of individuals with severe handicaps participating in programs under this chapter.”

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 inserted “The Commissioner shall annually collect information on each client whose case is closed out in the preceding fiscal year and include the information in the report required by this section. The information shall set forth a complete count of such cases in a manner permitting the greatest possible cross-classification of data. The data elements shall include, but not be limited to, age, sex, race, ethnicity, education, type of disability, severity of disability, key rehabilitation process dates, earnings at time of entry into program and at closure, work status, occupation, cost of case services, types of services provided, types of facilities or agencies which furnished services and whether each such facility or agency is public or private, and reasons for closure. The Commissioner shall take whatever action is necessary to assure that the identity of each client for which information is supplied under this subsection is confidential.” and inserted “also” after “Such annual reports shall”.

For transfer of functions and offices of Secretary and Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, including Rehabilitation Services Administration and Commissioner thereof, under this chapter to Secretary and Department of Education, and for delegation of certain functions of Secretary of Education under this chapter to Assistant Secretary for Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, see sections 3417 and 3441 of Title 20, Education.

Section 136 of Pub. L. 102–569 directed Commissioner of Rehabilitation Services Administration to undertake a comprehensive review of the current system for collecting and reporting client data under this chapter, particularly data on clients of the programs under subchapter I of this chapter, specified considerations in conducting the review, required recommendations for improvements in the data collection and reporting system based on the review, and directed Commissioner, not later than 18 months after Oct. 29, 1992, to publish the recommendations in the Federal Register and prepare and submit a report containing the recommendations to the appropriate committees of Congress but not implement the recommendations earlier than 90 days after the date on which the Commissioner submits the report.

Section 137 of Pub. L. 102–569 provided that: “The Secretary of Education and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall enter into a memorandum of understanding for the purpose of exchanging data of mutual importance, regarding clients of State vocational rehabilitation agencies, that are contained in databases maintained by the Rehabilitation Services Administration, as required under section 13 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 712), and the Social Security Administration, from its Summary Earnings and Records and Master Beneficiary Records. For purposes of the exchange, the Social Security data shall not be considered tax information and, as appropriate, the confidentiality of all client information shall be maintained by both agencies.”

This section is referred to in sections 706, 721, 722, 726, 753a, 776, 795g, 795*o*, 796d–1 of this title.

For the purpose of improving program management and effectiveness, the Secretary, in consultation with the Commissioner, shall evaluate all the programs authorized by this chapter, their general effectiveness in relation to their cost, their impact on related programs, and their structure and mechanisms for delivery of services, using appropriate methodology and evaluative research designs. The Secretary shall establish and use standards for the evaluations required by this subsection. The standards shall, to the extent feasible, for all appropriate programs include standards relating to the increases in employment and earnings, taking into account economic factors in the area to be served by the program, the characteristics of the individuals with disabilities to be served, and the employment outcomes to be attained. Evaluations shall be conducted by persons not immediately involved in the administration of the program or project evaluated.

In carrying out evaluations under this section, the Secretary shall obtain the opinions of program and project participants about the strengths and weaknesses of the programs and projects.

The Secretary shall annually publish summaries of the results of evaluative research and evaluations of program and project impact and effectiveness, including the standards used for such evaluations, the full contents of which shall be available to the Congress and the public.

The Secretary shall take the necessary action to assure that all studies, evaluations, proposals, and data produced or developed with Federal funds shall become the property of the United States.

Such information as the Secretary may deem necessary for purposes of the evaluations conducted under this section shall be made available upon request of the Secretary, by the departments and agencies of the executive branch.

(1) To assess the linkages between vocational rehabilitation services and economic and noneconomic outcomes, the Secretary shall continue to conduct a longitudinal study of a national sample of applicants for the services.

(2) The study shall address factors related to attrition and completion of the program through which the services are provided and factors within and outside the program affecting results. Appropriate comparisons shall be used to contrast the experiences of similar persons who do not obtain the services.

(3) The study shall be planned to cover the period beginning on the application of the individuals for the services, through the eligibility determination and provision of services for the individuals, and a further period of not less than 2 years after the termination of services 1

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §14, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(10), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2986; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §103, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 17; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §§103(d)(2)(C), 106, title X, §1001(a)(5), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1812, 1841; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(p)(5), 107, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4356, 4362.)

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 781 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2977.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §107(2)(C), inserted “, and the employment outcomes to be attained” before period at end of third sentence.

Pub. L. 102–569, §107(2)(B), which directed substitution of “, the characteristics” for “and the characteristics” in third sentence, could not be executed because “and the characteristics” did not appear subsequent to amendment by Pub. L. 102–569, §107(2)(A). See below.

Pub. L. 102–569, §107(2)(A), substituted “program, the characteristics” for “program and the characteristics” in third sentence.

Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(5), 107(1), substituted “Secretary, in consultation with the Commissioner,” for “Commissioner” before “shall evaluate”, “Secretary” for “Commissioner” before “shall establish”, and “disabilities” for “handicaps” after “individuals with”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §107(1)(B), (3), substituted “the Secretary shall obtain the opinions” for “the Commissioner shall, whenever possible, arrange to obtain the opinions”.

Subsecs. (c) to (e). Pub. L. 102–569, §107(1)(B), substituted “Secretary” for “Commissioner” wherever appearing.

Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §107(4), added subsec. (f) and redesignated former subsec. (f) as (g).

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(f)(1), inserted comma after “earnings”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–630, §201(f)(2), substituted “evaluations of program” for “evaluation of program”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 106(a), (c), substituted provision that the Commissioner evaluate all programs authorized by this chapter for the purpose of improving program management and effectiveness, using appropriate methodology and evaluative research designs, for provision that the Secretary evaluate the impact of all authorized programs and their general effectiveness in achieving stated goals, including, where appropriate, comparisons with appropriate control groups composed of persons who had not participated in such programs, “The Commissioner shall establish” for “The Secretary shall establish”, and “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §106(c), substituted “the Commissioner” for “the Secretary”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §106(b), (c), substituted “The Commissioner” for “The Secretary” and inserted “including the standards used for such evaluations,” after “effectiveness,”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–506, §106(c), substituted “The Commissioner” for “The Secretary”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(a)(5)(B), substituted “upon request of the Commissioner” for “to him, upon request”.

Pub. L. 99–506, §§106(c), 1001(a)(5)(A), made identical amendments, substituting “as the Commissioner may deem necessary” for “as the Secretary may deem necessary”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221 inserted provisions requiring the Secretary to establish and use standards for the evaluations required by this subsection, with such standards, to the extent feasible, for all appropriate programs to include standards relating to the increases in employment and earnings taking into account economic factors in the area to be served by the program and the characteristics of the handicapped individuals to be served.

Section 402 of Pub. L. 95–602, as amended by Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(c)(2), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 19, provided that the Secretary, after consultation with the Commissioner of the Rehabilitation Services Administration, Assistant Secretary of Education for the Office of Special Education and Rehabilitation Services, the Director of the National Institute on Handicapped Research, and other appropriate officials, organizations, and individuals, conduct a study of the special problems and needs of handicapped individuals who reside in rural areas in the United States, and upon the completion of such study, but not later than eighteen months after the date of Nov. 6, 1978, submit the results of such study, together with such recommendations as deemed appropriate to the President, and to the appropriate committees of the Congress.

Section 403 of Pub. L. 95–602 provided that, in consultation with appropriate Federal departments and agencies, the Secretary conduct a study of possible ways to structure Federal programs providing benefits to handicapped individuals in order to eliminate any disincentives for individuals receiving benefits under such programs to obtain and continue in employment, and upon the completion of such study, but not later than twenty-four months after Nov. 6, 1978, submit the results of such study, together with such recommendations as deemed appropriate to the President and the Congress.

This section is referred to in section 706 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a period.

The Secretary shall establish a central clearinghouse for information and resource availability for individuals with disabilities which shall provide information and data regarding (1) the location, provision, and availability of services and programs for individuals with disabilities, (2) research and recent medical and scientific developments bearing on disabilities (and their prevention, amelioration, causes, and cures), and (3) the current numbers of individuals with disabilities and their needs. The clearinghouse shall also provide any other relevant information and data which the Secretary considers appropriate.

The Commissioner may assist the Secretary to develop within the Department of Education a coordinated system of information and data retrieval, which will have the capacity and responsibility to provide information regarding the information and data referred to in subsection (a) of this section to the Congress, public and private agencies and organizations, individuals with disabilities and their families, professionals in fields serving such individuals, and the general public.

The office established to carry out the provisions of this section shall be known as the “Office of Information and Resources for Individuals with Disabilities”.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §15, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(10), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2986; amended Pub. L. 96–374, title XIII, §1322, Oct. 3, 1980, 94 Stat. 1499; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(a)(1), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(6), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4356.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(6)(A), (B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing and “scientific developments bearing on disabilities” for “scientific developments bearing on handicapping conditions”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(6)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(6)(C), substituted “Individuals with Disabilities” for “the Handicapped”.

1986—Subsecs. (a), (b). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

1984—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Department of Education” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–374, §1322(a), substituted “The Secretary shall establish” for “The Secretary may establish”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 96–374, §1322(b), substituted “The office” for “Any office”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–374 effective Oct. 1, 1980, see section 1393(a) of Pub. L. 96–374, set out as a note under section 1001 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 706, 712 of this title.

(a) Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, no funds appropriated under this chapter for any research program or activity may be used for any purpose other than that for which the funds were specifically authorized.

(b) No more than 1 percent of funds appropriated for discretionary grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements authorized by this chapter may be used for the purpose of providing non-Federal panels of experts to review applications for such grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §16, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(a)(10), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2987; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §107, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1812; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §108(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4363.)

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “1 percent” for “one-half of 1 percent”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “Transfer of funds” for “Use of funds” in section catchline and amended text generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “No funds appropriated under this chapter for any research program or activity may be used for any purpose other than that for which the funds were specifically authorized.”

The application of any State rule or policy relating to the administration or operation of programs funded by this chapter (including any rule or policy based on State interpretation of any Federal law, regulation, or guideline) shall be identified as a State imposed requirement.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §17, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §108(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1812.)

Applications for grants or contracts in excess of $60,000 in the aggregate authorized to be funded under this chapter, other than grants or contracts for evaluations, dissemination, or conferences, shall be reviewed by panels of experts which shall include a majority of non-Federal members. Non-Federal members may be provided travel, per diem, and consultant fees not to exceed the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §18, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §109(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1813; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §201(g), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §108(b), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4363.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the rate provided for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332”.

1988—Pub. L. 100–630 inserted comma after “this chapter” and after “conferences”.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, and notwithstanding any other provision of law—

(1) any funds appropriated for a fiscal year to carry out any grant program under part B or C of subchapter I of this chapter, section 794e of this title (except as provided in section 794e(b) of this title), part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, subpart 2 or 3 of part A of subchapter VII of this chapter, or part B of subchapter VII of this chapter (except as provided in section 796k(b) of this title), including any funds reallotted under any such grant program, that are not obligated and expended by recipients prior to the beginning of the succeeding fiscal year; or

(2) any amounts of program income, including reimbursement payments under the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 301 et seq.), received by recipients under any grant program specified in paragraph (1) that are not obligated and expended by recipients prior to the beginning of the fiscal year succeeding the fiscal year in which such amounts were received,

shall remain available for obligation and expenditure by such recipients during such succeeding fiscal year.

Such funds shall remain available for obligation and expenditure by a recipient as provided in subsection (a) of this section only to the extent that the recipient complied with any Federal share requirements applicable to the program for the fiscal year for which the funds were appropriated.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §19, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §109(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4363; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §104, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 719.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 7 (§301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–73 amended heading and text of subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, and notwithstanding any other provision of law, any funds appropriated for a fiscal year to carry out any grant program under part B or C of subchapter I of this chapter, section 794e of this title, part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, or subpart 2 or 3 of part A of subchapter VII of this chapter, that are not obligated and expended by recipients prior to the beginning of the succeeding fiscal year shall remain available for obligation and expenditure by such recipients during such succeeding fiscal year.”

All programs, including community rehabilitation programs, and projects, that provide services to individuals with disabilities under this chapter shall advise such individuals who are applicants for or recipients of the services, or the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, of the availability and purposes of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title, including information on means of seeking assistance under such program.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §20, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §110(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4363; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §105, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 719.)

1993—Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “such individuals who are applicants for or recipients of the services” for “such individuals”.

With respect to the programs authorized in subchapters II through VIII of this chapter, the Congress finds as follows:

The racial profile of America is rapidly changing. While the rate of increase for white Americans is 3.2 percent, the rate of increase for racial and ethnic minorities is much higher: 38.6 percent for Latinos, 14.6 percent for African-Americans, and 40.1 percent for Asian-Americans and other ethnic groups. By the year 2000, the Nation will have 260,000,000 people, one of every three of whom will be either African-American, Latino, or Asian-American.

Ethnic and racial minorities tend to have disabling conditions at a disproportionately high rate. The rate of work-related disability for American Indians is about one and one-half times that of the general population. African-Americans are also one and one-half times more likely to be disabled than whites and twice as likely to be severely disabled.

Patterns of inequitable treatment of minorities have been documented in all major junctures of the vocational rehabilitation process. As compared to white Americans, a larger percentage of African-American applicants to the vocational rehabilitation system is denied acceptance. Of applicants accepted for service, a larger percentage of African-American cases is closed without being rehabilitated. Minorities are provided less training than their white counterparts. Consistently, less money is spent on minorities than on their white counterparts.

Recruitment efforts within vocational rehabilitation at the level of pre-service training, continuing education, and in-service training must focus on bringing larger numbers of minorities into the profession in order to provide appropriate practitioner knowledge, role models, and sufficient manpower to address the clearly changing demography of vocational rehabilitation.

The Commissioner shall develop a policy to mobilize the resources of the Nation to prepare minorities for careers in vocational rehabilitation, independent living, and related services.

This policy shall focus on—

(A) the recruitment of minorities into the field of vocational rehabilitation counseling and related disciplines; and

(B) financially assisting Historically Black Colleges and Universities, Hispanic-serving institutions of higher education, and other institutions of higher education whose minority enrollment is at least 50 percent to prepare students for vocational rehabilitation and related service careers.

The Commissioner shall develop a plan to provide outreach services and other related activities (such as cooperative efforts) to the entities described in subparagraph (B) in order to enhance the capacity and increase the participation of such entities in competitions for grants, contracts, and cooperative agreements under subchapters I through VIII of this chapter.

The entities referred to in subparagraph (A) are—

(i) Historically Black Colleges and Universities, Hispanic-serving institutions of higher education, and other institutions of higher education whose minority student enrollment is at least 50 percent;

(ii) nonprofit and for-profit agencies at least 51 percent owned or controlled by one or more minority individuals; and

(iii) underrepresented populations.

For the purpose of implementing the plan required in subparagraph (A), the Commissioner shall, for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997, expend 1 percent of the funds appropriated for the fiscal year involved for carrying out programs authorized in subchapters II through VIII of this chapter, except programs authorized under subchapter IV or V of this chapter.

The Commissioner shall exercise the utmost authority, resourcefulness, and diligence to meet the requirements of this section.

Not later than January 31 of each year, starting with fiscal year 1994, the Commissioner shall prepare and submit to Congress a final report on the progress toward meeting the goals of this section during the preceding fiscal year.

The report shall include—

(i) a full explanation of any progress toward meeting the goals of this section; and

(ii) a plan to meet the goals, if necessary.

In awarding grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements under subchapters I, II, III, VI, VII, and VIII of this chapter, and section 794e of this title, the Commissioner and the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research, where appropriate, shall require applicants to demonstrate how they will address, in whole or in part, the needs of individuals with disabilities from minority backgrounds.

(Pub. L. 93–112, §21, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §111(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4363; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §106, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 719.)

1993—Subsec. (b)(3) to (6). Pub. L. 103–73 redesignated the par. (3) relating to Commissioner's effort to meet requirements of this section as par. (4) and redesignated former pars. (4) and (5) as (5) and (6), respectively.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b, 762, 795j, 795*l*, 795n, 795*o*, 796, 796c, 2231, 2243 of this title; title 20 section 1413; title 42 sections 422, 1382d.

(1) Congress finds that—

(A) work—

(i) is a valued activity, both for individuals and society; and

(ii) fulfills the need of an individual to be productive, promotes independence, enhances self-esteem, and allows for participation in the mainstream of life in America;

(B) as a group, individuals with disabilities experience staggering levels of unemployment and poverty;

(C) individuals with disabilities, including individuals with the most severe disabilities, have demonstrated their ability to achieve gainful employment in integrated settings if appropriate services and supports are provided;

(D) reasons for the significant number of individuals with disabilities not working, or working at a level not commensurate with their abilities and capabilities, include—

(i) discrimination;

(ii) lack of accessible and available transportation;

(iii) fear of losing health coverage under the medicare and medicaid programs under titles XVIII and XIX of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1395 et seq. and 1396 et seq.) or fear of losing existing private health insurance; and

(iv) lack of education, training, and supports to meet job qualification standards necessary to enter or retain or advance in employment;

(E) enforcement of subchapter V of this chapter and of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) holds the promise of ending discrimination for individuals with disabilities; and

(F) the provision of vocational rehabilitation services can enable individuals with disabilities, including individuals with the most severe disabilities, to pursue meaningful careers by securing gainful employment commensurate with their abilities and capabilities.

(2) The purpose of this subchapter is to assist States in operating a comprehensive, coordinated, effective, efficient, and accountable program of vocational rehabilitation that is designed to assess, plan, develop, and provide vocational rehabilitation services for individuals with disabilities, consistent with their strengths, resources, priorities, concerns, abilities, and capabilities, so that such individuals may prepare for and engage in gainful employment.

(3) It is the policy of the United States that such a program shall be carried out in a manner consistent with the following principles:

(A) Individuals with disabilities, including individuals with the most severe disabilities, are generally presumed to be capable of engaging in gainful employment and the provision of individualized vocational rehabilitation services can improve their ability to become gainfully employed.

(B) Individuals with disabilities must be provided the opportunities to obtain gainful employment in integrated settings.

(C) Individuals with disabilities must be active participants in their own rehabilitation programs, including making meaningful and informed choices about the selection of their vocational goals and objectives and the vocational rehabilitation services they receive.

(D) Families and natural supports can play an important role in the success of a vocational rehabilitation program, if the individual with a disability requests, desires, or needs such supports.

(E) Qualified vocational rehabilitation counselors, other qualified rehabilitation personnel, and other qualified personnel facilitate the accomplishment of the employment goals and objectives of an individual.

(F) Individuals with disabilities and their advocates are full partners in the vocational rehabilitation program and must be involved on a regular basis and in a meaningful manner with respect to policy development and implementation.

(G) Accountability measures must facilitate and not impede the accomplishment of the goals and objectives of the program, including providing vocational rehabilitation services to, among others, individuals with the most severe disabilities.

(1) For the purpose of making grants to States under part B of this subchapter (other than grants under section 732 of this title) to assist States in meeting the costs of vocational rehabilitation services provided in accordance with State plans under section 721 of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for fiscal years 1993 through 1997, except that the amount to be appropriated for a fiscal year shall not be less than the amount of the appropriation under this subsection for the immediately preceding fiscal year, plus the amount of the Consumer Price Index addition determined under subsection (c) of this section for the immediately preceding fiscal year.

(2) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part C of this subchapter such sums as may be necessary for fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(1) No later than November 15 of each fiscal year (beginning with the fiscal year 1979), the Secretary of Labor shall publish in the Federal Register the percentage change in the Consumer Price Index published for October of the preceding fiscal year and October of the fiscal year in which such publication is made.

(2)(A) If in any fiscal year the percentage change published under paragraph (1) indicates an increase in the Consumer Price Index, then the amount to be appropriated under subsection (b) of this section for the subsequent fiscal year shall be at least the amount appropriated for the fiscal year in which the publication is made under paragraph (1) increased by such percentage change.

(B) If in any fiscal year the percentage change published under paragraph (1) does not indicate an increase in the Consumer Price Index, then the amount to be appropriated under subsection (b) of this section for the subsequent fiscal year shall be at least the amount appropriated for the fiscal year in which the publication is made under paragraph (1).

(3) For purposes of this section, the term “Consumer Price Index” means the Consumer Price Index for All Urban Consumers, published monthly by the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

(1)(A) Unless the Congress in the regular session which ends prior to the beginning of the terminal fiscal year—

(i) of the authorization of appropriations for the program authorized by the State grant program under part B of this subchapter; or

(ii) of the duration of the program authorized by the State grant program under part B of this subchapter;

has passed legislation which would have the effect of extending the authorization or duration (as the case may be) of such program, such authorization is automatically extended for one additional year for the program authorized by this subchapter.

(B) The amount authorized to be appropriated for the additional fiscal year described in subparagraph (A) shall be an amount equal to the amount appropriated for such program for fiscal year 1997, plus the amount of the Consumer Price Index addition determined under subsection (c) of this section for the immediately preceding fiscal year.

(2)(A) For the purposes of subdivision (i) of paragraph (1), the Congress shall not have been deemed to have passed legislation unless such legislation becomes law.

(B) In any case where the Commissioner is required under an applicable statute to carry out certain acts or make certain determinations which are necessary for the continuation of the program authorized by this subchapter, if such acts or determinations are required during the terminal year of such program, such acts and determinations shall be required during any fiscal year in which that part of paragraph (1) of this subsection which follows subdivision (ii) of paragraph (1) is in operation.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §100, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 363; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §102(a), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1618; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §102(a), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3; Pub. L. 94–230, §§2(a), 11(b)(2), (3), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211, 213; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §101(a), (b), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2955; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §111(a)–(d), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 19; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title II, §201, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1813; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–52, §2(a), (b)(1), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 260; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §121(a), (b), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4365, 4367.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(D)(iii), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles XVIII and XIX of the Act are classified generally to subchapters XVIII (§1395 et seq.) and XIX (§1396 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(E), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 31 and 42–1 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §121(a)(1), amended section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §121(a)(2), added subsec. (a) and struck out former subsec. (a) which read as follows: “The purpose of this subchapter is to authorize grants to assist States to meet the current and future needs of individuals with handicaps, so that such individuals may prepare for and engage in gainful employment to the extent of their capabilities.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §121(b)(1), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting provisions authorizing appropriations necessary to carry out parts B and C for fiscal years 1993 to 1997 for provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal years 1987 to 1992.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A), (B). Pub. L. 102–569, §121(b)(2), substituted “to be appropriated under subsection (b) of this section for the subsequent fiscal year shall be at least the amount” for “authorized to be appropriated under subsection (b)(1) of this section for the subsequent fiscal year is the amount authorized to be”.

Subsec. (d)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §121(b)(3), substituted “1997,” for “1992, or the amount authorized to be appropriated for such program for fiscal year 1992, whichever is higher,”.

1991—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 102–52, §2(a)(1)(A), substituted “are authorized” for “is authorized” and “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–52, §2(a)(1)(B), substituted “1992” for “1991”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(C). Pub. L. 102–52, §2(a)(1)(C), struck out “and” after “1990,” and inserted “, and $1,875,512,100 for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–52, §2(b)(1), substituted “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

Subsec. (d)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–52, §2(a)(2), substituted “1992” for “1991” in two places.

1988—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(a)(1), struck out par. (3) which read as follows: “For the purpose of making grants to Indian tribes under part D of this subchapter, there are authorized to be appropriated for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986, in addition to any other amounts authorized to be appropriated under this section, such sums as may be necessary for such fiscal year, but not more than an amount equal to 1 percent of the amount appropriated for that fiscal year under paragraph (1) of this subsection.”

Subsec. (c)(1), (2)(A), (B). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(a)(2)(A), substituted “Consumer Price Index” for “price index”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(a)(2), substituted “section” for “subsection” and “Consumer Price Index” for “price index”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(a)(3), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “Unless the Congress in the regular session which ends prior to the beginning of the terminal fiscal year—

“(A) of the authorization of appropriations for the program authorized by the State grant program under part B of this subchapter; or

“(B) of the duration of the program authorized by the State grant program under part B of this subchapter;

either—

“(i) has passed or has formally rejected legislation which would have the effect of extending the authorization or duration (as the case may be) of that program; or

“(ii) by action of either the House of Representatives or the Senate, approves a resolution stating that the provisions of this section shall no longer apply to such program;

such authorization or duration is automatically extended for one additional fiscal year for the program authorized by this subchapter. The amount appropriated for the additional year shall be the amount which the Congress could, under the terms of the law for which the appropriation is made, have appropriated based upon the amount authorized for fiscal year 1991 and the amount authorized under subsection (c) of this section.”

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §201(a), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows:

“(A) For the purpose of making grants to States under part B of this subchapter (other than grants under section 732 of this title) to assist them in meeting the costs of vocational rehabilitation services provided in accordance with State plans under section 721 of this title, there is authorized to be appropriated $1,037,800,000 for the fiscal year 1984, and the amount determined under subsection (c) of this section for each of the fiscal years 1985, 1986, and 1987.

“(B) In addition, there are authorized to be appropriated for such purpose such additional sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1985 and 1986. Any amount appropriated pursuant to this subparagraph shall be allocated in accordance with section 730(a)(4) of this title.

“(C) In no event may the amount appropriated for the purpose of making grants to States under part B of this subchapter (other than section 732 of this title) be more than $1,117,500,000 for the fiscal year 1985 and $1,203,200,000 for the fiscal year 1986.”

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §201(b), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “For the purpose of allotments under section 740(a)(1) of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986. There are further authorized to be appropriated for such purpose for each such year such additional sums as the Congress may determine to be necessary.”

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §201(c), substituted “fiscal year 1991” for “fiscal year 1986” in concluding provisions.

1984—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(a), inserted exception for grants under section 732 of this title, substituted provisions authorizing appropriations of $1,037,800,000 for fiscal year 1984 and of amounts determined under subsec. (c) of this section for each of the fiscal years 1985, 1986, and 1987, authorizing necessary additional amounts for each of the fiscal years 1985 and 1986, and setting upper limits on the amounts appropriated to make grants under part B of this subchapter other than section 732 of this title for fiscal years 1985 and 1986 for provisions which had formerly authorized appropriations for fiscal years 1974 through 1982 and had set upper limits on the amount appropriated for fiscal years 1980, 1981, and 1982.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(b), substituted provisions authorizing appropriations of such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986 for provisions which had formerly authorized appropriations for fiscal years 1979, 1980, 1981, and 1982.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(c), substituted “each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986” for “the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, and for each of the three fiscal years thereafter”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(d), added subsec. (d).

1978—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(a)(1), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations of $808,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1979 and for amounts determined under subsec. (c) for the succeeding three fiscal years providing that the amounts appropriated not exceed $880,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1980, $945,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1981, and $972,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1982.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(a)(2), substituted provision authorizing appropriations for allotments under section 740(a)(1) of this title of $45,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1979, $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1980, $55,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1981, and $60,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1982 for provision authorizing appropriations for carrying out part C of this subchapter (relating to grants to States and public and nonprofit agencies) and former part D of this subchapter (relating to a comprehensive study of the needs of the most severely handicapped) of $37,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1974, $39,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1975, $42,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, and $25,000,000 for the fiscal years ending Sept. 30, 1977 and Sept. 30, 1978, but restricting the amount available in each fiscal year for carrying out former part D to $1,000,000.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(a)(3), added par. (3).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(b), added subsec. (c).

1976—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 94–230, §2(a)(1), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations of $740,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(2), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations of $760,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 94–230, §2(a)(2), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations of $25,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(3), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations of $25,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1974—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 93–516, §102(a)(1), inserted provisions authorizing appropriation of $720,000,000 for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–651, §102(a)(1), amended subsec. (b)(1) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 93–516, §102(a)(2), inserted provisions authorizing appropriation of $42,000,000 for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–651, §102(a)(2), amended subsec. (b)(2) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Section 11(a), (b)(1), (c) of Pub. L. 94–230 provided that:

“(a) Unless the Congress, before April 15, 1977, has passed legislation which would have the effect of extending the authorization of each program and activity the authorization for which is extended through the fiscal year ending September 30, 1977, by the amendments made by section 2 through section 10 [amending sections 720, 732, 741, 761, 771, 772, 774, 775, 783, 785, and 792 of this title], each such authorization shall be automatically extended through the fiscal year ending September 30, 1978, in accordance with the amendments made by subsection (b).

“(b)(1) The amendments made by this subsection [amending sections 720, 732, 761, 771, 772, 774, 775, 783, 785, and 792 of this title] shall take effect at the close of April 15, 1977, unless the Congress has passed legislation in accordance with the provisions of subsection (a).

“(c) For purposes of this section, the Congress shall not have been deemed to have passed legislation unless such legislation becomes law.”

This section is referred to in sections 730, 732, 744, 794e, 796e, 796f of this title; title 42 sections 6025, 6042, 10822.

In order to be eligible to participate in programs under this subchapter, a State shall submit to the Commissioner a State plan for vocational rehabilitation services for a 3-year period, or shall submit the plan on such date, and at such regular intervals, as the Secretary may determine to be appropriate to coincide with the intervals at which the State submits State plans under other Federal laws, such as part B of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1411 et seq.). In order to be eligible to participate in programs under this subchapter, a State, upon the request of the Commissioner, shall make such annual revisions in the plan as may be necessary. Each such plan shall—

(A) designate a State agency as the sole State agency to administer the plan, or to supervise its administration by a local agency, except that (i) where, under the State's law, the State agency for individuals who are blind or other agency which provides assistance or services to adults who are blind is authorized to provide vocational rehabilitation services to such individuals, such agency may be designated as the sole State agency to administer the part of the plan under which vocational rehabilitation services are provided for individuals who are blind (or to supervise the administration of such part by a local agency) and a separate State agency may be designated as the sole State agency with respect to the rest of the State plan, (ii) the Commissioner, upon the request of a State, may authorize such agency to share funding and administrative responsibility with another agency of the State or with a local agency in order to permit such agencies to carry out a joint program to provide services to individuals with disabilities, and may waive compliance with respect to vocational rehabilitation services furnished under such programs with the requirement of paragraph (4) of this subsection that the plan be in effect in all political subdivisions of that State, and (iii) in the case of American Samoa, the appropriate State agency shall be the Governor of American Samoa;

(B) provide that the State agency so designated to administer or supervise the administration of the State plan, or (if there are two State agencies designated under subparagraph (A) of this paragraph) to supervise or administer the part of the State plan that does not relate to services for individuals who are blind, shall be (i) a State agency primarily concerned with vocational rehabilitation, or vocational and other rehabilitation, of individuals with disabilities, (ii) the State agency administering or supervising the administration of education or vocational education in the State, or (iii) a State agency which includes at least two other major organizational units each of which administers one or more of the major public education, public health, public welfare, or labor programs of the State;

provide, except in the case of agencies described in paragraph (1)(B)(i)—

(A) that the State agency designated pursuant to paragraph (1) (or each State agency if two are so designated) shall include a vocational rehabilitation bureau, division, or other organizational unit which (i) is primarily concerned with vocational rehabilitation, or vocational and other rehabilitation, of individuals with disabilities, and is responsible for the vocational rehabilitation program of such State agency, (ii) has a full-time director, and (iii) has a staff employed on such rehabilitation work of such organizational unit all or substantially all of whom are employed full time on such work; and

(B)(i) that such unit shall be located at an organizational level and shall have an organizational status within such State agency comparable to that of other major organizational units of such agency, or (ii) in the case of an agency described in paragraph (1)(B)(ii), either that such unit shall be so located and have such status, or that the director of such unit shall be the executive officer of such State agency; except that, in the case of a State which has designated only one State agency pursuant to paragraph (1) of this subsection, such State may, if it so desires, assign responsibility for the part of the plan under which vocational rehabilitation services are provided for individuals who are blind to one organizational unit of such agency, and assign responsibility for the rest of the plan to another organizational unit of such agency, with the provisions of this paragraph applying separately to each of such units;

provide for financial participation by the State, or if the State so elects, by the State and local agencies to meet the amount of the non-Federal share;

provide that the plan shall be in effect in all political subdivisions, except that in the case of any activity which, in the judgment of the Commissioner, is likely to assist in promoting the vocational rehabilitation of substantially larger numbers of individuals with disabilities or groups of individuals with disabilities the Commissioner may waive compliance with the requirement herein that the plan be in effect in all political subdivisions of the State to the extent and for such period as may be provided in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Commissioner, but only if the non-Federal share of the cost of such vocational rehabilitation services is met from funds made available by a local agency (including, to the extent permitted by such regulations, funds contributed to such agency by a private agency, organization, or individual);

(A) contain the plans, policies, and methods to be followed in carrying out the State plan and in its administration and supervision, including the results of a comprehensive, Statewide assessment of the rehabilitation needs of individuals with severe disabilities residing within the State and the State's response to the assessment, a description of the method to be used to expand and improve services to individuals with the most severe disabilities, including individuals served under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, and a description of the method to be used to utilize community rehabilitation programs to the maximum extent feasible, an explanation of the methods by which the State will provide vocational rehabilitation services to all individuals with disabilities within the State who are eligible for such services, and, in the event that vocational rehabilitation services cannot be provided to all eligible individuals with disabilities who apply for such services, (i) show and provide the justification for the order to be followed in selecting individuals to whom vocational rehabilitation services will be provided,,1 and (ii) show the outcomes and service goals,,1 and the time within which they may be achieved, for the rehabilitation of such individuals, which order of selection for the provision of vocational rehabilitation services shall be determined on the basis of serving first those individuals with the most severe disabilities in accordance with criteria established by the State, and shall be consistent with priorities in such order of selection so determined, and outcome and service goals for serving individuals with disabilities, established in regulations prescribed by the Commissioner;

(B) provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that the State has studied and considered a broad variety of means for providing services to individuals with the most severe disabilities, including the use of funds under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter to supplement funds under part B of this subchapter to pay for the cost of services leading to supported employment; and

(C) describe—

(i) how a broad range of rehabilitation technology services will be provided at each stage of the rehabilitation process;

(ii) how a broad range of such rehabilitation technology services will be provided on a statewide basis; and

(iii) the training that will be provided to vocational rehabilitation counselors, client assistance personnel, and other related services personnel;

(A) provide for such methods of administration, other than methods relating to the establishment and maintenance of personnel standards, as are found by the Commissioner to be necessary for the proper and efficient administration of the plan (including a requirement that the State agency and facilities in receipt of assistance under this subchapter shall take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified individuals with disabilities covered under, and on the same terms and conditions as set forth in, section 793 of this title); and

(B) provide satisfactory assurances that facilities used in connection with the delivery of services assisted under the plan will comply with the Act of August 12, 1968, commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 [42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq.], with section 794 of this title, and with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.];

(A) include a description (consistent with the purposes of this chapter) of a comprehensive system of personnel development, which shall include—

(i) a description of the procedures and activities the State agency will undertake to ensure an adequate supply of qualified State rehabilitation professionals and paraprofessionals for the designated State unit, including the development and maintenance of a system for determining, on an annual basis—

(I) the number and type of personnel that are employed by the State agency in the provision of vocational rehabilitation services, including ratios of counselors to clients; and

(II) the number and type of personnel needed by the State, and a projection of the numbers of such personnel that will be needed in 5 years, based on projections of the number of individuals to be served, the number of such personnel who are expected to retire or leave the field, and other relevant factors;

(ii) where appropriate, a description of the manner in which activities will be undertaken through this section to coordinate the system of personnel development with personnel development under the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.);

(iii) a description of the development and maintenance of a system of determining, on an annual basis, information on the institutions of higher education within the State that are preparing rehabilitation professionals, including—

(I) the numbers of students enrolled in such programs; and

(II) the number who graduated with certification or licensure, or with credentials to qualify for certification or licensure, during the past year;

(iv) a description of the development, updating, and implementation of a plan that—

(I) will address the current and projected vocational rehabilitation services personnel training needs for the designated State unit; and

(II) provides for the coordination and facilitation of efforts between the designated State unit and institutions of higher education (as defined in section 1141(a) of title 20) and professional associations to recruit, prepare and retain qualified personnel, including personnel from minority backgrounds, and personnel who are individuals with disabilities; and

(v) a description of the procedures and activities the State agency will undertake to ensure that all personnel employed by the designated State unit are appropriately and adequately trained and prepared, including—

(I) a system for the continuing education of rehabilitation professionals and paraprofessionals within the designated State unit, particularly with respect to rehabilitation technology; and

(II) procedures for acquiring and disseminating to rehabilitation professionals and paraprofessionals within the designated State unit significant knowledge from research and other sources, including procedures for providing training regarding the amendments to this chapter made by the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992;

(B) set forth policies and procedures relating to the establishment and maintenance of standards to ensure that personnel, including professionals and paraprofessionals, needed within the State agency to carry out this part are appropriately and adequately prepared and trained, including—

(i) the establishment and maintenance of standards that are consistent with any national or State approved or recognized certification, licensing, registration, or other comparable requirements that apply to the area in which such personnel are providing vocational rehabilitation services; and

(ii) to the extent such standards are not based on the highest requirements in the State applicable to a specific profession or discipline, the steps the State is taking to require the retraining or hiring of personnel within the designated State unit that meet appropriate professional requirements in the State; and

(C) contain provisions relating to the establishment and maintenance of minimum standards to ensure the availability of personnel within the designated State unit, to the maximum extent feasible, trained to communicate in the native language or mode of communication of the client;

provide, at a minimum, for the provision of the vocational rehabilitation services specified in paragraphs (1) through (3) and paragraph (12) of section 723(a) of this title, and for the provision of such other services as are specified under such section after a determination that comparable services and benefits are not available under any other program, except that such a determination shall not be required—

(A) if the determination would delay the provision of such services to any individual at extreme medical risk; or

(B) prior to the provision of such services if an immediate job placement would be lost due to a delay in the provision of such comparable benefits;

provided that—

(A) to the maximum extent appropriate, and consistent with the requirements of this chapter, existing information available from other programs and providers (particularly information used by education officials and the Social Security Administration) and information that can be provided by the individual with a disability or the family of the individual shall be used for purposes of determining eligibility for vocational rehabilitation services and for choosing rehabilitation goals, objectives, and services;

(B) an individualized written rehabilitation program meeting the requirements of section 722 of this title will be developed for each individual with a disability eligible for vocational rehabilitation services under this chapter;

(C) such services will be provided under the plan in accordance with such program; and

(D) records of the characteristics of each applicant will be kept specifying, as to those individuals who apply for services under this subchapter and are determined not to be eligible therefor, the reasons for such determinations in such detail as required by the Commissioner in order for the Commissioner to analyze and evaluate annually the reasons for and numbers of such ineligibility determinations as part of the Commissioner's responsibilities under section 712 of this title, and that the State agency will at least annually categorize and analyze such reasons and numbers and report this information to the Commissioner and will, not later than 12 months after each such determination, review each such ineligibility determination in accordance with the criteria set forth in section 722 of this title;

(A) provide that the State agency will make such reports in such form, containing such information (including the data described in subparagraph (D) of paragraph (9) of this subsection, periodic estimates of the population of individuals with disabilities eligible for services under this chapter in such State, specifications of the number of such individuals who will be served with funds provided under this chapter and the outcomes and service goals to be achieved for such individuals in each priority category specified in accordance with paragraph (5) of this subsection, and the service costs for each such category), and at such time as the Commissioner may require to carry out the functions of the Commissioner under this subchapter, and comply with such provisions as are necessary to assure the correctness and verification of such reports; and

(B) provide that reports under subparagraph (A) will include information on—

(i) the number of such individuals who are evaluated and the number rehabilitated;

(ii) the costs of administration, counseling, provision of direct services, development of community rehabilitation programs, and other functions carried out under this chapter; and

(iii) the utilization by such individuals of other programs pursuant to paragraph (11);

(A) provide for interagency cooperation with, and the utilization of the services and facilities of, the State agencies administering the State's public assistance programs, other programs for individuals with disabilities, veterans programs, community mental health programs, manpower programs, and public employment offices, and the Social Security Administration of the Department of Health and Human Services, the Department of Veterans Affairs, and other Federal, State, and local public agencies providing services related to the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities (specifically including arrangements for the coordination of services to individuals eligible for services under this chapter, the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.), the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.), and the Javits-Wagner-O'Day Act (41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.);

(B) provide that cooperation under subparagraph (A) shall include, to the extent practicable, means for providing training to staff of the agencies described in subparagraph (A) as to the availability and benefits of, and eligibility standards for, vocational rehabilitation services, in order to enhance the opportunity of individuals receiving the services described in subparagraph (A) to obtain vocational rehabilitation services; and

(C) in providing for interagency cooperation under subparagraph (A), provide for such cooperation by means including, if appropriate—

(i) establishing interagency working groups; and

(ii) entering into formal interagency cooperative agreements that—

(I) identify policies, practices, and procedures that can be coordinated among the agencies (particularly definitions, standards for eligibility, the joint sharing and use of evaluations and assessments, and procedures for making referrals);

(II) identify available resources and define the financial responsibility of each agency for paying for necessary services (consistent with State law) and procedures for resolving disputes between agencies; and

(III) include all additional components necessary to ensure meaningful cooperation and coordination;

(A) provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that, in the provision of vocational rehabilitation services, maximum utilization shall be made of public or other vocational or technical training programs or other appropriate resources in the community; and

(B) provide (as appropriate) for entering into agreements with the operators of community rehabilitation programs for the provision of services for the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities;

(A) provide that vocational rehabilitation services provided under the State plan shall be available to any civil employee of the United States who is disabled while in the performance of the employee's duty on the same terms and conditions as apply to other persons, and

(B) provide that special consideration will be given to the rehabilitation under this chapter of an individual with a disability whose disability was sustained in the line of duty while such individual was performing as a public safety officer if the proximate cause of such disability was a criminal act, apparent criminal act, or a hazardous condition resulting directly from the officer's performance of duties in direct connection with the enforcement, execution, and administration of law or fire prevention, firefighting, or related public safety activities;

provide that no residence requirement will be imposed which excludes from services under the plan any individual who is present in the State;

provide for continuing statewide studies of the needs of individuals with disabilities and how these needs may be most effectively met, including—

(A) a full needs assessment for serving individuals with severe disabilities;

(B) an assessment of the capacity and effectiveness of community rehabilitation programs, plans for improving such programs, and policies for the use thereof by the State agency;

(C) review of the efficacy of the criteria employed with respect to ineligibility determinations described in paragraph (9)(C) 2 of this subsection with a view toward the relative need for services to significant segments of the population of individuals with disabilities and the need for expansion of services to those individuals with the most severe disabilities; and

(D) outreach procedures to identify and serve individuals with disabilities who are minorities and individuals with disabilities who have been unserved or underserved by the vocational rehabilitation system;

provide for—

(A)(i) at least annual review and reevaluation of the status of each individual with a disability placed in an extended employment setting in a community rehabilitation program (including a workshop) or other employment under section 214(c) of this title, to determine the interests, priorities, and needs of the individual for employment, or training for competitive employment, in an integrated setting in the labor market; and

(ii) input into the review and reevaluation by the individual with a disability, or, in an appropriate case, a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of the individual, if the individual requests, desires, or needs assistance;

(B) maximum efforts, including the identification of vocational rehabilitation services, reasonable accommodations, and other support services, to enable such an individual to benefit from training or to be placed in employment in an integrated setting; and

(C) services designed to promote movement from extended employment to integrated employment, including supported employment, independent living, and community participation;

provide that if, under special circumstances, the State plan includes provisions for the construction of facilities for community rehabilitation programs—

(A) the Federal share of the cost of construction thereof for a fiscal year will not exceed an amount equal to 10 per centum of the State's allotment for such year,

(B) the provisions of section 776 of this title shall be applicable to such construction and such provisions shall be deemed to apply to such construction, and

(C) there shall be compliance with regulations the Commissioner shall prescribe designed to assure that no State will reduce its efforts in providing other vocational rehabilitation services (other than for the establishment of facilities for community rehabilitation programs) because its plan includes such provisions for construction;

provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that the State agency designated pursuant to paragraph (1) (or each State agency if two are so designated) and any sole local agency administering the plan in a political subdivision of the State will take into account, in connection with matters of general policy arising in the administration of the plan, the views of individuals and groups thereof who are recipients of vocational rehabilitation services (or, in appropriate cases, their parents or guardians), personnel working in the field of vocational rehabilitation, providers of vocational rehabilitation services, and the Director of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title;

provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that the continuing studies required under paragraph (15) of this subsection, as well as an annual evaluation of the effectiveness of the program in meeting the goals and priorities set forth in the plan, will form the basis for the submission, from time to time as the Commissioner may require, of appropriate amendments to the plan, and for developing and updating the strategic plan required under part C of this subchapter;

provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that, as appropriate, the State shall actively consult with Indian tribes and tribal organizations and native Hawaiian organizations in the development of the State plan, and that, except as otherwise provided in section 750 of this title, the State shall provide vocational rehabilitation services to American Indians who are individuals with disabilities residing in the State to the same extent as the State provides such services to other significant segments of the population of individuals with disabilities residing in the State;

provide that the State agency has the authority to enter into contracts with profitmaking organizations for the purpose of providing on-the-job training and related programs for individuals with disabilities under part B of subchapter VI of this chapter upon a determination by such agency that such profitmaking organizations are better qualified to provide such rehabilitation services than nonprofit agencies and organizations;

provide for the establishment and maintenance of information and referral programs (the staff of which shall include, to the maximum extent feasible, interpreters for individuals who are deaf) in sufficient numbers to assure that individuals with disabilities within the State are afforded accurate vocational rehabilitation information and appropriate referrals to other Federal and State programs and activities which would benefit them;

(A) provide satisfactory assurances that in the formulation of policies governing the provision of the rehabilitation services consistent with the State plan, and any revisions, that the State agency conducts public meetings throughout the State, after appropriate and sufficient notice, to allow interested groups and organizations and all segments of the public an opportunity to comment on the State plan before development of the plan by the State, (B) include a summary of such comments and the State agency's response to such comments, and (C) provide satisfactory assurances that the State agency will consult with the Director of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title in the formulation of policies governing the provision of vocational rehabilitation services consistent with the State plan and other revisions;

contain plans, policies, and procedures to be followed (including entering into a formal interagency cooperative agreement, in accordance with paragraph (11)(C)(ii), with education officials responsible for the provision of a free appropriate public education to students who are individuals with disabilities) that are designed to—

(A) facilitate the development and accomplishment of—

(i) long-term rehabilitation goals;

(ii) intermediate rehabilitation objectives; and

(iii) goals and objectives related to enabling a student to live independently before the student leaves a school setting,

to the extent the goals and objectives described in clauses (i) through (iii) are included in an individualized education program of the student, including the specification of plans for coordination with the educational agencies in the provision of transition services;

(B) facilitate the transition from the provision of a free appropriate public education under the responsibility of an educational agency to the provision of vocational rehabilitation services under the responsibility of the designated State unit, including the specification of plans for coordination with educational agencies in the provision of transition services authorized under section 723(a)(14) of this title to an individual, consistent with the individualized written rehabilitation program of the individual; and

(C) provide that such plans, policies, and procedures will address—

(i) provisions for determining State lead agencies and qualified personnel responsible for transition services;

(ii) procedures for outreach to and identification of youth in need of such services; and

(iii) a timeframe for evaluation and followup of youth who have received such services;

provide assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that the State has an acceptable plan for carrying out part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, including the use of funds under that part to supplement funds under part B of this subchapter for the cost of services leading to supported employment;

describe the manner in which on-the-job or other related personal assistance services will be provided to assist individuals with disabilities while the individuals are receiving vocational rehabilitation services;

describe the manner in which cooperative agreements with private nonprofit vocational rehabilitation service providers will be established;

identify the needs and utilization of community rehabilitation programs under the Act commonly known as the Wagner-O'Day Act (41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.);

describe the manner in which individuals with disabilities will be given choice and increased control in determining their vocational rehabilitation goals and objectives;

describe the manner in which students who are individuals with disabilities and who are not in special education programs can access and receive vocational rehabilitation services, where appropriate;

describe the manner in which assistive technology devices and services will be provided, or worksite assessments will be made as part of the assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs of an individual;

describe the manner in which the State will modify the policies and procedures of the State based on consumer satisfaction surveys conducted by the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council or independent commission described in paragraph (36);

provide for coordination and working relationships with the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title and independent living centers within the State;

provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that the State—

(A) has developed and implemented a strategic plan for expanding and improving vocational rehabilitation services for individuals with disabilities on a statewide basis in accordance with part C of this subchapter; and

(B) will use at least 1.5 percent of the allotment of the State under section 730 of this title for the uses described in section 743 of this title;

(A) describe how the system for evaluating the performance of rehabilitation counselors, coordinators, and other personnel used in the State facilitates the accomplishment of the purpose and policy of this subchapter, including the policy of serving, among others, individuals with the most severe disabilities; and

(B) provide satisfactory assurances that the system in no way impedes such accomplishment; and

provide satisfactory assurances to the Commissioner that—

(A)(i) the State has established a State Rehabilitation Advisory Council that meets the criteria set forth in section 725 of this title;

(ii) the designated State agency and the designated State unit seek and seriously consider on a regular and ongoing basis advice from the Council regarding the development and implementation of the State plan and the strategic plan and amendments to the plans, and other policies and procedures of general applicability pertaining to the provision of vocational rehabilitation services in the State;

(iii) the designated State agency includes, in its State plan or an amendment to the plan, a summary of advice provided by the Council, including recommendations from the annual report of the Council, the survey of consumer satisfaction, and other reports prepared by the Council, and the response of the designated State agency to such advice and recommendations (including explanations with respect to advice and recommendations that were rejected); and

(iv) the designated State unit transmits to the Council—

(I) all plans, reports, and other information required under the 3 chapter to be submitted to the Commissioner;

(II) all policies, practices, and procedures of general applicability provided to or used by rehabilitation personnel; and

(III) copies of due process hearing decisions, which shall be transmitted in such a manner as to preserve the confidentiality of the participants in the hearings;

(B) an independent commission—

(i) is responsible under State law for operating, or overseeing the operation of, the vocational rehabilitation program in the State;

(ii) is consumer-controlled by persons who—

(I) are individuals with physical or mental impairments that substantially limit major life activities; and

(II) represent individuals with a broad range of disabilities;

(iii) includes individuals representing family members, advocates, and authorized representatives of individuals with mental impairments; and

(iv) undertakes the function set forth in section 725(c)(3) of this title; or

(C) in the case of a State that, under subsection (a)(1)(A)(i) of this section, designates a State agency to administer the part of the State plan under which vocational rehabilitation services are provided for individuals who are blind and designates a separate State agency to administer the remainder of the State plan—

(i) an independent commission is responsible under State law for operating, or overseeing the operation of, the vocational rehabilitation programs of both such agencies and meets the requirements of clauses (ii) and (iv) of subparagraph (B);

(ii)(I) an independent commission is responsible under State law for operating, or overseeing the operation of, the vocational rehabilitation program in the State for individuals who are blind, is consumer-controlled by and represents individuals who are blind, and undertakes the function set forth in section 725(c)(3) of this title; and

(II) an independent commission is responsible under State law for operating, or overseeing the operation of, the vocational rehabilitation program in the State for all individuals with disabilities except for individuals who are blind and meets the requirements of clauses (ii) and (iv) of subparagraph (B); or

(iii)(I) an independent commission is responsible under State law for operating, or overseeing the operation of, the vocational rehabilitation program in the State for individuals who are blind, is consumer-controlled by and represents individuals who are blind, and undertakes the function set forth in section 725(c)(3) of this title; and

(II) the State has established a State Rehabilitation Advisory Council that meets the criteria set forth in section 725 of this title and carries out the duties of such a Council with respect to functions for, and services provided to, individuals with disabilities except for individuals who are blind.

The Commissioner shall approve any plan which the Commissioner finds fulfills the conditions specified in subsection (a) of this section, and shall disapprove any plan which does not fulfill such conditions. Prior to such disapproval, the Commissioner shall notify a State of the intention to disapprove its plan, and shall afford such State reasonable notice and opportunity for hearing.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §101, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 363; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(b)–(d), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619, 1620; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(b)–(d), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–5; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§102, 122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2957, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(a)(2), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(f), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2489; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2), title II, §202, title X, §1001(b)(1)–(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1814, 1841, 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3304; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(1)(A), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–119, §26(e), Oct. 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 607; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(*o*), (p)(7), 122, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4355, 4356, 4367; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §§102(2), 107(a), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 718, 719; Pub. L. 104–106, div. D, title XLIII, §4321(i)(7), Feb. 10, 1996, 110 Stat. 676.)

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1400 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. Part B of the Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§1411 et seq.) of chapter 33 of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

Act of August 12, 1968, commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, referred to in subsec. (a)(6)(B), is Pub. L. 90–480, Aug. 12, 1968, 82 Stat. 718, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§4151 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 4151 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(6)(B), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992, referred to in subsec. (a)(7)(A)(v)(II), is Pub. L. 102–569, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4344. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1992 Amendment note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

Paragraph (9)(C) of this subsection, referred to in subsec. (a)(15)(C), was redesignated paragraph (9)(D) of this subsection by Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §122(g)(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4370.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(11)(A), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Javits-Wagner-O'Day Act and the Wagner-O'Day Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(11)(A), (28), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 697, 52 Stat. 1196, as amended, which is classified to sections 46 to 48c of Title 41, Public Contracts. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 35, 41c, and 42–1 of this title.

1996—Subsec. (a)(11)(A). Pub. L. 104–106 substituted “the Javits-Wagner-O'Day Act (41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.)” for “the Act entitled ‘An Act to create a Committee on Purchases of Blind-made Products, and for other purposes’, approved June 25, 1938 (commonly known as the Wagner-O'Day Act; 41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.)”.

1993—Subsec. (a)(10)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(1), substituted “described in subparagraph (D)” for “described in subparagraph (C)”.

Subsec. (a)(13)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §102(2), made technical correction to Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(E). See 1992 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (a)(32). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(2), inserted “or independent commission described in paragraph (36)” after “Council”.

Subsec. (a)(34)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(3), substituted “section 730 of this title” for “part B of this subchapter”.

Subsec. (a)(36)(B)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(4)(A), amended cl. (i) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (i) read as follows: “is responsible under State law for overseeing the operation of the designated State agency;”.

Subsec. (a)(36)(C)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(4)(B)(i), amended cl. (i) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (i) read as follows: “an independent commission is responsible under State law for overseeing both such agencies and meets the requirements of subparagraph (B)(ii); or”.

Subsec. (a)(36)(C)(ii), (iii). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(a)(4)(B)(ii), added cls. (ii) and (iii) and struck out former cl. (ii) which read as follows:

“(I) an independent commission is responsible under State law for overseeing the first agency described in this subparagraph and meets the requirements of subparagraph (B)(ii); and

“(II) an independent commission is responsible under State law for overseeing the second State agency described in this subparagraph and is required by such State law to be consumer-controlled by individuals who are blind and to represent individuals who are blind.”

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(a), substituted “for a 3-year period, or shall submit the plan on such date, and at such regular intervals, as the Secretary may determine to be appropriate to coincide with the intervals at which the State submits State plans under other Federal laws, such as part B of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1411 et seq.). In order to be eligible to participate in programs under this subchapter, a State, upon the request of the Commissioner, shall make such annual revisions in the plan as may be necessary.” for “for a three-year period and, upon request of the Commissioner, shall make such annual revisions in the plan as may be necessary.”

Subsec. (a)(1)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(b), struck out “and” at end of cl. (i) and inserted “, and” and cl. (iii) before semicolon at end.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), (p)(7)(A)(i), (ii), in cl. (i), substituted “individuals who are blind” for “the blind” in two places and “adults who are blind” for “the adult blind” and in cl. (ii), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” and “paragraph (4)” for “clause (4)”.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), (2), (p)(7)(A)(i), (iii), substituted “subparagraph (A) of this paragraph” for “subclause (A) of this clause”, “individuals who are blind” for “the blind”, and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), (p)(7)(B), (C), in introductory provisions, substituted “paragraph” for “clause” in subpar. (A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”, and in subpar. (B), substituted “paragraph” for “clause” wherever appearing and “individuals who are blind” for “the blind”.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(c)(1), substituted “community rehabilitation programs to the maximum extent feasible, an explanation of the methods by which the State will provide vocational rehabilitation services to all individuals with disabilities within the State who are eligible for such services,” for “existing rehabilitation facilities to the maximum extent feasible;” and in cl. (ii), inserted “in accordance with criteria established by the State,” before “and shall be consistent”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(5)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(c)(2), inserted before semicolon at end “, including the use of funds under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter to supplement funds under part B of this subchapter to pay for the cost of services leading to supported employment”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(c)(3), added subpar. (C) and struck out former subpar. (C) which read as follows: “describe how rehabilitation engineering services will be provided to assist an increasing number of individuals with disabilities;”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(6)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(6)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(d), inserted before semicolon at end “, with section 794 of this title, and with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990”.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(e), amended par. (7) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (7) read as follows: “contain (A) provisions relating to the establishment and maintenance of personnel standards, which are consistent with any State licensure laws and regulations, including provisions relating to the tenure, selection, appointment, and qualifications of personnel, (B) provisions relating to the establishment and maintenance of minimum standards governing the facilities and qualified personnel utilized therein the provision of vocational rehabilitation services, but the Commissioner shall exercise no authority with respect to the selection, method of selection, tenure of office, or compensation of any individual employed in accordance with such provision, and (C) provisions relating to the establishment and maintenance of minimum standards to assure the availability of personnel, to the maximum extent feasible, trained to communicate in the client's native language or mode of communication;”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(f), substituted “except that such a determination shall not be required—” and subpars. (A) and (B) for “except that such determinations shall not be required where it would delay the provision of such services to any individual at extreme medical risk;”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), (3), substituted “paragraphs” for “clauses” and “paragraph” for “clause”.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(g), added subpar. (A), redesignated former subpars. (A) to (C) as (B) to (D), respectively, realigned margins, and substituted a semicolon for the comma at end of subpars. (B) and (C).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(D), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps” in cl. (A).

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(h), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A) and added subpar. (B).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), (2), (p)(7)(C), substituted “subparagraph” for “subclause”, “paragraph” for “clause” in two places, and “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(i), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A), substituted “provide for interagency cooperation” for “provide for entering into cooperative arrangements” and “(20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.), the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.), and the Act entitled ‘An Act to create a Committee on Purchases of Blind-made Products, and for other purposes’, approved June 25, 1938 (commonly known as the Wagner-O'Day Act; 41 U.S.C. 46 et seq.);” for “, and the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act);”, and added subpars. (C) and (D).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(12)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(j)(1), substituted “programs” for “facilities”.

Subsec. (a)(12)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(j)(2), substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(13)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(E), as amended by Pub. L. 103–73, §102(2), substituted “with a disability whose disability was sustained” for “with handicaps whose handicapping condition arises from a disability sustained”.

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(k)(1), inserted par. designation “(15)”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(15)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(k)(2)(A), struck out “conducting” before “a full needs assessment”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(15)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(k)(2)(B), substituted “capacity and effectiveness of community rehabilitation programs, plans for improving such programs,” for “capacity and condition of rehabilitation facilities, plans for improving such facilities,” and struck out “and” at end.

Subsec. (a)(15)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(k)(2)(C), inserted “and” at end.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(15)(D). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(k)(2)(D), added subpar. (D).

Subsec. (a)(16). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(*l*), amended par. (16) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (16) read as follows: “provide for (A) periodic review and reevaluation of the status of individuals with handicaps placed in extended employment in rehabilitation facilities (including workshops) to determine the feasibility of their employment, or training for employment, in the competitive labor market, and (B) maximum efforts to place such individuals in such employment or training whenever it is determined to be feasible;”.

Subsec. (a)(17). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(m)(1), in introductory provisions, substituted “if, under special circumstances, the State plan includes provisions for the construction of facilities for community rehabilitation programs” for “where such State plan includes provisions for the construction of rehabilitation facilities”.

Subsec. (a)(17)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(m)(2), substituted “facilities for community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”.

Subsec. (a)(18). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(n), substituted “providers of vocational rehabilitation services, and the Director of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title” for “and providers of vocational rehabilitation services”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), substituted “paragraph” for “clause”.

Subsec. (a)(19). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(*o*), inserted “, and for developing and updating the strategic plan required under part C of this subchapter” before semicolon at end.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(*o*)(1), substituted “paragraph” for “clause”.

Subsec. (a)(20). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(F), substituted “American Indians who are individuals with disabilities” for “American Indians with handicaps” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(21). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(22). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(7)(G), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “the deaf” and “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(23). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(p), inserted “before development of the plan by the State” after “comment on the State plan”, struck out “and” before “(B)”, and inserted before semicolon “, and” and subpar. (C).

Subsec. (a)(24). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(q), amended par. (24) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (24) read as follows: “contain the plans, policies, and methods to be followed to assist in the transition from education to employment related activities; and”.

Subsec. (a)(25). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(r), amended par. (25) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (25) read as follows: “provide satisfactory assurances that the State has an acceptable plan for part C of subchapter VI of this chapter.”

Subsec. (a)(26) to (36). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(s), added pars. (26) to (36).

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §122(t), struck out subsec. (c) which provided for payment limitations in cases of noncompliance and disbursement of withheld funds and subsec. (d) which provided for judicial review, additional submissions and presentations, new or modified determinations by the Commissioner, relief, and scope of review. See section 727(c) and (d) of this title.

1991—Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 102–119 substituted “Individuals with Disabilities Education Act” for “Education of the Handicapped Act”.

Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Department of Veterans Affairs” for “Veterans’ Administration”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1)(A)(i). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(1), inserted comma after “where” and after “law” and struck out comma after “adult blind”.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(2), substituted “prescribed by the Commissioner” for “prescribed by him”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(3)–(5), in introductory provisions, substituted “individuals with the most severe handicaps,” for “individuals with handicaps with the most severe handicaps”, in cl. (i), substituted “provided,, and” for “provided, and”, and in cl. (ii), substituted “goals,, and” for “goals, and”.

Subsec. (a)(7)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(6), substituted “utilized therein” for “utilized in”.

Subsec. (a)(9)(C). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(7), substituted “the Commissioner to analyze” for “him to analyze” and “the Commissioner's responsibilities” for “his responsibilities”.

Subsec. (a)(13)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(8), inserted “who is” before “disabled” and substituted “the employee's” for “his”.

Subsec. (a)(13)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(9), substituted “if the proximate cause” for “and the proximate cause”.

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(10), amended par. (15) generally, substituting new text without a par. designation. Prior to amendment, par. (15) read as follows: “provide for continuing statewide studies of the needs of individuals with handicaps and how these needs may be most effectively met, including conducting a full needs assessment for serving individuals with severe handicaps and including the capacity and condition of rehabilitation facilities, plans for improving such facilities, and policies for the use thereof by the State agency and review of the efficacy of the criteria employed with respect to ineligibility determinations described in subclause (C) of clause (9) of this subsection with a view toward the relative need for services to significant segments of the population of individuals with handicaps and the need for expansion of services to those individuals with the most severe handicaps;”.

Subsec. (a)(20). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(b)(11), substituted “American Indians with handicaps” for “handicapped American Indians”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1), (2)(A), (4). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 202(a)(1)(A), (B), inserted “the results of a comprehensive, Statewide assessment of the rehabilitation needs of individuals with severe handicaps residing within the State and the State's response to the assessment,” after “including”, substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and inserted “including individuals served under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A)(i). Pub. L. 99–506, §202(a)(1)(C), substituted “(i) show and provide the justification for” for “show (i)”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 202(a)(1)(D), inserted “show” after “(ii)” and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(C). Pub. L. 99–506, §202(a)(2), added subpar. (C).

Subsec. (a)(6)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(7)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §202(b), inserted “qualified” after “facilities and”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 99–506, §202(c), amended par. (8) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (8) read as follows: “provide, at a minimum, for the provision of the vocational rehabilitation services specified in clauses (1) through (3) of subsection (a) of section 723 of this title, and the remainder of such services specified in such section after full consideration of eligibility for similar benefits under any other program, except that, in the case of the vocational rehabilitation services specified in clauses (4) and (5) of subsection (a) of such section, such consideration shall not be required where it would delay the provision of such services to any individual;”.

Subsec. (a)(9)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(B), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual”.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), 1001(b)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, “to carry out the functions of the Commissioner” for “to carry out his functions”, and “such provisions as are necessary” for “such provisions as he may find necessary”.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 202(d), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and inserted “community mental health programs,” after “veterans programs,”.

Subsec. (a)(12)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(13)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(A), substituted “an individual with handicaps” for “a handicapped individual”.

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 202(e), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and inserted “, including conducting a full needs assessment for serving individuals with severe handicaps and” after “effectively met” and struck out opening and closing parentheses before “including the capacity” and after “by the State agency”, respectively.

Subsec. (a)(16)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(20). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 202(f), inserted provisions relating to consultation with Indian tribes and tribal organizations and native Hawaiian organizations in the development of the State plan and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(21), (22). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(23) to (25). Pub. L. 99–506, §202(g), (h), added pars. (23) to (25).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(2), substituted “which the Commissioner finds” for “which he finds”, “and shall disapprove” for “and he shall disapprove”, and “notify a State of the intention to disapprove its plan, and shall afford” for “notify a State of his intention to disapprove its plan, and he shall afford”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(3), in provisions following lettered subpar. (B), substituted “(or, in the discretion of the Commissioner” for “(or, in his discretion”, “until the Commissioner is satisfied” for “until he is satisfied”, and “Until the Commissioner is” for “Until he is”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(4), substituted “designated by the Commissioner for that purpose” for “designated by him for that purpose” and “on which the Commissioner based” for “on which he based”.

1984—Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “the Vocational Education Act”.

Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Department of Health and Human Services” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §102(a)(1), substituted in introductory text, provision requiring a State to submit to the Commissioner a plan for a three year period and upon request to make annual revisions for provision requiring a State to submit to the Secretary an annual plan.

Subsec. (a)(1)(A), (4). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(2), 122(b)(1), inserted provision requiring a description of the method to be used to utilize existing facilities to the maximum extent feasible and substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(B). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(3), 122(b)(1), designated existing provision as subpar. (A), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”, and added subpar. (B).

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(4), 122(b)(1), substituted in cl. (B), “Commissioner” for “Secretary” and added cl. (C).

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(5), 122(b)(1), substituted in cl. (C), “section 712 of this title” for “section 781 of this title” and “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 95–602, §102(a)(6), inserted “(specifically including arrangements for the coordination of services to individuals eligible for services under this chapter, the Education of the Handicapped Act, and the Vocational Education Act)” after “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(12). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(7), 122(b)(1), designated existing provision as subpar. (A), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”, and added subpar. (B).

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 95–602, §102(a)(8), substituted “(including the capacity and condition of rehabilitation facilities, plans for improving such facilities, and policies for the use thereof by the State agency)” for “(including the State's needs for rehabilitation facilities)”.

Subsec. (a)(17)(C). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (a)(18). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(9), 122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” and inserted “personnel” before “working in the field”.

Subsec. (a)(19). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(a)(10), 122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(20) to (22). Pub. L. 95–602, §102(a)(11), added pars. (20) to (22).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §§102(b), 122(b)(1), designated existing provision as par. (1), and in par. (1) as so designated, redesignated pars. (1) and (2) as subpars. (A) and (B), respectively, added par. (2), and substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 95–602, §102(c), substituted provisions authorizing judicial review of determinations by the Commissioner in the Court of Appeals for the circuit in which the State is located provided a petition is filed within thirty days after the date notice of the final determination was received by the State, permitting additional submissions and presentations, and granting the court jurisdiction to administer appropriate relief in accordance with chapter 7 of title 5, except with respect to interim relief for a determination under subsec. (c) and to the standard of relief under section 706(2)(E) of title 5 for provisions authorizing judicial review of the action of the Secretary in the United States district court for the district where the capital of the State is located and providing review of such action be on the record in accordance with chapter 7 of title 5.

1974—Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(b), inserted parenthetical provisions relating to the requirement that the State take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified handicapped individuals covered under, and on the same terms and conditions as set forth in section 793 of this title.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(b), amended subsec. (a)(6) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(c), in par. (C), inserted provisions that the records be in such detail as required by the Secretary in order for him to analyze and evaluate annually the reasons for and numbers of such ineligibility determinations as part of his responsibilities under section 781 of this title, and that the state agency will at least annually categorize and analyze such reasons and numbers and report this information to the Secretary and will, not later than 12 months after each such determination, review each such ineligibility determination in accordance with the criteria set forth in section 722 of this title.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(c), amended subsec. (a)(9) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (a)(15). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(d), substituted “needs for rehabilitation facilities and review of the efficacy of the criteria employed with respect to ineligibility determinations described in subclause (C) of clause (9) of this subsection” for “needs for rehabilitation.”

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(d), amended subsec. (a)(15) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

For effective date and applicability of amendment by Pub. L. 104–106, see section 4401 of Pub. L. 104–106, set out as a note under section 251 of Title 41, Public Contracts.

Amendment by section 122 of Pub. L. 102–569 to be implemented by Secretary of Education as soon as practicable after Oct. 29, 1992, consistent with effective and efficient administration of this chapter, but not later than Oct. 1, 1993, see section 138(b) of Pub. L. 102–569, set out as a note under section 701 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 705, 706, 709, 711, 720, 722, 723, 725, 727, 730, 731, 740, 744, 762, 772, 776, 777b, 777e, 795, 795n, 795p, 796d–1, 796k, 797a, 2212 of this title; title 20 section 107a.

2 See References in Text note below.

3 So in original. Probably should be “this”.

(1) An individual is eligible for assistance under this subchapter if the individual—

(A) is an individual with a disability under section 706(8)(A) of this title; and

(B) requires vocational rehabilitation services to prepare for, enter, engage in, or retain gainful employment.

(2) An individual who has a disability or is blind as determined pursuant to title II or title XVI of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 401 et seq. and 1381 et seq.) shall be considered to have—

(A) a physical or mental impairment which for such individual constitutes or results in a substantial impediment to employment under section 706(8)(A)(i) of this title; and

(B) a severe physical or mental impairment which seriously limits one or more functional capacities in terms of an employment outcome under section 706(15)(A)(i) of this title.

(3) Determinations made by officials of other agencies, particularly the education officials described in section 721(a)(24) of this title, regarding whether an individual satisfies one or more factors relating to whether an individual is an individual with a disability under section 706(8)(A) of this title or an individual with a severe disability under section 706(15)(A) of this title, shall be used (to the extent appropriate and available and consistent with the requirements under this chapter) for making such determinations under this chapter.

(4)(A) It shall be presumed that an individual can benefit in terms of an employment outcome from vocational rehabilitation services under section 706(8)(A)(ii) of this title, unless the designated State unit can demonstrate by clear and convincing evidence that such individual is incapable of benefiting from vocational rehabilitation services in terms of an employment outcome.

(B) In making the demonstration required under subparagraph (A) with respect to cases in which the issue concerns the severity of the disability of an individual, the designated State unit shall first conduct an extended evaluation by providing the services described in subparagraph (C)(iii)(I), and conducting the assessment described in subparagraph (C)(iii)(II), of section 706(22) of this title.

(5)(A) The designated State unit shall determine whether an individual is eligible for vocational rehabilitation services under this subchapter within a reasonable period of time, not to exceed 60 days after the individual has submitted an application to receive the services unless—

(i) the designated State unit notifies the individual that exceptional and unforeseen circumstances beyond the control of the agency preclude the agency from completing the determination within the prescribed time and the individual agrees that an extension of time is warranted; or

(ii) such an extended evaluation is required.

(B) The determination of eligibility shall be based on the review of existing data described in section 706(22)(A)(i) of this title, and, to the extent necessary, the preliminary assessment described in section 706(22)(A)(ii) of this title.

(6) The designated State unit shall ensure that a determination of ineligibility made with respect to an individual prior to the initiation of an individualized written rehabilitation program, based on the review, and to the extent necessary, the preliminary assessment, shall include specification of—

(A) the reasons for such a determination;

(B) the rights and remedies available to the individual, including, if appropriate, recourse to the processes set forth in subsections (b)(2) and (d) of this section; and

(C) the availability of services provided by the client assistance program under section 732 of this title to the individual.

(1)(A) As soon as a determination has been made that an individual is eligible for vocational rehabilitation services, the designated State unit shall complete an assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in subparagraphs (B) and (C) of section 706(22) of this title (if such assessment is necessary) and ensure that—

(i) an individualized written rehabilitation program is jointly developed, agreed upon, and signed by—

(I) such eligible individual (or, in an appropriate case, a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual); and

(II) the vocational rehabilitation counselor or coordinator; and

(ii) such program meets the requirements set forth in subparagraph (B).

(B) Each individualized written rehabilitation program shall—

(i) be designed to achieve the employment objective of the individual, consistent with the unique strengths, resources, priorities, concerns, abilities, and capabilities, of the individual;

(ii) include a statement of the long-term rehabilitation goals based on the assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in section 706(22)(B) of this title, including an assessment of career interests, for the individual, which goals shall, to the maximum extent appropriate, include placement in integrated settings;

(iii) include a statement of the intermediate rehabilitation objectives related to the attainment of such goals, determined through such assessment carried out in the most individualized and integrated setting (consistent with the informed choice of the individual);

(iv)(I) include a statement of the specific vocational rehabilitation services to be provided, and the projected dates for the initiation and the anticipated duration of each such service;

(II) if appropriate, include a statement of the specific rehabilitation technology services to be provided to assist in the implementation of intermediate rehabilitation objectives and long-term rehabilitation goals for the individual; and

(III) if appropriate, include a statement of the specific on-the-job and related personal assistance services to be provided to the individual, and, if appropriate and desired by the individual, the training in managing, supervising, and directing personal assistance services to be provided to the individual;

(v) include an assessment of the expected need for postemployment services and, if appropriate, extended services;

(vi) provide for—

(I) a reassessment of the need for postemployment services and, if appropriate, extended services prior to the point of successful rehabilitation, in accordance with this subsection; and

(II) if appropriate, the development of a statement detailing how such services shall be provided or arranged through cooperative agreements with other service providers;

(vii) include objective criteria and an evaluation procedure and schedule for determining whether such goals and objectives are being achieved;

(viii) include the terms and conditions under which goods and services described above will be provided to the individual in the most integrated settings;

(ix) identify the entity or entities that will provide the vocational rehabilitation services and the process used to provide or procure such services;

(x) include a statement by the individual, in the words of the individual (or, if appropriate, in the words of a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of the individual), describing how the individual was informed about and involved in choosing among alternative goals, objectives, services, entities providing such services, and methods used to provide or procure such services;

(xi) include, if necessary, an amendment specifying—

(I) the reasons that an individual for whom a program has been prepared is no longer eligible for vocational rehabilitation services; and

(II) the rights and remedies available to such an individual including, if appropriate, recourse to the processes set forth in subsections (b)(2) and (d) of this section;

(xii) set forth the rights and remedies available to such an individual including, if appropriate, recourse to the processes set forth in subsections (b)(2) and (d) of this section;

(xiii) provide a description of the availability of a client assistance program established pursuant to section 732 of this title;

(xiv) to the maximum extent possible, be provided in the native language, or mode of communication, of the individual, or, in an appropriate case, of a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual; and

(xv) include information identifying other related services and benefits provided pursuant to any Federal, State, or local program that will enhance the capacity of the individual to achieve the vocational objectives of the individual.

(C) The designated State unit shall furnish a copy of the individualized written rehabilitation program and amendments to the program to the individual with a disability or, in an appropriate case, a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of the individual.

(2) Each individualized written rehabilitation program shall be reviewed annually, at which time such individual (or, in appropriate cases, the parents or guardian of the individual) will be afforded an opportunity to review such program and jointly redevelop and agree to its terms. Any revisions or amendments to the program resulting from such review shall be incorporated into or affixed to such program. Such revisions or amendments shall not take effect until agreed to and signed by the individual with a disability, or, if appropriate, by a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual. Each individualized written rehabilitation program shall be revised as needed.

The Director of the designated State unit shall also ensure that (1) in making any determination of ineligibility referred to in subsection (a) of this section, or in developing and carrying out the individualized written rehabilitation program required by section 721 of this title in the case of each individual with a disability, emphasis is placed upon the determination and achievement of a vocational goal for such individual, (2) a decision that such an individual is not capable of achieving such a goal and thus is not eligible for vocational rehabilitation services provided with assistance under this part, is made only in full consultation with such individual (or, in appropriate cases, such individual's parents or guardians), and only upon the certification, as an amendment to such written program, or as a part of the specification of reasons for an ineligibility determination, as appropriate, that the preliminary diagnosis or assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in subparagraphs (B) and (C) of section 706(22) of this title, as appropriate, has demonstrated that such individual is not then capable of achieving such a goal, and (3) any such decision, as an amendment to such written program, shall be reviewed at least annually in accordance with the procedure and criteria established in this section.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (4), the Director of any designated State unit shall establish procedures for the review of determinations made by the rehabilitation counselor or coordinator under this section, upon the request of an individual with a disability (or, in appropriate cases, such individual's parents or guardian).

(2)(A) Such review procedures shall provide an opportunity to such individuals for the submission of additional evidence and information to an impartial hearing officer who shall make a decision based on the provisions of the State plan approved under section 721(a) of this title.

(B) The impartial hearing officer shall be selected to hear a particular case—

(i) on a random basis; or

(ii) by agreement between—

(I) the Director of the designated State unit and the individual with a disability; or

(II) in an appropriate case, the Director and a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual.

(C) The impartial hearing officer shall be selected from among a pool of qualified persons identified jointly by—

(i) the designated State unit; and

(ii)(I) the members of the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council established under section 725 of this title who were appointed under one of clauses (v) through (viii) of section 725(b)(1)(A) of this title, or under one of clauses (v) through (ix) of section 725(b)(1)(B) of this title, as appropriate;

(II) the commission described in subparagraph (B) or (C)(i) of section 721(a)(36) of this title; or

(III) the commissions described in section 721(a)(36)(C)(ii) of this title.

(3)(A) Within 20 days of the mailing of the decision to the individual with a disability (or, in appropriate cases, such individual's parents or guardian), the Director shall notify such individuals of the intent to review such decision in whole or in part.

(B) If the Director decides to review the decision, such individuals shall be provided an opportunity for the submission of additional evidence and information relevant to a final decision.

(C)(i) The Director may not overturn or modify a decision of an impartial hearing officer, or part of such a decision, that supports the position of the individual unless the Director concludes, based on clear and convincing evidence, that the decision of the independent hearing officer is clearly erroneous on the basis of being contrary to Federal or State law, including policy.

(ii) A final decision shall be made in writing by the Director and shall include a full report of the findings and the grounds for such decision.

(iii) Upon making a final decision, the Director shall provide a copy of such decision to such individual.

(D) Except as provided in paragraph (4), the Director may not delegate responsibility to make any such final decision to any other officer or employee of the designated State unit.

(4)(A) A fair hearing board, established by a State before January 1, 1985, and authorized under State law to review determinations under this chapter, is authorized to carry out the responsibilities of the Director under this subsection.

(B) The provisions of paragraphs (1) through (3) of this subsection shall not apply to any State to which subparagraph (A) of this paragraph applies.

(5) Unless the individual with a disability so requests, or, in an appropriate case, a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual so requests, pending a final determination of such hearing or other final resolution under this subsection, the designated State unit shall not institute a suspension, reduction, or termination of services being provided under the individualized written rehabilitation program, unless such services have been obtained through misrepresentation, fraud, collusion, or criminal conduct on the part of the individual with a disability.

(6)(A) The Director shall collect data described in subparagraph (B) and prepare and submit to the Commissioner a report containing such data. For the report submitted on or before February 1, 1988, the Commissioner shall prepare a summary of the information furnished under this paragraph and include the summary in the annual report submitted under section 712 of this title.

(B) The data required to be collected under this paragraph shall include—

(i) a description of State procedures for review;

(ii) the number of appeals to the independent hearing officer and the State Director, including the type of complaint and the issues involved;

(iii) the number of decisions by the State Director reversing in whole or in part the decision of the impartial hearing officer; and

(iv) the number of decisions affirming the position of the individual with a disability assisted through the client assistance program.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §102, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 368; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(e), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1620; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(e), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–5; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§103, 122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2959, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §§104(a)(3), 112, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18, 20; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(A), (B), title II, §203, title X, §1001(b)(5), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1815, 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3305; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(p)(8), 123, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4357, 4375; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(b), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 720.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II and XVI of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVI (§1381 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a)(5)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(b)(1), substituted “section 706(22)(A)(ii)” for “section 706(22)(A)(iii)”.

Subsec. (d)(2)(C)(ii)(I). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(b)(2)(A), substituted “who were appointed under one of clauses (v) through (viii) of section 725(b)(1)(A), or under one of clauses (v) through (ix) of section 725(b)(1)(B), as appropriate” for “who were appointed under one of subparagraphs (E) through (H) of section 725(b)(1) of this title”.

Subsec. (d)(6)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(b)(2)(B), redesignated pars. (1) to (4) as cls. (i) to (iv), respectively.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(a), amended subsec. (a) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions requiring joint development of individualized written rehabilitation programs setting forth terms and conditions for provision of goods and services to individuals with handicaps.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(b)(1), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which related to development and scope of individualized written rehabilitation programs.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(b)(2), inserted after first sentence “Any revisions or amendments to the program resulting from such review shall be incorporated into or affixed to such program. Such revisions or amendments shall not take effect until agreed to and signed by the individual with a disability, or, if appropriate, by a parent, a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, of such individual.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(8), 123(c), substituted “Director of the designated State unit shall also ensure” for “Commissioner shall also insure”, “individual with a disability” for “individual with handicaps”, and “assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs described in subparagraphs (B) and (C) of section 706(22) of this title” for “evaluation of rehabilitation potential”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(8), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(d)(1), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A) and added subpars. (B) and (C).

Subsec. (d)(3)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(8), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(d)(2), added subpar. (C) and struck out former subpar. (C) which read as follows: “A final decision shall be made in writing by the Director and shall include a full report of the findings and the grounds for such decision. When a final decision is made, a copy of such decision shall be provided to such individuals.”

Subsec. (d)(5), (6). Pub. L. 102–569, §123(d)(3), (4), added par. (5) and redesignated former par. (5) as (6).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(8), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps” in par. (5)(B)(4).

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(c)(1), substituted “including, where appropriate, recourse to the processes set forth in subsections (b)(2) and (d) of this section, and the availability of services provided under section 732 of this title” for “including recourse to the process set forth in subsection (b)(5) of this section”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(H). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(c)(2), substituted “individuals with severe handicaps” for “severely handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(c)(3), inserted comma after “annually” and after “(or”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(c)(4), inserted “is” after “thus”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(B), 1001(b)(5)(A), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” wherever appearing and “such individual's parents” for “his parents”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §203(a), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows: “Each individualized written rehabilitation program shall be reviewed on an annual basis at which time each such individual (or, in appropriate cases, his parents or guardians) will be afforded an opportunity to review such program and jointly redevelop and agree to its terms. Such program shall include, but not be limited to (1) a statement of long-range rehabilitation goals for the individual and intermediate rehabilitation objectives related to the attainment of such goals, (2) a statement of the specific vocational rehabilitation services to be provided, (3) the projected date for the initiation and the anticipated duration of each such service, (4) objective criteria and evaluation procedure and schedule for determining whether such objectives and goals are being achieved, and, (5) where appropriate, a detailed explanation of the availability of a client assistance project established in such area pursuant to section 732 of this title.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(B), 1001(b)(5)(A), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” in cl. (1) and “such individual's parents” for “his parents” in cl. (2).

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(5)(C), which directed that par. (1) be amended by substituting “delegate the responsibility” for “delegate his responsibility”, could not be executed because of prior amendment by section 203(b) of Pub. L. 99–506, see below.

Pub. L. 99–506, §203(b), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “The Director of any designated State unit shall establish procedures for the review of determinations made by the rehabilitation counselor or coordinator under this section, upon the request of an individual with handicaps (or, in appropriate cases, his parents or guardians). Such procedures shall include a requirement that the final decision concerning the review of any such determination be made in writing by the Director. The Director may not delegate his responsibility to make any such final decision to any other officer or employee of the designated State unit.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(A), substituted “an individual with handicaps” for “a handicapped individual”.

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(5)(B), which directed the substitution of “such individual's parent” for “his parent”, could not be executed because of prior amendment to par. (2), the only place in section containing “his parent”, by section 203(b) of Pub. L. 99–506, see below.

Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(5)(D), which directed the substitution of “any responsibility of the Secretary” for “his responsibilities”, could not be executed because of prior amendment by section 203(b) of Pub. L. 99–506, see below.

Pub. L. 99–506, §203(b), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “Any individual with handicaps (or, in appropriate cases, his parent or guardian) who is not satisfied with the final decision made under paragraph (1) by the Director of the designated State unit may request the Secretary to review such decision. Upon such request the Secretary shall conduct such a review and shall make recommendations to the Director as to the appropriate disposition of the matter. The Secretary may not delegate his responsibilities under this paragraph to any officer of the Department of Education who is employed at a position below that of an Assistant Secretary.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(B), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual”.

Subsec. (d)(3) to (5). Pub. L. 99–506, §203(b), added pars. (3) to (5).

1984—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 98–221, §112, struck out “beyond any reasonable doubt” after “rehabilitation potential, as appropriate, has demonstrated”.

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(a)(3), substituted “Department of Education” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §103(1), inserted “and agree to” after “redevelop”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 95–602, §103(2), added subsec. (d).

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(e)(1), substituted “written rehabilitation program, or the specification of reasons for a determination of ineligibility prior to initiation of such program based on preliminary diagnosis,” for “written rehabilitation program,” and inserted provisions that the specifications of reasons for an ineligibility determination shall set forth the rights and remedies available to the individual in question, including recourse to the process set forth in subsec. (b)(5) of this section.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(e)(1), amended subsec. (a) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(e)(2), substituted “in making any determination of ineligibility referred to in subsection (a) of this section, or in developing and carrying out the individualized written rehabilitation program required by section 721 of this title in the case of each handicapped individual,” for “in developing and carrying out individualized written rehabilitation program required by section 721 of this title in the case of each handicapped individual primary”.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(e)(2), amended subsec. (c)(1) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(e)(3), substituted “program, or as a part of the specification of reasons for an ineligibility determination, as appropriate, that the preliminary diagnosis or evaluation of rehabilitation potential, as appropriate,” for “program, that the evaluation of rehabilitation potential”.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(e)(3), amended subsec. (c)(2) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(e)(4), substituted “such decision, as an amendment to such written program,” for “such decision”.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(e)(4), amended subsec. (c)(3) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

This section is referred to in sections 711, 721, 795m, 795n, 2211 of this title.

Vocational rehabilitation services provided under this chapter are any goods or services necessary to render an individual with a disability employable, including, but not limited to, the following:

(1) an assessment for determining eligibility and vocational rehabilitation needs by qualified personnel, including, if appropriate, an assessment by personnel skilled in rehabilitation technology;

(2) counseling, guidance, and work-related placement services for individuals with disabilities, including job search assistance, placement assistance, job retention services, personal assistance services, and followup, follow-along, and specific postemployment services necessary to assist such individuals to maintain, regain, or advance in employment;

(3) vocational and other training services for individuals with disabilities, which shall include personal and vocational adjustment, books, and other training materials, and such services to the families of such individuals as are necessary to the adjustment or rehabilitation of such individuals, except that no training services in institutions of higher education shall be paid for with funds under this subchapter unless maximum efforts have been made to secure grant assistance, in whole or in part, from other sources to pay for such training;

(4) physical and mental restoration services, including, but not limited to, (A) corrective surgery or therapeutic treatment necessary to correct or substantially modify a physical or mental condition which is stable or slowly progressive and constitutes a substantial impediment to employment, but is of such nature that such correction or modification may reasonably be expected to eliminate or reduce such impediment to employment within a reasonable length of time, (B) necessary hospitalization in connection with surgery or treatment, (C) prosthetic and orthotic devices, (D) eyeglasses and visual services as prescribed by qualified personnel, under State licensure laws, that are selected by the individual, (E) special services (including transplantation and dialysis), artificial kidneys, and supplies necessary for the treatment of individuals with end-stage renal disease, and (F) diagnosis and treatment for mental and emotional disorders by qualified personnel under State licensure laws;

(5) maintenance for additional costs incurred while participating in rehabilitation;

(6) interpreter services for individuals who are deaf, and reader services for those individuals determined to be blind after an examination by qualified personnel under State licensure laws;

(7) recruitment and training services for individuals with disabilities to provide them with new employment opportunities in the fields of rehabilitation, health, welfare, public safety, and law enforcement, and other appropriate service employment;

(8) rehabilitation teaching services and orientation and mobility services for individuals who are blind;

(9) occupational licenses, tools, equipment, and initial stocks and supplies;

(10) transportation in connection with the rendering of any vocational rehabilitation service;

(11) telecommunications, sensory, and other technological aids and devices;

(12) rehabilitation technology services;

(13) referral and other services designed to assist individuals with disabilities in securing needed services from other agencies through agreements developed under section 721(a)(11) of this title, if such services are not available under this chapter;

(14) transition services that promote or facilitate the accomplishment of long-term rehabilitation goals and intermediate rehabilitation objectives;

(15) on-the-job or other related personal assistance services provided while an individual with a disability is receiving services described in this section; and

(16) supported employment services.

Vocational rehabilitation services, when provided for the benefit of groups of individuals, may also include the following:

(1) In the case of any type of small business operated by individuals with the most severe disabilities the operation of which can be improved by management services and supervision provided by the State agency, the provision of such services and supervision, along or together with the acquisition by the State agency of vending facilities or other equipment and initial stocks and supplies.

(2) The establishment, development, or improvement of community rehabilitation programs, including, under special circumstances, the construction of a facility, and the provision of other services (including services offered at community rehabilitation programs) which promise to contribute substantially to the rehabilitation of a group of individuals but which are not related directly to the individualized rehabilitation written program of any one individual with a disability. Such programs shall be used to provide services that promote integration and competitive employment.

(3) The use of existing telecommunications systems (including telephone, television, satellite, radio, and other similar systems) which have the potential for substantially improving service delivery methods, and the development of appropriate programing to meet the particular needs of individuals with disabilities.

(4) The use of services providing recorded material for individuals who are blind and captioned films or video cassettes for individuals who are deaf.

(5) Technical assistance and support services to businesses that are not subject to title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.) and that are seeking to employ individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §103, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 368; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §104, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2960; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2), title II, §204, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1817; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3305; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(p)(9), 124, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4357, 4379; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(c), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 721.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(5), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 34, 35, 41, and 42a of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a)(4)(D). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(c)(1)(A), substituted “qualified personnel, under State licensure laws, that are selected by the individual” for “a physician skilled in the diseases of the eye or by an optometrist, whichever the individual may select”.

Subsec. (a)(4)(F). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(c)(1)(B), substituted “qualified personnel under State licensure laws” for “a physician or licensed psychologist in accordance with State licensure laws”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(c)(2), substituted “those individuals determined to be blind after an examination by qualified personnel under State licensure laws;” for “those individuals determined to be blind after an examination by a physician skilled in the diseases of the eye or by an optometrist, whichever the individual may select”.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(A), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(1), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which read as follows: “evaluation of rehabilitation potential, including diagnostic and related services incidental to the determination of eligibility for, and the nature and scope of, services to be provided, including, where appropriate—

“(A) an evaluation by personnel skilled in rehabilitation engineering technology; and

“(B) an examination by a physician skilled in the diagnosis and treatment of mental or emotional disorders, or by a licensed psychologist in accordance with State laws and regulations, or both;”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(2), struck out “referral,” after “guidance,” inserted “work-related” before “placement services” and “job search assistance, placement assistance, job retention services, personal assistance services, and” before “followup,” substituted “maintain, regain, or advance in employment” for “maintain or regain employment”, and struck out before semicolon “, and other services designed to help individuals with disabilities secure needed services from other agencies, where such services are not available under this chapter”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(9)(B), 124(a)(3), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”, “and such services to the families” for “and services to the families”, and “, except that” for “: *Provided*, That”.

Subsec. (a)(4)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(4), substituted “impediment to employment,” for “handicap to employment,” and “reduce such impediment to employment” for “substantially reduce the handicap”.

Subsec. (a)(4)(E). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(C)(i), substituted “individuals with” for “individuals suffering from”.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(5), substituted “for additional costs incurred while participating in rehabilitation” for “, not exceeding the estimated cost of subsistence, during rehabilitation”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(C)(ii), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “deaf individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(C)(iii), substituted “individuals who are blind” for “the blind”.

Subsec. (a)(12). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(7), substituted “technology services” for “engineering services”.

Subsec. (a)(13) to (16). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(a)(6), (8), added pars. (13) to (16).

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(9)(B), 124(b)(1), substituted “In the case” for “in the case”, “disabilities” for “handicaps”, and a period for semicolon at end.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(b)(2), substituted “The establishment, development, or improvement of community rehabilitation programs, including, under special circumstances, the construction of a facility, and the provision of other services (including services offered at community rehabilitation programs)” for “the construction or establishment of public or nonprofit rehabilitation facilities and the provision of other facilities and services (including services offered at rehabilitation facilities)” and a period for semicolon after “disability” and inserted at end “Such programs shall be used to provide services that promote integration and competitive employment.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(9)(A), substituted “individual with a disability” for “individual with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(9)(B), 124(b)(3), substituted “The use of” for “the use of”, “disabilities” for “handicaps”, and a period for “; and” at end.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(9)(D), 124(b)(4), substituted “The use of” for “the use of”, “individuals who are blind” for “the blind”, and “individuals who are deaf” for “the deaf”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §124(b)(5), added par. (5).

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(d)(1), struck out comma after “related services” and substituted “where appropriate—” for “where appropriate,” in introductory provisions and substituted subpars. (A) and (B) for “evaluation by personnel skilled in rehabilitation engineering technology, examination by a physician skilled in the diagnosis and treatment of mental or emotional disorders, or by a licensed psychologist in accordance with State laws and regulations, or both;”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(d)(2), substituted “individuals to maintain” for “individuals maintain”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(A), substituted “an individual with handicaps” for “a handicapped individual” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §204(a), inserted “evaluation by personnel skilled in rehabilitation engineering technology,” after “appropriate,”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 204(b), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and “specific postemployment services necessary to assist such individuals maintain or regain employment, and other” for “other postemployment services necessary to assist such individuals to maintain their employment and”.

Subsec. (a)(3), (7). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(12). Pub. L. 99–506, §204(c), added par. (12).

Subsec. (b)(2), (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(B), (C), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual”.

1978—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 95–602, §104(a), inserted “mental or” before “emotional”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §104(b), inserted “(including services offered at rehabilitation facilities)” after “services” in par. (2) and added pars. (3) and (4).

This section is referred to in sections 706, 721, 797a of this title.

For the purpose of determining the amount of payments to States for carrying out part B of this subchapter (or to an Indian tribe under part D of this subchapter), the non-Federal share, subject to such limitations and conditions as may be prescribed in regulations by the Commissioner, shall include contributions of funds made by any private agency, organization, or individual to a State or local agency to assist in meeting the costs of establishment of a community rehabilitation program or construction, under special circumstances, of a facility for such a program, which would be regarded as State or local funds except for the condition, imposed by the contributor, limiting use of such funds to establishment of such a program or construction of such a facility.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §104, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 370; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title II, §205, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1817; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §125, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4381.)

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 32 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “costs of establishment of a community rehabilitation program or construction, under special circumstances, of a facility for such a program” for “costs of construction or establishment of a public or nonprofit rehabilitation facility” and directed the substitution of “establishment of such a program or construction of such a facility”, which was executed by making the substitution for “construction or establishment of such facility” to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 inserted “(or to an Indian tribe under part D of this subchapter)”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B) or (C) of section 721(a)(36) of this title, to be eligible to receive financial assistance under this subchapter a State shall establish a State Rehabilitation Advisory Council (referred to in this section as the “Council”) in accordance with this section.

A State that designates a State agency to administer the part of the State plan under which vocational rehabilitation services are provided for individuals who are blind under section 721(a)(1)(A)(i) of this title may establish a separate Council in accordance with this section to perform the duties of such a Council with respect to such State agency.

Except in the case of a separate Council established under subsection (a)(2) of this section, the Council shall be composed of—

(i) at least one representative of the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title, which representative may be the chairperson or other designee of the Council;

(ii) at least one representative of a parent training and information center established pursuant to section 1431(e)(1) of title 20;

(iii) at least one representative of the client assistance program established under section 732 of this title;

(iv) at least one vocational rehabilitation counselor, with knowledge of and experience with vocational rehabilitation programs, who shall serve as an ex officio, nonvoting member of the Council if the counselor is an employee of the designated State agency;

(v) at least one representative of community rehabilitation program service providers;

(vi) four representatives of business, industry, and labor;

(vii) representatives of disability advocacy groups representing a cross section of—

(I) individuals with physical, cognitive, sensory, and mental disabilities; and

(II) parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, of individuals with disabilities who have difficulty in representing themselves or are unable due to their disabilities to represent themselves; and

(viii) current or former applicants for, or recipients of, vocational rehabilitation services.

In the case of a separate Council established under subsection (a)(2) of this section, the Council shall be composed of—

(i) at least one representative described in subparagraph (A)(i);

(ii) at least one representative described in subparagraph (A)(ii);

(iii) at least one representative described in subparagraph (A)(iii);

(iv) at least one vocational rehabilitation counselor described in subparagraph (A)(iv), who shall serve as described in such subparagraph;

(v) at least one representative described in subparagraph (A)(v);

(vi) four representatives described in subparagraph (A)(vi);

(vii) at least one representative of a disability advocacy group representing individuals who are blind;

(viii) at least one parent, family member, guardian, advocate, or authorized representative, of an individual who—

(I) is an individual who is blind and has multiple disabilities; and

(II) has difficulty in representing himself or herself or is unable due to disabilities to represent himself or herself; and

(ix) applicants or recipients described in subparagraph (A)(viii).

In the case of a separate Council established under subsection (a)(2) of this section, any Council that is required by State law, as in effect on October 29, 1992, to have fewer than 13 members shall be deemed to be in compliance with subparagraph (B) if the Council—

(i) meets the requirements of subparagraph (B), other than the requirements of clauses (vi) and (ix) of such subparagraph; and

(ii) includes at least—

(I) one representative described in subparagraph (B)(vi); and

(II) one applicant or recipient described in subparagraph (B)(ix).

The Director of the designated State unit shall be an ex officio member of the Council.

Members of the Council shall be appointed by the Governor. In the case of a State that, under State law, vests appointment authority in an entity in lieu of, or in conjunction with, the Governor, such as one or more houses of the State legislature, or an independent board that has general appointment authority, that entity shall make the appointments. The appointing authority shall select members after soliciting recommendations from representatives of organizations representing a broad range of individuals with disabilities and organizations interested in individuals with disabilities.

A majority of Council members shall be persons who are—

(A) individuals with disabilities described in section 706(8)(B) of this title; and

(B) not employed by the designated State unit.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the Council shall select a chairperson from among the membership of the Council.

In States in which the Governor does not have veto power pursuant to State law, the Governor shall designate a member of the Council to serve as the chairperson of the Council or shall require the Council to so designate such a member.

Each member of the Council shall serve for a term of not more than 3 years, except that—

(i) a member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which a predecessor was appointed, shall be appointed for the remainder of such term; and

(ii) the terms of service of the members initially appointed shall be (as specified by the appointing authority) for such fewer number of years as will provide for the expiration of terms on a staggered basis.

No member of the Council may serve more than two consecutive full terms.

Any vacancy occurring in the membership of the Council shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment. The vacancy shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Council.

The Council shall—

(1) review, analyze, and advise the designated State unit regarding the performance of the responsibilities of the unit under this subchapter, particularly responsibilities relating to—

(A) eligibility (including order of selection);

(B) the extent, scope, and effectiveness of services provided; and

(C) functions performed by State agencies that affect or that potentially affect the ability of individuals with disabilities in achieving rehabilitation goals and objectives under this subchapter;

(2) advise the designated State agency and the designated State unit, and, at the discretion of the designated State agency, assist in the preparation of applications, the State plan, the strategic plan and amendments to the plans, reports, needs assessments, and evaluations required by this subchapter;

(3) to the extent feasible, conduct a review and analysis of the effectiveness of, and consumer satisfaction with—

(A) the functions performed by State agencies and other public and private entities responsible for performing functions for individuals with disabilities; and

(B) vocational rehabilitation services—

(i) provided, or paid for from funds made available, under this chapter or through other public or private sources; and

(ii) provided by State agencies and other public and private entities responsible for providing vocational rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities;

(4) prepare and submit an annual report to the Governor or appropriate State entity and the Commissioner on the status of vocational rehabilitation programs operated within the State, and make the report available to the public;

(5) coordinate with other councils within the State, including the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title, the advisory panel established under section 1413(a)(12) of title 20, the State Planning Council described in section 6024 of title 42, and the State mental health planning council established under section 1916(e) 1 of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300x–4(e));

(6) advise the State agency designated under section 721(a)(1) of this title and provide for coordination and the establishment of working relationships between the State agency and the Statewide Independent Living Council and centers for independent living within the State; and

(7) perform such other functions, consistent with the purpose of this subchapter, as the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council determines to be appropriate, that are comparable to the other functions performed by the Council.

The Council shall prepare, in conjunction with the designated State unit, a plan for the provision of such resources, including such staff and other personnel, as may be necessary to carry out the functions of the Council under this section. The resource plan shall, to the maximum extent possible, rely on the use of resources in existence during the period of implementation of the plan.

To the extent that there is a disagreement between the Council and the designated State unit in regard to the resources necessary to carry out the functions of the Council as set forth in this section, the disagreement shall be resolved by the Governor or appointing agency consistent with paragraph (1).

Each Council shall, consistent with State law, supervise and evaluate such staff and other personnel as may be necessary to carry out its functions under this section.

While assisting the Council in carrying out its duties, staff and other personnel shall not be assigned duties by the designated State unit or any other agency or office of the State, that would create a conflict of interest.

No member of the Council shall cast a vote on any matter that would provide direct financial benefit to the member or otherwise give the appearance of a conflict of interest under State law.

The Council shall convene at least 4 meetings a year in such places as it determines to be necessary to conduct Council business and conduct such forums or hearings as the Council considers appropriate. The meetings, hearings, and forums shall be publicly announced. The meetings shall be open and accessible to the general public unless there is a valid reason for an executive session.

The Council may use funds appropriated under this subchapter (except for funds appropriated to carry out the client assistance program under section 732 of this title and funds reserved pursuant to section 730(d) of this title to carry out part D of this subchapter) to reimburse members of the Council for reasonable and necessary expenses of attending Council meetings and performing Council duties (including child care and personal assistance services), and to pay compensation to a member of the Council, if such member is not employed or must forfeit wages from other employment, for each day the member is engaged in performing the duties of the Council.

The Council is authorized to hold such hearings and forums as the Council may determine to be necessary to carry out the duties of the Council.

To the extent that a State has established a Council before September 30, 1992, that is comparable to the Council described in this section, such established Council shall be considered to be in compliance with this section. Within 1 year after October 29, 1992, such State shall establish a Council that complies in full with this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §105, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §126(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4381; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(d)(1), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 721.)

Section 1916(e) of the Public Health Service Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(5), probably means section 1916(e) of title XIX of act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, as added by Pub. L. 97–35, which was classified to section 300x–4(e) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Section 1916 was repealed and a new section 1916 enacted by Pub. L. 102–321, title II, §201(2), July 10, 1992, 106 Stat. 378, 384, which is classified to section 300x–5 of Title 42 and does not relate to the State mental health planning council. However, similar provisions are contained in section 1914 of the Public Health Service Act, as added by Pub. L. 102–321, which is classified to section 300x–3 of Title 42.

1993—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(d)(1)(A)(i), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which consisted of subpars. (A) to (H) relating to the composition of the Council.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(d)(1)(A)(ii), in first sentence struck out “or the appropriate entity within the State responsible for making appointments” after “by the Governor” and inserted after first sentence: “In the case of a State that, under State law, vests appointment authority in an entity in lieu of, or in conjunction with, the Governor, such as one or more houses of the State legislature, or an independent board that has general appointment authority, that entity shall make the appointments.”

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(d)(1)(B), inserted “(except for funds appropriated to carry out the client assistance program under section 732 of this title and funds reserved pursuant to section 730(d) of this title to carry out part D of this subchapter)” before “to reimburse members”.

Section 107(d)(2) of Pub. L. 103–73 provided that: “In the case of a State that demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Secretary of Education that the State has designated a State agency to administer the part of the State plan under which vocational rehabilitation services are provided for individuals who are blind under section 101(a)(1)(A)(i) of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 [29 U.S.C. 721(a)(1)(A)(i)], and has established by State law a separate Council to perform the duties of a State Rehabilitation Advisory Council with respect to such State agency, the Secretary may delay the effective date of all or part of section 105(b)(1)(B) [29 U.S.C. 725(b)(1)(B)], as amended by paragraph (1), until October 1, 1994.”

This section is referred to in sections 706, 721, 722, 727, 742, 796d of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

The Commissioner shall, not later than September 30, 1994, establish and publish evaluation standards and performance indicators for the vocational rehabilitation program under this subchapter.

The standards and indicators shall include outcome and related measures of program performance that facilitate and in no way impede the accomplishment of the purpose and policy of this subchapter.

The standards and indicators shall be developed with input from State vocational rehabilitation agencies, related professional and consumer organizations, recipients of vocational rehabilitation services, and other interested parties. The Commissioner shall publish in the Federal Register a notice of intent to regulate regarding the development of proposed standards and indicators. Proposed standards and indicators shall be published in the Federal Register for review and comment. Final standards and indicators shall be published in the Federal Register.

In accordance with regulations established by the Secretary, each State shall report to the Commissioner after the end of each fiscal year the extent to which the State is in compliance with the standards and indicators.

If the Commissioner determines that the performance of any State is below established standards, the Commissioner shall provide technical assistance to the State and the State and the Commissioner shall jointly develop a program improvement plan outlining the specific actions to be taken by the State to improve program performance.

The Commissioner shall—

(i) review the program improvement efforts of the State on a biannual basis and, if necessary, request the State to make further revisions to the plan to improve performance; and

(ii) continue to conduct such reviews and request such revisions until the State sustains satisfactory performance over a period of more than 1 year.

If the Commissioner determines that a State whose performance falls below the established standards has failed to enter into a program improvement plan, or is not complying substantially with the terms and conditions of such a program improvement plan, the Commissioner shall, consistent with subsections (c) and (d) of section 727 of this title, reduce or make no further payments to the State under this program, until the State has entered into an approved program improvement plan, or satisfies the Commissioner that the State is complying substantially with the terms and conditions of such a program improvement plan, as appropriate.

Beginning in fiscal year 1996, the Commissioner shall include in each annual report to the Congress under section 712 of this title an analysis of program performance, including relative State performance, based on the standards and indicators.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §106, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §127(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4385.)

This section is referred to in section 727 of this title.

In carrying out the duties of the Commissioner under this subchapter, the Commissioner shall—

(A) provide for the annual review and periodic on-site monitoring of programs under this subchapter; and

(B) determine whether, in the administration of the State plan, a State is complying substantially with the provisions of such plan and with evaluation standards and performance indicators established under section 726 of this title.

In conducting reviews under this section the Commissioner shall consider, at a minimum—

(A) State policies and procedures;

(B) guidance materials;

(C) decisions resulting from hearings conducted in accordance with due process;

(D) strategic plans and updates;

(E) plans and reports prepared under section 726(b) of this title;

(F) consumer satisfaction surveys described in section 721(a)(32) of this title;

(G) information provided by the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council established under section 725 of this title;

(H) reports; and

(I) budget and financial management data.

In conducting monitoring under this section the Commissioner shall conduct—

(A) on-site visits, including on-site reviews of records to verify that the State is following requirements regarding the order of selection set forth in section 721(a)(5)(A) of this title;

(B) public hearings and other strategies for collecting information from the public;

(C) meetings with the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council;

(D) reviews of individual case files, including individualized written rehabilitation programs and ineligibility determinations; and

(E) meetings with rehabilitation counselors and other personnel.

In conducting the review and monitoring, the Commissioner shall examine—

(A) the eligibility process;

(B) the provision of services, including, if applicable, the order of selection;

(C) whether the personnel evaluation system described in section 721(a)(35) of this title facilitates and does not impede the accomplishments of the program;

(D) such other areas as may be identified by the public or through meetings with the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council; and

(E) such other areas of inquiry as the Commissioner may consider appropriate.

The Commissioner shall—

(1) provide technical assistance to programs under this subchapter regarding improving the quality of vocational rehabilitation services provided; and

(2) provide technical assistance and establish a corrective action plan for a program under this subchapter if the Commissioner finds that the program fails to comply substantially with the provisions of the State plan, or with evaluation standards or performance indicators established under section 726 of this title, in order to ensure that such failure is corrected as soon as practicable.

Whenever the Commissioner, after providing reasonable notice and an opportunity for a hearing to the State agency administering or supervising the administration of the State plan approved under section 721 of this title, finds that—

(A) the plan has been so changed that it no longer complies with the requirements of section 721(a) of this title; or

(B) in the administration of the plan there is a failure to comply substantially with any provision of such plan or with an evaluation standard or performance indicator established under section 726 of this title,

the Commissioner shall notify such State agency that no further payments will be made to the State under this subchapter (or, in the discretion of the Commissioner, that such further payments will be reduced, in accordance with regulations the Commissioner shall prescribe, or that further payments will not be made to the State only for the projects under the parts of the State plan affected by such failure), until the Commissioner is satisfied there is no longer any such failure.

Until the Commissioner is so satisfied, the Commissioner shall make no further payments to such State under this subchapter (or shall reduce payments or limit payments to projects under those parts of the State plan in which there is no such failure).

The Commissioner may, in accordance with regulations the Secretary shall prescribe, disburse any funds withheld from a State under paragraph (1) to any public or nonprofit private organization or agency within such State or to any political subdivision of such State submitting a plan meeting the requirements of section 721(a) of this title. The Commissioner may not make any payment under this paragraph unless the entity to which such payment is made has provided assurances to the Commissioner that such entity will contribute, for purposes of carrying out such plan, the same amount as the State would have been obligated to contribute if the State received such payment.

Any State that is dissatisfied with a final determination of the Commissioner under section 721(b) of this title or subsection (c) of this section may file a petition for judicial review of such determination in the United States Court of Appeals for the circuit in which the State is located. Such a petition may be filed only within the 30-day period beginning on the date that notice of such final determination was received by the State. The clerk of the court shall transmit a copy of the petition to the Commissioner or to any officer designated by the Commissioner for that purpose. In accordance with section 2112 of title 28, the Commissioner shall file with the court a record of the proceeding on which the Commissioner based the determination being appealed by the State. Until a record is so filed, the Commissioner may modify or set aside any determination made under such proceedings.

If, in an action under this subsection to review a final determination of the Commissioner under section 721(b) of this title or subsection (c) of this section, the petitioner or the Commissioner applies to the court for leave to have additional oral submissions or written presentations made respecting such determination, the court may, for good cause shown, order the Commissioner to provide within 30 days an additional opportunity to make such submissions and presentations. Within such period, the Commissioner may revise any findings of fact, modify or set aside the determination being reviewed, or make a new determination by reason of the additional submissions and presentations, and shall file such modified or new determination, and any revised findings of fact, with the return of such submissions and presentations. The court shall thereafter review such new or modified determination.

Upon the filing of a petition under paragraph (1) for judicial review of a determination, the court shall have jurisdiction—

(i) to grant appropriate relief as provided in chapter 7 of title 5, except for interim relief with respect to a determination under subsection (c) of this section; and

(ii) except as otherwise provided in subparagraph (B), to review such determination in accordance with chapter 7 of title 5.

Section 706 of title 5 shall apply to the review of any determination under this subsection, except that the standard for review prescribed by paragraph (2)(E) of such section 706 shall not apply and the court shall hold unlawful and set aside such determination if the court finds that the determination is not supported by substantial evidence in the record of the proceeding submitted pursuant to paragraph (1), as supplemented by any additional submissions and presentations filed under paragraph (2).

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §107, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §128(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4386.)

This section is referred to in sections 705, 726, 796d–1 of this title.

Amounts described in subsection (b) of this section may not be expended by a State for any purpose other than carrying out programs for which the State receives financial assistance under this subchapter, under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, or under subchapter VII of this chapter.

The amounts referred to in subsection (a) of this section are amounts provided to a State under the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 301 et seq.) as reimbursement for the expenditure of payments received by the State from allotments under section 730 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §108, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §129(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4389.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 7 (§301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

A State may expend payments received under section 731 of this title—

(1) to carry out a program to train employers with respect to compliance with the requirements of title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.); and

(2) to inform employers of the existence of the program and the availability of the services of the program.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §109, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §130(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4389.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in par. (1), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

This part is referred to in sections 706, 718, 720, 721, 724, 740, 787 of this title.

(1) Subject to the provisions of subsection (d) of this section, for each fiscal year beginning before October 1, 1978, each State shall be entitled to an allotment of an amount bearing the same ratio to the amount authorized to be appropriated under section 720(b)(1) of this title for allotment under this section as the product of (A) the population of the State, and (B) the square of its allotment percentage, bears to the sum of the corresponding products for all the States.

(2)(A) For each fiscal year beginning on or after October 1, 1978, each State shall be entitled to an allotment in an amount equal to the amount such State received under paragraph (1) for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1978, and an additional amount determined pursuant to subparagraph (B) of this paragraph.

(B) For each fiscal year beginning on or after October 1, 1978, each State shall be entitled to an allotment, from any amount authorized to be appropriated for such fiscal year under section 720(b)(1)(A) 1 of this title for allotment under this section in excess of the amount appropriated under section 720(b)(1)(A) 1 of this title for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1978, in an amount equal to the sum of—

(i) an amount bearing the same ratio to 50 percent of such excess amount as the product of the population of the State and the square of its allotment percentage bears to the sum of the corresponding products for all the States; and

(ii) an amount bearing the same ratio to 50 percent of such excess amount as the product of the population of the State and its allotment percentage bears to the sum of the corresponding products for all the States.

(3) The sum of the payment to any State (other than Guam, American Samoa, the Virgin Islands, the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau) under this subsection for any fiscal year which is less than one-third of 1 percent of the amount appropriated under section 720(b)(1)(A) 1 of this title, or $3,000,000, whichever is greater, shall be increased to that amount, the total of the increases thereby required being derived by proportionately reducing the allotment to each of the remaining such States under this subsection, but with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the sum of the allotments made under this subsection to any such remaining State from being thereby reduced to less than that amount.

(4) For each fiscal year beginning on or after October 1, 1984, for which any amount is appropriated pursuant to section 720(b)(1)(B) 1 of this title, each State shall receive an allocation (from such appropriated amount) in addition to the allotment to which such State is entitled under paragraphs (2) and (3) of this subsection. Such additional allocation shall be an amount which bears the same ratio to the amount so appropriated as that State's allotment under paragraphs (2) and (3) of this subsection bears to the sum of such allotments of all the States.

(5) The Republic of Palau may receive allotments or allocations under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

(1) If the payment to a State under section 731(a) of this title for a fiscal year is less than the total payments such State received under section 2 of the Vocational Rehabilitation Act for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1973, such State shall be entitled to an additional payment (subject to the same terms and conditions applicable to other payments under this part) equal to the difference between such payment under section 731(a) of this title and the amount so received by it.

(2) If a State receives as its Federal share under section 731(a) of this title for any fiscal year less than the applicable Federal share of the expenditure of such State for fiscal year 1972 for vocational rehabilitation services under the plan for such State approved under section 721 of this title (including any amount expended by such State for the administration of the State plan but excluding any amount expended by such State from non-Federal sources for construction under such plan), such State shall be entitled to an additional payment for such fiscal year, subject to the same terms and conditions applicable to other payments under this part, equal to the difference between such payment under section 731(a) of this title and an amount equal to the applicable Federal share of such expenditure for vocational rehabilitation services.

(3) Any payment attributable to the additional payment to a State under this subsection shall be made only from appropriations specifically made to carry out this subsection, and such additional appropriations are hereby authorized.

(1) Not later than forty-five days prior to the end of the fiscal year, the Commissioner shall determine, after reasonable opportunity for the submission to the Commissioner of comments by the State agency administering or supervising the program established under this subchapter, that any payment of an allotment to a State under section 731(a) of this title for any fiscal year will not be utilized by such State in carrying out the purposes of this subchapter.

(2) As soon as practicable but not later than the end of the fiscal year, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the purposes of this subchapter to one or more other States to the extent the Commissioner determines that such other State will be able to use such additional amount during that fiscal year or the subsequent fiscal year for carrying out such purposes. The Commissioner shall make such amount available only if such other State will be able to make sufficient payments from non-Federal sources to pay for the non-Federal share of the cost of vocational rehabilitation services under the State plan for the fiscal year for which the amount was appropriated.

(3) For the purposes of this part, any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to this subsection shall be regarded as an increase of such State's allotment (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

(1) For fiscal year 1987 and for each subsequent fiscal year, the Commissioner shall reserve from the amount appropriated under section 720(b)(1) of this title for allotment under this section a sum, determined under paragraph (2), to carry out the purposes of part D of this subchapter.

(2) The sum referred to in paragraph (1) shall be, as determined by the Secretary—

(A) not less than one-third of one percent and not more than 1.5 percent of the amount under paragraph (1), for fiscal years 1993 and 1994; and

(B) not less than one-half of one percent and not more than 1.5 percent of the amount under paragraph (1), for fiscal years 1995, 1996, and 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §110, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 370; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§101(c), (d), 122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2956, 2957, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §111(e), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 20; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(c)(2), title II, §§206, 207, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1817, 1818; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §131, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4389; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(e), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 723.)

Section 720(b)(1) of this title, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(B), (3), (4), was amended generally by Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §121(b)(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4367, and, as so amended, no longer contains subpars. (A) and (B).

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (a)(5), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

Section 2 of the Vocational Rehabilitation Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), is section 2 of act June 2, 1920, ch. 219, 41 Stat. 735, as amended, which provided for grants to States for vocational rehabilitation services, including computation of allotments, amount of payments, adjusted Federal shares, and private contributions for construction or establishment of facilities, and which was classified to section 32 of this title. Section 32 was repealed by section 500(a) of Pub. L. 93–112, effective 90 days after Sept. 26, 1973, and is covered by this section and sections 724 and 731 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 32 and 42–1 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(e)(1), struck out “to pay for initial expenditures during” before “the subsequent fiscal year” in first sentence, and inserted at end: “The Commissioner shall make such amount available only if such other State will be able to make sufficient payments from non-Federal sources to pay for the non-Federal share of the cost of vocational rehabilitation services under the State plan for the fiscal year for which the amount was appropriated.”

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(e)(2), struck out par. (4) which read as follows: “If the Commissioner determines, under paragraph (1), that any payment of an allotment to a State under section 731(a) of this title for any fiscal year will not be utilized by such State in carrying out the purposes of this subchapter, the payment shall remain available for reallotment to other States until reallotted.”

1992—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §131(a)(1), substituted “and the Republic of Palau” for “and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §131(a)(2), added par. (5).

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §131(b), added par. (4).

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §131(c), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “For any fiscal year the sum shall be not less than 1/4 of one percent and not more than one percent of the amount under paragraph (1), as determined by the Secretary.”

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §207(1), inserted qualification relating to subsec. (d) of this section.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §206(a), struck out “, as a result of the maintenance of effort provisions of such section,” after “for any fiscal year” and inserted “for fiscal year 1972” after “such State”.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(c)(2), substituted “the applicable Federal share” for “80 percent” in two places.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §206(b), amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) read as follows: “Whenever the Commissioner determines, after reasonable opportunity for the submission to him of comments by the State agency administering or supervising the program established under this subchapter that any payment of an allotment to a State under section 731(a) of this title for any fiscal year will not be utilized by such State in carrying out the purposes of this subchapter, he shall make such amount available for carrying out the purposes of this subchapter to one or more other States to the extent he determines such other State will be able to use such additional amount during such year for carrying out such purposes. Any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this part, be regarded as an increase of such State's allotment (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.”

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–506, §207(2), added subsec. (d).

1984—Subsec. (a)(2)(B), (3). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(e)(1), substituted “section 720(b)(1)(A)” for “section 720(b)(1)” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 98–221, §111(e)(2), added par. (4).

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(c), substituted provision establishing a computation formula for State allotments for fiscal years beginning before Oct. 1, 1978, and for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1978, for provision establishing a computation formula for each fiscal year, inserted a provision establishing a formula for additional amounts, excluded the Northern Mariana Islands from consideration for adjustments, and increased minimum amount of adjustment to $3,000,000.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §101(d), designated existing provision as par. (1), struck out provision requiring payments attributable to the additional payment under this subsection to be made only from appropriations specifically made to carry out this subsection and such additional appropriations as authorized, and added pars. (2) and (3).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Section 103(c)(2) of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that the amendment made by that section is effective Oct. 1, 1988.

This section is referred to in sections 707, 721, 725, 728, 731, 750, 795p, 797a of this title; title 42 section 1396n.

1 See References in Text note below.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), from each State's allotment under this part for any fiscal year, the Commissioner shall pay to a State an amount equal to the Federal share of the cost of vocational rehabilitation services under the plan for that State approved under section 721 of this title, including expenditures for the administration of the State plan and development and implementation of the strategic plan as provided in section 721(a)(34)(A) of this title. Any State that receives such an amount shall expend, for development and implementation of the strategic plan, not less than the percentage of the allotment of the State referred to in section 721(a)(34)(B) of this title.

(2)(A) The total of payments under paragraph (1) to a State for a fiscal year may not exceed its allotment under subsection (a),1 of section 730 of this title for such year and such payments shall not be made in an amount which would result in a violation of the provisions of the State plan required by section 721(a)(17) of this title.

(B)(i) For fiscal year 1993, the amount otherwise payable to a State for a fiscal year under this section shall be reduced by the amount by which expenditures from non-Federal sources under the State plan under this subchapter for the previous fiscal year are less than the average of the total of such expenditures for the 3 fiscal years preceding the previous fiscal year.

(ii) For fiscal year 1994 and each fiscal year thereafter, the amount otherwise payable to a State for a fiscal year under this section shall be reduced by the amount by which expenditures from non-Federal sources under the State plan under this subchapter for the previous fiscal year are less than the total of such expenditures for the second fiscal year preceding the previous fiscal year.

(C) The Commissioner may waive or modify any requirement or limitation under paragraphs (A) and (B) if the Commissioner determines that a waiver or modification is an equitable response to exceptional or uncontrollable circumstances affecting the State.

(3)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the amount of a payment under this section with respect to any construction project in any State shall be equal to the same percentage of the cost of such project as the Federal share that is applicable in the case of rehabilitation facilities (as defined in section 291*o*(g) of title 42), in such State.

(B) If the Federal share with respect to rehabilitation facilities in such State is determined pursuant to section 291*o*(b)(2) of title 42, the percentage of the cost for purposes of this section shall be determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Commissioner designed to achieve as nearly as practicable results comparable to the results obtained under such section.

The method of computing and paying amounts pursuant to subsection (a) of this section shall be as follows:

(1) The Commissioner shall, prior to the beginning of each calendar quarter or other period prescribed by the Commissioner, estimate the amount to be paid to each State under the provisions of such subsection for such period, such estimate to be based on such records of the State and information furnished by it, and such other investigation as the Commissioner may find necessary.

(2) The Commissioner shall pay, from the allotment available therefor, the amount so estimated by the Commissioner for such period, reduced or increased, as the case may be, by any sum (not previously adjusted under this paragraph) by which the Commissioner finds that the estimate of the amount to be paid the State for any prior period under such subsection was greater or less than the amount which should have been paid to the State for such prior period under such subsection. Such payment shall be made prior to audit or settlement by the General Accounting Office, shall be made through the disbursing facilities of the Treasury Department, and shall be made in such installments as the Commissioner may determine.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §111, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 371; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title II, §208, title X, §1001(b)(6), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1818, 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(e)(1), (2)(A), (3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3306; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §132, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4390; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(f), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 723.)

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 32 and 36 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–73 realigned margins of pars. (1) and (2).

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §132(1), struck out “(including any additional payment to it under section 730(b) of this title)” after “for any fiscal year” and substituted “State plan and development and implementation of the strategic plan as provided in section 721(a)(34)(A) of this title. Any State that receives such an amount shall expend, for development and implementation of the strategic plan, not less than the percentage of the allotment of the State referred to in section 721(a)(34)(B) of this title.” for “State plan.”

Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §132(2)(A), struck out “(and any additional payment under subsection (b))” after “subsection (a)”.

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §132(2)(B), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “For fiscal year 1990 and each fiscal year thereafter, the amount otherwise payable to a State for a fiscal year under this section shall be reduced by the amount by which expenditures from non-Federal sources under the State plan under this subchapter for the previous fiscal year are less than the average of the total of such expenditures for the three fiscal years preceding that previous fiscal year.”

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §132(3), added par. (3).

1988—Pub. L. 100–630, §202(e)(1), made technical correction to section number, resulting in no change in text.

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(e)(2)(A), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “The amount otherwise payable to a State for a fiscal year under this section shall be reduced by any amount by which expenditures from non-Federal sources under the State plan during such year under this subchapter are less than the average of the total of such expenditures for the three preceding fiscal years.”

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(e)(3), struck out comma after “such other investigation”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §208, amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “From each State's allotment under this part for any fiscal year (including any additional payment to it under section 730(b) of this title), the Commissioner shall pay to such State an amount equal to the Federal share of the cost of vocational rehabilitation services under the plan for such State approved under section 721 of this title, including expenditures for the administration of the State plan, except that the total of such payments to such State for such fiscal year may not exceed its allotment under subsection (a) (and its additional payment under subsection (b), if any) of section 730 of this title for such year and such payments shall not be made in an amount which would result in a violation of the provisions of the State plan required by clause (17) of section 721(a) of this title and except that the amount otherwise payable to such State for such year under this section shall be reduced by the amount (if any) by which expenditures from non-Federal sources during such year under this subchapter are less than expenditures under the State plan for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1972, under the Vocational Rehabilitation Act.”

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(6)(A), substituted “prescribed by the Commissioner” for “prescribed by him”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(6)(B), substituted “estimated by the Commissioner” for “estimated by him” and “the Commissioner finds that the” for “he finds that his”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

Section 202(e)(2)(B) of Pub. L. 100–630 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect on October 1, 1989.”

Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §368, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3976, provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

This section is referred to in sections 706, 728a, 730 of this title; title 5 section 8104.

1 So in original. The comma probably should not appear.

From funds appropriated under subsection (i) of this section, the Secretary shall, in accordance with this section, make grants to States to establish and carry out client assistance programs to provide assistance in informing and advising all clients and client applicants of all available benefits under this chapter, and, upon request of such clients or client applicants, to assist and advocate for such clients or applicants in their relationships with projects, programs, and community rehabilitation programs providing services to them under this chapter, including assistance and advocacy in pursuing legal, administrative, or other appropriate remedies to ensure the protection of the rights of such individuals under this chapter and to facilitate access to the services funded under this chapter through individual and systemic advocacy. The client assistance program shall provide information on the available services and benefits under this chapter and title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.) to individuals with disabilities in the State, especially with regard to individuals with disabilities who have traditionally been unserved or underserved by vocational rehabilitation programs. In providing assistance and advocacy under this subsection with respect to services under this subchapter, a client assistance program may provide the assistance and advocacy with respect to services that are directly related to facilitating the employment of the individual.

No State may receive payments from its allotment under this chapter in any fiscal year unless the State has in effect not later than October 1, 1984, a client assistance program which—

(1) has the authority to pursue legal, administrative, and other appropriate remedies to ensure the protection of rights of individuals with disabilities who are receiving treatments, services, or rehabilitation under this chapter within the State; and

(2) meets the requirements of designation under subsection (c) of this section.

(1)(A) The Governor shall designate a public or private agency to conduct the client assistance program under this section. Except as provided in the last sentence of this paragraph, the Governor shall designate an agency which is independent of any agency which provides treatment, services, or rehabilitation to individuals under this chapter. If there is an agency in the State which has, or had, prior to February 22, 1984, served as a client assistance agency under this section and which received Federal financial assistance under this chapter, the Governor may, in the initial designation, designate an agency which provides treatment, services, or rehabilitation to individuals with disabilities under this chapter.

(B) The Governor may not redesignate the agency designated under subparagraph (A) without good cause and unless—

(i) the Governor has given the agency 30 days notice of the intention to make such redesignation, including specification of the good cause for such redesignation and an opportunity to respond to the assertion that good cause has been shown;

(ii) individuals with disabilities or their representatives have timely notice of the redesignation and opportunity for public comment; and

(iii) the agency has the opportunity to appeal to the Commissioner on the basis that the redesignation was not for good cause.

(2) In carrying out the provisions of this section, the Governor shall consult with the director of the State vocational rehabilitation agency, the head of the developmental disability protection and advocacy agency, and with representatives of professional and consumer organizations serving individuals with disabilities in the State.

(3) The agency designated under this subsection shall be accountable for the proper use of funds made available to the agency.

(4) For the purpose of this subsection, the term “Governor” means the chief executive of the State.

The agency designated under subsection (c) of this section may not bring any class action in carrying out its responsibilities under this section.

(1)(A) The Secretary shall allot the sums appropriated for each fiscal year under this section among the States on the basis of relative population of each State, except that no State shall receive less than $50,000.

(B) The Secretary shall allot $30,000 each to American Samoa, Guam, the Virgin Islands, the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

(C) For the purpose of this paragraph, the term “State” does not include American Samoa, Guam, the Virgin Islands, the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau.

(D)(i) In any fiscal year that the funds appropriated for such fiscal year exceed $7,500,000, the minimum allotment shall be $100,000 for States and $45,000 for territories.

(ii) For any fiscal year in which the total amount appropriated under subsection (h) of this section exceeds the total amount appropriated under such subsection for the preceding fiscal year by a percentage greater than the most recent percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers published by the Secretary of Labor under section 720(c)(1) of this title, the Secretary shall increase each of the minimum allotments under clause (i) by such percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers.

(2) The amount of an allotment to a State for a fiscal year which the Secretary determines will not be required by the State during the period for which it is available for the purpose for which allotted shall be available for reallotment by the Secretary at appropriate times to other States with respect to which such a determination has not been made, in proportion to the original allotments of such States for such fiscal year, but with such proportionate amount for any of such other States being reduced to the extent it exceeds the sum the Secretary estimates such State needs and will be able to use during such period; and the total of such reduction shall be similarly reallotted among the States whose proportionate amounts were not so reduced. Any such amount so reallotted to a State for a fiscal year shall be deemed to be a part of its allotment for such fiscal year.

(3) Except as specifically prohibited by or as otherwise provided in State law, the Secretary shall pay to the agency designated under subsection (c) of this section the amount specified in the application approved under subsection (f) of this section.

No grant may be made under this section unless the State submits an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing or accompanied by such information as the Secretary deems necessary to meet the requirements of this section.

The Secretary shall prescribe regulations applicable to the client assistance program which shall include the following requirements:

(1) No employees of such programs shall, while so employed, serve as staff or consultants of any rehabilitation project, program, or facility receiving assistance under this chapter in the State.

(2) Each program shall be afforded reasonable access to policymaking and administrative personnel in the State and local rehabilitation programs, projects, or facilities.

(3) Each program shall contain provisions designed to assure that to the maximum extent possible mediation procedures are used prior to resorting to administrative or legal remedies.

(4), (5) Repealed. Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1041(c)(1), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 714.

(6) For purposes of any periodic audit, report, or evaluation of the performance of a client assistance program under this section, the Secretary shall not require such a program to disclose the identity of, or any other personally identifiable information related to, any individual requesting assistance under such program.

There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for fiscal years 1993 through 1997 to carry out the provisions of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 371; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §§102(b), 111(f), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1618, 1620; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §§102(b), 111(f), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3, 2–5; Pub. L. 94–230, §§2(b), 11(b)(4), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211, 213; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§105, 122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2960, 2987; Pub. L. 97–375, title I, §105, Dec. 21, 1982, 96 Stat. 1820; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §113(a), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 20; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title II, §209, title X, §1001(b)(7), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1818, 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3306; Pub. L. 102–52, §2(c), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 260; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §§102(p)(10), 133, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4357, 4391; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(g), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 723; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1041(c), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 714.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (e)(1)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

1995—Subsec. (g)(4), (5). Pub. L. 104–66, §1041(c)(1), struck out pars. (4) and (5) which read as follows:

“(4) The agency designated under subsection (c) of this section shall submit an annual report to the Secretary on the operation of the program during the previous year, including a summary of the work done and the uniform statistical tabulation of all cases handled by such program. A copy of each such report shall be submitted to the appropriate committees of the Congress by the Secretary, together with a summary of such reports and the Secretary's evaluation of the program, including appropriate recommendations.

“(5) Each such report shall contain information on the number of requests the client assistance program under this section receives annually, the number of requests such program is unable to serve, and the reasons that the program is unable to serve all the requests.”

Subsec. (g)(6). Pub. L. 104–66, §1041(c)(2), substituted “any” for “such report or for any other” before “periodic audit”.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(g)(1), in first sentence substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “facilities” before “providing services to them”.

Subsec. (e)(1)(D)(ii). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(g)(2), added cl. (ii) and struck out former cl. (ii) which read as follows: “Subject to clause (i), the Commissioner may increase the minimum allotments under subparagraphs (A) and (B) for any fiscal year for which funds appropriated under this section for such fiscal year exceed the sums appropriated under this section for the preceding fiscal year.”

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(a), in first sentence, substituted “to assist and advocate for such clients” for “to assist such clients”, inserted “and advocacy” after “including assistance”, and inserted before period “and to facilitate access to the services funded under this chapter through individual and systemic advocacy”, amended second sentence generally, and inserted at end “In providing assistance and advocacy under this subsection with respect to services under this subchapter, a client assistance program may provide the assistance and advocacy with respect to services that are directly related to facilitating the employment of the individual.”. Prior to amendment, second sentence read as follows: “The client assistance program may provide information on the available services under this chapter to any individuals with disabilities in the State.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(10), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in second sentence.

Subsecs. (b)(1), (c)(1)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(10), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(b), added subpar. (B) and struck out former subpar. (B) which read as follows: “The Governor may not redesignate the agency designated under subparagraph (A) without good cause and only after notice and an opportunity for public comment has been given of the intention to make such redesignation.”

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(10), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (e)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(c)(1), substituted “and the Republic of Palau, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.” for “and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands.”

Subsec. (e)(1)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(c)(2), substituted “and the Republic of Palau” for “and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Subsec. (e)(1)(D). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(c)(3), in cl. (i), substituted “$100,000” for “$75,000” and in cl. (ii), substituted “clause (i)” for “subsection (c) of this section”, “minimum allotments under subparagraphs (A) and (B)” for “minimum allotment under subparagraph (A)”, and “fiscal year.” for “fiscal year by more than the percentage increase in the Consumer Price Index published monthly by the Bureau of Labor Statistics.”

Subsec. (g)(5), (6). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(d), added pars. (5) and (6).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(e), redesignated subsec. (i) as (h), substituted “such sums as may be necessary for fiscal years 1993 through 1997 to carry out the provisions of this section” for “$7,100,000 for fiscal year 1987, $7,550,000 for fiscal year 1988, $8,000,000 for fiscal year 1989, $8,450,000 for fiscal year 1990, $8,796,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992, to carry out the provisions of this section”, and struck out former subsec. (h) which required Commissioner to conduct a comprehensive evaluation of client assistance program and submit a report to Congress.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(10), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in par. (2)(A) and (C).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–569, §133(e)(2), redesignated subsec. (i) as (h).

1991—Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–52 struck out “and” after “1990,” and inserted “and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992,” after “1991,”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(2), struck out comma after “client assistance program” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(3), added par. (4).

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(4), struck out comma after “consultants of”.

Subsec. (g)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(5), substituted “the Secretary's” for “his”.

Subsec. (h)(3)(C). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(6), substituted “February 22, 1984” for “this reauthorization” in two places.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(f)(7), inserted comma after “1991”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §209(a), inserted provision that the client assistance program may provide information on the available services under this chapter to any handicapped individuals in the State.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 209(b), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A), inserted “, in the initial designation,” after “the Governor may” and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, and added subpar. (B).

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (e)(1)(D). Pub. L. 99–506, §209(d), added subpar. (D).

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(b)(7), substituted “at appropriate times” for “from time to time on such dates he may fix”.

Subsec. (e)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §209(c), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows:

“(A) The Secretary shall pay to the Governor from the allotment of the State the amount specified in the application approved under subsection (f) of this section.

“(B) For the purpose of this paragraph and subsection (c) of this section, the term ‘Governor’ means the chief executive of the State.”

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §209(e), struck out “, or receive benefits of any kind directly or indirectly from” after “or consultants of”.

Subsec. (h)(2)(A), (C). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 99–506, §209(f), amended subsec. (i) generally, substituting provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal years 1987 through 1991 for provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal years 1984 through 1986.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted provisions making permanent a client assistance program funded from appropriations authorized by subsec. (i) of this section for provisions which had established the client assistance program as a pilot program for fiscal years 1979, 1980, 1981, and 1982 to be funded from appropriations authorized by section 777 of this title for special projects and demonstrations.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted provisions that no State may receive payments from its allotment under this chapter unless the State has in effect not later than Oct. 1, 1984, a client assistance program meeting certain enumerated conditions for former provisions which had authorized the promulgation of regulations. The former provisions of former subsec. (b) are covered in subsecs. (c) and (g).

Subsecs. (c) to (i). Pub. L. 98–221 added subsecs. (c) to (i).

1982—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 97–375 struck out par. (3) which provided that the project submit to the Commissioner through the State agency designated by section 721 of this title an annual report on the previous year's operation of the project, including a summary of work done and uniform statistical tabulation of cases handled, and that the Commissioner submit a copy of the report to appropriate committees of Congress, together with a summary of the reports, evaluation of the projects, and appropriate recommendations.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §§105, 122(b)(1), substituted “section 777 of this title” for “section 774 of this title” in two places, “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing, and “no less than $3,500,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, and for each of the three succeeding fiscal years, to establish in geographically dispersed regions” for “up to $1,500,000, but no less than $500,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1974, up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1975, up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1977, and up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1978, to establish in no less than 7 nor more than 20 geographically dispersed regions” and inserted “, including assistance in pursuing legal, administrative, or other appropriate remedies to insure the protection of the rights of such individuals under this chapter” after “them under this chapter”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(b)(1), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

1976—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 94–230, §2(b), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(4), inserted provisions authorizing appropriations up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516 substituted “in excess of $11,860,000” for “in excess of an amount equal to the amount obligated for expenditure for carrying out such projects and demonstrations from appropriations under the Vocational Rehabilitation Act in the fiscal year ending June 30, 1973,”, authorized appropriation of up to $2,500,000 but no less than $1,000,000 for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, and inserted provisions that in the event that funds so appropriated under section 774 of this title do not exceed $11,860,000 in any fiscal year, the Secretary is authorized to utilize such funds to carry out this section.

Pub. L. 93–651 amended subsec. (a) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

For contingency provisions relating to the extensions of program authorizations and to the effective date of such extensions, see section 11(a), (b)(1), and (c) of Pub. L. 94–230, set out as a note under section 720 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 718a, 720, 721, 722, 725, 794e, 796, 796c of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 706, 718, 720, 721, 796d of this title.

Effective October 1, 1993, any State desiring to receive assistance under this part and part B of this subchapter shall prepare and submit to the Commissioner a statewide strategic plan for developing and using innovative approaches for achieving long-term success in expanding and improving vocational rehabilitation services, including supported employment services, provided under the State plan submitted under section 721 of this title and the supplement to the State plan submitted under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §120, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §134(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4392.)

A prior section 740, Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §120, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 372; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§101(e)(1), 122(b)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2957, 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title X, §1001(b)(8), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(g), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3306, provided for State allotments to assist in meeting the cost of vocational rehabilitation services, prior to the general revision of this part by Pub. L. 102–569.

The strategic plan shall be designed to achieve the purpose and policy of this subchapter and carry out the State plan and the supplement to the State plan submitted under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter.

The strategic plan shall include—

(1) a statement of the mission, philosophy, values, and principles of the vocational rehabilitation program in the State;

(2) specific goals and objectives for expanding and improving the system for providing the vocational rehabilitation program;

(3) specific multifaceted and systemic approaches for accomplishing the objectives, including interagency coordination and cooperation, that build upon state-of-the-art practices and research findings and that implement the State plan and the supplement to the State plan submitted under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter;

(4) a description of the specific programs, projects, and activities funded under this part and how the programs, projects, and activities accomplish the objectives; and

(5) specific criteria for determining whether the objectives have been achieved, an assurance that the State will conduct an annual evaluation to determine the extent to which the objectives have been achieved, and, if specific objectives have not been achieved, the reasons that the objectives have not been achieved and a description of alternative approaches that will be taken.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §121, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §134(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4392.)

A prior section 741, Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §121, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 373; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §102(c), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1618; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §102(c), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3; Pub. L. 94–230, §2(c), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§101(e)(2), 122(b), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2957, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §114, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 23; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title II, §210, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1819; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(h), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3306; Pub. L. 102–52, §2(b)(2), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 260, related to payments to States for planning, preparing, and initiating special programs under approved State plans and payments for the costs of constructing facilities to be used in providing services under such State plans, prior to the general revision of this part by Pub. L. 102–569.

The strategic plan shall cover a 3-year period and shall be updated on an annual basis to reflect actual experience over the previous year and input from the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council established under section 725 of this title, individuals with disabilities, and other interested parties.

Prior to developing the strategic plan, the State shall hold public forums and meet with and receive recommendations from members of the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council and the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title.

The State shall consider the recommendations and, if the State rejects the recommendations, shall include a written explanation of the rejection in the strategic plan.

The State shall develop a procedure for ensuring ongoing comment from the councils described in subsection (b) of this section as the plan is being implemented.

The State shall widely disseminate the strategic plan to individuals with disabilities, disability organizations, rehabilitation professionals, and other interested persons.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §122, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §134(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4393.)

A State may use funds made available under this part, directly or by grant, contract, or other arrangement, to carry out—

(1) programs to initiate and expand employment opportunities for individuals with severe disabilities in integrated settings that allow for the use of on-the-job training to promote the objectives of title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.);

(2) programs or activities to improve the provision of, and expand, employment services in integrated settings to individuals with sensory, cognitive, physical, and mental impairments who have traditionally not been served by the State vocational rehabilitation agency;

(3) programs and activities to maximize the ability of individuals with disabilities to use rehabilitation technology in employment settings;

(4) programs and activities that—

(A) assist employers in accommodating, evaluating, training, or placing individuals with disabilities in the workplace of the employer consistent with provisions of this chapter and title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.]; and

(B) may include short-term technical assistance or other effective strategies;

(5) programs and activities that expand and improve the extent and type of client involvement in the review and selection of the training and employment goals of the client;

(6) programs and activities that expand and improve opportunities for career advancement for individuals with severe disabilities;

(7) programs, projects, and activities designed to initiate, expand, or improve working relationships between vocational rehabilitation services provided under this subchapter and independent living services provided under subchapter VII of this chapter;

(8) programs, projects, and activities designed to improve functioning of the system for delivering vocational rehabilitation services and to improve coordination and working relationships with other State and local agencies, business, industry, labor, community rehabilitation programs, and centers for independent living, including projects designed to—

(A) increase the ease of access to, timeliness of, and quality of vocational rehabilitation services through the development and implementation of policies, procedures, and systems and interagency mechanisms for providing vocational rehabilitation services;

(B) improve the working relationships between State vocational rehabilitation agencies, and other State agencies, centers for independent living, community rehabilitation programs, educational agencies involved in higher education, adult basic education, and continuing education, and businesses, industry, and labor organizations, in order to create and facilitate cooperation in—

(i) planning and implementing services; and

(ii) the development of an integrated system of community-based vocational rehabilitation service that includes appropriate transitions between service systems; and

(C) improve the ability of professionals, clients, advocates, business, industry, and labor to work in cooperative partnerships to improve the quality of vocational rehabilitation services and job and career opportunities for individuals with disabilities;

(9) support efforts to ensure that the annual evaluation of the effectiveness of the program in meeting the goals and objectives set forth in the State plan, including the system for evaluating the performance of rehabilitation counselors, coordinators, and other personnel used in the State, facilitates and does not impede the accomplishment of the purpose and policy of this subchapter, including serving, among others, individuals with the most severe disabilities;

(10) support the initiation, expansion, and improvement of a comprehensive system of personnel development;

(11) support the provision of training and technical assistance to clients, business, industry, labor, community rehabilitation programs, and others regarding the implementation of the amendments made by the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992, of subchapter V of this chapter, and of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.]; and

(12) support the funding of the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council and the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §123, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §134(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4393.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in pars. (1), (4)(A), and (11), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992, referred to in par. (11), is Pub. L. 102–569, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4344. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1992 Amendment note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in section 721 of this title.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), from sums appropriated for each fiscal year to carry out this part (not including sums used in accordance with section 721(a)(34)(B) of this title), the Commissioner shall make an allotment to each State whose State plan has been approved under section 721 of this title of an amount bearing the same ratio to such sums as the population of the State bears to the population of all States.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this part, the allotment to any State under subparagraph (A) shall be not less than $200,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater, and the allotment of any State under this section for any fiscal year that is less than $200,000 or one-third of one percent of such sums shall be increased to the greater of the two amounts.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(B), Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau shall not be considered to be States.

Each jurisdiction described in subparagraph (A) shall be allotted under paragraph (1)(A) not less than one-eighth of one percent of the amounts made available for purposes of this part for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

For any fiscal year, beginning in fiscal year 1994, in which the total amount appropriated to carry out this part exceeds the total amount appropriated to carry out this part for the preceding fiscal year by a percentage greater than the most recent percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers published by the Secretary of Labor under section 720(c)(1) of this title, the Commissioner shall increase the minimum allotment under paragraph (1)(B) by such percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers.

To provide minimum allotments to States (as increased under subsection (a)(3) of this section) under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, or to provide minimum allotments to States under subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section, the Commissioner shall proportionately reduce the allotments of the remaining States under subsection (a)(1)(A) of this section, with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining State from being reduced to less than the minimum allotment for a State (as increased under subsection (a)(3) of this section) under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, or the minimum allotment for a State under subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section, as appropriate.

Whenever the Commissioner determines that any amount of an allotment to a State for any fiscal year will not be expended by such State for carrying out the provisions of this part, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the purposes of this part to one or more of the States that the Commissioner determines will be able to use additional amounts during such year for carrying out such provisions. Any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this section, be regarded as an increase in the allotment of the State (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §124, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §134(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4395; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §107(h), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 723.)

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

1993—Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(h)(1)(A)(i), substituted “paragraph (1)(B)” for “this subsection”.

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(h)(1)(A)(ii), substituted “allotted under paragraph (1)(A)” for “allotted”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(h)(1)(B), added par. (3) and struck out heading and text of former par. (3). Text read as follows: “For purposes of determining the minimum amount of an allotment under paragraph (1)(B), the amount $200,000 shall, in the case of such allotments for fiscal year 1994 and subsequent fiscal years, be increased to the extent necessary to offset the effects of inflation occurring since October 1992, as measured by the percentage increase in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers (U.S. city average) during the period ending on April 1 of the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the allotment is to be made.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–73, §107(h)(2), added subsec. (b) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (b). Text read as follows: “Amounts necessary to provide allotments to States in accordance with subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section as increased under subsection (a)(3) of this section, or to provide allotments in accordance with subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section, shall be derived by proportionately reducing the allotments of the remaining States under subsection (a)(1) of this section, but with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining States from being thereby reduced to less than the greater of $200,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for purposes of this part for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, as increased in accordance with subsection (a)(3) of this section.”

This part is referred to in sections 724, 725, 730 of this title.

The Commissioner, in accordance with the provisions of this part, may make grants to the governing bodies of Indian tribes located on Federal and State reservations (and consortia of such governing bodies) to pay 90 percent of the costs of vocational rehabilitation services for American Indians who are individuals with disabilities residing on such reservations. The non-Federal share of such costs may be in cash or in kind, fairly valued, and the Commissioner may waive such non-Federal share requirement in order to carry out the purposes of this chapter.

(1) No grant may be made under this part for any fiscal year unless an application therefor has been submitted to and approved by the Commissioner. The Commissioner may not approve an application unless the application—

(A) is made at such time, in such manner, and contains such information as the Commissioner may require;

(B) contains assurances that the rehabilitation services provided under this part to American Indians who are individuals with disabilities residing on a reservation in a State shall be, to the maximum extent feasible, comparable to rehabilitation services provided under this subchapter to other individuals with disabilities residing in the State and that, where appropriate, may include services traditionally used by Indian tribes; and

(C) contains assurances that the application was developed in consultation with the designated State unit of the State.

(2) The provisions of sections 450c, 450d, 450e, and 450f(a) of title 25 shall be applicable to any application submitted under this part. For purposes of this paragraph, any reference in any such provision to the Secretary of Education or to the Secretary of the Interior shall be considered to be a reference to the Commissioner.

(3) Any application approved under this part shall be effective for not less than twelve months or more than 36 months, except as determined otherwise by the Commissioner pursuant to prescribed regulations. The State shall continue to provide vocational rehabilitation services under its State plan to American Indians residing on a reservation whenever such State includes any such American Indians in its State population under section 730(a)(1) of this title.

(4) In making grants under this part, the Secretary shall give priority consideration to applications for the continuation of programs which have been funded under this part.

(5) Nothing in this section may be construed to authorize a separate service delivery system for Indian residents of a State who reside in non-reservation areas.

The term “reservation” includes Indian reservations, public domain Indian allotments, former Indian reservations in Oklahoma, and land held by incorporated Native groups, regional corporations, and village corporations under the provisions of the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act [43 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §130, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 374; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(g), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1621; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(g), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–6; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §106, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2960; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title II, §211, title X, §1002(b)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1819, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(i), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3306; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(11), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4357.)

The Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is Pub. L. 92–203, Dec. 18, 1971, 85 Stat. 688, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1601 et seq.) of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1601 of Title 43 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(11)(A), substituted “American Indians who are individuals with disabilities” for “American Indians with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(11), substituted “American Indians who are individuals with disabilities” for “American Indians with handicaps” and “other individuals with disabilities” for “other individuals with handicaps”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(i)(1), inserted comma after “part” and substituted “American Indians with handicaps” for “handicapped American Indians”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(i)(2), substituted “American Indians with handicaps” for “handicapped American Indians”.

Subsecs. (c) to (e). Pub. L. 100–630, §202(i)(3), which redesignated subsec. (e) as (c) and struck out subsec. (d), was executed without regard to the purported amendment by Pub. L. 95–602 as the probable intent of Congress. Prior to amendment, subsec. (d) read as follows: “For the purpose of computing the allotment of any State under section 730(a) of this title, the number of American Indians residing on a reservation to be served by a grant under this part shall be subtracted from the population used for such State in section 730(a)(1) of this title as follows:

“(1) 33 percent of such American Indians in the first fiscal year during which such Indians are served by grants under this part;

“(2) 66 percent of such American Indians in the second fiscal year during which such Indians are served by grants under this part; and

“(3) 100 percent of such American Indians in the third fiscal year during which such Indians are served by grants under this part.”

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §211(a), amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “The Commissioner, in accordance with the provisions of this part, may make grants to the governing bodies of Indian tribes located on Federal and State reservations to pay 90 percent of the costs of vocational rehabilitation services for handicapped American Indians residing on such reservations.”

Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 211(b)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and inserted provision including services traditionally used by Indian tribes.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(b)(1), substituted “Secretary of Education” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §211(b)(2), inserted “or more than 36 months,” after “months”.

Subsec. (b)(4), (5). Pub. L. 99–506, §211(b)(3), added pars. (4) and (5).

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 99–506, §211(c), purported to strike out subsec. (c) and redesignate subsec. (d) as (c). As amended by Pub. L. 95–602 section did not contain a subsec. (c). See 1988 Amendment note above.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 amended section generally, substituting subsecs. (a), (b), (d), and (e) relating to authorizing vocational rehabilitation services grants to handicapped American Indians for former subsecs. (a) and (b) relating to a study of comprehensive service needs of individuals with the most severe handicaps.

1974—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–516 substituted “June 30, 1975” for “February 1, 1975”.

Pub. L. 93–651 amended subsec. (b) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

This section is referred to in section 721 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §131, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §106, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2961, and amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, directed Secretary to submit to Congress, not less than thirty months after Nov. 6, 1978, an evaluation of programs conducted under this part.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §131, formerly §132, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title II, §212(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1820; renumbered §132, Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §202(j), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3307, provided for study on special problems and needs of Indians with handicaps both on and off the reservation.

The Commissioner shall conduct a comprehensive review of the current system for collecting and reporting data on clients of programs carried out under this chapter, particularly data on clients of the programs carried out under this subchapter.

In conducting the review, the Commissioner shall examine the kind, quantity, and quality of the data that are currently collected and reported, taking into consideration the range of purposes that the data serve at the Federal, State, and local levels.

In conducting the review, the Commissioner shall examine the feasibility of collecting and reporting under the system information, if such information can be determined, with respect to each client participating in a program under this chapter, regarding—

(A) other programs in which the client participated during the 3 years before the date on which the client applied to participate in a program under this chapter;

(B) the number of jobs held, hours worked, and earnings received by the client during such 3 years;

(C) the types of major and secondary disabilities of the client;

(D) the dates of the onset of the disabilities;

(E) the severity of the disabilities;

(F) the source from which the client was referred to a program under this chapter;

(G) the hours worked by the client;

(H) the size and industry code of the place of employment of the client at the time of entry into such a program and at the termination of services under the program;

(I) the number of services provided to the client under the programs and the cost of each service;

(J) the types of public support received by the client;

(K) the primary sources of economic support and amounts of public assistance received by the client before and after receiving the services;

(L) whether the client is covered by health insurance from any source and whether health insurance is available through the employer of the client;

(M) the supported employment status of the client; and

(N) the reasons for terminating the services received by the client.

Based on the review, the Commissioner shall recommend improvements in the data collection and reporting system.

In developing the recommendations, the Commissioner shall seek views of persons and entities providing or using such data, including State agencies, State Rehabilitation Advisory Councils, providers of vocational rehabilitation services, professionals in the field of vocational rehabilitation, clients and organizations representing clients, the National Council on Disability, other Federal agencies, non-Federal researchers, other analysts using the data, and other members of the public.

Not later than 18 months after October 29, 1992, the Commissioner shall publish the recommendations in the Federal Register and shall prepare and submit a report containing the recommendations to the appropriate committees of Congress. The Commissioner shall not implement the recommendations earlier than 90 days after the date on which the Commissioner submits the report.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §140, as added Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §108, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 724.)

The Secretary of Education and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall enter into a memorandum of understanding for the purposes of exchanging data of mutual importance—

(1) that concern clients of State vocational rehabilitation agencies; and

(2) that are data maintained either by—

(A) the Rehabilitation Services Administration, as required by section 712 of this title; or

(B) the Social Security Administration, from its Summary Earnings and Records and Master Beneficiary Records.

For purposes of the exchange, the data described in subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section shall not be considered return information (as defined in section 6103(b)(2) of title 26) and, as appropriate, the confidentiality of all client information shall be maintained by both agencies.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title I, §141, as added Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §108, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 725.)

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b of this title.

The purpose of this subchapter is to—

(1) provide for research, demonstration projects, training, and related activities to maximize the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, family support, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities of all ages, with particular emphasis on improving the effectiveness of services authorized under this chapter;

(2) provide for a comprehensive and coordinated approach to the support and conduct of such research, demonstration projects, training, and related activities and to ensure that the approach is in accordance with the long-range plan for research developed under section 761a(g) of this title;

(3) promote the transfer of rehabilitation technology to individuals with disabilities through research and demonstration projects relating to—

(A) the procurement process for the purchase of rehabilitation technology;

(B) the utilization of rehabilitation technology on a national basis; and

(C) specific adaptations or customizations of products to enable individuals with disabilities to live more independently;

(4) ensure the widespread distribution, in usable formats, of practical scientific and technological information—

(A) generated by research, demonstration projects, training, and related activities; and

(B) regarding state-of-the-art practices, improvements in the services authorized under this chapter, rehabilitation technology, and new knowledge regarding disabilities,

to rehabilitation professionals, individuals with disabilities, and other interested parties;

(5) identify effective strategies that enhance the opportunities of individuals with disabilities to engage in productive work; and

(6) increase opportunities for researchers who are members of traditionally underserved populations, including researchers who are members of minority groups and researchers who are individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §200, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 374; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §107, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2962; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 102–569, title II, §201, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4398.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 added pars. (1) to (6) and struck out former pars. (1) to (4) which read as follows:

“(1) provide for a comprehensive and coordinated approach to the administration and conduct of research, demonstration projects, and related activities for the rehabilitation of individuals with handicaps, including programs designed to train persons who provide rehabilitation services and persons who conduct research, by authorizing Federal assistance in accordance with a plan for rehabilitation research developed under this subchapter;

“(2) facilitate the distribution of information concerning developments in rehabilitation procedures, methods, and devices to rehabilitation professionals and to individuals with handicaps to assist such individuals to live more independently;

“(3) improve the distribution of technological devices and equipment for individuals with handicaps by providing financial support for the development and distribution of such devices and equipment; and

“(4) increase the scientific and technological information presently available in the field of rehabilitation.”

1986—Pars. (1) to (3). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted provision declaring that the purpose of this subchapter is to develop a coordinated and comprehensive approach to rehabilitation and training, to facilitate the distribution of information concerning development in the rehabilitation field, to improve distribution of technological devices and equipment, and to increase scientific and technological information for provision declaring the purpose of this subchapter is to authorize Federal assistance to State and public or nonprofit agencies to plan and conduct research and related activities in the rehabilitation field and to plan and conduct courses of training and related activities designed to increase the number of trained personnel and the level of their skills.

(a) There are authorized to be appropriated—

(1) for the purpose of providing for the expenses of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research under section 761a of this title, which shall include the expenses of the Rehabilitation Research Advisory Council under section 765 of this title, and shall not include the expenses of such Institute to carry out section 762 of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997; and

(2) to carry out section 762 of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(b) Funds appropriated under this subchapter shall remain available until expended.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §201, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 374; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §103, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1618; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §103, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–3; Pub. L. 94–230, §§3, 11(b)(5), (6), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211, 213; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §108, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2962; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §121, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 23; Pub. L. 99–506, title III, §301, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1820; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §203(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3307; Pub. L. 102–52, §3, June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 260; Pub. L. 102–569, title II, §202, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4398.)

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 31 of this title.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §202(1), substituted “which shall include the expenses of the Rehabilitation Research Advisory Council under section 765 of this title, and shall not include the expenses of such Institute to carry out section 762 of this title” for “other than expenses to carry out section 762 of this title” and “each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “fiscal year 1987, and for each succeeding fiscal year ending prior to October 1, 1992”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §202(2), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “$49,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, $52,000,000 for fiscal year 1988, $55,000,000 for fiscal year 1989, $58,000,000 for fiscal year 1990, $60,378,500 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992 for the purpose of carrying out section 762 of this title, of which $1,000,000 shall be available for fiscal year 1987, $1,050,000 for fiscal year 1988, $1,102,500 for fiscal year 1989, $1,160,000 for fiscal year 1990, $1,208,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992 for the purpose of carrying out the last sentence of section 762(b)(2)(C) of this title.”

1991—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–52, §3(1), substituted “1992” for “1991”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–52, §3(2), struck out “and” after “1990,” in two places and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991” in two places.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630 inserted comma after “1987”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506 amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated—

“(1) for the purpose of providing for the expenses of the National Institute of Handicapped Research under section 761a of this title, other than expenses to carry out section 762 of this title, such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1984, and for each of the two succeeding fiscal years; and

“(2) for the purpose of carrying out section 762 of this title, $36,000,000 for the fiscal year 1984, $40,000,000 for the fiscal year 1985, and $44,000,000 for the fiscal year 1986.”

1984—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, §121(a), substituted “fiscal year 1984, and for each of the two succeeding fiscal years” for “the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, and for each of the three succeeding fiscal years”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 98–221, §121(b), substituted “for the purpose of carrying out section 762 of this title, $36,000,000 for the fiscal year 1984, $40,000,000 for the fiscal year 1985, and $44,000,000 for the fiscal year 1986” for “for the purpose of carrying out section 762 of this title, $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, $75,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1980, $90,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1981, and $100,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1982”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602 substituted provision authorizing appropriation of sums as may be necessary for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1979 and the three succeeding fiscal years, for expenses of the National Institute of Handicapped Research, other than expenses for research, and for the expenses for research, $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1979, $75,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1980, $90,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1981, and $100,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1982 for provision authorizing appropriations for research of $25,000,000 for each of the fiscal years ending June 30, 1974 and June 30, 1975, $32,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, and $30,000,000 for each of the fiscal years ending Sept. 30, 1977 and Sept. 30, 1978, with certain spending requirements for the establishment of rehabilitation engineering research centers, and for training, $27,700,000 for each of the fiscal years ending June 30, 1974 and June 30, 1975, $32,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, $25,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977, and $30,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1976—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 94–230, §3(a), inserted provision authorizing appropriations of $30,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(5), inserted provision authorizing appropriations of $30,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 94–230, §3(b), inserted provision authorizing appropriations of $25,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(6), inserted provision authorizing appropriations of $30,000,000 for the fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1974—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 93–516, §103(1), (2), inserted provision authorizing appropriation of $32,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, and substituted “such fiscal years, respectively, and 25 per centum of the amounts appropriated in each succeeding fiscal year” for “such fiscal years, respectively,”.

Pub. L. 93–651, §103(1), (2), amended subsec. (a)(1) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 93–516, §103(3), inserted provision authorizing appropriation of $32,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–651, §103(3), amended subsec. (a)(2) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

For contingency provisions relating to the extensions of program authorizations and to the effective date of such extensions, see section 11(a), (b)(1), and (c) of Pub. L. 94–230, set out as a note under section 720 of this title.

(1) There is established within the Department of Education a National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research (hereinafter in this subchapter referred to as the “Institute”), which shall be headed by a Director (hereinafter in this subchapter referred to as the “Director”), in order to—

(A) promote, coordinate, and provide for—

(i) research;

(ii) demonstration projects; and

(iii) related activities,

with respect to individuals with disabilities;

(B) more effectively carry out activities through the programs under section 762 of this title;

(C) widely disseminate information from the activities described in clauses (i) through (iii) of subparagraph (A) and subparagraph (B); and

(D) provide leadership in advancing the quality of life of individuals with disabilities.

(2) In the performance of the functions of the office, the Director shall be directly responsible to the Secretary or to the same Under Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Department of Education to whom the Commissioner is responsible under section 702(a) of this title.

The Director, through the Institute, shall be responsible for—

(1) administering the programs described in section 762 of this title,

(2) widely disseminating findings, conclusions, and recommendations, resulting from research, demonstration projects, and related activities funded by the Institute, to—

(A) other Federal, State, tribal, and local public agencies;

(B) private organizations engaged in research relating to rehabilitation or providing rehabilitation services;

(C) rehabilitation practitioners; and

(D) individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such individuals;

(3) coordinating, through the Interagency Committee established by section 761b of this title, all Federal programs and policies relating to research in rehabilitation;

(4) widely disseminating educational materials and research results, concerning ways to maximize the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, family support, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities, to—

(A) public and private entities, including—

(i) elementary and secondary schools (as defined in section 8801 of title 20; 1 and

(ii) institutions of higher education;

(B) rehabilitation practitioners;

(C) individuals with disabilities (especially such individuals who are members of minority groups or of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter); and

(D) the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals described in subparagraph (C);

(5) conducting an education program to inform the public about ways of providing for the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities, including information relating to family care and self care;

(6) conducting conferences, seminars, and workshops (including in-service training programs and programs for individuals with disabilities) concerning advances in rehabilitation research and rehabilitation technology, pertinent to the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, family support, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities;

(7) taking whatever action is necessary to keep the Congress fully and currently informed with respect to the implementation and conduct of programs and activities carried out under this subchapter, including dissemination activities;

(8) producing, in conjunction with the Department of Labor, the National Center for Health Statistics, the Bureau of the Census, the Health Care Financing Administration, the Social Security Administration, the Bureau of Indian Affairs, the Indian Health Service, and other Federal departments and agencies, as may be appropriate, statistical reports and studies on the employment, health, income, and other demographic characteristics of individuals with disabilities, including information on individuals with disabilities who live in rural or inner-city settings, with particular attention given to underserved populations, and widely disseminating such reports and studies to rehabilitation professionals, individuals with disabilities, the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such individuals, and others to assist in the planning, assessment, and evaluation of vocational and other rehabilitation services for individuals with disabilities;

(9) conducting research on consumer satisfaction with vocational rehabilitation services for the purpose of identifying effective rehabilitation programs and policies that promote the independence of individuals with disabilities and achievement of long-term vocational goals;

(10) conducting research to examine the relationship between the provision of specific services and long-term vocational outcomes; and

(11) coordinating activities with the Attorney General regarding the provision of information, training, or technical assistance regarding the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) to ensure consistency with the plan for technical assistance required under section 506 of such Act (42 U.S.C. 12206).

(1) The Director of the Institute shall be appointed by the Secretary, except that the person serving as the Director on October 29, 1992, may, at the pleasure of the President, continue to serve as Director. The Director shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in research administration. The Director shall be compensated at the rate payable for level V of the Executive Schedule under section 5316 of title 5. The Director shall not delegate any of the Director's functions to any officer who is not directly responsible to the Director.

(2) There shall be a Deputy Director of the Institute (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “Deputy Director”) who shall be appointed by the Secretary. The Deputy Director shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in research administration. The Deputy Director shall be compensated at the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5, and shall act for the Director during the absence of the Director or the inability of the Director to perform the essential functions of the job, exercising such powers as the Director may prescribe. The Deputy Director shall serve as Director until a Director is appointed under paragraph (1).

(3) The Director, subject to the approval of the President, may appoint, for terms not to exceed three years, without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointment in the competitive service, and may compensate, without regard to the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of such title relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates, such technical and professional employees of the Institute as the Director deems ncessary 2 to accomplish the functions of the Institute and also appoint and compensate without regard to such provisions, in a number not to exceed one-fifth of the number of full-time, regular technical and professional employees of the Institute.

(4) The Director may obtain the services of consultants, without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service.

The Director, pursuant to regulations which the Secretary shall prescribe, may establish and maintain fellowships with such stipends and allowances, including travel and subsistence expenses provided for under title 5, as the Director considers necessary to procure the assistance of highly qualified research fellows, including individuals with disabilities, from the United States and foreign countries.

(1) The Director shall, pursuant to regulations which the Secretary shall prescribe, provide for scientific review of all research grants and programs over which the Director has authority by utilizing, to the maximum extent possible, appropriate peer review groups established within the Institute and composed of non-Federal scientists and other experts in the rehabilitation field (including experts in the independent living field) competent to review research grants and programs, including knowledgeable individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals. The Director shall solicit nominations for such peer review groups from the public and shall publish the names of the individuals selected. Individuals comprising each peer review group shall be selected from a pool of qualified individuals to facilitate knowledgeable, cost-effective review.

(2) In providing for such scientific review, the Secretary shall provide for training of such individuals and mechanisms to receive input from individuals with disabilities, and from the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

Not less than 90 percent of the funds appropriated under this subchapter for any fiscal year shall be expended by the Director to carry out activities under this subchapter through grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements. Up to 10 percent of the funds appropriated under this subchapter for any fiscal year may be expended directly for the purpose of carrying out the functions of the Director under this section.

The Director shall develop and submit to appropriate committees of the Congress a long-range plan for rehabilitation research which shall—

(1) identify any research which should be conducted respecting the full inclusion and integration into society of individuals with disabilities, especially in the area of employment;

(2) determine the funding priorities for research activities under this section and explain the basis for such priorities, including a detailed description of any new types of research recommended under this paragraph for funding;

(3) specify appropriate goals and timetables for activities to be conducted under this section;

(4) be developed in consultation with the Rehabilitation Research Advisory Council established under section 765 of this title and after full consideration of the input of individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, organizations representing individuals with disabilities, providers of services furnished under this chapter, and researchers in the rehabilitation field;

(5) specify plans for widespread dissemination of research results in accessible formats to rehabilitation practitioners, individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals;

(6) specify plans for widespread dissemination of research results that concern individuals with disabilities who are members of minority groups or of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter;

(7) 3 be developed by the Director—

(A) in coordination with the Commissioner; and

(B) in consultation with the National Council on Disability established under subchapter IV of this chapter, the Secretary of Education, officials responsible for the administration of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.), the Interagency Committee on Disability Research established under section 761b of this title, individuals with disabilities, the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, and any other persons or entities the Director considers appropriate; and

(8) 3 be revised, in the manner required by this section—

(A) at least once every 5 years; and

(B) at any time determined to be necessary by the Director.

The plan required by this subsection shall be developed by the Director in consultation with the Commissioner, the National Council on Disability established under subchapter IV of this chapter, the Secretary of Education, officials responsible for the administration of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act [42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.], the Interagency Committee established by section 761b of this title, and any other persons or entities the Director considers appropriate. Such plan shall be reviewed at least once every three years and may be revised at any time by the Director to the extent the Director considers necessary.

In order to promote cooperation among Federal departments and agencies conducting research programs, the Director shall consult with the administrators of such programs, and with the Interagency Committee established by section 761b of this title, regarding the design of research projects conducted by such entities and the results and applications of such research.

(1) The Director shall take appropriate actions to provide for a comprehensive and coordinated research program under this subchapter. In providing such a program, the Director may undertake joint activities with other Federal entities engaged in research and with appropriate private entities. Any Federal entity proposing to establish any research project related to the purposes of this chapter shall consult, through the Interagency Committee established by section 761b of this title, with the Director as Chairperson of such Committee and provide the Director with sufficient prior opportunity to comment on such project.

(2) Any person responsible for administering any program of the National Institutes of Health, the Department of Veterans Affairs, the National Science Foundation, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, the Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, or of any other Federal entity, shall, through the Interagency Committee established by section 761b of this title, consult and cooperate with the Director in carrying out such program if the program is related to the purposes of this subchapter.

(1) The Director shall make a grant to an institution of higher education to support a program of pediatric rehabilitation research.

(2) The Director shall support, either directly or by way of grant or contract, a Research and Training Center in the Pacific Basin in order to improve services to individuals with disabilities through relevant rehabilitation research and training in the Pacific Basin and to assist in the coordination of rehabilitation services provided by a broad range of agencies and entities. Such center shall—

(A) develop a sound demographic base,

(B) analyze, develop, and utilize appropriate technology,

(C) develop a culturally relevant rehabilitation manpower development program, and

(D) facilitate interagency communication and cooperation, implementing advanced information technology.

(3) The Director shall support, directly or by grant or contract, a center associated with an institution of higher education, for research and training concerning the delivery of rehabilitation services to rural areas.

The Director shall make grants to institutions of higher education for the training of rehabilitation researchers, including individuals with disabilities, with particular attention to research areas that support the implementation and objectives of this chapter and that improve the effectiveness of services authorized under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §202, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §109(4), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2963; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §§104(a)(4), (b)(1), 122, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18, 23; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title III, §§302, 303, title X, §§1001(c), 1002(c), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1820, 1821, 1842, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §203(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3307; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(1)(A), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(12), title II, §203, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4357, 4399; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §§102(4), 109(a), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 718, 725; Pub. L. 103–218, title IV, §402(a), Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 96; Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §394(i)(1), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4028.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(11), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, referred to in subsec. (c)(3), (4), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsec. (g), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, and amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 202 of Pub. L. 93–112, title II, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 375, was classified to section 762 of this title prior to renumbering as section 204 of Pub. L. 93–112.

1994—Subsec. (b)(4)(A)(i). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “section 8801 of title 20” for “paragraphs (8) and (21), respectively, of section 2891 of title 20)”.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 103–218 substituted “characteristics of individuals with disabilities, including information on individuals with disabilities who live in rural or inner-city settings, with particular attention given to underserved populations,” for “characteristics of individuals with disabilities”.

1993—Subsec. (b)(2)(D). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(a)(1)(A), substituted “such individuals” for “the individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(4)(D). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(a)(1)(B), substituted “individuals described in subparagraph (C)” for “individuals”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(a)(2), which directed amendment of fourth sentence by substituting “The” for “In case of any vacancy in the office of the Director, the”, was executed by substituting “The” for “In the case of any vacancy in the office of the Director, the” before “Deputy Director shall serve”, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (g)(3). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(a)(3), struck out “and” at end.

Subsec. (g)(4) to (8). Pub. L. 103–73, §102(4), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 102–569, §203(g)(5). See 1992 Amendment note below.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(a), in first sentence, substituted “(1) There” for “In order to promote and coordinate research with respect to individuals with disabilities and to more effectively carry out the programs under section 762 of this title, there” and “, in order to—” and subpars. (A) to (D) for the period at end, added par. (2), and struck out former second sentence which read as follows: “In the performance of the functions of the office, the Director shall be directly responsible to the Secretary or to the same Under Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Department of Education to whom the Commissioner is responsible under section 702(a) of this title.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “research with respect to” in first sentence.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(1), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “disseminating information acquired through research funded by the Institute to other Federal, State, tribal, and local public agencies and to private organizations engaged in research relating to rehabilitation or providing rehabilitation services;”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(2), added par. (4) and struck out former par. (4) which read as follows: “disseminating educational materials to primary and secondary schools, institutions of higher education, and to public and private entities concerning how the quality of life of individuals with disabilities may be improved;”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “quality of life of”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(3), added par. (6) and struck out former par. (6) which read as follows: “conducting conferences, seminars, and workshops (including in-service training programs) concerning research and engineering advances in rehabilitation pertinent to the problems of individuals with disabilities;”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “problems of”.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(4), substituted “, including dissemination activities;” for “; and”.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(5), inserted “the Health Care Financing Administration,” after “Bureau of the Census,” and “widely” before “disseminating” and substituted “, individuals with disabilities, the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such individuals, and others to assist in the planning, assessment, and evaluation” for “and others to assist in the planning and evaluation” and a semicolon for the period at end.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “characteristics of” and “services for”.

Subsec. (b)(9) to (11). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(b)(6), added pars. (9) to (11).

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(c)(1), in first sentence, substituted “appointed by the Secretary, except that the person serving as the Director on October 29, 1992, may, at the pleasure of the President, continue to serve as Director” for “appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate” and struck out fourth sentence which read as follows: “In carrying out any of the Director's functions under this section, the Director shall be guided by general policies of the National Council on Disability established in subchapter IV of this chapter.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(B), substituted “National Council on Disability” for “National Council on the Handicapped” in fourth sentence.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(c)(2), inserted after first sentence “The Deputy Director shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in research administration.”, substituted “the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the rate provided for grade GS–17 of the General Schedule under section 5332” and “of the Director or the inability of the Director to perform the essential functions of the job” for “or disability of the Director”, and struck out at end “The position created by this paragraph shall be in addition to the number of positions placed in grade GS–17 of the General Schedule under section 5108 of title 5.”

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(d), inserted “, including individuals with disabilities,” after “fellows”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(e), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted “rehabilitation field (including experts in the independent living field) competent to review research grants and programs, including knowledgeable individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals. The Director shall solicit nominations for such peer review groups from the public and shall publish the names of the individuals selected. Individuals comprising each peer review group shall be selected from a pool of qualified individuals to facilitate knowledgeable, cost-effective review.” for “rehabilitation field.”, and added par. (2).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(f), added subsec. (f) and struck out former subsec. (f) which read as follows: “Not less than 90 percent of the funds appropriated under paragraph (2) of section 761(a) of this title to carry out section 762 of this title shall be expended by the Director to carry out such section through grants or contracts with qualified public or private agencies and individuals.”

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(g)(1), struck out “within eighteen months after November 6, 1978,” after “Congress” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(g)(2), substituted “full inclusion and integration into society of individuals with disabilities, especially in the area of employment;” for “problems encountered by individuals with disabilities in their daily activities, especially problems related to employment;”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “problems encountered by”.

Subsec. (g)(2), (3). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(g)(3), (4), struck out “and” at end of par. (2) and substituted “; and” for period at end of par. (3).

Subsec. (g)(4) to (8). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(g)(5), as amended by Pub. L. 103–73, §102(4), added pars. (4) to (8).

Subsec. (i)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(h), substituted “purposes of this subchapter” for “purposes of this section”.

Subsec. (j)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(i)(1), substituted “to support” for “for the establishment of”.

Subsec. (j)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(12)(A), 203(i)(2), substituted “Director shall support” for “Director shall establish” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (j)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(i)(2), substituted “Director shall support” for “Director shall establish”.

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(j), substituted “rehabilitation researchers, including individuals with disabilities, with particular attention to research areas that support the implementation and objectives of this chapter and that improve the effectiveness of services authorized under this chapter.” for “researchers in the field of rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “rehabilitation of”.

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(k), struck out subsec. (*l*) which required submission to Congress of policy recommendations not later than one year after Oct. 21, 1986, for establishment of an agency designed to ensure production and marketing of technology and distribution of such technology to individuals with disabilities.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 102–569, §203(k), struck out subsec. (m) which read as follows: “The Director shall conduct a study of health insurance practices and policies which affect individuals with disabilities. Not later than February 1, 1990, the Director shall submit a report of the study to the appropriate committees of the Congress.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(12)(A), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

1991—Subsec. (i)(2). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Department of Veterans Affairs” for “Veterans’ Administration”.

1988—Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(1), substituted “services for individuals with handicaps” for “services for the handicapped”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(2)(A), (C), substituted “the Director's” for “his” in two places and “responsible to the Director” for “responsible to him”.

Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(2)(B), which directed amendment of par. (1) by striking “National Council on the Handicapped” where it appears in the third sentence and inserting “National Council on Disability”, could not be executed because “National Council on the Handicapped” appeared in the fourth sentence.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(3), inserted comma after “to such provisions”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(4)(A), which directed amendment of the second sentence of subsec. (g) by striking “in the consultation” and inserting “in consultation” could not be executed because the words “in the consultation” did not appear.

Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(4)(B), (5), in concluding provisions, substituted “National Council on Disability” for “National Council on the Handicapped” and “the Director considers necessary” for “necessary”.

Subsec. (i)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(6), which directed amendment of par. (2) by substituting “Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services” for “Office of Special Education and Rehabilitation Services” could not be executed because the words “Office of Special Education and Rehabilitation Services” did not appear.

Subsec. (j)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(7), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “The Director shall establish, either directly or by way of grant or contract, a Research and Training Center in the Pacific Basin in order to improve services to individuals with handicaps through relevant rehabilitation research and training in the Pacific Basin and to assist in the coordination of rehabilitation services provided by a broad range of agencies and entities. Such Center shall (A) develop a sound demographic base, (B) analyze, develop, and utilize appropriate technology, (C) develop a culturally relevant rehabilitation manpower development program, and (D) facilitate interagency communication and cooperation, implementing advanced information technology.”

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(8), substituted “Director or the Interagency Committee on Disability Research” for “Director or the Committee on Handicapped Research”, inserted a comma after “Further”, and substituted “views of the Interagency Committee on Disability Research” for “views of the Interagency Committee on Handicapped Research”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506, §302, substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 302, 1001(c)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research” and “the functions of the office” for “his functions”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §303(a)(1), inserted “tribal,” after “State,”.

Subsec. (b)(4) to (6). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 303(a)(2), inserted “the Bureau of Indian Affairs, the Indian Health Service,” after “Administration” and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(c)(2), substituted “Director” for “he”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(c)(3), struck out “he considers” before “necessary”.

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (i)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(c)(4), substituted “appropriate actions” for “whatever actions he considers appropriate” and “as Chairperson” for “in his role of Chairman”.

Subsec. (j)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(c), struck out “at an institution of higher education” after “pediatric rehabilitation research”.

Subsec. (j)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §303(b), inserted provision that purpose of Research and Training Center is to improve services to individuals with handicaps through relevant rehabilitation research and training in the Pacific Basin and to assist in the coordination of rehabilitation services provided by a broad range of agencies and entities, and provision requiring the Center to develop a sound demographic base, analyze, develop, and utilize appropriate technology, develop a culturally relevant rehabilitation manpower development program, and facilitate interagency communication and cooperation, implementing advanced information technology.

Subsec. (j)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §303(c), added par. (3).

Subsecs. (k) to (m). Pub. L. 99–506, §303(d)–(f), added subsecs. (k) to (m).

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §122(a), substituted “Education” for “Health, Education, and Welfare” in two places.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, §122(b), inserted “The Director shall be an individual with substantial experience in rehabilitation and in research administration.”

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(1), substituted “Secretary of Education” for “Commissioner of Education”.

Subsec. (i)(2). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(a)(4), substituted “Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services” for “Bureau of Education for the Handicapped”.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 98–221, §122(c), added subsec. (j).

Section 302(b) of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that: “The Act [this chapter] is amended by striking out ‘National Institute of Handicapped Research’ each place it appears in the Act (including the table of contents) and inserting in lieu thereof ‘National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research’. Any reference in any other provision of law to the ‘National Institute of Handicapped Research’ shall be considered to be a reference to the ‘National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research’.”

This section is referred to in sections 760, 761, 765 of this title.

1 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

2 So in original. Probably should be “necessary”.

3 So in original. Pars. (7) and (8) are similar to concluding provisions.

(1) In order to promote coordination and cooperation among Federal departments and agencies conducting rehabilitation research programs, there is established within the Federal Government an Interagency Committee on Disability Research (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “Committee”), chaired by the Director and comprised of such members as the President may designate, including the following (or their designees): the Director, the Commissioner of the Rehabilitation Services Administration, the Assistant Secretary for Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, the Secretary of Education, the Secretary of Veterans Affairs, the Director of the National Institutes of Health, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health, the Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, the Secretary of Transportation, the Assistant Secretary of the Interior for Indian Affairs, the Director of the Indian Health Service, and the Director of the National Science Foundation.

(2) The Committee shall meet not less than four times each year.

After receiving input from individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, the Committee shall identify, assess, and seek to coordinate all Federal programs, activities, and projects, and plans for such programs, activities, and projects with respect to the conduct of research related to rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities.

The Committee shall annually submit to the President and to the appropriate committees of the Congress a report making such recommendations as the Committee deems appropriate with respect to coordination of policy and development of objectives and priorities for all Federal programs relating to the conduct of research related to rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §203, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §109(4), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2965; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(m)(1), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 694; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(b)(2), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title III, §304, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1822; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §203(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3307; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(1)(B), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(13), title II, §204, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4403.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §204(a), inserted “the Commissioner of the Rehabilitation Services Administration, the Assistant Secretary for Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,” after “designees): the Director,”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(13), 204(b), substituted “After receiving input from individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, the” for “The” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “rehabilitation of”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(13), 204(c), substituted “shall annually” for “, not later than eighteen months after November 6, 1978, and annually thereafter, shall” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

1991—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Secretary of Veterans Affairs” for “Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “Disability Research” for “Handicapped Research”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §304, inserted “the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health,” after “Institutes of Health,” and “the Assistant Secretary of the Interior for Indian Affairs, the Director of the Indian Health Service,” after “Transportation,”.

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1984—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, which directed the substitution of “Secretary of Education” for “Commissioner of Education”, could not be executed in view of the previous amendment by Pub. L. 96–88. See 1979 Amendment note below.

1979—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 96–88 substituted requirement that the Secretary of Education or his designee be a member of the Committee for requirement that the Commissioner of Education and the Commissioner of the Rehabilitation Services Administration or their designees be members.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–88 effective May 4, 1980, with specified exceptions, see section 601 of Pub. L. 96–88, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3401 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in section 761a of this title.

The Director may make grants to and contracts with States and public or private agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, Indian tribes, and tribal organizations, to pay part of the cost of projects for the purpose of planning and conducting research, demonstration projects, training, and related activities, the purposes of which are to develop methods, procedures, and rehabilitation technology, that maximize the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, family support, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities, especially individuals with the most severe disabilities, and improve the effectiveness of services authorized under this chapter. In carrying out this section, the Director shall emphasize projects that support the implementation of subchapters I, III, VI, VII, and VIII of this chapter, including projects addressing the needs described in the State plans submitted under section 721 or 796c of this title by State agencies. Such projects may include medical and other scientific, technical, methodological, and other investigations into the nature of disability, methods of analyzing it, and restorative techniques, including basic research where related to rehabilitation techniques or services; studies and analyses of industrial, vocational, social, recreational, psychiatric, psychological, economic, and other factors affecting rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities; studies and analysis of special problems of individuals who are homebound and individuals who are institutionalized; studies analyses, and demonstrations of architectural and engineering design adapted to meet the special needs of individuals with disabilities; studies, analyses, and other activities related to supported employment; and related activities which hold promise of increasing knowledge and improving methods in the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities and individuals with the most severe disabilities, particularly individuals with disabilities, and individuals with the most severe disabilities, who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter.

In addition to carrying out projects under subsection (a) of this section, the Director may make grants under this subsection (referred to in this subsection as “research grants”) to pay part or all of the cost of the specialized research or demonstration activities described in paragraphs (2) through (16).

(A) Research grants may be used for the establishment and support of Rehabilitation Research and Training Centers, for the purpose of providing an integrated program of research, which Centers shall—

(i) be operated in collaboration with institutions of higher education or providers of rehabilitation services or other appropriate services; and

(ii) serve as centers of national excellence and national or regional resources for providers and individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

(B) The Centers shall conduct research and training activities by—

(i) conducting coordinated and advanced programs of research in rehabilitation targeted toward the production of new knowledge that will improve rehabilitation methodology and service delivery systems, alleviate or stabilize disabling conditions, and promote maximum social and economic independence of individuals with disabilities;

(ii) providing training (including graduate, pre-service, and in-service training) to assist individuals to more effectively provide rehabilitation services;

(iii) providing training (including graduate, pre-service, and in-service training) for rehabilitation research personnel and other rehabilitation personnel; and

(iv) serving as an informational and technical assistance resource to providers, individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, through conferences, workshops, public education programs, in-service training programs, and similar activities.

(C) The research to be carried out at each such Center may include—

(i) basic or applied medical rehabilitation research;

(ii) research regarding the psychological and social aspects of rehabilitation, including disability policy;

(iii) research related to vocational rehabilitation;

(iv) continuation of research that promotes the emotional, social, educational, and functional growth of children who are individuals with disabilities;

(v) continuation of research to develop and evaluate interventions, policies, and services that support families of those children and adults who are individuals with disabilities; and

(vi) continuation of research that will improve services and policies that foster the productivity, independence, and social integration of individuals with disabilities, and enable individuals with disabilities, including individuals with mental retardation and other developmental disabilities, to live in their communities.

(D) Training of students preparing to be rehabilitation personnel shall be an important priority for such a Center.

(E) The Director shall make grants under this paragraph to establish and support both comprehensive centers dealing with multiple disabilities and centers primarily focused on particular disabilities.

(F) Grants made under this paragraph may be used to provide funds for services rendered by such a Center to individuals with disabilities in connection with the research and training activities.

(G) Grants made under this paragraph may be used to provide faculty support for teaching—

(i) rehabilitation-related courses of study for credit; and

(ii) other courses offered by the Centers, either directly or through another entity.

(H) The research and training activities conducted by such a Center shall be conducted in a manner that is accessible to and usable by individuals with disabilities.

(I) The Director shall encourage the Centers to develop practical applications for the findings of the research of the Centers.

(J) In awarding grants under this paragraph, the Director shall take into consideration the location of any proposed Center and the appropriate geographic and regional allocation of such Centers.

(K) To be eligible to receive a grant under this paragraph, each such institution or provider shall—

(i) be of sufficient size, scope, and quality to effectively carry out the activities in an efficient manner consistent with appropriate State and Federal law; and

(ii) demonstrate the ability to carry out the training activities either directly or through another entity that can provide such training.

(L) The Director shall make grants under this paragraph for periods of 5 years, except that the Director may make a grant for a period of less than 5 years if—

(i) the grant is made to a new recipient; or

(ii) the grant supports new or innovative research.

(M) Grants made under this paragraph shall be made on a competitive basis. To be eligible to receive a grant under this paragraph, a prospective grant recipient shall submit an application to the Director at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Director may require.

(N) The Director shall establish a system of peer review of applications for grants under this paragraph. The peer review of an application for the renewal of a grant made under this paragraph shall take into account the past performance of the applicant in carrying out the grant and input from individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

(O) An institution or provider that receives a grant under this paragraph to establish such a Center may not collect more than 15 percent of the amount of the grant received by the Center in indirect cost charges.

(A) Research grants may be used for the establishment and support of Rehabilitation Engineering Research Centers, operated by or in collaboration with institutions of higher education or nonprofit organizations, to conduct research or demonstration activities, and training activities, regarding rehabilitation technology, including rehabilitation engineering, assistive technology devices, and assistive technology services, for the purposes of enhancing opportunities for better meeting the needs of, and addressing the barriers confronted by, individuals with disabilities in all aspects of their lives.

(B) In order to carry out the purposes set forth in subparagraph (A), such a Center shall carry out the research or demonstration activities by—

(i) developing and disseminating innovative methods of applying advanced technology, scientific achievement, and psychological and social knowledge to—

(I) solve rehabilitation problems and remove environmental barriers through planning and conducting research, including cooperative research with public or private agencies and organizations, designed to produce new scientific knowledge, and new or improved methods, equipment, and devices; and

(II) study new or emerging technologies, products, or environments, and the effectiveness and benefits of such technologies, products, or environments;

(ii) demonstrating and disseminating—

(I) innovative models for the delivery, to rural and urban areas, of cost-effective rehabilitation technology services that promote utilization of assistive technology devices; and

(II) other scientific research to assist in meeting the employment and independent living needs of individuals with severe disabilities; or

(iii) conducting research or demonstration activities that facilitate service delivery systems change by demonstrating, evaluating, documenting, and disseminating—

(I) consumer responsive and individual and family-centered innovative models for the delivery to both rural and urban areas, of innovative cost-effective rehabilitation technology services that promote utilization of rehabilitation technology; and

(II) other scientific research to assist in meeting the employment and independent living needs of, and addressing the barriers confronted by, individuals with disabilities, including individuals with severe disabilities.

(C) To the extent consistent with the nature and type of research or demonstration activities described in subparagraph (B), each Center established or supported through a grant made available under this paragraph shall—

(i) cooperate with programs established under the Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act of 1988 (29 U.S.C. 2201 et seq.) and other regional and local programs to provide information to individuals with disabilities and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals to—

(I) increase awareness and understanding of how rehabilitation technology can address their needs; and

(II) increase awareness and understanding of the range of options, programs, services, and resources available, including financing options for the technology and services covered by the area of focus of the Center;

(ii) provide training opportunities to individuals, including individuals with disabilities, to become researchers of rehabilitation technology and practitioners of rehabilitation technology in conjunction with institutions of higher education and nonprofit organizations; and

(iii) respond, through research or demonstration activities, to the needs of individuals with all types of disabilities who may benefit from the application of technology within the area of focus of the Center.

(D)(i) In establishing Centers to conduct the research or demonstration activities described in subparagraph (B)(iii), the Director may establish one Center in each of the following areas of focus:

(I) Early childhood services, including early intervention and family support.

(II) Education at the elementary and secondary levels, including transition from school to postschool activities.

(III) Employment, including supported employment, and reasonable accommodations and the reduction of environmental barriers as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) and subchapter V of this chapter.

(IV) Independent living, including transition from institutional to community living, maintenance of community living on leaving the work force, self-help skills, and activities of daily living.

(ii) Each Center conducting the research or demonstration activities described in subparagraph (B)(iii) shall have an advisory committee, of which the majority of members are individuals with disabilities who are users of rehabilitation technology, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of users of rehabilitation technology.

(E) Grants made under this paragraph shall be made on a competitive basis and shall be for a period of 5 years, except that the Director may make a grant for a period of less than 5 years if—

(i) the grant is made to a new recipient; or

(ii) the grant supports new or innovative research.

(F) To be eligible to receive a grant under this paragraph, a prospective grant recipient shall submit an application to the Director at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Director may require.

(G) Each Center established or supported through a grant made available under this paragraph shall—

(i) cooperate with State agencies and other local, State, regional, and national programs and organizations developing or delivering rehabilitation technology, including State programs funded under the Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act of 1988 (29 U.S.C. 2201 et seq.); and

(ii) prepare and submit to the Director as part of an application for continuation of a grant, or as a final report, a report that documents the outcomes of the program in terms of both short- and long-term impact on the lives of individuals with disabilities, and such other information as may be requested by the Director.

(A) Research grants may be used to conduct a program for spinal cord injury research, including conducting such a program by making grants to public or private agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstration projects for spinal cord injuries, that will—

(i) ensure widespread dissemination of research findings among all Spinal Cord Injury Centers, to rehabilitation practitioners, individuals with spinal cord injury, the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such individuals, and organizations receiving financial assistance under this paragraph;

(ii) provide encouragement and support for initiatives and new approaches by individual and institutional investigators; and

(iii) establish and maintain close working relationships with other governmental and voluntary institutions and organizations engaged in similar efforts in order to unify and coordinate scientific efforts, encourage joint planning, and promote the interchange of data and reports among spinal cord injury investigations.

(B) Any agency or organization carrying out a project or demonstration project assisted by a grant under this paragraph that provides services to individuals with spinal cord injuries shall—

(i) establish, on an appropriate regional basis, a multidisciplinary system of providing vocational and other rehabilitation services, specifically designed to meet the special needs of individuals with spinal cord injuries, including acute care as well as periodic inpatient or outpatient followup and services;

(ii) demonstrate and evaluate the benefits to individuals with spinal cord injuries served in, and the degree of cost effectiveness of, such a regional system;

(iii) demonstrate and evaluate existing, new, and improved methods and equipment essential to the care, management, and rehabilitation of individuals with spinal cord injuries; and

(iv) demonstrate and evaluate methods of community outreach for individuals with spinal cord injuries and community education in connection with the problems of such individuals in areas such as housing, transportation, recreation, employment, and community activities.

(C) In awarding grants under this paragraph, the Director shall take into account the location of any proposed Spinal Cord Injury Center and the appropriate geographic and regional allocation of such Centers.

Research grants may be used to conduct a program for end-stage renal disease research, to include support of projects and demonstrations for providing special services (including transplantation and dialysis), artificial kidneys, and supplies necessary for the rehabilitation of individuals with such disease and which will (A) insure dissemination of research findings, (B) provide encouragement and support for initiatives and new approaches by individual and institutional investigators, and (C) establish and maintain close working relationships with other governmental and voluntary institutions and organizations engaged in similar efforts, in order to unify and coordinate scientific efforts, encourage joint planning, and promote the interchange of data and reports among investigators in the field of end-stage renal disease. No person shall be selected to participate in such program who is eligible for services for such disease under any other provision of law.

Research grants may be used to conduct a program for international rehabilitation research, demonstration, and training for the purpose of developing new knowledge and methods in the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities in the United States, cooperating with and assisting in developing and sharing information found useful in other nations in the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities, and initiating a program to exchange experts and technical assistance in the field of rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities with other nations as a means of increasing the levels of skill of rehabilitation personnel.

Research grants may be used to conduct a research program concerning the use of existing telecommunications systems (including telephone, television, satellite, radio, and other similar systems) which have the potential for substantially improving service delivery methods, and the development of appropriate programing to meet the particular needs of individuals with disabilities.

Research grants may be used to conduct a program of joint projects with the National Institutes of Health, the National Institute of Mental Health, the Health Services Administration, the Administration on Aging, the National Science Foundation, the Veterans’ Administration, the Department of Health and Human Services, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, other Federal agencies, and private industry in areas of joint interest involving rehabilitation.

Research grants may be used to conduct a program of research related to the rehabilitation of children, or older individuals, who are individuals with disabilities, including older American Indians who are individuals with disabilities. Such research program may include projects designed to assist the adjustment of, or maintain as residents in the community, older workers who are individuals with disabilities on leaving the work force.

Research grants may be used to conduct a research program to develop and demonstrate innovative methods to attract and retain professionals to serve in rural areas in the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities, including individuals with severe disabilities.

Research grants may be used to conduct a model research and demonstration project designed to assess the feasibility of establishing a center for producing and distributing to individuals who are deaf captioned video cassettes providing a broad range of educational, cultural, scientific, and vocational programing.

Research grants may be used to conduct a model research and demonstration program to develop innovative methods of providing services for preschool age children who are individuals with disabilities, including the following: (A) early intervention, assessment, parent counseling, infant stimulation, early identification, diagnosis, and evaluation of children who are individuals with severe disabilities up to the age of five, with a special emphasis on children who are individuals with severe disabilities up to the age of three; (B) such physical therapy, language development, pediatric, nursing, psychological, and psychiatric services as are necessary for such children; and (C) appropriate services for the parents of such children, including psychological and psychiatric services, parent counseling, and training.

Research grants may be used to conduct a model research and training program under which model training centers shall be established to develop and use more advanced and effective methods of evaluating and addressing the employment needs of individuals with disabilities, including programs which—

(A) provide training and continuing education for personnel involved with the employment of individuals with disabilities;

(B) develop model procedures for testing and evaluating the employment needs of individuals with disabilities;

(C) develop model training programs to teach individuals with disabilities skills which will lead to appropriate employment;

(D) develop new approaches for job placement of individuals with disabilities, including new followup procedures relating to such placement; and

(E) provide information services regarding education, training, employment, and job placement for individuals with disabilities.

Research grants may be used to conduct a rehabilitation research program under which financial assistance is provided in order to (A) test new concepts and innovative ideas, (B) demonstrate research results of high potential benefits, (C) purchase prototype aids and devices for evaluation, (D) develop unique rehabilitation training curricula, and (E) be responsive to special initiatives of the Director. No single grant under this paragraph may exceed $50,000 in any fiscal year and all payments made under this paragraph in any fiscal year may not exceed 5 per centum of the amount available under this section to the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research in any fiscal year. Regulations and administrative procedures with respect to financial assistance under this paragraph shall, to the maximum extent possible, be expedited.

Research grants may be used to conduct studies of the rehabilitation needs of American Indian populations and of effective mechanisms for the delivery of rehabilitation services to Indians residing on and off reservations.

Research grants may be used to conduct a demonstration program under which one or more projects national in scope shall be established to develop procedures to provide incentives for the development, manufacturing, and marketing of orphan technological devices designed to enable individuals with disabilities to achieve independence and access to gainful employment.

The provisions of section 776 of this title shall apply to assistance provided under this section, unless the context indicates to the contrary.

(1) In carrying out evaluations of research demonstration and related projects under this section, the Director is authorized to make arrangements for site visits to obtain information on the accomplishments of the projects.

(2) The Director shall not make a grant under this section which exceeds $299,999 unless the peer review of the grant application has included a site visit.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §204, formerly §202, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 375, amended Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(h), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1621; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(h), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–6; renumbered and amended Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§109(3), 110, 111, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2963, 2966; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §§104(a)(5), 123, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18, 24; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), (h)(2), title III, §§302(b), 305, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1811, 1821, 1822; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §203(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3308; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(14), title II, §205, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4403; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §109(b), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 726.)

The Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act of 1988, referred to in subsec. (b)(3)(C)(i), (G)(i), is Pub. L. 100–407, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1044, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 24 (§2201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2201 of this title and Tables.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(3)(D)(i)(III), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

A prior section 204 of Pub. L. 93–112, title II, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 376, was classified to section 764 of this title prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 34 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(b)(1), in second sentence inserted “, including projects addressing the needs described in the State plans submitted under section 721 or 796c of this title by State agencies” before period at end and in third sentence directed striking out “, as described in the State plans submitted by the State agencies,” which was executed by striking out “, as described in the State plans submitted by State agencies,” after “Such projects”, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (b)(2)(G)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(b)(2)(A), substituted “rehabilitation-related” for “rehabilitation related”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(B)(iii)(I). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(b)(2)(B)(i), substituted “family-centered” for “family centered”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(C)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(b)(2)(B)(ii), substituted “Assistance for Individuals” for “Assistance to Individuals” and struck out comma after “representatives of the individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(4)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 103–73, §109(b)(2)(C), realigned margin.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(a), in first sentence, substituted “demonstration projects, training, and related activities, the purposes of which are to develop methods, procedures, and rehabilitation technology, that maximize the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, family support, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities, especially individuals with the most severe disabilities, and improve the effectiveness of services authorized under this chapter. In carrying out this section, the Director shall emphasize projects that support the implementation of subchapters I, III, VI, VII, and VIII of this chapter” for “demonstrations, and related activities which bear directly on the development of methods, procedures, and devices to assist in the provision of vocational and other rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities, especially those with the most severe disabilities, under this chapter” and in last sentence, inserted “, as described in the State plans submitted by State agencies,” and substituted “studies and analysis of special problems of individuals who are homebound and individuals who are institutionalized” for “special problems of homebound and institutionalized individuals” and “, particularly individuals with disabilities, and individuals with the most severe disabilities, who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter.” for period at end.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), in first sentence, substituted “individuals with disabilities, especially those with the most severe disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps, especially those with the most severe handicaps” after “services to” and in last sentence, substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “rehabilitation of” and after “special needs of”, and “individuals with disabilities and individuals with the most severe disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps and individuals with the most severe handicaps” after “methods in the rehabilitation of”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(2), struck out introductory provisions which read as follows: “In addition to carrying out projects under subsection (a) of this section, the Director may make grants to pay part or all of the cost of the following specialized research activities:”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(2), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which established Rehabilitation Research and Training Centers and provided for areas of research.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(2), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which provided for the establishment of Rehabilitation Engineering Research Centers.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in four places.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(2), added par. (3) and struck out former par. (3) which provided for spinal cord injury research.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(2), added par. (4). Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(A)(i), substituted “individuals with such disease” for “individuals suffering from such disease”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (4) as (5) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (5) redesignated (6).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (5) as (6) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (6) redesignated (7).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (6) as (7) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (7) redesignated (8).

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (7) as (8) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (8) redesignated (9).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(A)(ii), (B), substituted “children who are individuals with disabilities” for “children with handicaps”, “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”, and “American Indians who are individuals with disabilities” for “American Indians with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(9). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(4), amended par. (9) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (9) read as follows: “Research grants may be used to conduct a program of research related to the rehabilitation of children who are individuals with disabilities and of individuals with disabilities who are aged sixty or older, except that research concerning American Indians who are individuals with disabilities shall include those 55 and older.”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (8) as (9) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (9) redesignated (10).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(10). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (9) as (10) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (10) redesignated (11).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(A)(iii), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “deaf individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(11). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (10) as (11) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (11) redesignated (12).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(A)(iv), substituted “children who are individuals with disabilities” for “children with handicaps” and “children who are individuals with severe disabilities” for “children with severe handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), (5), redesignated par. (11) as (12), substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”, and inserted “assessment,” after “early intervention,”. Former par. (12) redesignated (13).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(13). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), (6), redesignated par. (12) as (13), in introductory provisions, substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of” and “addressing the employment needs” for “developing the employment potential”, in subpar. (B), substituted “employment needs” for “employment potential”. Former par. (13) redesignated (14).

Subsec. (b)(14). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (13) as (14) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (14) redesignated (15).

Subsec. (b)(15). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (14) as (15) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”. Former par. (15) redesignated (16).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(14)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(16). Pub. L. 102–569, §205(b)(1), (3), redesignated par. (15) as (16) and substituted “Research grants may be used to conduct” for “Conduct of”.

1988—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(1), substituted “Centers” for “centers” in seventh sentence.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(2), struck out “to” after “handicaps,” at end.

Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(3), struck out “to” after “handicaps, and” at end.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(4), substituted “Centers” for “centers”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(5), substituted “Conduct of a” for “Conduct a”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(6), which directed the substitution of “rehabilitation of individuals” for “rehabilitation of the individuals”, could not be executed because the words “rehabilitation of the individuals” did not appear.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(7), substituted “children with handicaps” for “handicapped children” and “American Indians with handicaps” for “handicapped Indian Americans”.

Subsec. (b)(9). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(d)(8), substituted “individuals with handicaps, including” for “handicapped and”.

Subsec. (b)(11). Pub. L. 100–630, §203(b)(9), (10), substituted “children with handicaps” for “handicapped children” in introductory provisions and substituted “children with severe handicaps” for “severely handicapped children” in two places in cl. (A).

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 305(a), (b), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and inserted “Indian tribes, and tribal organizations,”; “recreational,”, and “studies, analyses, and other activities related to supported employment;”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 305(c)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and substituted “Center (and as appropriate shall include consideration of rural issues)” for “Center”, and inserted provisions requiring that peer review of applications for renewal of a Rehabilitation Research and Training Center grant take the applicant's past performance into account, prohibiting the host institution from collecting in excess of 15 percent in indirect cost charges, and requiring that awards under cl. (C) of this paragraph be made on a competitive basis, beginning with fiscal year 1991.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(c)(2), in cl. (A), substituted “develop and disseminate” for “develop”, added cl. (B), redesignated former cl. (B) as (C), added cl. (D), and inserted provisions requiring that during fiscal year 1987, at least two such Rehabilitation Engineering Research Centers shall be established, and requiring that one demonstration grant pursuant to cl. (D) be made to an agency or organization in South Carolina and Connecticut.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in cls. (A) and (B).

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(c)(3), inserted provisions requiring that in the award of grants under this paragraph, the Director take into account the location of any proposed Center and the appropriate geographic and regional allocation of such Centers.

Subsec. (b)(5), (6). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(c)(4), inserted “the National Institute of Mental Health,”.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 305(c)(5), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and inserted provision that research concerning handicapped Indian Americans shall include those 55 and older.

Subsec. (b)(9). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(h)(2), substituted “individuals with severe handicaps” for “severely handicapped individuals”. See Codification note above.

Subsec. (b)(11)(B), (C). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(c)(6), inserted references to psychological services.

Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(13). Pub. L. 99–506, §302(b), substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research”.

Subsec. (b)(14), (15). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(c), added pars. (14) and (15).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–506, §305(d), added subsec. (d).

1984—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, §123(a), inserted at end “Rehabilitation Research and Training Centers shall include both comprehensive centers dealing with multiple disabilities and centers focused on particular disabilities. Grants to Centers need not be automatically terminated at the end of a project period and may be renewed on the basis of a thorough evaluation and peer review including site visits. Training of students preparing to be rehabilitation personnel through centers shall be an important priority. Grants may include faculty support for teaching of rehabilitation related courses of study for credit and other courses offered by the institutions of higher education affiliated with the Center.”

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 98–221, §123(b), substituted “pursuant to sections 777 and 777a of this title” for “pursuant to section 773(b) of this title”.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(a)(5), substituted “Department of Health and Human Services” for “Office of Education”.

Subsec. (b)(13). Pub. L. 98–221, §123(c), added par. (13).

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §110, substituted “The Director may” for “The Secretary, through the Commissioner, and in coordination with other appropriate programs in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, is authorized to”, “public or private” for “public or nonprofit”, and “provision of vocational and other rehabilitation services” for “provision of vocational rehabilitation services” and inserted “, including basic research where related to rehabilitation techniques or services” after “restorative techniques” and “, psychiatric” after “social”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §111, substituted in provision preceding par. (1), “the Director may” for “the Secretary, through the Commissioner, and in coordination with other appropriate programs in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, is authorized to”, inserted in par. (1), provision authorizing determination of research to be based on the particular needs of handicapped individuals in the geographic area served by the Center and specifying types of research which may be included, substituted in par. (2)(A), “psychiatric, psychological” for “psychological”, and added pars. (6) to (12).

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516 substituted “studies, analyses, and demonstrations of architectural and engineering design adapted to meet the special needs of handicapped individuals” for “studies and analyses of of architectural and engineering design adapted to meet the special needs of handicapped individuals”.

Pub. L. 93–651, amended subsec. (a) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Reference to Veterans’ Administration deemed to refer to Department of Veterans Affairs pursuant to section 10 of Pub. L. 100–527, set out as a Department of Veterans Affairs Act note under section 301 of Title 38, Veterans’ Benefits.

Ex. Ord. No. 12270, Jan. 15, 1981, 46 F.R. 4675, which established a President's Council on Spinal Cord Injury, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12553, Feb. 25, 1986, 51 F.R. 7237.

This section is referred to in sections 761, 761a of this title; title 38 sections 3904, 7303.

The Secretary of Education is authorized to make grants to, and to enter into contract with, public and nonprofit agencies and organizations for the purpose of research and demonstration projects specifically designed to address the multiple and interrelated service needs of individuals with handicaps, the elderly, and children, youths, adults, and families. A report evaluating each project funded under this section shall be submitted to appropriate committees of the Congress within four months after the date each such project is completed.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary.

No funds other than those appropriated pursuant to this subsection can be used for the conduct of research specifically authorized by this section.

Within one year after the date appropriations are made under subsection (b) of this section for purposes of research and demonstration projects under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall prepare and transmit to the Congress a study concerning the impact of vocational rehabilitation services provided under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 [29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.] on recipients of disability payments under titles II and XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq., 1381 et seq.]. The study shall examine the relationship between the vocational rehabilitation services provided under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and the programs under sections 222 and 1615 of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 422, 1382d], and shall include—

(1) an analysis of the savings in disability benefit payments under titles II and XVI of the Social Security Act as a result of the provision of vocational rehabilitation services under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973;

(2) a specification of the rate of return to the active labor force by recipients of services under sections 222 and 1615 of the Social Security Act;

(3) a specification of the total amount of expenditures, in the five fiscal years preceding the date of submission of the report, for vocational rehabilitation services under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and under sections 222 and 1615 of the Social Security Act, and recommendations for the coordinated presentation of such expenditures in the Budget submitted by the President pursuant to section 1105 of title 31; and

(4) recommendations to improve the coordination of services under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 with programs under sections 222 and 1615 of the Social Security Act, including recommendations for increasing savings in disability benefits payments and the rate of return to the active labor force by recipients of services under sections 222 and 1615 of the Social Security Act.

(Pub. L. 95–602, title IV, §401, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 3002; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(c)(1), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810.)

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (c), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended, which is classified generally to this chapter (§701 et seq.). For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II and XVI of the Social Security Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVI (§1381 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

In subsec. (c)(3), “section 1105 of title 31” was substituted for “section 201 of the Budget and Accounting Act, 1921 [31 U.S.C. 11]” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

Section was enacted as part of the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and Developmental Disabilities Amendments of 1978, and not as part of Rehabilitation Act of 1973 which comprises this chapter.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Secretary of Education” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §203, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 376, relating to making of grants and contracts for training of personnel involved in vocational services to handicapped individuals, was redesignated as section 304 of Pub. L. 93–112 and transferred to section 774 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §204, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 376, provided that a full report on research and training activities be included in annual report to Congress.

Subject to the availability of appropriations, the Secretary shall establish in the Department of Education a Rehabilitation Research Advisory Council (referred to in this section as the “Council”) composed of 12 members appointed by the Secretary.

The Council shall advise the Director with respect to research priorities and the development and revision of the long-range plan required by section 761a(g) of this title.

Members of the Council shall be generally representative of the community of rehabilitation professionals, the community of rehabilitation researchers, the community of individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals. At least one-half of the members shall be individuals with disabilities or parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

Each member of the Council shall serve for a term of up to 3 years, determined by the Secretary, except that—

(A) a member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which a predecessor was appointed, shall be appointed for the remainder of such term; and

(B) the terms of service of the members initially appointed shall be (as specified by the Secretary) for such fewer number of years as will provide for the expiration of terms on a staggered basis.

No member of the Council may serve more than two consecutive full terms. Members may serve after the expiration of their terms until their successors have taken office.

Any vacancy occurring in the membership of the Council shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment for the position being vacated. The vacancy shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Council.

Each member of the Council who is not an officer or full-time employee of the Federal Government shall receive a payment of $150 for each day (including travel time) during which the member is engaged in the performance of duties for the Council. All members of the Council who are officers or full-time employees of the United States shall serve without compensation in addition to compensation received for their services as officers or employees of the United States.

Each member of the Council may receive travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5 for employees serving intermittently in the Government service, for each day the member is engaged in the performance of duties away from the home or regular place of business of the member.

On the request of the Council, the Secretary may detail, with or without reimbursement, any of the personnel of the Department of Education to the Council to assist the Council in carrying out its duties. Any detail shall not interrupt or otherwise affect the civil service status or privileges of the Federal employee.

On the request of the Council, the Secretary shall provide such technical assistance to the Council as the Council determines to be necessary to carry out its duties.

Section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act (5 U.S.C. App.) shall not apply with respect to the Council.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title II, §205, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title II, §206(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4409.)

Section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (i), is section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in sections 761, 761a of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b, 762 of this title.

The purpose of this subchapter is to—

(1) authorize grants and contracts to—

(A) ensure that skilled personnel are available to provide rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities through vocational, medical, social, and psychological rehabilitation programs, through supported employment programs, through independent living services programs, and through client assistance programs;

(B) maintain and upgrade basic skills and knowledge of personnel employed to provide state-of-the-art service delivery systems and rehabilitation technology services; and

(C) provide training and information to individuals with disabilities, the parents, families, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives of the individuals, and other appropriate parties to develop the skills necessary for individuals with disabilities to access the rehabilitation system and to become active decisionmakers in the rehabilitation process;

(2) authorize grants for special projects and demonstrations which hold promise of expanding or otherwise improving rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities, including individuals with spinal cord injuries, older individuals who are blind, and individuals who are deaf whose maximum vocational potential has not been reached, which experiment with new types of patterns of services or devices for the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities (including opportunities for new careers for individuals with disabilities, and for other individuals in programs serving individuals with disabilities) and which provide vocational rehabilitation services to migratory agricultural workers who are individuals with disabilities or seasonal farmworkers who are individuals with disabilities;

(3) authorize grants and contracts to assist in the provision of vocational rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities;

(4) authorize grants and contracts to assist in the development and improvement of community rehabilitation programs; and

(5) establish uniform grant and contract requirements for programs assisted under this subchapter and certain other provisions of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §301, formerly §300, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 377; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(c)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3308; renumbered §301 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(15), title III, §301(a), (b)(3), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4410, 4411.)

A prior section 301 of Pub. L. 93–112, title III, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 377, as amended, was classified to section 771 of this title prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569.

1992—Par. (1). Pub. L. 102–569, §301(a)(3), added par. (1). Former par. (1) redesignated (4).

Par. (2). Pub. L. 102–569, §301(a)(1), (2), (4), redesignated par. (3) as (2), transferred it to appear after par. (1), and directed the striking of “and” at end which could not be executed because “and” did not appear. Former par. (2) redesignated (3).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(15)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Par. (3). Pub. L. 102–569, §301(a)(1), (2), (5), redesignated par. (2) as (3), transferred it to appear after par. (2), and substituted “rehabilitation” for “training”. Former par. (3) redesignated (2).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(15)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing, “older individuals who are blind, and individuals who are deaf” for “older blind individuals, and deaf individuals”, “workers who are individuals with disabilities” for “workers with handicaps”, and “farmworkers who are individuals with disabilities” for “farmworkers with handicaps”.

Par. (4). Pub. L. 102–569, §301(a)(1), (6), redesignated par. (1) as (4) and substituted “development and improvement of community rehabilitation programs; and” for “construction and initial staffing of rehabilitation facilities and authorize such staffing as the Commissioner deems appropriate;”. Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Par. (5). Pub. L. 102–569, §301(a)(1), redesignated par. (4) as (5).

1988—Par. (3). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “migratory agricultural workers with handicaps or seasonal farmworkers with handicaps” for “handicapped migratory agricultural workers or seasonal farmworkers”.

1986—Pars. (2), (3). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1978—Par. (1). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(1)(A), inserted “and authorize such staffing as the Commissioner deems appropriate” after “facilities”.

Pars. (4), (5). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(1)(B), (C), redesignated par. (5) as (4). Former par. (4), which declared as one of the purposes of this subchapter the establishment and operation of a National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, was struck out.

This section is referred to in section 797b of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §301, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 377; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §104, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1618; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §104, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§4, 11(b)(7), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 211, 213; Pub. L. 94–273, §3(18), Apr. 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 377; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§112(a), 122(c)(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2967, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §131, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 24; Pub. L. 99–506, title IV, §401, title X, §1002(d)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1823, 1844; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(a), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261, related to grants for construction of rehabilitation facilities, staffing, and planning assistance.

(1) The Commissioner may make grants to and contracts with States and public or nonprofit agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, to pay part of the cost of projects for training, traineeships, and related activities, including the provision of technical assistance, designed to assist in increasing the numbers of qualified personnel trained in providing vocational, medical, social, and psychological rehabilitation services, and other services provided under this chapter, to individuals with disabilities, including (A) personnel specifically trained in providing employment assistance to individuals with disabilities through job development and job placement services, (B) personnel specifically trained to identify, assess, and meet the individual rehabilitation needs of individuals with severe disabilities, including needs for rehabilitation technology services, (C) personnel specifically trained to deliver services to individuals who may benefit from receiving independent living services, personnel specifically trained to deliver services in client assistance programs, (D) personnel specifically trained to deliver services, through supported employment programs, to individuals with the most severe disabilities, and (E) personnel trained in performing other functions necessary to the development of such services.

(2) Grants and contracts under paragraph (1) may be expended for scholarships, with necessary stipends and allowances.

(3) In carrying out this subsection, the Commissioner shall furnish training regarding the services provided under this chapter, and, in particular, services provided in accordance with amendments made by the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992, to rehabilitation counselors and other rehabilitation personnel. In carrying out this subsection, the Commissioner shall also furnish training to such counselors and personnel regarding the applicability of section 794 of this title, title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.], and the provisions of titles II and XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq., 1381 et seq.] that are related to work incentives for individuals with disabilities.

(4) The Commissioner, in carrying out this subsection, shall make grants to Historically Black Colleges and Universities and other institutions of higher education whose minority student enrollment is at least 50 percent.

(5) No grant shall be awarded under this section unless the applicant has submitted an application to the Commissioner in such form, and in accordance with such procedures, as the Commissioner may require. Any such application shall include a detailed description of strategies that will be utilized to recruit and train persons so as to reflect the diverse populations of the United States, as part of the effort to increase the number of individuals with disabilities, and individuals who are members of minority groups, who are available to provide rehabilitation services.

(1)(A) In making such grants or contracts, the Commissioner shall target funds made available for any year to areas of personnel shortage.

(B) Projects described in subsection (a) of this section may include—

(i) projects to train personnel in the areas of vocational rehabilitation counseling, rehabilitation technology, rehabilitation medicine, rehabilitation nursing, rehabilitation social work, rehabilitation psychiatry, rehabilitation psychology, rehabilitation dentistry, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech pathology and audiology, physical education, therapeutic recreation, community rehabilitation programs, or prosthetics and orthotics;

(ii) projects to train personnel to provide—

(I) services to individuals with specific disabilities or specific impediments to rehabilitation, including individuals who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter;

(II) job development and job placement services to individuals with disabilities;

(III) supported employment services, including services of employment specialists for individuals with disabilities;

(IV) specialized services for individuals with severe disabilities; or

(V) recreation for individuals with disabilities;

(iii) projects to train personnel in other fields contributing to the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities; and

(iv) projects to train personnel in the use, applications, and benefits of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services (as defined in paragraphs (2) and (3) of section 2202 of this title).

(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), no grant under this section may be used to provide any one course of study to an individual for a period of more than 4 years.

(B) If the grant recipient determines that an individual has a disability which seriously affects the completion of training under this section, the grant recipient may modify the limitation under subparagraph (A).

(3)(A) A recipient of a grant or contract under this section shall provide assurances that each individual who receives a scholarship, for any academic year beginning after June 1, 1992, utilizing funds provided under such grant or contract shall enter into an agreement with the recipient under which the individual shall—

(i) maintain employment—

(I) in a nonprofit rehabilitation agency or related agency or in a State rehabilitation agency or related agency, including a professional corporation or professional practice group through which the individual has a service arrangement with the designated State agency;

(II) on a full- or part-time basis; and

(III) for a period of not less than the full-time equivalent of 2 years for each year for which assistance under this section was received,

within a period, beginning after the recipient completes the training for which the scholarship was awarded, of not more than the sum of the number of years in the period described in subclause (III) and 2 additional years; and

(ii) repay all or part of any scholarship received, plus interest, if the individual does not fulfill the requirements of clause (i),

except as the Commissioner by regulation may provide for repayment exceptions and deferrals.

(B) The Commissioner shall be responsible for the enforcement of each agreement entered into under subparagraph (A) upon completion of training under such subparagraph.

The Commissioner shall evaluate the impact of the training programs conducted under this section, shall determine training needs for qualified personnel necessary to provide services to individuals with disabilities, and shall develop a long-term rehabilitation manpower plan designed to target resources on areas of personnel shortage. The Commissioner shall prepare and submit to the Congress, by September 30 of each fiscal year, a report setting forth and justifying in detail how the training funds for the fiscal year prior to such submission are allocated by professional discipline and other program areas. The report shall also contain findings on personnel shortages, how funds proposed for the succeeding fiscal year will be allocated under the President's budget proposal, and how the findings of personnel shortages justify the allocations.

In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Commissioner shall award two grants to States, public or nonprofit private agencies and organizations, and institutions of higher education to support the development of rehabilitation technician programs. Such programs shall be designed to train local residents, who are recruited from a community historically unserved or underserved by programs providing vocational rehabilitation services under this chapter, to be liaisons between the community and vocational rehabilitation counselors. Entities receiving grants to carry out projects under this subsection shall coordinate the activities carried out through the projects with the activities of State vocational rehabilitation agencies to promote the employment of the individuals trained to be rehabilitation technicians. The rehabilitation technician program shall provide a mechanism through which individuals with disabilities residing in remote, isolated settings can successfully access vocational rehabilitation services.

(1) In carrying out subsection (a) of this section, the Commissioner shall award two grants to States, public or nonprofit private agencies and organizations, and institutions of higher education to support the formation of consortia or partnerships of public or nonprofit private entities for the purpose of providing opportunities for career advancement or competency-based training to current employees of public or nonprofit private agencies that provide services to individuals with disabilities. Such opportunities shall include certificate or degree granting programs in vocational rehabilitation services and related services.

(2) An entity that receives a grant under paragraph (1) may use the grant for purposes including—

(A) establishing a program with an institution of higher education to develop creative new programs and coursework options, or to expand existing programs, concerning the fields of vocational rehabilitation services and related services, including—

(i) providing release time for faculty and staff for curriculum development; and

(ii) paying for instructional costs and startup and other program development costs;

(B) establishing a career development mentoring program using faculty and professional staff members of participating agencies as role models, career sponsors, and academic advisors for experienced State, city, and county employees, and volunteers, who—

(i) have demonstrated a commitment to working in the fields described in clause (i); and

(ii) are enrolled in a program relating to such a field at an institution of higher education;

(C) supporting a wide range of programmatic and research activities aimed at increasing opportunities for career advancement and competency-based training in such fields; and

(D) identifying existing public or private agency and labor union personnel policies and benefit programs that may facilitate the ability of employees to take advantage of higher education opportunities, such as leave time and tuition reimbursement.

(3) In making grants for projects under paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall ensure that the projects shall be geographically distributed throughout the United States in urban and rural areas.

(4) The Commissioner shall, for the purpose of providing technical assistance to States or entities receiving grants under paragraph (1), enter into a cooperative agreement through a separate competition with an entity that has successfully demonstrated the capacity and expertise in the education, training, and retention of employees to serve individuals with disabilities through the use of consortia or partnerships established for the purpose of retraining the existing work force and providing opportunities for career enhancement.

(5) The Commissioner may conduct an evaluation of projects funded under this subsection.

(6) During the period in which an entity is receiving financial assistance under paragraph (1), the entity may not receive financial assistance under paragraph (4).

(1) For the purpose of training a sufficient number of interpreters to meet the communications needs of individuals who are deaf and individuals who are deaf-blind, the Secretary, through the Office of Deafness and Communicative Disorders, may award grants to any public or private nonprofit agency or organization to establish interpreter training programs or to provide financial assistance for ongoing interpreter training programs. The Secretary shall award grants for programs in such geographic areas throughout the United States as the Secretary considers appropriate to best carry out the purpose of this section. Priority shall be given to public or private nonprofit agencies or organizations with existing programs that have demonstrated their capacity for providing interpreter training services.

(2) No grant shall be awarded under paragraph (1) unless the applicant has submitted an application to the Secretary in such form, and in accordance with such procedures, as the Secretary may require. Any such application shall—

(A) describe the manner in which an interpreter training program would be developed and operated during the five-year period following the award of any grant under this section;

(B) demonstrate the applicant's capacity or potential for providing training for interpreters for individuals who are deaf and individuals who are deaf-blind;

(C) provide assurances that any interpreter trained or retrained under such program shall meet such minimum standards of competency as the Secretary may establish for purposes of this section; and

(D) contain such other information as the Secretary may require.

(1) The Commissioner is authorized to provide technical assistance to State rehabilitation agencies and community rehabilitation programs, directly or through contracts with State vocational rehabilitation agencies or nonprofit organizations.

(2) An expert or consultant appointed or serving under contract pursuant to this section shall be compensated at a rate subject to approval of the Commissioner which shall not exceed the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5. Such an expert or consultant may be allowed travel and transportation expenses in accordance with section 5703 of title 5.

(3)(A) Subject to subparagraph (B), at least 15 percent of the sums appropriated to carry out this section shall be allocated to designated State agencies to be used, directly or indirectly, for projects for in-service training of rehabilitation personnel, including projects designed—

(i) to address recruitment and retention of qualified rehabilitation professionals;

(ii) to provide for succession planning;

(iii) to provide for leadership development and capacity building; and

(iv) for fiscal years 1993 and 1994, to provide training regarding the amendments to this chapter made by the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992.

(B) If the allocation to designated State agencies required by subparagraph (A) would result in a lower level of funding for projects being carried out on October 29, 1992, by other recipients of funds under this section, the Commissioner may allocate less than 15 percent of the sums described in subparagraph (A) to designated State agencies for such in-service training.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(1) Consistent with paragraph (2), and consistent with the general authority set forth in this section to fund training activities, nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the Commissioner from exercising authority under this subchapter, or making available funds appropriated to carry out this subchapter, to fund the training activities described in section 797b of this title.

(2) If the amount of funds appropriated for a fiscal year to carry out this section exceeds the amount of funds appropriated for the preceding fiscal year to carry out this section, adjusted by the percent by which the average of the estimated gross domestic product fixed-weight price index for that fiscal year differs from that estimated index for the preceding fiscal year, the amount of the excess shall be treated as if the excess were appropriated under subchapter VIII of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §302, formerly title II, §203, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 376; renumbered title III, §304, and amended Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§109(2), 114, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2963, 2970; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §133, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 24; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title IV, §403, title X, §1002(d)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1824, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3308; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(c), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; Pub. L. 102–119, §26(e), Oct. 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 607; renumbered §302 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(18), title III, §§301(b)(3), (4), 302, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4411; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §110(a), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 726; Pub. L. 103–218, title IV, §402(b), Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 96; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1042(d), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 715.)

The Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1992, referred to in subsecs. (a)(3) and (g)(3)(A)(iv), is Pub. L. 102–569, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4344. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1992 Amendment note set out under section 701 of this title.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(3), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(3), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II and XVI of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVI (§1381 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

Section was formerly classified to section 774 of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 102–569.

A prior section 302 of Pub. L. 93–112 was renumbered section 303 and is classified to section 772 of this title.

1995—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–66 in second sentence substituted “by September 30 of each fiscal year” for “simultaneously with the budget submission for the succeeding fiscal year for the Rehabilitation Services Administration”.

1994—Subsec. (b)(1)(B)(iv). Pub. L. 103–218 added cl. (iv).

1993—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–73, §110(a)(1), in second sentence substituted “local residents, who are recruited from” for “local employees, who are recruited from or reside in” and inserted after second sentence “Entities receiving grants to carry out projects under this subsection shall coordinate the activities carried out through the projects with the activities of State vocational rehabilitation agencies to promote the employment of the individuals trained to be rehabilitation technicians.”

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 103–73, §110(a)(2), amended subsec. (h) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (h) read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section, $31,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, $33,000,000 for fiscal year 1988, $35,000,000 for fiscal year 1989, $37,000,000 for fiscal year 1990, $38,517,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992. There are further authorized to be appropriated for each such fiscal year such additional sums as the Congress may determine to be necessary to carry out this section.”

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(a), designated existing provisions as par. (1), inserted in introductory provisions “, including the provision of technical assistance,” after “traineeships, and related activities” and “, and other services provided under this chapter,” after “rehabilitation services”, redesignated former par. (1) as subpar. (A) and substituted “specifically” for “specially”, redesignated former par. (2) as subpar. (B) and inserted before comma at end “, including needs for rehabilitation technology services”, redesignated former par. (3) as subpar. (C) and substituted “independent living services” for “comprehensive services for independent living” and struck out “and” at end, added par. (4) and redesignated it as subpar. (D), redesignated former par. (4) as (5) and further redesignated it as subpar. (E), struck out second and third sentences, and added pars. (2) to (5). Prior to amendment, second and third sentences read as follows: “Recipients of grants or contracts under this section shall give due regard to the training of individuals with disabilities as part of the effort to increase the number of qualified personnel available to provide rehabilitation services. In carrying out the provisions of this subsection, the Commissioner shall, in addition to furnishing training in the services provided under this chapter to rehabilitation counselors, furnish training to such counselors in the applicability of the provisions of section 794 of this title.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(18)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(b)(1), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which read as follows: “In making such grants or contracts, funds made available for any year shall be targeted to areas of personnel shortage which may include projects in rehabilitation engineering, rehabilitation medicine, rehabilitation nursing, rehabilitation counseling, rehabilitation social work, rehabilitation psychiatry, rehabilitation psychology, rehabilitation dentistry, physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech pathology and audiology, physical education, therapeutic recreation, workshop and facility administration, prosthetics and orthodontics, specialized personnel in providing services to blind and deaf individuals, specialized personnel in providing job development and job placement services for individuals with disabilities, specialized personnel in providing employment training for supported employment, other specialized personnel for individuals with severe disabilities, recreation for individuals with disabilities, and other fields contributing to the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities, including homebound and institutionalized individuals and individuals with disabilities with limited English-speaking ability.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(18)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(18)(B), substituted “disability” for “handicap”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(b)(2), inserted “, for any academic year beginning after June 1, 1992,” after “who receives a scholarship”, added cl. (i), and struck out former cl. (i) which read as follows: “within the ten-year period after completing the training for which the scholarship was awarded, maintain employment in a nonprofit rehabilitation or related agency, or in a State rehabilitation agency, on a full-time basis for a period of not less than two years for each year for which assistance was received; and”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(18)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(c), added subsecs. (d) and (e). Former subsecs. (d) and (e) redesignated (f) and (g), respectively.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(c)(1), redesignated subsec. (d) as (f). Former subsec. (f) redesignated (h).

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(d)(1), in first sentence, substituted “individuals who are deaf and individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf individuals”, “Office of Deafness and Communicative Disorders” for “Office of Information and Resources for Individuals With Disabilities”, and “grants” for “grants under this section” and struck out second sentence which read as follows: “Not more than twelve programs shall be established or assisted by grants under this section.”

Subsec. (f)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(d)(2), in introductory provisions substituted “paragraph (1)” for “this section”, in subpar. (B) substituted “individuals who are deaf and individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf individuals”, in subpar. (C) inserted “and” at end, redesignated subpar. (E) as (D), and struck out former subpar. (D) which read as follows: “provide assurances that (i) to the extent appropriate, the applicant shall provide for the training or retraining (including short-term and in-service training) of teachers who are involved in providing instruction to deaf individuals but who are not certified as teachers of deaf individuals, and (ii) funds for such in-service training shall be provided under this section only through funds appropriated under the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act; and”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(c)(1), (e), redesignated subsec. (e) as (g), in par. (1) substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”, in par. (2) substituted “the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the daily rate payable for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332”, and added par. (3).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(c)(1), redesignated subsec. (f) as (h).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–569, §302(f), added subsec. (i).

1991—Subsec. (d)(2)(D). Pub. L. 102–119 substituted “Individuals with Disabilities Education Act” for “Education of the Handicapped Act”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “fiscal year” for “the fiscal year” before “1987”, “1988”, “1989”, and “1990”, struck out “and” after “1990,”, and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(1), substituted “programs, and” for “program,, and”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(2), substituted “individuals with severe handicaps, recreation for individuals with handicaps” for “those individuals who meet the definition of severely handicapped, recreation for ill and individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(3), substituted “grant or contract under” for “grant of contract under” and “utilizing funds” for “from funds” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(4), substituted “for Individuals With Disabilities” for “for the Handicapped”.

Subsec. (d)(2)(D). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(5), substituted “of the Handicapped Act” for “for All Handicapped Children Act”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(c)(6), substituted “1991.” for “1991..”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 403(a), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, added cl. (2), redesignated former cls. (2) and (3) as (3) and (4), respectively, and, following such clauses, inserted provision requiring recipients of grants or contracts under this section to give due regard to training of individuals with handicaps as part of the effort to increase the number of qualified personnel available to provide rehabilitation services.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(d)(2), which directed the substitution of “program, and” for “program, and”, could not be executed because the words “program, and” did not appear. See 1988 Amendment note above for cl. (3).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §403(c), designated existing first sentence as par. (1) and struck out existing second sentence which read as follows: “No grant shall be made under this section for furnishing to an individual any one course of study extending for a period in excess of four years.”. See par. (2).

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §403(b)(1)–(3), inserted “rehabilitation engineering,” before “rehabilitation medicine”, “rehabilitation dentistry,” after “rehabilitation psychology,” and “physical education, therapeutic recreation,” after “speech pathology and audiology,”.

Pub. L. 99–506, §403(b)(4), which directed the insertion of “specialized personnel in providing employment training for supported employment, other specialized personnel for those individuals who meet the definition of severely handicapped,” after “job placement services for handicapped individuals,”, was executed by making the insertion after “job placement services for individuals with handicaps,” as the probable intent of Congress because of the prior amendment by section 103(d)(2)(C) of Pub. L. 99–506.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(2), (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §403(c)(2), (d), added pars. (2) and (3).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §403(e)(2), added subsec. (e). Former subsec. (e) redesignated (f).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–506, §403(f), which directed the substitution of authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1987 through 1991 for authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1984 through 1986 in subsec. (e), was executed by making the substitution in subsec. (f), to reflect the probable intent of Congress and the intervening redesignation of former subsec. (e) as (f) by section 403(e)(1) of Pub. L. 99–506.

Pub. L. 99–506, §403(e)(1), redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §133(a), (b)(1), inserted “qualified” before “personnel trained in providing vocational”, inserted “(1)” after “services to handicapped individuals, including”, inserted a comma and cl. (2) after “and job placement services”, inserted “(3)” before “personnel trained in performing”, and inserted provision requiring that the Commissioner furnish training to rehabilitation counselors in the applicability of the provisions of section 794 of this title.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221, §133(c), substituted “shall be targeted to areas of personnel shortage which may” for “will be utilized to provide a balanced program of assistance to meet the medical, vocational, and other personnel training needs of both public and private rehabilitation programs and institutions, to”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–221, §133(b)(2), (d), substituted “needs for qualified personnel” for “needs for personnel” and inserted provision requiring the Commissioner to prepare and submit to the Congress, simultaneously with the budget submission for the succeeding fiscal year for the Rehabilitation Services Administration, a report setting forth and justifying in detail how the training funds for the fiscal year prior to such submission are allocated by professional discipline and other program areas, with the report also to contain findings on personnel shortages, how funds proposed for the succeeding fiscal year will be allocated under the President's budget proposal, and how the findings of personnel shortages justify the allocations.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 98–221, §133(e), substituted “(e)” for “(d)” as designation for subsection authorizing appropriations, thereby correcting a typographical error in Pub. L. 95–602 which had added two subsecs. (d), and in subsec. (e) as so redesignated, substituted “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section, $22,000,000 for the fiscal year 1984, $27,000,000 for the fiscal year 1985, and $31,000,000 for the fiscal year 1986” for “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section $34,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, $40,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1980, $45,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1981, and $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1982”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §114(1), substituted “The Commissioner may” for “The Secretary, through the Commissioner, in coordination with other appropriate programs in the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, is authorized to”, “vocational, medical, social, and psychological rehabilitation services” for “vocational services”, and “individuals, including personnel specially trained in providing employment assistance to handicapped individuals through job development and job placement services, and personnel trained in performing” for “individuals and in performing”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 95–602, §114(2), inserted “, rehabilitation psychiatry” after “social work” and “specialized personnel in providing job development and job placement services for handicapped individuals,” after “blind and deaf individuals,”.

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 95–602, §114(3), added subsec. (c) and two subsecs. (d).

This section is referred to in section 797b of this title.

For the purpose of making grants and entering into contracts under this section, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(1) The Commissioner is authorized to make grants to States and public or nonprofit organizations and agencies to pay up to 90 per centum of the cost of projects for providing vocational rehabilitation services or employment support services to individuals with disabilities, especially those with the most severe disabilities, in public or nonprofit community rehabilitation programs.

(2)(A) For purposes of this section, vocational rehabilitation services shall include—

(i) training with a view toward career advancement;

(ii) training (including on-the-job training) in occupational skills; and

(iii) services, including rehabilitation technology services, personal assistance services, and supported employment services and extended services, that—

(I) are related to training described in clause (i) or (ii); and

(II) are required by the individual to engage in such training.

(B) Pursuant to regulations, payment of weekly allowances may be made to individuals receiving vocational rehabilitation services and related services under this section. Such allowances may not be paid to any individual for any period in excess of two years. In determining the amount of such allowances for any individual, consideration shall be given to the individual's need for such an allowance, including any expenses reasonably attributable to receipt of vocational rehabilitation services, the extent to which such an allowance will help assure entry into and satisfactory completion of training, and such other factors, specified by the Commissioner, as will promote such individual's capacity to engage in competitive employment.

(3) The Commissioner may make a grant for a project pursuant to this subsection only if the Commissioner determines that (A) the purpose of such project is to prepare individuals with disabilities, especially those with the most severe disabilities, for competitive employment, or to place or retain such individual in competitive employment, including supported employment; (B) the individuals to receive vocational rehabilitation services under such project will include only those who have been determined to be in need of such vocational rehabilitation services by the State agency or agencies designated as provided in section 721(a)(1) of this title of the State in which the community rehabilitation program is located; (C) the full range of vocational rehabilitation services will be made available to each such individual, to the extent of that individual's need for such services; and (D) the project, including the participating community rehabilitation program and the vocational rehabilitation services provided, meets such other requirements as the Commissioner may prescribe in regulations for carrying out the purposes of this subsection.

The Commissioner is also authorized to make grants, upon applications approved by the designated State agency, to public or nonprofit agencies, institutions, or organizations to assist them in meeting the cost of planning community rehabilitation programs, the cost of the services to be provided by such programs, and initial staffing costs of such programs.

(1) The Commissioner is authorized to make grants to public or nonprofit community rehabilitation programs, or to an organization or combination of such programs, to pay the Federal share of the cost of projects to analyze, improve, and increase their professional services to individuals with disabilities, their management effectiveness, or any other part of their operations affecting their capacity to provide employment and services for such individuals.

(2) No part of any grant made pursuant to this subsection may be used to pay costs of acquiring, constructing, expanding, remodeling, or altering any building.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §303, formerly §302, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 378; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §105, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §105, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§5, 11(b)(8), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§112(b), 122(c)(3), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2968, 2987; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §132, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 24; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title IV, §402, title X, §1001(d)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1824, 1842; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3308; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(b), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; renumbered §303 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(16), title III, §§301(b)(3), 303, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4411, 4416.)

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

A prior section 303 of Pub. L. 93–112 was renumbered section 304 and is classified to section 773 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former section 41b of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(16)(A), 303(d), substituted “rehabilitation” for “training” and “disabilities” for “handicaps” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(a), substituted “1993 through 1997” for “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, and 1992”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(16)(B), 303(b)(1), substituted “rehabilitation services or employment support services” for “training services”, “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”, and “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(b)(2)(A), added subpar. (A) and struck out former subpar. (A) which read as follows: “Vocational training services for purposes of this subsection shall include training with a view toward career advancement; training in occupational skills; related services, including work evaluation, work testing, provision of occupational tools and equipment required by the individual to engage in such training, and job tryouts; and payment of weekly allowances to individuals receiving such training and related services.”

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(b)(2)(B), inserted first sentence “Pursuant to regulations, payment of weekly allowances may be made to individuals receiving vocational rehabilitation services and related services under this section.”, in second sentence, substituted a period for “, and such allowances for any week shall not exceed $30 plus $10 for each of the individual's dependents, or $70, whichever is less.”, and in last sentence, substituted “vocational rehabilitation services” for “training services” and “competitive employment” for “gainful and suitable employment”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(16)(B), 303(b)(3)(A), substituted “competitive employment, or to place or retain such individual in competitive employment” for “gainful and suitable employment” and “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(3)(B). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(b)(3)(B), struck out “suitable for and” after “determined to be” and substituted “vocational rehabilitation” for “training” in two places and “community rehabilitation program” for “rehabilitation facility”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(C). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(b)(3)(C), substituted “vocational rehabilitation” for “training”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(D). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(b)(3)(D), substituted “community rehabilitation program and the vocational rehabilitation” for “rehabilitation facility and the training”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(c)(2), added subsec. (c). Former subsec. (c) redesignated (d).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(16)(B), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in par. (1).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(c)(1), redesignated subsec. (c) as (d).

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §303(c)(3), substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities” and “such programs” for “such facilities”.

1991—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

1988—Subsec. (b)(3)(D). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “meets” for “meet”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §402(a), substituted “of the fiscal years 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, and 1991” for “fiscal year ending before October 1, 1986”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(1)(A), substituted “only if the Commissioner determines” for “only on his determination”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 402(b), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and inserted reference to supported employment.

Subsec. (b)(3)(C). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(1)(B), substituted “of that individual's need” for “of his need”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(D). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(1)(C), substituted “as the Commissioner may prescribe” for “as he may prescribe”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “October 1, 1986” for “October 1, 1982”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §112(b), substituted “entering into contracts” for “contracts” and “each fiscal year ending before October 1, 1982” for “the fiscal years ending June 30, 1974, June 30, 1975, June 30, 1976, September 30, 1977, and September 30, 1978”.

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(3), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

1976—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 94–230, §5, extended authorization of appropriation for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(8), extended authorization of appropriations for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516 extended authorization of appropriation for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–651 amended subsec. (a) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

For contingency provisions relating to the extensions of program authorizations and to the effective date of such extensions, see section 11(a), (b)(1), and (c) of Pub. L. 94–230, set out as a note under section 720 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 776 of this title.

It is the purpose of this section to assist and encourage the provision of needed community rehabilitation programs for individuals with disabilities primarily served by State rehabilitation programs.

The Commissioner may, under special circumstances and in accordance with this section and subject to section 776 of this title, guarantee the payment of principal and interest on loans made to nonprofit private entities by non-Federal lenders and by the Federal Financing Bank for the construction of facilities for community rehabilitation programs, including equipment used in their operation.

In the case of a guarantee of any loan to a nonprofit private entity under this section, the Commissioner shall pay, to the holder of such loan and for and on behalf of the project for which the loan was made, amounts sufficient to reduce by 2 percent per annum the net effective interest rate otherwise payable on such loan. Each holder of a loan which is guaranteed under this section shall have a contractual right to receive from the United States interest payments required by the preceding sentence.

The cumulative total of the principal of the loans outstanding at any time with respect to which guarantees have been issued, or which have been directly made, may not exceed $100,000,000.

(1) The Commissioner may not approve a loan guarantee for a project under this section unless the Commissioner determines that (A) the terms, conditions, security (if any), and schedule and amount of repayments with respect to the loan are sufficient to protect the financial interests of the United States and are otherwise reasonable, including a determination that the rate of interest does not exceed such per centum per annum on the principal obligation outstanding as the Commissioner determines to be reasonable, taking into account the range of interest rates prevailing in the private market for similar loans and the risks assumed by the United States, and (B) the loan would not be available on reasonable terms and conditions without the guarantee under this section.

(2)(A) The United States shall be entitled to recover from the applicant for a loan guarantee under this section the amount of any payment made pursuant to such guarantee, unless the Commissioner for good cause waives such right of recovery. Upon making any such payment, the United States shall be subrogated to all of the rights of the recipient of the payments with respect to which the guarantee was made.

(B) To the extent permitted by subparagraph (C), any terms and conditions applicable to a loan guarantee under this section (including terms and conditions imposed under paragraph (1)) may be modified by the Commissioner to the extent considered consistent with the interests of the United States.

(C) Any loan guarantee made by the Commissioner under this section shall be incontestable (i) in the hands of an applicant on whose behalf such guarantee is made unless the applicant engaged in fraud or misrepresentation in securing such guarantee, and (ii) as to any person (or a successor in interest) who makes or contracts to make a loan to such applicant in reliance thereon unless such person (or a successor in interest) engaged in fraud or misrepresentation in making or contracting to make such loan.

(D) Guarantees of loans under this section shall be subject to such further terms and conditions as the Commissioner considers necessary to assure that the purposes of this section will be achieved.

(1) There is established in the Treasury a loan guarantee fund (hereinafter in this subsection referred to as the “fund”) which shall be available to the Commissioner without fiscal year limitation, in such amounts as may be specified from time to time in appropriation Acts—

(A) to enable the Commissioner to discharge the responsibilities under loan guarantees issued under this section; and

(B) for payment of interest under subsection (c) of this section on loans guaranteed under this section.

There are authorized to be appropriated such amounts as may be necessary to provide the sums required for the fund. There shall also be deposited in the fund amounts received by the Commissioner in connection with loan guarantees under this section and other property or assets derived by the Commissioner from operations respecting such loan guarantees, including any money derived from the sale of assets.

(2)(A) If at any time the sums in the fund are insufficient to enable the Commissioner—

(i) to make payments of interest under subsection (c) of this section; or

(ii) to otherwise comply with guarantees under this section of loans to nonprofit private entities;

the Commissioner is authorized to issue to the Secretary of the Treasury notes or other obligations in such forms and denominations, bearing such maturities, and subject to such terms and conditions, as may be prescribed by the Commissioner with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury.

(B) Such notes or other obligations shall bear interest at a rate determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, taking into consideration the current average market yield on outstanding marketable obligations of the United States of comparable maturities during the month preceding the issuance of the notes or other obligations.

(C) The Secretary of the Treasury shall purchase any notes and other obligations issued under this paragraph, and for that purpose the Secretary may use as a public debt transaction the proceeds from the sale of any securities issued under chapter 31 of title 31. The purposes for which securities may be issued under that chapter are extended to include any purchase of such notes and obligations. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time sell any of the notes or other obligations acquired by the Secretary under this paragraph. All redemptions, purchases, and sales by the Secretary of the Treasury of such notes or other obligations shall be treated as a public debt transaction of the United States.

(D) Sums borrowed under this paragraph shall be deposited in the fund and redemption of such notes and obligations shall be made by the Commissioner from the fund.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §304, formerly §303, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 379; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §113, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2968; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title X, §1001(d)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1843; renumbered §304 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(17), title III, §§301(b)(3), 304, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4411, 4417.)

In subsec. (f)(2)(C), “chapter 31 of title 31” and “that chapter” substituted for “the Second Liberty Bond Act” and “that Act”, respectively, on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

A prior section 304 of Pub. L. 93–112 was renumbered section 302 and is classified to section 771a of this title.

Another prior section 304 of Pub. L. 93–112, title III, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 381; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §§106, 111(i)–(k), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619, 1621; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §§106, 111(i)–(k), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4, 2–6; Pub. L. 94–230, §§6, 11(b)(9), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213, related to special projects and demonstrations, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §109(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2962.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §304(1), substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(17), 304(2), substituted “community rehabilitation” for “facilities for” and “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §304(3), inserted “under special circumstances and” after “may,” and substituted “facilities for community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(A), substituted “unless the Commissioner determines” for “unless he determines”.

Subsec. (e)(2)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(B), substituted “to the extent considered” for “to the extent he considers”.

Subsec. (e)(2)(C)(ii). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(C), substituted “(or a successor in interest)” for “(or his successor in interest)” in two places.

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(E), substituted “derived by the Commissioner from operations” for “derived by him from his operations” in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (f)(1)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(D), substituted “to enable the Commissioner to discharge the responsibilities under loan guarantees issued under this section” for “to enable him to discharge his responsibilities under loan guarantees issued by him under this section”.

Subsec. (f)(2)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(F), substituted “the Commissioner is authorized” for “he is authorized” in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (f)(2)(C). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(d)(2)(G), substituted “and for that purpose may use” for “and for that purpose he may use” and “acquired by the Secretary” for “acquired by him”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted provisions guaranteeing the payment of principal and interest on loans made to nonprofit private entities by non-Federal lenders and by the Federal Financing Bank for construction of rehabilitation facilities but restricting the total amount of principal of loans outstanding at any one time to an amount not to exceed $100,000,000 for provisions authorizing the Secretary to insure mortgages for rehabilitation facilities and establishing a Rehabilitation Facilities Insurance Fund.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §304, formerly title II, §203, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 376, renumbered and amended, which related to Federal grants, contracts, and programs for training in rehabilitation services, was renumbered section 302 of Pub. L. 93–112, by Pub. L. 102–569, title III, §301(b)(3), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4411, and transferred to section 771a of this title.

(1) In order to provide a focal point in communities for the development and delivery of services designed primarily for individuals with disabilities, the Commissioner may make grants to any designated State unit to establish and operate comprehensive rehabilitation centers. The centers shall be established in order to provide a broad range of services to individuals with disabilities, including information and referral services, counseling services, and job placement, health, educational, social, and recreational services, as well as to provide facilities for recreational activities.

(2) To the maximum extent practicable, such centers shall provide, upon request, to local governmental units and other public and private nonprofit entities located in the area such information and technical assistance (including support personnel such as interpreters for individuals who are deaf) as may be necessary to assist those entities in complying with this chapter, particularly the requirements of section 794 of this title.

No grant may be made under this section unless an application therefor has been submitted to and approved by the Commissioner. The Commissioner may not approve an application for a grant unless the application—

(1) contains assurances that the designated State unit will use funds provided by such grant in accordance with subsections (c) and (d) of this section; and

(2) contains such other information, and is submitted in such form and in accordance with such procedures, as the Commissioner may require.

(1) The designated State unit may—

(A) in accordance with subsection (c) of this section make grants to units of general purpose local government or to other public or nonprofit private agencies or organizations and may make contracts with any agency or organization to pay not to exceed 80 percent of the cost of—

(i) leasing facilities to serve as comprehensive rehabilitation centers;

(ii) expanding, remodeling, or altering facilities to the extent necessary to adapt them to serve as comprehensive rehabilitation centers;

(iii) operating such centers; or

(iv) carrying out any combination of the activities specified in this subparagraph; and

(B) directly carry out the activities described in subparagraph (A), except that not more than 80 percent of the costs of providing any comprehensive rehabilitation center may be provided from funds under this section.

(2) Funds made available to any designated State unit under this section for the purpose of assisting in the operation of a comprehensive rehabilitation center may be used to compensate professional and technical personnel required to operate the center and to deliver services in the center, and to provide equipment for the center.

(1) The designated State unit may approve a grant or enter into a contract under subsection (c) of this section only if the application for such grant or contract meets the requirements specified in paragraphs (1), (2), (4), and (5) of section 776(b) of this title and if the application contains assurances that any center assisted by such grant or contract shall be in reasonably close proximity to the majority of individuals eligible to use the comprehensive rehabilitation center.

(2) Any designated State unit which directly provides for comprehensive rehabilitation centers under subsection (c)(1)(B) of this section shall use funds under this section in the same manner as any other grant recipient is required to use such funds.

If within 20 years after the completion of any construction project for which funds have been paid under this section—

(1) the owner of the facility ceases to be a public or nonprofit private agency or organization, or

(2) the facility ceases to be used for the purposes for which it was leased or constructed (unless the Commissioner determines, in accordance with regulations, that there is good cause for releasing the applicant or other owner from the obligation to do so),

the United States shall be entitled to recover from the grant recipient or other owner of the facility an amount which bears the same ratio to the value of the facility (or so much thereof as constituted an approved project or projects) at the time the United States seeks recovery as the amount of such Federal funds bore to the cost of renovating the facility under subsection (c)(1)(A)(ii) of this section. Such value shall be determined by agreement of the parties or by action brought in the United States district court for the district in which such facility is situated.

The requirements of section 776 of this title shall not apply to funds allotted under this section, except that subsections (g) and (h) of such section shall be applicable with respect to such funds.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §305, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §115(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2971; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §134, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 25; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title IV, §404, title X, §1002(d)(3), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1825, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(d), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(19), title III, §305, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4358, 4417.)

A prior section 305 of Pub. L. 93–112, title III, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 383, as amended by Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §107, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §107, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§7, 11(b)(10), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213; Pub. L. 94–288, §§1, 2, May 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 520, which authorized appropriations for fiscal years ending June 30, 1974, June 30, 1975, June 30, 1976, Sept. 30, 1977, and Sept. 30, 1978, for the establishment of the Helen Keller National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, was formerly classified to this section and redesignated section 313 of Pub. L. 93–112 by section 109(1) of Pub. L. 95–602. Section 313 of Pub. L. 93–112, as amended generally by section 116(2) of Pub. L. 95–602, was classified to section 777c of this title and subsequently repealed by Pub. L. 98–221.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(19)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(19)(B), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “the deaf”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §305(1), substituted “center” for “facility” after “any”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §305(2), substituted “1993 through 1997” for “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, and 1992”.

1991—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “primarily for individuals with handicaps” for “primarily for handicapped persons”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (c)(2), (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(d)(3), redesignated par. (3) as (2). No par. (2) had been enacted.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 99–506, §404, in amending section generally, substituted authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1987 through 1991 for authorization of appropriations for fiscal years 1984 through 1986.

1984—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986” for “the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, and for the three succeeding fiscal years”.

This section is referred to in section 776 of this title.

The provisions of this section shall apply to all projects approved and assisted under this subchapter, except as otherwise provided in section 775(f) of this title. The Commissioner shall insure compliance with this section prior to making any grant or entering into any contract or agreement under this subchapter, except projects authorized under section 772 of this title.

To be approved, an application for assistance for a construction project, or for a project which involves construction, under this subchapter must—

(1) contain or be supported by reasonable assurances that (A) for a period of not less than twenty years after completion of construction of the project it will be used as a public or nonprofit facility, (B) sufficient funds will be available to meet the non-Federal share of the cost of construction of the project, and (C) sufficient funds will be available, when construction of the project is completed, for its effective use for its intended purpose;

(2) provide that Federal funds provided to any agency or organization under this subchapter will be used only for the purposes for which provided and in accordance with the applicable provisions of this section and the section under which such funds are provided;

(3) provide that the agency or organization receiving Federal funds under this subchapter will make an annual report to the Commissioner, which the Commissioner shall submit to the Secretary for inclusion (in summarized form) in the annual report submitted to the Congress under section 712 of this title;

(4) be accompanied or supplemented by plans and specifications which have been approved by the Board established by section 792 of this title, in which due consideration shall be given to excellence of architecture and design, and to the inclusion of works of art (not representing more than 1 per centum of the cost of the project), and which comply with regulations prescribed by the Commissioner relating to minimum standards of construction and equipment (promulgated with particular emphasis on securing compliance with the requirements of the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 (P.L. 90–480) [42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq.]), and with regulations of the Secretary of Labor relating to occupational health and safety standards for facilities for community rehabilitation programs; and

(5) contain or be supported by reasonable assurance that any laborer or mechanic employed by any contractor or subcontractor in the performance of work on any construction aided by payments pursuant to any grant under this section will be paid wages at rates not less than those prevailing on similar construction in the locality as determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with the Davis-Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276a—276a–5); and the Secretary of Labor shall have, with respect to the labor standards specified in this paragraph, the authority and functions set forth in Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950 (15 F.R. 3176) and section 276c of title 40.

Upon approval of any application for a grant or contract for a project under this subchapter, the Commissioner shall reserve, from any appropriation available therefore, the amount of such grant or contract determined under this subchapter. In case an amendment to an approved application is approved, or the estimated cost of a project is revised upward, any additional payment with respect thereto may be made from the appropriation from which the original reservation was made or the appropriation for the fiscal year in which such amendment or revision is approved.

If, within twenty years after completion of any construction project for which funds have been paid under this subchapter, the facility shall cease to be a public or nonprofit facility, the United States shall be entitled to recover from the applicant or other owner of the facility the amount bearing the same ratio to the then value (as determined by agreement of the parties or by action brought in the United States district court for the district in which such facility is situated) of the facility, as the amount of the Federal participation bore to the cost of construction of such facility.

Payment of assistance or reservation of funds made pursuant to this subchapter may be made (after necessary adjustment on account of previously made overpayments or underpayments) in advance or by way of reimbursement, and in such installments and on such conditions, as the Commissioner may determine.

A project for construction of a facility for a community rehabilitation program which is primarily a workshop may, where approved by the Commissioner as necessary to the effective operation of the facility, include such construction as may be necessary to provide residential accommodations for use in connection with the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities.

No funds provided under this subchapter may be used to assist in the construction of any facility which is or will be used for religious worship or any sectarian activity.

When, in any State, funds provided under this subchapter will be used for providing direct services to individuals with disabilities or for developing or improving community rehabilitation programs which will provide such services, such services must be carried out in a manner not inconsistent with the State plan approved pursuant to section 721 of this title.

Prior to making any grant or entering into any contract under this subchapter, the Commissioner shall afford reasonable opportunity to the appropriate State agency or agencies designated pursuant to section 721 of this title to comment on such grant or contract.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §306, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 384; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §111(*l*), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1621; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §111(*l*), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–6; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§115(b), 122(c)(4)–(6), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2972, 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title X, §1002(d)(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(20), title III, §306, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359, 4417.)

The Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, referred to in subsec. (b)(4), is Pub. L. 90–480, Aug. 12, 1968, 82 Stat. 718, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§4151 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 4151 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Davis-Bacon Act, as amended, referred to in subsec. (b)(5), is act Mar. 3, 1931, ch. 411, 46 Stat. 1494, as amended, which is classified generally to sections 276a to 276a–5 of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 276a of Title 40 and Tables.

Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950, referred to in subsec. (b)(5), is Reorg. Plan No. 14 of 1950, eff. May 24, 1950, 15 F.R. 3176, 64 Stat. 1267, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

Prior similar provisions were contained in former sections 34, 41a, 41b, 42–1, and 42a of this title.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §306(1), made technical amendment to reference to section 772 of this title to reflect renumbering of corresponding section of original act.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §306(2), substituted “facilities for community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(20), 306(3), substituted “facility for a community rehabilitation program” for “rehabilitation facility” and “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(20), 306(4), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” and “developing or improving community rehabilitation programs” for “establishing facilities”.

1988—Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(e)(1), substituted “relating” for “related” after “Commissioner”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(e)(2), inserted “the” before “Davis-Bacon Act”.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(e)(3), inserted comma after “When”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(d)(4), substituted “775(f)” for “775(g)”.

Subsecs. (f), (h). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §§115(b), 122(c)(4), inserted “, except as otherwise provided in section 775(g) of this title” after “assisted under this subchapter” and substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(5), substituted provision directing that the annual report of agencies and organizations receiving Federal funds be made to the Commissioner who will then submit it to the Secretary for provision directing that the annual report be made to the Secretary.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(6), substituted “prescribed by the Commissioner” for “prescribed by the Secretary”.

Subsecs. (c), (e), (f), (i). Pub. L. 95–602, §122(c)(4), substituted “Commissioner” for “Secretary” wherever appearing.

1974—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 93–516, in provisions preceding par. (1), substituted “a construction project, or for a project which involves construction, under” for “a construction project under”, and in par. (4), substituted “plans and specifications which have been approved by the Board established by section 792 of this title, in which” for “plans and specifications in which”.

Pub. L. 93–651 amended subsec. (b) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

This section is referred to in sections 721, 762, 773, 775, 777a, 777b, 777f, 797b of this title.

For the purpose of carrying out this part (other than sections 777a(c), 777a(d), 777b, and 777f of this title), there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §310, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2973; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §135, title II, §208(b), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 25, 34; Pub. L. 99–506, title IV, §405, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1825; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(e)(1), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; Pub. L. 102–569, title III, §307, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4418; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §110(b), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 726.)

1993—Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “sections 777a(c), 777a(d),” for “sections 777a(d), 777a(e),”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 struck out subsec. designation “(a)”, substituted “777b, and 777f” for “and 777f” and “such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “$15,860,000 for fiscal year 1987, $16,790,000 for fiscal year 1988, $17,800,000 for fiscal year 1989, $18,900,000 for fiscal year 1990, $19,675,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992.”, and struck out subsec. (b) which read as follows: “Of the amounts appropriated for any fiscal year under subsection (a) of this section, 5 percent of such amount shall be available in such fiscal year only for the purpose of making grants under section 777b of this title. There is further authorized to be appropriated for each such fiscal year such additional amount as may be necessary to equal, when added to the amount made available for the purpose of making grants under section 777b of this title, an amount of $5,000,000 for each such fiscal year.”

1991—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–52 struck out “and” after “1990,” and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “(other than sections 777a(d), 777a(e), and 777f of this title)” for identical language.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §405(1), substituted “(other than sections 777a(d), 777a(e), and 777f of this title)” for “(other than section 777f of this title)”.

Pub. L. 99–506, §405(2), which directed the substitution of “$15,860,000 for fiscal year 1987, $16,790,000 for fiscal year 1988, $17,800,000 for fiscal year 1989, $18,900,000 for fiscal year 1990, and $19,675,000 for fiscal year 1991” for “$12,900,000 for the fiscal year 1984, $13,600,000 for the fiscal year 1985, and $14,300,000 for the fiscal year 1986” was executed by substituting the new phrase for “$12,900,000 for fiscal year 1984, $13,600,000 for fiscal year 1985, and $14,300,000 for fiscal year 1986” as the probable intent of Congress.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §135, substituted “777f” for “777c” and “$12,900,000 for fiscal year 1984, $13,600,000 for fiscal year 1985, and $14,300,000 for fiscal year 1986” for “such sums as may be necessary for each fiscal year ending prior to October 1, 1982”, which amendment was executed by making such substitution for “such sums as may be necessary for each fiscal year ending before October 1, 1982” as the probable intent of Congress.

Pub. L. 98–221, §208(b), which directed the striking out of “(other than section 777c of this title),”, could not be executed in view of previous amendment by section 135 of Pub. L. 98–221. See above.

Subject to the provisions of section 776 of this title, the Commissioner may make grants to States and to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstrations (including related research and evaluation) for—

(1) establishing programs for providing vocational rehabilitation services, which hold promise of expanding or otherwise improving rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities (especially those with the most severe disabilities), including individuals who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by the programs under this chapter, individuals who are blind, and individuals who are deaf;

(2) applying new types or patterns of services or devices for individuals with disabilities (including programs for providing individuals with disabilities, or other individuals in programs servicing individuals with disabilities, with opportunities for new careers and career advancement);

(3) operating programs to demonstrate methods of making recreational activities fully accessible to individuals with disabilities; and

(4) operating programs to meet the special needs of isolated populations of individuals with disabilities, particularly among American Indians residing on or outside of reservations.

(1) The Commissioner may make grants to public and nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstrations including research and evaluation for youths who are individuals with disabilities to provide job training and prepare them for entry into the labor force. Such projects shall be designed to demonstrate cooperative efforts between local educational agencies, business and industry, vocational rehabilitation programs, and organizations representing labor and organizations responsible for promoting or assisting in local economic development.

(2) Services under this subsection may include—

(A) jobs search assistance;

(B) on-the-job training;

(C) job development including worksite modification and use of advanced learning technology for skills training;

(D) dissemination of information on program activities to business and industry; and

(E) followup services for individuals placed in employment.

(3) The Commissioner shall assure that projects shall be coordinated with other projects assisted under section 1425 of title 20.

(1)(A) The Commissioner may make grants to public and nonprofit community rehabilitation programs, designated State units, and other public and private agencies and organizations for the cost of developing special projects and demonstrations providing supported employment, including continuation of determinations of the effectiveness of natural supports or other alternatives to providing extended employment services.

(B) Not less than one such grant shall be nationwide in scope. The grant shall (i) identify community-based models that can be replicated, (ii) identify impediments to the development of supported employment programs (including funding and cost considerations), and (iii) develop a mechanism to explore the use of existing community rehabilitation programs as well as other community-based programs.

(C) Not less than two such grants shall serve individuals who either are low-functioning and deaf or low-functioning and hard-of-hearing.

(2)(A) The Commissioner may make grants to public agencies and nonprofit private organizations for the cost of providing technical assistance to States in implementing part C of subchapter VI of this chapter.

(B) Not less than one such grant shall be nationwide in scope. Each eligible applicant must have experience in training and provision of supported employment services.

(3) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this subsection such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(1) The Commissioner, subject to the provisions of section 776 of this title, shall make grants in accordance with the provisions of this subsection for the purpose of developing, expanding, and disseminating model statewide transitional planning services for youths who are individuals with severe disabilities. In order to facilitate similar model transitional programs, each grantee under this subsection shall—

(A) collect data documenting the effectiveness of the project, including data on the outcome of the individuals served; and

(B) disseminate the information to other States.

(2) No grant may be made under this subsection unless an application is submitted to the Commissioner at such time, in such form, and in accordance with such procedures as the Commissioner may require.

(3)(A) A second grant authorized by this subsection shall be made to a public agency in a predominantly rural western State.

(B) Each application for a grant submitted pursuant to subparagraph (A) of this paragraph shall describe model transitional planning services for both youths who are individuals with severe disabilities and other youths with disabilities designed to develop procedures, strategies, and techniques which may be replicated successfully in other rural States.

(4) There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(1) The Commissioner may make grants to public or private institutions to pay for the cost of developing special projects and demonstration projects to address the general education, counseling, vocational training, work transition, supported employment, job placement, followup, and community outreach needs of individuals who are either low-functioning and deaf or low-functioning and hard-of-hearing. Such projects shall provide educational and vocational rehabilitation services that are not otherwise available in the region involved and shall maximize the potential of such individuals, including individuals who are deaf and have additional severe disabilities.

(2) The Commissioner shall monitor the activities of the recipients of grants under this subsection to ensure that the recipients carry out the projects in accordance with paragraph (1), that the recipients coordinate the projects as described in paragraph (3), and that information about innovative methods of service delivery developed by such projects is disseminated.

(3) The Commissioner shall prepare and submit an annual report to Congress that includes an assessment of the manner in which the recipients carrying out the projects coordinate the projects with projects carried out by other public or nonprofit agencies serving individuals who are deaf, to expand or improve services for such individuals.

(1) Consistent with paragraph (2), and consistent with the general authority set forth in this section to fund special demonstration programs, projects, and activities, nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the Commissioner from exercising authority under this subchapter, or making available funds appropriated to carry out this subchapter, to fund programs, projects, and activities described in section 797a of this title.

(2) If the amount of funds appropriated for a fiscal year to carry out this section exceeds the amount of funds appropriated for the preceding fiscal year to carry out this section, adjusted by the percent by which the average of the estimated gross domestic product fixed-weight price index for that fiscal year differs from that estimated index for the preceding fiscal year, the amount of the excess shall be treated as if the excess were appropriated under subchapter VIII of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §311, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2973; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §136, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 26; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title III, §302(b), title IV, §406, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1821, 1826; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(g), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(e)(2), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; Pub. L. 102–119, §26(e), Oct. 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 607; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(21), title III, §308, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359, 4418; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §110(c), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 726; Pub. L. 104–66, title I, §1041(b), Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 714.)

1995—Subsec. (c)(3), (4). Pub. L. 104–66 redesignated par. (4) as (3) and struck out former par. (3) which read as follows:

“(3)(A) On June 1 of each year, the Commissioner shall submit a report to the Congress on activities assisted under paragraph (1) for the preceding fiscal year which includes—

“(i) a list of the grants awarded under this subsection;

“(ii) the number of individuals with severe disabilities served by each grant recipient, the average cost to provide support services to each such individual, and the average wage paid to each such individual; and

“(iii) the recommendations of the projects under paragraph (1)(B).

“(B) Each such report shall also include activities assisted under paragraph (2) for the preceding fiscal year, including (i) a list of the grants awarded under paragraph (2), (ii) the nature of technical assistance activities undertaken, and (iii) recommended areas where additional technical assistance is necessary.”

1993—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §110(c)(1), substituted semicolon for comma at end.

Subsec. (c)(1)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §110(c)(2), inserted “and” before “(iii)”.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(a), in par. (1) struck out “and, where appropriate, constructing facilities” after “establishing programs” and substituted “individuals who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by the programs under this chapter, individuals who are blind, and individuals who are deaf,” for “blind or deaf individuals, irrespective of age or vocational potential, who can benefit from comprehensive services;”, in par. (2) substituted “new careers and career advancement);” for “new careers);”, in par. (3) struck out “and, where appropriate, renovating and constructing facilities” after “operating programs”, and struck out concluding provisions which read as follows: “The Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research may make grants to States and to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstrations for spinal cord injuries.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(21)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing in pars. (1) to (4).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(b), redesignated subsec. (c) as (b) and struck out former subsec. (b) which related to qualifications for any project or demonstration assisted by a grant which provides services to individuals with spinal cord injuries.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(c)(3), in par. (4) substituted “such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “$9,000,000 for fiscal year 1987, $9,520,000 for fiscal year 1988, $10,000,000 for fiscal year 1989, $10,690,000 for fiscal year 1990, $11,128,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(c)(2), substituted “June 1 of each year” for “June 1, 1988, and on each subsequent June 1” in introductory provisions of par. (3)(A).

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(c)(1), in par. (1), substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities” and inserted before period “, including continuation of determinations of the effectiveness of natural supports or other alternatives to providing extended employment services” in subpar. (A), struck out “and” before “(iii)” and substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “community-based rehabilitation facilities” in subpar. (B), and added subpar. (C).

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(b), redesignated subsec. (d) as (c). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (e).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(21)(B), substituted “youths who are individuals with disabilities” for “youths with handicaps” in par. (1).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(d)(2), (4), redesignated par. (5) as (4) and substituted “such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “$450,000 for fiscal year 1987, $475,830 for fiscal year 1988, $504,427 for fiscal year 1989, $535,550 for fiscal year 1990, $557,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992 to carry out the provisions of this subsection”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(d)(3), in par. (3)(A) struck out cl. (i) designation and cl. (ii) which read as follows: “A third grant authorized by this subsection shall be made to a public agency or nonprofit private organization in a predominantly rural southwestern State.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(d)(1), (2), redesignated par. (4) as (3) and struck out former par. (3) which authorized one grant to be made to a public agency in a predominantly urban State in New England for an existing model statewide transitional planning services program.

Pub. L. 102–569, §308(b), redesignated subsec. (e) as (d). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (c).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(21)(C), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in par. (3)(A)(ii).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(e), added subsec. (e). Former subsec. (e) redesignated (d).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(21)(D)(ii), substituted “youths who are individuals with severe disabilities and other youths with disabilities” for “youths with severe handicaps and youths with mild handicaps” in par. (4)(B).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(21)(D)(i), substituted “who are individuals with severe disabilities” for “with severe handicaps” in par. (1).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §308(f), added subsec. (f).

1991—Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 102–119 substituted reference to the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act for reference to the Education of the Handicapped Act in the original, which for purposes of codification was translated as section 1425 of title 20, thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (d)(4). Pub. L. 102–52, §4(e)(2)(A), substituted “fiscal year” for “the fiscal year” before “1987”, “1988”, “1989”, “1990”, and “1991”, struck out “and” after “1990,”, and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

Subsec. (e)(5). Pub. L. 102–52, §4(e)(2)(B), struck out “and” after “1990,” and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

1988—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(g)(1), substituted “youths with handicaps” for “handicapped youths”.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(g)(2), substituted “youths with severe handicaps” for “severely handicapped youths” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (e)(3)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(g)(3), which directed the substitution of “families, will” for “families.” was executed by making the substitution for “families,” as the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (e)(3)(B)(iv). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(g)(4), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” and “agency designated” for “agency designed”.

Subsec. (e)(4)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(g)(5), substituted “both youths with severe handicaps and youths with mild handicaps” for “both severely and mildly handicapped youth”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §302(b), substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research” in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1) to (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 99–506, §406(a), added par. (4).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §302(b), substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research” in concluding provisions.

Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §406(b), added subsecs. (d) and (e).

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §136(a), struck out “individuals with spinal cord injuries and” after “including” in par. (1) and inserted after par. (3) a provision authorizing the Director of the National Institute of Handicapped Research to make grants to States and to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstrations for spinal cord injuries.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221, §136(b), inserted provision directing the Director of the National Institute of Handicapped Research to coordinate with the Commissioner each grant made under this subsection.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–221, §136(c), added subsec. (c).

This section is referred to in sections 777, 795*l* of this title.

The Commissioner, subject to the provisions of section 776 of this title, is authorized to make grants to any State agency designated pursuant to a State plan approved under section 721 of this title, to nonprofit agencies working in collaboration with such State agency, or to any local agency participating in the administration of such a plan, to pay up to 90 per centum of the cost of projects or demonstrations for the provision of vocational rehabilitation services to individuals with disabilities, as determined in accordance with rules prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, who are migratory agricultural workers or seasonal farmworkers, and to members of their families (whether or not such family members are individuals with disabilities) who are with them, including maintenance and transportation of such individuals and members of their families where necessary to the rehabilitation of such individuals. Maintenance payments under this section shall be consistent with any maintenance payments made to other individuals with disabilities in the State under this chapter. Such grants shall be conditioned upon satisfactory assurance that in the provision of such services there will be appropriate cooperation between the grantee and other public or nonprofit agencies and organizations having special skills and experience in the provision of services to migratory agricultural workers, seasonal farmworkers, or their families. This section shall be administered in coordination with other programs serving migrant agricultural workers and seasonal farmworkers, including programs under title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 6301 et seq.], section 311 of the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2861], the Migrant Health Act [42 U.S.C. 254b], and the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 [7 U.S.C. 2041 et seq.].

There are authorized to be appropriated for fiscal years 1993 through 1997 such sums as may be necessary to carry out this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §312, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2974; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(h), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(22), title III, §309, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359, 4420.)

The Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (a), is Pub. L. 89–10, Apr. 11, 1965, 79 Stat. 27, as amended generally by Pub. L. 103–382, title I, §101, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3519. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§6301 et seq.) of chapter 70 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6301 of Title 20 and Tables.

Section 311 of the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2861], referred to in subsec. (a), was repealed by Pub. L. 95–568, §8(a)(2), Nov. 2, 1978, 92 Stat. 2428.

The Migrant Health Act, referred to in subsec. (a), means section 329, formerly section 310, of act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, as added by Pub. L. 87–692, Sept. 25, 1962, 76 Stat. 592, as amended, which is classified to section 254b of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

The Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963, referred to in subsec. (a), is Pub. L. 88–582, Sept. 7, 1964, 78 Stat. 920, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture, and was repealed by Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §523, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2600. See section 1801 et seq. of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), inserted “to nonprofit agencies working in collaboration with such State agency,” after “section 721 of this title,”, substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing, and added subsec. (b).

1988—Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “such family members are individuals with handicaps)” for “handicapped)”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

This section is referred to in section 777 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §313, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2974, related to Helen Keller National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults. See chapter 21 (§1901 et seq.) of this title.

A prior section 777c, Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §313, formerly §305, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 383; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §107, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §107, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§7, 11(b)(10), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213; Pub. L. 94–288, §§1, 2, May 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 520; renumbered §313 and amended Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§109(1), 116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2962, 2974, formerly classified to section 775 of this title, authorized appropriations for fiscal years ending June 30, 1974, June 30, 1975, June 30, 1976, Sept. 30, 1977, and Sept. 30, 1978, for establishment of Helen Keller National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(k), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309.

The Commissioner may award grants to States or to private nonprofit agencies or organizations of national scope (as so determined by the Commissioner) to—

(1) provide reading services to individuals who are blind and who are not otherwise eligible for such services through other State or Federal programs; and

(2) expand the quality and scope of reading services available to individuals who are blind, and to assure to the maximum extent possible that the reading services provided under this chapter will meet the reading needs of such individuals attending institutions providing elementary, secondary, or post-secondary education, and will be adequate to assist such individuals to obtain and continue in employment.

Any State which receives a grant under this section shall administer the reading services for which such grant is awarded through the designated State unit of the State.

No grant shall be awarded under this section unless the applicant has submitted an application to the Secretary in such form, at such time, and containing such information as the Secretary may require.

For purposes of this section, the term “reading services” means—

(1) the employment of persons who, by reading aloud, can afford individuals who are blind ready access to printed information;

(2) the transcription of printed information into braille or sound recordings if such transcription is performed pursuant to individual requests from individuals who are blind for such services;

(3) the storage and distribution of braille materials and sound recordings;

(4) the purchase, storage, and distribution of equipment and materials necessary for the production, duplication, and reproduction of braille materials and sound recordings;

(5) the purchase, storage, and distribution of equipment to individuals who are blind to provide them with individual access to printed materials by mechanical or electronic means; and

(6) radio reading services for individuals who are blind.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §314, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2975; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(i), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(23), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(23)(A), amended section catchline.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(23)(B), substituted “individuals who are blind and” for “blind persons”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(23)(C), substituted “available to individuals who are blind” for “available to blind persons”, “needs of such individuals” for “needs of blind persons”, and “to assist such individuals” for “to assist blind persons”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(23)(D), substituted “individuals who are blind” for “blind persons” in pars. (1), (2), (5), and (6).

1988—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “needs” for “need”.

The Commissioner may make grants to designated State units to establish within each State a program of interpreter services (including interpreter referral services) which shall be made available to individuals who are deaf and to any public agency or private nonprofit organization involved in the delivery of assistance or services to individuals who are deaf.

No grant may be made under this section unless an application therefor is submitted to the Commissioner in such form, at such times, and in accordance with such procedures as the Commissioner may require. Such application shall—

(1) provide assurances that the program to be conducted under this section will be operated in areas within the State which are specifically selected to provide convenient locations for the provision of services to the maximum feasible number of individuals who are deaf;

(2) include a plan which describes, in sufficient detail, the manner in which interpreter referral services will be coordinated with the information and referral programs required under section 721(a)(22) of this title;

(3) provide assurances that the program will seek to enter into contractual or other arrangements, to the extent appropriate, with private nonprofit organizations comprised of primarily hearing-impaired individuals (or private nonprofit organizations which have the primary purpose of providing assistance or services to hearing-impaired individuals) for the operation of such programs;

(4) provide that any interpreter participating in the program shall be required to meet minimum standards established by the Commissioner; and

(5) contain such other information as the Secretary may require.

Any designated State unit receiving funds under this section may provide interpreter services, without cost, for a period of not to exceed one year to any public agency or private nonprofit organization which provides assistance to individuals who are deaf. At the end of such period, agencies or organizations receiving such services through referrals shall reimburse the designated State unit for the costs of such services. Funds may also be used for the purchase or rental of equipment necessary to provide assistance or services to individuals who are deaf.

Funds provided to any designated State unit for any program under this section shall not be used for any administrative or related costs, nor shall such funds be used for assistance to individuals who are deaf and who are receiving rehabilitation services under any other provision of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §315, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2975; amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(24), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(24)(A), amended section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(24)(B), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “deaf individuals” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(24)(C), substituted “to the maximum feasible number of individuals who are deaf” for “to the maximum number of deaf individuals feasible”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(24)(D), substituted “individuals who are deaf” for “deaf individuals” in two places.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(24)(E), substituted “individuals who are deaf and” for “deaf individuals”.

(a)(1) The Commissioner, subject to the provisions of section 776 of this title, shall make grants to States, public agencies, and nonprofit private organizations for paying the Federal share of the cost of initiation of recreation programs to provide individuals with disabilities with recreational activities and related experiences to aid in the employment, mobility, socialization, independence, and community integration of such individuals. The programs authorized to be assisted under this section may include, but are not limited to, vocational skills development, leisure education, leisure networking, leisure resource development, physical education and sports, scouting and camping, 4–H activities, music, dancing, handicrafts, art, and homemaking. Whenever possible and appropriate, such programs and activities should be provided in settings with peers who are not individuals with disabilities. Programs and activities under this section shall be designed to demonstrate ways in which such programs assist in maximizing the independence and integration of individuals with disabilities.

(2) Each such grant shall be made for a period of not more than 3 years. Such a grant shall not be renewable, except that the Commissioner may renew such a grant if the Commissioner determines that the grant recipient will continue to develop model or innovative programs of exceptional merit or will contribute substantially to the development or improvement of special recreational programs in other locations.

(3) No grant may be made under this section unless the agreement with respect to such grant contains provisions to assure that, to the extent possible, existing resources will be used to carry out the activities for which the grant is to be made.

(4) To be eligible to receive a grant under this section, a State, agency, or organization shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require, including a description of—

(A) the manner in which the findings and results of the project will be made generally available; and

(B) the means by which the service program will be continued after Federal assistance ends.

(5) Recreation programs funded under this section shall maintain, at a minimum, the same level of services over a 3-year project period.

(6) The Commissioner shall, not later than 180 days after October 29, 1992, develop means to objectively evaluate, and encourage the replication of, activities assisted by this section.

(7) The Commissioner shall require each recipient of a grant under this section to annually prepare and submit a report on the results of the activities assisted by the grant. The Commissioner shall not make financial assistance available to a grant recipient for a subsequent year until the Commissioner has received and evaluated such a report from the recipient regarding the current year.

(8) The Commissioner shall annually issue and provide for the dissemination of a report describing the findings and results of programs funded by this section.

(9) The Federal share of the costs of the recreation programs shall be 100 percent for the first year of the grant, 75 percent for the second year, and 50 percent for the third year.

(b) There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title III, §316, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §116(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2976; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §137, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 26; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title IV, §407, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1827; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §204(j), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3309; Pub. L. 102–52, §4(e)(3), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 261; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(25), title III, §310, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4359, 4420; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §110(d), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 726.)

1993—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “handicapped individuals” in first sentence.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §310(a)(1), in first sentence, substituted “the Federal share of the cost” for “part or all of the cost” and inserted “employment,” before “mobility,” and in second sentence, inserted “vocational skills development,” before “leisure education,”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(25), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “and integration of” and “peers who are not individuals with disabilities” for “peers without handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §310(a)(2), substituted “a period of not more than 3 years. Such a grant shall not be renewable, except that the Commissioner may renew such a grant if the Commissioner determines that the grant recipient will continue to develop model or innovative programs of exceptional merit or will contribute substantially to the development or improvement of special recreational programs in other locations” for “a minimum of a three-year period”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §310(a)(3), substituted “to be made.” for “to be made, and that with respect to children the activities for which the grant is to be made will be conducted before or after school.”

Subsec. (a)(4) to (9). Pub. L. 102–569, §310(a)(4), added pars. (4) to (9).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §310(b), substituted “such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “$2,330,000 for fiscal year 1987, $2,470,000 for fiscal year 1988, $2,620,000 for fiscal year 1989, $2,780,000 for fiscal year 1990, $2,894,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992 to carry out this section”.

1991—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–52 struck out “and” after “1990,” and inserted “, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991”.

1988—Pub. L. 100–630, §204(j)(1), inserted section catchline.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §204(j)(2), substituted “peers without handicaps” for “nonhandicapped peers”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §407, amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “The Commissioner, subject to the provisions of section 776 of this title, shall make grants to State and public nonprofit agencies and organizations for paying part or all of the cost of initiation of recreation programs to provide individuals with handicaps with recreational activities to aid in the mobility and socialization of such individuals. The activities authorized to be assisted under this section may include, but are not limited to, scouting and camping, 4-H activities, sports, music, dancing, handicrafts, art, and homemaking. No grant may be made under the provisions of this section unless the agreement with respect to such grant contains provisions to assure that, to the extent possible, existing resources will be used to carry out the activities for which the grant is to be made, and that with respect to children the activities for which the grant is to be made will be conducted after school.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §407, in amending subsec. (b) generally, substituted provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal years 1987 through 1991 for provisions authorizing appropriations for fiscal years 1984 through 1986.

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a) and added subsec. (b).

This section is referred to in section 777 of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 702, 706, 718b, 761a of this title.

(1)(A) There is established within the Federal Government a National Council on Disability (hereinafter in this subchapter referred to as the “National Council”), which shall be composed of fifteen members appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate.

(B) The President shall select members of the National Council after soliciting recommendations from representatives of—

(i) organizations representing a broad range of individuals with disabilities; and

(ii) organizations interested in individuals with disabilities.

(C) The members of the National Council shall be individuals with disabilities or individuals who have substantial knowledge or experience relating to disability policy or programs. The members of the National Council shall be appointed so as to be representative of individuals with disabilities, national organizations concerned with individuals with disabilities, providers and administrators of services to individuals with disabilities, individuals engaged in conducting medical or scientific research relating to individuals with disabilities, business concerns, and labor organizations. A majority of the members of the National Council shall be individuals with disabilities, or parents or guardians of individuals with disabilities. The members of the National Council shall be broadly representative of minority and other individuals and groups.

(2) The purpose of the National Council is to promote policies, programs, practices, and procedures that—

(A) guarantee equal opportunity for all individuals with disabilities, regardless of the nature or severity of the disability; and

(B) empower individuals with disabilities to achieve economic self-sufficiency, independent living, and inclusion and integration into all aspects of society.

(1) Each member of the National Council shall serve for a term of 3 years, except that the terms of service of the members initially appointed after November 6, 1978, shall be (as specified by the President) for such fewer number of years as will provide for the expiration of terms on a staggered basis.

(2)(A) No member of the Council may serve more than two consecutive full terms beginning on the date of initial service on the Council. Members may serve after the expiration of their terms until their successors have taken office.

(B) As used in this paragraph:

(i) The term “full term” means a term of 3 years.

(ii) The term “date of initial service” means, with respect to a member, the date on which the member is sworn in.

(3) Any member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring before the expiration of the term for which such member's predecessor was appointed shall be appointed only for the remainder of such term.

The President shall designate the Chairperson from among the members appointed to the National Council. The National Council shall meet at the call of the Chairperson, but not less often than four times each year.

Eight members of the National Council shall constitute a quorum and any vacancy in the National Council shall not affect its power to function.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §400, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2977; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §141(a), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 26; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title V, §501, title X, §1001(e), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1828, 1843; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §205(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(26), title IV, §401, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4421.)

A prior section 780, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §400, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 385, related to general administrative powers of Secretary under this chapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §401(a)(1), designated first sentence as subpar. (A), added subpars. (B) and (C), in last sentence substituted “A majority of the members of the National Council” for “At least five members of the National Council”, and inserted at end “The members of the National Council shall be broadly representative of minority and other individuals and groups.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(26), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §401(a)(2), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “The purpose of the National Council is to promote the full integration, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities in the community, schools, the workplace and all other aspects of American life.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(26), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(1), (2). Pub. L. 102–569, §401(b), added pars. (1) and (2) and struck out former pars. (1) and (2) which read as follows:

“(1) Members of the National Council shall be appointed to serve for terms of three years, except that of the members first appointed—

“(A) five shall serve for terms of one year,

“(B) five shall serve for terms of two years, and

“(C) five shall serve for terms of three years,

as designated by the President at the time of appointment.

“(2) Members may be reappointed and may serve after the expiration of their terms until their successors have taken office.”

1988—Pub. L. 100–630, §205(b)(1), substituted “on Disability” for “on the Handicapped” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(b)(2), substituted “on Disability” for “on the Handicapped”, “concerned with individuals with handicaps” for “concerned with the handicapped”, and “services to individuals with handicaps” for “services to the handicapped”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(b)(3), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §501(1), designated existing provisions as par. (1).

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §501(2), added par. (2).

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(e)(1), substituted “such member's predecessor” for “his predecessor”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(e)(2), substituted “Chairperson” for “Chairman” in two places.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “within the Federal Government” for “with the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

This section is referred to in section 781 of this title.

Effective on February 22, 1984, the National Council on the Handicapped shall be an independent agency within the Federal Government and shall not be an agency within the Department of Education or any other department or agency of the United States.

There are transferred to the Chairman of the National Council on the Handicapped all functions relating to the Council which were vested in the Secretary of Education on the day before February 22, 1984. The Chairman of the National Council on the Handicapped shall continue to exercise all the functions under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 [29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.] or any other law or authority which the Chairman was performing before February 22, 1984.

References in any statute, reorganization plan, Executive order, regulation, or other official document or proceeding to the Department of Education or the Secretary of Education with respect to functions or activities relating to the National Council on the Handicapped shall be deemed to refer to the National Council on the Handicapped or the Chairman of the National Council on the Handicapped, respectively.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §141(b), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 26.)

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in par. (2), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended, which is classified generally to this chapter (§701 et seq.). For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

Section was enacted as part of the Rehabilitation Amendments of 1984, and not as part of Rehabilitation Act of 1973 which comprises this chapter.

The National Council on the Handicapped was established by section 780 of this title and was redesignated the National Council on Disability by an amendment to that section by Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §205(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310.

(a) The National Council shall—

(1) provide advice to the Director with respect to the policies and conduct of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research, including ways to improve research concerning individuals with disabilities and the methods of collecting and disseminating findings of such research;

(2) provide advice to the Commissioner with respect to the policies of and conduct of the Rehabilitation Services Administration;

(3) advise the President, the Congress, the Commissioner, the appropriate Assistant Secretary of the Department of Education, and the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research on the development of the programs to be carried out under this chapter;

(4) provide advice regarding priorities for the activities of the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council and review the recommendations of such Council for legislative and administrative changes to ensure that such recommendations are consistent with the purposes of the Council to promote the full integration, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities;

(5) review and evaluate on a continuing basis—

(A) policies, programs, practices, and procedures concerning individuals with disabilities conducted or assisted by Federal departments and agencies, including programs established or assisted under this chapter or under the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act [42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.]; and

(B) all statutes and regulations pertaining to Federal programs which assist such individuals with disabilities;

in order to assess the effectiveness of such policies, programs, practices, procedures, statutes, and regulations in meeting the needs of individuals with disabilities;

(6) assess the extent to which such policies, programs, practices, and procedures facilitate or impede the promotion of the policies set forth in subparagraphs (A) and (B) of section 780(a)(2) of this title;

(7) gather information about the implementation, effectiveness, and impact of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.);

(8) make recommendations to the President, the Congress, the Secretary, the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research, and other officials of Federal agencies, respecting ways to better promote the policies set forth in section 780(a)(2) of this title;

(9) provide to the Congress on a continuing basis advice, recommendations, legislative proposals, and any additional information which the Council or the Congress deems appropriate; and

(10) review and evaluate on a continuing basis new and emerging disability policy issues affecting individuals with disabilities at the Federal, State, and local levels, and in the private sector, including the need for and coordination of adult services, access to personal assistance services, school reform efforts and the impact of such efforts on individuals with disabilities, access to health care, and policies that operate as disincentives for the individuals to seek and retain employment.

(b)(1) Not later than October 31, 1993, and annually thereafter, the National Council shall prepare and submit to the President and the appropriate committees of the Congress a report entitled “National Disability Policy: A Progress Report”.

(2) The report shall assess the status of the Nation in achieving the policies set forth in section 780(a)(2) of this title, with particular focus on the new and emerging issues impacting on the lives of individuals with disabilities. The report shall present, as appropriate, available data on health, housing, employment, insurance, transportation, recreation, training, prevention, early intervention, and education. The report shall include recommendations for policy change.

(3) In determining the issues to focus on and the findings, conclusions, and recommendations to include in the report, the Council shall seek input from the public, particularly individuals with disabilities, representatives of organizations representing a broad range of individuals with disabilities, and organizations and agencies interested in individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §401, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2977; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §142, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 27; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title III, §302(b), title V, §502, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1821, 1828; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §205(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(27), title IV, §402, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4422; Pub. L. 104–66, title II, §2131, Dec. 21, 1995, 109 Stat. 731.)

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(5)(A), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, and amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(7), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 781, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §401, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 386, related to program and project evaluation, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1995—Subsec. (a)(9) to (11). Pub. L. 104–66 redesignated pars. (10) and (11) as (9) and (10), respectively, and struck out former par. (9) which read as follows: “not later than March 31 of each year, prepare and submit to the Congress and the President a report containing a summary of the activities and accomplishments of the Council with respect to the duties described in paragraphs (1) through (8);”.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(1), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which read as follows: “establish general policies for, and review the operation of, the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research;”.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(3), added par. (4). Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(27)(A), struck out “individuals with handicaps and” after “concerning” in subpar. (A), after “assist such” in subpar. (B), and after “needs of” in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (4), redesignated par. (4) as (5), in subpar. (A) substituted “policies, programs, practices, and procedures” for “all policies, programs, and activities”, in subpar. (B) substituted “statutes and regulations” for “statutes”, and in concluding provisions substituted “practices, procedures, statutes, and regulations” for “activities, and statutes”. Former par. (5) redesignated (6).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(27)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (5), redesignated par. (5) as (6) and substituted “practices, and procedures facilitate or impede the promotion of the policies set forth in subparagraphs (A) and (B) of section 780(a)(2) of this title;” for “and activities provide incentives or disincentives to the establishment of community-based services for individuals with disabilities, promote the full integration of such individuals in the community, in schools, and in the workplace, and contribute to the independence and dignity of such individuals;”. Former par. (6) redesignated (8).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(27)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (6), added par. (7). Former par. (7) redesignated (9).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(27)(B), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (7), redesignated par. (6) as (8) and amended it generally. Prior to amendment, par. (6) read as follows: “make recommendations to the President, the Congress, the Secretary, and the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research respecting ways to improve research concerning individuals with disabilities, the administration of services for individuals with disabilities, and the methods of collecting and disseminating the findings of such research, and make recommendations for facilitating the implementation of programs based upon such findings;”. Former par. (8) redesignated (10).

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (8), redesignated par. (7) as (9) and amended it generally. Prior to amendment, par. (7) read as follows: “submit not later than March 31 of each year (beginning in 1980) an annual report to the Congress, and the President, containing (A) a statement of the current status of research concerning individuals with disabilities in the United States, (B) a review of the activities of the Rehabilitation Services Administration and the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research, and (C) such recommendations respecting the items described in clauses (A) and (B) as the National Council considers appropriate; and”.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(2), (9), redesignated par. (8) as (10) and substituted “; and” for period at end.

Subsec. (a)(11). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(a)(10), added par. (11).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §402(b), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows:

“(1) Not later than January 30, 1988, and annually thereafter, the National Council shall issue a report to the President and the Congress on the progress that has been made in implementing the recommendations contained in the Council's January 30, 1986, report Toward Independence.

“(2) The reports issued pursuant to paragraph (1) shall present, as appropriate, available data on health, housing, employment, insurance, transportation, recreation, and education, and shall include appropriate information on the current status and trends in the status of individuals with disabilities.”

1988—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(c)(1)–(3), in subpar. (A), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and “individuals with disabilities” for “persons with disabilities”, in subpar. (B), substituted “assist” for “assisted”, “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, and “individuals with disabilities” for “persons with disabilities”, and in concluding provisions, substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and “individuals with disabilities” for “persons with disabilities”.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(c)(1), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(7)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(c)(4), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “the handicapped”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(c)(5), inserted comma after “recommendations”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §205(c)(6), substituted “recommendations” for “recommendation”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1), (3). Pub. L. 99–506, §302(b), substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research”.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 99–506, §502(a)(1), amended par. (4) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (4) read as follows: “review and evaluate on a continuing basis all policies, programs, and activities concerning individuals with handicaps and persons with developmental disabilities conducted or assisted by Federal departments and agencies, including programs established or assisted under this chapter or under the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act [42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.], in order to assess the effectiveness of such policies, programs, and activities in meeting the needs of individuals with handicaps;”.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 99–506, §502(a)(2)(B), added par. (5). Former par. (5) redesignated (6).

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 302(b), 502(a)(2)(A), redesignated former par. (5) as (6), and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing, and “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research”. Former par. (6) redesignated (7).

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 99–506, §§302(b), 502(a)(2)(A), redesignated former par. (6) as (7) and in cl. (B) substituted “National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research” for “National Institute of Handicapped Research”. Former par. (7) redesignated (8).

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 99–506, §502(a)(2)(A), (3), redesignated former par. (7) as (8) and inserted “legislative proposals” after “recommendations”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §502(b), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows: “The National Council shall—

“(1) review all statutes pertaining to Federal programs which assist individuals with handicaps;

“(2) make a priority listing of such programs based on the number of individuals with handicaps such programs assist and the Federal costs of such programs;

“(3) assess the extent to which such programs provide incentives or disincentives to the establishment of community-based services for individuals with handicaps, promote the full integration of such individuals in the community, in schools, and in the workplace, and contribute to the independence and dignity of such individuals;

“(4) recommend to the President and the Congress legislative proposals for increasing incentives and eliminating disincentives in Federal programs based on the assessment made pursuant to clause (3); and

“(5) prepare and submit a final report to the President and to the Congress not later than February 1, 1986, on the review, assessment, and recommendations required by this subsection.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in pars. (1) to (3).

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a); in subsec. (a) as so designated, amended par. (3) generally, inserting “the President, the Congress,” after “advise” and substituting “Department of Education” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”, amended par. (5) by inserting “the President, the Congress,” before “the Secretary”, by striking out “the Commissioner,” after “the Secretary,”, and by striking out “and” at the end, amended par. (6) by striking out “the Secretary,” after “report to” and by substituting “; and” for the period at end, and added par. (7); and added subsec. (b).

Members of the National Council shall be entitled to receive compensation at a rate equal to the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5, including travel time, for each day they are engaged in the performance of their duties as members of the National Council.

Members of the National Council who are full-time officers or employees of the United States shall receive no additional pay on account of their service on the National Council except for compensation for travel expenses as provided under subsection (c) of this section.

While away from their homes or regular places of business in the performance of services for the National Council, members of the National Council shall be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, in the same manner as persons employed intermittently in the Government service are allowed expenses under section 5703 of title 5.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §402, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2978; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §205(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310; Pub. L. 102–569, title IV, §403, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4423.)

A prior section 782, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §402, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 387, authorized the Secretary to obtain information from Federal agencies, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “rate of basic pay payable for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “travel time” for “traveltime”.

(1) The National Council may appoint, without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, or the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of such title relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates, an Executive Director to assist the National Council to carry out its duties. The Executive Director shall be appointed from among individuals who are experienced in the planning or operation of programs for individuals with disabilities.

(2) The Executive Director is authorized to hire not to exceed eight technical and professional employees to assist the National Council to carry out its duties.

(1) The National Council may procure temporary and intermittent services to the same extent as is authorized by section 3109(b) of title 5 (but at rates for individuals not to exceed the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5.

(2) The National Council may—

(A) accept voluntary and uncompensated services, notwithstanding the provisions of section 1342 of title 31;

(B) in the name of the Council, accept, employ, and dispose of, in furtherance of this chapter, any money or property, real or personal, or mixed, tangible or nontangible, received by gift, devise, bequest, or otherwise; and

(C) enter into contracts and cooperative agreements with Federal and State agencies, private firms, institutions, and individuals for the conduct of research and surveys, preparation of reports and other activities necessary to the discharge of the Council's duties and responsibilities.

(3) Not more than 10 per centum of the total amounts available to the National Council in each fiscal year may be used for official representation and reception.

The Administrator of General Services shall provide to the National Council on a reimbursable basis such administrative support services as the Council may request.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §403, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2978; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §143, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 28; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title V, §503, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1829; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §205(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(28), title IV, §404, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4423; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §111, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 727.)

The provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

A prior section 783, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §403, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 387; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §108, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §108, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§8, 11(b)(11), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213, authorized appropriations to conduct program and project evaluations, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1993—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “eight” for “seven”.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(28), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §404, substituted “rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “annual rate of basic pay payable for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332”.

1988—Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–630 amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “accept, in the name of the Council, employ and dispose of in furtherance of this chapter, any money, or property, real or personal, or mixed, tangible or nontangible, received by gift, devise, bequest, or otherwise; and”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 99–506, §503, struck out par. (4) which provided that from the amount available to the Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services, Department of Education, $500,000 in fiscal year 1984 was to be transferred and made available to the National Council.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §143(a)–(c), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted “an Executive Director” for “up to seven technical and professional employees” and inserted provision requiring that the Executive Director be appointed from among individuals experienced in the planning or operation of programs for handicapped individuals, and added par. (2).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221, §143(d), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added pars. (2) to (4).

The National Council may prescribe such bylaws and rules as may be necessary to carry out its duties under this subchapter.

The National Council may hold such hearings, sit and act at such times and places, take such testimony, and receive such evidence as it deems advisable.

The National Council may appoint advisory committees to assist the National Council in carrying out its duties. The members thereof shall serve without compensation.

The National Council may use the United States mails in the same manner and upon the same conditions as other departments and agencies of the United States.

The National Council may use, with the consent of the agencies represented on the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council, and as authorized in subchapter V of this chapter, such services, personnel, information, and facilities as may be needed to carry out its duties under this subchapter, with or without reimbursement to such agencies.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §404, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2979; amended Pub. L. 102–569, title IV, §405, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4423.)

A prior section 784, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §404, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 387, directed Secretary to submit annual reports to the President and to Congress on activities carried out under this chapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1992—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–569 added subsec. (e).

Advisory committees established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a committee established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such committee is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a committee established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided for by law. See section 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subchapter such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §405, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §117, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2979; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title V, §504, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1829; Pub. L. 102–52, §5, June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262; Pub. L. 102–569, title IV, §406, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4423.)

A prior section 785, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §405, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 388; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §§109, 111(m), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619, 1621; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §§109, 111(m), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4, 2–6; Pub. L. 94–230, §§9, 11(b)(12), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213, specified certain responsibilities of the Secretary, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 95–602, §117.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “1993 through 1997” for “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, and 1992”.

1991—Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 inserted provision limiting authorization of appropriations under this subchapter to each of the fiscal years 1987 through 1991.

Section 786, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §406, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 389; S. Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977, provided that the Secretary conduct a study on the role of sheltered workshops in the rehabilitation and employment of handicapped individuals and report the results of this study to Congress within twenty-four months after Sept. 26, 1973.

Section 787, Pub. L. 93–112, title IV, §407, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 389, provided that the Secretary conduct a study on allotment of funds among the States for grants for basic vocational rehabilitation and report the results of this study to Congress not later than June 30, 1974.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 702, 706, 718b, 720, 743, 762, 784 of this title; title 20 sections 1221, 1415; title 38 section 3116; title 42 section 12201.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §500, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 390, related to effects on existing law, references in other provisions, availability of unexpended appropriations, savings provision, and extension of appropriations.

There is established within the Federal Government an Interagency Committee on Employees who are Individuals with Disabilities (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “Committee”), comprised of such members as the President may select, including the following (or their designees whose positions are Executive Level IV or higher): the Chairman of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (hereafter in this section referred to as the “Commission”), the Director of the Office of Personnel Management, the Secretary of Veterans Affairs, the Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of Education, and the Secretary of Health and Human Services. Either the Director of the Office of Personnel Management and the Chairman of the Commission shall serve as co-chairpersons of the Committee or the Director or Chairman shall serve as the sole chairperson of the Committee, as the Director and Chairman jointly determine, from time to time, to be appropriate. The resources of the President's Committees on Employment of People With Disabilities and on Mental Retardation shall be made fully available to the Committee. It shall be the purpose and function of the Committee (1) to provide a focus for Federal and other employment of individuals with disabilities, and to review, on a periodic basis, in cooperation with the Commission, the adequacy of hiring, placement, and advancement practices with respect to individuals with disabilities, by each department, agency, and instrumentality in the executive branch of Government, and to insure that the special needs of such individuals are being met; and (2) to consult with the Commission to assist the Commission to carry out its responsibilities under subsections (b), (c), and (d) of this section. On the basis of such review and consultation, the Committee shall periodically make to the Commission such recommendations for legislative and administrative changes as it deems necessary or desirable. The Commission shall timely transmit to the appropriate committees of Congress any such recommendations.

Each department, agency, and instrumentality (including the United States Postal Service and the Postal Rate Commission) in the executive branch shall, within one hundred and eighty days after September 26, 1973, submit to the Commission and to the Committee an affirmative action program plan for the hiring, placement, and advancement of individuals with disabilities in such department, agency, or instrumentality. Such plan shall include a description of the extent to which and methods whereby the special needs of employees who are individuals with disabilities are being met. Such plan shall be updated annually, and shall be reviewed annually and approved by the Commission, if the Commission determines, after consultation with the Committee, that such plan provides sufficient assurances, procedures and commitments to provide adequate hiring, placement, and advancement opportunities for individuals with disabilities.

The Commission, after consultation with the Committee, shall develop and recommend to the Secretary for referral to the appropriate State agencies, policies and procedures which will facilitate the hiring, placement, and advancement in employment of individuals who have received rehabilitation services under State vocational rehabilitation programs, veterans’ programs, or any other program for individuals with disabilities, including the promotion of job opportunities for such individuals. The Secretary shall encourage such State agencies to adopt and implement such policies and procedures.

The Commission, after consultation with the Committee, shall, on June 30, 1974, and at the end of each subsequent fiscal year, make a complete report to the appropriate committees of the Congress with respect to the practices of and achievements in hiring, placement, and advancement of individuals with disabilities by each department, agency, and instrumentality and the effectiveness of the affirmative action programs required by subsection (b) of this section, together with recommendations as to legislation which have been submitted to the Commission under subsection (a) of this section, or other appropriate action to insure the adequacy of such practices. Such report shall also include an evaluation by the Committee of the effectiveness of the activities of the Commission under subsections (b) and (c) of this section.

An individual who, as a part of an individualized written rehabilitation program under a State plan approved under this chapter, participates in a program of unpaid work experience in a Federal agency, shall not, by reason thereof, be considered to be a Federal employee or to be subject to the provisions of law relating to Federal employment, including those relating to hours of work, rates of compensation, leave, unemployment compensation, and Federal employee benefits.

(1) The Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of Education are authorized and directed to cooperate with the President's Committee on Employment of People With Disabilities in carrying out its functions.

(2) In selecting personnel to fill all positions on the President's Committee on Employment of People With Disabilities, special consideration shall be given to qualified individuals with disabilities.

The standards used to determine whether this section has been violated in a complaint alleging nonaffirmative action employment discrimination under this section shall be the standards applied under title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.) and the provisions of sections 501 through 504, and 510, of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12201–12204 and 12210), as such sections relate to employment.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §501, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 390; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(b)(3), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title X, §§1001(f)(1), 1002(e)(1), (2)(A), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1843, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3310; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(1)(B), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(29), title V, §503, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4424; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §112(a), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 727.)

Level IV of the Executive Schedule, referred to in subsec. (a), is set out in section 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (g), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

Prior similar provisions were set out in section 38 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–73 in first sentence inserted comma after “Veterans Affairs”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(29)(A), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §503(a), substituted “the Director of the Office of Personnel Management, the Secretary of Veterans Affairs” for “the Secretary of Veterans Affairs, and”, and amended second sentence generally. Prior to amendment, second sentence read as follows: “The Secretary of Education and the Chairman of the Commission shall serve as co-chairpersons of the Committee.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(29)(B), (C), substituted “Interagency Committee on Employees who are Individuals with Disabilities” for “Interagency Committee on Handicapped Employees” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” in two places.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(29)(C), (D), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” after “advancement of” and after “opportunities for” and “employees who are individuals with disabilities” for “employees with handicaps”.

Subsecs. (c), (d), (f)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(29)(C), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §503(b), added subsec. (g).

1991—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Secretary of Veterans Affairs” for “Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(a)(1)–(4), inserted “(hereafter in this section referred to as the ‘Commission’)” after first reference to “Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” and substituted “Commission” for “Equal Opportunity Employment Commission” wherever appearing, “Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of Education, and the Secretary of Health and Human Services” for “Secretaries of Labor and Education and Health and Human Services” in first sentence, “co-chairpersons” for “co-chairmen” in second sentence, “Employment of People With Disabilities” for “Employment of the Handicapped” in second sentence which was executed to third sentence as the probable intent of Congress, and “Commission” for “Office” in cl. (2).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(a)(2), (5), substituted “submit to the Commission” for “submit to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission”, “employees with handicaps” for “handicapped employees”, and “Commission, if the Commission determines” for “Office, if the Office determines”.

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(a)(2), substituted “Commission” for “Equal Opportunity Employment Commission” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(a)(6), substituted “an individualized” for “a individualized”.

Subsec. (f)(1), (2). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(a)(7), substituted “Employment of People With Disabilities” for “Employment of the Handicapped”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in section catchline.

Subsecs. (a) to (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 1002(e)(1), substituted “Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” for “Office of Personnel Management” and “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 1002(e)(1), (2)(A), substituted “Equal Employment Opportunity Commission” for “Office of Personnel Management” wherever appearing, “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, and “of the activities” for “of the the activities”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(f)(1), substituted “a individualized” for “his individualized”.

Subsec. (f)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(3)(A)–(D), substituted “the Chairman of the Office of Personnel Management” and “Education and Health and Human Services” for “the Chairman of the Civil Service Commission” and “Health, Education, and Welfare”, respectively, in first sentence, “Secretary of Education and the Chairman of the Office of Personnel Management” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare and the Chairman of the Civil Service Commission” in second sentence, “Office of Personnel Management” for “Civil Service Commission” in four places, and “Office” for “Commission”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(3)(C), (D), substituted “Office of Personnel Management” for “Civil Service Commission” and substituted “Office” for “Commission” in two places.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(3)(C), substituted “Office of Personnel Management” for “Civil Service Commission”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(3)(C), (E), substituted “Office of Personnel Management” for “Civil Service Commission” in two places and “the activities of the Office of Personnel Management” for “Civil Service Commission's activities”.

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 98–221, §104(b)(3)(F), substituted “Secretary of Education” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

Ex. Ord. No. 10640, Oct. 10, 1955, 20 F.R. 7717, formerly set out as a note under section 39 of this title, which related to President's Committee on Employment of the Physically Handicapped, was superseded by section 6(a) of Ex. Ord. No. 10994, Feb. 14, 1962, 27 F.R. 1447, which established President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped.

Ex. Ord. No. 10994, Feb. 14, 1962, 27 F.R. 1447, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 11018, Apr. 27, 1962, 27 F.R. 4143, which established the President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped, was superseded by Ex. Ord. No. 11480, Sept. 9, 1969, 34 F.R. 14273, formerly set out below.

Ex. Ord. No. 11480, Sept. 9, 1969, 34 F.R. 14273, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 26, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053; Ex. Ord. No. 12608, Sept. 9, 1987, 52 F.R. 34617, which established and provided for the functions of the President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped, was superseded by Ex. Ord. No. 12640, May 10, 1988, 53 F.R. 16996, set out below.

Ex. Ord. No. 11830, Jan. 9, 1975, 40 F.R. 2411, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 12106, Dec. 26, 1978, 44 F.R. 1053; Ex. Ord. No. 12450, Dec. 9, 1983, 48 F.R. 55409; Ex. Ord. No. 12672, Mar. 21, 1989, 54 F.R. 12167; Ex. Ord. No. 12704, §1, Feb. 26, 1990, 55 F.R. 6969, provided:

By virtue of the authority vested in me by section 501(a) of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (Public Law 93–112; 87 Stat. 390) [subsec. (a) of this section], it is hereby ordered as follows:

(1) Secretary of Defense.

(2) Secretary of Labor.

(3) Secretary of Education, Co-Chairman.

(4) Director of the Office of Personnel Management.

(5) Administrator of Veterans Affairs.

(6) Administrator of General Services.

(7) Chairman of the Federal Communications Commission.

(8) Chairman of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, Co-Chairman.

(9) Secretary of Health and Human Services.

(10) Postmaster General of the United States Postal Service.

(11) Chairman of the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities (Ex Officio).

(12) Such other members as the President may designate.

Ex. Ord. No. 12640, May 10, 1988, 53 F.R. 16996, as amended by Ex. Ord. No. 12945, Jan. 20, 1995, 60 F.R. 4527, provided:

By virtue of the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and laws of the United States of America, and in order to provide for the carrying out of the provisions of the Joint Resolution approved July 11, 1949, ch. 302, 63 Stat. 409, as amended, and the provisions of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, P.L. 93–112, Section 501(a)–(f), as amended [29 U.S.C. 791(a)–(f)], it is ordered as follows:

*Establishment and Composition of the President's Committee*. (a) There is hereby established the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities (hereinafter referred to as the Committee or as the President's Committee).

(b) The Committee shall be composed of a Chairman and not more than six Vice Chairs, who shall be appointed by and serve at the pleasure of the President, and of so many other members as may be appointed thereto from time to time by the Chairman of the President's Committee from among persons (including representatives of organizations) who can contribute to the achievement of the objectives of the Committee. Members appointed by the Chairman shall be appointed for a term of 3 years and may be reappointed. The Chairman of the President's Committee may at any time terminate the service of any member of the President's Committee, except any member appointed by the President.

(c) The Chairman of the President's Committee, upon the advice of the Executive Committee (hereinafter provided for), may designate as, or invite to be, associate members of the President's Committee any heads of Federal departments or agencies that have responsibility for training and rehabilitation services or advocate activities touching the field of interest of the Committee or that are leading employers of individuals with disabilities.

(d) Representatives of business, industry, labor, private organizations, public agencies, other concerned organizations, and individuals with disabilities who are not members may be invited to attend meetings of the Committee.

*Functions of the Committee*. The President's Committee shall provide advice and information as to the development of maximum employment opportunities for people who are physically disabled, mentally retarded, and mentally ill. To this end the Committee shall advise the President as to information that can be used by employers, labor unions, and national and international organizations, suggest programs for public education, and suggest methods of enlisting cooperation among organizations and agencies, Federal, State, and local officials, Governors’ and local Committees on Employment of People with Disabilities, professional organizations, organized labor, and appropriate international organizations. In carrying out these functions vested in it by the Rehabilitation Act, as amended [29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.], the Committee shall be guided by the general policies of the National Council on the Handicapped and shall work closely with the Department of Labor, the Department of Education, the Department of Health and Human Services, the Veterans’ Administration, State employment security agencies, and State vocational rehabilitation agencies.

*Executive Committee*. (a) There is hereby established the Executive Committee of the President's Committee on Employment of People with Disabilities. The Executive Committee shall be composed of the Chairman of the President's Committee, who shall also be the Chairman of the Executive Committee, the Vice Chair of the President's Committee, and so many additional members as will provide an Executive Committee of not less than 15 and not more than 30 members. The said additional members shall be appointed for a term of 3 years by the Chairman of the President's Committee from among the members of the President's Committee or otherwise. The Chairman of the President's Committee may at any time terminate the service of any member of the Executive Committee.

(b) The Executive Committee shall advise and assist the Chairman of the President's Committee in the conduct of the business of the President's Committee and, as authorized by the President's Committee or the Chairman thereof (with due regard for the responsibilities of other Federal agencies), shall study the problems of people with disabilities in obtaining and retaining suitable employment, invite authorities in the various professional, technical, and other pertinent fields to advise it in the exploration of those problems, and review plans and projects for advocating the employment of people with disabilities.

*Advisory Council*. There is hereby established the Advisory Council on Employment of People with Disabilities, which shall advise the President's Committee with respect to the responsibilities of the Committee. The Council shall be composed of the Chairman of the President's Committee, who shall also be the Chairman of the Council, and of the following-named officers, or their respective alternates: Secretary of State, Secretary of the Treasury; Secretary of Defense; The Attorney General; Secretary of the Interior; Secretary of Agriculture; Secretary of Commerce; Secretary of Labor; Secretary of Health and Human Services; Secretary of Housing and Urban Development; Secretary of Transportation; Secretary of Education; Chairman, Equal Employment Opportunity Commission; Administrator of General Services; Director, Office of Personnel Management; Director, United States Information Agency; Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs; and the Postmaster General.

*Administrative and Incidental Matters*. (a) The President's Committee, the Executive Committee, and the Advisory Council shall each meet on call of the Chairman of the President's Committee at a time and place designated by the Chairman. In the case of the President's Committee and the Executive Committee, the Chairman shall call at least one meeting and two meetings, respectively, to be held during each calendar year.

(b) In the absence of designation by the President, the Chairman of the President's Committee may from time to time designate a Vice Chair of the President's Committee to be one or more of the following-named in the absence of the Chairman: Acting Chairman of the President's Committee, Acting Chairman of the Executive Committee, and Acting Chairman of the Advisory Council. The Chairman of the President's Committee shall from time to time assign other duties to the Vice Chairs thereof.

(c) The Chairman of the President's Committee shall on behalf of the President direct the President's Committee and its functions.

(d) The Chairman may from time to time prescribe such necessary rules, procedures, and policies relating to the President's Committee, the Executive Committee, and the Advisory Council, and to their affairs, as are not inconsistent with law or with the provisions of this Order.

(e) The Vice Chairs shall advise and counsel the Committee and shall represent the Committee on appropriate occasions.

(f) All members (including the Chairman and Vice Chairs) of the President's Committee, the Executive Committee, and the Advisory Council shall serve without compensation. The Chairman and the Vice Chairs of the President's Committee may receive transportation and per diem allowances as authorized by law for persons serving without compensation. Persons with disabilities serving as Chairman or Vice Chairs may be compensated for attendant expenses, consistent with government procedures and practices.

(g) Employees of the President's Committee shall be appointed, subject to law, and shall be directed by the Chairman of the Committee. To such extent as may be mutually arranged by the Chairman of the Committee and the Secretary of Labor, employees of the Committee shall be subject to the administrative rules, regulations, and procedures of the Department of Labor.

(h) The Department of Labor is requested to make available to the President's Committee necessary office space and to furnish the Committee, under such arrangements respecting financing as may be appropriate, necessary equipment, supplies, and services. The estimates of appropriations for the operations of the Committee shall be included within the framework of the appropriations structure of the Department of Labor, in such manner as the Director of the Office of Management and Budget may prescribe. The Chairman of the Committee, in cooperation with the Assistant Secretary for Administration and Management of the Department of Labor, shall be responsible for the preparation and justification of the estimates of appropriations for the Committee.

*Reporting*. The President's Committee shall report annually to the President, who may apprise the Congress, and other interested organizations and individuals on the progress and problems of maximizing employment opportunities for people with disabilities.

*Prior Orders; Transition*. (a) To the extent that this Order is inconsistent with any provision of any prior order, or with any provisions of any regulation or other measure or disposition, heretofore issued, made, or taken by the President or by any other officer of the Executive branch of the Government, this Order shall control. Executive Order No. 11480 of September 9, 1969, as amended, is hereby superseded.

(b) Without further action by the President or the Chairman of the Committee, all members, employees, records, property, funds, and pending business of the President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped provided for in Executive Order No. 11480 of September 9, 1969, as amended, shall on the date of this Order become members, employees, records, property, funds, and pending business of the Committee established by this Order.

(c) The tenure of persons as members of the Committee in pursuance of the provisions of Section 7(b) of this Order, (i), in the case of persons appointed to the predecessor Committee by the President, shall be at the pleasure of the President, and (ii), in the case of other members, shall be for periods equal to their respective unexpired terms under Executive Order No. 11480, as amended, but shall also be subject to the provisions of the last sentence of Section 1(b) of this Order.

This section is referred to in sections 706, 794a of this title; title 2 sections 1202, 1311; title 3 sections 411, 421; title 5 sections 2302, 3102, 7702; title 22 sections 3905, 4131; title 38 section 4214; title 42 section 1981a.

(1) There is established within the Federal Government the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (hereinafter referred to as the “Access Board”) which shall be composed as follows:

(A) Thirteen members shall be appointed by the President from among members of the general public of whom at least a majority shall be individuals with disabilities.

(B) The remaining members shall be the heads of each of the following departments or agencies (or their designees whose positions are executive level IV or higher):

(i) Department of Health and Human Services.

(ii) Department of Transportation.

(iii) Department of Housing and Urban Development.

(iv) Department of Labor.

(v) Department of the Interior.

(vi) Department of Defense.

(vii) Department of Justice.

(viii) General Services Administration.

(ix) Department of Veterans Affairs.

(x) United States Postal Service.

(xi) Department of Education.

(xii) Department of Commerce.

The Chairperson 1 and vice-chairperson of the Access Board shall be elected by majority vote of the members of the Access Board to serve for terms of one year. When the chairperson is a member of the general public, the vice-chairperson shall be a Federal official; and when the chairperson is a Federal official, the vice-chairperson shall be a member of the general public. Upon the expiration of the term as chairperson of a member who is a Federal official, the subsequent chairperson shall be a member of the general public; and vice versa.

(2)(A)(i) The term of office of each appointed member of the Access Board shall be 4 years, except as provided in clause (ii). Each year, the terms of office of at least three appointed members of the board 2 shall expire.

(ii)(I) One member appointed for a term beginning December 4, 1992 shall serve for a term of 3 years.

(II) One member appointed for a term beginning December 4, 1993 shall serve for a term of 2 years.

(III) One member appointed for a term beginning December 4, 1994 shall serve for a term of 1 year.

(IV) Members appointed for terms beginning before December 4, 1992 shall serve for terms of 3 years.

(B) A member whose term has expired may continue to serve until a successor has been appointed.

(C) A member appointed to fill a vacancy shall serve for the remainder of the term to which that member's predecessor was appointed.

(3) If any appointed member of the Access Board becomes a Federal employee, such member may continue as a member of the Access Board for not longer than the sixty-day period beginning on the date the member becomes a Federal employee.

(4) No individual appointed under paragraph (1)(A) of this subsection who has served as a member of the Access Board may be reappointed to the Access Board more than once unless such individual has not served on the Access Board for a period of two years prior to the effective date of such individual's appointment.

(5)(A) Members of the Access Board who are not regular full-time employees of the United States shall, while serving on the business of the Access Board, be entitled to receive compensation at rates fixed by the President, but not to exceed the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level IV of the Executive Schedule under section 5315 of title 5, including travel time, for each day they are engaged in the performance of their duties as members of the Access Board; and shall be entitled to reimbursement for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred by them in carrying out their duties under this section.

(B) Members of the Access Board who are employed by the Federal Government shall serve without compensation, but shall be reimbursed for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred by them in carrying out their duties under this section.

(6)(A) The Access Board shall establish such bylaws and other rules as may be appropriate to enable the Access Board to carry out its functions under this chapter.

(B) The bylaws shall include quorum requirements. The quorum requirements shall provide that (i) a proxy may not be counted for purposes of establishing a quorum, and (ii) not less than half the members required for a quorum shall be members of the general public appointed under paragraph (1)(A).

It shall be the function of the Access Board to—

(1) ensure compliance with the standards prescribed pursuant to the Act entitled “An Act to ensure that certain buildings financed with Federal funds are so designed and constructed as to be accessible to the physically handicapped”, approved August 12, 1968 (commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968; 42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq.) (including the application of such Act to the United States Postal Service), including enforcing all standards under such Act, and ensuring that all waivers and modifications to the standards are based on findings of fact and are not inconsistent with the provisions of this section;

(2) develop advisory guidelines for, and provide appropriate technical assistance to, individuals or entities with rights or duties under regulations prescribed pursuant to this subchapter or titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12131 et seq. and 12181 et seq.) with respect to overcoming architectural, transportation, and communication barriers;

(3) establish and maintain minimum guidelines and requirements for the standards issued pursuant to the Act commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 and titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990;

(4) promote accessibility throughout all segments of society;

(5) investigate and examine alternative approaches to the architectural, transportation, communication, and attitudinal barriers confronting individuals with disabilities, particularly with respect to telecommunications devices, public buildings and monuments, parks and parklands, public transportation (including air, water, and surface transportation, whether interstate, foreign, intrastate, or local), and residential and institutional housing;

(6) determine what measures are being taken by Federal, State, and local governments and by other public or nonprofit agencies to eliminate the barriers described in paragraph (5);

(7) promote the use of the International Accessibility Symbol in all public facilities that are in compliance with the standards prescribed by the Administrator of General Services, the Secretary of Defense, and the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development pursuant to the Act commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968;

(8) make to the President and to the Congress reports that shall describe in detail the results of its investigations under paragraphs (5) and (6);

(9) make to the President and to the Congress such recommendations for legislative and administrative changes as the Access Board determines to be necessary or desirable to eliminate the barriers described in paragraph (5); and

(10) ensure that public conveyances, including rolling stock, are readily accessible to, and usable by, individuals with physical disabilities.

The Access Board shall also (1)(A) determine how and to what extent transportation barriers impede the mobility of individuals with disabilities and aged individuals with disabilities and consider ways in which travel expenses in connection with transportation to and from work for individuals with disabilities can be met or subsidized when such individuals are unable to use mass transit systems or need special equipment in private transportation, and (B) consider the housing needs of individuals with disabilities; (2) determine what measures are being taken, especially by public and other nonprofit agencies and groups having an interest in and a capacity to deal with such problems, (A) to eliminate barriers from public transportation systems (including vehicles used in such systems), and to prevent their incorporation in new or expanded transportation systems, and (B) to make housing available and accessible to individuals with disabilities or to meet sheltered housing needs; and (3) prepare plans and proposals for such further actions as may be necessary to the goals of adequate transportation and housing for individuals with disabilities, including proposals for bringing together in a cooperative effort, agencies, organizations, and groups already working toward such goals or whose cooperation is essential to effective and comprehensive action.

(1) The Access Board shall conduct investigations, hold public hearings, and issue such orders as it deems necessary to ensure compliance with the provisions of the Acts cited in subsection (b) of this section. Except as provided in paragraph (3) of subsection (e) of this section, the provisions of subchapter II of chapter 5, and chapter 7, of title 5 shall apply to procedures under this section, and an order of compliance issued by the Access Board shall be a final order for purposes of judicial review. Any such order affecting any Federal department, agency, or instrumentality of the United States shall be final and binding on such department, agency, or instrumentality. An order of compliance may include the withholding or suspension of Federal funds with respect to any building or public conveyance or rolling stock found not to be in compliance with standards enforced under this section. Pursuant to chapter 7 of title 5, any complainant or participant in a proceeding under this subsection may obtain review of a final order issued in such proceeding.

(2) The executive director is authorized, at the direction of the Access Board—

(A) to bring a civil action in any appropriate United States district court to enforce, in whole or in part, any final order of the Access Board under this subsection; and

(B) to intervene, appear, and participate, or to appear as amicus curiae, in any court of the United States or in any court of a State in civil actions that relate to this section or to the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 [42 U.S.C. 4151 et seq.].

Except as provided in section 518(a) of title 28, relating to litigation before the Supreme Court, the executive director may appear for and represent the Access Board in any civil litigation brought under this section.

(1) There shall be appointed by the Access Board an executive director and such other professional and clerical personnel as are necessary to carry out its functions under this chapter. The Access Board is authorized to appoint as many administrative law judges as are necessary for proceedings required to be conducted under this section. The provisions applicable to administrative law judges appointed under section 3105 of title 5 shall apply to administrative law judges appointed under this subsection.

(2) The Executive Director shall exercise general supervision over all personnel employed by the Access Board (other than administrative law judges and their assistants). The Executive Director shall have final authority on behalf of the Access Board, with respect to the investigation of alleged noncompliance and in the issuance of formal complaints before the Access Board, and shall have such other duties as the Access Board may prescribe.

(3) For the purpose of this section, an order of compliance issued by an administrative law judge shall be deemed to be an order of the Access Board and shall be the final order for the purpose of judicial review.

(1)(A) In carrying out the technical assistance responsibilities of the Access Board under this section, the Board may enter into an interagency agreement with another Federal department or agency.

(B) Any funds appropriated to such a department or agency for the purpose of providing technical assistance may be transferred to the Access Board. Any funds appropriated to the Access Board for the purpose of providing such technical assistance may be transferred to such department or agency.

(C) The Access Board may arrange to carry out the technical assistance responsibilities of the Board under this section through such other departments and agencies for such periods as the Board determines to be appropriate.

(D) The Access Board shall establish a procedure to ensure separation of its compliance and technical assistance responsibilities under this section.

(2) The departments or agencies specified in subsection (a) of this section shall make available to the Access Board such technical, administrative, or other assistance as it may require to carry out its functions under this section, and the Access Board may appoint such other advisers, technical experts, and consultants as it deems necessary to assist it in carrying out its functions under this section. Special advisory and technical experts and consultants appointed pursuant to this paragraph shall, while performing their functions under this section, be entitled to receive compensation at rates fixed by the Chairperson,3 but not exceeding the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5, including travel time, and while serving away from their homes or regular places of business they may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of such title 5 for persons in the Government service employed intermittently.

(1) The Access Board shall, at the end of each fiscal year, report its activities during the preceding fiscal year to the Congress. Such report shall include an assessment of the extent of compliance with the Acts cited in subsection (b) of this section, along with a description and analysis of investigations made and actions taken by the Access Board, and the reports and recommendations described in paragraphs (8) and (9) of such subsection.

(2) The Access Board shall, at the same time that the Access Board transmits the report required under section 7(b) of the Act commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 4157(b)), transmit the report to the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(1) The Access Board may make grants to, or enter into contracts with, public or private organizations to carry out its duties under subsections (b) and (c) of this section.

(2)(A) The Access Board may accept, hold, administer, and utilize gifts, devises, and bequests of property, both real and personal, for the purpose of aiding and facilitating the functions of the Access Board under paragraphs (5) and (7) of subsection (b) of this section. Gifts and bequests of money and proceeds from sales of other property received as gifts, devises, or bequests shall be deposited in the Treasury and shall be disbursed upon the order of the Chairperson.3 Property accepted pursuant to this section, and the proceeds thereof, shall be used as nearly as possible in accordance with the terms of the gifts, devises, or bequests. For purposes of Federal income, estate, or gift taxes, property accepted under this section shall be considered as a gift, devise, or bequest to the United States.

(B) The Access Board shall publish regulations setting forth the criteria the Board will use in determining whether the acceptance of gifts, devises, and bequests of property, both real and personal, would reflect unfavorably upon the ability of the Board or any employee to carry out the responsibilities or official duties of the Board in a fair and objective manner, or would compromise the integrity of or the appearance of the integrity of a Government program or any official involved in that program.

(3) The Access Board shall, at the same time that the Access Board transmits the report required under section 7(b) of the Act entitled “An Act to ensure that certain buildings financed with Federal funds are so designated and constructed as to be accessible to the physically handicapped”, approved August 12, 1968 (commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968) [42 U.S.C. 4157(b)] transmit that report to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives.

There are authorized to be appropriated for the purpose of carrying out the duties and functions of the Access Board under this section such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §502, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 391; Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §§110, 111(n)–(q), Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619, 1621, 1622; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §§110, 111(n)–(q), Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4, 2–6, 2–7; Pub. L. 94–230, §§10, 11(b)(13), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 214; Pub. L. 95–251, §2(a)(8), Mar. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 183; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §118, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2979; Pub. L. 96–374, title XIII, §1321, Oct. 3, 1980, 94 Stat. 1499; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §151, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 28; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title VI, §601, title X, §1002(e)(2)(B)–(D), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1829, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3311; Pub. L. 102–52, §6, June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(1)(A), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(30), title V, §504, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4424; Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §112(b), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 727.)

Executive level IV, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(B), is set out in section 5315 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Act commonly known as the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, referred to in subsecs. (b)(1), (3), (7) and (d)(2)(B), is Pub. L. 90–480, Aug. 12, 1968, 82 Stat. 718, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§4151 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 4151 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), (3), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Titles II and III of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§12131 et seq.) and III (§12181 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 126 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

For history of Pub. L. 93–651, which enacted amendments identical to Pub. L. 93–516, see Codification note set out under section 701 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “level IV of the Executive Schedule under section 5315” for “level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §504(a)(2), (3), substituted “the Access Board” and “The Access Board” for “the Board” and “The Board”, respectively, wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(a)(1), substituted “the ‘Access Board’ ” for “the ‘Board’ ” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(1)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(b)(1)(A), substituted “Thirteen” for “Twelve” and “at least a majority” for “six”.

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(30), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(xii). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(b)(1)(B), added cl. (xii).

Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(b)(2), designated existing provisions as cl. (i), substituted “4 years, except as provided in clause (ii)” for “three years” and “at least three” for “four”, and added cl. (ii).

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(b)(3), substituted “a Federal” for “such an” after “member becomes”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(b)(4), substituted “the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the daily rate prescribed for GS–18 under section 5332”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(c), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions which outlined eight specific functions of the Access Board.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(30), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(d)(1), in first sentence, substituted “The Access Board shall conduct” for “In carrying out its functions under this chapter, the Access Board shall, directly or through grants to public or private nonprofit organizations or contracts with private nonprofit or forprofit organizations, carry out its functions under subsections (b) and (c) of this section, and shall conduct” and “to ensure compliance” for “to insure compliance”.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(d)(2), struck out par. (3) which read as follows: “The Access Board, in consultation and coordination with other concerned Federal departments and agencies and agencies within the Department of Education, shall develop standards and provide appropriate technical assistance to any public or private activity, person, or entity affected by regulations prescribed pursuant to this subchapter with respect to overcoming architectural, transportation, and communication barriers. Any funds appropriated to any such department or agency for the purpose of providing such assistance may be transferred to the Access Board for the purpose of carrying out this paragraph. The Access Board may arrange to carry out its responsibilities under this paragraph through such other departments and agencies for such periods as the Access Board determines is appropriate. In carrying out its technical assistance responsibilities under this paragraph, the Access Board shall establish a procedure to insure separation of its compliance and technical assistance responsibilities under this section.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(e), added par. (1), designated existing provisions as par. (2) and substituted “paragraph” for “subsection”, “Chairperson” for “Secretary”, and “the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the daily pay rate for a person employed as a GS–18 under section 5332”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(f), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted “paragraphs (8) and (9) of such subsection” for “clauses (5) and (6) of subsection (b) of this section”, struck out at end “The Access Board shall prepare two final reports of its activities under subsection (c) of this section. One such report shall be on its activities in the field of transportation barriers facing individuals with disabilities, and the other such report shall be on its activities in the field of the housing needs of individuals with disabilities. The Access Board shall, not later than September 30, 1975, submit each such report, together with its recommendations, to the President and the Congress. The Access Board shall also prepare for such submission an interim report of its activities in each such field within 18 months after September 26, 1973. The Access Board shall prepare and submit two additional reports of its activities under subsection (c) of this section, one report on its activities in the field of transportation barriers facing individuals with disabilities and the other report on its activities in the field of the housing needs of individuals with disabilities. The two additional reports required by the previous sentence shall be submitted not later than February 1, 1988.”, and added par. (2).

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(30), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(g)(1)–(3), redesignated par. (2) as (1), struck out at end “The Access Board may also make grants to any designated State unit for the purpose of conducting studies to provide the cost assessments required by paragraph (1). Before including in such report the findings of any study conducted for the Access Board under a grant or contract to provide the Access Board with such cost assessments, the Access Board shall take all necessary steps to validate the accuracy of any such findings.”, and struck out former par. (1) which read as follows: “Within one year following November 6, 1978, the Access Board shall submit to the President and the Congress a report containing an assessment of the amounts required to be expended by States and by political subdivisions thereof to provide individuals with disabilities with full access to all programs and activities receiving Federal assistance.”

Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(30), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps” before “with full access”.

Subsec. (h)(2). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(g)(4), which directed the addition of par. (2) “at the end” of subsec. (h), was executed by adding par. (2) before par. (3) to reflect the probable intent of Congress. Former par. (2) redesignated (1).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–569, §504(h), substituted “fiscal years 1993 through 1997.” for “fiscal years 1987 through 1992, but in no event shall the amount appropriated for any one fiscal year exceed $3,000,000.”

1991—Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(ix). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Department of Veterans Affairs” for “Veterans’ Administration”.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1987 through 1992” for “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, and 1991”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(1), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “The term of office of each appointed member of the Board shall be three years; except that (i) the members first taking office shall serve, as designated by the President at the time of appointment, four for a term of one year, four for a term of two years, and three for a term of three years, (ii) a member whose term has expired may continue to serve until a successor has been appointed, and (iii) a member appointed to fill a vacancy shall serve for the remainder of the term to which that member's predecessor was appointed.”

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(2), substituted “the member” for “he”.

Subsec. (a)(5)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(3), substituted “travel time” for “traveltime”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(4)–(7), inserted a comma after “surface transportation” in cl. (2), and substituted “Administrator of General Services” for “Administrator of the General Services Administration” in cl. (4), “results of” for “results to” in cl. (5), and “individuals with physical handicaps” for “physically handicapped persons” in cl. (8).

Subsec. (c)(2)(A). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(8), inserted a comma after “expanded transportation systems”.

Subsec. (d)(2)((B). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(9), substituted “that relate to” for “which related to”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(10), substituted “daily pay rate for” for “daily pay rate, for”, “section 5332 of title 5” for “section 5332 of title 45”, and “travel time” for “traveltime”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(b)(11), substituted “transportation barriers facing individuals with handicaps” for “transportation barriers to individuals with handicaps” and for “transportation barriers of handicapped individuals” in fourth and seventh sentences, respectively, and “housing needs of individuals with handicaps” for “housing needs of handicapped individuals” in seventh sentence.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 601(a)(2), substituted “Twelve” for “Eleven”, “six” for “five”, and “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B). Pub. L. 99–506, §601(a)(1), substituted provision that Chairperson and vice-chairperson of Board shall be elected by majority vote of members of Board to serve for terms of one year, for provision that President had to appoint first Chairman of such Board who was to serve for term of not more than two years, with subsequent Chairmen to be elected by majority vote of Board for term of one year, and inserted provisions that positions of Chairperson and vice-chairperson each be held alternately in succession by Federal official and by member of general public, and that when either office is held by member of general public, the other will be held by Federal official.

Subsec. (a)(2)(ii), (iii). Pub. L. 99–506, §601(a)(3), added cls. (ii) and (iii), and struck out former cl. (ii) which read as follows: “any member appointed to fill a vacancy shall serve for the remainder of the term for which his predecessor was appointed”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 99–506, §601(a)(4), added par. (6).

Subsecs. (b)(2), (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (d)(2)(A). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(e)(2)(B), substituted “any final order” for “any, final order”.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(e)(2)(C), substituted “Department of Education” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare” and “with respect to overcoming” for “with respect overcoming to”.

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §1002(e)(2)(D), substituted “alleged noncompliance and in” for “alleged noncompliance in”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 99–506, §601(b), inserted provisions requiring the Board to submit, not later than Feb. 1, 1988, two additional reports on its activities under subsec. (c), one report to deal with its activities relating to transportation barriers to handicapped individuals, the other to deal with activities relating to the housing needs of handicapped individuals.

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted reference to individuals with handicaps for reference to handicapped individuals.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 99–506, §601(c), which directed the substitution of “of the fiscal years 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, and 1991,” for “fiscal year ending before October 1, 1986,” was executed by making the substitution for “fiscal year ending before October 1, 1986.,” as the probable intent of Congress. See 1984 Amendment note below.

1984—Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “October 1, 1986.” for “October 1, 1982”.

1980—Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(i). Pub. L. 96–374, §1321(a)(1), substituted “Department of Health and Human Services” for “Department of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(xi). Pub. L. 96–374, §1321(a)(2), added cl. (xi).

Subsec. (h)(3). Pub. L. 96–374, §1321(b), added par. (3).

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(a), substituted provision permitting President to appoint eleven members of Board from general public of whom five are to be handicapped, adding head of the Department of Justice as a Board member, authorizing President to appoint the first chairman, and providing for the term of office, reappointment, and compensation of Board members for provision restricting Board membership to head of Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, Department of Transportation, Department of Housing and Urban Development, Department of Labor, Department of the Interior, Department of Defense, General Services Administration, United States Postal Service, and Veterans’ Administration, appointing Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare as chairman, and authorizing appointment of a Consumer Advisory Panel, a majority of members of which were to be handicapped, to provide guidance, advice, and recommendations to Board.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(b)(1), substituted provision requiring Board to insure compliance with standards of Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, including application to United States Postal Service, and to insure all waivers and modifications of standards are based on findings of fact and are not inconsistent with that Act or this section for provision requiring Board to insure compliance with the standards prescribed by General Services Administration, Department of Defense, and Department of Housing and Urban Development pursuant to Architectural Barriers Act of 1968.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(b)(2), inserted “communication,” before “and attitudinal” and “telecommunication devices,” before “public buildings”.

Subsec. (b)(7), (8). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(b)(3), added pars. (7) and (8).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(c), designated existing provision as par. (1), substituted “public or private nonprofit organizations or contracts with private nonprofit or forprofit organizations” for “or contracts with public or private nonprofit organizations”, “Except as provided in paragraph (3) of subsection (e) of this section, provisions” for “The provisions”, “building or public conveyance or rolling stock found” for “building found”, and “enforced under this section” for “prescribed pursuant to the Acts cited in subsection (b) of this section”, inserted provision permitting a complainant or participant in a proceeding under this subsection to obtain review of a final order pursuant to chapter 7 of title 5, and added pars. (2) and (3).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(d), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added pars. (2) and (3).

Pub. L. 95–251 substituted “administrative law judges” for “hearing examiners” wherever appearing. Such substitution was made in pars. (2) and (3) as the probable intent of Congress in view of the amendment to subsec. (e) by section 2(a)(8) of Pub. L. 95–251 (although prior in time to the amendment by Pub. L. 95–602) requiring such substitution wherever appearing in text.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(e), added subsec. (h). Former subsec. (h), which authorized appropriations for carrying out duties and functions of the Board of $1,000,000 for each of fiscal years ending June 30, 1974, and June 30, 1975, $1,500,000 for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976, and $1,500,000 for each of fiscal years ending Sept. 30, 1977 and Sept. 30, 1978, was struck out.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 95–602, §118(e), added subsec. (i).

1976—Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 94–230, §10, authorized appropriation of $1,500,000 for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1977.

Pub. L. 94–230, §11(b)(13), authorized appropriation of $1,500,000 for fiscal year ending Sept. 30, 1978.

1974—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(n), redesignated cls. (6), (7), and (8), as cls. (7), (8), and (9), added cl. (6), and following designated clauses, inserted provisions that Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare shall be Chairman of Board, and that Board shall appoint, upon recommendation of Secretary, a Consumer Advisory Panel, a majority of members of which shall be handicapped individuals, to provide guidance, advice, and recommendations to Board in carrying out its functions.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(n), amended subsec. (a) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(*o*), substituted “this chapter, the Board shall, directly or through grants to or contracts with public or private nonprofit organizations, carrying out its functions under subsections (b) and (c) of this section, and shall conduct” for “this section, the Board shall conduct”, and inserted provisions that any such order affecting any Federal department, agency, or instrumentality of the United States shall be final and binding on such department, agency, or instrumentality, and that an order of compliance may include the withholding or suspension of Federal funds with respect to any building found not to be in compliance with standards prescribed pursuant to the Acts referred to in subsec. (b) of this section.

Pub. L. 93–651, 111(*o*), amended subsec. (d) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(p), inserted provisions relating to appointment of an executive director and other professional and clerical personnel.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(p), amended subsec. (e) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 93–516, §111(q), substituted “not later than September 30, 1975” for “prior to January 1, 1975”.

Pub. L. 93–651, §111(q), amended subsec. (g) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 93–516, §110, authorized appropriation of $1,500,000 for fiscal year ending June 30, 1976.

Pub. L. 93–651, §110, amended subsec. (h) in exactly the same manner as it was amended by Pub. L. 93–516.

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–374 effective Oct. 1, 1980, see section 1393(a) of Pub. L. 96–374, set out as a note under section 1001 of Title 20, Education.

For contingency provisions relating to the extensions of program authorizations and to the effective date of such extensions, see section 11(a), (b)(1), and (c) of Pub. L. 94–230, set out as a note under section 720 of this title.

Advisory panels established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a panel established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such panel is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a panel established by the Congress, its duration is otherwise provided for by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in sections 776, 794b of this title; title 42 sections 4157, 12185; title 49 section 40103.

1 So in original. Probably should not be capitalized.

2 So in original. Probably should be “Access Board”.

3 So in original. Probably should not be capitalized.

Any contract in excess of $10,000 entered into by any Federal department or agency for the procurement of personal property and nonpersonal services (including construction) for the United States shall contain a provision requiring that the party contracting with the United States shall take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified individuals with disabilities. The provisions of this section shall apply to any subcontract in excess of $10,000 entered into by a prime contractor in carrying out any contract for the procurement of personal property and nonpersonal services (including construction) for the United States. The President shall implement the provisions of this section by promulgating regulations within ninety days after September 26, 1973.

If any individual with a disability believes any contractor has failed or refused to comply with the provisions of a contract with the United States, relating to employment of individuals with disabilities, such individual may file a complaint with the Department of Labor. The Department shall promptly investigate such complaint and shall take such action thereon as the facts and circumstances warrant, consistent with the terms of such contract and the laws and regulations applicable thereto.

(1) The requirements of this section may be waived, in whole or in part, by the President with respect to a particular contract or subcontract, in accordance with guidelines set forth in regulations which the President shall prescribe, when the President determines that special circumstances in the national interest so require and states in writing the reasons for such determination.

(2)(A) The Secretary of Labor may waive the requirements of the affirmative action clause required by regulations promulgated under subsection (a) of this section with respect to any of a prime contractor's or subcontractor's facilities that are found to be in all respects separate and distinct from activities of the prime contractor or subcontractor related to the performance of the contract or subcontract, if the Secretary of Labor also finds that such a waiver will not interfere with or impede the effectuation of this chapter.

(B) Such waivers shall be considered only upon the request of the contractor or subcontractor. The Secretary of Labor shall promulgate regulations that set forth the standards used for granting such a waiver.

The standards used to determine whether this section has been violated in a complaint alleging nonaffirmative action employment discrimination under this section shall be the standards applied under title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.) and the provisions of sections 501 through 504, and 510, of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12201–12204 and 12210), as such sections relate to employment.

The Secretary shall develop procedures to ensure that administrative complaints filed under this section and under the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.] are dealt with in a manner that avoids duplication of effort and prevents imposition of inconsistent or conflicting standards for the same requirements under this section and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §503, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 393; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §122(d)(1), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(B), (C), title X, §§1001(f)(2), (3), 1002(e)(3), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1843, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3312; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(31), title V, §505, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4427.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsecs. (d) and (e), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(31)(A), 505(a), substituted “$10,000” for “$2,500” in two places, struck out “, in employing persons to carry out such contract,” after “contain a provision requiring that”, and substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps as defined in section 706(8) of this title”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(31)(B), substituted “individual with a disability” for “individual with handicaps” and “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §505(b), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 102–569, §505(c), added subsecs. (d) and (e).

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(c)(1), inserted a comma after “to carry out such contract”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(c)(2), substituted “refused” for “refuses”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(c)(3), substituted “which the President” for “which The President” and “when the President” for “when The President”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 1002(e)(3), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and “section 706(8) of this title” for “section 706(7) of this title”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(B), (C), 1001(f)(2), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual”, “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”, and “a contract” for “his contract”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(f)(3), substituted “The President” for “he” in two places and substituted “the reasons” for “his reasons”.

1978—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 95–602 substituted “section 706(7) of this title” for “section 706(6) of this title”.

This section is referred to in sections 706, 721, 796c, 796f–4 of this title.

No otherwise qualified individual with a disability in the United States, as defined in section 706(8) of this title, shall, solely by reason of her or his disability, be excluded from the participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity receiving Federal financial assistance or under any program or activity conducted by any Executive agency or by the United States Postal Service. The head of each such agency shall promulgate such regulations as may be necessary to carry out the amendments to this section made by the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and Developmental Disabilities Act of 1978. Copies of any proposed regulation shall be submitted to appropriate authorizing committees of the Congress, and such regulation may take effect no earlier than the thirtieth day after the date on which such regulation is so submitted to such committees.

For the purposes of this section, the term “program or activity” means all of the operations of—

(1)(A) a department, agency, special purpose district, or other instrumentality of a State or of a local government; or

(B) the entity of such State or local government that distributes such assistance and each such department or agency (and each other State or local government entity) to which the assistance is extended, in the case of assistance to a State or local government;

(2)(A) a college, university, or other postsecondary institution, or a public system of higher education; or

(B) a local educational agency (as defined in section 8801 of title 20), system of vocational education, or other school system;

(3)(A) an entire corporation, partnership, or other private organization, or an entire sole proprietorship—

(i) if assistance is extended to such corporation, partnership, private organization, or sole proprietorship as a whole; or

(ii) which is principally engaged in the business of providing education, health care, housing, social services, or parks and recreation; or

(B) the entire plant or other comparable, geographically separate facility to which Federal financial assistance is extended, in the case of any other corporation, partnership, private organization, or sole proprietorship; or

(4) any other entity which is established by two or more of the entities described in paragraph (1), (2), or (3);

any part of which is extended Federal financial assistance.

Small providers are not required by subsection (a) of this section to make significant structural alterations to their existing facilities for the purpose of assuring program accessibility, if alternative means of providing the services are available. The terms used in this subsection shall be construed with reference to the regulations existing on March 22, 1988.

The standards used to determine whether this section has been violated in a complaint alleging employment discrimination under this section shall be the standards applied under title I of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12111 et seq.) and the provisions of sections 501 through 504, and 510, of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12201–12204 and 12210), as such sections relate to employment.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §504, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 394; Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §§119, 122(d)(2), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2982, 2987; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(B), title X, §1002(e)(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1844; Pub. L. 100–259, §4, Mar. 22, 1988, 102 Stat. 29; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3312; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(32), title V, §506, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4428; Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §394(i)(2), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4029.)

The amendments to this section made by the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and Developmental Disabilities Act of 1978, referred to in subsec. (a), mean the amendments made by Pub. L. 95–602. See 1978 Amendments note below.

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (d), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§12111 et seq.) of chapter 126 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “section 8801 of title 20” for “section 2891(12) of title 20”.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(32), substituted “a disability” for “handicaps” and “disability” for “handicap” in first sentence.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §506, added subsec. (d).

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(d)(1), substituted “her or his handicap” for “his handicap”.

Pub. L. 100–259, §4(1), designated existing provisions as subsec. (a).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–259, §4(2), added subsec. (b).

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(d)(2), substituted “section 2891(12) of title 20” for “section 2854(a)(10) of title 20”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–259, §4(2), added subsec. (c).

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” and “section 706(8) of this title” for “section 706(7) of this title”.

1978—Pub. L. 95–602 substituted “section 706(7) of this title” for “section 706(6) of this title” and inserted provision prohibiting discrimination under any program or activity conducted by any Executive agency or by the United States Postal Service and requiring the heads of these agencies to promulgate regulations prohibiting discrimination.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–259 not to be construed to extend application of this chapter to ultimate beneficiaries of Federal financial assistance excluded from coverage before Mar. 22, 1988, see section 7 of Pub. L. 100–259, set out as a Construction note under section 1687 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–259 not to be construed to force or require any individual or hospital or any other institution, program, or activity receiving Federal funds to perform or pay for an abortion, see section 8 of Pub. L. 100–259, set out as a note under section 1688 of Title 20, Education.

Rights or protections of this section not affected by any provision of Pub. L. 98–457, see section 127 of Pub. L. 98–457, set out as a note under section 5101 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

For provisions relating to the coordination of implementation and enforcement of the provisions of this section by the Attorney General, see section 1–201 of Ex. Ord. No. 12250, Nov. 2, 1980, 45 F.R. 72995, set out as a note under section 2000d–1 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Ex. Ord. No. 11914, Apr. 28, 1976, 41 F.R. 17871, which related to nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs, was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12250, Nov. 2, 1980, 45 F.R. 72995, set out as a note under section 2000d–1 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

This section is referred to in sections 706, 721, 771a, 775, 794a, 1577, 2211, 2618 of this title; title 5 section 3102; title 12 section 1715z–1a; title 16 sections 410aaa–41, 410aaa–52; title 20 sections 1231e, 1232e, 2321, 2328, 2468e, 8066, 8507; title 25 section 2005; title 42 sections 290cc–33, 300w–7, 300x–57, 708, 1437*l*, 1437v, 1437w, 1437aaa–1, 1437aaa–2, 1760, 1769h, 2000d–7, 3608, 5057, 5309, 6727, 8625, 9849, 9906, 10406, 11386, 11394, 12134, 12142, 12143, 12144, 12146, 12147, 12148, 12162, 12635, 12832, 12872, 12873, 12892, 12893, 12899b, 12899c, 13603; title 49 section 5310.

(a)(1) The remedies, procedures, and rights set forth in section 717 of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 2000e–16), including the application of sections 706(f) through 706(k) (42 U.S.C. 2000e–5(f) through (k)), shall be available, with respect to any complaint under section 791 of this title, to any employee or applicant for employment aggrieved by the final disposition of such complaint, or by the failure to take final action on such complaint. In fashioning an equitable or affirmative action remedy under such section, a court may take into account the reasonableness of the cost of any necessary work place accommodation, and the availability of alternatives therefor or other appropriate relief in order to achieve an equitable and appropriate remedy.

(2) The remedies, procedures, and rights set forth in title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.] shall be available to any person aggrieved by any act or failure to act by any recipient of Federal assistance or Federal provider of such assistance under section 794 of this title.

(b) In any action or proceeding to enforce or charge a violation of a provision of this subchapter, the court, in its discretion, may allow the prevailing party, other than the United States, a reasonable attorney's fee as part of the costs.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §505, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §120(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2982.)

The Civil Rights Act of 1964, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 88–352, July 2, 1964, 78 Stat. 241, as amended. Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 is classified generally to subchapter V (§2000d et seq.) of chapter 21 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2000a of Title 42 and Tables.

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1311; title 3 section 411; title 22 section 3905; title 42 sections 1981a, 10406, 12133.

(a) The Secretary may provide directly or by contract with State vocational rehabilitation agencies or experts or consultants or groups thereof, technical assistance—

(1) to persons operating community rehabilitation programs; and

(2) with the concurrence of the Access Board established by section 792 of this title, to any public or nonprofit agency, institution, or organization;

for the purpose of assisting such persons or entities in removing architectural, transportation, or communication barriers. Any concurrence of the Access Board under this paragraph shall reflect its consideration of the cost studies carried out by States under section 792(c)(1) of this title.

(b) Any such experts or consultants, while serving pursuant to such contracts, shall be entitled to receive compensation at rates fixed by the Secretary, but not exceeding the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5, including travel time, and while so serving away from their homes or regular places of business, they may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5 for persons in the Government service employed intermittently.

(c) The Secretary, with the concurrence of the Access Board and the President, may provide, directly or by contract, financial assistance to any public or nonprofit agency, institution, or organization for the purpose of removing architectural, transportation, and communication barriers. No assistance may be provided under this paragraph until a study demonstrating the need for such assistance has been conducted and submitted under section 792(h)(1) of this title.

(d) In order to carry out this section, there are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §506, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §120(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2983; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3312; Pub. L. 102–569, title V, §507, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4428.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §507(a), (b), substituted “community rehabilitation programs” for “rehabilitation facilities” in par. (1) and inserted “Access” before “Board” in par. (2) and concluding provisions.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §507(c), substituted “the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382” for “the rate of basic pay payable for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule, under section 5332”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §507(a), (d), inserted “Access” before “Board” and substituted “792(h)(1)” for “792(h)(2)”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(e)(1), (2), redesignated former par. (1) as subsec. (a) and former subpars. (A) and (B) as pars. (1) and (2), respectively.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(e)(1), (3), redesignated former par. (2) as subsec. (b) and substituted “travel time” for “traveltime”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(e)(1), (4), redesignated former par. (3) as subsec. (c) and inserted a comma after “the President”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(e)(1), redesignated former par. (4) as subsec. (d).

There is hereby established an Interagency Disability Coordinating Council (hereafter in this section referred to as the “Council”) composed of the Secretary of Education, the Secretary of Health and Human Services, the Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, the Secretary of Transportation, the Assistant Secretary of the Interior for Indian Affairs, the Attorney General, the Director of the Office of Personnel Management, the Chairperson of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, the Chairperson of the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, and such other officials as may be designated by the President.

The Council shall—

(1) have the responsibility for developing and implementing agreements, policies, and practices designed to maximize effort, promote efficiency, and eliminate conflict, competition, duplication, and inconsistencies among the operations, functions, and jurisdictions of the various departments, agencies, and branches of the Federal Government responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the provisions of this subchapter, and the regulations prescribed thereunder;

(2) be responsible for developing and implementing agreements, policies, and practices designed to coordinate operations, functions, and jurisdictions of the various departments and agencies of the Federal Government responsible for promoting the full integration into society, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities; and

(3) carry out such studies and other activities, subject to the availability of resources, with advice from the National Council on Disability, in order to identify methods for overcoming barriers to integration into society, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities.

On or before July 1 of each year, the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council shall prepare and submit to the President and to the Congress a report of the activities of the Council designed to promote and meet the employment needs of individuals with disabilities, together with such recommendations for legislative and administrative changes as the Council concludes are desirable to further promote this section, along with any comments submitted by the National Council on Disability as to the effectiveness of such activities and recommendations in meeting the needs of individuals with disabilities. Nothing in this section shall impair any responsibilities assigned by any Executive order to any Federal department, agency, or instrumentality to act as a lead Federal agency with respect to any provisions of this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §507, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title I, §120(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2983; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(m)(2), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 694; Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(b)(4), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18; Pub. L. 99–506, title VI, §602, title X, §1001(f)(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1830, 1843; Pub. L. 102–569, title V, §508(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4429.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 amended section generally, changing Council name from Interagency Coordinating Council to Interagency Disability Coordinating Council, including as members Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, Secretary of Transportation, and such other officials as designated by the President, requiring Council to be responsible for developing and implementing policies and practices to eliminate inconsistencies among Federal departments and agencies responsible for enforcement of provisions of this subchapter and to carry out such studies and other activities, with advice from the National Council on Disability, to identify methods for overcoming barriers to integration into society, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities, and directing in annual report inclusion of any comments submitted by National Council on Disability as to effectiveness of activities and recommendations in meeting needs of individuals with disabilities.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506, §602, inserted reference to Assistant Secretary of the Interior for Indian Affairs.

Pub. L. 99–506, §1001(f)(4), which directed the substitution of “Chairperson” for “Chairman” was executed by substituting “Chairperson of the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board” for “Chairman of the Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board” to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Chairman of the Office of Personnel Management” for “Chairman of the United States Civil Service Commission” and purported to substitute “Secretary of Education, the Secretary of Health and Human Services,” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare” which amendment could not be executed in view of the previous amendment by Pub. L. 96–88. See 1979 Amendment note below.

1979—Pub. L. 96–88 substituted requirement that the Secretaries of Education and Health and Human Services be members of the Council for requirement that the Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare be a member.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–88 effective May 4, 1980, with specified exceptions, see section 601 of Pub. L. 96–88, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3401 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 2215, 2231 of this title.

The Secretary, through the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research, and the Administrator of the General Services Administration, in consultation with the electronics and information technology industry and the Interagency Council on Accessible Technology, shall develop and establish guidelines for Federal agencies for electronic and information technology accessibility designed to ensure, regardless of the type of medium, that individuals with disabilities can produce information and data, and have access to information and data, comparable to the information and data, and access, respectively, of individuals who are not individuals with disabilities. Such guidelines shall be revised, as necessary, to reflect technological advances or changes.

Each Federal agency shall comply with the guidelines established under this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §508, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VI, §603(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1830; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §206(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3312; Pub. L. 102–569, title V, §509(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4430.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 amended section generally, substituting present provisions for provisions relating to electronic equipment accessibility guidelines, in consultation with electronic industry, designed to insure individuals with handicaps use of electronic office equipment with or without special peripherals, requiring the Administrator of General Services to adopt guidelines for electronic equipment accessibility established under this section for Federal procurement of electronic equipment, and defining term “special peripherals”.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(f)(1), inserted “the Director of” before “the National Institute”, struck out “the” before “General Services”, and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(f)(2), inserted “by the Director of the National Institute on Disability and Rehabilitation Research and the Administrator of General Services in consultation with the electronics industry and the Interagency Committee for Computer Support of Handicapped Employees” after “revised”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–630, §206(f)(3), substituted “an individual with handicaps” for “a handicapped individual”.

This section is referred to in section 2213 of this title.

The purpose of this section is to support a system in each State to protect the legal and human rights of individuals with disabilities who—

(1) need services that are beyond the scope of services authorized to be provided by the client assistance program under section 732 of this title; and

(2) are ineligible for protection and advocacy programs under part C of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6041 et seq.) and the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986 (42 U.S.C. 10801 et seq.).

For any fiscal year in which the amount appropriated to carry out this section is less than $5,500,000, the Commissioner may make grants from such amount to eligible systems within States to plan for, develop outreach strategies for, and carry out protection and advocacy programs authorized under this section for individuals with disabilities who meet the requirements of paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (a) of this section.

For any fiscal year in which the amount appropriated to carry out this section equals or exceeds $5,500,000, the Commissioner shall set aside not less than 1.8 percent and not more than 2.2 percent of the amount to provide training and technical assistance to the systems established under this section.

For any such fiscal year, after the reservation required by paragraph (1) has been made, the Commissioner shall make allotments from the remainder of such amount in accordance with paragraph (3) to eligible systems within States to enable such systems to carry out protection and advocacy programs authorized under this section for such individuals.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), from such remainder for each such fiscal year, the Commissioner shall make an allotment to the eligible system within a State of an amount bearing the same ratio to such remainder as the population of the State bears to the population of all States.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this section, and except as provided in paragraph (4), the allotment to any system under subparagraph (A) shall be not less than $100,000 or one-third of one percent of the remainder for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater, and the allotment to any system under this section for any fiscal year that is less than $100,000 or one-third of one percent of such remainder shall be increased to the greater of the two amounts.

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(B), Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau shall not be considered to be States.

The eligible system within a jurisdiction described in subparagraph (A) shall be allotted under paragraph (3)(A) not less than $50,000 for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

For any fiscal year, beginning in fiscal year 1994, in which the total amount appropriated to carry out this section exceeds the total amount appropriated to carry out this section for the preceding fiscal year by a percentage greater than the most recent percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers published by the Secretary of Labor under section 720(c)(1) of this title, the Commissioner shall increase the minimum allotment under paragraphs (3)(B) and (4)(B) by such percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers.

To provide minimum allotments to systems within States (as increased under subsection (c)(5) of this section) under subsection (c)(3)(B) of this section, or to provide minimum allotments to systems within States (as increased under subsection (c)(5) of this section) under subsection (c)(4)(B) of this section, the Commissioner shall proportionately reduce the allotments of the remaining systems within States under subsection (c)(3) of this section, with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining system within a State from being reduced to less than the minimum allotment for a system within a State (as increased under subsection (c)(5) of this section) under subsection (c)(3)(B) of this section, or the minimum allotment for a State (as increased under subsection (c)(5) of this section) under subsection (c)(4)(B) of this section, as appropriate.

Whenever the Commissioner determines that any amount of an allotment to a system within a State for any fiscal year described in subsection (c)(1) of this section will not be expended by such system in carrying out the provisions of this section, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the provisions of this section to one or more of the systems that the Commissioner determines will be able to use additional amounts during such year for carrying out such provisions. Any amount made available to a system for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this section, be regarded as an increase in the allotment of the system (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

In order to receive assistance under this section, an eligible system shall submit an application to the Commissioner, at such time, in such form and manner, and containing such information and assurances as the Commissioner determines necessary to meet the requirements of this section, including assurances that the eligible system will—

(1) have in effect a system to protect and advocate the rights of individuals with disabilities;

(2) have the same general authorities, including access to records and program income, as are set forth in part C of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6041 et seq.);

(3) have the authority to pursue legal, administrative, and other appropriate remedies or approaches to ensure the protection of, and advocacy for, the rights of such individuals within the State who are ineligible for protection and advocacy programs under part C of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6041 et seq.) and the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986 (42 U.S.C. 10801 et seq.) or client assistance programs under section 732 of this title;

(4) provide information on and make referrals to programs and services addressing the needs of individuals with disabilities in the State;

(5) develop a statement of objectives and priorities on an annual basis, and provide to the public, including individuals with disabilities and, as appropriate, their representatives, an opportunity to comment on the objectives and priorities established by, and activities of, the system including—

(A) the objectives and priorities for the activities of the system for each year and the rationale for the establishment of such objectives and priorities; and

(B) the coordination of programs provided through the system under this section with the advocacy programs of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title, the State long-term care ombudsman program established under the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3001 et seq.), the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.), and the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986 (42 U.S.C. 10801 et seq.);

(6) establish a grievance procedure for clients or prospective clients of the system to ensure that individuals with disabilities are afforded equal opportunity to access the services of the system;

(7) provide assurances to the Commissioner that funds made available under this section will be used to supplement and not supplant the non-Federal funds that would otherwise be made available for the purpose for which Federal funds are provided; and

(8) not use allotments provided under this section in a manner inconsistent with section 14404 of title 42.

Notwithstanding any other provision of law, the Commissioner shall pay directly to any system that complies with the provisions of this section, the amount of the allotment of the State involved under this section, unless the State provides otherwise.

Any amount paid to a State for a fiscal year that remains unobligated at the end of such year shall remain available to such State for obligation during the next fiscal year for the purposes for which such amount was paid.

For purposes of any audit, report, or evaluation of the performance of the program established under this section, the Commissioner shall not require such a program to disclose the identity of, or any other personally identifiable information related to, any individual requesting assistance under such program.

Notwithstanding subsection (n) of this section, a protection and advocacy system that—

(1) received funds for fiscal year 1992, under section 796g 1 of this title, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, to carry out a project; and

(2) receives a continuation award for such project for fiscal year 1993,

shall not be eligible to receive additional funds under this section for fiscal year 1993.

In any State in which an eligible system is located within a State agency, a State may use a portion of any allotment under subsection (c) of this section for the cost of the administration of the system required by this section. Such portion may not exceed 5 percent of the allotment.

The Commissioner may delegate the administration of this program to the Commissioner of the Administration on Developmental Disabilities within the Department of Health and Human Services.

The Commissioner shall annually prepare and submit to the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate a report describing the types of services and activities being undertaken by programs funded under this section, the total number of individuals served under this section, the types of disabilities represented by such individuals, and the types of issues being addressed on behalf of such individuals.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, and 1997.

As used in this section, the term “eligible system” means a protection and advocacy system that is established under part C of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6041 et seq.) and that meets the requirements of subsection (f) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title V, §509, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title V, §510(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4430; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §112(c), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 727; Pub. L. 105–12, §9(n), Apr. 30, 1997, 111 Stat. 28.)

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsecs. (a)(2), (f)(2), (3), (5)(B), and (n), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, and amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Part C of the Act is classified generally to subchapter III (§6041 et seq.) of chapter 75 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986, referred to in subsecs. (a)(2) and (f)(3), (5)(B), is Pub. L. 99–319, May 23, 1986, 100 Stat. 478, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 114 (§10801 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 10801 of Title 42 and Tables.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (c)(4)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (f)(5)(B), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 35 (§3001 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

Section 796g of this title, referred to in subsec. (i)(1), was repealed by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

1997—Subsec. (f)(8). Pub. L. 105–12 added par. (8).

1993—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(1), added par. (1) and struck out former par. (1) which read as follows: “are ineligible for client assistance programs under section 732 of this title; and”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(2), added subsec. (b) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (b). Text read as follows:

“(1)

“(2)

Subsec. (c)(4)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(3)(A)(i), substituted “paragraph (3)(B)” for “this subsection”.

Subsec. (c)(4)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(3)(A)(ii), substituted “allotted under paragraph (3)(A)” for “allotted”.

Subsec. (c)(5). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(3)(B), added par. (5) and struck out heading and text of former par. (5). Text read as follows:

“(A)

“(B)

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(4), added subsec. (d) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (d). Text read as follows: “Amounts necessary to provide allotments to systems within States in accordance with subsection (c)(3)(B) of this section as increased under subsection (c)(5) of this section, or to provide allotments in accordance with subsection (c)(4)(B) of this section as increased in accordance with subsection (c)(5) of this section, shall be derived by proportionately reducing the allotments of the remaining systems within States under subsection (c)(3) of this section, but with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining systems within States from being thereby reduced to less than the greater of $100,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for purposes of this section for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, as increased in accordance with subsection (c)(5) of this section.”

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(6), which directed the amendment of this section “in subsection (i), to read as follows: “, was executed by adding subsec. (i). Former subsec. (i) redesignated (n).

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(7), added subsec. (j) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (j). Text read as follows: “An eligible system may not use more than 5 percent of any allotment under subsection (c) of this section for the cost of administration of the system required by this section.”

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 103–73, §112(c)(5), redesignated subsec. (i) as (n).

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–12 effective Apr. 30, 1997, applicable to Federal payments made pursuant to obligations incurred after Apr. 30, 1997, for items and services provided on or after such date, and also applicable with respect to contracts entered into, renewed, or extended after Apr. 30, 1997, as well as contracts entered into before Apr. 30, 1997, to the extent permitted under such contracts, see section 11 of Pub. L. 105–12, set out as an Effective Date note under section 14401 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

This section is referred to in sections 718, 718b, 2202, 2212 of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b, 762, 2231 of this title.

This part is referred to in section 702 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

In order to promote useful opportunities in community service activities for individuals with disabilities who have poor employment prospects, the Secretary of Labor (hereinafter in this part referred to as the “Secretary”) is authorized to establish a community service employment pilot program for individuals with disabilities. For purposes of this part, the term “eligible individuals” means persons who are individuals with disabilities (as defined in section 706(8)(A) of this title) and who are referred to programs under this part by designated State units.

(1) The Secretary may enter into agreements with public or private nonprofit agencies or organizations, including national organizations, agencies of a State government or a political subdivision of a State (having elected or duly appointed governing officials), or a combination of such political subdivisions, or tribal organizations in order to carry out the pilot program referred to in subsection (a) of this section. Such agreements may include provisions consistent with subsection (c) of this section for the payment of the costs of projects developed by such organizations and agencies in cooperation with the Secretary. No payment shall be made by the Secretary toward the cost of any such project unless the Secretary determines that:

(A) Such project will provide employment only for eligible individuals, except that if eligible individuals are not available to serve as technical, administrative, or supervisory personnel for a project then such personnel may be recruited from among other individuals.

(B) Such project will provide employment for eligible individuals in the community in which such individuals reside, or in nearby communities.

(C) Such project will employ eligible individuals in services related to publicly owned and operated facilities and projects, or projects sponsored by organizations, other than political parties, exempt from taxation under section 501(c)(3) of title 26, except for projects involving the construction, operation, or maintenance of any facility used or to be used as a place for sectarian religious instruction or worship.

(D) Such project will contribute to the general welfare of the community in which eligible individuals are employed under such project.

(E) Such project (i) will result in an increase in employment opportunities over those opportunities which would otherwise be available, (ii) will not result in any displacement of currently employed workers (including partial displacement, such as a reduction in the hours of nonovertime work or wages or employment benefits), and (iii) will not impair existing contracts or result in the substitution of Federal funds for other funds in connection with work that would otherwise be performed.

(F) Such project will not employ any eligible individual to perform work which is the same or substantially the same as that performed by any other person who is on layoff from employment with the agency or organization sponsoring such project.

(G) Such project will utilize methods of recruitment and selection (including the listing of job vacancies with the State agency units designated under section 721(a)(2)(A) of this title to administer vocational rehabilitation services under this chapter) which will assure that the maximum number of eligible individuals will have an opportunity to participate in the project.

(H) Such project will provide for (i) such training as may be necessary to make the most effective use of the skills and talents of individuals who are participating in the project, and (ii) during the period of such training, a reasonable subsistence allowance for such individuals and the payment of any other reasonable expenses related to such training.

(I) Such project will provide safe and healthy working conditions for any eligible individual employed under such project and will pay any such individual at a rate of pay not lower than the rate of pay described in paragraph (2).

(J) Such project will be established or administered with the advice of (i) persons competent in the field of service in which employment is being provided, and (ii) persons who are knowledgeable with regard to the needs of individuals with disabilities.

(K) Such project will pay any reasonable costs for work-related expenses, transportation, and personal assistance services incurred by eligible individuals employed under such project in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(L) Such project will provide appropriate placement services for employees under the project to assist them in locating unsubsidized employment when the Federal assistance for the project terminates.

(2) The rate of pay referred to in subparagraph (I) of paragraph (1) is the highest of the following:

(A) the 1 prevailing rate of pay for persons employed in similar occupations by the same employer.

(B) The minimum wage which would be applicable to the employee under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.] if such employee were not exempt from such Act under section 13 thereof [29 U.S.C. 213].

(C) The State or local minimum wage for the most nearly comparable covered employment.

The Department of Labor shall not issue any certificate of exemption under section 14(c) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 214(c)] with respect to any person employed in a project under this section.

(1) The Secretary may pay not to exceed 90 percent of the cost of any project which is the subject of an agreement entered into under subsection (b) of this section. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the Secretary may pay all of the costs of any such project which is (A) an emergency or disaster project, or (B) a project located in an economically depressed area, as determined by the Secretary in consultation with the Secretary of Commerce and the Director of the Community Services Administration.

(2) The non-Federal share of any project under this part may be in cash or in kind. In determining the amount of the non-Federal share, the Secretary may attribute fair market value to services and facilities contributed from non-Federal sources.

Payments under this part may be made in advance or by way of reimbursement, and in such installments as the Secretary may determine.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §611, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2989; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title X, §1002(f), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1844; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(36), title VI, §601, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360, 4434.)

The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §§102(p)(36), 601(a), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” wherever appearing and “706(8)(A)” for “706(8)”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(J). Pub. L. 102–569, §102(p)(36), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(K). Pub. L. 102–569, §601(b), substituted “personal assistance services” for “attendant care”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 1002(f), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing and “section 706(8) of this title” for “section 706(7) of this title”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(J). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

For short title of this subchapter as the “Employment Opportunities for Handicapped Individuals Act”, see section 601 of Pub. L. 93–112 set out as a note under section 701 of this title.

The Community Services Administration, which was established by section 601 of the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2941), was terminated when the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964, Pub. L. 88–452, Aug. 20, 1964, 78 Stat. 508, as amended, was repealed, except for titles VIII and X, effective Oct. 1, 1981, by section 683(a) of Pub. L. 97–35, title VI, Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 519, which is classified to 42 U.S.C. 9912(a). An Office of Community Services, headed by a Director, was established in the Department of Health and Human Services by section 676 of Pub. L. 97–35, which is classified to 42 U.S.C. 9905.

1 So in original. Probably should be capitalized.

In order to effectively carry out the provisions of this part, the Secretary shall, through the Commissioner of the Rehalibitation 1 Services Administration, consult with any designated State unit with regard to—

(1) the localities in which community service projects of the type authorized by this part are most needed;

(2) the employment situations and types of skills possessed by eligible individuals in such localities; and

(3) potential projects suitable for funding in such localities.

The Secretary shall coordinate the pilot program established under this part with the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.] and the Community Services Block Grant Act [42 U.S.C. 9901 et seq.].

In carrying out this part, the Secretary may, with the consent of any other Federal, State, or local agency, use the services, equipment, personnel, and facilities of such agency with or without providing such agency with reimbursement and may use the services, equipment, and facilities of any other public or private entity on a similar basis.

Within one hundred and eighty days after the effective date of this part, the Secretary shall issue and publish in the Federal Register such regulations as may be necessary to carry out this part.

The Secretary shall not delegate any function of the Secretary under this part to any other department or agency of the Federal Government.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §612, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2991; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §165, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 30; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313.)

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 19 (§1501 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

The Community Services Block Grant Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is subtitle B (§§671–683) of title VI of Pub. L. 97–35, Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 511, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 106 (§9901 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 9901 of Title 42 and Tables.

The effective date of this part, referred to in subsec. (d), probably means the date of enactment of this part, which was Nov. 6, 1978.

1988—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–630 amended subsec. (b) by striking “programs authorized under” in the first sentence and all that follows through the period at the end and inserting “the Job Training Partnership Act and the Community Services Block Grant Act.”. The provisions struck out read as follows: “programs authorized under the Emergency Jobs and Unemployment Assistance Act of 1974, the Job Training Partnership Act, the Community Services Act of 1974, and the Emergency Employment Act of 1971. Appropriations under this part may not be used to carry out any program under the Acts referred to in the preceding sentence.”

1984—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Job Training Partnership Act” for “Comprehensive Employment and Training Act of 1973”.

1 So in original. Probably should be “Rehabilitation”.

Eligible individuals who are employed in any project funded under this part shall not be considered to be Federal employees as a result of such employment and shall not be subject to the provisions of part III of title 5.

No contract shall be entered into under this part with a contractor who is, or whose employees are, under State law, exempted from operation of any State workmen's compensation law generally applicable to employees, unless the contractor shall undertake to provide for persons to be employed under such contract, through insurance by a recognized carrier or by self-insurance authorized by State law, workmen's compensation coverage equal to that provided by law for covered employment.

No part of the wages, allowances, or reimbursement for transportation and personal assistance services costs made available to an eligible individual employed in any project funded under this part shall be treated as income or benefits for the purpose of any other program or provision of State or Federal law, unless the Secretary makes a case by case determination that disallowance of such income or benefits is inequitable or does not carry out the purposes of this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §613, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2991; amended Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §602, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4434.)

1992—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “personal assistance services” for “attendant care”.

(a) The Secretary shall consult with, and obtain the written views of, the Commissioner of the Rehabilitation Services Administration before establishing rules or general policy in the administration of this part.

(b) The Secretary shall consult and cooperate with the Director of the Community Services Administration, the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and the heads of other Federal agencies carrying out related programs, in order to achieve maximum coordination between such programs and the program established under this part. Each Federal agency shall cooperate with the Secretary in disseminating information relating to the availability of assistance under this part and in identifying individuals eligible for employment in projects assisted under this part.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §614, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2992; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §104(b)(5), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 18.)

1984—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “Secretary of Health and Human Services” for “Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare”.

The Community Services Administration, which was established by section 601 of the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964, as amended (42 U.S.C. 2941), was terminated when the Economic Opportunity Act of 1964, Pub. L. 88–452, Aug. 20, 1964, 78 Stat. 508, as amended, was repealed, except for titles VIII and X, effective Oct. 1, 1981, by section 683(a) of Pub. L. 97–35, title VI, Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 519, which is classified to 42 U.S.C. 9912(a). An Office of Community Services, headed by a Director, was established in the Department of Health and Human Services by section 676 of Pub. L. 97–35, which is classified to 42 U.S.C. 9905.

(1) Preference in awarding grants or contracts under this part shall be given to organizations of proven ability in providing employment services to individuals with disabilities under this program and similar programs. The Secretary, in awarding grants and contracts under this section, shall, to the extent feasible, assure an equitable distribution of activities under such grants and contracts among the States, taking into account the needs of underserved States and the needs of Indian tribes.

(2) The Secretary shall allot for projects within each State the sums appropriated for any fiscal year under section 795f of this title so that each State will receive an amount which bears the same ratio to such sums as the population of the State bears to the population of all the States.

The amount allotted for projects within any State under subsection (a) of this section for any fiscal year which the Secretary determines will not be required for such year shall be reallotted, from time to time and on such dates during such year as the Secretary may fix, to projects within other States in proportion to the original allotments to projects within such States under subsection (a) of this section for such year, but with such proportionate amount for any of such other States being reduced to the extent it exceeds the sum the Secretary estimates that projects within such State need and will be able to use for such year. The total of such reductions shall be similarly reallotted among the States whose proportionate amounts were not so reduced. Any amount reallotted to a State under this subsection during a year shall be deemed part of its allotment under subsection (a) of this section for such year.

The amount apportioned for projects within each State under subsection (a) of this section shall be apportioned among areas within each such State in an equitable manner, taking into consideration (1) the proportion which eligible individuals in each such area bears to the total number of such individuals, respectively, in that State, and (2) the relative distribution of such individuals residing in rural and urban areas within the State (including individuals residing on Indian reservations).

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §615, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2992; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title VII, §701, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1831; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(37), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4360.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “individuals with handicaps”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 701(a), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” and inserted requirement that the Secretary take into account the needs of Indian tribes.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §701(b), inserted provision relating to individuals residing on Indian reservations.

For purposes of this part—

(1) the term “community service” means social, health, welfare, and educational services, legal and other counseling services and assistance, including tax counseling and assistance and financial counseling, and library, recreational, and other similar services; conservation, maintenance, or restoration of natural resources; community betterment or beautification; antipollution and environmental quality efforts; economic development; and such other services essential and necessary to the community as the Secretary, by regulation, may prescribe; and

(2) the term “pilot program” means the community service employment program for individuals with disabilities established under this part.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §616, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2993; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(38), title VI, §603, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4361, 4434.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 inserted “and” at end of par. (1), substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” and a period for “; and” in par. (2), and struck out par. (3) which read as follows: “the term ‘attendant care’ means interpreter services for the deaf, reader services for the blind, and services provided to assist mentally retarded individuals to perform duties of employment.”

1986—Par. (2). Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this part such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §617, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2993; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §161, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 29; Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §702, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1831; Pub. L. 102–52, §7(a), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262; Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §604, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4434.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “1993 through 1997” for “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, and 1992”.

1991—Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1990, 1991, and 1992” for “1990, and 1991”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, and 1991” for “1984, 1985, and 1986”.

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this part such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986” for “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the purposes of this part $35,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1979, $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1980, $75,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1981, and $100,000,000 for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1982”.

This section is referred to in section 795d of this title.

This part is referred to in section 721 of this title.

(1) The purpose of this part is to create and expand job and career opportunities for individuals with disabilities in the competitive labor market by engaging the talent and leadership of private industry as partners in the rehabilitation process, to identify competitive job and career opportunities and the skills needed to perform such jobs, to create practical job and career readiness and training programs, and to provide job placements and career advancement.

(2) The Commissioner, in consultation with the Secretaries of Labor and Commerce and with designated State units, may award grants to individual employers, community rehabilitation program providers, labor unions, trade associations, Indian tribes, tribal organizations, designated State units, and other entities to establish jointly financed Projects With Industry to create and expand job and career opportunities for individuals with disabilities, which projects shall—

(A) provide for the establishment of business advisory councils, which shall—

(i) be comprised of—

(I) representatives of private industry, business concerns, and organized labor; and

(II) individuals with disabilities and their representatives;

(ii) identify job and career availability within the community;

(iii) identify the skills necessary to perform the jobs and careers identified; and

(iv) prescribe training programs designed to develop appropriate job and career skills for individuals with disabilities;

(B) provide individuals with disabilities with training in realistic work settings in order to prepare the individuals for employment and career advancement in the competitive market;

(C) provide job placement and career advancement services;

(D) to the extent appropriate, provide for—

(i) the development and modification of jobs and careers to accommodate the special needs of such individuals;

(ii) the distribution of rehabilitation technology to such individuals; and

(iii) the modification of any facilities or equipment of the employer that are used primarily by individuals with disabilities; and

(E) provide individuals with disabilities with such support services as may be required in order to maintain the employment and career advancement for which the individuals have received training under this part.

(3) An individual shall be eligible for services described in paragraph (2) if the appropriate designated State unit determines the individual to be an individual with a disability under section 706(8)(A) of this title or an individual with a severe disability under section 706(15)(A) of this title. In making such a determination, the unit shall rely on the determination made by the recipient of the grant under which the services are provided, to the extent appropriate and available and consistent with the requirements under this chapter. If a designated State unit does not notify a recipient of a grant within 60 days that the determination of the recipient is inappropriate, the recipient of the grant may consider the individual to be eligible.

(4) The Commissioner shall enter into an agreement with the grant recipient regarding the establishment of the project. Any agreement shall be jointly developed by the Commissioner, the grant recipient, and, to the extent practicable, the appropriate designated State unit and the individuals with disabilities (or their representatives) involved. Such agreements shall specify the terms of training and employment under the project, provide for the payment by the Commissioner of part of the costs of the project (in accordance with subsection (c) of this section), and contain the items required under subsection (b) of this section and such other provisions as the parties to the agreement consider to be appropriate.

(5) Any agreement shall include a description of a plan to annually conduct a review and evaluation of the operation of the project in accordance with standards developed by the Commissioner under subsection (d) of this section, and, in conducting the review and evaluation, to collect information on—

(A) the numbers and types of individuals with disabilities served;

(B) the types of services provided;

(C) the sources of funding;

(D) the percentage of resources committed to each type of service provided;

(E) the extent to which the employment status and earning power of individuals with disabilities changed following services;

(F) the extent of capacity building activities, including collaboration with business and industry and other organizations, agencies, and institutions;

(G) a comparison, if appropriate, of activities in prior years with activities in the most recent year; and

(H) the number of project participants who were terminated from project placements and the duration of such placements.

(6) The Commissioner may include, as part of agreements with grant recipients, authority for such grant recipients to provide technical assistance to—

(A) assist employers in hiring individuals with disabilities; or

(B) improve or develop relationships between—

(i) grant recipients or prospective grant recipients; and

(ii) employers or organized labor; or

(C) assist employers in understanding and meeting the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) as the Act relates to employment of individuals with disabilities.

No payment shall be made by the Commissioner under any agreement with a grant recipient entered into under subsection (a) of this section unless such agreement—

(1) provides an assurance that individuals with disabilities placed under such agreement shall receive at least the applicable minimum wage;

(2) provides an assurance that any individual with a disability placed under this part shall be afforded terms and benefits of employment equal to terms and benefits that are afforded to the similarly situated co-workers of the individual, and that such individuals with disabilities shall not be segregated from their co-workers; and

(3) provides an assurance that an annual evaluation report containing information specified under subsection (a)(5) of this section shall be submitted as determined to be appropriate by the Commissioner.

Payments under this section with respect to any project may not exceed 80 per centum of the costs of the project.

(1) The Commissioner shall develop standards for the evaluation described in subsection (a)(5) of this section and shall review and revise the evaluation standards as necessary, subject to paragraphs (2) and (3).

(2) In revising the standards for evaluation to be used by the grant recipients, the Commissioner shall obtain and consider recommendations for such standards from State vocational rehabilitation agencies, current and former grant recipients, professional organizations representing business and industry, organizations representing individuals with disabilities, individuals served by grant recipients, organizations representing community rehabilitation program providers, and labor organizations.

(3) No standards may be established under this subsection unless the standards are approved by the National Council on Disability. The Council shall approve the standards within ninety days after receiving the standards. If the Secretary of Education has not received notification of approval or disapproval from the Council within ninety days, the standards shall be deemed approved. A Council decision on such standards shall occur at a regularly scheduled meeting of the Council, and shall be the result of a simple majority of those present at the meeting.

(1)(A) A grant may be awarded under this section for a period of up to 5 years and such grant may be renewed.

(B) Grants under this section shall be awarded on a competitive basis. To be eligible to receive such a grant, a prospective grant recipient shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require.

(2) The Commissioner shall to the extent practicable ensure an equitable distribution of payments made under this section among the States. To the extent funds are available, the Commissioner shall award grants under this section to new projects that will serve individuals with disabilities in States, portions of States, Indian tribes, or tribal organizations, that are currently unserved or underserved by projects.

(1) The Commissioner shall, as necessary, develop and publish in the Federal Register in final form indicators of what constitutes minimum compliance consistent with the evaluation standards under subsection (d)(1) of this section.

(2) Each grant recipient shall report to the Commissioner at the end of each project year the extent to which the grant recipient is in compliance with the evaluation standards.

(3)(A) The Commissioner shall annually conduct on-site compliance reviews of at least 15 percent of grant recipients. The Commissioner shall select grant recipients for review on a random basis.

(B) The Commissioner shall use the indicators in determining compliance with the evaluation standards.

(C) The Commissioner shall ensure that at least one member of a team conducting such a review shall be an individual who—

(i) is not an employee of the Federal Government; and

(ii) has experience or expertise in conducting projects.

(D) The Commissioner shall ensure that—

(i) a representative of the appropriate designated State unit shall participate in the review; and

(ii) no person shall participate in the review of a grant recipient if—

(I) the grant recipient provides any direct financial benefit to the reviewer; or

(II) participation in the review would give the appearance of a conflict of interest.

(4) In making a determination concerning any subsequent grant under this section, the Commissioner shall consider the past performance of the applicant, if applicable. The Commissioner shall use compliance indicators developed under this subsection that are consistent with program evaluation standards developed under subsection (d) of this section to assess minimum project performance for purposes of making continuation awards in the third, fourth, and fifth years.

(5) Each fiscal year the Commissioner shall include in the annual report to Congress required by section 712 of this title an analysis of the extent to which grant recipients have complied with the evaluation standards. The Commissioner may identify individual grant recipients in the analysis. In addition, the Commissioner shall report the results of on-site compliance reviews, identifying individual grant recipients.

The Commissioner may provide, directly or by way of grant, contract, or cooperative agreement, technical assistance to—

(1) entities conducting projects for the purpose of assisting such entities in—

(A) the improvement of or the development of relationships with private industry or labor; or

(B) the improvement of relationships with State vocational rehabilitation agencies; and

(2) entities planning the development of new projects.

As used in this section:

(1) The term “agreement” means an agreement described in subsection (a)(4) of this section.

(2) The term “project” means a Project With Industry established under subsection (a)(2) of this section.

(3) The term “grant recipient” means a recipient of a grant under subsection (a)(2) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §621, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2993; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §§162, 163, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 29, 30; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(B), (C), title VII, §703(a)(1)–(3), (b)–(d), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1831, 1832; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313; Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §611, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4434.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(6)(C), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §611(a), amended subsec. (a) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions outlining purpose of subchapter and providing for agreements to establish jointly financed projects to expand job opportunities, training services, and supportive services for individuals with handicaps, as well as an evaluation plan documenting assistance to such individuals.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–569, §611(b), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions directing that no payment be made to an employer unless agreement provided assurances regarding minimum wage payment, right of Commissioner to review any termination of employment, equal terms of employment with other employees, and compliance with evaluation procedures.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–569, §611(c), added pars. (1) and (2), redesignated par. (4) as (3), and struck out former pars. (1) to (3) which in par. (1) required development of standards of evaluation to assist recipients of assistance under this subchapter to review and evaluate operation of their projects, in par. (2) required comprehensive evaluation of the Projects With Industry Program along with submission of report to Congress, and in par. (3) provided that in developing standards of evaluation, Commissioner should obtain and consider recommendations from various public and private organizations and entities.

Subsecs. (e) to (h). Pub. L. 102–569, §611(d), amended subsecs. (e) to (h) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions which: in subsec. (e), provided for effective period of financial assistance agreements and annual review; in subsec. (f), provided for indicators for compliance with evaluation standards, annual reports, on-site compliance reviews, and analysis included in reports to Congress; in subsec. (g), provided for technical assistance to entities conducting or planning Projects With Industry; and in subsec. (h), provided for advance availability of funds for certain grantees, compliance with evaluation standards, unserved geographic areas, competitive basis for awarding grants, and continuation of assistance.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 102–569, §611(e), struck out subsec. (i) which established priority in the approving of applications for assistance to unserved or underserved areas.

1988—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 100–630, §207(b)(1), substituted “individuals” for “people” after “qualify”.

Subsec. (a)(2)(D)(iii). Pub. L. 100–630, §207(b)(2), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(1), (3). Pub. L. 100–630, §207(b)(3), (4), substituted “assurance” for “assurances”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–630, §207(b)(5)–(7), substituted “subsection (a)(4)” for “section (a)(3)” in pars. (1) and (2) and “on Disability” for “on the Handicapped” in par. (4).

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(a)(1)(B), added par. (1). Former par. (1) redesignated (2).

Subsec. (a)(2)(A) to (C). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(a)(1)(A), (2), redesignated former par. (1) as (2), amended subpars. (A) to (C) generally, and redesignated former par. (2) as (3). Prior to amendment, subpars. (A) to (C) read as follows:

“(A) shall provide individuals with handicaps with training and employment in a realistic work setting in order to prepare them for employment in the competitive market;

“(B) shall provide individuals with handicaps with such supportive services as may be required to permit them to continue to engage in the employment for which they have received training under this section; and

“(C) shall, to the extent appropriate, expand job opportunities for individuals with handicaps by providing for (i) the development and modification of jobs to accommodate the special needs of such individuals, (ii) the distribution of special aids, appliances, or adapted equipment to such individuals, (iii) the establishment of appropriate job placement services, and (iv) the modification of any facilities or equipment of the employer which are to be used primarily by individuals with handicaps.”

Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (a)(2)(D), (E). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(a)(2), added subpars. (D) and (E).

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 703(a)(1)(A), redesignated former par. (2) as (3) and substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”. Former par. (3) redesignated (4).

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 99–506, §§103(d)(2)(C), 703(a)(1)(A), (3), redesignated former par. (3) as (4) and substituted “each project year” for “each year of a funding cycle” in introductory provisions, and “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals” in subpars. (A) and (E).

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(B), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(B), (C), substituted “individual with handicaps” for “handicapped individual” and “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(b)(A)–(C), added par. (4) set out first.

Pub. L. 99–506, §703(b)(1)–(3), added par. (4) set out second.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(c), inserted provision that such standards shall be revised as necessary, subject to par. (4) of this subsection.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 99–506, §103(d)(2)(C), substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(c), amended subsec. (e) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (e) read as follows: “The parties to each agreement receiving assistance under this section in the fiscal year in which the Rehabilitation Amendments of 1984 is enacted shall continue to receive assistance through September 30, 1986, unless the Commissioner determines that there is a substantial failure to comply with the agreement.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(d)(1), amended subsec. (f) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (f) read as follows: “The Commissioner shall to the extent practicable assure an equitable distribution of payments made under this section among the States.”

Subsecs. (g) to (i). Pub. L. 99–506, §703(d), added subsecs. (g) to (i).

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–221, §162(a), (b), inserted “, designated State units” after “employers” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) in par. (1) and added par. (3).

Subsecs. (d) to (f). Pub. L. 98–221, §§162(c), 163, added subsecs. (d) to (f).

Section 703(a)(4) of Pub. L. 99–506 provided that: “The amendment made by paragraph (2), adding clause (E) to section 621(a)(2) of the Act [29 U.S.C. 795g(a)(2)(E)], shall take effect one year after the date of enactment of this Act [Oct. 21, 1986].”

This section is referred to in section 797a of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §622, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2994, and amended, which related to business opportunities for individuals with disabilities and promulgation of regulations, was renumbered section 641 of Pub. L. 93–112, by Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §612(a)(2), (3), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4438, and transferred to section 795r of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this part, such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §622, formerly §623, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2994; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §164, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 30; Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1834; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313; Pub. L. 102–52, §7(b), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262; renumbered §622 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §613(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4439.)

A prior section 622 of Pub. L. 93–112 was renumbered section 641 and classified to section 795r of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §613(a)(2), substituted “this part, such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997” for “section 795g of this title, $16,070,000 for fiscal year 1987, $17,010,000 for fiscal year 1988, $18,030,000 for fiscal year 1989, $19,149,000 for fiscal year 1990, $19,925,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992, and for section 795h of this title such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, and 1992”.

1991—Pub. L. 102–52 inserted “and such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1992” after “1991,” and “, and 1992” before the period and struck out “and” after “1990,” in two places.

1988—Pub. L. 100–630 inserted comma after “fiscal year 1991” and substituted “1989, 1990, and” for “1989, 1990 and”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary to carry out the provisions for section 795g of this title, $13,000,000 for fiscal year 1984, $14,400,000 for fiscal year 1985, and $15,200,000 for fiscal year 1986; and for section 795h of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986.”

1984—Pub. L. 98–221 substituted “for section 795g of this title, $13,000,000 for fiscal year 1984, $14,400,000 for fiscal year 1985, and $15,200,000 for fiscal year 1986; and for section 795h of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1984, 1985, and 1986” for “of this part for each fiscal year beginning before October 1, 1982”.

This part is referred to in sections 718, 721, 728, 740, 741, 777a, 796 of this title.

It is the purpose of this part to authorize allotments, in addition to grants for vocational rehabilitation services under subchapter I of this chapter, to assist States in developing collaborative programs with appropriate entities to provide supported employment services for individuals with the most severe disabilities who require supported employment services to enter or retain competitive employment.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §631, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4439.)

A prior section 795j, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §631, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1834, outlined the purpose of this part, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a).

The Secretary shall allot the sums appropriated for each fiscal year to carry out this part among the States on the basis of relative population of each State, except that—

(A) no State shall receive less than $250,000, or one-third of one percent of the sums appropriated for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater; and

(B) if the sums appropriated to carry out this part for the fiscal year exceed by $1,000,000 or more the sums appropriated to carry out this part in fiscal year 1992, no State shall receive less than $300,000, or one-third of one percent of the sums appropriated for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater.

For the purposes of this subsection, Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Republic of Palau, and the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands shall not be considered to be States.

Each jurisdiction described in subparagraph (A) shall be allotted not less than one-eighth of one percent of the amounts appropriated for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

Whenever the Commissioner determines that any amount of an allotment to a State for any fiscal year will not be expended by such State for carrying out the provisions of this part, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the provisions of this part to one or more of the States that the Commissioner determines will be able to use additional amounts during such year for carrying out such provisions. Any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this section, be regarded as an increase in the allotment of the State (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §632, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4439.)

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

A prior section 795k, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §632, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1834, related to eligibility for services under this part, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a). See section 795m of this title.

This section is referred to in section 795n of this title.

Funds provided under this part may be used to provide supported employment services to individuals who are eligible under this part. Funds provided under this part, subchapter I of this chapter, or subsection (b) or (c) of section 777a of this title may not be used to provide extended services to individuals who are eligible under this part or subchapter I of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §633, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4440; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §113, Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 728.)

A prior section 795*l*, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §633, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1834; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313, provided for allotments to States, unused funds, and planning grants, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a). See section 795k of this title.

1993—Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “subsection (b) or (c)” for “subsection (c) or (f)”.

An individual shall be eligible under this part to receive supported employment services authorized under this chapter if—

(1) the individual is eligible for vocational rehabilitation services;

(2) the individual is determined to be an individual with the most severe disabilities; and

(3) a comprehensive assessment of rehabilitation needs of the individual provided under section 722(b)(1)(A) of this title, including an evaluation of rehabilitation, career, and job needs, identifies supported employment as the appropriate rehabilitation objective for the individual.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §634, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4440.)

A prior section 795m, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §634, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1835; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313; Pub. L. 102–119, §26(e), Oct. 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 607, provided for submission of State plans for assistance under this part, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a). See section 795n of this title.

To be eligible for an allotment under this part, a State shall submit to the Commissioner, as part of the State plan under section 721 of this title, a State plan supplement for providing supported employment services authorized under this chapter to individuals who are eligible under this chapter to receive the services. Each State shall make such annual revisions in the plan supplement as may be necessary.

Each such plan supplement shall—

(1) designate each agency that the State designated under section 721(a)(1) of this title as the agency to administer the program assisted under this part;

(2) summarize the results of the comprehensive, statewide assessment conducted under section 721(a)(5) of this title, with respect to the rehabilitation and career needs of individuals with severe disabilities and the need for supported employment services, including needs related to coordination and use of information within the State relating to section 1418(b)(1)(C) of title 20;

(3) describe the quality, scope, and extent of supported employment services authorized under this chapter to be provided to individuals who are eligible under this chapter to receive the services and specify the goals and plans of the State with respect to the distribution of funds received under section 795k of this title;

(4) demonstrate evidence of the efforts of the designated State agency to identify and make arrangements (including entering into cooperative agreements) with other State agencies and other appropriate entities to assist in the provision of supported employment services;

(5) demonstrate evidence of the efforts of the designated State agency to identify and make arrangements (including entering into cooperative agreements) with other public or nonprofit agencies or organizations within the State, employers, natural supports, and other entities with respect to the provision of extended services;

(6) provide assurances that—

(A) funds made available under this part will only be used to provide supported employment services authorized under this chapter to individuals who are eligible under this part to receive the services;

(B) that the comprehensive assessments of individuals with severe disabilities conducted under section 722(b)(1)(A) of this title and funded under subchapter I of this chapter will include consideration of supported employment as an appropriate rehabilitation objective;

(C) an individualized written rehabilitation program, as required by section 722 of this title, will be developed and updated using funds under subchapter I of this chapter in order to—

(i) specify the supported employment services to be provided;

(ii) specify the expected extended services needed; and

(iii) identify the source of extended services, which may include natural supports, or to the extent that it is not possible to identify the source of extended services at the time the individualized written rehabilitation program is developed, a statement describing the basis for concluding that there is a reasonable expectation that such sources will become available;

(D) the State will use funds provided under this part only to supplement, and not supplant, the funds provided under subchapter I of this chapter, in providing supported employment services specified in the individualized written rehabilitation program;

(E) services provided under an individualized written rehabilitation program will be coordinated with services provided under other individualized plans established under other Federal or State programs;

(F) to the extent jobs skills training is provided, the training will be provided on-site; and

(G) supported employment services will include placement in an integrated setting for the maximum number of hours possible based on the unique strengths, resources, interests, concerns, abilities, and capabilities of individuals with the most severe disabilities;

(7) provide assurances that the State agencies designated under paragraph (1) will expend not more than 5 percent of the allotment of the State under this part for administrative costs of carrying out this part; and

(8) contain such other information and be submitted in such manner as the Commissioner may require.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §635, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4440.)

A prior section 795n, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §635, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1836; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(g), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, related to availability and comparability of services under this part, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a). See section 795*l* of this title.

This section is referred to in section 795*o* of this title.

Each State agency designated under section 795n(b)(1) of this title shall collect the client information required by section 712 of this title separately for supported employment clients under this part and for supported employment clients under subchapter I of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §636, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4442.)

A prior section 795*o*, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §636, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1836, contained provisions similar to this section, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a).

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit a State from providing supported employment services in accordance with the State plan submitted under section 721 of this title by using funds made available through a State allotment under section 730 of this title.

Nothing in this part shall be construed to prohibit a State from providing discrete postemployment services in accordance with the State plan submitted under section 721 of this title by using funds made available through a State allotment under section 730 of this title to an individual who is eligible under this part.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §637, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4442.)

A prior section 795p, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §637, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1837, contained a savings provision not prohibiting a State from carrying out post-employment services leading to supported employment, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a).

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this part such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §638, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VI, §621(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4442.)

A prior section 795q, Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §638, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VII, §704(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1837; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(h), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314; Pub. L. 102–52, §7(c), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262, authorized appropriations for this part for fiscal years 1987 to 1992, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §621(a).

(a) The Commissioner, in consultation with the Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of Commerce, may make grants to, or enter into contracts with, individuals with disabilities to enable them to establish or operate commercial or other enterprises to develop or market their products or services. Within ninety days after November 6, 1978, the Commissioner shall promulgate regulations to carry out this section, including regulations specifying (1) the maximum amount of money which may be provided under this section to any participant, and (2) procedures for certification, by designated State units, of individuals eligible to participate in any program under this section.

(b) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section such sums as may be necessary for each of the 1993 through 1997 fiscal years.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VI, §641, formerly §622, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title II, §201, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2994; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §207(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3313; renumbered §641 and amended Pub. L. 102–569, title I, §102(p)(39), title VI, §612(a)(2), (3), (b), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4361, 4438.)

Section was formerly classified to section 795h of this title prior to renumbering by Pub. L. 102–569.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “disabilities” for “handicaps” in section catchline and in text, designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), and added subsec. (b).

1988—Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of Commerce” for “Secretaries of Labor and Commerce”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–506 substituted “individuals with handicaps” for “handicapped individuals”.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b, 728, 743, 762, 2231 of this title.

The purpose of this part is to promote a philosophy of independent living, including a philosophy of consumer control, peer support, self-help, self-determination, equal access, and individual and system advocacy, in order to maximize the leadership, empowerment, independence, and productivity of individuals with disabilities, and the integration and full inclusion of individuals with disabilities into the mainstream of American society, by—

(1) providing financial assistance to States for providing, expanding, and improving the provision of independent living services;

(2) providing financial assistance to develop and support statewide networks of centers for independent living; and

(3) providing financial assistance to States for improving working relationships among State independent living rehabilitation service programs, centers for independent living, Statewide Independent Living Councils established under section 796d of this title, State vocational rehabilitation programs receiving assistance under subchapter I of this chapter, State programs of supported employment services receiving assistance under part C of subchapter VI of this chapter, client assistance programs receiving assistance under section 732 of this title, programs funded under other subchapters of this chapter, programs funded under other Federal law, and programs funded through non-Federal sources.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §701, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(a), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 728.)

A prior section 796, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §701, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2995, provided Congressional statement of purpose of former subchapter VII, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1).

1993—Par. (3). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “other Federal law” for “other Federal programs”.

Section 702 of title VII of Pub. L. 102–569 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(c)

As used in this part:

The term “center for independent living” means a consumer-controlled, community-based, cross-disability, nonresidential private nonprofit agency that—

(A) is designed and operated within a local community by individuals with disabilities; and

(B) provides an array of independent living services.

The term “consumer control” means, with respect to an entity, that the entity vests power and authority in individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §702, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.)

A prior section 796a, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §702, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2995; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(A), (C), title VIII, §801, title X, §§1001(g)(1), 1002(h), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1837, 1843, 1844; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, provided eligibility requirements and definition of “comprehensive services for independent living”, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796b of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 796f–3, 2211 of this title.

Services may be provided under this part to any individual with a severe disability, as defined in section 706(15)(B) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §703, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4444.)

A prior section 796b, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §703, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2996; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title X, §1001(g)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1843; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, related to State allotments for comprehensive services for independent living, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796e of this title.

To be eligible to receive financial assistance under this part, a State shall submit to the Commissioner, and obtain approval of, a State plan containing such provisions as the Commissioner may require, including, at a minimum, the provisions required in this section.

The plan under paragraph (1) shall be jointly developed and signed by—

(A) the director of the designated State unit; and

(B) the chairperson of the Statewide Independent Living Council, acting on behalf of and at the direction of the Council.

The plan shall provide for the review and revision of the plan, not less than once every 3 years, to ensure the existence of appropriate planning, financial support and coordination, and other assistance to appropriately address, on a statewide and comprehensive basis, needs in the State for—

(A) the provision of State independent living services;

(B) the development and support of a statewide network of centers for independent living; and

(C) working relationships between—

(i) programs providing independent living services and independent living centers; and

(ii) the vocational rehabilitation program established under subchapter I of this chapter, and other programs providing services for individuals with disabilities.

The State shall submit the plan to the Commissioner 90 days before the completion date of the preceding plan. If a State fails to submit such a plan that complies with the requirements of this section, the Commissioner may withhold financial assistance under this part until such time as the State submits such a plan.

The plan shall provide for the establishment of a Statewide Independent Living Council in accordance with section 796d of this title.

The plan shall designate the designated State unit of such State as the agency that, on behalf of the State, shall—

(1) receive, account for, and disburse funds received by the State under this part based on the plan;

(2) provide administrative support services for a program under subpart 2, and a program under subpart 3 in a case in which the program is administered by the State under section 796f–2 of this title;

(3) keep such records and afford such access to such records as the Commissioner finds to be necessary with respect to the programs; and

(4) submit such additional information or provide such assurances as the Commissioner may require with respect to the programs.

The plan shall—

(1) specify the objectives to be achieved under the plan and establish timelines for the achievement of the objectives; and

(2) explain how such objectives are consistent with and further the purpose of this part.

The plan shall provide that the State will provide independent living services under this part to individuals with severe disabilities, and will provide the services to such an individual in accordance with an independent living plan mutually agreed upon by an appropriate staff member of the service provider and the individual, unless the individual signs a waiver stating that such a plan is unnecessary.

The plan shall describe the extent and scope of independent living services to be provided under this part to meet such objectives. If the State makes arrangements, by grant or contract, for providing such services, such arrangements shall be described in the plan.

The plan shall set forth a design for the establishment of a statewide network of centers for independent living that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

In States in which State funding for centers for independent living equals or exceeds the amount of funds allotted to the State under subpart 3, as provided in section 796f–2 of this title, the plan shall include policies, practices, and procedures governing the awarding of grants to centers for independent living and oversight of such centers consistent with section 796f–2 of this title.

The plan shall set forth the steps that will be taken to maximize the cooperation, coordination, and working relationships among—

(1) the independent living rehabilitation service program, the Statewide Independent Living Council, and centers for independent living; and

(2) the designated State unit, other State agencies represented on such Council, other councils that address the needs of specific disability populations and issues, and other public and private entities determined to be appropriate by the Council.

The plan shall describe how services funded under this part will be coordinated with, and complement, other services, in order to avoid unnecessary duplication with other Federal, State, and local programs.

The plan shall describe efforts to coordinate Federal and State funding for centers for independent living and independent living services.

With respect to services and centers funded under this part, the plan shall set forth steps to be taken regarding outreach to populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this subchapter, including minority groups and urban and rural populations.

The plan shall provide satisfactory assurances that all recipients of financial assistance under this part will—

(1) notify all individuals seeking or receiving services under this part about the availability of the client assistance program under section 732 of this title, the purposes of the services provided under such program, and how to contact such program;

(2) take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified individuals with disabilities on the same terms and conditions required with respect to the employment of such individuals under the provisions of section 793 of this title;

(3) adopt such fiscal control and fund accounting procedures as may be necessary to ensure the proper disbursement of and accounting for funds paid to the State under this part;

(4)(A) maintain records that fully disclose—

(i) the amount and disposition by such recipient of the proceeds of such financial assistance;

(ii) the total cost of the project or undertaking in connection with which such financial assistance is given or used; and

(iii) the amount of that portion of the cost of the project or undertaking supplied by other sources;

(B) maintain such other records as the Commissioner determines to be appropriate to facilitate an effective audit;

(C) afford such access to records maintained under subparagraphs (A) and (B) as the Commissioner determines to be appropriate; and

(D) submit such reports with respect to such records as the Commissioner determines to be appropriate;

(5) provide access to the Commissioner and the Comptroller General or any of their duly authorized representatives, for the purpose of conducting audits and examinations, of any books, documents, papers, and records of the recipients that are pertinent to the financial assistance received under this part; and

(6) provide for public hearings regarding the contents of the plan during both the formulation and review of the plan.

The plan shall establish a method for the periodic evaluation of the effectiveness of the plan in meeting the objectives established in subsection (d) of this section, including evaluation of satisfaction by individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §704, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4444; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(b), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 728.)

A prior section 796c, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §704, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2997; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, related to payments to States from allotments to pay Federal share of expenditures, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796e–1 of this title.

1993—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “a program under subpart 2, and a program under subpart 3 in a case in which the program is administered by the State under section 796f–2 of this title” for “programs under subparts 2 and 3”.

Secretary of Education to implement provisions of this section as soon as is practicable after Oct. 29, 1992, consistent with effective and efficient administration of this chapter, but not later than Oct. 1, 1993, see section 702(c) of Pub. L. 102–569, set out as a note under section 796 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 762, 796d, 796d–1, 796f–1, 796f–2, 796f–4, 796k of this title.

To be eligible to receive financial assistance under this part, each State shall establish a Statewide Independent Living Council (referred to in this section as the “Council”). The Council shall not be established as an entity within a State agency.

Members of the Council shall be appointed by the Governor or the appropriate entity within the State responsible for making appointments, within 90 days after October 29, 1992. The appointing authority shall select members after soliciting recommendations from representatives of organizations representing a broad range of individuals with disabilities and organizations interested in individuals with disabilities.

The Council shall include—

(A) at least one director of a center for independent living chosen by the directors of centers for independent living within the State; and

(B) as ex officio, nonvoting members—

(i) a representative from the designated State unit; and

(ii) representatives from other State agencies that provide services for individuals with disabilities.

The Council may include—

(A) other representatives from centers for independent living;

(B) parents and guardians of individuals with disabilities;

(C) advocates of and for individuals with disabilities;

(D) representatives from private businesses;

(E) representatives from organizations that provide services for individuals with disabilities; and

(F) other appropriate individuals.

The Council shall be composed of members—

(i) who provide statewide representation;

(ii) who represent a broad range of individuals with disabilities;

(iii) who are knowledgeable about centers for independent living and independent living services; and

(iv) a majority of whom are persons who are—

(I) individuals with disabilities described in section 706(8)(B) of this title; and

(II) not employed by any State agency or center for independent living.

A majority of the voting members of the Council shall be—

(i) individuals with disabilities described in section 706(8)(B) of this title; and

(ii) not employed by any State agency or center for independent living.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the Council shall select a chairperson from among the voting membership of the Council.

In States in which the Governor does not have veto power pursuant to State law, the Governor shall designate a voting member of the Council to serve as the chairperson of the Council or shall require the Council to so designate such a voting member.

Each member of the Council shall serve for a term of 3 years, except that—

(i) a member appointed to fill a vacancy occurring prior to the expiration of the term for which a predecessor was appointed, shall be appointed for the remainder of such term; and

(ii) the terms of service of the members initially appointed shall be (as specified by the appointing authority) for such fewer number of years as will provide for the expiration of terms on a staggered basis.

No member of the Council may serve more than two consecutive full terms.

Any vacancy occurring in the membership of the Council shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment. The vacancy shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Council.

The Council shall—

(1) jointly develop and sign (in conjunction with the designated State unit) the State plan required in section 796c of this title;

(2) monitor, review, and evaluate the implementation of the State plan;

(3) coordinate activities with the State Rehabilitation Advisory Council established under section 725 of this title and councils that address the needs of specific disability populations and issues under other Federal law;

(4) ensure that all regularly scheduled meetings of the Council are open to the public and sufficient advance notice is provided; and

(5) submit to the Commissioner such periodic reports as the Commissioner may reasonably request, and keep such records, and afford such access to such records, as the Commissioner finds necessary to verify such reports.

The Council is authorized to hold such hearings and forums as the Council may determine to be necessary to carry out the duties of the Council.

The Council shall prepare, in conjunction with the designated State unit, a plan for the provision of such resources, including such staff and personnel, as may be necessary to carry out the functions of the Council under this section, with funds made available under this part and part C of subchapter I of this chapter and from other public and private sources. The resource plan shall, to the maximum extent possible, rely on the use of resources in existence during the period of implementation of the plan.

Each Council shall, consistent with State law, supervise and evaluate such staff and other personnel as may be necessary to carry out the functions of the Council under this section.

While assisting the Council in carrying out its duties, staff and other personnel shall not be assigned duties by the designated State agency or any other agency or office of the State, that would create a conflict of interest.

The Council may use such resources to reimburse members of the Council for reasonable and necessary expenses of attending Council meetings and performing Council duties (including child care and personal assistance services), and to pay compensation to a member of the Council, if such member is not employed or must forfeit wages from other employment, for each day the member is engaged in performing Council duties.

To the extent that a State has established a Council before September 30, 1992, that is comparable to the Council described in this section, such Council shall be considered to be in compliance with this section. Within 1 year after October 29, 1992, such State shall establish a Council that complies in full with this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §705, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4446; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(c), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 728.)

A prior section 796d, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §705, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2997; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(B), (C), (h)(2), title VIII, §802, title X, §1001(g)(3), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1811, 1837, 1843; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314; Pub. L. 102–119, §26(e), Oct. 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 607, related to State plans for providing comprehensive services for independent living, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796c of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(c)(1), substituted “a State agency” for “another State agency”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(c)(2)(A), added par. (4) and struck out heading and text of former par. (4). Text read as follows: “The Council shall be composed of members—

“(A) who provide statewide representation;

“(B) who represent a broad range of individuals with disabilities;

“(C) who are knowledgeable about centers for independent living and independent living services; and

“(D) a majority of whom are persons who are—

“(i) individuals with disabilities described in section 706(8)(B) of this title; and

“(ii) not employed by any State agency or center for independent living.”

Subsec. (b)(5)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(c)(2)(B)(i), substituted “voting membership” for “membership”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(c)(2)(B)(ii), substituted “voting member” for “member” in two places.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(c)(3), substituted “sign” for “submit” and “unit” for “agency”.

This section is referred to in sections 721, 725, 742, 743, 796, 796c, 796e–2, 2212 of this title.

The Commissioner shall approve any State plan submitted under section 796c of this title that the Commissioner determines meets the requirements of section 796c of this title, and shall disapprove any such plan that does not meet such requirements, as soon as practicable after receiving the plan. Prior to such disapproval, the Commissioner shall notify the State of the intention to disapprove the plan, and shall afford such State reasonable notice and opportunity for a hearing.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the provisions of subsections (c) and (d) of section 727 of this title shall apply to any State plan submitted to the Commissioner under section 796c of this title.

For purposes of the application described in subparagraph (A), all references in such provisions—

(i) to the Secretary shall be deemed to be references to the Commissioner; and

(ii) to section 721 of this title shall be deemed to be references to section 796c of this title.

Not later than October 1, 1993, the Commissioner shall develop and publish in the Federal Register indicators of minimum compliance consistent with the standards set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

The Commissioner shall annually conduct on-site compliance reviews of at least 15 percent of the centers for independent living that receive funds under section 796f–1 of this title and shall periodically conduct such a review of each such center. The Commissioner shall select such centers and such State units for review on a random basis. The Commissioner shall annually conduct onsite compliance reviews of at least one-third of the designated State units that receive funding under section 796f–2 of this title, and, to the extent necessary to determine the compliance of such a State unit with subsections (f) and (g) of section 796f–2 of this title, centers that receive funding under section 796f–2 of this title in such State.

The Commissioner shall—

(A) to the maximum extent practicable, carry out such a review by using employees of the Department who are knowledgeable about the provision of independent living services;

(B) ensure that the employee of the Department with responsibility for supervising such a review shall have such knowledge; and

(C) ensure that at least one member of a team conducting such a review shall be an individual who—

(i) is not a government employee; and

(ii) has experience in the operation of centers for independent living.

The Commissioner shall include, in the annual report required under section 712 of this title, information on the extent to which centers for independent living receiving funds under subpart 3 have complied with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title. The Commissioner may identify individual centers for independent living in the analysis. The Commissioner shall report the results of on-site compliance reviews, identifying individual centers for independent living and other recipients of assistance under this part.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §706, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4448; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(d), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 729.)

A prior section 796d–1, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §706, as added Pub. L. 99–506, title VIII, §803(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1837; amended Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(e), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, provided for a State Independent Living Council, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796d of this title.

1993—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 103–73 in first sentence substituted “section 796f–1 of this title” for “subpart 3”, in second sentence inserted “and such State units” after “select such centers”, and inserted after second sentence: “The Commissioner shall annually conduct onsite compliance reviews of at least one-third of the designated State units that receive funding under section 796f–2 of this title, and, to the extent necessary to determine the compliance of such a State unit with subsections (f) and (g) of section 796f–2 of this title, centers that receive funding under section 796f–2 of this title in such State.”

This section is referred to in sections 796e, 796e–1, 796f of this title.

This subpart is referred to in sections 718, 796c, 796f–1, 796f–2 of this title.

Except as provided in subparagraphs (B) and (C), from sums appropriated for each fiscal year to carry out this subpart, the Commissioner shall make an allotment to each State whose State plan has been approved under section 796d–1 of this title of an amount bearing the same ratio to such sums as the population of the State bears to the population of all States.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this subpart, the amount of any allotment made under subparagraph (A) to a State for a fiscal year shall not be less than the amount of an allotment made to the State for fiscal year 1992 under part A of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this subpart, and except as provided in subparagraph (B), the allotment to any State under subparagraph (A) shall be not less than $275,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater, and the allotment of any State under this section for any fiscal year that is less than $275,000 or one-third of one percent of such sums shall be increased to the greater of the two amounts.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(C), Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau shall not be considered to be States.

Each jurisdiction described in subparagraph (A) shall be allotted under paragraph (1)(A) not less than one-eighth of one percent of the amounts made available for purposes of this subpart for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

For any fiscal year, beginning in fiscal year 1994, in which the total amount appropriated to carry out this subpart exceeds the total amount appropriated to carry out this subpart for the preceding fiscal year by a percentage greater than the most recent percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers published by the Secretary of Labor under section 720(c)(1) of this title, the Commissioner shall increase the minimum allotment under paragraph (1)(C) by such percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers.

To provide allotments to States in accordance with subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, to provide minimum allotments to States (as increased under subsection (a)(3) of this section) under subsection (a)(1)(C) of this section, or to provide minimum allotments to States under subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section, the Commissioner shall proportionately reduce the allotments of the remaining States under subsection (a)(1)(A) of this section, with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining State from being reduced to less than the amount required by subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section.

Whenever the Commissioner determines that any amount of an allotment to a State for any fiscal year will not be expended by such State in carrying out the provisions of this subpart, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the provisions of this subpart to one or more of the States that the Commissioner determines will be able to use additional amounts during such year for carrying out such provisions. Any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this section, be regarded as an increase in the allotment of the State (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §711, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4450; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(e), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 729.)

Part A of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(B), means former part A (§796 et seq.) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

A prior section 796e, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §711, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2998; amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §171, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 30; Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), title VIII, §§804(a)(1), (b), (c), 805, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, 1838, 1839; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(f), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, related to establishment and operation of independent living centers, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1). See section 796f et seq. of this title.

1993—Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(e)(1)(A)(i), substituted “paragraph (1)(C)” for “this subsection”.

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(e)(1)(A)(ii), substituted “allotted under paragraph (1)(A)” for “allotted”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(e)(1)(B), added par. (3) and struck out heading and text of former par. (3). Text read as follows: “For purposes of determining the minimum amount of an allotment under paragraph (1)(C), the amount $275,000 shall, in the case of such allotments for fiscal year 1994 and subsequent fiscal years, be increased to the extent necessary to offset the effects of inflation occurring since October 1992, as measured by the percentage increase in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers (U.S. city average) during the period ending on April 1 of the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the allotment is to be made.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(e)(2), added subsec. (b) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (b). Text read as follows: “Subject to subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, amounts necessary to provide allotments to States in accordance with subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, or in accordance with subsection (a)(1)(C) of this section as increased under subsection (a)(3) of this section, or to provide allotments under subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section, shall be derived by proportionately reducing the allotments of the remaining States under subsection (a)(1) of this section, but with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining States from being thereby reduced to less than the greater of $275,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for purposes of this subpart for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, as increased in accordance with subsection (a)(3) of this section.”

This section is referred to in section 796e–1 of this title.

From the allotment of each State for a fiscal year under section 796e of this title, the State shall be paid the Federal share of the expenditures incurred during such year under its State plan approved under section 796d–1 of this title. Such payments may be made (after necessary adjustments on account of previously made overpayments or underpayments) in advance or by way of reimbursement, and in such installments and on such conditions as the Commissioner may determine.

The Federal share with respect to any State for any fiscal year shall be 90 percent of the expenditures incurred by the State during such year under its State plan approved under section 796d–1 of this title.

The non-Federal share of the cost of any project that receives assistance through an allotment under this subpart may be provided in cash or in kind, fairly evaluated, including plant, equipment, or services.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §712, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4451; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(f), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 730.)

1993—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 103–73 struck out heading and text of par. (3). Text read as follows: “For the purpose of determining the Federal share with respect to any State, expenditures by a political subdivision of such State shall, subject to regulations prescribed by the Commissioner, be regarded as expenditures by such State.”

The State may use funds received under this subpart to provide the resources described in section 796d(e) of this title, relating to the Statewide Independent Living Council, and may use funds received under this subpart—

(1) to provide independent living services to individuals with severe disabilities;

(2) to demonstrate ways to expand and improve independent living services;

(3) to support the operation of centers for independent living that are in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in subsections (b) and (c) of section 796f–4 of this title;

(4) to support activities to increase the capacities of public or nonprofit agencies and organizations and other entities to develop comprehensive approaches or systems for providing independent living services;

(5) to conduct studies and analyses, gather information, develop model policies and procedures, and present information, approaches, strategies, findings, conclusions, and recommendations to Federal, State, and local policymakers in order to enhance independent living services for individuals with disabilities;

(6) to train individuals with disabilities and individuals providing services to individuals with disabilities and other persons regarding the independent living philosophy; and

(7) to provide outreach to populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this subchapter, including minority groups and urban and rural populations.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §713, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4451; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(g), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 730.)

1993—Par. (3). Pub. L. 103–73 inserted “that are in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in subsections (b) and (c) of section 796f–4 of this title” after “living”.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subpart such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, and 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §714, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4452.)

This subpart is referred to in sections 718, 796c, 796d–1 of this title.

From the funds appropriated for fiscal year 1994 and for each subsequent fiscal year to carry out this subpart, the Commissioner shall allot such sums as may be necessary to States and other entities in accordance with subsections (b) through (d) of this section.

For any fiscal year in which the funds appropriated to carry out this subpart exceed the funds appropriated to carry out this subpart for fiscal year 1993, the Commissioner shall first reserve from such excess, to provide training and technical assistance to eligible agencies, centers for independent living, and Statewide Independent Living Councils for such fiscal year, not less than 1.8 percent, and not more than 2 percent, of the funds appropriated to carry out this subpart for the fiscal year involved.

From the funds reserved under paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall make grants to, and enter into contracts and other arrangements with, entities who have experience in the operation of centers for independent living to provide such training and technical assistance with respect to planning, developing, conducting, administering, and evaluating centers for independent living.

The Commissioner shall conduct a survey of Statewide Independent Living Councils and centers for independent living regarding training and technical assistance needs in order to determine funding priorities for such grants, contracts, and other arrangements.

To be eligible to receive a grant or enter into a contract or other arrangement under this subsection, such an entity shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing a proposal to provide such training and technical assistance, and containing such additional information as the Commissioner may require. The Commissioner shall provide for peer review of grant applications by panels that include persons who are not government employees and who have experience in the operation of centers for independent living.

No funds reserved by the Commissioner under this subsection may be combined with funds appropriated under any other Act or part of this chapter if the purpose of combining funds is to make a single discretionary grant or a single discretionary payment, unless such funds appropriated under this part are separately identified in such grant or payment and are used for the purposes of this part.

After the reservation required by subsection (b) of this section has been made, and except as provided in subparagraphs (B) and (C),,1 from the remainder of the amounts appropriated for each such fiscal year to carry out this subpart, the Commissioner shall make an allotment to each State whose State plan has been approved under section 796d–1 of this title of an amount bearing the same ratio to such remainder as the population of the State bears to the population of all States.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this subpart, the amount of any allotment made under subparagraph (A) to a State for a fiscal year shall not be less than the amount of financial assistance received by centers for independent living in the State for fiscal year 1992 under part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992.

Subject to the availability of appropriations to carry out this subpart and except as provided in subparagraph (B), for a fiscal year in which the amounts appropriated to carry out this subpart exceed the amounts appropriated for fiscal year 1992 to carry out part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992—

(i) if such excess is not less than $8,000,000, the allotment to any State under subparagraph (A) shall be not less than $450,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater, and the allotment of any State under this section for any fiscal year that is less than $450,000 or one-third of one percent of such sums shall be increased to the greater of the two amounts;

(ii) if such excess is not less than $4,000,000 and is less than $8,000,000, the allotment to any State under subparagraph (A) shall be not less than $400,000 or one-third of one percent of the sums made available for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, whichever is greater, and the allotment of any State under this section for any fiscal year that is less than $400,000 or one-third of one percent of such sums shall be increased to the greater of the two amounts; and

(iii) if such excess is less than $4,000,000, the allotment to any State under subparagraph (A) shall approach, as nearly as possible, the greater of the two amounts described in clause (ii).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(C), Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau shall not be considered to be States.

Each jurisdiction described in subparagraph (A) shall be allotted under paragraph (1)(A) not less than one-eighth of one percent of the remainder for the fiscal year for which the allotment is made, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

For any fiscal year, beginning in fiscal year 1994, in which the total amount appropriated to carry out this subpart exceeds the total amount appropriated to carry out this subpart for the preceding fiscal year by a percentage greater than the most recent percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers published by the Secretary of Labor under section 720(c)(1) of this title, the Commissioner shall increase the minimum allotment under paragraph (1)(C) by such percentage change in the Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers.

To provide allotments to States in accordance with paragraph (1)(B), to provide minimum allotments to States (as increased under paragraph (3)) under paragraph (1)(C), or to provide minimum allotments to States under paragraph (2)(B), the Commissioner shall proportionately reduce the allotments of the remaining States under paragraph (1)(A), with such adjustments as may be necessary to prevent the allotment of any such remaining State from being reduced to less than the amount required by paragraph (1)(B).

Whenever the Commissioner determines that any amount of an allotment to a State for any fiscal year will not be expended by such State for carrying out the provisions of this subpart, the Commissioner shall make such amount available for carrying out the provisions of this subpart to one or more of the States that the Commissioner determines will be able to use additional amounts during such year for carrying out such provisions. Any amount made available to a State for any fiscal year pursuant to the preceding sentence shall, for the purposes of this section, be regarded as an increase in the allotment of the State (as determined under the preceding provisions of this section) for such year.

For fiscal year 1993, the Commissioner shall first reserve from the funds appropriated to carry out this subpart, not less than 1.8 percent, and not more than 2 percent, of such funds for training, technical assistance, and transition assistance, to centers for independent living.

From the funds reserved under subparagraph (A), the Commissioner shall make grants to, and enter into contracts and other arrangements with, entities who have experience in the operation of centers for independent living, to—

(i) provide such training and technical assistance with respect to planning, developing, conducting, administering, and evaluating centers for independent living; and

(ii) provide such transition assistance to assist the centers with efforts to achieve compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in this subpart.

To be eligible to receive a grant or enter into a contract or other arrangement under this paragraph, such an entity shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing a proposal to provide such training, technical assistance, and transition assistance and containing such additional information as the Commissioner may require. The Commissioner shall provide for peer review of such proposals by panels that include persons who are not government employees and who have experience in the operation of centers for independent living.

An entity that receives funds under this paragraph shall comply with subsection (b)(5) of this section with respect to the funds.

After the reservation required by paragraph (1) has been made, and from the remainder of the funds appropriated for fiscal year 1993 to carry out this subpart, the Secretary is authorized to make grants to eligible agencies described in subparagraph (B) to operate centers for independent living.

Entities that received funding directly or through subgrants or contracts under part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, in fiscal year 1992 shall receive assistance under this subpart for fiscal year 1993 if the entities submit applications that demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that as of October 1, 1993, such entities will be private nonprofit agencies that meet the standards described in section 796f–4(b) of this title, and that contain the assurances described in section 796f–4(c) of this title. In determining whether a center meets the standards described in section 796f–4(b) of this title, the Commissioner will look for information that shows how the center will meet each standard. The Commissioner shall consider any data on past performance that is provided by the agency that shows how the center has been meeting the standards.

Private nonprofit agencies that did not receive assistance under part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, in fiscal year 1992 may receive assistance under this subpart for fiscal year 1993 if the agencies submit satisfactory applications for fiscal year 1993. In determining whether an application is satisfactory, the Secretary shall use the criteria for selection of centers specified in section 796f–1(d)(2)(B) of this title.

In making awards under this subsection, the Secretary shall distribute funds in accordance with paragraphs (1), (2), and (4) of subsection (c) of this section, and subsection (d) of this section.

The Secretary may not award funds to a private nonprofit agency that did not receive assistance under part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, in fiscal year 1992 until the Secretary has funded all agencies within each State that received such funding and have submitted applications described in subparagraph (B)(i) for fiscal year 1993.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §721, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4452; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(h), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 730.)

Part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsecs. (c)(1)(B), (C) and (e)(2)(B), (C), means former part B (§796e) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

A prior section 796f, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §721, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2999; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title X, §1001(g)(4), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1843; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(g), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, related to establishment of independent living service programs for older blind individuals, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–569, §701(1).

1993—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(1), inserted “to eligible agencies, centers for independent living, and Statewide Independent Living Councils” after “assistance” and substituted “of the funds appropriated to carry out this subpart for the fiscal year involved” for “of such funds”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(2)(A), substituted “After” for “Except as provided in subparagraphs (B) and (C) and after” and inserted “, and except as provided in subparagraphs (B) and (C),” after “made”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(2)(B), substituted “paragraph (1)(C)” for “this subsection” in subpar. (A) and “allotted under paragraph (1)(A)” for “allotted” in subpar. (B).

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(2)(C), added par. (4).

Subsec. (e)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(3)(A), struck out “, whichever is greater,” after “of such funds”.

Subsec. (e)(2)(B)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(3)(B)(i), in first sentence substituted “Entities” for “Private nonprofit agencies”, “if the entities submit” for “if the agencies submit”, and “entities will be private nonprofit agencies that meet the standards described in section 796f–4(b) of this title, and” for “agencies will meet the standards described in section 796f–4(b) of this title and”.

Subsec. (e)(2)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(h)(3)(B)(ii), added cl. (iii).

Provisions of this subpart not applicable with respect to fiscal year 1992 for programs receiving assistance under former part B (former section 796e of this title), as in effect on the day before Oct. 29, 1992, and provisions of former part B to continue to apply for such programs with respect to fiscal year 1992, see section 702(b) of Pub. L. 102–569, set out as a note under section 796 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 796f–1, 796f–2, 796f–3 of this title.

Unless the director of a designated State unit awards grants under section 796f–2 of this title to eligible agencies in a State for a fiscal year, the Commissioner shall award grants under this section to such eligible agencies for such fiscal year from the amount of funds allotted to the State under subsection (c) or (d) of section 796f of this title for such year.

The Commissioner shall award such grants, from the amount of funds so allotted, to such eligible agencies for the planning, conduct, administration, and evaluation of centers for independent living that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

In any State in which the Commissioner has approved the State plan required by section 796c of this title, the Commissioner may make a grant under this section to any eligible agency that—

(1) has the power and authority to carry out the purpose of this subpart and perform the functions set forth in section 796f–4 of this title within a community and to receive and administer funds under this subpart, funds and contributions from private or public sources that may be used in support of a center for independent living, and funds from other public and private programs;

(2) is determined by the Commissioner to be able to plan, conduct, administer, and evaluate a center for independent living consistent with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title; and

(3) submits an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require.

In the administration of the provisions of this section, the Commissioner shall award grants to any eligible agency that has been awarded a grant under this subpart by September 30, 1993, unless the Commissioner makes a finding that the agency involved fails to meet program and fiscal standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

If there is no center for independent living serving a region of the State or a region is underserved, and the increase in the allotment of the State is sufficient to support an additional center for independent living in the State, the Commissioner may award a grant under this section to the most qualified applicant proposing to serve such region, consistent with the provisions in the State plan setting forth the design of the State for establishing a statewide network of centers for independent living.

In selecting from among applicants for a grant under this section for a new center for independent living, the Commissioner—

(A) shall consider comments regarding the application, if any, by the Statewide Independent Living Council in the State in which the applicant is located;

(B) shall consider the ability of each such applicant to operate a center for independent living based on—

(i) evidence of the need for such a center;

(ii) any past performance of such applicant in providing services comparable to independent living services;

(iii) the plan for satisfying or demonstrated success in satisfying the standards and the assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title;

(iv) the quality of key personnel and the involvement of individuals with severe disabilities;

(v) budgets and cost-effectiveness;

(vi) an evaluation plan; and

(vii) the ability of such applicant to carry out the plans; and

(C) shall give priority to applications from applicants proposing to serve geographic areas within each State that are currently unserved or underserved by independent living programs, consistent with the provisions of the State plan submitted under section 796c of this title regarding establishment of a statewide network of centers for independent living.

Notwithstanding paragraphs (1) and (2), a center for independent living that receives assistance under subpart 2 (or part A of this subchapter as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992) for a fiscal year for the general operation of the center shall be eligible for a grant for the subsequent fiscal year under this subsection.

The Commissioner shall be guided by the following order of priorities in allocating funds among centers for independent living within a State, to the extent funds are available:

(1) The Commissioner shall support existing centers for independent living, as described in subsection (c) of this section, that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title, at the level of funding for the previous year.

(2) The Commissioner shall provide for a cost-of-living increase for such existing centers for independent living.

(3) The Commissioner shall fund new centers for independent living, as described in subsection (d) of this section, that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

A center that provides or manages residential housing after October 1, 1994, shall not be considered to be an eligible agency under this section.

The Commissioner shall periodically review each center receiving funds under this section to determine whether such center is in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title. If the Commissioner determines that any center receiving funds under this section is not in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title, the Commissioner shall immediately notify such center that it is out of compliance.

The Commissioner shall terminate all funds under this section to such center 90 days after the date of such notification unless the center submits a plan to achieve compliance within 90 days of such notification and such plan is approved by the Commissioner.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §722, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4456; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(i), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 731.)

Part A of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), means former part A (§796 et seq.) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

1993—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(i)(1), substituted “has been awarded a grant under this subpart by” for “is receiving funds under this subpart on”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(i)(2), inserted “proposing to serve such region” after “qualified applicant”.

Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(i)(3), (4), added subsec. (f) and redesignated former subsec. (f) as (g).

This section is referred to in sections 796d–1, 796f, 796f–2, 796f–3 of this title.

Beginning on October 1, 1993, the director of a designated State unit, as provided in paragraph (2), or the Commissioner, as provided in paragraph (3), shall award grants under this section for an initial fiscal year if the Commissioner determines that the amount of State funds that were earmarked by a State for a preceding fiscal year to support the general operation of centers for independent living meeting the requirements of this subpart equaled or exceeded the amount of funds allotted to the State under subsection (c) or (d) of section 796f of this title for such year.

The director or the Commissioner, as appropriate, shall award such grants, from the amount of funds so allotted for the initial fiscal year, to eligible agencies in the State for the planning, conduct, administration, and evaluation of centers for independent living that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

The Commissioner shall by regulation specify the preceding fiscal year with respect to which the Commissioner will make the determinations described in clause (i) and subparagraph (B), making such adjustments as may be necessary to accommodate State funding cycles such as 2-year funding cycles or State fiscal years that do not coincide with the Federal fiscal year.

For each year subsequent to the initial fiscal year described in subparagraph (A), the director of the designated State unit shall continue to have the authority to award such grants under this section if the Commissioner determines that the State continues to earmark the amount of State funds described in subparagraph (A)(i). If the State does not continue to earmark such an amount for a fiscal year, the State shall be ineligible to make grants under this section after a final year following such fiscal year, as defined in accordance with regulations established by the Commissioner, and for each subsequent fiscal year.

In order for the designated State unit to be eligible to award the grants described in paragraph (1) and carry out this section for a fiscal year with respect to a State, the designated State agency shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, and in such manner as the Commissioner may require, including information about the amount of State funds described in paragraph (1) for the preceding fiscal year. If the Commissioner makes a determination described in subparagraph (A)(i) or (B), as appropriate, of paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall approve the application and designate the director of the designated State unit to award the grant and carry out this section.

If the designated State agency of a State described in paragraph (1) does not submit and obtain approval of an application under paragraph (2), the Commissioner shall award the grant described in paragraph (1) to eligible agencies in the State in accordance with section 796f–1 of this title.

In any State in which the Commissioner has approved the State plan required by section 796c of this title, the director of the designated State unit may award a grant under this section to any eligible agency that—

(1) has the power and authority to carry out the purpose of this subpart and perform the functions set forth in section 796f–4 of this title within a community and to receive and administer funds under this subpart, funds and contributions from private or public sources that may be used in support of a center for independent living, and funds from other public and private programs;

(2) is determined by the director to be able to plan, conduct, administer, and evaluate a center for independent living, consistent with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title; and

(3) submits an application to the director at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the head of the designated State unit may require.

In the administration of the provisions of this section, the director of the designated State unit shall award grants under this section to any eligible agency that has been awarded a grant under this subpart by September 30, 1993, unless the director makes a finding that the agency involved fails to comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

If there is no center for independent living serving a region of the State or the region is unserved or underserved, and the increase in the allotment of the State is sufficient to support an additional center for independent living in the State, the director of the designated State unit may award a grant under this section from among eligible agencies, consistent with the provisions of the State plan under section 796c of this title setting forth the design of the State for establishing a statewide network of centers for independent living.

In selecting from among eligible agencies in awarding a grant under this subpart for a new center for independent living—

(A) the director of the designated State unit and the chairperson of, or other individual designated by, the Statewide Independent Living Council acting on behalf of and at the direction of the Council, shall jointly appoint a peer review committee that shall rank applications in accordance with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title and criteria jointly established by such director and such chairperson or individual;

(B) the peer review committee shall consider the ability of each such applicant to operate a center for independent living, and shall recommend an applicant to receive a grant under this section, based on—

(i) evidence of the need for a center for independent living, consistent with the State plan;

(ii) any past performance of such applicant in providing services comparable to independent living services;

(iii) the plan for complying with, or demonstrated success in complying with, the standards and the assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title;

(iv) the quality of key personnel of the applicant and the involvement of individuals with severe disabilities by the applicant;

(v) the budgets and cost-effectiveness of the applicant;

(vi) the evaluation plan of the applicant; and

(vii) the ability of such applicant to carry out the plans; and

(C) the director of the designated State unit shall award the grant on the basis of the recommendations of the peer review committee if the actions of the committee are consistent with Federal and State law.

Notwithstanding paragraphs (1) and (2), a center for independent living that receives assistance under subpart 2 (or part A of this subchapter as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992) for a fiscal year for the general operation of the center shall be eligible for a grant for the subsequent fiscal year under this subsection.

Unless the director of the designated State unit and the chairperson of the Council or other individual designated by the Council acting on behalf of and at the direction of the Council jointly agree on another order of priority, the director shall be guided by the following order of priorities in allocating funds among centers for independent living within a State, to the extent funds are available:

(1) The director of the designated State unit shall support existing centers for independent living, as described in subsection (c) of this section, that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title, at the level of funding for the previous year.

(2) The director of the designated State unit shall provide for a cost-of-living increase for such existing centers for independent living.

(3) The director of the designated State unit shall fund new centers for independent living, as described in subsection (d) of this section, that comply with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title.

A center that provides or manages residential housing after October 1, 1994, shall not be considered to be an eligible agency under this section.

The director of the designated State unit shall periodically review each center receiving funds under this section to determine whether such center is in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title. If the director of the designated State unit determines that any center receiving funds under this section is not in compliance with the standards and assurances set forth in section 796f–4 of this title, the director of the designated State unit shall immediately notify such center that it is out of compliance.

The director of the designated State unit shall terminate all funds under this section to such center 90 days after—

(A) the date of such notification; or

(B) in the case of a center that requests an appeal under subsection (i) of this section, the date of any final decision under subsection (i) of this section,

unless the center submits a plan to achieve compliance within 90 days and such plan is approved by the director, or if appealed, by the Commissioner.

The director of the designated State unit shall annually conduct onsite compliance reviews of at least 15 percent of the centers for independent living that receive funding under this section in the State. Each team that conducts on-site compliance review of centers for independent living shall include at least one person who is not an employee of the designated State agency, who has experience in the operation of centers for independent living, and who is jointly selected by the director of the designated State unit and the chairperson of or other individual designated by the Council acting on behalf of and at the direction of the Council. A copy of this review shall be provided to the Commissioner.

If the director of the designated State unit proposes to take a significant adverse action against a center for independent living, the center may seek mediation and conciliation to be provided by an individual or individuals who are free of conflicts of interest identified by the chairperson of or other individual designated by the Council. If the issue is not resolved through the mediation and conciliation, the center may appeal the proposed adverse action to the Commissioner for a final decision.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §723, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4458; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(j), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 731.)

Part A of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), means former part A (§796 et seq.) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

1993—Subsec. (a)(1)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(1)(A), inserted before period at end “, making such adjustments as may be necessary to accommodate State funding cycles such as 2-year funding cycles or State fiscal years that do not coincide with the Federal fiscal year”.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(1)(B), inserted “eligible agencies in” before “the State in accordance”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(2), substituted “has been awarded a grant under this subpart by” for “is receiving funds under this subpart on”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(4), added subsec. (f). Former subsec. (f) redesignated (g).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(5), substituted “subsection (i)” for “subsection (h)” in two places in par. (2)(B).

Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(3), redesignated subsec. (f) as (g). Former subsec. (g) redesignated (h).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(6), inserted first sentence and struck out former first sentence which read as follows: “The director of the designated State unit shall conduct on-site compliance review of centers for independent living.”

Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(3), redesignated subsec. (g) as (h). Former subsec. (h) redesignated (i).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(j)(3), redesignated subsec. (h) as (i).

This section is referred to in sections 796c, 796d–1, 796f–1, 796f–3 of this title.

Notwithstanding section 796a(1) of this title, if—

(A) no nonprofit private agency—

(i) submits an acceptable application to operate a center for independent living for fiscal year 1993 before a date specified by the Commissioner; and

(ii) obtains approval of the application under section 796f–1 or 796f–2 of this title; and

(B) a State directly operated such a center in fiscal year 1992 with funds provided under part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992,

the State may apply to the Commissioner for assistance under section 796f(e)(2) of this title for the conduct, administration, and evaluation of such a center.

A State that receives assistance with respect to a center in accordance with paragraph (1) shall ensure that the center shall comply with all of the requirements of this subpart, other than the requirement that the center be a private nonprofit agency.

A State that receives assistance for fiscal year 1993 with respect to a center in accordance with subsection (a) of this section may continue to receive assistance under this subpart for fiscal year 1994 or a succeeding fiscal year if, for such fiscal year—

(1) no nonprofit private agency—

(A) submits an acceptable application to operate a center for independent living for the fiscal year before a date specified by the Commissioner; and

(B) obtains approval of the application under section 796f–1 or 796f–2 of this title; or

(2) after funding all applications so submitted and approved, the Commissioner determines that funds remain available to provide such assistance.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §724, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4461; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(k), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 731.)

Part B of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsec. (a)(1)(B), means former part B (§796e) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

1993—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–73 substituted “the fiscal year” for “fiscal year 1993”.

Each center for independent living that receives assistance under this subpart shall comply with the standards set out in subsection (b) of this section and provide and comply with the assurances set out in subsection (c) of this section in order to ensure that all programs and activities under this subpart are planned, conducted, administered, and evaluated in a manner consistent with the purposes of this part and the objective of providing assistance effectively and efficiently.

The center shall promote and practice the independent living philosophy of—

(A) consumer control of the center regarding decisionmaking, service delivery, management, and establishment of the policy and direction of the center;

(B) self-help and self-advocacy;

(C) development of peer relationships and peer role models; and

(D) equal access of individuals with severe disabilities to society and to all services, programs, activities, resources, and facilities, whether public or private and regardless of the funding source.

The center shall provide services to individuals with a range of severe disabilities. The center shall provide services on a cross-disability basis (for individuals with all different types of severe disabilities, including individuals with severe disabilities who are members of populations that are unserved or underserved by programs under this subchapter). Eligibility for services at any center for independent living shall be determined by the center, and shall not be based on the presence of any one or more specific severe disabilities.

The center shall facilitate the development and achievement of independent living goals selected by individuals with severe disabilities who seek such assistance by the center.

The center shall work to increase the availability and improve the quality of community options for independent living in order to facilitate the development and achievement of independent living goals by individuals with severe disabilities.

The center shall provide independent living core services and, as appropriate, a combination of any other independent living services specified in section 706(30)(B) of this title.

The center shall conduct activities to increase the capacity of communities within the service area of the center to meet the needs of individuals with severe disabilities.

The center shall conduct resource development activities to obtain funding from sources other than this part.

The eligible agency shall provide at such time and in such manner as the Commissioner may require, such satisfactory assurances as the Commissioner may require, including satisfactory assurances that—

(1) the applicant is an eligible agency;

(2) the center will be designed and operated within local communities by individuals with disabilities, including an assurance that the center will have a Board that is the principal governing body of the center and a majority of which shall be composed of individuals with severe disabilities;

(3) the applicant will comply with the standards set forth in subsection (b) of this section;

(4) the applicant will establish clear priorities through annual and 3-year program and financial planning objectives for the center, including overall goals or a mission for the center, a work plan for achieving the goals or mission, specific objectives, service priorities, and types of services to be provided, and a description that shall demonstrate how the proposed activities of the applicant are consistent with the most recent 3-year State plan under section 796c of this title;

(5) the applicant will use sound organizational and personnel assignment practices, including taking affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified individuals with severe disabilities on the same terms and conditions required with respect to the employment of individuals with disabilities under section 793 of this title;

(6) the applicant will ensure that the majority of the staff, and individuals in decisionmaking positions, of the applicant are individuals with disabilities;

(7) the applicant will practice sound fiscal management, including making arrangements for an annual independent fiscal audit;

(8) the applicant will conduct annual self-evaluations, prepare an annual report, and maintain records adequate to measure performance with respect to the standards, containing information regarding, at a minimum—

(A) the extent to which the center is in compliance with the standards;

(B) the number and types of individuals with severe disabilities receiving services through the center;

(C) the types of services provided through the center and the number of individuals with severe disabilities receiving each type of service;

(D) the sources and amounts of funding for the operation of the center;

(E) the number of individuals with severe disabilities who are employed by, and the number who are in management and decisionmaking positions in, the center; and

(F) a comparison, when appropriate, of the activities of the center in prior years with the activities of the center in the most recent year;

(9) individuals with severe disabilities who are seeking or receiving services at the center will be notified by the center of the existence of, the availability of, and how to contact, the client assistance program;

(10) aggressive outreach regarding services provided through the center will be conducted in an effort to reach populations of individuals with severe disabilities that are unserved or underserved by programs under this subchapter, especially minority groups and urban and rural populations;

(11) staff at centers for independent living will receive training on how to serve such unserved and underserved populations, including minority groups and urban and rural populations;

(12) the center will submit to the Statewide Independent Living Council a copy of its approved grant application and the annual report required under paragraph (8);

(13) the center will prepare and submit a report to the designated State unit or the Commissioner, as the case may be, at the end of each fiscal year that contains the information described in paragraph (8) and information regarding the extent to which the center is in compliance with the standards set forth in subsection (b) of this section; and

(14) an independent living plan described in section 796c(e) of this title will be developed unless the individual who would receive services under the plan signs a waiver stating that such a plan is unnecessary.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §725, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4462; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(*l*), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 731.)

1993—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 103–73 in second sentence inserted “severe” before “disabilities who are members of” and substituted “under this subchapter” for “under this chapter” and in third sentence inserted “shall be determined by the center, and” before “shall not be based”.

This section is referred to in sections 796c, 796d–1, 796e–2, 796f, 796f–1, 796f–2 of this title.

As used in this subpart, the term “eligible agency” means a consumer-controlled, community-based, cross-disability, nonresidential private nonprofit agency.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §726, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4464.)

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subpart such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, and 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §727, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4464.)

Prior sections 796g to 796i were repealed by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

Section 796g, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §731, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 3000; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(h)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1811; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(h), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3314, provided for grants to States to establish systems to protect and advocate for rights of individuals with severe handicaps.

Section 796h, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §732, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 3000; amended Pub. L. 99–506, title I, §103(d)(2)(C), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1810, related to affirmative action on part of recipients of assistance to employ and advance in employment qualified individuals with handicaps.

Section 796i, Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §741, formerly §731, as added Pub. L. 95–602, title III, §301, Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 3001; renumbered §741 and amended Pub. L. 98–221, title I, §172(a)(1), (b), Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 32; Pub. L. 99–506, title VIII, §806, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1840; Pub. L. 100–630, title II, §208(i), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3315; Pub. L. 102–52, §8, June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 262, provided for appropriations for parts A to D of former subchapter VII of this chapter.

This part is referred to in section 718 of this title.

For purposes of this part, the term “older individual who is blind” means an individual age 55 or older whose severe visual impairment makes competitive employment extremely difficult to attain but for whom independent living goals are feasible.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §751, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §703(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4464.)

Subject to subsections (b) and (c) of this section, the Commissioner may make grants to States for the purpose of providing the services described in subsection (d) of this section to older individuals who are blind.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under this subsection unless the State involved agrees that the grant will be administered solely by the agency described in section 721(a)(1)(A)(i) of this title.

Beginning with fiscal year 1993, in the case of any fiscal year for which the amount appropriated under section 796*l* of this title is less than $13,000,000, grants made under subsection (a) of this section shall be—

(1) discretionary grants made on a competitive basis to States; or

(2) grants made on a noncompetitive basis to pay for the continuation costs of activities for which a grant was awarded—

(A) under this part; or

(B) under part C of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992.

In the case of any fiscal year for which the amount appropriated under section 796*l* of this title is equal to or greater than $13,000,000, grants under subsection (a) of this section shall be made only to States and shall be made only from allotments under paragraph (2).

For grants under subsection (a) of this section for a fiscal year described in paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall make an allotment to each State in an amount determined in accordance with subsection (j) of this section, and shall make a grant to the State of the allotment made for the State if the State submits to the Commissioner an application in accordance with subsection (i) of this section.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under subsection (a) of this section unless the State involved agrees that the grant will be expended only for purposes of—

(1) providing independent living services to older individuals who are blind;

(2) conducting activities that will improve or expand services for such individuals; and

(3) conducting activities to help improve public understanding of the problems of such individuals.

Independent living services for purposes of subsection (d)(1) of this section include—

(1) services to help correct blindness, such as—

(A) outreach services;

(B) visual screening;

(C) surgical or therapeutic treatment to prevent, correct, or modify disabling eye conditions; and

(D) hospitalization related to such services;

(2) the provision of eyeglasses and other visual aids;

(3) the provision of services and equipment to assist an older individual who is blind to become more mobile and more self-sufficient;

(4) mobility training, Braille instruction, and other services and equipment to help an older individual who is blind adjust to blindness;

(5) guide services, reader services, and transportation;

(6) any other appropriate service designed to assist an older individual who is blind in coping with daily living activities, including supportive services and rehabilitation teaching services;

(7) independent living skills training, information and referral services, peer counseling, and individual advocacy training; and

(8) other independent living services, as defined in section 706(30) of this title.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under subsection (a) of this section unless the State involved agrees, with respect to the costs of the program to be carried out by the State pursuant to such subsection, to make available (directly or through donations from public or private entities) non-Federal contributions toward such costs in an amount that is not less than $1 for each $9 of Federal funds provided in the grant.

Non-Federal contributions required in paragraph (1) may be in cash or in kind, fairly evaluated, including plant, equipment, or services. Amounts provided by the Federal Government, or services assisted or subsidized to any significant extent by the Federal Government, may not be included in determining the amount of such non-Federal contributions.

A State may expend a grant under subsection (a) of this section to carry out the purposes specified in subsection (d) of this section through grants to public and nonprofit private agencies or organizations.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under subsection (a) of this section unless the State involved agrees that, in carrying out subsection (d)(1) of this section, the State will seek to incorporate into the State plan under section 796c of this title any new methods and approaches relating to independent living services for older individuals who are blind.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under subsection (a) of this section unless an application for the grant is submitted to the Commissioner and the application is in such form, is made in such manner, and contains such agreements, assurances, and information as the Commissioner determines to be necessary to carry out this section (including agreements, assurances, and information with respect to any grants under subsection (j)(4) of this section).

An application for a grant under this section shall contain—

(A) an assurance that the designated State unit described in subsection (a)(2) of this section will prepare and submit to the Commissioner a report, at the end of each fiscal year, with respect to each project or program the designated State unit operates or administers under this section, whether directly or through a grant or contract, which report shall contain, at a minimum, information on—

(i) the number and types of older individuals who are blind and are receiving services;

(ii) the types of services provided and the number of older individuals who are blind and are receiving each type of service;

(iii) the sources and amounts of funding for the operation of each project or program;

(iv) the amounts and percentages of resources committed to each type of service provided;

(v) data on actions taken to employ, and advance in employment, qualified individuals with severe disabilities, including older individuals who are blind; and

(vi) a comparison, if appropriate, of prior year activities with the activities of the most recent year;

(B) an assurance that the designated State unit will—

(i) provide services that contribute to the maintenance of, or the increased independence of, older individuals who are blind; and

(ii) engage in—

(I) capacity-building activities, including collaboration with other agencies and organizations;

(II) activities to promote community awareness, involvement, and assistance; and

(III) outreach efforts; and

(C) an assurance that the application is consistent with the State plan for providing independent living services required by section 796c of this title.

Subject to the availability of appropriations, the amount of an allotment under subsection (a) of this section for a State for a fiscal year shall be the greater of—

(A) the amount determined under paragraph (2); or

(B) the amount determined under paragraph (3).

In the case of the several States, the District of Columbia, and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the amount referred to in subparagraph (A) of paragraph (1) for a fiscal year is the greater of—

(i) $225,000; or

(ii) an amount equal to one-third of one percent of the amount appropriated under section 796*l* of this title for the fiscal year and available for allotments under subsection (a) of this section.

In the case of Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau, the amount referred to in subparagraph (A) of paragraph (1) for a fiscal year is $40,000, except that the Republic of Palau may receive such allotment under this section only until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect.

The amount referred to in subparagraph (B) of paragraph (1) for a State for a fiscal year is the product of—

(A) the amount appropriated under section 796*l* of this title and available for allotments under subsection (a) of this section; and

(B) a percentage equal to the quotient of—

(i) an amount equal to the number of individuals residing in the State who are not less than 55 years of age; divided by

(ii) an amount equal to the number of individuals residing in the United States who are not less than 55 years of age.

From the amounts specified in subparagraph (B), the Commissioner may make grants to States whose population of older individuals who are blind has a substantial need for the services specified in subsection (d) of this section relative to the populations in other States of older individuals who are blind.

The amounts referred to in subparagraph (A) are any amounts that are not paid to States under subsection (a) of this section as a result of—

(i) the failure of any State to submit an application under subsection (i) of this section;

(ii) the failure of any State to prepare within a reasonable period of time such application in compliance with such subsection; or

(iii) any State informing the Commissioner that the State does not intend to expend the full amount of the allotment made for the State under subsection (a) of this section.

The Commissioner may not make a grant under subparagraph (A) unless the State involved agrees that the grant is subject to the same conditions as grants made under subsection (a) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §752, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §703(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4465; amended Pub. L. 103–73, title I, §114(m), Aug. 11, 1993, 107 Stat. 732.)

Part C of this subchapter, as in effect on the day before October 29, 1992, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), means former part C (§796f) which was included in the repeal of subchapter VII of this chapter by Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §701(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4443.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (j)(2)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

1993—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(m)(1), substituted “agency” for “unit” in heading.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(m)(2), amended heading and text of subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “Beginning with fiscal year 1994, in the case of any fiscal year for which the amount appropriated under section 796*l* of this title is less than $13,000,000, grants under subsection (a) of this section shall be discretionary grants made on a competitive basis to States.”

Subsec. (j)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(m)(3)(A), substituted “or” for “and” at end.

Subsec. (j)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 103–73, §114(m)(3)(B), substituted “or” for “and” at end.

This section is referred to in section 718 of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this part such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VII, §753, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VII, §703(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4468.)

This section is referred to in section 796k of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 706, 718b, 762, 771a, 777a of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out section 797a of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out section 797b of this title, such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VIII, §801, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VIII, §801(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4469.)

The Commissioner shall make grants to States and to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations for the purpose of providing transportation services to individuals with disabilities who—

(A)(i) are employed or seeking employment; or

(ii) are receiving vocational rehabilitation services from public or private organizations; and

(B) reside in geographic areas in which fixed route public transportation or comparable paratransit service is not available.

The Commissioner may make a grant under this subsection only if the applicant involved agrees that transportation services under this subsection will be provided on a regular and continuing basis between—

(A) the home of the individual; and

(B) the place of employment of the individual, the place where the individual is seeking employment, or the place where the individual is receiving vocational rehabilitation services.

The Commissioner may make a grant under paragraph (1) only if the applicant involved agrees that, in providing transportation services under this subsection—

(A) a charge for the transportation will be imposed on each employed eligible individual who uses the transportation; and

(B) the amount of the charge for an instance of use of the transportation for the distance involved will be in a fair and reasonable amount that is consistent with fees for comparable services in comparable geographic areas.

The Commissioner may make a grant under this subsection only if the applicant involved agrees to prepare and submit to the Commissioner, not later than December 31 of the fiscal year following the fiscal year for which the grant is made, a report containing—

(A) a description of the goals of the program carried out with the grant;

(B) a description of the activities and services provided under the program;

(C) a description of the number of eligible individuals served under the program;

(D) a description of methods used to ensure that the program serves the eligible individuals most in need of the transportation services provided under the program; and

(E) such additional information as the Commissioner may require.

Nothing in this subsection may be construed as limiting the rights or responsibilities of any individual under any other provision of this chapter, under the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.], or under any other provision of law.

The Commissioner shall make grants to public or nonprofit community rehabilitation programs, designated State units, and other public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay for the cost of developing special projects and demonstrations related to vocational rehabilitation outcomes. Such projects and demonstrations may include activities providing alternatives to case closure practice and identifying and implementing appropriate incentives to vocational rehabilitation counselors to achieve high quality placements for individuals with the most severe disabilities.

Each recipient of such a grant shall—

(A) identify, develop, and test exemplary models that can be replicated; and

(B) identify innovative methods, such as weighted case closures, to evaluate the performance of vocational rehabilitation counselors that in no way impede the accomplishment of the purposes and policy of serving, among others, those individuals with the most severe disabilities.

The Commissioner shall make grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to carry out demonstration programs designed to demonstrate the utility of early intervention in furnishing vocational evaluation, training, and counseling services to working adults recently determined to have chronic and progressive diseases that may be severely disabling, such as multiple sclerosis.

In carrying out a demonstration program under paragraph (1), an eligible entity shall conduct a program intended to demonstrate the effectiveness of such early intervention in improving the job retention of the working adults or in facilitating the entry of the working adults to new careers and employment. The demonstration program shall test a number of alternative service systems, including an employer assistance program, a system involving early intervention by State vocational rehabilitation agencies, and a private nonprofit agency joint venture with an employer or State vocational rehabilitation agency.

The Commissioner may make grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of special projects and demonstration projects to support models for providing community-based, coordinated services to facilitate the transition of individuals with disabilities from rehabilitation hospital or nursing home programs or comparable programs, to programs providing independent living services in the community, including services such as personal assistance services, health maintenance services, counseling, and social and vocational services.

To be eligible to receive a grant under this subsection, an agency or organization shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require.

An agency or organization that receives a grant under this subsection shall evaluate the effectiveness of such models and prepare and submit to the Commissioner a report containing the evaluation.

The Commissioner may award grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations—

(1) to conduct a study to examine the factors that have created barriers to successful rehabilitation outcomes for individuals with disabilities from minority backgrounds, and develop and evaluate policy, research, and training strategies for overcoming the barriers;

(2) to conduct a study to examine the factors that have created significant underrepresentation of individuals from minority backgrounds in the rehabilitation professions, including such underrepresentation among researchers, and develop and evaluate policy, research, and training strategies for overcoming the underrepresentation; and

(3) to conduct a study to examine the factors that have created barriers to successful rehabilitation outcomes for individuals with neurological or other related disorders, and examine how the hidden or episodic nature of the disability affects eligibility and the provision of services.

The Commissioner may make grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay part or all of the costs of conducting studies, special projects, or demonstration projects relating to the management and service delivery systems of the vocational rehabilitation programs authorized under this chapter.

To be eligible to receive a grant under this subsection, an agency or organization shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require.

The Commissioner may make grants to States and public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to pay all or part of the costs of projects to demonstrate ways to increase client choice in the rehabilitation process, including the selection of providers of vocational rehabilitation services.

An entity that receives a grant under this subsection shall use the grant only—

(A) for activities that are directly related to planning, operating, and evaluating the demonstration projects; and

(B) to supplement, and not supplant, funds made available from Federal and non-Federal sources for such projects.

Any eligible entity that desires to receive a grant under this subsection shall submit an application at such time, in such manner, and containing such information and assurances as the Commissioner may require, including—

(A) a description of—

(i) how the applicant intends to promote increased client choice in the rehabilitation process, including a description, if appropriate, of how an applicant will determine the cost of any service or product offered to an eligible client;

(ii) how the applicant intends to ensure that any vocational rehabilitation service or related service is provided by a qualified provider who is accredited or meets such other quality assurance and cost-control criteria as the State may establish; and

(iii) the outreach activities to be conducted by the applicant to obtain eligible clients; and

(B) assurances that a written plan will be established with the full participation of the client, which plan shall, at a minimum, include—

(i) a statement of the vocational rehabilitation goals to be achieved;

(ii) a statement of the specific vocational rehabilitation services to be provided, the projected dates for their initiation, and the anticipated duration of each such service; and

(iii) objective criteria, an evaluation procedure, and a schedule, for determining whether such goals are being achieved.

In selecting entities to receive grants under paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall take into consideration the—

(A) diversity of strategies used to increase client choice, including selection among qualified service providers;

(B) geographic distribution of projects; and

(C) diversity of clients to be served.

Entities that receive grants under paragraph (1) shall maintain such records as the Commissioner may require and comply with any request from the Commissioner for such records.

At least 80 percent of the funds awarded for any project under this subsection shall be used for direct services, as specifically chosen by eligible clients.

The Commissioner shall conduct an evaluation of the demonstration projects with respect to the services provided, clients served, client outcomes obtained, implementation issues addressed, the cost effectiveness of the project, and the effects of increased choice on clients and service providers. The Commissioner may reserve funds for the evaluation for a fiscal year from the amounts appropriated to carry out projects under this subsection for the fiscal year.

For the purposes of this subsection:

The term “direct services” means vocational rehabilitation services, as described in section 723(a) of this title.

The term “eligible client” means an individual with a disability, as defined in section 706(8)(A) of this title, who is not currently receiving services under an individualized written rehabilitation program established through a designated State unit.

Subject to the availability of appropriations, there is hereby established a National Commission on Rehabilitation Services (referred to in this section as the “National Commission”) for the purpose of studying the nature, quality, and adequacy of vocational rehabilitation, independent living, supported employment, research, training, and other programs authorized under this chapter, and submitting to the President and to Congress recommendations that will further the successful employment outcomes, independence, and integration of individuals with disabilities into the workplace and community.

The National Commission shall consist of 15 members who are recognized by knowledge, experience, and education as experts in the field of rehabilitation. At least a majority of the members of the National Commission shall be individuals with disabilities representing a cross-section of individuals with different types of disabilities.

Members of the National Commission shall be appointed as follows:

Five members shall be appointed by the President, or, if the President delegates the authority to make the appointment, by the Secretary of Education.

Five members shall be appointed by the president pro tempore of the Senate, with the advice and approval of the Majority Leader and Minority Leader of the Senate.

Five members shall be appointed by the Speaker of the House of Representatives with the advice and approval of the Majority Leader and Minority Leader of the House of Representatives.

Members shall be appointed for the life of the National Commission.

Any vacancy in the National Commission shall not affect its powers, but shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment.

The National Commission shall select a Chairperson from among its members.

The National Commission shall meet at the call of the Chairperson, but not less often than four times each year.

Ten members of the National Commission shall constitute a quorum.

The Chairperson, upon approval by the National Commission, may establish such committees as the Chairperson determines to be necessary to fulfill the duties of the National Commission.

The National Commission shall conduct studies and analyses with respect to—

(i) the effectiveness of vocational rehabilitation and independent living services in enhancing the employment outcomes of individuals with disabilities;

(ii) the adequacy of research and training activities in fostering innovative approaches that further the employment of individuals with disabilities;

(iii) the capacity of supported employment and independent living services in promoting the integration of individuals with disabilities into the workplace and community;

(iv) methods for enhancing access to services authorized under this chapter by minorities who are individuals with disabilities and individuals with disabilities who are members of populations that have traditionally been unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter that provide such vocational rehabilitation services and independent living services;

(v) means for enhancing interagency coordination among Federal and State agencies to promote the maximization of employment-related programs, services, and benefits on behalf of individuals with disabilities; and

(vi) such other issues as the National Commission may identify as relevant to promoting the employment, independence, and integration of individuals with disabilities.

The National Commission shall conduct policy analyses to—

(i) develop options for improving fiscal equity in the allotment of grants under section 730 of this title;

(ii) provide guidance on implementing the order of selection described in section 721(a)(5)(A) of this title; and

(iii) address the shortage of rehabilitation professionals.

Not later than January 30, 1995, the National Commission shall prepare and issue a comprehensive interim report to the President, the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives, and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, containing the results of the studies and analyses described in subparagraphs (A) and (B) and specific recommendations for amendments to this chapter needed to promote the provision of comprehensive vocational rehabilitation and independent living services on behalf of individuals with disabilities.

Not later than January 30, 1997, the National Commission shall prepare and issue a comprehensive final report to the President, the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives, and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate, containing the results and recommendations described in clause (i).

The National Commission may hold such hearings, sit and act at such times and places, take such testimony, and receive such evidence as the National Commission determines to be necessary to carry out its functions.

The National Commission may secure directly from any Federal department or agency such information (including statistics) as the National Commission considers necessary to carry out the functions of the National Commission. Upon request of the Chairperson of the National Commission, the head of such department or agency shall furnish such information to the National Commission.

The National Commission may secure, directly or by contract or other means, such additional information as the National Commission determines to be necessary from universities, research institutions, foundations, State and local agencies, and other public or private agencies.

The National Commission is authorized to consult with—

(i) any organization representing individuals with disabilities;

(ii) public or private service providers;

(iii) Federal, State, and local agencies;

(iv) individual experts;

(v) institutions of higher education involved in the preparation of vocational rehabilitation services personnel; and

(vi) such other entities and persons as will aid the National Commission in carrying out its duties.

Each member of the National Commission who is not an officer or full-time employee of the Federal Government shall receive a payment of $150 for each day (including travel time) during which the member is engaged in the performance of duties for the National Commission. Members of the National Commission who are officers or full-time employees of the United States shall serve without compensation in addition to compensation received for their services as officers or employees of the United States.

Each member of the National Commission may receive travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5, for employees serving intermittently in the Government service, for each day the member is engaged in the performance of duties away from the home or regular place of business of the member.

The Chairperson of the National Commission may, without regard to provisions of title 5, governing appointments in the competitive service, appoint and terminate a staff director of the National Commission. The employment of the staff director shall be subject to confirmation by the National Commission. The staff director shall be appointed from among individuals who are experienced in the planning, administration, or operation of vocational rehabilitation and independent living services or programs.

The staff director of the National Commission may, without regard to provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, appoint and terminate such additional personnel as may be necessary, but not more than ten full-time equivalent positions, to enable the National Commission to carry out its duties.

The Chairperson of the National Commission may fix the compensation of the staff director, and the staff director may fix the compensation of the additional personnel, without regard to the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of title 5 relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates, except that the rate of pay for the staff director and other personnel may not exceed the rate of pay for level 4 of the Senior Executive Service Schedule under section 5382 of title 5.

The heads of all Federal agencies are, to the extent not prohibited by law, directed to cooperate with the National Commission in carrying out its duties. The National Commission may utilize the services, personnel, information, and facilities of other Federal, State, local, and private agencies with or without reimbursement, upon the consent of the heads of such agencies.

Any Federal Government employee may be detailed to the National Commission without reimbursement, and such detail shall be without interruption or loss of civil service status or privilege.

The National Commission shall terminate not later than 90 days following the submission of the final report as described in paragraph (2)(C)(ii).

The Commissioner may award grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to establish model personal assistance services systems and other innovative service programs to maximize the full inclusion and integration into society, employment, independent living, and economic and social self-sufficiency of individuals with disabilities.

Consistent with the purposes of section 795g of this title, the Commissioner may make grants to partnerships or consortia that include private business concerns or industries to pay for the Federal share of developing and carrying out model demonstration projects for workers with disabilities who need new or upgraded skills to adapt to emerging technologies, work methods, and markets and to ensure that such individuals possess the knowledge and skills necessary to compete in the workplace.

Grants made under this subsection shall be for 3-year periods.

Any partnership or consortia desiring to receive a grant under this subsection shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information and assurances as the Commissioner may require, including—

(A) information identifying at least one member of the partnership or consortium that is a private business concern or industry; and

(B) assurances that—

(i) each member of the eligible partnership or consortium will pay a portion of the non-Federal share of the cost of developing and carrying out the project;

(ii) the partnership or consortium will carry out all of the activities described in subparagraphs (A) through (E) of section 795g(a)(2) of this title;

(iii) the partnership or consortium will disseminate information on the model program conducted;

(iv) the partnership or consortium will utilize, if available, job skill standards established jointly by management and labor to assist in evaluating the job skills of an individual and assessing the skills that are needed for the individual to compete in the workplace;

(v) the partnership or consortium will prepare and submit an evaluation report containing data specified by the Commissioner at the end of each project year; and

(vi) the partnership or consortium will take such steps as are necessary to continue the activities of the project after the period for which Federal assistance is sought.

For the purposes of this subsection, the term “workers with disabilities” shall mean individuals with disabilities who are working in competitive employment and who need new or upgraded skills to improve their employment and career advancement opportunities.

The Commissioner may award grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to establish model systems of comprehensive service delivery to individuals with severe disabilities, other than spinal cord injuries, requiring a multidisciplinary system of providing vocational and other rehabilitation services, where the Commissioner determines that the development of such systems is needed.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VIII, §802, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VIII, §801(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4469.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (a)(5), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, referred to in subsec. (h)(5)(A), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

This section is referred to in sections 777a, 797 of this title.

The Commissioner shall award at least three grants to eligible institutions of higher education, to support the formation of regional partnerships with other public or private entities for the purpose of developing and implementing in-service training programs, including certificate or degree granting programs concerning vocational rehabilitation services and related services, for vocational rehabilitation professionals through the use of telecommunications.

Any eligible entity that desires to receive a grant under this subsection shall submit an application at such time, in such manner, and containing such information and assurances as the Commissioner may require, including—

(A) a detailed explanation of how the applicant will utilize interactive audio, video, and computer technologies between distant locations to provide in-service training programs to the region;

(B) a description of how the applicant intends to utilize and build upon existing telecommunications networks within the region to be served;

(C) a copy of all agreements governing the division of functions within the partnership, including an assurance that all States within the region will be served;

(D) a copy of a binding commitment entered into between the partnership and each entity that is legally permitted to provide, and from which the partnership is to obtain, the telecommunications services and facilities required for the project, that stipulates that if the partnership receives the grant the entity will provide such telecommunications services and facilities in the area to be served within a reasonable time and at a charge that is in accordance with State law;

(E) a description of the curriculum to be provided, frequency of providing service, and sites of service;

(F) a description of the need to purchase or lease—

(i) computer hardware and software;

(ii) audio and video equipment;

(iii) telecommunications terminal equipment; or

(iv) interactive video equipment;

(G) an assurance that the partnership will use not less than 75 percent of the amount of the grant for instructional curriculum development and programming; and

(H) a description of the means by which the project will be evaluated.

In awarding grants under paragraph (1), the Commissioner shall take into consideration the sparsity of State populations in the region to be served.

For the purposes of this subsection:

The term “eligible entity” means any institution of higher education with demonstrated experience in the area of continuing education for vocational rehabilitation personnel.

The term “interactive video equipment” means equipment used to produce and prepare video and audio signals for transmission between distant locations so that individuals at such locations can see and hear each other, and related equipment.

The term “region” means one of the ten regions served by the Rehabilitation Services Administration.

The term “rehabilitation professionals” means personnel described in section 770(a)(1) 1 of this title.

The Commissioner shall make grants to and enter into contracts with States and public or nonprofit agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, to pay all or part of the cost of training in the use of Braille for personnel providing vocational rehabilitation services or educational services to youth and adults who are blind.

Such grants shall be used for the establishment or continuation of projects that may provide—

(A) development of Braille training materials; and

(B) in-service or pre-service training in the use of Braille and methods of teaching Braille to youth and adults who are blind.

To be eligible to receive a grant, or enter into a contract, under paragraph (1), an agency or organization shall submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require.

The Commissioner is authorized to make grants through a separate competition to private nonprofit organizations for the purpose of establishing programs to provide training and information to enable individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or other authorized representatives of the individuals to participate more effectively with professionals in meeting the vocational and rehabilitation needs of individuals with disabilities. Such grants shall be designed to meet the unique training and information needs of individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or other authorized representatives of the individuals, who live in the area to be served, particularly those who are members of populations that have been unserved or underserved by programs under this chapter.

An organization that receives a grant to establish training and information programs under this subsection shall use the grant to assist individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals to—

(A) better understand vocational rehabilitation and independent living programs and services;

(B) provide followup support for transition and employment programs;

(C) communicate more effectively with transition and rehabilitation personnel and other relevant professionals;

(D) provide support in the development of the individualized written rehabilitation program;

(E) provide support and expertise in obtaining information about rehabilitation and independent living programs, services, and resources that are appropriate; and

(F) understand the provisions of this chapter, particularly provisions relating to employment, supported employment, and independent living.

The Commissioner shall ensure that grants under this subsection shall—

(A) be distributed geographically to the greatest extent possible throughout all States; and

(B) be targeted to individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, in both urban and rural areas or on a State or regional basis.

In order to receive a grant under this subsection, a private nonprofit organization shall—

(A) submit an application to the Commissioner at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Commissioner may require, including information demonstrating the capacity and expertise of the organization to—

(i) coordinate and work closely with parent training and information centers established under section 1431 of title 20; and

(ii) effectively conduct the training and information activities authorized under this subsection;

(B)(i) be governed by a board of directors—

(I) that includes professionals in the field of vocational rehabilitation; and

(II) on which a majority of the members are individuals with disabilities or the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals; or

(ii)(I) have a membership that represents the interests of individuals with disabilities; and

(II) establish a special governing committee that meets the requirements specified in subclauses (I) and (II) of clause (i) to operate a training and information program under this subsection; and

(C) serve individuals with a full range of disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals.

Each private nonprofit organization carrying out a program receiving assistance under this subsection shall consult with appropriate agencies that serve or assist individuals with disabilities, and the parents, family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of the individuals, located in the jurisdiction served by the program.

The Commissioner shall provide coordination and technical assistance by grant or cooperative agreement for establishing, developing, and coordinating the training and information programs. To the extent practicable, such assistance shall be provided by the parent training and information centers established under section 1431 of title 20.

The board of directors or special governing committee of a nonprofit private organization receiving a grant under this subsection shall meet at least once in each calendar quarter to review the training and information program, and each such committee shall directly advise the governing board regarding the views and recommendations of the committee.

If a nonprofit private organization requests the renewal of a grant under this subsection, the board of directors or the special governing committee shall prepare and submit to the Commissioner a written review of the training and information program conducted by the nonprofit private organization during the preceding fiscal year.

The Commissioner may award grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to provide training designed to provide impartial hearing officers with the skills necessary to fairly decide appeals under this chapter.

The Commissioner may award grants to public or nonprofit agencies and organizations to develop and demonstrate innovative methods to attract and retain professionals to serve in urban areas in the rehabilitation of individuals with disabilities, including individuals with severe disabilities.

The requirements of subsections (a) (except the first sentence), (b), and (c), of section 771a of this title, and paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (g) of such section, shall apply with respect to grants made available under this section, other than subsection (c) of this section. The requirements of section 776 of this title shall apply with respect to grants made available under this section.

(Pub. L. 93–112, title VIII, §803, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title VIII, §801(a), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4478.)

This section is referred to in sections 771a, 797 of this title.

The Comprehensive Employment and Training Act of 1973, Pub. L. 93–203, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839, as amended by Pub. L. 93–567, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845; Pub. L. 94–444, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1476; Pub. L. 94–482, Oct. 12, 1976, 90 Stat. 2081; Pub. L. 95–40, June 3, 1977, 91 Stat. 203; Pub. L. 95–44, June 15, 1977, 91 Stat. 220; Pub. L. 95–93, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, comprised this chapter prior to its complete revision by Pub. L. 95–524, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1909. The Act, Pub. L. 93–203, as amended generally by Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1909, was known as the Comprehensive Employment and Training Act, and was set out as having been added by Pub. L. 95–524 without reference to the intervening amendments in view of the extensive revision of the Act's provisions by Pub. L. 95–524.

1 So in original. Probably should be section “771a(a)(1)”.

Section 801, Pub. L. 93–203, §2, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1912, set out Congressional statement of purpose in enacting this chapter.

A prior section 801, Pub. L. 93–203, §2, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839, provided for a Congressional statement of purpose for this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 802, Pub. L. 93–203, §3, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1912, provided definitions for this chapter.

A prior section 802, Pub. L. 93–203, §4, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839; Pub. L. 95–44, §2(a), June 15, 1977, 91 Stat. 220; Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §302, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 650, authorized appropriations for this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 3 of Pub. L. 93–203, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839, provided for transitional provisions and was set out as a note under section 801 of this title, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 981 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 803, Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §305, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 651, providing for increased participation of veterans in public service employment programs and job training opportunities, was omitted because it was limited to fiscal years 1977 and 1978.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 811, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §101, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1917, related to prime sponsors under this chapter.

A prior section 811, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §101, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 840, provided description of a program to provide comprehensive manpower services, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 812 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 812, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §102, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1918, related to authority of Secretary to provide services.

A prior section 812, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §102, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 841, related to prime sponsors, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203, by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 820 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 813, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §103, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1918, related to submission and contents of a comprehensive employment and training plan.

A prior section 813, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §103, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 842, provided for allocation of funds with respect to comprehensive manpower services program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 815 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 814, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §104, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1922, related to review of comprehensive employment and training plans.

A prior section 814, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §104, Dec. 28, 1978, 87 Stat. 843, related to establishment of prime sponsor's planning councils, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 818 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 815, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §105, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1925, related to Governor's coordination and special services plan.

A prior section 815, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §105, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 843; Pub. L. 94–444, §12(b)(1), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1483, related to conditions for receipt of financial assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 816 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203, by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 816, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §106, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1926, related to complaints and sanctions against prime sponsors under this chapter.

A prior section 816, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §106, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 845; Pub. L. 94–444, §12(b)(2), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1483, provided for special provisions relating to State prime sponsors, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 818 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 817, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §107, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1929, related to judicial review under this chapter.

A prior section 817, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §107, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 846; Pub. L. 94–482, title II, §203(a), Oct. 12, 1976, 90 Stat. 2213; Pub. L. 95–40, §1(28)(A), June 3, 1977, 91 Stat. 207, related to establishment of a State Manpower Services Council, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 819 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 818, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §108, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1929, authorized the Secretary to reallocate funds under this chapter.

A prior section 818, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §108, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 847; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, provided for review of comprehensive manpower plans, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 813 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 819, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §109, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1930, related to prime sponsor's planning councils.

A prior section 819, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §109, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 848, provided for judicial review with respect to comprehensive manpower plans, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 814 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 820, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §110, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1930, related to State employment and training councils.

A prior section 820, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 848, related to authority of the Secretary to provide services, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 817 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 821, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §111, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1932, related to consultation by the Secretary with various Federal and State agencies regarding education and health and welfare services and supporting programs.

A prior section 821, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §111, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 849, provided for allowances for individuals receiving training or education with respect to comprehensive manpower services, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 875 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 822, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §112, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1932; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §1, Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375; Pub. L. 97–14, §2, June 16, 1981, 95 Stat. 98; Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(a), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 519, provided authorization of appropriations for carrying out this chapter.

A prior section 822, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §112, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 850, provided for supplemental vocational education assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 802 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 823, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §121, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1934, related to conditions applicable to all programs under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 983 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 824, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §122, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1938, and amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(a), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to special conditions applicable to public service employment.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 848 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 825, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §123, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1941, set out various administrative provisions applicable to this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former sections 813 and 984 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 826, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §124, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1943, related to wages and allowances applicable to all activities financed under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 821 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 827, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §125, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1944, related to labor standards for all laborers and mechanics employed on works that are federally assisted under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 986 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 828, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §126, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1944, related to various powers of the Secretary under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 982 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 829, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §127, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1945; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(2), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693, related to various reports to be made by Federal agencies regarding programs, activities, etc., under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former sections 849 and 985 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section, Pub. L. 95–524, §5(b), Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2019, related to development of methods to ascertain energy development and conservation employment impact data, and the presentation of best available data to the Secretary of Energy, Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, Director of the Office of Management and Budget, and committees of Congress.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of this section is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 830, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §128, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1947, authorized the Secretary to accept and utilize services and property in the furtherance of the purposes of this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 987 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 831, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §129, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1947, provided the Secretary with additional authorization to utilize various services and facilities of Federal, State, and local agencies and public and private organizations in the performance of functions under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 988 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 832, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §130, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1948, related to interstate agreements to facilitate compliance with the provisions of this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 989 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 833, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §131, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1948, prohibited financial assistance for programs under this chapter involving political activities.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 990 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 834, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §132, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1948, related to prohibition of, and sanctions against, discrimination under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 991 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 835, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §133, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1949, related to records, audits, and investigations of recipients of funds under this chapter.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 992 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 836, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §134, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1949, related to bonding of those who handle funds or other financial assistance received under this chapter.

Section 837, Pub. L. 93–203, title I, §135, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1950, related to establishment of an Office of Management Assistance, the assignment of accountants, management specialists, and other professionals to such office, and reimbursement for services of such office.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 841, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §201, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1950, set out the Congressional statement of purpose in enacting provisions relating to comprehensive employment and training services.

A prior section 841, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §201, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §106(a), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1849, provided for a Congressional statement of purpose with respect to a public service employment program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 811 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 842, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §202, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1950; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(b), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376; Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(b), (c), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 520, related to allocation of funds for comprehensive employment and training services.

A prior section 842, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §202, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §106(b), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1849, Pub. L. 94–444, §14(a), Oct 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1487, related to an allocation of funds with regard to the public service employment programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 813 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 843, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §203, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1953, related to conditions for the receipt of financial assistance for comprehensive employment and training services.

A prior section 843, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §203, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 94–444, §3(a)(1), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1476, related to availability of financial assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 815 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 844, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §204, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1953, related to supplemental vocational education assistance.

A prior section 844, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §204, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §106 (c), (d), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1849, related to eligible applicants, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 822 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 845, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §205, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1954, related to participant assessment in comprehensive employment and training services programs.

A prior section 845, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §205, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 851; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §106 (e), (f), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1849; Pub. L. 94–444, §7, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1482; Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §306(a), Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 651, related to applications for financial assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 846, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §211, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1954, described types of comprehensive employment and training services programs.

A prior section 846, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §206, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 854, related to approval of applications for financial assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 211 of Pub. L. 93–203, title II, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 857; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §103, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1847, related to a determination of areas of substantial unemployment which was formerly classified to section 851 of this title, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 811 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 847, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §212, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1955, related to limitations on use of funds under comprehensive employment and training services programs.

A prior section 847, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §207, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 854, related to special responsibilities of Secretary, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 848, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §213, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1955, related to eligibility for participation in a program for services for economically disadvantaged.

A prior section 848, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §208, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 855, related to special conditions for providing financial assistance for public service employment programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 849, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §214, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1955, provided for services for youth.

A prior section 849, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §209, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 856; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §105, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1848, provided for a special report to Congress with respect to activities concerning public service employment program, prior to the general revision of this Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 850, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §215, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1956, related to services for older workers.

A prior section 850, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §210, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 857; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §106(g), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1849, related to utilization of funds for public service employment programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 851, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §216, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1956, related to services for public assistance recipients.

A prior section 851, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §211, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 857; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §103, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1847, related to determinations by Secretary of areas of substantial unemployment, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §221, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1956, related to occupational upgrading and retraining programs.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of this section is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 853, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §231, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1957, set out the Congressional statement of purpose for transitional employment opportunities for the economically disadvantaged.

Section 854, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §232, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1958, related to financial assistance to prime sponsors for transitional public service employment for economically disadvantaged persons who are unemployed.

Section 855, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §233, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1958; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(b), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to allocation of funds for carrying out of transitional employment opportunities for the economically disadvantaged.

Section 856, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §234, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1959, related to expenditure of funds by prime sponsors for purposes of transitional employment opportunities for economically disadvantaged.

Section 857, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §235, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1959, related to applicability of section 966 of this title to transitional employment opportunities for economically disadvantaged.

Section 858, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §236, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1959, related to eligibility for transitional employment opportunities for economically disadvantaged.

Section 859, Pub. L. 93–203, title II, §237, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1960, related to payment of wages to economically disadvantaged individuals employed in transitional public service employment.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 871, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §301, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1960, related to special programs and activities.

A prior section 871, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §301, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 857, provided for additional manpower services, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 872, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §302, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1962, related to Native American employment and training programs.

A prior section 872, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §302, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 858; Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §303(a)–(d), Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 650, related to Native American employment and training programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 873, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §303, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1964; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(3), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693, related to migrant and seasonal farmworker employment and training programs.

A prior section 873, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §303, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 859, related to migrant and seasonal farmworker manpower programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 874, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §304, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1965, related to job search and relocation assistance.

A prior section 874, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §304, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 859, provided for youth programs and other special programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 875, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §305, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1965; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(d), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to veterans information and outreach.

A prior section 875, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §306, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 860, related to a consultation with Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 803 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 876, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §306, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1965, related to programs for the handicapped.

A prior section 306 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 860, related to a consultation with Secretary of Health, Education, and Welfare, was classified to former section 875 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 877, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §307, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1966, related to partnership programs between prime sponsors and employment security agencies.

Section 878, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §308, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1966, related to projects for middle-aged and older workers.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 879, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §311, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1968; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(4), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693; Pub. L. 96–583, §3(c), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to establishment of various employment and training research programs.

A prior section 311 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 860; Pub. L. 94–444, §10, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1483, which related to establishment of a comprehensive program of manpower research, was classified to former section 881 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 880, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §312, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1970, provided for a labor market information and job bank program.

A prior section 312 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 861, which related to development of a system of labor market information and establishment of a job bank program, was classified to former section 882 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 881, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §313, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1971, related to evaluation of all programs and activities under this chapter.

A prior section 881, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §311, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 860; Pub. L. 94–444, §10, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1483, related to establishment of a comprehensive program of manpower research, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 313 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 862, which related to an evaluation of the programs and activities conducted under this chapter, was classified to section 883 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 882, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §314, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1972; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(5), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693, provided for training and technical assistance with respect to programs under this chapter.

A prior section 882, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §312, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 861, related to development of a system of labor market information and establishment of a job bank program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 314 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, which related to a continuous study with respect to the removal of artificial barriers to employment and advancement, was classified to former section 884 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 885 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 883, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §315, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1972, related to National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee.

A prior section 883, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §313, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 862, related to evaluation of programs and activities conducted under this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 315 of Pub. L. 93–203, title III, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, which related to training and technical assistance, was classified to former section 885 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 884, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §316, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1973, related to evaluation of a prime sponsor's employment and training services program and to the awarding of incentive grants to such sponsors.

A prior section 884, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §314, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, related to a continuous study with respect to the removal of artificial barriers to employment and advancement, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 885, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §317, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1973, related to voucher demonstration projects.

A prior section 885, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §315, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, related to training and technical assistance, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 886, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §318, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1974, related to employment and training activities to stimulate local private economic development.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 891, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §401, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1974, set out Congressional declaration of purpose for youth employment and training programs.

A prior section 891, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §321, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 632, provided for a Congressional declaration of purpose with respect to youth employment, training and demonstration programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 401 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, which provided for a congressional statement of purpose with respect to the Job Corps program, was classified to former section 911 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 874 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 892, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §402, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1974, provided definitions of “eligible youth” under various youth programs.

A prior section 892, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §325, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 632, related to authorization of youth incentive entitlement pilot projects, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 402 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 864, related to establishment of a Job Corps and was classified to former section 912 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 892a, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §403, as added Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(e)(1), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 520, related to transferability of funds for youth programs.

A prior section 892a, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §326, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 633, related to guarantees of employment opportunities, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 892b to 892d of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 892b, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §327, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 633, related to selection of prime sponsors.

Section 892c, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §328, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 635, related to special provisions for development of a participants role as a member of the community and for restrictions on use of funds.

Section 892d, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §329, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 635, related to reports to Congress.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 893, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §411, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1974, set out Congressional statement of purpose for youth employment demonstration programs.

A prior section 893, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §331, added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 636, provided for a Congressional declaration of purpose with respect to a program of community conservation and improvement projects, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 411 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 868, which related to activities designed to establish a mutually beneficial relationship between Job Corps centers and nearby communities, was classified to former section 921 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 891 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 893a to 893g of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 893a, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §332, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 636, defined terms used in provisions covering youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Section 893b, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §333, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 636, related to allocation of funds with respect to youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Section 893c, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §334, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 637, authorized Secretary to enter into agreements with eligible applicants to pay the costs of community conservation and improvement youth employment projects.

Section 893d, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §335, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 637, related to applications for community conservation and improvement youth employment projects.

Section 893e, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §336, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 637, related to submittal of proposed agreements to Secretary.

Section 893f, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §337, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 638, related to authority of Secretary to approve or deny project applications.

Section 893g, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §338, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 639, related to a work limitation with respect to eligible youths involved in community conservation and improvement projects.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of this section is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 894, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §416, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1975, authorized youth incentive entitlement pilot projects.

A prior section 894, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §341, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 639, provided for a Congressional declaration of purpose with respect to youth employment and training programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 416 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 872, which related to the Federal status of enrollees in the Job Corps, was classified to former section 926 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 892 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203, by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 894a to 894g of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 894a, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §342, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 639, related to programs authorized for youth employment and training.

Section 894b, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §343, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 640, related to allocation of funds with respect to youth employment and training programs.

Section 894c, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §344, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 642, related to eligible applicants for purposes of the youth employment and training programs.

Section 894d, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §345, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 642, related to eligible participants for programs for employment and training of youth.

Section 894e, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §346, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 642, related to conditions for receipt of financial assistance for programs authorized under former section 894a of this title.

Section 894f, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §347, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 645, related to a review of plans by the Secretary.

Section 894g, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §348, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 645, related to discretionary projects of Secretary dealing with unemployment problems of youth.

Section 895, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §417, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1975, related to employment guarantees under youth incentive entitlement pilot projects.

A prior section 895, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §351, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 646, provided for authorization of appropriations and distribution of funds with respect to youth employment demonstration programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 417 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873, which related to special limitations with respect to the Job Corps, was classified to former section 927 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 892a of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 895a to 895f of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 895a, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §352, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 646, related to rates of pay.

Section 895b, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §353, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 647, related to special conditions with respect to financial assistance to youth employment, training, and demonstration programs.

Section 895c, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §354, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 648, related to special provisions for youth community conservation and improvement projects and for youth employment and training programs.

Section 895d, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §355, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 649, related to grant or award of academic credit and counseling and placement services.

Section 895e, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §356, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 649, related to affect of earnings received under the youth employment, training, and demonstration programs in determination of need under other programs.

Section 895f, Pub. L. 93–203, title III, §357, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title II, §201, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 649, related to general provisions.

Section 896, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §418, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1976, related to selection of prime sponsors to operate youth incentive entitlement projects.

A prior section 418 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873, related to prohibitions respecting political discrimination and political activity, was classified to former section 928 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 892b of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 897, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §419, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1978, related to special provisions for development of participant's role as a member of the community and for restrictions on use of funds for youth incentive entitlement projects.

A prior section 419 of Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, which provided for administrative provisions, was classified to former section 929 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 892c of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 898, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §420, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1978, related to reports by the Secretary to Congress regarding youth incentive entitlement projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 892d of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 899, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §421, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1979, set out Congressional statement of purpose for youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 900, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §422, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1979, provided definitions applicable to youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893a of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 901, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §423, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1979, related to allocation of funds regarding youth community conservation projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893b of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 902, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §424, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1980, authorized Secretary to enter into agreements with eligible applicants to pay the costs of community conversation and improvement youth employment projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893c of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 903, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §425, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1980, related to applications for youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893d of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 904, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §426, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1980, related to proposed agreements for funding submitted to Secretary by eligible applicants.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893e of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 905, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §427, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1981, related to approval or denial of youth community conservation and improvement project applications submitted with an opposed agreement.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893f of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 906, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §428, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1981, set out work limitations under youth community conservation and improvement projects.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 893g of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 907, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §431, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1982, set out Congressional statement of purpose for youth employment and training programs.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 908, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §432, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1982, related to youth employment and training programs eligible to receive financial assistance.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894a of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 909, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §433, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1983; amended Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(d)(1), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 520, related to allocation of funds for youth employment and training programs.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894b of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 910, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §434, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1985, related to eligible applicants for youth employment and training programs.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894c of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 911, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §435, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1985, related to eligible participants for youth employment and training programs.

A prior section 911, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §401, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 863, provided for a congressional statement of purpose with regard to the Job Corps, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894d of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 912, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §436, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1985; amended Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(d)(2), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 520, related to conditions for receipt of financial assistance for youth employment and training programs.

A prior section 912, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §402, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 864, related to establishment of the Job Corps, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894e of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 913, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §437, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1987, related to review of youth employment and training plans by Secretary.

A prior section 913, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §403, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 864, related to eligibility for enrollment in the Job Corps, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894f of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 914, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §438, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1987; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(6), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693, related to Secretary's discretionary youth employment and training projects.

A prior section 914, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §404, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 864, related to screening and selection of applicants, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 894g of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 915, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §439, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1988, related to youth employment incentive and social bonus program.

A prior section 915, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §405, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 865, related to special limitations on screening and selection of applicants, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §441, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1989, provided that, of the sums available for carrying out the provisions of this part, 15 percent would be available for subpart 1, 15 percent would be available for subpart 2, and 70 percent would be available for subpart 3.

A prior section 916, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §406, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 865, related to enrollment and assignment in the Job Corps, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 917, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §442, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1989, related to rates of pay under youth employment demonstration programs.

A prior section 917, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §407, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 866, related to establishment and operation of Job Corps centers, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895a of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 918, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §443, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1990, related to special conditions for financial assistance for youth employment demonstration programs.

A prior section 918, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §408, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 866, related to activities of the program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895b of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 919, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §444, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1991, related to special provisions for youth community conservation and improvement projects and youth employment and training programs.

A prior section 919, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §409, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 867, provided for allowances and support for the enrollees, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895c of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 920, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §445, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1992, related to academic credit and counseling and placement services.

A prior section 920, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §410, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 868, related to Job Corps centers standards of conduct and deportment, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895d of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 921, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §446, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1992, provided that the earnings and allowances received by any youth under a youth employment demonstration program would be disregarded in determining the eligibility of the youth's family for, and the amount of, any benefits based on need under any Federal or federally assisted program.

A prior section 921, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §411, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 868, related to activities designed to establish a mutually beneficial relationship between Job Corps centers and nearby communities, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895e of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 922, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §447, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1992, related to applicability of subchapter I of this chapter to youth employment demonstration programs.

A prior section 922, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §412, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 869, related to counseling and job placement, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 895f of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 923, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §450, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1992, set out Congressional statement of purpose for establishment of the Job Corps.

A prior section 923, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §413, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 870, related to an evaluation of experimental and developmental projects, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 911 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 924, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §451, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1993, related to establishment of a Job Corps.

A prior section 924, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §414, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 871, related to use of advisory boards and committees by Secretary, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 912 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 925, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §452, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1993, related to individuals eligible to enroll in Job Corps.

A prior section 925, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §415, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 871, related to action by Secretary to facilitate participation by the States in the Job Corps program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 913 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 926, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §453, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1993, related to screening and selection of applicants for Job Corps.

A prior section 926, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §416, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 872, related to applicability of certain Federal laws to the Job Corps program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 914 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 927, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §454, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1994, related to special limitations on selection of enrollees in Job Corps.

A prior section 927, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §417, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873, related to special limitations with regard to the Job Corps program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 915 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 928, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §455, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1994, related to enrollment and assignment of enrollees in Job Corps.

A prior section 928, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §418, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873, related to prohibitions concerning political discrimination and political activity, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 916 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 929, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §456, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1994, related to establishment of Job Corps centers.

A prior section 929, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §419, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 873; Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to administrative provisions with regard to the Job Corps program, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 917 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 930, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §457, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1995; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(c), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to various Job Corps activities.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 918 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 931, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §458, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1995, related to allowances and support for enrollees of the Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 919 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 932, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §459, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1996, related to standards of conduct in Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 920 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 933, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §460, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1997, related to community participation, including community advisory councils, with regard to Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 921 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 934, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §461, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1997, related to counseling and job placement for enrollees of Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 922 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 935, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §462, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1998; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(c), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to experimental and developmental projects in furtherance of Job Corps program.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 923 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524

Section 936, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §463, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1998, related to advisory boards and committees in connection with the operation of Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 924 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 937, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §464, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1999, related to participation of States in Job Corps program.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 925 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 938, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §465, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 1999, related to application of provisions of Federal law to enrollees in Job Corps.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 926 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 939, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §466, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2000, related to ratio of women enrollees in Job Corps, acquisition as property of United States of all studies, evaluations, and proposals produced with Federal funds in course of Job Corps program, and transactions conducted by private for-profit contractors for Job Corps centers.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 927 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 940, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §467, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2000, set out administrative provisions in connection with Job Corps program.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 929 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 941, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §468, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2001, related to utilization of funds for Job Corps program.

Section 941a, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §469, as added Pub. L. 96–341, §1, Sept. 8, 1980, 94 Stat. 1076, related to Earle C. Clements Job Corps Center.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 942, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §481, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2001, related to establishment of summer youth programs.

Section 943, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §482, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2001, related to prime sponsors eligible for assistance under summer youth programs.

Section 944, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §483, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2001, related to financial assistance under summer youth programs.

Section 945, Pub. L. 93–203, title IV, §484, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2002, related to Secretarial authority over summer youth programs.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 951, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §501, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2002, set out Congressional statement of purpose for establishment of a National Commission for Employment Policy.

A prior section 951, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §501, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 874, provided for Congressional findings and declaration of purpose with regard to National Commission for Manpower Policy, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 952, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §502, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2002; amended Pub. L. 96–88, title V, §508(h)(7), Oct. 17, 1979, 93 Stat. 693, related to establishment of National Commission for Employment Policy.

A prior section 952, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §502, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 874; Pub. L. 94–482, title II, §203(b)(1), Oct. 12, 1976, 90 Stat. 2214, related to establishment of National Commission for Manpower Policy, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 95–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 953, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §503, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2003, related to functions of National Commission for Employment Policy.

A prior section 953, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §503, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 875; Pub. L. 94–482, title II, §203(b)(2), Oct. 12, 1976, 90 Stat. 2214; Pub. L. 95–40, §1(28)(B), June 3, 1977, 91 Stat. 207, related to functions of National Commission for Manpower Policy, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 954, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §504, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2004, set out administrative provisions relating to powers of Chairman of the National Commission for Employment Policy.

A prior section 954, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §504, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 875, related to a study of utilization and interrelation of programs of manpower training with closely associated programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 955, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §505, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2005, related to reports made by Commission to President, Congress, and Federal departments and agencies.

A prior section 955, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §505, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 875, related to reports to President and Congress, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 956, Pub. L. 93–203, title V, §506, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 876, related to a study by Secretary concerning the impact of energy shortages upon manpower needs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

For provisions that the Commission established by former sections 951 to 955 of this title continues to be authorized until Sept. 30, 1983, and that on that date the personnel, property, and records of that Commission shall be transferred to the Commission established by section 1771 et seq. of this title, see section 1591(b) of this title.

Section 961, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §601, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2005, set out Congressional statement of purpose for a countercyclical public service employment program.

A prior section 961, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, 601, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §2, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1476; Pub. L. 95–44, §2(b), June 15, 1977, 91 Stat. 220, authorized appropriations for emergency job programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 962, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §602, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2006, related to reports on appropriations submitted by President to Congress.

A prior section 962, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §602, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §§3(a)(2), 8(a), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1476, 1482; Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §306(b), Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 651, related to availability of financial assistance for emergency job programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 963, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §603, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2006, related to financial assistance for public service employment programs.

A prior section 963, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §603, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1846; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §§4(b), 8(b), (c), 14(b), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1477, 1482, 1487, related to allotment of funds with regard to emergency job programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 962 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 964, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §604, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2007; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §3(b), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3376, related to allocation of funds with regard to public service employment programs.

A prior section 964, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §604, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1846, related to special provision for areas of excessively high unemployment and for expansion of job opportunities, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 963 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 965, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §605, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2008, related to expenditure of funds with regard to a public service employment program.

A prior section 965, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §605, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1847; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §5(b)(3), (d), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1480, related to expenditure of funds with regard to emergency job programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 966, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §606, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2008, related to prime sponsors and Native American entities qualified to receive financial assistance and program agents.

A prior section 966, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §606, as added Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1847; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §5(b)(2), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1479, provided for reallocation of funds by Secretary, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 967, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §607, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2009, related to eligibility for employment under a public service employment program.

A prior section 967, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §607, as added Pub. L. 94–444, §5(a), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1477; amended Pub. L. 95–44, §2(c), June 15, 1977, 91 Stat. 220, related to reservation of funds for certain public service jobholders, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Provisions similar to those comprising this section were contained in former section 968 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 968, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §608, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2009, related to payment of wages to those employed under a public service employment program.

A prior section 968, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §608, as added Pub. L. 94–444, §5(a), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1478; amended Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §307, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 652, related to eligibility of long-term unemployed low-income persons, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 969, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §609, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2009, related to wage supplementation for public service employees receiving financial assistance under public service employment programs.

A prior section 969, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §609, as added Pub. L. 94–444, §5(a), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1479, related to approval of project applications, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 970, Pub. L. 93–203, title VI, §610, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2009, related to utilization of funds available under public service employment programs.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 981, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §701, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2010; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §2(1), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375, set out Congressional statement of purpose for increase of private sector opportunities for the economically disadvantaged.

A prior section 981, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §701, formerly title VI, §601, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 876; renumbered title VII, §701, and amended Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §§101, 107(a)–(c), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, 1849; Pub. L. 94–444, §5(b)(1), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1479; Pub. L. 95–93, title III, §303(e), Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 650, defined terms for use in this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 982, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §702, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2010; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §2(2), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375; Pub. L. 97–35, title VII, §701(f), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 521, related to financial assistance to prime sponsors for increase of private sector opportunities for economically disadvantaged.

A prior section 982, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §702, formerly title VI, §602, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 877; renumbered title VII, §702, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845; amended Pub. L. 94–444, §5(c), Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1480, related to legal authority of Secretary under this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 983, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §703, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2010; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §2(3), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375, related to conditions for receipt of financial assistance for increase of private sector opportunities for economically disadvantaged.

A prior section 983, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §703, formerly title VI, §603, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 878; renumbered title VII, §703, and amended Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §§101, 107(d), Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, 1849, related to conditions applicable to all programs, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 984, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §704, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2011; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §2(4), (5), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375, related to private industry councils.

A prior section 984, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §704, formerly title VI, §604, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 879; renumbered title VII, §704, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, and amended Pub. L. 94–444, §§3(b), 9, 11, Oct. 1, 1976, 90 Stat. 1476, 1482, 1483, related to special provisions applicable to this chapter, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 985, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §705, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2012; amended Pub. L. 96–583, §2(6)–(9), Dec. 23, 1980, 94 Stat. 3375, 3376, related to private sector initiatives by prime sponsors.

A prior section 985, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §705, formerly title VI, §605, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 879; renumbered title VII, §705, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, provided for reports to President and Congress, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 986, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §706, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2013, related to a report to Congress and dissemination of information to prime sponsors.

A prior section 986, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §706, formerly title VI, §606, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 880; renumbered title VII, §706, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to labor standards, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 987 to 990 of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 987, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §707, formerly title VI, §607, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 880; renumbered title VII, §707, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to authority of Secretary to accept gifts in name of Department.

Section 988, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §708, formerly title VI, §608, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 881; renumbered title VII, §708, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to use of the services and facilities of departments, agencies, and establishments of the United States by Secretary.

Section 989, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §709, formerly title VI, §609, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 881; renumbered title VII, §709, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to interstate agreements.

Section 990, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §710, formerly title VI, §610, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 881; renumbered title VII, §710, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to prohibition concerning political activities.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.

Section 991, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §801, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2013, set out Congressional statement of purpose for Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 991, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §712, formerly title VI, §612, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 882; renumbered title VII, §712, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to prohibition concerning discrimination, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 801 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, which provided for Congressional declaration of purpose with regard to Young Adult Conservation Corps, was formerly classified to section 993 of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 992, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §802, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2013, related to establishment of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 992, Pub. L. 93–203, title VII, §713, formerly title VI, §613, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 882; renumbered title VII, §713, Pub. L. 93–567, title I, §101, Dec. 31, 1974, 88 Stat. 1845, related to records, audits, and reports, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 802 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, which provided for establishment of Young Adult Conservation Corps, was formerly classified to section 993a of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 993, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §803, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2013, related to enrollees of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 993, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §801, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, provided for a Congressional declaration of purpose with regard to Young Adult Conservation Corps, prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

A prior section 803 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, which related to selection of enrollees, was formerly classified to section 993b of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Sections 993a to 993i of this title were eliminated in the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 993a, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §802, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, related to establishment of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

Section 993b, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §803, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 627, related to selection of enrollees of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

Section 993c, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §804, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 628, related to activities of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

Section 993d, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §805, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 629, related to conditions applicable to Young Adult Conservation Corps enrollees.

Section 993e, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §806, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 630, related to State and local programs.

Section 993f, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §807, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, related to an annual report to President and Congress.

Section 993g, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §808, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, related to prohibition concerning discrimination.

Section 993h, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §809, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, related to transfer of funds pursuant to an interagency agreement.

Section 993i, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §810, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, related to authorization of appropriations for Young Adult Conservation Corps program.

Section 994, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §804, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2014, related to activities of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 804 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 628, which related to activities of Young Adult Conservation Corps, was formerly classified to section 993c of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 995, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §805, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2015, related to conditions applicable to enrollees of Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 805 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 629, which related to conditions applicable to Young Adult Conservation Corps enrollees, was formerly classified to section 993d of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 996, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §806, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2016, related to State and local programs in connection with Young Adult Conservation Corps.

A prior section 806 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 630, which related to State and local programs, was formerly classified to section 993e of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 997, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §807, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2017, related to an annual report to President and Congress.

A prior section 807 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, which related to an annual report to President and Congress, was formerly classified to section 993f of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 998, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §808, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2017, related to prohibition of discrimination.

A prior section 808 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, which related to a prohibition concerning discrimination, was formerly classified to section 993g of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 999, Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, §809, as added Pub. L. 95–524, §2, Oct. 27, 1978, 92 Stat. 2017, related to transfer of funds pursuant to interagency agreement.

A prior section 809 of Pub. L. 93–203, title VIII, as added Pub. L. 95–93, title I, §101, Aug. 5, 1977, 91 Stat. 631, which related to a transfer of funds pursuant to an interagency agreement, was formerly classified to section 993h of this title prior to the general revision of Pub. L. 93–203 by Pub. L. 95–524.

Section 184(a) of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that the repeal of these sections is effective Oct. 13, 1982.



























This chapter is referred to in section 441 of this title; title 7 section 1a; title 15 sections 77b, 631b, 662; title 18 section 1027; title 20 section 1085; title 26 sections 412, 414; title 26 section 404; title 31 section 9502; title 42 sections 1395w–22, 1396s, 3035r; title 45 section 743.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 1201, 1202, 1203, 1343 of this title; title 18 sections 664, 1027, 1954; title 19 sections 2345, 2373; title 26 section 6103.

The Congress finds that the growth in size, scope, and numbers of employee benefit plans in recent years has been rapid and substantial; that the operational scope and economic impact of such plans is increasingly interstate; that the continued well-being and security of millions of employees and their dependents are directly affected by these plans; that they are affected with a national public interest; that they have become an important factor affecting the stability of employment and the successful development of industrial relations; that they have become an important factor in commerce because of the interstate character of their activities, and of the activities of their participants, and the employers, employee organizations, and other entities by which they are established or maintained; that a large volume of the activities of such plans are carried on by means of the mails and instrumentalities of interstate commerce; that owing to the lack of employee information and adequate safeguards concerning their operation, it is desirable in the interests of employees and their beneficiaries, and to provide for the general welfare and the free flow of commerce, that disclosure be made and safeguards be provided with respect to the establishment, operation, and administration of such plans; that they substantially affect the revenues of the United States because they are afforded preferential Federal tax treatment; that despite the enormous growth in such plans many employees with long years of employment are losing anticipated retirement benefits owing to the lack of vesting provisions in such plans; that owing to the inadequacy of current minimum standards, the soundness and stability of plans with respect to adequate funds to pay promised benefits may be endangered; that owing to the termination of plans before requisite funds have been accumulated, employees and their beneficiaries have been deprived of anticipated benefits; and that it is therefore desirable in the interests of employees and their beneficiaries, for the protection of the revenue of the United States, and to provide for the free flow of commerce, that minimum standards be provided assuring the equitable character of such plans and their financial soundness.

It is hereby declared to be the policy of this chapter to protect interstate commerce and the interests of participants in employee benefit plans and their beneficiaries, by requiring the disclosure and reporting to participants and beneficiaries of financial and other information with respect thereto, by establishing standards of conduct, responsibility, and obligation for fiduciaries of employee benefit plans, and by providing for appropriate remedies, sanctions, and ready access to the Federal courts.

It is hereby further declared to be the policy of this chapter to protect interstate commerce, the Federal taxing power, and the interests of participants in private pension plans and their beneficiaries by improving the equitable character and the soundness of such plans by requiring them to vest the accrued benefits of employees with significant periods of service, to meet minimum standards of funding, and by requiring plan termination insurance.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §2, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 832.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (b) and (c), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out below and Tables.

Pub. L. 98–397, title III, §§302, 303, Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1451, 1452, as amended by Pub. L. 99–514, §2, title XI, §1145(c), title XVIII, §1898(g), (h)(1)(A), (2), (3), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095, 2491, 2956, 2957; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7861(d)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2431, provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1) the date on which the last of the collective bargaining agreements relating to the plan terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof agreed to after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984]), or

“(2) July 1, 1988.

For purposes of paragraph (1), any plan amendment made pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement relating to the plan which amends the plan solely to conform to any requirement added by title I or II [of Pub. L. 98–397] shall not be treated as a termination of such collective bargaining agreement.

“(c)

“(d)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) between employee representatives and 1 or more employers, and

“(B) successor agreements to 1 or more collective bargaining agreements which terminate after July 30, 1984, and before January 1, 1985,

the amendments made by section 301 shall not apply to plan amendments adopted before April 1, 1985, pursuant to such successor agreements (without regard to any modification or reopening after December 31, 1984).

“(a)

“(1)

“(2)

“(3)

“(b)

“(1) the date on which such plan is first otherwise amended after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984], or

“(2) the beginning of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1986.

“(c)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) who has at least 1 hour of service under the plan on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984] or has at least 1 hour of paid leave on or after such date of enactment,

“(B) who dies before the annuity starting date, and

“(C) who dies on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984] and before the first day of the first plan year to which the amendments made by this Act apply,

the amendments made by sections 103 and 203 shall be treated as in effect as of the time of such participant's death. In the case of a profit-sharing or stock bonus plan to which this paragraph applies, the plan shall be treated as meeting the requirements of the amendments made by sections 103 and 203 with respect to any participant if the plan made a distribution in a form other than a life annuity to the surviving spouse of the participant of such participant's nonforfeitable benefit.

“(3)

“(4)

“(A)

“(B)

“(d)

“(1) shall treat such order as a qualified domestic relations order if such administrator is paying benefits pursuant to such order on such date, and

“(2) may treat any other such order entered before such date as a qualified domestic relations order even if such order does not meet the requirements of such amendments.

“(e)

“(1)

“(A) a participant had at least 1 hour of service under the plan on or after September 2, 1974,

“(B) section 205 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [section 1055 of this title] and section 401(a)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [section 401(a)(11) of Title 26] (as in effect on the day before the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984]) would not (but for this paragraph) apply to such participant,

“(C) the amendments made by sections 103 and 203 [amending section 1055 of this title and section 401 of Title 26 and enacting section 417 of Title 26] of this Act do not apply to such participant, and

“(D) as of the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984], the participant's annuity starting date has not occurred and the participant is alive,

then such participant may elect to have section 205 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [section 1055 of this title] and section 401(a)(11) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [section 401(a)(11) of Title 26] (as in effect on the day before the date of the enactment of this Act) apply.

“(2)

“(A) a participant had at least 1 hour of service in any plan year beginning on or after January 1, 1976,

“(B) the amendments made by sections 103 and 203 [amending section 1055 of this title and section 401 of Title 26 and enacting section 417 of Title 26] would not (but for this paragraph) apply to such participant,

“(C) when such participant separated from service, such participant had at least 10 years of service under the plan and had a nonforfeitable right to all (or any portion) of such participant's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions, and

“(D) as of the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984], such participant's annuity starting date has not occurred and such participant is alive,

then such participant may elect to have the qualified preretirement survivor annuity requirements of the amendments made by sections 103 and 203 apply.

“(3)

“(A) beginning on the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 23, 1984], and

“(B) ending on the earlier of the participant's annuity starting date or the date of the participant's death.

“(4)

“(A)

“(i)

“(ii)

“(B)

“(f) The amendments made by section 301 of this Act [amending section 1054 of this title and sections 401 and 411 of Title 26] shall not apply to the termination of a defined benefit plan if such termination—

“(1) is pursuant to a resolution directing the termination of such plan which was adopted by the Board of Directors of a corporation on July 17, 1984, and

“(2) occurred on November 30, 1984.”

[Amendment by section 1145(c) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable as if included in the amendments made by the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, see section 1145(d) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.]

[Amendment by section 1898(g), (h)(1)(A), (2), (3) of Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if included in the provision of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, to which such amendment relates, except as otherwise provided, see section 1898(j) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.]

Pub. L. 105–92, §1, Nov. 19, 1997, 111 Stat. 2139, provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 1146 and 1147 of this title and provisions set out as a note under section 1146 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Savings Are Vital to Everyone's Retirement Act of 1997’.”

Pub. L. 103–401, §1, Oct. 22, 1994, 108 Stat. 4172, provided that: “This Act [amending section 1132 of this title and enacting provisions set out as notes under section 1132 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Pension Annuitants Protection Act of 1994’.”

Pub. L. 102–89, §1, Aug. 14, 1991, 105 Stat. 446, provided that: “This Act [amending section 1002 of this title and enacting provisions set out as a note under section 1002 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Rural Telephone Cooperative Associations ERISA Amendments Act of 1991’.”

Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11001, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 237, provided that: “This title [enacting sections 1001b, 1085a, 1143a, 1349, 1369, and 1370 of this title, amending sections 1002, 1023, 1024, 1054, 1061, 1083, 1084, 1086, 1301, 1303, 1305, 1306, 1322, 1322a, 1341, 1342, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1362 to 1364, and 1366 to 1368 of this title, and sections 402, 404, 412, and 501 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, repealing section 1304 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 1023, 1054, 1085a, 1135, 1143a, 1303, 1306, 1341, 1362, and 1369 of this title and section 404 of Title 26] may be cited as ‘Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986’.”

Pub. L. 98–397, §1, Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1426, provided that: “This Act [enacting section 417 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, amending sections 1025, 1052 to 1056, and 1144 of this title and sections 72, 401, 402, 410, 411, 414, 6057, and 6652 of Title 26, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section] may be cited as the ‘Retirement Equity Act of 1984’.”

Pub. L. 96–364, §1, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1208, provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 1001a, 1145, 1322a, 1322b, 1323, 1341a, 1381 to 1405, 1411 to 1415, 1421 to 1426, 1431, 1441, and 1451 to 1453 of this title and sections 418 to 418E of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, amending sections 1002, 1023, 1051, 1053, 1058, 1081, 1082, 1103, 1104, 1108, 1132, 1202, 1301 to 1303, 1305 to 1307, 1321, 1322, 1341, 1342, 1344, 1346, 1348, 1361 to 1366, and 1461 of this title, section 8521 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and sections 194, 401, 404, 411 to 414, 501, 3304, 4971 and 4975 of Title 26, repealing former section 1323 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section, sections 1001a, 1302, 1306, 1381, 1385, 1426 and 1461 of this title, section 8521 of Title 5, and sections 401, 404, 414, 418, and 3304 of Title 26] may be cited as the ‘Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980’.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 93–406 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter, sections 408 to 415, 4971 to 4975, 6057 to 6059, 6692, and 6693 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, section 1037 of former Title 31, Money and Finance, and section 1320b–1 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, amending section 441 of this title, sections 5108 and 5109 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, sections 664, 1027, and 1954 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, sections 37, 46, 56, 62, 72, 101, 122, 219, 220, 275, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 503, 801, 805, 871, 901, 1304, 1348, 1379, 2039, 3401, 6033, 6047, 6051, 6103, 6104, 6161, 6201, 6204, 6211, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6344, 6501, 6503, 6511, 6512, 6601, 6652, 6653, 6659, 6676, 6677, 6679, 6682, 6688, 6690, 6861, 6862, 7422, 7451, 7459, 7482, 7701, and 7802, of Title 26, and section 846 of former Title 31, repealing sections 301 to 309 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 72, 122, 219, 401, 402, 403, 404, 410, 411, 412, 415, 501, 4973, 4975, 6057, 6059, 6103, 6104, 7476, and 7802 of Title 26] may be cited as the ‘Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974’.”

This subchapter and subchapter III of this chapter not applicable in interpreting Internal Revenue Code of 1986, except to the extent specifically provided in such Code, or as determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, see section 9343(a) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Pub. L. 98–397, title III, §304, Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1454, directed Comptroller General to conduct detailed study of effect on women of participation, vesting, funding, integration, survivorship features, and other relevant plan and Federal pension rules and, not later than Jan. 1, 1990, submit a report on the study to Congress.

Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §413, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1309, directed Comptroller General to conduct a study of effects of amendments made by Pub. L. 99–364 on: participants, beneficiaries, employers, employee organizations, and other parties, and the self-sufficiency of the fund established under section 1305 of this title with respect to benefits guaranteed under section 1322a of this title, taking into account financial conditions of multiemployer plans and employers and to report to Congress no later than June 30, 1985, results of study including his recommendations with respect thereto.

Pub. L. 96–14, May 24, 1979, 93 Stat. 29, known as the Pension Policy Commission Act, authorized the President's Commission on Pension Policy established by Ex. Ord. No. 12071 to continue in operation for two years following May 24, 1979, and set forth membership, compensation, implementation, and reporting requirements, with the Commission to cease to exist ninety days after submission of the final report.

Prepared by the President and transmitted to the Senate and the House of Representatives in Congress assembled, August 10, 1978, pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 9 of Title 5 of the United States Code.1

Except as otherwise provided in Sections 104 and 106 of this Plan, all authority of the Secretary of Labor to issue the following described documents pursuant to the statutes hereinafter specified is hereby transferred to the Secretary of the Treasury:

(a) regulations, rulings, opinions, variances and waivers under Parts 2 [29 U.S.C. 1051 et seq.] and 3 [29 U.S.C. 1081 et seq.] of Subtitle B of Title I and subsection 1012(c) [set out as a note under 26 U.S.C. 411] of Title II of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (29 U.S.C. 1001 note) (hereinafter referred to as “ERISA”).

EXCEPT for sections and subsections 201, 203(a)(3)(B), 209, and 301(a) of ERISA; [29 U.S.C. 1051, 1053(a)(3)(B), 1059, and 1081(a)];

(b) such regulations, rulings, and opinions which are granted to the Secretary of Labor under Sections 404, 410, 411, 412, and 413 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, as amended [26 U.S.C. 404, 410, 411, 412, and 413], (hereinafter referred to as the “Code”).

EXCEPT for subsection 411(a)(3)(B) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 411(a)(3)(B)] and the definitions of “collectively bargained plan” and “collective bargaining agreement” contained in subsections 404 (a)(1)(B) and (a)(1)(C), 410 (b)(2)(A) and (b)(2)(B), and 413(a)(1) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 404(a)(1)(B) and (a)(1)(C), 410 (b)(2)(A) and (b)(2)(B), and 413(a)(1)]; and

(c) regulations, rulings, and opinions under subsections 3(19), 3(22), 3(23), 3(24), 3(25), 3(27), 3(28), 3(29), 3(30), and 3(31) of Subtitle A of Title I of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1002(19), (22), (23), (24), (25), (27), (28), (29), (30), and (31)].

Except as otherwise provided in Section 105 of this Plan, all authority of the Secretary of the Treasury to issue the following described documents pursuant to the statutes hereinafter specified is hereby transferred to the Secretary of Labor;

(a) regulations, rulings, opinions, and exemptions under section 4975 of the Code [26 U.S.C. 4975],

EXCEPT for (i) subsections 4975(a), (b), (c)(3), (d)(3), (c)(1), and (e)(7) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 4975(a), (b), (c)(3), (d)(3), (e)(1), and (e)(7)]; (ii) to the extent necessary for the continued enforcement of subsections 4975(a) and (b) [26 U.S.C. 4975(a) and (b)] by the Secretary of the Treasury, subsections 4975(f)(1), (f)(2), (f)(4), (f)(5) and (f)(6) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 4975(f)(1), (f)(2), (f)(4), (f)(5) and (f)(6)]; and (iii) exemptions with respect to transactions that are exempted by subsection 404(c) of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1104(c)] from the provisions of Part 4 of Subtitle B of Title I of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1101 et seq.]; and

(b) regulations, rulings, and opinions under subsection 2003(c) of ERISA [set out as a note under 29 U.S.C. 4975].

EXCEPT for subsection 2003(c)(1)(B) [set out in the note under 26 U.S.C. 4975].

In the case of fiduciary actions which are subject to Part 4 of Subtitle B of Title I of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1101 et seq.], the Secretary of the Treasury shall notify the Secretary of Labor prior to the time of commencing any proceeding to determine whether the action violates the exclusive benefit rule of subsection 401(a) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 401(a)], but not later than prior to issuing a preliminary notice of intent to disqualify under that rule, and the Secretary of the Treasury shall not issue a determination that a plan or trust does not satisfy the requirements of subsection 401(a) by reason of the exclusive benefit rule of subsection 401(a), unless within 90 days after the date on which the Secretary of the Treasury notifies the Secretary of Labor of pending action, the Secretary of Labor certifies that he has no objection to the disqualification or the Secretary of Labor fails to respond to the Secretary of the Treasury. The requirements of this paragraph do not apply in the case of any termination or jeopardy assessment under sections 6851 or 6861 of the Code [26 U.S.C. 6851 or 6861] that has been approved in advance by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, or, as delegated, the Assistant Commissioner for Employee Plans and Exempt Organizations.

The transfers provided for in Section 101 of this Plan shall not affect the ability of the Secretary of Labor, subject to the provisions of Title III of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.] relating to jurisdiction, administration, and enforcement, to engage in enforcement under Section 502 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1132] or to exercise the authority set forth under Title III of ERISA, including the ability to make interpretations necessary to engage in such enforcement or to exercise such authority. However, in bringing such actions and in exercising such authority with respect to Parts 2 [29 U.S.C. 1051 et seq.] and 3 [29 U.S.C. 1081 et seq.] of Subtitle B of Title I of ERISA and any definitions for which the authority of the Secretary of Labor is transferred to the Secretary of the Treasury as provided in Section 101 of this Plan, the Secretary of Labor shall be bound by the regulations, rulings, opinions, variances, and waivers issued by the Secretary of the Treasury.

The transfers provided for in Section 102 of this Plan shall not affect the ability of the Secretary of the Treasury, subject to the provisions of Title III of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.] relating to jurisdiction, administration, and enforcement, (a) to audit plans and employers and to enforce the excise tax provisions of subsections 4975(a) and 4975(b) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 4975(a) and (b)], to exercise the authority set forth in subsections 502(b)(1) and 502(h) of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1132(b)(1) and (h)], or to exercise the authority set forth in Title III of ERISA, including the ability to make interpretations necessary to audit, to enforce such taxes, and to exercise such authority; and (b) consistent with the coordination requirements under Section 103 of this Plan, to disqualify, under section 401 of the Code [26 U.S.C. 401], a plan subject to Part 4 of Subtitle B of Title I of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1101 et seq.], including the ability to make the interpretations necessary to make such disqualification. However, in enforcing such excise taxes and, to the extent applicable, in disqualifying such plans the Secretary of the Treasury shall be bound by the regulations, rulings, opinions, and exemptions issued by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to the authority transferred to the Secretary of Labor as provided in Section 102 of this Plan.

(a) The Secretary of the Treasury shall not exercise the functions transferred pursuant to Section 101 of this Plan to issue in proposed or final form any of the documents described in subsection (b) of this Section in any case in which such documents would significantly impact on or substantially affect collectively bargained plans unless, within 100 calendar days after the Secretary of the Treasury notifies the Secretary of Labor of such proposed action, the Secretary of Labor certifies that he has no objection or he fails to respond to the Secretary of the Treasury. The fact of such a notification, except for such notification for documents described in subsection (b)(iv) of this Section, from the Secretary of the Treasury to the Secretary of Labor shall be announced by the Secretary of Labor to the public within ten days following the date of receipt of the notification by the Secretary of Labor.

(b) The documents to which this Section applies are:

(i) amendments to regulations issued pursuant to subsections 202(a)(3), 203(b)(2) and (3)(A), 204(b)(3)(A), (C), and (E), and 210(a)(2) of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1052(a)(3), 1053(b)(2) and (3)(A), 1054(b)(3)(A), (C), and (E), and 1060(a)(2)], and subsections 410(a)(3) and 411(a)(5), (6)(A), and (b)(3)(A), (C), and (E), 413(b)(4) and (c)(3) and 414(f) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 410(a)(3) and 411(a)(5), (6)(A), and (b)(3)(A), (C), and (E), 413 (b)(4) and (c)(3) and 414(f)];

(ii) regulations issued pursuant to subsections 204(b)(3)(D), 302(c)(8), and 304(a) and (b)(2)(A) of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1054(b)(3)(D), 1082(c)(8), and 1084(a) and (b)(2)(A)], and subsections 411(b)(3)(D), 412(c)(8), (e), and (f)(2)(A) of the Code [26 U.S.C. 411(b)(3)(D), 412(c)(8), (e), and (f)(2)(A)]; and

(iii) revenue rulings (within the meaning of 26 CFR Section 601.201(a)(6)), revenue procedures, and similar publications, if the rulings, procedures and publications are issued under one of the statutory provisions listed in (i) and (ii) of this subsection; and

(iv) rulings (within the meaning of 26 CFR Section 601.201(a)(2)) issued prior to the issuance of a published regulation under one of the statutory provisions listed in (i) and (ii) of this subsection and not issued under a published Revenue Ruling.

(c) For those documents described in subsections (b)(i), (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) of this Section, the Secretary of Labor may request the Secretary of the Treasury to initiate the actions described in this Section 106 of this Plan.

On or before January 31, 1980, the President will submit to both Houses of the Congress an evaluation of the extent to which this Reorganization Plan has alleviated the problems associated with the present administrative structure under ERISA, accompanied by specific legislative recommendations for a long-term administrative structure under ERISA.

So much of the personnel, property, records, and unexpended balances of appropriations, allocations and other funds employed, used, held, available, or to be made available in connection with the functions transferred under this Plan, as the Director of the Office of Management and Budget shall determine, shall be transferred to the appropriate agency, or component at such time or times as the Director of the Office of Management and Budget shall provide, except that no such unexpended balances transferred shall be used for purposes other than those for which the appropriation was originally made. The Director of the Office of Management and Budget shall provide for terminating the affairs of any agencies abolished herein and for such further measures and dispositions as such Director deems necessary to effectuate the purposes of this Reorganization Plan.

The provisions of this Reorganization Plan shall become effective at such time or times, on or before April 30, 1979, as the President shall specify, but not sooner than the earliest time allowable under Section 906 of Title 5, United States Code.

To the Congress of the United States:

Today I am submitting to the Congress my fourth Reorganization Plan for 1978. This proposal is designed to simplify and improve the unnecessarily complex administrative requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) [see Short Title note set out under this section]. The new plan will eliminate overlap and duplication in the administration of ERISA and help us achieve our goal of well regulated private pension plans.

ERISA was an essential step in the protection of worker pension rights. Its administrative provisions, however, have resulted in bureaucratic confusion and have been justifiably criticized by employers and unions alike. The biggest problem has been overlapping jurisdictional authority. Under current ERISA provisions, the Departments of Treasury and Labor both have authority to issue regulations and decisions.

This dual jurisdiction has delayed a good many important rulings and, more importantly, produced bureaucratic runarounds and burdensome reporting requirements.

The new plan will significantly reduce these problems. In addition, both Departments are trying to cut red tape and paperwork, to eliminate unnecessary reporting requirements, and to streamline forms wherever possible.

Both Departments have already made considerable progress, and both will continue the effort to simplify their rules and their forms.

The Reorganization Plan is the most significant result of their joint effort to modify and simplify ERISA. It will eliminate most of the jurisdictional overlap between Treasury and Labor by making the following changes:

1) Treasury will have statutory authority for minimum standards. The new plan puts all responsibility for funding, participation, and vesting of benefit rights in the Department of Treasury. These standards are necessary to ensure that employee benefit plans are adequately funded and that all beneficiary rights are protected. Treasury is the most appropriate Department to administer these provisions; however, Labor will continue to have veto power over Treasury decisions that significantly affect collectively bargained plans.

2) Labor will have statutory authority for fiduciary obligations. ERISA prohibits transactions in which self-interest or conflict of interest could occur, but allows certain exemptions from these prohibitions. Labor will be responsible for overseeing fiduciary conduct under these provisions.

3) Both Departments will retain enforcement powers. The Reorganization Plan will continue Treasury's authority to audit plans and levy tax penalties for any deviation from standards. The plan will also continue Labor's authority to bring civil action against plans and fiduciaries. These provisions are retained in order to keep the special expertise of each Department available. New coordination between the Departments will eliminate duplicative investigations of alleged violations.

This reorganization will make an immediate improvement in ERISA's administration. It will eliminate almost all of the dual and overlapping authority in the two departments and dramatically cut the time required to process applications for exemptions from prohibited transactions.

This plan is an interim arrangement. After the Departments have had a chance to administer ERISA under this new plan, the Office of Management and Budget and the Departments will jointly evaluate that experience. Based on that evaluation, early in 1980, the Administration will make appropriate legislative proposals to establish a long-term administrative structure for ERISA.

Each provision in this reorganization will accomplish one or more of the purposes in Title 5 of U.S.C. 901(a). There will be no change in expenditure or personnel levels, although a small number of people will be transferred from the Department of Treasury to the Department of Labor.

We all recognize that the administration of ERISA has been unduly burdensome. I am confident that this reorganization will significantly relieve much of that burden.

This plan is the culmination of our effort to streamline ERISA. It provides an administrative arrangement that will work.

ERISA has been a symbol of unnecessarily complex government regulation. I hope this new step will become equally symbolic of my Administration's commitment to making government more effective and less intrusive in the lives of our people.

Jimmy Carter.

Ex. Ord. No. 12071, July 12, 1978, 43 F.R. 30259, which established the President's Commission on Pension Policy and provided for its membership, functions, etc., was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12379, §1, Aug. 17, 1982, 47 F.R. 36099, set out as a note under section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Ex. Ord. No. 12108, Dec. 28, 1978, 44 F.R. 1065, provided:

By the authority vested in me as President of the United States of America by Section 109 of Reorganization Plan No. 4 of 1978 (43 F.R. 47713) [set out above], it is hereby ordered that the provisions of Reorganization Plan No. 4 of 1978 shall be effective on Sunday, December 31, 1978.

Jimmy Carter.

Ex. Ord. No. 12262, Jan. 7, 1981, 46 F.R. 2313, which established the Interagency Employee Benefit Council and provided for its membership, functions, etc., was revoked by Ex. Ord. No. 12379, §9, Aug. 17, 1982, 47 F.R. 36099, set out as a note under section 14 of the Federal Advisory Committee Act in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1 As amended September 20, 1978.

The Congress finds that—

(1) multiemployer pension plans have a substantial impact on interstate commerce and are affected with a national public interest;

(2) multiemployer pension plans have accounted for a substantial portion of the increase in private pension plan coverage over the past three decades;

(3) the continued well-being and security of millions of employees, retirees, and their dependents are directly affected by multiemployer pension plans; and

(4)(A) withdrawals of contributing employers from a multiemployer pension plan frequently result in substantially increased funding obligations for employers who continue to contribute to the plan, adversely affecting the plan, its participants and beneficiaries, and labor-management relations, and

(B) in a declining industry, the incidence of employer withdrawals is higher and the adverse effects described in subparagraph (A) are exacerbated.

The Congress further finds that—

(1) it is desirable to modify the current multiemployer plan termination insurance provisions in order to increase the likelihood of protecting plan participants against benefit losses; and

(2) it is desirable to replace the termination insurance program for multiemployer pension plans with an insolvency-based benefit protection program that will enhance the financial soundness of such plans, place primary emphasis on plan continuation, and contain program costs within reasonable limits.

It is hereby declared to be the policy of this Act—

(1) to foster and facilitate interstate commerce,

(2) to alleviate certain problems which tend to discourage the maintenance and growth of multiemployer pension plans,

(3) to provide reasonable protection for the interests of participants and beneficiaries of financially distressed multiemployer pension plans, and

(4) to provide a financially self-sufficient program for the guarantee of employee benefits under multiemployer plans.

(Pub. L. 96–364, §3, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1209.)

This Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is Pub. L. 96–364, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1208, known as the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1980 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Section was enacted as part of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980, and not as part of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 which comprises this chapter.

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, see section 1461(e)(1) of this title.

Section 412(b) of Pub. L. 96–364 directed Secretary of Labor to study feasibility of requiring collective bargaining on both issues of contributions to, and benefits from, multiemployer plans, and submit a report on the study to Congress within 3 years of Sept. 26, 1980.

The Congress finds that—

(1) single-employer defined benefit pension plans have a substantial impact on interstate commerce and are affected with a national interest;

(2) the continued well-being and retirement income security of millions of workers, retirees, and their dependents are directly affected by such plans;

(3) the existence of a sound termination insurance system is fundamental to the retirement income security of participants and beneficiaries of such plans; and

(4) the current termination insurance system in some instances encourages employers to terminate pension plans, evade their obligations to pay benefits, and shift unfunded pension liabilities onto the termination insurance system and the other premium-payers.

The Congress further finds that modification of the current termination insurance system and an increase in the insurance premium for single-employer defined benefit pension plans—

(1) is desirable to increase the likelihood that full benefits will be paid to participants and beneficiaries of such plans;

(2) is desirable to provide for the transfer of liabilities to the termination insurance system only in cases of severe hardship;

(3) is necessary to maintain the premium costs of such system at a reasonable level; and

(4) is necessary to finance properly current funding deficiencies and future obligations of the single-employer pension plan termination insurance system.

It is hereby declared to be the policy of this title—

(1) to foster and facilitate interstate commerce;

(2) to encourage the maintenance and growth of single-employer defined benefit pension plans;

(3) to increase the likelihood that participants and beneficiaries under single-employer defined benefit pension plans will receive their full benefits;

(4) to provide for the transfer of unfunded pension liabilities onto the single-employer pension plan termination insurance system only in cases of severe hardship;

(5) to maintain the premium costs of such system at a reasonable level; and

(6) to assure the prudent financing of current funding deficiencies and future obligations of the single-employer pension plan termination insurance system by increasing termination insurance premiums.

(Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11002, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 237.)

This title, referred to in subsec. (c), is title XI of Pub. L. 99–272, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 237, known as the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1986 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Section was enacted as part of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, and not as part of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 which comprises this chapter.

Section effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1341 of this title.

For purposes of this subchapter:

(1) The terms “employee welfare benefit plan” and “welfare plan” mean any plan, fund, or program which was heretofore or is hereafter established or maintained by an employer or by an employee organization, or by both, to the extent that such plan, fund, or program was established or is maintained for the purpose of providing for its participants or their beneficiaries, through the purchase of insurance or otherwise, (A) medical, surgical, or hospital care or benefits, or benefits in the event of sickness, accident, disability, death or unemployment, or vacation benefits, apprenticeship or other training programs, or day care centers, scholarship funds, or prepaid legal services, or (B) any benefit described in section 186(c) of this title (other than pensions on retirement or death, and insurance to provide such pensions).

(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the terms “employee pension benefit plan” and “pension plan” mean any plan, fund, or program which was heretofore or is hereafter established or maintained by an employer or by an employee organization, or by both, to the extent that by its express terms or as a result of surrounding circumstances such plan, fund, or program—

(i) provides retirement income to employees, or

(ii) results in a deferral of income by employees for periods extending to the termination of covered employment or beyond,

regardless of the method of calculating the contributions made to the plan, the method of calculating the benefits under the plan or the method of distributing benefits from the plan.

(B) The Secretary may by regulation prescribe rules consistent with the standards and purposes of this chapter providing one or more exempt categories under which—

(i) severance pay arrangements, and

(ii) supplemental retirement income payments, under which the pension benefits of retirees or their beneficiaries are supplemented to take into account some portion or all of the increases in the cost of living (as determined by the Secretary of Labor) since retirement,

shall, for purposes of this subchapter, be treated as welfare plans rather than pension plans. In the case of any arrangement or payment a principal effect of which is the evasion of the standards or purposes of this chapter applicable to pension plans, such arrangement or payment shall be treated as a pension plan.

(3) The term “employee benefit plan” or “plan” means an employee welfare benefit plan or an employee pension benefit plan or a plan which is both an employee welfare benefit plan and an employee pension benefit plan.

(4) The term “employee organization” means any labor union or any organization of any kind, or any agency or employee representation committee, association, group, or plan, in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning an employee benefit plan, or other matters incidental to employment relationships; or any employees’ beneficiary association organized for the purpose in whole or in part, of establishing such a plan.

(5) The term “employer” means any person acting directly as an employer, or indirectly in the interest of an employer, in relation to an employee benefit plan; and includes a group or association of employers acting for an employer in such capacity.

(6) The term “employee” means any individual employed by an employer.

(7) The term “participant” means any employee or former employee of an employer, or any member or former member of an employee organization, who is or may become eligible to receive a benefit of any type from an employee benefit plan which covers employees of such employer or members of such organization, or whose beneficiaries may be eligible to receive any such benefit.

(8) The term “beneficiary” means a person designated by a participant, or by the terms of an employee benefit plan, who is or may become entitled to a benefit thereunder.

(9) The term “person” means an individual, partnership, joint venture, corporation, mutual company, joint-stock company, trust, estate, unincorporated organization, association, or employee organization.

(10) The term “State” includes any State of the United States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, Wake Island, and the Canal Zone. The term “United States” when used in the geographic sense means the States and the Outer Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act (43 U.S.C. 1331–1343).

(11) The term “commerce” means trade, traffic, commerce, transportation, or communication between any State and any place outside thereof.

(12) The term “industry or activity affecting commerce” means any activity, business, or industry in commerce or in which a labor dispute would hinder or obstruct commerce or the free flow of commerce, and includes any activity or industry “affecting commerce” within the meaning of the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947 [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.], or the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.].

(13) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(14) The term “party in interest” means, as to an employee benefit plan—

(A) any fiduciary (including, but not limited to, any administrator, officer, trustee, or custodian), counsel, or employee of such employee benefit plan;

(B) a person providing services to such plan;

(C) an employer any of whose employees are covered by such plan;

(D) an employee organization any of whose members are covered by such plan;

(E) an owner, direct or indirect, of 50 percent or more of—

(i) the combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote or the total value of shares of all classes of stock of a corporation.1

(ii) the capital interest or the profits interest of a partnership, or

(iii) the beneficial interest of a trust or unincorporated enterprise,

which is an employer or an employee organization described in subparagraph (C) or (D);

(F) a relative (as defined in paragraph (15)) of any individual described in subparagraph (A), (B), (C), or (E);

(G) a corporation, partnership, or trust or estate of which (or in which) 50 percent or more of—

(i) the combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote or the total value of shares of all classes of stock of such corporation,

(ii) the capital interest or profits interest of such partnership, or

(iii) the beneficial interest of such trust or estate,

is owned directly or indirectly, or held by persons described in subparagraph (A), (B), (C), (D), or (E);

(H) an employee, officer, director (or an individual having powers or responsibilities similar to those of officers or directors), or a 10 percent or more shareholder directly or indirectly, of a person described in subparagraph (B), (C), (D), (E), or (G), or of the employee benefit plan; or

(I) a 10 percent or more (directly or indirectly in capital or profits) partner or joint venturer of a person described in subparagraph (B), (C), (D), (E), or (G).

The Secretary, after consultation and coordination with the Secretary of the Treasury, may by regulation prescribe a percentage lower than 50 percent for subparagraph (E) and (G) and lower than 10 percent for subparagraph (H) or (I). The Secretary may prescribe regulations for determining the ownership (direct or indirect) of profits and beneficial interests, and the manner in which indirect stockholdings are taken into account. Any person who is a party in interest with respect to a plan to which a trust described in section 501(c)(22) of title 26 is permitted to make payments under section 1403 of this title shall be treated as a party in interest with respect to such trust.

(15) The term “relative” means a spouse, ancestor, lineal descendant, or spouse of a lineal descendant.

(16)(A) The term “administrator” means—

(i) the person specifically so designated by the terms of the instrument under which the plan is operated;

(ii) if an administrator is not so designated, the plan sponsor; or

(iii) in the case of a plan for which an administrator is not designated and a plan sponsor cannot be identified, such other person as the Secretary may by regulation prescribe.

(B) The term “plan sponsor” means (i) the employer in the case of an employee benefit plan established or maintained by a single employer, (ii) the employee organization in the case of a plan established or maintained by an employee organization, or (iii) in the case of a plan established or maintained by two or more employers or jointly by one or more employers and one or more employee organizations, the association, committee, joint board of trustees, or other similar group of representatives of the parties who establish or maintain the plan.

(17) The term “separate account” means an account established or maintained by an insurance company under which income, gains, and losses, whether or not realized, from assets allocated to such account, are, in accordance with the applicable contract, credited to or charged against such account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the insurance company.

(18) The term “adequate consideration” when used in part 4 of subtitle B of this subchapter means (A) in the case of a security for which there is a generally recognized market, either (i) the price of the security prevailing on a national securities exchange which is registered under section 78f of title 15, or (ii) if the security is not traded on such a national securities exchange, a price not less favorable to the plan than the offering price for the security as established by the current bid and asked prices quoted by persons independent of the issuer and of any party in interest; and (B) in the case of an asset other than a security for which there is a generally recognized market, the fair market value of the asset as determined in good faith by the trustee or named fiduciary pursuant to the terms of the plan and in accordance with regulations promulgated by the Secretary.

(19) The term “nonforfeitable” when used with respect to a pension benefit or right means a claim obtained by a participant or his beneficiary to that part of an immediate or deferred benefit under a pension plan which arises from the participant's service, which is unconditional, and which is legally enforceable against the plan. For purposes of this paragraph, a right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable merely because the plan contains a provision described in section 1053(a)(3) of this title.

(20) The term “security” has the same meaning as such term has under section 77b(1) 2 of title 15.

(21)(A) Except as otherwise provided in subparagraph (B), a person is a fiduciary with respect to a plan to the extent (i) he exercises any discretionary authority or discretionary control respecting management of such plan or exercises any authority or control respecting management or disposition of its assets, (ii) he renders investment advice for a fee or other compensation, direct or indirect, with respect to any moneys or other property of such plan, or has any authority or responsibility to do so, or (iii) he has any discretionary authority or discretionary responsibility in the administration of such plan. Such term includes any person designated under section 1105(c)(1)(B) of this title.

(B) If any money or other property of an employee benefit plan is invested in securities issued by an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 [15 U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.], such investment shall not by itself cause such investment company or such investment company's investment adviser or principal underwriter to be deemed to be a fiduciary or a party in interest as those terms are defined in this subchapter, except insofar as such investment company or its investment adviser or principal underwriter acts in connection with an employee benefit plan covering employees of the investment company, the investment adviser, or its principal underwriter. Nothing contained in this subparagraph shall limit the duties imposed on such investment company, investment adviser, or principal underwriter by any other law.

(22) The term “normal retirement benefit” means the greater of the early retirement benefit under the plan, or the benefit under the plan commencing at normal retirement age. The normal retirement benefit shall be determined without regard to—

(A) medical benefits, and

(B) disability benefits not in excess of the qualified disability benefit.

For purposes of this paragraph, a qualified disability benefit is a disability benefit provided by a plan which does not exceed the benefit which would be provided for the participant if he separated from the service at normal retirement age. For purposes of this paragraph, the early retirement benefit under a plan shall be determined without regard to any benefit under the plan which the Secretary of the Treasury finds to be a benefit described in section 1054(b)(1)(G) of this title.

(23) The term “accrued benefit” means—

(A) in the case of a defined benefit plan, the individual's accrued benefit determined under the plan and, except as provided in section 1054(c)(3) of this title, expressed in the form of an annual benefit commencing at normal retirement age, or

(B) in the case of a plan which is an individual account plan, the balance of the individual's account.

The accrued benefit of an employee shall not be less than the amount determined under section 1054(c)(2)(B) of this title with respect to the employee's accumulated contribution.

(24) The term “normal retirement age” means the earlier of—

(A) the time a plan participant attains normal retirement age under the plan, or

(B) the later of—

(i) the time a plan participant attains age 65, or

(ii) the 5th anniversary of the time a plan participant commenced participation in the plan.

(25) The term “vested liabilities” means the present value of the immediate or deferred benefits available at normal retirement age for participants and their beneficiaries which are nonforfeitable.

(26) The term “current value” means fair market value where available and otherwise the fair value as determined in good faith by a trustee or a named fiduciary (as defined in section 1102(a)(2) of this title) pursuant to the terms of the plan and in accordance with regulations of the Secretary, assuming an orderly liquidation at the time of such determination.

(27) The term “present value”, with respect to a liability, means the value adjusted to reflect anticipated events. Such adjustments shall conform to such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.

(28) The term “normal service cost” or “normal cost” means the annual cost of future pension benefits and administrative expenses assigned, under an actuarial cost method, to years subsequent to a particular valuation date of a pension plan. The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe regulations to carry out this paragraph.

(29) The term “accrued liability” means the excess of the present value, as of a particular valuation date of a pension plan, of the projected future benefit costs and administrative expenses for all plan participants and beneficiaries over the present value of future contributions for the normal cost of all applicable plan participants and beneficiaries. The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe regulations to carry out this paragraph.

(30) The term “unfunded accrued liability” means the excess of the accrued liability, under an actuarial cost method which so provides, over the present value of the assets of a pension plan. The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe regulations to carry out this paragraph.

(31) The term “advance funding actuarial cost method” or “actuarial cost method” means a recognized actuarial technique utilized for establishing the amount and incidence of the annual actuarial cost of pension plan benefits and expenses. Acceptable actuarial cost methods shall include the accrued benefit cost method (unit credit method), the entry age normal cost method, the individual level premium cost method, the aggregate cost method, the attained age normal cost method, and the frozen initial liability cost method. The terminal funding cost method and the current funding (pay-as-you-go) cost method are not acceptable actuarial cost methods. The Secretary of the Treasury shall issue regulations to further define acceptable actuarial cost methods.

(32) The term “governmental plan” means a plan established or maintained for its employees by the Government of the United States, by the government of any State or political subdivision thereof, or by any agency or instrumentality of any of the foregoing. The term “governmental plan” also includes any plan to which the Railroad Retirement Act of 1935, or 1937 [45 U.S.C. 231 et seq.] applies, and which is financed by contributions required under that Act and any plan of an international organization which is exempt from taxation under the provisions of the International Organizations Immunities Act [22 U.S.C. 288 et seq.].

(33)(A) The term “church plan” means a plan established and maintained (to the extent required in clause (ii) of subparagraph (B)) for its employees (or their beneficiaries) by a church or by a convention or association of churches which is exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26.

(B) The term “church plan” does not include a plan—

(i) which is established and maintained primarily for the benefit of employees (or their beneficiaries) of such church or convention or association of churches who are employed in connection with one or more unrelated trades or businesses (within the meaning of section 513 of title 26), or

(ii) if less than substantially all of the individuals included in the plan are individuals described in subparagraph (A) or in clause (ii) of subparagraph (C) (or their beneficiaries).

(C) For purposes of this paragraph—

(i) A plan established and maintained for its employees (or their beneficiaries) by a church or by a convention or association of churches includes a plan maintained by an organization, whether a civil law corporation or otherwise, the principal purpose or function of which is the administration or funding of a plan or program for the provision of retirement benefits or welfare benefits, or both, for the employees of a church or a convention or association of churches, if such organization is controlled by or associated with a church or a convention or association of churches.

(ii) The term employee of a church or a convention or association of churches includes—

(I) a duly ordained, commissioned, or licensed minister of a church in the exercise of his ministry, regardless of the source of his compensation;

(II) an employee of an organization, whether a civil law corporation or otherwise, which is exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26 and which is controlled by or associated with a church or a convention or association of churches; and

(III) an individual described in clause (v).

(iii) A church or a convention or association of churches which is exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26 shall be deemed the employer of any individual included as an employee under clause (ii).

(iv) An organization, whether a civil law corporation or otherwise, is associated with a church or a convention or association of churches if it shares common religious bonds and convictions with that church or convention or association of churches.

(v) If an employee who is included in a church plan separates from the service of a church or a convention or association of churches or an organization, whether a civil law corporation or otherwise, which is exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26 and which is controlled by or associated with a church or a convention or association of churches, the church plan shall not fail to meet the requirements of this paragraph merely because the plan—

(I) retains the employee's accrued benefit or account for the payment of benefits to the employee or his beneficiaries pursuant to the terms of the plan; or

(II) receives contributions on the employee's behalf after the employee's separation from such service, but only for a period of 5 years after such separation, unless the employee is disabled (within the meaning of the disability provisions of the church plan or, if there are no such provisions in the church plan, within the meaning of section 72(m)(7) of title 26) at the time of such separation from service.

(D)(i) If a plan established and maintained for its employees (or their beneficiaries) by a church or by a convention or association of churches which is exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26 fails to meet one or more of the requirements of this paragraph and corrects its failure to meet such requirements within the correction period, the plan shall be deemed to meet the requirements of this paragraph for the year in which the correction was made and for all prior years.

(ii) If a correction is not made within the correction period, the plan shall be deemed not to meet the requirements of this paragraph beginning with the date on which the earliest failure to meet one or more of such requirements occurred.

(iii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “correction period” means—

(I) the period ending 270 days after the date of mailing by the Secretary of the Treasury of a notice of default with respect to the plan's failure to meet one or more of the requirements of this paragraph; or

(II) any period set by a court of competent jurisdiction after a final determination that the plan fails to meet such requirements, or, if the court does not specify such period, any reasonable period determined by the Secretary of the Treasury on the basis of all the facts and circumstances, but in any event not less than 270 days after the determination has become final; or

(III) any additional period which the Secretary of the Treasury determines is reasonable or necessary for the correction of the default,

whichever has the latest ending date.

(34) The term “individual account plan” or “defined contribution plan” means a pension plan which provides for an individual account for each participant and for benefits based solely upon the amount contributed to the participant's account, and any income, expenses, gains and losses, and any forfeitures of accounts of other participants which may be allocated to such participant's account.

(35) The term “defined benefit plan” means a pension plan other than an individual account plan; except that a pension plan which is not an individual account plan and which provides a benefit derived from employer contributions which is based partly on the balance of the separate account of a participant—

(A) for the purposes of section 1052 of this title, shall be treated as an individual account plan, and

(B) for the purposes of paragraph (23) of this section and section 1054 of this title, shall be treated as an individual account plan to the extent benefits are based upon the separate account of a participant and as a defined benefit plan with respect to the remaining portion of benefits under the plan.

(36) The term “excess benefit plan” means a plan maintained by an employer solely for the purpose of providing benefits for certain employees in excess of the limitations on contributions and benefits imposed by section 415 of title 26 on plans to which that section applies without regard to whether the plan is funded. To the extent that a separable part of a plan (as determined by the Secretary of Labor) maintained by an employer is maintained for such purpose, that part shall be treated as a separate plan which is an excess benefit plan.

(37)(A) The term “multiemployer plan” means a plan—

(i) to which more than one employer is required to contribute,

(ii) which is maintained pursuant to one or more collective bargaining agreements between one or more employee organizations and more than one employer, and

(iii) which satisfies such other requirements as the Secretary may prescribe by regulation.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph, all trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control within the meaning of section 1301(b)(1) of this title are considered a single employer.

(C) Notwithstanding subparagraph (A), a plan is a multiemployer plan on and after its termination date if the plan was a multiemployer plan under this paragraph for the plan year preceding its termination date.

(D) For purposes of this subchapter, notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this paragraph, for any plan year which began before September 26, 1980, the term “multiemployer plan” means a plan described in this paragraph (37) as in effect immediately before such date.

(E) Within one year after September 26, 1980, a multiemployer plan may irrevocably elect, pursuant to procedures established by the corporation and subject to the provisions of sections 1453(b) and (c) of this title, that the plan shall not be treated as a multiemployer plan for all purposes under this chapter or the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 if for each of the last 3 plan years ending prior to the effective date of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980—

(i) the plan was not a multiemployer plan because the plan was not a plan described in subparagraph (A)(iii) of this paragraph and section 414(f)(1)(C) of title 26 (as such provisions were in effect on the day before September 26, 1980); and

(ii) the plan had been identified as a plan that was not a multiemployer plan in substantially all its filings with the corporation, the Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of the Treasury.

(F)(i) For purposes of this subchapter a qualified football coaches plan—

(I) shall be treated as a multiemployer plan to the extent not inconsistent with the purposes of this subparagraph; and

(II) notwithstanding section 401(k)(4)(B) of title 26, may include a qualified cash and deferred arrangement.

(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “qualified football coaches plan” means any defined contribution plan which is established and maintained by an organization—

(I) which is described in section 501(c) of title 26;

(II) the membership of which consists entirely of individuals who primarily coach football as full-time employees of 4-year colleges or universities described in section 170(b)(1)(A)(ii) of title 26; and

(III) which was in existence on September 18, 1986.

(38) The term “investment manager” means any fiduciary (other than a trustee or named fiduciary, as defined in section 1102(a)(2) of this title)—

(A) who has the power to manage, acquire, or dispose of any asset of a plan;

(B) who (i) is registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 [15 U.S.C. 80b–1 et seq.]; (ii) is not registered as an investment adviser under such Act by reason of paragraph (1) of section 203A(a) of such Act [15 U.S.C. 80b–3a(a)], is registered as an investment adviser under the laws of the State (referred to in such paragraph (1)) in which it maintains its principal office and place of business, and, at the time the fiduciary last filed the registration form most recently filed by the fiduciary with such State in order to maintain the fiduciary's registration under the laws of such State, also filed a copy of such form with the Secretary; (iii) is a bank, as defined in that Act; or (iv) is an insurance company qualified to perform services described in subparagraph (A) under the laws of more than one State; and

(C) has acknowledged in writing that he is a fiduciary with respect to the plan.

(39) The terms “plan year” and “fiscal year of the plan” mean, with respect to a plan, the calendar, policy, or fiscal year on which the records of the plan are kept.

(40)(A) The term “multiple employer welfare arrangement” means an employee welfare benefit plan, or any other arrangement (other than an employee welfare benefit plan), which is established or maintained for the purpose of offering or providing any benefit described in paragraph (1) to the employees of two or more employers (including one or more self-employed individuals), or to their beneficiaries, except that such term does not include any such plan or other arrangement which is established or maintained—

(i) under or pursuant to one or more agreements which the Secretary finds to be collective bargaining agreements,

(ii) by a rural electric cooperative, or

(iii) by a rural telephone cooperative association.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph—

(i) two or more trades or businesses, whether or not incorporated, shall be deemed a single employer if such trades or businesses are within the same control group,

(ii) the term “control group” means a group of trades or businesses under common control,

(iii) the determination of whether a trade or business is under “common control” with another trade or business shall be determined under regulations of the Secretary applying principles similar to the principles applied in determining whether employees of two or more trades or businesses are treated as employed by a single employer under section 1301(b) of this title, except that, for purposes of this paragraph, common control shall not be based on an interest of less than 25 percent,

(iv) the term “rural electric cooperative” means—

(I) any organization which is exempt from tax under section 501(a) of title 26 and which is engaged primarily in providing electric service on a mutual or cooperative basis, and

(II) any organization described in paragraph (4) or (6) of section 501(c) of title 26 which is exempt from tax under section 501(a) of title 26 and at least 80 percent of the members of which are organizations described in subclause (I), and

(v) the term “rural telephone cooperative association” means an organization described in paragraph (4) or (6) of section 501(c) of title 26 which is exempt from tax under section 501(a) of title 26 and at least 80 percent of the members of which are organizations engaged primarily in providing telephone service to rural areas of the United States on a mutual, cooperative, or other basis.

(41) 3

(41) 3 The term “single-employer plan” means a plan which is not a multiemployer plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §3, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 833; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §§302, 305, title IV, §§407(a), 409, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1291, 1294, 1303, 1307; Pub. L. 97–473, title III, §302(a), Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2612; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(c)(1), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 273; Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9203(b)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1979; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1879(u)(3), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2913; Pub. L. 100–202, §136(a), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1329–441; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7871(b)(2), 7881(m)(2)(D), 7891(a)(1), 7893(a), 7894(a)(1)(A), (2)(A), (3), (4), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2435, 2444, 2445, 2447, 2448; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12002(b)(2)(C), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–566; Pub. L. 102–89, §2, Aug. 14, 1991, 105 Stat. 446; Pub. L. 104–290, title III, §308(b)(1), Oct. 11, 1996, 110 Stat. 3440; Pub. L. 105–72, §1(a), Nov. 10, 1997, 111 Stat. 1457.)

This chapter, referred to in pars. (2)(B) and (37)(E), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act, referred to in par. (10), is act Aug. 7, 1953, ch. 345, 67 Stat. 462, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter III (§1331 et seq.) of chapter 29 of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1331 of Title 43 and Tables.

The Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, referred to in par. (12), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 7 (§141 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in par. (12), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

Section 77b(1) of title 15, referred to in par. (20), was redesignated section 77b(a)(1) of title 15 by Pub. L. 104–290, title I, §106(a)(1), Oct. 11, 1996, 110 Stat. 3424.

The Investment Company Act of 1940, referred to in par. (21)(B), is title I of act Aug. 22, 1940, ch. 686, 54 Stat. 789, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter I (§80a–1 et seq.) of chapter 2D of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 80a–51 of Title 15 and Tables.

The Railroad Retirement Act of 1935 or 1937, referred to in par. (32), means act Aug. 29, 1935, ch. 812, 49 Stat. 867, as amended, known as the Railroad Retirement Act of 1935. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1935 was amended generally by act June 24, 1937, ch. 382, part I, 50 Stat. 307, and was known as the Railroad Retirement Act of 1937. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1937 was amended generally and redesignated the Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 by Pub. L. 93–445, title I, Oct. 16, 1974, 88 Stat. 1305 and is classified generally to subchapter IV (§231 et seq.) of chapter 9 of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

The International Organizations Immunities Act, referred to in par. (32), is title I of act Dec. 29, 1945, ch. 652, 59 Stat. 669, as amended, which is classified principally to subchapter XVIII (§288 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 288 of Title 22 and Tables.

Sections 1453(b) and (c) of this title, referred to in par. (37)(E), was in the original “sections 4403(b) and (c)”, meaning sections 4403(b) and (c) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, which was translated as section 1453(b) and (c) of this title as the probable intent of Congress, in view of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 not containing a section 4403 and the subject matter of section 4303 of the Act which is classified to section 1453(b) and (c) of this title.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1954, referred to in par. (37)(E), was redesignated the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 by Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095, and is classified to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For the effective date of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980, referred to in par. (37)(E), see section 1461(e) of this title.

The Investment Advisers Act of 1940, referred to in par. (38)(B), is title II of act Aug. 22, 1940, ch. 686, 54 Stat. 847, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§80b–1 et seq.) of chapter 2D of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 80b–20 of Title 15 and Tables.

1997—Par. (38)(B). Pub. L. 105–72 added introductory provisions and cls. (i) and (ii), redesignated former cls. (ii) and (iii) as (iii) and (iv), respectively, and struck out former introductory provisions and cl. (i) which read as follows: “who is (i) registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 or under the laws of any State;”.

1996—Par. (38)(B). Pub. L. 104–290 temporarily inserted “or under the laws of any State” before “; (ii) is a bank,”. See Effective and Termination Dates of 1996 Amendment note below.

1991—Par. (40)(A)(iii), (B)(v). Pub. L. 102–89 added cl. (iii) at end of subpar. (A) and cl. (v) at end of subpar. (B).

1990—Par. (41). Pub. L. 101–508 added par. (41) which read as follows: “The term ‘single-employer plan’ means a plan which is not a multiemployer plan.”

1989—Pars. (14), (33), (36), (40)(B)(iv). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Par. (23). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(m)(2)(D), inserted at end “The accrued benefit of an employee shall not be less than the amount determined under section 1054(c)(2)(B) of this title with respect to the employee's accumulated contribution.”

Par. (24)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(b)(2), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “the latest of—

“(i) the time a plan participant attains age 65,

“(ii) in the case of a plan participant who commences participation in the plan within 5 years before attaining normal retirement age under the plan, the 5th anniversary of the time the plan participant commences participation in the plan, or

“(iii) in the case of a plan participant not described in clause (ii), the 10th anniversary of the time the plan participant commences participation in the plan.”

Par. (33)(D)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(a)(1)(A), substituted “Secretary of the Treasury” for “Secretary” in subcls. (I) to (III).

Par. (37)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(a), substituted “section 1301(b)(1)” for “section 1301(c)(1)”.

Par. (37)(F)(i)(II). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(a)(2)(A)(i), substituted “the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “such Code”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Par. (37)(F)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(a)(2)(A)(ii), (iii), inserted “of such Code” after “section 501(c)” in subcl. (I) and after “section 170(b)(1)(A)(ii)” in subcl. (II), which for purposes of codification was translated as “of title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Par. (39). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(a)(3), substituted “mean, with respect to a plan, the calendar” for “mean with respect to a plan, calendar”.

Par. (41). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(a)(4), added par. (41).

1987—Par. (37)(F). Pub. L. 100–202 added subpar. (F).

1986—Par. (24)(B). Pub. L. 99–509 amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “the later of—

“(i) the time a plan participant attains age 65, or

“(ii) the 10th anniversary of the time a plan participant commenced participation in the plan.”

Par. (37)(A). Pub. L. 99–514 repealed the amendment made by Pub. L. 99–272. See note below.

Pub. L. 99–272, which, eff. Jan. 1, 1986, directed the substitution of “means a pension plan” for “means a plan” was repealed by Pub. L. 99–514, eff. Jan. 1, 1986.

1983—Par. (40). Pub. L. 97–473 added par. (40).

1980—Par. (2). Pub. L. 96–364, §409, redesignated existing provisions as subpar. (A), inserted exception for subpar. (B), substituted “(i)” for “(A)” and “(ii)” for “(B)”, and added subpar. (B).

Par. (14). Pub. L. 96–364, §305, inserted provisions respecting a trust described in section 501(c)(22) of title 26.

Par. (33). Pub. L. 96–364, §407(a), substituted provisions defining “church plan” as a plan established and maintained (to the extent required in cl. (ii) of subpar. (B)) for employees or beneficiaries by a church, etc., exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26, for provisions defining “church plan” as a plan established and maintained for employees by a church, etc., exempt from tax under section 501 of title 26, or a plan in existence on Jan. 1, 1974, established and maintained by a church, etc., for employees and employees of agencies of the church, etc.

Par. (37). Pub. L. 96–364, §302(a), substantially revised definition of term “multiemployer plan” by, among other changes, restructuring subpar. (A), resulting in elimination of provisions covering amount of contributions and payment of benefits, and subpar. (B), resulting in elimination of provisions reworking amount of contributions for subsequent plan years, and added subpars. (C) to (E).

Section 1(c) of Pub. L. 105–72 provided that: “The amendments made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall take effect on July 8, 1997, except that the requirement of section 3(38)(B)(ii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [section 1002(38)(B)(ii) of this title] (as amended by this Act) for filing with the Secretary of Labor of a copy of a registration form which has been filed with a State before the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 10, 1997], or is to be filed with a State during the 1-year period beginning with such date, shall be treated as satisfied upon the filing of such a copy with the Secretary at any time during such 1-year period. This section shall supersede section 308(b) of the National Securities Markets Improvement Act of 1996 [Pub. L. 104–290, amending this section and enacting provisions set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1996 Amendment note below] (and the amendment made thereby).”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–290 effective 270 days after Oct. 11, 1996, see section 308(a) of Pub. L. 104–290, as amended, set out as a note under section 80b–2 of Title 15, Commerce and Trade.

Section 308(b)(2) of Pub. L. 104–290 which provided that the amendment made by paragraph (1), amending this section, which ceased to be effective 2 years after Oct. 11, 1996, was superseded by section 1(c) of Pub. L. 105–72, set out as an Effective Date of 1997 Amendment note above.

Section 3 of Pub. L. 102–89 provided that: “The amendments made by section 2 [amending this section] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 14, 1991].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to reversions occurring after Sept. 30, 1990, but not applicable to any reversion after Sept. 30, 1990, if (1) in the case of plans subject to subchapter III of this chapter, notice of intent to terminate under such subchapter was provided to participants (or if no participants, to Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation) before Oct. 1, 1990, (2) in the case of plans subject to subchapter I of this chapter (and not subchapter III), notice of intent to reduce future accruals under section 1054(h) of this title was provided to participants in connection with termination before Oct. 1, 1990, (3) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter, a request for a determination letter with respect to termination was filed with Secretary of the Treasury or Secretary's delegate before Oct. 1, 1990, or (4) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter and having only one participant, a resolution terminating the plan was adopted by employer before Oct. 1, 1990, see section 12003 of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 4980 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7871(b)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the amendments made by section 9203 of Pub. L. 99–509, see section 7871(b)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7881(m)(2)(D) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.

Section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “Except as otherwise provided in this section, any amendment made by this section [amending this section, sections 1003, 1025, 1051 to 1056, 1060, 1061, 1081 to 1084, 1085a, 1101, 1103, 1107, 1108, 1132, 1134, 1137, 1161, 1166, 1167, 1201 to 1203, 1222, 1301, 1302, 1307, 1309, 1321 to 1322a, 1342 to 1345, 1362, 1368, 1384, 1385, 1390, 1391, 1393, 1403, 1421, 1423, 1425, and 1453 of this title, and section 4980B of Title 26] shall take effect as if included in the provision of the Reform Act [probably means Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514] to which such amendment relates.”

Section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “Any amendment made by this section [amending this section and sections 1322a, 1341, 1342, 1347, 1366, 1367, and 1398 of this title] shall take effect as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986 [Pub. L. 99–272, title XI] to which such amendment relates.”

Section 7894(a)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 407 of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 [Pub. L. 96–364].”

Section 7894(a)(2)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by this paragraph [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 136 of Public Law 100–202.”

Section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “Except as otherwise provided in this section, any amendment made by this section [amending this section and sections 1021, 1024 to 1026, 1028, 1031, 1051 to 1056, 1060, 1061, 1081, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1103, 1107, 1108, 1113, 1114, 1132, 1144, 1321 to 1322a, 1344, 1368, and 1461 of this title] shall take effect as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [Pub. L. 93–406] to which such amendment relates.”

Section 136(b) of Pub. L. 100–202 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to years beginning after the date of the enactment of this joint resolution [Dec. 22, 1987].”

Amendment by section 1879(u)(3) of Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if such provisions were included in the enactment of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986 [Pub. L. 99–272], see section 1879(u)(4)(A) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 1054 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 applicable only with respect to plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1988, and only with respect to service performed on or after such date, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendments note under section 623 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Section 302(c) of Pub. L. 97–473 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and section 1144 of this title] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Jan. 14, 1983].”

Amendment of pars. (2), (14), and (37), by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Amendment of par. (33) by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Jan. 1, 1974, see section 407(c) of Pub. L. 96–364, set out as a note under section 414 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Secretary of Labor, Secretary of the Treasury, and Equal Employment Opportunity Commission each to issue before Feb. 1, 1988, final regulations to carry out amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

Section 1(b) of Pub. L. 105–72 provided that: “A fiduciary shall be treated as meeting the requirements of section 3(38)(B)(ii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1002(38)(B)(ii)] (as amended by subsection (a)) relating to provision to the Secretary of Labor of a copy of the form referred to therein, if a copy of such form (or substantially similar information) is available to the Secretary of Labor from a centralized electronic or other record-keeping database.”

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 623, 1003, 1023, 1053, 1055, 1056, 1081, 1082, 1143a, 1144, 1301, 1321, 1342, 1453, 2104, 2611 of this title; title 5 sections 8438, 8477; title 12 section 1821; title 15 sections 77b, 662; title 18 section 1954; title 26 sections 412, 414, 3121, 3306, 4980B, 4980D, 9702, 9712, 9803; title 38 sections 4303, 4317, 4318; title 42 sections 300bb–8, 300gg–91, 409, 1306, 3058k.

1 So in original. The period probably should be a comma.

2 See References in Text note below.

3 So in original. Two pars. (41) have been enacted.

(a) Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section and in sections 1051, 1081, and 1101 of this title, this subchapter shall apply to any employee benefit plan if it is established or maintained—

(1) by any employer engaged in commerce or in any industry or activity affecting commerce; or

(2) by any employee organization or organizations representing employees engaged in commerce or in any industry or activity affecting commerce; or

(3) by both.

(b) The provisions of this subchapter shall not apply to any employee benefit plan if—

(1) such plan is a governmental plan (as defined in section 1002(32) of this title);

(2) such plan is a church plan (as defined in section 1002(33) of this title) with respect to which no election has been made under section 410(d) of title 26;

(3) such plan is maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable workmen's compensation laws or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws;

(4) such plan is maintained outside of the United States primarily for the benefit of persons substantially all of whom are nonresident aliens; or

(5) such plan is an excess benefit plan (as defined in section 1002(36) of this title) and is unfunded.

The provisions of part 7 of subtitle B shall not apply to a health insurance issuer (as defined in section 1191b(b)(2) of this title) solely by reason of health insurance coverage (as defined in section 1191b(b)(1) of this title) provided by such issuer in connection with a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title) if the provisions of this subchapter do not apply to such group health plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §4, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 839; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(d), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1952; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(A), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938.)

1996—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 104–204, in concluding provisions, made technical amendment to references in original act which appear in text as references to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191 inserted at end “The provisions of part 7 of subtitle B shall not apply to a health insurance issuer (as defined in section 1191b(b)(2) of this title) solely by reason of health insurance coverage (as defined in section 1191b(b)(1) of this title) provided by such issuer in connection with a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title) if the provisions of this subchapter do not apply to such group health plan.”

1989—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [enacting section 1185 of this title and amending this section and sections 1021, 1022, 1024, 1132, 1136, 1144, 1181, 1191, and 1191a of this title] shall apply with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 1998.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1181 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1051, 1081, 1101, 1144 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1131, 1169 of this title.

The administrator of each employee benefit plan shall cause to be furnished in accordance with section 1024(b) of this title to each participant covered under the plan and to each beneficiary who is receiving benefits under the plan—

(1) a summary plan description described in section 1022(a)(1) 1 of this title; and

(2) the information described in sections 1024(b)(3) and 1025(a) and (c) of this title.

The administrator shall, in accordance with section 1024(a) of this title, file with the Secretary—

(1) the annual report containing the information required by section 1023 of this title; and

(2) terminal and supplementary reports as required by subsection (c) of this section.

(1) Each administrator of an employee pension benefit plan which is winding up its affairs (without regard to the number of participants remaining in the plan) shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, file such terminal reports as the Secretary may consider necessary. A copy of such report shall also be filed with the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

(2) The Secretary may require terminal reports to be filed with regard to any employee welfare benefit plan which is winding up its affairs in accordance with regulations promulgated by the Secretary.

(3) The Secretary may require that a plan described in paragraph (1) or (2) file a supplementary or terminal report with the annual report in the year such plan is terminated and that a copy of such supplementary or terminal report in the case of a plan described in paragraph (1) be also filed with the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

If an employer maintaining a plan other than a multiemployer plan fails to make a required installment or other payment required to meet the minimum funding standard under section 1082 of this title to a plan before the 60th day following the due date for such installment or other payment, the employer shall notify each participant and beneficiary (including an alternate payee as defined in section 1056(d)(3)(K) of this title) of such plan of such failure. Such notice shall be made at such time and in such manner as the Secretary may prescribe.

This subsection shall not apply to any failure if the employer has filed a waiver request under section 1083 of this title with respect to the plan year to which the required installment relates, except that if the waiver request is denied, notice under paragraph (1) shall be provided within 60 days after the date of such denial.

For purposes of this subsection, the terms “required installment” and “due date” have the same meanings given such terms by section 1082(e) of this title.

Not later than 60 days before the date of a qualified transfer by an employee pension benefit plan of excess pension assets to a health benefits account, the administrator of the plan shall notify (in such manner as the Secretary may prescribe) each participant and beneficiary under the plan of such transfer. Such notice shall include information with respect to the amount of excess pension assets, the portion to be transferred, the amount of health benefits liabilities expected to be provided with the assets transferred, and the amount of pension benefits of the participant which will be nonforfeitable immediately after the transfer.

Not later than 60 days before the date of any qualified transfer by an employee pension benefit plan of excess pension assets to a health benefits account, the employer maintaining the plan from which the transfer is made shall provide the Secretary, the Secretary of the Treasury, the administrator, and each employee organization representing participants in the plan a written notice of such transfer. A copy of any such notice shall be available for inspection in the principal office of the administrator.

Such notice shall identify the plan from which the transfer is made, the amount of the transfer, a detailed accounting of assets projected to be held by the plan immediately before and immediately after the transfer, and the current liabilities under the plan at the time of the transfer.

The Secretary may prescribe such additional reporting requirements as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this section.

For purposes of paragraph (1), any term used in such paragraph which is also used in section 420 of title 26 (as in effect on January 1, 1995) shall have the same meaning as when used in such section.

An employer shall comply with the applicable requirements of section 1320b–14 of title 42. Upon the request of an employer maintaining a group health plan, any plan sponsor, plan administrator, insurer, third-party administrator, or other person who maintains under the plan the information necessary to enable the employer to comply with the applicable requirements of section 1320b–14 of title 42 shall, in such form and manner as may be prescribed in regulations of the Secretary (in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services), provide such information (not inconsistent with paragraph (2))—

(i) in the case of a request by an employer described in subparagraph (B) and a plan that is not a multiemployer plan or a component of an arrangement described in subparagraph (C), to the Medicare and Medicaid Coverage Data Bank;

(ii) in the case of a plan that is a multiemployer plan or is a component of an arrangement described in subparagraph (C), to the employer or to such Data Bank, at the option of the plan; and

(iii) in any other case, to the employer or to such Data Bank, at the option of the employer.

An employer is described in this subparagraph for any calendar year if such employer normally employed fewer than 50 employees on a typical business day during such calendar year.

An arrangement described in this subparagraph is any arrangement in which two or more employers contribute for the purpose of providing group health plan coverage for employees.

Any plan sponsor, plan administrator, insurer, third-party administrator, or other person described in paragraph (1)(A) (other than the employer) that maintains the information under the plan shall not provide to an employer in order to satisfy the requirements of section 1320b–14 of title 42, and shall not provide to the Data Bank under such section, information that pertains in any way to—

(A) the health status of a participant, or of the participant's spouse, dependent child, or other beneficiary,

(B) the cost of coverage provided to any participant or beneficiary, or

(C) any limitations on such coverage specific to any participant or beneficiary.

The Secretary may, in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services, prescribe such regulations as are necessary to carry out this subsection.

The Secretary may, by regulation, require multiple employer welfare arrangements providing benefits consisting of medical care (within the meaning of section 1191b(a)(2) of this title) which are not group health plans to report, not more frequently than annually, in such form and such manner as the Secretary may require for the purpose of determining the extent to which the requirements of part 7 are being carried out in connection with such benefits.

Except as provided in this subsection, no report shall be required under this section by an employer maintaining a qualified salary reduction arrangement under section 408(p) of title 26.

The trustee of any simple retirement account established pursuant to a qualified salary reduction arrangement under section 408(p) of title 26 shall provide to the employer maintaining the arrangement each year a description containing the following information:

(A) The name and address of the employer and the trustee.

(B) The requirements for eligibility for participation.

(C) The benefits provided with respect to the arrangement.

(D) The time and method of making elections with respect to the arrangement.

(E) The procedures for, and effects of, withdrawals (including rollovers) from the arrangement.

The employer shall notify each employee immediately before the period for which an election described in section 408(p)(5)(C) of title 26 may be made of the employee's opportunity to make such election. Such notice shall include a copy of the description described in paragraph (2).

**For regulations relating to coordination of reports to the Secretaries of Labor and the Treasury, see section 1204 of this title.**

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §101, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 840; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9304(d), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–348; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(b)(5)(A), 7894(b)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2438, 2448; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12012(d)(1), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–572; Pub. L. 103–66, title IV, §4301(b)(1), Aug. 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 375; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §731(c)(4)(A), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5004; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1421(d)(1), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1799; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(e)(1), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1952; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(B), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(a), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1061.)

Section 1022(a)(1) of this title, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), was redesignated section 1022(a) of this title by Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(b)(1)(B), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1061.

1997—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 105–34 redesignated pars. (4) and (5) as (1) and (2), respectively, and struck out former pars. (1) to (3), which read as follows:

“(1) the summary plan description described in section 1022(a)(1) of this title;

“(2) a plan description containing the matter required in section 1022(b) of this title;

“(3) modifications and changes referred to in section 1022(a)(2) of this title;”.

1996—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to reference in original act which appears in text as reference to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191, §101(e)(1)(B), added subsec. (g). Former subsec. (g) redesignated (h).

Pub. L. 104–188 added subsec. (g). Former subsec. (g) redesignated (h).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 104–191, §101(e)(1)(A), redesignated subsec. (g), relating to simple retirement accounts, as (h).

Pub. L. 104–188, §1421(d)(1), redesignated subsec. (g), relating to cross references, as (h).

1994—Subsec. (e)(3). Pub. L. 103–465 substituted “1995” for “1991”.

1993—Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 103–66 added subsec. (f) and redesignated former subsec. (f) as (g).

1990—Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 101–508 added subsec. (e) and redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

1989—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(b)(2), substituted “sections” for “section”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(5)(A), substituted “an employer maintaining a plan” for “an employer of a plan”.

1987—Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 100–203 added subsec. (d) and redesignated former subsec. (d) as (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment of Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1181 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 applicable to taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1996, see section 1421(e) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 72 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 4301(d) of Pub. L. 103–66 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) during the period after the date before the date of the enactment of this Act and before such first plan year, the plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of the amendments made by this section, and

“(B) such plan amendment applies retroactively to the period after the date before the date of the enactment of this Act and before such first plan year.

A plan shall not be treated as failing to be operated in accordance with the provisions of the plan merely because it operates in accordance with this paragraph.”

Section 12012(e) of Pub. L. 101–508 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and sections 1082, 1103, 1108, and 1132 of this title] shall apply to qualified transfers under section 420 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [26 U.S.C. 420] made after the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 5, 1990].”

Amendment by section 7881(b)(5)(A) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7894(b)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9304(d) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(b)(5)(C), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2438, provided that the amendment made by that section is effective with respect to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle D [§§1401–1465] of title I of Pub. L. 104–188 require an amendment to any plan or annuity contract, such amendment shall not be required to be made before the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 1465 of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1104, 1132 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

2 So in original. Probably should be “(i)”.

(a) A summary plan description of any employee benefit plan shall be furnished to participants and beneficiaries as provided in section 1024(b) of this title. The summary plan description shall include the information described in subsection (b) of this section, shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average plan participant, and shall be sufficiently accurate and comprehensive to reasonably apprise such participants and beneficiaries of their rights and obligations under the plan. A summary of any material modification in the terms of the plan and any change in the information required under subsection (b) of this section shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the average plan participant and shall be furnished in accordance with section 1024(b)(1) of this title.

(b) The summary plan description shall contain the following information: The name and type of administration of the plan; in the case of a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title), whether a health insurance issuer (as defined in section 1191b(b)(2) of this title) is responsible for the financing or administration (including payment of claims) of the plan and (if so) the name and address of such issuer; the name and address of the person designated as agent for the service of legal process, if such person is not the administrator; the name and address of the administrator; names, titles, and addresses of any trustee or trustees (if they are persons different from the administrator); a description of the relevant provisions of any applicable collective bargaining agreement; the plan's requirements respecting eligibility for participation and benefits; a description of the provisions providing for nonforfeitable pension benefits; circumstances which may result in disqualification, ineligibility, or denial or loss of benefits; the source of financing of the plan and the identity of any organization through which benefits are provided; the date of the end of the plan year and whether the records of the plan are kept on a calendar, policy, or fiscal year basis; the procedures to be followed in presenting claims for benefits under the plan including the office at the Department of Labor through which participants and beneficiaries may seek assistance or information regarding their rights under this chapter and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 with respect to health benefits that are offered through a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title) and the remedies available under the plan for the redress of claims which are denied in whole or in part (including procedures required under section 1133 of this title).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §102, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 841; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(c)(2), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1951; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(C), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(b), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1061.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (b), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 104–191, Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1936. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1996 Amendment note set out under section 201 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, and Tables.

1997—Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(b)(2)(B), substituted “Summary plan description” for “Plan description and summary plan description” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(b)(1), struck out “(1)” after subsec. designation and struck out par. (2) which read as follows: “A plan description (containing the information required by subsection (b) of this section) of any employee benefit plan shall be prepared on forms prescribed by the Secretary, and shall be filed with the Secretary as required by section 1024(a)(1) of this title. Any material modification in the terms of the plan and any change in the information described in subsection (b) of this section shall be filed in accordance with section 1024(a)(1)(D) of this title.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(b)(2)(A), substituted “The summary plan description shall contain” for “The plan description and summary plan description shall contain”.

1996—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to references in original act which appear in text as references to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191 inserted “in the case of a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title), whether a health insurance issuer (as defined in section 1191b(b)(2) of this title) is responsible for the financing or administration (including payment of claims) of the plan and (if so) the name and address of such issuer;” after “type of administration of the plan;” and “including the office at the Department of Labor through which participants and beneficiaries may seek assistance or information regarding their rights under this chapter and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 with respect to health benefits that are offered through a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title)” after “presenting claims for benefits under the plan”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1181 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1024, 1029, 1185 of this title.

(1)(A) An annual report shall be published with respect to every employee benefit plan to which this part applies. Such report shall be filed with the Secretary in accordance with section 1024(a) of this title, and shall be made available and furnished to participants in accordance with section 1024(b) of this title.

(B) The annual report shall include the information described in subsections (b) and (c) of this section and where applicable subsections (d) and (e) of this section and shall also include—

(i) a financial statement and opinion, as required by paragraph (3) of this subsection, and

(ii) an actuarial statement and opinion, as required by paragraph (4) of this subsection.

(2) If some or all of the information necessary to enable the administrator to comply with the requirements of this subchapter is maintained by—

(A) an insurance carrier or other organization which provides some or all of the benefits under the plan, or holds assets of the plan in a separate account,

(B) a bank or similar institution which holds some or all of the assets of the plan in a common or collective trust or a separate trust, or custodial account, or

(C) a plan sponsor as defined in section 1002(16)(B) of this title,

such carrier, organization, bank, institution, or plan sponsor shall transmit and certify the accuracy of such information to the administrator within 120 days after the end of the plan year (or such other date as may be prescribed under regulations of the Secretary).

(3)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (C), the administrator of an employee benefit plan shall engage, on behalf of all plan participants, an independent qualified public accountant, who shall conduct such an examination of any financial statements of the plan, and of other books and records of the plan, as the accountant may deem necessary to enable the accountant to form an opinion as to whether the financial statements and schedules required to be included in the annual reports by subsection (b) of this section are presented fairly in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles applied on a basis consistent with that of the preceding year. Such examination shall be conducted in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards, and shall involve such tests of the books and records of the plan as are considered necessary by the independent qualified public accountant. The independent qualified public accountant shall also offer his opinion as to whether the separate schedules specified in subsection (b)(3) of this section and the summary material required under section 1024(b)(3) of this title present fairly, and in all material respects the information contained therein when considered in conjunction with the financial statements taken as a whole. The opinion by the independent qualified public accountant shall be made a part of the annual report. In a case where a plan is not required to file an annual report, the requirements of this paragraph shall not apply. In a case where by reason of section 1024(a)(2) of this title a plan is required only to file a simplified annual report, the Secretary may waive the requirements of this paragraph.

(B) In offering his opinion under this section the accountant may rely on the correctness of any actuarial matter certified to by an enrolled actuary, if he so states his reliance.

(C) The opinion required by subparagraph (A) need not be expressed as to any statements required by subsection (b)(3)(G) of this section prepared by a bank or similar institution or insurance carrier regulated and supervised and subject to periodic examination by a State or Federal agency if such statements are certified by the bank, similar institution, or insurance carrier as accurate and are made a part of the annual report.

(D) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “qualified public accountant” means—

(i) a person who is a certified public accountant, certified by a regulatory authority of a State;

(ii) a person who is a licensed public accountant licensed by a regulatory authority of a State; or

(iii) a person certified by the Secretary as a qualified public accountant in accordance with regulations published by him for a person who practices in States where there is no certification or licensing procedure for accountants.

(4)(A) The administrator of an employee pension benefit plan subject to the reporting requirement of subsection (d) of this section shall engage, on behalf of all plan participants, an enrolled actuary who shall be responsible for the preparation of the materials comprising the actuarial statement required under subsection (d) of this section. In a case where a plan is not required to file an annual report, the requirement of this paragraph shall not apply, and, in a case where by reason of section 1024(a)(2) of this title, a plan is required only to file a simplified report, the Secretary may waive the requirement of this paragraph.

(B) The enrolled actuary shall utilize such assumptions and techniques as are necessary to enable him to form an opinion as to whether the contents of the matters reported under subsection (d) of this section—

(i) are in the aggregate reasonably related to the experience of the plan and to reasonable expectations; and

(ii) represent his best estimate of anticipated experience under the plan.

The opinion by the enrolled actuary shall be made with respect to, and shall be made a part of, each annual report.

(C) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “enrolled actuary” means an actuary enrolled under subtitle C of subchapter II of this chapter.

(D) In making a certification under this section the enrolled actuary may rely on the correctness of any accounting matter under subsection (b) of this section to which any qualified public accountant has expressed an opinion, if he so states his reliance.

An annual report under this section shall include a financial statement containing the following information:

(1) With respect to an employee welfare benefit plan; a statement of assets and liabilities; a statement of changes in fund balance; and a statement of changes in financial position. In the notes to financial statements, disclosures concerning the following items shall be considered by the accountant: a description of the plan including any significant changes in the plan made during the period and the impact of such changes on benefits; a description of material lease commitments, other commitments, and contingent liabilities; a description of agreements and transactions with persons known to be parties in interest; a general description of priorities upon termination of the plan; information concerning whether or not a tax ruling or determination letter has been obtained; and any other matters necessary to fully and fairly present the financial statements of the plan.

(2) With respect to an employee pension benefit plan: a statement of assets and liabilities, and a statement of changes in net assets available for plan benefits which shall include details of revenues and expenses and other changes aggregated by general source and application. In the notes to financial statements, disclosures concerning the following items shall be considered by the accountant: a description of the plan including any significant changes in the plan made during the period and the impact of such changes on benefits; the funding policy (including policy with respect to prior service cost), and any changes in such policies during the year; a description of any significant changes in plan benefits made during the period; a description of material lease commitments, other commitments, and contingent liabilities; a description of agreements and transactions with persons known to be parties in interest; a general description of priorities upon termination of the plan; information concerning whether or not a tax ruling or determination letter has been obtained; and any other matters necessary to fully and fairly present the financial statements of such pension plan.

(3) With respect to all employee benefit plans, the statement required under paragraph (1) or (2) shall have attached the following information in separate schedules:

(A) a statement of the assets and liabilities of the plan aggregated by categories and valued at their current value, and the same data displayed in comparative form for the end of the previous fiscal year of the plan;

(B) a statement of receipts and disbursements during the preceding twelve-month period aggregated by general sources and applications;

(C) a schedule of all assets held for investment purposes aggregated and identified by issue, borrower, or lessor, or similar party to the transaction (including a notation as to whether such party is known to be a party in interest), maturity date, rate of interest, collateral, par or maturity value, cost, and current value;

(D) a schedule of each transaction involving a person known to be party in interest, the identity of such party in interest and his relationship or that of any other party in interest to the plan, a description of each asset to which the transaction relates; the purchase or selling price in case of a sale or purchase, the rental in case of a lease, or the interest rate and maturity date in case of a loan; expense incurred in connection with the transaction; the cost of the asset, the current value of the asset, and the net gain (or loss) on each transaction;

(E) a schedule of all loans or fixed income obligations which were in default as of the close of the plan's fiscal year or were classified during the year as uncollectable and the following information with respect to each loan on such schedule (including a notation as to whether parties involved are known to be parties in interest): the original principal amount of the loan, the amount of principal and interest received during the reporting year, the unpaid balance, the identity and address of the obligor, a detailed description of the loan (including date of making and maturity, interest rate, the type and value of collateral, and other material terms), the amount of principal and interest overdue (if any) and an explanation thereof;

(F) a list of all leases which were in default or were classified during the year as uncollectable; and the following information with respect to each lease on such schedule (including a notation as to whether parties involved are known to be parties in interest): the type of property leased (and, in the case of fixed assets such as land, buildings, leasehold, and so forth, the location of the property), the identity of the lessor or lessee from or to whom the plan is leasing, the relationship of such lessors and lessees, if any, to the plan, the employer, employee organization, or any other party in interest, the terms of the lease regarding rent, taxes, insurance, repairs, expenses, and renewal options; the date the leased property was purchased and its cost, the date the property was leased and its approximate value at such date, the gross rental receipts during the reporting period, expenses paid for the leased property during the reporting period, the net receipts from the lease, the amounts in arrears, and a statement as to what steps have been taken to collect amounts due or otherwise remedy the default;

(G) if some or all of the assets of a plan or plans are held in a common or collective trust maintained by a bank or similar institution or in a separate account maintained by an insurance carrier or a separate trust maintained by a bank as trustee, the report shall include the most recent annual statement of assets and liabilities of such common or collective trust, and in the case of a separate account or a separate trust, such other information as is required by the administrator in order to comply with this subsection; and

(H) a schedule of each reportable transaction, the name of each party to the transaction (except that, in the case of an acquisition or sale of a security on the market, the report need not identify the person from whom the security was acquired or to whom it was sold) and a description of each asset to which the transaction applies; the purchase or selling price in case of a sale or purchase, the rental in case of a lease, or the interest rate and maturity date in case of a loan; expenses incurred in connection with the transaction; the cost of the asset, the current value of the asset, and the net gain (or loss) on each transaction. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the term “reportable transaction” means a transaction to which the plan is a party if such transaction is—

(i) a transaction involving an amount in excess of 3 percent of the current value of the assets of the plan;

(ii) any transaction (other than a transaction respecting a security) which is part of a series of transactions with or in conjunction with a person in a plan year, if the aggregate amount of such transactions exceeds 3 percent of the current value of the assets of the plan;

(iii) a transaction which is part of a series of transactions respecting one or more securities of the same issuer, if the aggregate amount of such transactions in the plan year exceeds 3 percent of the current value of the assets of the plan; or

(iv) a transaction with or in conjunction with a person respecting a security, if any other transaction with or in conjunction with such person in the plan year respecting a security is required to be reported by reason of clause (i).

(4) The Secretary may, by regulation, relieve any plan from filing a copy of a statement of assets and liabilities (or other information) described in paragraph (3)(G) if such statement and other information is filed with the Secretary by the bank or insurance carrier which maintains the common or collective trust or separate account.

The administrator shall furnish as a part of a report under this section the following information:

(1) The number of employees covered by the plan.

(2) The name and address of each fiduciary.

(3) Except in the case of a person whose compensation is minimal (determined under regulations of the Secretary) and who performs solely ministerial duties (determined under such regulations), the name of each person (including but not limited to, any consultant, broker, trustee, accountant, insurance carrier, actuary, administrator, investment manager, or custodian who rendered services to the plan or who had transactions with the plan) who received directly or indirectly compensation from the plan during the preceding year for services rendered to the plan or its participants, the amount of such compensation, the nature of his services to the plan or its participants, his relationship to the employer of the employees covered by the plan, or the employee organization, and any other office, position, or employment he holds with any party in interest.

(4) An explanation of the reason for any change in appointment of trustee, accountant, insurance carrier, enrolled actuary, administrator, investment manager, or custodian.

(5) Such financial and actuarial information including but not limited to the material described in subsections (b) and (d) of this section as the Secretary may find necessary or appropriate.

With respect to an employee pension benefit plan (other than (A) a profit sharing, savings, or other plan, which is an individual account plan, (B) a plan described in section 1081(b) of this title, or (C) a plan described both in section 1321(b) of this title and in paragraph (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), or (7) of section 1081(a) of this title) an annual report under this section for a plan year shall include a complete actuarial statement applicable to the plan year which shall include the following:

(1) The date of the plan year, and the date of the actuarial valuation applicable to the plan year for which the report is filed.

(2) The date and amount of the contribution (or contributions) received by the plan for the plan year for which the report is filed and contributions for prior plan years not previously reported.

(3) The following information applicable to the plan year for which the report is filed: the normal costs, the accrued liabilities, an identification of benefits not included in the calculation; a statement of the other facts and actuarial assumptions and methods used to determine costs, and a justification for any change in actuarial assumptions or cost methods; and the minimum contribution required under section 1082 of this title.

(4) The number of participants and beneficiaries, both retired and nonretired, covered by the plan.

(5) The current value of the assets accumulated in the plan, and the present value of the assets of the plan used by the actuary in any computation of the amount of contributions to the plan required under section 1082 of this title and a statement explaining the basis of such valuation of present value of assets.

(6) Information required in regulations of the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation with respect to:

(A) the current value of the assets of the plan,

(B) the present value of all nonforfeitable benefits for participants and beneficiaries receiving payments under the plan,

(C) the present value of all nonforfeitable benefits for all other participants and beneficiaries,

(D) the present value of all accrued benefits which are not nonforfeitable (including a separate accounting of such benefits which are benefit commitments, as defined in section 1301(a)(16) of this title), and

(E) the actuarial assumptions and techniques used in determining the values described in subparagraphs (A) through (D).

(7) A certification of the contribution necessary to reduce the accumulated funding deficiency to zero.

(8) A statement by the enrolled actuary—

(A) that to the best of his knowledge the report is complete and accurate, and

(B) the requirements of section 1082(c)(3) of this title (relating to reasonable actuarial assumptions and methods) have been complied with.

(9) A copy of the opinion required by subsection (a)(4) of this section.

(10) A statement by the actuary which discloses—

(A) any event which the actuary has not taken into account, and

(B) any trend which, for purposes of the actuarial assumptions used, was not assumed to continue in the future,

but only if, to the best of the actuary's knowledge, such event or trend may require a material increase in plan costs or required contribution rates.

(11) If the current value of the assets of the plan is less than 70 percent of the current liability under the plan (within the meaning of section 1082(d)(7) of this title), the percentage which such value is of such liability..1

(12) Such other information regarding the plan as the Secretary may by regulation require.

(13) Such other information as may be necessary to fully and fairly disclose the actuarial position of the plan.

Such actuary shall make an actuarial valuation of the plan for every third plan year, unless he determines that a more frequent valuation is necessary to support his opinion under subsection (a)(4) of this section.

If some or all of the benefits under the plan are purchased from and guaranteed by an insurance company, insurance service, or other similar organization, a report under this section shall include a statement from such insurance company, service, or other similar organization covering the plan year and enumerating—

(1) the premium rate or subscription charge and the total premium or subscription charges paid to each such carrier, insurance service, or other similar organization and the approximate number of persons covered by each class of such benefits; and

(2) the total amount of premiums received, the approximate number of persons covered by each class of benefits, and the total claims paid by such company, service, or other organization; dividends or retroactive rate adjustments, commissions, and administrative service or other fees or other specific acquisition costs paid by such company, service, or other organization; any amounts held to provide benefits after retirement; the remainder of such premiums; and the names and addresses of the brokers, agents, or other persons to whom commissions or fees were paid, the amount paid to each, and for what purpose. If any such company, service, or other organization does not maintain separate experience records covering the specific groups it serves, the report shall include in lieu of the information required by the foregoing provisions of this paragraph (A) a statement as to the basis of its premium rate or subscription charge, the total amount of premiums or subscription charges received from the plan, and a copy of the financial report of the company, service, or other organization and (B) if such company, service, or organization incurs specific costs in connection with the acquisition or retention of any particular plan or plans, a detailed statement of such costs.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §103, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 841; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §307, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1295; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(b)(1), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 272; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9342(a)(1), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–371; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(j)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2442.)

1989—Subsec. (d)(11). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “70 percent” for “60 percent” and “the percentage which such value is of such liability.” for “such percentage”.

1987—Subsec. (d)(11) to (13). Pub. L. 100–203 added par. (11) and redesignated former pars. (11) and (12) as (12) and (13), respectively.

1986—Subsec. (d)(6). Pub. L. 99–272 amended par. (6) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (6) read as follows: “The present value of all of the plan's liabilities for nonforfeitable pension benefits allocated by the termination priority categories as set forth in section 1344 of this title, and the actuarial assumptions used in these computations. The Secretary shall establish regulations defining (for purposes of this section) ‘termination priority categories’ and acceptable methods, including approximate methods, for allocating the plan's liabilities to such termination priority categories.”

1980—Subsec. (d)(10) to (12). Pub. L. 96–364 added par. (10) and redesignated former pars. (10) and (11) as (11) and (12), respectively.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to reports required to be filed after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9342(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1132 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Section 11016(b)(3) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “Any regulations, modifications, or waivers which have been issued by the Secretary of Labor with respect to section 103(d)(6) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1023(d)(6)] (as in effect immediately before the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986]) shall remain in full force and effect until modified by any regulations with respect to such section 103(d)(6) prescribed by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.”

Secretary of the Treasury and Secretary of Labor to take such steps as may be necessary to assure coordination to the maximum extent feasible between the actuarial reports required by subsec. (d) of this section and section 6059 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, see section 1033(c) of Pub. L. 93–406, set out as a note under section 6059 of Title 26.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1024, 1029 of this title; title 5 section 8439; title 31 section 9503.

(1) The administrator of any employee benefit plan subject to this part shall file with the Secretary the annual report for a plan year within 210 days after the close of such year (or within such time as may be required by regulations promulgated by the Secretary in order to reduce duplicative filing). The Secretary shall make copies of such annual reports available for inspection in the public document room of the Department of Labor.

(2)(A) With respect to annual reports required to be filed with the Secretary under this part, he may by regulation prescribe simplified annual reports for any pension plan which covers less than 100 participants.

(B) Nothing contained in this paragraph shall preclude the Secretary from requiring any information or data from any such plan to which this part applies where he finds such data or information is necessary to carry out the purposes of this subchapter nor shall the Secretary be precluded from revoking provisions for simplified reports for any such plan if he finds it necessary to do so in order to carry out the objectives of this subchapter.

(3) The Secretary may by regulation exempt any welfare benefit plan from all or part of the reporting and disclosure requirements of this subchapter, or may provide for simplified reporting and disclosure if he finds that such requirements are inappropriate as applied to welfare benefit plans.

(4) The Secretary may reject any filing under this section—

(A) if he determines that such filing is incomplete for purposes of this part; or

(B) if he determines that there is any material qualification by an accountant or actuary contained in an opinion submitted pursuant to section 1023(a)(3)(A) or section 1023(a)(4)(B) of this title.

(5) If the Secretary rejects a filing of a report under paragraph (4) and if a revised filing satisfactory to the Secretary is not submitted within 45 days after the Secretary makes his determination under paragraph (4) to reject the filing, and if the Secretary deems it in the best interest of the participants, he may take any one or more of the following actions—

(A) retain an independent qualified public accountant (as defined in section 1023(a)(3)(D) of this title) on behalf of the participants to perform an audit,

(B) retain an enrolled actuary (as defined in section 1023(a)(4)(C) of this title) on behalf of the plan participants, to prepare an actuarial statement,

(C) bring a civil action for such legal or equitable relief as may be appropriate to enforce the provisions of this part, or

(D) take any other action authorized by this subchapter.

The administrator shall permit such accountant or actuary to inspect whatever books and records of the plan are necessary for such audit. The plan shall be liable to the Secretary for the expenses for such audit or report, and the Secretary may bring an action against the plan in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover such expenses.

(6) The administrator of any employee benefit plan subject to this part shall furnish to the Secretary, upon request, any documents relating to the employee benefit plan, including but not limited to, the latest summary plan description (including any summaries of plan changes not contained in the summary plan description), and the bargaining agreement, trust agreement, contract, or other instrument under which the plan is established or operated.

Publication of the summary plan descriptions and annual reports shall be made to participants and beneficiaries of the particular plan as follows:

(1) The administrator shall furnish to each participant, and each beneficiary receiving benefits under the plan, a copy of summary plan description, and all modifications and changes referred to in section 1022(a) of this title—

(A) within 90 days after he becomes a participant, or (in the case of a beneficiary) within 90 days after he first receives benefits, or

(B) if later, within 120 days after the plan becomes subject to this part.

The administrator shall furnish to each participant, and each beneficiary receiving benefits under the plan, every fifth year after the plan becomes subject to this part an updated summary plan description described in section 1022 of this title which integrates all plan amendments made within such five-year period, except that in a case where no amendments have been made to a plan during such five-year period this sentence shall not apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the administrator shall furnish to each participant, and to each beneficiary receiving benefits under the plan, the summary plan description described in section 1022 of this title every tenth year after the plan becomes subject to this part. If there is a modification or change described in section 1022(a) of this title (other than a material reduction in covered services or benefits provided in the case of a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title)), a summary description of such modification or change shall be furnished not later than 210 days after the end of the plan year in which the change is adopted to each participant, and to each beneficiary who is receiving benefits under the plan. If there is a modification or change described in section 1022(a) of this title that is a material reduction in covered services or benefits provided under a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title), a summary description of such modification or change shall be furnished to participants and beneficiaries not later than 60 days after the date of the adoption of the modification or change. In the alternative, the plan sponsors may provide such description at regular intervals of not more than 90 days. The Secretary shall issue regulations within 180 days after August 21, 1996, providing alternative mechanisms to delivery by mail through which group health plans (as so defined) may notify participants and beneficiaries of material reductions in covered services or benefits.

(2) The administrator shall make copies of the latest updated summary plan description and the latest annual report and the bargaining agreement, trust agreement, contract, or other instruments under which the plan was established or is operated available for examination by any plan participant or beneficiary in the principal office of the administrator and in such other places as may be necessary to make available all pertinent information to all participants (including such places as the Secretary may prescribed by regulations).

(3) Within 210 days after the close of the fiscal year of the plan, the administrators shall furnish to each participant, and to each beneficiary receiving benefits under the plan, a copy of the statements and schedules, for such fiscal year, described in subparagraphs (A) and (B) of section 1023(b)(3) of this title and such other material (including the percentage determined under section 1023(d)(11) of this title) as is necessary to fairly summarize the latest annual report.

(4) The administrator shall, upon written request of any participant or beneficiary, furnish a copy of the latest updated summary,1 plan description, and the latest annual report, any terminal report, the bargaining agreement, trust agreement, contract, or other instruments under which the plan is established or operated. The administrator may make a reasonable charge to cover the cost of furnishing such complete copies. The Secretary may by regulation prescribe the maximum amount which will constitute a reasonable charge under the preceding sentence.

The Secretary may by regulation require that the administrator of any employee benefit plan furnish to each participant and to each beneficiary receiving benefits under the plan a statement of the rights of participants and beneficiaries under this subchapter.

**For regulations respecting coordination of reports to the Secretaries of Labor and the Treasury, see section 1204 of this title.**

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §104, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 847; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(b)(2), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 273; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9342(a)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–371; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(b)(3), (4), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2448; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(c)(1), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1951; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(D), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(c)(1), (2)(A), (d)(1)–(3), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1062.)

1997—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(c)(1), amended par. (1) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions requiring filing of annual report, plan description, summary plan description, as well as modifications and changes in plan descriptions.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(c)(2)(A), added par. (6).

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(d)(1), substituted “section 1022(a) of this title” for “section 1022(a)(1) of this title” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(d)(2), substituted “the latest updated summary plan description and” for “the plan description and”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(d)(3), struck out “plan description” before “, plan description, and the latest annual report”.

1996—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to references in original act which appear in text as references to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191, in closing provisions, substituted “1022(a)(1) of this title (other than a material reduction in covered services or benefits provided in the case of a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title)),” for “1022(a)(1) of this title,” and inserted at end “If there is a modification or change described in section 1022(a)(1) of this title that is a material reduction in covered services or benefits provided under a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title), a summary description of such modification or change shall be furnished to participants and beneficiaries not later than 60 days after the date of the adoption of the modification or change. In the alternative, the plan sponsors may provide such description at regular intervals of not more than 90 days. The Secretary shall issue regulations within 180 days after August 21, 1996, providing alternative mechanisms to delivery by mail through which group health plans (as so defined) may notify participants and beneficiaries of material reductions in covered services or benefits.”

1989—Subsec. (a)(5)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(b)(3), substituted a comma for period at end.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(b)(4), struck out comma after “summary”.

1987—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 100–203 inserted “(including the percentage determined under section 1023(d)(11) of this title)” after “material”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 99–272 struck out provision permitting the Secretary to waive or modify the requirements of section 1023(d)(6) of this title if he found that the interests of the plan participants were not harmed and the expense of compliance was not justified by the needs of the participants, the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, and the Department of Labor for some portion or all of the information otherwise required under section 1023(d)(6) of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1181 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to reports required to be filed after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9342(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1132 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1022, 1023, 1027, 1029, 1132, 1185 of this title; title 31 section 9503.

1 So in original. Comma probably should not appear.

Each administrator of an employee pension benefit plan shall furnish to any plan participant or beneficiary who so requests in writing, a statement indicating, on the basis of the latest available information—

(1) the total benefits accrued, and

(2) the nonforfeitable pension benefits, if any, which have accrued, or the earliest date on which benefits will become nonforfeitable.

In no case shall a participant or beneficiary be entitled under this section to receive more than one report described in subsection (a) of this section during any one 12-month period.

Each administrator required to register under section 6057 of title 26 shall, before the expiration of the time prescribed for such registration, furnish to each participant described in subsection (a)(2)(C) of such section, an individual statement setting forth the information with respect to such participant required to be contained in the registration statement required by section 6057(a)(2) of title 26. Such statement shall also include a notice to the participant of any benefits which are forfeitable if the participant dies before a certain date.

Subsection (a) of this section shall apply to a plan to which more than one unaffiliated employer is required to contribute only to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary in coordination with the Secretary of the Treasury.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §105, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 849; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §106, Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1436; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(b)(5), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2448.)

1989—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(b)(5), substituted “12-month” for “12 month”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1984—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–397 inserted at end “Such statement shall also include a notice to the participant of any benefits which are forfeitable if the participant dies before a certain date.”

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(b)(5) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see sections 302 and 303 of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Secretary of Labor authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations by him, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1026, 1132 of this title.

(a) Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, the contents of the annual reports, statements, and other documents filed with the Secretary pursuant to this part shall be public information and the Secretary shall make any such information and data available for inspection in the public document room of the Department of Labor. The Secretary may use the information and data for statistical and research purposes, and compile and publish such studies, analyses, reports, and surveys based thereon as he may deem appropriate.

(b) Information described in sections 1025(a) and 1025(c) of this title with respect to a participant may be disclosed only to the extent that information respecting that participant's benefits under title II of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.] may be disclosed under such Act.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §106, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(b)(6), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2448; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(d)(4), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1062.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 105–34 struck out “descriptions,” before “annual reports,”.

1989—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “sections” for “section”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Every person subject to a requirement to file any report or to certify any information therefor under this subchapter or who would be subject to such a requirement but for an exemption or simplified reporting requirement under section 1024(a)(2) or (3) of this title shall maintain records on the matters of which disclosure is required which will provide in sufficient detail the necessary basic information and data from which the documents thus required may be verified, explained, or clarified, and checked for accuracy and completeness, and shall include vouchers, worksheets, receipts, and applicable resolutions, and shall keep such records available for examination for a period of not less than six years after the filing date of the documents based on the information which they contain, or six years after the date on which such documents would have been filed but for an exemption or simplified reporting requirement under section 1024(a)(2) or (3) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §107, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(d)(5), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1062.)

1997—Pub. L. 105–34 struck out “description or” after “requirement to file any”.

In any criminal proceeding under section 1131 of this title, based on any act or omission in alleged violation of this part or section 1112 of this title, no person shall be subject to any liability or punishment for or on account of the failure of such person to (1) comply with this part or section 1112 of this title, if he pleads and proves that the act or omission complained of was in good faith, in conformity with, and in reliance on any regulation or written ruling of the Secretary, or (2) publish and file any information required by any provision of this part if he pleads and proves that he published and filed such information in good faith, and in conformity with any regulation or written ruling of the Secretary issued under this part regarding the filing of such reports. Such a defense, if established, shall be a bar to the action or proceeding, notwithstanding that (A) after such act or omission, such interpretation or opinion is modified or rescinded or is determined by judicial authority to be invalid or of no legal effect, or (B) after publishing or filing the annual reports and other reports required by this subchapter, such publication or filing is determined by judicial authority not to be in conformity with the requirements of this part.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §108, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 850; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(b)(7), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2448; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(d)(6), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1062.)

1997—Pub. L. 105–34, which directed the amendment of cl. (2)(B) by substituting “annual reports” for “plan descriptions, annual reports,”, was executed by making the substitution for “plan description, annual reports,” to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1989—Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “act or omission” for “act of omission” before “complained of”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, the Secretary may require that any information required under this subchapter to be submitted to him, including but not limited to the information required to be filed by the administrator pursuant to section 1023(b)(3) and (c) of this title, must be submitted on such forms as he may prescribe.

The financial statement and opinion required to be prepared by an independent qualified public accountant pursuant to section 1023(a)(3)(A) of this title, the actuarial statement required to be prepared by an enrolled actuary pursuant to section 1023(a)(4)(A) of this title and the summary plan description required by section 1022(a) of this title shall not be required to be submitted on forms.

The Secretary may prescribe the format and content of the summary plan description, the summary of the annual report described in section 1024(b)(3) of this title and any other report, statements or documents (other than the bargaining agreement, trust agreement, contract, or other instrument under which the plan is established or operated), which are required to be furnished or made available to plan participants and beneficiaries receiving benefits under the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §109, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 850.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1135 of this title.

(a) The Secretary on his own motion or after having received the petition of an administrator may prescribe an alternative method for satisfying any requirement of this part with respect to any pension plan, or class of pension plans, subject to such requirement if he determines—

(1) that the use of such alternative method is consistent with the purposes of this subchapter and that it provides adequate disclosure to the participants and beneficiaries in the plan, and adequate reporting to the Secretary,

(2) that the application of such requirement of this part would—

(A) increase the costs to the plan, or

(B) impose unreasonable administrative burdens with respect to the operation of the plan, having regard to the particular characteristics of the plan or the type of plan involved; and

(3) that the application of this part would be adverse to the interests of plan participants in the aggregate.

(b) An alternative method may be prescribed under subsection (a) of this section by regulation or otherwise. If an alternative method is prescribed other than by regulation, the Secretary shall provide notice and an opportunity for interested persons to present their views, and shall publish in the Federal Register the provisions of such alternative method.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §110, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 851.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1143, 1343 of this title.

(a)(1) The Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act [29 U.S.C. 301 et seq.] is repealed except that such Act shall continue to apply to any conduct and events which occurred before the effective date of this part.

(2)(A) Section 664 of title 18 is amended by striking out “any such plan subject to the provisions of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act” and inserting in lieu thereof “any employee benefit plan subject to any provisions of title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”.

(B)(i) Section 1027 of such title 18 is amended by striking out “Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act” and inserting in lieu thereof “title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”, and by striking out “Act” each place it appears and inserting in lieu thereof “title”.

(ii) The heading for such section is amended by striking out “

(iii) The table of sections of chapter 47 of such title 18 is amended by striking out “Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act” in the item relating to section 1027 and inserting in lieu thereof “Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”.

(C) Section 1954 of such title 18 is amended by striking out “any plan subject to the provisions of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act as amended” and inserting in lieu thereof “any employee welfare benefit plan or employee pension benefit plan, respectively, subject to any provisions of title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”; and by striking out “sections 3(3) and 5(b)(1) and (2) of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act, as amended” and inserting in lieu thereof “sections 3(4) and (3)(16) 1 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”.

(D) Section 211 of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 (29 U.S.C. 441) is amended by striking out “Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act” and inserting in lieu thereof “Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”.

(b)(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), this part (including the amendments and repeals made by subsection (a) of this section) shall take effect on January 1, 1975.

(2) In the case of a plan which has a plan year which begins before January 1, 1975, and ends after December 31, 1974, the Secretary may postpone by regulation the effective date of the repeal of any provision of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act (and of any amendment made by subsection (a)(2) of this section) and the effective date of any provision of this part, until the beginning of the first plan year of such plan which begins after January 1, 1975.

(c) The provisions of this subchapter authorizing the Secretary to promulgate regulations shall take effect on September 2, 1974.

(d) Subsections (b) and (c) of this section shall not apply with respect to amendments made to this part in provisions enacted after September 2, 1974.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §111, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 851; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(h)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2451.)

The Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1), (2), (b)(2), is Pub. L. 85–836, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 997, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 10 (§301 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 301 of this title and Tables.

Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(A) to (C), means title I of Pub. L. 93–406, which enacted this subchapter, amended section 441 of this title, section 5108 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and sections 664, 1027, and 1954 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and repealed sections 301 to 309 of this title.

The Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(B)(ii), (iii), (D), is Pub. L. 93–406, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 829, as amended. Titles I, III, and IV of such act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239 added subsec. (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1144 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1103, 1132, 1201, 1202 of this title; title 26 section 6057.

1 So in original. Probably should be “3(16)”.

This part shall apply to any employee benefit plan described in section 1003(a) of this title (and not exempted under section 1003(b) of this title) other than—

(1) an employee welfare benefit plan;

(2) a plan which is unfunded and is maintained by an employer primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees;

(3)(A) a plan established and maintained by a society, order, or association described in section 501(c)(8) or (9) of title 26, if no part of the contributions to or under such plan are made by employers of participants in such plan, or

(B) a trust described in section 501(c)(18) of title 26;

(4) a plan which is established and maintained by a labor organization described in section 501(c)(5) of title 26 and which does not at any time after September 2, 1974, provide for employer contributions;

(5) any agreement providing payments to a retired partner or a deceased partner's successor in interest, as described in section 736 of title 26;

(6) an individual retirement account or annuity described in section 408 of title 26, or a retirement bond described in section 409 of title 26 (as effective for obligations issued before January 1, 1984);

(7) an excess benefit plan; or

(8) any plan, fund or program under which an employer, all of whose stock is directly or indirectly owned by employees, former employees or their beneficiaries, proposes through an unfunded arrangement to compensate retired employees for benefits which were forfeited by such employees under a pension plan maintained by a former employer prior to the date such pension plan became subject to this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §201, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 852; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §411(a), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1308; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(c)(1)(A), (11)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2448, 2449.)

Section 409 of title 26, referred to in par. (6), means section 409 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, prior to its repeal by Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title IV, §491(b), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 848, applicable to obligations issued after Dec. 31, 1983.

This chapter, referred to in par. (8), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Pars. (3)(A), (4), (5). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Par. (6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “section 408 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “section 408 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “section 408 of title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(11)(A), substituted “section 409 of title 26 (as effective for obligations issued before January 1, 1984)” for “section 409 of title 26”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(1)(A)(i), struck out “or” after semicolon at end.

Par. (7). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(1)(A)(ii), substituted “plan; or” for “plan.”

Par. (8). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(1)(A)(iii), substituted “any plan” for “Any plan”.

1980—Par. (8). Pub. L. 96–364 added par. (8).

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(c)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 411 of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 [Pub. L. 96–364].”

Section 7894(c)(11)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in section 491(b) of Public Law 98–369.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1003 of this title.

(a)(1)(A) No pension plan may require, as a condition of participation in the plan, that an employee complete a period of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan extending beyond the later of the following dates—

(i) the date on which the employee attains the age of 21; or

(ii) the date on which he completes 1 year of service.

(B)(i) In the case of any plan which provides that after not more than 2 years of service each participant has a right to 100 percent of his accrued benefit under the plan which is nonforfeitable at the time such benefit accrues, clause (ii) of subparagraph (A) shall be applied by substituting “2 years of service” for “1 year of service”.

(ii) In the case of any plan maintained exclusively for employees of an educational organization (as defined in section 170(b)(1)(A)(ii) of title 26) by an employer which is exempt from tax under section 501(a) of title 26, which provides that each participant having at least 1 year of service has a right to 100 percent of his accrued benefit under the plan which is nonforfeitable at the time such benefit accrues, clause (i) of subparagraph (A) shall be applied by substituting “26” for “21”. This clause shall not apply to any plan to which clause (i) applies.

(2) No pension plan may exclude from participation (on the basis of age) employees who have attained a specified age.

(3)(A) For purposes of this section, the term “year of service” means a 12-month period during which the employee has not less than 1,000 hours of service. For purposes of this paragraph, computation of any 12-month period shall be made with reference to the date on which the employee's employment commenced, except that, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, such computation may be made by reference to the first day of a plan year in the case of an employee who does not complete 1,000 hours of service during the 12-month period beginning on the date his employment commenced.

(B) In the case of any seasonal industry where the customary period of employment is less than 1,000 hours during a calendar year, the term “year of service” shall be such period as may be determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(C) For purposes of this section, the term “hour of service” means a time of service determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(D) For purposes of this section, in the case of any maritime industry, 125 days of service shall be treated as 1,000 hours of service. The Secretary may prescribe regulations to carry out the purposes of this subparagraph.

(4) A plan shall be treated as not meeting the requirements of paragraph (1) unless it provides that any employee who has satisfied the minimum age and service requirements specified in such paragraph, and who is otherwise entitled to participate in the plan, commences participation in the plan no later than the earlier of—

(A) the first day of the first plan year beginning after the date on which such employee satisfied such requirements, or

(B) the date 6 months after the date on which he satisfied such requirements,

unless such employee was separated from the service before the date referred to in subparagraph (A) or (B), whichever is applicable.

(b)(1) Except as otherwise provided in paragraphs (2), (3), and (4), all years of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan shall be taken into account in computing the period of service for purposes of subsection (a)(1) of this section.

(2) In the case of any employee who has any 1-year break in service (as defined in section 1053(b)(3)(A) of this title) under a plan to which the service requirements of clause (i) of subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section apply, if such employee has not satisfied such requirements, service before such break shall not be required to be taken into account.

(3) In computing an employee's period of service for purposes of subsection (a)(1) of this section in the case of any participant who has any 1-year break in service (as defined in section 1053(b)(3)(A) of this title), service before such break shall not be required to be taken into account under the plan until he has completed a year of service (as defined in subsection (a)(3) of this section) after his return.

(4)(A) For purposes of paragraph (1), in the case of a nonvested participant, years of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan before any period of consecutive 1-year breaks in service shall not be required to be taken into account in computing the period of service if the number of consecutive 1-year breaks in service within such period equals or exceeds the greater of—

(i) 5, or

(ii) the aggregate number of years of service before such period.

(B) If any years of service are not required to be taken into account by reason of a period of breaks in service to which subparagraph (A) applies, such years of service shall not be taken into account in applying subparagraph (A) to a subsequent period of breaks in service.

(C) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “nonvested participant” means a participant who does not have any nonforfeitable right under the plan to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions.

(5)(A) In the case of each individual who is absent from work for any period—

(i) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual,

(ii) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual,

(iii) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or

(iv) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement,

the plan shall treat as hours of service, solely for purposes of determining under this subsection whether a 1-year break in service (as defined in section 1053(b)(3)(A) of this title) has occurred, the hours described in subparagraph (B).

(B) The hours described in this subparagraph are—

(i) the hours of service which otherwise would normally have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or

(ii) in any case in which the plan is unable to determine the hours described in clause (i), 8 hours of service per day of such absence,

except that the total number of hours treated as hours of service under this subparagraph by reason of any such pregnancy or placement shall not exceed 501 hours.

(C) The hours described in subparagraph (B) shall be treated as hours of service as provided in this paragraph—

(i) only in the year in which the absence from work begins, if a participant would be prevented from incurring a 1-year break in service in such year solely because the period of absence is treated as hours of service as provided in subparagraph (A); or

(ii) in any other case, in the immediately following year.

(D) For purposes of this paragraph, the term “year” means the period used in computations pursuant to subsection (a)(3)(A) of this section.

(E) A plan may provide that no credit will be given pursuant to this paragraph unless the individual furnishes to the plan administrator such timely information as the plan may reasonably require to establish—

(i) that the absence from work is for reasons referred to in subparagraph (A), and

(ii) the number of days for which there was such an absence.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §202, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 853; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §102(a), (d)(1), (e)(1), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1426, 1427; Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9203(a)(1), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1979; Pub. L. 99–514, title XI, §1113(e)(3), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2448; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7861(a)(2), 7891(a)(1), 7892(a), 7894(c)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2430, 2445, 2447, 2449.)

1989—Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(2), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 99–514. See 1986 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(2)(A), substituted “educational organization” for “educational institution”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7892(a), struck out comma after “specified age”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(2)(B), substituted “a plan” for “the plan”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(i). Pub. L. 99–514, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(2), substituted “2 years of service” for “3 years of service” in two places.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–509 substituted a period for “unless—

“(A) the plan is a—

“(i) defined benefit plan, or

“(ii) target benefit plan (as defined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury), and

“(B) such employees begin employment with the employer after they have attained a specified age which is not more than 5 years before the normal retirement age under the plan.”

1984—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(a), substituted “21” for “25” in subpar. (A)(i) and “ ‘26’ for ‘21’ ” for “ ‘30’ for ‘25’ ” in subpar. (B)(ii).

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(d)(1), amended par. (4) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (4) read as follows: “In the case of an employee who does not have any nonforfeitable right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions, years of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan before a break in service shall not be required to be taken into account in computing the period of service for purposes of subsection (a)(1) of this section if the number of consecutive 1-year breaks in service equals or exceeds the aggregate number of such years of service before such break. Such aggregate number of years of service before such break shall be deemed not to include any years of service not required to be taken into account under this paragraph by reason of any prior break in service.”

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(e)(1), added par. (5).

Amendment by section 7861(a)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7892(c) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “Any amendment made by this section [amending this section and section 1082 of this title] shall take effect as if included in the provision of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1987 [Pub. L. 100–203, probably should refer to Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–509] or Pension Protection Act [Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, probably should refer to Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1987, Pub. L. 100–203] to which such amendment relates.”

Amendment by section 7894(c)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 1113(e)(3) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, with special rule for plans maintained pursuant to collective bargaining agreements ratified before Mar. 1, 1986, and not applicable to employees who do not have 1 hour of service in any plan year to which the amendment applies, see section 1113(f) of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 applicable only with respect to plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1988, and only with respect to service performed on or after such date, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendments note under section 623 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see sections 302 and 303 of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Secretary of Labor, Secretary of the Treasury, and Equal Employment Opportunity Commission each to issue before Feb. 1, 1988, final regulations to carry out amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1053, 1054, 1060, 1061 of this title.

Each pension plan shall provide that an employee's right to his normal retirement benefit is nonforfeitable upon the attainment of normal retirement age and in addition shall satisfy the requirements of paragraphs (1) and (2) of this subsection.

(1) A plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if an employee's rights in his accrued benefit derived from his own contributions are nonforfeitable.

(2) A plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if it satisfies the requirements of subparagraph (A) or (B).

(A) A plan satisfies the requirements of this subparagraph if an employee who has completed at least 5 years of service has a nonforfeitable right to 100 percent of the employee's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions.

(B) A plan satisfies the requirements of this subparagraph if an employee has a nonforfeitable right to a percentage of the employee's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions determined under the following table:


(3)(A) A right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the plan provides that it is not payable if the participant dies (except in the case of a survivor annuity which is payable as provided in section 1055 of this title).

(B) A right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the plan provides that the payment of benefits is suspended for such period as the employee is employed, subsequent to the commencement of payment of such benefits—

(i) in the case of a plan other than a multi-employer plan, by an employer who maintains the plan under which such benefits were being paid; and

(ii) in the case of a multiemployer plan, in the same industry, in the same trade or craft, and the same geographic area covered by the plan, as when such benefits commenced.

The Secretary shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this subparagraph, including regulations with respect to the meaning of the term “employed”.

(C) A right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because plan amendments may be given retroactive application as provided in section 1082(c)(8) of this title.

(D)(i) A right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the plan provides that, in the case of a participant who does not have a nonforfeitable right to at least 50 percent of his accrued benefit derived from employer contributions, such accrued benefit may be forfeited on account of the withdrawal by the participant of any amount attributable to the benefit derived from mandatory contributions (as defined in the last sentence of section 1054(c)(2)(C) of this title) made by such participant.

(ii) Clause (i) shall not apply to a plan unless the plan provides that any accrued benefit forfeited under a plan provision described in such clause shall be restored upon repayment by the participant of the full amount of the withdrawal described in such clause plus, in the case of a defined benefit plan, interest. Such interest shall be computed on such amount at the rate determined for purposes of section 1054(c)(2)(C) of this title (if such subsection applies) on the date of such repayment (computed annually from the date of such withdrawal). The plan provision required under this clause may provide that such repayment must be made (I) in the case of a withdrawal on account of separation from service, before the earlier of 5 years after the first date on which the participant is subsequently re-employed by the employer, or the close of the first period of 5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service commencing after the withdrawal; or (II) in the case of any other withdrawal, 5 years after the date of the withdrawal.

(iii) In the case of accrued benefits derived from employer contributions which accrued before September 2, 1974, a right to such accrued benefit derived from employer contributions shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the plan provides that an amount of such accrued benefit may be forfeited on account of the withdrawal by the participant of an amount attributable to the benefit derived from mandatory contributions, made by such participant before September 2, 1974, if such amount forfeited is proportional to such amount withdrawn. This clause shall not apply to any plan to which any mandatory contribution is made after September 2, 1974. The Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this clause.

(iv) For purposes of this subparagraph, in the case of any class-year plan, a withdrawal of employee contributions shall be treated as a withdrawal of such contributions on a plan year by plan year basis in succeeding order of time.

(v) Cross reference.—

**For nonforfeitability where the employee has a nonforfeitable right to at least 50 percent of his accrued benefit, see section 1056(c) of this title.**

(E)(i) A right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions under a multiemployer plan shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the plan provides that benefits accrued as a result of service with the participant's employer before the employer had an obligation to contribute under the plan may not be payable if the employer ceases contributions to the multiemployer plan.

(ii) A participant's right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions under a multiemployer plan shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because—

(I) the plan is amended to reduce benefits under section 1425 or 1441 of this title, or

(II) benefit payments under the plan may be suspended under section 1426 or 1441 of this title.

(F) A matching contribution (within the meaning of section 401(m) of title 26) shall not be treated as forfeitable merely because such contribution is forfeitable if the contribution to which the matching contribution relates is treated as an excess contribution under section 401(k)(8)(B) of title 26, an excess deferral under section 402(g)(2)(A) of title 26, or an excess aggregate contribution under section 401(m)(6)(B) of title 26.

(1) In computing the period of service under the plan for purposes of determining the nonforfeitable percentage under subsection (a)(2) of this section, all of an employee's years of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan shall be taken into account, except that the following may be disregarded:

(A) years of service before age 18,1

(B) years of service during a period for which the employee declined to contribute to a plan requiring employee contributions,1

(C) years of service with an employer during any period for which the employer did not maintain the plan or a predecessor plan, defined by the Secretary of the Treasury;

(D) service not required to be taken into account under paragraph (3);

(E) years of service before January 1, 1971, unless the employee has had at least 3 years of service after December 31, 1970;

(F) years of service before this part first applies to the plan if such service would have been disregarded under the rules of the plan with regard to breaks in service, as in effect on the applicable date; and

(G) in the case of a multiemployer plan, years of service—

(i) with an employer after—

(I) a complete withdrawal of such employer from the plan (within the meaning of section 1383 of this title), or

(II) to the extent permitted by regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, a partial withdrawal described in section 1385(b)(2)(A)(i) of this title in connection with the decertification of the collective bargaining representative; and

(ii) with any employer under the plan after the termination date of the plan under section 1348 of this title.

(2)(A) For purposes of this section, except as provided in subparagraph (C), the term “year of service” means a calendar year, plan year, or other 12-consecutive month period designated by the plan (and not prohibited under regulations prescribed by the Secretary) during which the participant has completed 1,000 hours of service.

(B) For purposes of this section, the term “hour of service” has the meaning provided by section 1052(a)(3)(C) of this title.

(C) In the case of any seasonal industry where the customary period of employment is less than 1,000 hours during a calendar year, the term “year of service” shall be such period as determined under regulations of the Secretary.

(D) For purposes of this section, in the case of any maritime industry, 125 days of service shall be treated as 1,000 hours of service. The Secretary may prescribe regulations to carry out the purposes of this subparagraph.

(3)(A) For purposes of this paragraph, the term “1-year break in service” means a calendar year, plan year, or other 12-consecutive-month period designated by the plan (and not prohibited under regulations prescribed by the Secretary) during which the participant has not completed more than 500 hours of service.

(B) For purposes of paragraph (1), in the case of any employee who has any 1-year break in service, years of service before such break shall not be required to be taken into account until he has completed a year of service after his return.

(C) For purposes of paragraph (1), in the case of any participant in an individual account plan or an insured defined benefit plan which satisfies the requirements of subsection 1054(b)(1)(F) of this title who has 5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service, years of service after such 5-year period shall not be required to be taken into account for purposes of determining the nonforfeitable percentage of his accrued benefit derived from employer contributions which accrued before such 5-year period.

(D)(i) For purposes of paragraph (1), in the case of a nonvested participant, years of service with the employer or employers maintaining the plan before any period of consecutive 1-year breaks in service shall not be required to be taken into account if the number of consecutive 1-year breaks in service within such period equals or exceeds the greater of—

(I) 5, or

(II) the aggregate number of years of service before such period.

(ii) If any years of service are not required to be taken into account by reason of a period of breaks in service to which clause (i) applies, such years of service shall not be taken into account in applying clause (i) to a subsequent period of breaks in service.

(iii) For purposes of clause (i), the term “nonvested participant” means a participant who does not have any nonforfeitable right under the plan to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions.

(E)(i) In the case of each individual who is absent from work for any period—

(I) by reason of the pregnancy of the individual,

(II) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual,

(III) by reason of the placement of a child with the individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such individual, or

(IV) for purposes of caring for such child for a period beginning immediately following such birth or placement,

the plan shall treat as hours of service, solely for purposes of determining under this paragraph whether a 1-year break in service has occurred, the hours described in clause (ii).

(ii) The hours described in this clause are—

(I) the hours of service which otherwise would normally have been credited to such individual but for such absence, or

(II) in any case in which the plan is unable to determine the hours described in subclause (I), 8 hours of service per day of absence,

except that the total number of hours treated as hours of service under this clause by reason of such pregnancy or placement shall not exceed 501 hours.

(iii) The hours described in clause (ii) shall be treated as hours of service as provided in this subparagraph—

(I) only in the year in which the absence from work begins, if a participant would be prevented from incurring a 1-year break in service in such year solely because the period of absence is treated as hours of service as provided in clause (i); or

(II) in any other case, in the immediately following year.

(iv) For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “year” means the period used in computations pursuant to paragraph (2).

(v) A plan may provide that no credit will be given pursuant to this subparagraph unless the individual furnishes to the plan administrator such timely information as the plan may reasonably require to establish—

(I) that the absence from work is for reasons referred to in clause (i), and

(II) the number of days for which there was such an absence.

(4) Cross references.—

**(A) For definitions of “accrued benefit” and “normal retirement age”, see sections 1002(23) and (24) of this title;**

**(B) For effect of certain cash out distributions, see section 1054(d)(1) of this title.**

(1)(A) A plan amendment changing any vesting schedule under this plan shall be treated as not satisfying the requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section if the nonforfeitable percentage of the accrued benefit derived from employer contributions (determined as of the later of the date such amendment is adopted, or the date such amendment becomes effective) of any employee who is a participant in the plan is less than such nonforfeitable percentage computed under the plan without regard to such amendment.

(B) A plan amendment changing any vesting schedule under the plan shall be treated as not satisfying the requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section unless each participant having not less than 3 years of service is permitted to elect, within a reasonable period after adoption of such amendment, to have his nonforfeitable percentage computed under the plan without regard to such amendment.

(2) Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to benefits which may not be provided for designated employees in the event of early termination of the plan under provisions of the plan adopted pursuant to regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury to preclude the discrimination prohibited by section 401(a)(4) of title 26.

A pension plan may allow for nonforfeitable benefits after a lesser period and in greater amounts than are required by this part.

(1) If the present value of any nonforfeitable benefit with respect to a participant in a plan exceeds $5,000, the plan shall provide that such benefit may not be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the present value shall be calculated in accordance with section 1055(g)(3) of this title.

(3) This subsection shall not apply to any distribution of dividends to which section 404(k) of title 26 applies.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §203, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 854; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §303, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1292; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §§102(b), (c), (d)(2), (e)(2), 105(a), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1426–1428, 1436; Pub. L. 99–514, title XI, §§1113(e)(1), (2), (4)(A), 1139(c)(1), title XVIII, §1898(a)(1)(B), (4)(B)(i), (d)(1)(B), (2)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2447, 2448, 2487, 2942, 2944, 2955; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7861(a)(1), (5)(B), (6)(B), 7862(d)(4), (5), (10), 7891(a)(1), (b)(1), (2), 7894(c)(3), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2430, 2434, 2445, 2449; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §767(c)(1), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5039; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1442(b), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1808; Pub. L. 105–34, title X, §1071(b)(1), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 948.)

1997—Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 105–34 substituted “$5,000” for “$3,500”.

1996—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 104–188, §1442(b)(1), substituted “subparagraph (A) or (B)” for “subparagraph (A), (B), or (C)” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(2)(C). Pub. L. 104–188, §1442(b)(2), struck out subpar. (C) which read as follows: “A plan satisfies the requirements of this subparagraph if—

“(i) the plan is a multiemployer plan (within the meaning of section 1002(37)), and

“(ii) under the plan—

“(I) an employee who is covered pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement described in section 1002(37)(A)(ii) of this title and who has completed at least 10 years of service has a nonforfeitable right to 100 percent of the employee's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions, and

“(II) the requirements of subparagraph (A) or (B) are met with respect to employees not described in subclause (I).”

1994—Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 103–465 amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows:

“(2)(A) For purposes of paragraph (1), the present value shall be calculated—

“(i) by using an interest rate no greater than the applicable interest rate if the vested accrued benefit (using such rate) is not in excess of $25,000, and

“(ii) by using an interest rate no greater than 120 percent of the applicable interest rate if the vested accrued benefit exceeds $25,000 (as determined under clause (i)).

In no event shall the present value determined under subclause (II) be less than $25,000.

“(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term ‘applicable interest rate’ means the interest rate which would be used (as of the date of the distribution) by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for purposes of determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination.”

1989—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(1)(A), substituted “satisfies the requirements” for “satisfies the following requirements” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (a)(2)(C)(ii)(I). Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(1)(B), substituted “section 1002(37)(A)(ii) of this title” for “section 414(f)(1)(B)”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(D)(v). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(3), substituted “nonforfeitability” for “nonforfeitably”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(F). Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(5)(B), added subpar. (F).

Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7861(a)(6)(B), amended subpar. (A) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (A) read as follows: “years of service before age 18, except that in case of a plan which does not satisfy subparagraph (A) or (B) of subsection (a)(2) of this section, the plan may not disregard any such year of service during which the employee was a participant;”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(10), which directed amendment of par. (1) by substituting “nonforfeitable benefit” for “vested accrued benefit”, could not be executed because the language “vested accrued benefit” did not appear after the amendment by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(5), see below.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(5), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “If the present value of any vested accrued benefit exceeds $3,500, a pension plan shall provide that such benefit may not be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.”

Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(4), made technical correction to Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(d)(1)(B), see 1986 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(b)(1), (2), realigned margins of subpars. (A) and (B) and struck out subpar. (B) heading “Applicable interest rate”.

Subsec. (e)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1986—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–514, §1113(e)(1), amended par. (2) generally, substituting provisions covering 5-year vesting, 3- to 7-year vesting, and multiemployer plans, for former provisions which covered 10-year vesting, 5- to 15-year vesting, and the “rule of 45” under which a plan satisfied the requirements of this paragraph if an employee who had completed at least 5 years of service and with respect to whom the sum of his age and years of service equalled or exceeded 45 had a right to a percentage of his accrued benefits derived from employer contributions.

Subsec. (a)(3)(D)(ii). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(a)(4)(B)(i), inserted last sentence and struck out former last sentence which read as follows: “In the case of a defined contribution plan the plan provision required under this clause may provide that such repayment must be made before the participant has any 1-year break in service commencing after the withdrawal.”

Subsec. (c)(1)(B). Pub. L. 99–514, §1113(e)(4)(A), substituted “3 years” for “5 years”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 99–514, §1113(e)(2), struck out par. (3) which provided for class year vesting.

Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(a)(1)(B), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “The requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be deemed to be satisfied in the case of a class year plan if such plan provides that 100 percent of each employee's right to or derived from the contributions of the employer on his behalf with respect to any plan year are nonforfeitable not later than the end of the 5th year following the plan year for which such contributions were made. For purposes of this part, the term ‘class year plan’ means a profit sharing, stock bonus, or money purchase plan which provides for the separate nonforfeitability of employees’ rights to or derived from the contributions for each plan year.”

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(d)(1)(B), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(4), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “If the present value of any accrued benefit exceeds $3,500, such benefit shall not be treated as nonforfeitable if the plan provides that the present value of such benefit could be immediately distributed without the consent of the participant.”

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 99–514, §1139(c)(1), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “For purposes of paragraph (1), the present value shall be calculated by using an interest rate not greater than the interest rate which would be used (as of the date of the distribution) by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for purposes of determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination.”

Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(d)(2)(B), added par. (3).

1984—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(b), substituted “18” for “22”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(C). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(c), substituted “5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service” for “any 1-year break in service” and substituted “such 5-year period” for “such break” in two places.

Subsec. (b)(3)(D). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(d)(2), amended subpar. (D) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (D) read as follows: “For purposes of paragraph (1), in the case of a participant who, under the plan, does not have any nonforfeitable right to an accrued benefit derived from employer contributions, years of service before any 1-year break in service shall not be required to be taken into account if the number of consecutive 1-year breaks in service equals or exceeds the aggregate number of such years of service prior to such break. Such aggregate number of years of service before such break shall be deemed not to include any years of service not required to be taken into account under this subparagraph by reason of any prior break in service.”

Subsec. (b)(3)(E). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(e)(2), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 98–397, §105(a), added subsec. (e).

1980—Subsec. (a)(3)(E). Pub. L. 96–364, §303(1), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (b)(1)(G). Pub. L. 96–364, §303(2)–(4), added subpar. (G).

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to plan years beginning after Aug. 5, 1997, see section 1071(c) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 applicable to plan years beginning on or after the earlier of (1) the later of (A) Jan. 1, 1997, or (B) the date on which the last of the collective bargaining agreements pursuant to which the plan is maintained terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof after Aug. 20, 1996), or (2) Jan. 1, 1999, but such amendment not applicable to any individual who does not have more than 1 hour of service under the plan on or after the 1st day of the 1st plan year to which such amendment applies, see section 1442(c) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan years and limitation years beginning after Dec. 31, 1994, except that employer may elect to treat such amendment as effective on or after Dec. 8, 1994, with provisions relating to reduction of accrued benefits, exception, and timing of plan amendment, see section 767(d) of Pub. L. 103–465, as amended, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by sections 7861(a)(1), (5)(B), (6)(B) and 7862(d)(4), (5), (10) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1), (b)(1), (2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(c)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 1113(e)(1), (2), (4)(A) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, with special rule for plans maintained pursuant to collective bargaining agreements ratified before Mar. 1, 1986, and not applicable to employees who do not have 1 hour of service in any plan year to which the amendment applies, see section 1113(f) of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 1139(c)(1) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to distributions in plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except that such amendments shall not apply to any distributions in plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, and before Jan. 1, 1987, if such distributions were made in accordance with the requirements of the regulations issued under the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, with additional provisions relating to reductions in accrued benefits, see section 1139(d) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(a)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to contributions made for plan years beginning after Oct. 22, 1986, except that in the case of a plan described in section 302(b) of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title, such amendments shall not apply to any plan year to which amendments made by Pub. L. 98–397 do not apply by reason of such section 302(b), see section 1898(a)(1)(C) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(a)(4)(B)(i), (d)(1)(B), (2)(B), of Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if included in the provision of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, to which such amendment relates, except as otherwise provided, see section 1898(j) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see sections 302 and 303 of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate to issue before Feb. 1, 1988, final regulations to carry out amendments made by section 1113 of Pub. L. 99–514, see section 1141 of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle D [§§1401–1465] of title I of Pub. L. 104–188 require an amendment to any plan or annuity contract, such amendment shall not be required to be made before the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 1465 of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 623, 1002, 1052, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1222, 1344, 1425, 1426, 1441 of this title; title 26 section 6057.

1 So in original. The comma probably should be a semicolon.

Each pension plan shall satisfy the requirements of subsection (b)(3) of this section, and—

(1) in the case of a defined benefit plan, shall satisfy the requirements of subsection (b)(1) of this section; and

(2) in the case of a defined contribution plan, shall satisfy the requirements of subsection (b)(2) of this section.

(1)(A) A defined benefit plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if the accrued benefit to which each participant is entitled upon his separation from the service is not less than—

(i) 3 percent of the normal retirement benefit to which he would be entitled at the normal retirement age if he commenced participation at the earliest possible entry age under the plan and served continuously until the earlier of age 65 or the normal retirement age specified under the plan, multiplied by

(ii) the number of years (not in excess of 331/3) of his participation in the plan.

In the case of a plan providing retirement benefits based on compensation during any period, the normal retirement benefit to which a participant would be entitled shall be determined as if he continued to earn annually the average rate of compensation which he earned during consecutive years of service, not in excess of 10, for which his compensation was the highest. For purposes of this subparagraph, social security benefits and all other relevant factors used to compute benefits shall be treated as remaining constant as of the current year for all years after such current year.

(B) A defined benefit plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph of a particular plan year if under the plan the accrued benefit payable at the normal retirement age is equal to the normal retirement benefit and the annual rate at which any individual who is or could be a participant can accrue the retirement benefits payable at normal retirement age under the plan for any later plan year is not more than 1331/3 percent of the annual rate at which he can accrue benefits for any plan year beginning on or after such particular plan year and before such later plan year. For purposes of this subparagraph—

(i) any amendment to the plan which is in effect for the current year shall be treated as in effect for all other plan years;

(ii) any change in an accrual rate which does not apply to any individual who is or could be a participant in the current year shall be disregarded;

(iii) the fact that benefits under the plan may be payable to certain employees before normal retirement age shall be disregarded; and

(iv) social security benefits and all other relevant factors used to compute benefits shall be treated as remaining constant as of the current year for all years after the current year.

(C) A defined benefit plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if the accrued benefit to which any participant is entitled upon his separation from the service is not less than a fraction of the annual benefit commencing at normal retirement age to which he would be entitled under the plan as in effect on the date of his separation if he continued to earn annually until normal retirement age the same rate of compensation upon which his normal retirement benefit would be computed under the plan, determined as if he had attained normal retirement age on the date any such determination is made (but taking into account no more than the 10 years of service immediately preceding his separation from service). Such fraction shall be a fraction, not exceeding 1, the numerator of which is the total number of his years of participation in the plan (as of the date of his separation from the service) and the denominator of which is the total number of years he would have participated in the plan if he separated from the service at the normal retirement age. For purposes of this subparagraph, social security benefits and all other relevant factors used to compute benefits shall be treated as remaining constant as of the current year for all years after such current year.

(D) Subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) shall not apply with respect to years of participation before the first plan year to which this section applies but a defined benefit plan satisfies the requirements of this subparagraph with respect to such years of participation only if the accrued benefit of any participant with respect to such years of participation is not less than the greater of—

(i) his accrued benefit determined under the plan, as in effect from time to time prior to September 2, 1974, or

(ii) an accrued benefit which is not less than one-half of the accrued benefit to which such participant would have been entitled if subparagraph (A), (B), or (C) applied with respect to such years of participation.

(E) Notwithstanding subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) of this paragraph, a plan shall not be treated as not satisfying the requirements of this paragraph solely because the accrual of benefits under the plan does not become effective until the employee has two continuous years of service. For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “year of service” has the meaning provided by section 1052(a)(3)(A) of this title.

(F) Notwithstanding subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C), a defined benefit plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if such plan

(i) is funded exclusively by the purchase of insurance contracts, and

(ii) satisfies the requirements of paragraphs (2) and (3) of section 1081(b) of this title (relating to certain insurance contract plans),

but only if an employee's accrued benefit as of any applicable date is not less than the cash surrender value his insurance contracts would have on such applicable date if the requirements of paragraphs (4), (5), and (6) of section 1081(b) of this title were satisfied.

(G) Notwithstanding the preceding subparagraphs, a defined benefit plan shall be treated as not satisfying the requirements of this paragraph if the participant's accrued benefit is reduced on account of any increase in his age or service. The preceding sentence shall not apply to benefits under the plan commencing before benefits payable under title II of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.] which benefits under the plan—

(i) do not exceed social security benefits, and

(ii) terminate when such social security benefits commence.

(H)(i) Notwithstanding the preceding subparagraphs, a defined benefit plan shall be treated as not satisfying the requirements of this paragraph if, under the plan, an employee's benefit accrual is ceased, or the rate of an employee's benefit accrual is reduced, because of the attainment of any age.

(ii) A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of this subparagraph solely because the plan imposes (without regard to age) a limitation on the amount of benefits that the plan provides or a limitation on the number of years of service or years of participation which are taken into account for purposes of determining benefit accrual under the plan.

(iii) In the case of any employee who, as of the end of any plan year under a defined benefit plan, has attained normal retirement age under such plan—

(I) if distribution of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee has commenced as of the end of such plan year, then any requirement of this subparagraph for continued accrual of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee during such plan year shall be treated as satisfied to the extent of the actuarial equivalent of in-service distribution of benefits, and

(II) if distribution of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee has not commenced as of the end of such year in accordance with section 1056(a)(3) of this title, and the payment of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee is not suspended during such plan year pursuant to section 1053(a)(3)(B) of this title, then any requirement of this subparagraph for continued accrual of benefits under such plan with respect to such employee during such plan year shall be treated as satisfied to the extent of any adjustment in the benefit payable under the plan during such plan year attributable to the delay in the distribution of benefits after the attainment of normal retirement age.

The preceding provisions of this clause shall apply in accordance with regulations of the Secretary of the Treasury. Such regulations may provide for the application of the preceding provisions of this clause, in the case of any such employee, with respect to any period of time within a plan year.

(iv) Clause (i) shall not apply with respect to any employee who is a highly compensated employee (within the meaning of section 414(q) of title 26) to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury for purposes of precluding discrimination in favor of highly compensated employees within the meaning of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26.

(v) A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of clause (i) solely because the subsidized portion of any early retirement benefit is disregarded in determining benefit accruals.

(vi) Any regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to clause (v) of section 411(b)(1)(H) of title 26 shall apply with respect to the requirements of this subparagraph in the same manner and to the same extent as such regulations apply with respect to the requirements of such section 411(b)(1)(H).

(2)(A) A defined contribution plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if, under the plan, allocations to the employee's account are not ceased, and the rate at which amounts are allocated to the employee's account is not reduced, because of the attainment of any age.

(B) A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of subparagraph (A) solely because the subsidized portion of any early retirement benefit is disregarded in determining benefit accruals.

(C) Any regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to subparagraphs (B) and (C) of section 411(b)(2) of title 26 shall apply with respect to the requirements of this paragraph in the same manner and to the same extent as such regulations apply with respect to the requirements of such section 411(b)(2).

(3) A plan satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if—

(A) in the case of a defined benefit plan, the plan requires separate accounting for the portion of each employee's accrued benefit derived from any voluntary employee contributions permitted under the plan; and

(B) in the case of any plan which is not a defined benefit plan, the plan requires separate accounting for each employee's accrued benefit.

(4)(A) For purposes of determining an employee's accrued benefit, the term “year of participation” means a period of service (beginning at the earliest date on which the employee is a participant in the plan and which is included in a period of service required to be taken into account under section 1052(b) of this title, determined without regard to section 1052(b)(5) of this title) as determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary which provide for the calculation of such period on any reasonable and consistent basis.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph, except as provided in subparagraph (C), in the case of any employee whose customary employment is less than full time, the calculation of such employee's service on any basis which provides less than a ratable portion of the accrued benefit to which he would be entitled under the plan if his customary employment were full time shall not be treated as made on a reasonable and consistent basis.

(C) For purposes of this paragraph, in the case of any employee whose service is less than 1,000 hours during any calendar year, plan year or other 12-consecutive-month period designated by the plan (and not prohibited under regulations prescribed by the Secretary) the calculation of his period of service shall not be treated as not made on a reasonable and consistent basis merely because such service is not taken into account.

(D) In the case of any seasonal industry where the customary period of employment is less than 1,000 hours during a calendar year, the term “year of participation” shall be such period as determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(E) For purposes of this subsection in the case of any maritime industry, 125 days of service shall be treated as a year of participation. The Secretary may prescribe regulations to carry out the purposes of this subparagraph.

(1) For purposes of this section and section 1053 of this title an employee's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions as of any applicable date is the excess (if any) of the accrued benefit for such employee as of such applicable date over the accrued benefit derived from contributions made by such employee as of such date.

(2)(A) In the case of a plan other than a defined benefit plan, the accrued benefit derived from contributions made by an employee as of any applicable date is—

(i) except as provided in clause (ii), the balance of the employee's separate account consisting only of his contributions and the income, expenses, gains, and losses attributable thereto, or

(ii) if a separate account is not maintained with respect to an employee's contributions under such a plan, the amount which bears the same ratio to his total accrued benefit as the total amount of the employee's contributions (less withdrawals) bears to the sum of such contributions and the contributions made on his behalf by the employer (less withdrawals).

(B)

(C) For purposes of this subsection, the term “accumulated contributions” means the total of—

(i) all mandatory contributions made by the employee,

(ii) interest (if any) under the plan to the end of the last plan year to which section 1053(a)(2) of this title does not apply (by reason of the applicable effective date), and

(iii) interest on the sum of the amounts determined under clauses (i) and (ii) compounded annually—

(I) at the rate of 120 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of a plan year for the period beginning with the 1st plan year to which subsection (a)(2) of this section applies by reason of the applicable effective date) and ending with the date on which the determination is being made, and

(II) at the interest rate which would be used under the plan under section 1055(g)(3) of this title (as of the determination date) for the period beginning with the determination date and ending on the date on which the employee attains normal retirement age.

For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “mandatory contributions” means amounts contributed to the plan by the employee which are required as a condition of employment, as a condition of participation in such plans, or as a condition of obtaining benefits under the plan attributable to employer contributions.

(D) The Secretary of the Treasury is authorized to adjust by regulation the conversion factor described in subparagraph (B) from time to time as he may deem necessary. No such adjustment shall be effective for a plan year beginning before the expiration of 1 year after such adjustment is determined and published.

(3) For purposes of this section, in the case of any defined benefit plan, if an employee's accrued benefit is to be determined as an amount other than an annual benefit commencing at normal retirement age, or if the accrued benefit derived from contributions made by an employee is to be determined with respect to a benefit other than an annual benefit in the form of a single life annuity (without ancillary benefits) commencing at normal retirement age, the employee's accrued benefit, or the accrued benefits derived from contributions made by an employee, as the case may be, shall be the actuarial equivalent of such benefit or amount determined under paragraph (1) or (2).

(4) In the case of a defined benefit plan which permits voluntary employee contributions, the portion of an employee's accrued benefit derived from such contributions shall be treated as an accrued benefit derived from employee contributions under a plan other than a defined benefit plan.

Notwithstanding section 1053(b)(1) of this title, for purposes of determining the employee's accrued benefit under the plan, the plan may disregard service performed by the employee with respect to which he has received—

(1) a distribution of the present value of his entire nonforfeitable benefit if such distribution was in an amount (not more than the dollar limit under section 1053(e)(1) of this title) permitted under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, or

(2) a distribution of the present value of his nonforfeitable benefit attributable to such service which he elected to receive.

Paragraph (1) shall apply only if such distribution was made on termination of the employee's participation in the plan. Paragraph (2) shall apply only if such distribution was made on termination of the employee's participation in the plan or under such other circumstances as may be provided under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

For purposes of determining the employee's accrued benefit, the plan shall not disregard service as provided in subsection (d) of this section unless the plan provides an opportunity for the participant to repay the full amount of a distribution described in subsection (d) of this section with, in the case of a defined benefit plan, interest at the rate determined for purposes of subsection (c)(2)(C) of this section and provides that upon such repayment the employee's accrued benefit shall be recomputed by taking into account service so disregarded. This subsection shall apply only in the case of a participant who—

(1) received such a distribution in any plan year to which this section applies which distribution was less than the present value of his accrued benefit,

(2) resumes employment covered under the plan, and

(3) repays the full amount of such distribution with, in the case of a defined benefit plan, interest at the rate determined for purposes of subsection (c)(2)(C) of this section.

The plan provision required under this subsection may provide that such repayment must be made (A) in the case of a withdrawal on account of separation from service, before the earlier of 5 years after the first date on which the participant is subsequently re-employed by the employer, or the close of the first period of 5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service commencing after the withdrawal; or (B) in the case of any other withdrawal, 5 years after the date of the withdrawal.

For the purposes of this part, an employer shall be treated as maintaining a plan if any employee of such employer accrues benefits under such plan by reason of service with such employer.

(1) The accrued benefit of a participant under a plan may not be decreased by an amendment of the plan, other than an amendment described in section 1082(c)(8) or 1441 of this title.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), a plan amendment which has the effect of—

(A) eliminating or reducing an early retirement benefit or a retirement-type subsidy (as defined in regulations), or

(B) eliminating an optional form of benefit,

with respect to benefits attributable to service before the amendment shall be treated as reducing accrued benefits. In the case of a retirement-type subsidy, the preceding sentence shall apply only with respect to a participant who satisfies (either before or after the amendment) the preamendment conditions for the subsidy. The Secretary of the Treasury may by regulations provide that this subparagraph shall not apply to a plan amendment described in subparagraph (B) (other than a plan amendment having an effect described in subparagraph (A)).

(3) For purposes of this subsection, any—

(A) tax credit employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 409(a) of title 26, or

(B) employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of title 26),

shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of this subsection merely because it modifies distribution options in a nondiscriminatory manner.

(1) A plan described in paragraph (2) may not be amended so as to provide for a significant reduction in the rate of future benefit accrual, unless, after adoption of the plan amendment and not less than 15 days before the effective date of the plan amendment, the plan administrator provides a written notice, setting forth the plan amendment and its effective date, to—

(A) each participant in the plan,

(B) each beneficiary who is an alternate payee (within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(K) of this title) under an applicable qualified domestic relations order (within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(B)(i) of this title), and

(C) each employee organization representing participants in the plan,

except that such notice shall instead be provided to a person designated, in writing, to receive such notice on behalf of any person referred to in subparagraph (A), (B), or (C).

(2) A plan is described in this paragraph if such plan is—

(A) a defined benefit plan, or

(B) an individual account plan which is subject to the funding standards of section 1082 of this title.

(1) In the case of a plan described in paragraph (3) which is maintained by an employer that is a debtor in a case under title 11 or similar Federal or State law, no amendment of the plan which increases the liabilities of the plan by reason of—

(A) any increase in benefits,

(B) any change in the accrual of benefits, or

(C) any change in the rate at which benefits become nonforfeitable under the plan,

with respect to employees of the debtor, shall be effective prior to the effective date of such employer's plan of reorganization.

(2) Paragraph (1) shall not apply to any plan amendment that—

(A) the Secretary of the Treasury determines to be reasonable and that provides for only de minimis increases in the liabilities of the plan with respect to employees of the debtor,

(B) only repeals an amendment described in section 1082(c)(8) of this title,

(C) is required as a condition of qualification under part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26, or

(D) was adopted prior to, or pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement entered into prior to, the date on which the employer became a debtor in a case under title 11 or similar Federal or State law.

(3) This subsection shall apply only to plans (other than multiemployer plans) covered under section 1321 of this title for which the funded current liability percentage (within the meaning of section 1082(d)(8) of this title) is less than 100 percent after taking into account the effect of the amendment.

(4) For purposes of this subsection, the term “employer” has the meaning set forth in section 1082(c)(11)(A) of this title, without regard to section 1082(c)(11)(B) of this title.

**For special rules relating to plan provisions adopted to preclude discrimination, see section 1053(c)(2) of this title.**

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §204, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 858; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §§102(e)(3), (f), 105(b), title III, §301(a)(2), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1429, 1436, 1451; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11006(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 243; Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9202(a), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1975; Pub. L. 99–514, title XI, §1113(e)(4)(B), title XVIII, §§1879(u)(1), 1898(a)(4)(B)(ii), (f)(1)(B), (2), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2448, 2913, 2944, 2956; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9346(a), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–374; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7862(b)(1)(A), (2), 7871(a)(1), (3), 7881(m)(2)(A)–(C), 7891(a)(1), 7894(c)(4)–(6), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2432, 2434, 2435, 2444, 2445, 2449; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §766(a), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5036; Pub. L. 105–34, title X, §1071(b)(2), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 948.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1)(G), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 105–34 substituted “the dollar limit under section 1053(e)(1) of this title” for “$3,500”.

1994—Subsecs. (i), (j). Pub. L. 103–465 added subsec. (i) and redesignated former subsec. (i) as (j).

1989—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(4), substituted “subparagraph” for “suparagraph” in last sentence.

Subsec. (b)(1)(E). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(5), substituted “term ‘year of service’ ” for “term ‘years of service’ ”.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(a)(1), redesignated subpar. (C) as (B) and struck out former subpar. (B) which read as follows: “Subparagraph (A) shall not apply with respect to any employee who is a highly compensated employee (within the meaning of section 414(q) of title 26) to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury for purposes of precluding discrimination in favor of highly compensated employees within the meaning of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26.”

Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(a)(3), substituted “subparagraphs (B) and (C)” for “subparagraphs (C) and (D)”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(a)(1), redesignated subpar. (D) as (C). Former subpar. (C) redesignated (B).

Subsec. (b)(2)(D). Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(a)(1), redesignated subpar. (D) as (C).

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(m)(2)(B), inserted heading and amended text generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows:

“(i) In the case of a defined benefit plan providing an annual benefit in the form of a single life annuity (without ancillary benefits) commencing at normal retirement age, the accrued benefit derived from contributions made by an employee as of any applicable date is the annual benefit equal to the employee's accumulated contributions multiplied by the appropriate conversion factor.

“(ii) For purposes of clause (i), the term ‘appropriate conversion factor’ means the factor necessary to convert an amount equal to the accumulated contributions to a single life annuity (without ancillary benefits) commencing at normal retirement age and shall be 10 percent for a normal retirement age of 65 years. For other normal retirement ages the conversion factor shall be determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(C)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(m)(2)(A), amended cl. (iii) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (iii) read as follows: “interest on the sum of the amounts determined under clauses (i) and (ii) compounded annually at the rate of 120 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of a plan year) from the beginning of the first plan year to which section 1053(a)(2) of this title applies (by reason of the applicable effective date) to the date upon which the employee would attain normal retirement age.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(E). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(m)(2)(C), struck out subpar. (E) which read as follows: “The accrued benefit derived from employee contributions shall not exceed the greater of—

“(i) the employee's accrued benefit under the plan, or

“(ii) the accrued benefit derived from employee contributions determined as though the amounts calculated under clauses (ii) and (iii) of subparagraph (C) were zero.”

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(6), removed the indentation of the term “Paragraph” where first appearing in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (g)(3)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(1)(A), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 99–514, §1879(u)(1), see 1986 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (h)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(2), adjusted left-hand margin of introductory provisions to full measure.

1987—Subsec. (c)(2)(C)(iii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9346(a)(1), substituted “120 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of a plan year)” for “5 percent per annum”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(D). Pub. L. 100–203, §9346(a)(2), struck out “, the rate of interest described in clause (iii) of subparagraph (C), or both,” before “from time to time” in first sentence and struck out second sentence which read as follows: “The rate of interest shall bear the relationship to 5 percent which the Secretary of the Treasury determines to be comparable to the relationship which the long-term money rates and investment yields for the last period of 10 calendar years ending at least 12 months before the beginning of the plan year bear to the long-term money rates and investment yields for the 10-calendar year period 1964 through 1973.”

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–509, §9202(a)(1), amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “Each pension plan shall satisfy the requirements of subsection (b)(2) of this section, and in the case of a defined benefit plan shall also satisfy the requirements of subsection (b)(1) of this section.”

Subsec. (b)(1)(H). Pub. L. 99–509, §9202(a)(2), added subpar. (H).

Subsec. (b)(2) to (4). Pub. L. 99–509, §9202(a)(3), added par. (2) and redesignated former pars. (2) and (3) as (3) and (4), respectively.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(a)(4)(B)(ii), inserted last sentence and struck out former last sentence which read as follows: “In the case of a defined contribution plan, the plan provision required under this subsection may provide that such repayment must be made before the participant has 5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service commencing after such withdrawal”.

Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(f)(2), inserted reference to section 1441.

Subsec. (g)(3). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(f)(1)(B), added par. (3).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 99–514, §1879(u)(1), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(1)(A), designated existing provisions as par. (1), substituted “plan described in paragraph (2)” for “single-employer plan”, redesignated former pars. (1) to (3) as subpars. (A) to (C), respectively, substituted “subparagraph (A), (B), or (C)” for “paragraph (1), (2), or (3)” in concluding provisions, and added par. (2).

Pub. L. 99–272 added subsec. (h). Former subsec. (h) redesignated (i).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 99–514, §1113(e)(4)(B), amended subsec. (i) generally, striking out reference to class year plans under section 1053(c)(3) of this title.

Pub. L. 99–272 redesignated former subsec. (h) as (i).

1984—Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(e)(3), inserted “, determined without regard to section 1052(b)(5) of this title” after “section 1052(b) of this title”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 98–397, §105(b), substituted “$3,500” for “$1,750”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 98–397, §102(f), substituted “5 consecutive 1-year breaks in service” for “any 1-year break in service”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 98–397, §301(a)(2), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to plan years beginning after Aug. 5, 1997, see section 1071(c) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan amendments adopted on or after Dec. 8, 1994, see section 766(d) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7862(b)(1)(A), (2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7871(a)(1), (3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the amendments made by section 9202 of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–509, see section 7871(a)(4) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 7881(m)(2)(A)–(C) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(c)(4)–(6) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9346(c) of Pub. L. 100–203 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) during the period after such amendments made by this section take effect and before such first plan year, the plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of such amendments or in accordance with an amendment prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury and adopted by the plan, and

“(B) such plan amendment applies retroactively to the period after such amendments take effect and such first plan year.

A plan shall not be treated as failing to provide definitely determinable benefits or contributions, or to be operated in accordance with the provisions of the plan, merely because it operates in accordance with this subsection.”

Amendment by section 1113(e)(4)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, with special rule for plans maintained pursuant to collective bargaining agreements ratified before Mar. 1, 1986, and not applicable to employees who do not have 1 hour of service in any plan year to which the amendment applies, see section 1113(f) of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 1879(u)(5), formerly section 1879(u)(4), of Pub. L. 99–514, as redesignated and amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7862(b)(1)(A), (B), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2432, provided that:

“(A)

“(B)

Amendment by section 1898(a)(4)(B)(ii), (f)(1)(B), (2) of Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if included in the provision of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, to which such amendment relates, except as otherwise provided, see section 1898(j) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 applicable only with respect to plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1988, and only to employees who have 1 hour of service in any plan year to which amendment applies, with special rule for collectively bargained plans, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendments note under section 623 of this title.

Section 11006(b) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “The amendments made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall apply with respect to plan amendments adopted on or after January 1, 1986, except that, in the case of plan amendments adopted on or after January 1, 1986, and on or before the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986], the requirements of section 204(h) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [subsec. (h) of this section] (as added by this section) shall be treated as met if the written notice required under such section 204(h) is provided before 60 days after the date of the enactment of this Act.”

Amendment by sections 102(e)(3), (f), and 105(b) of Pub. L. 98–397 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see sections 302 and 303 of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Amendment by section 301(a)(2) of Pub. L. 98–397 not applicable to the termination of a certain defined benefit plan, see section 303(f) of Pub. L. 98–397.

Secretary of Labor, Secretary of the Treasury, and Equal Employment Opportunity Commission each to issue before Feb. 1, 1988, final regulations to carry out amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Section 7881(m)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that:“If—

“(A) during the period beginning December 22, 1987, and ending June 21, 1988, a plan was amended to reflect the amendments made by section 9346 of the Pension Protection Act [Pub. L. 100–203, amending this section and section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code], and

“(B) such plan is amended to reflect the amendments made by this subsection [amending this section, section 1002 of this title, and section 411 of Title 26],

any plan amendment described in subparagraph (B) shall not be treated as reducing accrued benefits for purposes of section 411(d)(6) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [section 411(d)(6) of Title 26] or section 204(g) of ERISA [subsec. (g) of this section].”

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by Pub. L. 99–509 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 9204 of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as an Effective and Termination Dates of 1986 Amendment note under section 623 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1053, 1056, 1057, 1060, 1061, 1322, 1425, 1426, 1441 of this title.

Each pension plan to which this section applies shall provide that—

(1) in the case of a vested participant who does not die before the annuity starting date, the accrued benefit payable to such participant shall be provided in the form of a qualified joint and survivor annuity, and

(2) in the case of a vested participant who dies before the annuity starting date and who has a surviving spouse, a qualified preretirement survivor annuity shall be provided to the surviving spouse of such participant.

(1) This section shall apply to—

(A) any defined benefit plan,

(B) any individual account plan which is subject to the funding standards of section 1082 of this title, and

(C) any participant under any other individual account plan unless—

(i) such plan provides that the participant's nonforfeitable accrued benefit (reduced by any security interest held by the plan by reason of a loan outstanding to such participant) is payable in full, on the death of the participant, to the participant's surviving spouse (or, if there is no surviving spouse or the surviving spouse consents in the manner required under subsection (c)(2) of this section, to a designated beneficiary),

(ii) such participant does not elect the payment of benefits in the form of a life annuity, and

(iii) with respect to such participant, such plan is not a direct or indirect transferee (in a transfer after December 31, 1984) of a plan which is described in subparagraph (A) or (B) or to which this clause applied with respect to the participant.

Clause (iii) of subparagraph (C) shall apply only with respect to the transferred assets (and income therefrom) if the plan separately accounts for such assets and any income therefrom.

(2)(A) In the case of—

(i) a tax credit employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 409(a) of title 26), or

(ii) an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of title 26),

subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to that portion of the employee's accrued benefit to which the requirements of section 409(h) of title 26 apply.

(B) Subparagraph (A) shall not apply with respect to any participant unless the requirements of clause 1 (i), (ii), and (iii) of paragraph (1)(C) are met with respect to such participant.

(4) 2 This section shall not apply to a plan which the Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate has determined is a plan described in section 404(c) of title 26 (or a continuation thereof) in which participation is substantially limited to individuals who, before January 1, 1976, ceased employment covered by the plan.

(4) 2 A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of paragraph (1)(C) or (2) merely because the plan provides that benefits will not be payable to the surviving spouse of the participant unless the participant and such spouse had been married throughout the 1-year period ending on the earlier of the participant's annuity starting date or the date of the participant's death.

(1) A plan meets the requirements of this section only if—

(A) under the plan, each participant—

(i) may elect at any time during the applicable election period to waive the qualified joint and survivor annuity form of benefit or the qualified preretirement survivor annuity form of benefit (or both), and

(ii) may revoke any such election at any time during the applicable election period, and

(B) the plan meets the requirements of paragraphs (2), (3), and (4).

(2) Each plan shall provide that an election under paragraph (1)(A)(i) shall not take effect unless—

(A)(i) the spouse of the participant consents in writing to such election, (ii) such election designates a beneficiary (or a form of benefits) which may not be changed without spousal consent (or the consent of the spouse expressly permits designations by the participant without any requirement of further consent by the spouse), and (iii) the spouse's consent acknowledges the effect of such election and is witnessed by a plan representative or a notary public, or

(B) it is established to the satisfaction of a plan representative that the consent required under subparagraph (A) may not be obtained because there is no spouse, because the spouse cannot be located, or because of such other circumstances as the Secretary of the Treasury may by regulations prescribe.

Any consent by a spouse (or establishment that the consent of a spouse may not be obtained) under the preceding sentence shall be effective only with respect to such spouse.

(3)(A) Each plan shall provide to each participant, within a reasonable period of time before the annuity starting date (and consistent with such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe) a written explanation of—

(i) the terms and conditions of the qualified joint and survivor annuity,

(ii) the participant's right to make, and the effect of, an election under paragraph (1) to waive the joint and survivor annuity form of benefit,

(iii) the rights of the participant's spouse under paragraph (2), and

(iv) the right to make, and the effect of, a revocation of an election under paragraph (1).

(B)(i) Each plan shall provide to each participant, within the applicable period with respect to such participant (and consistent with such regulations as the Secretary may prescribe), a written explanation with respect to the qualified preretirement survivor annuity comparable to that required under subparagraph (A).

(ii) For purposes of clause (i), the term “applicable period” means, with respect to a participant, whichever of the following periods ends last:

(I) The period beginning with the first day of the plan year in which the participant attains age 32 and ending with the close of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the participant attains age 35.

(II) A reasonable period after the individual becomes a participant.

(III) A reasonable period ending after paragraph (5) ceases to apply to the participant.

(IV) A reasonable period ending after this section applies to the participant.

In the case of a participant who separates from service before attaining age 35, the applicable period shall be a reasonable period after separation.

(4) Each plan shall provide that, if this section applies to a participant when part or all of the participant's accrued benefit is to be used as security for a loan, no portion of the participant's accrued benefit may be used as security for such loan unless—

(A) the spouse of the participant (if any) consents in writing to such use during the 90-day period ending on the date on which the loan is to be so secured, and

(B) requirements comparable to the requirements of paragraph (2) are met with respect to such consent.

(5)(A) The requirements of this subsection shall not apply with respect to the qualified joint and survivor annuity form of benefit or the qualified preretirement survivor annuity form of benefit, as the case may be, if such benefit may not be waived (or another beneficiary selected) and if the plan fully subsidizes the costs of such benefit.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), a plan fully subsidizes the costs of a benefit if under the plan the failure to waive such benefit by a participant would not result in a decrease in any plan benefits with respect to such participant and would not result in increased contributions from such participant.

(6) If a plan fiduciary acts in accordance with part 4 of this subtitle in—

(A) relying on a consent or revocation referred to in paragraph (1)(A), or

(B) making a determination under paragraph (2),

then such consent, revocation, or determination shall be treated as valid for purposes of discharging the plan from liability to the extent of payments made pursuant to such Act.

(7) For purposes of this subsection, the term “applicable election period” means—

(A) in the case of an election to waive the qualified joint and survivor annuity form of benefit, the 90-day period ending on the annuity starting date, or

(B) in the case of an election to waive the qualified preretirement survivor annuity, the period which begins on the first day of the plan year in which the participant attains age 35 and ends on the date of the participant's death.

In the case of a participant who is separated from service, the applicable election period under subparagraph (B) with respect to benefits accrued before the date of such separation from service shall not begin later than such date.

(8) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subsection—

(A)(i) A plan may provide the written explanation described in paragraph (3)(A) after the annuity starting date. In any case to which this subparagraph applies, the applicable election period under paragraph (7) shall not end before the 30th day after the date on which such explanation is provided.

(ii) The Secretary of the Treasury may by regulations limit the application of clause (i), except that such regulations may not limit the period of time by which the annuity starting date precedes the provision of the written explanation other than by providing that the annuity starting date may not be earlier than termination of employment.

(B) A plan may permit a participant to elect (with any applicable spousal consent) to waive any requirement that the written explanation be provided at least 30 days before the annuity starting date (or to waive the 30-day requirement under subparagraph (A)) if the distribution commences more than 7 days after such explanation is provided.

For purposes of this section, the term “qualified joint and survivor annuity” means an annuity—

(1) for the life of the participant with a survivor annuity for the life of the spouse which is not less than 50 percent of (and is not greater than 100 percent of) the amount of the annuity which is payable during the joint lives of the participant and the spouse, and

(2) which is the actuarial equivalent of a single annuity for the life of the participant.

Such term also includes any annuity in a form having the effect of an annuity described in the preceding sentence.

For purposes of this section—

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), the term “qualified preretirement survivor annuity” means a survivor annuity for the life of the surviving spouse of the participant if—

(A) the payments to the surviving spouse under such annuity are not less than the amounts which would be payable as a survivor annuity under the qualified joint and survivor annuity under the plan (or the actuarial equivalent thereof) if—

(i) in the case of a participant who dies after the date on which the participant attained the earliest retirement age, such participant had retired with an immediate qualified joint and survivor annuity on the day before the participant's date of death, or

(ii) in the case of a participant who dies on or before the date on which the participant would have attained the earliest retirement age, such participant had—

(I) separated from service on the date of death,

(II) survived to the earliest retirement age,

(III) retired with an immediate qualified joint and survivor annuity at the earliest retirement age, and

(IV) died on the day after the day on which such participant would have attained the earliest retirement age, and

(B) under the plan, the earliest period for which the surviving spouse may receive a payment under such annuity is not later than the month in which the participant would have attained the earliest retirement age under the plan.

In the case of an individual who separated from service before the date of such individual's death, subparagraph (A)(ii)(I) shall not apply.

(2) In the case of any individual account plan or participant described in subparagraph (B) or (C) of subsection (b)(1) of this section, the term “qualified preretirement survivor annuity” means an annuity for the life of the surviving spouse the actuarial equivalent of which is not less than 50 percent of the portion of the account balance of the participant (as of the date of death) to which the participant had a nonforfeitable right (within the meaning of section 1053 of this title).

(3) For purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2), any security interest held by the plan by reason of a loan outstanding to the participant shall be taken into account in determining the amount of the qualified preretirement survivor annuity.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), a plan may provide that a qualified joint and survivor annuity (or a qualified preretirement survivor annuity) will not be provided unless the participant and spouse had been married throughout the 1-year period ending on the earlier of—

(A) the participant's annuity starting date, or

(B) the date of the participant's death.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), if—

(A) a participant marries within 1 year before the annuity starting date, and

(B) the participant and the participant's spouse in such marriage have been married for at least a 1-year period ending on or before the date of the participant's death,

such participant and such spouse shall be treated as having been married throughout the 1-year period ending on the participant's annuity starting date.

(1) A plan may provide that the present value of a qualified joint and survivor annuity or a qualified preretirement survivor annuity will be immediately distributed if such value does not exceed the dollar limit under section 1053(e)(1) of this title. No distribution may be made under the preceding sentence after the annuity starting date unless the participant and the spouse of the participant (or where the participant has died, the surviving spouse) consent in writing to such distribution.

(2) If—

(A) the present value of the qualified joint and survivor annuity or the qualified preretirement survivor annuity exceeds the dollar limit under section 1053(e)(1) of this title, and

(B) the participant and the spouse of the participant (or where the participant has died, the surviving spouse) consent in writing to the distribution,

the plan may immediately distribute the present value of such annuity.

(3)

(A)

(i)

(ii)

(I)

(II)

(B)

(i) the later of when a plan amendment applying subparagraph (A) is adopted or made effective, or

(ii) the first day of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1999,

shall be calculated, for purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2), using the interest rate determined under the regulations of the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination that were in effect on September 1, 1993, and using the provisions of the plan as in effect on the day before December 8, 1994; but only if such provisions of the plan met the requirements of this paragraph as in effect on the day before December 8, 1994.

For purposes of this section—

(1) The term “vested participant” means any participant who has a nonforfeitable right (within the meaning of section 1002(19) of this title) to any portion of such participant's accrued benefit.

(2)(A) The term “annuity starting date” means—

(i) the first day of the first period for which an amount is payable as an annuity, or

(ii) in the case of a benefit not payable in the form of an annuity, the first day on which all events have occurred which entitle the participant to such benefit.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the first day of the first period for which a benefit is to be received by reason of disability shall be treated as the annuity starting date only if such benefit is not an auxiliary benefit.

(3) The term “earliest retirement age” means the earliest date on which, under the plan, the participant could elect to receive retirement benefits.

A plan may take into account in any equitable manner (as determined by the Secretary of the Treasury) any increased costs resulting from providing a qualified joint or survivor annuity or a qualified preretirement survivor annuity.

If the use of any participant's accrued benefit (or any portion thereof) as security for a loan meets the requirements of subsection (c)(4) of this section, nothing in this section shall prevent any distribution required by reason of a failure to comply with the terms of such loan.

No consent of a spouse shall be effective for purposes of subsection (g)(1) or (g)(2) of this section (as the case may be) unless requirements comparable to the requirements for spousal consent to an election under subsection (c)(1)(A) of this section are met.

In prescribing regulations under this section, the Secretary of the Treasury shall consult with the Secretary of Labor.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §205, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 862; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §103(a), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1429; Pub. L. 99–514, title XI, §§1139(c)(2), 1145(b), title XVIII, §1898(b)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), (5)(B), (6)(B), (7)(B), (8)(B), (9)(B), (10)(B), (11)(B), (12)(B), (13)(B), (14)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2488, 2491, 2945–2951; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7861(d)(2), 7862(d)(1)(B), (3), (6)–(9), 7891(a)(1), (b)(3), (c), (e), 7894(c)(7)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2431, 2434, 2445, 2447, 2449; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §767(c)(2), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5039; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1451(b), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1815; Pub. L. 105–34, title X, §1071(b)(2), title XVI, §1601(d)(5), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 948, 1089.)

1997—Subsec. (c)(8)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 105–34, §1601(d)(5), substituted “Secretary of the Treasury” for “Secretary”.

Subsec. (g)(1), (2)(A). Pub. L. 105–34, §1071(b)(2), substituted “the dollar limit under section 1053(e)(1) of this title” for “$3,500”.

1996—Subsec. (c)(8). Pub. L. 104–188 added par. (8).

1994—Subsec. (g)(3). Pub. L. 103–465 amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows:

“(3)(A) For purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2), the present value shall be calculated—

“(i) by using an interest rate no greater than the applicable interest rate if the vested accrued benefit (using such rate) is not in excess of $25,000, and

“(ii) by using an interest rate no greater than 120 percent of the applicable interest rate if the vested accrued benefit exceeds $25,000 (as determined under clause (i)).

In no event shall the present value determined under subclause (II) be less than $25,000.

“(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term ‘applicable interest rate’ means the interest rate which would be used (as of the date of the distribution) by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for purposes of determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination.”

1989—Subsec. (b)(1)(C)(i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(7), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(7)(B), see 1986 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (b)(3), (4). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(9), amended directory language of Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(14)(B), see 1986 Amendment note below, and redesignated par. (3), as added by Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(14)(B), as par. (4).

Pub. L. 101–239, §§7861(d)(2), 7891(c), realigned margins of par. (3), as added by Pub. L. 99–514, §1145(b), and redesignated such par. (3) as (4).

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(1)(B), inserted at end “In the case of a participant who separates from service before attaining age 35, the applicable period shall be a reasonable period after separation.”

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(ii)(IV). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(6), substituted “after this section” for “after section 1101(a)(11) of this title”.

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(ii)(V). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(1)(B), struck out subcl. (V) which read as follows: “A reasonable period after separation from service in case of a participant who separates before attaining age 35.”

Subsec. (c)(6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(7)(A), substituted “such Act” for “such act”.

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(8), substituted “nonforfeitable right (within the meaning of section 1053 of this title)” for “nonforfeitable accrued benefit”.

Subsec. (g)(3)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(b)(3), realigned margins of subpar. (A).

Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §§7862(d)(3)(A), 7891(e)(1), amended par. (1) identically, substituting “The term” for “the term” and “benefit.” for “benefit,”.

Subsec. (h)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §§7862(d)(3)B), 7891(e)(2), amended par. (3) identically, substituting “The term” for “the term”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(3)(B), substituted “who does not die before the annuity starting date” for “who retires under the plan”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(2)(B)(ii), inserted at end “Clause (iii) of subparagraph (C) shall apply only with respect to the transferred assets (and income therefrom) if the plan separately accounts for such assets and any income therefrom.”

Subsec. (b)(1)(C)(i). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(13)(B), substituted “(c)(2)” for “(c)(2)(A)”.

Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(7)(B), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(7), inserted “(reduced by any security interest held by the plan by reason of a loan outstanding to such participant)”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(C)(iii). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(2)(B)(i), substituted “a direct or indirect transferee (in a transfer after December 31, 1984)” for “a transferee”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(14)(B), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(d)(9)(A), added par. (3) relating to treatment of plan as meeting requirements of par. (1)(C) or (2) of subsec. (b).

Pub. L. 99–514, §1145(b), added par. (3) relating to applicability of this section to plans described in section 404(c) of title 26.

Subsec. (c)(1)(B). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(i), substituted “paragraphs (2), (3), and (4)” for “paragraphs (2) and (3)”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(6)(B), amended subpar. (A) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (A) read as follows: “the spouse of the participant consents in writing to such election, and the spouse's consent acknowledges the effect of such election and is witnessed by a plan representative or a notary public, or”.

Subsec. (c)(3)(B). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(5)(B), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “Each plan shall provide to each participant, within the period beginning with the first day of the plan year in which the participant attains age 32 and ending with the close of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the participant attains age 35 (and consistent with such regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe), a written explanation with respect to the qualified preretirement survivor annuity comparable to that required under subparagraph (A).”

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(ii), added par. (4). Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Subsec. (c)(5). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(ii), redesignated par. (4) as (5). Former par. (5) redesignated (6).

Subsec. (c)(5)(A). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(11)(B), inserted “if such benefit may not be waived (or another beneficiary selected) and”.

Subsec. (c)(6), (7). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(ii), redesignated pars. (5) and (6) as (6) and (7), respectively.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(1)(B), inserted at end “In the case of an individual who separated from service before the date of such individual's death, subparagraph (A)(ii)(I) shall not apply.”

Subsec. (e)(2). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(9)(B)(i), substituted “the portion of the account balance of the participant (as of the date of death) to which the participant had a nonforfeitable accrued benefit” for “the account balance of the participant as of the date of death”.

Subsec. (e)(3). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(9)(B)(ii), added par. (3).

Subsec. (g)(3). Pub. L. 99–514, §1139(c)(2), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “For purposes of paragraphs (1) and (2), the present value of a qualified joint and survivor annuity or a qualified preretirement survivor annuity shall be determined as of the date of the distribution and by using an interest rate not greater than the interest rate which would be used (as of the date of the distribution) by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation for purposes of determining the present value of a lump sum distribution on plan termination.”

Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(8)(B), substituted “such participant's accrued benefit” for “the accrued benefit derived from employer contributions”.

Subsec. (h)(2). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(12)(B), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “the term ‘annuity starting date’ means the first day of the first period for which an amount is received as an annuity (whether by reason of retirement or disability), and”.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(iii), added subsec. (j). Former subsec. (j) redesignated (k).

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(10)(B), added subsec. (k). Former subsec. (k) redesignated (*l*).

Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(4)(B)(iii), redesignated subsec. (j) as (k).

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(b)(10)(B), redesignated subsec. (k) as (*l*).

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions relating to provisions to be included in applicable plans for former provisions relating to form of payment of annuity benefits.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions relating to applicable plans under this section for former provisions relating to plans providing for payment of benefits before normal retirement age.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions relating to conditions under which plans meet the requirements of this section for former provisions relating to election of qualified joint and survivor annuity form.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions defining “qualified joint and survivor annuity” for former provisions relating to the participant's spouse not being entitled to receive survivor annuity.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions defining “qualified preretirement survivor annuity” for former provisions relating to election to take annuity.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions to the effect that plans may provide that annuities will not be provided unless the participant and spouse had been married for a certain 1-year period, for former provisions relating to plan provisions which render election or revocation ineffective if participant dies within period of up to 2 years following the date of election or revocation.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions relating to plan provisions for immediate distribution of present value if such value does not exceed $3,500 and for written consent from the participant and spouse for former provisions setting forth definitions. See subsec. (h) of this section.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions setting forth definitions for former provisions relating to increased costs resulting from providing joint and survivor annuity benefits. See subsec. (i) of this section.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 98–397 substituted provisions relating to increased costs resulting from providing annuities under applicable plans for former provisions setting forth the effective date of this section.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 98–397 added subsec. (j).

Amendment by section 1071(b)(2) of Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to plan years beginning after Aug. 5, 1997, see section 1071(c) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 1601(d)(5) of Pub. L. 105–34 effective as if included in the provisions of the Small Business Job Protection Act of 1996, Pub. L. 104–188, to which it relates, see section 1601(j) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 23 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1996, see section 1451(c) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 417 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan years and limitation years beginning after Dec. 31, 1994, except that employer may elect to treat such amendment as effective on or after Dec. 8, 1994, with provisions relating to reduction of accrued benefits, exception, and timing of plan amendment, see section 767(d) of Pub. L. 103–465, as amended, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by sections 7861(d)(2) and 7862(d)(1)(B), (3), (6)–(9) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1), (b)(3), (c), (e) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(c)(7)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 103 of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984 [Pub. L. 98–397] in reference to the new section 205(c)(5) of ERISA [subsec. (c)(5) of this section] as added by such section 3113.”

Amendment by section 1139(c)(2) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to distributions in plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except that such amendments shall not apply to any distributions in plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, and before Jan. 1, 1987, if such distributions were made in accordance with the requirements of the regulations issued under the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, with additional provisions relating to reductions in accrued benefits, see section 1139(d) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 411 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 1145(b) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable as if included in the amendments made by the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, see section 1145(d) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(b)(4)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable with respect to loans made after Aug. 18, 1985, see section 1898(b)(4)(C) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 417 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(b)(6)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to plan years beginning after Oct. 22, 1986, see section 1898(b)(6)(C) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 417 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(b)(8)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to distributions after Oct. 22, 1986, see section 1898(b)(8)(C) of Pub. L. 99–514, as added, set out as a note under section 417 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 1898(b)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (5)(B), (7)(B), (9)(B), (10)(B), (11)(B), (12)(B), (13)(B), (14)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if included in the provision of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, to which such amendment relates, except as otherwise provided, see section 1898(j) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see sections 302 and 303 of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Nothing in amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 to prevent any distribution required by reason of failure to comply with terms of loan made on or before Aug. 18, 1985, and secured by portion of participant's accrued benefit, see section 1898(b)(4)(C)(ii) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 417 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle D [§§1401–1465] of title I of Pub. L. 104–188 require an amendment to any plan or annuity contract, such amendment shall not be required to be made before the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 1465 of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1054, 1056, 1061, 1322, 1350 of this title; title 28 section 3010.

1 So in original. Probably should be “clauses”.

2 So in original. There are two pars. designated (4) and no par. (3).

Each pension plan shall provide that unless the participant otherwise elects, the payment of benefits under the plan to the participant shall begin not later than the 60th day after the latest of the close of the plan year in which—

(1) occurs the date on which the participant attains the earlier of age 65 or the normal retirement age specified under the plan,

(2) occurs the 10th anniversary of the year in which the participant commenced participation in the plan, or

(3) the participant terminates his service with the employer.

In the case of a plan which provides for the payment of an early retirement benefit, such plan shall provide that a participant who satisfied the service requirements for such early retirement benefit, but separate from the service (with any nonforfeitable right to an accrued benefit) before satisfying the age requirement for such early retirement benefit, is entitled upon satisfaction of such age requirement to receive a benefit not less than the benefit to which he would be entitled at the normal retirement age, actuarially reduced under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

If—

(1) a participant or beneficiary is receiving benefits under a pension plan, or

(2) a participant is separated from the service and has non-forfeitable rights to benefits,

a plan may not decrease benefits of such a participant by reason of any increase in the benefit levels payable under title II of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.] or the Railroad Retirement Act of 1937 [45 U.S.C. 231 et seq.] or any increase in the wage base under such title II, if such increase takes place after September 2, 1974, or (if later) the earlier of the date of first entitlement of such benefits or the date of such separation.

No pension plan may provide that any part of a participant's accrued benefit derived from employer contributions (whether or not otherwise nonforfeitable) is forfeitable solely because of withdrawal by such participant of any amount attributable to the benefit derived from contributions made by such participant. The preceding sentence shall not apply (1) to the accrued benefit of any participant unless, at the time of such withdrawal, such participant has a nonforfeitable right to at least 50 percent of such accrued benefit, or (2) to the extent that an accrued benefit is permitted to be forfeited in accordance with section 1053(a)(3)(D)(iii) of this title.

(1) Each pension plan shall provide that benefits provided under the plan may not be assigned or alienated.

(2) For the purposes of paragraph (1) of this subsection, there shall not be taken into account any voluntary and revocable assignment of not to exceed 10 percent of any benefit payment, or of any irrevocable assignment or alienation of benefits executed before September 2, 1974. The preceding sentence shall not apply to any assignment or alienation made for the purposes of defraying plan administration costs. For purposes of this paragraph a loan made to a participant or beneficiary shall not be treated as an assignment or alienation if such loan is secured by the participant's accrued non-forfeitable benefit and is exempt from the tax imposed by section 4975 of title 26 (relating to tax on prohibited transactions) by reason of section 4975(d)(1) of title 26.

(3)(A) Paragraph (1) shall apply to the creation, assignment, or recognition of a right to any benefit payable with respect to a participant pursuant to a domestic relations order, except that paragraph (1) shall not apply if the order is determined to be a qualified domestic relations order. Each pension plan shall provide for the payment of benefits in accordance with the applicable requirements of any qualified domestic relations order.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph—

(i) the term “qualified domestic relations order” means a domestic relations order—

(I) which creates or recognizes the existence of an alternate payee's right to, or assigns to an alternate payee the right to, receive all or a portion of the benefits payable with respect to a participant under a plan, and

(II) with respect to which the requirements of subparagraphs (C) and (D) are met, and

(ii) the term “domestic relations order” means any judgment, decree, or order (including approval of a property settlement agreement) which—

(I) relates to the provision of child support, alimony payments, or marital property rights to a spouse, former spouse, child, or other dependent of a participant, and

(II) is made pursuant to a State domestic relations law (including a community property law).

(C) A domestic relations order meets the requirements of this subparagraph only if such order clearly specifies—

(i) the name and the last known mailing address (if any) of the participant and the name and mailing address of each alternate payee covered by the order,

(ii) the amount or percentage of the participant's benefits to be paid by the plan to each such alternate payee, or the manner in which such amount or percentage is to be determined,

(iii) the number of payments or period to which such order applies, and

(iv) each plan to which such order applies.

(D) A domestic relations order meets the requirements of this subparagraph only if such order—

(i) does not require a plan to provide any type or form of benefit, or any option, not otherwise provided under the plan,

(ii) does not require the plan to provide increased benefits (determined on the basis of actuarial value), and

(iii) does not require the payment of benefits to an alternate payee which are required to be paid to another alternate payee under another order previously determined to be a qualified domestic relations order.

(E)(i) A domestic relations order shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of clause (i) of subparagraph (D) solely because such order requires that payment of benefits be made to an alternate payee—

(I) in the case of any payment before a participant has separated from service, on or after the date on which the participant attains (or would have attained) the earliest retirement age,

(II) as if the participant had retired on the date on which such payment is to begin under such order (but taking into account only the present value of benefits actually accrued and not taking into account the present value of any employer subsidy for early retirement), and

(III) in any form in which such benefits may be paid under the plan to the participant (other than in the form of a joint and survivor annuity with respect to the alternate payee and his or her subsequent spouse).

For purposes of subclause (II), the interest rate assumption used in determining the present value shall be the interest rate specified in the plan or, if no rate is specified, 5 percent.

(ii) For purposes of this subparagraph, the term “earliest retirement age” means the earlier of—

(I) the date on which the participant is entitled to a distribution under the plan, or

(II) the later of the date of the participant attains age 50 or the earliest date on which the participant could begin receiving benefits under the plan if the participant separated from service.

(F) To the extent provided in any qualified domestic relations order—

(i) the former spouse of a participant shall be treated as a surviving spouse of such participant for purposes of section 1055 of this title (and any spouse of the participant shall not be treated as a spouse of the participant for such purposes), and

(ii) if married for at least 1 year, the surviving former spouse shall be treated as meeting the requirements of section 1055(f) of this title.

(G)(i) In the case of any domestic relations order received by a plan—

(I) the plan administrator shall promptly notify the participant and each alternate payee of the receipt of such order and the plan's procedures for determining the qualified status of domestic relations orders, and

(II) within a reasonable period after receipt of such order, the plan administrator shall determine whether such order is a qualified domestic relations order and notify the participant and each alternate payee of such determination.

(ii) Each plan shall establish reasonable procedures to determine the qualified status of domestic relations orders and to administer distributions under such qualified orders. Such procedures—

(I) shall be in writing,

(II) shall provide for the notification of each person specified in a domestic relations order as entitled to payment of benefits under the plan (at the address included in the domestic relations order) of such procedures promptly upon receipt by the plan of the domestic relations order, and

(III) shall permit an alternate payee to designate a representative for receipt of copies of notices that are sent to the alternate payee with respect to a domestic relations order.

(H)(i) During any period in which the issue of whether a domestic relations order is a qualified domestic relations order is being determined (by the plan administrator, by a court of competent jurisdiction, or otherwise), the plan administrator shall separately account for the amounts (hereinafter in this subparagraph referred to as the “segregated amounts”) which would have been payable to the alternate payee during such period if the order had been determined to be a qualified domestic relations order.

(ii) If within the 18-month period described in clause (v) the order (or modification thereof) is determined to be a qualified domestic relations order, the plan administrator shall pay the segregated amounts (including any interest thereon) to the person or persons entitled thereto.

(iii) If within the 18-month period described in clause (v)—

(I) it is determined that the order is not a qualified domestic relations order, or

(II) the issue as to whether such order is a qualified domestic relations order is not resolved,

then the plan administrator shall pay the segregated amounts (including any interest thereon) to the person or persons who would have been entitled to such amounts if there had been no order.

(iv) Any determination that an order is a qualified domestic relations order which is made after the close of the 18-month period described in clause (v) shall be applied prospectively only.

(v) For purposes of this subparagraph, the 18-month period described in this clause is the 18-month period beginning with the date on which the first payment would be required to be made under the domestic relations order.

(I) If a plan fiduciary acts in accordance with part 4 of this subtitle in—

(i) treating a domestic relations order as being (or not being) a qualified domestic relations order, or

(ii) taking action under subparagraph (H),

then the plan's obligation to the participant and each alternate payee shall be discharged to the extent of any payment made pursuant to such Act.

(J) A person who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order shall be considered for purposes of any provision of this chapter a beneficiary under the plan. Nothing in the preceding sentence shall permit a requirement under section 1301 of this title of the payment of more than 1 premium with respect to a participant for any period.

(K) The term “alternate payee” means any spouse, former spouse, child, or other dependent of a participant who is recognized by a domestic relations order as having a right to receive all, or a portion of, the benefits payable under a plan with respect to such participant.

(L) This paragraph shall not apply to any plan to which paragraph (1) does not apply.

(M) Payment of benefits by a pension plan in accordance with the applicable requirements of a qualified domestic relations order shall not be treated as garnishment for purposes of section 1673(a) of title 15.

(N) In prescribing regulations under this paragraph, the Secretary shall consult with the Secretary of the Treasury.

(4) Paragraph (1) shall not apply to any offset of a participant's benefits provided under an employee pension benefit plan against an amount that the participant is ordered or required to pay to the plan if—

(A) the order or requirement to pay arises—

(i) under a judgment of conviction for a crime involving such plan,

(ii) under a civil judgment (including a consent order or decree) entered by a court in an action brought in connection with a violation (or alleged violation) of part 4 of this subtitle, or

(iii) pursuant to a settlement agreement between the Secretary and the participant, or a settlement agreement between the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation and the participant, in connection with a violation (or alleged violation) of part 4 of this subtitle by a fiduciary or any other person,

(B) the judgment, order, decree, or settlement agreement expressly provides for the offset of all or part of the amount ordered or required to be paid to the plan against the participant's benefits provided under the plan, and

(C) in a case in which the survivor annuity requirements of section 1055 of this title apply with respect to distributions from the plan to the participant, if the participant has a spouse at the time at which the offset is to be made—

(i) either—

(I) such spouse has consented in writing to such offset and such consent is witnessed by a notary public or representative of the plan (or it is established to the satisfaction of a plan representative that such consent may not be obtained by reason of circumstances described in section 1055(c)(2)(B) of this title), or

(II) an election to waive the right of the spouse to a qualified joint and survivor annuity or a qualified preretirement survivor annuity is in effect in accordance with the requirements of section 1055(c) of this title,

(ii) such spouse is ordered or required in such judgment, order, decree, or settlement to pay an amount to the plan in connection with a violation of part 4 of this subtitle, or

(iii) in such judgment, order, decree, or settlement, such spouse retains the right to receive the survivor annuity under a qualified joint and survivor annuity provided pursuant to section 1055(a)(1) of this title and under a qualified preretirement survivor annuity provided pursuant to section 1055(a)(2) of this title, determined in accordance with paragraph (5).

A plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of section 1055 of this title solely by reason of an offset under this paragraph.

(5)(A) The survivor annuity described in paragraph (4)(C)(iii) shall be determined as if—

(i) the participant terminated employment on the date of the offset,

(ii) there was no offset,

(iii) the plan permitted commencement of benefits only on or after normal retirement age,

(iv) the plan provided only the minimum-required qualified joint and survivor annuity, and

(v) the amount of the qualified preretirement survivor annuity under the plan is equal to the amount of the survivor annuity payable under the minimum-required qualified joint and survivor annuity.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph, the term “minimum-required qualified joint and survivor annuity” means the qualified joint and survivor annuity which is the actuarial equivalent of the participant's accrued benefit (within the meaning of section 1002(23) of this title) and under which the survivor annuity is 50 percent of the amount of the annuity which is payable during the joint lives of the participant and the spouse.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this part, the fiduciary of a pension plan that is subject to the additional funding requirements of section 1082(d) of this title shall not permit a prohibited payment to be made from a plan during a period in which such plan has a liquidity shortfall (as defined in section 1082(e)(5) of this title).

For purposes of paragraph (1), the term “prohibited payment” means—

(A) any payment, in excess of the monthly amount paid under a single life annuity (plus any social security supplements described in the last sentence of section 1054(b)(1)(G) of this title), to a participant or beneficiary whose annuity starting date (as defined in section 1055(h)(2) of this title), that occurs during the period referred to in paragraph (1),

(B) any payment for the purchase of an irrevocable commitment from an insurer to pay benefits, and

(C) any other payment specified by the Secretary of the Treasury by regulations.

For purposes of this subsection, a plan has a liquidity shortfall during the period that there is an underpayment of an installment under section 1082(e) of this title by reason of paragraph (5)(A) thereof.

Compliance with this subsection shall not constitute a violation of any other provision of this chapter.

In the case of a plan covered by subchapter III of this chapter, the plan shall provide that, upon termination of the plan, benefits of missing participants shall be treated in accordance with section 1350 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §206, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 864; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §104(a), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1433; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1898(c)(2)(B), (4)(B), (5), (6)(B), (7)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2952–2954; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(c)(8), (9)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2449; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §§761(a)(9)(B)(i), 776(c)(2), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5033, 5048; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1502(a), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1058.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Railroad Retirement Act of 1937, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 29, 1935, ch. 812, 49 Stat. 867, as amended generally by act June 24, 1937, ch. 382, part I, 50 Stat. 307, and which was classified principally to subchapter III (§228a et seq.) of chapter 9 of Title 45, Railroads. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1937 was amended generally and redesignated the Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 by Pub. L. 93–445, title I, Oct. 16, 1974, 88 Stat. 1305. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 is classified generally to subchapter IV (§231 et seq.) of chapter 9 of Title 45. For complete classification of these acts to the Code, see Tables.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (e)(4), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (d)(4), (5). Pub. L. 105–34 added pars. (4) and (5).

1994—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(9)(B)(i), added subsec. (e).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–465, §776(c)(2), added subsec. (f).

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(8), inserted “occurs” before “the date”.

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (d)(3)(I). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(9)(A), substituted “such Act” for “such act”.

1986—Subsec. (d)(3)(E)(i). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(7)(B)(iii), substituted “A” for “In the case of any payment before a participant has separated from service, a” in introductory provisions and inserted “in the case of any payment before a participant has separated from service,” in subcl. (I).

Subsec. (d)(3)(E)(ii). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(7)(B)(iv), amended cl. (ii) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (ii) read as follows: “For purposes of this subparagraph, the term ‘earliest retirement age’ has the meaning given such term by section 1055(h)(3) of this section, except that in the case of any individual account plan, the earliest retirement age shall be the date which is 10 years before the normal retirement age.”

Subsec. (d)(3)(F)(i). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(6)(B), inserted “(and any spouse of the participant shall not be treated as a spouse of the participant for such purposes)”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(F)(ii). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(7)(B)(i), inserted “surviving” before “former spouse”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(G)(i)(I). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(7)(B)(ii), substituted “each” for “any other”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(H)(i). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(2)(B)(i), substituted “shall separately account for the amounts (hereinafter in this subparagraph referred to as the ‘segregated amounts’)” for “shall segregate in a separate account in the plan or in an escrow account the amounts”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(H)(ii), (iii). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(2)(B)(ii), (iii), substituted “the 18-month period described in clause (v)” for “18 months” and “including any interest” for “plus any interest”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(H)(iv). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(2)(B)(iv), inserted “described in clause (v)”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(H)(v). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(2)(B)(v), added cl. (v).

Subsec. (d)(3)(L). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(4)(B), added subpar. (L) and redesignated former subpar. (L) as (N).

Subsec. (d)(3)(M). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(5), added subpar. (M).

Subsec. (d)(3)(N). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(c)(4)(B), redesignated subpar. (L) as (N).

1984—Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 98–397 added par. (3).

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to judgments, orders, and decrees issued, and settlement agreements entered into, on or after Aug. 5, 1997, see section 1502(c) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 761(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

Section 776(e) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The provisions of this section [enacting section 1350 of this title and amending this section and sections 1303, 1305, and 1341 of this title and section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code] shall be effective with respect to distributions that occur in plan years commencing after final regulations implementing these provisions are prescribed by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.” [Final implementing regulations were issued Nov. 22, 1995, effective for distributions in plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1996. See 60 F.R. 61740.]

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(c)(8) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(c)(9)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 104 of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984 [Pub. L. 98–397].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–514 effective as if included in the provision of the Retirement Equity Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–397, to which such amendment relates, except as otherwise provided, see section 1898(j) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 effective Jan. 1, 1985, except as otherwise provided, see section 303(d) of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 623, 1021, 1053, 1054, 1061, 1132, 1144, 1301, 1322, 1344 of this title.

In the case of any plan maintained on January 1, 1974, if not later than 2 years after September 2, 1974, the administrator petitions the Secretary, the Secretary may prescribe an alternate method which shall be treated as satisfying the requirements of section 1053(a)(2) or 1054(b)(1) (other than subparagraph (D) thereof) of this title or both for a period of not more than 4 years. The Secretary may prescribe such alternate method only when he finds that—

(1) the application of such requirements would increase the costs of the plan to such an extent that there would result a substantial risk to the voluntary continuation of the plan or a substantial curtailment of benefit levels or the levels of employees’ compensation.

(2) the application of such requirements or discontinuance of the plan would be adverse to the interests of plan participants in the aggregate, and

(3) a waiver or extension of time granted under section 1083 or 1084 of this title would be inadequate.

In the case of any plan with respect to which an alternate method has been prescribed under the preceding provisions of this subsection for a period of not more than 4 years, if, not later than 1 year before the expiration of such period, the administrator petitions the Secretary for an extension of such alternate method, and the Secretary makes the findings required by the preceding sentence, such alternate method may be extended for not more than 3 years.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §207, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 865.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1143 of this title.

A pension plan may not merge or consolidate with, or transfer its assets or liabilities to, any other plan after September 2, 1974, unless each participant in the plan would (if the plan then terminated) receive a benefit immediately after the merger, consolidation, or transfer which is equal to or greater than the benefit he would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger, consolidation, or transfer (if the plan had then terminated). The preceding sentence shall not apply to any transaction to the extent that participants either before or after the transaction are covered under a multiemployer plan to which subchapter III of this chapter applies.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §208, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 865; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(b)(1), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1299.)

1980—Pub. L. 96–364 substituted provisions respecting applicability of preceding sentence to transactions under a covered multiemployer plan to which subchapter III applies, for provisions relating to applicability of paragraph to a multiemployer plan only to extent determined by Corporation.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1061, 1343, 1344 of this title.

(a)(1) Except as provided by paragraph (2) every employer shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, maintain records with respect to each of his employees sufficient to determine the benefits due or which may become due to such employees. The plan administrator shall make a report, in such manner and at such time as may be provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary, to each employee who is a participant under the plan and who—

(A) requests such report, in such manner and at such time as may be provided in such regulations,

(B) terminates his service with the employer, or

(C) has a 1-year break in service (as defined in section 1053(b)(3)(A) of this title).

The employer shall furnish to the plan administrator the information necessary for the administrator to make the reports required by the preceding sentence. Not more than one report shall be required under subparagraph (A) in any 12-month period. Not more than one report shall be required under subparagraph (C) with respect to consecutive 1-year breaks in service. The report required under this paragraph shall be sufficient to inform the employee of his accrued benefits under the plan and the percentage of such benefits which are nonforfeitable under the plan.

(2) If more than one employer adopts a plan, each such employer shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, furnish to the plan administrator the information necessary for the administrator to maintain the records and make the reports required by paragraph (1). Such administrator shall maintain the records and, to the extent provided under regulations prescribed by the Secretary, make the reports, required by paragraph (1).

(b) If any person who is required, under subsection (a) of this section, to furnish information or maintain records for any plan year fails to comply with such requirement, he shall pay to the Secretary a civil penalty of $10 for each employee with respect to whom such failure occurs, unless it is shown that such failure is due to reasonable cause.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §209, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 865.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this part or part 3, the following provisions of this subsection shall apply to a plan maintained by more than one employer:

(1) Section 1052 of this title shall be applied as if all employees of each of the employers were employed by a single employer.

(2) Sections 1053 and 1054 of this title shall be applied as if all such employers constituted a single employer, except that the application of any rules with respect to breaks in service shall be made under regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(3) The minimum funding standard provided by section 1082 of this title shall be determined as if all participants in the plan were employed by a single employer.

For purposes of this part and part 3—

(1) in any case in which the employer maintains a plan of a predecessor employer, service for such predecessor shall be treated as service for the employer, and

(2) in any case in which the employer maintains a plan which is not the plan maintained by a predecessor employer, service for such predecessor shall, to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, be treated as service for the employer.

For purposes of sections 1052, 1053, and 1054 of this title, all employees of all corporations which are members of a controlled group of corporations (within the meaning of section 1563(a) of title 26, determined without regard to section 1563(a)(4) and (e)(3)(C) of title 26) shall be treated as employed by a single employer. With respect to a plan adopted by more than one such corporation, the minimum funding standard of section 1082 of this title shall be determined as if all such employers were a single employer, and allocated to each employer in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

For purposes of sections 1052, 1053, and 1054 of this title, under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, all employees of trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control shall be treated as employed by a single employer. The regulations prescribed under this subsection shall be based on principles similar to the principles which apply in the case of subsection (c) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §210, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 866; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(c)(10), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2449.)

1989—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(c)(10), substituted “and (e)(3)(C) of such Code” for “and (e)(3)(C) of such code”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “and (e)(3)(C) of title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(c)(10) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

(a) Except as otherwise provided in this section, this part shall apply in the case of plan years beginning after September 2, 1974.

(b)(1) Except as otherwise provided in subsection (d) of this section, sections 1055, 1056(d) and 1058 of this title shall apply with respect to plan years beginning after December 31, 1975.

(2) Except as otherwise provided in subsections (c) and (d) of this section in the case of a plan in existence on January 1, 1974, this part shall apply in the case of plan years beginning after December 31, 1975.

(c)(1) In the case of a plan maintained on January 1, 1974, pursuant to one or more agreements which the Secretary finds to be collective bargaining agreements between employee organizations and one or more employers, no plan shall be treated as not meeting the requirements of sections 1054 and 1055 of this title by reason of a supplementary or special plan provision (within the meaning of paragraph (2)) for any plan year before the year which begins after the earlier of—

(A) the date on which the last of such agreements relating to the plan terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof agreed to after September 2, 1974), or

(B) December 31, 1980.

For purposes of subparagraph (A) and section 1086(c) 1 of this title, any plan amendment made pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement relating to the plan which amends the plan solely to conform to any requirement contained in this chapter or the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 shall not be treated as a termination of such collective bargaining agreement. This paragraph shall not apply unless the Secretary determines that the participation and vesting rules in effect on September 2, 1974, are not less favorable to participants, in the aggregate, than the rules provided under sections 1052, 1053, and 1054 of this title.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term “supplementary or special plan provision” means any plan provision which—

(A) provides supplementary benefits, not in excess of one-third of the basic benefit, in the form of any annuity for the life of the participant, or

(B) provides that, under a contractual agreement based on medical evidence as to the effects of working in an adverse environment for an extended period of time, a participant having 25 years of service is to be treated as having 30 years of service.

(3) This subsection shall apply with respect to a plan if (and only if) the application of this subsection results in a later effective date for this part than the effective date required by subsection (b) of this section.

(d) If the administrator of a plan elects under section 1017(d) of this Act to make applicable to a plan year and to all subsequent plan years the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 relating to participation, vesting, funding, and form of benefit, this part shall apply to the first plan year to which such election applies and to all subsequent plan years.

(e)(1) No pension plan to which section 1052 of this title applies may make effective any plan amendment with respect to breaks in service (which amendment is made or becomes effective after January 1, 1974, and before the date on which section 1052 of this title first becomes effective with respect to such plan) which provides that any employee's participation in the plan would commence to any date later than the later of—

(A) the date on which his participation would commence under the break in service rules of section 1052(b) of this title, or

(B) the date on which his participation would commence under the plan as in effect on January 1, 1974.

(2) No pension plan to which section 1053 of this title applies may make effective any plan amendment with respect to breaks in service (which amendment is made or becomes effective after January 1, 1974, and before the date on which section 1053 of this title first becomes effective with respect to such plan) if such amendment provides that the nonforfeitable benefit derived from employer contributions to which any employee would be entitled is less than the lesser of the nonforfeitable benefit derived from employer contributions to which he would be entitled under—

(A) the break in service rules of section 1052(b)(3) of this title, or

(B) the plan as in effect on January 1, 1974.

Subparagraph (B) shall not apply if the break in service rules under the plan would have been in violation of any law or rule of law in effect on January 1, 1974.

(f) The preceding provisions of this section shall not apply with respect to amendments made to this part in provisions enacted after September 2, 1974.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §211, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 867; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11015(a)(1)(B), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 265; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(h)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2451.)

Section 1086(c) of this title, referred to in subsec. (c)(1), was in the original “section 307(c)”, meaning section 307(c) of Pub. L. 93–406, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Section 307(c) was renumbered section 308(c) by Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9341(b)(1), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–370.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (c)(1), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsecs. (c)(1) and (d), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 1017(d) of this Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is section 1017 of Pub. L. 93–406, which is set out as an Effective Date; Transitional Rules note under section 410 of Title 26.

1989—Subsecs. (c)(1), (d). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(h)(2), added subsec. (f).

1986—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–272 made a technical amendment to the reference to section 1086(c) of this title to reflect the renumbering of the corresponding section of the original act.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(h)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 applicable with respect to applications for waivers, extensions, and modifications filed on or after Apr. 7, 1986, see section 11015(a)(3) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1085a of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1086 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1060, 1103, 1132, 1201, 1202 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

This part shall apply to any employee pension benefit plan described in section 1003(a) of this title, (and not exempted under section 1003(b) of this title), other than—

(1) an employee welfare benefit plan;

(2) an insurance contract plan described in subsection (b) of this section;

(3) a plan which is unfunded and is maintained by an employer primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees;

(4)(A) a plan which is established and maintained by a society, order, or association described in section 501(c)(8) or (9) of title 26, if no part of the contributions to or under such plan are made by employers of participants in such plan; or

(B) a trust described in section 501(c)(18) of title 26;

(5) a plan which has not at any time after September 2, 1974, provided for employer contributions;

(6) an agreement providing payments to a retired partner or deceased partner or a deceased partner's successor in interest as described in section 736 of title 26;

(7) an individual retirement account or annuity as described in section 408(a) of title 26, or a retirement bond described in section 409 of title 26 (as effective for obligations issued before January 1, 1984);

(8) an individual account plan (other than a money purchase plan) and a defined benefit plan to the extent it is treated as an individual account plan (other than a money purchase plan) under section 1002(35)(B) of this title;

(9) an excess benefit plan; or

(10) any plan, fund or program under which an employer, all of whose stock is directly or indirectly owned by employees, former employees or their beneficiaries, proposes through an unfunded arrangement to compensate retired employees for benefits which were forfeited by such employees under a pension plan maintained by a former employer prior to the date such pension plan became subject to this chapter.

For the purposes of paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section a plan is an “insurance contract plan” if—

(1) the plan is funded exclusively by the purchase of individual insurance contracts,

(2) such contracts provide for level annual premium payments to be paid extending not later than the retirement age for each individual participating in the plan, and commencing with the date the individual became a participant in the plan (or, in the case of an increase in benefits, commencing at the time such increase became effective),

(3) benefits provided by the plan are equal to the benefits provided under each contract at normal retirement age under the plan and are guaranteed by an insurance carrier (licensed under the laws of a State to do business with the plan) to the extent premiums have been paid,

(4) premiums payable for the plan year, and all prior plan years under such contracts have been paid before lapse or there is reinstatement of the policy,

(5) no rights under such contracts have been subject to a security interest at any time during the plan year, and

(6) no policy loans are outstanding at any time during the plan year.

A plan funded exclusively by the purchase of group insurance contracts which is determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury to have the same characteristics as contracts described in the preceding sentence shall be treated as a plan described in this subsection.

This part applies, with respect to a terminated multiemployer plan to which section 1321 of this title applies, until the last day of the plan year in which the plan terminates, within the meaning of section 1341a(a)(2) of this title.

Any amount of any financial assistance from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation to any plan, and any repayment of such amount, shall be taken into account under this section in such manner as determined by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §301, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 868; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §304(a), title IV, §411(b), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1293, 1308; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(d)(1)(A), (4)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2449.)

Section 409 of title 26, referred to in subsec. (a)(7), means section 409 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, prior to its repeal by Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title IV, §491(b), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 848, applicable to obligations issued after Dec. 31, 1983.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a)(10), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Subsec. (a)(4)(A), (6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(4)(A), substituted “section 409 of title 26 (as effective for obligations issued before January 1, 1984)” for “section 409 of title 26”.

Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(1)(A)(i), struck out “or” after semicolon at end.

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(1)(A)(ii), substituted “; or” for period at end.

Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(1)(A)(iii), substituted “any” for “Any”.

1980—Subsec. (a)(10). Pub. L. 96–364, §411(b), added par. (10).

Subsecs. (c), (d). Pub. L. 96–364, §304(a), added subsecs. (c) and (d).

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(d)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 411 of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 [Pub. L. 96–364].”

Section 7894(d)(4)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in section 491(b) of Public Law 98–369.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1003, 1023, 1054 of this title.

(1) Every employee pension benefit plan subject to this part shall satisfy the minimum funding standard (or the alternative minimum funding standard under section 1085 of this title) for any plan year to which this part applies. A plan to which this part applies shall have satisfied the minimum funding standard for such plan for a plan year if as of the end of such plan year the plan does not have an accumulated funding deficiency.

(2) For the purposes of this part, the term “accumulated funding deficiency” means for any plan the excess of the total charges to the funding standard account for all plan years (beginning with the first plan year to which this part applies) over the total credits to such account for such years or, if less, the excess of the total charges to the alternative minimum funding standard account for such plan years over the total credits to such account for such years.

(3) In any plan year in which a multiemployer plan is in reorganization, the accumulated funding deficiency of the plan shall be determined under section 1423 of this title.

(1) Each plan to which this part applies shall establish and maintain a funding standard account. Such account shall be credited and charged solely as provided in this section.

(2) For a plan year, the funding standard account shall be charged with the sum of—

(A) the normal cost of the plan for the plan year,

(B) the amounts necessary to amortize in equal annual installments (until fully amortized)—

(i) in the case of a plan in existence on January 1, 1974, the unfunded past service liability under the plan on the first day of the first plan year to which this part applies, over a period of 40 plan years,

(ii) in the case of a plan which comes into existence after January 1, 1974, the unfunded past service liability under the plan on the first day of the first plan year to which this part applies, over a period of 30 plan years,

(iii) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net increase (if any) in unfunded past service liability under the plan arising from plan amendments adopted in such year, over a period of 30 plan years,

(iv) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net experience loss (if any) under the plan, over a period of 5 plan years (15 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan), and

(v) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net loss (if any) resulting from changes in actuarial assumptions used under the plan, over a period of 10 plan years (30 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan),

(C) the amount necessary to amortize each waived funding deficiency (within the meaning of section 1083(c) of this title) for each prior plan year in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over a period of 5 plan years (15 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan),

(D) the amount necessary to amortize in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over a period of 5 plan years any amount credited to the funding standard account under paragraph (3)(D), and

(E) the amount necessary to amortize in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over a period of 20 years the contributions which would be required to be made under the plan but for the provisions of subsection (c)(7)(A)(i)(I) of this section.

(3) For a plan year, the funding standard account shall be credited with the sum of—

(A) the amount considered contributed by the employer to or under the plan for the plan year,

(B) the amount necessary to amortize in equal annual installments (until fully amortized)—

(i) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net decrease (if any) in unfunded past service liability under the plan arising from plan amendments adopted in such year, over a period of 30 plan years,

(ii) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net experience gain (if any) under the plan, over a period of 5 plan years (15 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan), and

(iii) separately, with respect to each plan year, the net gain (if any) resulting from changes in actuarial assumptions used under the plan, over a period of 10 plan years (30 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan),

(C) the amount of the waived funding deficiency (within the meaning of section 1083(c) of this title) for the plan year, and

(D) in the case of a plan year for which the accumulated funding deficiency is determined under the funding standard account if such plan year follows a plan year for which such deficiency was determined under the alternative minimum funding standard, the excess (if any) of any debit balance in the funding standard account (determined without regard to this subparagraph) over any debit balance in the alternative minimum funding standard account.

(4) Under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, amounts required to be amortized under paragraph (2) or paragraph (3), as the case may be—

(A) may be combined into one amount under such paragraph to be amortized over a period determined on the basis of the remaining amortization period for all items entering into such combined amount, and

(B) may be off set against amounts required to be amortized under the other such paragraph, with the resulting amount to be amortized over a period determined on the basis of the remaining amortization periods for all items entering into whichever of the two amounts being offset is the greater.

(5)

(A)

(B)

(i)

(ii)

(I) 1 weighted average of the rates of interest on 30-year Treasury securities during the 4-year period ending on the last day before the beginning of the plan year.

(II)

(iii)

(I) determined without taking into account the experience of the plan and reasonable expectations, but

(II) consistent with the assumptions which reflect the purchase rates which would be used by insurance companies to satisfy the liabilities under the plan.

(6) In the case of a plan which, immediately before September 26, 1980, was a multiemployer plan (within the meaning of section 1002(37) of this title as in effect immediately before such date)—

(A) any amount described in paragraph (2)(B)(ii), (2)(B)(iii), or (3)(B)(i) of this subsection which arose in a plan year beginning before such date shall be amortized in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over 40 plan years, beginning with the plan year in which the amount arose;

(B) any amount described in paragraph (2)(B)(iv) or (3)(B)(ii) of this subsection which arose in a plan year beginning before such date shall be amortized in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over 20 plan years, beginning with the plan year in which the amount arose;

(C) any change in past service liability which arises during the period of 3 plan years beginning on or after such date, and results from a plan amendment adopted before such date, shall be amortized in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over 40 plan years, beginning with the plan year in which the change arises; and

(D) any change in past service liability which arises during the period of 2 plan years beginning on or after such date, and results from the changing of a group of participants from one benefit level to another benefit level under a schedule of plan benefits which—

(i) was adopted before such date, and

(ii) was effective for any plan participant before the beginning of the first plan year beginning on or after such date,

shall be amortized in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over 40 plan years, beginning with the plan year in which the increase arises.

(7) For purposes of this part—

(A) Any amount received by a multiemployer plan in payment of all or part of an employer's withdrawal liability under part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter shall be considered an amount contributed by the employer to or under the plan. The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe by regulation additional charges and credits to a multiemployer plan's funding standard account to the extent necessary to prevent withdrawal liability payments from being unduly reflected as advance funding for plan liabilities.

(B) If a plan is not in reorganization in the plan year but was in reorganization in the immediately preceding plan year, any balance in the funding standard account at the close of such immediately preceding plan year—

(i) shall be eliminated by an offsetting credit or charge (as the case may be), but

(ii) shall be taken into account in subsequent plan years by being amortized in equal annual installments (until fully amortized) over 30 plan years.

The preceding sentence shall not apply to the extent of any accumulated funding deficiency under section 418B(a) of title 26 as of the end of the last plan year that the plan was in reorganization.

(C) Any amount paid by a plan during a plan year to the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation pursuant to section 1402 of this title or to a fund exempt under section 501(c)(22) of title 26 pursuant to section 1403 of this title shall reduce the amount of contributions considered received by the plan for the plan year.

(D) Any amount paid by an employer pending a final determination of the employer's withdrawal liability under part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter and subsequently refunded to the employer by the plan shall be charged to the funding standard account in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(E) For purposes of the full funding limitation under subsection (c)(7) of this section, unless otherwise provided by the plan, the accrued liability under a multiemployer plan shall not include benefits which are not nonforfeitable under the plan after the termination of the plan (taking into consideration section 411(d)(3) of title 26).

(1) For purposes of this part, normal costs, accrued liability, past service liabilities, and experience gains and losses shall be determined under the funding method used to determine costs under the plan.

(2)(A) For purposes of this part, the value of the plan's assets shall be determined on the basis of any reasonable actuarial method of valuation which takes into account fair market value and which is permitted under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(B) For purposes of this part, the value of a bond or other evidence of indebtedness which is not in default as to principal or interest may, at the election of the plan administrator, be determined on an amortized basis running from initial cost at purchase to par value at maturity or earliest call date. Any election under this subparagraph shall be made at such time and in such manner as the Secretary of the Treasury shall by regulations provide, shall apply to all such evidences of indebtedness, and may be revoked only with the consent of the Secretary of the Treasury. In the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, this subparagraph shall not apply, but the Secretary of the Treasury may by regulations provide that the value of any dedicated bond portfolio of such plan shall be determined by using the interest rate under subsection (b)(5) of this section.

(3) For purposes of this section, all costs, liabilities, rates of interest, and other factors under the plan shall be determined on the basis of actuarial assumptions and methods—

(A) in the case of—

(i) a plan other than a multiemployer plan, each of which is reasonable (taking into account the experience of the plan and reasonable expectations) or which, in the aggregate, result in a total contribution equivalent to that which would be determined if each such assumption and method were reasonable, or

(ii) a multiemployer plan, which, in the aggregate, are reasonable (taking into account the experiences of the plan and reasonable expectations), and

(B) which, in combination, offer the actuary's best estimate of anticipated experience under the plan.

(4) For purposes of this section, if—

(A) a change in benefits under the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 301 et seq.] or in other retirement benefits created under Federal or State law, or

(B) a change in the definition of the term “wages” under section 3121 of title 26, or a change in the amount of such wages taken into account under regulations prescribed for purposes of section 401(a)(5) of title 26,

results in an increase or decrease in accrued liability under a plan, such increase or decrease shall be treated as an experience loss or gain.

(5)(A)

(B)

(i)

(ii)

(I) the plan is a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan) to which subchapter III of this chapter applies;

(II) the aggregate unfunded vested benefits as of the close of the preceding plan year (as determined under section 1306(a)(3)(E)(iii) of this title) of such plan and all other plans maintained by the contributing sponsors (as defined in section 1301(a)(13) of this title) and members of such sponsors’ controlled groups (as defined in section 1301(a)(14) of this title) which are covered by subchapter III of this chapter (disregarding plans with no unfunded vested benefits) exceed $50,000,000; and

(III) the change in assumptions (determined after taking into account any changes in interest rate and mortality table) results in a decrease in the unfunded current liability of the plan for the current plan year that exceeds $50,000,000, or that exceeds $5,000,000 and that is 5 percent or more of the current liability of the plan before such change.

(6) If, as of the close of a plan year, a plan would (without regard to this paragraph) have an accumulated funding deficiency (determined without regard to the alternative minimum funding standard account permitted under section 1085 of this title) in excess of the full funding limitation—

(A) the funding standard account shall be credited with the amount of such excess, and

(B) all amounts described in paragraphs (2), (B), (C), and (D) and (3)(B) of subsection (b) of this section which are required to be amortized shall be considered fully amortized for purposes of such paragraphs.

(7)

(A)

(i) the lesser of (I) the applicable percentage of current liability (including the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year), or (II) the accrued liability (including normal cost) under the plan (determined under the entry age normal funding method if such accrued liability cannot be directly calculated under the funding method used for the plan), over

(ii) the lesser of—

(I) the fair market value of the plan's assets, or

(II) the value of such assets determined under paragraph (2).

(B)

(C)

(D)

(i) for adjustments to the percentage contained in subparagraph (A)(i) to take into account the respective ages or lengths of service of the participants, and

(ii) alternative methods based on factors other than current liability for the determination of the amount taken into account under subparagraph (A)(i).

(E)

(i)

(I) 90 percent of the current liability of the plan (including the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year), over

(II) the value of the plan's assets determined under paragraph (2).

(ii)

(I) the term “current liability” has the meaning given such term by subsection (d)(7) of this section (without regard to subparagraph (D) thereof), and

(II) assets shall not be reduced by any credit balance in the funding standard account.

(F)


(8) For purposes of this part, any amendment applying to a plan year which—

(A) is adopted after the close of such plan year but no later than 21/2 months after the close of the plan year (or, in the case of a multiemployer plan, no later than 2 years after the close of such plan year),

(B) does not reduce the accrued benefit of any participant determined as of the beginning of the first plan year to which the amendment applies, and

(C) does not reduce the accrued benefit of any participant determined as of the time of adoption except to the extent required by the circumstances,

shall, at the election of the plan administrator, be deemed to have been made on the first day of such plan year. No amendment described in this paragraph which reduces the accrued benefits of any participant shall take effect unless the plan administrator files a notice with the Secretary notifying him of such amendment and the Secretary has approved such amendment or, within 90 days after the date on which such notice was filed, failed to disapprove such amendment. No amendment described in this subsection shall be approved by the Secretary unless he determines that such amendment is necessary because of a substantial business hardship (as determined under section 1083(b) of this title) and that waiver under section 1083(a) of this title is unavailable or inadequate.

(9) For purposes of this part, a determination of experience gains and losses and a valuation of the plan's liability shall be made not less frequently than once every year, except that such determination shall be made more frequently to the extent required in particular cases under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(10) For purposes of this section—

(A) In the case of a defined benefit plan other than a multiemployer plan, any contributions for a plan year made by an employer during the period—

(i) beginning on the day after the last day of such plan year, and

(ii) ending on the date which is 81/2 months after the close of the plan year,

shall be deemed to have been made on such last day.

(B) In the case of a plan not described in subparagraph (A), any contributions for a plan year made by an employer after the last day of such plan year, but not later than two and one-half months after such day, shall be deemed to have been made on such last day. For purposes of this subparagraph, such two and one-half month period may be extended for not more than six months under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(11)

(A)

(B)

(i)

(ii) *o*) of section 414 of title 26.

(12)

In the case of a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan) to which this subsection applies under paragraph (9) for any plan year, the amount charged to the funding standard account for such plan year shall be increased by the sum of—

(A) the excess (if any) of—

(i) the deficit reduction contribution determined under paragraph (2) for such plan year, over

(ii) the sum of the charges for such plan year under subsection (b)(2) of this section, reduced by the sum of the credits for such plan year under subparagraph (B) of subsection (b)(3) of this section, plus

(B) the unpredictable contingent event amount (if any) for such plan year.

Such increase shall not exceed the amount which, after taking into account charges (other than the additional charge under this subsection) and credits under subsection (b) of this section, is necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage (taking into account the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year) to 100 percent.

For purposes of paragraph (1), the deficit reduction contribution determined under this paragraph for any plan year is the sum of—

(A) the unfunded old liability amount,

(B) the unfunded new liability amount,

(C) the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year, and

(D) the aggregate of the unfunded mortality increase amounts.

For purposes of this subsection—

The unfunded old liability amount with respect to any plan for any plan year is the amount necessary to amortize the unfunded old liability under the plan in equal annual installments over a period of 18 plan years (beginning with the 1st plan year beginning after December 31, 1988).

The term “unfunded old liability” means the unfunded current liability of the plan as of the beginning of the 1st plan year beginning after December 31, 1987 (determined without regard to any plan amendment increasing liabilities adopted after October 16, 1987).

In the case of a plan maintained pursuant to 1 or more collective bargaining agreements between employee representatives and the employer ratified before October 29, 1987, the unfunded old liability amount with respect to such plan for any plan year shall be increased by the amount necessary to amortize the unfunded existing benefit increase liability in equal annual installments over a period of 18 plan years beginning with—

(I) the plan year in which the benefit increase with respect to such liability occurs, or

(II) if the taxpayer elects, the 1st plan year beginning after December 31, 1988.

For purposes of clause (i), the unfunded existing benefit increase liability means, with respect to any benefit increase under the agreements described in clause (i) which takes effect during or after the 1st plan year beginning after December 31, 1987, the unfunded current liability determined—

(I) by taking into account only liabilities attributable to such benefit increase, and

(II) by reducing (but not below zero) the amount determined under paragraph (8)(A)(ii) by the current liability determined without regard to such benefit increase.

For purposes of this subparagraph, any extension, amendment, or other modification of an agreement after October 28, 1987, shall not be taken into account.

The unfunded old liability amount with respect to any plan for any plan year shall be increased by the amount necessary to amortize the amount of additional unfunded old liability under the plan in equal annual installments over a period of 12 plan years (beginning with the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994).

For purposes of clause (i), the term “additional unfunded old liability” means the amount (if any) by which—

(I) the current liability of the plan as of the beginning of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994, valued using the assumptions required by paragraph (7)(C) as in effect for plan years beginning after December 31, 1994, exceeds

(II) the current liability of the plan as of the beginning of such first plan year, valued using the same assumptions used under subclause (I) (other than the assumptions required by paragraph (7)(C)), using the prior interest rate, and using such mortality assumptions as were used to determine current liability for the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1992.

For purposes of clause (ii), the term “prior interest rate” means the rate of interest that is the same percentage of the weighted average under subsection (b)(5)(B)(ii)(I) of this section for the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994, as the rate of interest used by the plan to determine current liability for the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1992, is of the weighted average under subsection (b)(5)(B)(ii)(I) of this section for such first plan year beginning after December 31, 1992.

If an employer makes an election under clause (ii), the additional unfunded old liability for purposes of subparagraph (D) shall be the amount (if any) by which—

(I) the unfunded current liability of the plan as of the beginning of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994, valued using the assumptions required by paragraph (7)(C) as in effect for plan years beginning after December 31, 1994, exceeds

(II) the unamortized portion of the unfunded old liability under the plan as of the beginning of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994.

(I) An employer may irrevocably elect to apply the provisions of this subparagraph as of the beginning of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994.

(II) If an election is made under this clause, the increase under paragraph (1) for any plan year beginning after December 31, 1994, and before January 1, 2002, to which this subsection applies (without regard to this subclause) shall not be less than the increase that would be required under paragraph (1) if the provisions of this subchapter as in effect for the last plan year beginning before January 1, 1995, had remained in effect.

For purposes of this subsection—

The unfunded new liability amount with respect to any plan for any plan year is the applicable percentage of the unfunded new liability.

The term “unfunded new liability” means the unfunded current liability of the plan for the plan year determined without regard to—

(i) the unamortized portion of the unfunded old liability, the unamortized portion of the additional unfunded old liability, the unamortized portion of each unfunded mortality increase, and the unamortized portion of the unfunded existing benefit increase liability, and

(ii) the liability with respect to any unpredictable contingent event benefits (without regard to whether the event has occurred).

The term “applicable percentage” means, with respect to any plan year, 30 percent, reduced by the product of—

(i) .40 multiplied by

(ii) the number of percentage points (if any) by which the funded current liability percentage exceeds 60 percent.

The unpredictable contingent event amount with respect to a plan for any plan year is an amount equal to the greatest of—

(i) the applicable percentage of the product of—

(I) 100 percent, reduced (but not below zero) by the funded current liability percentage for the plan year, multiplied by

(II) the amount of unpredictable contingent event benefits paid during the plan year, including (except as provided by the Secretary of the Treasury) any payment for the purchase of an annuity contract for a participant or beneficiary with respect to such benefits,

(ii) the amount which would be determined for the plan year if the unpredictable contingent event benefit liabilities were amortized in equal annual installments over 7 plan years (beginning with the plan year in which such event occurs), or

(iii) the additional amount that would be determined under paragraph (4)(A) if the unpredictable contingent event benefit liabilities were included in unfunded new liability notwithstanding paragraph (4)(B)(ii).


This paragraph shall not apply to unpredictable contingent event benefits (and liabilities attributable thereto) for which the event occurred before the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1988.

Unless the employer elects otherwise, the amount determined under subparagraph (A) for the plan year in which the event occurs shall be equal to 150 percent of the amount determined under subparagraph (A)(i). The amount under subparagraph (A)(ii) for subsequent plan years in the amortization period shall be adjusted in the manner provided by the Secretary of the Treasury to reflect the application of this subparagraph.

The present value of the amounts described in subparagraph (A) with respect to any one event shall not exceed the unpredictable contingent event benefit liabilities attributable to that event.

This subsection shall not apply to any plan for any plan year if on each day during the preceding plan year such plan had no more than 100 participants.

In the case of a plan to which subparagraph (A) does not apply and which on each day during the preceding plan year had no more than 150 participants, the amount of the increase under paragraph (1) for such plan year shall be equal to the product of—

(i) such increase determined without regard to this subparagraph, multiplied by

(ii) 2 percent for the highest number of participants in excess of 100 on any such day.

For purposes of this paragraph, all defined benefit plans maintained by the same employer (or any member of such employer's controlled group) shall be treated as 1 plan, but only employees of such employer or member shall be taken into account.

For purposes of this subsection—

The term “current liability” means all liabilities to participants and their beneficiaries under the plan.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), any unpredictable contingent event benefit shall not be taken into account until the event on which the benefit is contingent occurs.

The term “unpredictable contingent event benefit” means any benefit contingent on an event other than—

(I) age, service, compensation, death, or disability, or

(II) an event which is reasonably and reliably predictable (as determined by the Secretary of the Treasury).

Effective for plan years beginning after December 31, 1994—

The rate of interest used to determine current liability under this subsection shall be the rate of interest used under subsection (b)(5) of this section, except that the highest rate in the permissible range under subparagraph (B)(ii) thereof shall not exceed the specified percentage under subclause (II) of the weighted average referred to in such subparagraph.

For purposes of subclause (I), the specified percentage shall be determined as follows:


In the case of plan years beginning before the first plan year to which the first tables prescribed under subclause (II) apply, the mortality table used in determining current liability under this subsection shall be the table prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury which is based on the prevailing commissioners’ standard table (described in section 807(d)(5)(A) of title 26) used to determine reserves for group annuity contracts issued on January 1, 1993.

The Secretary of the Treasury may by regulation prescribe for plan years beginning after December 31, 1999, mortality tables to be used in determining current liability under this subsection. Such tables shall be based upon the actual experience of pension plans and projected trends in such experience. In prescribing such tables, the Secretary of the Treasury shall take into account results of available independent studies of mortality of individuals covered by pension plans.

The Secretary of the Treasury shall periodically (at least every 5 years) review any tables in effect under this subsection and shall, to the extent the Secretary determines necessary, by regulation update the tables to reflect the actual experience of pension plans and projected trends in such experience.

Notwithstanding clause (ii)—

In the case of plan years beginning after December 31, 1995, the Secretary of the Treasury shall establish mortality tables which may be used (in lieu of the tables under clause (ii)) to determine current liability under this subsection for individuals who are entitled to benefits under the plan on account of disability. Such Secretary shall establish separate tables for individuals whose disabilities occur in plan years beginning before January 1, 1995, and for individuals whose disabilities occur in plan years beginning on or after such date.

In the case of disabilities occurring in plan years beginning after December 31, 1994, the tables under subclause (I) shall apply only with respect to individuals described in such subclause who are disabled within the meaning of title II of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.] and the regulations thereunder.

In the case of any plan year beginning in 1995, a plan may use its own mortality assumptions for individuals who are entitled to benefits under the plan on account of disability.

In the case of a participant to whom this subparagraph applies, only the applicable percentage of the years of service before such individual became a participant shall be taken into account in computing the current liability of the plan.

For purposes of this subparagraph, the applicable percentage shall be determined as follows:


This subparagraph shall apply to any participant who, at the time of becoming a participant—

(I) has not accrued any other benefit under any defined benefit plan (whether or not terminated) maintained by the employer or a member of the same controlled group of which the employer is a member,

(II) who first becomes a participant under the plan in a plan year beginning after December 31, 1987, and

(III) has years of service greater than the minimum years of service necessary for eligibility to participate in the plan.

An employer may elect not to have this subparagraph apply. Such an election, once made, may be revoked only with the consent of the Secretary of the Treasury.

For purposes of this subsection—

The term “unfunded current liability” means, with respect to any plan year, the excess (if any) of—

(i) the current liability under the plan, over

(ii) value of the plan's assets determined under subsection (c)(2) of this section.

The term “funded current liability percentage” means, with respect to any plan year, the percentage which—

(i) the amount determined under subparagraph (A)(ii), is of

(ii) the current liability under the plan.

The term “controlled group” means any group treated as a single employer under subsections (b), (c), (m), and (*o*) of section 414 of title 26.

The Secretary of the Treasury shall provide such adjustments in the unfunded old liability amount, the unfunded new liability amount, the unpredictable contingent event amount, the current payment amount, and any other charges or credits under this section as are necessary to avoid duplication or omission of any factors in the determination of such amounts, charges, or credits.

For purposes of this subsection, the amount determined under subparagraph (A)(ii) shall be reduced by any credit balance in the funding standard account. The Secretary of the Treasury may provide for such reduction for purposes of any other provision which references this subsection.

Except as provided in paragraph (6)(A), this subsection shall apply to a plan for any plan year if its funded current liability percentage for such year is less than 90 percent.

Subparagraph (A) shall not apply to a plan for a plan year if—

(i) the funded current liability percentage for the plan year is at least 80 percent, and

(ii) such percentage for each of the 2 immediately preceding plan years (or each of the 2d and 3d immediately preceding plan years) is at least 90 percent.

For purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (B), the term “funded current liability percentage” has the meaning given such term by paragraph (8)(B), except that such percentage shall be determined for any plan year—

(i) without regard to paragraph (8)(E), and

(ii) by using the rate of interest which is the highest rate allowable for the plan year under paragraph (7)(C).

For purposes of this paragraph:

The funded current liability percentage for any plan year beginning before January 1, 1995, shall be treated as not less than 90 percent only if for such plan year the plan met one of the following requirements (as in effect for such year):

(I) The full-funding limitation under subsection (c)(7) of this section for the plan was zero.

(II) The plan had no additional funding requirement under this subsection (or would have had no such requirement if its funded current liability percentage had been determined under subparagraph (C)).

(III) The plan's additional funding requirement under this subsection did not exceed the lesser of 0.5 percent of current liability or $5,000,000.

For purposes of determining whether subparagraph (B) applies to any plan year beginning in 1995 or 1996, a plan shall be treated as meeting the requirements of subparagraph (B)(ii) if the plan met the requirements of clause (i) of this subparagraph for any two of the plan years beginning in 1992, 1993, and 1994 (whether or not consecutive).

The unfunded mortality increase amount with respect to each unfunded mortality increase is the amount necessary to amortize such increase in equal annual installments over a period of 10 plan years (beginning with the first plan year for which a plan uses any new mortality table issued under paragraph (7)(C)(ii)(II) or (III)).

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “unfunded mortality increase” means an amount equal to the excess of—

(i) the current liability of the plan for the first plan year for which a plan uses any new mortality table issued under paragraph (7)(C)(ii)(II) or (III), over

(ii) the current liability of the plan for such plan year which would have been determined if the mortality table in effect for the preceding plan year had been used.

For any applicable plan year, at the election of the employer, the increase under paragraph (1) shall not exceed the greater of—

(i) the increase that would be required under paragraph (1) if the provisions of this subchapter as in effect for plan years beginning before January 1, 1995, had remained in effect, or

(ii) the amount which, after taking into account charges (other than the additional charge under this subsection) and credits under subsection (b) of this section, is necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage (taking into account the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year) for the applicable plan year to a percentage equal to the sum of the initial funded current liability percentage of the plan plus the applicable number of percentage points for such applicable plan year.

Except as provided in clause (ii), for plans with an initial funded current liability percentage of 75 percent or less, the applicable number of percentage points for the applicable plan year is:


In the case of a plan to which this clause applies, the applicable number of percentage points for any such applicable plan year is the sum of—

(I) 2 percentage points;

(II) the applicable number of percentage points (if any) under this clause for the preceding applicable plan year;

(III) the product of .10 multiplied by the excess (if any) of (a) 85 percentage points over (b) the sum of the initial funded current liability percentage and the number determined under subclause (II);

(IV) for applicable plan years beginning in 2000, 1 percentage point; and

(V) for applicable plan years beginning in 2001, 2 percentage points.

Clause (ii) shall apply to a plan for an applicable plan year if the initial funded current liability percentage of such plan is more than 75 percent.

In the case of a plan which (but for this subclause) has an initial funded current liability percentage of 75 percent or less, clause (ii) (and not clause (i)) shall apply to such plan with respect to applicable plan years beginning after the first applicable plan year for which the sum of the initial funded current liability percentage and the applicable number of percentage points (determined under clause (i)) exceeds 75 percent. For purposes of applying clause (ii) to such a plan, the initial funded current liability percentage of such plan shall be treated as being the sum referred to in the preceding sentence.

For purposes of this paragraph—

(i) The term “applicable plan year” means a plan year beginning after December 31, 1994, and before January 1, 2002.

(ii) The term “initial funded current liability percentage” means the funded current liability percentage as of the first day of the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1994.

If a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan) which has a funded current liability percentage (as defined in subsection (d)(8) of this section) for the preceding plan year of less than 100 percent fails to pay the full amount of a required installment for the plan year, then the rate of interest charged to the funding standard account under subsection (b)(5) of this section with respect to the amount of the underpayment for the period of the underpayment shall be equal to the greater of—

(A) 175 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of such plan year), or

(B) the rate of interest used under the plan in determining costs (including adjustments under subsection (b)(5)(B) of this section).

For purposes of paragraph (1)—

The amount of the underpayment shall be the excess of—

(i) the required installment, over

(ii) the amount (if any) of the installment contributed to or under the plan on or before the due date for the installment.

The period for which any interest is charged under this subsection with respect to any portion of the underpayment shall run from the due date for the installment to the date on which such portion is contributed to or under the plan (determined without regard to subsection (c)(10) of this section).

For purposes of subparagraph (A)(ii), contributions shall be credited against unpaid required installments in the order in which such installments are required to be paid.

For purposes of this subsection—

There shall be 4 required installments for each plan year.

In the case of the following |
|

required installments: |
The due date is: |

1st | April 15 |

2nd | July 15 |

3rd | October 15 |

4th | January 15 of the following year. |


For purposes of this subsection—

The amount of any required installment shall be the applicable percentage of the required annual payment.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “required annual payment” means the lesser of—

(i) 90 percent of the amount required to be contributed to or under the plan by the employer for the plan year under section 412 of title 26 (without regard to any waiver under subsection (c) thereof), or

(ii) 100 percent of the amount so required for the preceding plan year.

Clause (ii) shall not apply if the preceding plan year was not a year of 12 months.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the applicable percentage shall be determined in accordance with the following table:


In the case of a plan to which subsection (d) of this section applies for any calendar year and which has any unpredictable contingent event benefit liabilities—

Such liabilities shall not be taken into account in computing the required annual payment under subparagraph (B).

Each required installment shall be increased by the greatest of—

(I) the unfunded percentage of the amount of benefits described in subsection (d)(5)(A)(i) of this section paid during the 3-month period preceding the month in which the due date for such installment occurs,

(II) 25 percent of the amount determined under subsection (d)(5)(A)(ii) of this section for the plan year, or

(III) 25 percent of the amount determined under subsection (d)(5)(A)(iii) of this section for the plan year.

For purposes of clause (ii)(I), the term “unfunded percentage” means the percentage determined under subsection (d)(5)(A)(i)(I) of this section for the plan year.

In no event shall the increases under clause (ii) exceed the amount necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage (within the meaning of subsection (d)(8)(B) of this section) for the plan year to 100 percent.

A plan to which this paragraph applies shall be treated as failing to pay the full amount of any required installment to the extent that the value of the liquid assets paid in such installment is less than the liquidity shortfall (whether or not such liquidity shortfall exceeds the amount of such installment required to be paid but for this paragraph).

This paragraph shall apply to a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan or a plan described in subsection (d)(6)(A) of this section) which—

(i) is required to pay installments under this subsection for a plan year, and

(ii) has a liquidity shortfall for any quarter during such plan year.

For purposes of paragraph (1), any portion of an installment that is treated as not paid under subparagraph (A) shall continue to be treated as unpaid until the close of the quarter in which the due date for such installment occurs.

If the amount of any required installment is increased by reason of subparagraph (A), in no event shall such increase exceed the amount which, when added to prior installments for the plan year, is necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage (taking into account the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year) to 100 percent.

For purposes of this paragraph—

The term “liquidity shortfall” means, with respect to any required installment, an amount equal to the excess (as of the last day of the quarter for which such installment is made) of the base amount with respect to such quarter over the value (as of such last day) of the plan's liquid assets.

The term “base amount” means, with respect to any quarter, an amount equal to 3 times the sum of the adjusted disbursements from the plan for the 12 months ending on the last day of such quarter.

If the amount determined under subclause (I) exceeds an amount equal to 2 times the sum of the adjusted disbursements from the plan for the 36 months ending on the last day of the quarter and an enrolled actuary certifies to the satisfaction of the Secretary of the Treasury that such excess is the result of nonrecurring circumstances, the base amount with respect to such quarter shall be determined without regard to amounts related to those nonrecurring circumstances.

The term “disbursements from the plan” means all disbursements from the trust, including purchases of annuities, payments of single sums and other benefits, and administrative expenses.

The term “adjusted disbursements” means disbursements from the plan reduced by the product of—

(I) the plan's funded current liability percentage (as defined in subsection (d)(8) of this section) for the plan year, and

(II) the sum of the purchases of annuities, payments of single sums, and such other disbursements as the Secretary of the Treasury shall provide in regulations.

The term “liquid assets” means cash, marketable securities and such other assets as specified by the Secretary of the Treasury in regulations.

The term “quarter” means, with respect to any required installment, the 3-month period preceding the month in which the due date for such installment occurs.

The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe such regulations as are necessary to carry out this paragraph.

In applying this subsection to a plan year beginning on any date other than January 1, there shall be substituted for the months specified in this subsection, the months which correspond thereto.

This section shall be applied to plan years of less than 12 months in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

In the case of a plan covered under section 1321 of this title, if—

(A) any person fails to make a required installment under subsection (e) of this section or any other payment required under this section before the due date for such installment or other payment, and

(B) the unpaid balance of such installment or other payment (including interest), when added to the aggregate unpaid balance of all preceding such installments or other payments for which payment was not made before the due date (including interest), exceeds $1,000,000,

then there shall be a lien in favor of the plan in the amount determined under paragraph (3) upon all property and rights to property, whether real or personal, belonging to such person and any other person who is a member of the same controlled group of which such person is a member.

This subsection shall apply to a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan) for any plan year for which the funded current liability percentage (within the meaning of subsection (d)(8)(B) of this section) of such plan is less than 100 percent.

For purposes of paragraph (1), the amount of the lien shall be equal to the aggregate unpaid balance of required installments and other payments required under this section (including interest)—

(A) for plan years beginning after 1987, and

(B) for which payment has not been made before the due date.

A person committing a failure described in paragraph (1) shall notify the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation of such failure within 10 days of the due date for the required installment or other payment.

The lien imposed by paragraph (1) shall arise on the due date for the required installment or other payment and shall continue until the last day of the first plan year in which the plan ceases to be described in paragraph (1)(B). Such lien shall continue to run without regard to whether such plan continues to be described in paragraph (2) during the period referred to in the preceding sentence.

Any amount with respect to which a lien is imposed under paragraph (1) shall be treated as taxes due and owing the United States and rules similar to the rules of subsections (c), (d), and (e) of section 1368 of this title shall apply with respect to a lien imposed by subsection (a) of this section and the amount with respect to such lien.

Any lien created under paragraph (1) may be perfected and enforced only by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, or at the direction of the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, by the contributing sponsor (or any member of the controlled group of the contributing sponsor).

For purposes of this subsection—

The terms “due date” and “required installment” have the meanings given such terms by subsection (e) of this section, except that in the case of a payment other than a required installment, the due date shall be the date such payment is required to be made under this section.

The term “controlled group” means any group treated as a single employer under subsections (b), (c), (m), and (*o*) of section 414 of title 26.

For purposes of this section, in the case of a qualified transfer (as defined in section 420 of title 26)—

(1) any assets transferred in a plan year on or before the valuation date for such year (and any income allocable thereto) shall, for purposes of subsection (c)(7) of this section, be treated as assets in the plan as of the valuation date for such year, and

(2) the plan shall be treated as having a net experience loss under subsection (b)(2)(B)(iv) of this section in an amount equal to the amount of such transfer (reduced by any amounts transferred back to the plan under section 420(c)(1)(B) of title 26) and for which amortization charges begin for the first plan year after the plan year in which such transfer occurs, except that such subsection shall be applied to such amount by substituting “10 plan years” for “5 plan years”.

**For alternative amortization method for certain multiemployer plans see section 1013(d) of this Act.**

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §302, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 869; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §304(b), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1293; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9301(b), 9303(b), (d)(2), 9304(a)(2), (b)(2), (e)(2), 9305(b)(2), 9307(a)(2), (b)(2), (e)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–332, 1330–337, 1330–342, 1330–344, 1330–346, 1330–349, 1330–352, 1330–356 to 1330–358; Pub. L. 100–647, title II, §2005(a)(2)(B), (d)(2), Nov. 10, 1988, 102 Stat. 3610, 3612; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(a)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), (5)(B), (6)(B), (b)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), (6)(B)(i), (d)(1)(B), (2), (4), 7891(a)(1), 7892(b), 7894(d)(2), (5), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2435–2439, 2445, 2447, 2449, 2450; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12012(c), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–572; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §§761(a)(1)–(9)(A), (10), 762(a), 763(a), 764(a), 768(b), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5024–5031, 5033–5036, 5041; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1521(b), (c)(2), (3)(B), title XVI, §1604(b)(2)(B), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1069, 1070, 1097.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsecs. (c)(4)(A) and (d)(7)(C)(iii)(II), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 7 (§301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title II of the Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Retirement Protection Act of 1994, referred to in subsec. (d)(11), is subtitle F (§§750–781) of title VII of Pub. L. 103–465, Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5012. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1994 Amendment note set out under section 1 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, and Tables.

Section 1013(d) of this Act, referred to in subsec. (h), is section 1013(d) of Pub. L. 93–406, which is set out as an Alternative Amortization Method for Certain Multi-employer Plans note under section 412 of Title 26.

Section 2005(d)(2) of Pub. L. 100–647, which directed that subsec. (d)(3)(B) of this section be amended by striking out “October 17, 1987” in cl. (i) and inserting in lieu thereof “October 29, 1987”, and by striking out “October 16, 1987” in cl. (iii) and inserting in lieu thereof “October 28, 1987”, could not be executed because it did not contain cls. (i) and (iii).

1997—Subsec. (b)(2)(E). Pub. L. 105–34, §1521(c)(2), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (c)(7)(A)(i)(I). Pub. L. 105–34, §1521(b)(A), substituted “the applicable percentage” for “150 percent”.

Subsec. (c)(7)(D). Pub. L. 105–34, §1521(c)(3)(B), inserted “and” at end of cl. (i), substituted a period for “, and” at end of cl. (ii), and struck out cl. (iii) which read as follows: “for the treatment under this section of contributions which would be required to be made under the plan but for the provisions of subparagraph (A)(i)(I).”

Subsec. (c)(7)(F). Pub. L. 105–34, §1521(b)(B), added subpar. (F).

Subsec. (e)(5)(E)(ii)(II). Pub. L. 105–34, §1604(b)(2)(B), substituted “subclause (I)” for “clause (i)”.

1994—Subsec. (c)(5). Pub. L. 103–465, §762(a), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A), inserted heading, and added subpar. (B).

Subsec. (c)(7)(A)(i). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(10)(A), inserted “(including the expected increase in current liability due to benefits accruing during the plan year)” after “current liability”.

Subsec. (c)(7)(B). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(10)(C), amended heading and text of subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “For purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (D), the term ‘current liability’ has the meaning given such term by subsection (d)(7) of this section (without regard to subparagraph (D) thereof).”

Subsec. (c)(7)(E). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(10)(B), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (c)(12). Pub. L. 103–465, §763(a), added par. (12).

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(1)(A), (2)(B), substituted “to which this subsection applies under paragraph (9)” for “which has an unfunded current liability” in introductory provisions and substituted last sentence for one which read “Such increase shall not exceed the amount necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage to 100 percent.”

Subsec. (d)(1)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(2)(A), amended cl. (ii) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (ii) read as follows: “the sum of the charges for such plan year under subparagraphs (B) (other than clauses (iv) and (v) thereof), (C), and (D) of subsection (b)(2) of this section, reduced by the sum of the credits for such plan year under subparagraph (B)(i) of subsection (b)(3) of this section, plus”.

Subsec. (d)(2)(C), (D). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(3), (7)(B)(i), added subpars. (C) and (D).

Subsec. (d)(3)(D), (E). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(4)(A), added subpars. (D) and (E).

Subsec. (d)(4)(B)(i). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(4)(B), (7)(B)(iii), inserted “, the unamortized portion of the additional unfunded old liability, the unamortized portion of each unfunded mortality increase,” after “the unfunded old liability”.

Subsec. (d)(4)(C). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(5), substituted “.40” for “.25” in cl. (i) and “60” for “35” in cl. (ii).

Subsec. (d)(5)(A). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(6)(A)(i), substituted “greatest of” for “greater of” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (d)(5)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(6)(A)(ii)–(iv), added cl. (iii).

Subsec. (d)(5)(E). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(6)(B), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (d)(7)(C). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(7)(A), amended heading and text of subpar. (C) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “The rate of interest used to determine current liability shall be the rate of interest used under subsection (b)(5) of this section.”

Subsec. (d)(9) to (11). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(1)(B), (7)(B)(ii), (8), added pars. (9) to (11).

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 103–465, §764(a), in introductory provisions, inserted “which has a funded current liability percentage (as defined in subsection (d)(8) of this section) for the preceding plan year of less than 100 percent” before “fails to pay” and substituted “the plan year” for “any plan year”.

Subsec. (e)(4)(D)(ii). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(6)(C)(i), substituted “greatest of” for “greater of” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (e)(4)(D)(ii)(III). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(6)(C)(ii)–(iv), added subcl. (III).

Subsec. (e)(5), (6). Pub. L. 103–465, §761(a)(9)(A), added par. (5) and redesignated former par. (5) as (6).

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 103–465, §768(b)(1), substituted “covered under section 4021 of this title” for “to which this section applies” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (f)(3). Pub. L. 103–465, §768(b)(2), amended heading and text of par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “For purposes of paragraph (1), the amount of the lien shall be equal to the lesser of—

“(A) the amount by which the unpaid balances described in paragraph (1)(B) (including interest) exceed $1,000,000, or

“(B) the aggregate unpaid balance of required installments and other payments required under this section (including interest)—

“(i) for plan years beginning after 1987, and

“(ii) for which payment has not been made before the due date.”

Subsec. (f)(4)(B). Pub. L. 103–465, §768(b)(3), struck out “60th day following the” before “due date”.

1990—Subsecs. (g), (h). Pub. L. 101–508 added subsec. (g) and redesignated former subsec. (g) as (h).

1989—Subsec. (b)(3)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(2), substituted comma for period at end.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(d)(2)(B), struck out introductory provision which read as follows: “For purposes of determining a plan's current liability and for purposes of determining a plan's required contribution under section 412(*l*) of title 26 for any plan year—”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(d)(2)(A), inserted introductory provision “For purposes of determining a plan's current liability and for purposes of determining a plan's required contribution under subsection (d) of this section for any plan year—”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(B)(ii)(I). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(d)(2)(C), substituted “the weighted average of the rates” for “average rate”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(d)(1)(B), struck out “for purposes of this section and for purposes of determining current liability,” before “the interest rate” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (b)(7)(B), (E). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(d)(4), realigned margins.

Subsec. (c)(4)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (c)(6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(5), substituted “section 1085 of this title” for “subsection (g) of this section”.

Subsec. (c)(7). Pub. L. 101–239, §7892(b), realigned margins.

Subsec. (c)(9). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(6)(B), substituted “every year” for “every 3 years”.

Subsec. (c)(10)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(1)(B), inserted “defined benefit” before “plan other”.

Subsec. (c)(10)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(2)(B), substituted “plan not described in subparagraph (A)” for “multiemployer plan”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(C)(ii)(II). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(1)(B), inserted “(but not below zero)” after “reducing”.

Subsec. (d)(4)(B)(i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(2)(B), inserted “and the unamortized portion of the unfunded existing benefit increase liability” after “liability”.

Subsec. (d)(5)(C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(3)(B), substituted “the first plan year beginning after December 31, 1988” for “October 17, 1987”.

Subsec. (d)(7)(D)(iii)(III). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(4)(B)(i), added subcl. (III).

Subsec. (d)(7)(D)(iv). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(4)(B)(ii), added cl. (iv).

Subsec. (d)(8)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(5)(B)(i), struck out “reduced by any credit balance in the funding standard account” after “this section”.

Subsec. (d)(8)(E). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(a)(5)(B)(ii), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(3)(B), inserted “defined benefit” before “plan (other”.

Subsec. (e)(1)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(6)(B)(i), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “the rate under subsection (b)(5) of this section.”

Subsec. (e)(4)(D). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(4)(B), amended subpar. (D) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (D) read as follows: “In the case of a plan with any unpredictable contingent event benefit liabilities—

“(i) such liabilities shall not be taken into account in computing the required annual payment under subparagraph (B), and

“(ii) each required installment shall be increased by the greater of—

“(I) the amount of benefits described in subsection (d)(5)(A)(i) of this section paid during the 3-month period preceding the month in which the due date for such installment occurs, or

“(II) 25 percent of the amount determined under subsection (d)(5)(A)(ii) of this section for the plan year.”

1988—Subsec. (d)(3)(C). Pub. L. 100–647, §2005(a)(2)(B), substituted “October 29” for “October 17” in cl. (i) and “October 28” for “October 16” in cl. (iii).

1987—Subsec. (b)(2)(B)(iv), (C), (3)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9307(a)(2)(A), substituted “5 plan years (15 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” for “15 plan years”.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B)(v), (3)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9307(a)(2)(B), substituted “10 plan years (30 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” for “30 plan years”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–203, §9307(e)(2), amended par. (5) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (5) read as follows: “The funding standard account (and items therein) shall be charged or credited (as determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury) with interest at the appropriate rate consistent with the rate or rates of interest used under the plan to determine costs.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–203, §9303(d)(2), inserted at end “In the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, this subparagraph shall not apply, but the Secretary of the Treasury may by regulations provide that the value of any dedicated bond portfolio of such plan shall be determined by using the interest rate under subsection (b)(5) of this section.”

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–203, §9307(b)(2), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “For purposes of this part, all costs, liabilities, rates of interest, and other factors under the plan shall be determined on the basis of actuarial assumptions and methods which, in the aggregate, are reasonable (taking into account the experience of the plan and reasonable expectations) and which, in combination, offer the actuary's best estimate of anticipated experience under the plan.”

Subsec. (c)(7). Pub. L. 100–203, §9301(b), amended par. (7) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (7) read as follows: “For purposes of paragraph (6), the term ‘full funding limitation’ means the excess (if any) of—

“(A) the accrued liability (including normal cost) under the plan (determined under the entry age normal funding method if such accrued liability cannot be directly calculated under the funding method used for the plan), over

“(B) the lesser of the fair market value of the plan's assets or the value of such assets determined under paragraph (2).”

Subsec. (c)(10). Pub. L. 100–203, §9304(a)(2), amended par. (10) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (10) read as follows: “For purposes of this part, any contributions for a plan year made by an employer after the last day of such plan year, but not later than 21/2 months after such day, shall be deemed to have been made on such last day. For purposes of this paragraph, such 21/2 month period may be extended for not more than 6 months under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.”

Subsec. (c)(11). Pub. L. 100–203, §9305(b)(2), added par. (11).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–203, §9303(b)(1), added subsec. (d). Former subsec. (d) “Cross reference” redesignated (e).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 100–203, §9304(b)(2), added subsec. (e). Former subsec. (e) “Cross reference” redesignated (f).

Pub. L. 100–203, §9303(b)(1), redesignated former subsec. (d) as (e).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–203, §9304(e)(2), added subsec. (f). Former subsec. (f) “Cross reference” redesignated (g).

Pub. L. 100–203, §9304(b)(2), redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 100–203, §9304(e)(2), redesignated former subsec. (f) as (g).

1980—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 96–364, §304(b)(3), added par. (3).

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 96–364, §304(b)(1), struck out in par. (B)(ii) and (iii) “(40 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” after “30 plan years” and in par. (B)(iv) “(20 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” after “15 plan years”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 96–364, §304(b)(1), struck out in par. (B)(i) “(40 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” after “30 plan years” and in par. (B)(ii) “(20 plan years in the case of a multiemployer plan)” after “15 plan years”.

Subsec. (b)(6), (7). Pub. L. 96–364, §304(b)(2), added pars. (6) and (7).

Amendment by section 1521(b), (c)(2), (3)(B) of Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1998, see section 1521(d)(1) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 1604(b)(2)(B) of Pub. L. 105–34 effective as if included in the sections of the Uruguay Round Agreements Act, Pub. L. 103–465, to which it relates, see section 1604(b)(4) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 761(a)(1)–(9)(A), (10) of Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1994, see section 761(b)(1) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Section 762(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) such change would have required the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury had such amendment applied to such change, and

“(B) such change is not so approved.”

Section 763(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to plan years beginning after December 31, 1994 with respect to collective bargaining agreements in effect on or after January 1, 1995.”

Section 764(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to plan years beginning after the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].

Amendment by section 768(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 effective for installments and other payments required under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, or under this part, that become due on or after Dec. 8, 1994, see section 768(c) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to qualified transfers under section 420 of title 26 made after Nov. 5, 1990, see section 12012(e) of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 1021 of this title.

Amendment by section 7881(a)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), (5)(B), (6)(B), (b)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), (6)(B)(i), (d)(1)(B), (2), (4) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7892(b) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7892(c) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1052 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(d)(2), (5) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–647 effective as if included in the amendments made by the provisions of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1987, Pub. L. 100–203, to which it relates, see section 2005(e) of Pub. L. 100–647, set out as a note under section 404 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 9301(b) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9301(c)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 9303(b) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, see section 9303(e)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9303(d)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9303(e)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9304(a)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9304(a)(3) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9304(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan years beginning after 1988, see section 9304(b)(3) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9304(e)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9304(e)(3) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9305(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9305(d) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26.

Amendment by section 9307(a)(2), (b)(2), (e)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, except that subsec. (b)(2)(B)(iv), (3)(B)(ii) of this section (as amended by section 9307(a)(2)(A) of Pub. L. 100–203) is applicable to gains and losses established in years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9307(f) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 404 of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1023, 1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1060, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1085a, 1085b, 1301, 1303, 1306, 1310, 1311, 1342, 1343, 1362, 1371, 1423 of this title; title 26 section 412.

If an employer, or in the case of a multi-employer plan, 10 percent or more of the number of employers contributing to or under the plan are unable to satisfy the minimum funding standard for a plan year without temporary substantial business hardship (substantial business hardship in the case of a multiemployer plan) and if application of the standard would be adverse to the interests of plan participants in the aggregate, the Secretary of the Treasury may waive the requirements of section 1082(a) of this title for such year with respect to all or any portion of the minimum funding standard other than the portion thereof determined under section 1082(b)(2)(C) of this title. The Secretary of the Treasury shall not waive the minimum funding standard with respect to a plan for more than 3 of any 15 (5 of any 15 in the case of a multiemployer plan) consecutive plan years. The interest rate used for purposes of computing the amortization charge described in subsection (b)(2)(C) of this section for any plan year shall be—

(1) in the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, the greater of (A) 150 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of such plan year), or (B) the rate of interest used under the plan in determining costs (including adjustments under section 1082(b)(5)(B) of this title), and

(2) in the case of a multiemployer plan, the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.

For purposes of this part, the factors taken into account in determining temporary substantial business hardship (substantial business hardship in the case of a multiemployer plan) shall include (but shall not be limited to) whether—

(1) the employer is operating at an economic loss,

(2) there is substantial unemployment or underemployment in the trade or business and in the industry concerned,

(3) the sales and profits of the industry concerned are depressed or declining, and

(4) it is reasonable to expect that the plan will be continued only if the waiver is granted.

For purposes of this part, the term “waived funding deficiency” means the portion of the minimum funding standard (determined without regard to subsection (b)(3)(C) of section 1082 of this title) for a plan year waived by the Secretary of the Treasury and not satisfied by employer contributions.

In the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, no waiver may be granted under this section with respect to any plan for any plan year unless an application therefor is submitted to the Secretary of the Treasury not later than the 15th day of the 3rd month beginning after the close of such plan year.

In the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, if an employer is a member of a controlled group, the temporary substantial business hardship requirements of subsection (a) of this section shall be treated as met only if such requirements are met—

(i) with respect to such employer, and

(ii) with respect to the controlled group of which such employer is a member (determined by treating all members of such group as a single employer).

The Secretary of the Treasury may provide that an analysis of a trade or business or industry of a member need not be conducted if the Secretary of the Treasury determines such analysis is not necessary because the taking into account of such member would not significantly affect the determination under this subsection.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “controlled group” means any group treated as a single employer under subsection (b), (c), (m), or (*o*) of section 414 of title 26.

(1) The Secretary of the Treasury shall, before granting a waiver under this section, require each applicant to provide evidence satisfactory to such Secretary that the applicant has provided notice of the filing of the application for such waiver to each employee organization representing employees covered by the affected plan, and each affected party (as defined in section 1301(a)(21) of this title) other than the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation. Such notice shall include a description of the extent to which the plan is funded for benefits which are guaranteed under subchapter III of this chapter and for benefit liabilities.

(2) The Secretary of the Treasury shall consider any relevant information provided by a person to whom notice was given under paragraph (1).

**For corresponding duties of the Secretary of the Treasury with regard to implementation of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, see section 412(d) of title 26.**

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §303, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 872; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §§11015(b)(1)(A), 11016(c)(2), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 267, 273; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9306(a)(2), (b)(2), (c)(2)(A), (d)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–353 to 1330–355; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(b)(6)(B)(ii), (7), (8), (c)(2), 7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2438, 2439, 2445.)

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsec. (f), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(7), redesignated pars. (A) and (B) as pars. (1) and (2), respectively, realigned margins, redesignated cls. (i) and (ii) as subpars. (A) and (B), respectively, of par. (1), and made technical correction to reference to section 6621(b) of title 26 in par. (2) resulting in no change in text.

Subsec. (a)(1)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(6)(B)(ii), inserted “(including adjustments under section 1082(b)(5)(B) of this title)” after “costs”.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(c)(2), substituted “for benefit liabilities” for “the benefit liabilities” in last sentence.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(8), transferred subsec. (f) to follow immediately after subsec. (e).

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(a)(2)(B), substituted “temporary substantial business hardship (substantial business hardship in the case of a multiemployer plan)” for “substantial business hardship”.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(b)(2), substituted “more than 3 of any 15 (5 of any 15 in the case of a multiemployer plan)” for “more than 5 of any 15”.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(c)(2)(A), substituted “The interest rate used for purposes of computing the amortization charge described in subsection (b)(2)(C) of this section for any plan year shall be—” and pars. (A) and (B) for “The interest rate used for purposes of computing the amortization charge described in section 1082(b)(2)(C) of this title for a variance granted under this subsection shall be the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(a)(2)(B), substituted “temporary substantial business hardship (substantial business hardship in the case of a multiemployer plan)” for “substantial business hardship”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(a)(2)(A), added subsec. (d)(1). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (f).

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(a)(2)(C), added par. (2).

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(d)(2), substituted “plan, and each affected party (as defined in section 1301(a)(21) of this title) other than the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation. Such notice shall include a description of the extent to which the plan is funded for benefits which are guaranteed under subchapter III of this chapter and the benefit liabilities.” for “plan.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(a)(2)(A), redesignated former subsec. (d) as (f).

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11015(b)(1)(A), inserted provision that the interest rate used for purposes of computing the amortization charge described in section 1082(b)(2)(C) of this title for a variance granted under this subsection be the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(2), added subsec. (e).

Amendment by section 7881(b)(6)(B)(ii), (7), (8), (c)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable in the case of any application submitted after Dec. 17, 1987, and any waiver granted pursuant to such an application, except that the amendment by section 9306(a)(2)(A) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, amendment by section 9306(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to waivers for plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, and amendment by section 9306(d)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to applications submitted more than 90 days after Dec. 22, 1987, with certain exceptions and transitional rules, see section 9306(f) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1057, 1082, 1084, 1085a, 1143, 1362, 1423 of this title; title 26 section 412.

The period of years required to amortize any unfunded liability (described in any clause of subsection (b)(2)(B) of section 1082 of this title) of any plan may be extended by the Secretary for a period of time (not in excess of 10 years) if he determines that such extension would carry out the purposes of this chapter and would provide adequate protection for participants under the plan and their beneficiaries and if he determines that the failure to permit such extension would—

(1) result in—

(A) a substantial risk to the voluntary continuation of the plan, or

(B) a substantial curtailment of pension benefit levels or employee compensation, and

(2) be adverse to the interests of plan participants in the aggregate.

In the case of a plan other than a multiemployer plan, the interest rate applicable for any plan year under any arrangement entered into by the Secretary in connection with an extension granted under this subsection shall be the greater of (A) 150 percent of the Federal mid-term rate (as in effect under section 1274 of title 26 for the 1st month of such plan year), or (B) the rate of interest used under the plan in determining costs. In the case of a multiemployer plan, such rate shall be the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.

(1) No amendment of the plan which increases the liabilities of the plan by reason of any increase in benefits, any change in the accrual of benefits, or any change in the rate at which benefits become nonforfeitable under the plan shall be adopted if a waiver under section 1083(a) of this title or an extension of time under subsection (a) of this section is in effect with respect to the plan, or if a plan amendment described in section 1082(c)(8) of this title has been made at any time in the preceding 12 months (24 months in the case of a multiemployer plan). If a plan is amended in violation of the preceding sentence, any such waiver, or extension of time, shall not apply to any plan year ending on or after the date on which such amendment is adopted.

(2) Paragraph (1) shall not apply to any plan amendment which—

(A) the Secretary determines to be reasonable and which provides for only de minimis increases in the liabilities of the plan,

(B) only repeals an amendment described in section 1082(c)(8) of this title, or

(C) is required as a condition of qualification under part I of subchapter D, of chapter 1, of title 26.

(1) The Secretary of the Treasury shall, before granting an extension under this section, require each applicant to provide evidence satisfactory to such Secretary that the applicant has provided notice of the filing of the application for such extension to each employee organization representing employees covered by the affected plan.

(2) The Secretary of the Treasury shall consider any relevant information provided by a person to whom notice was given under paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §304, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 873; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §§11015(b)(1)(B), 11016(c)(3), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 267, 273; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9306(c)(2)(B), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–355; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(d)(3), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2449.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(d)(3), substituted a comma for period at end.

Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–203 amended last sentence generally. Prior to amendment, last sentence read as follows: “The interest rate applicable under any arrangement entered into by the Secretary in connection with an extension granted under this subsection shall be the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.”

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11015(b)(1)(B), inserted provision that the interest rate applicable under any arrangement entered into by the Secretary in connection with an extension granted under this subsection be the rate determined under section 6621(b) of title 26.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(3), added subsec. (c).

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(d)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable in the case of any application submitted after Dec. 17, 1987, and any waiver granted pursuant to such an application, see section 9306(f) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1057, 1085a, 1143, 1362 of this title; title 26 section 412.

A plan which uses a funding method that requires contributions in all years not less than those required under the entry age normal funding method may maintain an alternative minimum funding standard account for any plan year. Such account shall be credited and charged solely as provided in this section.

For a plan year the alternative minimum funding standard accounts shall be—

(1) charged with the sum of—

(A) the lesser of normal cost under the funding method used under the plan or normal cost determined under the unit credit method,

(B) the excess, if any, of the present value of accrued benefits under the plan over the fair market value of the assets, and

(C) an amount equal to the excess, if any, of credits to the alternative minimum funding standard account for all prior plan years over charges to such account for all such years, and

(2) credited with the amount considered contributed by the employer to or under the plan (within the meaning of section 1082(c)(10) of this title) for the plan year.

The alternative minimum funding standard account (and items therein) shall be charged or credited with interest in the manner provided under section 1082(b)(5) of this title with respect to the funding standard account.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §305, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 873.)

This section is referred to in section 1082 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, the Secretary of the Treasury may require an employer maintaining a defined benefit plan which is a single-employer plan (within the meaning of section 1301(a)(15) of this title) to provide security to such plan as a condition for granting or modifying a waiver under section 1083 of this title or an extension under section 1084 of this title.

Any security provided under paragraph (1) may be perfected and enforced only by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation or, at the direction of the Corporation, by a contributing sponsor (within the meaning of section 1301(a)(13) of this title) or a member of such sponsor's controlled group (within the meaning of section 1301(a)(14) of this title).

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, the Secretary of the Treasury shall, before granting or modifying a waiver under section 1083 of this title or an extension under section 1084 of this title with respect to a plan described in subsection (a)(1) of this section—

(1) provide the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation with—

(A) notice of the completed application for any waiver, extension, or modification, and

(B) an opportunity to comment on such application within 30 days after receipt of such notice, and

(2) consider—

(A) any comments of the Corporation under paragraph (1)(B), and

(B) any views of any employee organization representing participants in the plan which are submitted in writing to the Secretary of the Treasury in connection with such application.

Information provided to the corporation under this subsection shall be considered tax return information and subject to the safeguarding and reporting requirements of section 6103(p) of title 26.

The preceding provisions of this section shall not apply to any plan with respect to which the sum of—

(A) the outstanding balance of the accumulated funding deficiencies (within the meaning of section 1082(a)(2) of this title and section 412(a) of title 26) of the plan,

(B) the outstanding balance of the amount of waived funding deficiencies of the plan waived under section 1083 of this title or section 412(d) of title 26, and

(C) the outstanding balance of the amount of decreases in the minimum funding standard allowed under section 1084 of this title or section 412(e) of title 26,

is less than $1,000,000.

For purposes of paragraph (1)(A), accumulated funding deficiencies shall include any increase in such amount which would result if all applications for waivers of the minimum funding standard under section 1083 of this title or section 412(d) of title 26 and for extensions of the amortization period under section 1084 of this title or section 412(e) of title 26 which are pending with respect to such plan were denied.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §306, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11015(a)(1)(A)(ii), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 264; amended Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9306(e)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–355; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

A prior section 306 of Pub. L. 93–406 was renumbered section 308 and is classified to section 1086 of this title.

1989—Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 100–203, §9306(e)(2), substituted “$1,000,000” for “$2,000,000”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable in the case of any application submitted after Dec. 17, 1987, and any waiver granted pursuant to such an application, see section 9306(f) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 11015(a)(3) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “The amendments made by this subsection [enacting this section and amending section 1061 of this title and section 412 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code] shall apply with respect to applications for waivers, extensions, and modifications filed on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986].”

If—

(1) a defined benefit plan (other than a multiemployer plan) to which the requirements of section 1082 of this title apply adopts an amendment an effect of which is to increase current liability under the plan for a plan year, and

(2) the funded current liability percentage of the plan for the plan year in which the amendment takes effect is less than 60 percent, including the amount of the unfunded current liability under the plan attributable to the plan amendment,

the contributing sponsor (or any member of the controlled group of the contributing sponsor) shall provide security to the plan.

The security required under subsection (a) of this section shall consist of—

(1) a bond issued by a corporate surety company that is an acceptable surety for purposes of section 1112 of this title,

(2) cash, or United States obligations which mature in 3 years or less, held in escrow by a bank or similar financial institution, or

(3) such other form of security as is satisfactory to the Secretary of the Treasury and the parties involved.

The security shall be in an amount equal to the excess of—

(1) the lesser of—

(A) the amount of additional plan assets which would be necessary to increase the funded current liability percentage under the plan to 60 percent, including the amount of the unfunded current liability under the plan attributable to the plan amendment, or

(B) the amount of the increase in current liability under the plan attributable to the plan amendment and any other plan amendments adopted after December 22, 1987, and before such plan amendment, over

(2) $10,000,000.

The security shall be released (and any amounts thereunder shall be refunded together with any interest accrued thereon) at the end of the first plan year which ends after the provision of the security and for which the funded current liability percentage under the plan is not less than 60 percent. The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe regulations for partial releases of the security by reason of increases in the funded current liability percentage.

A contributing sponsor which is required to provide security under subsection (a) of this section shall notify the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation within 30 days after the amendment requiring such security takes effect. Such notice shall contain such information as the Corporation may require.

For purposes of this section, the terms “current liability”, “funded current liability percentage”, and “unfunded current liability” shall have the meanings given such terms by section 1082(d) of this title, except that in computing unfunded current liability there shall not be taken into account any unamortized portion of the unfunded old liability amount as of the close of the plan year.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §307, as added Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9341(b)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–370; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(i)(1)(B)–(3)(A), (4)(B), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2442.)

A prior section 307 of Pub. L. 93–406 was renumbered section 308 and is classified to section 1086 of this title.

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(i)(4)(B), inserted “to which the requirements of section 1082 of this title apply” after “multiemployer plan)”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(i)(1)(B), which directed amendment of subsec. (c)(1)(B) by inserting “and any other plan amendments adopted after December 22, 1987, and before such plan amendment” without specifying where such language was to be inserted, was executed by making the insertion after “to the plan amendment”, as the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(i)(2), inserted “of the Treasury” after “Secretary”.

Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(i)(3)(A), added subsec. (e) and redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section applicable to plan amendments adopted after Dec. 22, 1987, except that, in the case of a plan maintained pursuant to one or more collective bargaining agreements between employee representatives and one or more employers ratified before Dec. 22, 1987, this section not applicable to plan amendments adopted pursuant to collective bargaining agreements ratified before Dec. 22, 1987, see section 9341(c) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as an Effective Date of 1987 Amendment note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in section 1371 of this title.

(a) Except as otherwise provided in this section, this part shall apply in the case of plan years beginning after September 2, 1974.

(b) Except as otherwise provided in subsections (c) and (d) of this section, in the case of a plan in existence on January 1, 1974, this part shall apply in the case of plan years beginning after December 31, 1975.

(c)(1) In the case of a plan maintained on January 1, 1974, pursuant to one or more agreements which the Secretary finds to be collective bargaining agreements between employee representatives and one or more employers, this part shall apply only with respect to plan years beginning after the earlier of the date specified in subparagraph (A) or (B) of section 1061(c)(1) of this title.

(2) This subsection shall apply with respect to a plan if (and only if) the application of this subsection results in a later effective date for this part than the effective date required by subsection (b) of this section.

(d) In the case of a plan the administrator of which elects under section 1017(d) of this Act to have the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 relating to participation, vesting, funding, and form of benefit to apply to a plan year and to all subsequent plan years, this part shall apply to plan years beginning on the earlier of the first plan year to which such election applies or the first plan year determined under subsections (a), (b), and (c) of this section.

(e) In the case of a plan maintained by a labor organization which is exempt from tax under section 501(c)(5) of title 26 exclusively for the benefit of its employees and their beneficiaries, this part shall be applied by substituting for the term “December 31, 1975” in subsection (b) of this section, the earlier of—

(1) the date on which the second convention of such labor organization held after September 2, 1974, ends or

(2) December 31, 1980,

but in no event shall a date earlier than the later of December 31, 1975, or the date determined under subsection (c) of this section be substituted.

(f) The preceding provisions of this section shall not apply with respect to amendments made to this part in provisions enacted after September 2, 1974.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §308, formerly §306, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 874, renumbered §307, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11015(a)(1)(A)(i), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 264; renumbered §308, Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9341(b)(1), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–370; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(h)(3), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2451.)

Section 1017 of this Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is section 1017 of Pub. L. 93–406, which is set out as an Effective Date; Transitional Rules note under section 410 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1954, referred to in subsec. (d), was redesignated the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 by Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095, and is classified to Title 26.

1989—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–239 added subsec. (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1061 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1002, 1055, 1056, 1132, 1169, 1201, 1342, 1349 of this title.

This part shall apply to any employee benefit plan described in section 1003(a) of this title (and not exempted under section 1003(b) of this title), other than—

(1) a plan which is unfunded and is maintained by an employer primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees; or

(2) any agreement described in section 736 of title 26, which provides payments to a retired partner or deceased partner or a deceased partner's successor in interest.

For purposes of this part:

(1) In the case of a plan which invests in any security issued by an investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 [15 U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.], the assets of such plan shall be deemed to include such security but shall not, solely by reason of such investment, be deemed to include any assets of such investment company.

(2) In the case of a plan to which a guaranteed benefit policy is issued by an insurer, the assets of such plan shall be deemed to include such policy, but shall not, solely by reason of the issuance of such policy, be deemed to include any assets of such insurer. For purposes of this paragraph:

(A) The term “insurer” means an insurance company, insurance service, or insurance organization, qualified to do business in a State.

(B) The term “guaranteed benefit policy” means an insurance policy or contract to the extent that such policy or contract provides for benefits the amount of which is guaranteed by the insurer. Such term includes any surplus in a separate account, but excludes any other portion of a separate account.

(1)(A) Not later than June 30, 1997, the Secretary shall issue proposed regulations to provide guidance for the purpose of determining, in cases where an insurer issues 1 or more policies to or for the benefit of an employee benefit plan (and such policies are supported by assets of such insurer's general account), which assets held by the insurer (other than plan assets held in its separate accounts) constitute assets of the plan for purposes of this part and section 4975 of title 26 and to provide guidance with respect to the application of this subchapter to the general account assets of insurers.

(B) The proposed regulations under subparagraph (A) shall be subject to public notice and comment until September 30, 1997.

(C) The Secretary shall issue final regulations providing the guidance described in subparagraph (A) not later than December 31, 1997.

(D) Such regulations shall only apply with respect to policies which are issued by an insurer on or before December 31, 1998, to or for the benefit of an employee benefit plan which is supported by assets of such insurer's general account. With respect to policies issued on or before December 31, 1998, such regulations shall take effect at the end of the 18-month period following the date on which such regulations become final.

(2) The Secretary shall ensure that the regulations issued under paragraph (1)—

(A) are administratively feasible, and

(B) protect the interests and rights of the plan and of its participants and beneficiaries (including meeting the requirements of paragraph (3)).

(3) The regulations prescribed by the Secretary pursuant to paragraph (1) shall require, in connection with any policy issued by an insurer to or for the benefit of an employee benefit plan to the extent that the policy is not a guaranteed benefit policy (as defined in subsection (b)(2)(B) of this section)—

(A) that a plan fiduciary totally independent of the insurer authorize the purchase of such policy (unless such purchase is a transaction exempt under section 1108(b)(5) of this title),

(B) that the insurer describe (in such form and manner as shall be prescribed in such regulations), in annual reports and in policies issued to the policyholder after the date on which such regulations are issued in final form pursuant to paragraph (1)(C)—

(i) a description of the method by which any income and expenses of the insurer's general account are allocated to the policy during the term of the policy and upon the termination of the policy, and

(ii) for each report, the actual return to the plan under the policy and such other financial information as the Secretary may deem appropriate for the period covered by each such annual report,

(C) that the insurer disclose to the plan fiduciary the extent to which alternative arrangements supported by assets of separate accounts of the insurer (which generally hold plan assets) are available, whether there is a right under the policy to transfer funds to a separate account and the terms governing any such right, and the extent to which support by assets of the insurer's general account and support by assets of separate accounts of the insurer might pose differing risks to the plan, and

(D) that the insurer manage those assets of the insurer which are assets of such insurer's general account (irrespective of whether any such assets are plan assets) with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims, taking into account all obligations supported by such enterprise.

(4) Compliance by the insurer with all requirements of the regulations issued by the Secretary pursuant to paragraph (1) shall be deemed compliance by such insurer with sections 1104, 1106, and 1107 of this title with respect to those assets of the insurer's general account which support a policy described in paragraph (3).

(5)(A) Subject to subparagraph (B), any regulations issued under paragraph (1) shall not take effect before the date on which such regulations become final.

(B) No person shall be subject to liability under this part or section 4975 of title 26 for conduct which occurred before the date which is 18 months following the date described in subparagraph (A) on the basis of a claim that the assets of an insurer (other than plan assets held in a separate account) constitute assets of the plan, except—

(i) as otherwise provided by the Secretary in regulations intended to prevent avoidance of the regulations issued under paragraph (1), or

(ii) as provided in an action brought by the Secretary pursuant to paragraph (2) or (5) of section 1132(a) of this title for a breach of fiduciary responsibilities which would also constitute a violation of Federal or State criminal law.

The Secretary shall bring a cause of action described in clause (ii) if a participant, beneficiary, or fiduciary demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Secretary that a breach described in clause (ii) has occurred.

(6) Nothing in this subsection shall preclude the application of any Federal criminal law.

(7) For purposes of this subsection, the term “policy” includes a contract.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §401, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 874; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1460(a), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1820.)

The Investment Company Act of 1940, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), is title I of act Aug. 22, 1940, ch. 686, 54 Stat. 789, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter I (§80a–1 et seq.) of chapter 2D of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 80a–51 of Title 15 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–188 added subsec. (c).

1989—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Section 1460(b) of Pub. L. 104–188 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle D [§§1401–1465] of title I of Pub. L. 104–188 require an amendment to any plan or annuity contract, such amendment shall not be required to be made before the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 1465 of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in section 1003 of this title; title 26 section 4975.

(1) Every employee benefit plan shall be established and maintained pursuant to a written instrument. Such instrument shall provide for one or more named fiduciaries who jointly or severally shall have authority to control and manage the operation and administration of the plan.

(2) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “named fiduciary” means a fiduciary who is named in the plan instrument, or who, pursuant to a procedure specified in the plan, is identified as a fiduciary (A) by a person who is an employer or employee organization with respect to the plan or (B) by such an employer and such an employee organization acting jointly.

Every employee benefit plan shall—

(1) provide a procedure for establishing and carrying out a funding policy and method consistent with the objectives of the plan and the requirements of this subchapter,

(2) describe any procedure under the plan for the allocation of responsibilities for the operation and administration of the plan (including any procedures described in section 1105(c)(1) of this title),

(3) provide a procedure for amending such plan, and for identifying the persons who have authority to amend the plan, and

(4) specify the basis on which payments are made to and from the plan.

Any employee benefit plan may provide—

(1) that any person or group of persons may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity with respect to the plan (including service both as trustee and administrator);

(2) that a named fiduciary, or a fiduciary designated by a named fiduciary pursuant to a plan procedure described in section 1105(c)(1) of this title, may employ one or more persons to render advice with regard to any responsibility such fiduciary has under the plan; or

(3) that a person who is a named fiduciary with respect to control or management of the assets of the plan may appoint an investment manager or managers to manage (including the power to acquire and dispose of) any assets of a plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §402, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 875.)

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1103, 1105, 1114 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, all assets of an employee benefit plan shall be held in trust by one or more trustees. Such trustee or trustees shall be either named in the trust instrument or in the plan instrument described in section 1102(a) of this title or appointed by a person who is a named fiduciary, and upon acceptance of being named or appointed, the trustee or trustees shall have exclusive authority and discretion to manage and control the assets of the plan, except to the extent that—

(1) the plan expressly provides that the trustee or trustees are subject to the direction of a named fiduciary who is not a trustee, in which case the trustees shall be subject to proper directions of such fiduciary which are made in accordance with the terms of the plan and which are not contrary to this chapter, or

(2) authority to manage, acquire, or dispose of assets of the plan is delegated to one or more investment managers pursuant to section 1102(c)(3) of this title.

The requirements of subsection (a) of this section shall not apply—

(1) to any assets of a plan which consist of insurance contracts or policies issued by an insurance company qualified to do business in a State;

(2) to any assets of such an insurance company or any assets of a plan which are held by such an insurance company;

(3) to a plan—

(A) some or all of the participants of which are employees described in section 401(c)(1) of title 26; or

(B) which consists of one or more individual retirement accounts described in section 408 of title 26;

to the extent that such plan's assets are held in one or more custodial accounts which qualify under section 401(f) or 408(h) of title 26, whichever is applicable.

(4) to a plan which the Secretary exempts from the requirement of subsection (a) of this section and which is not subject to any of the following provisions of this chapter—

(A) part 2 of this subtitle,

(B) part 3 of this subtitle, or

(C) subchapter III of this chapter; or

(5) to a contract established and maintained under section 403(b) of title 26 to the extent that the assets of the contract are held in one or more custodial accounts pursuant to section 403(b)(7) of title 26.

(6) Any plan, fund or program under which an employer, all of whose stock is directly or indirectly owned by employees, former employees or their beneficiaries, proposes through an unfunded arrangement to compensate retired employees for benefits which were forfeited by such employees under a pension plan maintained by a former employer prior to the date such pension plan became subject to this chapter.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), (3), or (4) or subsection (d) of this section, or under sections 1342 and 1344 of this title (relating to termination of insured plans), or under section 420 of title 26 (as in effect on January 1, 1995), the assets of a plan shall never inure to the benefit of any employer and shall be held for the exclusive purposes of providing benefits to participants in the plan and their beneficiaries and defraying reasonable expenses of administering the plan.

(2)(A) In the case of a contribution, or a payment of withdrawal liability under part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter—

(i) if such contribution or payment is made by an employer to a plan (other than a multiemployer plan) by a mistake of fact, paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return of such contribution to the employer within one year after the payment of the contribution, and

(ii) if such contribution or payment is made by an employer to a multiemployer plan by a mistake of fact or law (other than a mistake relating to whether the plan is described in section 401(a) of title 26 or the trust which is part of such plan is exempt from taxation under section 501(a) of title 26), paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return of such contribution or payment to the employer within 6 months after the plan administrator determines that the contribution was made by such a mistake.

(B) If a contribution is conditioned on initial qualification of the plan under section 401 or 403(a) of title 26, and if the plan receives an adverse determination with respect to its initial qualification, then paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return of such contribution to the employer within one year after such determination, but only if the application for the determination is made by the time prescribed by law for filing the employer's return for the taxable year in which such plan was adopted, or such later date as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.

(C) If a contribution is conditioned upon the deductibility of the contribution under section 404 of title 26, then, to the extent the deduction is disallowed, paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return to the employer of such contribution (to the extent disallowed) within one year after the disallowance of the deduction.

(3) In the case of a withdrawal liability payment which has been determined to be an overpayment, paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return of such payment to the employer within 6 months after the date of such determination.

(1) Upon termination of a pension plan to which section 1321 of this title does not apply at the time of termination and to which this part applies (other than a plan to which no employer contributions have been made) the assets of the plan shall be allocated in accordance with the provisions of section 1344 of this title, except as otherwise provided in regulations of the Secretary.

(2) The assets of a welfare plan which terminates shall be distributed in accordance with the terms of the plan, except as otherwise provided in regulations of the Secretary.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §403, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 876; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §310, title IV, §§402(b)(2), 410(a), 411(c), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1296, 1299, 1308; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9343(c), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–372; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(k), 7891(a)(1), 7894(e)(1)(A), (3), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2443, 2445, 2450; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12012(a), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–571; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §731(c)(4)(B), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5004.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1) and (b)(4), (6), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 103–465 substituted “1995” for “1991”.

1990—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 101–508 inserted “, or under section 420 of title 26 (as in effect on January 1, 1991)” after “insured plans”.

1989—Subsecs. (b)(3), (5), (c)(2)(A)(ii), (C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(3), redesignated cls. (i) and (ii) as subpars. (A) and (B), respectively, struck out “, to the extent that such plan's assets are held in one or more custodial accounts which qualify under section 401(f) or 408(h) of title 26, whichever is applicable” before the semicolon in subpar. (B), and inserted concluding provision “to the extent that such plan's assets are held in one or more custodial accounts which qualify under section 401(f) or 408(h) of title 26, whichever is applicable.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(1)(A), in introductory provisions, made technical amendment to reference to part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter to correct reference to corresponding part of original Act, requiring no change in text, and in cls. (i) and (ii), inserted “if such contribution or payment is” before “made by an employer”.

Subsec. (c)(3), (4). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(k), redesignated par. (4) as (3) and struck out former par. (3) which read as follows: “In the case of a contribution which would otherwise be an excess contribution (as defined in section 4979(c) of title 26) paragraph (1) shall not prohibit a correcting distribution with respect to such contribution from the plan to the employer to the extent permitted in such section to avoid payment of an excise tax on excess contributions under such section.”

1987—Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–203, §9343(c)(1), amended subpar. (B) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (B) read as follows: “If a contribution is conditioned on qualification of the plan under section 401, 403(a), or 405(a) of title 26, and if the plan does not qualify, then paragraph (1) shall not prohibit the return of such contributions to the employer within one year after the date of denial of qualification of the plan.”

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–203, §9343(c)(2), substituted “section 4979(c) of title 26” for “section 4972(b) of title 26”.

1980—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(b)(2), substituted “chapter” for “subchapter”.

Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 96–364, §411(c), added par. (6).

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 96–364, §310(1), inserted reference to par. (4).

Subsec. (c)(2)(A). Pub. L. 96–364, §410(a), substituted provisions relating to contributions or payments of withdrawal liability under part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter made by an employer to a plan by a mistake of fact, and by an employer to a multiemployer plan by a mistake of fact or law, for provisions relating to contributions made by an employer by a mistake of fact.

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 96–364, §310(2), added par. (4).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to qualified transfers under section 420 of title 26 made after Nov. 5, 1990, see section 12012(e) of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 1021 of this title.

Amendment by section 7881(k) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(e)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 410 of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 [Pub. L. 96–364].”

Amendment by section 7894(e)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Amendment by section 410(a) of Pub. L. 96–364 effective Jan. 1, 1975, except with respect to contributions received by a collectively bargained plan maintained by more than one employer before Sept. 26, 1980, see section 410(c) of Pub. L. 96–364, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this part call for the promulgation of regulations, see sections 1031 and 1114 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1104, 1105, 1114, 1403 of this title; title 26 section 409.

(1) Subject to sections 1103(c) and (d), 1342, and 1344 of this title, a fiduciary shall discharge his duties with respect to a plan solely in the interest of the participants and beneficiaries and—

(A) for the exclusive purpose of:

(i) providing benefits to participants and their beneficiaries; and

(ii) defraying reasonable expenses of administering the plan;

(B) with the care, skill, prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of a like character and with like aims;

(C) by diversifying the investments of the plan so as to minimize the risk of large losses, unless under the circumstances it is clearly prudent not to do so; and

(D) in accordance with the documents and instruments governing the plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of this subchapter and subchapter III of this chapter.

(2) In the case of an eligible individual account plan (as defined in section 1107(d)(3) of this title), the diversification requirement of paragraph (1)(C) and the prudence requirement (only to the extent that it requires diversification) of paragraph (1)(B) is not violated by acquisition or holding of qualifying employer real property or qualifying employer securities (as defined in section 1107(d)(4) and (5) of this title).

Except as authorized by the Secretary by regulations, no fiduciary may maintain the indicia of ownership of any assets of a plan outside the jurisdiction of the district courts of the United States.

(1) In the case of a pension plan which provides for individual accounts and permits a participant or beneficiary to exercise control over the assets in his account, if a participant or beneficiary exercises control over the assets in his account (as determined under regulations of the Secretary)—

(A) such participant or beneficiary shall not be deemed to be a fiduciary by reason of such exercise, and

(B) no person who is otherwise a fiduciary shall be liable under this part for any loss, or by reason of any breach, which results from such participant's or beneficiary's exercise of control.

(2) In the case of a simple retirement account established pursuant to a qualified salary reduction arrangement under section 408(p) of title 26, a participant or beneficiary shall, for purposes of paragraph (1), be treated as exercising control over the assets in the account upon the earliest of—

(A) an affirmative election among investment options with respect to the initial investment of any contribution,

(B) a rollover to any other simple retirement account or individual retirement plan, or

(C) one year after the simple retirement account is established.

No reports, other than those required under section 1021(g) of this title, shall be required with respect to a simple retirement account established pursuant to such a qualified salary reduction arrangement.

(1) If, in connection with the termination of a pension plan which is a single-employer plan, there is an election to establish or maintain a qualified replacement plan, or to increase benefits, as provided under section 4980(d) of title 26, a fiduciary shall discharge the fiduciary's duties under this subchapter and subchapter III of this chapter in accordance with the following requirements:

(A) In the case of a fiduciary of the terminated plan, any requirement—

(i) under section 4980(d)(2)(B) of title 26 with respect to the transfer of assets from the terminated plan to a qualified replacement plan, and

(ii) under section 4980(d)(2)(B)(ii) or 4980(d)(3) of title 26 with respect to any increase in benefits under the terminated plan.

(B) In the case of a fiduciary of a qualified replacement plan, any requirement—

(i) under section 4980(d)(2)(A) of title 26 with respect to participation in the qualified replacement plan of active participants in the terminated plan,

(ii) under section 4980(d)(2)(B) of title 26 with respect to the receipt of assets from the terminated plan, and

(iii) under section 4980(d)(2)(C) of title 26 with respect to the allocation of assets to participants of the qualified replacement plan.

(2) For purposes of this subsection—

(A) any term used in this subsection which is also used in section 4980(d) of title 26 shall have the same meaning as when used in such section, and

(B) any reference in this subsection to title 26 shall be a reference to title 26 as in effect immediately after the enactment of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1990.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §404, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 877; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §309, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1296; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12002(b)(1), (2)(A), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–565, 1388–566; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1421(d)(2), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1799.)

The enactment of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (d)(2)(B), is the enactment of Pub. L. 101–508, which was approved Nov. 5, 1990.

1996—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–188 designated existing provisions as par. (1), redesignated former pars. (1) and (2) as subpars. (A) and (B), respectively, and added par. (2).

1990—Subsec. (a)(1)(D). Pub. L. 101–508, §12002(b)(2)(A), substituted “and subchapter III” for “or subchapter III”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–508, §12002(b)(1), added subsec. (d).

1980—Subsec. (a)(1)(D). Pub. L. 96–364 inserted reference to subchapter III of this chapter.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 applicable to taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1996, see section 1421(e) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 72 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to reversions occurring after Sept. 30, 1990, but not applicable to any reversion after Sept. 30, 1990, if (1) in the case of plans subject to subchapter III of this chapter, notice of intent to terminate under such subchapter was provided to participants (or if no participants, to Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation) before Oct. 1, 1990, (2) in the case of plans subject to subchapter I of this chapter (and not subchapter III), notice of intent to reduce future accruals under section 1054(h) of this title was provided to participants in connection with termination before Oct. 1, 1990, (3) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter, a request for a determination letter with respect to termination was filed with Secretary of the Treasury or Secretary's delegate before Oct. 1, 1990, or (4) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter and having only one participant, a resolution terminating the plan was adopted by employer before Oct. 1, 1990, see section 12003 of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 4980 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this part call for the promulgation of regulations, see sections 1031 and 1114 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle D [§§1401–1465] of title I of Pub. L. 104–188 require an amendment to any plan or annuity contract, such amendment shall not be required to be made before the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 1465 of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1101, 1105, 1107, 1344, 1403 of this title.

In addition to any liability which he may have under any other provisions of this part, a fiduciary with respect to a plan shall be liable for a breach of fiduciary responsibility of another fiduciary with respect to the same plan in the following circumstances:

(1) if he participates knowingly in, or knowingly undertakes to conceal, an act or omission of such other fiduciary, knowing such act or omission is a breach;

(2) if, by his failure to comply with section 1104(a)(1) of this title in the administration of his specific responsibilities which give rise to his status as a fiduciary, he has enabled such other fiduciary to commit a breach; or

(3) if he has knowledge of a breach by such other fiduciary, unless he makes reasonable efforts under the circumstances to remedy the breach.

(1) Except as otherwise provided in subsection (d) of this section and in section 1103(a)(1) and (2) of this title, if the assets of a plan are held by two or more trustees—

(A) each shall use reasonable care to prevent a co-trustee from committing a breach; and

(B) they shall jointly manage and control the assets of the plan, except that nothing in this subparagraph (B) shall preclude any agreement, authorized by the trust instrument, allocating specific responsibilities, obligations, or duties among trustees, in which event a trustee to whom certain responsibilities, obligations, or duties have not been allocated shall not be liable by reason of this subparagraph (B) either individually or as a trustee for any loss resulting to the plan arising from the acts or omissions on the part of another trustee to whom such responsibilities, obligations, or duties have been allocated.

(2) Nothing in this subsection shall limit any liability that a fiduciary may have under subsection (a) of this section or any other provision of this part.

(3)(A) In the case of a plan the assets of which are held in more than one trust, a trustee shall not be liable under paragraph (1) except with respect to an act or omission of a trustee of a trust of which he is a trustee.

(B) No trustee shall be liable under this subsection for following instructions referred to in section 1103(a)(1) of this title.

(1) The instrument under which a plan is maintained may expressly provide for procedures (A) for allocating fiduciary responsibilities (other than trustee responsibilities) among named fiduciaries, and (B) for named fiduciaries to designate persons other than named fiduciaries to carry out fiduciary responsibilities (other than trustee responsibilities) under the plan.

(2) If a plan expressly provides for a procedure described in paragraph (1), and pursuant to such procedure any fiduciary responsibility of a named fiduciary is allocated to any person, or a person is designated to carry out any such responsibility, then such named fiduciary shall not be liable for an act or omission of such person in carrying out such responsibility except to the extent that—

(A) the named fiduciary violated section 1104(a)(1) of this title—

(i) with respect to such allocation or designation,

(ii) with respect to the establishment or implementation of the procedure under this paragraph (1), or

(iii) in continuing the allocation or designation; or

(B) the named fiduciary would otherwise be liable in accordance with subsection (a) of this section.

(3) For purposes of this subsection, the term “trustee responsibility” means any responsibility provided in the plan's trust instrument (if any) to manage or control the assets of the plan, other than a power under the trust instrument of a named fiduciary to appoint an investment manager in accordance with section 1102(c)(3) of this title.

(1) If an investment manager or managers have been appointed under section 1102(c)(3) of this title, then, notwithstanding subsections (a)(2) and (3) and subsection (b) of this section, no trustees shall be liable for the acts or omissions of such investment manager or managers, or be under an obligation to invest or otherwise manage any asset of the plan which is subject to the management of such investment manager.

(2) Nothing in this subsection shall relieve any trustee of any liability under this part for any act of such trustee.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §405, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 878.)

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1102, 1110, 1114 of this title; title 26 section 4975.

Except as provided in section 1108 of this title:

(1) A fiduciary with respect to a plan shall not cause the plan to engage in a transaction, if he knows or should know that such transaction constitutes a direct or indirect—

(A) sale or exchange, or leasing, of any property between the plan and a party in interest;

(B) lending of money or other extension of credit between the plan and a party in interest;

(C) furnishing of goods, services, or facilities between the plan and a party in interest;

(D) transfer to, or use by or for the benefit of a party in interest, of any assets of the plan; or

(E) acquisition, on behalf of the plan, of any employer security or employer real property in violation of section 1107(a) of this title.

(2) No fiduciary who has authority or discretion to control or manage the assets of a plan shall permit the plan to hold any employer security or employer real property if he knows or should know that holding such security or real property violates section 1107(a) of this title.

A fiduciary with respect to a plan shall not—

(1) deal with the assets of the plan in his own interest or for his own account,

(2) in his individual or in any other capacity act in any transaction involving the plan on behalf of a party (or represent a party) whose interests are adverse to the interests of the plan or the interests of its participants or beneficiaries, or

(3) receive any consideration for his own personal account from any party dealing with such plan in connection with a transaction involving the assets of the plan.

A transfer of real or personal property by a party in interest to a plan shall be treated as a sale or exchange if the property is subject to a mortgage or similar lien which the plan assumes or if it is subject to a mortgage or similar lien which a party-in-interest placed on the property within the 10-year period ending on the date of the transfer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §406, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 879.)

This section is referred to in sections 1101, 1108, 1114, 1132, 1203, 1399, 1411 of this title; title 26 section 4975.

Except as otherwise provided in this section and section 1114 of this title:

(1) A plan may not acquire or hold—

(A) any employer security which is not a qualifying employer security, or

(B) any employer real property which is not qualifying employer real property.

(2) A plan may not acquire any qualifying employer security or qualifying employer real property, if immediately after such acquisition the aggregate fair market value of employer securities and employer real property held by the plan exceeds 10 percent of the fair market value of the assets of the plan.

(3)(A) After December 31, 1984, a plan may not hold any qualifying employer securities or qualifying employer real property (or both) to the extent that the aggregate fair market value of such securities and property determined on December 31, 1984, exceeds 10 percent of the greater of—

(i) the fair market value of the assets of the plan, determined on December 31, 1984, or

(ii) the fair market value of the assets of the plan determined on January 1, 1975.

(B) Subparagraph (A) of this paragraph shall not apply to any plan which on any date after December 31, 1974; and before January 1, 1985, did not hold employer securities or employer real property (or both) the aggregate fair market value of which determined on such date exceeded 10 percent of the greater of

(i) the fair market value of the assets of the plan, determined on such date, or

(ii) the fair market value of the assets of the plan determined on January 1, 1975.

(4)(A) After December 31, 1979, a plan may not hold any employer securities or employer real property in excess of the amount specified in regulations under subparagraph (B). This subparagraph shall not apply to a plan after the earliest date after December 31, 1974, on which it complies with such regulations.

(B) Not later than December 31, 1976, the Secretary shall prescribe regulations which shall have the effect of requiring that a plan divest itself of 50 percent of the holdings of employer securities and employer real property which the plan would be required to divest before January 1, 1985, under paragraph (2) or subsection (c) of this section (whichever is applicable).

(1) Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to any acquisition or holding of qualifying employer securities or qualifying employer real property by an eligible individual account plan.

(2)(A) If this paragraph applies to an eligible individual account plan, the portion of such plan which consists of applicable elective deferrals (and earnings allocable thereto) shall be treated as a separate plan—

(i) which is not an eligible individual account plan, and

(ii) to which the requirements of this section apply.

(B)(i) This paragraph shall apply to any eligible individual account plan if any portion of the plan's applicable elective deferrals (or earnings allocable thereto) are required to be invested in qualifying employer securities or qualifying employer real property or both—

(I) pursuant to the terms of the plan, or

(II) at the direction of a person other than the participant on whose behalf such elective deferrals are made to the plan (or a beneficiary).

(ii) This paragraph shall not apply to an individual account plan for a plan year if, on the last day of the preceding plan year, the fair market value of the assets of all individual account plans maintained by the employer equals not more than 10 percent of the fair market value of the assets of all pension plans (other than multiemployer plans) maintained by the employer.

(iii) This paragraph shall not apply to an individual account plan that is an employee stock ownership plan as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of title 26.

(iv) This paragraph shall not apply to an individual account plan if, pursuant to the terms of the plan, the portion of any employee's applicable elective deferrals which is required to be invested in qualifying employer securities and qualifying employer real property for any year may not exceed 1 percent of the employee's compensation which is taken into account under the plan in determining the maximum amount of the employee's applicable elective deferrals for such year.

(C) For purposes of this paragraph, the term “applicable elective deferral” means any elective deferral (as defined in section 402(g)(3)(A) of title 26) which is made pursuant to a qualified cash or deferred arrangement as defined in section 401(k) of title 26.

(3)

**(A) For exemption from diversification requirements for holding of qualifying employer securities and qualifying employer real property by eligible individual account plans, see section 1104(a)(2) of this title.**

**(B) For exemption from prohibited transactions for certain acquisitions of qualifying employer securities and qualifying employer real property which are not in violation of 10 percent limitation, see section 1108(e) of this title.**

**(C) For transitional rules respecting securities or real property subject to binding contracts in effect on June 30, 1974, see section 1114(c) of this title.**

(1) A plan which makes the election, under paragraph (3) shall be treated as satisfying the requirement of subsection (a)(3) of this section if and only if employer securities held on any date after December 31, 1974 and before January 1, 1985 have a fair market value, determined as of December 31, 1974, not in excess of 10 percent of the lesser of—

(A) the fair market value of the assets of the plan determined on such date (disregarding any portion of the fair market value of employer securities which is attributable to appreciation of such securities after December 31, 1974) but not less than the fair market value of plan assets on January 1, 1975, or

(B) an amount equal to the sum of (i) the total amount of the contributions to the plan received after December 31, 1974, and prior to such date, plus (ii) the fair market value of the assets of the plan, determined on January 1, 1975.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, in the case of an employer security held by a plan after January 1, 1975, the ownership of which is derived from ownership of employer securities held by the plan on January 1, 1975, or from the exercise of rights derived from such ownership, the value of such security held after January 1, 1975, shall be based on the value as of January 1, 1975, of the security from which ownership was derived. The Secretary shall prescribe regulations to carry out this paragraph.

(3) An election under this paragraph may not be made after December 31, 1975. Such an election shall be made in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, and shall be irrevocable. A plan may make an election under this paragraph only if on January 1, 1975, the plan holds no employer real property. After such election and before January 1, 1985 the plan may not acquire any employer real property.

For purposes of this section—

(1) The term “employer security” means a security issued by an employer of employees covered by the plan, or by an affiliate of such employer. A contract to which section 1108(b)(5) of this title applies shall not be treated as a security for purposes of this section.

(2) The term “employer real property” means real property (and related personal property) which is leased to an employer of employees covered by the plan, or to an affiliate of such employer. For purposes of determining the time at which a plan acquires employer real property for purposes of this section, such property shall be deemed to be acquired by the plan on the date on which the plan acquires the property or on the date on which the lease to the employer (or affiliate) is entered into, whichever is later.

(3)(A) The term “eligible individual account plan” means an individual account plan which is (i) a profit-sharing, stock bonus, thrift, or savings plan; (ii) an employee stock ownership plan; or (iii) a money purchase plan which was in existence on September 2, 1974, and which on such date invested primarily in qualifying employer securities. Such term excludes an individual retirement account or annuity described in section 408 of title 26.

(B) Notwithstanding subparagraph (A), a plan shall be treated as an eligible individual account plan with respect to the acquisition or holding of qualifying employer real property or qualifying employer securities only if such plan explicitly provides for acquisition and holding of qualifying employer securities or qualifying employer real property (as the case may be). In the case of a plan in existence on September 2, 1974, this subparagraph shall not take effect until January 1, 1976.

(C) The term “eligible individual account plan” does not include any individual account plan the benefits of which are taken into account in determining the benefits payable to a participant under any defined benefit plan.

(4) The term “qualifying employer real property” means parcels of employer real property—

(A) if a substantial number of the parcels are dispersed geographically;

(B) if each parcel of real property and the improvements thereon are suitable (or adaptable without excessive cost) for more than one use;

(C) even if all of such real property is leased to one lessee (which may be an employer, or an affiliate of an employer); and

(D) if the acquisition and retention of such property comply with the provisions of this part (other than section 1104(a)(1)(B) of this title to the extent it requires diversification, and sections 1104(a)(1)(C), 1106 of this title, and subsection (a) of this section).

(5) The term “qualifying employer security” means an employer security which is—

(A) stock,

(B) a marketable obligation (as defined in subsection (e) of this section), or

(C) an interest in a publicly traded partnership (as defined in section 7704(b) of title 26), but only if such partnership is an existing partnership as defined in section 10211(c)(2)(A) of the Revenue Act of 1987 (Public Law 100–203).

After December 17, 1987, in the case of a plan other than an eligible individual account plan, an employer security described in subparagraph (A) or (C) shall be considered a qualifying employer security only if such employer security satisfies the requirements of subsection (f)(1) of this section.

(6) The term “employee stock ownership plan” means an individual account plan—

(A) which is a stock bonus plan which is qualified, or a stock bonus plan and money purchase plan both of which are qualified, under section 401 of title 26, and which is designed to invest primarily in qualifying employer securities, and

(B) which meets such other requirements as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe by regulation.

(7) A corporation is an affiliate of an employer if it is a member of any controlled group of corporations (as defined in section 1563(a) of title 26, except that “applicable percentage” shall be substituted for “80 percent” wherever the latter percentage appears in such section) of which the employer who maintains the plan is a member. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the term “applicable percentage” means 50 percent, or such lower percentage as the Secretary may prescribe by regulation. A person other than a corporation shall be treated as an affiliate of an employer to the extent provided in regulations of the Secretary. An employer which is a person other than a corporation shall be treated as affiliated with another person to the extent provided by regulations of the Secretary. Regulations under this paragraph shall be prescribed only after consultation and coordination with the Secretary of the Treasury.

(8) The Secretary may prescribe regulations specifying the extent to which conversions, splits, the exercise of rights, and similar transactions are not treated as acquisitions.

(9) For purposes of this section, an arrangement which consists of a defined benefit plan and an individual account plan shall be treated as 1 plan if the benefits of such individual account plan are taken into account in determining the benefits payable under such defined benefit plan.

For purposes of subsection (d)(5) of this section, the term “marketable obligation” means a bond, debenture, note, or certificate, or other evidence of indebtedness (hereinafter in this subsection referred to as “obligation”) if—

(1) such obligation is acquired—

(A) on the market, either (i) at the price of the obligation prevailing on a national securities exchange which is registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or (ii) if the obligation is not traded on such a national securities exchange, at a price not less favorable to the plan than the offering price for the obligation as established by current bid and asked prices quoted by persons independent of the issuer;

(B) from an underwriter, at a price (i) not in excess of the public offering price for the obligation as set forth in a prospectus or offering circular filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, and (ii) at which a substantial portion of the same issue is acquired by persons independent of the issuer; or

(C) directly from the issuer, at a price not less favorable to the plan than the price paid currently for a substantial portion of the same issue by persons independent of the issuer;

(2) immediately following acquisition of such obligation—

(A) not more than 25 percent of the aggregate amount of obligations issued in such issue and outstanding at the time of acquisition is held by the plan, and

(B) at least 50 percent of the aggregate amount referred to in subparagraph (A) is held by persons independent of the issuer; and

(3) immediately following acquisition of the obligation, not more than 25 percent of the assets of the plan is invested in obligations of the employer or an affiliate of the employer.

(1) Stock satisfies the requirements of this paragraph if, immediately following the acquisition of such stock—

(A) no more than 25 percent of the aggregate amount of stock of the same class issued and outstanding at the time of acquisition is held by the plan, and

(B) at least 50 percent of the aggregate amount referred to in subparagraph (A) is held by persons independent of the issuer.

(2) Until January 1, 1993, a plan shall not be treated as violating subsection (a) of this section solely by holding stock which fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1) if such stock—

(A) has been so held since December 17, 1987, or

(B) was acquired after December 17, 1987, pursuant to a legally binding contract in effect on December 17, 1987, and has been so held at all times after the acquisition.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §407, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 880; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9345(a)(1), (2), (b), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–373; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(*l*)(1)–(4), 7891(a)(1), 7894(e)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2443, 2445, 2450; Pub. L. 101–540, §1, Nov. 8, 1990, 104 Stat. 2379; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1524(a), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1071.)

Section 10211(c)(2)(A) of the Revenue Act of 1987 (Public Law 100–203), referred to in subsec. (d)(5)(C), is set out as a note under section 7704 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1997—Subsec. (b)(2), (3). Pub. L. 105–34 added par. (2) and redesignated former par. (2) as (3).

1990—Subsec. (d)(5). Pub. L. 101–540 amended par. (5) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (5) read as follows: “The term ‘qualifying employer security’ means an employer security which is stock or a marketable obligation (as defined in subsection (e) of this section). After December 17, 1987, in the case of a plan other than an eligible individual account plan, stock shall be considered a qualifying employer security only if such stock satisfies the requirements of subsection (f)(1) of this section.”

1989—Subsec. (d)(3)(A), (6)(A), (7). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (d)(3)(C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(*l*)(1), realigned margin.

Subsec. (d)(6)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(2), substituted “money purchase plan” for “money purchase” and “employer securities” for “employee securities”.

Subsec. (d)(9). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(*l*)(2), substituted “such individual account plan” for “such arrangement” and realigned margin.

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(*l*)(3)(A), (4), substituted “paragraph” for “subsection” and “if, immediately following the acquisition of such stock” for “if”.

Subsec. (f)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(*l*)(3)(B), struck out par. (3) which read as follows: “After December 17, 1987, no plan may acquire stock which does not satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1) unless the acquisition is made pursuant to a legally binding contract in effect on such date.”

1987—Subsec. (d)(3)(C). Pub. L. 100–203, §9345(a)(1), added subpar. (C).

Subsec. (d)(5). Pub. L. 100–203, §9345(b)(1), inserted at end “After December 17, 1987, in the case of a plan other than an eligible individual account plan, stock shall be considered a qualifying employer security only if such stock satisfies the requirements of subsection (f)(1) of this section.”

Subsec. (d)(9). Pub. L. 100–203, §9345(a)(2), added par. (9).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–203, §9345(b)(2), added subsec. (f).

Section 1524(b) of Pub. L. 105–34 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to elective deferrals for plan years beginning after December 31, 1998.”

Section 2 of Pub. L. 101–540 provided that: “The amendment made by section 1 [amending this section] shall apply to interests in publicly traded partnerships acquired before, on, or after January 1, 1987.”

Amendment by section 7881(*l*)(1)–(4) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(e)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9345(a)(3) of Pub. L. 100–203 provided that: “The amendments made by this subsection [amending this section] shall apply with respect to arrangements established after December 17, 1987.”

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this part call for the promulgation of regulations, see sections 1031 and 1114 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1101, 1104, 1106, 1108, 1114, 1222 of this title; title 19 section 2373.

The Secretary shall establish an exemption procedure for purposes of this subsection. Pursuant to such procedure, he may grant a conditional or unconditional exemption of any fiduciary or transaction, or class of fiduciaries or transactions, from all or part of the restrictions imposed by sections 1106 and 1107(a) of this title. Action under this subsection may be taken only after consultation and coordination with the Secretary of the Treasury. An exemption granted under this section shall not relieve a fiduciary from any other applicable provision of this chapter. The Secretary may not grant an exemption under this subsection unless he finds that such exemption is—

(1) administratively feasible,

(2) in the interests of the plan and of its participants and beneficiaries, and

(3) protective of the rights of participants and beneficiaries of such plan.

Before granting an exemption under this subsection from section 1106(a) or 1107(a) of this title, the Secretary shall publish notice in the Federal Register of the pendency of the exemption, shall require that adequate notice be given to interested persons, and shall afford interested persons opportunity to present views. The Secretary may not grant an exemption under this subsection from section 1106(b) of this title unless he affords an opportunity for a hearing and makes a determination on the record with respect to the findings required by paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this subsection.

The prohibitions provided in section 1106 of this title shall not apply to any of the following transactions:

(1) Any loans made by the plan to parties in interest who are participants or beneficiaries of the plan if such loans (A) are available to all such participants and beneficiaries on a reasonably equivalent basis, (B) are not made available to highly compensated employees (within the meaning of section 414(q) of title 26) in an amount greater than the amount made available to other employees, (C) are made in accordance with specific provisions regarding such loans set forth in the plan, (D) bear a reasonable rate of interest, and (E) are adequately secured. A loan made by a plan shall not fail to meet the requirements of the preceding sentence by reason of a loan repayment suspension described under section 414(u)(4) of title 26.

(2) Contracting or making reasonable arrangements with a party in interest for office space, or legal, accounting, or other services necessary for the establishment or operation of the plan, if no more than reasonable compensation is paid therefor.

(3) A loan to an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 1107(d)(6) of this title), if—

(A) such loan is primarily for the benefit of participants and beneficiaries of the plan, and

(B) such loan is at an interest rate which is not in excess of a reasonable rate.

If the plan gives collateral to a party in interest for such loan, such collateral may consist only of qualifying employer securities (as defined in section 1107(d)(5) of this title).

(4) The investment of all or part of a plan's assets in deposits which bear a reasonable interest rate in a bank or similar financial institution supervised by the United States or a State, if such bank or other institution is a fiduciary of such plan and if—

(A) the plan covers only employees of such bank or other institution and employees of affiliates of such bank or other institution, or

(B) such investment is expressly authorized by a provision of the plan or by a fiduciary (other than such bank or institution or affiliate thereof) who is expressly empowered by the plan to so instruct the trustee with respect to such investment.

(5) Any contract for life insurance, health insurance, or annuities with one or more insurers which are qualified to do business in a State, if the plan pays no more than adequate consideration, and if each such insurer or insurers is—

(A) the employer maintaining the plan, or

(B) a party in interest which is wholly owned (directly or indirectly) by the employer maintaining the plan, or by any person which is a party in interest with respect to the plan, but only if the total premiums and annuity consideration written by such insurers for life insurance, health insurance, or annuities for all plans (and their employers) with respect to which such insurers are parties in interest (not including premiums or annuity considerations written by the employer maintaining the plan) do not exceed 5 percent of the total premiums and annuity considerations written for all lines of insurance in that year by such insurers (not including premiums or annuity considerations written by the employer maintaining the plan).

(6) The providing of any ancillary service by a bank or similar financial institution supervised by the United States or a State, if such bank or other institution is a fiduciary of such plan, and if—

(A) such bank or similar financial institution has adopted adequate internal safeguards which assure that the providing of such ancillary service is consistent with sound banking and financial practice, as determined by Federal or State supervisory authority, and

(B) the extent to which such ancillary service is provided is subject to specific guidelines issued by such bank or similar financial institution (as determined by the Secretary after consultation with Federal and State supervisory authority), and adherence to such guidelines would reasonably preclude such bank or similar financial institution from providing such ancillary service (i) in an excessive or unreasonable manner, and (ii) in a manner that would be inconsistent with the best interests of participants and beneficiaries of employee benefit plans.

Such ancillary services shall not be provided at more than reasonable compensation.

(7) The exercise of a privilege to convert securities, to the extent provided in regulations of the Secretary, but only if the plan receives no less than adequate consideration pursuant to such conversion.

(8) Any transaction between a plan and (i) a common or collective trust fund or pooled investment fund maintained by a party in interest which is a bank or trust company supervised by a State or Federal agency or (ii) a pooled investment fund of an insurance company qualified to do business in a State, if—

(A) the transaction is a sale or purchase of an interest in the fund,

(B) the bank, trust company, or insurance company receives not more than reasonable compensation, and

(C) such transaction is expressly permitted by the instrument under which the plan is maintained, or by a fiduciary (other than the bank, trust company, or insurance company, or an affiliate thereof) who has authority to manage and control the assets of the plan.

(9) The making by a fiduciary of a distribution of the assets of the plan in accordance with the terms of the plan if such assets are distributed in the same manner as provided under section 1344 of this title (relating to allocation of assets).

(10) Any transaction required or permitted under part 1 of subtitle E of subchapter III of this chapter.

(11) A merger of multiemployer plans, or the transfer of assets or liabilities between multiemployer plans, determined by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation to meet the requirements of section 1411 of this title.

(12) The sale by a plan to a party in interest on or after December 18, 1987, of any stock, if—

(A) the requirements of paragraphs (1) and (2) of subsection (e) of this section are met with respect to such stock,

(B) on the later of the date on which the stock was acquired by the plan, or January 1, 1975, such stock constituted a qualifying employer security (as defined in section 1107(d)(5) of this title as then in effect), and

(C) such stock does not constitute a qualifying employer security (as defined in section 1107(d)(5) of this title as in effect at the time of the sale).

(13) Any transfer in a taxable year beginning before January 1, 2001, of excess pension assets from a defined benefit plan to a retiree health account in a qualified transfer permitted under section 420 of title 26 (as in effect on January 1, 1995).

Nothing in section 1106 of this title shall be construed to prohibit any fiduciary from—

(1) receiving any benefit to which he may be entitled as a participant or beneficiary in the plan, so long as the benefit is computed and paid on a basis which is consistent with the terms of the plan as applied to all other participants and beneficiaries;

(2) receiving any reasonable compensation for services rendered, or for the reimbursement of expenses properly and actually incurred, in the performance of his duties with the plan; except that no person so serving who already receives full time pay from an employer or an association of employers, whose employees are participants in the plan, or from an employee organization whose members are participants in such plan shall receive compensation from such plan, except for reimbursement of expenses properly and actually incurred; or

(3) serving as a fiduciary in addition to being an officer, employee, agent, or other representative of a party in interest.

(1) Section 1107(b) of this title and subsections (b), (c), and (e) of this section shall not apply to a transaction in which a plan directly or indirectly—

(A) lends any part of the corpus or income of the plan to,

(B) pays any compensation for personal services rendered to the plan to, or

(C) acquires for the plan any property from, or sells any property to,

any person who is with respect to the plan an owner-employee (as defined in section 401(c)(3) of title 26), a member of the family (as defined in section 267(c)(4) of such title) of any such owner-employee, or any corporation in which any such owner-employee owns, directly or indirectly, 50 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote or 50 percent or more of the total value of shares of all classes of stock of the corporation.

(2)(A) For purposes of paragraph (1), the following shall be treated as owner-employees:

(i) A shareholder-employee.

(ii) A participant or beneficiary of an individual retirement plan (as defined in section 7701(a)(37) of title 26).

(iii) An employer or association of employees which establishes such an individual retirement plan under section 408(c) of such title.

(B) Paragraph (1)(C) shall not apply to a transaction which consists of a sale of employer securities to an employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 1107(d)(6) of this title) by a shareholder-employee, a member of the family (as defined in section 267(c)(4) of such title) of any such owner-employee, or a corporation in which such a shareholder-employee owns stock representing a 50 percent or greater interest described in paragraph (1).

(3) For purposes of paragraph (2), the term “shareholder-employee” means an employee or officer of an S corporation (as defined in section 1361(a)(1) of such title) who owns (or is considered as owning within the meaning of section 318(a)(1) of such title) more than 5 percent of the outstanding stock of the corporation on any day during the taxable year of such corporation.

Sections 1106 and 1107 of this title shall not apply to the acquisition or sale by a plan of qualifying employer securities (as defined in section 1107(d)(5) of this title) or acquisition, sale or lease by a plan of qualifying employer real property (as defined in section 1107(d)(4) of this title)—

(1) if such acquisition, sale, or lease is for adequate consideration (or in the case of a marketable obligation, at a price not less favorable to the plan than the price determined under section 1107(e)(1) of this title),

(2) if no commission is charged with respect thereto, and

(3) if—

(A) the plan is an eligible individual account plan (as defined in section 1107(d)(3) of this title), or

(B) in the case of an acquisition or lease of qualifying employer real property by a plan which is not an eligible individual account plan, or of an acquisition of qualifying employer securities by such a plan, the lease or acquisition is not prohibited by section 1107(a) of this title.

Section 1106(b)(2) of this title shall not apply to any merger or transfer described in subsection (b)(11) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §408, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 883; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §308, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1295; Pub. L. 97–354, §5(a)(43), Oct. 19, 1982, 96 Stat. 1697; Pub. L. 99–514, title XI, §1114(b)(15)(B), title XVIII, §1898(i)(1), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2452, 2957; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(*l*)(5), 7891, 7894(e)(4)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2443, 2445, 2450; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12012(b), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–571; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §731(c)(4)(C), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5004; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1704(n)(2), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1886; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1506(b)(2), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1066.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 105–34 amended subsec. (d) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions exempting transactions involving an owner-employee, a member of the family, or a corporation controlled by any such owner-employee through the ownership, directly or indirectly, of 50 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote or 50 percent or more of the total value of shares of all classes of stock of the corporation.

1996—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 104–188 inserted at end “A loan made by a plan shall not fail to meet the requirements of the preceding sentence by reason of a loan repayment suspension described under section 414(u)(4) of title 26.”

1994—Subsec. (b)(13). Pub. L. 103–465 substituted “2001” for “1996” and “1995” for “1991”.

1990—Subsec. (b)(13). Pub. L. 101–508 added par. (13).

1989—Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(*l*)(5), added par. (12).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), in last sentence, substituted “section 401(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “section 401(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “section 401(c)(3) of title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(2), in last sentence, substituted “section 408 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “section 408 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954” and “section 408(c) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “section 408(c) of such Code” which for purposes of codification were translated as “section 408 of title 26” and “section 408(c) of title 26”, respectively, thus requiring no change in text.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(4)(A), in last sentence, substituted “individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity described in section 408 of title 26 or a retirement bond described in section 409 of title 26 (as effective for obligations issued before January 1, 1984)” for “individual retirement account, individual retirement annuity, or an individual retirement bond (as defined in section 408 or 409 of title 26)” and “section 408(c) of such Code” for “section 408(c) of such code”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “section 408(c) of title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1986—Subsec. (b)(1)(B). Pub. L. 99–514, §1114(b)(15)(B), substituted “highly compensated employees (within the meaning of section 414(q) of title 26)” for “highly compensated employees, officers, or shareholders”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–514, §1898(i)(1), struck out “(a),” before “(b),” in introductory provisions.

1982—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 97–354 substituted “section 1379 of title 26 as in effect on the day before the date of the enactment of the Subchapter S Revision Act of 1982” for “section 1379 of title 26”.

1980—Subsec. (b)(10), (11). Pub. L. 96–364, §308(a), added pars. (10) and (11).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 96–364, §308(b), added subsec. (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 105–34 applicable to taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1997, see section 1506(c) of Pub. L. 105–34, set out as a note under section 409 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 effective as of Dec. 12, 1994, see section 1704(n)(3) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 414 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to qualified transfers under section 420 of title 26 made after Nov. 5, 1990, see section 12012(e) of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 1021 of this title.

Amendment by section 7881(*l*)(5) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(e)(4)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in section 491(b) of the Deficit Reduction Act of 1984 [Pub. L. 98–369].”

Amendment by section 1114(b)(15)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 applicable to years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, see section 1114(c)(3) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 414 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 1898(i)(2) of Pub. L. 99–514 provided that: “The amendment made by paragraph (1) [amending this section] shall apply to transactions after the date of the enactment of this Act [Oct. 22, 1986].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 97–354 applicable to taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1982, see section 6(a) of Pub. L. 97–354, set out as a note under section 1361 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary of the Treasury or his delegate to issue before Feb. 1, 1988, final regulations to carry out amendments made by section 1114 of Pub. L. 99–514, see section 1141 of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this part call for the promulgation of regulations, see sections 1031 and 1114 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1101, 1106, 1107, 1403 of this title; title 5 section 8477; title 26 section 4975.

(a) Any person who is a fiduciary with respect to a plan who breaches any of the responsibilities, obligations, or duties imposed upon fiduciaries by this subchapter shall be personally liable to make good to such plan any losses to the plan resulting from each such breach, and to restore to such plan any profits of such fiduciary which have been made through use of assets of the plan by the fiduciary, and shall be subject to such other equitable or remedial relief as the court may deem appropriate, including removal of such fiduciary. A fiduciary may also be removed for a violation of section 1111 of this title.

(b) No fiduciary shall be liable with respect to a breach of fiduciary duty under this subchapter if such breach was committed before he became a fiduciary or after he ceased to be a fiduciary.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §409, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 886.)

This section is referred to in section 1132 of this title.

(a) Except as provided in sections 1105(b)(1) and 1105(d) of this title, any provision in an agreement or instrument which purports to relieve a fiduciary from responsibility or liability for any responsibility, obligation, or duty under this part shall be void as against public policy.

(b) Nothing in this subpart 1 shall preclude—

(1) a plan from purchasing insurance for its fiduciaries or for itself to cover liability or losses occurring by reason of the act or omission of a fiduciary, if such insurance permits recourse by the insurer against the fiduciary in the case of a breach of a fiduciary obligation by such fiduciary;

(2) a fiduciary from purchasing insurance to cover liability under this part from and for his own account; or

(3) an employer or an employee organization from purchasing insurance to cover potential liability of one or more persons who serve in a fiduciary capacity with regard to an employee benefit plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §410, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 886.)

This section is referred to in section 1114 of this title.

1 So in original. This part does not contain subparts.

No person who has been convicted of, or has been imprisoned as a result of his conviction of, robbery, bribery, extortion, embezzlement, fraud, grand larceny, burglary, arson, a felony violation of Federal or State law involving substances defined in section 802(6) of title 21, murder, rape, kidnaping, perjury, assault with intent to kill, any crime described in section 80a–9(a)(1) of title 15, a violation of any provision of this chapter, a violation of section 186 of this title, a violation of chapter 63 of title 18, a violation of section 874, 1027, 1503, 1505, 1506, 1510, 1951, or 1954 of title 18, a violation of the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 (29 U.S.C. 401), any felony involving abuse or misuse of such person's position or employment in a labor organization or employee benefit plan to seek or obtain an illegal gain at the expense of the members of the labor organization or the beneficiaries of the employee benefit plan, or conspiracy to commit any such crimes or attempt to commit any such crimes, or a crime in which any of the foregoing crimes is an element, shall serve or be permitted to serve—

(1) as an administrator, fiduciary, officer, trustee, custodian, counsel, agent, employee, or representative in any capacity of any employee benefit plan,

(2) as a consultant or adviser to an employee benefit plan, including but not limited to any entity whose activities are in whole or substantial part devoted to providing goods or services to any employee benefit plan, or

(3) in any capacity that involves decisionmaking authority or custody or control of the moneys, funds, assets, or property of any employee benefit plan,

during or for the period of thirteen years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, unless the sentencing court on the motion of the person convicted sets a lesser period of at least three years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, or unless prior to the end of such period, in the case of a person so convicted or imprisoned (A) his citizenship rights, having been revoked as a result of such conviction, have been fully restored, or (B) if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, the United States district court for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements under section 994(a) of title 28, determines that such person's service in any capacity referred to in paragraphs (1) through (3) would not be contrary to the purposes of this subchapter. Prior to making any such determination the court shall hold a hearing and shall give notice to 1 such proceeding by certified mail to the Secretary of Labor and to State, county, and Federal prosecuting officials in the jurisdiction or jurisdictions in which such person was convicted. The court's determination in any such proceeding shall be final. No person shall knowingly hire, retain, employ, or otherwise place any other person to serve in any capacity in violation of this subsection. Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this subsection, no corporation or partnership will be precluded from acting as an administrator, fiduciary, officer, trustee, custodian, counsel, agent, or employee of any employee benefit plan or as a consultant to any employee benefit plan without a notice, hearing, and determination by such court that such service would be inconsistent with the intention of this section.

Any person who intentionally violates this section shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than five years, or both.

For the purpose of this section—

(1) A person shall be deemed to have been “convicted” and under the disability of “conviction” from the date of the judgment of the trial court, regardless of whether that judgment remains under appeal.

(2) The term “consultant” means any person who, for compensation, advises, or represents an employee benefit plan or who provides other assistance to such plan, concerning the establishment or operation of such plan.

(3) A period of parole or supervised release shall not be considered as part of a period of imprisonment.

Whenever any person—

(1) by operation of this section, has been barred from office or other position in an employee benefit plan as a result of a conviction, and

(2) has filed an appeal of that conviction,

any salary which would be otherwise due such person by virtue of such office or position, shall be placed in escrow by the individual or organization responsible for payment of such salary. Payment of such salary into escrow shall continue for the duration of the appeal or for the period of time during which such salary would be otherwise due, whichever period is shorter. Upon the final reversal of such person's conviction on appeal, the amounts in escrow shall be paid to such person. Upon the final sustaining of that person's conviction on appeal, the amounts in escrow shall be returned to the individual or organization responsible for payments of those amounts. Upon final reversal of such person's conviction, such person shall no longer be barred by this statute 2 from assuming any position from which such person was previously barred.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §411, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 887; Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §§229, 230, 802, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2031, 2131; Pub. L. 100–182, §15(b), Dec. 7, 1987, 101 Stat. 1269.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959, referred to in subsec. (a), is Pub. L. 86–257, Sept. 14, 1959, 73 Stat. 519, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 11 (§401 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 401 of this title, and Tables.

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–182, in concluding provisions, substituted “if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, the United States district court for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements under section 994(a) of title 28,” for “the United States Parole Commission”, “court shall” for “Commission shall”, “court's” for “Commission's”, “such court” for “such Parole Commission”, and “a hearing” for “an administrative hearing”.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–473, §229, which directed substitution of “if the offense is a Federal offense, the sentencing judge or, if the offense is a State or local offense, on motion of the United States Department of Justice, the district court of the United States for the district in which the offense was committed, pursuant to sentencing guidelines and policy statements issued pursuant to section 994(a) of title 28,” for “the Board of Parole of the United States Justice Department”, “court” and “court's” for “Board” and “Board's”, respectively, and “a” for “an administrative”, was (except for the last substitution) incapable of execution in view of the previous amendment by section 802 of Pub. L. 98–473 which became effective prior to the effective date of the amendment by section 229. See note below.

Pub. L. 98–473, §802(a), in amending provisions after “the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act of 1959 (29 U.S.C. 401),” generally, inserted provisions relating to abuse or misuse of employment in a labor organization or employee benefit plan, in cl. (1) substituted “employee, or representative in any capacity” for “or employee”, in cl. (2) substituted “consultant or adviser to an” for “consultant to any”, added cl. (3), substituted “the period of thirteen years” for “five years”, “unless the sentencing court on the motion of the person convicted sets a lesser period of at least three years after such conviction or after the end of such imprisonment, whichever is later, or unless prior to the end of such period,” for “unless prior to the end of such five-year period,”, in cl. (B) substituted “the United States Parole Commission” for “the Board of Parole of the United States Department of Justice” and “paragraphs (1) through (3)” for “paragraph (1) or (2)”, and in provisions following cl. (B) substituted “Commission” and “Commission's” for “Board” and “Board's”, respectively, inserted provision of notice to the Secretary of Labor, and substituted “hire, retain, employ, or otherwise place any other person to serve in any capacity” for “permit any other person to serve in any capacity referred to in paragraph (1) or (2)” and “Parole Commission” for “Board of Parole”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–473, §802(b), substituted “five years” for “one year”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 98–473, §802(c), substituted “, regardless of whether that judgment remains under appeal” for “or the date of the final sustaining of such judgment on appeal, whichever is the later event”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 98–473, §230, inserted “or supervised release” after “parole”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 98–473, §802(d), added subsec. (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–182 applicable with respect to offenses committed after Dec. 7, 1987, see section 26 of Pub. L. 100–182, set out as a note under section 3006A of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Amendments by sections 229 and 230 of Pub. L. 98–473 effective Nov. 1, 1987, and applicable only to offenses committed after the taking effect of such amendments, see section 235(a)(1) of Pub. L. 98–473, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3551 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

Amendment by section 802 of Pub. L. 98–473 effective with respect to any judgment of conviction entered by the trial court after Oct. 12, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 804 of Pub. L. 98–473, set out as a note under section 504 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1109 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “of”.

2 So in original. Probably should be “section”.

Every fiduciary of an employee benefit plan and every person who handles funds or other property of such a plan (hereafter in this section referred to as “plan official”) shall be bonded as provided in this section; except that—

(1) where such plan is one under which the only assets from which benefits are paid are the general assets of a union or of an employer, the administrator, officers, and employees of such plan shall be exempt from the bonding requirements of this section, and

(2) no bond shall be required of a fiduciary (or of any director, officer, or employee of such fiduciary) if such fiduciary—

(A) is a corporation organized and doing business under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(B) is authorized under such laws to exercise trust powers or to conduct an insurance business;

(C) is subject to supervision or examination by Federal or State authority; and

(D) has at all times a combined capital and surplus in excess of such a minimum amount as may be established by regulations issued by the Secretary, which amount shall be at least $1,000,000. Paragraph (2) shall apply to a bank or other financial institution which is authorized to exercise trust powers and the deposits of which are not insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, only if such bank or institution meets bonding or similar requirements under State law which the Secretary determines are at least equivalent to those imposed on banks by Federal law.

The amount of such bond shall be fixed at the beginning of each fiscal year of the plan. Such amount shall be not less than 10 per centum of the amount of funds handled. In no case shall such bond be less than $1,000 nor more than $500,000, except that the Secretary, after due notice and opportunity for hearing to all interested parties, and after consideration of the record, may prescribe an amount in excess of $500,000, subject to the 10 per centum limitation of the preceding sentence. For purposes of fixing the amount of such bond, the amount of funds handled shall be determined by the funds handled by the person, group, or class to be covered by such bond and by their predecessor or predecessors, if any, during the preceding reporting year, or if the plan has no preceding reporting year, the amount of funds to be handled during the current reporting year by such person, group, or class, estimated as provided in regulations of the Secretary. Such bond shall provide protection to the plan against loss by reason of acts of fraud or dishonesty on the part of the plan official, directly or through connivance with others. Any bond shall have as surety thereon a corporate surety company which is an acceptable surety on Federal bonds under authority granted by the Secretary of the Treasury pursuant to sections 9304–9308 of title 31. Any bond shall be in a form or of a type approved by the Secretary, including individual bonds or schedule or blanket forms of bonds which cover a group or class.

It shall be unlawful for any plan official to whom subsection (a) of this section applies, to receive, handle, disburse, or otherwise exercise custody or control of any of the funds or other property of any employee benefit plan, without being bonded as required by subsection (a) of this section and it shall be unlawful for any plan official of such plan, or any other person having authority to direct the performance of such functions, to permit such functions, or any of them, to be performed by any plan official, with respect to whom the requirements of subsection (a) of this section have not been met.

It shall be unlawful for any person to procure any bond required by subsection (a) of this section from any surety or other company or through any agent or broker in whose business operations such plan or any party in interest in such plan has any control or significant financial interest, direct or indirect.

Nothing in any other provision of law shall require any person, required to be bonded as provided in subsection (a) of this section because he handles funds or other property of an employee benefit plan, to be bonded insofar as the handling by such person of the funds or other property of such plan is concerned.

The Secretary shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this section including exempting a plan from the requirements of this section where he finds that (1) other bonding arrangements or (2) the overall financial condition of the plan would be adequate to protect the interests of the beneficiaries and participants. When, in the opinion of the Secretary, the administrator of a plan offers adequate evidence of the financial responsibility of the plan, or that other bonding arrangements would provide adequate protection of the beneficiaries and participants, he may exempt such plan from the requirements of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §412, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 888.)

In subsec. (a), “sections 9304–9308 of title 31” substituted for “sections 6 through 13 of title 6, United States Code” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this part call for the promulgation of regulations, see sections 1031 and 1114 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1028, 1085b, 1383, 1384 of this title; title 26 section 401.

No action may be commenced under this subchapter with respect to a fiduciary's breach of any responsibility, duty, or obligation under this part, or with respect to a violation of this part, after the earlier of—

(1) six years after (A) the date of the last action which constituted a part of the breach or violation, or (B) in the case of an omission the latest date on which the fiduciary could have cured the breach or violation, or

(2) three years after the earliest date on which the plaintiff had actual knowledge of the breach or violation;

except that in the case of fraud or concealment, such action may be commenced not later than six years after the date of discovery of such breach or violation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §413, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 889; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9342(b), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–371; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(j)(4), 7894(e)(5), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2443, 2450.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(5), struck out “(a)” before “No action”.

Par. (2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(j)(4), struck out comma after “violation”.

1987—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 100–203 struck out “(A)” after “date” and struck out “or (B) on which a report from which he could reasonably be expected to have obtained knowledge of such breach or violation was filed with the Secretary under this subchapter”.

Amendment by section 7881(j)(4) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7894(e)(5) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to reports required to be filed after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9342(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1132 of this title.

(a) Except as provided in subsections (b), (c), and (d) of this section, this part shall take effect on January 1, 1975.

(b)(1) The provisions of this part authorizing the Secretary to promulgate regulations shall take effect on September 2, 1974.

(2) Upon application of a plan, the Secretary may postpone until not later than January 1, 1976, the applicability of any provision of sections 1102, 1103 (other than 1103(c)), 1105 (other than 1105(a) and (d)), and 1110(a) of this title, as it applies to any plan in existence on September 2, 1974, if he determines such postponement is (A) necessary to amend the instrument establishing the plan under which the plan is maintained and (B) not adverse to the interest of participants and beneficiaries.

(3) This part shall take effect on September 2, 1974, with respect to a plan which terminates after June 30, 1974, and before January 1, 1975, and to which at the time of termination section 1321 of this title applies.

(c) Sections 1106 and 1107(a) of this title (relating to prohibited transactions) shall not apply—

(1) until June 30, 1984, to a loan of money or other extension of credit between a plan and a party in interest under a binding contract in effect on July 1, 1974 (or pursuant to renewals of such a contract), if such loan or other extension of credit remains at least as favorable to the plan as an arm's-length transaction with an unrelated party would be, and if the execution of the contract, the making of the loan, or the extension of credit was not, at the time of such execution, making, or extension, a prohibited transaction (within the meaning of section 503(b) of title 26 or the corresponding provisions of prior law);

(2) until June 30, 1984, to a lease or joint use of property involving the plan and a party in interest pursuant to a binding contract in effect on July 1, 1974 (or pursuant to renewals of such a contract), if such lease or joint use remains at least as favorable to the plan as an arm's-length transaction with an unrelated party would be and if the execution of the contract was not, at the time of such execution, a prohibited transaction (within the meaning of section 503(b) of title 26 or the corresponding provisions of prior law);

(3) until June 30, 1984, to the sale, exchange or other disposition of property described in paragraph (2) between a plan and a party in interest if—

(A) in the case of a sale, exchange, or other disposition of the property by the plan to the party in interest, the plan receives an amount which is not less than the fair market value of the property at the time of such disposition; and

(B) in the case of the acquisition of the property by the plan, the plan pays an amount which is not in excess of the fair market value of the property at the time of such acquisition;

(4) until June 30, 1977, to the provision of services, to which paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) do not apply between a plan and a party in interest—

(A) under a binding contract in effect on July 1, 1974 (or pursuant to renewals of such contract), or

(B) if the party in interest ordinarily and customarily furnished such services on June 30, 1974, if such provision of services remains at least as favorable to the plan as an arm's-length transaction with an unrelated party would be and if such provision of services was not, at the time of such provision, a prohibited transaction (within the meaning of section 503(b) of title 26) or the corresponding provisions of prior law; or

(5) the sale, exchange, or other disposition of property which is owned by a plan on June 30, 1974, and all times thereafter, to a party in interest, if such plan is required to dispose of such property in order to comply with the provisions of section 1107(a) of this title (relating to the prohibition against holding excess employer securities and employer real property), and if the plan receives not less than adequate consideration.

(d) Any election, or failure to elect, by a disqualified person under section 2003(c)(1)(B) of this Act shall be treated for purposes of this part (but not for purposes of section 1144 of this title) as an act or omission occurring before the effective date of this part.

(e) The preceding provisions of this section shall not apply with respect to amendments made to this part in provisions enacted after September 2, 1974.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §414, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 889; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(e)(6), (h)(4), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2450, 2451.)

Section 2003(c)(1)(B) of this Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is section 2003(c)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 93–406, which is set out as an Effective Date; Savings Provisions note under section 4975 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1989—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(e)(6), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text, and substituted “or the corresponding provisions of prior law)” for “) or the corresponding provisions of prior law”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(h)(4), added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1107 of this title.

Any person who willfully violates any provision of part 1 of this subtitle, or any regulation or order issued under any such provision, shall upon conviction be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than one year, or both; except that in the case of such violation by a person not an individual, the fine imposed upon such person shall be a fine not exceeding $100,000.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §501, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 891.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1028 of this title.

A civil action may be brought—

(1) by a participant or beneficiary—

(A) for the relief provided for in subsection (c) of this section, or

(B) to recover benefits due to him under the terms of his plan, to enforce his rights under the terms of the plan, or to clarify his rights to future benefits under the terms of the plan;

(2) by the Secretary, or by a participant, beneficiary or fiduciary for appropriate relief under section 1109 of this title;

(3) by a participant, beneficiary, or fiduciary (A) to enjoin any act or practice which violates any provision of this subchapter or the terms of the plan, or (B) to obtain other appropriate equitable relief (i) to redress such violations or (ii) to enforce any provisions of this subchapter or the terms of the plan;

(4) by the Secretary, or by a participant, or beneficiary for appropriate relief in the case of a violation of 1025(c) of this title;

(5) except as otherwise provided in subsection (b) of this section, by the Secretary (A) to enjoin any act or practice which violates any provision of this subchapter, or (B) to obtain other appropriate equitable relief (i) to redress such violation or (ii) to enforce any provision of this subchapter;

(6) by the Secretary to collect any civil penalty under paragraph (2), (4), (5), or (6) of subsection (c) of this section or under subsection (i) or (*l*) of this section;

(7) by a State to enforce compliance with a qualified medical child support order (as defined in section 1169(a)(2)(A) of this title);

(8) by the Secretary, or by an employer or other person referred to in section 1021(f)(1) of this title, (A) to enjoin any act or practice which violates subsection (f) of section 1021 of this title, or (B) to obtain appropriate equitable relief (i) to redress such violation or (ii) to enforce such subsection; or

(9) in the event that the purchase of an insurance contract or insurance annuity in connection with termination of an individual's status as a participant covered under a pension plan with respect to all or any portion of the participant's pension benefit under such plan constitutes a violation of part 4 of this title 1 or the terms of the plan, by the Secretary, by any individual who was a participant or beneficiary at the time of the alleged violation, or by a fiduciary, to obtain appropriate relief, including the posting of security if necessary, to assure receipt by the participant or beneficiary of the amounts provided or to be provided by such insurance contract or annuity, plus reasonable prejudgment interest on such amounts.

(1) In the case of a plan which is qualified under section 401(a), 403(a), or 405(a) 2 of title 26 (or with respect to which an application to so qualify has been filed and has not been finally determined) the Secretary may exercise his authority under subsection (a)(5) of this section with respect to a violation of, or the enforcement of, parts 2 and 3 of this subtitle (relating to participation, vesting, and funding), only if—

(A) requested by the Secretary of the Treasury, or

(B) one or more participants, beneficiaries, or fiduciaries, of such plan request in writing (in such manner as the Secretary shall prescribe by regulation) that he exercise such authority on their behalf. In the case of such a request under this paragraph he may exercise such authority only if he determines that such violation affects, or such enforcement is necessary to protect, claims of participants or beneficiaries to benefits under the plan.

(2) The Secretary shall not initiate an action to enforce section 1145 of this title.

(3) The Secretary is not authorized to enforce under this part any requirement of part 7 against a health insurance issuer offering health insurance coverage in connection with a group health plan (as defined in section 1191b(a)(1) of this title). Nothing in this paragraph shall affect the authority of the Secretary to issue regulations to carry out such part.

(1) Any administrator (A) who fails to meet the requirements of paragraph (1) or (4) of section 1166 2 of this title or section 1021(e)(1) of this title with respect to a participant or beneficiary, or (B) who fails or refuses to comply with a request for any information which such administrator is required by this subchapter to furnish to a participant or beneficiary (unless such failure or refusal results from matters reasonably beyond the control of the administrator) by mailing the material requested to the last known address of the requesting participant or beneficiary within 30 days after such request may in the court's discretion be personally liable to such participant or beneficiary in the amount of up to $100 a day from the date of such failure or refusal, and the court may in its discretion order such other relief as it deems proper. For purposes of this paragraph, each violation described in subparagraph (A) with respect to any single participant, and each violation described in subparagraph (B) with respect to any single participant or beneficiary, shall be treated as a separate violation.

(2) The Secretary may assess a civil penalty against any plan administrator of up to $1,000 a day from the date of such plan administrator's failure or refusal to file the annual report required to be filed with the Secretary under section 1021(b)(4) 2 of this title. For purposes of this paragraph, an annual report that has been rejected under section 1024(a)(4) of this title for failure to provide material information shall not be treated as having been filed with the Secretary.

(3) Any employer maintaining a plan who fails to meet the notice requirement of section 1021(d) of this title with respect to any participant or beneficiary or who fails to meet the requirements of section 1021(e)(2) of this title with respect to any person may in the court's discretion be liable to such participant or beneficiary or to such person in the amount of up to $100 a day from the date of such failure, and the court may in its discretion order such other relief as it deems proper.

(4) The Secretary may assess a civil penalty of not more than $1,000 for each violation by any person of section 1021(f)(1) of this title.

(5) The Secretary may assess a civil penalty against any person of up to $1,000 a day from the date of the person's failure or refusal to file the information required to be filed by such person with the Secretary under regulations prescribed pursuant to section 1021(g) of this title.

(6) If, within 30 days of a request by the Secretary to a plan administrator for documents under section 1024(a)(6) of this title, the plan administrator fails to furnish the material requested to the Secretary, the Secretary may assess a civil penalty against the plan administrator of up to $100 a day from the date of such failure (but in no event in excess of $1,000 per request). No penalty shall be imposed under this paragraph for any failure resulting from matters reasonably beyond the control of the plan administrator.

(7) The Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall maintain such ongoing consultation as may be necessary and appropriate to coordinate enforcement under this subsection with enforcement under section 1320b–14(c)(8) of title 42.

(1) An employee benefit plan may sue or be sued under this subchapter as an entity. Service of summons, subpena, or other legal process of a court upon a trustee or an administrator of an employee benefit plan in his capacity as such shall constitute service upon the employee benefit plan. In a case where a plan has not designated in the summary plan description of the plan an individual as agent for the service of legal process, service upon the Secretary shall constitute such service. The Secretary, not later than 15 days after receipt of service under the preceding sentence, shall notify the administrator or any trustee of the plan of receipt of such service.

(2) Any money judgment under this subchapter against an employee benefit plan shall be enforceable only against the plan as an entity and shall not be enforceable against any other person unless liability against such person is established in his individual capacity under this subchapter.

(1) Except for actions under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section, the district courts of the United States shall have exclusive jurisdiction of civil actions under this subchapter brought by the Secretary or by a participant, beneficiary, fiduciary, or any person referred to in section 1021(f)(1) of this title. State courts of competent jurisdiction and district courts of the United States shall have concurrent jurisdiction of actions under paragraphs (1)(B) and (7) of subsection (a) of this section.

(2) Where an action under this subchapter is brought in a district court of the United States, it may be brought in the district where the plan is administered, where the breach took place, or where a defendant resides or may be found, and process may be served in any other district where a defendant resides or may be found.

The district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction, without respect to the amount in controversy or the citizenship of the parties, to grant the relief provided for in subsection (a) of this section in any action.

(1) In any action under this subchapter (other than an action described in paragraph (2)) by a participant, beneficiary, or fiduciary, the court in its discretion may allow a reasonable attorney's fee and costs of action to either party.

(2) In any action under this subchapter by a fiduciary for or on behalf of a plan to enforce section 1145 of this title in which a judgment in favor of the plan is awarded, the court shall award the plan—

(A) the unpaid contributions,

(B) interest on the unpaid contributions,

(C) an amount equal to the greater of—

(i) interest on the unpaid contributions, or

(ii) liquidated damages provided for under the plan in an amount not in excess of 20 percent (or such higher percentage as may be permitted under Federal or State law) of the amount determined by the court under subparagraph (A),

(D) reasonable attorney's fees and costs of the action, to be paid by the defendant, and

(E) such other legal or equitable relief as the court deems appropriate.

For purposes of this paragraph, interest on unpaid contributions shall be determined by using the rate provided under the plan, or, if none, the rate prescribed under section 6621 of title 26.

A copy of the complaint in any action under this subchapter by a participant, beneficiary, or fiduciary (other than an action brought by one or more participants or beneficiaries under subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section which is solely for the purpose of recovering benefits due such participants under the terms of the plan) shall be served upon the Secretary and the Secretary of the Treasury by certified mail. Either Secretary shall have the right in his discretion to intervene in any action, except that the Secretary of the Treasury may not intervene in any action under part 4 of this subtitle. If the Secretary brings an action under subsection (a) of this section on behalf of a participant or beneficiary, he shall notify the Secretary of the Treasury.

In the case of a transaction prohibited by section 1106 of this title by a party in interest with respect to a plan to which this part applies, the Secretary may assess a civil penalty against such party in interest. The amount of such penalty may not exceed 5 percent of the amount involved in each such transaction (as defined in section 4975(f)(4) of title 26) for each year or part thereof during which the prohibited transaction continues, except that, if the transaction is not corrected (in such manner as the Secretary shall prescribe in regulations which shall be consistent with section 4975(f)(5) of title 26) within 90 days after notice from the Secretary (or such longer period as the Secretary may permit), such penalty may be in an amount not more than 100 percent of the amount involved. This subsection shall not apply to a transaction with respect to a plan described in section 4975(e)(1) of title 26.

In all civil actions under this subchapter, attorneys appointed by the Secretary may represent the Secretary (except as provided in section 518(a) of title 28), but all such litigation shall be subject to the direction and control of the Attorney General.

Suits by an administrator, fiduciary, participant, or beneficiary of an employee benefit plan to review a final order of the Secretary, to restrain the Secretary from taking any action contrary to the provisions of this chapter, or to compel him to take action required under this subchapter, may be brought in the district court of the United States for the district where the plan has its principal office, or in the United States District Court for the District of Columbia.

(1) In the case of—

(A) any breach of fiduciary responsibility under (or other violation of) part 4 of this subtitle by a fiduciary, or

(B) any knowing participation in such a breach or violation by any other person,

the Secretary shall assess a civil penalty against such fiduciary or other person in an amount equal to 20 percent of the applicable recovery amount.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term “applicable recovery amount” means any amount which is recovered from a fiduciary or other person with respect to a breach or violation described in paragraph (1)—

(A) pursuant to any settlement agreement with the Secretary, or

(B) ordered by a court to be paid by such fiduciary or other person to a plan or its participants and beneficiaries in a judicial proceeding instituted by the Secretary under subsection (a)(2) or (a)(5) of this section.

(3) The Secretary may, in the Secretary's sole discretion, waive or reduce the penalty under paragraph (1) if the Secretary determines in writing that—

(A) the fiduciary or other person acted reasonably and in good faith, or

(B) it is reasonable to expect that the fiduciary or other person will not be able to restore all losses to the plan (or to provide the relief ordered pursuant to subsection (a)(9) of this section) without severe financial hardship unless such waiver or reduction is granted.

(4) The penalty imposed on a fiduciary or other person under this subsection with respect to any transaction shall be reduced by the amount of any penalty or tax imposed on such fiduciary or other person with respect to such transaction under subsection (i) of this section and section 4975 of title 26.

In the case of a distribution to a pension plan participant or beneficiary in violation of section 1056(e) of this title by a plan fiduciary, the Secretary shall assess a penalty against such fiduciary in an amount equal to the value of the distribution. Such penalty shall not exceed $10,000 for each such distribution.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §502, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 891; Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §306(b), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1295; Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(b), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 231; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9342(c), 9344, Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–372, 1330–373; Pub. L. 101–239, title II, §2101(a), (b), title VII, §§7881(b)(5)(B), (j)(2), (3), 7891(a)(1), 7894(f)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2123, 2438, 2442, 2445, 2450; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12012(d)(2), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–573; Pub. L. 103–66, title IV, §4301(c)(1)–(3), Aug. 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 376; Pub. L. 103–401, §§2, 3, Oct. 22, 1994, 108 Stat. 4172; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §761(a)(9)(B)(ii), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5033; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(b), (e)(2), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1951, 1952; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(E), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938; Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(c)(2)(B), (d)(7), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1062.)

Section 405(a) of title 26, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), was repealed by Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title IV, §491(a), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 848.

Paragraphs (1) and (4) of section 1166 of this title, referred to in subsec. (c)(1), were redesignated as pars. (1) and (4) of section 1166(a) of this title by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(d)(1)(A)(ii)(I), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.

Section 1021(b)(4) of this title, referred to in subsec. (c)(2), was redesignated section 1021(b)(1) of this title by Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(a), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1061.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (k), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(d)(7), substituted “(5), or (6)” for “or (5)”.

Subsec. (c)(6), (7). Pub. L. 105–34, §1503(c)(2)(B), added par. (6) and redesignated former par. (6) as (7).

1996—Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 104–191, §101(e)(2)(A)(i), substituted “under paragraph (2), (4), or (5) of subsection (c) of this section or under subsection (i) or (*l*) of this section” for “under subsection (c)(2) or (i) or (*l*) of this section”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to reference in original act which appears in text as reference to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191, §101(b), added par. (3).

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 104–191, §101(e)(2)(B), inserted at end “For purposes of this paragraph, each violation described in subparagraph (A) with respect to any single participant, and each violation described in subparagraph (B) with respect to any single participant or beneficiary, shall be treated as a separate violation.”

Subsec. (c)(4) to (6). Pub. L. 104–191, §101(e)(2)(A)(ii), struck out “For purposes of this paragraph, each violation described in subparagraph (A) with respect to any single participant, and each violation described in subparagraph (B) with respect to any single participant or beneficiary, shall be treated as a separate violation. The Secretary and” after “section 1021(f)(1) of this title.”, redesignated “the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall maintain such ongoing consultation as may be necessary and appropriate to coordinate enforcement under this subsection with enforcement under section 1320b–14(c)(8) of title 42.” as par. (6) and inserted “The Secretary and” before “the Secretary of Health and Human Services”, and added par. (5).

1994—Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 103–401, §2, added par. (9).

Subsec. (*l*)(3)(B). Pub. L. 103–401, §3, inserted “(or to provide the relief ordered pursuant to subsection (a)(9) of this section)” after “to restore all losses to the plan”.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 103–465 added subsec. (m).

1993—Subsec. (a)(7), (8). Pub. L. 103–66, §4301(c)(1), added pars. (7) and (8).

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 103–66, §4301(c)(2), added par. (4).

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 103–66, §4301(c)(3), substituted in first sentence “fiduciary, or any person referred to in section 1021(f)(1) of this title” for “or fiduciary” and in second sentence “paragraphs (1)(B) and (7) of subsection (a)” for “subsection (a)(1)(B)”.

1990—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 101–508, §12012(d)(2)(A), inserted “or section 1021(e)(1) of this title” after “section 1166 of this title”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 101–508, §12012(d)(2)(B), inserted “or who fails to meet the requirements of section 1021(e)(2) of this title with respect to any person” after first reference to “beneficiary” and “or to such person” after second reference to “beneficiary”.

1989—Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(j)(2), substituted “subsection (c)(2) or (i)” for “subsection (i)”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §2101(b), inserted “or (*l*)” after “subsection (i)”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(f)(1), substituted “respect” for “respct” before “to a violation” in introductory provisions.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(j)(3), inserted “against any plan administrator” after “civil penalty” and substituted “such plan administrator's” for “a plan administrator's”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(b)(5)(B), added par. (3).

Subsec. (g)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 101–239, §2101(a), added subsec. (*l*).

1987—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–203, §9342(c), designated existing provision as par. (1), redesignated as cls. (A) and (B) former cls. (1) and (2), and added par. (2).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9344, amended second sentence generally. Prior to amendment, second sentence read as follows: “The amount of such penalty may not exceed 5 percent of the amount involved (as defined in section 4975(f)(4) of title 26); except that if the transaction is not corrected (in such manner as the Secretary shall prescribe by regulation, which regulations shall be consistent with section 4975(f)(5) of title 26) within 90 days after notice from the Secretary (or such longer period as the Secretary may permit), such penalty may be in an amount not more than 100 percent of the amount involved.”

1986—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–272 inserted “(1) who fails to meet the requirements of paragraph (1) or (4) of section 1166 of this title with respect to a participant or beneficiary, or (2)”.

1980—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §306(b)(1), redesignated existing provisions as par. (1)(A) and (B) and added par. (2).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 96–364, §306(b)(2), redesignated existing provisions as par. (1), inserted exception for actions under paragraph (2), and added par. (2).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1994, see section 761(b)(1) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Section 5 of Pub. L. 103–401 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section] shall apply to any legal proceeding pending, or brought, on or after May 31, 1993.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to qualified transfers under section 420 of title 26 made after Nov. 5, 1990, see section 12012(e) of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 1021 of this title.

Section 2101(c) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to any breach of fiduciary responsibility or other violation occurring on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Dec. 19, 1989].”

Amendment by section 7881(b)(5)(B), (j)(2), (3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(f)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9342(d) of Pub. L. 100–203 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 applicable to plan years beginning on or after July 1, 1986, with special rule for collective bargaining agreements, see section 10002(d) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date note under section 1161 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Section 4 of Pub. L. 103–401 provided that: “Nothing in this Act [amending this section and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and section 1001 of this title] shall be construed to limit the legal standing of individuals to bring a civil action as participants or beneficiaries under section 502(a) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (29 U.S.C. 1132(a)), and nothing in this Act shall affect the responsibilities, obligations, or duties imposed upon fiduciaries by title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this subchapter].”

For provisions setting forth circumstances under which any amendment to a plan required to be made by an amendment made by section 4301 of Pub. L. 103–66 shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1994, see section 4301(d) of Pub. L. 103–66, set out as an Effective Date of 1993 Amendment note under section 1021 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1101, 1136, 1140 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “subtitle”.

2 See References in Text note below.

In accordance with regulations of the Secretary, every employee benefit plan shall—

(1) provide adequate notice in writing to any participant or beneficiary whose claim for benefits under the plan has been denied, setting forth the specific reasons for such denial, written in a manner calculated to be understood by the participant, and

(2) afford a reasonable opportunity to any participant whose claim for benefits has been denied for a full and fair review by the appropriate named fiduciary of the decision denying the claim.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §503, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 893.)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1022 of this title.

The Secretary shall have the power, in order to determine whether any person has violated or is about to violate any provision of this subchapter or any regulation or order thereunder—

(1) to make an investigation, and in connection therewith to require the submission of reports, books, and records, and the filing of data in support of any information required to be filed with the Secretary under this subchapter, and

(2) to enter such places, inspect such books and records and question such persons as he may deem necessary to enable him to determine the facts relative to such investigation, if he has reasonable cause to believe there may exist a violation of this subchapter or any rule or regulation issued thereunder or if the entry is pursuant to an agreement with the plan.

The Secretary may make available to any person actually affected by any matter which is the subject of an investigation under this section, and to any department or agency of the United States, information concerning any matter which may be the subject of such investigation; except that any information obtained by the Secretary pursuant to section 6103(g) of title 26 shall be made available only in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

The Secretary may not under the authority of this section require any plan to submit to the Secretary any books or records of the plan more than once in any 12 month period, unless the Secretary has reasonable cause to believe there may exist a violation of this subchapter or any regulation or order thereunder.

For the purposes of any investigation provided for in this subchapter, the provisions of sections 49 and 50 of title 15 (relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, records, and documents) are hereby made applicable (without regard to any limitation in such sections respecting persons, partnerships, banks, or common carriers) to the jurisdiction, powers, and duties of the Secretary or any officers designated by him. To the extent he considers appropriate, the Secretary may delegate his investigative functions under this section with respect to insured banks acting as fiduciaries of employee benefit plans to the appropriate Federal banking agency (as defined in section 1813(q) of title 12).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §504, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 893; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1135, 1136 of this title; title 5 section 8478a.

Subject to subchapter II of this chapter and section 1029 of this title, the Secretary may prescribe such regulations as he finds necessary or appropriate to carry out the provisions of this subchapter. Among other things, such regulations may define accounting, technical and trade terms used in such provisions; may prescribe forms; and may provide for the keeping of books and records, and for the inspection of such books and records (subject to section 1134(a) and (b) of this title).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §505, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 894.)

Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11018, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 277, provided that:

“(a)

“(1)

“(A) any interest in the entity is first offered to a plan, account, or arrangement subject to such Act investing in the entity (hereinafter in this section referred to as a ‘plan investor’) on or before the date which is 120 days after the date of publication of such rule or regulation as a final rule or regulation;

“(B) no plan investor acquires an interest in the entity from an issuer or underwriter at any time on or after the date which is 270 days after the date of publication of such rule or regulation as a final rule or regulation (except pursuant to a contract or subscription binding on the plan investor and entered into, or tendered, before the expiration of such 270-day period, or pursuant to the exercise, on or before December 31, 1990, of a warrant which was the subject of an effective registration under the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77q et seq.) [15 U.S.C. 77a et seq.] prior to the date of the enactment of this section [Apr. 7, 1986]); and

“(C) every interest in the entity acquired by a plan investor (or contracted for or subscribed to by a plan investor) before the expiration of such 270-day period is a security—

“(i) which is part of an issue or class of securities which upon such acquisition or at any time during the offering period is held by 100 or more persons;

“(ii) the economic rights of ownership in respect of which are freely transferable;

“(iii) which is registered under the Securities Act of 1933; and

“(iv) which is part of an issue or class of securities which is registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.) (or is so registered within three years of the effective date of the registration statement of such securities for purposes of the Securities Act of 1933: *Provided*, That the issuer provides plan investors with such reports with respect to the offering period as are required with respect to such period by the Securities and Exchange Commission under such Acts and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder).

In the case of partnerships organized prior to enactment of this section, the requirements of subparagraphs (iii) and (iv) shall not apply to initial limited partnership interests in an entity otherwise described above: *Provided*, That such entity was the subject of an effective registration under the Securities Act of 1933 prior to the date of the enactment of this section, such interests were issued solely for partnership organizational purposes in compliance with State limited partnership laws, and such interest has a value as of the date of issue of less than $20,000 and represents less than one percent of the total interests outstanding as of the completion of the offering period.

“(2)

“(A) Interpretive Bulletin 75–2 (29 CFR 2509.750–2); or

“(B) the regulations proposed by the Secretary of Labor and published—

“(i) on August 28, 1979, at 44 Fed. Reg. 50363;

“(ii) on June 6, 1980, at 45 Fed. Reg. 38084;

“(iii) on January 8, 1985, at 50 Fed. Reg. 961; or

“(iv) on February 15, 1985, at 50 Fed. Reg. 6361,

without regard to any limitation of any effective date proposed therein.

“(b)

“(1) The term ‘real estate entity’ means an entity which, at any time within two years after the closing of its offering period has invested or has contracted to invest at least 75 percent of the value of its net assets available for investment in direct or indirect ownership of ‘real estate assets’ or ‘interests in real property’.

“(2) The term ‘real estate asset’ means real property (including an interest in real property) and any share of stock or beneficial interest, partnership interest, depository receipt, or any other interest in any other real estate entity.

“(3) The term ‘interest in real property’ includes, directly or indirectly, the following:

“(A) the ownership or co-ownership of land or improvements thereon;

“(B) any mortgage (including an interest in or co-ownership of any mortgage, leasehold mortgage, pool of mortgages, deed of trust, or similar instrument) on land or improvements thereon,

“(C) any leasehold of land or improvements thereon; and

“(D) any option to acquire any of the foregoing, but does not include any mineral, oil, or gas royalty interest.

“(4) Whether the economic rights of ownership with respect to a security are ‘freely transferable’ shall be determined based upon all the facts and circumstances, but ordinarily none of the following, alone or in any combination, shall cause the economic rights of ownership to be considered not freely transferable—

“(A) any requirement that not less than a minimum number of shares or units of such security be transferred or assigned by any investor: *Provided*, That such requirement does not prevent transfer of all of the then remaining shares or units held by an investor;

“(B) any prohibition against transfer or assignment of such security or rights in respect thereof to an ineligible or unsuitable investor;

“(C) any restriction on or prohibition against any transfer or assignment which would either result in a termination or reclassification of the entity for Federal or State tax purposes or which would violate any State or Federal statute, regulation, court order, judicial decree, or rule of law;

“(D) any requirement that reasonable transfer or administrative fees be paid in connection with a transfer or assignment;

“(E) any requirement that advance notice of a transfer or assignment be given to the entity and any requirement regarding execution of documentation evidencing such transfer or assignment (including documentation setting forth representations from either or both of the transferor or transferee as to compliance with any restriction or requirement described in this section or requiring compliance with the entity's governing instruments);

“(F) any restriction on substitution of an assignee as a limited partner of a partnership, including a general partner consent requirement: *Provided*, That the economic benefits of ownership of the assignor may be transferred or assigned without regard to such restriction or consent (other than compliance with any other restriction described in this section);

“(G) any administrative procedure which establishes an effective date, or an event such as the completion of the offering, prior to which a transfer or assignment will not be effective; and

“(H) any limitation or restriction on transfer or assignment which is not created or imposed by the issuer or any person acting for or on behalf of such issuer.

“(c)

“(d)

“(e)

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

In order to avoid unnecessary expense and duplication of functions among Government agencies, the Secretary may make such arrangements or agreements for cooperation or mutual assistance in the performance of his functions under this subchapter and the functions of any such agency as he may find to be practicable and consistent with law. The Secretary may utilize, on a reimbursable or other basis, the facilities or services of any department, agency, or establishment of the United States or of any State or political subdivision of a State, including the services of any of its employees, with the lawful consent of such department, agency, or establishment; and each department, agency, or establishment of the United States is authorized and directed to cooperate with the Secretary and, to the extent permitted by law, to provide such information and facilities as he may request for his assistance in the performance of his functions under this subchapter. The Attorney General or his representative shall receive from the Secretary for appropriate action such evidence developed in the performance of his functions under this subchapter as may be found to warrant consideration for criminal prosecution under the provisions of this subchapter or other Federal law.

The Secretary shall have the responsibility and authority to detect and investigate and refer, where appropriate, civil and criminal violations related to the provisions of this subchapter and other related Federal laws, including the detection, investigation, and appropriate referrals of related violations of title 18. Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to preclude other appropriate Federal agencies from detecting and investigating civil and criminal violations of this subchapter and other related Federal laws.

A State may enter into an agreement with the Secretary for delegation to the State of some or all of the Secretary's authority under sections 1132 and 1134 of this title to enforce the requirements under part 7 in connection with multiple employer welfare arrangements, providing medical care (within the meaning of section 1191b(a)(2) of this title), which are not group health plans.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §506, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 894; Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §805, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2134; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(e)(3), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1953; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(F), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938.)

1996—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to reference in original act which appears in text as reference to section 1191b of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191 added subsec. (c).

1984—Pub. L. 98–473 designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), added subsec. (b), and amended section catchline.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

Section 250 of title II of Pub. L. 104–191 provided that: “Nothing in this subtitle [subtitle E (§§241–250) of title II of Pub. L. 104–191, enacting sections 24, 669, 1035, 1347, 1518, and 3486 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, amending sections 982, 1345, 1510, and 1956 of Title 18, and enacting provisions set out as notes under section 1395i of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare] shall be construed as affecting the authority of the Secretary of Labor under section 506(b) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1136(b)], including the Secretary's authority with respect to violations of title 18, United States Code (as amended by this subtitle).”

This section is referred to in section 1144 of this title.

(a) Subchapter II of chapter 5, and chapter 7, of title 5 (relating to administrative procedure), shall be applicable to this subchapter.

(b) Omitted.

(c) No employee of the Department of Labor or the Department of the Treasury shall administer or enforce this subchapter or the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 with respect to any employee benefit plan under which he is a participant or beneficiary, any employee organization of which he is a member, or any employer organization in which he has an interest. This subsection does not apply to an employee benefit plan which covers only employees of the United States.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §507, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 894; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsec. (c), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Subsec. (b) of this section amended section 5108 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1989—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1144 of this title.

There are hereby authorized to be appropriated such sums as may be necessary to enable the Secretary to carry out his functions and duties under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §508, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 895.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

If any provision of this chapter, or the application of such provision to any person or circumstances, shall be held invalid, the remainder of this chapter, or the application of such provision to persons or circumstances other than those as to which it is held invalid, shall not be affected thereby.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §509, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 895.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

It shall be unlawful for any person to discharge, fine, suspend, expel, discipline, or discriminate against a participant or beneficiary for exercising any right to which he is entitled under the provisions of an employee benefit plan, this subchapter, section 1201 of this title, or the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act [29 U.S.C. 301 et seq.], or for the purpose of interfering with the attainment of any right to which such participant may become entitled under the plan, this subchapter, or the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act. It shall be unlawful for any person to discharge, fine, suspend, expel, or discriminate against any person because he has given information or has testified or is about to testify in any inquiry or proceeding relating to this chapter or the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act. The provisions of section 1132 of this title shall be applicable in the enforcement of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §510, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 895.)

The Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 85–836, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 997, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 10 (§301 et seq.) of this title, and was repealed by Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §111(a)(1), Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 851 (Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974), effective Jan. 1, 1975. Such section 111(a)(1) also provided that the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act should continue to apply to any conduct and events which occurred before Jan. 1, 1975 (see section 1031 of this title). For complete classification of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act to the Code prior to such repeal, see Tables.

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

It shall be unlawful for any person through the use of fraud, force, violence, or threat of the use of force or violence, to restrain, coerce, intimidate, or attempt to restrain, coerce, or intimidate any participant or beneficiary for the purpose of interfering with or preventing the exercise of any right to which he is or may become entitled under the plan, this subchapter, section 1201 of this title, or the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act [29 U.S.C. 301 et seq.]. Any person who willfully violates this section shall be fined $10,000 or imprisoned for not more than one year, or both.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §511, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 895.)

The Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 85–836, Aug. 28, 1958, 72 Stat. 997, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 10 (§301 et seq.) of this title, and was repealed by Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §111(a)(1), Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 851 (Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974), effective Jan. 1, 1975. Such section 111(a)(1) also provided that the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act should continue to apply to any conduct and events which occurred before Jan. 1, 1975 (see section 1031 of this title). For complete classification of the Welfare and Pension Plans Disclosure Act to the Code prior to such repeal, see Tables.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

(1) There is hereby established an Advisory Council on Employee Welfare and Pension Benefit Plans (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “Council”) consisting of fifteen members appointed by the Secretary. Not more than eight members of the Council shall be members of the same political party.

(2) Members shall be persons qualified to appraise the programs instituted under this chapter.

(3) Of the members appointed, three shall be representatives of employee organizations (at least one of whom shall be representative of any organization members of which are participants in a multiemployer plan) ; three shall be representatives of employers (at least one of whom shall be representative of employers maintaining or contributing to multi-employer plans); three representatives shall be appointed from the general public, one of whom shall be a person representing those receiving benefits from a pension plan; and there shall be one representative each from the field of insurance, corporate trust, actuarial counseling, investment counseling, investment management, and the accounting field.

(4) Members shall serve for terms of three years except that of those first appointed, five shall be appointed for terms of one year, five shall be appointed for terms of two years, and five shall be appointed for terms of three years. A member may be reappointed. A member appointed to fill a vacancy shall be appointed only for the remainder of such term. A majority of members shall constitute a quorum and action shall be taken only by a majority vote of those present and voting.

It shall be the duty of the Council to advise the Secretary with respect to the carrying out of his functions under this chapter and to submit to the Secretary recommendations with respect thereto. The Council shall meet at least four times each year and at such other times as the Secretary requests. In his annual report submitted pursuant to section 1143(b) of this title, the Secretary shall include each recommendation which he has received from the Council during the preceding calendar year.

The Secretary shall furnish to the Council an executive secretary and such secretarial, clerical, and other services as are deemed necessary to conduct its business. The Secretary may call upon other agencies of the Government for statistical data, reports, and other information which will assist the Council in the performance of its duties.

(1) Members of the Council shall each be entitled to receive the daily equivalent of the annual rate of basic pay in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule for each day (including travel time) during which they are engaged in the actual performance of duties vested in the Council.

(2) While away from their homes or regular places of business in the performance of services for Council, members of the Council shall be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, in the same manner as persons employed intermittently in the Government service are allowed expenses under section 5703(b) of title 5.

Section 14(a) of the Federal Advisory Committee Act (relating to termination) shall not apply to the Council.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §512, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 895.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a)(2), (b), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Section 14(a) of the Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (e), is section 14(a) of Pub. L. 92–463, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

(1) The Secretary is authorized to undertake research and surveys and in connection therewith to collect, compile, analyze and publish data, information, and statistics relating to employee benefit plans, including retirement, deferred compensation, and welfare plans, and types of plans not subject to this chapter.

(2) The Secretary is authorized and directed to undertake research studies relating to pension plans, including but not limited to (A) the effects of this subchapter upon the provisions and costs of pension plans, (B) the role of private pensions in meeting the economic security needs of the Nation, and (C) the operation of private pension plans including types and levels of benefits, degree of reciprocity or portability, and financial and actuarial characteristics and practices, and methods of encouraging the growth of the private pension system.

(3) The Secretary may, as he deems appropriate or necessary, undertake other studies relating to employee benefit plans, the matters regulated by this subchapter, and the enforcement procedures provided for under this subchapter.

(4) The research, surveys, studies, and publications referred to in this subsection may be conducted directly, or indirectly through grant or contract arrangements.

The Secretary shall submit annually a report to the Congress covering his administration of this subchapter for the preceding year, and including (1) an explanation of any variances or extensions granted under section 1030, 1057, 1083, or 1084 of this title and the projected date for terminating the variance; (2) the status of cases in enforcement status; (3) recommendations received from the Advisory Council during the preceding year; and (4) such information, data, research findings, studies, and recommendations for further legislation in connection with the matters covered by this subchapter as he may find advisable.

The Secretary is authorized and directed to cooperate with the Congress and its appropriate committees, subcommittees, and staff in supplying data and any other information, and personnel and services, required by the Congress in any study, examination, or report by the Congress relating to pension benefit plans established or maintained by States or their political subdivisions.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §513, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 896.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1142 of this title.

The Comptroller General of the United States may, pursuant to the request of any Member of Congress, study employee benefit plans, including the effects of such plans on employees, participants, and their beneficiaries.

For the purpose of conducting studies under this section, the Comptroller General, or any of his duly authorized representatives, shall have access to and the right to examine and copy any books, documents, papers, records, or other recorded information—

(A) within the possession or control of the administrator, sponsor, or employer of and persons providing services to any employee benefit plan, and

(B) which the Comptroller General or his representative finds, in his own judgment, pertinent to such study.

The Comptroller General shall not disclose the identity of any individual or employer in making any information obtained under this section available to the public.

For purposes of this section, the terms “employee benefit plan”, “participant”, “administrator”, “beneficiary”, “plan sponsor”, “employee”, and “employer” are defined in section 1002 of this title.

The preceding provisions of this section shall be effective on April 7, 1986.

(Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(d), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 275.)

Section was enacted as part of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, and also as part of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, and not as part of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 which comprises this chapter.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, the provisions of this subchapter and subchapter III of this chapter shall supersede any and all State laws insofar as they may now or hereafter relate to any employee benefit plan described in section 1003(a) of this title and not exempt under section 1003(b) of this title. This section shall take effect on January 1, 1975.

(1) This section shall not apply with respect to any cause of action which arose, or any act or omission which occurred, before January 1, 1975.

(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), nothing in this subchapter shall be construed to exempt or relieve any person from any law of any State which regulates insurance, banking, or securities.

(B) Neither an employee benefit plan described in section 1003(a) of this title, which is not exempt under section 1003(b) of this title (other than a plan established primarily for the purpose of providing death benefits), nor any trust established under such a plan, shall be deemed to be an insurance company or other insurer, bank, trust company, or investment company or to be engaged in the business of insurance or banking for purposes of any law of any State purporting to regulate insurance companies, insurance contracts, banks, trust companies, or investment companies.

(3) Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit use by the Secretary of services or facilities of a State agency as permitted under section 1136 of this title.

(4) Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to any generally applicable criminal law of a State.

(5)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to the Hawaii Prepaid Health Care Act (Haw. Rev. Stat. §§393–1 through 393–51).

(B) Nothing in subparagraph (A) shall be construed to exempt from subsection (a) of this section—

(i) any State tax law relating to employee benefit plans, or

(ii) any amendment of the Hawaii Prepaid Health Care Act enacted after September 2, 1974, to the extent it provides for more than the effective administration of such Act as in effect on such date.

(C) Notwithstanding subparagraph (A), parts 1 and 4 of this subtitle, and the preceding sections of this part to the extent they govern matters which are governed by the provisions of such parts 1 and 4, shall supersede the Hawaii Prepaid Health Care Act (as in effect on or after January 14, 1983), but the Secretary may enter into cooperative arrangements under this paragraph and section 1136 of this title with officials of the State of Hawaii to assist them in effectuating the policies of provisions of such Act which are superseded by such parts 1 and 4 and the preceding sections of this part.

(6)(A) Notwithstanding any other provision of this section—

(i) in the case of an employee welfare benefit plan which is a multiple employer welfare arrangement and is fully insured (or which is a multiple employer welfare arrangement subject to an exemption under subparagraph (B)), any law of any State which regulates insurance may apply to such arrangement to the extent that such law provides—

(I) standards, requiring the maintenance of specified levels of reserves and specified levels of contributions, which any such plan, or any trust established under such a plan, must meet in order to be considered under such law able to pay benefits in full when due, and

(II) provisions to enforce such standards, and

(ii) in the case of any other employee welfare benefit plan which is a multiple employer welfare arrangement, in addition to this subchapter, any law of any State which regulates insurance may apply to the extent not inconsistent with the preceding sections of this subchapter.

(B) The Secretary may, under regulations which may be prescribed by the Secretary, exempt from subparagraph (A)(ii), individually or by class, multiple employer welfare arrangements which are not fully insured. Any such exemption may be granted with respect to any arrangement or class of arrangements only if such arrangement or each arrangement which is a member of such class meets the requirements of section 1002(1) and section 1003 of this title necessary to be considered an employee welfare benefit plan to which this subchapter applies.

(C) Nothing in subparagraph (A) shall affect the manner or extent to which the provisions of this subchapter apply to an employee welfare benefit plan which is not a multiple employer welfare arrangement and which is a plan, fund, or program participating in, subscribing to, or otherwise using a multiple employer welfare arrangement to fund or administer benefits to such plan's participants and beneficiaries.

(D) For purposes of this paragraph, a multiple employer welfare arrangement shall be considered fully insured only if the terms of the arrangement provide for benefits the amount of all of which the Secretary determines are guaranteed under a contract, or policy of insurance, issued by an insurance company, insurance service, or insurance organization, qualified to conduct business in a State.

(7) Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to qualified domestic relations orders (within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(B)(i) of this title), qualified medical child support orders (within the meaning of section 1169(a)(2)(A) of this title), and the provisions of law referred to in section 1169(a)(2)(B)(ii) of this title to the extent enforced by qualified medical child support orders.

(8) Subsection (a) of this section shall not be construed to preclude any State cause of action—

(A) with respect to which the State exercises its acquired rights under section 1169(b)(3) of this title with respect to a group health plan (as defined in section 1167(1) of this title), or

(B) for recoupment of payment with respect to items or services pursuant to a State plan for medical assistance approved under title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.] which would not have been payable if such acquired rights had been executed before payment with respect to such items or services by the group health plan.

(9) For additional provisions relating to group health plans, see section 1191 of this title.

For purposes of this section:

(1) The term “State law” includes all laws, decisions, rules, regulations, or other State action having the effect of law, of any State. A law of the United States applicable only to the District of Columbia shall be treated as a State law rather than a law of the United States.

(2) The term “State” includes a State, any political subdivisions thereof, or any agency or instrumentality of either, which purports to regulate, directly or indirectly, the terms and conditions of employee benefit plans covered by this subchapter.

Nothing in this subchapter shall be construed to alter, amend, modify, invalidate, impair, or supersede any law of the United States (except as provided in sections 1031 and 1137(c) of this title) or any rule or regulation issued under any such law.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §514, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 897; Pub. L. 97–473, title III, §§301(a), 302(b), Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2611, 2613; Pub. L. 98–397, title I, §104(b), Aug. 23, 1984, 98 Stat. 1436; Pub. L. 99–272, title IX, §9503(d)(1), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 207; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7894(f)(2)(A), (3)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2450, 2451; Pub. L. 103–66, title IV, §4301(c)(4), Aug. 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 377; Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(f)(1), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1953; Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(G), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(8)(B), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title XIX of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter XIX (§1396 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b)(9). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to reference in original act which appears in text as reference to section 1191 of this title.

Pub. L. 104–191 added par. (9).

1993—Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 103–66, §4301(c)(4)(A), which directed the insertion in par. (7)(D) of “, qualified medical child support orders (within the meaning of section 1169(a)(2)(A) of this title), and the provisions of law referred to in section 1169(a)(2)(B)(ii) of this title to the extent enforced by qualified medical child support orders” before the period, was executed by making the insertion before the period at end of par. (7), to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 103–66, §4301(c)(4)(B), added par. (8) and struck out former par. (8) which read as follows: “Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to any State law mandating that an employee benefit plan not include any provision which has the effect of limiting or excluding coverage or payment for any health care for an individual who would otherwise be covered or entitled to benefits or services under the terms of the employee benefit plan, because that individual is provided, or is eligible for, benefits or services pursuant to a plan under title XIX of the Social Security Act, to the extent such law is necessary for the State to be eligible to receive reimbursement under title XIX of that Act.”

1989—Subsec. (b)(5)(C). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(f)(2)(A), substituted “by such parts 1 and 4 and the preceding sections of this part” for “by such parts”.

Subsec. (b)(6)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(f)(3)(A), substituted “section 1002(1)” for “section 1002(*l*)”.

1986—Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 99–272 added par. (8).

1984—Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 98–397 added par. (7).

1983—Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 97–473, §301(a), added par. (5).

Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 97–473, §302(b), added par. (6).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204, set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

Section 7894(f)(2)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by this paragraph [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 301 of Public Law 97–473.”

Section 7894(f)(3)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by this paragraph [amending this section] shall take effect as if included in section 302 of Public Law 97–473.”

Section 9503(d)(2) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the amendment made by paragraph (1) [amending this section] shall become effective on October 1, 1986.

“(B) In the case of a plan maintained pursuant to one or more collective bargaining agreements between employee representatives and one or more employers ratified on or before the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986], the amendment made by paragraph (1) shall become effective on the later of—

“(i) October 1, 1986; or

“(ii) the earlier of—

“(I) the date on which the last of the collective bargaining agreements under which the plan is maintained, which were in effect on the date of the enactment of this Act, terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof agreed to after the date of the enactment of this Act); or

“(II) three years after the date of the enactment of this Act.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–397 effective Jan. 1, 1985, except as otherwise provided, see section 303(d) of Pub. L. 98–397, set out as a note under section 1001 of this title.

Section 301(c) of Pub. L. 97–473 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Jan. 14, 1983].”

Amendment by section 302(b) of Pub. L. 97–473 effective Jan. 14, 1983, see section 302(c) of Pub. L. 97–473, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Secretary authorized, effective Sept. 2, 1974, to promulgate regulations wherever provisions of this subchapter call for the promulgation of regulations, see section 1031 of this title.

For provisions setting forth circumstances under which any amendment to a plan required to be made by an amendment made by section 4301 of Pub. L. 103–66 shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1994, see section 4301(d) of Pub. L. 103–66, set out as an Effective Date of 1993 Amendment note under section 1021 of this title.

Section 301(b) of Pub. L. 97–473 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall not be considered a precedent with respect to extending such amendment to any other State law.”

This section is referred to in sections 1114, 1191, 1191b of this title; title 4 section 114; title 26 section 9805; title 42 sections 300gg–23, 300gg–62, 300gg–91.

Every employer who is obligated to make contributions to a multiemployer plan under the terms of the plan or under the terms of a collectively bargained agreement shall, to the extent not inconsistent with law, make such contributions in accordance with the terms and conditions of such plan or such agreement.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §515, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title III, §306(a), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1295.)

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1132, 1401, 1451 of this title; title 38 section 4318.

The Secretary shall maintain an ongoing program of outreach to the public designed to effectively promote retirement income savings by the public.

The Secretary shall carry out the requirements of subsection (a) of this section by means which shall ensure effective communication to the public, including publication of public service announcements, public meetings, creation of educational materials, and establishment of a site on the Internet.

The information to be made available by the Secretary as part of the program of outreach required under subsection (a) of this section shall include the following:

(1) a description of the vehicles currently available to individuals and employers for creating and maintaining retirement income savings, specifically including information explaining to employers, in simple terms, the characteristics and operation of the different retirement savings vehicles, including the steps to establish each such vehicle; and

(2) information regarding matters relevant to establishing retirement income savings, such as—

(A) the forms of retirement income savings;

(B) the concept of compound interest;

(C) the importance of commencing savings early in life;

(D) savings principles;

(E) the importance of prudence and diversification in investing;

(F) the importance of the timing of investments; and

(G) the impact on retirement savings of life's uncertainties, such as living beyond one's life expectancy.

The Secretary shall establish a permanent site on the Internet concerning retirement income savings. The site shall contain at least the following information:

(1) a means for individuals to calculate their estimated retirement savings needs, based on their retirement income goal as a percentage of their preretirement income;

(2) a description in simple terms of the common types of retirement income savings arrangements available to both individuals and employers (specifically including small employers), including information on the amount of money that can be placed into a given vehicle, the tax treatment of the money, the amount of accumulation possible through different typical investment options and interest rate projections, and a directory of resources of more descriptive information;

(3) materials explaining to employers in simple terms, the characteristics and operation of the different retirement savings arrangements for their workers and what the basic legal requirements are under this chapter and the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, including the steps to establish each such arrangement;

(4) copies of all educational materials developed by the Department of Labor, and by other Federal agencies in consultation with such Department, to promote retirement income savings by workers and employers; and

(5) links to other sites maintained on the Internet by governmental agencies and nonprofit organizations that provide additional detail on retirement income savings arrangements and related topics on savings or investing.

The Secretary shall coordinate the outreach program under this section with similar efforts undertaken by other public and private entities.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §516, as added Pub. L. 105–92, §3(a), Nov. 19, 1997, 111 Stat. 2139.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 2 of Pub. L. 105–92 provided that:

“(a)

“(1) The impending retirement of the baby boom generation will severely strain our already overburdened entitlement system, necessitating increased reliance on pension and other personal savings.

“(2) Studies have found that less than a third of Americans have even tried to calculate how much they will need to have saved by retirement, and that less than 20 percent are very confident they will have enough money to live comfortably throughout their retirement.

“(3) A leading obstacle to expanding retirement savings is the simple fact that far too many Americans—particularly the young—are either unaware of, or without the knowledge and resources necessary to take advantage of, the extensive benefits offered by our retirement savings system.

“(b)

“(1) to advance the public's knowledge and understanding of retirement savings and its critical importance to the future well-being of American workers and their families;

“(2) to provide for a periodic, bipartisan national retirement savings summit in conjunction with the White House to elevate the issue of savings to national prominence; and

“(3) to initiate the development of a broad-based, public education program to encourage and enhance individual commitment to a personal retirement savings strategy.”

Not later than July 15, 1998, the President shall convene a National Summit on Retirement Income Savings at the White House, to be co-hosted by the President and the Speaker and the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives and the Majority Leader and Minority Leader of the Senate. Such a National Summit shall be convened thereafter in 2001 and 2005 on or after September 1 of each year involved. Such a National Summit shall—

(1) advance the public's knowledge and understanding of retirement savings and its critical importance to the future well-being of American workers and their families;

(2) facilitate the development of a broad-based, public education program to encourage and enhance individual commitment to a personal retirement savings strategy;

(3) develop recommendations for additional research, reforms, and actions in the field of private pensions and individual retirement savings; and

(4) disseminate the report of, and information obtained by, the National Summit and exhibit materials and works of the National Summit.

The National Summit shall be planned and conducted under the direction of the Secretary, in consultation with, and with the assistance of, the heads of such other Federal departments and agencies as the President may designate. Such assistance may include the assignment of personnel. The Secretary shall, in planning and conducting the National Summit, consult with the congressional leaders specified in subsection (e)(2) of this section. The Secretary shall also, in carrying out the Secretary's duties under this subsection, consult and coordinate with at least one organization made up of private sector businesses and associations partnered with Government entities to promote long-term financial security in retirement through savings.

The purpose of the National Summit shall be—

(1) to increase the public awareness of the value of personal savings for retirement;

(2) to advance the public's knowledge and understanding of retirement savings and its critical importance to the future well-being of American workers and their families;

(3) to facilitate the development of a broad-based, public education program to encourage and enhance individual commitment to a personal retirement savings strategy;

(4) to identify the problems workers have in setting aside adequate savings for retirement;

(5) to identify the barriers which employers, especially small employers, face in assisting their workers in accumulating retirement savings;

(6) to examine the impact and effectiveness of individual employers to promote personal savings for retirement among their workers and to promote participation in company savings options;

(7) to examine the impact and effectiveness of government programs at the Federal, State, and local levels to educate the public about, and to encourage, retirement income savings;

(8) to develop such specific and comprehensive recommendations for the legislative and executive branches of the Government and for private sector action as may be appropriate for promoting private pensions and individual retirement savings; and

(9) to develop recommendations for the coordination of Federal, State, and local retirement income savings initiatives among the Federal, State, and local levels of government and for the coordination of such initiatives.

The scope of the National Summit shall consist of issues relating to individual and employer-based retirement savings and shall not include issues relating to the old-age, survivors, and disability insurance program under title II of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.].

To carry out the purposes of the National Summit, the National Summit shall bring together—

(A) professionals and other individuals working in the fields of employee benefits and retirement savings;

(B) Members of Congress and officials in the executive branch;

(C) representatives of State and local governments;

(D) representatives of private sector institutions, including individual employers, concerned about promoting the issue of retirement savings and facilitating savings among American workers; and

(E) representatives of the general public.

The participants in the National Summit shall include the following individuals or their designees:

(A) the Speaker and the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives;

(B) the Majority Leader and the Minority Leader of the Senate;

(C) the Chairman and ranking Member of the Committee on Education and the Workforce of the House of Representatives;

(D) the Chairman and ranking Member of the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate;

(E) the Chairman and ranking Member of the Special Committee on Aging of the Senate;

(F) the Chairman and ranking Member of the Subcommittees on Labor, Health and Human Services, and Education of the Senate and House of Representatives; and

(G) the parties referred to in subsection (b) of this section.

There shall be not more than 200 additional participants. Of such additional participants—

(i) one-half shall be appointed by the President, in consultation with the elected leaders of the President's party in Congress (either the Speaker of the House of Representatives or the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives, and either the Majority Leader or the Minority Leader of the Senate; 1 and

(ii) one-half shall be appointed by the elected leaders of Congress of the party to which the President does not belong (one-half of that allotment to be appointed by either the Speaker of the House of Representatives or the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives, and one-half of that allotment to be appointed by either the Majority Leader or the Minority Leader of the Senate).

The additional participants described in subparagraph (A) shall be—

(i) appointed not later than January 31, 1998;

(ii) selected without regard to political affiliation or past partisan activity; and

(iii) representative of the diversity of thought in the fields of employee benefits and retirement income savings.

The National Summit shall be presided over equally by representatives of the executive and legislative branches.

In administering this section, the Secretary shall—

(A) request the cooperation and assistance of such other Federal departments and agencies and other parties referred to in subsection (b) of this section as may be appropriate in the carrying out of this section;

(B) furnish all reasonable assistance to State agencies, area agencies, and other appropriate organizations to enable them to organize and conduct conferences in conjunction with the National Summit;

(C) make available for public comment a proposed agenda for the National Summit that reflects to the greatest extent possible the purposes for the National Summit set out in this section;

(D) prepare and make available background materials for the use of participants in the National Summit that the Secretary considers necessary; and

(E) appoint and fix the pay of such additional personnel as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this section without regard to provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, and without regard to chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of such title relating to classification and General Schedule pay rates.

The Secretary shall, in carrying out the responsibilities and functions of the Secretary under this section, and as part of the National Summit, ensure that—

(A) the National Summit shall be conducted in a manner that ensures broad participation of Federal, State, and local agencies and private organizations, professionals, and others involved in retirement income savings and provides a strong basis for assistance to be provided under paragraph (1)(B);

(B) the agenda prepared under paragraph (1)(C) for the National Summit is published in the Federal Register; and

(C) the personnel appointed under paragraph (1)(E) shall be fairly balanced in terms of points of views represented and shall be appointed without regard to political affiliation or previous partisan activities.

The provisions of the Federal Advisory Committee Act (5 U.S.C. App.) shall not apply to the National Summit.

The Secretary shall prepare a report describing the activities of the National Summit and shall submit the report to the President, the Speaker and Minority Leader of the House of Representatives, the Majority and Minority Leaders of the Senate, and the chief executive officers of the States not later than 90 days after the date on which the National Summit is adjourned.

For purposes of this section, the term “State” means a State, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, and any other territory or possession of the United States.

There is authorized to be appropriated for fiscal years beginning on or after October 1, 1997, such sums as are necessary to carry out this section.

In order to facilitate the National Summit as a public-private partnership, the Secretary may accept private contributions, in the form of money, supplies, or services, to defray the costs of the National Summit.

The financial obligation for the Department of Labor for fiscal year 1998 shall not exceed the lesser of—

(1) one-half of the costs of the National Summit; or

(2) $250,000.

The private sector organization described in subsection (b) of this section and contracted with by the Secretary shall be obligated for the balance of the cost of the National Summit.

The Secretary may enter into contracts to carry out the Secretary's responsibilities under this section. The Secretary shall enter into a contract on a sole-source basis to ensure the timely completion of the National Summit in fiscal year 1998.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §517, as added Pub. L. 105–92, §4(a), Nov. 19, 1997, 111 Stat. 2141.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of the Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, referred to in subsec. (f)(1)(E), are classified generally to section 3301 et seq. of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

The Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (f)(3), is Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5.

This part is referred to in section 1191b of this title; title 26 section 9805; title 42 sections 300gg–91, 1396a, 1396e.

1 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

The plan sponsor of each group health plan shall provide, in accordance with this part, that each qualified beneficiary who would lose coverage under the plan as a result of a qualifying event is entitled, under the plan, to elect, within the election period, continuation coverage under the plan.

Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to any group health plan for any calendar year if all employers maintaining such plan normally employed fewer than 20 employees on a typical business day during the preceding calendar year.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §601, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 227; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7862(c)(1)(B), 7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2432, 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–239 struck out at end “Under regulations, rules similar to the rules of subsections (a) and (b) of section 52 of title 26 (relating to employers under common control) shall apply for purposes of this subsection.”

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by section 7862(c)(1)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to years beginning after Dec. 31, 1986, see section 7862(c)(1)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 10002(d) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) the date on which the last of the collective bargaining agreements relating to the plan terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof agreed to after the date of the enactment of this Act), or

“(B) January 1, 1987.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), any plan amendment made pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement relating to the plan which amends the plan solely to conform to any requirement added by this section shall not be treated as a termination of such collective bargaining agreement.”

This section is referred to in section 1162 of this title.

For purposes of section 1161 of this title, the term “continuation coverage” means coverage under the plan which meets the following requirements:

The coverage must consist of coverage which, as of the time the coverage is being provided, is identical to the coverage provided under the plan to similarly situated beneficiaries under the plan with respect to whom a qualifying event has not occurred. If coverage is modified under the plan for any group of similarly situated beneficiaries, such coverage shall also be modified in the same manner for all individuals who are qualified beneficiaries under the plan pursuant to this part in connection with such group.

The coverage must extend for at least the period beginning on the date of the qualifying event and ending not earlier than the earliest of the following:

In the case of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title, except as provided in clause (ii), the date which is 18 months after the date of the qualifying event.

If a qualifying event (other than a qualifying event described in section 1163(6) of this title) occurs during the 18 months after the date of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title, the date which is 36 months after the date of the qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title.

In the case of a qualifying event described in section 1163(6) of this title (relating to bankruptcy proceedings), the date of the death of the covered employee or qualified beneficiary (described in section 1167(3)(C)(iii) of this title), or in the case of the surviving spouse or dependent children of the covered employee, 36 months after the date of the death of the covered employee.

In the case of a qualifying event not described in section 1163(2) or 1163(6) of this title, the date which is 36 months after the date of the qualifying event.

In the case of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title that occurs less than 18 months after the date the covered employee became entitled to benefits under title XVIII of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1395 et seq.], the period of coverage for qualified beneficiaries other than the covered employee shall not terminate under this subparagraph before the close of the 36-month period beginning on the date the covered employee became so entitled.

In the case of a qualified beneficiary who is determined, under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq., 1381 et seq.], to have been disabled at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part, any reference in clause (i) or (ii) to 18 months is deemed a reference to 29 months (with respect to all qualified beneficiaries), but only if the qualified beneficiary has provided notice of such determination under section 1166(3) 1 of this title before the end of such 18 months.

The date on which the employer ceases to provide any group health plan to any employee.

The date on which coverage ceases under the plan by reason of a failure to make timely payment of any premium required under the plan with respect to the qualified beneficiary. The payment of any premium (other than any payment referred to in the last sentence of paragraph (3)) shall be considered to be timely if made within 30 days after the date due or within such longer period as applies to or under the plan.

The date on which the qualified beneficiary first becomes, after the date of the election—

(i) covered under any other group health plan (as an employee or otherwise) which does not contain any exclusion or limitation with respect to any preexisting condition of such beneficiary (other than such an exclusion or limitation which does not apply to (or is satisfied by) such beneficiary by reason of chapter 100 of title 26, part 7 of this subtitle, or title XXVII of the Public Health Service Act [42 U.S.C. 300gg et seq.]), or

(ii) in the case of a qualified beneficiary other than a qualified beneficiary described in section 1167(3)(C) of this title, entitled to benefits under title XVIII of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1395 et seq.].

In the case of a qualified beneficiary who is disabled at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part, the month that begins more than 30 days after the date of the final determination under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq., 1381 et seq.] that the qualified beneficiary is no longer disabled.

The plan may require payment of a premium for any period of continuation coverage, except that such premium—

(A) shall not exceed 102 percent of the applicable premium for such period, and

(B) may, at the election of the payor, be made in monthly installments.

In no event may the plan require the payment of any premium before the day which is 45 days after the day on which the qualified beneficiary made the initial election for continuation coverage. In the case of an individual described in the last sentence of paragraph (2)(A), any reference in subparagraph (A) of this paragraph to “102 percent” is deemed a reference to “150 percent” for any month after the 18th month of continuation coverage described in clause (i) or (ii) of paragraph (2)(A).

The coverage may not be conditioned upon, or discriminate on the basis of lack of, evidence of insurability.

In the case of a qualified beneficiary whose period of continuation coverage expires under paragraph (2)(A), the plan must, during the 180-day period ending on such expiration date, provide to the qualified beneficiary the option of enrollment under a conversion health plan otherwise generally available under the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §602, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 228; amended Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9501(b)(1)(B), (2)(B), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 2076, 2077; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1895(d)(1)(B), (2)(B), (3)(B), (4)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2936–2938; Pub. L. 101–239, title VI, §6703(a), (b), title VII, §§7862(c)(3)(B), (4)(A), (5)(B), 7871(c), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2296, 2432, 2433, 2435; Pub. L. 104–188, title I, §1704(g)(1)(B), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1880; Pub. L. 104–191, title IV, §421(b)(1), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 2088.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in par. (2)(A), (D)(ii), (E), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II, XVI, and XVIII of the Social Security Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.), XVI (§1381 et seq.), and XVIII (§1395 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

Section 1166(3) of this title, referred to in par. (2)(A), was redesignated as section 1166(a)(3) of this title by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(d)(1)(A)(ii)(I), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.

The Public Health Service Act, referred to in par. (2)(D)(i), is act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, 58 Stat. 682, as amended. Title XXVII of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XXV (§300gg et seq.) of chapter 6A of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 201 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Par. (2)(A). Pub. L. 104–191, §421(b)(1)(A), in closing provisions, substituted “In the case of a qualified beneficiary” for “In the case of an individual” and “at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part” for “at the time of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title”, struck out “with respect to such event” after “(ii) to 18 months”, and inserted “(with respect to all qualified beneficiaries)” after “29 months”.

Par. (2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 104–188 amended cl. (v) generally. Prior to amendment, cl. (v) read as follows:

“(v)

Par. (2)(D)(i). Pub. L. 104–191, §421(b)(1)(B), inserted “(other than such an exclusion or limitation which does not apply to (or is satisfied by) such beneficiary by reason of chapter 100 of title 26, part 7 of this subtitle, or title XXVII of the Public Health Service Act [42 U.S.C. 300gg et seq.])” before “, or” at end.

Par. (2)(E). Pub. L. 104–191, §421(b)(1)(C), substituted “at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part” for “at the time of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title”.

1989—Par. (2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §6703(a)(1), inserted after and below cl. (iv) “In the case of an individual who is determined, under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act, to have been disabled at the time of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title, any reference in clause (i) or (ii) to 18 months with respect to such event is deemed a reference to 29 months, but only if the qualified beneficiary has provided notice of such determination under section 1166(3) of this title before the end of such 18 months.”

Par. (2)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7871(c), substituted “described in section 1163(6)” for “described in 1163(6)”.

Par. (2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(5)(B), which directed the insertion of cl. (v) “at the end” of par. (2)(A), was executed by inserting cl. (v) after cl. (iv), to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Par. (2)(D). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(3)(B), substituted “entitlement” for “eligibility” in heading and inserted “which does not contain any exclusion or limitation with respect to any preexisting condition of such beneficiary” after “or otherwise)” in cl. (i).

Par. (2)(E). Pub. L. 101–239, §6703(a)(2), added subpar. (E).

Par. (3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(4)(A), which directed substitution of “In no event may the plan require the payment of any premium before the day which is 45 days after the day on which the qualified beneficiary made the initial election for continuation coverage.” for last sentence of par. (3), was executed by making the substitution for the following sentence: “If an election is made after the qualifying event, the plan shall permit payment for continuation coverage during the period preceding the election to be made within 45 days of the date of the election.”, notwithstanding the sentence added at the end of par. (3) by Pub. L. 101–239, §6703(b).

Pub. L. 101–239, §6703(b), inserted at end “In the case of an individual described in the last sentence of paragraph (2)(A), any reference in subparagraph (A) of this paragraph to ‘102 percent’ is deemed a reference to ‘150 percent’ for any month after the 18th month of continuation coverage described in clause (i) or (ii) of paragraph (2)(A).”

1986—Par. (1). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(1)(B), inserted “If coverage is modified under the plan for any group of similarly situated beneficiaries, such coverage shall also be modified in the same manner for all individuals who are qualified beneficiaries under the plan pursuant to this part in connection with such group.”

Par. (2)(A). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(2)(B), amended subpar. (A) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (A) read as follows:

“(A)

“(i) a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title (relating to terminations and reduced hours), the date which is 18 months after the date of the qualifying event, and

“(ii) any qualifying event not described in clause (i), the date which is 36 months after the date of the qualifying event.”

Par. (2)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 99–509, §9501(b)(1)(B)(i), inserted “(other than a qualifying event described in section 1163(6) of this title)”.

Par. (2)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 99–509, §9501(b)(1)(B)(iv), added cl. (iii). Former cl. (iii) redesignated (iv).

Par. (2)(A)(iv). Pub. L. 99–509, §9501(b)(1)(B)(ii), (iii), redesignated cl. (iii) as (iv) and inserted “or 1163(6)”.

Par. (2)(C). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(3)(B), inserted “The payment of any premium (other than any payment referred to in the last sentence of paragraph (3)) shall be considered to be timely if made within 30 days after the date due or within such longer period as applies to or under the plan.”

Par. (2)(D). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(4)(B)(ii), (iii), substituted “Group health plan coverage or medicare eligibility” for “Reemployment or medicare eligibility” as heading and substituted “covered under any other group health plan (as an employee or otherwise)” for “a covered employee under any other group health plan” in cl. (i).

Par. (2)(D)(ii). Pub. L. 99–509, §9501(b)(2)(B), inserted “in the case of a qualified beneficiary other than a qualified beneficiary described in section 1167(3)(C) of this title” before “entitled”.

Par. (2)(E). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(4)(B)(i), struck out subpar. (E), remarriage of spouse, which read as follows: “In the case of an individual who is a qualified beneficiary by reason of being the spouse of a covered employee, the date on which the beneficiary remarries and becomes covered under a group health plan.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 effective Jan. 1, 1997, regardless of whether qualifying event occurred before, on, or after such date, see section 421(d) of Pub. L. 104–191 set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–188 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1989, see section 1704(g)(2) of Pub. L. 104–188, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26.

Section 6703(d) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and section 1166 of this title] shall apply to plan years beginning on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Dec. 19, 1989], regardless of whether the qualifying event occurred before, on, or after such date.”

Amendment by section 7862(c)(3)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to (i) qualifying events occurring after Dec. 31, 1989, and (ii) in the case of qualified beneficiaries who elected continuation coverage after Dec. 31, 1988, the period for which the required premium was paid (or was attempted to be paid but was rejected as such), see section 7862(c)(3)(D) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7862(c)(4)(A) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1989, see section 7862(c)(4)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26.

Amendment by section 7862(c)(5)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1989, see section 7862(c)(5)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–514 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in enactment of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 1895(e) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in title X of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 9501(e) of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in section 1167 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

For purposes of this part, the term “qualifying event” means, with respect to any covered employee, any of the following events which, but for the continuation coverage required under this part, would result in the loss of coverage of a qualified beneficiary:

(1) The death of the covered employee.

(2) The termination (other than by reason of such employee's gross misconduct), or reduction of hours, of the covered employee's employment.

(3) The divorce or legal separation of the covered employee from the employee's spouse.

(4) The covered employee becoming entitled to benefits under title XVIII of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1395 et seq.].

(5) A dependent child ceasing to be a dependent child under the generally applicable requirements of the plan.

(6) A proceeding in a case under title 11, commencing on or after July 1, 1986, with respect to the employer from whose employment the covered employee retired at any time.

In the case of an event described in paragraph (6), a loss of coverage includes a substantial elimination of coverage with respect to a qualified beneficiary described in section 1167(3)(C) of this title within one year before or after the date of commencement of the proceeding.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §603, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 229; amended Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9501(a)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 2076.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in par. (4), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title XVIII of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter XVIII (§1395 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1986—Pub. L. 99–509 added par. (6) and last sentence.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in title X of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 9501(e) of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1162, 1166, 1167 of this title.

For purposes of this part—

The term “applicable premium” means, with respect to any period of continuation coverage of qualified beneficiaries, the cost to the plan for such period of the coverage for similarly situated beneficiaries with respect to whom a qualifying event has not occurred (without regard to whether such cost is paid by the employer or employee).

To the extent that a plan is a self-insured plan—

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the applicable premium for any period of continuation coverage of qualified beneficiaries shall be equal to a reasonable estimate of the cost of providing coverage for such period for similarly situated beneficiaries which—

(i) is determined on an actuarial basis, and

(ii) takes into account such factors as the Secretary may prescribe in regulations.

If an administrator elects to have this subparagraph apply, the applicable premium for any period of continuation coverage of qualified beneficiaries shall be equal to—

(i) the cost to the plan for similarly situated beneficiaries for the same period occurring during the preceding determination period under paragraph (3), adjusted by

(ii) the percentage increase or decrease in the implicit price deflator of the gross national product (calculated by the Department of Commerce and published in the Survey of Current Business) for the 12-month period ending on the last day of the sixth month of such preceding determination period.

An administrator may not elect to have subparagraph (B) apply in any case in which there is any significant difference, between the determination period and the preceding determination period, in coverage under, or in employees covered by, the plan. The determination under the preceding sentence for any determination period shall be made at the same time as the determination under paragraph (3).

The determination of any applicable premium shall be made for a period of 12 months and shall be made before the beginning of such period.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §604, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 229.)

For purposes of this part—

The term “election period” means the period which—

(A) begins not later than the date on which coverage terminates under the plan by reason of a qualifying event,

(B) is of at least 60 days’ duration, and

(C) ends not earlier than 60 days after the later of—

(i) the date described in subparagraph (A), or

(ii) in the case of any qualified beneficiary who receives notice under section 1166(4) 1 of this title, the date of such notice.

Except as otherwise specified in an election, any election of continuation coverage by a qualified beneficiary described in subparagraph (A)(i) or (B) of section 1167(3) of this title shall be deemed to include an election of continuation coverage on behalf of any other qualified beneficiary who would lose coverage under the plan by reason of the qualifying event. If there is a choice among types of coverage under the plan, each qualified beneficiary is entitled to make a separate selection among such types of coverage.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §605, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 230; amended Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1895(d)(5)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2939.)

Section 1166(4) of this title, referred to in par. (1)(C)(ii), was redesignated as section 1166(a)(4) of this title by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(d)(1)(A)(ii)(I), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.

1986—Par. (2). Pub. L. 99–514 inserted “of continuation coverage” after “any election” and inserted at end “If there is a choice among types of coverage under the plan, each qualified beneficiary is entitled to make a separate selection among such types of coverage.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–514 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in enactment of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 1895(e) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1 See References in Text note below.

In accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary—

(1) the group health plan shall provide, at the time of commencement of coverage under the plan, written notice to each covered employee and spouse of the employee (if any) of the rights provided under this subsection,

(2) the employer of an employee under a plan must notify the administrator of a qualifying event described in paragraph (1), (2), (4), or (6) of section 1163 of this title within 30 days (or, in the case of a group health plan which is a multiemployer plan, such longer period of time as may be provided in the terms of the plan) of the date of the qualifying event,

(3) each covered employee or qualified beneficiary is responsible for notifying the administrator of the occurrence of any qualifying event described in paragraph (3) or (5) of section 1163 of this title within 60 days after the date of the qualifying event and each qualified beneficiary who is determined, under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq., 1381 et seq.], to have been disabled at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part is responsible for notifying the plan administrator of such determination within 60 days after the date of the determination and for notifying the plan administrator within 30 days after the date of any final determination under such title or titles that the qualified beneficiary is no longer disabled, and

(4) the administrator shall notify—

(A) in the case of a qualifying event described in paragraph (1), (2), (4), or (6) of section 1163 of this title, any qualified beneficiary with respect to such event, and

(B) in the case of a qualifying event described in paragraph (3) or (5) of section 1163 of this title where the covered employee notifies the administrator under paragraph (3), any qualified beneficiary with respect to such event,

of such beneficiary's rights under this subsection.

The requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be considered satisfied in the case of a multiemployer plan in connection with a qualifying event described in paragraph (2) of section 1163 of this title if the plan provides that the determination of the occurrence of such qualifying event will be made by the plan administrator.

For purposes of subsection (a)(4) of this section, any notification shall be made within 14 days (or, in the case of a group health plan which is a multiemployer plan, such longer period of time as may be provided in the terms of the plan) of the date on which the administrator is notified under paragraph (2) or (3), whichever is applicable, and any such notification to an individual who is a qualified beneficiary as the spouse of the covered employee shall be treated as notification to all other qualified beneficiaries residing with such spouse at the time such notification is made.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §606, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 230; amended Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9501(d)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 2077; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1895(d)(6)(B), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2939; Pub. L. 101–239, title VI, §6703(c), title VII, §7891(d)(1)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2296, 2445; Pub. L. 104–191, title IV, §421(b)(2), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 2088.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(3), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II and XVI of the Social Security Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVI (§1381 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 104–191 substituted “at any time during the first 60 days of continuation coverage under this part” for “at the time of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title”.

1989—Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(d)(1)(A)(ii), designated first sentence as subsec. (a), added subsec. (b), designated second sentence as subsec. (c), and substituted “For purposes of subsection (a)(4) of this section” for “For purposes of paragraph (4)”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(d)(1)(A)(i)(II), inserted in last sentence “(or, in the case of a group health plan which is a multiemployer plan, such longer period of time as may be provided in the terms of the plan)” after “14 days”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(d)(1)(A)(i)(I), inserted “(or, in the case of a group health plan which is a multiemployer plan, such longer period of time as may be provided in the terms of the plan)” after “30 days” in par. (2).

Pub. L. 101–239, §6703(c), inserted “and each qualified beneficiary who is determined, under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act, to have been disabled at the time of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title is responsible for notifying the plan administrator of such determination within 60 days after the date of the determination and for notifying the plan administrator within 30 days after the date of any final determination under such title or titles that the qualified beneficiary is no longer disabled” before comma in par. (3).

1986—Par. (2). Pub. L. 99–509 substituted “(4), or (6)” for “or (4)”.

Par. (3). Pub. L. 99–514 inserted “within 60 days after the date of the qualifying event”.

Par. (4)(A). Pub. L. 99–509 substituted “(4), or (6)” for “or (4)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–191 effective Jan. 1, 1997, regardless of whether qualifying event occurred before, on, or after such date, see section 421(d) of Pub. L. 104–191 set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 6703(c) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to plan years beginning on or after Dec. 19, 1989, regardless of whether the qualifying event occurred before, on, or after such date, see section 6703(d) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1162 of this title.

Amendment by section 7891(d)(1)(A) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable with respect to plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1990, see section 7891(d)(1)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–514 applicable only with respect to qualifying events occurring after Oct. 22, 1986, see section 1895(d)(6)(D) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in title X of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 9501(e) of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 10002(e) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “At the time that the amendments made by this section [enacting this part and amending section 1132 of this title] apply to a group health plan (within the meaning of section 607(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1167(1)]), the plan shall notify each covered employee, and spouse of the employee (if any), who is covered under the plan at that time of the continuation coverage required under part 6 of subtitle B of title I of such Act [this part]. The notice furnished under this subsection is in lieu of notice that may otherwise be required under section 606(1) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1166(1)] with respect to such individuals.”

This section is referred to in sections 1132, 1162, 1165, 1167 of this title.

For purposes of this part—

The term “group health plan” means an employee welfare benefit plan providing medical care (as defined in section 213(d) of title 26) to participants or beneficiaries directly or through insurance, reimbursement, or otherwise. Such term shall not include any plan substantially all of the coverage under which is for qualified long-term care services (as defined in section 7702B(c) of title 26).

The term “covered employee” means an individual who is (or was) provided coverage under a group health plan by virtue of the performance of services by the individual for 1 or more persons maintaining the plan (including as an employee defined in section 401(c)(1) of title 26).

The term “qualified beneficiary” means, with respect to a covered employee under a group health plan, any other individual who, on the day before the qualifying event for that employee, is a beneficiary under the plan—

(i) as the spouse of the covered employee, or

(ii) as the dependent child of the employee.

Such term shall also include a child who is born to or placed for adoption with the covered employee during the period of continuation coverage under this part.

In the case of a qualifying event described in section 1163(2) of this title, the term “qualified beneficiary” includes the covered employee.

In the case of a qualifying event described in section 1163(6) of this title, the term “qualified beneficiary” includes a covered employee who had retired on or before the date of substantial elimination of coverage and any other individual who, on the day before such qualifying event, is a beneficiary under the plan—

(i) as the spouse of the covered employee,

(ii) as the dependent child of the employee, or

(iii) as the surviving spouse of the covered employee.

Subsection (n) (relating to leased employees) and subsection (t) (relating to application of controlled group rules to certain employee benefits) of section 414 of title 26 shall apply for purposes of this part in the same manner and to the same extent as such subsections apply for purposes of section 106 of title 26. Any regulations prescribed by the Secretary pursuant to the preceding sentence shall be consistent and coextensive with any regulations prescribed for similar purposes by the Secretary of the Treasury (or such Secretary's delegate) under such subsections.

A group health plan shall not be treated as failing to meet the requirements of this part solely because the plan provides both—

(A) that the period of extended coverage referred to in section 1162(2) of this title commences with the date of the loss of coverage, and

(B) that the applicable notice period provided under section 1166(a)(2) of this title commences with the date of the loss of coverage.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §607, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 231; amended Pub. L. 99–509, title IX, §9501(c)(2), Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 2077; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1895(d)(8), (9)(A), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2940; Pub. L. 100–647, title III, §3011(b)(6), Nov. 10, 1988, 102 Stat. 3625; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7862(c)(2)(A), (6)(A), 7891(a)(1), (d)(2)(B)(i), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2432, 2433, 2445, 2446; Pub. L. 104–191, title III, §321(d)(2), title IV, §421(b)(3), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 2058, 2088.)

1996—Par. (1). Pub. L. 104–191, §321(d)(2), inserted at end “Such term shall not include any plan substantially all of the coverage under which is for qualified long-term care services (as defined in section 7702B(c) of title 26).”

Par. (3)(A). Pub. L. 104–191, §421(b)(3), inserted at end “Such term shall also include a child who is born to or placed for adoption with the covered employee during the period of continuation coverage under this part.”

1989—Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(d)(2)(B)(i)(I), inserted “and special rules” after “Definitions” in section catchline.

Par. (1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(6)(A), repealed Pub. L. 100–647, §3011(b)(6), see 1988 Amendment note below.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Par. (2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(2)(A), substituted “the performance of services by the individual for 1 or more persons maintaining the plan (including as an employee defined in section 401(c)(1) of title 26)” for “the individual's employment or previous employment with an employer”.

Par. (5). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(d)(2)(B)(i)(II), added par. (5).

1988—Par. (1). Pub. L. 100–647, §3011(b)(6), which directed amendment of par. (1) by substituting “section 162(i)(2) of title 26” for “section 162(i)(3) of title 26”, was repealed by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(c)(6)(A).

Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(8), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “The term ‘group health plan’ means an employee welfare benefit plan that is a group health plan (within the meaning of section 162(i)(3) of title 26).”

Par. (3)(C). Pub. L. 99–509 added subpar. (C).

Par. (4). Pub. L. 99–514, §1895(d)(9)(A), added par. (4).

Amendment by section 321(d)(2) of Pub. L. 104–191 applicable to contracts issued after Dec. 31, 1996, see section 321(f) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as an Effective Date note under section 7702B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 421(b)(3) of Pub. L. 104–191 effective Jan. 1, 1997, regardless of whether qualifying event occurred before, on, or after such date, see section 421(d) of Pub. L. 104–191 set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26.

Amendment by section 7862(c)(2)(A) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1989, see section 7862(c)(2)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 7862(c)(6)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “Subparagraph (A) [repealing section 3011(b)(6) of Pub. L. 100–647, which amended this section] shall be effective as if included in the enactment of section 3011(b) of the Technical and Miscellaneous Revenue Act of 1988 [Pub. L. 100–647].”

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7891(d)(2)(B)(i) of Pub. L. 101–239 applicable with respect to plan years beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1990, see section 7891(d)(2)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 4980B of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–647 applicable to taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1988, but not applicable to any plan for any plan year to which section 162(k) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code (as in effect on the day before Nov. 10, 1988) did not apply by reason of section 10001(e)(2) of Pub. L. 99–272, see section 3011(d) of Pub. L. 100–647, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26.

Section 1895(d)(9)(B) of Pub. L. 99–514 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect in the same manner and to the same extent as the amendments made by subsections (e) and (i) of section 1151 of this Act [amending sections 132 and 414 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code, see section 1151(k) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as an Effective Date note under section 89 of Title 26].”

Amendment by section 1895(d)(8) of Pub. L. 99–514 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in enactment of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 1895(e) of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–509 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in title X of the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, Pub. L. 99–272, see section 9501(e) of Pub. L. 99–509, set out as a note under section 162 of Title 26.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1144, 1162, 1163, 1165 of this title; title 38 sections 4317, 4318; title 42 sections 1396a, 1396b, 1396g–1.

The Secretary may prescribe regulations to carry out the provisions of this part.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §608, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title X, §10002(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 231.)

Each group health plan shall provide benefits in accordance with the applicable requirements of any qualified medical child support order. A qualified medical child support order with respect to any participant or beneficiary shall be deemed to apply to each group health plan which has received such order, from which the participant or beneficiary is eligible to receive benefits, and with respect to which the requirements of paragraph (4) are met.

For purposes of this subsection—

The term “qualified medical child support order” means a medical child support order—

(i) which creates or recognizes the existence of an alternate recipient's right to, or assigns to an alternate recipient the right to, receive benefits for which a participant or beneficiary is eligible under a group health plan, and

(ii) with respect to which the requirements of paragraphs (3) and (4) are met.

The term “medical child support order” means any judgment, decree, or order (including approval of a settlement agreement) which—

(i) provides for child support with respect to a child of a participant under a group health plan or provides for health benefit coverage to such a child, is made pursuant to a State domestic relations law (including a community property law), and relates to benefits under such plan, or

(ii) enforces a law relating to medical child support described in section 1908 of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396g–1] (as added by section 13822 1 of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993) with respect to a group health plan,

if such judgment, decree, or order (I) is issued by a court of competent jurisdiction or (II) is issued through an administrative process established under State law and has the force and effect of law under applicable State law. For purposes of this subparagraph, an administrative notice which is issued pursuant to an administrative process referred to in subclause (II) of the preceding sentence and which has the effect of an order described in clause (i) or (ii) of the preceding sentence shall be treated as such an order.

The term “alternate recipient” means any child of a participant who is recognized under a medical child support order as having a right to enrollment under a group health plan with respect to such participant.

A medical child support order meets the requirements of this paragraph only if such order clearly specifies—

(A) the name and the last known mailing address (if any) of the participant and the name and mailing address of each alternate recipient covered by the order, except that, to the extent provided in the order, the name and mailing address of an official of a State or a political subdivision thereof may be substituted for the mailing address of any such alternate recipient,

(B) a reasonable description of the type of coverage to be provided to each such alternate recipient, or the manner in which such type of coverage is to be determined, and

(C) the period to which such order applies.

A medical child support order meets the requirements of this paragraph only if such order does not require a plan to provide any type or form of benefit, or any option, not otherwise provided under the plan, except to the extent necessary to meet the requirements of a law relating to medical child support described in section 1908 of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396g–1] (as added by section 13822 1 of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993).

In the case of any medical child support order received by a group health plan—

(i) the plan administrator shall promptly notify the participant and each alternate recipient of the receipt of such order and the plan's procedures for determining whether medical child support orders are qualified medical child support orders, and

(ii) within a reasonable period after receipt of such order, the plan administrator shall determine whether such order is a qualified medical child support order and notify the participant and each alternate recipient of such determination.

Each group health plan shall establish reasonable procedures to determine whether medical child support orders are qualified medical child support orders and to administer the provision of benefits under such qualified orders. Such procedures—

(i) shall be in writing,

(ii) shall provide for the notification of each person specified in a medical child support order as eligible to receive benefits under the plan (at the address included in the medical child support order) of such procedures promptly upon receipt by the plan of the medical child support order, and

(iii) shall permit an alternate recipient to designate a representative for receipt of copies of notices that are sent to the alternate recipient with respect to a medical child support order.

If a plan fiduciary acts in accordance with part 4 of this subtitle in treating a medical child support order as being (or not being) a qualified medical child support order, then the plan's obligation to the participant and each alternate recipient shall be discharged to the extent of any payment made pursuant to such act of the fiduciary.

A person who is an alternate recipient under a qualified medical child support order shall be considered a beneficiary under the plan for purposes of any provision of this chapter.

A person who is an alternate recipient under any medical child support order shall be considered a participant under the plan for purposes of the reporting and disclosure requirements of part 1 of this subtitle.

Any payment for benefits made by a group health plan pursuant to a medical child support order in reimbursement for expenses paid by an alternate recipient or an alternate recipient's custodial parent or legal guardian shall be made to the alternate recipient or the alternate recipient's custodial parent or legal guardian.

Payment of benefits by a group health plan to an official of a State or a political subdivision thereof whose name and address have been substituted for the name and address of an alternate recipient in a qualified medical child support order, pursuant to paragraph (3)(A), shall be treated, for purposes of this subchapter, as payment of benefits to the alternate recipient.

A group health plan shall provide that payment for benefits with respect to a participant under the plan will be made in accordance with any assignment of rights made by or on behalf of such participant or a beneficiary of the participant as required by a State plan for medical assistance approved under title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.] pursuant to section 1912(a)(1)(A) of such Act [42 U.S.C. 1396k(a)(1)(A)] (as in effect on August 10, 1993).

A group health plan shall provide that, in enrolling an individual as a participant or beneficiary or in determining or making any payments for benefits of an individual as a participant or beneficiary, the fact that the individual is eligible for or is provided medical assistance under a State plan for medical assistance approved under title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.] will not be taken into account.

A group health plan shall provide that, to the extent that payment has been made under a State plan for medical assistance approved under title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.] in any case in which a group health plan has a legal liability to make payment for items or services constituting such assistance, payment for benefits under the plan will be made in accordance with any State law which provides that the State has acquired the rights with respect to a participant to such payment for such items or services.

In any case in which a group health plan provides coverage for dependent children of participants or beneficiaries, such plan shall provide benefits to dependent children placed with participants or beneficiaries for adoption under the same terms and conditions as apply in the case of dependent children who are natural children of participants or beneficiaries under the plan, irrespective of whether the adoption has become final.

A group health plan may not restrict coverage under the plan of any dependent child adopted by a participant or beneficiary, or placed with a participant or beneficiary for adoption, solely on the basis of a preexisting condition of such child at the time that such child would otherwise become eligible for coverage under the plan, if the adoption or placement for adoption occurs while the participant or beneficiary is eligible for coverage under the plan.

For purposes of this subsection—

The term “child” means, in connection with any adoption, or placement for adoption, of the child, an individual who has not attained age 18 as of the date of such adoption or placement for adoption.

The term “placement”, or being “placed”, for adoption, in connection with any placement for adoption of a child with any person, means the assumption and retention by such person of a legal obligation for total or partial support of such child in anticipation of adoption of such child. The child's placement with such person terminates upon the termination of such legal obligation.

A group health plan may not reduce its coverage of the costs of pediatric vaccines (as defined under section 1928(h)(6) of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396s(h)(6)] as amended by section 13830 2 of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993) below the coverage it provided as of May 1, 1993.

Any regulations prescribed under this section shall be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor, in consultation with the Secretary of Health and Human Services.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §609, as added Pub. L. 103–66, title IV, §4301(a), Aug. 10, 1993, 107 Stat. 371; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title III, §381(a), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2257; Pub. L. 105–33, title V, §§5611(a), (b), 5612(a), 5613(a), (b), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 647, 648.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a)(7)(A), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title XIX of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XIX (§1396 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1997—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 105–33, §5613(b), inserted at end “A qualified medical child support order with respect to any participant or beneficiary shall be deemed to apply to each group health plan which has received such order, from which the participant or beneficiary is eligible to receive benefits, and with respect to which the requirements of paragraph (4) are met.”

Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 105–33, §5612(a), inserted at end of concluding provisions “For purposes of this subparagraph, an administrative notice which is issued pursuant to an administrative process referred to in subclause (II) of the preceding sentence and which has the effect of an order described in clause (i) or (ii) of the preceding sentence shall be treated as such an order.”

Subsec. (a)(3)(A). Pub. L. 105–33, §5611(a), inserted at end “except that, to the extent provided in the order, the name and mailing address of an official of a State or a political subdivision thereof may be substituted for the mailing address of any such alternate recipient,”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(B). Pub. L. 105–33, §5613(a)(1), (2), struck out “by the plan” after “to be provided” and inserted “and” at end.

Subsec. (a)(3)(C). Pub. L. 105–33, §5613(a)(3), substituted a period for “, and” at end.

Subsec. (a)(3)(D). Pub. L. 105–33, §5613(a)(4), struck out subpar. (D) which read as follows: “each plan to which such order applies.”

Subsec. (a)(9). Pub. L. 105–33, §5611(b), added par. (9).

1996—Subsec. (a)(2)(B). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “which—” for “issued by a court of competent jurisdiction which—” in introductory provisions, substituted a comma for a period at end of cl. (ii), and inserted concluding provisions after cl. (ii).

Section 5611(c) of Pub. L. 105–33 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply with respect to medical child support orders issued on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 5, 1997].”

Section 5612(b) of Pub. L. 105–33 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall be effective as if included in the enactment of section 381 of the Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act of 1996 (Public Law 104–193; 110 Stat. 2257).”

Section 5613(c) of Pub. L. 105–33 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply with respect to medical child support orders issued on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 5, 1997].”

Section 381(b) of Pub. L. 104–193 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) during the period after the date before the date of the enactment of this Act and before such 1st plan year, the plan is operated in accordance with the requirements of the amendments made by this section; and

“(B) such plan amendment applies retroactively to the period after the date before the date of the enactment of this Act and before such 1st plan year.

A plan shall not be treated as failing to be operated in accordance with the provisions of the plan merely because it operates in accordance with this paragraph.”

For provisions setting forth circumstances under which any amendment to a plan required to be made by an amendment made by section 4301(d) of Pub. L. 103–66 shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1994, see section 4301(d) of Pub. L. 103–66, set out as an Effective Date of 1993 Amendment note under section 1021 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1132, 1144, 1191b of this title; title 26 section 9805; title 42 section 300gg–91.

This part is referred to in sections 1003, 1021, 1132, 1136, 1162 of this title; title 26 section 4980B.

1 So in original. Probably should be section “13623”.

2 So in original. Probably should be section “13631”.

Subject to subsection (d) of this section, a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may, with respect to a participant or beneficiary, impose a preexisting condition exclusion only if—

(1) such exclusion relates to a condition (whether physical or mental), regardless of the cause of the condition, for which medical advice, diagnosis, care, or treatment was recommended or received within the 6-month period ending on the enrollment date;

(2) such exclusion extends for a period of not more than 12 months (or 18 months in the case of a late enrollee) after the enrollment date; and

(3) the period of any such preexisting condition exclusion is reduced by the aggregate of the periods of creditable coverage (if any, as defined in subsection (c)(1) of this section) applicable to the participant or beneficiary as of the enrollment date.

For purposes of this part—

The term “preexisting condition exclusion” means, with respect to coverage, a limitation or exclusion of benefits relating to a condition based on the fact that the condition was present before the date of enrollment for such coverage, whether or not any medical advice, diagnosis, care, or treatment was recommended or received before such date.

Genetic information shall not be treated as a condition described in subsection (a)(1) of this section in the absence of a diagnosis of the condition related to such information.

The term “enrollment date” means, with respect to an individual covered under a group health plan or health insurance coverage, the date of enrollment of the individual in the plan or coverage or, if earlier, the first day of the waiting period for such enrollment.

The term “late enrollee” means, with respect to coverage under a group health plan, a participant or beneficiary who enrolls under the plan other than during—

(A) the first period in which the individual is eligible to enroll under the plan, or

(B) a special enrollment period under subsection (f) of this section.

The term “waiting period” means, with respect to a group health plan and an individual who is a potential participant or beneficiary in the plan, the period that must pass with respect to the individual before the individual is eligible to be covered for benefits under the terms of the plan.

For purposes of this part, the term “creditable coverage” means, with respect to an individual, coverage of the individual under any of the following:

(A) A group health plan.

(B) Health insurance coverage.

(C) Part A or part B of title XVIII of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1395c et seq.; 1395j et seq.].

(D) Title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.], other than coverage consisting solely of benefits under section 1928 [42 U.S.C. 1396s].

(E) Chapter 55 of title 10.

(F) A medical care program of the Indian Health Service or of a tribal organization.

(G) A State health benefits risk pool.

(H) A health plan offered under chapter 89 of title 5.

(I) A public health plan (as defined in regulations).

(J) A health benefit plan under section 2504(e) of title 22.

Such term does not include coverage consisting solely of coverage of excepted benefits (as defined in section 1191b(c) of this title).

A period of creditable coverage shall not be counted, with respect to enrollment of an individual under a group health plan, if, after such period and before the enrollment date, there was a 63-day period during all of which the individual was not covered under any creditable coverage.

For purposes of subparagraph (A) and subsection (d)(4) of this section, any period that an individual is in a waiting period for any coverage under a group health plan (or for group health insurance coverage) or is in an affiliation period (as defined in subsection (g)(2) of this section) shall not be taken into account in determining the continuous period under subparagraph (A).

Except as otherwise provided under subparagraph (B), for purposes of applying subsection (a)(3) of this section, a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, shall count a period of creditable coverage without regard to the specific benefits covered during the period.

A group health plan, or a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may elect to apply subsection (a)(3) of this section based on coverage of benefits within each of several classes or categories of benefits specified in regulations rather than as provided under subparagraph (A). Such election shall be made on a uniform basis for all participants and beneficiaries. Under such election a group health plan or issuer shall count a period of creditable coverage with respect to any class or category of benefits if any level of benefits is covered within such class or category.

In the case of an election with respect to a group health plan under subparagraph (B) (whether or not health insurance coverage is provided in connection with such plan), the plan shall—

(i) prominently state in any disclosure statements concerning the plan, and state to each enrollee at the time of enrollment under the plan, that the plan has made such election, and

(ii) include in such statements a description of the effect of this election.

Periods of creditable coverage with respect to an individual shall be established through presentation of certifications described in subsection (e) of this section or in such other manner as may be specified in regulations.

Subject to paragraph (4), a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may not impose any preexisting condition exclusion in the case of an individual who, as of the last day of the 30-day period beginning with the date of birth, is covered under creditable coverage.

Subject to paragraph (4), a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may not impose any preexisting condition exclusion in the case of a child who is adopted or placed for adoption before attaining 18 years of age and who, as of the last day of the 30-day period beginning on the date of the adoption or placement for adoption, is covered under creditable coverage. The previous sentence shall not apply to coverage before the date of such adoption or placement for adoption.

A group health plan, and health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may not impose any preexisting condition exclusion relating to pregnancy as a preexisting condition.

Paragraphs (1) and (2) shall no longer apply to an individual after the end of the first 63-day period during all of which the individual was not covered under any creditable coverage.

A group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, shall provide the certification described in subparagraph (B)—

(i) at the time an individual ceases to be covered under the plan or otherwise becomes covered under a COBRA continuation provision,

(ii) in the case of an individual becoming covered under such a provision, at the time the individual ceases to be covered under such provision, and

(iii) on the request on behalf of an individual made not later than 24 months after the date of cessation of the coverage described in clause (i) or (ii), whichever is later.

The certification under clause (i) may be provided, to the extent practicable, at a time consistent with notices required under any applicable COBRA continuation provision.

The certification described in this subparagraph is a written certification of—

(i) the period of creditable coverage of the individual under such plan and the coverage (if any) under such COBRA continuation provision, and

(ii) the waiting period (if any) (and affiliation period, if applicable) imposed with respect to the individual for any coverage under such plan.

To the extent that medical care under a group health plan consists of group health insurance coverage, the plan is deemed to have satisfied the certification requirement under this paragraph if the health insurance issuer offering the coverage provides for such certification in accordance with this paragraph.

In the case of an election described in subsection (c)(3)(B) of this section by a group health plan or health insurance issuer, if the plan or issuer enrolls an individual for coverage under the plan and the individual provides a certification of coverage of the individual under paragraph (1)—

(A) upon request of such plan or issuer, the entity which issued the certification provided by the individual shall promptly disclose to such requesting plan or issuer information on coverage of classes and categories of health benefits available under such entity's plan or coverage, and

(B) such entity may charge the requesting plan or issuer for the reasonable cost of disclosing such information.

The Secretary shall establish rules to prevent an entity's failure to provide information under paragraph (1) or (2) with respect to previous coverage of an individual from adversely affecting any subsequent coverage of the individual under another group health plan or health insurance coverage.

A group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage in connection with a group health plan, shall permit an employee who is eligible, but not enrolled, for coverage under the terms of the plan (or a dependent of such an employee if the dependent is eligible, but not enrolled, for coverage under such terms) to enroll for coverage under the terms of the plan if each of the following conditions is met:

(A) The employee or dependent was covered under a group health plan or had health insurance coverage at the time coverage was previously offered to the employee or dependent.

(B) The employee stated in writing at such time that coverage under a group health plan or health insurance coverage was the reason for declining enrollment, but only if the plan sponsor or issuer (if applicable) required such a statement at such time and provided the employee with notice of such requirement (and the consequences of such requirement) at such time.

(C) The employee's or dependent's coverage described in subparagraph (A)—

(i) was under a COBRA continuation provision and the coverage under such provision was exhausted; or

(ii) was not under such a provision and either the coverage was terminated as a result of loss of eligibility for the coverage (including as a result of legal separation, divorce, death, termination of employment, or reduction in the number of hours of employment) or employer contributions toward such coverage were terminated.

(D) Under the terms of the plan, the employee requests such enrollment not later than 30 days after the date of exhaustion of coverage described in subparagraph (C)(i) or termination of coverage or employer contribution described in subparagraph (C)(ii).

If—

(i) a group health plan makes coverage available with respect to a dependent of an individual,

(ii) the individual is a participant under the plan (or has met any waiting period applicable to becoming a participant under the plan and is eligible to be enrolled under the plan but for a failure to enroll during a previous enrollment period), and

(iii) a person becomes such a dependent of the individual through marriage, birth, or adoption or placement for adoption,

the group health plan shall provide for a dependent special enrollment period described in subparagraph (B) during which the person (or, if not otherwise enrolled, the individual) may be enrolled under the plan as a dependent of the individual, and in the case of the birth or adoption of a child, the spouse of the individual may be enrolled as a dependent of the individual if such spouse is otherwise eligible for coverage.

A dependent special enrollment period under this subparagraph shall be a period of not less than 30 days and shall begin on the later of—

(i) the date dependent coverage is made available, or

(ii) the date of the marriage, birth, or adoption or placement for adoption (as the case may be) described in subparagraph (A)(iii).

If an individual seeks to enroll a dependent during the first 30 days of such a dependent special enrollment period, the coverage of the dependent shall become effective—

(i) in the case of marriage, not later than the first day of the first month beginning after the date the completed request for enrollment is received;

(ii) in the case of a dependent's birth, as of the date of such birth; or

(iii) in the case of a dependent's adoption or placement for adoption, the date of such adoption or placement for adoption.

In the case of a group health plan that offers medical care through health insurance coverage offered by a health maintenance organization, the plan may provide for an affiliation period with respect to coverage through the organization only if—

(A) no preexisting condition exclusion is imposed with respect to coverage through the organization,

(B) the period is applied uniformly without regard to any health status-related factors, and

(C) such period does not exceed 2 months (or 3 months in the case of a late enrollee).

For purposes of this part, the term “affiliation period” means a period which, under the terms of the health insurance coverage offered by the health maintenance organization, must expire before the health insurance coverage becomes effective. The organization is not required to provide health care services or benefits during such period and no premium shall be charged to the participant or beneficiary for any coverage during the period.

Such period shall begin on the enrollment date.

An affiliation period under a plan shall run concurrently with any waiting period under the plan.

A health maintenance organization described in paragraph (1) may use alternative methods, from those described in such paragraph, to address adverse selection as approved by the State insurance commissioner or official or officials designated by the State to enforce the requirements of part A of title XXVII of the Public Health Service Act [42 U.S.C. 300gg et seq.] for the State involved with respect to such issuer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §701, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1939; amended Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(b)(3)(H), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2938.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(C), (D), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Parts A and B of title XVIII of the Act are classified generally to parts A (§1395c et seq.) and B (§1395j et seq.) of subchapter XVIII of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title XIX of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XIX (§1396 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Public Health Service Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(3), is act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, 58 Stat. 682, as amended. Part A of title XXVII of the Act is classified generally to part A (§300gg et seq.) of subchapter XXV of chapter 6A of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 201 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 104–204 made technical amendment to reference in original act which appears in text as reference to section 1191b of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on and after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204, set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(A)

“(i)

“(ii)

“(B)

“(i)

“(ii)

“(iii)

“(C)

“(i) the individual may present other credible evidence of such coverage in order to establish the period of creditable coverage; and

“(ii) a group health plan and a health insurance issuer shall not be subject to any penalty or enforcement action with respect to the plan's or issuer's crediting (or not crediting) such coverage if the plan or issuer has sought to comply in good faith with the applicable requirements under the amendments made by this section [enacting this part and amending sections 1003, 1021, 1022, 1024, 1132, 1136, and 1144 of this title].

“(3)

“(A) the date on which the last of the collective bargaining agreements relating to the plan terminates (determined without regard to any extension thereof agreed to after the date of the enactment of this Act), or

“(B) July 1, 1997.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), any plan amendment made pursuant to a collective bargaining agreement relating to the plan which amends the plan solely to conform to any requirement of such part shall not be treated as a termination of such collective bargaining agreement.

“(4)

“(5)

This section is referred to in sections 1182, 1191 of this title.

Subject to paragraph (2), a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage in connection with a group health plan, may not establish rules for eligibility (including continued eligibility) of any individual to enroll under the terms of the plan based on any of the following health status-related factors in relation to the individual or a dependent of the individual:

(A) Health status.

(B) Medical condition (including both physical and mental illnesses).

(C) Claims experience.

(D) Receipt of health care.

(E) Medical history.

(F) Genetic information.

(G) Evidence of insurability (including conditions arising out of acts of domestic violence).

(H) Disability.

To the extent consistent with section 1181 of this title, paragraph (1) shall not be construed—

(A) to require a group health plan, or group health insurance coverage, to provide particular benefits other than those provided under the terms of such plan or coverage, or

(B) to prevent such a plan or coverage from establishing limitations or restrictions on the amount, level, extent, or nature of the benefits or coverage for similarly situated individuals enrolled in the plan or coverage.

For purposes of paragraph (1), rules for eligibility to enroll under a plan include rules defining any applicable waiting periods for such enrollment.

A group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering health insurance coverage in connection with a group health plan, may not require any individual (as a condition of enrollment or continued enrollment under the plan) to pay a premium or contribution which is greater than such premium or contribution for a similarly situated individual enrolled in the plan on the basis of any health status-related factor in relation to the individual or to an individual enrolled under the plan as a dependent of the individual.

Nothing in paragraph (1) shall be construed—

(A) to restrict the amount that an employer may be charged for coverage under a group health plan; or

(B) to prevent a group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, from establishing premium discounts or rebates or modifying otherwise applicable copayments or deductibles in return for adherence to programs of health promotion and disease prevention.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §702, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1945.)

This section is referred to in section 1191b of this title.

A group health plan which is a multiemployer plan or which is a multiple employer welfare arrangement may not deny an employer whose employees are covered under such a plan continued access to the same or different coverage under the terms of such a plan, other than—

(1) for nonpayment of contributions;

(2) for fraud or other intentional misrepresentation of material fact by the employer;

(3) for noncompliance with material plan provisions;

(4) because the plan is ceasing to offer any coverage in a geographic area;

(5) in the case of a plan that offers benefits through a network plan, there is no longer any individual enrolled through the employer who lives, resides, or works in the service area of the network plan and the plan applies this paragraph uniformly without regard to the claims experience of employers or any health status-related factor in relation to such individuals or their dependents; and

(6) for failure to meet the terms of an applicable collective bargaining agreement, to renew a collective bargaining or other agreement requiring or authorizing contributions to the plan, or to employ employees covered by such an agreement.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §703, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1946.)

A group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage, may not—

(A) except as provided in paragraph (2)—

(i) restrict benefits for any hospital length of stay in connection with childbirth for the mother or newborn child, following a normal vaginal delivery, to less than 48 hours, or

(ii) restrict benefits for any hospital length of stay in connection with childbirth for the mother or newborn child, following a cesarean section, to less than 96 hours; or

(B) require that a provider obtain authorization from the plan or the issuer for prescribing any length of stay required under subparagraph (A) (without regard to paragraph (2)).

Paragraph (1)(A) shall not apply in connection with any group health plan or health insurance issuer in any case in which the decision to discharge the mother or her newborn child prior to the expiration of the minimum length of stay otherwise required under paragraph (1)(A) is made by an attending provider in consultation with the mother.

A group health plan, and a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage in connection with a group health plan, may not—

(1) deny to the mother or her newborn child eligibility, or continued eligibility, to enroll or to renew coverage under the terms of the plan, solely for the purpose of avoiding the requirements of this section;

(2) provide monetary payments or rebates to mothers to encourage such mothers to accept less than the minimum protections available under this section;

(3) penalize or otherwise reduce or limit the reimbursement of an attending provider because such provider provided care to an individual participant or beneficiary in accordance with this section;

(4) provide incentives (monetary or otherwise) to an attending provider to induce such provider to provide care to an individual participant or beneficiary in a manner inconsistent with this section; or

(5) subject to subsection (c)(3) of this section, restrict benefits for any portion of a period within a hospital length of stay required under subsection (a) of this section in a manner which is less favorable than the benefits provided for any preceding portion of such stay.

(1) Nothing in this section shall be construed to require a mother who is a participant or beneficiary—

(A) to give birth in a hospital; or

(B) to stay in the hospital for a fixed period of time following the birth of her child.

(2) This section shall not apply with respect to any group health plan, or any group health insurance coverage offered by a health insurance issuer, which does not provide benefits for hospital lengths of stay in connection with childbirth for a mother or her newborn child.

(3) Nothing in this section shall be construed as preventing a group health plan or issuer from imposing deductibles, coinsurance, or other cost-sharing in relation to benefits for hospital lengths of stay in connection with childbirth for a mother or newborn child under the plan (or under health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan), except that such coinsurance or other cost-sharing for any portion of a period within a hospital length of stay required under subsection (a) of this section may not be greater than such coinsurance or cost-sharing for any preceding portion of such stay.

The imposition of the requirements of this section shall be treated as a material modification in the terms of the plan described in section 1022(a)(1) 1 of this title, for purposes of assuring notice of such requirements under the plan; except that the summary description required to be provided under the last sentence of section 1024(b)(1) of this title with respect to such modification shall be provided by not later than 60 days after the first day of the first plan year in which such requirements apply.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to prevent a group health plan or a health insurance issuer offering group health insurance coverage from negotiating the level and type of reimbursement with a provider for care provided in accordance with this section.

The requirements of this section shall not apply with respect to health insurance coverage if there is a State law (as defined in section 1191(d)(1) of this title) for a State that regulates such coverage that is described in any of the following subparagraphs:

(A) Such State law requires such coverage to provide for at least a 48-hour hospital length of stay following a normal vaginal delivery and at least a 96-hour hospital length of stay following a cesarean section.

(B) Such State law requires such coverage to provide for maternity and pediatric care in accordance with guidelines established by the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, the American Academy of Pediatrics, or other established professional medical associations.

(C) Such State law requires, in connection with such coverage for maternity care, that the hospital length of stay for such care is left to the decision of (or required to be made by) the attending provider in consultation with the mother.

Section 1191(a)(1) of this title shall not be construed as superseding a State law described in paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §711, as added Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(a)(5), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2935.)

Section 1022(a)(1) of this title, referred to in subsec. (d), was redesignated section 1022(a) of this title by Pub. L. 105–34, title XV, §1503(b)(1)(B), Aug. 5, 1997, 111 Stat. 1061.

Section applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on and after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204, set out as an Effective Date of 1996 Amendment note under section 1003 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1191, 1191a of this title; title 42 sections 300gg–4, 300gg–51.

1 See References in Text note below.

In the case of a group health plan (or health insurance coverage offered in connection with such a plan) that provides both medical and surgical benefits and mental health benefits—

If the plan or coverage does not include an aggregate lifetime limit on substantially all medical and surgical benefits, the plan or coverage may not impose any aggregate lifetime limit on mental health benefits.

If the plan or coverage includes an aggregate lifetime limit on substantially all medical and surgical benefits (in this paragraph referred to as the “applicable lifetime limit”), the plan or coverage shall either—

(i) apply the applicable lifetime limit both to the medical and surgical benefits to which it otherwise would apply and to mental health benefits and not distinguish in the application of such limit between such medical and surgical benefits and mental health benefits; or

(ii) not include any aggregate lifetime limit on mental health benefits that is less than the applicable lifetime limit.

In the case of a plan or coverage that is not described in subparagraph (A) or (B) and that includes no or different aggregate lifetime limits on different categories of medical and surgical benefits, the Secretary shall establish rules under which subparagraph (B) is applied to such plan or coverage with respect to mental health benefits by substituting for the applicable lifetime limit an average aggregate lifetime limit that is computed taking into account the weighted average of the aggregate lifetime limits applicable to such categories.

In the case of a group health plan (or health insurance coverage offered in connection with such a plan) that provides both medical and surgical benefits and mental health benefits—

If the plan or coverage does not include an annual limit on substantially all medical and surgical benefits, the plan or coverage may not impose any annual limit on mental health benefits.

If the plan or coverage includes an annual limit on substantially all medical and surgical benefits (in this paragraph referred to as the “applicable annual limit”), the plan or coverage shall either—

(i) apply the applicable annual limit both to medical and surgical benefits to which it otherwise would apply and to mental health benefits and not distinguish in the application of such limit between such medical and surgical benefits and mental health benefits; or

(ii) not include any annual limit on mental health benefits that is less than the applicable annual limit.

In the case of a plan or coverage that is not described in subparagraph (A) or (B) and that includes no or different annual limits on different categories of medical and surgical benefits, the Secretary shall establish rules under which subparagraph (B) is applied to such plan or coverage with respect to mental health benefits by substituting for the applicable annual limit an average annual limit that is computed taking into account the weighted average of the annual limits applicable to such categories.

Nothing in this section shall be construed—

(1) as requiring a group health plan (or health insurance coverage offered in connection with such a plan) to provide any mental health benefits; or

(2) in the case of a group health plan (or health insurance coverage offered in connection with such a plan) that provides mental health benefits, as affecting the terms and conditions (including cost sharing, limits on numbers of visits or days of coverage, and requirements relating to medical necessity) relating to the amount, duration, or scope of mental health benefits under the plan or coverage, except as specifically provided in subsection (a) of this section (in regard to parity in the imposition of aggregate lifetime limits and annual limits for mental health benefits).

This section shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan) for any plan year of a small employer.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “small employer” means, in connection with a group health plan with respect to a calendar year and a plan year, an employer who employed an average of at least 2 but not more than 50 employees on business days during the preceding calendar year and who employs at least 2 employees on the first day of the plan year.

For purposes of this paragraph—

Rules similar to the rules under subsections (b), (c), (m), and (*o*) of section 414 of title 26 shall apply for purposes of treating persons as a single employer.

In the case of an employer which was not in existence throughout the preceding calendar year, the determination of whether such employer is a small employer shall be based on the average number of employees that it is reasonably expected such employer will employ on business days in the current calendar year.

Any reference in this paragraph to an employer shall include a reference to any predecessor of such employer.

This section shall not apply with respect to a group health plan (or health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan) if the application of this section to such plan (or to such coverage) results in an increase in the cost under the plan (or for such coverage) of at least 1 percent.

In the case of a group health plan that offers a participant or beneficiary two or more benefit package options under the plan, the requirements of this section shall be applied separately with respect to each such option.

For purposes of this section—

The term “aggregate lifetime limit” means, with respect to benefits under a group health plan or health insurance coverage, a dollar limitation on the total amount that may be paid with respect to such benefits under the plan or health insurance coverage with respect to an individual or other coverage unit.

The term “annual limit” means, with respect to benefits under a group health plan or health insurance coverage, a dollar limitation on the total amount of benefits that may be paid with respect to such benefits in a 12-month period under the plan or health insurance coverage with respect to an individual or other coverage unit.

The term “medical or surgical benefits” means benefits with respect to medical or surgical services, as defined under the terms of the plan or coverage (as the case may be), but does not include mental health benefits.

The term “mental health benefits” means benefits with respect to mental health services, as defined under the terms of the plan or coverage (as the case may be), but does not include benefits with respect to treatment of substance abuse or chemical dependency.

This section shall not apply to benefits for services furnished on or after September 30, 2001.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §712, as added Pub. L. 104–204, title VII, §702(a), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2944.)

Section 702(c) of Pub. L. 104–204 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [enacting this section] shall apply with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 1998.”

Subject to paragraph (2) and except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, this part shall not be construed to supersede any provision of State law which establishes, implements, or continues in effect any standard or requirement solely relating to health insurance issuers in connection with group health insurance coverage except to the extent that such standard or requirement prevents the application of a requirement of this part.

Nothing in this part shall be construed to affect or modify the provisions of section 1144 of this title with respect to group health plans.

Subject to paragraph (2), the provisions of this part relating to health insurance coverage offered by a health insurance issuer supersede any provision of State law which establishes, implements, or continues in effect a standard or requirement applicable to imposition of a preexisting condition exclusion specifically governed by section 1181 of this title which differs from the standards or requirements specified in such section.

Only in relation to health insurance coverage offered by a health insurance issuer, the provisions of this part do not supersede any provision of State law to the extent that such provision—

(A) substitutes for the reference to “6-month period” in section 1181(a)(1) of this title a reference to any shorter period of time;

(B) substitutes for the reference to “12 months” and “18 months” in section 1181(a)(2) of this title a reference to any shorter period of time;

(C) substitutes for the references to “63 days” in sections 1181(c)(2)(A) and (d)(4)(A) of this title a reference to any greater number of days;

(D) substitutes for the reference to “30-day period” in sections 1181(b)(2) and (d)(1) of this title a reference to any greater period;

(E) prohibits the imposition of any preexisting condition exclusion in cases not described in section 1181(d) of this title or expands the exceptions described in such section;

(F) requires special enrollment periods in addition to those required under section 1181(f) of this title; or

(G) reduces the maximum period permitted in an affiliation period under section 1181(g)(1)(B) of this title.

Except as provided in section 1185 of this title, nothing in this part shall be construed as requiring a group health plan or health insurance coverage to provide specific benefits under the terms of such plan or coverage.

For purposes of this section—

The term “State law” includes all laws, decisions, rules, regulations, or other State action having the effect of law, of any State. A law of the United States applicable only to the District of Columbia shall be treated as a State law rather than a law of the United States.

The term “State” includes a State, the Northern Mariana Islands, any political subdivisions of a State or such Islands, or any agency or instrumentality of either.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §731, formerly §704, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1946; renumbered §731 and amended Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(a)(3), (b)(1), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2935, 2937.)

1996—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–204, §603(b)(1), substituted “Except as provided in section 1185 of this title, nothing” for “Nothing”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on and after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204, set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Section applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1144, 1185 of this title.

The requirements of this part (other than section 1185 of this title) shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan) for any plan year if, on the first day of such plan year, such plan has less than 2 participants who are current employees.

The requirements of this part shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage) in relation to its provision of excepted benefits described in section 1191b(c)(1) of this title.

The requirements of this part shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan) in relation to its provision of excepted benefits described in section 1191b(c)(2) of this title if the benefits—

(A) are provided under a separate policy, certificate, or contract of insurance; or

(B) are otherwise not an integral part of the plan.

The requirements of this part shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage offered in connection with a group health plan) in relation to its provision of excepted benefits described in section 1191b(c)(3) of this title if all of the following conditions are met:

(A) The benefits are provided under a separate policy, certificate, or contract of insurance.

(B) There is no coordination between the provision of such benefits and any exclusion of benefits under any group health plan maintained by the same plan sponsor.

(C) Such benefits are paid with respect to an event without regard to whether benefits are provided with respect to such an event under any group health plan maintained by the same plan sponsor.

The requirements of this part shall not apply to any group health plan (and group health insurance coverage) in relation to its provision of excepted benefits described in section 1191b(c)(4) of this title if the benefits are provided under a separate policy, certificate, or contract of insurance.

For purposes of this part—

Any plan, fund, or program which would not be (but for this subsection) an employee welfare benefit plan and which is established or maintained by a partnership, to the extent that such plan, fund, or program provides medical care (including items and services paid for as medical care) to present or former partners in the partnership or to their dependents (as defined under the terms of the plan, fund, or program), directly or through insurance, reimbursement, or otherwise, shall be treated (subject to paragraph (2)) as an employee welfare benefit plan which is a group health plan.

In the case of a group health plan, the term “employer” also includes the partnership in relation to any partner.

In the case of a group health plan, the term “participant” also includes—

(A) in connection with a group health plan maintained by a partnership, an individual who is a partner in relation to the partnership, or

(B) in connection with a group health plan maintained by a self-employed individual (under which one or more employees are participants), the self-employed individual,

if such individual is, or may become, eligible to receive a benefit under the plan or such individual's beneficiaries may be eligible to receive any such benefit.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §732, formerly §705, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1948; renumbered §732 and amended Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(a)(3), (b)(2), (3)(I)–(L), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2935, 2937, 2938.)

1996—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 104–204, §603(b)(2), inserted “(other than section 1185 of this title)” after “part”.

Subsecs. (b), (c)(1) to (3). Pub. L. 104–204, §603(b)(3)(I)–(L), made technical amendment to references in original act which appear in text as references to section 1191b of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–204 applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning on and after Jan. 1, 1998, see section 603(c) of Pub. L. 104–204, set out as a note under section 1003 of this title.

Section applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

For purposes of this part—

The term “group health plan” means an employee welfare benefit plan to the extent that the plan provides medical care (as defined in paragraph (2) and including items and services paid for as medical care) to employees or their dependents (as defined under the terms of the plan) directly or through insurance, reimbursement, or otherwise.

The term “medical care” means amounts paid for—

(A) the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or amounts paid for the purpose of affecting any structure or function of the body,

(B) amounts paid for transportation primarily for and essential to medical care referred to in subparagraph (A), and

(C) amounts paid for insurance covering medical care referred to in subparagraphs (A) and (B).

For purposes of this part—

The term “health insurance coverage” means benefits consisting of medical care (provided directly, through insurance or reimbursement, or otherwise and including items and services paid for as medical care) under any hospital or medical service policy or certificate, hospital or medical service plan contract, or health maintenance organization contract offered by a health insurance issuer.

The term “health insurance issuer” means an insurance company, insurance service, or insurance organization (including a health maintenance organization, as defined in paragraph (3)) which is licensed to engage in the business of insurance in a State and which is subject to State law which regulates insurance (within the meaning of section 1144(b)(2) of this title). Such term does not include a group health plan.

The term “health maintenance organization” means—

(A) a federally qualified health maintenance organization (as defined in section 1301(a) of the Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300e(a))),

(B) an organization recognized under State law as a health maintenance organization, or

(C) a similar organization regulated under State law for solvency in the same manner and to the same extent as such a health maintenance organization.

The term “group health insurance coverage” means, in connection with a group health plan, health insurance coverage offered in connection with such plan.

For purposes of this part, the term “excepted benefits” means benefits under one or more (or any combination thereof) of the following:

(A) Coverage only for accident, or disability income insurance, or any combination thereof.

(B) Coverage issued as a supplement to liability insurance.

(C) Liability insurance, including general liability insurance and automobile liability insurance.

(D) Workers’ compensation or similar insurance.

(E) Automobile medical payment insurance.

(F) Credit-only insurance.

(G) Coverage for on-site medical clinics.

(H) Other similar insurance coverage, specified in regulations, under which benefits for medical care are secondary or incidental to other insurance benefits.

(A) Limited scope dental or vision benefits.

(B) Benefits for long-term care, nursing home care, home health care, community-based care, or any combination thereof.

(C) Such other similar, limited benefits as are specified in regulations.

(A) Coverage only for a specified disease or illness.

(B) Hospital indemnity or other fixed indemnity insurance.

Medicare supplemental health insurance (as defined under section 1395ss(g)(1) of title 42), coverage supplemental to the coverage provided under chapter 55 of title 10, and similar supplemental coverage provided to coverage under a group health plan.

For purposes of this part—

The term “COBRA continuation provision” means any of the following:

(A) Part 6 of this subtitle.

(B) Section 4980B of title 26, other than subsection (f)(1) of such section insofar as it relates to pediatric vaccines.

(C) Title XXII of the Public Health Service Act [42 U.S.C. 300bb–1 et seq.].

The term “health status-related factor” means any of the factors described in section 1182(a)(1) of this title.

The term “network plan” means health insurance coverage offered by a health insurance issuer under which the financing and delivery of medical care (including items and services paid for as medical care) are provided, in whole or in part, through a defined set of providers under contract with the issuer.

The term “placement”, or being “placed”, for adoption, has the meaning given such term in section 1169(c)(3)(B) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §733, formerly §706, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1949; renumbered §733, Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(a)(3), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2935.)

The Public Health Service Act, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(C), is act July 1, 1944, ch. 373, 58 Stat. 682, as amended. Title XXII of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XX (§300bb–1 et seq.) of chapter 6A of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 201 of Title 42 and Tables.

Section applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1003, 1021, 1022, 1024, 1132, 1136, 1181, 1191a of this title.

The Secretary, consistent with section 104 of the Health Care Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, may promulgate such regulations as may be necessary or appropriate to carry out the provisions of this part. The Secretary may promulgate any interim final rules as the Secretary determines are appropriate to carry out this part.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title I, §734, formerly §707, as added Pub. L. 104–191, title I, §101(a), Aug. 21, 1996, 110 Stat. 1951; renumbered §734, Pub. L. 104–204, title VI, §603(a)(3), Sept. 26, 1996, 110 Stat. 2935.)

Section 104 of the Health Care Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, referred to in text, probably means section 104 of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996, Pub. L. 104–191, which is set out as a note under section 300gg–92 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section applicable with respect to group health plans for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, except as otherwise provided, see section 101(g) of Pub. L. 104–191, set out as a note under section 1181 of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in section 1135 of this title.

Before issuing an advance determination of whether a pension, profit-sharing, or stock bonus plan, a trust which is a part of such a plan, or an annuity or bond purchase plan meets the requirements of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26, the Secretary of the Treasury shall require the person applying for the determination to provide, in addition to any material and information necessary for such determination, such other material and information as may reasonably be made available at the time such application is made as the Secretary of Labor may require under subchapter I of this chapter for the administration of that subchapter. The Secretary of the Treasury shall also require that the applicant provide evidence satisfactory to the Secretary that the applicant has notified each employee who qualifies as an interested party (within the meaning of regulations prescribed under section 7476(b)(1) of title 26 (relating to declaratory judgements in connection with the qualification of certain retirement plans)) of the application for a determination.

(1) Whenever an application is made to the Secretary of the Treasury for a determination of whether a pension, profit-sharing, or stock bonus plan, a trust which is a part of such a plan, or an annuity or bond purchase plan meets the requirements of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26, the Secretary shall upon request afford an opportunity to comment on the application at any time within 45 days after receipt thereof to—

(A) any employee or class of employee qualifying as an interested party within the meaning of the regulations referred to in subsection (a) of this section.

(B) the Secretary of Labor, and

(C) the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation.

(2) The Secretary of Labor may not request an opportunity to comment upon such an application unless he has been requested in writing to do so by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation or by the lesser of—

(A) 10 employees, or

(B) 10 percent of the employees

who qualify as interested parties within the meaning of the regulations referred to in subsection (a) of this section. Upon receiving such a request, the Secretary of Labor shall furnish a copy of the request to the Secretary of the Treasury within 5 days (excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal public holidays (as set forth in section 6103 of title 5)).

(3) Upon receiving such a request from the Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of the Treasury shall furnish to the Secretary of Labor such information held by the Secretary of the Treasury relating to the application as the Secretary of Labor may request.

(4) The Secretary of Labor shall, within 30 days after receiving a request from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation or from the necessary number of employees who qualify as interested parties, notify the Secretary of the Treasury, the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, and such employees with respect to whether he is going to comment on the application to which the request relates and with respect to any matters raised in such request on which he is not going to comment. If the Secretary of Labor indicates in the notice required under the preceding sentence that he is not going to comment on all or part of the matters raised in such request, the Secretary of the Treasury shall afford the corporation, and such employees, an opportunity to comment on the application with respect to any matter on which the Secretary of Labor has declined to comment.

The Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation and, upon petition of a group of employees referred to in subsection (b)(2) of this section, the Secretary of Labor, may intervene in any action brought for declaratory judgment under section 7476 of title 26 in accordance with the provisions of such section. The Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation is permitted to bring an action under such section 7476 under such rules as may be prescribed by the United States Tax Court.

If the Secretary of the Treasury determines that a plan or trust to which this section applies meets the applicable requirements of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26 and issues a determination letter to the applicant, the Secretary shall notify the Secretary of Labor of his determination and furnish such information and material relating to the application and determination held by the Secretary of the Treasury as the Secretary of Labor may request for the proper administration of subchapter I of this chapter. The Secretary of Labor shall accept the determination of the Secretary of the Treasury as prima facie evidence of initial compliance by the plan with the standards of parts 2, 3, and 4 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter. The determination of the Secretary of the Treasury shall not be prima facie evidence on issues relating solely to part 4 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter. If an application for such a determination is withdrawn, or if the Secretary of the Treasury issues a determination that the plan or trust does not meet the requirements of such part I, the Secretary shall notify the Secretary of Labor of the withdrawal or determination.

This section does not apply with respect to an application for any plan received by the Secretary of the Treasury before the date on which section 410 of title 26 applies to the plan, or on which such section will apply if the plan is determined by the Secretary to be a qualified plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3001, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 995; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9343(b), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–372; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsecs. (a), (b)(1), (c) to (e). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–203 inserted after second sentence “The determination of the Secretary of the Treasury shall not be prima facie evidence on issues relating solely to part 4 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1140, 1141 of this title; title 26 section 7476.

In carrying out the provisions of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26 with respect to whether a plan or a trust meets the requirements of section 410(a) or 411 of title 26 (relating to minimum participation standards and minimum vesting standards, respectively), the Secretary of the Treasury shall notify the Secretary of Labor when the Secretary of the Treasury issues a preliminary notice of intent to disqualify related to the plan or trust or, if earlier, at the time of commencing any proceeding to determine whether the plan or trust satisfies such requirements. Unless the Secretary of the Treasury finds that the collection of a tax imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 is in jeopardy, the Secretary of the Treasury shall not issue a determination that the plan or trust does not satisfy the requirements of such section until the expiration of a period of 60 days after the date on which he notifies the Secretary of Labor of such review. The Secretary of the Treasury, in his discretion, may extend the 60-day period referred to in the preceding sentence if he determines that such an extension would enable the Secretary of Labor to obtain compliance with such requirements by the plan within the extension period. Except as otherwise provided in this chapter, the Secretary of Labor shall not generally apply part 2 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter to any plan or trust subject to sections 410(a) and 411 of title 26, but shall refer alleged general violations of the vesting or participation standards to the Secretary of the Treasury. (The preceding sentence shall not apply to matters relating to individuals benefits.)

Unless the Secretary of the Treasury finds that the collection of a tax is in jeopardy, in carrying out the provisions of section 4971 of title 26 (relating to taxes on the failure to meet minimum funding standards), the Secretary of the Treasury shall notify the Secretary of Labor before sending a notice of deficiency with respect to any tax imposed under that section on an employer, and, in accordance with the provisions of subsection (d) of that section, afford the Secretary of Labor an opportunity to comment on the imposition of the tax in the case. The Secretary of the Treasury may waive the imposition of the tax imposed under section 4971(b) of title 26 in appropriate cases. Upon receiving a written request from the Secretary of Labor or from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, the Secretary of the Treasury shall cause an investigation to be commenced expeditiously with respect to whether the tax imposed under section 4971 of title 26 should be applied with respect to any employer to which the request relates. The Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor shall consult with each other from time to time with respect to the provisions of section 412 of title 26 (relating to minimum funding standards) and with respect to the funding standards applicable under subchapter I of this chapter in order to coordinate the rules applicable under such standards.

Regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under sections 410(a), 411, and 412 of title 26 (relating to minimum participation standards, minimum vesting standards, and minimum funding standards, respectively) shall also apply to the minimum participation, vesting, and funding standards set forth in parts 2 and 3 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this chapter, the Secretary of Labor shall not prescribe other regulations under such parts, or apply the regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury under sections 410(a), 411, 412 of title 26 and applicable to the minimum participation, vesting, and funding standards under such parts in a manner inconsistent with the way such regulations apply under sections 410(a), 411, and 412 of title 26.

The Secretary of Labor and the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, before filing briefs in any case involving the construction or application of minimum participation standards, minimum vesting standards, or minimum funding standards under subchapter I of this chapter shall afford the Secretary of the Treasury a reasonable opportunity to review any such brief. The Secretary of the Treasury shall have the right to intervene in any such case.

The Secretary of the Treasury shall consult with the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation with respect to any proposed or final regulation authorized by subpart C of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26, or by sections 1421 through 1426 of this title, before publishing any such proposed or final regulation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3002, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 996; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(b)(3), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1299; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsec. (a), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a), (c), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

Subpart C of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26, referred to in subsec. (e), commences with section 418 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “tax imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “tax imposed under the Internal Revenue Code of 1954” and “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsecs. (b), (c), (e). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1980—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 96–364 added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in title 26 section 4971.

Unless the Secretary of the Treasury finds that the collection of a tax is in jeopardy, in carrying out the provisions of section 4975 of title 26 (relating to tax on prohibited transactions) the Secretary of the Treasury shall, in accordance with the provisions of subsection (h) of such section, notify the Secretary of Labor before sending a notice of deficiency with respect to the tax imposed by subsection (a) or (b) of such section, and, in accordance with the provisions of subsection (h) of such section, afford the Secretary an opportunity to comment on the imposition of the tax in any case. The Secretary of the Treasury shall have authority to waive the imposition of the tax imposed under section 4975(b) in appropriate cases. Upon receiving a written request from the Secretary of Labor or from the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, the Secretary of the Treasury shall cause an investigation to be carried out with respect to whether the tax imposed by section 4975 of title 26 should be applied to any person referred to in the request.

The Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor shall consult with each other from time to time with respect to the provisions of section 4975 of title 26 (relating to tax on prohibited transactions) and with respect to the provisions of subchapter I of this chapter relating to prohibited transactions and exemptions therefrom in order to coordinate the rules applicable under such standards.

Whenever the Secretary of Labor obtains information indicating that a party-in-interest or disqualified person is violating section 1106 of this title, he shall transmit such information to the Secretary of the Treasury.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3003, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 998; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsecs. (a), (b). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 26 section 4975.

(a) Whenever in this chapter or in any provision of law amended by this chapter the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor are required to carry out provisions relating to the same subject matter (as determined by them) they shall consult with each other and shall develop rules, regulations, practices, and forms which, to the extent appropriate for the efficient administration of such provisions, are designed to reduce duplication of effort, duplication of reporting, conflicting or overlapping requirements, and the burden of compliance with such provisions by plan administrators, employers, and participants and beneficiaries.

(b) In order to avoid unnecessary expense and duplication of functions among Government agencies, the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor may make such arrangements or agreements for cooperation or mutual assistance in the performance of their functions under this chapter, and the functions of any such agencies as they find to be practicable and consistent with law. The Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor may utilize, on a reimbursable or other basis, the facilities or services, of any department, agency, or establishment of the United States or of any State or political subdivision of a State, including the services, of any of its employees, with the lawful consent of such department, agency, or establishment; and each department, agency, or establishment of the United States is authorized and directed to cooperate with the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor and, to the extent permitted by law, to provide such information and facilities as they may request for their assistance in the performance of their functions under this chapter. The Attorney General or his representative shall receive from the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor for appropriate action such evidence developed in the performance of their functions under this chapter as may be found to warrant consideration for criminal prosecution under the provisions of this subchapter or other Federal law.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3004, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 998.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in sections 1021, 1024 of this title; title 26 sections 6057, 6058, 6059.

The staffs of the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives, the Joint Committee on Taxation, and the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate shall carry out the duties assigned under this subchapter to the Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force. By agreement among the chairmen of such Committees, the Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force shall be furnished with office space, clerical personnel, and such supplies and equipment as may be necessary for the Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force to carry out its duties under this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3021, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 999; Pub. L. 94–455, title VIII, §803(i) (2)(A)(iii), title XIX, §1907(a)(5), Oct. 4, 1976, 90 Stat. 1591, 1836; S. Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977; S. Res. 30, Mar. 7, 1979.)

1976—Pub. L. 94–455, §803(i)(2)(A)(iii), substituted “Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force” for “Joint Pension Task Force” wherever appearing.

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Committee on Human Resources of Senate changed to Committee on Labor and Human Resources of Senate, effective Mar. 7, 1979, by Senate Resolution No. 30, 96th Congress. See, also, Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate adopted Nov. 14, 1979.

Joint Committee on Internal Revenue Taxation redesignated Joint Committee on Taxation by section 1907(a)(5) of Pub. L. 94–455.

Committee on Labor and Public Welfare of Senate abolished and replaced by Committee on Human Resources of Senate, effective Feb. 11, 1977. See Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate, as amended by Senate Resolution No. 4 (popularly cited as the “Committee System Reorganization Amendments of 1977”), approved Feb. 4, 1977.

This section is referred to in section 1222 of this title.

(a) The Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force shall, within 24 months after September 2, 1974, make a full study and review of—

(1) the effect of the requirements of section 411 of title 26 and of section 1053 of this title to determine the extent of discrimination, if any, among employees in various age groups resulting from the application of such requirements;

(2) means of providing for the portability of pension rights among different pension plans;

(3) the appropriate treatment under subchapter III of this chapter (relating to termination insurance) of plans established and maintained by small employers;

(4) the broadening of stock ownership, particularly with regard to employee stock ownership plans (as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of title 26 and section 1107(d)(6) of this title) and all other alternative methods for broadening stock ownership to the American labor force and others;

(5) the effects and desirability of the Federal preemption of State and local law with respect to matters relating to pension and similar plans; and

(6) such other matter as any of the committees referred to in section 1221 of this title may refer to it.

(b) The Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force shall report the results of its study and review to each of the committees referred to in section 1221 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3022, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 999; Pub. L. 94–455, title VIII, §803(i)(1), (2)(A)(iii), Oct. 4, 1976, 90 Stat. 1590, 1591; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (a)(1), (4). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1976—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 94–455, §803(i)(1), (2)(A)(iii), substituted “Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force” for “Joint Pension Task Force” in provision preceding par. (1), redesignated pars. (4) and (5) as (5) and (6), respectively, and added par. (4).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 94–455, §803(i)(2)(A)(iii), substituted “Joint Pension, Profit-Sharing, and Employee Stock Ownership Plan Task Force” for “Joint Pension Task Force”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

(a) The Committee on Education and Labor and the Committee on Ways and Means of the House of Representatives and the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate shall study retirement plans established and maintained or financed (directly or indirectly) by the Government of the United States, by any State (including the District of Columbia) or political subdivision thereof, or by any agency or instrumentality of any of the foregoing. Such study shall include an analysis of—

(1) the adequacy of existing levels of participation, vesting, and financing arrangements,

(2) existing fiduciary standards, and

(3) the necessity for Federal legislation and standards with respect to such plans.

In determining whether any such plan is adequately financed, each committee shall consider the necessity for minimum funding standards, as well as the taxing power of the government maintaining the plan.

(b) Not later than December 31, 1976, the Committee on Education and Labor and the Committee on Ways and Means shall each submit to the House of Representatives the results of the studies conducted under this section, together with such recommendations as they deem appropriate. The Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources shall each submit to the Senate the results of the studies conducted under this section together with such recommendations as they deem appropriate not later than such date.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3031, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 999; S. Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977; S. Res. 30, Mar. 7, 1979.)

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Committee on Human Resources of Senate changed to Committee on Labor and Human Resources of Senate, effective Mar. 7, 1979, by Senate Resolution No. 30, 96th Congress. See, also, Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate adopted Nov. 14, 1979.

Committee on Labor and Public Welfare of Senate abolished and replaced by Committee on Human Resources of Senate, effective Feb. 11, 1977. See Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate, as amended by Senate Resolution No. 4 (popularly cited as the “Committee System Reorganization Amendments of 1977”), approved Feb. 4, 1977.

The Secretary of Labor shall, during the 2–year period beginning on September 2, 1974, conduct a full and complete study and investigation of the steps necessary to be taken to insure that professional, scientific, and technical personnel and others working in associated occupations employed under Federal procurement, construction, or research contracts or grants will, to the extent feasible, be protected against forfeitures of pension or retirement rights or benefits, otherwise provided, as a consequence of job transfers or loss of employment resulting from terminations or modifications of Federal contracts, grants, or procurement policies. The Secretary of Labor shall report the results of his study and investigation to the Congress within 2 years after September 2, 1974. The Secretary of Labor is authorized, to the extent provided by law, to obtain the services of private research institutions and such other persons by contract or other arrangement as he determines necessary in carrying out the provisions of this section.

In the course of conducting the study and investigation described in subsection (a) of this section, and in developing the regulations referred to in subsection (c) of this section, the Secretary of Labor shall consult—

(1) with appropriate professional societies, business organizations, and labor organizations, and

(2) with the heads of interested Federal departments and agencies.

Within 1 year after the date on which he submits his report to the Congress under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary of Labor shall, if he determines it to be feasible, develop regulations, which will provide the protection of pension and retirement rights and benefits referred to in subsection (a) of this section.

(1) Any regulations developed pursuant to subsection (c) of this section shall take effect if, and only if—

(A) the Secretary of Labor, not later than the day which is 3 years after September 2, 1974, delivers a copy of such regulations to the House of Representatives and a copy to the Senate, and

(B) before the close of the 120–day period which begins on the day on which the copies of such regulations are delivered to the House of Representatives and to the Senate, neither the House of Representatives nor the Senate adopts, by an affirmative vote of a majority of those present and voting in that House, a resolution of disapproval.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the term “resolution of disapproval” means only a resolution of either House of Congress, the matter after the resolving clause of which is as follows: “That the ____ does not favor the taking effect of the regulations transmitted to the Congress by the Secretary of Labor on ____”, the first blank space therein being filled with the name of the resolving House and the second blank space therein being filled with the day and year.

(3) A resolution of disapproval in the House of Representatives shall be referred to the Committee on Education and Labor. A resolution of disapproval in the Senate shall be referred to the Committee on Labor and Human Resources.

(4)(A) If the committee to which a resolution of disapproval has been referred has not reported it at the end of 7 calendar days after its introduction, it is in order to move either to discharge the committee from further consideration of the resolution or to discharge the committee from further consideration of any other resolution of disapproval which has been referred to the committee.

(B) A motion to discharge may be made only by an individual favoring the resolution, is highly privileged (except that it may not be made after the committee has reported a resolution of disapproval), and debate thereon shall be limited to not more than 1 hour, to be divided equally between those favoring and those opposing the resolution. An amendment to the motion is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the motion is agreed to or disagreed to.

(C) If the motion to discharge is agreed to or disagreed to, the motion may not be renewed, nor may another motion to discharge the committee be made with respect to any other resolution of disapproval.

(5)(A) When the committee has reported, or has been discharged from further consideration of, a resolution of disapproval, it is at any time thereafter in order (even though a previous motion to the same effect has been disagreed to) to move to proceed to the consideration of the resolution. The motion is highly privileged and is not debatable. An amendment to the motion is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the motion is agreed to or disagreed to.

(B) Debate on the resolution of disapproval shall be limited to not more than 10 hours, which shall be divided equally between those favoring and those opposing the resolution. A motion further to limit debate is not debatable. An amendment to, or motion to recommit, the resolution is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the resolution is agreed to or disagreed to.

(6)(A) Motions to postpone, made with respect to the discharge from committee or the consideration of a resolution of disapproval, and motions to proceed to the consideration of other business, shall be decided without debate.

(B) Appeals from the decisions of the Chair relating to the application of the rules of the House of Representatives or the Senate, as the case may be, to the procedure relating to any resolution of disapproval shall be decided without debate.

(7) Whenever the Secretary of Labor transmits copies of the regulations to the Congress, a copy of such regulations shall be delivered to each House of Congress on the same day and shall be delivered to the Clerk of the House of Representatives if the House is not in session and to the Secretary of the Senate if the Senate is not in session.

(8) The 120 day period referred to in paragraph (1) shall be computed by excluding—

(A) the days on which either House is not in session because of an adjournment of more than 3 days to a day certain or an adjournment of the Congress sine die, and

(B) any Saturday and Sunday, not excluded under subparagraph (A), when either House is not in session.

(9) This subsection is enacted by the Congress—

(A) as an exercise of the rulemaking power of the House of Representatives and the Senate, respectively, and as such they are deemed a part of the rules of each House, respectively, but applicable only with respect to the procedure to be followed in that House in the case of resolutions of disapproval described in paragraph (2); and they supersede other rules only to the extent that they are inconsistent therewith; and

(B) with full recognition of the constitutional right of either House to change the rules (so far as relating to the procedures of that House) at any time, in the same manner and to the same extent as in the case of any other rule of that House.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3032, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1000; S. Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977; S. Res. 30, Mar. 7, 1979.)

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Committee on Human Resources of Senate changed to Committee on Labor and Human Resources of Senate, effective Mar. 7, 1979, by Senate Resolution No. 30, 96th Congress. See, also, Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate adopted Nov. 14, 1979.

Committee on Labor and Public Welfare of Senate abolished and replaced by Committee on Human Resources of Senate, effective Feb. 11, 1977. See Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate, as amended by Senate Resolution No. 4 (popularly cited as the “Committee System Reorganization Amendments of 1977”), approved Feb. 4, 1977.

This subtitle is referred to in section 1023 of this title; title 26 section 7701.

The Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of the Treasury shall, not later than the last day of the first calendar month beginning after September 2, 1974, establish a Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries (hereinafter in this part referred to as the “Joint Board”).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3041, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1002.)

(a) The Joint Board shall, by regulations, establish reasonable standards and qualifications for persons performing actuarial services with respect to plans in which this chapter applies and, upon application by any individual, shall enroll such individual if the Joint Board finds that such individual satisfies such standards and qualifications. With respect to individuals applying for enrollment before January 1, 1976, such standards and qualifications shall include a requirement for an appropriate period of responsible actuarial experience relating to pension plans. With respect to individuals applying for enrollment on or after January 1, 1976, such standards and qualifications shall include—

(1) education and training in actuarial mathematics and methodology, as evidenced by—

(A) a degree in actuarial mathematics or its equivalent from an accredited college or university,

(B) successful completion of an examination in actuarial mathematics and methodology to be given by the Joint Board, or

(C) successful completion of other actuarial examinations deemed adequate by the Joint Board, and

(2) an appropriate period of responsible actuarial experience.

Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this subsection, the Joint Board may provide for the temporary enrollment for the period ending January 1, 1976, of actuaries under such interim standards as it deems adequate.

(b) The Joint Board may, after notice and an opportunity for a hearing, suspend or terminate the enrollment of an individual under this section if the Joint Board finds that such individual—

(1) has failed to discharge his duties under this chapter, or

(2) does not satisfy the requirements for enrollment as in effect at the time of his enrollment.

The Joint Board may also, after notice and opportunity for hearing, suspend or terminate the temporary enrollment of an individual who fails to discharge his duties under this chapter or who does not satisfy the interim enrollment standards.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title III, §3042, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1002.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 1056, 1058, 1082, 1083, 1103, 1104, 1144, 1222 of this title; title 26 sections 401, 412, 414, 6103; title 45 section 743.

This subtitle is referred to in section 1371 of this title.

(a) For purposes of this subchapter, the term—

(1) “administrator” means the person or persons described in paragraph (16) of section 1002 of this title;

(2) “substantial employer”, for any plan year of a single-employer plan, means one or more persons—

(A) who are contributing sponsors of the plan in such plan year,

(B) who, at any time during such plan year, are members of the same controlled group, and

(C) whose required contributions to the plan for each plan year constituting one of—

(i) the two immediately preceding plan years, or

(ii) the first two of the three immediately preceding plan years,

total an amount greater than or equal to 10 percent of all contributions required to be paid to or under the plan for such plan year;

(3) “multiemployer plan” means a plan—

(A) to which more than one employer is required to contribute,

(B) which is maintained pursuant to one or more collective bargaining agreements between one or more employee organizations and more than one employer, and

(C) which satisfies such other requirements as the Secretary of Labor may prescribe by regulation,

except that, in applying this paragraph—

(i) a plan shall be considered a multiemployer plan on and after its termination date if the plan was a multiemployer plan under this paragraph for the plan year preceding such termination, and

(ii) for any plan year which began before September 26, 1980, the term “multiemployer plan” means a plan described in section 414(f) of title 26 as in effect immediately before such date;

(4) “corporation”, except where the context clearly requires otherwise, means the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation established under section 1302 of this title;

(5) “fund” means the appropriate fund established under section 1305 of this title;

(6) “basic benefits” means benefits guaranteed under section 1322 of this title (other than under section 1322(c) 1 of this title), or under section 1322a of this title (other than under section 1322a(g) of this title);

(7) “non-basic benefits” means benefits guaranteed under section 1322(c) 1 of this title or 1322a(g) of this title;

(8) “nonforfeitable benefit” means, with respect to a plan, a benefit for which a participant has satisfied the conditions for entitlement under the plan or the requirements of this chapter (other than submission of a formal application, retirement, completion of a required waiting period, or death in the case of a benefit which returns all or a portion of a participant's accumulated mandatory employee contributions upon the participant's death), whether or not the benefit may subsequently be reduced or suspended by a plan amendment, an occurrence of any condition, or operation of this chapter or the Internal Revenue Code of 1986;

(9) “reorganization index” means the amount determined under section 1421(b) of this title;

(10) “plan sponsor” means, with respect to a multiemployer plan—

(A) the plan's joint board of trustees, or

(B) if the plan has no joint board of trustees, the plan administrator;

(11) “contribution base unit” means a unit with respect to which an employer has an obligation to contribute under a multiemployer plan, as defined in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury;

(12) “outstanding claim for withdrawal liability” means a plan's claim for the unpaid balance of the liability determined under part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter for which demand has been made, valued in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation;

(13) “contributing sponsor”, of a single-employer plan, means a person described in section 1082(c)(11)(A) of this title (without regard to section 1082(c)(11)(B) of this title) or section 412(c)(11)(A) of title 26 (without regard to section 412(c)(11)(B) of such title).2

(14) in the case of a single-employer plan—

(A) “controlled group” means, in connection with any person, a group consisting of such person and all other persons under common control with such person;

(B) the determination of whether two or more persons are under “common control” shall be made under regulations of the corporation which are consistent and coextensive with regulations prescribed for similar purposes by the Secretary of the Treasury under subsections (b) and (c) of section 414 of title 26; and

(C)(i) notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, during any period in which an individual possesses, directly or indirectly, the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of an affected air carrier of which he was an accountable owner, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract, or otherwise, the affected air carrier shall be considered to be under common control not only with those persons described in subparagraph (B), but also with all related persons; and

(ii) for purposes of this subparagraph, the term—

(I) “affected air carrier” means an air carrier, as defined in section 40102(a)(2) of title 49, that holds a certificate of public convenience and necessity under section 41102 of title 49 for route number 147, as of November 12, 1991;

(II) “related person” means any person which was under common control (as determined under subparagraph (B)) with an affected air carrier on October 10, 1991, or any successor to such related person;

(III) “accountable owner” means any individual who on October 10, 1991, owned directly or indirectly through the application of section 318 of title 26 more than 50 percent of the total voting power of the stock of an affected air carrier;

(IV) “successor” means any person that acquires, directly or indirectly through the application of section 318 of title 26, more than 50 percent of the total voting power of the stock of a related person, more than 50 percent of the total value of the securities (as defined in section 1002(20) of this title) of the related person, more than 50 percent of the total value of the assets of the related person, or any person into which such related person shall be merged or consolidated; and

(V) “individual” means a living human being;

(15) “single-employer plan” means any defined benefit plan (as defined in section 1002(35) of this title) which is not a multiemployer plan;

(16) “benefit liabilities” means the benefits of employees and their beneficiaries under the plan (within the meaning of section 401(a)(2) of title 26);

(17) “amount of unfunded guaranteed benefits”, of a participant or beneficiary as of any date under a single-employer plan, means an amount equal to the excess of—

(A) the actuarial present value (determined as of such date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title) of the benefits of the participant or beneficiary under the plan which are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, over

(B) the current value (as of such date) of the assets of the plan which are required to be allocated to those benefits under section 1344 of this title;

(18) “amount of unfunded benefit liabilities” means, as of any date, the excess (if any) of—

(A) the value of the benefit liabilities under the plan (determined as of such date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title), over

(B) the current value (as of such date) of the assets of the plan;

(19) “outstanding amount of benefit liabilities” means, with respect to any plan, the excess (if any) of—

(A) the value of the benefit liabilities under the plan (determined as of the termination date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title), over

(B) the value of the benefit liabilities which would be so determined by only taking into account benefits which are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title or to which assets of the plan are allocated under section 1344 of this title;

(20) “person” has the meaning set forth in section 1002(9) of this title;

(21) “affected party” means, with respect to a plan—

(A) each participant in the plan,

(B) each beneficiary under the plan who is a beneficiary of a deceased participant or who is an alternate payee (within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(K) of this title) under an applicable qualified domestic relations order (within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(B)(i) of this title),

(C) each employee organization representing participants in the plan, and

(D) the corporation,

except that, in connection with any notice required to be provided to the affected party, if an affected party has designated, in writing, a person to receive such notice on behalf of the affected party, any reference to the affected party shall be construed to refer to such person.

(b)(1) An individual who owns the entire interest in an unincorporated trade or business is treated as his own employer, and a partnership is treated as the employer of each partner who is an employee within the meaning of section 401(c)(1) of title 26. For purposes of this subchapter, under regulations prescribed by the corporation, all employees of trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) which are under common control shall be treated as employed by a single employer and all such trades and businesses as a single employer. The regulations prescribed under the preceding sentence shall be consistent and coextensive with regulations prescribed for similar purposes by the Secretary of the Treasury under section 414(c) of title 26.

(2) For purposes of subtitle E of this subchapter—

(A) except as otherwise provided in subtitle E of this subchapter, contributions or other payments shall be considered made under a plan for a plan year if they are made within the period prescribed under section 412(c)(10) of title 26 (determined, in the case of a terminated plan, as if the plan had continued beyond the termination date), and

(B) the term “Secretary of the Treasury” means the Secretary of the Treasury or such Secretary's delegate.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4001, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1003; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(1), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1296; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11004, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 238; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9312(b)(4), (5), 9313(a)(2)(F), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–363, 1330–365; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445; Pub. L. 102–229, title II, §214, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1718; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §761(a)(11), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5034.)

Section 1322(c) of this title, referred to in subsec. (a)(6), (7), was redesignated section 1322(d) of this title by Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(b)(3)(A)(i), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–362.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a)(8), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, referred to in subsec. (a)(8), is classified generally to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

In subsec. (a)(14)(C)(ii)(I), “section 40102(a)(2) of title 49” substituted for “section 101(3) of the Federal Aviation Act of 1958” and “section 41102 of title 49” substituted for “section 401 of such Act” on authority of Pub. L. 103–272, §6(b), July 5, 1994, 108 Stat. 1378, the first section of which enacted subtitles II, III, and V to X of Title 49, Transportation.

1994—Subsec. (a)(13). Pub. L. 103–465 substituted “means a person described in section 1082(c)(11)(A) of this title (without regard to section 1082(c)(11)(B) of this title) or section 412(c)(11)(A) of title 26 (without regard to section 412(c)(11)(B) of such title).” for “means a person—

“(A) who is responsible, in connection with such plan, for meeting the funding requirements under section 1082 of this title or section 412 of title 26, or

“(B) who is a member of the controlled group of a person described in subparagraph (A), has been responsible for meeting such funding requirements, and has employed a significant number (as may be defined in regulations of the corporation) of participants under such plan while such person was so responsible;”.

1991—Subsec. (a)(14)(C). Pub. L. 102–229, which directed the amendment of section 4001(a)(14) of the Employment Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 by adding subpar. (C), was executed to section 4001(a)(14) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, which is classified to this section, to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1989—Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”.

Subsecs. (a)(13)(A), (14)(B), (b)(1), (2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsec. (a)(16). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(4), amended par. (16) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (16) read as follows: “ ‘benefit commitments’, to a participant or beneficiary as of any date under a single-employer plan, means all benefits provided by the plan with respect to the participant or beneficiary which—

“(A) are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title,

“(B) would be guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, but for the operation of subsection 1322(b) of this title, or

“(C) constitute—

“(i) early retirement supplements or subsidies, or

“(ii) plant closing benefits,

irrespective of whether any such supplements, subsidies, or benefits are benefits guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, if the participant or beneficiary has satisfied, as of such date, all of the conditions required of him or her under the provisions of the plan to establish entitlement to the benefits, except for the submission of a formal application, retirement, completion of a required waiting period subsequent to application for benefits, or designation of a beneficiary;”.

Subsec. (a)(18). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(F), amended par. (18) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (18) read as follows: “ ‘amount of unfunded benefit commitments’, of a participant or beneficiary as of any date under a single-employer plan, means an amount equal to the excess of—

“(A) the actuarial present value (determined as of such date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title) of the benefit commitments to the participant or beneficiary under the plan, over

“(B) the current value (as of such date) of the assets of the plan which are required to be allocated to those benefit commitments under section 1344 of this title;”.

Subsec. (a)(19). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(5), amended par. (19) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (19) read as follows: “ ‘outstanding amount of benefit commitments’, of a participant or beneficiary under a terminated single-employer plan, means the excess of—

“(A) the actuarial present value (determined as of the termination date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title) of the benefit commitments to such participant or beneficiary under the plan, over

“(B) the actuarial present value (determined as of such date on the basis of assumptions prescribed by the corporation for purposes of section 1344 of this title) of the benefits of such participant or beneficiary which are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title or to which assets of the plan are required to be allocated under section 1344 of this title;”.

1986—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(a)(1), amended par. (2) generally, substituting provisions defining “substantial employer” for any plan year of a single-employer plan for provisions defining “substantial employer” for any plan year as an employer, treating employers who are members of the same affiliated group as one employer, who has made contributions to or under a plan under which more than one employer, other than a multi-employer plan, makes contributions for each of the two immediately preceding plan years or the second and third preceding plan years equaling or exceeding 10 percent of all employer contributions paid to or under that plan for such year.

Subsec. (a)(13). Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(a)(2)–(4), added par. (13).

Subsec. (a)(14). Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(a)(2)–(4), added par. (14).

Subsec. (a)(15) to (21). Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(a)(2)–(4), added pars. (15) to (21).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(b), designated existing provisions as par. (1), added par. (2), and struck out amendments by Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(F), which had been executed by designating existing provisions as par. (1) and adding pars. (2) to (4). See 1980 Amendment note below. For successor provisions to former pars. (2), (3), and (4), see subsecs. (a)(15), (b)(2)(A), and (b)(2)(B), respectively.

1980—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(A), inserted provision excepting multiemployer plan.

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(B), substantially revised definition of term “multiemployer plan” by, among other changes, adding subpars. (A) to (C) and cl. (i), and restating existing provisions as cl. (ii) with respect to plan years beginning before Sept. 26, 1980.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(C), inserted references to section 1322a of this title.

Subsec. (a)(7). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(D), inserted reference to section 1322a(g) of this title.

Subsec. (a)(8) to (12). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(E), added pars. (8) to (12).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(1)(F), which was executed by designating existing provisions as par. (1) and adding pars. (2) to (4), notwithstanding directory language that pars. (2) to (4) be added at end of subsec. (c)(1) as redesignated, was struck out by Pub. L. 99–272, §11004(b). See 1986 Amendment note above.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 effective as if included in the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, see section 761(b)(2) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(f)(9), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and sections 1305, 1322, 1341, 1342, 1349, 1362, 1364, and 1368 of this title and repealing section 1349 of this title] shall apply with respect to—

“(A) plan terminations under section 4041 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1341] with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 4041(a)(2) of ERISA after December 17, 1987, and

“(B) plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 4042 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1342] after December 17, 1987.”

Section 9313(c) of Pub. L. 100–203 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and sections 1341 and 1367 of this title] shall apply with respect to plan terminations under section 4041 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1341] with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 4041(a)(2) of ERISA after December 17, 1987.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This subchapter not applicable in interpreting Internal Revenue Code of 1986, except to the extent specifically provided in such Code, or as determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, see section 9343(a) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1023, 1056, 1082, 1083, 1085a, 1365, 1366, 1441, 1461 of this title; title 26 sections 412, 418.

1 See References in Text note below.

2 So in original. The period probably should be a semicolon.

There is established within the Department of Labor a body corporate to be known as the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation. In carrying out its functions under this subchapter, the corporation shall be administered by the chairman of the board of directors in accordance with policies established by the board. The purposes of this subchapter, which are to be carried out by the corporation, are—

(1) to encourage the continuation and maintenance of voluntary private pension plans for the benefit of their participants,

(2) to provide for the timely and uninterrupted payment of pension benefits to participants and beneficiaries under plans to which this subchapter applies, and

(3) to maintain premiums established by the corporation under section 1306 of this title at the lowest level consistent with carrying out its obligations under this subchapter.

To carry out the purposes of this subchapter, the corporation has the powers conferred on a nonprofit corporation under the District of Columbia Nonprofit Corporation Act [D.C. Code, §29–501 et seq.] and, in addition to any specific power granted to the corporation elsewhere in this subchapter or under that Act, the corporation has the power—

(1) to sue and be sued, complain and defend, in its corporate name and through its own counsel, in any court, State or Federal;

(2) to adopt, alter, and use a corporate seal, which shall be judicially noticed;

(3) to adopt, amend, and repeal, by the board of directors, by laws, rules, and regulations relating to the conduct of its business and the exercise of all other rights and powers granted to it by this chapter and such other bylaws, rules, and regulations as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this subchapter;

(4) to conduct its business (including the carrying on of operations and the maintenance of offices) and to exercise all other rights and powers granted to it by this chapter in any State or other jurisdiction without regard to qualification, licensing, or other requirements imposed by law in such State or other jurisdiction;

(5) to lease, purchase, accept gifts or donations of, or otherwise to acquire, to own, hold, improve, use, or otherwise deal in or with, and to sell, convey, mortgage, pledge, lease, exchange, or otherwise dispose of, any property, real, personal, or mixed, or any interest therein wherever situated;

(6) to appoint and fix the compensation of such officers, attorneys, employees, and agents as may be required, to determine their qualifications, to define their duties, and, to the extent desired by the corporation, require bonds for them and fix the penalty thereof, and to appoint and fix the compensation of experts and consultants in accordance with the provisions of section 3109 of title 5;

(7) to utilize the personnel and facilities of any other agency or department of the United States Government, with or without reimbursement, with the consent of the head of such agency or department; and

(8) to enter into contracts, to execute instruments, to incur liabilities, and to do any and all others acts and things as may be necessary or incidental to the conduct of its business and the exercise of all other rights and powers granted to the corporation by this chapter.

The board of directors of the corporation consists of the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secretary of Labor, and the Secretary of Commerce. Members of the Board shall serve without compensation, but shall be reimbursed for travel, subsistence, and other necessary expenses incurred in the performance of their duties as members of the board. The Secretary of Labor is the chairman of the board of directors.

The board of directors shall meet at the call of its chairman, or as otherwise provided by the bylaws of the corporation.

As soon as practicable, but not later than 180 days after September 2, 1974, the board of directors shall adopt initial bylaws and rules relating to the conduct of the business of the corporation. Thereafter, the board of directors may alter, supplement, or repeal any existing bylaw or rule, and may adopt additional bylaws and rules from time to time as may be necessary. The chairman of the board shall cause a copy of the bylaws of the corporation to be published in the Federal Register not less often than once each year.

(1) The corporation, its property, its franchise, capital, reserves, surplus, and its income (including, but not limited to, any income of any fund established under section 1305 of this title), shall be exempt from all taxation now or hereafter imposed by the United States (other than taxes imposed under chapter 21 of title 26, relating to Federal Insurance Contributions Act [26 U.S.C. 3101 et seq.], and chapter 23 of title 26, relating to Federal Unemployment Tax Act [26 U.S.C. 3301 et seq.], or by any State or local taxing authority, except that any real property and any tangible personal property (other than cash and securities) of the corporation shall be subject to State and local taxation to the same extent according to its value as other real and tangible personal property is taxed.

(2) The receipts and disbursements of the corporation in the discharge of its functions shall be included in the totals of the budget of the United States Government. The United States is not liable for any obligation or liability incurred by the corporation.

(3) Omitted.

(1) There is established an advisory committee to the corporation, for the purpose of advising the corporation as to its policies and procedures relating to (A) the appointment of trustees in termination proceedings, (B) investment of moneys, (C) whether plans being terminated should be liquidated immediately or continued in operation under a trustee, and (D) such other issues as the corporation may request from time to time. The advisory committee may also recommend persons for appointment as trustees in termination proceedings, make recommendations with respect to the investment of moneys in the funds, and advise the corporation as to whether a plan subject to being terminated should be liquidated immediately or continued in operation under a trustee.

(2) The advisory committee consists of seven members appointed, from among individuals recommended by the board of directors, by the President. Of the seven members, two shall represent the interests of employee organizations, two shall represent the interests of employers who maintain pension plans, and three shall represent the interests of the general public. The President shall designate one member as chairman at the time of the appointment of that member.

(3) Members shall serve for terms of 3 years each, except that, of the members first appointed, one of the members representing the interests of employee organizations, one of the members representing the interests of employers, and one of the members representing the interests of the general public shall be appointed for terms of 2 years each, one of the members representing the interests of the general public shall be appointed for a term of 1 year, and the other members shall be appointed to full 3–year terms. The advisory committee shall meet at least six times each year and at such other times as may be determined by the chairman or requested by any three members of the advisory committee.

(4) Members shall be chosen on the basis of their experience with employee organizations, with employers who maintain pension plans, with the administration of pension plans, or otherwise on account of outstanding demonstrated ability in related fields. Of the members serving on the advisory committee at any time, no more than four shall be affiliated with the same political party.

(5) An individual appointed to fill a vacancy occurring other than by the expiration of a term of office shall be appointed only for the unexpired term of the member he succeeds. Any vacancy occurring in the office of a member of the advisory committee shall be filled in the manner in which that office was originally filled.

(6) The advisory committee shall appoint and fix the compensation of such employees as it determines necessary to discharge its duties, including experts and consultants in accordance with the provisions of section 3109 of title 5. The corporation shall furnish to the advisory committee such professional, secretarial, and other services as the committee may request.

(7) Members of the advisory committee shall, for each day (including traveltime) during which they are attending meetings or conferences of the committee or otherwise engaged in the business of the committee, be compensated at a rate fixed by the corporation which is not in excess of the daily equivalent of the annual rate of basic pay in effect for grade GS–18 of the General Schedule, and while away from their homes or regular places of business they may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5.

(8) The Federal Advisory Committee Act does not apply to the advisory committee established by this subsection.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4002, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1004; Pub. L. 94–455, title XV, §1510(a), Oct. 4, 1976, 90 Stat. 1741; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §§403(*l*), 406(a), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1302, 1303; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

The District of Columbia Nonprofit Corporation Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 87–569, Aug. 6, 1962, 76 Stat. 265, as amended, which appears in chapter 5 (§29–501 et seq.) of Title 29, Corporations, of the District of Columbia Code.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (b)(3), (4), and (8), was in original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Federal Insurance Contributions Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(1), is act Aug. 16, 1954, ch. 736, §§3101, 3102, 3111, 3112, 3121 to 3128, 68A Stat. 415, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 21 (§3101 et seq.) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 3128 of Title 26 and Tables.

The Federal Unemployment Tax Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(1), is act Aug. 16, 1954, ch. 736, §§3301 to 3311, 68A Stat. 454, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 23 (§3301 et seq.) of Title 26. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 3311 of Title 26 and Tables.

The Federal Advisory Committee Act, referred to in subsec. (h)(8), is Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

Subsec. (c) amended section 5108 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, and subsec. (g)(3) amended section 846 of former Title 31, Money and Finance.

1989—Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1980—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(*l*), inserted provisions respecting bylaws, etc., to carry out this subchapter.

Subsec. (g)(2). Pub. L. 96–364, §406(a), substituted provisions relating to inclusion of receipts and disbursements in United States budget totals and nonliability of United States for obligation or liability of corporation, for provisions relating to noninclusion of receipts and disbursements in United States budget totals, exemption from limitations with respect to budget outlays, and restrictions on liability for obligation or liability incurred by the corporation.

1976—Subsec. (g)(1). Pub. L. 94–455 exempted corporation from all taxation now or hereafter imposed by United States (other than taxes imposed under chapter 21 of title 26, relating to Federal Insurance Contributions Act, and chapter 23 of title 26, relating to Federal Unemployment Tax Act).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Section 406(b) of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall apply to fiscal years beginning after September 30, 1980.”

Section 1510(b) of Pub. L. 94–455 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall take effect on September 2, 1974.”

References in laws to the rates of pay for GS–16, 17, or 18, or to maximum rates of pay under the General Schedule, to be considered references to rates payable under specified sections of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, see section 529 [title I, §101(c)(1)] of Pub. L. 101–509, set out in a note under section 5376 of Title 5.

This section is referred to in section 1301 of this title.

The corporation may make such investigations as it deems necessary to enforce any provision of this subchapter or any rule or regulation thereunder, and may require or permit any person to file with it a statement in writing, under oath or otherwise as the corporation shall determine, as to all the facts and circumstances concerning the matter to be investigated. The corporation shall annually audit a statistically significant number of plans terminating under section 1341(b) of this title to determine whether participants and beneficiaries have received their benefit commitments and whether section 1350(a) of this title has been satisfied. Each audit shall include a statistically significant number of participants and beneficiaries.

For the purpose of any such investigation, or any other proceeding under this subchapter, any member of the board of directors of the corporation, or any officer designated by the chairman, may administer oaths and affirmations, subpena witnesses, compel their attendance, take evidence, and require the production of any books, papers, correspondence, memoranda, or other records which the corporation deems relevant or material to the inquiry.

In the case of contumacy by, or refusal to obey a subpena issued to, any person, the corporation may invoke the aid of any court of the United States within the jurisdiction of which such investigation or proceeding is carried on, or where such person resides or carries on business, in requiring the attendance and testimony of witnesses and the production of books, papers, correspondence, memoranda, and other records. The court may issue an order requiring such person to appear before the corporation, or member or officer designated by the corporation, and to produce records or to give testimony related to the matter under investigation or in question. Any failure to obey such order of the court may be punished by the court as a contempt thereof. All process in any such case may be served in the judicial district in which such person is an inhabitant or may be found.

In order to avoid unnecessary expense and duplication of functions among government agencies, the corporation may make such arrangements or agreements for cooperation or mutual assistance in the performance of its functions under this subchapter as is practicable and consistent with law. The corporation may utilize the facilities or services of any department, agency, or establishment of the United States or of any State or political subdivision of a State, including the services of any of its employees, with the lawful consent of such department, agency, or establishment. The head of each department, agency, or establishment of the United States shall cooperate with the corporation and, to the extent permitted by law, provide such information and facilities as it may request for its assistance in the performance of its functions under this subchapter. The Attorney General or his representative shall receive from the corporation for appropriate action such evidence developed in the performance of its functions under this subchapter as may be found to warrant consideration for criminal prosecution under the provisions of this or any other Federal law.

(1) Civil actions may be brought by the corporation for appropriate relief, legal or equitable or both, to enforce (A) the provisions of this subchapter, and (B) in the case of a plan which is covered under this subchapter (other than a multiemployer plan) and for which the conditions for imposition of a lien described in section 1082(f)(1)(A) and (B) of this title or section 412(n)(1)(A) and (B) of title 26 have been met, section 1082 of this title and section 412 of title 26.

(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, where such an action is brought in a district court of the United States, it may be brought in the district where the plan is administered, where the violation took place, or where a defendant resides or may be found, and process may be served in any other district where a defendant resides or may be found.

(3) The district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction of actions brought by the corporation under this subchapter without regard to the amount in controversy in any such action.

(4) Repealed. Pub. L. 98–620, title IV, §402(33), Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3360.

(5) In any action brought under this subchapter, whether to collect premiums, penalties, and interest under section 1307 of this title or for any other purpose, the court may award to the corporation all or a portion of the costs of litigation incurred by the corporation in connection with such action.

(6)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (C), an action under this subsection may not be brought after the later of—

(i) 6 years after the date on which the cause of action arose, or

(ii) 3 years after the applicable date specified in subparagraph (B).

(B)(i) Except as provided in clause (ii), the applicable date specified in this subparagraph is the earliest date on which the corporation acquired or should have acquired actual knowledge of the existence of such cause of action.

(ii) If the corporation brings the action as a trustee, the applicable date specified in this subparagraph is the date on which the corporation became a trustee with respect to the plan if such date is later than the date described in clause (i).

(C) In the case of fraud or concealment, the period described in subparagraph (A)(ii) shall be extended to 6 years after the applicable date specified in subparagraph (B).

(1) Except with respect to withdrawal liability disputes under part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter, any person who is a fiduciary, employer, contributing sponsor, member of a contributing sponsor's controlled group, participant, or beneficiary, and is adversely affected by any action of the corporation with respect to a plan in which such person has an interest, or who is an employee organization representing such a participant or beneficiary so adversely affected for purposes of collective bargaining with respect to such plan, may bring an action against the corporation for appropriate equitable relief in the appropriate court.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the term “appropriate court” means—

(A) the United States district court before which proceedings under section 1341 or 1342 of this title are being conducted,

(B) if no such proceedings are being conducted, the United States district court for the judicial district in which the plan has its principal office, or

(C) the United States District Court for the District of Columbia.

(3) In any action brought under this subsection, the court may award all or a portion of the costs and expenses incurred in connection with such action to any party who prevails or substantially prevails in such action.

(4) This subsection shall be the exclusive means for bringing actions against the corporation under this subchapter, including actions against the corporation in its capacity as a trustee under section 1342 or 1349 1 of this title.

(5)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (C), an action under this subsection may not be brought after the later of—

(i) 6 years after the date on which the cause of action arose, or

(ii) 3 years after the applicable date specified in subparagraph (B).

(B)(i) Except as provided in clause (ii), the applicable date specified in this subparagraph is the earliest date on which the plaintiff acquired or should have acquired actual knowledge of the existence of such cause of action.

(ii) In the case of a plaintiff who is a fiduciary bringing the action in the exercise of fiduciary duties, the applicable date specified in this subparagraph is the date on which the plaintiff became a fiduciary with respect to the plan if such date is later than the date specified in clause (i).

(C) In the case of fraud or concealment, the period described in subparagraph (A)(ii) shall be extended to 6 years after the applicable date specified in subparagraph (B).

(6) The district courts of the United States have jurisdiction of actions brought under this subsection without regard to the amount in controversy.

(7) In any suit, action, or proceeding in which the corporation is a party, or intervenes under section 1451 of this title, in any State court, the corporation may, without bond or security, remove such suit, action, or proceeding from the State court to the United States district court for the district or division in which such suit, action, or proceeding is pending by following any procedure for removal now or hereafter in effect.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4003, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1006; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §§402(a)(2), 403(k), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1297, 1302; Pub. L. 98–620, title IV, §402(33), Nov. 8, 1984, 98 Stat. 3360; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §§11014(b)(1), (2), 11016(c)(5), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 262, 264, 274; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §§773(a), 776(b)(1), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5044, 5048.)

Section 1349 of this title, referred to in subsec. (f)(4), was repealed by Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(a), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–361.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–465, §776(b)(1), inserted “and whether section 1350(a) of this title has been satisfied” before period at end of second sentence.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 103–465, §773(a), inserted “(A)” after “enforce” and substituted “, and” and cl. (B) for period at end.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(5), inserted provisions directing the corporation to audit annually a statistically significant number of plans terminating under section 1341(b) of this title to determine whether participants and beneficiaries have received their benefit commitments and to include a statistically significant number of participants and beneficiaries in each audit.

Subsec. (e)(6). Pub. L. 99–272, §11014(b)(2), added par. (6).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–272, §11014(b)(1), amended subsec. (f) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (f) read as follows: “Except as provided in section 1451(a)(2) of this title, any participant, beneficiary, plan administrator, or employee adversely affected by any action of the corporation, or by a receiver or trustee appointed by the corporation, with respect to a plan in which such participant, beneficiary, plan administrator or employer has an interest, may bring an action against the corporation, receiver, or trustee in the appropriate court. For purposes of this subsection the term ‘appropriate court’ means the United States district court before which proceedings under section 1341 or 1342 of this title are being conducted, or if no such proceedings are being conducted the United States district court for the district in which the plan has its principal office, or the United States district court for the District of Columbia. The district courts of the United States have jurisdiction of actions brought under this subsection without regard to the amount in controversy. In any suit, action, or proceeding in which the corporation is a party, or intervenes under section 1451 of this title, in any State court, the corporation may, without bond or security, remove such suit, action, or proceeding from the State court to the United States District Court for the district or division embracing the place where the same is pending by following any procedure for removal now or hereafter in effect.”

1984—Subsec. (e)(4). Pub. L. 98–620 struck out par. (4) which provided that upon application by the corporation to a court of the United States for expedited handling of any case in which the corporation was a party, it was the duty of that court to assign such case for hearing at the earliest practical date and to cause such case to be in every way expedited.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(2)(A), substituted “enforce” for “determine whether any person has violated or is about to violate”.

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(2)(B), substituted “enforce” for “redress violations of”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 96–364, §§402(a)(2)(C), 403(k), substituted “Except as provided in section 1451(a)(2) of the title, any” for “Any” and inserted provisions relating to removal of actions.

Section 773(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall be effective for installments and other payments required under section 302 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1082] or section 412 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [26 U.S.C. 412] that become due on or after the date of the enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].”

Amendment by section 776(b)(1) of Pub. L. 103–465 effective with respect to distributions that occur in plan years commencing on or after Jan. 1, 1996, see section 776(e) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Section 11014(b)(3) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “The amendments made by this subsection [amending this section] shall apply with respect to actions filed after the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986].”

Amendment by section 11016(c)(5) of Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–620 not applicable to cases pending on Nov. 8, 1984, see section 403 of Pub. L. 98–620, set out as a note under section 1657 of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1341, 1461 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

Section, Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4004, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1008, related to appointment, within 270 days after Sept. 2, 1974, and powers and functions of a receiver to assume control of terminated plan and its assets.

Repeal effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1341 of this title.

There are established on the books of the Treasury of the United States for revolving funds to be used by the corporation in carrying out its duties under this subchapter. One of the funds shall be used with respect to basic benefits guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, one of the funds shall be used with respect to basic benefits guaranteed under section 1322a of this title, one of the funds shall be used with respect to nonbasic benefits guaranteed under section 1322 of this title (if any), and the remaining fund shall be used with respect to nonbasic benefits guaranteed under section 1322a of this title (if any), other than subsection (g)(2) thereof (if any). Whenever in this subchapter reference is made to the term “fund” the reference shall be considered to refer to the appropriate fund established under this subsection.

(1) Each fund established under this section shall be credited with the appropriate portion of—

(A) funds borrowed under subsection (c) of this section,

(B) premiums, penalties, interest, and charges collected under this subchapter,

(C) the value of the assets of a plan administered under section 1342 of this title by a trustee to the extent that they exceed the liabilities of such plan,

(D) the amount of any employer liability payments under subtitle D of this subchapter, to the extent that such payments exceed liabilities of the plan (taking into account all other plan assets),

(E) earnings on investments of the fund or on assets credited to the fund under this subsection,

(F) attorney's fees awarded to the corporation, and

(G) receipts from any other operations under this subchapter.

(2) Subject to the provisions of subsection (a) of this section, each fund shall be available—

(A) for making such payments as the corporation determines are necessary to pay benefits guaranteed under section 1322 or 1322a of this title or benefits payable under section 1350 of this title,

(B) to purchase assets from a plan being terminated by the corporation when the corporation determines such purchase will best protect the interests of the corporation, participants in the plan being terminated, and other insured plans,

(C) to repay to the Secretary of the Treasury such sums as may be borrowed (together with interest thereon) under subsection (c) of this section,

(D) to pay the operational and administrative expenses of the corporation, including reimbursement of the expenses incurred by the Department of the Treasury in maintaining the funds, and the Comptroller General in auditing the corporation, and

(E) to pay to participants and beneficiaries the estimated amount of benefits which are guaranteed by the corporation under this subchapter and the estimated amount of other benefits to which plan assets are allocated under section 1344 of this title, under single-employer plans which are unable to pay benefits when due or which are abandoned.

(3) Whenever the corporation determines that the moneys of any fund are in excess of current needs, it may request the investment of such amounts as it determines advisable by the Secretary of the Treasury in obligations issued or guaranteed by the United States but, until all borrowings under subsection (c) of this section have been repaid, the obligations in which such excess moneys are invested may not yield a rate of return in excess of the rate of interest payable on such borrowings.

The corporation is authorized to issue to the Secretary of the Treasury notes or other obligations in an aggregate amount of not to exceed $100,000,000, in such forms and denominations, bearing such maturities, and subject to such terms and conditions as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. Such notes or other obligations shall bear interest at a rate determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, taking into consideration the current average market yield on outstanding marketable obligations of the United States of comparable maturities during the month preceding the issuance of such notes or other obligations of the corporation. The Secretary of the Treasury is authorized and directed to purchase any notes or other obligations issued by the corporation under this subsection, and for that purpose he is authorized to use as a public debt transaction the proceeds from the sale of any securities issued under chapter 31 of title 31, and the purposes for which securities may be issued under that chapter, are extended to include any purchase of such notes and obligations. The Secretary of the Treasury may at any time sell any of the notes or other obligations acquired by him under this subsection. All redemptions, purchases, and sales by the Secretary of the Treasury of such notes or other obligations shall be treated as public debt transactions of the United States.

(1) A fifth fund shall be established for the reimbursement of uncollectible withdrawal liability under section 1402 of this title, and shall be credited with the appropriate—

(A) premiums, penalties, and interest charges collected under this subchapter, and

(B) earnings on investments of the fund or on assets credited to the fund.

The fund shall be available to make payments pursuant to the supplemental program established under section 1402 of this title, including those expenses and other charges determined to be appropriate by the corporation.

(2) The corporation may invest amounts of the fund in such obligations as the corporation considers appropriate.

(1) A sixth fund shall be established for the supplemental benefit guarantee program provided under section 1322a(g)(2) of this title.

(2) Such fund shall be credited with the appropriate—

(A) premiums, penalties, and interest charges collected under section 1322a(g)(2) of this title, and

(B) earnings on investments of the fund or on assets credited to the fund.

The fund shall be available for making payments pursuant to the supplemental benefit guarantee program established under section 1322a(g)(2) of this title, including those expenses and other charges determined to be appropriate by the corporation.

(3) The corporation may invest amounts of the fund in such obligations as the corporation considers appropriate.

(1) A seventh fund shall be established and credited with—

(A) premiums, penalties, and interest charges collected under section 1306(a)(3)(A)(i) of this title (not described in subparagraph (B)) to the extent attributable to the amount of the premium in excess of $8.50,

(B) premiums, penalties, and interest charges collected under section 1306(a)(3)(E) of this title, and

(C) earnings on investments of the fund or on assets credited to the fund.

(2) Amounts in the fund shall be available for transfer to other funds established under this section with respect to a single-employer plan but shall not be available to pay—

(A) administrative costs of the corporation, or

(B) benefits under any plan which was terminated before October 1, 1988,

unless no other amounts are available for such payment.

(3) The corporation may invest amounts of the fund in such obligations as the corporation considers appropriate.

(1) Amounts in any fund established under this section may be used only for the purposes for which such fund was established and may not be used to make loans to (or on behalf of) any other fund or to finance any other activity of the corporation.

(2) None of the funds borrowed under subsection (c) of this section may be used to make loans to (or on behalf of) any fund other than a fund described in the second sentence of subsection (a) of this section.

(3) Any repayment to the corporation of any amount paid out of any fund in connection with a multiemployer plan shall be deposited in such fund.

Any stock in a person liable to the corporation under this subchapter which is paid to the corporation by such person or a member of such person's controlled group in satisfaction of such person's liability under this subchapter may be voted only by the custodial trustees or outside money managers of the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4005, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1009; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(a), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1300; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(1), (2), (c)(7), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 268, 274; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9312(c)(4), 9331(d), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–364, 1330–368; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §776(b)(2), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5048.)

In subsec. (c), “chapter 31 of title 31” and “that chapter” substituted for “the Second Liberty Bond Act, as amended” and “that Act, as amended,”, respectively, on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 103–465, which directed the amendment of subpar. (A) by inserting “or benefits payable under section 1350 of this title” after “section 1322a of this title”, was executed by making the insertion after “section 1322 or 1322a of this title” to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1987—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(d), added subsec. (f). Former subsec. (f) redesignated (g).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(d), redesignated former subsec. (f) as (g). Former subsec. (g) redesignated (h).

Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(c)(4), struck out “or fiduciaries with respect to trusts to which the requirements of section 1349 of this title apply” after “money managers of the corporation”.

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(d), redesignated former subsec. (g) as (h).

1986—Subsec. (b)(1)(F), (G). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(2), added subpar. (F) and redesignated former subpar. (F) as (G).

Subsec. (b)(2)(E). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(1), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(7), added subsec. (g).

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(a)(1), substituted provisions respecting benefits guaranteed under sections 1322 and 1322a of this title, for provisions respecting benefits guaranteed under sections 1322 and 1323 of this title.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(a)(2), (3), in subpar. (A) inserted reference to section 1322a of this title, struck out subpar. (B) relating to payments under section 1323 of this title, and redesignated former subpars. (C) to (E) as (B) to (D), respectively.

Subsecs. (d) to (f). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(a)(4), added subsecs. (d) to (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 effective with respect to distributions that occur in plan years commencing on or after Jan. 1, 1996, see section 776(e) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Amendment by section 9312(c)(4) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Section 9331(f) of Pub. L. 100–203 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1301, 1302, 1308, 1322a, 1361, 1461 of this title.

(1) The corporation shall prescribe such schedules of premium rates and bases for the application of those rates as may be necessary to provide sufficient revenue to the fund for the corporation to carry out its functions under this subchapter. The premium rates charged by the corporation for any period shall be uniform for all plans, other than multiemployer plans, insured by the corporation with respect to basic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322 of this title, and shall be uniform for all multiemployer plans with respect to basic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322a of this title.

(2) The corporation shall maintain separate schedules of premium rates, and bases for the application of those rates, for—

(A) basic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322 of this title for single-employer plans,

(B) basic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322a of this title for multiemployer plans,

(C) nonbasic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322 of this title for single-employer plans,

(D) nonbasic benefits guaranteed by it under section 1322a of this title for multiemployer plans, and

(E) reimbursements of uncollectible withdrawal liability under section 1402 of this title.

The corporation may revise such schedules whenever it determines that revised schedules are necessary. Except as provided in section 1322a(f) of this title, in order to place a revised schedule described in subparagraph (A) or (B) in effect, the corporation shall proceed in accordance with subsection (b)(1) of this section, and such schedule shall apply only to plan years beginning more than 30 days after the date on which a joint resolution approving such revised schedule is enacted.

(3)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (C), the annual premium rate payable to the corporation by all plans for basic benefits guaranteed under this subchapter is—

(i) in the case of a single-employer plan, for plan years beginning after December 31, 1990, an amount equal to the sum of $19 plus the additional premium (if any) determined under subparagraph (E) for each individual who is a participant in such plan during the plan year;

(ii) in the case of a multiemployer plan, for the plan year within which the date of enactment of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 falls, an amount for each individual who is a participant in such plan for such plan year equal to the sum of—

(I) 50 cents, multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the number of months in such year ending on or before such date and the denominator of which is 12, and

(II) $1.00, multiplied by a fraction equal to 1 minus the fraction determined under clause (i),

(iii) in the case of a multiemployer plan, for plan years beginning after September 26, 1980, an amount equal to—

(I) $1.40 for each participant, for the first, second, third, and fourth plan years,

(II) $1.80 for each participant, for the fifth and sixth plan years,

(III) $2.20 for each participant, for the seventh and eighth plan years, and

(IV) $2.60 for each participant, for the ninth plan year, and for each succeeding plan year.

(B) The corporation may prescribe by regulation the extent to which the rate described in subparagraph (A)(i) applies more than once for any plan year to an individual participating in more than one plan maintained by the same employer, and the corporation may prescribe regulations under which the rate described in subparagraph (A)(iii) will not apply to the same participant in any multiemployer plan more than once for any plan year.

(C)(i) If the sum of—

(I) the amounts in any fund for basic benefits guaranteed for multiemployer plans, and

(II) the value of any assets held by the corporation for payment of basic benefits guaranteed for multiemployer plans,

is for any calendar year less than 2 times the amount of basic benefits guaranteed by the corporation under this subchapter for multiemployer plans which were paid out of any such fund or assets during the preceding calendar year, the annual premium rates under subparagraph (A) shall be increased to the next highest premium level necessary to insure that such sum will be at least 2 times greater than such amount during the following calendar year.

(ii) If the board of directors of the corporation determines that an increase in the premium rates under subparagraph (A) is necessary to provide assistance to plans which are receiving assistance under section 1431 of this title and to plans the board finds are reasonably likely to require such assistance, the board may order such increase in the premium rates.

(iii) The maximum annual premium rate which may be established under this subparagraph is $2.60 for each participant.

(iv) The provisions of this subparagraph shall not apply if the annual premium rate is increased to a level in excess of $2.60 per participant under any other provisions of this subchapter.

(D)(i) Not later than 120 days before the date on which an increase under subparagraph (C)(ii) is to become effective, the corporation shall publish in the Federal Register a notice of the determination described in subparagraph (C)(ii), the basis for the determination, the amount of the increase in the premium, and the anticipated increase in premium income that would result from the increase in the premium rate. The notice shall invite public comment, and shall provide for a public hearing if one is requested. Any such hearing shall be commenced not later than 60 days before the date on which the increase is to become effective.

(ii) The board of directors shall review the hearing record established under clause (i) and shall, not later than 30 days before the date on which the increase is to become effective, determine (after consideration of the comments received) whether the amount of the increase should be changed and shall publish its determination in the Federal Register.

(E)(i) The additional premium determined under this subparagraph with respect to any plan for any plan year shall be an amount equal to the amount determined under clause (ii) divided by the number of participants in such plan as of the close of the preceding plan year.

(ii) The amount determined under this clause for any plan year shall be an amount equal to $9.00 for each $1,000 (or fraction thereof) of unfunded vested benefits under the plan as of the close of the preceding plan year.

(iii) For purposes of clause (ii)—

(I) Except as provided in subclause (II) or (III), the term “unfunded vested benefits” means the amount which would be the unfunded current liability (within the meaning of section 1082(d)(8)(A) of this title) if only vested benefits were taken into account.

(II) The interest rate used in valuing vested benefits for purposes of subclause (I) shall be equal to the applicable percentage of the annual yield on 30-year Treasury securities for the month preceding the month in which the plan year begins. For purposes of this subclause, the applicable percentage is 80 percent for plan years beginning before July 1, 1997, 85 percent for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, and before the 1st plan year to which the first tables prescribed under section 1082(d)(7)(C)(ii)(II) of this title apply, and 100 percent for such 1st plan year and subsequent plan years.

(III) In the case of any plan year for which the applicable percentage under subclause (II) is 100 percent, the value of the plan's assets used in determining unfunded current liability under subclause (I) shall be their fair market value.

(iv) No premium shall be determined under this subparagraph for any plan year if, as of the close of the preceding plan year, contributions to the plan for the preceding plan year were not less than the full funding limitation for the preceding plan year under section 412(c)(7) of title 26.

(4) The corporation may prescribe, subject to the enactment of a joint resolution in accordance with this section or section 1322a(f) of this title, alternative schedules of premium rates, and bases for the application of those rates, for basic benefits guaranteed by it under sections 1322 and 1322a of this title based, in whole or in part, on the risks insured by the corporation in each plan.

(5)(A) In carrying out its authority under paragraph (1) to establish schedules of premium rates, and bases for the application of those rates, for nonbasic benefits guaranteed under sections 1322 and 1322a of this title the premium rates charged by the corporation for any period for nonbasic benefits guaranteed shall—

(i) be uniform by category of nonbasic benefits guaranteed,

(ii) be based on the risks insured in each category, and

(iii) reflect the experience of the corporation (including experience which may be reasonably anticipated) in guaranteeing such benefits.

(B) Notwithstanding subparagraph (A), premium rates charged to any multiemployer plan by the corporation for any period for supplemental guarantees under section 1322a(g)(2) of this title may reflect any reasonable considerations which the corporation determines to be appropriate.

(6)(A) In carrying out its authority under paragraph (1) to establish premium rates and bases for basic benefits guaranteed under section 1322 of this title with respect to single-employer plans, the corporation shall establish such rates and bases in coverage schedules in accordance with the provisions of this paragraph.

(B) The corporation may establish annual premiums for single-employer plans composed of the sum of—

(i) a charge based on a rate applicable to the excess, if any, of the present value of the basic benefits of the plan which are guaranteed over the value of the assets of the plan, not in excess of 0.1 percent, and

(ii) an additional charge based on a rate applicable to the present value of the basic benefits of the plan which are guaranteed.

The rate for the additional charge referred to in clause (ii) shall be set by the corporation for every year at a level which the corporation estimates will yield total revenue approximately equal to the total revenue to be derived by the corporation from the charges referred to in clause (i) of this subparagraph.

(C) The corporation may establish annual premiums for single-employer plans based on—

(i) the number of participants in a plan, but such premium rates shall not exceed the rates described in paragraph (3),

(ii) unfunded basic benefits guaranteed under this subchapter, but such premium rates shall not exceed the limitations applicable to charges referred to in subparagraph (B)(i), or

(iii) total guaranteed basic benefits, but such premium rates shall not exceed the rates for additional charges referred to in subparagraph (B)(ii).

If the corporation uses two or more of the rate bases described in this subparagraph, the premium rates shall be designed to produce approximately equal amounts of aggregate premium revenue from each of the rate bases used.

(D) For purposes of this paragraph, the corporation shall by regulation define the terms “value of assets” and “present value of the benefits of the plan which are guaranteed” in a manner consistent with the purposes of this subchapter and the provisions of this section.

(1) In order to place a revised schedule (other than a schedule described in subsection (a)(2)(C), (D), or (E) of this section) in effect, the corporation shall transmit the proposed schedule, its proposed effective date, and the reasons for its proposal to the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives, and to the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(2) The succeeding paragraphs of this subsection are enacted by Congress as an exercise of the rulemaking power of the Senate and the House of Representatives, respectively, and as such they shall be deemed a part of the rules of each House, respectively, but applicable only with respect to the procedure to be followed in that House in the case of resolutions described in paragraph (3). They shall supersede other rules only to the extent that they are inconsistent therewith. They are enacted with full recognition of the constitutional right of either House to change the rules (so far as relating to the procedure of that House) at any time, in the same manner and to the same extent as in the case of any rule of that House.

(3) For the purpose of the succeeding paragraphs of this subsection, “resolution” means only a joint resolution, the matter after the resolving clause of which is as follows: “The proposed revised schedule transmitted to Congress by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation on ____ is hereby approved.”, the blank space therein being filled with the date on which the corporation's message proposing the rate was delivered.

(4) A resolution shall be referred to the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and to the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(5) If a committee to which has been referred a resolution has not reported it before the expiration of 10 calendar days after its introduction, it shall then (but not before) be in order to move to discharge the committee from further consideration of that resolution, or to discharge the committee from further consideration of any other resolution with respect to the proposed adjustment which has been referred to the committee. The motion to discharge may be made only by a person favoring the resolution, shall be highly privileged (except that it may not be made after the committee has reported a resolution with respect to the same proposed rate), and debate thereon shall be limited to not more than 1 hour, to be divided equally between those favoring and those opposing the resolution. An amendment to the motion is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the motion is agreed to or disagreed to. If the motion to discharge is agreed to or disagreed to, the motion may not be renewed, nor may another motion to discharge the committee be made with respect to any other resolution with respect to the same proposed rate.

(6) When a committee has reported, or has been discharged from further consideration of a resolution, it is at any time thereafter in order (even though a previous motion to the same effect has been disagreed to) to move to proceed to the consideration of the resolution. The motion is highly privileged and is not debatable. An amendment to the motion is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the motion is agreed to or disagreed to. Debate on the resolution shall be limited to not more than 10 hours, which shall be divided equally between those favoring and those opposing the resolution. A motion further to limit debate is not debatable. An amendment to, or motion to recommit, the resolution is not in order, and it is not in order to move to reconsider the vote by which the resolution is agreed to or disagreed to.

(7) Motions to postpone, made with respect to the discharge from committee, or the consideration of, a resolution and motions to proceed to the consideration of other business shall be decided without debate. Appeals from the decisions of the Chair relating to the application of the rules of the Senate or the House of Representatives, as the case may be, to the procedure relating to a resolution shall be decided without debate.

(1) Except as provided in subsection (a)(3) of this section, and subject to paragraph (2), the rate for all plans for basic benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to plan years ending after September 2, 1974, is—

(A) in the case of each plan which was not a multiemployer plan in a plan year—

(i) with respect to each plan year beginning before January 1, 1978, an amount equal to $1 for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year,

(ii) with respect to each plan year beginning after December 31, 1977, and before January 1, 1986, an amount equal to $2.60 for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year, and 1

(iii) with respect to each plan year beginning after December 31, 1985, and before January 1, 1988, an amount equal to $8.50 for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year, and

(iv) with respect to each plan year beginning after December 31, 1987, and before January 1, 1991, an amount equal to $16 for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year, and

(B) in the case of each plan which was a multiemployer plan in a plan year, an amount equal to 50 cents for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year.

(2) The rate applicable under this subsection for the plan year preceding September 1, 1975, is the product of—

(A) the rate described in the preceding sentence; and

(B) a fraction—

(i) the numerator of which is the number of calendar months in the plan year which ends after September 2, 1974, and before the date on which the new plan year commences, and

(ii) the denominator of which is 12.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4006, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1010; Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §105, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1264; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11005(a)–(c)(3), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 240–242; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9331(a), (b), (e), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–367, 1330–368; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(h), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2442; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12021(a), (b), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–573; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §774(a)(1), (b)(1), (2), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5045, 5046.)

The plan year within which the date of enactment of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 falls, referred to in subsec. (a)(3)(A)(ii), refers to the plan year within which the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 96–364 falls, such enactment being approved Sept. 26, 1980.

1994—Subsec. (a)(3)(E)(iii). Pub. L. 103–465, §774(b)(1), (2), in subcl. (I), inserted “or (III)” after “subclause (II)”, in subcl. (II), substituted “equal to the applicable percentage” for “equal to 80 percent” and inserted at end “For purposes of this subclause, the applicable percentage is 80 percent for plan years beginning before July 1, 1997, 85 percent for plan years beginning after June 30, 1997, and before the 1st plan year to which the first tables prescribed under section 1082(d)(7)(C)(ii)(II) of this title apply, and 100 percent for such 1st plan year and subsequent plan years.”, and added subcl. (III).

Subsec. (a)(3)(E)(iv), (v). Pub. L. 103–465, §774(a)(1), redesignated cl. (v) as (iv) and struck out former cl. (iv) which read as follows:

“(iv)(I) Except as provided in this clause, the aggregate increase in the premium payable with respect to any participant by reason of this subparagraph shall not exceed $53.

“(II) If an employer made contributions to a plan during 1 or more of the 5 plan years preceding the 1st plan year to which this subparagraph applies in an amount not less than the maximum amount allowable as a deduction with respect to such contributions under section 404 of title 26, the dollar amount in effect under subclause (I) for the 1st 5 plan years to which this subparagraph applies shall be reduced by $3 for each plan year for which such contributions were made in such amount.”

1990—Subsec. (a)(3)(A)(i). Pub. L. 101–508, §12021(a)(1), substituted “for plan years beginning after December 31, 1990, an amount equal to the sum of $19” for “for plan years beginning after December 31, 1987, an amount equal to the sum of $16”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(E)(ii). Pub. L. 101–508, §12021(b)(1), substituted “$9.00” for “$6.00”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(E)(iv)(I). Pub. L. 101–508, §12021(b)(2), substituted “$53” for “$34”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(A)(iv). Pub. L. 101–508, §12021(a)(2), added cl. (iv).

1989—Subsec. (a)(3)(E)(v). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(h)(1), added cl. (v).

Subsec. (c)(1)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(h)(2), realigned margin.

1987—Subsec. (a)(3)(A)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(a), substituted “for plan years beginning after December 31, 1987, an amount equal to the sum of $16 plus the additional premium (if any) determined under subparagraph (E)” for “for plan years beginning after December 31, 1985, an amount equal to $8.50”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(E). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(b), added subpar. (E).

Subsec. (c)(1)(A). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(e), struck out “and” at end of cl. (i), inserted “and before January 1, 1986,” in cl. (ii), and added cl. (iii).

1986—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(b)(1), struck out provision that in establishing annual premiums with respect to plans, other than multiemployer plans, pars. (5) and (6) of this subsection, as in effect before Sept. 26, 1980, would continue to apply.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(1), substituted “a joint resolution approving such revised schedule is enacted” for “the Congress approves such revised schedule by a concurrent resolution”.

Subsec. (a)(3)(A)(i). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(a)(1), substituted “December 31, 1985, an amount equal to $8.50” for “December 31, 1977, an amount equal to $2.60”.

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(2), substituted “the enactment of a joint resolution” for “approval by the Congress”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(b)(2), added par. (6).

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(3), substituted “joint” for “concurrent” and “The” for “That the Congress favors the” and inserted “is hereby approved”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(A). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(a)(2), amended subpar. (A) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (A) read as follows: “in the case of each plan which was not a multiemployer plan in a plan year, an amount equal to $1 for each individual who was a participant in such plan during the plan year, and”.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §105(a), substituted provisions setting forth authority of corporation to prescribe schedules of premium rates and bases for the application of such rates and provisions respecting contents, coverages, alternate schedules, etc., of schedules and application bases, for provisions setting forth authority of corporation to prescribe insurance premium rates and coverage schedules for the application of such rates and provisions respecting contents, coverages, rates, etc., of schedules and premium rates.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §105(b), in par. (1) substituted “(C), (D), or (E)” for “(B) or (C)”, “revised schedule” for “revised coverage schedule”, and “Human Resources” for “Public Welfare”, in par. (3) substituted “revised schedule” for “revised coverage schedule”, and in par. (4) substituted “Human Resources” for “Public Welfare”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 96–364, §105(c), added subsec. (c).

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Section 774(a)(2) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that:

“(A)

“(B)

“(i) $53, and

“(ii) the product derived by multiplying—

“(I) the excess (if any) of the amount determined under clause (i) of section 4006(a)(3)(E) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [subsec. (a)(3)(E) of this section], over $53, by

“(II) the applicable percentage.

For purposes of this subparagraph, the applicable percentage shall be the percentage specified in the following table:

For the plan year beginning: | The applicable percentage is: | |
---|---|---|

on or after | but before | |

July 1, 1994 | July 1, 1995 | 20 percent |

July 1, 1995 | July 1, 1996 | 60 percent.” |


Section 774(b)(3) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendments made by this subsection [amending this section] shall apply to plan years beginning after the date of the enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].

Section 12021(c) of Pub. L. 101–508 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply to plan years beginning after December 31, 1990.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9331(f)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1305 of this title.

Section 11005(d) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Section 774(c) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “In the case of a regulated public utility described in section 7701(a)(33)(A)(i) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [26 U.S.C. 7701(a)(33)(A)(i)], the amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall not apply to plan years beginning before the earlier of—

“(1) January 1, 1998, or

“(2) the date the regulated public utility begins to collect from utility customers rates that reflect the costs incurred or projected to be incurred for additional premiums under section 4006(a)(3)(E) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [subsec. (a)(3)(E) of this section] pursuant to final and nonappealable determinations by all public utility commissions (or other authorities having jurisdiction over the rates and terms of service by the regulated public utility) that the costs are just and reasonable and recoverable from customers of the regulated public utility.”

Section 11005(e) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(1)

“(2)

“(3)

Section 11017(a) of Pub. L. 99–272 directed Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation to conduct a study of, and submit to an advisory council not later than one year after Apr. 7, 1986, a report on the premiums established under the single-employer pension plan termination insurance program under this subchapter, including (1) the long-term stability of the program, (2) alternatives with respect to proposals for changes in the premium levels under such program, (3) methods currently used in projecting future costs, (4) alternative methods of projecting such future costs, (5) methods currently used in determining premiums needed to allocate and adequately fund such future costs, along with any alternative methods of making such premium determinations, and (6) alternative premium bases upon which some or all of such projected future costs would be allocated on an exposure-related or risk-related computation; and further provided for submission of the advisory council's report to Congress 180 days after submission of the Corporation's report to the advisory council, as well as the cooperation and consultation with other Federal agencies in compilation of reports.

Section 412(a) of Pub. L. 96–364 directed Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation to conduct a separate study with respect to advantages and disadvantages of establishing a graduated premium rate schedule under this section which is based on risk, and necessity of adopting special rules in cases of union-mandated withdrawal from multiemployer pension plans, and to report to Congress the results of the studies conducted, including its recommendations with respect thereto.

This section is referred to in sections 1082, 1302, 1305, 1310, 1311, 1322a, 1343 of this title; title 26 section 412.

1 So in original. The word “and” probably should not appear.

The designated payor of each plan shall pay the premiums imposed by the corporation under this subchapter with respect to that plan when they are due. Premiums under this subchapter are payable at the time, and on an estimated, advance, or other basis, as determined by the corporation. Premiums imposed by this subchapter on September 2, 1974 (applicable to that portion of any plan year during which such date occurs) are due within 30 days after such date. Premiums imposed by this subchapter on the first plan year commencing after September 2, 1974, are due within 30 days after such plan year commences. Premiums shall continue to accrue until a plan's assets are distributed pursuant to a termination procedure, or until a trustee is appointed pursuant to section 1342 of this title, whichever is earlier. The corporation may waive or reduce premiums for a multiemployer plan for any plan year during which such plan receives financial assistance from the corporation under section 1431 of this title, except that any amount so waived or reduced shall be treated as financial assistance under such section.

If any basic benefit premium is not paid when it is due the corporation is authorized to assess a late payment charge of not more than 100 percent of the premium payment which was not timely paid. The preceding sentence shall not apply to any payment of premium made within 60 days after the date on which payment is due, if before such date, the designated payor obtains a waiver from the corporation based upon a showing of substantial hardship arising from the timely payment of the premium. The corporation is authorized to grant a waiver under this subsection upon application made by the designated payor, but the corporation may not grant a waiver if it appears that the designated payor will be unable to pay the premium within 60 days after the date on which it is due. If any premium is not paid by the last date prescribed for a payment, interest on the amount of such premium at the rate imposed under section 6601(a) of title 26 (relating to interest on underpayment, nonpayment, or extensions of time for payment of tax) shall be paid for the period from such last date to the date paid.

If any designated payor fails to pay a premium when due, the corporation is authorized to bring a civil action in any district court of the United States within the jurisdiction of which the plan assets are located, the plan is administered, or in which a defendant resides or is found for the recovery of the amount of the premium penalty, and interest, and process may be served in any other district. The district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction over actions brought under this subsection by the corporation without regard to the amount in controversy.

The corporation shall not cease to guarantee basic benefits on account of the failure of a designated payor to pay any premium when due.

(1) For purposes of this section, the term “designated payor” means—

(A) the contributing sponsor or plan administrator in the case of a single-employer plan, and

(B) the plan administrator in the case of a multiemployer plan.

(2) If the contributing sponsor of any single-employer plan is a member of a controlled group, each member of such group shall be jointly and severally liable for any premiums required to be paid by such contributing sponsor. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the term “controlled group” means any group treated as a single employer under subsection (b), (c), (m), or (*o*) of section 414 of title 26.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4007, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1013; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §§402(a)(3), 403(b), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1298, 1300; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9331(c), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–368; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsecs. (a) to (d). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(c)(1), substituted “designated payor” for “plan administrator” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 100–203, §9331(c)(2), added subsec. (e).

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364 inserted provisions relating to waiver or reduction of premiums, and struck out provisions relating to payment of premiums under statutory requirements respecting contingent liability coverage.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable to plan years beginning after Dec. 31, 1987, see section 9331(f)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1305 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1303 of this title.

As soon as practicable after the close of each fiscal year the corporation shall transmit to the President and the Congress a report relative to the conduct of its business under this subchapter for that fiscal year. The report shall include financial statements setting forth the finances of the corporation at the end of such fiscal year and the result of its operations (including the source and application of its funds) for the fiscal year and shall include an actuarial evaluation of the expected operations and status of the funds established under section 1305 of this title for the next five years (including a detailed statement of the actuarial assumptions and methods used in making such evaluation).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4008, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1014.)

The corporation shall provide advice and assistance to individuals with respect to evaluating the economic desirability of establishing individual retirement accounts or other forms of individual retirement savings for which a deduction is allowable under section 219 of title 26 and with respect to evaluating the desirability, in particular cases, of transferring amounts representing an employee's interest in a qualified plan to such an account upon the employee's separation from service with an employer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4009, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1014; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Each person described in subsection (b) of this section shall provide the corporation annually, on or before a date specified by the corporation in regulations, with—

(1) such records, documents, or other information that the corporation specifies in regulations as necessary to determine the liabilities and assets of plans covered by this subchapter; and

(2) copies of such person's audited (or, if unavailable, unaudited) financial statements, and such other financial information as the corporation may prescribe in regulations.

The persons covered by subsection (a) of this section are each contributing sponsor, and each member of a contributing sponsor's controlled group, of a single-employer plan covered by this subchapter, if—

(1) the aggregate unfunded vested benefits at the end of the preceding plan year (as determined under section 1306(a)(3)(E)(iii) of this title) of plans maintained by the contributing sponsor and the members of its controlled group exceed $50,000,000 (disregarding plans with no unfunded vested benefits);

(2) the conditions for imposition of a lien described in section 1082(f)(1)(A) and (B) of this title or section 412(n)(1)(A) and (B) of title 26 have been met with respect to any plan maintained by the contributing sponsor or any member of its controlled group; or

(3) minimum funding waivers in excess of $1,000,000 have been granted with respect to any plan maintained by the contributing sponsor or any member of its controlled group, and any portion thereof is still outstanding.

Any information or documentary material submitted to the corporation pursuant to this section shall be exempt from disclosure under section 552 of title 5, and no such information or documentary material may be made public, except as may be relevant to any administrative or judicial action or proceeding. Nothing in this section is intended to prevent disclosure to either body of Congress or to any duly authorized committee or subcommittee of the Congress.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4010, as added Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §772(a), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5044.)

Section 772(c) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [enacting this section] shall be effective on the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].”

The plan administrator of a plan subject to the additional premium under section 1306(a)(3)(E) of this title shall provide, in a form and manner and at such time as prescribed in regulations of the corporation, notice to plan participants and beneficiaries of the plan's funding status and the limits on the corporation's guaranty should the plan terminate while underfunded. Such notice shall be written in a manner so as to be understood by the average plan participant.

Subsection (a) of this section shall not apply to any plan to which section 1082(d) of this title does not apply for the plan year by reason of paragraph (9) thereof.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4011, as added Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §775(a), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5046.)

Section 775(c) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [enacting this section] shall be effective for plan years beginning after the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].”

This subtitle is referred to in sections 1361, 1371 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, this subchapter applies to any plan (including a successor plan) which, for a plan year—

(1) is an employee pension benefit plan (as defined in paragraph (2) of section 1002 of this title) established or maintained—

(A) by an employer engaged in commerce or in any industry or activity affecting commerce, or

(B) by any employee organization, or organization representing employees, engaged in commerce or in any industry or activity affecting commerce, or

(C) by both,

which has, in practice, met the requirements of part I of subchapter D of chapter 1 of title 26 (as in effect for the preceding 5 plan years of the plan) applicable to the plans described in paragraph (2) for the preceding 5 plan years; or

(2) is, or has been determined by the Secretary of the Treasury to be, a plan described in section 401(a) of title 26, or which meets, or has been determined by the Secretary of the Treasury to meet, the requirements of section 404(a)(2) of title 26.

For purposes of this subchapter, a successor plan is considered to be a continuation of a predecessor plan. For this purpose, unless otherwise specifically indicated in this subchapter, a successor plan is a plan which covers a group of employees which includes substantially the same employees as a previously established plan, and provides substantially the same benefits as that plan provided.

This section does not apply to any plan—

(1) which is an individual account plan, as defined in paragraph (34) of section 1002 of this title,

(2) established and maintained for its employees by the Government of the United States, by the government of any State or political subdivision thereof, or by any agency or instrumentality of any of the foregoing, or to which the Railroad Retirement Act of 1935 or 1937 [45 U.S.C. 231 et seq.] applies and which is financed by contributions required under that Act,

(3) which is a church plan as defined in section 414(e) of title 26, unless that plan has made an election under section 410(d) of title 26, and has notified the corporation in accordance with procedures prescribed by the corporation, that it wishes to have the provisions of this part apply to it,

(4)(A) established and maintained by a society, order, or association described in section 501(c)(8) or (9) of title 26, if no part of the contributions to or under the plan is made by employers of participants in the plan, or

(B) of which a trust described in section 501(c)(18) of title 26 is a part;

(5) which has not at any time after September 2, 1974, provided for employer contributions;

(6) which is unfunded and which is maintained by an employer primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees;

(7) which is established and maintained outside of the United States primarily for the benefit of individuals substantially all of whom are nonresident aliens;

(8) which is maintained by an employer solely for the purpose of providing benefits for certain employees in excess of the limitations on contributions and benefits imposed by section 415 of title 26 on plans to which that section applies, without regard to whether the plan is funded, and, to the extent that a separable part of a plan (as determined by the corporation) maintained by an employer is maintained for such purpose, that part shall be treated for purposes of this subchapter, as a separate plan which is an excess benefit plan;

(9) which is established and maintained exclusively for substantial owners as defined in section 1322(b)(6) 1 of this title;

(10) of an international organization which is exempt from taxation under the International Organizations Immunities Act [22 U.S.C. 288 et seq.];

(11) maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable workmen's compensation laws or unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws;

(12) which is a defined benefit plan, to the extent that it is treated as an individual account plan under paragraph (35)(B) of section 1002 of this title; or

(13) established and maintained by a professional service employer which does not at any time after September 2, 1974, have more than 25 active participants in the plan.

(1) For purposes of subsection (b)(1) of this section, the term “individual account plan” does not include a plan under which a fixed benefit is promised if the employer or his representative participated in the determination of that benefit.

(2) For purposes of this paragraph and for purposes of subsection (b)(13) of this section.

(A) the term “professional service employer” means any proprietorship, partnership, corporation, or other association or organization (i) owned or controlled by professional individuals or by executors or administrators of professional individuals, (ii) the principal business of which is the performance of professional services, and

(B) the term “professional individuals” includes but is not limited to, physicians, dentists, chiropractors, osteopaths, optometrists, other licensed practitioners of the healing arts, attorneys at law, public accountants, public engineers, architects, draftsmen, actuaries, psychologists, social or physical scientists, and performing artists.

(3) In the case of a plan established and maintained by more than one professional service employer, the plan shall not be treated as a plan described in subsection (b)(13) of this section if, at any time after September 2, 1974, the plan has more than 25 active participants.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4021, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1014; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(4), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1298; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7894(g)(3)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2451.)

The Railroad Retirement Act of 1935 or 1937, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), means act Aug. 29, 1935, ch. 812, 49 Stat. 867, known as the Railroad Retirement Act of 1935. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1935 was amended generally by act June 24, 1937, ch. 382, part I, 50 Stat. 307, and was known as the Railroad Retirement Act of 1937. The Railroad Retirement Act of 1937 was amended generally and redesignated the Railroad Retirement Act of 1974 by Pub. L. 93–445, title I, Oct. 16, 1974, 88 Stat. 1305, and is classified generally to subchapter IV (§231 et seq.) of chapter 9 of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

Paragraph (6) of section 1322(b) of this title, referred to in subsec. (b)(9), was redesignated as par. (5) by Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(c)(4), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301.

The International Organizations Immunities Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(10), is title I of act Dec. 29, 1945, ch. 652, 59 Stat. 669, as amended, which is classified principally to subchapter XVIII (§288 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 288 of Title 22 and Tables.

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(3)(A), substituted “this subchapter applies” for “this section applies” in introductory provisions.

Subsecs. (a)(1), (2), (b)(3), (4)(A), (8). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364 inserted “unless otherwise specifically indicated in this subchapter,” after “For this purpose,”.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(g)(3)(A) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1023, 1054, 1081, 1082, 1103, 1114, 1322, 1322a, 1323, 1341, 1341a, 1343, 1344, 1365, 1461 of this title; title 26 sections 401, 412, 4972.

1 See References in Text note below.

Subject to the limitations contained in subsection (b) of this section, the corporation shall guarantee, in accordance with this section, the payment of all nonforfeitable benefits (other than benefits becoming nonforfeitable solely on account of the termination of a plan) under a single-employer plan which terminates at a time when this subchapter applies to it.

(1) Except to the extent provided in paragraph (7)—

(A) no benefits provided by a plan which has been in effect for less than 60 months at the time the plan terminates shall be guaranteed under this section, and

(B) any increase in the amount of benefits under a plan resulting from a plan amendment which was made, or became effective, whichever is later, within 60 months before the date on which the plan terminates shall be disregarded.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the time a successor plan (within the meaning of section 1321(a) of this title) has been in effect includes the time a previously established plan (within the meaning of section 1321(a) of this title) was in effect. For purposes of determining what benefits are guaranteed under this section in the case of a plan to which section 1321 of this title does not apply on September 3, 1974, the 60-month period referred to in paragraph (1) shall be computed beginning on the first date on which such section does apply to the plan.

(3) The amount of monthly benefits described in subsection (a) of this section provided by a plan, which are guaranteed under this section with respect to a participant, shall not have an actuarial value which exceeds the actuarial value of a monthly benefit in the form of a life annuity commencing at age 65 equal to the lesser of—

(A) his average monthly gross income from his employer during the 5 consecutive calendar year period (or, if less, during the number of calendar years in such period in which he actively participates in the plan) during which his gross income from that employer was greater than during any other such period with that employer determined by dividing 1/12 of the sum of all such gross income by the number of such calendar years in which he had such gross income, or

(B) $750 multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the contribution and benefit base (determined under section 230 of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 430]) in effect at the time the plan terminates and the denominator of which is such contribution and benefit base in effect in calendar year 1974.

The provisions of this paragraph do not apply to non-basic benefits. The maximum guaranteed monthly benefit shall not be reduced solely on account of the age of a participant in the case of a benefit payable by reason of disability that occurred on or before the termination date, if the participant demonstrates to the satisfaction of the corporation that the Social Security Administration has determined that the participant satisfies the definition of disability under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.; 1381 et seq.], and the regulations thereunder. If a benefit payable by reason of disability is converted to an early or normal retirement benefit for reasons other than a change in the health of the participant, such early or normal retirement benefit shall be treated as a continuation of the benefit payable by reason of disability and this subparagraph shall continue to apply.

(4)(A) The actuarial value of a benefit, for purposes of this subsection, shall be determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(B) For purposes of paragraph (3)—

(i) the term “gross income” means “earned income” within the meaning of section 911(b) of title 26 (determined without regard to any community property laws),

(ii) in the case of a participant in a plan under which contributions are made by more than one employer, amounts received as gross income from any employer under that plan shall be aggregated with amounts received from any other employer under that plan during the same period, and

(iii) any non-basic benefit shall be disregarded.

(5)(A) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “substantial owner” means an individual who—

(i) owns the entire interest in an unincorporated trade or business,

(ii) in the case of a partnership, is a partner who owns, directly or indirectly, more than 10 percent of either the capital interest or the profits interest in such partnership, or

(iii) in the case of a corporation, owns, directly or indirectly, more than 10 percent in value of either the voting stock of that corporation or all the stock of that corporation.

For purposes of clause (iii) the constructive ownership rules of section 1563(e) of title 26 shall apply (determined without regard to section 1563(e)(3)(C)). For purposes of this subchapter an individual is also treated as a substantial owner with respect to a plan if, at any time within the 60 months preceding the date on which the determination is made, he was a substantial owner under the plan.

(B) In the case of a participant in a plan under which benefits have not been increased by reason of any plan amendments and who is covered by the plan as a substantial owner, the amount of benefits guaranteed under this section shall not exceed the product of—

(i) a fraction (not to exceed 1) the numerator of which is the number of years the substantial owner was an active participant in the plan, and the denominator of which is 30, and

(ii) the amount of the substantial owner's monthly benefits guaranteed under subsection (a) of this section (as limited under paragraph (3) of this subsection).

(C) In the case of a participant in a plan, other than a plan described in subparagraph (B), who is covered by the plan as a substantial owner, the amount of the benefit guaranteed under this section shall, under regulations prescribed by the corporation, treat each benefit increase attributable to a plan amendment as if it were provided under a new plan. The benefits guaranteed under this section with respect to all such amendments shall not exceed the amount which would be determined under subparagraph (B) if subparagraph (B) applied.

(6)(A) No benefits accrued under a plan after the date on which the Secretary of the Treasury issues notice that he has determined that any trust which is a part of a plan does not meet the requirements of section 401(a) of title 26, or that the plan does not meet the requirements of section 404(a)(2) of title 26, are guaranteed under this section unless such determination is erroneous. This subparagraph does not apply if the Secretary subsequently issues a notice that such trust meets the requirements of section 401(a) of title 26 or that the plan meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2) of title 26 and if the Secretary determines that the trust or plan has taken action necessary to meet such requirements during the period between the issuance of the notice referred to in the preceding sentence and the issuance of the notice referred to in this sentence.

(B) No benefits accrued under a plan after the date on which an amendment of the plan is adopted which causes the Secretary of the Treasury to determine that any trust under the plan has ceased to meet the requirements of section 401(a) of title 26 or that the plan has ceased to meet the requirements of section 404(a)(2) of title 26, are guaranteed under this section unless such determination is erroneous. This subparagraph shall not apply if the amendment is revoked as of the date it was first effective or amended to comply with such requirements.

(7) Benefits described in paragraph (1) are guaranteed only to the extent of the greater of—

(A) 20 percent of the amount which, but for the fact that the plan or amendment has not been in effect for 60 months or more, would be guaranteed under this section, or

(B) $20 per month,

multiplied by the number of years (but not more than 5) the plan or amendment, as the case may be, has been in effect. In determining how many years a plan or amendment has been in effect for purposes of this paragraph, the first 12 months beginning with the date on which the plan or amendment is made or first becomes effective (whichever is later) constitutes one year, and each consecutive period of 12 months thereafter constitutes an additional year. This paragraph does not apply to benefits payable under a plan unless the corporation finds substantial evidence that the plan was terminated for a reasonable business purpose and not for the purpose of obtaining the payment of benefits by the corporation under this subchapter.

(1) In addition to benefits paid under the preceding provisions of this section with respect to a terminated plan, the corporation shall pay the portion of the amount determined under paragraph (2) which is allocated with respect to each participant under section 1344(a) of this title. Such payment shall be made to such participant or to such participant's beneficiaries (including alternate payees, within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(K) of this title).

(2) The amount determined under this paragraph is an amount equal to the product derived by multiplying—

(A) the outstanding amount of benefit liabilities under the plan (including interest calculated from the termination date), by

(B) the applicable recovery ratio.

(3)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (C), for purposes of this subsection, the term “recovery ratio” means the average ratio, with respect to prior plan terminations described in subparagraph (B), of—

(i) the value of the recovery of the corporation under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title in connection with such prior terminations, to

(ii) the amount of unfunded benefit liabilities under such plans as of the termination date in connection with such prior terminations.

(B) A plan termination described in this subparagraph is a termination with respect to which—

(i) the corporation has determined the value of recoveries under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title, and

(ii) notices of intent to terminate were provided after December 17, 1987, and during the 5-Federal fiscal year period ending with the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year in which occurs the date of the notice of intent to terminate with respect to the plan termination for which the recovery ratio is being determined.

(C) In the case of a terminated plan with respect to which the outstanding amount of benefit liabilities exceeds $20,000,000, for purposes of this section, the term “recovery ratio” means, with respect to the termination of such plan, the ratio of—

(i) the value of the recoveries of the corporation under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title in connection with such plan, to

(ii) the amount of unfunded benefit liabilities under such plan as of the termination date.

(4) Determinations under this subsection shall be made by the corporation. Such determinations shall be binding unless shown by clear and convincing evidence to be unreasonable.

The corporation is authorized to guarantee the payment of such other classes of benefits and to establish the terms and conditions under which such other classes of benefits are guaranteed as it determines to be appropriate.

For purposes of subsection (a) of this section, a qualified preretirement survivor annuity (as defined in section 1055(e)(1) of this title) with respect to a participant under a terminated single-employer plan shall not be treated as forfeitable solely because the participant has not died as of the termination date.

For purposes of this section, the effective date of a plan amendment described in section 1054(i)(1) of this title shall be the effective date of the plan of reorganization of the employer described in section 1054(i)(1) of this title or, if later, the effective date stated in such amendment.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4022, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1016; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(c), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(c)(8), (9), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 274; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(b)(3)(A), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–362; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(f)(4), (5), (11), 7891(a)(1), 7894(g)(1), (3)(B), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, 2441, 2445, 2451; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §§766(c), 777(a), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5037, 5049.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(3), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles II, and XVI of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§401 et seq.) and XVI (§1381 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 103–465, §777(a), inserted at end “The maximum guaranteed monthly benefit shall not be reduced solely on account of the age of a participant in the case of a benefit payable by reason of disability that occurred on or before the termination date, if the participant demonstrates to the satisfaction of the corporation that the Social Security Administration has determined that the participant satisfies the definition of disability under title II or XVI of the Social Security Act, and the regulations thereunder. If a benefit payable by reason of disability is converted to an early or normal retirement benefit for reasons other than a change in the health of the participant, such early or normal retirement benefit shall be treated as a continuation of the benefit payable by reason of disability and this subparagraph shall continue to apply.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–465, §766(c), added subsec. (f).

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(3)(B), substituted “this subchapter” for “section 1321 of this title”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(1), substituted “60-month” for “60 month”.

Subsec. (b)(4)(B)(i), (5)(A), (6). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(11), substituted “under section 1344(a) of this title. Such payment shall be made to such participant” for “under section 1344(a) of this title, to such participant”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(4), struck out “(in the case of a deceased participant)” before “to such participant's beneficiaries”.

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(5), inserted before period at end “, and during the 5-Federal fiscal year period ending with the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year in which occurs the date of the notice of intent to terminate with respect to the plan termination for which the recovery ratio is being determined”.

1987—Subsecs. (c) to (e). Pub. L. 100–203 added subsec. (c) and redesignated former subsecs. (c) and (d) as (d) and (e), respectively.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(8), in provisions following subpar. (B) substituted “12 months beginning with” for “12 months following”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(9), added subsec. (d).

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(c)(2), inserted “, in accordance with this section,” after “guarantee” and “single-employer” before “plan which”, and struck out “the terms of” after “under”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(c)(3), (4), in par. (1) substituted “(7)” for “(8)”, struck out par. (5) relating to receipt of a life annuity commencing at age 65, and redesignated pars. (6) to (8) as (5) to (7), respectively.

Amendment by section 766(c) of Pub. L. 103–465 applicable to plan amendments adopted on or after Dec. 8, 1994, see section 766(d) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 777(b) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendment made by this section [amending this section] shall be effective for plan terminations under section 4041(c) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1341(c)] with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 4041(a)(2) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1342], or under section 4042 of such Act with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the corporation, on or after the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].”

Amendment by section 7881(f)(4), (5), (11) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(g)(1), (3)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Section 9312(b)(3)(B) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(f)(1), (6), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, provided that:

“(i)

“(I) subparagraph (A) of section 4022(c)(3) of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1322(c)(3)(A)] (as amended by this paragraph) shall not apply, and

“(II) subparagraph (C) of section 4022(c)(3) of ERISA (as so amended) shall apply irrespective of the outstanding amount of benefit liabilities under the plan.

“(ii) [Repealed. Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(f)(6), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440.]”

This section is referred to in sections 1301, 1305, 1306, 1321, 1322a, 1322b, 1341, 1343, 1344, 1346, 1350, 1361, 1412, 1461 of this title; title 26 section 404; title 42 section 430.

The corporation shall guarantee, in accordance with this section, the payment of all nonforfeitable benefits (other than benefits becoming nonforfeitable solely on account of the termination of a plan) under a multiemployer plan—

(1) to which this subchapter applies, and

(2) which is insolvent under section 1426(b) or 1441(d)(2) of this title.

(1)(A) For purposes of this section, a benefit or benefit increase which has been in effect under a plan for less than 60 months is not eligible for the corporation's guarantee. For purposes of this paragraph, any month of any plan year during which the plan was insolvent or terminated (within the meaning of section 1341a(a)(2) of this title) shall not be taken into account.

(B) For purposes of this section, a benefit or benefit increase which has been in effect under a plan for less than 60 months before the first day of the plan year for which an amendment reducing the benefit or the benefit increase is taken into account under section 1425(a)(2) of this title in determining the minimum contribution requirement for the plan year under section 1423(b) of this title is not eligible for the corporation's guarantee.

(2) For purposes of this section—

(A) the date on which a benefit or a benefit increase under a plan is first in effect is the later of—

(i) the date on which the documents establishing or increasing the benefit were executed, or

(ii) the effective date of the benefit or benefit increase;

(B) the period of time for which a benefit or a benefit increase has been in effect under a successor plan includes the period of time for which the benefit or benefit increase was in effect under a previously established plan; and

(C) in the case of a plan to which section 1321 of this title did not apply on September 3, 1974, the time periods referred to in this section are computed beginning on the date on which section 1321 of this title first applies to the plan.

(1) Except as provided in subsection (g) of this section, the monthly benefit of a participant or a beneficiary which is guaranteed under this section by the corporation with respect to a plan is the product of—

(A) 100 percent of the accrual rate up to $5, plus 75 percent of the lesser of—

(i) $15, or

(ii) the accrual rate, if any, in excess of $5, and

(B) the number of the participant's years of credited service.

(2) Except as provided in paragraph (6) of this subsection and in subsection (g) of this section, in applying paragraph (1) with respect to a plan described in paragraph (5)(A), the term “65 percent” shall be substituted in paragraph (1)(A) for the term “75 percent”.

(3) For purposes of this section, the accrual rate is—

(A) the monthly benefit of the participant or beneficiary which is described in subsection (a) of this section and which is eligible for the corporation's guarantee under subsection (b) of this section, except that such benefit shall be—

(i) no greater than the monthly benefit which would be payable under the plan at normal retirement age in the form of a single life annuity, and

(ii) determined without regard to any reduction under section 411(a)(3)(E) of title 26; divided by

(B) the participant's years of credited service.

(4) For purposes of this subsection—

(A) a year of credited service is a year in which the participant completed—

(i) a full year of participation in the plan, or

(ii) any period of service before participation which is credited for purposes of benefit accrual as the equivalent of a full year of participation;

(B) any year for which the participant is credited for purposes of benefit accrual with a fraction of the equivalent of a full year of participation shall be counted as such a fraction of a year of credited service; and

(C) years of credited service shall be determined by including service which may otherwise be disregarded by the plan under section 411(a)(3)(E) of title 26.

(5)(A) A plan is described in this subparagraph if—

(i) the first plan year—

(I) in which the plan is insolvent under section 1426(b) or 1441(d)(2) of this title, and

(II) for which benefits are required to be suspended under section 1426 of this title, or reduced or suspended under section 1441 of this title, until they do not exceed the levels provided in this subsection,

begins before the year 2000; and

(ii) the plan sponsor has not established to the satisfaction of the corporation that, during the period of 10 consecutive plan years (or of such lesser number of plan years for which the plan was maintained) immediately preceding the first plan year to which the minimum funding standards of section 412 of title 26 apply, the total amount of the contributions required under the plan for each plan year was at least equal to the sum of—

(I) the normal cost for that plan year, and

(II) the interest for the plan year (determined under the plan) on the unfunded past service liability for that plan year, determined as of the beginning of that plan year.

(B) A plan shall not be considered to be described in subparagraph (A) if—

(i) it is established to the satisfaction of the corporation that—

(I) the total amount of the contributions received under the plan for the plan years for which the actuarial valuations (performed during the period described in subparagraph (A)(ii)) were performed was at least equal to the sum described in subparagraph (A)(ii); or

(II) the rates of contribution to the plan under the collective bargaining agreements negotiated when the findings of such valuations were available were reasonably expected to provide such contributions;

(ii) the number of actuarial valuations performed during the period described in subparagraph (A)(ii) is—

(I) at least 2, in any case in which such period consists of more than 6 plan years, and

(II) at least 1, in any case in which such period consists of 6 or fewer plan years; and

(iii) if the proposition described in clause (i)(I) is to be established, the plan sponsor certifies that to the best of the plan sponsor's knowledge there is no information available which establishes that the total amount of the contributions received under the plan for any plan year during the period described in subparagraph (A)(ii) for which no valuation was performed is less than the sum described in subparagraph (A)(ii).

(6) Notwithstanding paragraph (2), in the case of a plan described in paragraph (5)(A), if for any period of 3 consecutive plan years beginning with the first plan year to which the minimum funding standards of section 412 of title 26 apply, the value of the assets of the plan for each such plan year is an amount equal to at least 8 times the benefit payments for such plan year—

(A) paragraph (2) shall not apply to such plan; and

(B) the benefit of a participant or beneficiary guaranteed by the corporation with respect to the plan shall be an amount determined under paragraph (1).

In the case of a benefit which has been reduced under section 411(a)(3)(E) of title 26, the corporation shall guarantee the lesser of—

(1) the reduced benefit, or

(2) the amount determined under subsection (c) of this section.

The corporation shall not guarantee benefits under a multiemployer plan which, under section 1322(b)(6) of this title, would not be guaranteed under a single-employer plan.

(1) No later than 5 years after September 26, 1980, and at least every fifth year thereafter, the corporation shall—

(A) conduct a study to determine—

(i) the premiums needed to maintain the basic-benefit guarantee levels for multiemployer plans described in subsection (c) of this section, and

(ii) whether the basic-benefit guarantee levels for multiemployer plans may be increased without increasing the basic-benefit premiums for multiemployer plans under this subchapter; and

(B) report such determinations to the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and to the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate.

(2)(A) If the last report described in paragraph (1) indicates that a premium increase is necessary to support the existing basic-benefit guarantee levels for multiemployer plans, the corporation shall transmit to the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and to the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate by March 31 of any calendar year in which congressional action under this subsection is requested—

(i) a revised schedule of basic-benefit guarantees for multiemployer plans which would be necessary in the absence of an increase in premiums approved in accordance with section 1306(b) of this title,

(ii) a revised schedule of basic-benefit premiums for multiemployer plans which is necessary to support the existing basic-benefit guarantees for such plans, and

(iii) a revised schedule of basic-benefit guarantees for multiemployer plans for which the schedule of premiums necessary is higher than the existing premium schedule for such plans but lower than the revised schedule of premiums for such plans specified in clause (ii), together with such schedule of premiums.

(B) The revised schedule of increased premiums referred to in subparagraph (A)(ii) or (A)(iii) shall go into effect as approved by the enactment of a joint resolution.

(C) If an increase in premiums is not so enacted, the revised guarantee schedule described in subparagraph (A)(i) shall go into effect on the first day of the second calendar year following the year in which such revised guarantee schedule was submitted to the Congress.

(3)(A) If the last report described in paragraph (1) indicates that basic-benefit guarantees for multiemployer plans can be increased without increasing the basic-benefit premiums for multiemployer plans under this subchapter, the corporation shall submit to the Committee on Ways and Means and the Committee on Education and Labor of the House of Representatives and to the Committee on Finance and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources of the Senate by March 31 of the calendar year in which congressional action under this paragraph is requested—

(i) a revised schedule of increases in the basic-benefit guarantees which can be supported by the existing schedule of basic-benefit premiums for multiemployer plans, and

(ii) a revised schedule of basic-benefit premiums sufficient to support the existing basic-benefit guarantees.

(B) The revised schedules referred to in subparagraph (A)(i) or subparagraph (A)(ii) shall go into effect as approved by the enactment of a joint resolution.

(4)(A) The succeeding subparagraphs of this paragraph are enacted by the Congress as an exercise of the rulemaking power of the Senate and the House of Representatives, respectively, and as such they shall be deemed a part of the rules of each House, respectively, but applicable only with respect to the procedure to be followed in that House in the case of joint resolutions (as defined in subparagraph (B)). Such subparagraphs shall supersede other rules only to the extent that they are inconsistent therewith. They are enacted with full recognition of the constitutional right of either House to change the rules (so far as relating to the procedure of that House) at any time, in the same manner, and to the same extent as in the case of any rule of that House.

(B) For purposes of this subsection, “joint resolution” means only a joint resolution, the matter after the resolving clause of which is as follows: “The proposed schedule described in transmitted to the Congress by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation on is hereby approved.”, the first blank space therein being filled with “section 4022A(f)(2)(A)(ii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”, “section 4022A(f)(2)(A)(iii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”, “section 4022A(f)(3)(A)(i) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974”, or “section 4022A(f)(3)(A)(ii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974” (whichever is applicable), and the second blank space therein being filled with the date on which the corporation's message proposing the revision was submitted.

(C) The procedure for disposition of a joint resolution shall be the procedure described in section 1306(b)(4) through (7) of this title.

(1) The corporation may guarantee the payment of such other classes of benefits under multiemployer plans, and establish the terms and conditions under which those other classes of benefits are guaranteed, as it determines to be appropriate.

(2)(A) The corporation shall prescribe regulations to establish a supplemental program to guarantee benefits under multiemployer plans which would be guaranteed under this section but for the limitations in subsection (c) of this section. Such regulations shall be proposed by the corporation no later than the end of the 18th calendar month following September 26, 1980. The regulations shall make coverage under the supplemental program available no later than January 1, 1983. Any election to participate in the supplemental program shall be on a voluntary basis, and a plan electing such coverage shall continue to pay the premiums required under section 1306(a)(2)(B) of this title to the revolving fund used pursuant to section 1305 of this title in connection with benefits otherwise guaranteed under this section. Any such election shall be irrevocable, except to the extent otherwise provided by regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(B) The regulations prescribed under this paragraph shall provide—

(i) that a plan must elect coverage under the supplemental program within the time permitted by the regulations;

(ii) unless the corporation determines otherwise, that a plan may not elect supplemental coverage unless the value of the assets of the plan as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the election must be made is an amount equal to 15 times the total amount of the benefit payments made under the plan for that year; and

(iii) such other reasonable terms and conditions for supplemental coverage, including funding standards and any other reasonable limitations with respect to plans or benefits covered or to means of program financing, as the corporation determines are necessary and appropriate for a feasible supplemental program consistent with the purposes of this subchapter.

(3) Any benefits guaranteed under this subsection shall be considered nonbasic benefits for purposes of this subchapter.

(4)(A) No revised schedule of premiums under this subsection, after the initial schedule, shall go into effect unless—

(i) the revised schedule is submitted to the Congress, and

(ii) a joint resolution described in subparagraph (B) is not enacted before the close of the 60th legislative day after such schedule is submitted to the Congress.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), a joint resolution described in this subparagraph is a joint resolution the matter after the resolving clause of which is as follows: “The revised premium schedule transmitted to the Congress by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 4022A(g)(4) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 on is hereby disapproved.”, the blank space therein being filled with the date on which the revised schedule was submitted.

(C) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the term “legislative day” means any calendar day other than a day on which either House is not in session because of a sine die adjournment or an adjournment of more than 3 days to a day certain.

(D) The procedure for disposition of a joint resolution described in subparagraph (B) shall be the procedure described in paragraphs (4) through (7) of section 1306(b) of this title.

(5) Regulations prescribed by the corporation to carry out the provisions of this subsection, may, to the extent provided therein, supersede the requirements of sections 1426, 1431, and 1441 of this title, and the requirements of section 418E of title 26, but only with respect to benefits guaranteed under this subsection.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (3), subsections (b) and (c) of this section shall not apply with respect to the nonforfeitable benefits accrued as of July 29, 1980, with respect to a participant or beneficiary under a multiemployer plan—

(1) who is in pay status on July 29, 1980, or

(2) who is within 36 months of the normal retirement age and has a nonforfeitable right to a pension as of that date.

(2) The benefits described in paragraph (1) shall be guaranteed by the corporation in the same manner and to the same extent as benefits are guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title (without regard to this section).

(3) This subsection does not apply with respect to a plan for plan years following a plan year—

(A) in which the plan has terminated within the meaning of section 1341a(a)(2) of this title, or

(B) in which it is determined by the corporation that substantially all the employers have withdrawn from the plan pursuant to an agreement or arrangement to withdraw.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4022A, as added Pub. L. 93–364, title I, §102, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1210; amended Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11005(c)(4)–(12), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 242; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7891(a)(1), 7893(b), 7894(g)(3)(C)(i), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445, 2447, 2451.)

Section 4022A(f)(2)(A)(ii), (iii), (3)(A)(i), and (ii) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (f)(4)(B), is classified to subsec. (f)(2)(A)(ii), (iii), (3)(A)(i) and (ii) of this section.

Section 4022A(g)(4) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (g)(4)(B), is classified to subsec. (g)(4) of this section.

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(3)(C)(i), substituted “this subchapter” for “section 1321 of this title”.

Subsecs. (c)(3)(A)(ii), (4)(C), (5)(A)(ii), (6), (d), (g)(5). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (f)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(b), substituted “the enactment” for “the the enactment”.

1986—Subsec. (f)(2)(B). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(4), substituted “the enactment of a joint resolution” for “Congress by concurrent resolution”.

Subsec. (f)(2)(C). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(5), substituted “so enacted” for “approved”.

Subsec. (f)(3)(B). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(6), substituted “enactment of a joint resolution” for “Congress by concurrent resolution”.

Subsec. (f)(4)(A). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(7), substituted “joint” for “concurrent”.

Subsec. (f)(4)(B). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(8), substituted “joint” for “concurrent” in two places and “The” for “That the Congress favors the” and inserted “is hereby approved”.

Subsec. (f)(4)(C). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(9), substituted “joint” for “concurrent”.

Subsec. (g)(4)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(10), substituted “joint” for “concurrent” and “enacted” for “adopted”.

Subsec. (g)(4)(B). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(11), substituted “joint” for “concurrent” in two places and “The” for “That the Congress disapproves the” and inserted “is hereby disapproved”.

Subsec. (g)(4)(D). Pub. L. 99–272, §11005(c)(12), substituted “joint” for “concurrent”.

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7893(b) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(g)(3)(C)(ii) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by clause (i) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in section 102 of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 [Pub. L. 96–364].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective for plan years commencing after Dec. 31, 1985, see section 11005(d)(1) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1306 of this title.

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1301, 1305, 1306, 1322b, 1346, 1361, 1411, 1413, 1424, 1425, 1426, 1441, 1461 of this title; title 26 sections 418C, 418D, 418E.

(a) Notwithstanding sections 1322 and 1322a of this title, no person shall receive from the corporation pursuant to a guarantee by the corporation of basic benefits with respect to a participant under all multiemployer and single employer plans an amount, or amounts, with an actuarial value which exceeds the actuarial value of a monthly benefit in the form of a life annuity commencing at age 65 equal to the amount determined under section 1322(b)(3)(B) of this title as of the date of the last plan termination.

(b) For purposes of this section—

(1) the receipt of benefits under a multiemployer plan receiving financial assistance from the corporation shall be considered the receipt of amounts from the corporation pursuant to a guarantee by the corporation of basic benefits except to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation, and

(2) the date on which a multiemployer plan, whether or not terminated, begins receiving financial assistance from the corporation shall be considered a date of plan termination.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4022B, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §102, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1215.)

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1344, 1346 of this title.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, a fiduciary of a plan to which section 1321 of this title applies is not in violation of the fiduciary's duties as a result of any act or of any withholding of action required by this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4023, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(5), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1298.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of the title and Tables.

A prior section 1323, Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4023, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1019, related to contingent liability coverage, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §107, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1267.

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This subtitle is referred to in sections 1361, 1371 of this title.

Except in the case of a termination for which proceedings are otherwise instituted by the corporation as provided in section 1342 of this title, a single-employer plan may be terminated only in a standard termination under subsection (b) of this section or a distress termination under subsection (c) of this section.

Not less than 60 days before the proposed termination date of a standard termination under subsection (b) of this section or a distress termination under subsection (c) of this section, the plan administrator shall provide to each affected party (other than the corporation in the case of a standard termination) a written notice of intent to terminate stating that such termination is intended and the proposed termination date. The written notice shall include any related additional information required in regulations of the corporation.

The corporation shall not proceed with a termination of a plan under this section if the termination would violate the terms and conditions of an existing collective bargaining agreement. Nothing in the preceding sentence shall be construed as limiting the authority of the corporation to institute proceedings to involuntarily terminate a plan under section 1342 of this title.

A single-employer plan may terminate under a standard termination only if—

(A) the plan administrator provides the 60-day advance notice of intent to terminate to affected parties required under subsection (a)(2) of this section,

(B) the requirements of subparagraphs (A) and (B) of paragraph (2) are met,

(C) the corporation does not issue a notice of noncompliance under subparagraph (C) of paragraph (2), and

(D) when the final distribution of assets occurs, the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities (determined as of the termination date).

As soon as practicable after the date on which the notice of intent to terminate is provided pursuant to subsection (a)(2) of this section, the plan administrator shall send a notice to the corporation setting forth—

(i) certification by an enrolled actuary—

(I) of the projected amount of the assets of the plan (as of a proposed date of final distribution of assets),

(II) of the actuarial present value (as of such date) of the benefit liabilities (determined as of the proposed termination date) under the plan, and

(III) that the plan is projected to be sufficient (as of such proposed date of final distribution) for such benefit liabilities,

(ii) such information as the corporation may prescribe in regulations as necessary to enable the corporation to make determinations under subparagraph (C), and

(iii) certification by the plan administrator that—

(I) the information on which the enrolled actuary based the certification under clause (i) is accurate and complete, and

(II) the information provided to the corporation under clause (ii) is accurate and complete.

Clause (i) and clause (iii)(I) shall not apply to a plan described in section 412(i) of title 26.

No later than the date on which a notice is sent by the plan administrator under subparagraph (A), the plan administrator shall send a notice to each person who is a participant or beneficiary under the plan—

(i) specifying the amount of the benefit liabilities (if any) attributable to such person as of the proposed termination date and the benefit form on the basis of which such amount is determined, and

(ii) including the following information used in determining such benefit liabilities:

(I) the length of service,

(II) the age of the participant or beneficiary,

(III) wages,

(IV) the assumptions, including the interest rate, and

(V) such other information as the corporation may require.

Such notice shall be written in such manner as is likely to be understood by the participant or beneficiary and as may be prescribed in regulations of the corporation.

Within 60 days after receipt of the notice under subparagraph (A), the corporation shall issue a notice of noncompliance to the plan administrator if—

(I) it determines, based on the notice sent under paragraph (2)(A) of subsection (b) of this section, that there is reason to believe that the plan is not sufficient for benefit liabilities,

(II) it otherwise determines, on the basis of information provided by affected parties or otherwise obtained by the corporation, that there is reason to believe that the plan is not sufficient for benefit liabilities, or

(III) it determines that any other requirement of subparagraph (A) or (B) of this paragraph or of subsection (a)(2) of this section has not been met, unless it further determines that the issuance of such notice would be inconsistent with the interests of participants and beneficiaries.

The corporation and the plan administrator may agree to extend the 60-day period referred to in clause (i) by a written agreement signed by the corporation and the plan administrator before the expiration of the 60-day period. The 60-day period shall be extended as provided in the agreement and may be further extended by subsequent written agreements signed by the corporation and the plan administrator made before the expiration of a previously agreed upon extension of the 60-day period. Any extension may be made upon such terms and conditions (including the payment of benefits) as are agreed upon by the corporation and the plan administrator.

The plan administrator shall commence the final distribution of assets pursuant to the standard termination of the plan as soon as practicable after the expiration of the 60-day (or extended) period referred to in subparagraph (C), but such final distribution may occur only if—

(i) the plan administrator has not received during such period a notice of noncompliance from the corporation under subparagraph (C), and

(ii) when such final distribution occurs, the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities (determined as of the termination date).

In connection with any final distribution of assets pursuant to the standard termination of the plan under this subsection, the plan administrator shall distribute the assets in accordance with section 1344 of this title. In distributing such assets, the plan administrator shall—

(i) purchase irrevocable commitments from an insurer to provide all benefit liabilities under the plan, or

(ii) in accordance with the provisions of the plan and any applicable regulations, otherwise fully provide all benefit liabilities under the plan. A transfer of assets to the corporation in accordance with section 1350 of this title on behalf of a missing participant shall satisfy this subparagraph with respect to such participant.

Within 30 days after the final distribution of assets is completed pursuant to the standard termination of the plan under this subsection, the plan administrator shall send a notice to the corporation certifying that the assets of the plan have been distributed in accordance with the provisions of subparagraph (A) so as to pay all benefit liabilities under the plan.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to preclude the continued exercise by the corporation, after the termination date of a plan terminated in a standard termination under this subsection, of its authority under section 1303 of this title with respect to matters relating to the termination. A certification under paragraph (3)(B) shall not affect the corporation's obligations under section 1322 of this title.

A single-employer plan may terminate under a distress termination only if—

(A) the plan administrator provides the 60-day advance notice of intent to terminate to affected parties required under subsection (a)(2) of this section,

(B) the requirements of subparagraph (A) of paragraph (2) are met, and

(C) the corporation determines that the requirements of subparagraph (B) of paragraph (2) are met.

As soon as practicable after the date on which the notice of intent to terminate is provided pursuant to subsection (a)(2) of this section, the plan administrator shall provide the corporation, in such form as may be prescribed by the corporation in regulations, the following information:

(i) such information as the corporation may prescribe by regulation as necessary to make determinations under subparagraph (B) and paragraph (3);

(ii) unless the corporation determines the information is not necessary for purposes of paragraph (3)(A) or section 1362 of this title, certification by an enrolled actuary of—

(I) the amount (as of the proposed termination date and, if applicable, the proposed distribution date) of the current value of the assets of the plan,

(II) the actuarial present value (as of such dates) of the benefit liabilities under the plan,

(III) whether the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities as of such dates,

(IV) the actuarial present value (as of such dates) of benefits under the plan guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, and

(V) whether the plan is sufficient for guaranteed benefits as of such dates;

(iii) in any case in which the plan is not sufficient for benefit liabilities as of such date—

(I) the name and address of each participant and beneficiary under the plan as of such date, and

(II) such other information as shall be prescribed by the corporation by regulation as necessary to enable the corporation to be able to make payments to participants and beneficiaries as required under section 1322(c) of this title; and

(iv) certification by the plan administrator that—

(I) the information on which the enrolled actuary based the certifications under clause (ii) is accurate and complete, and

(II) the information provided to the corporation under clauses (i) and (iii) is accurate and complete.

Clause (ii) and clause (iv)(I) shall not apply to a plan described in section 412(i) of title 26.

Upon receipt of the notice of intent to terminate required under subsection (a)(2) of this section and the information required under subparagraph (A), the corporation shall determine whether the requirements of this subparagraph are met as provided in clause (i), (ii), or (iii). The requirements of this subparagraph are met if each person who is (as of the proposed termination date) a contributing sponsor of such plan or a member of such sponsor's controlled group meets the requirements of any of the following clauses:

The requirements of this clause are met by a person if—

(I) such person has filed or has had filed against such person, as of the proposed termination date, a petition seeking liquidation in a case under title 11 or under any similar Federal law or law of a State or political subdivision of a State (or a case described in clause (ii) filed by or against such person has been converted, as of such date, to a case in which liquidation is sought), and

(II) such case has not, as of the proposed termination date, been dismissed.

The requirements of this clause are met by a person if—

(I) such person has filed, or has had filed against such person, as of the proposed termination date, a petition seeking reorganization in a case under title 11 or under any similar law of a State or political subdivision of a State (or a case described in clause (i) filed by or against such person has been converted, as of such date, to such a case in which reorganization is sought),

(II) such case has not, as of the proposed termination date, been dismissed,

(III) such person timely submits to the corporation any request for the approval of the bankruptcy court (or other appropriate court in a case under such similar law of a State or political subdivision) of the plan termination, and

(IV) the bankruptcy court (or such other appropriate court) determines that, unless the plan is terminated, such person will be unable to pay all its debts pursuant to a plan of reorganization and will be unable to continue in business outside the chapter 11 reorganization process and approves the termination.

The requirements of this clause are met by a person if such person demonstrates to the satisfaction of the corporation that—

(I) unless a distress termination occurs, such person will be unable to pay such person's debts when due and will be unable to continue in business, or

(II) the costs of providing pension coverage have become unreasonably burdensome to such person, solely as a result of a decline of such person's workforce covered as participants under all single-employer plans of which such person is a contributing sponsor.

The corporation shall notify the plan administrator as soon as practicable of its determinations made pursuant to subparagraph (B).

If the corporation determines that the requirements for a distress termination set forth in paragraphs (1) and (2) are met, the corporation shall—

(i) determine that the plan is sufficient for guaranteed benefits (as of the termination date) or that the corporation is unable to make such determination on the basis of information made available to the corporation,

(ii) determine that the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities (as of the termination date) or that the corporation is unable to make such determination on the basis of information made available to the corporation, and

(iii) notify the plan administrator of the determinations made pursuant to this subparagraph as soon as practicable.

After the corporation notifies the plan administrator of its determinations under subparagraph (A), the termination of the plan shall be carried out as soon as practicable, as provided in clause (i), (ii), or (iii).

In any case in which the corporation determines that the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities, the plan administrator shall proceed to distribute the plan's assets, and make certification to the corporation with respect to such distribution, in the manner described in subsection (b)(3) of this section, and shall take such other actions as may be appropriate to carry out the termination of the plan.

In any case in which the corporation determines that the plan is sufficient for guaranteed benefits, but further determines that it is unable to determine that the plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities on the basis of the information made available to it, the plan administrator shall proceed to distribute the plan's assets in the manner described in subsection (b)(3) of this section, make certification to the corporation that the distribution has occurred, and take such actions as may be appropriate to carry out the termination of the plan.

In any case in which the corporation determines that it is unable to determine that the plan is sufficient for guaranteed benefits on the basis of the information made available to it, the corporation shall commence proceedings in accordance with section 1342 of this title.

If, after the plan administrator has begun to terminate the plan as authorized under subparagraph (B)(i), the plan administrator finds that the plan is unable, or will be unable, to pay benefit liabilities which are not benefits guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title, the plan administrator shall notify the corporation of such finding as soon as practicable thereafter.

If, after the plan administrator has begun to terminate the plan as authorized by subparagraph (B)(i) or (ii), the plan administrator finds that the plan is unable, or will be unable, to pay all benefits under the plan which are guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title, the plan administrator shall notify the corporation of such finding as soon as practicable thereafter. If the corporation concurs in the finding of the plan administrator (or the corporation itself makes such a finding), the corporation shall institute appropriate proceedings under section 1342 of this title.

The plan administrator shall—

(I) meet the requirements of clause (ii) for the period commencing on the date on which the plan administrator provides a notice of distress termination to the corporation under subsection (a)(2) of this section and ending on the date on which the plan administrator receives notification from the corporation of its determinations under subparagraph (A), and

(II) meet the requirements of clause (ii) commencing on the date on which the plan administrator or the corporation makes a finding under subparagraph (C)(ii).

The requirements of this clause are met by the plan administrator if the plan administrator—

(I) refrains from distributing assets or taking any other actions to carry out the proposed termination under this subsection,

(II) pays benefits attributable to employer contributions, other than death benefits, only in the form of an annuity,

(III) does not use plan assets to purchase irrevocable commitments to provide benefits from an insurer, and

(IV) continues to pay all benefit liabilities under the plan, but, commencing on the proposed termination date, limits the payment of benefits under the plan to those benefits which are guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title or to which assets are required to be allocated under section 1344 of this title.

In the event the plan administrator is later determined not to have met the requirements for distress termination, any benefits which are not paid solely by reason of compliance with subclause (IV) shall be due and payable immediately (together with interest, at a reasonable rate, in accordance with regulations of the corporation).

For purposes of this section—

A single-employer plan is sufficient for benefit liabilities if there is no amount of unfunded benefit liabilities under the plan.

A single-employer plan is sufficient for guaranteed benefits if there is no amount of unfunded guaranteed benefits under the plan.

The adoption of an amendment to a plan which causes the plan to become a plan described in section 1321(b)(1) of this title constitutes a termination of the plan. Such an amendment may take effect only after the plan satisfies the requirements for standard termination under subsection (b) of this section or distress termination under subsection (c) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4041, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1020; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(d), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §§11007, 11008(a), (b), 11009, Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 244, 247, 248; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9312(c)(1), (2), 9313(a)(1)–(2)(E), (b)(1)–(5), 9314(a), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–363 to 1330–366; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(f)(7), (g)(1)–(6), 7893(c), (d), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, 2441, 2447; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §§776(b)(3), 778(a)(1), (b)(1), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5048–5050.)

Chapter 11, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii)(IV), probably means chapter 11 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(C)(i)(I). Pub. L. 103–465, §778(a)(1)(A), added subcl. (I) and struck out former subcl. (I) which read as follows: “It has reason to believe that any requirement of subsection (a)(2) of this section or subparagraph (A) or (B) has not been met, or”.

Subsec. (b)(2)(C)(i)(III). Pub. L. 103–465, §778(a)(1)(B), (C), added subcl. (III).

Subsec. (b)(3)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 103–465, §776(b)(3), inserted at end “A transfer of assets to the corporation in accordance with section 1350 of this title on behalf of a missing participant shall satisfy this subparagraph with respect to such participant.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(i)(I). Pub. L. 103–465, §778(b)(1), inserted “Federal law or” after “under any similar”.

1989—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(6), realigned margin of last sentence.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(c), realigned margin of last sentence.

Subsec. (b)(3)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(4), inserted period at end.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(3), in introductory provisions, inserted “unless the corporation determines the information is not necessary for purposes of paragraph (3)(A) or section 1362 of this title,” before “certification”, in subcl. (I), inserted “and, if applicable, the proposed distribution date” after “termination date”, and in subcls. (II) to (V), substituted “dates” for “date”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A)(iii)(II). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(7)(A), (B), struck out “(or its designee under section 1349(b) of this title)” before “to be able” and substituted “section 1322(c) of this title” for “section 1349 of this title”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(2), substituted “(as of the proposed termination date)” for “(as of the termination date)”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(i), (ii). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(5), made clarifying amendment to directory language of Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(3), see 1987 Amendment note below.

Subsec. (c)(3)(C)(i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(7)(C), struck out at end “If the corporation concurs in the finding of the plan administrator (or the corporation itself makes such a finding) the corporation shall take the actions set forth in subparagraph (B)(ii)(II) relating to the trust established for purposes of section 1349 of this title.”

Subsec. (c)(3)(D). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(d)(1), realigned margins.

Subsec. (c)(3)(D)(ii)(I). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(d)(2), substituted “under this subsection” for “of this subsection”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(1), substituted “sufficient for benefit liabilities” for “sufficient for benefit commitments”.

1987—Subsec. (b)(1)(D). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(1), amended subpar. (D) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (D) read as follows: “when the final distribution of assets occurs, the plan is sufficient for benefit commitments (determined as of the termination date).”

Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(a)(1)(B), inserted at end “Clause (i) and clause (iii)(I) shall not apply to a plan described in section 412(i) of title 26.”

Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(A), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments” in subcls. (II) and (III).

Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(a)(1)(A), added cl. (iii) and struck out former cl. (iii) which read as follows: “certification by the plan administrator that the information on which the enrolled actuary based the certification under clause (i) and the information provided to the corporation under clause (ii) are accurate and complete.”

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(B), substituted “the amount of the benefit liabilities (if any) attributable to such person” for “the amount of such person's benefit commitments (if any)” in cl. (i), and “such benefit liabilities” for “such benefit commitments” in cl. (ii).

Subsec. (b)(2)(C)(i)(II), (D)(ii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(A), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(C)(i), added cl. (i) and struck out former cl. (i) which read as follows: “purchase irrevocable commitments from an insurer to provide the benefit liabilities under the plan and all other benefits (if any) under the plan to which assets are required to be allocated under section 1344 of this title, or”.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(A), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(C)(i), added cl. (ii) and struck out former cl. (ii) which read as follows: “in accordance with the provisions of the plan and any applicable regulations of the corporation, otherwise fully provide the benefit liabilities under the plan and all other benefits (if any) under the plan to which assets are required to be allocated under section 1344 of this title.”

Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(A), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(B). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(C)(ii), substituted “so as to pay all benefit liabilities under the plan” for “so as to pay the benefit liabilities under the plan and all other benefits under the plan to which assets are required to be allocated under section 1344 of this title.”

Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(A), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(a)(1)(B), inserted at end “Clause (ii) and clause (iv)(I) shall not apply to a plan described in section 412(i) of title 26.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments” in subcls. (II) and (III).

Subsec. (c)(2)(A)(iii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments” in introductory provision.

Subsec. (c)(2)(A)(iv). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(a)(2)(A), added cl. (iv) and struck out former cl. (iv) which read as follows: “certification by the plan administrator that the information on which the enrolled actuary based the certifications under clause (ii) and the information provided to the corporation under clauses (i) and (iii) are accurate and complete.”

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(1)(A), substituted “a member” for “a substantial member” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(3), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(5), substituted “proposed termination date” for “termination date” in subcls. (I) and (II).

Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(4), inserted “(or a case described in clause (ii) filed by or against such person has been converted, as of such date, to a case in which liquidation is sought)” in subcl. (I).

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii)(I). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(3), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(5), substituted “proposed termination date” for “termination date”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii)(II). Pub. L. 100–203 §9313(b)(5)(A), struck out “and” at end.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(3), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(5), substituted “proposed termination date” for “termination date”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii)(III). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(5)(C), added subcl. (III). Former subcl. (III) redesignated (IV).

Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii)(IV). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(2), (5)(B), (D), redesignated former subcl. (III) as (IV) and substituted “(or such other appropriate court) determines that, unless the plan is terminated, such person will be unable to pay all its debts pursuant to a plan of reorganization and will be unable to continue in business outside the chapter 11 reorganization process and approves the termination” for “(or other appropriate court in a case under such similar law of a State or political subdivision) approves the termination”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(C), (D). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(b)(1)(B), redesignated former subpar. (D) as (C) and struck out former subpar. (C) which read as follows: “For purposes of subparagraph (B), the term ‘substantial member’ of a controlled group means a person whose assets comprise 5 percent or more of the total assets of the controlled group as a whole.”

Subsec. (c)(3)(A). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments” in heading and in cl. (ii).

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted in heading and text “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted in heading and text “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(c)(1), struck out former subcl. (I) designation and substituted comma for dash before “the plan administrator”, substituted period for “, and” after “termination of the plan”, and struck out former subcl. (II) which read as follows: “the corporation shall establish a separate trust in connection with the plan for purposes of section 1349 of this title.”

Subsec. (c)(3)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(c)(2), struck out former subcl. (I) designation and substituted comma for dash before “the corporation shall commence”, substituted period for “, and” after “section 1342 of this title”, and struck out former subcl. (II) which read as follows: “the corporation shall establish a separate trust in connection with the plan for purposes of section 1349 of this title unless the corporation determines that all benefit commitments under the plan are benefits guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title.”

Subsec. (c)(3)(C)(i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted in heading and text “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (c)(3)(D)(ii)(IV). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(D), substituted “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 100–203, §9313(a)(2)(E), substituted in text, “no amount of unfunded benefit liabilities” for “no amount of unfunded benefit commitments” and in heading, “benefit liabilities” for “benefit commitments”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11007(a), added subsec. (a) relating to general rules governing single-employer plan terminations and struck out former subsec. (a) relating to filing of notice that the plan is to be terminated.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–272, §§11007(a), 11008(a), added subsec. (b) relating to standard termination of single-employer plans and struck out former subsec. (b) relating to notice of sufficiency of plan assets.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–272, §§11007(a), 11009(a), added subsec. (c) relating to distress termination of single-employer plans and struck out former subsec. (c) relating to a finding and notice of inability to determine that the assets of a plan are sufficient.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–272, §11007(b), amended subsec. (d) generally, substituting provisions relating to sufficiency for benefit commitments and for guaranteed benefits, for provisions relating to an extension of the 90-day period upon written agreement.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–272, §11009(b), redesignated subsec. (f) as (e) and struck out former subsec. (e) which related to notification and appropriate proceedings upon a finding after authorized commencement of termination that the plan is unable to pay basic benefits when due.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–272, §11009(b)(2), redesignated subsec. (f) as (e).

Pub. L. 99–272, §11008(b), amended subsec. (f) generally, substituting provisions relating to limitation on the conversion of a defined benefit plan to a defined contribution plan, for provisions relating to amendment of a plan with respect to which basic benefits are guaranteed.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(d)(2), inserted “single-employer” after “termination of a”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(d)(3), struck out subsec. (g) which related to petition to the appropriate court for appointment of a trustee.

Amendment by section 776(b)(3) of Pub. L. 103–465 effective with respect to distributions that occur in plan years commencing on or after Jan. 1, 1996, see section 776(e) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1056 of this title.

Section 778(a)(2) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendments made by this subsection [amending this section] shall apply to any plan termination under section 4041(b) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [subsec. (b) of this section] with respect to which the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation has not, as of the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994], issued a notice of noncompliance that has become final, or otherwise issued a final determination that the plan termination is nullified.”

Section 778(b)(2) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendment made by this subsection [amending this section] shall be effective as if included in the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986 [Pub. L. 99–272, title XI].”

Amendment by section 7881(f)(7), (g)(1)–(6) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7893(c), (d) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 9312(c)(1), (2) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by section 9313(a)(1)–(2)(E), (b)(1)–(5) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, see section 9313(c) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Section 11019 of title XI of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(a)

“(1) notices of intent to terminate were filed with the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 4041 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1341] before such date, or

“(2) proceedings were commenced under section 4042 of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1342] before such date.

“(b)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) the plan administrator provided notice to the participants in the plan regarding the termination in compliance with applicable regulations of the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation as in effect on the date of the notice, and

“(B) the notice of intent to terminate provided to the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation in connection with the termination was filed with the Corporation not less than 10 days before the proposed date of termination specified in the notice.

For purposes of section 4041 of such Act (as amended by this title), the proposed date of termination specified in the notice of intent to terminate referred to in subparagraph (B) shall be considered the proposed termination date.

“(3)

“(A)

“(i) that the plan administrator wishes the termination to proceed as a standard termination under section 4041(b) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as amended by this title) [29 U.S.C. 1341(b)] in accordance with subparagraph (B),

“(ii) that the plan administrator wishes the termination to proceed as a distress termination under section 4041(c) of such Act (as amended by this title) in accordance with subparagraph (C), or

“(iii) that the plan administrator wishes to stop the termination proceedings in accordance with subparagraph (D).

“(B)

“(i)

“(I)

“(II)

“(ii)

“(C)

“(D)

“(i)

“(ii)

“(E)

“(i) the plan could not otherwise, pursuant to the preceding provisions of this paragraph, terminate in a termination treated as a standard termination under section 4041(b) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as amended by this title), and

“(ii) the extension would result in a greater likelihood that benefit commitments under the plan would be paid in full,

except that any such period may not be so extended beyond one year after the date of the enactment of this Act.

“(c)

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Section 11008(c) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “In the case of a standard termination of a plan under section 4041(b) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as amended by this section) [29 U.S.C. 1341(b)] with respect to which a notice of intent to terminate is filed before 120 days after the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986], the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation may, without the consent of the plan administrator, extend the 60-day period under section 4041(b)(2)(C)(i) of such Act (as so amended) for a period not to exceed 60 days.”

Section 11008(d) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that:

“(1)

“(A) determines that the assets of the plan are sufficient for benefit commitments (within the meaning of section 4041(d)(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as amended by section 11007) [29 U.S.C. 1341(d)(1)]) under the plan, and

“(B) issues to the plan administrator a written notice setting forth the determination described in subparagraph (A).

“(2)

“(A) the plan administrator has filed a notice of intent to terminate with the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation, and—

“(i) the filing was made before January 1, 1986, and the Corporation has not issued a notice of sufficiency for such plan before the date of the enactment of this Act [Apr. 7, 1986], or

“(ii) the filing is made on or after January 1, 1986, and before 60 days after the date of the enactment of this Act and the Corporation has not issued a notice of sufficiency for such plan before the date of the enactment of this Act, and

“(B) of the persons who are (as of the termination date) participants in the plan, the lesser of 10 percent or 200 have filed complaints with the Corporation regarding such termination—

“(i) in the case of plans described in subparagraph (A)(i), before 15 days after the date of the enactment of this Act, or

“(ii) in any other case, before the later of 15 days after the date of the enactment of this Act or 45 days after the date of the filing of such notice.

“(3)

“(4)

“(A)

“(B)

This section is referred to in sections 1303, 1342, 1348, 1350, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1370 of this title; title 26 sections 404, 418, 4972.

1 So in original. Probably should be “benefit liabilities”.

Termination of a multiemployer plan under this section occurs as a result of—

(1) the adoption after September 26, 1980, of a plan amendment which provides that participants will receive no credit for any purpose under the plan for service with any employer after the date specified by such amendment;

(2) the withdrawal of every employer from the plan, within the meaning of section 1383 of this title, or the cessation of the obligation of all employers to contribute under the plan; or

(3) the adoption of an amendment to the plan which causes the plan to become a plan described in section 1321(b)(1) of this title.

(1) The date on which a plan terminates under paragraph (1) or (3) of subsection (a) of this section is the later of—

(A) the date on which the amendment is adopted, or

(B) the date on which the amendment takes effect.

(2) The date on which a plan terminates under paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section is the earlier of—

(A) the date on which the last employer withdraws, or

(B) the first day of the first plan year for which no employer contributions were required under the plan.

Except as provided in subsection (f)(1) of this section, the plan sponsor of a plan which terminates under paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section shall—

(1) limit the payment of benefits to benefits which are nonforfeitable under the plan as of the date of the termination, and

(2) pay benefits attributable to employer contributions, other than death benefits, only in the form of an annuity, unless the plan assets are distributed in full satisfaction of all nonforfeitable benefits under the plan.

The plan sponsor of a plan which terminates under paragraph (2) of subsection (a) of this section shall reduce benefits and suspend benefit payments in accordance with section 1441 of this title.

In the case of a plan which terminates under paragraph (1) or (3) of subsection (a) of this section, the rate of an employer's contributions under the plan for each plan year beginning on or after the plan termination date shall equal or exceed the highest rate of employer contributions at which the employer had an obligation to contribute under the plan in the 5 preceding plan years ending on or before the plan termination date, unless the corporation approves a reduction in the rate based on a finding that the plan is or soon will be fully funded.

(1) The plan sponsor of a terminated plan may authorize the payment other than in the form of an annuity of a participant's entire nonforfeitable benefit attributable to employer contributions, other than a death benefit, if the value of the entire nonforfeitable benefit does not exceed $1,750. The corporation may authorize the payment of benefits under the terms of a terminated plan other than nonforfeitable benefits, or the payment other than in the form of an annuity of benefits having a value greater than $1,750, if the corporation determines that such payment is not adverse to the interest of the plan's participants and beneficiaries generally and does not unreasonably increase the corporation's risk of loss with respect to the plan.

(2) The corporation may prescribe reporting requirements for terminated plans, and rules and standards for the administration of such plans, which the corporation considers appropriate to protect the interests of plan participants and beneficiaries or to prevent unreasonable loss to the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4041A, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §103, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1216.)

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1081, 1322a, 1342, 1348, 1383, 1396, 1412, 1413, 1421, 1441, 1461 of this title; title 26 sections 412, 418.

The corporation may institute proceedings under this section to terminate a plan whenever it determines that—

(1) the plan has not met the minimum funding standard required under section 412 of title 26, or has been notified by the Secretary of the Treasury that a notice of deficiency under section 6212 of title 26 has been mailed with respect to the tax imposed under section 4971(a) of title 26,

(2) the plan will be unable to pay benefits when due,

(3) the reportable event described in section 1343(c)(7) of this title has occurred, or

(4) the possible long-run loss of the corporation with respect to the plan may reasonably be expected to increase unreasonably if the plan is not terminated.

The corporation shall as soon as practicable institute proceedings under this section to terminate a single-employer plan whenever the corporation determines that the plan does not have assets available to pay benefits which are currently due under the terms of the plan. The corporation may prescribe a simplified procedure to follow in terminating small plans as long as that procedure includes substantial safeguards for the rights of the participants and beneficiaries under the plans, and for the employers who maintain such plans (including the requirement for a court decree under subsection (c) of this section). Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, the corporation is authorized to pool assets of terminated plans for purposes of administration, investment, payment of liabilities of all such terminated plans, and such other purposes as it determines to be appropriate in the administration of this subchapter.

(1) Whenever the corporation makes a determination under subsection (a) of this section with respect to a plan or is required under subsection (a) of this section to institute proceedings under this section, it may, upon notice to the plan, apply to the appropriate United States district court for the appointment of a trustee to administer the plan with respect to which the determination is made pending the issuance of a decree under subsection (c) of this section ordering the termination of the plan. If within 3 business days after the filing of an application under this subsection, or such other period as the court may order, the administrator of the plan consents to the appointment of a trustee, or fails to show why a trustee should not be appointed, the court may grant the application and appoint a trustee to administer the plan in accordance with its terms until the corporation determines that the plan should be terminated or that termination is unnecessary. The corporation may request that it be appointed as trustee of a plan in any case.

(2) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter—

(A) upon the petition of a plan administrator or the corporation, the appropriate United States district court may appoint a trustee in accordance with the provisions of this section if the interests of the plan participants would be better served by the appointment of the trustee, and

(B) upon the petition of the corporation, the appropriate United States district court shall appoint a trustee proposed by the corporation for a multiemployer plan which is in reorganization or to which section 1341a(d) of this title applies, unless such appointment would be adverse to the interests of the plan participants and beneficiaries in the aggregate.

(3) The corporation and plan administrator may agree to the appointment of a trustee without proceeding in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (1) and (2).

If the corporation is required under subsection (a) of this section to commence proceedings under this section with respect to a plan or, after issuing a notice under this section to a plan administrator, has determined that the plan should be terminated, it may, upon notice to the plan administrator, apply to the appropriate United States district court for a decree adjudicating that the plan must be terminated in order to protect the interests of the participants or to avoid any unreasonable deterioration of the financial condition of the plan or any unreasonable increase in the liability of the fund. If the trustee appointed under subsection (b) of this section disagrees with the determination of the corporation under the preceding sentence he may intervene in the proceeding relating to the application for the decree, or make application for such decree himself. Upon granting a decree for which the corporation or trustee has applied under this subsection the court shall authorize the trustee appointed under subsection (b) of this section (or appoint a trustee if one has not been appointed under such subsection and authorize him) to terminate the plan in accordance with the provisions of this subtitle. If the corporation and the plan administrator agree that a plan should be terminated and agree to the appointment of a trustee without proceeding in accordance with the requirements of this subsection (other than this sentence) the trustee shall have the power described in subsection (d)(1) of this section and, in addition to any other duties imposed on the trustee under law or by agreement between the corporation and the plan administrator, the trustee is subject to the duties described in subsection (d)(3) of this section. Whenever a trustee appointed under this subchapter is operating a plan with discretion as to the date upon which final distribution of the assets is to be commenced, the trustee shall notify the corporation at least 10 days before the date on which he proposes to commence such distribution.

(3) 1 In the case of a proceeding initiated under this section, the plan administrator shall provide the corporation, upon the request of the corporation, the information described in clauses (ii), (iii), and (iv) of section 1341(c)(2)(A) of this title.

(1)(A) A trustee appointed under subsection (b) of this section shall have the power—

(i) to do any act authorized by the plan or this subchapter to be done by the plan administrator or any trustee of the plan;

(ii) to require the transfer of all (or any part) of the assets and records of the plan to himself as trustee;

(iii) to invest any assets of the plan which he holds in accordance with the provisions of the plan, regulations of the corporation, and applicable rules of law;

(iv) to limit payment of benefits under the plan to basic benefits or to continue payment of some or all of the benefits which were being paid prior to his appointment;

(v) in the case of a multiemployer plan, to reduce benefits or suspend benefit payments under the plan, give appropriate notices, amend the plan, and perform other acts required or authorized by subtitle (E) of this subchapter to be performed by the plan sponsor or administrator;

(vi) to do such other acts as he deems necessary to continue operation of the plan without increasing the potential liability of the corporation, if such acts may be done under the provisions of the plan; and

(vii) to require the plan sponsor, the plan administrator, any contributing or withdrawn employer, and any employee organization representing plan participants to furnish any information with respect to the plan which the trustee may reasonably need in order to administer the plan.

If the court to which application is made under subsection (c) of this section dismisses the application with prejudice, or if the corporation fails to apply for a decree under subsection (c) of this section, within 30 days after the date on which the trustee is appointed under subsection (b) of this section, the trustee shall transfer all assets and records of the plan held by him to the plan administrator within 3 business days after such dismissal or the expiration of such 30-day period, and shall not be liable to the plan or any other person for his acts as trustee except for willful misconduct, or for conduct in violation of the provisions of part 4 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter (except as provided in subsection (d)(1)(A)(v) of this section). The 30-day period referred to in this subparagraph may be extended as provided by agreement between the plan administrator and the corporation or by court order obtained by the corporation.

(B) If the court to which an application is made under subsection (c) of this section issues the decree requested in such application, in addition to the powers described in subparagraph (A), the trustee shall have the power—

(i) to pay benefits under the plan in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter;

(ii) to collect for the plan any amounts due the plan, including but not limited to the power to collect from the persons obligated to meet the requirements of section 1082 of this title or the terms of the plan;

(iii) to receive any payment made by the corporation to the plan under this subchapter;

(iv) to commence, prosecute, or defend on behalf of the plan any suit or proceeding involving the plan;

(v) to issue, publish, or file such notices, statements, and reports as may be required by the corporation or any order of the court;

(vi) to liquidate the plan assets;

(vii) to recover payments under section 1345(a) of this title; and

(viii) to do such other acts as may be necessary to comply with this subchapter or any order of the court and to protect the interests of plan participants and beneficiaries.

(2) As soon as practicable after his appointment, the trustee shall give notice to interested parties of the institution of proceedings under this subchapter to determine whether the plan should be terminated or to terminate the plan, whichever is applicable. For purposes of this paragraph, the term “interested party” means—

(A) the plan administrator,

(B) each participant in the plan and each beneficiary of a deceased participant,

(C) each employer who may be subject to liability under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title,

(D) each employer who is or may be liable to the plan under section 2 part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter,

(E) each employer who has an obligation to contribute, within the meaning of section 1392(a) of this title, under a multiemployer plan, and

(F) each employee organization which, for purposes of collective bargaining, represents plan participants employed by an employer described in subparagraph (C), (D), or (E).

(3) Except to the extent inconsistent with the provisions of this chapter, or as may be otherwise ordered by the court, a trustee appointed under this section shall be subject to the same duties as those of a trustee under section 704 of title 11, and shall be, with respect to the plan, a fiduciary within the meaning of paragraph (21) of section 1002 of this title and under section 4975(e) of title 26 (except to the extent that the provisions of this subchapter are inconsistent with the requirements applicable under part 4 of subtitle B of subchapter I of this chapter and of such section 4975).

An application by the corporation under this section may be filed notwithstanding the pendency in the same or any other court of any bankruptcy, mortgage foreclosure, or equity receivership proceeding, or any proceeding to reorganize, conserve, or liquidate such plan or its property, or any proceeding to enforce a lien against property of the plan.

Upon the filing of an application for the appointment of a trustee or the issuance of a decree under this section, the court to which an application is made shall have exclusive jurisdiction of the plan involved and its property wherever located with the powers, to the extent consistent with the purposes of this section, of a court of the United States having jurisdiction over cases under chapter 11 of title 11. Pending an adjudication under subsection (c) of this section such court shall stay, and upon appointment by it of a trustee, as provided in this section such court shall continue the stay of, any pending mortgage foreclosure, equity receivership, or other proceeding to reorganize, conserve, or liquidate the plan or its property and any other suit against any receiver, conservator, or trustee of the plan or its property. Pending such adjudication and upon the appointment by it of such trustee, the court may stay any proceeding to enforce a lien against property of the plan or any other suit against the plan.

An action under this subsection may be brought in the judicial district where the plan administrator resides or does business or where any asset of the plan is situated. A district court in which such action is brought may issue process with respect to such action in any other judicial district.

(1) The amount of compensation paid to each trustee appointed under the provisions of this subchapter shall require the prior approval of the corporation, and, in the case of a trustee appointed by a court, the consent of that court.

(2) Trustees shall appoint, retain, and compensate accountants, actuaries, and other professional service personnel in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4042, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1021; Pub. L. 95–598, title III, §321(a), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2678; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(6), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1298; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §§11010, 11016(c)(10), (11), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 253, 274; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §§9312(c)(3), 9314(b), 9314(b), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–363, 1330–366, 1330–367; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(g)(7), 7891(a)(1), 7893(e), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2441, 2445, 2447; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §771(e)(2), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5043.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (d)(3), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–465 substituted “1343(c)(7)” for “1343(b)(7)”.

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(e), inserted period after “terms of the plan” at end of second sentence.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(7), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(b), see 1987 Amendment note below.

Subsecs. (a)(1), (d)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(b), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(7), amended last sentence generally. Prior to amendment, last sentence read as follows: “The corporation is authorized to pool the assets of terminated plans for purposes of administration and such other purposes, not inconsistent with its duties to the plan participants and the employer maintaining the plan under this subchapter, as it determines to be required for the efficient administration of this subchapter.” Another section 9314(b) of Pub. L. 100–203 amended subsec. (c) of this section, see below.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(b), added par. (3). Another section 9314(b) of Pub. L. 100–203 amended subsec. (a) of this section, see above.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(c)(3), struck out subsec. (i) which read as follows: “In any case in which a plan is terminated under this section in a termination proceeding initiated by the corporation pursuant to subsection (a) of this section, the corporation shall establish a separate trust in connection with the plan for purposes of section 1349 of this title, unless the corporation determines that all benefit commitments under the plan are benefits guaranteed by the corporation under section 1322 of this title or that there is no amount of unfunded benefit commitments under the plan.”

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(c), substituted “Institution of termination proceedings by the corporation” for “Termination by corporation” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(a)(1)(B), in provision following par. (4) inserted provision that the corporation as soon as practicable institute proceedings under this section to terminate a single-employer plan whenever the corporation determines that the plan does not have assets available to pay benefits currently due under the terms of the plan.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(a)(1)(A), substituted “will be” for “is”.

Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(a)(2)(A), inserted “or is required under subsection (a) of this section to institute proceedings under this section,”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(a)(2)(B), substituted “is required under subsection (a) of this section to commence proceedings under this section with respect to a plan or, after issuing a notice under this section to a plan administrator,” for “has issued a notice under this section to a plan administrator and (whether or not a trustee has been appointed under subsection (b) of this section)”.

Subsec. (d)(1)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(10), inserted “, including but not limited to the power to collect from the persons obligated to meet the requirements of section 1082 of this title or the terms of the plan”.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(11), substituted “those of a trustee under section 704 of title 11” for “a trustee appointed under section 75 of title 11”.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 99–272, §11010(b), added subsec. (i).

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(A), substituted “terminated plans” for “such small plans”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(B), redesignated existing provisions as par. (1) and added pars. (2) and (3).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(C), (D), substituted “unreasonable” for “further” wherever appearing, and “of the participants or” for “of the participants and”.

Subsec. (d)(1)(A). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(E), added cls. (v) and (vii) and redesignated former cl. (v) as (vi).

Subsec. (d)(1)(B). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(F), (G), in cl. (i) substituted “requirements of this subchapter” for “allocation requirements of section 1344 of this title”, and in cl. (iv) struck out exception respecting adverse party status of corporation.

Subsec. (d)(2)(D) to (F). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(6)(H)–(J), added subpars. (D) to (F).

1978—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 95–598 substituted “of a court of the United States having jurisdiction over cases under chapter 11 of title 11” for “of a court of bankruptcy and of a court in a proceeding under chapter X of the Bankruptcy Act” in first sentence and struck out “bankruptcy,” before “mortgage foreclosure” in second sentence.

Section 771(f) of Pub. L. 103–465 provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section and section 1343 of this title] shall be effective for events occurring 60 days or more after the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 8, 1994].”

Amendment by section 7881(g)(7) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7893(e) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 9312(c)(3) of Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under this section after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–598 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 402(a) of Pub. L. 95–598, set out as an Effective Date note preceding section 101 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

This section is referred to in sections 1103, 1104, 1303, 1305, 1307, 1341, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1350, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1370, 1413 of this title.

1 So in original. No pars. (1) and (2) have been designated.

Within 30 days after the plan administrator or the contributing sponsor knows or has reason to know that a reportable event described in subsection (c) of this section has occurred, he shall notify the corporation that such event has occurred, unless a notice otherwise required under this subsection has already been provided with respect to such event. The corporation is authorized to waive the requirement of the preceding sentence with respect to any or all reportable events with respect to any plan, and to require the notification to be made by including the event in the annual report made by the plan.

(1) The requirements of this subsection shall be applicable to a contributing sponsor if, as of the close of the preceding plan year—

(A) the aggregate unfunded vested benefits (as determined under section 1306(a)(3)(E)(iii) of this title) of plans subject to this subchapter which are maintained by such sponsor and members of such sponsor's controlled groups (disregarding plans with no unfunded vested benefits) exceed $50,000,000, and

(B) the funded vested benefit percentage for such plans is less than 90 percent.

For purposes of subparagraph (B), the funded vested benefit percentage means the percentage which the aggregate value of the assets of such plans bears to the aggregate vested benefits of such plans (determined in accordance with section 1306(a)(3)(E)(iii) of this title).

(2) This subsection shall not apply to an event if the contributing sponsor, or the member of the contributing sponsor's controlled group to which the event relates, is—

(A) a person subject to the reporting requirements of section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 [15 U.S.C. 78m, 78*o*(d)], or

(B) a subsidiary (as defined for purposes of such Act [15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.]) of a person subject to such reporting requirements.

(3) No later than 30 days prior to the effective date of an event described in paragraph (9), (10), (11), (12), or (13) of subsection (c) of this section, a contributing sponsor to which the requirements of this subsection apply shall notify the corporation that the event is about to occur.

(4) The corporation may waive the requirement of this subsection with respect to any or all reportable events with respect to any contributing sponsor.

For purposes of this section a reportable event occurs—

(1) when the Secretary of the Treasury issues notice that a plan has ceased to be a plan described in section 1321(a)(2) of this title, or when the Secretary of Labor determines the plan is not in compliance with subchapter I of this chapter;

(2) when an amendment of the plan is adopted if, under the amendment, the benefit payable with respect to any participant may be decreased;

(3) when the number of active participants is less than 80 percent of the number of such participants at the beginning of the plan year, or is less than 75 percent of the number of such participants at the beginning of the previous plan year;

(4) when the Secretary of the Treasury determines that there has been a termination or partial termination of the plan within the meaning of section 411(d)(3) of title 26, but the occurrence of such a termination or partial termination does not, by itself, constitute or require a termination of a plan under this subchapter;

(5) when the plan fails to meet the minimum funding standards under section 412 of title 26 (without regard to whether the plan is a plan described in section 1321(a)(2) of this title) or under section 1082 of this title;

(6) when the plan is unable to pay benefits thereunder when due;

(7) when there is a distribution under the plan to a participant who is a substantial owner as defined in section 1322(b)(6) 1 of this title if—

(A) such distribution has a value of $10,000 or more;

(B) such distribution is not made by reason of the death of the participant; and

(C) immediately after the distribution, the plan has nonforfeitable benefits which are not funded;

(8) when a plan merges, consolidates, or transfers its assets under section 1058 of this title, or when an alternative method of compliance is prescribed by the Secretary of Labor under section 1030 of this title;

(9) when, as a result of an event, a person ceases to be a member of the controlled group;

(10) when a contributing sponsor or a member of a contributing sponsor's controlled group liquidates in a case under title 11, or under any similar Federal law or law of a State or political subdivision of a State;

(11) when a contributing sponsor or a member of a contributing sponsor's controlled group declares an extraordinary dividend (as defined in section 1059(c) of title 26) or redeems, in any 12-month period, an aggregate of 10 percent or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote, or an aggregate of 10 percent or more of the total value of shares of all classes of stock, of a contributing sponsor and all members of its controlled group;

(12) when, in any 12-month period, an aggregate of 3 percent or more of the benefit liabilities of a plan covered by this subchapter and maintained by a contributing sponsor or a member of its controlled group are transferred to a person that is not a member of the controlled group or to a plan or plans maintained by a person or persons that are not such a contributing sponsor or a member of its controlled group; or

(13) when any other event occurs that may be indicative of a need to terminate the plan and that is prescribed by the corporation in regulations.

For purposes of paragraph (7), all distributions to a participant within any 24-month period are treated as a single distribution.

The Secretary of the Treasury shall notify the corporation—

(1) whenever a reportable event described in paragraph (1), (4), or (5) of subsection (c) of this section occurs, or

(2) whenever any other event occurs which the Secretary of the Treasury believes indicates that the plan may not be sound.

The Secretary of Labor shall notify the corporation—

(1) whenever a reportable event described in paragraph (1), (5), or (8) of subsection (c) of this section occurs, or

(2) whenever any other event occurs which the Secretary of Labor believes indicates that the plan may not be sound.

Any information or documentary material submitted to the corporation pursuant to this section shall be exempt from disclosure under section 552 of title 5, and no such information or documentary material may be made public, except as may be relevant to any administrative or judicial action or proceeding. Nothing in this section is intended to prevent disclosure to either body of Congress or to any duly authorized committee or subcommittee of the Congress.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4043, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1024; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445; Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §771(a)–(e)(1), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5042, 5043.)

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), is act June 6, 1934, ch. 404, 48 Stat. 881, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 2B (§78a et seq.) of Title 15, Commerce and Trade. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 78a of Title 15 and Tables.

Paragraph (6) of section 1322(b) of this title, referred to in subsec. (c)(7), was redesignated as par. (5) by Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(c)(4), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(a), (e)(1), in first sentence, inserted “or the contributing sponsor” after “administrator”, substituted “subsection (c)” for “subsection (b)”, and inserted before period at end “, unless a notice otherwise required under this subsection has already been provided with respect to such event”, and struck out last sentence which read as follows: “Whenever an employer making contributions under a plan to which section 1321 of this title applies knows or has reason to know that a reportable event has occurred he shall notify the plan administrator immediately.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(b), added subsec. (b). Former subsec. (b) redesignated (c).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(b), redesignated subsec. (b) as (c). Former subsec. (c) redesignated (d).

Subsec. (c)(8) to (13). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(c), struck out “or” at end of par. (8), added pars. (9) to (13), and struck out former par. (9) which read as follows: “when any other event occurs which the corporation determines may be indicative of a need to terminate the plan.”.

Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(b), (e)(1), redesignated subsecs. (c) and (d) as (d) and (e), respectively, and substituted “subsection (c)” for “subsection (b)” in par. (1) of each subsec.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–465, §771(d), added subsec. (f).

1989—Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 103–465 effective for events occurring 60 days or more after Dec. 8, 1994, see section 771(f) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as a note under section 1342 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1342, 1345, 1365 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

In the case of the termination of a single-employer plan, the plan administrator shall allocate the assets of the plan (available to provide benefits) among the participants and beneficiaries of the plan in the following order:

(1) First, to that portion of each individual's accrued benefit which is derived from the participant's contributions to the plan which were not mandatory contributions.

(2) Second, to that portion of each individual's accrued benefit which is derived from the participant's mandatory contributions.

(3) Third, in the case of benefits payable as an annuity—

(A) in the case of the benefit of a participant or beneficiary which was in pay status as of the beginning of the 3-year period ending on the termination date of the plan, to each such benefit, based on the provisions of the plan (as in effect during the 5-year period ending on such date) under which such benefit would be the least,

(B) in the case of a participant's or beneficiary's benefit (other than a benefit described in subparagraph (A)) which would have been in pay status as of the beginning of such 3-year period if the participant had retired prior to the beginning of the 3-year period and if his benefits had commenced (in the normal form of annuity under the plan) as of the beginning of such period, to each such benefit based on the provisions of the plan (as in effect during the 5-year period ending on such date) under which such benefit would be the least.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the lowest benefit in pay status during a 3-year period shall be considered the benefit in pay status for such period.

(4) Fourth—

(A) to all other benefits (if any) of individuals under the plan guaranteed under this subchapter (determined without regard to section 1322b(a) of this title), and

(B) to the additional benefits (if any) which would be determined under subparagraph (A) if section 1322(b)(5) of this title did not apply.

For purposes of this paragraph, section 1321 of this title shall be applied without regard to subsection (c) thereof.

(5) Fifth, to all other nonforfeitable benefits under the plan.

(6) Sixth, to all other benefits under the plan.

For purposes of subsection (a) of this section—

(1) The amount allocated under any paragraph of subsection (a) of this section with respect to any benefit shall be properly adjusted for any allocation of assets with respect to that benefit under a prior paragraph of subsection (a) of this section.

(2) If the assets available for allocation under any paragraph of subsection (a) of this section (other than paragraphs (5) and (6)) are insufficient to satisfy in full the benefits of all individuals which are described in that paragraph, the assets shall be allocated pro rata among such individuals on the basis of the present value (as of the termination date) of their respective benefits described in that paragraph.

(3) This paragraph applies if the assets available for allocation under paragraph (5) of subsection (a) of this section are not sufficient to satisfy in full the benefits of individuals described in that paragraph.

(A) If this paragraph applies, except as provided in subparagraph (B), the assets shall be allocated to the benefits of individuals described in such paragraph (5) on the basis of the benefits of individuals which would have been described in such paragraph (5) under the plan as in effect at the beginning of the 5-year period ending on the date of plan termination.

(B) If the assets available for allocation under subparagraph (A) are sufficient to satisfy in full the benefits described in such subparagraph (without regard to this subparagraph), then for purposes of subparagraph (A), benefits of individuals described in such subparagraph shall be determined on the basis of the plan as amended by the most recent plan amendment effective during such 5-year period under which the assets available for allocation are sufficient to satisfy in full the benefits of individuals described in subparagraph (A) and any assets remaining to be allocated under such subparagraph shall be allocated under subparagraph (A) on the basis of the plan as amended by the next succeeding plan amendment effective during such period.

(4) If the Secretary of the Treasury determines that the allocation made pursuant to this section (without regard to this paragraph) results in discrimination prohibited by section 401(a)(4) of title 26 then, if required to prevent the disqualification of the plan (or any trust under the plan) under section 401(a) or 403(a) of title 26, the assets allocated under subsections (a)(4)(B), (a)(5), and (a)(6) of this section shall be reallocated to the extent necessary to avoid such discrimination.

(5) The term “mandatory contributions” means amounts contributed to the plan by a participant which are required as a condition of employment, as a condition of participation in such plan, or as a condition of obtaining benefits under the plan attributable to employer contributions. For this purpose, the total amount of mandatory contributions of a participant is the amount of such contributions reduced (but not below zero) by the sum of the amounts paid or distributed to him under the plan before its termination.

(6) A plan may establish subclasses and categories within the classes described in paragraphs (1) through (6) of subsection (a) of this section in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

Any increase or decrease in the value of the assets of a single-employer plan occurring during the period beginning on the later of (1) the date a trustee is appointed under section 1342(b) of this title or (2) the date on which the plan is terminated is to be allocated between the plan and the corporation in the manner determined by the court (in the case of a court-appointed trustee) or as agreed upon by the corporation and the plan administrator in any other case. Any increase or decrease in the value of the assets of a single-employer plan occurring after the date on which the plan is terminated shall be credited to, or suffered by, the corporation.

(1) Subject to paragraph (3), any residual assets of a single-employer plan may be distributed to the employer if—

(A) all liabilities of the plan to participants and their beneficiaries have been satisfied,

(B) the distribution does not contravene any provision of law, and

(C) the plan provides for such a distribution in these circumstances.

(2)(A) In determining the extent to which a plan provides for the distribution of plan assets to the employer for purposes of paragraph (1)(C), any such provision, and any amendment increasing the amount which may be distributed to the employer, shall not be treated as effective before the end of the fifth calendar year following the date of the adoption of such provision or amendment.

(B) A distribution to the employer from a plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the requirements of this paragraph if the plan has been in effect for fewer than 5 years and the plan has provided for such a distribution since the effective date of the plan.

(C) Except as otherwise provided in regulations of the Secretary of the Treasury, in any case in which a transaction described in section 1058 of this title occurs, subparagraph (A) shall continue to apply separately with respect to the amount of any assets transferred in such transaction.

(D) For purposes of this subsection, the term “employer” includes any member of the controlled group of which the employer is a member. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the term “controlled group” means any group treated as a single employer under subsection (b), (c), (m) or (*o*) of section 414 of title 26.

(3)(A) Before any distribution from a plan pursuant to paragraph (1), if any assets of the plan attributable to employee contributions remain after satisfaction of all liabilities described in subsection (a) of this section, such remaining assets shall be equitably distributed to the participants who made such contributions or their beneficiaries (including alternate payees, within the meaning of section 1056(d)(3)(K) of this title).

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), the portion of the remaining assets which are attributable to employee contributions shall be an amount equal to the product derived by multiplying—

(i) the market value of the total remaining assets, by

(ii) a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the present value of all portions of the accrued benefits with respect to participants which are derived from participants’ mandatory contributions (referred to in subsection (a)(2) of this section), and

(II) the denominator of which is the present value of all benefits with respect to which assets are allocated under paragraphs (2) through (6) of subsection (a) of this section.

(C) For purposes of this paragraph, each person who is, as of the termination date—

(i) a participant under the plan, or

(ii) an individual who has received, during the 3-year period ending with the termination date, a distribution from the plan of such individual's entire nonforfeitable benefit in the form of a single sum distribution in accordance with section 1053(e) of this title or in the form of irrevocable commitments purchased by the plan from an insurer to provide such nonforfeitable benefit,

shall be treated as a participant with respect to the termination, if all or part of the nonforfeitable benefit with respect to such person is or was attributable to participants’ mandatory contributions (referred to in subsection (a)(2) of this section).

(4) Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to limit the requirements of section 4980(d) of title 26 (as in effect immediately after the enactment of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1990) or section 1104(d) of this title with respect to any distribution of residual assets of a single-employer plan to the employer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4044, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1025; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(7), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1299; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(c)(12), (13), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 274; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9311(a)(1), (b), (c), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–359, 1330–360; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(e)(3), 7891(a)(1), 7894(g)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, 2445, 2451; Pub. L. 101–508, title XII, §12002(b)(2)(B), Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1388–566.)

The enactment of the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (d)(4), is the enactment of Pub. L. 101–508, which was approved Nov. 5, 1990.

1990—Subsec. (d)(4). Pub. L. 101–508 added par. (4).

1989—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(2), substituted “accrued” for “accured”.

Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(e)(3), made technical correction to directory language of Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(b)(2), see 1987 Amendment note below.

1987—Subsec. (b)(4). Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(c), struck out reference to section 405(a) of title 26.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(b)(1), substituted “Subject to paragraph (3), any” for “Any”.

Subsec. (d)(2). Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(a)(1)(B), added par. (2). Former par. (2) redesignated (3).

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(b)(2), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(e)(3), added par. (3), and struck out former par. (3) which read as follows: “Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (1), if any assets of the plan attributable to employee contributions, remain after all liabilities of the plan to participants and their beneficiaries have been satisfied, such assets shall be equitably distributed to the employees who made such contributions (or their beneficiaries) in accordance with their rate of contributions.”

Pub. L. 100–203, §9311(a)(1)(A), redesignated former par. (2) as (3).

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(12), in provision preceding par. (1) struck out “defined benefit” after “single-employer”.

Subsec. (a)(4)(A). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(13)(A), substituted “section 1322b(a)” for “section 1322(b)(5)”.

Subsec. (a)(4)(B). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(c)(13)(B), substituted “section 1322(b)(5)” for “section 1322(b)(6)”.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(7)(A), inserted “single-employer” before “defined benefit”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(7)(B), inserted “single-employer” before “plan occurring” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(7)(C), inserted “single-employer” after “assets of a”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–508 applicable to reversions occurring after Sept. 30, 1990, but not applicable to any reversion after Sept. 30, 1990, if (1) in the case of plans subject to subchapter III of this chapter, notice of intent to terminate under such subchapter was provided to participants (or if no participants, to Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation) before Oct. 1, 1990, (2) in the case of plans subject to subchapter I of this chapter (and not subchapter III), notice of intent to reduce future accruals under section 1054(h) of this title was provided to participants in connection with termination before Oct. 1, 1990, (3) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter, a request for a determination letter with respect to termination was filed with Secretary of the Treasury or Secretary's delegate before Oct. 1, 1990, or (4) in the case of plans not subject to subchapter I or III of this chapter and having only one participant, a resolution terminating the plan was adopted by employer before Oct. 1, 1990, see section 12003 of Pub. L. 101–508, set out as a note under section 4980 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7881(e)(3) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by section 7894(g)(2) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if originally included in the provision of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, Pub. L. 93–406, to which such amendment relates, see section 7894(i) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 9311(d) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(e)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2439, provided that: “The amendments made by this section [amending this section] shall apply with respect to—

“(1) plan terminations under section 4041 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1341] with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 4041(a)(2) of ERISA after December 17, 1987, and

“(2) plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 4042 of ERISA [29 U.S.C. 1342] after December 17, 1987.

Except as provided in subsection (a)(2) [set out below], the amendments made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall apply to any provision of the plan or plan amendment adopted after December 17, 1987.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Section 9311(a)(2) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(e)(1), (4), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2439, 2440, provided that: “The amendments made by paragraph (1) [amending this section] shall apply, in the case of plans which, as of December 17, 1987, have no provision relating to the distribution of residual plan assets upon termination, only with respect to plan amendments providing for the distribution of plan assets to the employer which are adopted after December 17, 1988.”

For special temporary rule relating to requirements to be met before the final distribution of assets in the case of the termination of certain single-employer plans with respect to which the amount payable to the employer pursuant to subsec. (d) of this section exceeds $1,000,000, see section 11008(d) of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1103, 1104, 1108, 1301, 1305, 1322, 1341, 1346 of this title; title 26 section 4975.

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, the trustee is authorized to recover for the benefit of a plan from a participant the recoverable amount (as defined in subsection (b) of this section) of all payments from the plan to him which commenced within the 3-year period immediately preceding the time the plan is terminated.

For purposes of subsection (a) of this section the recoverable amount is the excess of the amount determined under paragraph (1) over the amount determined under paragraph (2).

(1) The amount determined under this paragraph is the sum of the amount of the actual payments received by the participant within the 3-year period.

(2) The amount determined under this paragraph is the sum of—

(A) the sum of the amount such participant would have received during each consecutive 12-month period within the 3 years if the participant received the benefit in the form described in paragraph (3),

(B) the sum for each of the consecutive 12-month periods of the lesser of—

(i) the excess, if any, of $10,000 over the benefit in the form described in paragraph (3), or

(ii) the excess of the actual payment, if any, over the benefit in the form described in paragraph (3), and

(C) the present value at the time of termination of the participant's future benefits guaranteed under this subchapter as if the benefits commenced in the form described in paragraph (3).

(3) The form of benefit for purposes of this subsection shall be the monthly benefit the participant would have received during the consecutive 12-month period, if he had elected at the time of the first payment made during the 3-year period, to receive his interest in the plan as a monthly benefit in the form of a life annuity commencing at the time of such first payment.

(1) In the event of a distribution described in section 1343(b)(7) 1 of this title the 3-year period referred to in subsection (b) of this section shall not end sooner than the date on which the corporation is notified of the distribution.

(2) The trustee shall not recover any payment made from a plan after or on account of the death of a participant, or to a participant who is disabled (within the meaning of section 72(m)(7) of title 26).

(3) The corporation is authorized to waive, in whole or in part, the recovery of any amount which the trustee is authorized to recover for the benefit of a plan under this section in any case in which it determines that substantial economic hardship would result to the participant or his beneficiaries from whom such amount is recoverable.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4045, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1027; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

Section 1343(b)(7) of this title, referred to in subsec. (c)(1), was redesignated section 1343(c)(7) of this title by Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §771(b), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5042.

1989—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1342 of this title; title 26 section 6511.

1 See References in Text note below.

The corporation and the plan administrator of any plan to be terminated under this subtitle shall furnish to the trustee such information as the corporation or the plan administrator has and, to the extent practicable, can obtain regarding—

(1) the amount of benefits payable with respect to each participant under a plan to be terminated,

(2) the amount of basic benefits guaranteed under section 1322 or 1322a of this title which are payable with respect to each participant in the plan,

(3) the present value, as of the time of termination, of the aggregate amount of basic benefits payable under section 1322 or 1322a of this title (determined without regard to section 1322b of this title),

(4) the fair market value of the assets of the plan at the time of termination,

(5) the computations under section 1344 of this title, and all actuarial assumptions under which the items described in paragraphs (1) through (4) were computed, and

(6) any other information with respect to the plan the trustee may require in order to terminate the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4046, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1028; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(e), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301.)

1980—Par. (2). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(e)(1), inserted “basic” before “benefits” and “or 1322a” after “1322”.

Par. (3). Pub. L. 96–364, §403(e), inserted “basic” before “benefits” and “or 1322a” after “1322”, and substituted “1322b” for “1322(b)(5)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Whenever the corporation determines that a plan which is to be terminated under section 1341 or 1342 of this title, or which is in the process of being terminated under section 1341 or 1342 of this title, should not be terminated under section 1341 or 1342 of this title as a result of such circumstances as the corporation determines to be relevant, the corporation is authorized to cease any activities undertaken to terminate the plan, and to take whatever action is necessary and within its power to restore the plan to its status prior to the determination that the plan was to be terminated under section 1341 or 1342 of this title. In the case of a plan which has been terminated under section 1341 or 1342 of this title the corporation is authorized in any such case in which the corporation determines such action to be appropriate and consistent with its duties under this subchapter, to take such action as may be necessary to restore the plan to its pretermination status, including, but not limited to, the transfer to the employer or a plan administrator of control of part or all of the remaining assets and liabilities of the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4047, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1028; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(3), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 268; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7893(g)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2447.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239 struck out “under this subtitle” before “should not be terminated”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–272 inserted “under section 1341 or 1342 of this title” after “terminated” in four places and substituted “section 1341 or 1342 of this title the corporation” for “section 1342 of this title the corporation”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

(a) For purposes of this subchapter the termination date of a single-employer plan is—

(1) in the case of a plan terminated in a standard termination in accordance with the provisions of section 1341(b) of this title, the termination date proposed in the notice provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title,

(2) in the case of a plan terminated in a distress termination in accordance with the provisions of section 1341(c) of this title, the date established by the plan administrator and agreed to by the corporation,

(3) in the case of a plan terminated in accordance with the provisions of section 1342 of this title, the date established by the corporation and agreed to by the plan administrator, or

(4) in the case of a plan terminated under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title in any case in which no agreement is reached between the plan administrator and the corporation (or the trustee), the date established by the court.

(b) For purposes of this subchapter, the date of termination of a multiemployer plan is—

(1) in the case of a plan terminated in accordance with the provisions of section 1341a of this title, the date determined under subsection (b) of that section; or

(2) in the case of a plan terminated in accordance with the provisions of section 1342 of this title the date agreed to between the plan administrator and the corporation (or the trustee appointed under section 1342(b)(2) of this title, if any), or, if no agreement is reached, the date established by the court.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4048, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1028; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §402(a)(8), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1299; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(4), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 268.)

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272 in provisions preceding par. (1) substituted “termination date” for “date of termination”, redesignated pars. (1) to (3) as (2) to (4), respectively, added par. (1), in par. (2), as so redesignated, inserted “in a distress termination” after “terminated” and substituted “section 1341(c)” for “section 1341”, and in par. (4), as so redesignated, substituted “under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title” for “in accordance with the provisions of either section”.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(8)(A), (B), designated existing provisions as subsec. (a), and inserted applicability to a single-employer plan.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 96–364, §402(a)(8)(C), added subsec. (b).

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1461 of this title; title 26 section 411.

Section, Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4049, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11012(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 258; amended Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1879(u)(2), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2913; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(d)(2), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–364, related to distribution of liability payments to participants and beneficiaries.

Repeal applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as an Effective Date of 1987 Amendment note under section 1301 of this title.

A plan administrator satisfies section 1341(b)(3)(A) of this title in the case of a missing participant only if the plan administrator—

(A) transfers the participant's designated benefit to the corporation or purchases an irrevocable commitment from an insurer in accordance with clause (i) of section 1341(b)(3)(A) of this title, and

(B) provides the corporation such information and certifications with respect to such designated benefits or irrevocable commitments as the corporation shall specify.

A transfer to the corporation under this section shall be treated as a transfer of assets from a terminated plan to the corporation as trustee, and shall be held with assets of terminated plans for which the corporation is trustee under section 1342 of this title, subject to the rules set forth in that section.

After a missing participant whose designated benefit was transferred to the corporation is located—

(A) in any case in which the plan could have distributed the benefit of the missing participant in a single sum without participant or spousal consent under section 1055(g) of this title, the corporation shall pay the participant or beneficiary a single sum benefit equal to the designated benefit paid the corporation plus interest as specified by the corporation, and

(B) in any other case, the corporation shall pay a benefit based on the designated benefit and the assumptions prescribed by the corporation at the time that the corporation received the designated benefit.

The corporation shall make payments under subparagraph (B) available in the same forms and at the same times as a guaranteed benefit under section 1322 of this title would be available to be paid, except that the corporation may make a benefit available in the form of a single sum if the plan provided a single sum benefit (other than a single sum described in subsection (b)(2)(A) of this section).

For purposes of this section—

The term “missing participant” means a participant or beneficiary under a terminating plan whom the plan administrator cannot locate after a diligent search.

The term “designated benefit” means the single sum benefit the participant would receive—

(A) under the plan's assumptions, in the case of a distribution that can be made without participant or spousal consent under section 1055(g) of this title;

(B) under the assumptions of the corporation in effect on the date that the designated benefit is transferred to the corporation, in the case of a plan that does not pay any single sums other than those described in subparagraph (A); or

(C) under the assumptions of the corporation or of the plan, whichever provides the higher single sum, in the case of a plan that pays a single sum other than those described in subparagraph (A).

The corporation shall prescribe such regulations as are necessary to carry out the purposes of this section, including rules relating to what will be considered a diligent search, the amount payable to the corporation, and the amount to be paid by the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4050, as added Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §776(a), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5047.)

Section effective with respect to distributions that occur in plan years commencing on or after Jan. 1, 1996, see section 776(e) of Pub. L. 103–465, set out as an Effective Date of 1994 Amendment note under section 1056 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1056, 1303, 1305, 1341 of this title; title 26 section 401.

This subtitle is referred to in sections 1305, 1461 of this title.

The corporation shall pay benefits under a single-employer plan terminated under this subchapter subject to the limitations and requirements of subtitle B of this subchapter. The corporation shall provide financial assistance to pay benefits under a multiemployer plan which is insolvent under section 1426 or 1441(d)(2)(A) of this title, subject to the limitations and requirements of subtitles B, C, and E of this subchapter. Amounts guaranteed by the corporation under sections 1322 and 1322a of this title shall be paid by the corporation only out of the appropriate fund. The corporation shall make payments under the supplemental program to reimburse multiemployer plans for uncollectible withdrawal liability only out of the fund established under section 1305(e) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4061, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1029; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(f), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301.)

1980—Pub. L. 96–364 substituted provisions relating to payment of benefits under a single-employer plan terminated under this subchapter subject to limitations and requirements of subtitle B of this subchapter for provisions relating to payment of benefits under a plan terminated under this subchapter subject to limitations and requirements of subtitle B of this subchapter.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

In any case in which a single-employer plan is terminated in a distress termination under section 1341(c) of this title or a termination otherwise instituted by the corporation under section 1342 of this title, any person who is, on the termination date, a contributing sponsor of the plan or a member of such a contributing sponsor's controlled group shall incur liability under this section. The liability under this section of all such persons shall be joint and several. The liability under this section consists of—

(1) liability to the corporation, to the extent provided in subsection (b) of this section, and

(2) liability to the trustee appointed under subsection (b) or (c) of section 1342 of this title, to the extent provided in subsection (c) of this section.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the liability to the corporation of a person described in subsection (a) of this section shall be the total amount of the unfunded benefit liabilities (as of the termination date) to all participants and beneficiaries under the plan, together with interest (at a reasonable rate) calculated from the termination date in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), in any case described in section 1341(c)(3)(C)(ii) of this title, actuarial present values shall be determined as of the date of the notice to the corporation (or the finding by the corporation) described in such section.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the liability to the corporation under this subsection shall be due and payable to the corporation as of the termination date, in cash or securities acceptable to the corporation.

Payment of so much of the liability under paragraph (1)(A) as exceeds 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in subsection (a) of this section (including interest) shall be made under commercially reasonable terms prescribed by the corporation. The parties involved shall make a reasonable effort to reach agreement on such commercially reasonable terms. Any such terms prescribed by the corporation shall provide for deferral of 50 percent of any amount of liability otherwise payable for any year under this subparagraph if a person subject to such liability demonstrates to the satisfaction of the corporation that no person subject to such liability has any individual pre-tax profits for such person's fiscal year ending during such year.

The corporation and any person liable under this section may agree to alternative arrangements for the satisfaction of liability to the corporation under this subsection.

A person described in subsection (a) of this section shall be subject to liability under this subsection to the trustee appointed under subsection (b) or (c) of section 1342 of this title. The liability of such person under this subsection shall consist of—

(1) the outstanding balance of the accumulated funding deficiencies (within the meaning of section 1082(a)(2) of this title and section 412(a) of title 26) of the plan (if any) (which, for purposes of this subparagraph, shall include the amount of any increase in such accumulated funding deficiencies of the plan which would result if all pending applications for waivers of the minimum funding standard under section 1083 of this title or section 412(d) of title 26 and for extensions of the amortization period under section 1084 of this title or section 412(e) of title 26 with respect to such plan were denied and if no additional contributions (other than those already made by the termination date) were made for the plan year in which the termination date occurs or for any previous plan year),

(2) the outstanding balance of the amount of waived funding deficiencies of the plan waived before such date under section 1083 of this title or section 412(d) of title 26 (if any), and

(3) the outstanding balance of the amount of decreases in the minimum funding standard allowed before such date under section 1084 of this title or section 412(e) of title 26 (if any),

together with interest (at a reasonable rate) calculated from the termination date in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation. The liability under this subsection shall be due and payable to such trustee as of the termination date, in cash or securities acceptable to such trustee.

The collective net worth of persons subject to liability in connection with a plan termination consists of the sum of the individual net worths of all persons who—

(i) have individual net worths which are greater than zero, and

(ii) are (as of the termination date) contributing sponsors of the terminated plan or members of their controlled groups.

For purposes of this paragraph, the net worth of a person is—

(i) determined on whatever basis best reflects, in the determination of the corporation, the current status of the person's operations and prospects at the time chosen for determining the net worth of the person, and

(ii) increased by the amount of any transfers of assets made by the person which are determined by the corporation to be improper under the circumstances, including any such transfers which would be inappropriate under title 11 if the person were a debtor in a case under chapter 7 of such title.

For purposes of this paragraph, determinations of net worth shall be made as of a day chosen by the corporation (during the 120-day period ending with the termination date) and shall be computed without regard to any liability under this section.

The term “pre-tax profits” means—

(A) except as provided in subparagraph (B), for any fiscal year of any person, such person's consolidated net income (excluding any extraordinary charges to income and including any extraordinary credits to income) for such fiscal year, as shown on audited financial statements prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, or

(B) for any fiscal year of an organization described in section 501(c) of title 26, the excess of income over expenses (as such terms are defined for such organizations under generally accepted accounting principles),

before provision for or deduction of Federal or other income tax, any contribution to any single-employer plan of which such person is a contributing sponsor at any time during the period beginning on the termination date and ending with the end of such fiscal year, and any amounts required to be paid for such fiscal year under this section. The corporation may by regulation require such information to be filed on such forms as may be necessary to determine the existence and amount of such pre-tax profits.

If an employer ceases operations at a facility in any location and, as a result of such cessation of operations, more than 20 percent of the total number of his employees who are participants under a plan established and maintained by him are separated from employment, the employer shall be treated with respect to that plan as if he were a substantial employer under a plan under which more than one employer makes contributions and the provisions of sections 1363, 1364, and 1365 of this title shall apply.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4062, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1029; Pub. L. 95–598, title III, §321(b), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2678; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(g), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11011(a), (b), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 253, 257; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(b)(1), (2)(A), (B)(ii), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–361; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(f)(2), (10)(A), (B), 7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, 2441, 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(2), inserted “and” at end of par. (1), redesignated par. (3) as (2), substituted “subsection (c)” for “subsection (d)”, and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “liability to the trust established pursuant to section 1341(c)(3)(B)(ii) or (iii) of this title or section 1342(i) of this title, to the extent provided in subsection (c) of this section, and”.

Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(10)(A), substituted “so much of the liability under paragraph (1)(A) as exceeds 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in subsection (a) of this section (including interest)” for “the liability under paragraph (1)(A)(ii)”.

Subsecs. (c)(1), (d)(2)(B). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(10)(B), amended Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(B)(ii), see 1987 Amendment note below.

1987—Subsec. (b)(1)(A). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(A), amended subpar. (A) generally. Prior to amendment, subpar. (A) read as follows: “Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the liability to the corporation of a person described in subsection (a) of this section shall consist of the sum of—

“(i) the lesser of—

“(I) the total amount of unfunded guaranteed benefits (as of the termination date) of all participants and beneficiaries under the plan, or

“(II) 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in subsection (a) of this section,

and

“(ii) the excess (if any) of—

“(I) 75 percent of the amount described in clause (i)(I), over

“(II) the amount described in clause (i)(II),

together with interest (at a reasonable rate) calculated from the termination date in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(1), redesignated subsec. (d) as (c) and struck out former subsec. (c) which related to liability to section 1349 trust.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(1)(B), redesignated subsec. (e) as (d). Former subsec. (d) redesignated (c).

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(B)(ii), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(10)(B), struck out par. (3) which read as follows: “The liability payment years in connection with a terminated plan consist of the consecutive one-year periods following the last plan year preceding the termination date, excluding the first such year in any case in which the first such year ends less than 180 days after the termination date.”

Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(1)(B), redesignated subsec. (f) as (e). Former subsec. (e) redesignated (d).

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(2), substituted “Liability for termination of single-employer plans under a distress termination or a termination by the corporation” for “Liability of employer” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(2), added subsec. (a) specifying persons liable and the nature and extent of liability and struck out former subsec. (a) specifying employers covered.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(2), added subsec. (b) relating to liability to corporation and struck out former subsec. (b) relating to amount of liability.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(2), added subsec. (c) relating to liability to section 1349 trust and struck out former subsec. (c) relating to method of determining net worth of employer.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(2), added subsec. (d) relating to liability to section 1342 trustee and struck out former subsec. (d) relating to corporate reorganizations.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a), added subsec. (e) and redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 99–272, §11011(a)(1), (b), redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f), and substituted in heading “Treatment of substantial cessation of operations” for “Cessation of operations at one facility”.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364 substituted “single-employee plan” for “plan (other than a multiemployer plan)”.

1978—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 95–598 substituted “title 11” and “a debtor in a case under chapter 7 of such title” for “the Bankruptcy Act” and “the subject of a proceeding under that Act”, respectively.

Amendment by section 7881(f)(2), (10)(A), (B) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–598 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 402(a) of Pub. L. 95–598, set out as an Effective Date note preceding section 101 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

Section 11012(d) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “In the case of a distress termination under section 4041(c) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as amended by section 11009) [29 U.S.C. 1341(c)] pursuant to a notice of intent to terminate filed before January 1, 1987, no payment of liability otherwise payable as provided in section 4062(c)(2)(B) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1362(c)(2)(B)] (as amended by this section [Act]) shall be required to be made before January 1, 1989.”

This section is referred to in sections 1322, 1341, 1342, 1363, 1364, 1367, 1368, 1370, 1398, 1412 of this title; title 26 section 404.

Except as provided in subsection (d) of this section, the plan administrator of a single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control—

(1) shall notify the corporation of the withdrawal during a plan year of a substantial employer for such plan year from the plan, within 60 days after such withdrawal, and

(2) request that the corporation determine the liability of all persons with respect to the withdrawal of the substantial employer.

The corporation shall, as soon as practicable thereafter, determine whether there is liability resulting from the withdrawal of the substantial employer and notify the liable persons of such liability.

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, any one or more contributing sponsors who withdraw, during a plan year for which they constitute a substantial employer, from a single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control, shall, upon notification of such contributing sponsors by the corporation as provided by subsection (a) of this section, be liable, together with the members of their controlled groups, to the corporation in accordance with the provisions of section 1362 of this title and this section. The amount of liability shall be computed on the basis of an amount determined by the corporation to be the amount described in section 1362 of this title for the entire plan, as if the plan had been terminated by the corporation on the date of the withdrawal referred to in subsection (a)(1) of this section multiplied by a fraction—

(1) the numerator of which is the total amount required to be contributed to the plan by such contributing sponsors for the last 5 years ending prior to the withdrawal, and

(2) the denominator of which is the total amount required to be contributed to the plan by all contributing sponsors for such last 5 years.

In addition to and in lieu of the manner prescribed in the preceding sentence, the corporation may also determine such liability on any other equitable basis prescribed by the corporation in regulations. Any amount collected by the corporation under this subsection shall be held in escrow subject to disposition in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (2) and (3) of subsection (c) of this section.

(1) In lieu of payment of a contributing sponsor's liability under this section, the contributing sponsor may be required to furnish a bond to the corporation in an amount not exceeding 150 percent of his liability to insure payment of his liability under this section. The bond shall have as surety thereon a corporate surety company which is an acceptable surety on Federal bonds under authority granted by the Secretary of the Treasury under sections 9304–9308 of title 31. Any such bond shall be in a form or of a type approved by the Secretary including individual bonds or schedule or blanket forms of bonds which cover a group or class.

(2) If the plan is not terminated under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title within the 5-year period commencing on the day of withdrawal, the liability is abated and any payment held in escrow shall be refunded without interest (or the bond cancelled) in accordance with bylaws or rules prescribed by the corporation.

(3) If the plan terminates under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title within the 5-year period commencing on the day of withdrawal, the corporation shall—

(A) demand payment or realize on the bond and hold such amount in escrow for the benefit of the plan;

(B) treat any escrowed payments under this section as if they were plan assets and apply them in a manner consistent with this subtitle; and

(C) refund any amount to the contributing sponsor which is not required to meet any obligation of the corporation with respect to the plan.

The provisions of this subsection apply in the case of a withdrawal described in subsection (a) of this section, and the provisions of subsections (b) and (c) of this section shall not apply, if the corporation determines that the procedure provided for under this subsection is consistent with the purposes of this section and section 1364 of this title and is more appropriate in the particular case. Upon a showing by the plan administrator of the plan that the withdrawal from the plan by one or more contributing sponsors has resulted, or will result, in a significant reduction in the amount of aggregate contributions to or under the plan, the corporation may—

(1) require the plan fund to be equitable allocated between those participants no longer working in covered service under the plan as a result of the withdrawal, and those participants who remain in covered service under the plan;

(2) treat that portion of the plan funds allocable under paragraph (1) to participants no longer in covered service as a plan terminated under section 1342 of this title; and

(3) treat that portion of the plan fund allocable to participants remaining in covered service as a separate plan.

The corporation is authorized to waive the application of the provisions of subsections (b), (c), and (d) of this section whenever it determines that there is an indemnity agreement in effect among contributing sponsors under the plan which is adequate to satisfy the purposes of this section and of section 1364 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4063, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1030; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(h), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(5)(A), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 268.)

In subsec. (c)(1), “sections 9304–9308 of title 31” substituted for “sections 6 through 13 of title 6, United States Code” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(vi), inserted “from single-employer plans under multiple controlled groups” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(i), in introductory par., substituted “single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control” for “plan under which more than one employer makes contributions (other than a multiemployer plan)”, in par. (1), substituted “withdrawal during a plan year of a substantial employer for such plan year” for “withdrawal of a substantial employer”, in par. (2), substituted “of all persons with respect to the withdrawal of the substantial employer” for “of such employer under this subtitle with respect to such withdrawal”, and in concluding provision substituted “whether there is liability resulting from the withdrawal of the substantial employer” for “whether such employer is liable for any amount under this subtitle with respect to the withdrawal” and “notify the liable persons” for “notify such employer”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(ii), in introductory par., substituted “any one or more contributing sponsors who withdraw, during a plan year for which they constitute a substantial employer, from a single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control, shall, upon notification of such contributing sponsors by the corporation as provided by subsection (a) of this section, be liable, together with the members of their controlled groups,” for “an employer who withdraws from a plan to which section 1321 of this title applies, during a plan year for which he was a substantial employer, and who is notified by the corporation as provided by subsection (a) of this section, shall be liable”, “amount of liability” for “amount of such employer's liability”, and “the withdrawal referred to in subsection (a)(1) of this section” for “the employer's withdrawal”, in par. (1), substituted “such contributing sponsors” for “such employer”, in par. (2), substituted “all contributing sponsors” for “all employers”, and in concluding provision substituted “such liability” for “the liability of each such employer”.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(iii)(I), substituted “of a contributing sponsor's liability under this section, the contributing sponsor” for “of his liability under this section the employer”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(iii)(II), inserted “under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title” and substituted “liability is” for “liability of such employer is” and “(or the bond cancelled)” for “to the employer (or his bond cancelled)”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(iii)(III), in introductory par., inserted “under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title” and, in subpar. (C), substituted “contributing sponsor” for “employer”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(iv), in introductory par., substituted “of the plan that the withdrawal from the plan by one or more contributing sponsors” for “of a plan (other than a multiemployer plan) that the withdrawal from the plan by any employer or employers” and struck out “by employers” after “contributions to or under the plan”, in par. (1), substituted “the withdrawal” for “their employer's withdrawal”, and in par. (2), substituted “plan terminated under section 1342 of this title” for “termination”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(A)(v), struck out “to any employer or plan administrator” before “whenever it determines” and substituted “contributing sponsors” for “all other employers”.

1980—Subsecs. (a), (d). Pub. L. 96–364 inserted provisions excepting a multiemployer plan.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1322, 1342, 1362, 1365, 1367, 1368, 1370, 1461 of this title; title 26 section 404.

(a) This section applies to all contributing sponsors of a single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control at the time such plan is terminated under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title, or who, at any time within the 5 plan years preceding the date of termination, made contributions under the plan.

(b) The corporation shall determine the liability with respect to each contributing sponsor and each member of its controlled group in a manner consistent with section 1362 of this title, except that the amount of liability determined under section 1362(b)(1) of this title with respect to the entire plan shall be allocated to each controlled group by multiplying such amount by a fraction—

(1) the numerator of which is the amount required to be contributed to the plan for the last 5 plan years ending prior to the termination date by persons in such controlled group as contributing sponsors, and

(2) the denominator of which is the total amount required to be contributed to the plan for such last 5 plan years by all persons as contributing sponsors,

and section 1368(a) of this title shall be applied separately with respect to each controlled group. The corporation may also determine the liability of each such contributing sponsor and member of its controlled group on any other equitable basis prescribed by the corporation in regulations.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4064, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1031; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(i), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(5)(B), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 270; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(b)(2)(C)(i), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–361; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(f)(3)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440.)

1989—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “section 1368(a)” for “clauses (i)(II) and (ii) of section 1362(b)(1)(A)”.

1987—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–203 amended first sentence generally. Prior to amendment, first sentence read as follows: “The corporation shall determine the liability with respect to each contributing sponsor and each member of its controlled group in a manner consistent with section 1362 of this title, except that—

“(1) the amount of the liability determined under section 1362(b)(1) of this title with respect to the entire plan—

“(A) shall be determined without regard to clauses (i)(II) and (ii) of section 1362(b)(1)(A) of this title, and

“(B) shall be allocated to each controlled group by multiplying such amount by a fraction—

“(i) the numerator of which is the amount required to be contributed to the plan for the last 5 plan years ending prior to the termination date by persons in such controlled group as contributing sponsors, and

“(ii) the denominator of which is the total amount required to be contributed to the plan for such last 5 plan years by all persons as contributing sponsors,

and clauses (i)(II) and (ii) of section 1362(b)(1)(A) of this title shall be applied separately with respect to each such controlled group, and

“(2) the amount of the liability determined under section 1362(c)(1) of this title with respect to the entire plan shall be allocated to each controlled group by multiplying such amount by the fraction described in paragraph (1)(B) in connection with such controlled group.”

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(B)(iii), substituted “on termination of single-employer plans under multiple controlled groups” for “of employers on termination of plan maintained by more than one employer” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(B)(i), substituted “all contributing sponsors of a single-employer plan which has two or more contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control” for “all employers who maintain a plan under which more than one employer makes contributions (other than a multiemployer plan)” and inserted “under section 1341(c) or 1342 of this title” after “terminated”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(5)(B)(ii), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting reference to each contributing sponsor and each member of its controlled group for reference to each employer of a plan maintained by more than one employer and inserted provisions that liability determined under section 1362(b)(1) of this title with respect to the entire plan be determined without regard to cls. (i)(II) and (ii) of section 1362(b)(1)(A) of this title and that the amount of liability determined under section 1362(c)(1) of this title with respect to the entire plan be allocated to each controlled group by multiplying such amount by the fraction described in par. (1)(B) in connection with such controlled group.

1980—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 96–364 inserted provisions excepting a multiemployer plan.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1322, 1342, 1362, 1363, 1367, 1368, 1370, 1412 of this title; title 26 section 404.

For each plan year for which section 1321 of this title applies to a plan, the plan administrator shall file with the corporation, on a form prescribed by the corporation, an annual report which identifies the plan and plan administrator and which includes—

(1) a copy of each notification required under section 1363 of this title with respect to such year,

(2) a statement disclosing whether any reportable event (described in section 1343(b) 1 of this title) occurred during the plan year except to the extent the corporation waives such requirement, and

(3) in the case of a multiemployer plan, information with respect to such plan which the corporation determines is necessary for the enforcement of subtitle E of this subchapter and requires by regulation, which may include—

(A) a statement certified by the plan's enrolled actuary of—

(i) the value of all vested benefits under the plan as of the end of the plan year, and

(ii) the value of the plan's assets as of the end of the plan year;

(B) a statement certified by the plan sponsor of each claim for outstanding withdrawal liability (within the meaning of section 1301(a)(12) of this title) and its value as of the end of that plan year and as of the end of the preceding plan year; and

(C) the number of employers having an obligation to contribute to the plan and the number of employers required to make withdrawal liability payments.

The report shall be filed within 6 months after the close of the plan year to which it relates. The corporation shall cooperate with the Secretary of the Treasury and the Secretary of Labor in an endeavor to coordinate the timing and content, and possibly obtain the combination, of reports under this section with reports required to be made by plan administrators to such Secretaries.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4065, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1032; Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §106, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1266.)

Section 1343(b) of this title, referred to in par. (2), was redesignated section 1343(c) of this title and a new section 1343(b) was added by Pub. L. 103–465, title VII, §771(b), Dec. 8, 1994, 108 Stat. 5042.

1980—Pub. L. 96–364 inserted provisions in par. (2) respecting waiver by corporation and added par. (3).

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1362 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

The plan administrator of each single-employer plan which has at least two contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control shall notify, within 6 months after the close of each plan year, any contributing sponsor of the plan who is described in section 1301(a)(2) of this title that such contributing sponsor (alone or together with members of such contributing sponsor's controlled group) constitutes a substantial employer for that year.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4066, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1032; Pub. L. 96–364, title IV, §403(j), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1301; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(5)(C), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 271; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7893(g)(2), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2447.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239 inserted “any” before “contributing sponsor of the plan”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–272 substituted “each single-employer plan which has at least two contributing sponsors at least two of whom are not under common control” for “each plan under which contributions are made by more than one employer (other than a multiemployer plan)”, “contributing sponsor of the plan” for “any employer making contributions under that plan”, and “that such contributing sponsor (alone or together with members of such contributing sponsor's controlled group) constitutes a substantial employer” for “that he is a substantial employer”.

1980—Pub. L. 96–364 inserted provisions excepting a multiemployer plan.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 96–364 effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

The corporation is authorized to make arrangements with contributing sponsors and members of their controlled groups who are or may become liable under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title for payment of their liability, including arrangements for deferred payment of amounts of liability to the corporation accruing as of the termination date on such terms and for such periods as the corporation deems equitable and appropriate.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4067, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1032; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(6)(A), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 271; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9313(b)(6), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–366; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7893(g)(3), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2448.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239 amended directory language of Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(A)(ii), see 1986 Amendment note below.

1987—Pub. L. 100–203 inserted “or may become” after “who are”.

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(A)(i), (iii), substituted “of liability” for “of employer liability” in section catchline and inserted “of amounts of liability to the corporation accruing as of the termination date” in text.

Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(A)(ii), as amended by Pub. L. 101–239, substituted “contributing sponsors and members of their controlled groups” for “employers”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, see section 9313(c) of Pub. L. 100–203, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

If any person liable to the corporation under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title neglects or refuses to pay, after demand, the amount of such liability (including interest), there shall be a lien in favor of the corporation in the amount of such liability (including interest) upon all property and rights to property, whether real or personal, belonging to such person, except that such lien may not be in an amount in excess of 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in section 1362(a) of this title 1

The lien imposed by subsection (a) of this section arises on the date of termination of a plan, and continues until the liability imposed under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title is satisfied or becomes unenforceable by reason of lapse of time.

(1) Except as otherwise provided under this section, the priority of a lien imposed under subsection (a) of this section shall be determined in the same manner as under section 6323 of title 26 (as in effect on April 7, 1986). Such section 6323 shall be applied for purposes of this section by disregarding subsection (g)(4) and by substituting—

(A) “lien imposed by section 4068 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [29 U.S.C. 1368]” for “lien imposed by section 6321” each place it appears in subsections (a), (b), (c)(1), (c)(4)(B), (d), (e), and (h)(5);

(B) “the corporation” for “the Secretary” in subsections (a) and (b)(9)(C);

(C) “the payment of the amount on which the section 4068(a) lien is based” for “the collection of any tax under this title” in subsection (b)(3);

(D) “a person whose property is subject to the lien” for “the taxpayer” in subsections (b)(8), (c)(2)(A)(i) (the first place it appears), (c)(2)(A)(ii), (c)(2)(B), (c)(4)(B), and (c)(4)(C) (in the matter preceding clause (i));

(E) “such person” for “the taxpayer” in subsections (c)(2)(A)(i) (the second place it appears) and (c)(4)(C)(ii);

(F) “payment of the loan value of the amount on which the lien is based is made to the corporation” for “satisfaction of a levy pursuant to section 6332(b)” in subsection (b)(9)(C);

(G) “section 4068(a) lien” for “tax lien” each place it appears in subsections (c)(1), (c)(2)(A), (c)(2)(B), (c)(3)(B)(iii), (c)(4)(B), (d), and (h)(5); and

(H) “the date on which the lien is first filed” for “the date of the assessment of the tax” in subsection (g)(3)(A).

(2) In a case under title 11 or in insolvency proceedings, the lien imposed under subsection (a) of this section shall be treated in the same manner as a tax due and owing to the United States for purposes of title 11 or section 3713 of title 31.

(3) For purposes of applying section 6323(a) of title 26 to determine the priority between the lien imposed under subsection (a) of this section and a Federal tax lien, each lien shall be treated as a judgment lien arising as of the time notice of such lien is filed.

(4) For purposes of this subsection, notice of the lien imposed by subsection (a) of this section shall be filed in the same manner as under section 6323(f) and (g) of title 26.

(1) In any case where there has been a refusal or neglect to pay the liability imposed under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title, the corporation may bring civil action in a district court of the United States to enforce the lien of the corporation under this section with respect to such liability or to subject any property, of whatever nature, of the liable person, or in which he has any right, title, or interest to the payment of such liability.

(2) The liability imposed by section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title may be collected by a proceeding in court if the proceeding is commenced within 6 years after the date upon which the plan was terminated or prior to the expiration of any period for collection agreed upon in writing by the corporation and the liable person before the expiration of such 6-year period. The period of limitations provided under this paragraph shall be suspended for the period the assets of the liable person are in the control or custody of any court of the United States, or of any State, or of the District of Columbia, and for 6 months thereafter, and for any period during which the liable person is outside the United States if such period of absence is for a continuous period of at least 6 months.

If the corporation determines that release of the lien or subordination of the lien to any other creditor of the liable person would not adversely affect the collection of the liability imposed under section 1362, 1363, or 1364 of this title, or that the amount realizable by the corporation from the property to which the lien attaches will ultimately be increased by such release or subordination, and that the ultimate collection of the liability will be facilitated by such release or subordination, the corporation may issue a certificate of release or subordination of the lien with respect to such property, or any part thereof.

For purposes of this section—

(1) The collective net worth of persons subject to liability in connection with a plan termination shall be determined as provided in section 1362(d)(1) of this title.

(2) The term “pre-tax profits” has the meaning provided in section 1362(d)(2) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4068, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1032; Pub. L. 95–598, title III, §321(c), Nov. 6, 1978, 92 Stat. 2678; Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11016(a)(6)(B), (c)(14), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 271, 275; Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9312(b)(2)(B)(i), (C)(ii), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–361, 1330–362; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7881(f)(3)(B), (10)(C), (12), 7891(a)(1), 7894(g)(4)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440, 2441, 2445, 2451.)

A former subsec. (f) of this section was originally subsec. (e) of section 1362 of this title and was redesignated as subsec. (f) of this section by Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(B)(ii). Subsequently, Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(B)(ii), was amended generally by Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(10)(B), and, as so amended, no longer contains language redesignating subsec. (e) of section 1362 as subsec. (f) of this section. As a result of that amendment, the transfer of subsec. (e) of section 1362 to subsec. (f) of this section was rescinded.

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(12), struck out “to the extent such amount does not exceed 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in section 1362(a) of this title” after “the amount of such liability” and substituted “in the amount of such liability (including interest) upon all property and rights to property, whether real or personal, belonging to such person, except that such lien may not be in an amount in excess of 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in section 1362(a) of this title” for “to the extent such amount does not exceed 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in section 1362(a) of this title upon all property and rights to property, whether real or personal, belonging to such person.”

Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(3)(B), struck out at end “The preceding provisions of this subsection shall be applied in a manner consistent with the provisions of section 1364(d) of this title relating to treatment of multiple controlled groups.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–239, §7891(a)(1), in pars. (1), (3), and (4), substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(g)(4)(A), substituted “section 3713 of title 31” for “section 3466 of the Revised Statutes (31 U.S.C. 191)”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(f)(10)(C), added subsec. (f).

1987—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(B)(i), substituted “to the extent such amount does not exceed 30 percent of the collective net worth of all persons described in section 1362(a) of this title” for “to the extent of an amount equal to the unpaid amount described in section 1362(b)(1)(A)(i) of this title” in two places.

Pub. L. 100–203, §9312(b)(2)(C)(ii), inserted at end “The preceding provisions of this subsection shall be applied in a manner consistent with the provisions of section 1364(d) of this title relating to treatment of multiple controlled groups.”

1986—Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(B)(i), struck out “of employer” after “liability” in section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(B)(ii), substituted “person liable” for “employer or employers liable”, “neglects or refuses” for “neglect or refuse”, and “such person” for “such employer or employers” and inserted “to the extent of an amount equal to the unpaid amount described in section 1362(b)(1)(A)(i) of this title” in two places.

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(B)(vi), substituted par. (1) for former par. (1) which read as follows: “Except as otherwise provided under this section, the priority of the lien imposed under subsection (a) of this section shall be determined in the same manner as under section 6323 of title 26. Such section 6323 shall be applied by substituting ‘lien imposed by section 4068 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974’ for ‘lien imposed by section 6321’; ‘corporation’ for ‘Secretary or his delegate’; ‘employer liability lien’ for ‘tax lien’; ‘employer’ for ‘taxpayer’; ‘lien arising under section 4068(a) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974’ for ‘assessment of the tax’; and ‘payment of the loan value is made to the corporation’ for ‘satisfaction of a levy pursuant to section 6332(b)’; each place such terms appear.”

Subsec. (d)(1), (2). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(B)(iii), (iv), substituted “liable person” for “employer” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 99–272, §11016(a)(6)(B)(v), (c)(14), struck out “, with the consent of the board of directors,” after “corporation determines” and substituted “liable person” for “employer or employers”.

1978—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 95–598 substituted “a case under title 11 or in” and “title 11” for “the case of bankruptcy or” and “the Bankruptcy Act”.

Amendment by section 7881(f)(3)(B), (10)(C), (12) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7891(a)(1) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 7894(g)(4)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in section 3 of Public Law 97–258.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–203 applicable with respect to plan terminations under section 1341 of this title with respect to which notices of intent to terminate are provided under section 1341(a)(2) of this title after Dec. 17, 1987, and plan terminations with respect to which proceedings are instituted by the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation under section 1342 of this title after that date, see section 9312(d)(1) of Pub. L. 100–203, as amended, set out as a note under section 1301 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–272 effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as a note under section 1341 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 95–598 effective Oct. 1, 1979, see section 402(a) of Pub. L. 95–598, set out as an Effective Date note preceding section 101 of Title 11, Bankruptcy.

This section is referred to in sections 1082, 1364, 1413 of this title; title 26 section 412.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a period.

If a principal purpose of any person in entering into any transaction is to evade liability to which such person would be subject under this subtitle and the transaction becomes effective within five years before the termination date of the termination on which such liability would be based, then such person and the members of such person's controlled group (determined as of the termination date) shall be subject to liability under this subtitle in connection with such termination as if such person were a contributing sponsor of the terminated plan as of the termination date. This subsection shall not cause any person to be liable under this subtitle in connection with such plan termination for any increases or improvements in the benefits provided under the plan which are adopted after the date on which the transaction referred to in the preceding sentence becomes effective.

For purposes of this subtitle, the following rules apply in the case of certain corporate reorganizations:

If a person ceases to exist by reason of a reorganization which involves a mere change in identity, form, or place of organization, however effected, a successor corporation resulting from such reorganization shall be treated as the person to whom this subtitle applies.

If a person ceases to exist by reason of liquidation into a parent corporation, the parent corporation shall be treated as the person to whom this subtitle applies.

If a person ceases to exist by reason of a merger, consolidation, or division, the successor corporation or corporations shall be treated as the person to whom this subtitle applies.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4069, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11013(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 260.)

Section 11013(b) of Pub. L. 99–272 provided that: “Section 4069(a) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (as added by subsection (a)) [subsec. (a) of this section] shall apply with respect to transactions becoming effective on or after January 1, 1986.”

Section effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1341 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1370, 1398 of this title.

Any person who is with respect to a single-employer plan a fiduciary, contributing sponsor, member of a contributing sponsor's controlled group, participant, or beneficiary, and is adversely affected by an act or practice of any party (other than the corporation) in violation of any provision of section 1341, 1342, 1362, 1363, 1364, or 1369 of this title, or who is an employee organization representing such a participant or beneficiary so adversely affected for purposes of collective bargaining with respect to such plan, may bring an action—

(1) to enjoin such act or practice, or

(2) to obtain other appropriate equitable relief (A) to redress such violation or (B) to enforce such provision.

A single-employer plan may be sued under this section as an entity. Service of summons, subpoena, or other legal process of a court upon a trustee or an administrator of a single-employer plan in such trustee's or administrator's capacity as such shall constitute service upon the plan. If a plan has not designated in the summary plan description of the plan an individual as agent for the service of legal process, service upon any contributing sponsor of the plan shall constitute such service. Any money judgment under this section against a single-employer plan shall be enforceable only against the plan as an entity and shall not be enforceable against any other person unless liability against such person is established in such person's individual capacity.

The district courts of the United States shall have exclusive jurisdiction of civil actions under this section. Such actions may be brought in the district where the plan is administered, where the violation took place, or where a defendant resides or may be found, and process may be served in any other district where a defendant resides or may be found. The district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction, without regard to the amount in controversy or the citizenship of the parties, to grant the relief provided for in subsection (a) of this section in any action.

A copy of the complaint or notice of appeal in any action under this section shall be served upon the corporation by certified mail. The corporation shall have the right in its discretion to intervene in any action.

In any action brought under this section, the court in its discretion may award all or a portion of the costs and expenses incurred in connection with such action, including reasonable attorney's fees, to any party who prevails or substantially prevails in such action.

Notwithstanding the preceding provisions of this subsection, no plan shall be required in any action to pay any costs and expenses (including attorney's fees).

Except as provided in paragraph (3), an action under this section may not be brought after the later of—

(A) 6 years after the date on which the cause of action arose, or

(B) 3 years after the applicable date specified in paragraph (2).

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the applicable date specified in this paragraph is the earliest date on which the plaintiff acquired or should have acquired actual knowledge of the existence of such cause of action.

In the case of a plaintiff who is a fiduciary bringing the action in the exercise of fiduciary duties, the applicable date specified in this paragraph is the date on which the plaintiff became a fiduciary with respect to the plan if such date is later than the date described in subparagraph (A).

In the case of fraud or concealment, the period described in paragraph (1)(B) shall be extended to 6 years after the applicable date specified in paragraph (2).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4070, as added Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, §11014(a), Apr. 7, 1986, 100 Stat. 261; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(f)(8), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2440.)

1989—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 101–239 struck out “1349,” after “section 1341, 1342,”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section effective Jan. 1, 1986, with certain exceptions, see section 11019 of Pub. L. 99–272, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1341 of this title.

The corporation may assess a penalty, payable to the corporation, against any person who fails to provide any notice or other material information required under this subtitle, subtitle A, B, or C of this subchapter, as 1 section 1082(f)(4) or 1085b(e) of this title, or any regulations prescribed under any such subtitle or such section, within the applicable time limit specified therein. Such penalty shall not exceed $1,000 for each day for which such failure continues.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4071, as added Pub. L. 100–203, title IX, §9314(c)(1), Dec. 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 1330–367; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7881(g)(8), (i)(3)(B), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2442.)

1989—Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(i)(3)(B), substituted “, subtitle A, B, or C of this subchapter, as section 1082(f)(4) or 1085b(e) of this title” for “or subtitle A, B, or C” and inserted “or such section” after “such subtitle”.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7881(g)(8), made clarifying amendment to directory language of Pub. L. 100–203, §9314(c)(1), resulting in no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Pension Protection Act, Pub. L. 100–203, §§9302–9346, to which such amendment relates, see section 7882 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

1980—Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1217, added subtitle heading. Former subtitle E heading “Effective Date; Special Rules” was struck out. See subtitle F of this subchapter.

This subtitle is referred to in sections 1301, 1342, 1361, 1365 of this title; title 26 section 9721.

This part is referred to in sections 1082, 1103, 1108, 1301, 1303, 1342, 1415, 1424, 1461 of this title; title 26 sections 404, 412, 413, 418C, 4975.

1 So in original. Probably should be “or”.

(a) If an employer withdraws from a multiemployer plan in a complete withdrawal or a partial withdrawal, then the employer is liable to the plan in the amount determined under this part to be the withdrawal liability.

(b) For purposes of subsection (a) of this section—

(1) The withdrawal liability of an employer to a plan is the amount determined under section 1391 of this title to be the allocable amount of unfunded vested benefits, adjusted—

(A) first, by any de minimis reduction applicable under section 1389 of this title,

(B) next, in the case of a partial withdrawal, in accordance with section 1386 of this title,

(C) then, to the extent necessary to reflect the limitation on annual payments under section 1399(c)(1)(B) of this title, and

(D) finally, in accordance with section 1405 of this title.

(2) The term “complete withdrawal” means a complete withdrawal described in section 1383 of this title.

(3) The term “partial withdrawal” means a partial withdrawal described in section 1385 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4201, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1217.)

A prior section 1381, Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4402, formerly §4082, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1034; S.Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977; Pub. L. 95–214, §1, Dec. 19, 1977, 91 Stat. 1501; S.Res. 30, Mar. 7, 1979; Pub. L. 96–24, June 19, 1979, 93 Stat. 70; Pub. L. 96–239, §1, Apr. 30, 1980, 94 Stat. 341; Pub. L. 96–293, §1, June 30, 1980, 94 Stat. 610, renumbered §4402 and amended Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §108(a)-(c)(1), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1267, relating to the effective dates and special rules for this subchapter, was transferred to section 1461 of this title.

Part effective Sept. 26, 1980, see section 1461(e)(2) of this title.

Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(a), (c), (d), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899, provided that:

“(a)

“(1)

“(2)

“(c)

“(d)

Section 108(c)(4) of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that: “In the case of an employer who withdrew before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 26, 1980] from a multiemployer plan covering employees in the seagoing industry (as determined by the corporation), sections 4201 through 4219 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as added by this Act, [section 1381 through 1399 of this title], are effective as of May 3, 1979. For the purpose of applying section 4217 [section 1397 of this title] for purposes of the preceding sentence, the date ‘May 2, 1979,’ shall be substituted for ‘April 28, 1980,’ and the date ‘May 3, 1979’ shall be substituted for ‘April 29, 1980’. For purposes of this paragraph, terms which are used in title IV of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this subchapter], or in regulations prescribed under that title, and which are used in the preceding sentence have the same meaning as when used in that Act [see Short Title note set out under sections 1001 of this title] or those regulations. For purposes of this paragraph, the term ‘employer’ includes only a substantial employer covering employees in the seagoing industry (as so determined) in connection with ports on the West Coast of the United States, but does not include an employer who withdrew from a plan because of a change in the collective bargaining representative.”

This section is referred to in sections 1401, 1415, 1422 of this title.

When an employer withdraws from a multiemployer plan, the plan sponsor, in accordance with this part, shall—

(1) determine the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability,

(2) notify the employer of the amount of the withdrawal liability, and

(3) collect the amount of the withdrawal liability from the employer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4202, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1218.)

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

For purposes of this part, a complete withdrawal from a multiemployer plan occurs when an employer—

(1) permanently ceases to have an obligation to contribute under the plan, or

(2) permanently ceases all covered operations under the plan.

(1) Notwithstanding subsection (a) of this section, in the case of an employer that has an obligation to contribute under a plan for work performed in the building and construction industry, a complete withdrawal occurs only as described in paragraph (2), if—

(A) substantially all the employees with respect to whom the employer has an obligation to contribute under the plan perform work in the building and construction industry, and

(B) the plan—

(i) primarily covers employees in the building and construction industry, or

(ii) is amended to provide that this subsection applies to employers described in this paragraph.

(2) A withdrawal occurs under this paragraph if—

(A) an employer ceases to have an obligation to contribute under the plan, and

(B) the employer—

(i) continues to perform work in the jurisdiction of the collective bargaining agreement of the type for which contributions were previously required, or

(ii) resumes such work within 5 years after the date on which the obligation to contribute under the plan ceases, and does not renew the obligation at the time of the resumption.

(3) In the case of a plan terminated by mass withdrawal (within the meaning of section 1341a(a)(2) of this title), paragraph (2) shall be applied by substituting “3 years” for “5 years” in subparagraph (B)(ii).

(1) Notwithstanding subsection (a) of this section, in the case of an employer that has an obligation to contribute under a plan for work performed in the entertainment industry, primarily on a temporary or project-by-project basis, if the plan primarily covers employees in the entertainment industry, a complete withdrawal occurs only as described in subsection (b)(2) of this section applied by substituting “plan” for “collective bargaining agreement” in subparagraph (B)(i) thereof.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the term “entertainment industry” means—

(A) theater, motion picture (except to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation), radio, television, sound or visual recording, music, and dance, and

(B) such other entertainment activities as the corporation may determine to be appropriate.

(3) The corporation may by regulation exclude a group or class of employers described in the preceding sentence from the application of this subsection if the corporation determines that such exclusion is necessary—

(A) to protect the interest of the plan's participants and beneficiaries, or

(B) to prevent a significant risk of loss to the corporation with respect to the plan.

(4) A plan may be amended to provide that this subsection shall not apply to a group or class of employers under the plan.

(1) Notwithstanding subsection (a) of this section, in the case of an employer who—

(A) has an obligation to contribute under a plan described in paragraph (2) primarily for work described in such paragraph, and

(B) does not continue to perform work within the jurisdiction of the plan,

a complete withdrawal occurs only as described in paragraph (3).

(2) A plan is described in this paragraph if substantially all of the contributions required under the plan are made by employers primarily engaged in the long and short haul trucking industry, the household goods moving industry, or the public warehousing industry.

(3) A withdrawal occurs under this paragraph if—

(A) an employer permanently ceases to have an obligation to contribute under the plan or permanently ceases all covered operations under the plan, and

(B) either—

(i) the corporation determines that the plan has suffered substantial damage to its contribution base as a result of such cessation, or

(ii) the employer fails to furnish a bond issued by a corporate surety company that is an acceptable surety for purposes of section 1112 of this title, or an amount held in escrow by a bank or similar financial institution satisfactory to the plan, in an amount equal to 50 percent of the withdrawal liability of the employer.

(4) If, after an employer furnishes a bond or escrow to a plan under paragraph (3)(B)(ii), the corporation determines that the cessation of the employer's obligation to contribute under the plan (considered together with any cessations by other employers), or cessation of covered operations under the plan, has resulted in substantial damage to the contribution base of the plan, the employer shall be treated as having withdrawn from the plan on the date on which the obligation to contribute or covered operations ceased, and such bond or escrow shall be paid to the plan. The corporation shall not make a determination under this paragraph more than 60 months after the date on which such obligation to contribute or covered operations ceased.

(5) If the corporation determines that the employer has no further liability under the plan either—

(A) because it determines that the contribution base of the plan has not suffered substantial damage as a result of the cessation of the employer's obligation to contribute or cessation of covered operations (considered together with any cessation of contribution obligation, or of covered operations, with respect to other employers), or

(B) because it may not make a determination under paragraph (4) because of the last sentence thereof,

then the bond shall be cancelled or the escrow refunded.

(6) Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as a limitation on the amount of the withdrawal liability of any employer.

For purposes of this part, the date of a complete withdrawal is the date of the cessation of the obligation to contribute or the cessation of covered operations.

(1) The corporation may prescribe regulations under which plans in industries other than the construction or entertainment industries may be amended to provide for special withdrawal liability rules similar to the rules described in subsections (b) and (c) of this section.

(2) Regulations under paragraph (1) shall permit use of special withdrawal liability rules—

(A) only in industries (or portions thereof) in which, as determined by the corporation, the characteristics that would make use of such rules appropriate are clearly shown, and

(B) only if the corporation determines, in each instance in which special withdrawal liability rules are permitted, that use of such rules will not pose a significant risk to the corporation under this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4203, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1218.)

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1341a, 1381, 1388, 1391, 1401 of this title; title 26 section 411.

(1) A complete or partial withdrawal of an employer (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “seller”) under this section does not occur solely because, as a result of a bona fide, arm's-length sale of assets to an unrelated party (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “purchaser”), the seller ceases covered operations or ceases to have an obligation to contribute for such operations, if—

(A) the purchaser has an obligation to contribute to the plan with respect to the operations for substantially the same number of contribution base units for which the seller had an obligation to contribute to the plan;

(B) the purchaser provides to the plan for a period of 5 plan years commencing with the first plan year beginning after the sale of assets, a bond issued by a corporate surety company that is an acceptable surety for purposes of section 1112 of this title, or an amount held in escrow by a bank or similar financial institution satisfactory to the plan, in an amount equal to the greater of—

(i) the average annual contribution required to be made by the seller with respect to the operations under the plan for the 3 plan years preceding the plan year in which the sale of the employer's assets occurs, or

(ii) the annual contribution that the seller was required to make with respect to the operations under the plan for the last plan year before the plan year in which the sale of the assets occurs,

which bond or escrow shall be paid to the plan if the purchaser withdraws from the plan, or fails to make a contribution to the plan when due, at any time during the first 5 plan years beginning after the sale; and

(C) the contract for sale provides that, if the purchaser withdraws in a complete withdrawal, or a partial withdrawal with respect to operations, during such first 5 plan years, the seller is secondarily liable for any withdrawal liability it would have had to the plan with respect to the operations (but for this section) if the liability of the purchaser with respect to the plan is not paid.

(2) If the purchaser—

(A) withdraws before the last day of the fifth plan year beginning after the sale, and

(B) fails to make any withdrawal liability payment when due,

then the seller shall pay to the plan an amount equal to the payment that would have been due from the seller but for this section.

(3)(A) If all, or substantially all, of the seller's assets are distributed, or if the seller is liquidated before the end of the 5 plan year period described in paragraph (1)(C), then the seller shall provide a bond or amount in escrow equal to the present value of the withdrawal liability the seller would have had but for this subsection.

(B) If only a portion of the seller's assets are distributed during such period, then a bond or escrow shall be required, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation, in a manner consistent with subparagraph (A).

(4) The liability of the party furnishing a bond or escrow under this subsection shall be reduced, upon payment of the bond or escrow to the plan, by the amount thereof.

(1) For the purposes of this part, the liability of the purchaser shall be determined as if the purchaser had been required to contribute to the plan in the year of the sale and the 4 plan years preceding the sale the amount the seller was required to contribute for such operations for such 5 plan years.

(2) If the plan is in reorganization in the plan year in which the sale of assets occurs, the purchaser shall furnish a bond or escrow in an amount equal to 200 percent of the amount described in subsection (a)(1)(B) of this section.

The corporation may by regulation vary the standards in subparagraphs (B) and (C) of subsection (a)(1) of this section if the variance would more effectively or equitably carry out the purposes of this subchapter. Before it promulgates such regulations, the corporation may grant individual or class variances or exemptions from the requirements of such subparagraphs if the particular case warrants it. Before granting such an individual or class variance or exemption, the corporation—

(1) shall publish notice in the Federal Register of the pendency of the variance or exemption,

(2) shall require that adequate notice be given to interested persons, and

(3) shall afford interested persons an opportunity to present their views.

For purposes of this section, the term “unrelated party” means a purchaser or seller who does not bear a relationship to the seller or purchaser, as the case may be, that is described in section 267(b) of title 26, or that is described in regulations prescribed by the corporation applying principles similar to the principles of such section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4204, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1220; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1391, 1401, 1405 of this title.

Except as otherwise provided in this section, there is a partial withdrawal by an employer from a plan on the last day of a plan year if for such plan year—

(1) there is a 70-percent contribution decline, or

(2) there is a partial cessation of the employer's contribution obligation.

For purposes of subsection (a) of this section—

(1)(A) There is a 70-percent contribution decline for any plan year if during each plan year in the 3-year testing period the employer's contribution base units do not exceed 30 percent of the employer's contribution base units for the high base year.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A)—

(i) The term “3-year testing period” means the period consisting of the plan year and the immediately preceding 2 plan years.

(ii) The number of contribution base units for the high base year is the average number of such units for the 2 plan years for which the employer's contribution base units were the highest within the 5 plan years immediately preceding the beginning of the 3-year testing period.

(2)(A) There is a partial cessation of the employer's contribution obligation for the plan year if, during such year—

(i) the employer permanently ceases to have an obligation to contribute under one or more but fewer than all collective bargaining agreements under which the employer has been obligated to contribute under the plan but continues to perform work in the jurisdiction of the collective bargaining agreement of the type for which contributions were previously required or transfers such work to another location, or

(ii) an employer permanently ceases to have an obligation to contribute under the plan with respect to work performed at one or more but fewer than all of its facilities, but continues to perform work at the facility of the type for which the obligation to contribute ceased.

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), a cessation of obligations under a collective bargaining agreement shall not be considered to have occurred solely because, with respect to the same plan, one agreement that requires contributions to the plan has been substituted for another agreement.

(1) In the case of a plan in which a majority of the covered employees are employed in the retail food industry, the plan may be amended to provide that this section shall be applied with respect to such plan—

(A) by substituting “35 percent” for “70 percent” in subsections (a) and (b) of this section, and

(B) by substituting “65 percent” for “30 percent” in subsection (b) of this section.

(2) Any amendment adopted under paragraph (1) shall provide rules for the equitable reduction of withdrawal liability in any case in which the number of the plan's contribution base units, in the 2 plan years following the plan year of withdrawal of the employer, is higher than such number immediately after the withdrawal.

(3) Section 1388 of this title shall not apply to a plan which has been amended under paragraph (1).

In the case of a plan described in section 404(c) of title 26, or a continuation thereof, the plan may be amended to provide rules setting forth other conditions consistent with the purposes of this chapter under which an employer has liability for partial withdrawal.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4205, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1221; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (d), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Section 108(c)(2) of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that:

“(A) For the purpose of applying section 4205 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this section] in the case of an employer described in subparagraph (B)—

“(i) ‘more than 75 percent’ shall be substituted for ‘70 percent’ in subsections (a) and (b) of such section.

“(ii) ‘25 percent or less’ shall be substituted for ‘30 percent’ in subsection (b) of such section, and

“(iii) the number of contribution units for the high base year shall be the average annual number of such units for calendar years 1970 and 1971.

“(B) An employer is described in this subparagraph if—

“(i) the employer is engaged in the trade or business of shipping bulk cargoes in the Great Lakes Maritime Industry, and whose fleet consists of vessels the gross registered tonnage of which was at least 7,800, as stated in the American Bureau of Shipping Record, and

“(ii) whose fleet during any 5 years from the period 1970 through and including 1979 has experienced a 33 percent or more increase in the contribution units as measured from the average annual contribution units for the calendar years 1970 and 1971.”

Section 108(d) of Pub. L. 96–364, as amended by Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(2), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899, provided that: “For purposes of section 4205 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this section]—

“(1) subsection (a)(1) of such section shall not apply to any plan year beginning before September 26, 1982,

“(2) subsection (a)(2) of such section shall not apply with respect to any cessation of contribution obligations occurring before September 26, 1980, and

“(3) in applying subsection (b) of such section, the employer's contribution base units for any plan year ending before September 26, 1980, shall be deemed to be equal to the employer's contribution base units for the last plan year ending before such date.”

Section 108(e) of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that:

“(1) In the case of a partial withdrawal under section 4205 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this section], an employer who—

“(A) before December 13, 1979, had publicly announced the total cessation of covered operations at a facility in a State (and such cessation occurred within 12 months after the announcement),

“(B) had not been obligated to make contributions to the plan on behalf of the employees at such facility for more than 8 years before the discontinuance of contributions, and

“(C) after the discontinuance of contributions does not within 1 year after the date of the partial withdrawal perform work in the same State of the type for which contributions were previously required,

shall be liable under such section with respect to such partial withdrawal in an amount not greater than the amount determined under paragraph (2).

“(2) The amount determined under this paragraph is the excess (if any) of—

“(A) the present value (on the withdrawal date) of the benefits under the plan which—

“(i) were vested on the withdrawal date (or, if earlier, at the time of separation from service with the employer at the facility),

“(ii) were accrued by employees who on December 13, 1979 (or, if earlier, at the time of separation from service with the employer at the facility), were employed at the facility, and

“(iii) are attributable to service with the withdrawing employer, over

“(B)(i) the sum of—

“(I) all employer contributions to the plan on behalf of employees at the facility before the withdrawal date,

“(II) interest (to the withdrawal date) on amounts described in subclause (I), and

“(III) $100,000, reduced by

“(ii) the sum of—

“(I) the benefits paid under the plan on or before the withdrawal date with respect to former employees who separated from employment at the facility, and

“(II) interest (to the withdrawal date) on amounts described in subclause (I).

“(3) For purposes of paragraph (2)—

“(A) actuarial assumptions shall be those used in the last actuarial report completed before December 13, 1979,

“(B) the term ‘withdrawal date’ means the date on which the employer ceased work at the facility of the type for which contributions were previously required, and

“(C) the term ‘facility’ means the facility referred to in paragraph (1).”

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1381, 1386, 1388, 1399, 1401 of this title; title 26 section 411.

(a) The amount of an employer's liability for a partial withdrawal, before the application of sections 1399(c)(1) and 1405 of this title, is equal to the product of—

(1) the amount determined under section 1391 of this title, and adjusted under section 1389 of this title if appropriate, determined as if the employer had withdrawn from the plan in a complete withdrawal—

(A) on the date of the partial withdrawal, or

(B) in the case of a partial withdrawal described in section 1385(a)(1) of this title (relating to 70-percent contribution decline), on the last day of the first plan year in the 3-year testing period,

multiplied by

(2) a fraction which is 1 minus a fraction—

(A) the numerator of which is the employer's contribution base units for the plan year following the plan year in which the partial withdrawal occurs, and

(B) the denominator of which is the average of the employer's contribution base units for—

(i) except as provided in clause (ii), the 5 plan years immediately preceding the plan year in which the partial withdrawal occurs, or

(ii) in the case of a partial withdrawal described in section 1385(a)(1) of this title (relating to 70-percent contribution decline), the 5 plan years immediately preceding the beginning of the 3-year testing period.

(b)(1) In the case of an employer that has withdrawal liability for a partial withdrawal from a plan, any withdrawal liability of that employer for a partial or complete withdrawal from that plan in a subsequent plan year shall be reduced by the amount of any partial withdrawal liability (reduced by any abatement or reduction of such liability) of the employer with respect to the plan for a previous plan year.

(2) The corporation shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to provide for proper adjustments in the reduction provided by paragraph (1) for—

(A) changes in unfunded vested benefits arising after the close of the prior year for which partial withdrawal liability was determined,

(B) changes in contribution base units occurring after the close of the prior year for which partial withdrawal liability was determined, and

(C) any other factors for which it determines adjustment to be appropriate,

so that the liability for any complete or partial withdrawal in any subsequent year (after the application of the reduction) properly reflects the employer's share of liability with respect to the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4206, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1222.)

This section is referred to in sections 1381, 1388, 1399, 1401 of this title.

(a) The corporation shall provide by regulation for the reduction or waiver of liability for a complete withdrawal in the event that an employer who has withdrawn from a plan subsequently resumes covered operations under the plan or renews an obligation to contribute under the plan, to the extent that the corporation determines that reduction or waiver of withdrawal liability is consistent with the purposes of this chapter.

(b) The corporation shall prescribe by regulation a procedure and standards for the amendment of plans to provide alternative rules for the reduction or waiver of liability for a complete withdrawal in the event that an employer who has withdrawn from the plan subsequently resumes covered operations or renews an obligation to contribute under the plan. The rules may apply only to the extent that the rules are consistent with the purposes of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4207, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1223.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

(1) If, for any 2 consecutive plan years following the plan year in which an employer has partially withdrawn from a plan under section 1385(a)(1) of this title (referred to elsewhere in this section as the “partial withdrawal year”), the number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer has an obligation to contribute under the plan for each such year is not less than 90 percent of the total number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer had an obligation to contribute under the plan for the high base year (within the meaning of section 1385(b)(1)(B)(ii) of this title), then the employer shall have no obligation to make payments with respect to such partial withdrawal (other than delinquent payments) for plan years beginning after the second consecutive plan year following the partial withdrawal year.

(2)(A) For any plan year for which the number of contribution base units with respect to which an employer who has partially withdrawn under section 1385(a)(1) of this title has an obligation to contribute under the plan equals or exceeds the number of units for the highest year determined under paragraph (1) without regard to “90 percent of”, the employer may furnish (in lieu of payment of the partial withdrawal liability determined under section 1386 of this title) a bond to the plan in the amount determined by the plan sponsor (not exceeding 50 percent of the annual payment otherwise required).

(B) If the plan sponsor determines under paragraph (1) that the employer has no further liability to the plan for the partial withdrawal, then the bond shall be cancelled.

(C) If the plan sponsor determines under paragraph (1) that the employer continues to have liability to the plan for the partial withdrawal, then—

(i) the bond shall be paid to the plan,

(ii) the employer shall immediately be liable for the outstanding amount of liability due with respect to the plan year for which the bond was posted, and

(iii) the employer shall continue to make the partial withdrawal liability payments as they are due.

If—

(1) for any 2 consecutive plan years following a partial withdrawal under section 1385(a)(1) of this title, the number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer has an obligation to contribute for each such year exceeds 30 percent of the total number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer had an obligation to contribute for the high base year (within the meaning of section 1385(b)(1)(B)(ii) of this title,1 and

(2) the total number of contribution base units with respect to which all employers under the plan have obligations to contribute in each of such 2 consecutive years is not less than 90 percent of the total number of contribution base units for which all employers had obligations to contribute in the partial withdrawal plan year;

then, the employer shall have no obligation to make payments with respect to such partial withdrawal (other than delinquent payments) for plan years beginning after the second such consecutive plan year.

In any case in which, in any plan year following a partial withdrawal under section 1385(a)(1) of this title, the number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer has an obligation to contribute for such year equals or exceeds 110 percent (or such other percentage as the plan may provide by amendment and which is not prohibited under regulations prescribed by the corporation) of the number of contribution base units with respect to which the employer had an obligation to contribute in the partial withdrawal year, then the amount of the employer's partial withdrawal liability payment for such year shall be reduced pro rata, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(1) An employer to whom section 1383(b) 2 of this title (relating to the building and construction industry) applies is liable for a partial withdrawal only if the employer's obligation to contribute under the plan is continued for no more than an insubstantial portion of its work in the craft and area jurisdiction of the collective bargaining agreement of the type for which contributions are required.

(2) An employer to whom section 1383(c) 2 of this title (relating to the entertainment industry) applies shall have no liability for a partial withdrawal except under the conditions and to the extent prescribed by the corporation by regulation.

(1) The corporation may prescribe regulations providing for the reduction or elimination of partial withdrawal liability under any conditions with respect to which the corporation determines that reduction or elimination of partial withdrawal liability is consistent with the purposes of this chapter.

(2) Under such regulations, reduction of withdrawal liability shall be provided only with respect to subsequent changes in the employer's contributions for the same operations, or under the same collective bargaining agreement, that gave rise to the partial withdrawal, and changes in the employer's contribution base units with respect to other facilities or other collective bargaining agreements shall not be taken into account.

(3) The corporation shall prescribe by regulation a procedure by which a plan may by amendment adopt rules for the reduction or elimination of partial withdrawal liability under any other conditions, subject to the approval of the corporation based on its determination that adoption of such rules by the plan is consistent with the purposes of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4208, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1224.)

“Section 1383(b) of this title” and “section 1383(c) of this title”, referred to in subsec. (d), were in the original “section 4202(b)” and “section 4202(c)”, respectively, meaning section 4202(b) and section 4202(c) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and were editorially translated as the probable intent of Congress in view of section 4202 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, which is classified to section 1382 of this title, not having subsection designations and the subject matter of section 4203 of the Act which is classified to section 1383 of this title.

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (e)(1), (3), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in sections 1385, 1401, 1403 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “title),”.

2 See References in Text note below.

Except in the case of a plan amended under subsection (b) of this section, the amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable under section 1391 of this title to an employer who withdraws from a plan shall be reduced by the smaller of—

(1) 3/4 of 1 percent of the plan's unfunded vested obligations (determined as of the end of the plan year ending before the date of withdrawal), or

(2) $50,000,

reduced by the amount, if any, by which the unfunded vested benefits allowable to the employer, determined without regard to this subsection, exceeds $100,000.

A plan may be amended to provide for the reduction of the amount determined under section 1391 of this title by not more than the greater of—

(1) the amount determined under subsection (a) of this section, or

(2) the lesser of—

(A) the amount determined under subsection (a)(1) of this section, or

(B) $100,000,

reduced by the amount, if any, by which the amount determined under section 1391 of this title for the employer, determined without regard to this subsection, exceeds $150,000.

This section does not apply—

(1) to an employer who withdraws in a plan year in which substantially all employers withdraw from the plan, or

(2) in any case in which substantially all employers withdraw from the plan during a period of one or more plan years pursuant to an agreement or arrangement to withdraw, to an employer who withdraws pursuant to such agreement or arrangement.

In any action or proceeding to determine or collect withdrawal liability, if substantially all employers have withdrawn from a plan within a period of 3 plan years, an employer who has withdrawn from such plan during such period shall be presumed to have withdrawn from the plan pursuant to an agreement or arrangement, unless the employer proves otherwise by a preponderance of the evidence.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4209, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1225.)

This section is referred to in sections 1381, 1386, 1391, 1394, 1399, 1401, 1403 of this title.

(a) An employer who withdraws from a plan in complete or partial withdrawal is not liable to the plan if the employer—

(1) first had an obligation to contribute to the plan after September 26, 1980,

(2) had an obligation to contribute to the plan for no more than the lesser of—

(A) 6 consecutive plan years preceding the date on which the employer withdraws, or

(B) the number of years required for vesting under the plan,

(3) was required to make contributions to the plan for each such plan year in an amount equal to less than 2 percent of the sum of all employer contributions made to the plan for each such year, and

(4) has never avoided withdrawal liability because of the application of this section with respect to the plan.

(b) Subsection (a) of this section shall apply to an employer with respect to a plan only if—

(1) the plan is not a plan which primarily covers employees in the building and construction industry;

(2) the plan is amended to provide that subsection (a) of this section applies;

(3) the plan provides, or is amended to provide, that the reduction under section 411(a)(3)(E) of title 26 applies with respect to the employees of the employer; and

(4) the ratio of the assets of the plan for the plan year preceding the first plan year for which the employer was required to contribute to the plan to the benefit payments made during that plan year was at least 8 to 1.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4210, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1226; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

The amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer that withdraws from a plan shall be determined in accordance with subsection (b), (c), or (d) of this section.

(1) Except as provided in subsections (c) and (d) of this section, the amount of unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer that withdraws is the sum of—

(A) the employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the change in the plan's unfunded vested benefits for plan years ending after September 25, 1980, as determined under paragraph (2),

(B) the employer's proportional share, if any, of the unamortized amount of the plan's unfunded vested benefits at the end of the plan year ending before September 26, 1980, as determined under paragraph (3); and

(C) the employer's proportional share of the unamortized amounts of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits (if any) as determined under paragraph (4).

If the sum of the amounts determined with respect to an employer under paragraphs (2), (3), and (4) is negative, the unfunded vested benefits allocable to the employer shall be zero.

(2)(A) An employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the change in the plan's unfunded vested benefits for plan years ending after September 25, 1980, is the sum of the employer's proportional shares of the unamortized amount of the change in unfunded vested benefits for each plan year in which the employer has an obligation to contribute under the plan ending—

(i) after such date, and

(ii) before the plan year in which the withdrawal of the employer occurs.

(B) The change in a plan's unfunded vested benefits for a plan year is the amount by which—

(i) the unfunded vested benefits at the end of the plan year; exceeds

(ii) the sum of—

(I) the unamortized amount of the unfunded vested benefits for the last plan year ending before September 26, 1980, and

(II) the sum of the unamortized amounts of the change in unfunded vested benefits for each plan year ending after September 25, 1980, and preceding the plan year for which the change is determined.

(C) The unamortized amount of the change in a plan's unfunded vested benefits with respect to a plan year is the change in unfunded vested benefits for the plan year, reduced by 5 percent of such change for each succeeding plan year.

(D) The unamortized amount of the unfunded vested benefits for the last plan year ending before September 26, 1980, is the amount of the unfunded vested benefits as of the end of that plan year reduced by 5 percent of such amount for each succeeding plan year.

(E) An employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of a change in unfunded vested benefits is the product of—

(i) the unamortized amount of such change (as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws); multiplied by

(ii) a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the sum of the contributions required to be made under the plan by the employer for the year in which such change arose and for the 4 preceding plan years, and

(II) the denominator of which is the sum for the plan year in which such change arose and the 4 preceding plan years of all contributions made by employers who had an obligation to contribute under the plan for the plan year in which such change arose reduced by the contributions made in such years by employers who had withdrawn from the plan in the year in which the change arose.

(3) An employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the plan's unfunded vested benefits for the last plan year ending before September 26, 1980, is the product of—

(A) such unamortized amount; multiplied by—

(B) a fraction—

(i) the numerator of which is the sum of all contributions required to be made by the employer under the plan for the most recent 5 plan years ending before September 26, 1980, and

(ii) the denominator of which is the sum of all contributions made for the most recent 5 plan years ending before September 26, 1980, by all employers—

(I) who had an obligation to contribute under the plan for the first plan year ending on or after such date, and

(II) who had not withdrawn from the plan before such date.

(4)(A) An employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits is the sum of the employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits for each plan year ending before the plan year in which the employer withdrew from the plan.

(B) Except as otherwise provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation, the reallocated unfunded vested benefits for a plan year is the sum of—

(i) any amount which the plan sponsor determines in that plan year to be uncollectible for reasons arising out of cases or proceedings under title 11, or similar proceedings.1

(ii) any amount which the plan sponsor determines in that plan year will not be assessed as a result of the operation of section 1389, 1399(c)(1)(B), or 1405 of this title against an employer to whom a notice described in section 1399 of this title has been sent, and

(iii) any amount which the plan sponsor determines to be uncollectible or unassessable in that plan year for other reasons under standards not inconsistent with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(C) The unamortized amount of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits with respect to a plan year is the reallocated unfunded vested benefits for the plan year, reduced by 5 percent of such reallocated unfunded vested benefits for each succeeding plan year.

(D) An employer's proportional share of the unamortized amount of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits with respect to a plan year is the product of—

(i) the unamortized amount of the reallocated unfunded vested benefits (as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws); multiplied by

(ii) the fraction defined in paragraph (2)(E)(ii).

(1) A multiemployer plan, other than a plan which primarily covers employees in the building and construction industry, may be amended to provide that the amount of unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer that withdraws from the plan is an amount determined under paragraph (2), (3), (4), or (5) of this subsection, rather than under subsection (b) or (d) of this section. A plan described in section 1383(b)(1)(B)(i) of this title (relating to the building and construction industry) may be amended, to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation, to provide that the amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer not described in section 1383(b)(1)(A) of this title shall be determined in a manner different from that provided in subsection (b) of this section.

(2)(A) The amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to any employer under this paragraph is the sum of the amounts determined under subparagraphs (B) and (C).

(B) The amount determined under this subparagraph is the product of—

(i) the plan's unfunded vested benefits as of the end of the last plan year ending before September 26, 1980, reduced as if those obligations were being fully amortized in level annual installments over 15 years beginning with the first plan year ending on or after such date; multiplied by

(ii) a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the sum of all contributions required to be made by the employer under the plan for the last 5 plan years ending before September 26, 1980, and

(II) the denominator of which is the sum of all contributions made for the last 5 plan years ending before September 26, 1980, by all employers who had an obligation to contribute under the plan for the first plan year ending after September 25, 1980, and who had not withdrawn from the plan before such date.

(C) The amount determined under this subparagraph is the product of—

(i) an amount equal to—

(I) the plan's unfunded vested benefits as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws, less

(II) the sum of the value as of such date of all outstanding claims for withdrawal liability which can reasonably be expected to be collected, with respect to employers withdrawing before such plan year, and that portion of the amount determined under subparagraph (B)(i) which is allocable to employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan in the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws and who also had an obligation to contribute under the plan for the first plan year ending after September 25, 1980; multiplied by

(ii) a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the total amount required to be contributed under the plan by the employer for the last 5 plan years ending before the date on which the employer withdraws, and

(II) the denominator of which is the total amount contributed under the plan by all employers for the last 5 plan years ending before the date on which the employer withdraws, increased by the amount of any employer contributions owed with respect to earlier periods which were collected in those plan years, and decreased by any amount contributed by an employer who withdrew from the plan under this part during those plan years.

(D) The corporation may by regulation permit adjustments in any denominator under this section, consistent with the purposes of this subchapter, where such adjustment would be appropriate to ease administrative burdens of plan sponsors in calculating such denominators.

(3) The amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer under this paragraph is the product of—

(A) the plan's unfunded vested benefits as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws, less the value as of the end of such year of all outstanding claims for withdrawal liability which can reasonably be expected to be collected from employers withdrawing before such year; multiplied by

(B) a fraction—

(i) the numerator of which is the total amount required to be contributed by the employer under the plan for the last 5 plan years ending before the withdrawal, and

(ii) the denominator of which is the total amount contributed under the plan by all employers for the last 5 plan years ending before the withdrawal, increased by any employer contributions owed with respect to earlier periods which were collected in those plan years, and decreased by any amount contributed to the plan during those plan years by employers who withdrew from the plan under this section during those plan years.

(4)(A) The amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer under this paragraph is equal to the sum of—

(i) the plan's unfunded vested benefits which are attributable to participants’ service with the employer (determined as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws), and

(ii) the employer's proportional share of any unfunded vested benefits which are not attributable to service with the employer or other employers who are obligated to contribute under the plan in the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws (determined as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws).

(B) The plan's unfunded vested benefits which are attributable to participants’ service with the employer is the amount equal to the value of nonforfeitable benefits under the plan which are attributable to participants’ service with such employer (determined under plan rules not inconsistent with regulations of the corporation) decreased by the share of plan assets determined under subparagraph (C) which is allocated to the employer as provided under subparagraph (D).

(C) The value of plan assets determined under this subparagraph is the value of plan assets allocated to nonforfeitable benefits which are attributable to service with the employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan in the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws, which is determined by multiplying—

(i) the value of the plan assets as of the end of the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws, by

(ii) a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the value of nonforfeitable benefits which are attributable to service with such employers, and

(II) the denominator of which is the value of all nonforfeitable benefits under the plan

as of the end of the plan year.

(D) The share of plan assets, determined under subparagraph (C), which is allocated to the employer shall be determined in accordance with one of the following methods which shall be adopted by the plan by amendment:

(i) by multiplying the value of plan assets determined under subparagraph (C) by a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the value of the nonforfeitable benefits which are attributable to service with the employer, and

(II) the denominator of which is the value of the nonforfeitable benefits which are attributable to service with all employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan in the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws;

(ii) by multiplying the value of plan assets determined under subparagraph (C) by a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the sum of all contributions (accumulated with interest) which have been made to the plan by the employer for the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws and all preceding plan years; and

(II) the denominator of which is the sum of all contributions (accumulated with interest) which have been made to the plan (for the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws and all preceding plan years) by all employers who have an obligation to contribute to the plan for the plan year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws; or

(iii) by multiplying the value of plan assets under subparagraph (C) by a fraction—

(I) the numerator of which is the amount determined under clause (ii)(I) of this subparagraph, less the sum of benefit payments (accumulated with interest) made to participants (and their beneficiaries) for the plan years described in such clause (ii)(I) which are attributable to service with the employer; and

(II) the denominator of which is the amount determined under clause (ii)(II) of this subparagraph, reduced by the sum of benefit payments (accumulated with interest) made to participants (and their beneficiaries) for the plan years described in such clause (ii)(II) which are attributable to service with respect to the employers described in such clause (ii)(II).

(E) The amount of the plan's unfunded vested benefits for a plan year preceding the plan year in which an employer withdraws, which is not attributable to service with employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan in the plan year preceding the plan year in which such employer withdraws, is equal to—

(i) an amount equal to—

(I) the value of all nonforfeitable benefits under the plan at the end of such plan year, reduced by

(II) the value of nonforfeitable benefits under the plan at the end of such plan year which are attributable to participants’ service with employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan for such plan year; reduced by

(ii) an amount equal to—

(I) the value of the plan assets as of the end of such plan year, reduced by

(II) the value of plan assets as of the end of such plan year as determined under subparagraph (C); reduced by

(iii) the value of all outstanding claims for withdrawal liability which can reasonably be expected to be collected with respect to employers withdrawing before the year preceding the plan year in which the employer withdraws.

(F) The employer's proportional share described in subparagraph (A)(ii) for a plan year is the amount determined under subparagraph (E) for the employer, but not in excess of an amount which bears the same ratio to the sum of the amounts determined under subparagraph (E) for all employers under the plan as the amount determined under subparagraph (C) for the employer bears to the sum of the amounts determined under subparagraph (C) for all employers under the plan.

(G) The corporation may prescribe by regulation other methods which a plan may adopt for allocating assets to determine the amount of the unfunded vested benefits attributable to service with the employer and to determine the employer's share of unfunded vested benefits not attributable to service with employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan in the plan year in which the employer withdraws.

(5)(A) The corporation shall prescribe by regulation a procedure by which a plan may, by amendment, adopt any other alternative method for determining an employer's allocable share of unfunded vested benefits under this section, subject to the approval of the corporation based on its determination that adoption of the method by the plan would not significantly increase the risk of loss to plan participants and beneficiaries or to the corporation.

(B) The corporation may prescribe by regulation standard approaches for alternative methods, other than those set forth in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection, which a plan may adopt under subparagraph (A), for which the corporation may waive or modify the approval requirements of subparagraph (A). Any alternative method shall provide for the allocation of substantially all of a plan's unfunded vested benefits among employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan.

(C) Unless the corporation by regulation provides otherwise, a plan may be amended to provide that a period of more than 5 but not more than 10 plan years may be used for determining the numerator and denominator of any fraction which is used under any method authorized under this section for determining an employer's allocable share of unfunded vested benefits under this section.

(D) The corporation may by regulation permit adjustments in any denominator under this section, consistent with the purposes of this subchapter, where such adjustment would be appropriate to ease administrative burdens of plan sponsors in calculating such denominators.

(1) The method of calculating an employer's allocable share of unfunded vested benefits set forth in subsection (c)(3) of this section shall be the method for calculating an employer's allocable share of unfunded vested benefits under a plan to which section 404(c) of title 26, or a continuation of such a plan, applies, unless the plan is amended to adopt another method authorized under subsection (b) or (c) of this section.

(2) Sections 1384, 1389, 1399(c)(1)(B), and 1405 of this title shall not apply with respect to the withdrawal of an employer from a plan described in paragraph (1) unless the plan is amended to provide that any of such sections apply.

In the case of a transfer of liabilities to another plan incident to an employer's withdrawal or partial withdrawal, the withdrawn employer's liability under this part shall be reduced in an amount equal to the value, as of the end of the last plan year ending on or before the date of the withdrawal, of the transferred unfunded vested benefits.

In the case of a withdrawal following a merger of multiemployer plans, subsection (b), (c), or (d) of this section shall be applied in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation; except that, if a withdrawal occurs in the first plan year beginning after a merger of multiemployer plans, the determination under this section shall be made as if each of the multiemployer plans had remained separate plans.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4211, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1226; amended Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(1)(A), (B), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (d)(1). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

1984—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–369, §558(b)(1)(A), (B), substituted “September 25, 1980” for “April 28, 1980” in pars. (1)(A) and (2)(A), (B)(ii)(II), and “September 26, 1980” for “April 29, 1980” in pars. (1)(B) and (2)(B)(ii)(I), (D), and in par. (3) in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and in subpar. (B)(i), (ii).

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 98–369, §558(b)(1)(A), (B), substituted “September 25, 1980” for “April 28, 1980” in subpars. (B)(ii)(II) and (C)(i)(II) and “September 26, 1980” for “April 29, 1980” in subpar. (B)(i), (ii)(I), (II).

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1381, 1386, 1389, 1394, 1399, 1400, 1401, 1415 of this title.

1 So in original. The period probably should be a comma.

For purposes of this part, the term “obligation to contribute” means an obligation to contribute arising—

(1) under one or more collective bargaining (or related) agreements, or

(2) as a result of a duty under applicable labor-management relations law, but

does not include an obligation to pay withdrawal liability under this section or to pay delinquent contributions.

Payments of withdrawal liability under this part shall not be considered contributions for purposes of this part.

If a principal purpose of any transaction is to evade or avoid liability under this part, this part shall be applied (and liability shall be determined and collected) without regard to such transaction.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4212, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1233.)

This section is referred to in sections 1342, 1401, 1425 of this title; title 26 sections 418A, 418D.

The corporation may prescribe by regulation actuarial assumptions which may be used by a plan actuary in determining the unfunded vested benefits of a plan for purposes of determining an employer's withdrawal liability under this part. Withdrawal liability under this part shall be determined by each plan on the basis of—

(1) actuarial assumptions and methods which, in the aggregate, are reasonable (taking into account the experience of the plan and reasonable expectations) and which, in combination, offer the actuary's best estimate of anticipated experience under the plan, or

(2) actuarial assumptions and methods set forth in the corporation's regulations for purposes of determining an employer's withdrawal liability.

In determining the unfunded vested benefits of a plan for purposes of determining an employer's withdrawal liability under this part, the plan actuary may—

(1) rely on the most recent complete actuarial valuation used for purposes of section 412 of title 26 and reasonable estimates for the interim years of the unfunded vested benefits, and

(2) in the absence of complete data, rely on the data available or on data secured by a sampling which can reasonably be expected to be representative of the status of the entire plan.

For purposes of this part, the term “unfunded vested benefits” means with respect to a plan, an amount equal to—

(A) the value of nonforfeitable benefits under the plan, less

(B) the value of the assets of the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4213, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1233; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

(a) No plan rule or amendment adopted after January 31, 1981, under section 1389 or 1391(c) of this title may be applied without the employer's consent with respect to liability for a withdrawal or partial withdrawal which occurred before the date on which the rule or amendment was adopted.

(b) All plan rules and amendments authorized under this part shall operate and be applied uniformly with respect to each employer, except that special provisions may be made to take into account the creditworthiness of an employer. The plan sponsor shall give notice to all employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan and to all employee organizations representing employees covered under the plan of any plan rules or amendments adopted pursuant to this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4214, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1234.)

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

The corporation may, by regulation, require the plan sponsor of a multiemployer plan to provide notice to the corporation when the withdrawal from the plan by any employer has resulted, or will result, in a significant reduction in the amount of aggregate contributions under the plan made by employers.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4215, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1234.)

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

In the case of a plan described in subsection (b) of this section—

(1) if an employer withdraws prior to a termination described in section 1341a(a)(2) of this title, the amount of withdrawal liability to be paid in any year by such employer shall be an amount equal to the greater of—

(A) the amount determined under section 1399(c)(1)(C)(i) of this title, or

(B) the product of—

(i) the number of contribution base units for which the employer would have been required to make contributions for the prior plan year if the employer had not withdrawn, multiplied by

(ii) the contribution rate for the plan year which would be required to meet the amortization schedules contained in section 1423(d)(3)(B)(ii) of this title (determined without regard to any limitation on such rate otherwise provided by this subchapter)

except that an employer shall not be required to pay an amount in excess of the withdrawal liability computed with interest; and

(2) the withdrawal liability of an employer who withdraws after December 31, 1983, as a result of a termination described in section 1341a(a)(2) of this title which is agreed to by the labor organization that appoints the employee representative on the joint board of trustees which sponsors the plan, shall be determined under subsection (c) of this section if—

(A) as a result of prior employer withdrawals in any plan year commencing after January 1, 1980, the number of contribution base units is reduced to less than 67 percent of the average number of such units for the calendar years 1974 through 1979; and

(B) at least 50 percent of the withdrawal liability attributable to the first 33 percent decline described in subparagraph (A) has been determined by the plan sponsor to be uncollectible within the meaning of regulations of the corporation of general applicability; and

(C) the rate of employer contributions under the plan for each plan year following the first plan year beginning after September 26, 1980 and preceding the termination date equals or exceeds the rate described in section 1423(d)(3) of this title.

A plan is described in this subsection if—

(1) it is a plan described in section 404(c) of title 26 or a continuation thereof; and

(2) participation in the plan is substantially limited to individuals who retired prior to January 1, 1976.

(1) The amount of an employer's liability under this paragraph is the product of—

(A) the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability determined without regard to this section, and

(B) the greater of 90 percent, or a fraction—

(i) the numerator of which is an amount equal to the portion of the plan's unfunded vested benefits that is attributable to plan participants who have a total of 10 or more years of signatory service, and

(ii) the denominator of which is an amount equal to the total unfunded vested benefits of the plan.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term “a year of signatory service” means a year during any portion of which a participant was employed for an employer who was obligated to contribute in that year, or who was subsequently obligated to contribute.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4216, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1234.)

This section is referred to in sections 1401, 1423 of this title; title 26 section 418B.

(a) For the purpose of determining the amount of unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer for a partial or complete withdrawal from a plan which occurs after September 25, 1980, and for the purpose of determining whether there has been a partial withdrawal after such date, the amount of contributions, and the number of contribution base units, of such employer properly allocable—

(1) to work performed under a collective bargaining agreement for which there was a permanent cessation of the obligation to contribute before September 26, 1980, or

(2) to work performed at a facility at which all covered operations permanently ceased before September 26, 1980, or for which there was a permanent cessation of the obligation to contribute before that date,

shall not be taken into account.

(b) A plan may, in a manner not inconsistent with regulations, which shall be prescribed by the corporation, adjust the amount of unfunded vested benefits allocable to other employers under a plan maintained by an employer described in subsection (a) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4217, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1235; amended Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(1)(A), (B), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899.)

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–369, §558(b)(1)(A), (B), substituted “September 25, 1980” for “April 28, 1980” in provisions preceding par. (1) and “September 26, 1980” for “April 29, 1980” in pars. (1) and (2).

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this part, an employer shall not be considered to have withdrawn from a plan solely because—

(1) an employer ceases to exist by reason of—

(A) a change in corporate structure described in section 1369(b) of this title, or

(B) a change to an unincorporated form of business enterprise,

if the change causes no interruption in employer contributions or obligations to contribute under the plan, or

(2) an employer suspends contributions under the plan during a labor dispute involving its employees.

For purposes of this part, a successor or parent corporation or other entity resulting from any such change shall be considered the original employer.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4218, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1236; amended Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1879(u)(4), as added Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7862(b)(1)(C), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2432; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7893(f), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2447.)

1989—Par. (1)(A). Pub. L. 101–239, §7893(f), made identical amendment to that of Pub. L. 99–514, §1879(u)(4), as added by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(1)(C), see below.

Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(1)(C), added Pub. L. 99–514, §1879(u)(4), see 1986 Amendment note below.

1986—Par. (1)(A). Pub. L. 99–514, §1879(u)(4), as added by Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(b)(1)(C), substituted “section 1369(b) of this title” for “section 1362(d) of this title”.

Amendment by section 7862(b)(1)(C) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Amendment by section 7893(f) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Single-Employer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–272, title XI, to which such amendment relates, see section 7893(h) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

This section is referred to in section 1401 of this title.

An employer shall, within 30 days after a written request from the plan sponsor, furnish such information as the plan sponsor reasonably determines to be necessary to enable the plan sponsor to comply with the requirements of this part.

(1) As soon as practicable after an employer's complete or partial withdrawal, the plan sponsor shall—

(A) notify the employer of—

(i) the amount of the liability, and

(ii) the schedule for liability payments, and

(B) demand payment in accordance with the schedule.

(2)(A) No later than 90 days after the employer receives the notice described in paragraph (1), the employer—

(i) may ask the plan sponsor to review any specific matter relating to the determination of the employer's liability and the schedule of payments,

(ii) may identify any inaccuracy in the determination of the amount of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to the employer, and

(iii) may furnish any additional relevant information to the plan sponsor.

(B) After a reasonable review of any matter raised, the plan sponsor shall notify the employer of—

(i) the plan sponsor's decision,

(ii) the basis for the decision, and

(iii) the reason for any change in the determination of the employer's liability or schedule of liability payments.

(1)(A)(i) Except as provided in subparagraphs (B) and (D) of this paragraph and in paragraphs (4) and (5), an employer shall pay the amount determined under section 1391 of this title, adjusted if appropriate first under section 1389 of this title and then under section 1386 of this title over the period of years necessary to amortize the amount in level annual payments determined under subparagraph (C), calculated as if the first payment were made on the first day of the plan year following the plan year in which the withdrawal occurs and as if each subsequent payment were made on the first day of each subsequent plan year. Actual payment shall commence in accordance with paragraph (2).

(ii) The determination of the amortization period described in clause (i) shall be based on the assumptions used for the most recent actuarial valuation for the plan.

(B) In any case in which the amortization period described in subparagraph (A) exceeds 20 years, the employer's liability shall be limited to the first 20 annual payments determined under subparagraph (C).

(C)(i) Except as provided in subparagraph (E), the amount of each annual payment shall be the product of—

(I) the average annual number of contribution base units for the period of 3 consecutive plan years, during the period of 10 consecutive plan years ending before the plan year in which the withdrawal occurs, in which the number of contribution base units for which the employer had an obligation to contribute under the plan is the highest, and

(II) the highest contribution rate at which the employer had an obligation to contribute under the plan during the 10 plan years ending with the plan year in which the withdrawal occurs.

For purposes of the preceding sentence, a partial withdrawal described in section 1385(a)(1) of this title shall be deemed to occur on the last day of the first year of the 3-year testing period described in section 1385(b)(1)(B)(i) of this title.

(ii)(I) A plan may be amended to provide that for any plan year ending before 1986 the amount of each annual payment shall be (in lieu of the amount determined under clause (i)) the average of the required employer contributions under the plan for the period of 3 consecutive plan years (during the period of 10 consecutive plan years ending with the plan year preceding the plan year in which the withdrawal occurs) for which such required contributions were the highest.

(II) Subparagraph (B) shall not apply to any plan year to which this clause applies.

(III) This clause shall not apply in the case of any withdrawal described in subparagraph (D).

(IV) If under a plan this clause applies to any plan year but does not apply to the next plan year, this clause shall not apply to any plan year after such next plan year.

(V) For purposes of this clause, the term “required contributions” means, for any period, the amounts which the employer was obligated to contribute for such period (not taking into account any delinquent contribution for any other period).

(iii) A plan may be amended to provide that for the first plan year ending on or after September 26, 1980, the number “5” shall be substituted for the number “10” each place it appears in clause (i) or clause (ii) (whichever is appropriate). If the plan is so amended, the number “5” shall be increased by one for each succeeding plan year until the number “10” is reached.

(D) In any case in which a multiemployer plan terminates by the withdrawal of every employer from the plan, or in which substantially all the employers withdraw from a plan pursuant to an agreement or arrangement to withdraw from the plan—

(i) the liability of each such employer who has withdrawn shall be determined (or redetermined) under this paragraph without regard to subparagraph (B), and

(ii) notwithstanding any other provision of this part, the total unfunded vested benefits of the plan shall be fully allocated among all such employers in a manner not inconsistent with regulations which shall be prescribed by the corporation.

Withdrawal by an employer from a plan, during a period of 3 consecutive plan years within which substantially all the employers who have an obligation to contribute under the plan withdraw, shall be presumed to be a withdrawal pursuant to an agreement or arrangement, unless the employer proves otherwise by a preponderance of the evidence.

(E) In the case of a partial withdrawal described in section 1385(a) of this title, the amount of each annual payment shall be the product of—

(i) the amount determined under subparagraph (C) (determined without regard to this subparagraph), multiplied by

(ii) the fraction determined under section 1386(a)(2) of this title.

(2) Withdrawal liability shall be payable in accordance with the schedule set forth by the plan sponsor under subsection (b)(1) of this section beginning no later than 60 days after the date of the demand notwithstanding any request for review or appeal of determinations of the amount of such liability or of the schedule.

(3) Each annual payment determined under paragraph (1)(C) shall be payable in 4 equal installments due quarterly, or at other intervals specified by plan rules. If a payment is not made when due, interest on the payment shall accrue from the due date until the date on which the payment is made.

(4) The employer shall be entitled to prepay the outstanding amount of the unpaid annual withdrawal liability payments determined under paragraph (1)(C), plus accrued interest, if any, in whole or in part, without penalty. If the prepayment is made pursuant to a withdrawal which is later determined to be part of a withdrawal described in paragraph (1)(D), the withdrawal liability of the employer shall not be limited to the amount of the prepayment.

(5) In the event of a default, a plan sponsor may require immediate payment of the outstanding amount of an employer's withdrawal liability, plus accrued interest on the total outstanding liability from the due date of the first payment which was not timely made. For purposes of this section, the term “default” means—

(A) the failure of an employer to make, when due, any payment under this section, if the failure is not cured within 60 days after the employer receives written notification from the plan sponsor of such failure, and

(B) any other event defined in rules adopted by the plan which indicates a substantial likelihood that an employer will be unable to pay its withdrawal liability.

(6) Except as provided in paragraph (1)(A)(ii), interest under this subsection shall be charged at rates based on prevailing market rates for comparable obligations, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(7) A multiemployer plan may adopt rules for other terms and conditions for the satisfaction of an employer's withdrawal liability if such rules—

(A) are consistent with this chapter, and

(B) are not inconsistent with regulations of the corporation.

(8) In the case of a terminated multiemployer plan, an employer's obligation to make payments under this section ceases at the end of the plan year in which the assets of the plan (exclusive of withdrawal liability claims) are sufficient to meet all obligations of the plan, as determined by the corporation.

The prohibitions provided in section 1106(a) of this title do not apply to any action required or permitted under this part.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4219, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1236; amended Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(1)(B), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (c)(7)(A), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1984—Subsec. (c)(1)(C)(iii). Pub. L. 98–369 substituted “September 26, 1980” for “April 29, 1980”.

This section is referred to in sections 1381, 1386, 1391, 1396, 1401, 1403, 1415 of this title.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, if an amendment to a multiemployer plan authorized by any preceding section of this part is adopted more than 36 months after the effective date of this section, the amendment shall be effective only if the corporation approves the amendment, or, within 90 days after the corporation receives notice and a copy of the amendment from the plan sponsor, fails to disapprove the amendment.

An amendment permitted by section 1391(c)(5) of this title may be adopted only in accordance with that section.

The corporation shall disapprove an amendment referred to in subsection (a) or (b) of this section only if the corporation determines that the amendment creates an unreasonable risk of loss to plan participants and beneficiaries or to the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4220, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1239.)

For the effective date of this section, referred to in subsec. (a), see 1461(e)(2) of this title.

(1) Any dispute between an employer and the plan sponsor of a multiemployer plan concerning a determination made under sections 1381 through 1399 of this title shall be resolved through arbitration. Either party may initiate the arbitration proceeding within a 60-day period after the earlier of—

(A) the date of notification to the employer under section 1399(b)(2)(B) of this title, or

(B) 120 days after the date of the employer's request under section 1399(b)(2)(A) of this title.

The parties may jointly initiate arbitration within the 180-day period after the date of the plan sponsor's demand under section 1399(b)(1) of this title.

(2) An arbitration proceeding under this section shall be conducted in accordance with fair and equitable procedures to be promulgated by the corporation. The plan sponsor may purchase insurance to cover potential liability of the arbitrator. If the parties have not provided for the costs of the arbitration, including arbitrator's fees, by agreement, the arbitrator shall assess such fees. The arbitrator may also award reasonable attorney's fees.

(3)(A) For purposes of any proceeding under this section, any determination made by a plan sponsor under sections 1381 through 1399 of this title and section 1405 of this title is presumed correct unless the party contesting the determination shows by a preponderance of the evidence that the determination was unreasonable or clearly erroneous.

(B) In the case of the determination of a plan's unfunded vested benefits for a plan year, the determination is presumed correct unless a party contesting the determination shows by a preponderance of evidence that—

(i) the actuarial assumptions and methods used in the determination were, in the aggregate, unreasonable (taking into account the experience of the plan and reasonable expectations), or

(ii) the plan's actuary made a significant error in applying the actuarial assumptions or methods.

(1) If no arbitration proceeding has been initiated pursuant to subsection (a) of this section, the amounts demanded by the plan sponsor under section 1399(b)(1) of this title shall be due and owing on the schedule set forth by the plan sponsor. The plan sponsor may bring an action in a State or Federal court of competent jurisdiction for collection.

(2) Upon completion of the arbitration proceedings in favor of one of the parties, any party thereto may bring an action, no later than 30 days after the issuance of an arbitrator's award, in an appropriate United States district court in accordance with section 1451 of this title to enforce, vacate, or modify the arbitrator's award.

(3) Any arbitration proceedings under this section shall, to the extent consistent with this subchapter, be conducted in the same manner, subject to the same limitations, carried out with the same powers (including subpena power), and enforced in United States courts as an arbitration proceeding carried out under title 9.

In any proceeding under subsection (b) of this section, there shall be a presumption, rebuttable only by a clear preponderance of the evidence, that the findings of fact made by the arbitrator were correct.

Payments shall be made by an employer in accordance with the determinations made under this part until the arbitrator issues a final decision with respect to the determination submitted for arbitration, with any necessary adjustments in subsequent payments for overpayments or underpayments arising out of the decision of the arbitrator with respect to the determination. If the employer fails to make timely payment in accordance with such final decision, the employer shall be treated as being delinquent in the making of a contribution required under the plan (within the meaning of section 1145 of this title).

If any employer requests in writing that the plan sponsor make available to the employer general information necessary for the employer to compute its withdrawal liability with respect to the plan (other than information which is unique to that employer), the plan sponsor shall furnish the information to the employer without charge. If any employer requests in writing that the plan sponsor make an estimate of such employer's potential withdrawal liability with respect to the plan or to provide information unique to that employer, the plan sponsor may require the employer to pay the reasonable cost of making such estimate or providing such information.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4221, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1239.)

This section is referred to in section 1451 of this title.

By May 1, 1982, the corporation shall establish by regulation a supplemental program to reimburse multiemployer plans for withdrawal liability payments which are due from employers and which are determined to be uncollectible for reasons arising out of cases or proceedings involving the employers under title 11, or similar cases or proceedings. Participation in the supplemental program shall be on a voluntary basis, and a plan which elects coverage under the program shall pay premiums to the corporation in accordance with a premium schedule which shall be prescribed from time to time by the corporation. The premium schedule shall contain such rates and bases for the application of such rates as the corporation considers to be appropriate.

The corporation may provide under the program for reimbursement of amounts of withdrawal liability determined to be uncollectible for any other reasons the corporation considers appropriate.

The cost of the program (including such administrative and legal costs as the corporation considers appropriate) may be paid only out of premiums collected under such program.

The supplemental program may be offered to eligible plans on such terms and conditions, and with such limitations with respect to the payment of reimbursements (including the exclusion of de minimis amounts of uncollectible employer liability, and the reduction or elimination of reimbursements which cannot be paid from collected premiums) and such restrictions on withdrawal from the program, as the corporation considers necessary and appropriate.

The corporation may enter into arrangements with private insurers to carry out in whole or in part the program authorized by this section and may require plans which elect coverage under the program to elect coverage by those private insurers.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4222, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1240.)

This section is referred to in sections 1082, 1305, 1306, 1403 of this title; title 26 section 412.

The plan sponsors of multiemployer plans may establish or participate in a withdrawal liability payment fund.

For purposes of this section, the term “withdrawal liability payment fund”, and the term “fund”, mean a trust which—

(1) is established and maintained under section 501(c)(22) of title 26,

(2) maintains agreements which cover a substantial portion of the participants who are in multiemployer plans which (under the rules of the trust instrument) are eligible to participate in the fund,

(3) is funded by amounts paid by the plans which participate in the fund, and

(4) is administered by a Board of Trustees, and in the administration of the fund there is equal representation of—

(A) trustees representing employers who are obligated to contribute to the plans participating in the fund, and

(B) trustees representing employees who are participants in plans which participate in the fund.

(1) If an employer withdraws from a plan which participates in a withdrawal liability payment fund, then, to the extent provided in the trust, the fund shall pay to that plan—

(A) the employer's unattributable liability,

(B) the employer's withdrawal liability payments which would have been due but for section 1388, 1389, 1399, or 1405 of this title,

(C) the employer's withdrawal liability payments to the extent they are uncollectible.

(2) The fund may provide for the payment of the employer's attributable liability if the fund—

(A) provides for the payment of both the attributable and the unattributable liability of the employer in a single payment, and

(B) is subrogated to all rights of the plan against the employer.

(3) For purposes of this section, the term—

(A) “attributable liability” means the excess, if any, determined under the provisions of a plan not inconsistent with regulations of the corporation, of—

(i) the value of vested benefits accrued as a result of service with the employer, over

(ii) the value of plan assets attributed to the employer, and

(B) “unattributable liability” means the excess of withdrawal liability over attributable liability.

Such terms may be further defined, and the manner in which they shall be applied may be prescribed, by the corporation by regulation.

(4)(A) The trust of a fund shall be maintained for the exclusive purpose of paying—

(i) any amount described in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), and

(ii) reasonable and necessary administrative expenses in connection with the establishment and operation of the trust and the processing of claims against the fund.

(B) The amounts paid by a plan to a fund shall be deemed a reasonable expense of administering the plan under sections 1103(c)(1) and 1104(a)(1)(A)(ii) of this title, and the payments made by a fund to a participating plan shall be deemed services necessary for the operation of the plan within the meaning of section 1108(b)(2) of this title or within the meaning of section 4975(d)(2) of title 26.

(1) For purposes of this part—

(A) only amounts paid by the fund to a plan under subsection (c)(1)(A) of this section shall be credited to withdrawal liability otherwise payable by the employer, unless the plan otherwise provides, and

(B) any amounts paid by the fund under subsection (c) of this section to a plan shall be treated by the plan as a payment of withdrawal liability to such plan.

(2) For purposes of applying provisions relating to the funding standard accounts (and minimum contribution requirements), amounts paid from the plan to the fund shall be applied to reduce the amount treated as contributed to the plan.

The fund shall be subrogated to the rights of the plan against the employer that has withdrawn from the plan for amounts paid by a fund to a plan under—

(1) subsection (c)(1)(A) of this section, to the extent not credited under subsection (d)(1)(A) of this section, and

(2) subsection (c)(1)(C) of this section.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, a fiduciary of the fund shall discharge the fiduciary's duties with respect to the fund in accordance with the standards for fiduciaries prescribed by this chapter (to the extent not inconsistent with the purposes of this section), and in accordance with the documents and instruments governing the fund insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of this chapter (to the extent not inconsistent with the purposes of this section). The provisions of the preceding sentence shall supersede any and all State laws relating to fiduciaries insofar as they may now or hereafter relate to a fund to which this section applies.

No payments shall be made from a fund to a plan on the occasion of a withdrawal or partial withdrawal of an employer from such plan if the employees representing the withdrawn contribution base units continue, after such withdrawal, to be represented under section 159 of this title (or other applicable labor laws) in negotiations with such employer by the labor organization which represented such employees immediately preceding such withdrawal.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the purchase of insurance by an employer from any other person, to limit the circumstances under which such insurance would be payable, or to limit in any way the terms and conditions of such insurance.

The corporation may provide by regulation rules not inconsistent with this section governing the establishment and maintenance of funds, but only to the extent necessary to carry out the purposes of this part (other than section 1402 of this title).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4223, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1241; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (f), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

1989—Subsecs. (b)(1), (c)(4)(B). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1002, 1082 of this title; title 26 sections 194A, 412, 501, 4975.

A multiemployer plan may adopt rules providing for other terms and conditions for the satisfaction of an employer's withdrawal liability if such rules are consistent with this chapter and with such regulations as may be prescribed by the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4224, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1242.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

(1) In the case of bona fide sale of all or substantially all of the employer's assets in an arm's-length transaction to an unrelated party (within the meaning of section 1384(d) of this title), the unfunded vested benefits allocable to an employer (after the application of all sections of this part having a lower number designation than this section), other than an employer undergoing reorganization under title 11 or similar provisions of State law, shall not exceed the greater of—

(A) a portion (determined under paragraph (2)) of the liquidation or dissolution value of the employer (determined after the sale or exchange of such assets), or

(B) the unfunded vested benefits attributable to employees of the employer.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the portion shall be determined in accordance with the following table:

If the liquidation or dissolution value of the employer after the sale or exchange is— | The portion is— |
---|---|

Not more than $2,000,000 | 30 percent of the amount. |

More than $2,000,000, but not more than $4,000,000 | $600,000, plus 35 percent of the amount in excess of $2,000,000. |

More than $4,000,000, but not more than $6,000,000 | $1,300,000, plus 40 percent of the amount in excess of $4,000,000. |

More than $6,000,000, but not more than $7,000,000 | $2,100,000, plus 45 percent of the amount in excess of $6,000,000. |

More than $7,000,000, but not more than $8,000,000 | $2,550,000, plus 50 percent of the amount in excess of $7,000,000. |

More than $8,000,000, but not more than $9,000,000 | $3,050,000, plus 60 percent of the amount in excess of $8,000,000. |

More than $9,000,000, but not more than $10,000,000 | $3,650,000, plus 70 percent of the amount in excess of $9,000,000. |

More than $10,000,000 | $4,350,000, plus 80 percent of the amount in excess of $10,000,000. |


In the case of an insolvent employer undergoing liquidation or dissolution, the unfunded vested benefits allocable to that employer shall not exceed an amount equal to the sum of—

(1) 50 percent of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to the employer (determined without regard to this section), and

(2) that portion of 50 percent of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to the employer (as determined under paragraph (1)) which does not exceed the liquidation or dissolution value of the employer determined—

(A) as of the commencement of liquidation or dissolution, and

(B) after reducing the liquidation or dissolution value of the employer by the amount determined under paragraph (1).

To the extent that the withdrawal liability of an employer is attributable to his obligation to contribute to or under a plan as an individual (whether as a sole proprietor or as a member of a partnership), property which may be exempt from the estate under section 522 of title 11 or under similar provisions of law, shall not be subject to enforcement of such liability.

For purposes of this section—

(1) an employer is insolvent if the liabilities of the employer, including withdrawal liability under the plan (determined without regard to subsection (b) of this section), exceed the assets of the employer (determined as of the commencement of the liquidation or dissolution), and

(2) the liquidation or dissolution value of the employer shall be determined without regard to such withdrawal liability.

In the case of one or more withdrawals of an employer attributable to the same sale, liquidation, or dissolution, under regulations prescribed by the corporation—

(1) all such withdrawals shall be treated as a single withdrawal for the purpose of applying this section, and

(2) the withdrawal liability of the employer to each plan shall be an amount which bears the same ratio to the present value of the withdrawal liability payments to all plans (after the application of the preceding provisions of this section) as the withdrawal liability of the employer to such plan (determined without regard to this section) bears to the withdrawal liability of the employer to all such plans (determined without regard to this section).

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4225, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1243.)

This section is referred to in sections 1381, 1386, 1391, 1401, 1403 of this title.

Unless otherwise provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation, a plan sponsor may not cause a multiemployer plan to merge with one or more multiemployer plans, or engage in a transfer of assets and liabilities to or from another multiemployer plan, unless such merger or transfer satisfies the requirements of subsection (b) of this section.

A merger or transfer satisfies the requirements of this section if—

(1) in accordance with regulations of the corporation, the plan sponsor of a multiemployer plan notifies the corporation of a merger with or transfer of plan assets or liabilities to another multiemployer plan at least 120 days before the effective date of the merger or transfer;

(2) no participant's or beneficiary's accrued benefit will be lower immediately after the effective date of the merger or transfer than the benefit immediately before that date;

(3) the benefits of participants and beneficiaries are not reasonably expected to be subject to suspension under section 1426 of this title; and

(4) an actuarial valuation of the assets and liabilities of each of the affected plans has been performed during the plan year preceding the effective date of the merger or transfer, based upon the most recent data available as of the day before the start of that plan year, or other valuation of such assets and liabilities performed under such standards and procedures as the corporation may prescribe by regulation.

The merger of multiemployer plans or the transfer of assets or liabilities between multiemployer plans, shall be deemed not to constitute a violation of the provisions of section 1106(a) of this title or section 1106(b)(2) of this title if the corporation determines that the merger or transfer otherwise satisfies the requirements of this section.

A plan to which liabilities are transferred under this section is a successor plan for purposes of section 1322a(b)(2)(B) of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4231, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1244.)

Part effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1108, 1415 of this title; title 26 section 4975.

A transfer of assets or liabilities between, or a merger of, a multiemployer plan and a single-employer plan shall satisfy the requirements of this section.

No accrued benefit of a participant or beneficiary may be lower immediately after the effective date of a transfer or merger described in subsection (a) of this section than the benefit immediately before that date.

(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (2) and (3), a multiemployer plan which transfers liabilities to a single-employer plan shall be liable to the corporation if the single-employer plan terminates within 60 months after the effective date of the transfer. The amount of liability shall be the lesser of—

(A) the amount of the plan asset insufficiency of the terminated single-employer plan, less 30 percent of the net worth of the employer who maintained the single-employer plan, determined in accordance with section 1362 or 1364 this title, or

(B) the value, on the effective date of the transfer, of the unfunded benefits transferred to the single-employer plan which are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title.

(2) A multiemployer plan shall be liable to the corporation as provided in paragraph (1) unless, within 180 days after the corporation receives an application (together with such information as the corporation may reasonably require for purposes of such application) from the multiemployer plan sponsor for a determination under this paragraph—

(A) the corporation determines that the interests of the plan participants and beneficiaries and of the corporation are adequately protected, or

(B) fails to make any determination regarding the adequacy with which such interests are protected with respect to such transfer of liabilities.

If, after the receipt of such application, the corporation requests from the plan sponsor additional information necessary for the determination, the running of the 180-day period shall be suspended from the date of such request until the receipt by the corporation of the additional information requested. The corporation may by regulation prescribe procedures and standards for the issuance of determinations under this paragraph. This paragraph shall not apply to any application submitted less than 180 days after September 26, 1980.

(3) A multiemployer plan shall not be liable to the corporation as provided in paragraph (1) in the case of a transfer from the multiemployer plan to a single-employer plan of liabilities which accrued under a single-employer plan which merged with the multiemployer plan, if, the value of liabilities transferred to the single-employer plan does not exceed the value of the liabilities for benefits which accrued before the merger, and the value of the assets transferred to the single-employer plan is substantially equal to the value of the assets which would have been in the single-employer plan if the employer had maintained and funded it as a separate plan under which no benefits accrued after the date of the merger.

(4) The corporation may make equitable arrangements with multiemployer plans which are liable under this subsection for satisfaction of their liability.

Benefits under a single-employer plan to which liabilities are transferred in accordance with this section are guaranteed under section 1322 of this title to the extent provided in that section as of the effective date of the transfer and the plan is a successor plan.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), a multiemployer plan may not transfer liabilities to a single-employer plan unless the plan sponsor of the plan to which the liabilities would be transferred agrees to the transfer.

(2) In the case of a transfer described in subsection (c)(3) of this section, paragraph (1) of this subsection is satisfied by the advance agreement to the transfer by the employer who will be obligated to contribute to the single-employer plan.

(1) The corporation may prescribe by regulation such additional requirements with respect to the transfer of assets or liabilities as may be necessary to protect the interests of plan participants and beneficiaries and the corporation.

(2) Except as otherwise determined by the corporation, a transfer of assets or liabilities to a single-employer plan from a plan in reorganization under section 1421 of this title is not effective unless the corporation approves such transfer.

(3) No transfer to which this section applies, in connection with a termination described in section 1341a(a)(2) of this title shall be effective unless the transfer meets such requirements as may be established by the corporation to prevent an increase in the risk of loss to the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4232, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1245.)

This section is referred to in section 1414 of this title.

The corporation may order the partition of a multiemployer plan in accordance with this section.

A plan sponsor may apply to the corporation for an order partitioning a plan. The corporation may not order the partition of a plan except upon notice to the plan sponsor and the participants and beneficiaries whose vested benefits will be affected by the partition of the plan, and upon finding that—

(1) a substantial reduction in the amount of aggregate contributions under the plan has resulted or will result from a case or proceeding under title 11 with respect to an employer;

(2) the plan is likely to become insolvent;

(3) contributions will have to be increased significantly in reorganization to meet the minimum contribution requirement and prevent insolvency; and

(4) partition would significantly reduce the likelihood that the plan will become insolvent.

The corporation may order the partition of a plan notwithstanding the pendency of a proceeding described in subsection (b)(1) of this section.

The corporation's partition order shall provide for a transfer of no more than the nonforfeitable benefits directly attributable to service with the employer referred to in subsection (b)(1) of this section and an equitable share of assets.

The plan created by the partition is—

(1) a successor plan to which section 1322a of this title applies, and

(2) a terminated multiemployer plan to which section 1341a(d) of this title applies, with respect to which only the employer described in subsection (b)(1) of this section has withdrawal liability, and to which section 1368 of this title applies.

The corporation may proceed under section 1342(c) through (h) of this title for a decree partitioning a plan and appointing a trustee for the terminated portion of a partitioned plan. The court may order the partition of a plan upon making the findings described in subsection (b)(1) through (4) of this section, and subject to the conditions set forth in subsections (c) through (e) of this section.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4233, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1246.)

A transfer of assets from a multiemployer plan to another plan shall comply with asset-transfer rules which shall be adopted by the multiemployer plan and which—

(1) do not unreasonably restrict the transfer of plan assets in connection with the transfer of plan liabilities, and

(2) operate and are applied uniformly with respect to each proposed transfer, except that the rules may provide for reasonable variations taking into account the potential financial impact of a proposed transfer on the multiemployer plan.

Plan rules authorizing asset transfers consistent with the requirements of section 1412(c)(3) of this title shall be considered to satisfy the requirements of this subsection.

The corporation shall prescribe regulations which exempt de minimis transfers of assets from the requirements of this part.

This part shall not apply to transfers of assets pursuant to written reciprocity agreements, except to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4234, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1247.)

This section is referred to in section 1415 of this title.

In any case in which an employer has completely or partially withdrawn from a multiemployer plan (hereafter in this section referred to as the “old plan”) as a result of a certified change of collective bargaining representative occurring after September 25, 1980, if participants of the old plan who are employed by the employer will, as a result of that change, participate in another multiemployer plan (hereafter in this section referred to as the “new plan”), the old plan shall transfer assets and liabilities to the new plan in accordance with this section.

(1) The employer shall notify the plan sponsor of the old plan of a change in multiemployer plan participation described in subsection (a) of this section no later than 30 days after the employer determines that the change will occur.

(2) The plan sponsor of the old plan shall—

(A) notify the employer of—

(i) the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability determined under part 1 of this subtitle with respect to the withdrawal,

(ii) the old plan's intent to transfer to the new plan the nonforfeitable benefits of the employees who are no longer working in covered service under the old plan as a result of the change of bargaining representative, and

(iii) the amount of assets and liabilities which are to be transferred to the new plan, and

(B) notify the plan sponsor of the new plan of the benefits, assets, and liabilities which will be transferred to the new plan.

(3) Within 60 days after receipt of the notice described in paragraph (2)(B), the new plan may file an appeal with the corporation to prevent the transfer. The transfer shall not be made if the corporation determines that the new plan would suffer substantial financial harm as a result of the transfer. Upon notification described in paragraph (2), if—

(A) the employer fails to object to the transfer within 60 days after receipt of the notice described in paragraph (2)(A), or

(B) the new plan either—

(i) fails to file such an appeal, or

(ii) the corporation, pursuant to such an appeal, fails to find that the new plan would suffer substantial financial harm as a result of the transfer described in the notice under paragraph (2)(B) within 180 days after the date on which the appeal is filed,

then the plan sponsor of the old plan shall transfer the appropriate amount of assets and liabilities to the new plan.

If the plan sponsor of the old plan transfers the appropriate amount of assets and liabilities under this section to the new plan, then the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability (as determined under section 1381(b) of this title without regard to such transfer and this section) with respect to the old plan shall be reduced by the amount by which—

(1) the value of the unfunded vested benefits allocable to the employer which were transferred by the plan sponsor of the old plan to the new plan, exceeds

(2) the value of the assets transferred.

In any case in which there is a complete or partial withdrawal described in subsection (a) of this section, if—

(1) the new plan files an appeal with the corporation under subsection (b)(3) of this section, and

(2) the employer is required by section 1399 of this title to begin making payments of withdrawal liability before the earlier of—

(A) the date on which the corporation finds that the new plan would not suffer substantial financial harm as a result of the transfer, or

(B) the last day of the 180-day period beginning on the date on which the new plan files its appeal,

then the employer shall make such payments into an escrow held by a bank or similar financial institution satisfactory to the old plan. If the transfer is made, the amounts paid into the escrow shall be returned to the employer. If the transfer is not made, the amounts paid into the escrow shall be paid to the old plan and credited against the employer's withdrawal liability.

(1) Notwithstanding subsection (b) of this section, the plan sponsor shall not transfer any assets to the new plan if—

(A) the old plan is in reorganization (within the meaning of section 1421(a) of this title), or

(B) the transfer of assets would cause the old plan to go into reorganization (within the meaning of section 1421(a) of this title).

(2) In any case in which a transfer of assets from the old plan to the new plan is prohibited by paragraph (1), the plan sponsor of the old plan shall transfer—

(A) all nonforfeitable benefits described in subsection (b)(2) of this section, if the value of such benefits does not exceed the withdrawal liability of the employer with respect to such withdrawal, or

(B) such nonforfeitable benefits having a value equal to the withdrawal liability of the employer, if the value of such benefits exceeds the withdrawal liability of the employer.

(1) Notwithstanding subsections (b) and (e) of this section, the plan sponsors of the old plan and the new plan may agree to a transfer of assets and liabilities that complies with sections 1411 and 1414 of this title, rather than this section, except that the employer's liability with respect to the withdrawal from the old plan shall be reduced under subsection (c) of this section as if assets and liabilities had been transferred in accordance with this section.

(2) If the employer withdraws from the new plan within 240 months after the effective date of a transfer of assets and liabilities described in this section, the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability to the new plan shall be the greater of—

(A) the employer's withdrawal liability determined under part 1 of this subtitle with respect to the new plan, or

(B) the amount by which the employer's withdrawal liability to the old plan was reduced under subsection (c) of this section, reduced by 5 percent for each 12-month period following the effective date of the transfer and ending before the date of the withdrawal from the new plan.

For purposes of this section—

(1) “appropriate amount of assets” means the amount by which the value of the nonforfeitable benefits to be transferred exceeds the amount of the employer's withdrawal liability to the old plan (determined under part 1 of this subtitle without regard to section 1391(e) of this title), and

(2) “certified change of collective bargaining representative” means a change of collective bargaining representative certified under the Labor-Management Relations Act, 1947 [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.], or the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4235, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1247; amended Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(1)(A), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899.)

The Labor-Management Relations Act, 1947, referred to in subsec. (g)(2), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 7 (§141 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(2), is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–369 substituted “September 25, 1980” for “April 28, 1980”.

Section effective Sept. 26, 1980, see section 1461(e)(4) of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1461 of this title.

A multiemployer plan is in reorganization for a plan year if the plan's reorganization index for that year is greater than zero.

(1) A plan's reorganization index for any plan year is the excess of—

(A) the vested benefits charge for such year, over

(B) the net charge to the funding standard account for such year.

(2) For purposes of this part, the net charge to the funding standard account for any plan year is the excess (if any) of—

(A) the charges to the funding standard account for such year under section 412(b)(2) of title 26, over

(B) the credits to the funding standard account under section 412(b)(3)(B) of title 26.

(3) For purposes of this part, the vested benefits charge for any plan year is the amount which would be necessary to amortize the plan's unfunded vested benefits as of the end of the base plan year in equal annual installments—

(A) over 10 years, to the extent such benefits are attributable to persons in pay status, and

(B) over 25 years, to the extent such benefits are attributable to other participants.

(4)(A) The vested benefits charge for a plan year shall be based on an actuarial valuation of the plan as of the end of the base plan year, adjusted to reflect—

(i) any—

(I) decrease of 5 percent or more in the value of plan assets, or increase of 5 percent or more in the number of persons in pay status, during the period beginning on the first day of the plan year following the base plan year and ending on the adjustment date, or

(II) at the election of the plan sponsor, actuarial valuation of the plan as of the adjustment date or any later date not later than the last day of the plan year for which the determination is being made,

(ii) any change in benefits under the plan which is not otherwise taken into account under this subparagraph and which is pursuant to any amendment—

(I) adopted before the end of the plan year for which the determination is being made, and

(II) effective after the end of the base plan year and on or before the end of the plan year referred to in subclause (I), and

(iii) any other event (including an event described in subparagraph (B)(i)(I)) which, as determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary, would substantially increase the plan's vested benefit charge.

(B)(i) In determining the vested benefits charge for a plan year following a plan year in which the plan was not in reorganization, any change in benefits which—

(I) results from the changing of a group of participants from one benefit level to another benefit level under a schedule of plan benefits as a result of changes in a collective bargaining agreement, or

(II) results from any other change in a collective bargaining agreement,

shall not be taken into account except to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(ii) Except as otherwise determined by the Secretary of the Treasury, in determining the vested benefits charge for any plan year following any plan year in which the plan was in reorganization, any change in benefits—

(I) described in clause (i)(I), or

(II) described in clause (i)(II) as determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury,

shall, for purposes of subparagraph (A)(ii), be treated as a change in benefits pursuant to an amendment to a plan.

(5)(A) For purposes of this part, the base plan year for any plan year is—

(i) if there is a relevant collective bargaining agreement, the last plan year ending at least 6 months before the relevant effective date, or

(ii) if there is no relevant collective bargaining agreement, the last plan year ending at least 12 months before the beginning of the plan year.

(B) For purposes of this part, a relevant collective bargaining agreement is a collective bargaining agreement—

(i) which is in effect for at least 6 months during the plan year, and

(ii) which has not been in effect for more than 36 months as of the end of the plan year.

(C) For purposes of this part, the relevant effective date is the earliest of the effective dates for the relevant collective bargaining agreements.

(D) For purposes of this part, the adjustment date is the date which is—

(i) 90 days before the relevant effective date, or

(ii) if there is no relevant effective date, 90 days before the beginning of the plan year.

(6) For purposes of this part, the term “person in pay status” means—

(A) a participant or beneficiary on the last day of the base plan year who, at any time during such year, was paid an early, late, normal, or disability retirement benefit (or a death benefit related to a retirement benefit), and

(B) to the extent provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, any other person who is entitled to such a benefit under the plan.

(7) For purposes of paragraph (3)—

(A) in determining the plan's unfunded vested benefits, plan assets shall first be allocated to the vested benefits attributable to persons in pay status, and

(B) the vested benefits charge shall be determined without regard to reductions in accrued benefits under section 1425 of this title which are first effective in the plan year.

(8) For purposes of this part, any outstanding claim for withdrawal liability shall not be considered a plan asset, except as otherwise provided in regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(9) For purposes of this part, the term “unfunded vested benefits” means with respect to a plan, an amount (determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury) equal to—

(A) the value of nonforfeitable benefits under the plan, less

(B) the value of assets of the plan.

Except as provided in regulations prescribed by the corporation, while a plan is in reorganization a benefit with respect to a participant (other than a death benefit) which is attributable to employer contributions and which has a value of more than $1,750 may not be paid in a form other than an annuity which (by itself or in combination with social security, railroad retirement, or workers’ compensation benefits) provides substantially level payments over the life of the participant.

Any multiemployer plan which terminates under section 1341a(a)(2) of this title shall not be considered in reorganization after the last day of the plan year in which the plan is treated as having terminated.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4241, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1249; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (b)(2)(A). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

Part, relating to multiemployer plan reorganization, effective, with respect to each plan, on the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after the earlier of the date on which the last collective-bargaining agreement providing for employer contributions under the plan, which was in effect on Sept. 26, 1980, expires, without regard to extensions agreed to after Sept. 26, 1980, or three years after Sept. 26, 1980, see section 1461(e)(3) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1202, 1301, 1412, 1415, 1423, 1426, 1461 of this title.

(a)(1) If—

(A) a multiemployer plan is in reorganization for a plan year, and

(B) section 1423 of this title would require an increase in contributions for such plan year,

the plan sponsor shall notify the persons described in paragraph (2) that the plan is in reorganization and that, if contributions to the plan are not increased, accrued benefits under the plan may be reduced or an excise tax may be imposed (or both such reduction and imposition may occur).

(2) The persons described in this paragraph are—

(A) each employer who has an obligation to contribute under the plan (within the meaning of section 1381(h)(5) of this title), and

(B) each employee organization which, for purposes of collective bargaining, represents plan participants employed by such an employer.

(3) The determination under paragraph (1)(B) shall be made without regard to the overburden credit provided by section 1424 of this title.

(b) The corporation may prescribe additional or alternative requirements for assuring, in the case of a plan with respect to which notice is required by subsection (a)(1) of this section, that the persons described in subsection (a)(2) of this section—

(1) receive appropriate notice that the plan is in reorganization,

(2) are adequately informed of the implications of reorganization status, and

(3) have reasonable access to information relevant to the plan's reorganization status.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4242, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1251.)

This section is referred to in sections 1202, 1426, 1461 of this title.

(1) For any plan year for which a plan is in reorganization—

(A) the plan shall continue to maintain its funding standard account while it is in reorganization, and

(B) the plan's accumulated funding deficiency under section 1082(a) of this title for such plan year shall be equal to the excess (if any) of—

(i) the sum of the minimum contribution requirement for such plan year (taking into account any overburden credit under section 1424(a) of this title) plus the plan's accumulated funding deficiency for the preceding plan year (determined under this section if the plan was in reorganization during such year or under section 1082(a) of this title if the plan was not in reorganization), over

(ii) amounts considered contributed by employers to or under the plan for the plan year (increased by any amount waived under subsection (f) of this section for the plan year).

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), withdrawal liability payments (whether or not received) which are due with respect to withdrawals before the end of the base plan year shall be considered amounts contributed by the employer to or under the plan if, as of the adjustment date, it was reasonable for the plan sponsor to anticipate that such payments would be made during the plan year.

(1) Except as otherwise provided in this section, for purposes of this part the minimum contribution requirement for a plan year in which a plan is in reorganization is an amount equal to the excess of—

(A) the sum of—

(i) the plan's vested benefits charge for the plan year, and

(ii) the increase in normal cost for the plan year determined under the entry age normal funding method which is attributable to plan amendments adopted while the plan was in reorganization, over

(B) the amount of the overburden credit (if any) determined under section 1424 of this title for the plan year.

(2) If the plan's current contribution base for the plan year is less than the plan's valuation contribution base for the plan year, the minimum contribution requirement for such plan year shall be equal to the product of the amount determined under paragraph (1) (after any adjustment required by this part other than this paragraph) and a fraction—

(A) the numerator of which is the plan's current contribution base for the plan year, and

(B) the denominator of which is the plan's valuation contribution base for the plan year.

(3)(A) If the vested benefits charge for a plan year of a plan in reorganization is less than the plan's cash-flow amount for the plan year, the plan's minimum contribution requirement for the plan year is the amount determined under paragraph (1) (determined before the application of paragraph (2)) after substituting the term “cash-flow amount” for the term “vested benefits charge” in paragraph (1)(A).

(B) For purposes of subparagraph (A), a plan's cash-flow amount for a plan year is an amount equal to—

(i) the amount of the benefits payable under the plan for the base plan year, plus the amount of the plan's administrative expenses for the base plan year, reduced by

(ii) the value of the available plan assets for the base plan year determined under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury,

adjusted in a manner consistent with section 1421(b)(4) of this title.

(1) For purposes of this part, a plan's current contribution base for a plan year is the number of contribution base units with respect to which contributions are required to be made under the plan for that plan year, determined in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(2)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), for purposes of this part a plan's valuation contribution base is the number of contribution base units for which contributions were received for the base plan year—

(i) adjusted to reflect declines in the contribution base which have occurred (or could reasonably be anticipated) as of the adjustment date for the plan year referred to in paragraph (1),

(ii) adjusted upward (in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury) for any contribution base reduction in the base plan year caused by a strike or lockout or by unusual events, such as fire, earthquake, or severe weather conditions, and

(iii) adjusted (in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury) for reductions in the contribution base resulting from transfers of liabilities.

(B) For any plan year—

(i) in which the plan is insolvent (within the meaning of section 1426(b)(1) of this title), and

(ii) beginning with the first plan year beginning after the expiration of all relevant collective bargaining agreements which were in effect in the plan year in which the plan became insolvent,

the plan's valuation contribution base is the greater of the number of contribution base units for which contributions were received for the first or second plan year preceding the first plan year in which the plan is insolvent, adjusted as provided in clause (ii) or (iii) of subparagraph (A).

(1) Under regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, the minimum contribution requirement applicable to any plan for any plan year which is determined under subsection (b) of this section (without regard to subsection (b)(2) of this section) shall not exceed an amount which is equal to the sum of—

(A) the greater of—

(i) the funding standard requirement for such plan year, or

(ii) 107 percent of—

(I) if the plan was not in reorganization in the preceding plan year, the funding standard requirement for such preceding plan year, or

(II) if the plan was in reorganization in the preceding plan year, the sum of the amount determined under this subparagraph for the preceding plan year and the amount (if any) determined under subparagraph (B) for the preceding plan year, plus

(B) if for the plan year a change in benefits is first required to be considered in computing the charges under section 412(b)(2)(A) or (B) of title 26, the sum of—

(i) the increase in normal cost for a plan year determined under the entry age normal funding method due to increases in benefits described in section 1421(b)(4)(A)(ii) of this title (determined without regard to section 1421(b)(4)(B)(i) of this title), and

(ii) the amount necessary to amortize in equal annual installments the increase in the value of vested benefits under the plan due to increases in benefits described in clause (i) over—

(I) 10 years, to the extent such increase in value is attributable to persons in pay status, or

(II) 25 years, to the extent such increase in value is attributable to other participants.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the funding standard requirement for any plan year is an amount equal to the net charge to the funding standard account for such plan year (as defined in section 1421(b)(2) of this title).

(3)(A) In the case of a plan described in section 1396(b) of this title, if a plan amendment which increases benefits is adopted after January 1, 1980—

(i) paragraph (1) shall apply only if the plan is a plan described in subparagraph (B), and

(ii) the amount under paragraph (1) shall be determined without regard to paragraph (1)(B).

(B) A plan is described in this subparagraph if—

(i) the rate of employer contributions under the plan for the first plan year beginning on or after the date on which an amendment increasing benefits is adopted, multiplied by the valuation contribution base for that plan year, equals or exceeds the sum of—

(I) the amount that would be necessary to amortize fully, in equal annual installments, by July 1, 1986, the unfunded vested benefits attributable to plan provisions in effect on July 1, 1977 (determined as of the last day of the base plan year); and

(II) the amount that would be necessary to amortize fully, in equal annual installments, over the period described in subparagraph (C), beginning with the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after the date on which the amendment is adopted, the unfunded vested benefits (determined as of the last day of the base plan year) attributable to each plan amendment after July 1, 1977; and

(ii) the rate of employer contributions for each subsequent plan year is not less than the lesser of—

(I) the rate which when multiplied by the valuation contribution base for that subsequent plan year produces the annual amount that would be necessary to complete the amortization schedule described in clause (i), or

(II) the rate for the plan year immediately preceding such subsequent plan year, plus 5 percent of such rate.

(C) The period determined under this subparagraph is the lesser of—

(i) 12 years, or

(ii) a period equal in length to the average of the remaining expected lives of all persons receiving benefits under the plan.

(4) Paragraph (1) shall not apply with respect to a plan, other than a plan described in paragraph (3), for the period of consecutive plan years in each of which the plan is in reorganization, beginning with a plan year in which occurs the earlier of the date of the adoption or the effective date of any amendment of the plan which increases benefits with respect to service performed before the plan year in which the adoption of the amendment occurred.

In determining the minimum contribution requirement with respect to a plan for a plan year under subsection (b) of this section, the vested benefits charge may be adjusted to reflect a plan amendment reducing benefits under section 412(c)(8) of title 26.

(1) The Secretary of the Treasury may waive any accumulated funding deficiency under this section in accordance with the provisions of section 1083(a) of this title.

(2) Any waiver under paragraph (1) shall not be treated as a waived funding deficiency (within the meaning of section 1083(c) of this title).

For purposes of making any determination under this part, the requirements of section 1082(c)(3) of this title shall apply.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4243, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1252; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsecs. (d)(1)(B), (e). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1082, 1202, 1322a, 1396, 1422, 1424, 1425, 1426, 1461 of this title.

For purposes of determining the minimum contribution requirement under section 1423 of this title (before the application of section 1423(b)(2) or (d) of this title) the plan sponsor of a plan which is overburdened for the plan year shall apply an overburden credit against the plan's minimum contribution requirement for the plan year (determined without regard to section 1423(b)(2) or (d) of this title and without regard to this section).

A plan is overburdened for a plan year if—

(1) the average number of pay status participants under the plan in the base plan year exceeds the average of the number of active participants in the base plan year and the 2 plan years preceding the base plan year, and

(2) the rate of employer contributions under the plan equals or exceeds the greater of—

(A) such rate for the preceding plan year, or

(B) such rate for the plan year preceding the first year in which the plan is in reorganization.

The amount of the overburden credit for a plan year is the product of—

(1) one-half of the average guaranteed benefit paid for the base plan year, and

(2) the overburden factor for the plan year.

The amount of the overburden credit for a plan year shall not exceed the amount of the minimum contribution requirement for such year (determined without regard to this section).

For purposes of this section, the overburden factor of a plan for the plan year is an amount equal to—

(1) the average number of pay status participants for the base plan year, reduced by

(2) the average of the number of active participants for the base plan year and for each of the 2 plan years preceding the base plan year.

For purposes of this section—

(1) The term “pay status participant” means, with respect to a plan, a participant receiving retirement benefits under the plan.

(2) The number of active participants for a plan year shall be the sum of—

(A) the number of active employees who are participants in the plan and on whose behalf contributions are required to be made during the plan year;

(B) the number of active employees who are not participants in the plan but who are in an employment unit covered by a collective bargaining agreement which requires the employees’ employer to contribute to the plan, unless service in such employment unit was never covered under the plan or a predecessor thereof, and

(C) the total number of active employees attributed to employers who made payments to the plan for the plan year of withdrawal liability pursuant to part 1 of this subtitle, determined by dividing—

(i) the total amount of such payments, by

(ii) the amount equal to the total contributions received by the plan during the plan year divided by the average number of active employees who were participants in the plan during the plan year.

The Secretary of the Treasury shall by regulation provide alternative methods of determining active participants where (by reason of irregular employment, contributions on a unit basis, or otherwise) this paragraph does not yield a representative basis for determining the credit.

(3) The term “average number” means, with respect to pay status participants for a plan year, a number equal to one-half the sum of—

(A) the number with respect to the plan as of the beginning of the plan year, and

(B) the number with respect to the plan as of the end of the plan year.

(4) The average guaranteed benefit paid is 12 times the average monthly pension payment guaranteed under section 1322a(c)(1) of this title determined under the provisions of the plan in effect at the beginning of the first plan year in which the plan is in reorganization and without regard to section 1322a(c)(2) of this title.

(5) The first year in which the plan is in reorganization is the first of a period of 1 or more consecutive plan years in which the plan has been in reorganization not taking into account any plan years the plan was in reorganization prior to any period of 3 or more consecutive plan years in which the plan was not in reorganization.

(1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this section, a plan is not eligible for an overburden credit for a plan year if the Secretary of the Treasury finds that the plan's current contribution base for the plan year was reduced, without a corresponding reduction in the plan's unfunded vested benefits attributable to pay status participants, as a result of a change in an agreement providing for employer contributions under the plan.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), a complete or partial withdrawal of an employer (within the meaning of part 1 of this subtitle) does not impair a plan's eligibility for an overburden credit, unless the Secretary of the Treasury finds that a contribution base reduction described in paragraph (1) resulted from a transfer of liabilities to another plan in connection with the withdrawal.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this section, if 2 or more multiemployer plans merge, the amount of the overburden credit which may be applied under this section with respect to the plan resulting from the merger for any of the 3 plan years ending after the effective date of the merger shall not exceed the sum of the used overburden credit for each of the merging plans for its last plan year ending before the effective date of the merger. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the used overburden credit is that portion of the credit which does not exceed the excess of the minimum contribution requirement (determined without regard to any overburden requirement under this section) over the employer contributions required under the plan.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4244, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1255.)

This section is referred to in sections 1202, 1422, 1423, 1461 of this title.

(1) Notwithstanding sections 1053 and 1054 of this title, a multiemployer plan in reorganization may be amended in accordance with this section, to reduce or eliminate accrued benefits attributable to employer contributions which, under section 1322a(b) of this title, are not eligible for the corporation's guarantee. The preceding sentence shall only apply to accrued benefits under plan amendments (or plans) adopted after March 26, 1980, or under collective bargaining agreements entered into after March 26, 1980.

(2) In determining the minimum contribution requirement with respect to a plan for a plan year under section 1423(b) of this title, the vested benefits charge may be adjusted to reflect a plan amendment reducing benefits under this section or section 412(c)(8) of title 26, but only if the amendment is adopted and effective no later than 21/2 months after the end of the plan year, or within such extended period as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe by regulation under section 412(c)(10) of title 26.

(1) Accrued benefits may not be reduced under this section unless—

(A) notice has been given, at least 6 months before the first day of the plan year in which the amendment reducing benefits is adopted, to—

(i) plan participants and beneficiaries,

(ii) each employer who has an obligation to contribute (within the meaning of section 1392(a) of this title) under the plan, and

(iii) each employee organization which, for purposes of collective bargaining, represents plan participants employed by such an employer,

that the plan is in reorganization and that, if contributions under the plan are not increased, accrued benefits under the plan will be reduced or an excise tax will be imposed on employers;

(B) in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury—

(i) any category of accrued benefits is not reduced with respect to inactive participants to a greater extent proportionally than such category of accrued benefits is reduced with respect to active participants,

(ii) benefits attributable to employer contributions other than accrued benefits and the rate of future benefit accruals are reduced at least to an extent equal to the reduction in accrued benefits of inactive participants, and

(iii) in any case in which the accrued benefit of a participant or beneficiary is reduced by changing the benefit form or the requirements which the participant or beneficiary must satisfy to be entitled to the benefit, such reduction is not applicable to—

(I) any participant or beneficiary in pay status on the effective date of the amendment, or the beneficiary of such a participant, or

(II) any participant who has attained normal retirement age, or who is within 5 years of attaining normal retirement age, on the effective date of the amendment, or the beneficiary of any such participant; and

(C) the rate of employer contributions for the plan year in which the amendment becomes effective and for all succeeding plan years in which the plan is in reorganization equals or exceeds the greater of—

(i) the rate of employer contributions, calculated without regard to the amendment, for the plan year in which the amendment becomes effective, or

(ii) the rate of employer contributions for the plan year preceding the plan year in which the amendment becomes effective.

(2) The plan sponsors shall include in any notice required to be sent to plan participants and beneficiaries under paragraph (1) information as to the rights and remedies of plan participants and beneficiaries as well as how to contact the Department of Labor for further information and assistance where appropriate.

A plan may not recoup a benefit payment which is in excess of the amount payable under the plan because of an amendment retroactively reducing accrued benefits under this section.

(1)(A) A plan which has been amended to reduce accrued benefits under this section may be amended to increase or restore accrued benefits, or the rate of future benefit accruals, only if the plan is amended to restore levels of previously reduced accrued benefits of inactive participants and of participants who are within 5 years of attaining normal retirement age to at least the same extent as any such increase in accrued benefits or in the rate of future benefit accruals.

(B) For purposes of this subsection, in the case of a plan which has been amended under this section to reduce accrued benefits—

(i) an increase in a benefit, or in the rate of future benefit accruals, shall be considered a benefit increase to the extent that the benefit, or the accrual rate, is thereby increased above the highest benefit level, or accrual rate, which was in effect under the terms of the plan before the effective date of the amendment reducing accrued benefits, and

(ii) an increase in a benefit, or in the rate of future benefit accruals, shall be considered a benefit restoration to the extent that the benefit, or the accrual rate, is not thereby increased above the highest benefit level, or accrual rate, which was in effect under the terms of the plan immediately before the effective date of the amendment reducing accrued benefits.

(2) If a plan is amended to partially restore previously reduced accrued benefit levels, or the rate of future benefit accruals, the benefits of inactive participants shall be restored in at least the same proportions as other accrued benefits which are restored.

(3) No benefit increase under a plan may take effect in a plan year in which an amendment reducing accrued benefits under the plan, in accordance with this section, is adopted or first becomes effective.

(4) A plan is not required to make retroactive benefit payments with respect to that portion of an accrued benefit which was reduced and subsequently restored under this section.

For purposes of this section, “inactive participant” means a person not in covered service under the plan who is in pay status under the plan or who has a nonforfeitable benefit under the plan.

The Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe rules under which, notwithstanding any other provision of this section, accrued benefit reductions or benefit increases for different participant groups may be varied equitably to reflect variations in contribution rates and other relevant factors reflecting differences in negotiated levels of financial support for plan benefit obligations.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4244A, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1257; amended Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §7891(a)(1), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2445.)

1989—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 101–239 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–239 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7891(f) of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 1002 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1202, 1322a, 1421, 1441, 1461 of this title.

Notwithstanding sections 1053 and 1054 of this title, in any case in which benefit payments under an insolvent multiemployer plan exceed the resource benefit level, any such payments of benefits which are not basic benefits shall be suspended, in accordance with this section, to the extent necessary to reduce the sum of such payments and the payments of such basic benefits to the greater of the resource benefit level or the level of basic benefits, unless an alternative procedure is prescribed by the corporation under section 1322a(g)(5) of this title.

For purposes of this section, for a plan year—

(1) a multiemployer plan is insolvent if the plan's available resources are not sufficient to pay benefits under the plan when due for the plan year, or if the plan is determined to be insolvent under subsection (d) of this section;

(2) “resource benefit level” means the level of monthly benefits determined under subsections (c)(1) and (3) and (d)(3) of this section to be the highest level which can be paid out of the plan's available resources;

(3) “available resources” means the plan's cash, marketable assets, contributions, withdrawal liability payments, and earnings, less reasonable administrative expenses and amounts owed for such plan year to the corporation under section 1431(b)(2) of this title; and

(4) “insolvency year” means a plan year in which a plan is insolvent.

(1) The plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization shall determine in writing the plan's resource benefit level for each insolvency year, based on the plan sponsor's reasonable projection of the plan's available resources and the benefits payable under the plan.

(2) The suspension of benefit payments under this section shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, apply in substantially uniform proportions to the benefits of all persons in pay status (within the meaning of section 1421(b)(6) of this title) under the plan, except that the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe rules under which benefit suspensions for different participant groups may be varied equitably to reflect variations in contribution rates and other relevant factors including differences in negotiated levels of financial support for plan benefit obligations.

(3) Notwithstanding paragraph (2), if a plan sponsor determines in writing a resource benefit level for a plan year which is below the level of basic benefits, the payment of all benefits other than basic benefits must be suspended for that plan year.

(4)(A) If, by the end of an insolvency year, the plan sponsor determines in writing that the plan's available resources in that insolvency year could have supported benefit payments above the resource benefit level for that insolvency year, the plan sponsor shall distribute the excess resources to the participants and beneficiaries who received benefit payments from the plan in that insolvency year, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(B) For purposes of this paragraph, the term “excess resources” means available resources above the amount necessary to support the resource benefit level, but no greater than the amount necessary to pay benefits for the plan year at the benefit levels under the plan.

(5) If, by the end of an insolvency year, any benefit has not been paid at the resource benefit level, amounts up to the resource benefit level which were unpaid shall be distributed to the participants and beneficiaries, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, to the extent possible taking into account the plan's total available resources in that insolvency year.

(6) Except as provided in paragraph (4) or (5), a plan is not required to make retroactive benefit payments with respect to that portion of a benefit which was suspended under this section.

(1) As of the end of the first plan year in which a plan is in reorganization, and at least every 3 plan years thereafter (unless the plan is no longer in reorganization), the plan sponsor shall compare the value of plan assets (determined in accordance with section 1423(b)(3)(B)(ii) of this title) for that plan year with the total amount of benefit payments made under the plan for that plan year. Unless the plan sponsor determines that the value of plan assets exceeds 3 times the total amount of benefit payments, the plan sponsor shall determine whether the plan will be insolvent in any of the next 3 plan years.

(2) If, at any time, the plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization reasonably determines, taking into account the plan's recent and anticipated financial experience, that the plan's available resources are not sufficient to pay benefits under the plan when due for the next plan year, the plan sponsor shall make such determination available to interested parties.

(3) The plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization shall determine in writing for each insolvency year the resource benefit level and the level of basic benefits no later than 3 months before the insolvency year.

(1) If the plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization determines under subsection (d)(1) or (2) of this section that the plan may become insolvent (within the meaning of subsection (b)(1) of this section), the plan sponsor shall—

(A) notify the Secretary of the Treasury, the corporation, the parties described in section 1422(a)(2) of this title, and the plan participants and beneficiaries of that determination, and

(B) inform the parties described in section 1422(a)(2) of this title and the plan participants and beneficiaries that if insolvency occurs certain benefit payments will be suspended, but that basic benefits will continue to be paid.

(2) No later than 2 months before the first day of each insolvency year, the plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization shall notify the Secretary of the Treasury, the corporation, and the parties described in paragraph (1)(B) of the resource benefit level determined in writing for that insolvency year.

(3) In any case in which the plan sponsor anticipates that the resource benefit level for an insolvency year may not exceed the level of basic benefits, the plan sponsor shall notify the corporation.

(4) Notice required by this subsection shall be given in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation, except that notice to the Secretary of the Treasury shall be given in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

(5) The corporation may prescribe a time other than the time prescribed by this section for the making of a determination or the filing of a notice under this section.

(1) If the plan sponsor of an insolvent plan, for which the resource benefit level is above the level of basic benefits, anticipates that, for any month in an insolvency year, the plan will not have funds sufficient to pay basic benefits, the plan sponsor may apply for financial assistance from the corporation under section 1431 of this title.

(2) A plan sponsor who has determined a resource benefit level for an insolvency year which is below the level of basic benefits shall apply for financial assistance from the corporation under section 1431 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4245, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1259.)

Section 108(c)(3) of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that:

“(A) For the purpose of determining the withdrawal liability of an employer under title IV of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [this subchapter] from a plan that terminates while the plan is insolvent (within the meaning of section 4245 of such Act [this section]), the plan's unfunded vested benefits shall be reduced by an amount equal to the sum of all overburden credits that were applied in determining the plan's accumulated funding deficiency for all plan years preceding the first plan year in which the plan is insolvent, plus interest thereon.

“(B) The provisions of subparagraph (A) apply only if—

“(i) the plan would have been eligible for the overburden credit in the last plan year beginning before the date of the enactment of this Act [Sept. 26, 1980], if section 4243 of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 [section 1423 of this title] had been in effect for that plan year, and

“(ii) the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation determines that the reduction of unfunded vested benefits under subparagraph (A) would not significantly increase the risk of loss to the corporation.”

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1202, 1322a, 1361, 1411, 1423, 1431, 1441, 1461 of this title.

If, upon receipt of an application for financial assistance under section 1426(f) of this title or section 1441(d) of this title, the corporation verifies that the plan is or will be insolvent and unable to pay basic benefits when due, the corporation shall provide the plan financial assistance in an amount sufficient to enable the plan to pay basic benefits under the plan.

(1) Financial assistance shall be provided under such conditions as the corporation determines are equitable and are appropriate to prevent unreasonable loss to the corporation with respect to the plan.

(2) A plan which has received financial assistance shall repay the amount of such assistance to the corporation on reasonable terms consistent with regulations prescribed by the corporation.

Pending determination of the amount described in subsection (a) of this section, the corporation may provide financial assistance in such amounts as it considers appropriate in order to avoid undue hardship to plan participants and beneficiaries.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4261, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1261.)

Part effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1306, 1307, 1322a, 1426 of this title; title 26 section 418E.

Notwithstanding sections 1053 and 1054 of this title, the plan sponsor of a terminated multiemployer plan to which section 1341a(d) of this title applies shall amend the plan to reduce benefits, and shall suspend benefit payments, as required by this section.

(1) The value of nonforfeitable benefits under a terminated plan referred to in subsection (a) of this section, and the value of the plan's assets, shall be determined in writing, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation, as of the end of the plan year during which section 1341a(d) of this title becomes applicable to the plan, and each plan year thereafter.

(2) For purposes of this section, plan assets include outstanding claims for withdrawal liability (within the meaning of section 1301(a)(12) of this title).

(1) If, according to the determination made under subsection (b) of this section, the value of nonforfeitable benefits exceeds the value of the plan's assets, the plan sponsor shall amend the plan to reduce benefits under the plan to the extent necessary to ensure that the plan's assets are sufficient, as determined and certified in accordance with regulations prescribed by the corporation, to discharge when due all of the plan's obligations with respect to nonforfeitable benefits.

(2) Any plan amendment required by this subsection shall, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury—

(A) reduce benefits only to the extent necessary to comply with paragraph (1);

(B) reduce accrued benefits only to the extent that those benefits are not eligible for the corporation's guarantee under section 1322a(b) of this title;

(C) comply with the rules for and limitations on benefit reductions under a plan in reorganization, as prescribed in section 1425 of this title, except to the extent that the corporation prescribes other rules and limitations in regulations under this section; and

(D) take effect no later than 6 months after the end of the plan year for which it is determined that the value of nonforfeitable benefits exceeds the value of the plan's assets.

(1) In any case in which benefit payments under a plan which is insolvent under paragraph (2)(A) exceed the resource benefit level, any such payments which are not basic benefits shall be suspended, in accordance with this subsection, to the extent necessary to reduce the sum of such payments and such basic benefits to the greater of the resource benefit level or the level of basic benefits, unless an alternative procedure is prescribed by the corporation in connection with a supplemental guarantee program established under section 1322a(g)(2) of this title.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, for a plan year—

(A) a plan is insolvent if—

(i) the plan has been amended to reduce benefits to the extent permitted by subsection (c) of this section, and

(ii) the plan's available resources are not sufficient to pay benefits under the plan when due for the plan year; and

(B) “resource benefit level” and “available resources” have the meanings set forth in paragraphs (2) and (3), respectively, of section 1426(b) of this title.

(3) The plan sponsor of a plan which is insolvent (within the meaning of paragraph (2)(A)) shall have the powers and duties of the plan sponsor of a plan in reorganization which is insolvent (within the meaning of section 1426(b)(1) of this title), except that regulations governing the plan sponsor's exercise of those powers and duties under this section shall be prescribed by the corporation, and the corporation shall prescribe by regulation notice requirements which assure that plan participants and beneficiaries receive adequate notice of benefit suspensions.

(4) A plan is not required to make retroactive benefit payments with respect to that portion of a benefit which was suspended under this subsection, except that the provisions of section 1426(c)(4) and (5) of this title shall apply in the case of plans which are insolvent under paragraph (2)(A), in connection with the plan year during which such section 1341a(d) of this title first became applicable to the plan and every year thereafter, in the same manner and to the same extent as such provisions apply to insolvent plans in reorganization under section 1426 of this title, in connection with insolvency years under such section 1426 of this title.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4281, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1261.)

Part effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1053, 1054, 1322a, 1341a, 1361, 1431 of this title; title 26 section 411.

(1) A plan fiduciary, employer, plan participant, or beneficiary, who is adversely affected by the act or omission of any party under this subtitle with respect to a multiemployer plan, or an employee organization which represents such a plan participant or beneficiary for purposes of collective bargaining, may bring an action for appropriate legal or equitable relief, or both.

(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (1), this section does not authorize an action against the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secretary of Labor, or the corporation.

In any action under this section to compel an employer to pay withdrawal liability, any failure of the employer to make any withdrawal liability payment within the time prescribed shall be treated in the same manner as a delinquent contribution (within the meaning of section 1145 of this title).

The district courts of the United States shall have exclusive jurisdiction of an action under this section without regard to the amount in controversy, except that State courts of competent jurisdiction shall have concurrent jurisdiction over an action brought by a plan fiduciary to collect withdrawal liability.

An action under this section may be brought in the district where the plan is administered or where a defendant resides or does business, and process may be served in any district where a defendant resides, does business, or may be found.

In any action under this section, the court may award all or a portion of the costs and expenses incurred in connection with such action, including reasonable attorney's fees, to the prevailing party.

An action under this section may not be brought after the later of—

(1) 6 years after the date on which the cause of action arose, or

(2) 3 years after the earliest date on which the plaintiff acquired or should have acquired actual knowledge of the existence of such cause of action; except that in the case of fraud or concealment, such action may be brought not later than 6 years after the date of discovery of the existence of such cause of action.

A copy of the complaint in any action under this section or section 1401 of this title shall be served upon the corporation by certified mail. The corporation may intervene in any such action.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4301, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1263.)

Part effective Sept. 26, 1980, except as specifically provided, see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1303, 1401 of this title; title 26 section 9721.

Any person who fails, without reasonable cause, to provide a notice required under this subtitle or any implementing regulations shall be liable to the corporation in an amount up to $100 for each day for which such failure continues. The corporation may bring a civil action against any such person in the United States District Court for the District of Columbia or in any district court of the United States within the jurisdiction of which the plan assets are located, the plan is administered, or a defendant resides or does business, and process may be served in any district where a defendant resides, does business, or may be found.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4302, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(2), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1263.)

Within one year after September 26, 1980, a multiemployer plan may irrevocably elect, pursuant to procedures established by the corporation, that the plan shall not be treated as a multiemployer plan for any purpose under this chapter or the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, if for each of the last 3 plan years ending prior to the effective date of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980—

(1) the plan was not a multiemployer plan because the plan was not a plan described in section 1002(37)(A)(iii) of this title and section 414(f)(1)(C) of title 26 (as such provisions were in effect on the day before September 26, 1980); and

(2) the plan had been identified as a plan that was not a multiemployer plan in substantially all its filings with the corporation, the Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of the Treasury.

An election described in subsection (a) of this section shall be effective only if—

(1) the plan is amended to provide that it shall not be treated as a multiemployer plan for all purposes under this chapter and the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, and

(2) written notice of the amendment is provided to the corporation within 60 days after the amendment is adopted.

An election described in subsection (a) of this section shall be treated as being effective as of September 26, 1980.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4303, as added Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §108(f), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1270.)

This chapter, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b)(1), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Internal Revenue Code of 1954, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (b)(1), was redesignated the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 by Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095, and is classified to Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For the effective date of the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980, referred to in subsec. (a), see section 1461(e) of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1002 of this title; title 26 section 414.

1980—Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §104(1), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1217, substituted “Subtitle F—Transition Rules and Effective Dates” for “Subtitle E—Effective Date; Special Rules”.

(a) The provisions of this subchapter take effect on September 2, 1974.

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (a) of this section, the corporation shall pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to any plan—

(1) which is not a multiemployer plan,

(2) which terminates after June 30, 1974, and before September 2, 1974,

(3) to which section 1321 of this title would apply if that section were effective beginning on July 1, 1974, and

(4) with respect to which a notice is filed with the Secretary of Labor and received by him not later than 10 days after September 2, 1974, except that, for reasonable cause shown, such notice may be filed with the Secretary of Labor and received by him not later than October 31, 1974, stating that the plan is a plan described in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3).

The corporation shall not pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to a plan described in the preceding sentence unless the corporation finds substantial evidence that the plan was terminated for a reasonable business purpose and not for the purpose of obtaining the payment of benefits by the corporation under this subchapter or for the purpose of avoiding the liability which might be imposed under subtitle D of this subchapter if the plan terminated on or after September 2, 1974. The provisions of subtitle D of this subchapter do not apply in the case of such a plan which terminates before September 2, 1974. For purposes of determining whether a plan is a plan described in paragraph (2), the provisions of section 1348 of this title shall not apply, but the corporation shall make the determination on the basis of the date on which benefits ceased to accrue or on any other reasonable basis consistent with the purposes of this subsection.

(c)(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (2), (3), and (4), the corporation shall not pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to a multiemployer plan which terminates before August 1, 1980. Whenever the corporation exercises the authority granted under paragraph (2) or (3), the corporation shall notify the Committee on Education and Labor and the Committee on Ways and Means of the House of Representatives, and the Committee on Labor and Human Resources and the Committee on Finance of the Senate.

(2) The corporation may, in its discretion, pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to a multiemployer plan which terminates after September 2, 1974 and before August 1, 1980, if—

(A) the plan was maintained during the 60 months immediately preceding the date on which the plan terminates, and

(B) the corporation determines that the payment by the corporation of benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to that plan will not jeopardize the payments the corporation anticipates it may be required to make in connection with benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to multiemployer plans which terminate after July 31, 1980.

(3) Notwithstanding any provision of section 1321 or 1322 of this title which would prevent such payments, the corporation, in carrying out its authority under paragraph (2), may pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to a multiemployer plan described in paragraph (2) in any case in which those benefits would otherwise not be payable if—

(A) the plan has been in effect for at least 5 years,

(B) the plan has been in substantial compliance with the funding requirements for a qualified plan with respect to the employees and former employees in those employment units on the basis of which the participating employers have contributed to the plan for the preceding 5 years, and

(C) the participating employers and employee organization or organizations had no reasonable recourse other than termination.

(4) If the corporation determines, under paragraph (2) or (3), that it will pay benefits guaranteed under this subchapter with respect to a multiemployer plan which terminates before August 1, 1980, the corporation—

(A) may establish requirements for the continuation of payments which commenced before January 2, 1974, with respect to retired participants under the plan,

(B) may not, notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, make payments with respect to any participant under such a plan who, on January 1, 1974, was receiving payment of retirement benefits, in excess of the amounts and rates payable with respect to such participant on that date,

(C) may not make any payments with respect to benefits guaranteed under this subchapter in connection with such a plan which are derived, directly or indirectly, from amounts borrowed under section 1305(c) of this title, and

(D) shall review from time to time payments made under the authority granted to it by paragraphs (2) and (3), and reduce or terminate such payments to the extent necessary to avoid jeopardizing the ability of the corporation to make payments of benefits guaranteed under this subchapter in connection with multiemployer plans which terminate after July 31, 1980, without increasing premium rates for such plans.

(d) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, guaranteed benefits payable by the corporation pursuant to its discretionary authority under this section shall continue to be paid at the level guaranteed under section 1322 of this title, without regard to any limitation on payment under subparagraph (C) or (D) of subsection (c)(4) of this section.

(e)(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (2), (3), and (4), the amendments to this chapter made by the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980 shall take effect on September 26, 1980.

(2)(A) Except as provided in this paragraph, part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter, relating to withdrawal liability, takes effect on September 26, 1980.

(B) For purposes of determining withdrawal liability under part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter, an employer who has withdrawn from a plan shall be considered to have withdrawn from a multiemployer plan if, at the time of the withdrawal, the plan was a multiemployer plan as defined in section 1301(a)(3) of this title as in effect at the time of the withdrawal.

(3) Sections 1421 through 1426 of this title, relating to multiemployer plan reorganization, shall take effect, with respect to each plan, on the first day of the first plan year beginning on or after the earlier of—

(A) the date on which the last collective bargaining agreement providing for employer contributions under the plan, which was in effect on September 26, 1980, expires, without regard to extensions agreed to on or after September 26, 1980, or

(B) 3 years after September 26, 1980.

(4) Section 1415 of this title shall take effect on September 26, 1980.

(f)(1) In the event that before September 26, 1980, the corporation has determined that—

(A) an employer has withdrawn from a multiemployer plan under section 1363 of this title, and

(B) the employer is liable to the corporation under such section,

the corporation shall retain the amount of liability paid to it or furnished in the form of a bond and shall pay such liability to the plan in the event the plan terminates in accordance with section 1341a(a)(2) of this title before the earlier of September 26, 1985, or the day after the 5-year period commencing on the date of such withdrawal.

(2) In any case in which the plan is not so terminated within the period described in paragraph (1), the liability of the employer is abated and any payment held in escrow shall be refunded without interest to the employer or the employer's bond shall be cancelled.

(g)(1) In any case in which an employer or employers withdrew from a multiemployer plan before the effective date of part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter, the corporation may—

(A) apply section 1363(d) of this title, as in effect before the amendments made by the Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980, to such plan,

(B) assess liability against the withdrawn employer with respect to the resulting terminated plan,

(C) guarantee benefits under the terminated plan under section 1322 of this title, as in effect before such amendments, and

(D) if necessary, enforce such action through suit brought under section 1303 of this title.

(2) The corporation shall use the revolving fund used by the corporation with respect to basic benefits guaranteed under section 1322a of this title in guaranteeing benefits under a terminated plan described in this subsection.

(h)(1) In the case of an employer who entered into a collective bargaining agreement—

(A) which was effective on January 12, 1979, and which remained in effect through May 15, 1982, and

(B) under which contributions to a multiemployer plan were to cease on January 12, 1982,

any withdrawal liability incurred by the employer pursuant to part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter as a result of the complete or partial withdrawal of the employer from the multiemployer plan before January 16, 1982, shall be void.

(2) In any case in which—

(A) an employer engaged in the grocery wholesaling business—

(i) had ceased all covered operations under a multiemployer plan before June 30, 1981, and had relocated its operations to a new facility in another State, and

(ii) had notified a local union representative on May 14, 1980, that the employer had tentatively decided to discontinue operations and relocate to a new facility in another State, and

(B) all State and local approvals with respect to construction of and commencement of operations at the new facility had been obtained, a contract for construction had been entered into, and construction of the new facility had begun before September 26, 1980,

any withdrawal liability incurred by the employer pursuant to part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter as a result of the complete or partial withdrawal of the employer from the multiemployer plan before June 30, 1981, shall be void.

(i) The preceding provisions of this section shall not apply with respect to amendments made to this subchapter in provisions enacted after October 22, 1986.

(Pub. L. 93–406, title IV, §4402, formerly §4082, Sept. 2, 1974, 88 Stat. 1034; S. Res. 4, Feb. 4, 1977; Pub. L. 95–214, §1, Dec. 19, 1977, 91 Stat. 1501; S. Res. 30, Mar. 7, 1979; Pub. L. 96–24, June 19, 1979, 93 Stat. 70; Pub. L. 96–239, Apr. 30, 1980, 94 Stat. 341; Pub. L. 96–293, §1, June 30, 1980, 94 Stat. 610; renumbered and amended Pub. L. 96–364, title I, §108(a)–(c)(1), Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1267; Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, title V, §558(b)(1)(B), (C), July 18, 1984, 98 Stat. 899; Pub. L. 99–514, title XVIII, §1852(i), Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2869; Pub. L. 101–239, title VII, §§7862(a), 7894(h)(5)(A), Dec. 19, 1989, 103 Stat. 2431, 2451.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (e)(1), was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 93–406, known as the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974. Titles I, III, and IV of such Act are classified principally to this chapter. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

The Multiemployer Pension Plan Amendments Act of 1980, referred to in subsecs. (e)(1) and (g)(1)(A), is Pub. L. 96–364, Sept. 26, 1980, 94 Stat. 1208. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1980 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of this title and Tables.

For the effective date of part 1 of subtitle E of this subchapter, referred to in subsec. (g)(1), see subsec. (e)(2) of this section.

Section was formerly classified to section 1381 of this title.

1989—Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 101–239, §7862(a), substituted “before January 16, 1982” for “before January 12, 1982” in concluding provisions.

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 101–239, §7894(h)(5)(A), added subsec. (i).

1986—Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 99–514 added subsec. (h).

1984—Subsec. (e)(2)(A), (4). Pub. L. 98–369, §558(b)(1)(B), substituted “September 26, 1980” for “April 29, 1980”.

Subsec. (f)(1). Pub. L. 98–369, §558(b)(1)(C), substituted “September 26, 1985” for “April 29, 1985”.

1980—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 96–293, §1(1), substituted “August 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1980”.

Pub. L. 96–239, §1(1), substituted “July 1, 1980” for “May 1, 1980”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 96–293, §1(1), (2), substituted “August 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1980” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “July 31, 1980” for “June 30, 1980” in subpar. (B).

Pub. L. 96–239, §1(1), (2), substituted “July 1, 1980” for “May 1, 1980” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “June 30, 1980” for “April 30, 1980” in subpar. (B).

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 96–293, §1(1), (2), substituted “August 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1980” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “July 31, 1980” for “June 30, 1980” in subpar. (D).

Pub. L. 96–239, §1(1), (2), substituted “July 1, 1980” for “May 1, 1980” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “June 30, 1980” for “April 30, 1980” in subpar. (D).

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 96–364, §108(b), added subsec. (d). Former subsec. (d), which related to report to Congressional committees respecting anticipated financial condition of program for mandatory coverage of multiemployer plans, was struck out.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 96–364, §108(c)(1), added subsec. (e). Former subsec. (e), which related to annual insurance premium payable to Corporation for coverage of guaranteed basic benefits, was struck out.

Subsecs. (f), (g). Pub. L. 96–364, §108(c)(1), added subsecs. (f) and (g).

1979—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 96–24, §1(1), substituted “May 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1979”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 96–24, §1(1), (2), substituted “May 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1979” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “April 30, 1980” for “June 30, 1979” in subpar. (B).

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 96–24, §1(1), (2), substituted “May 1, 1980” for “July 1, 1979” in provisions preceding subpar. (A) and “April 30, 1980” for “June 30, 1979” in subpar. (D).

1977—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(a)(1), substituted “July 1, 1979” for “January 1, 1978”.

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(a)(2), substituted “July 1, 1979” for “January 1, 1978” in provisions preceding subpar. (A).

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(a)(3), substituted “June 30, 1979” for “December 31, 1977”.

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(a)(4), substituted “July 1, 1979” for “January 1, 1978” in provisions preceding subpar. (A).

Subsec. (c)(4)(D). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(a)(5), substituted “June 30, 1979” for “December 31, 1977”.

Subsecs. (d), (e). Pub. L. 95–214, §1(b), added subsecs. (d) and (e).

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.

Committee on Human Resources of Senate changed to Committee on Labor and Human Resources of Senate, effective Mar. 7, 1979, by Senate Resolution No. 30, 96th Congress. See, also, Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate adopted Nov. 14, 1979.

Committee on Labor and Public Welfare of Senate abolished and replaced by Committee on Human Resources of Senate, effective Feb. 11, 1977. See Rule XXV of Standing Rules of Senate, as amended by Senate Resolution No. 4 (popularly cited as the “Committee System Reorganization Amendments of 1977”), approved Feb. 4, 1977.

Amendment by section 7862(a) of Pub. L. 101–239 effective as if included in the provision of the Tax Reform Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–514, to which such amendment relates, see section 7863 of Pub. L. 101–239, set out as a note under section 106 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 7894(h)(5)(B) of Pub. L. 101–239 provided that: “The amendment made by subparagraph (A) [amending this section] shall take effect as if originally included in the Reform Act [Pub. L. 99–514].”

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–514 effective, except as otherwise provided, as if included in the provisions of the Tax Reform Act of 1984, Pub. L. 98–369, div. A, to which such amendment relates, see section 1881 of Pub. L. 99–514, set out as a note under section 48 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

For provisions directing that if any amendments made by subtitle A or subtitle C of title XI [§§1101–1147 and 1171–1177] or title XVIII [§§1800–1899A] of Pub. L. 99–514 require an amendment to any plan, such plan amendment shall not be required to be made before the first plan year beginning on or after Jan. 1, 1989, see section 1140 of Pub. L. 99–514, as amended, set out as a note under section 401 of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code.

Section 405 of Pub. L. 96–364 provided that:

“(a) Except as otherwise provided in the amendments made by this Act [see Short Title of 1980 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of this title] and in subsection (b), if the way in which any such amendment will apply to a particular circumstance is to be set forth in regulations, any reasonable action during the period before such regulations take effect shall be treated as complying with such regulations for such period.

“(b) Subsection (a) shall not apply to any action which violates any instruction issued, or temporary rule prescribed, by the agency having jurisdiction but only if such instruction or rule was published, or furnished to the party taking the action, before such action was taken.”


























This chapter is referred to in sections 49a, 49f, 49g, 795a, 2304 of this title; title 5 section 3502; title 7 section 2015; title 8 sections 1255a, 1613; title 15 section 636; title 18 section 665; title 20 sections 1087vv, 1203a, 1206a, 1208aa, 2322, 2323, 2341a, 2343, 2392, 2396d, 2403, 2413, 2422, 6002, 6122, 6143, 6213, 6214, 6365, 6434, 6453, 6455, 7263; title 22 section 5855; title 26 sections 42, 6334; title 38 sections 4102A, 4213; title 42 sections 602, 603, 607, 683, 685, 1437u, 1474, 3013, 3056, 3056a, 3056h, 4953, 4959, 6103, 6864, 6873, 7274h, 9806, 11302, 12637, 12655m, 12899c, 12899e, 13823; title 48 section 1911.

It is the purpose of this chapter to establish programs to prepare youth and adults facing serious barriers to employment for participation in the labor force by providing job training and other services that will result in increased employment and earnings, increased educational and occupational skills, and decreased welfare dependency, thereby improving the quality of the work force and enhancing the productivity and competitiveness of the Nation.

(Pub. L. 97–300, §2, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1324; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §101(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1022.)

This chapter, referred to in text, was in the original “this Act”, meaning Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, known as the Job Training Partnership Act, which is classified generally to this chapter (§1501 et seq.). For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out below and Tables.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows: “It is the purpose of this chapter to establish programs to prepare youth and unskilled adults for entry into the labor force and to afford job training to those economically disadvantaged individuals and other individuals facing serious barriers to employment, who are in special need of such training to obtain productive employment.”

Section 701 of Pub. L. 102–367 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(c)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 202 of this Act [enacting section 1602 of this title] shall not take effect on July 1, 1993 [Amendment by section 202 did not take effect July 1, 1993, because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1993 were less than the sum referred to above.], and section 202 of the Job Training Partnership Act [section 1602 of this title] shall be amended to read as follows: [For text, see section 1602 of this title.]

“(2)

“(d)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 202 of this Act [enacting section 1602 of this title] shall take effect. [Amendment by section 202 did not take effect because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1998 were less than the sum referred to above.]

“(2)

“(e)

“(1)

“(2)

“(f)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 207 of this Act [enacting section 1642 of this title] shall not take effect on July 1, 1993 [Amendment by section 207 did not take effect July 1, 1993, because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1993 were less than the sum referred to above.] and title II of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.] shall be amended by inserting after section 261 of such Act [section 1641 of this title] the following: [For text, see section 1642 of this title.]

“(2)

“(g)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 207 of this Act [enacting section 1642 of this title] shall take effect. [Amendment by section 207 did not take effect because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1998 were less than the sum referred to above.]

“(2)

“(h)

“(i)

“(1)

“(2)

“(j)

Pub. L. 102–235, §11, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1811, provided that:

“(a) For purposes of this legislation, nothing in this Act [see Short Title of 1991 Amendment note above] shall be construed to mean that Congress is taking a position on the issue of comparable worth.

“(b) Nothing in this Act shall be construed to require, sanction or authorize discrimination in violation of title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2000e et seq.] or any other Federal law prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age. No individual shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, subjected to discrimination under, or denied employment in any program under this Act because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, handicap, political affiliation or belief. Failure to meet the goals in the Act shall not itself constitute a violation of title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 or any other Federal law prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 102–367 provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 1519, 1601 to 1606, 1630 to 1635, 1641 to 1646, 1673, 1734, 1735, 1782 to 1784b, and 1792 to 1792b of this title, amending this section and sections 1502, 1503, 1505, 1511, 1512, 1514 to 1518, 1531 to 1535, 1551 to 1554, 1571, 1572, 1574 to 1577, 1580, 1583, 1652, 1661, 1661c, 1661d, 1662a, 1662c, 1662e, 1671, 1672, 1693, 1696 to 1698, 1703, 1703a, 1706, 1707, 1731 to 1733, 1737, 1752 to 1754, 1772, 1773, 1781, and 1791 to 1791h of this title, section 2014 of Title 7, Agriculture, and sections 1205a and 2322 of Title 20, Education, repealing sections 1591, 1601 to 1605, 1630 to 1634, and 1734 to 1736 of this title, omitting sections 1791i and 1791j of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 1602 and 1642 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Job Training Reform Amendments of 1992’.”

Pub. L. 102–235, §1, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1806, provided that: “This Act [enacting section 1737 of this title, amending sections 1503, 1514, 1531 to 1533, and 1604 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under this section and sections 1514 and 1737 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Nontraditional Employment for Women Act’.”

Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §711, Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248, provided that: “This subtitle [subtitle B (§§711–714) of title VII of Pub. L. 100–628, enacting sections 1583 and 1791 to 1791j of this title, amending sections 49, 49a, 49b, 49d, 49e to 49j, 49*l*, 49*l*–1, 1502, 1504, 1505, 1514, 1516, 1531, and 1602 of this title and section 602 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, and amending provisions set out as a note under section 49 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Jobs for Employable Dependent Individuals Act’.”

Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6301, Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1524, provided that “This title”, meaning subtitle D (§§6301–6307) of title VI of Pub. L. 100–418, which enacted sections 565 and 1505 of this title, amended subchapter III of this chapter and sections 1502, 1516, 1532, and 1752 of this title, and enacted provisions set out as notes under section 1651 of this title, could be cited as the “Economic Dislocation and Worker Adjustment Assistance Act”, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(i), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4023.

Pub. L. 99–496, §1, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1261, provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 1582, 1630, and 1736 of this title and amending sections 1503, 1511, 1516, 1518, 1531, 1533, 1534, 1602, 1603, 1631 to 1634, 1651, 1652, 1707, and 1733 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Job Training Partnership Act Amendments of 1986’.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 97–300 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter and sections 49e, 49f, 49*l*, and 49*l*–1 of this title, amending sections 49, 49a, 49b, 49d, 49g, 49h, 49i, and 49j of this title, section 665 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure, and sections 602, 632, and 633 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, repealing chapter 17 (§801 et seq.) of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 49 and 801 of this title] may be cited as the ‘Job Training Partnership Act’.”

Section 101(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 provided that: “In recognition of the training needs of low-income adults and youth, the Congress declares it to be the policy of the United States to—

“(1) provide financial assistance to States and local service delivery areas to meet the training needs of such low-income adults and youth, and to assist such individuals in obtaining unsubsidized employment;

“(2) increase the funds available for programs under title II of the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.) by not less than 10 percent of the baseline each fiscal year to provide for growth in the percentage of eligible adults and youth served above the 5 percent of the eligible population that is currently served; and

“(3) encourage the provision of longer, more comprehensive, education, training, and employment services to the eligible population, which also requires increased funding in order to maintain current service levels.”

Pub. L. 102–235, §2, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1806, provided that:

“(a)

“(1) over 7,000,000 families in the United States live in poverty, and over half of those families are single parent households headed by women;

“(2) women stand to improve their economic security and independence through the training and other services offered under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.];

“(3) women participating under the Job Training Partnership Act tend to be enrolled in programs for traditionally female occupations;

“(4) many of the Job Training Partnership Act programs that have low female enrollment levels are in fields of work that are nontraditional for women;

“(5) employment in traditionally male occupations leads to higher wages, improved job security, and better long-range opportunities than employment in traditionally female-dominated fields;

“(6) the long-term economic security of women is served by increasing nontraditional employment opportunities for women; and

“(7) older women reentering the work force may have special needs in obtaining training and placement in occupations providing economic security.

“(b)

“(1) to encourage efforts by the Federal, State, and local levels of government aimed at providing a wider range of opportunities for women under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.];

“(2) to provide incentives to establish programs that will train, place, and retain women in nontraditional fields; and

“(3) to facilitate coordination between the Job Training Partnership Act and the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.] to maximize the effectiveness of resources available for training and placing women in nontraditional employment.”

(a)(1) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1993 and for each succeeding fiscal year. Of the sums appropriated to carry out parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter for each such fiscal year, an amount not less than 40 percent of such sums shall be made available to carry out part A of such subchapter and an amount not less than 40 percent of such sums shall be made available to carry out part C of such subchapter.

(2) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part B of subchapter II of this chapter such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1993 and for each succeeding fiscal year.

(b) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out subchapter III of this chapter (other than section 1662e thereof)—

(1) $980,000,000 for fiscal year 1989; and

(2) such sums as may be necessary for each succeeding fiscal year.

(c)(1) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out parts A, C, D, E, F, and G of subchapter IV of this chapter for fiscal year 1993 and each succeeding fiscal year an amount equal to not more than 7 percent of the total amount appropriated to carry out this chapter for each such fiscal year.

(2) From the amount appropriated under paragraph (1) for any fiscal year, the Secretary—

(A) shall first reserve—

(i) an amount of not less than 3.3 percent of the amount available for parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter for such fiscal year to carry out section 1671 of this title; and

(ii) an amount of not less than 3.2 percent of the amount available for parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter for such fiscal year to carry out section 1672 of this title; and

(B) after making such reservations, shall reserve—

(i) an amount equal to 7 percent of the amount appropriated under paragraph (1) to carry out part C of subchapter IV of this chapter;

(ii) $15,000,000 to carry out section 1733 of this title, of which—

(I) not less than 20 percent shall be used to carry out section 1733(b) of this title;

(II) not less than 20 percent shall be used to carry out section 1733(c) of this title; and

(III) $1,000,000 shall be used to carry out section 1733(d) of this title;

(iii) $6,000,000 to carry out subsections (e) and (f) of section 1752 of this title; and

(iv) $2,000,000 to carry out part F of subchapter IV of this chapter.

(3) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part H of subchapter IV of this chapter $100,000,000 for fiscal year 1993 and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1994 through 1997.

(4) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part I of subchapter IV of this chapter $5,000,000 for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997.

(5) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part J of subchapter IV of this chapter,1 $15,000,000 for fiscal year 1993 and such sums as may be necessary for each succeeding fiscal year.

(d) There are authorized to be appropriated $618,000,000 for fiscal year 1983, and such sums as may be necessary for each succeeding fiscal year, to carry out part B of subchapter IV of this chapter.

(e) There are authorized to be appropriated for each of fiscal years 1990 through 1996 such sums as may be necessary to carry out subchapter V of this chapter.

(f) The authorizations of appropriations contained in this section are subject to the program year provisions of section 1571 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, §3, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1324; Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6303, Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1538; Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §714(d), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3256; Pub. L. 101–549, title XI, §1101(b)(2), Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2712; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §102(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1023.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(a)(1), added subsec. (a) and struck out former subsec. (a) which read as follows:

“(1) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part A of subchapter II of this chapter and subchapter IV of this chapter (other than part B of such subchapter) such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1983 and for each succeeding fiscal year.

“(2) From the amount appropriated pursuant to paragraph (1) for any fiscal year, an amount equal to not more than 7 percent of the total amount appropriated pursuant to this section shall be available to carry out parts A, C, D, E, F, and G of subchapter IV of this chapter.

“(3) Of the amount so reserved under paragraph (2)—

“(A) 5 percent shall be available for part C of subchapter IV of this chapter, and

“(B) $2,000,000 shall be available for part F of subchapter IV of this chapter.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(a)(1), (2), redesignated subsec. (c) as (b) and struck out former subsec. (b) which read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out part B of subchapter II of this chapter such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1983 and for each succeeding fiscal year.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(a)(3), added subsec. (c). Former subsec. (c) redesignated (b).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(a)(4), substituted “(e) There” for “(e)(1) Subject to paragraph (2), there”, substituted “1996” for “1994”, and struck out pars. (2) and (3) which read as follows:

“(2) No funds appropriated pursuant to this chapter may be used to carry out such subchapter for any fiscal year unless funds appropriated to carry out part A of subchapter II of this chapter exceed any change in the consumer price index from the amounts appropriated for the previous fiscal year to carry out such part.

“(3) From amounts authorized to be appropriated for subchapter V of this chapter pursuant to paragraph (1), not more than $5,000,000 may be used for purposes of section 1791i of this title.”

1990—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 101–549, §1101(b)(2), inserted “(other than section 1662e thereof)” after “subchapter III of this chapter”.

1988—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 100–418 amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out subchapter III of this chapter such sums as may be necessary for fiscal year 1983 and for each succeeding fiscal year.”

Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 100–628 added subsec. (e) and redesignated former subsec. (e) as (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1602, 1631, 1642, 1652, 1662e, 1733 of this title.

1 So in original. The comma probably should not appear.

For the purposes of this chapter, the following definitions apply:

(1) The term “academic credit” means credit for education, training, or work experience applicable toward a secondary school diploma, a postsecondary degree, or an accredited certificate of completion, consistent with applicable State law and regulation and the requirements of an accredited educational agency or institution in a State.

(2) The term “administrative entity” means the entity designated to administer a job training plan under section 1513(b)(1)(B) of this title.

(3) The term “area of substantial unemployment” means any area of sufficient size and scope to sustain programs under parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter and which has an average rate of unemployment of at least 6.5 percent for the most recent twelve months as determined by the Secretary. Determinations of areas of substantial unemployment shall be made once each fiscal year.

(4) The term “chief elected official” includes—

(A) in the case of a State, the Governor;

(B) in the District of Columbia, the mayor; and

(C) in the case of a service delivery area designated under section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the governing body.

(5) The term “community-based organizations” means private nonprofit organizations which are representative of communities or significant segments of communities and which provide job training services (for example, Opportunities Industrialization Centers, the National Urban League, SER-Jobs for Progress, United Way of America, Mainstream, the National Puerto Rican Forum, National Council of La Raza, 70,001, Jobs for Youth, the Association of Farmworker Opportunity Programs, the Center for Employment Training, literacy organizations, agencies or organizations serving older individuals, organizations that provide service opportunities, youth corps programs, organizations operating career intern programs, neighborhood groups and organizations, community action agencies, community development corporations, vocational rehabilitation organizations, rehabilitation facilities (as defined in section 7(10) 1 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 [29 U.S.C. 706(10)]), agencies serving youth, agencies serving individuals with disabilities, including disabled veterans, agencies serving displaced homemakers, union-related organizations, and employer-related nonprofit organizations), and organizations serving nonreservation Indians, as well as tribal governments and Native Alaskan groups.

(6) Except as otherwise provided therein, the term “council” means the private industry council established under section 1512 of this title.

(7) The term “economic development agencies” includes local planning and zoning commissions or boards, community development agencies, and other local agencies and institutions responsible for regulating, promoting, or assisting in local economic development.

(8) The term “economically disadvantaged” means an individual who (A) receives, or is a member of a family which receives, cash welfare payments under a Federal, State, or local welfare program; (B) has, or is a member of a family which has, received a total family income for the six-month period prior to application for the program involved (exclusive of unemployment compensation, child support payments, and welfare payments) which, in relation to family size, was not in excess of the higher of (i) the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42,2 or (ii) 70 percent of the lower living standard income level; (C) is receiving (or has been determined within the 6-month period prior to the application for the program involved to be eligible to receive) food stamps pursuant to the Food Stamp Act of 1977 [7 U.S.C. 2011 et seq.]; (D) qualifies as a homeless individual under subsections (a) and (c) of section 103 of the Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act [42 U.S.C. 11302(a), (c)]; (E) is a foster child on behalf of whom State or local government payments are made; or (F) in cases permitted by regulations of the Secretary, is an individual with a disability whose own income meets the requirements of clause (A) or (B), but who is a member of a family whose income does not meet such requirements.

(9) The term “Governor” means the chief executive of any State.

(10)(A) The term “individual with a disability” means any individual who has a physical or mental disability which for such individual constitutes or results in a substantial handicap to employment.

(B) The term “individuals with disabilities” means more than one individual with a disability.

(11) The term “Hawaiian native” means any individual any of whose ancestors were natives, prior to 1778, of the area which now comprises the State of Hawaii.

(12) The term “institution of higher education” means any institution of higher education as that term is defined in section 1201(a) of the Higher Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 1141(a)].

(13) The term “labor market area” means an economically integrated geographic area within which individuals can reside and find employment within a reasonable distance or can readily change employment without changing their place of residence. Such areas shall be identified in accordance with criteria used by the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor in defining such areas or similar criteria established by a Governor.

(14) The term “local educational agency” means such an agency as defined in section 521(22) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational 3 Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2471(22)].

(15) The term “low-income level” means $7,000 with respect to income in 1969, and for any later year means that amount which bears the same relationship to $7,000 as the Consumer Price Index for that year bears to the Consumer Price Index for 1969, rounded to the nearest $1,000.

(16) The term “lower living standard income level” means that income level (adjusted for regional, metropolitan, urban, and rural differences and family size) determined annually by the Secretary based on the most recent “lower living family budget” issued by the Secretary.

(17) The term “offender” means any adult or juvenile who is or has been subject to any stage of the criminal justice process for whom services under this chapter may be beneficial or who requires assistance in overcoming artificial barriers to employment resulting from a record of arrest or conviction.

(18) The term “postsecondary institution” means an institution of higher education as that term is defined in section 481(a)(1) of the Higher Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 1088(a)(1)].

(19) The term “private sector” means, for purposes of the State job training councils and private industry councils, persons who are owners, chief executives or chief operating officers of private for-profit employers and major nongovernmental employers, such as health and educational institutions or other executives of such employers who have substantial management or policy responsibility.

(20) The term “public assistance” means Federal, State, or local government cash payments for which eligibility is determined by a needs or income test.

(21) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(22) The term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, Guam, the Northern Mariana Islands, American Samoa, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau.

(23) The term “State educational agency” means such an agency as defined in section 14101 of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 8801].

(24) The term “supportive services” means services which are necessary to enable an individual eligible for training under this chapter, but who cannot afford to pay for such services, to participate in a training program funded under this chapter. Such supportive services may include transportation, health care, financial assistance (except as a post-termination service), drug and alcohol abuse counseling and referral, individual and family counseling, special services, and materials for individuals with disabilities, job coaches, child care and dependent care, meals, temporary shelter, financial counseling, and other reasonable expenses required for participation in the training program and may be provided in-kind or through cash assistance.

(25) The term “unemployed individuals” means individuals who are without jobs and who want and are available for work. The determination of whether individuals are without jobs shall be made in accordance with the criteria used by the Bureau of Labor Statistics of the Department of Labor in defining individuals as unemployed.

(26) The term “unit of general local government” means any general purpose political subdivision of a State which has the power to levy taxes and spend funds, as well as general corporate and police powers.

(27)(A) The term “veteran” means an individual who served in the active military, naval, or air service, and who was discharged or released therefrom under conditions other than dishonorable.

(B) The term “disabled veteran” means (i) a veteran who is entitled to compensation under laws administered by the Secretary of Veterans Affairs, or (ii) an individual who was discharged or released from active duty because of service-connected disability.

(C) The term “recently separated veteran” means any veteran who applies for participation under any subchapter of this chapter within 48 months of the discharge or release from active military, naval, or air service.

(D) The term “Vietnam era veteran” means a veteran any part of whose active military service occurred between August 5, 1964, and May 7, 1975.

(28) The term “vocational education” has the meaning provided in section 521(41) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational 4 Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2471(41)].

(29) The term “displaced homemaker” means an individual who has been providing unpaid services to family members in the home and who—

(A) has been dependent either—

(i) on public assistance and whose youngest child is within 2 years of losing eligibility under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.]; or

(ii) on the income of another family member but is no longer supported by that income; and

(B) is unemployed or underemployed and is experiencing difficulty in obtaining or upgrading employment.

(30) The term “nontraditional employment” as applied to women refers to occupations or fields of work where women comprise less than 25 percent of the individuals employed in such occupation or field of work.

(31) The term “basic skills deficient” means, with respect to an individual, that the individual has English reading or computing skills at or below the 8th grade level on a generally accepted standardized test or a comparable score on a criterion-referenced test.

(32) The term “case management” means the provision of a client-centered approach in the delivery of services, designed to—

(A) prepare and coordinate comprehensive employment plans, such as service strategies, for participants to ensure access to the necessary training and supportive services, using, where feasible, computer-based technologies; and

(B) provide job and career counseling during program participation and after job placement.

(33) The term “citizenship skills” means skills and qualities, such as teamwork, problem-solving ability, self-esteem, initiative, leadership, commitment to life-long learning, and an ethic of civic responsibility, that are characteristic of productive workers and good citizens.

(34) The term “family” means two or more persons related by blood, marriage, or decree of court, who are living in a single residence, and are included in one or more of the following categories:

(A) A husband, wife, and dependent children.

(B) A parent or guardian and dependent children.

(C) A husband and wife.

(35) The term “hard-to-serve individual” means an individual who is included in one or more of the categories described in section 1603(b) of this title or subsection (b) or (d) of section 1643 of this title.

(36) The term “JOBS” means the Job Opportunities and Basic Skills Training Program authorized under part F of title IV of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 681 et seq.).

(37) The term “participant” means an individual who has been determined to be eligible to participate in and who is receiving services (except post-termination services authorized under sections 1604(c)(4) and 1644(d)(5) of this title and followup services authorized under section 1632(d) of this title) under a program authorized by this chapter. Participation shall be deemed to commence on the first day, following determination of eligibility, on which the participant began receiving subsidized employment, training, or other services provided under this chapter.

(38) The term “school dropout” means an individual who is no longer attending any school and who has not received a secondary school diploma or a certificate from a program of equivalency for such a diploma.

(39) The term “termination” means the separation of a participant who is no longer receiving services (except post-termination services authorized under sections 1604(c)(4) and 1644(d)(5) of this title and followup services authorized under section 1632(d) of this title) under a program authorized by this chapter.

(40) The term “youth corps program” means a program, such as a conservation corps or youth service program, that offers productive work with visible community benefits in a natural resource or human service setting and that gives participants a mix of work experience, basic and life skills, education, training, and supportive services.

(Pub. L. 97–300, §4, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1325; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(1), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2487; Pub. L. 99–159, title VII, §713(b)(1), Nov. 22, 1985, 99 Stat. 907; Pub. L. 99–496, §§14(b)(1), 15(a), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1265; Pub. L. 100–77, title VII, §740(a), July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 531; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(2)(A), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 276; Pub. L. 102–235, §3, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1807; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §103(a), (b)(1), title VII, §702(a)(1)–(3), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1024, 1026, 1111, 1112; Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(n)(1), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4023; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(1), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

Section 7 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in par. (5), was subsequently amended, and section 7(10) no longer defines the term “rehabilitation facility”. However, such term is defined elsewhere in that section.

The Food Stamp Act of 1977, referred to in par. (8)(C), is Pub. L. 88–525, Aug. 31, 1964, 78 Stat. 703, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§2011 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2011 of Title 7 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in pars. (29)(A)(i) and (36), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Parts A and F of title IV of the Act are classified generally to parts A (§601 et seq.) and F (§681 et seq.), respectively, of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Par. (29)(A)(i). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “(42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.)” after “Social Security Act”.

1994—Par. (23). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “section 14101” for “section 1471(23)”.

1992—Par. (3). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(1), substituted “programs under parts A and C” for “a program under part A”.

Par. (5). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(2), (b)(1)(A), inserted “the Association of Farmworker Opportunity Programs, the Center for Employment Training, literacy organizations, agencies or organizations serving older individuals, organizations that provide service opportunities, youth corps programs,” after “Jobs for Youth,”, substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “the handicapped”, and struck out “(including the National Urban Indian Council)” after “nonreservation Indians”.

Par. (8)(B)(i). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(3)(A), substituted “the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42” for “the poverty level determined in accordance with criteria established by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget”.

Par. (8)(C). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(3)(B), inserted “(or has been determined within the 6-month period prior to the application for the program involved to be eligible to receive)” after “is receiving”.

Par. (8)(D). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(3)(C), inserted “subsections (a) and (c) of” after “homeless individual under”.

Par. (8)(F). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(3)(D), (b)(1)(B), amended subpar. (F) identically, substituting “individual with a disability” for “adult handicapped individual”.

Par. (10). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(4), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A), substituted “individual with a disability” for “handicapped individual”, and added subpar. (B).

Par. (14). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(1), substituted “section 521(22)” for “section 521(19)”.

Par. (22). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(5), substituted “the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau” for “and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Par. (23). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(2), substituted “section 1471(23) of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965” for “section 1201(h) of the Higher Education Act of 1965”.

Par. (24). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(6), inserted “financial assistance (except as a post-termination service), drug and alcohol abuse counseling and referral, individual and family counseling,” after “health care,”, substituted “materials for individuals with disabilities, job coaches” for “materials for the handicapped”, and inserted “and dependent care” after “child care”.

Par. (27)(C). Pub. L. 102–367, §701(a)(3), realigned margins.

Par. (28). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(b)(1)(C), substituted “section 521(41)” for “section 521(31)”.

Par. (29). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(7), amended par. (29) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (29) read as follows: “The term ‘displaced homemaker’ means an individual who—

“(A) was a full-time homemaker for a substantial number of years; and

“(B) derived the substantial share of his or her support from—

“(i) a spouse and no longer receives such support due to the death, divorce, permanent disability of, or permanent separation from the spouse; or

“(ii) public assistance on account of dependents in the home and no longer receives such support.”

Pars. (31) to (40). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(a)(8), added pars. (31) to (40).

1991—Par. (27)(B). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Secretary of Veterans Affairs” for “Veterans’ Administration”.

Par. (30). Pub. L. 102–235 added par. (30).

1987—Par. (8). Pub. L. 100–77 added cl. (D) and redesignated former cls. (D) and (E) as (E) and (F), respectively.

1986—Par. (5). Pub. L. 99–496, §15(a)(1), inserted “, including disabled veterans” after “handicapped”.

Par. (27)(C), (D). Pub. L. 99–496, §15(a)(2), added subpars. (C) and (D).

Par. (29). Pub. L. 99–496, §14(b)(1), added par. (29).

1985—Par. (14). Pub. L. 99–159 made a clarifying amendment to Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(1)(A). See 1984 Amendment note below.

1984—Par. (14). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(1)(A), as amended by Pub. L. 99–159, substituted “section 521(19) of the Carl. D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 195(10) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Par. (23). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(1)(B), substituted “section 1201(h) of the Higher Education Act of 1965” for “section 195(11) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Par. (28). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(1)(C), substituted “section 521(31) of the Carl. D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 195(1) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–159 effective July 1, 1985, see section 714(a) of Pub. L. 99–159, set out as a note under section 2311 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1513, 1604, 1651, 2302, 2508 of this title; title 20 sections 2471, 5938, 6103; title 42 sections 685, 12773.

1 See References in Text note below.

2 So in original. Probably should be “42),”.

3 So in original. Probably should be “Vocational and Applied Technology”.

4 So in original. Probably should be “Vocational and Applied Technology”.

The Secretary shall insure that each individual participating in any program established under this chapter, or receiving any assistance or benefit under this chapter, has not violated section 3 of the Military Selective Service Act (50 U.S.C. App. 453) by not presenting and submitting to registration as required pursuant to such section. The Director of the Selective Service System shall cooperate with the Secretary in carrying out this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §604, formerly title V, §504, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1399; renumbered title VI, §604, Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), (2), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248.)

(1) The Secretary shall carry out the purposes of this section with sums appropriated pursuant to paragraph (2) for any fiscal year.

(2) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section $50,000,000 for fiscal year 1989 and such sums as may be necessary for each succeeding fiscal year.

The Secretary shall make such sums available through the United States Employment Service for the development and implementation of job bank systems in each State. Such systems shall be designed to use computerized electronic data processing and telecommunications systems for such purposes as—

(1) identifying job openings and referring jobseekers to job openings, with continual updating of such information;

(2) providing information on occupational supply and demand; and

(3) utilization of such systems by career information delivery systems (including career counseling programs in schools).

Wherever possible, computerized data systems developed with assistance under this section shall be capable of utilizing software compatible with other systems (including management information systems and unemployment insurance and other income maintenance programs) used in the administration of employment and training programs. In developing such systems, special consideration shall be given to the advice and recommendations of the State occupational information coordinating committees (established under section 2422(b) of title 20), and other users of such systems for the various purposes described in subsection (b) of this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title VI, §605, formerly title V, §505, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6307(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1541; renumbered title VI, §505, Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(1), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; renumbered §605, Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(20), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1113.)

The Secretary of Labor shall provide for grants to States to provide educational assistance and training for United States workers. The Secretary shall consult with the Secretary of Education in making grants under this section.

Within the purposes described in subsection (a) of this section, funds in the account used under this section shall be allocated among the States based on a formula, established jointly by the Secretaries of Labor and Education, that takes into consideration—

(1) the location of foreign workers admitted into the United States,

(2) the location of individuals in the United States requiring and desiring the educational assistance and training for which the funds can be applied, and

(3) the location of unemployed and underemployed United States workers.

(1) Within the purposes and allocations established under this section, disbursements shall be made to the States, in accordance with grant applications submitted to and approved jointly by the Secretaries of Labor and Education, to be applied in a manner consistent with the guidelines established by such Secretaries in consultation with the States. In applying such grants, the States shall consider providing funding to joint labor-management trust funds and other such non-profit organizations which have demonstrated capability and experience in directly training and educating workers.

(2) Not more than 5 percent of the funds disbursed to any State under this section may be used for administrative expenses.

The Secretaries shall provide that not more than 2 percent of the amount of funds disbursed to States under this section may be used by the Federal Government in the administration of this section.

The Secretary of Labor shall report annually to the Congress on the grants to States provided under this section.

In this section, the term “State” has the meaning given such term in section 1101(a)(36) of title 8.

(Pub. L. 101–649, title VIII, §801, Nov. 29, 1990, 104 Stat. 5087.)

Section was enacted as part of the Immigration Act of 1990, and not as part of the Job Training Partnership Act which comprises this chapter.

This subchapter is referred to in section 1634 of this title.

(1) The Governor shall, after receiving the proposal of the State job training coordinating council, publish a proposed designation of service delivery areas for the State each of which—

(A) is comprised of the State or one or more units of general local government;

(B) will promote effective delivery of job training services; and

(C)(i) is consistent with labor market areas or standard metropolitan statistical areas, but this clause shall not be construed to require designation of an entire labor market area; or

(ii) is consistent with areas in which related services are provided under other State or Federal programs.

(2) The Council shall include in its proposal a written explanation of the reasons for designating each service delivery area.

(3) Units of general local government (and combinations thereof), business organizations, and other affected persons or organizations shall be given an opportunity to comment on the proposed designation of service delivery areas and to request revisions thereof.

(4)(A) The Governor shall approve any request to be a service delivery area from—

(i) any unit of general local government with a population of 200,000 or more;

(ii) any consortium of contiguous units of general local government with an aggregate population of 200,000 or more which serves a substantial part of one or more labor market areas; and

(iii) any concentrated employment program grantee for a rural area which served as a prime sponsor under the Comprehensive Employment and Training Act.

(B) The Governor may approve a request to be a service delivery area from any unit of general local government or consortium of contiguous units of general local government, without regard to population, which serves a substantial portion of a labor market area.

(C) If the Governor denies a request submitted under subparagraph (A) and the entity making such request alleges that the decision of the Governor is contrary to the provisions of this section, such entity may appeal the decision to the Secretary, who shall make a final decision within 30 days after such appeal is received.

The Governor shall make a final designation of service delivery areas within the State. Before making a final designation of service delivery areas for the State, the Governor shall review the comments submitted under subsection (a)(3) of this section and requests submitted under subsection (a)(4) of this section.

(1) In accordance with subsection (a) of this section, the Governor may redesignate service delivery areas no more frequently than every two years, except as provided for in sections 1516(j)(4)(B) and 1574(b)(1)(B) of this title. Such redesignations shall be made not later than 4 months before the beginning of a program year.

(2) Subject to paragraph (1), the Governor shall make such a redesignation if a petition to do so is filed by an entity specified in subsection (a)(4)(A) of this section.

(3) The provisions of this subsection are subject to section 1515(c) of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §101, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1327; Pub. L. 99–496, §2, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1261; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §111, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1026.)

The Comprehensive Employment and Training Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(4)(A)(iii), is Pub. L. 93–203, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 17 (§801 et seq.) of this title, and was repealed by section 184(a)(1) of the Job Training Partnership Act, Pub. L. 97–300, title I, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1357, which is classified principally to this chapter. Provisions of the Comprehensive Employment and Training Act relating to prime sponsors were classified to section 811 of this title prior to its repeal.

1992—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 102–367 inserted “, except as provided for in sections 1516(j)(4)(B) and 1574(b)(1)(B) of this title” before period at end of first sentence.

1986—Subsec. (a)(4)(A)(ii). Pub. L. 99–496 substituted “one or more labor market areas” for “a labor market area”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1512, 1513, 1515, 1518, 1578, 1602, 1642, 1661a of this title.

There shall be a private industry council for every service delivery area established under section 1511 of this title, to be selected in accordance with this subsection. Each council shall consist of—

(1) representatives of the private sector, who shall constitute a majority of the membership of the council and who shall be owners of business concerns, chief executives or chief operating officers of nongovernmental employers, or other private sector executives who have substantial management or policy responsibility;

(2) representatives of organized labor and community-based organizations, who shall constitute not less than 15 percent of the membership of the council; and

(3) representatives of each of the following:

(A) Educational agencies (which agencies shall be representative of all educational agencies in the service delivery area).

(B) Vocational rehabilitation agencies.

(C) Public assistance agencies.

(D) Economic development agencies.

(E) The public employment service.

The Chairman of the council shall be selected from among members of the council who are representatives of the private sector.

(1)(A) Private sector representatives on the council shall be selected from among individuals nominated by general purpose business organizations after consulting with, and receiving recommendations from, other business organizations in the service delivery area. The number of such nominations shall be at least 150 percent of the number of individuals to be appointed under subsection (a)(1) of this section. Such nominations, and the individuals selected from such nominations, shall reasonably represent the industrial and demographic composition of the business community. Whenever possible, at least one-half of such business and industry representatives shall be representatives of small business, including minority business.

(B) For the purpose of this paragraph, the term—

(i) “general purpose business organizations” means organizations which admit to membership any for-profit business operating within the service delivery area; and

(ii) “small business” means private for-profit enterprises employing 500 or fewer employees.

(2) The education representatives on the council shall be selected from among individuals nominated by regional or local educational agencies, vocational education institutions, institutions of higher education (including entities offering adult education) or general organizations of such institutions, within the service delivery area.

(3) The labor representatives on the council shall be selected from individuals recommended by recognized State and local labor federations. If the State or local labor federation fails to nominate a sufficient number of individuals to meet the labor representation requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section, individual workers may be included on the council to complete the labor representation.

(4) The remaining members of the council shall be selected from individuals recommended by interested organizations.

(1) In any case in which there is only one unit of general local government with experience in administering job training programs within the service delivery area, the chief elected official of that unit shall appoint members to the council from the individuals nominated or recommended under subsection (c) of this section.

(2) In any case in which there are two or more such units of general local government in the service delivery area, the chief elected officials of such units shall appoint members to the council from the individuals so nominated or recommended in accordance with an agreement entered into by such units of general local government. In the absence of such an agreement, the appointments shall be made by the Governor from the individuals so nominated or recommended.

The initial number of members of the council shall be determined—

(1) by the chief elected official in the case described in subsection (d)(1) of this section,

(2) by the chief elected officials in accordance with the agreement in the case described in subsection (d)(2) of this section, or

(3) by the Governor in the absence of such agreement.

Thereafter, the number of members of the council shall be determined by the council.

Members shall be appointed for fixed and staggered terms and may serve until their successors are appointed. Any vacancy in the membership of the council shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment. Any member of the council may be removed for cause in accordance with procedures established by the council.

The Governor shall certify a private industry council if the Governor determines that its composition and appointments are consistent with the provisions of this subsection. Such certification shall be made or denied within 30 days after the date on which a list of members and necessary supporting documentation are submitted to the Governor. When the Governor certifies the council, it shall be convened within 30 days by the official or officials who made the appointments to such council under subsection (d) of this section.

In any case in which the service delivery area is a State, the State job training coordinating council or a portion of such council may be reconstituted to meet the requirements of this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §102, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1328; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §112, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1026.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(2), (3). Pub. L. 102–367, §112(a)(1), added pars. (2) and (3) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “representatives of educational agencies (representative of all educational agencies in the service delivery area), organized labor, rehabilitation agencies, community-based organizations, economic development agencies, and the public employment service.”

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §112(a)(2), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “Education representatives on the council shall be selected from among individuals nominated by local educational agencies, vocational education institutions, institutions of higher education, or general organizations of such agencies or institutions, and by private and proprietary schools or general organizations of such schools, within the service delivery area.”

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 102–367, §112(a)(3), amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “The remaining members of the council shall be selected from individuals recommended by interested organizations. Labor representatives shall be recommended by recognized State and local labor organizations or appropriate building trades councils.”

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 102–367, §112(a)(4), added par. (4).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1515, 1574, 1661, 1781, 1792a of this title; title 19 section 2296; title 20 sections 1201a, 2321, 2325, 2343, 6103; title 42 sections 685, 11481.

It shall be the responsibility of the private industry council to provide policy guidance for, and exercise oversight with respect to, activities under the job training plan for its service delivery area in partnership with the unit or units of general local government within its service delivery area.

(1) The council, in accordance with an agreement or agreements with the appropriate chief elected official or officials specified in subsection (c) of this section, shall—

(A) determine procedures for the development of the job training plan, which may provide for the preparation of all or any part of the plan (i) by the council, (ii) by any unit of general local government in the service delivery area, or by an agency thereof, or (iii) by such other methods or institutions as may be provided in such agreement; and

(B) select as a grant recipient and 1 entity to administer the job training plan (which may be separate entities), (i) the council, (ii) a unit of general local government in its service delivery area, or an agency thereof, (iii) a nonprofit private organization or corporation, or (iv) any other agreed upon entity or entities.

(2) The council is authorized to provide oversight of the programs conducted under the job training plan in accordance with procedures established by the council. In order to carry out this paragraph, the council shall have access to such information concerning the operations of such programs as is necessary.

For purposes of subsection (b) of this section, the appropriate chief elected official or officials means—

(1) the chief elected official of the sole unit of general local government in the service delivery area,

(2) the individual or individuals selected by the chief elected officials of all units of general local government in such area as their authorized representative, or

(3) in the case of a service delivery area designated under section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the representative of the chief elected official for such area (as defined in section 1503(4)(C) of this title).

No job training plan prepared under section 1514 of this title may be submitted to the Governor unless (1) the plan has been approved by the council and by the appropriate chief elected official or officials specified in subsection (c) of this section, and (2) the plan is submitted jointly by the council and such official or officials.

In order to carry out its functions under this chapter, the council—

(1) shall, in accordance with the job training plan, prepare and approve a budget for itself, and

(2) may hire staff, incorporate, and solicit and accept contributions and grant funds (from other public and private sources).

As used in this section, the term “oversight” means reviewing, monitoring, and evaluating.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §103, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1330; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(a), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026.)

1982—Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted reference to section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title for reference to section 1514(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1514, 1515 of this title; title 42 sections 603, 12899f, 12899h.

1 So in original. Probably should be “an”.

No funds appropriated under subchapter II of this chapter for any fiscal year may be provided to any service delivery area under this chapter except pursuant to a job training plan for two program years which is prepared in accordance with section 1513 of this title and which meets the requirements of this section.

Each job training plan for the programs conducted under subchapter II of this chapter shall contain—

(1) an identification of the entity that will administer the program and be the grant recipient of funds from the State;

(2) if there is more than one service delivery area in a single labor market area, provisions for coordinating particular aspects of the service delivery area program with other programs and service providers in the labor market area, including provisions for—

(A) assessing needs and problems in the labor market that form the basis for program planning;

(B) ensuring access by program participants in each service delivery area to skills training and employment opportunities throughout the entire labor market;

(C) coordinating or jointly implementing job development, placement, and other employer outreach activities; and

(D) entering into agreements and contracts, established pursuant to section 1551(e)(2) of this title, between service delivery areas to pay or share the cost of services;

(3) a description of methods of complying with the coordination criteria contained in the Governor's coordination and special services plan;

(4) a description of linkages established with appropriate agencies, pursuant to sections 1605 and 1645 of this title, designed to enhance the provision of services and avoid duplication, including—

(A) agreements with appropriate educational agencies;

(B) arrangements with other education, training, and employment programs authorized by Federal law;

(C) if appropriate, joint programs in which activities supported with assistance under this chapter are coordinated with activities (such as service opportunities and youth corps programs) supported with assistance made available under the National and Community Service Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12501 et seq.); and

(D) efforts to ensure the effective delivery of services to participants in coordination with local welfare agencies and other local agencies, community-based organizations, volunteer groups, business and labor organizations, and other training, education, employment, and social service programs;

(5) goals and objectives for the programs, including—

(A) a description of the manner in which the program will contribute to the economic self-sufficiency of participants, and the productivity of the local area and the Nation; and

(B) performance standards established in accordance with standards prescribed under section 1516 of this title;

(6) procedures for identifying and selecting participants, including—

(A) goals for the training and placement of hard-to-serve individuals, and a description of efforts to be undertaken to accomplish such goals;

(B) outreach efforts to recruit and expand awareness of training and placement opportunities for such individuals; and

(C) types of services to be provided to address the special needs of such individuals;

(7)(A) goals for—

(i) the training of women in nontraditional employment; and

(ii) the training-related placement of women in nontraditional employment and apprenticeships; and

(B) a description of efforts to be undertaken to accomplish the goals described in subparagraph (A), including efforts to increase awareness of such training and placement opportunities;

(8) adult and youth program budgets for 2 program years and any proposed expenditures for the succeeding 2 program years;

(9) a description of—

(A) the assessment process that will identify participant skill levels;

(B) the process for providing information and referrals for applicants and participants relating to appropriate programs and service providers;

(C) the services to be provided, including the means for involving labor organizations and community-based organizations in the provision of services, the estimated duration of service, and the estimated training cost per participant;

(D) the competency levels to be achieved by participants as a result of program participation; and

(E) the procedures for evaluating the progress of participants in achieving competencies;

(10) a description of the procedures and methods of carrying out subchapter V of this chapter, where applicable, relating to incentive bonus payments for the placement of individuals eligible under such subchapter;

(11) procedures, consistent with sections 1517 and 1574 of this title, for selecting service providers, which procedures shall take into account—

(A) past performance of the providers regarding—

(i) job training, basic skills training, or related activities;

(ii) fiscal accountability; and

(iii) ability to meet performance standards; and

(B) the ability of the providers to provide services that can lead to achievement of competency standards for participants with identified deficiencies;

(12) fiscal control (including procurement, monitoring, and management information system requirements), accounting, audit, and debt collection procedures, consistent with section 1574 of this title, to assure the proper disbursal of, and accounting for, funds received under subchapter II of this chapter; and

(13) procedures for the preparation and submission of an annual report to the Governor, which report shall include—

(A) a description of activities conducted during the program year;

(B) characteristics of participants;

(C) information on the extent to which applicable performance standards were met;

(D) information on the extent to which the service delivery area has met the goals of the area for the training and training-related placement of women in nontraditional employment and apprenticeships; and

(E) a statistical breakdown of women trained and placed in nontraditional occupations, including information regarding—

(i) the type of training received, by occupation;

(ii) whether the participant was placed in a job or apprenticeship, and, if so, the occupation and wage at placement;

(iii) the age of the participant;

(iv) the race of the participant; and

(v) retention of the participant in nontraditional employment.

If changes in labor market conditions, funding, or other factors require substantial deviation from an approved job training plan, the private industry council and the appropriate chief elected official or officials (as described in section 1513(c) of this title) shall submit a modification of such plan (including modification of the budget under subsection (b)(6) of this section), which shall be subject to review in accordance with section 1515 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §104, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1331; Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §714(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3255; Pub. L. 102–235, §4, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1807; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §113, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1027.)

The National and Community Service Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(4)(C), is Pub. L. 101–610, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3127, which is classified principally to chapter 129 (§12501 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12501 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §113(a), inserted “under subchapter II of this chapter” after “appropriated”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §113(b), amended subsec. (b) generally, substituting pars. (1) to (13) for former pars. (1) to (12) which also related to contents of job training plans.

1991—Subsec. (b)(5) to (11). Pub. L. 102–235, §4(1), (2), added par. (5) and redesignated former pars. (5) to (10) as (6) to (11), respectively. Former par. (11) redesignated (12).

Subsec. (b)(12). Pub. L. 102–235, §4(1), (3), redesignated par. (11) as (12) and added subpars. (D) and (E).

1988—Subsec. (b)(7) to (11). Pub. L. 100–628 redesignated pars. (7) to (10) as (8) to (11), respectively, and added a new par. (7). The portion of Pub. L. 100–628 directing redesignation of par. (11) as (12) could not be executed because subsec. (b) did not contain a par. (11).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section 12 of Pub. L. 102–235 provided that: “This Act [enacting section 1737 of this title, amending this section and sections 1503, 1531 to 1533, and 1604 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as notes under sections 1501 and 1737 of this title] and the amendments made by this Act shall take effect upon the date of enactment of this Act [Dec. 12, 1991], except that the requirements imposed by sections 4, 5, and 6 of this Act [amending this section and sections 1531 and 1532 of this title] shall apply to the plan or report filed or reviewed for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1992.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1513, 1515, 1531, 1532, 1551, 1604, 1632 of this title; title 20 section 2323.

(1) Not less than 120 days before the beginning of the first of the two program years covered by the job training plan—

(A) the proposed plan or summary thereof shall be published; and

(B) such plan shall be made available for review and comment to—

(i) each house of the State legislature for appropriate referral;

(ii) appropriate community-based organizations and local educational and other public agencies in the service delivery area; and

(iii) labor organizations in the area which represent employees having the skills in which training is proposed; and

(C) such plan shall be reasonably available to the general public through such means as public hearings and local news facilities.

(2) The final plan, or a summary thereof, shall be published not later than 80 days before the first of the two program years and shall be submitted to the Governor in accordance with section 1513(d)(2) of this title. Any modification shall be published not later than 80 days before it is effective and shall be submitted to the Governor in accordance with such section.

(1) The Governor shall approve the job training plan or modification thereof unless he finds that—

(A) corrective measures for deficiencies found in audits or in meeting performance standards from previous years have not been taken or are not acceptably underway;

(B) the entity proposed to administer the program does not have the capacity to administer the funds;

(C) there are inadequate safeguards for the protection of funds received;

(D) the plan (or modification) does not comply with a particular provision or provisions of this chapter or of regulations of the Secretary under this chapter; or

(E) the plan (or modification) does not comply with the criteria under sections 1531(b), 1605, and 1645 of this title for coordinating activities under this chapter with related program activities.

(2) The Governor shall approve or disapprove a job training plan (or modification) within 30 days after the date that the plan (or modification) is submitted, except that if a petition is filed under paragraph (3) such period shall be extended to 45 days. Any disapproval by the Governor may be appealed to the Secretary, who shall make a final decision of whether the Governor's disapproval complies with paragraph (1) of this subsection within 45 days after receipt of the appeal.

(3)(A) Interested parties may petition the Governor within 15 days of the date of submission for disapproval of the plan or modification thereof if—

(i) the party can demonstrate that it represents a substantial client interest,

(ii) the party took appropriate steps to present its views and seek resolution of disputed issues prior to submission of the plan to the Governor, and

(iii) the request for disapproval is based on a violation of statutory requirements.

(B) If the Governor approves the plan (or modification), the Governor shall notify the petitioner in writing of such decision and the reasons therefor.

(1) If a private industry council and the appropriate chief elected official or officials fail to reach the agreement required under section 1513(b) or (d) of this title and, as a consequence, funds for a service delivery area may not be made available under section 1514 of this title, then the Governor shall redesignate, without regard to sections 1 1511(a)(4) and (c)(1) of this title, the service delivery areas in the State to merge the affected area into one or more other service delivery areas, in order to promote the reaching of agreement.

(2) In any State in which service delivery areas are redesignated under paragraph (1), private industry councils shall, to the extent necessary for the redesignation, be reconstituted and job training plans modified as required to comply with sections 1512 and 1513 of this title. Services under an approved plan shall not be suspended while the council is reconstituted and the plan is modified.

In any case in which the service delivery area is a State, the plan (or modification) shall be submitted to the Secretary for approval. For the purpose of this subsection, the Secretary shall have the same authority as the Governor has under this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §105, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1332; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §114, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1030.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(1)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 102–367, §114(1), inserted “community-based organizations and” after “appropriate”.

Subsec. (b)(1)(E). Pub. L. 102–367, §114(2), substituted “sections 1531(b), 1605, and 1645 of this title” for “section 1531(b) of this title”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1511, 1514, 1578, 1661, 1661b of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “section”.

The Congress recognizes that job training is an investment in human capital and not an expense. In order to determine whether that investment has been productive, the Congress finds that—

(1) it is essential that criteria for measuring the return on this investment be developed; and

(2) the basic return on the investment is to be measured by long-term economic self-sufficiency, increased employment and earnings, reductions in welfare dependency, and increased educational attainment and occupational skills.

In prescribing performance standards for programs under parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter, the Secretary shall ensure that States and service delivery areas will make efforts to increase services and positive outcomes for hard-to-serve individuals.

In order to determine whether the basic measures described in subsection (a) of this section are achieved for programs under parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter, the Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Education and the Secretary of Health and Human Services, shall prescribe performance standards.

The Secretary shall base the performance standards for adult programs under part A of subchapter II of this chapter on appropriate factors, which may include—

(A) placement in unsubsidized employment;

(B) retention for not less than 6 months in unsubsidized employment;

(C) an increase in earnings, including hourly wages;

(D) a reduction in welfare dependency; and

(E) acquisition of skills, including basic skills, required to promote continued employability in the local labor market (including attainment of the competency levels described in paragraph (5)), or acquisition of a high school diploma or the equivalent of the diploma, if the acquisition of such skills or diploma is in addition to obtaining one or more of the outcomes described in subparagraphs (A) through (D).

The Secretary shall base the performance standards for youth programs under part C of subchapter II of this chapter on appropriate factors described in paragraph (3), and on factors including—

(i) attainment of employment competencies (including attainment of the competency levels described in paragraph (5));

(ii) dropout prevention and recovery;

(iii) secondary and postsecondary school completion or the equivalent of such completion; and

(iv) enrollment in other training programs, apprenticeships, or postsecondary education, or enlistment in the Armed Forces.

The Secretary may prescribe variations in the standards described in subparagraph (A) to reflect the differences between in-school and out-of-school programs.

The private industry councils, in consultation with appropriate educational agencies, and, where appropriate, the private sector, labor organizations, and community-based organizations, shall establish youth and adult competency levels, based on such factors as entry level skills and other hiring requirements.

The performance standards described in paragraphs (3) and (4) shall include provisions governing—

(A) the base period prior to program participation that will be used for measurement of the factors in such paragraphs, as appropriate;

(B) a representative period after termination from the program that is a reasonable indicator of postprogram employment, earnings, and cash welfare payment reductions; and

(C) cost-effective methods for obtaining such data as are necessary to carry out this section and section 1732(d) of this title which, notwithstanding any other provision of law, may include access to earnings records, State employment security records, records collected under the Federal Insurance Contributions Act (chapter 21 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986) [26 U.S.C. 3101 et seq.], records collected under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.], statistical sampling techniques, and similar records or measures, with appropriate safeguards to protect the confidentiality of the information obtained.

From funds available under section 1602(c)(1)(B) of this title, and under section 1642(c)(1)(B) of this title, for providing incentive grants under this paragraph, each Governor shall award incentive grants for programs under parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter, other than programs under section 1604(d) of this title, to service delivery areas that—

(A) exceed the performance standards established by the Secretary under this subsection (except for the standards established under paragraph (8)) with respect to services to all participants;

(B) exceed the performance standards established by the Secretary under this subsection (except for the standards established under paragraph (8)) with respect to services to populations of hard-to-serve individuals;

(C) serve more than the minimum percentage of out-of-school youth required by section 1643(f) of this title;

(D) place participants in employment that—

(i) provides post-program earnings exceeding the applicable performance criteria; and

(ii) includes employer-assisted employment benefits, including health benefits, consistent with the requirements of section 1553(a)(4) of this title relating to subsidized employment; and

(E) exceed the performance standards established by the Governor under subsection (e) of this section for programs under subchapter II of this chapter, except that not more than 25 percent of the incentive grants shall be awarded on performance standards established under subsection (e) of this section.

The Secretary shall prescribe performance standards relating gross program expenditures to various performance measures under this subsection, excluding any cost per participant measure. The Governors shall not take performance standards prescribed under this paragraph into consideration in awarding incentive grants under paragraph (7).

The Secretary shall prescribe performance standards for programs under subchapter III of this chapter based on placement and retention in unsubsidized employment.

In prescribing performance standards under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall make appropriate allowance for the difference in cost resulting from serving workers receiving needs-related payments under section 1661c(e) of this title.

Each Governor shall prescribe, and report in the Governor's coordination and special services plan, within parameters established by the Secretary, variations in the standards issued under subsections (b) and (c) of this section based upon—

(A) specific economic, geographic, and demographic factors in the State and in service delivery areas and substate areas within the State;

(B) the characteristics of the population to be served;

(C) the demonstrated difficulties in serving the population; and

(D) the type of services to be provided.

The Secretary shall—

(A) provide information and technical assistance on performance standards adjustments;

(B) collect data that identifies hard-to-serve individuals;

(C) provide guidance on setting performance standards at the service provider level that encourages increased service to such individuals; and

(D) review performance standards to ensure that such standards provide maximum incentive in serving such individuals.

The Governor may prescribe performance standards for programs under subchapter II of this chapter and subchapter III of this chapter in addition to those standards established by the Secretary under subsections (b) and (c) of this section. Such additional standards may include criteria relating to establishment of effective linkages with other programs to avoid duplication and enhance the delivery of services, the provision of high quality services, and successful service to hard-to-serve individuals. The additional performance standards established for subchapter II of this chapter shall be reported in the Governor's coordination and special services plan.

The Secretary shall prescribe performance standards for programs under parts A and B of subchapter IV of this chapter.

The Secretary shall prescribe a system for variations in performance standards for special populations to be served, including Native Americans, migrant and seasonal farmworkers, disabled and Vietnam era veterans, including veterans who served in the Indochina Theater between August 5, 1964 and May 7, 1975, older individuals, including those served under section 1604(d) of this title, and offenders, taking into account their special circumstances.

The Secretary may modify the performance standards under this section not more often than once every 2 program years. Such modifications shall not be retroactive.

Notwithstanding paragraph (1), the Secretary may modify standards relating to programs under part B of subchapter IV of this chapter each program year.

The National Commission for Employment Policy shall—

(1) advise the Secretary in the development of performance standards under this section for measuring results of participation in job training and in the development of parameters for variations of such standards referred to in subsection (d) of this section;

(2) evaluate the usefulness of such standards as measures of desired performance; and

(3) evaluate the impact of such standards (intended or otherwise) on the choice of who is served, what services are provided, and the cost of such services in service delivery areas.

The Secretary shall establish uniform criteria for determining whether—

(A) a service delivery area fails to meet performance standards under this section; and

(B) the circumstances under which remedial action authorized under this subsection shall be taken.

Each Governor shall provide technical assistance to service delivery areas failing to meet performance standards under the uniform criteria established under paragraph (1)(A).

Not later than 90 days after the end of each program year, each Governor shall report to the Secretary the final performance standards and performance for each service delivery area within the State, along with the plans of the Governor for providing the technical assistance required under paragraph (2).

If a service delivery area continues to fail to meet such performance standards for 2 consecutive program years, the Governor shall notify the Secretary and the service delivery area of the continued failure, and shall develop and impose a reorganization plan.

Such plan may restructure the private industry council, prohibit the use of designated service providers, merge the service delivery area into one or more other existing service delivery areas, or make other changes as the Governor determines to be necessary to improve performance, including the selection of an alternative administrative entity to administer the program for the service delivery area.

The alternative administrative entity described in subparagraph (B) may be a newly formed private industry council or any agency jointly selected by the Governor and the chief elected official of the largest unit of general local government in the service delivery area or substate area.

If the Governor has not imposed a reorganization plan as required by paragraph (4) within 90 days of the end of the second program year in which a service delivery area has failed to meet its performance standards, the Secretary shall develop and impose such a plan.

The Secretary shall recapture or withhold an amount not to exceed one-fifth of the State administration set-aside allocated under section 1602(c)(1)(A) of this title and under section 1642(c)(1)(A) of this title, for the purposes of providing technical assistance under a reorganization plan imposed pursuant to subparagraph (A).

A service delivery area that is the subject of a reorganization plan under paragraph (4) may, within 30 days after receiving notice thereof, appeal to the Secretary to rescind or revise such plan.

If the Secretary determines, upon appeal under subparagraph (A), that the Governor has not provided appropriate technical assistance as required under paragraph (2), the Secretary shall recapture or withhold an amount not to exceed one-fifth of the State administration set-aside allotted under section 1602(c)(1)(A) of this title and under section 1642(c)(1)(A) of this title. The Secretary shall use funds recaptured or withheld under this subparagraph to provide appropriate technical assistance.

If the Secretary approved the technical assistance plan provided by the Governor under paragraph (2), a determination under this subparagraph shall only be based on failure to effectively implement such plan and shall not be based on the plan itself.

A Governor of a State that is subject to recapture or withholding under paragraph (5) or (6)(B) may, within 30 days of receiving notice thereof, appeal such withholding to the Secretary.

For the purposes of this section, the term “employment” means employment for 20 or more hours per week.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §106, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1333; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(b), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 99–496, §15(b), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1266; Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6304(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1538; Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §§713(b), 714(b), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3255, 3256; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §115(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1030; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(2), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Federal Insurance Contributions Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(6)(C), is act Aug. 16, 1954, ch. 736, §§3101, 3102, 3111, 3112, 3121 to 3128, 68A Stat. 415, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 21 (§3101 et seq.) of Title 26, Internal Revenue Code. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 3128 of Title 26 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(6)(C), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b)(6)(C). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “records collected under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act,” for “State aid to families with dependent children records,”

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting subsecs. (a) to (k) for former subsecs. (a) to (h) which also related to performance standards for programs under this chapter.

1988—Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 100–628, §714(b), added par. (5).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 100–628, §713(b), designated existing provision as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Pub. L. 100–418, §6304(a)(1), inserted reference to subsec. (g) of this section and directed the insertion of “and in substate areas” after “State”, which was executed by making the insertion after “State” the first place it appeared to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 100–418, §6304(a)(2), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

1986—Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 99–496 inserted reference to disabled and Vietnam era veterans, including veterans who served in the Indochina Theater between Aug. 5, 1964, and May 7, 1975.

1982—Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted “offenders” for “ex-offenders”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, with Secretary of Labor required to issue revised performance standards under the amendments made by section 115 of Pub. L. 102–367 (amending this section and sections 1661 and 1662a of this title), as soon as Secretary determines sufficient data are available, but not later than July 1, 1994, except that with respect to the factor of retention in unsubsidized employment specified in subsec. (b)(3)(B) of this section, the requirement that such retention be for not less than 6 months is effective not later than July 1, 1995, see section 701(a) and (b) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–418 effective for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1989, except as otherwise provided, see section 6305 of Pub. L. 100–418, formerly set out as an Effective Date; Transition Provisions note under section 1651 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1511, 1514, 1518, 1602, 1604, 1633, 1642, 1661, 1662a, 1671, 1672 of this title; title 8 section 1522; title 20 section 2325.

1 So in original. Probably should be “of”.

The primary consideration in selecting agencies or organizations to deliver services within a service delivery area shall be the effectiveness of the agency or organization in delivering comparable or related services based on demonstrated performance,1 (in accordance with guidelines established by the Secretary), in terms of the likelihood of meeting performance goals, cost, quality of training, and characteristics of participants. In addition, consideration shall be given to demonstrated performance in making available appropriate supportive services, including child care. In complying with this subsection, proper consideration shall be given to community-based organizations as service providers.

Funds provided under this chapter shall not be used to duplicate facilities or services available in the area (with or without reimbursement) from Federal, State, or local sources, unless it is demonstrated that alternative services or facilities would be more effective or more likely to achieve the service delivery area's performance goals.

Appropriate education agencies in the service delivery area shall be provided the opportunity to provide educational services, unless the administrative entity demonstrates that alternative agencies or organizations would be more effective or would have greater potential to enhance the participants’ continued occupational and career growth.

The administrative entity shall not fund any occupational skills training program unless the level of skills provided in the program are in accordance with guidelines established by the private industry council.

The selection of service providers shall be made on a competitive basis to the extent practicable, and shall include—

(1) a determination of the ability of the service provider to meet program design specifications established by the administrative entity that take into account the purposes of the 2 chapter and the goals established in the Governor's coordination and special services plan; and

(2) documentation of compliance with procurement standards established by the Governor under section 1574 of this title, including the reasons for selection.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §107, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1335; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §116, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1034.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §116(a), inserted “, (in accordance with guidelines established by the Secretary)” after “demonstrated performance” and inserted after first sentence “In addition, consideration shall be given to demonstrated performance in making available appropriate supportive services, including child care.”

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §116(b), added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1514, 1531, 1661b of this title.

1 So in original. The comma probably should not appear.

2 So in original. Probably should be “this”.

Except as provided in subparagraph (A) or (B) of section 1551(d)(3) of this title, funds expended under this chapter shall be charged to the appropriate cost categories.

(1) The cost limitations contained in this subsection shall apply separately to the funds allocated for programs under part A of subchapter II of this chapter, and to the funds allocated for programs under part C of such subchapter.

(2) Funds expended under parts A and C of subchapter II of this chapter shall be charged to one of the following categories:

(A) Administration.

(B) Training-related and supportive services.

(C) Direct training services.

(3) The Secretary shall, consistent with sections 1604(b) and 1644(c) of this title, define by regulation the cost categories specified in paragraph (2).

(4) Of the funds allocated to a service delivery area for any program year under parts 1 A or C of subchapter II of this chapter—

(A) not more than 20 percent shall be expended for administration; and

(B) not less than 50 percent shall be expended for direct training services.

(5) Each service delivery area shall ensure that for all services provided to participants through contracts, grants, or other agreements with a service provider, such contract, grant, or agreement shall include appropriate amounts necessary for administration and supportive services.

(6) For purposes of paragraph (4), the term “allocated” means allocated for a program year, as adjusted for reallocations and reallotments under section 1519 of this title and for transfers of funds under sections 1606, 1635, and 1646 of this title.

Funds available under subchapter III of this chapter shall be expended in accordance with the limitations specified in section 1661d of this title.

The provisions of this section do not apply to any service delivery area designated pursuant to section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title.

This section shall not be construed to exempt programs under an approved plan from the performance standards established under section 1516 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §108, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1336; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(c), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 99–496, §15(c), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1266; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §117, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1035.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §117(a), amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) read as follows: “Not more than 15 percent of the funds available to a service delivery area for any fiscal year for programs under part A of subchapter II of this chapter may be expended for the cost of administration. For purposes of this paragraph, costs of program support (such as counseling) which are directly related to the provision of education or training and such additional costs as may be attributable to the development of training described in section 1604(28) of this title shall not be counted as part of the cost of administration.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §117(b), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) consisted of pars. (1) to (3) relating to joint limitations on administrative and work experience expenditures.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §117(c), amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) consisted of pars. (1) to (5) relating to exceptions to expenditure limitations, private industry council requests for special circumstances, and authority of a Governor to review a plan.

1986—Subsec. (c)(2)(B)(ii). Pub. L. 99–496 inserted “, including disabled veterans” after “handicapped individuals”.

1982—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(iv). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted “payments” for “projects”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1551, 1604 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “part”.

For program years beginning on or after July 1, 1993, the Governor shall, in accordance with the requirements of this subsection, reallocate to eligible service delivery areas within the State funds appropriated for such program year that are available for reallocation.

The amount available for reallocation is equal to the amount by which the unobligated balance of the service delivery area allocation under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter for all service delivery areas within the State at the end of the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this subsection is made exceeds 15 percent of such allocation for the prior program year.

The Governor shall reallocate the amounts available pursuant to paragraph (2) to eligible service delivery areas within the State that have the highest rates of unemployment for an extended period of time and to those with the highest poverty rates.

For purposes of this subsection, an eligible service delivery area means a service delivery area that has obligated at least 85 percent of its allocation under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, respectively, for the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this subsection is made.

For program years beginning on or after July 1, 1993, the Secretary shall, in accordance with the requirements of this subsection, reallot to eligible States funds appropriated for such program year that are available for reallotment.

The amount available for reallotment is equal to the amount by which the unobligated balance of the State allotment under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, respectively, for all States at the end of the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this subsection is made exceeds 15 percent of such allotment for that prior program year.

The Secretary shall reallot the amounts available pursuant to paragraph (2) to each eligible State an amount based on the relative amount allotted to such eligible State under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, respectively, for the program year the determination under this subsection is made compared to the total amount allotted to all eligible States under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, respectively, for such program year.

For purposes of this subsection, an eligible State means a State that has obligated at least 85 percent of its allocation under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, respectively, for the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this subsection is made.

The Governor of each State shall prescribe uniform procedures for the obligation of funds by service delivery areas within the State in order to avoid the requirement that funds be made available for reallotment under this subsection. The Governor shall further prescribe equitable procedures for making funds available from the State and service delivery areas in the event that a State is required to make funds available for reallotment under this subsection.

Funds obligated to carry out programs under section 1604(d) of this title shall not be counted in determining the amount available for reallocation under subsection (a)(2) of this section or the amount available for reallotment under subsection (b)(2).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §109, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §118, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1036.)

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1518, 1604 of this title.

This part is referred to in section 1551 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “(c)”.

(1) The Governor shall annually prepare a statement of goals and objectives for job training and placement programs within the State to assist in the preparation of the plans required under section 1514 of this title and section 8 of the Act of June 6, 1933 (known as the Wagner-Peyser Act) [29 U.S.C. 49g].

(2) Any State seeking financial assistance under this chapter shall submit a Governor's coordination and special services plan for two program years to the Secretary describing the use of all resources provided to the State and its service delivery areas under this chapter and evaluating the experience over the preceding two years.

(1) The plan shall establish criteria for coordinating activities under this chapter (including subchapter III of this chapter) with programs and services provided by State and local education and training agencies (including vocational education agencies), public assistance agencies, the employment service, rehabilitation agencies, programs for the homeless, postsecondary institutions, economic development agencies, and such other agencies as the Governor determines to have a direct interest in employment and training and human resource utilization within the State. Such criteria shall not affect local discretion concerning the selection of eligible participants or service providers in accordance with the provisions of sections 1 1517 2 1603, or 1643 of this title.

(2) The plan shall describe the measures taken by the State to ensure coordination and avoid duplication between the State agencies administering the work activities required under title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] and programs under subchapter II of this chapter in the planning and delivery of services.

(3) The plan shall describe the projected use of resources, including oversight of program performance, program administration, and program financial management, capacity building, priorities and criteria for State incentive grants, and performance goals for State-supported programs. The description of capacity building shall include the Governor's plans for technical assistance to service delivery areas and service providers, interstate technical assistance and training arrangements, other coordinated technical assistance arrangements undertaken pursuant to the direction of the Secretary, and, where applicable, research and demonstration projects.

(4) The plan shall include goals for—

(A) the training of women in nontraditional employment through funds available under this chapter, the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], and other sources of Federal and State support;

(B) the training-related placement of women in nontraditional employment and apprenticeships;

(C) a description of efforts to be undertaken to accomplish such goals, including efforts to increase awareness of such training and placement opportunities; and

(D) a description of efforts to coordinate activities provided pursuant to this chapter and the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act to train and place women in nontraditional employment.

(5) The State plan shall include a description of the manner in which the State will encourage the successful carrying out of—

(A) training activities for eligible individuals whose placement is the basis for the payment to the State of the incentive bonus authorized by subchapter V of this chapter; and

(B) the training services, outreach activities, and preemployment supportive services furnished to such individuals.

(6) The Governor shall report to the Secretary the adjustments made in the performance standards and the factors that are used in making the adjustments.

(7) If major changes occur in labor market conditions, funding, or other factors during the two-year period covered by the plan, the State shall submit a modification to the Secretary describing these changes.

Governor's coordination and special services activities may include—

(1) making available to service delivery areas, with or without reimbursement and upon request, appropriate information and technical assistance to assist in developing and implementing plans and programs;

(2) carrying out special model training and employment programs and related services (including programs receiving financial assistance from private sources);

(3) providing programs and related services for offenders, homeless individuals and other individuals whom the Governor determines require special assistance;

(4) providing financial assistance for special programs and services designed to meet the needs of rural areas outside major labor market areas;

(5) providing training opportunities in the conservation and efficient use of energy, and the development of solar energy sources as defined in section 3 of the Solar Energy Research, Development and Demonstration Act of 1974 [42 U.S.C. 5552];

(6) industry-wide training;

(7) coordination of activities relating to part A of subchapter II of this chapter with activities under subchapter III of this chapter;

(8) developing and providing to service delivery areas information on a State and local area basis regarding economic, industrial, and labor market conditions;

(9) providing programs and related services to encourage the recruitment of women for training, placement, and retention in nontraditional employment;

(10) providing preservice and inservice training for planning, management, and delivery staffs of administrative entities and private industry councils, as well as contractors for State supported programs;

(11) providing statewide programs which provide for joint funding of activities under this chapter with services and activities under other Federal, State, or local employment-related programs, including programs of the Department of Veterans Affairs; and

(12) making available to service delivery areas appropriate information and technical assistance to assist in developing and implementing joint programs, including youth corps programs, in which activities supported under this chapter are coordinated with activities supported under the National and Community Service Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12501 et seq.).

A Governor's coordination and special services plan shall be approved by the Secretary unless the Secretary determines that the plan does not comply with specific provisions of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §121, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1337; Pub. L. 99–496, §15(d), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1266; Pub. L. 99–570, title XI, §11004(a), Oct. 27, 1986, 100 Stat. 3207–168; Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §714(c), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3256; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(2)(B), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 277; Pub. L. 102–235, §5, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1807; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §121, title VII, §702(a)(4), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1037, 1112; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(3), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title IV of the Act is classified generally to subchapter IV (§601 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(4)(A), (D), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The National and Community Service Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (c)(12), is Pub. L. 101–610, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3127, which is classified principally to chapter 129 (§12501 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12501 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “the work activities required under title IV of the Social Security Act” for “the JOBS program” and struck out at end “The plan shall describe the procedures developed by the State to ensure that the State JOBS plan is consistent with the coordination criteria specified in this plan and identify the procedures developed to provide for the review of the JOBS plan by the State Job Training Coordinating Council.”

1992—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(4), substituted “1603, or 1643” for “and 1603”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §121(a)(1), added par. (2) and struck out former par. (2) which read as follows: “The plan shall describe the projected use of resources, including oversight and support activities, priorities and criteria for State incentive grants, and performance goals for State supported programs.”

Subsec. (b)(3) to (7). Pub. L. 102–367, §121(a)(2), (3), added par. (3) and redesignated former pars. (3) to (6) as (4) to (7), respectively.

Subsec. (c)(7). Pub. L. 102–367, §121(b)(1), inserted “coordination of activities relating to part A of subchapter II of this chapter with” before “activities”.

Subsec. (c)(12). Pub. L. 102–367, §121(b)(2)–(4), added par. (12).

1991—Subsec. (b)(3) to (6). Pub. L. 102–235, §5(a), added par. (3) and redesignated former pars. (3) to (5) as (4) to (6), respectively.

Subsec. (c)(9) to (11). Pub. L. 102–235, §5(b), added par. (9) and redesignated former pars. (9) and (10) as (10) and (11), respectively.

Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “programs of the Department of Veterans Affairs” for “Veterans’ Administration programs” in par. (10).

1988—Subsec. (b)(3) to (5). Pub. L. 100–628 added par. (3) and redesignated former pars. (3) and (4) as (4) and (5), respectively.

1986—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 99–570, §11004(a)(1), inserted “, programs for the homeless”.

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 99–570, §11004(a)(2), inserted “, homeless individuals”.

Subsec. (c)(10). Pub. L. 99–496 inserted “, including Veterans’ Administration programs”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 effective Dec. 12, 1991, except that requirements imposed by amendment applicable to plan or report filed or reviewed for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1992, see section 12 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1514 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1515, 1602, 1603, 1642, 1643, 1733 of this title; title 42 section 683.

1 So in original. Probably should be “section”.

2 So in original. Probably should be followed by a comma.

(1) Except as provided in subsection (d) of this section, any State which desires to receive financial assistance under this chapter shall establish a State job training coordinating council (hereinafter in this section referred to as the “State council”). Funding for the council shall be provided pursuant to sections 1602(c)(1)(A) and 1642(c)(1)(A) of this title.

(2) The State council shall be appointed by the Governor, who shall designate one nongovernmental member thereof to be chairperson. In making appointments to the State council, the Governor shall ensure that the membership of the State council reasonably represents the population of the State.

(3) The State job training coordinating council shall be composed as follows:

(A) Thirty percent of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of business and industry (including agriculture, where appropriate), including individuals who are representatives of business and industry on private industry councils within the State.

(B) Thirty percent of the membership of the State council shall be—

(i) representatives of the State legislature, and State agencies and organizations, such as the State educational agency, the State vocational education board, the State advisory council on vocational education, the State board of education (when not otherwise represented), State public assistance agencies, the State employment security agency, the State rehabilitation agency, the State occupational information coordinating committee, State postsecondary institutions, the State economic development agency, State veterans’ affairs agencies or equivalent, and such other agencies as the Governor determines to have a direct interest in employment and training and human resource utilization within the State; and

(ii) representatives of the units or consortia of general local government in the State who shall be nominated by the chief elected officials of the units or consortia of units of general local government, and the representatives of local educational agencies who shall be nominated by local educational agencies.

(C) Thirty percent of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of organized labor and representatives of community-based organizations in the State.

(D) Ten percent of the membership of the State council shall be appointed from the general public by the Governor of the State.

(4) The State council shall meet at such times and in such places as it deems necessary. The meetings shall be publicly announced, and, to the extent appropriate, open and accessible to the general public.

(5) The State council is authorized to obtain the services of such professional, technical, and clerical personnel as may be necessary to carry out its functions under this chapter.

(6) In order to assure objective management and oversight, the State council shall not operate programs or provide services directly to eligible participants, but shall exist solely to plan, coordinate, and monitor the provision of such programs and services.

(7) The plans and decisions of the State council shall be subject to approval by the Governor.

The State council shall—

(1) recommend a Governor's coordination and special services plan;

(2) recommend to the Governor substate service delivery areas, plan resource allocations not subject to section 1602(b) or 1642(b) of this title, provide management guidance and review for all programs in the State, develop appropriate linkages with other programs, coordinate activities with private industry councils, and develop the Governor's coordination and special services plan and recommend variations in performance standards;

(3) advise the Governor and local entities on job training plans and certify the consistency of such plans with criteria under the Governor's coordination and special services plan for coordination of activities under this chapter with other Federal, State, and local employment-related programs, including programs operated in designated enterprise zones;

(4) review the operation of programs conducted in each service delivery area, and the availability, responsiveness, and adequacy of State services, and make recommendations to the Governor, appropriate chief elected officials, and private industry councils, service providers, the State legislature, and the general public with respect to ways to improve the effectiveness of such programs or services;

(5) review the reports made pursuant to subparagraphs (D) and (E) of section 1514(b)(12) 1 of this title and make recommendations for technical assistance and corrective action, based on the results of such reports;

(6) prepare a summary of the reports made pursuant to subparagraphs (D) and (E) of section 1514(b)(12) 1 of this title detailing promising service delivery approaches developed in each service delivery area for the training and placement of women in nontraditional occupations, and disseminate annually such summary to service delivery areas, service providers throughout the State, and the Secretary;

(7) review the activities of the Governor to train, place, and retain women in nontraditional employment, including activities under section 1533 of this title, prepare a summary of activities and an analysis of results, and disseminate annually such summary to service delivery areas, service providers throughout the State, and the Secretary;

(8) consult with the sex equity coordinator established under section 111(b) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2321(b)], obtain from the sex equity coordinator a summary of activities and an analysis of results in training women in nontraditional employment under the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], and disseminate annually such summary to service delivery areas, service providers throughout the State, and the Secretary;

(9) review and comment on the State plan developed for the State employment service agency;

(10) make an annual report to the Governor which shall be a public document, and issue such other studies, reports, or documents as it deems advisable to assist service delivery areas in carrying out the purposes of this chapter;

(11)(A) identify, in coordination with the appropriate State agencies, the employment and training and vocational education needs throughout the State, and assess the extent to which employment and training, vocational education, rehabilitation services, public assistance, economic development, and other Federal, State, and local programs and services represent a consistent, integrated, and coordinated approach to meeting such needs; and

(B) comment at least once annually on the the 2 measures taken pursuant to section 113(b)(14) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational 3 Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2323(b)(14)]; and

(12) review plans of all State agencies providing employment, training, and related services, and provide comments and recommendations to the Governor, the State legislature, the State agencies, and the appropriate Federal agencies on the relevancy and effectiveness of employment and training and related service delivery systems in the State.

In addition to the functions described in subsection (b) of this section, the Governor may, to the extent permitted by applicable law, transfer functions which are related to functions under this chapter to the council established under this section from any State coordinating committee for the work incentive program under title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] or any advisory council established under the Wagner-Peyser Act [29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.].

(1) In lieu of establishing the State council required under subsection (a) of this section, each State may satisfy the requirements of this section by designating the State human resource investment council established in accordance with subchapter VI of this chapter (in this subsection referred to as the “State Council”) to carry out the duties described in subsection (b) of this section.

(2) Funding provided to carry out this section may be allotted to the State Council to carry out such functions and the other functions of the State Council if the Governor and the head of the State agency responsible for administration of programs under this chapter agree to such an allotment.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §122, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1339; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(d), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(2), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2487; Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6304(b), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1538; Pub. L. 102–235, §6, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1808; Pub. L. 102–367, title VI, §601(b)(3), title VII, §702(a)(5), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1103, 1112.)

Section 1514(b) of this title, referred to in subsec. (b)(5), (6), was amended generally by Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §113(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1027, which restated in section 1514(b)(13)(D) and (E) the provisions formerly contained in section 1514(b)(12)(D) and (E). Section 1514(b)(12) no longer contains a subpar. (D) or (E).

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(8), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title IV of such Act is classified generally to subchapter IV (§601 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(5)(A), substituted “sections 1602(c)(1)(A) and 1642(c)(1)(A)” for “section 1602(b)(4)”.

Pub. L. 102–367, §601(b)(3)(A), substituted “Except as provided in subsection (d) of this section, any” for “Any”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(5)(B), substituted “section 1602(b) or 1642(b)” for “section 1602(a)”.

Subsec. (b)(11)(B). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(5)(C), substituted “section 113(b)(14)” for “section 113(b)(9)”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–367, §601(b)(3)(B), added subsec. (d).

1991—Subsec. (b)(5) to (12). Pub. L. 102–235 added pars. (5) to (8) and redesignated former pars. (5) to (8) as (9) to (12), respectively.

1988—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 100–418 amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “The State council shall be composed as follows:

“(A) One-third of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of business and industry (including agriculture, where appropriate) in the State, including individuals who are representatives of business and industry on private industry councils in the State.

“(B) Not less than 20 percent of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of the State legislature and State agencies and organizations, such as the State educational agency, the State vocational education board, the State advisory council on vocational education, the State board of education (when not otherwise represented), State public assistance agencies, the State employment security agency, the State rehabilitation agency, the State occupational information coordinating committee, State postsecondary institutions, the State economic development agency, State veterans’ affairs agencies or equivalent, and such other agencies as the Governor determines to have a direct interest in employment and training and human resource utilization within the State.

“(C) Not less than 20 percent of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of the units or consortia of units of general local government in such State (including those which are administrative entities or grantees under this chapter) which shall be nominated by the chief elected officials of the units or consortia of units of general local government; and

“(D) Not less than 20 percent of the membership of the State council shall be representatives of the eligible population and of the general public, representatives of organized labor, representatives of community-based organizations, and representatives of local educational agencies (nominated by local educational agencies).”

1984—Subsec. (a)(8). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(2)(A), struck out par. (8) which defined State council.

Subsec. (b)(7)(B). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(2)(B), substituted “the measures taken pursuant to section 113(b)(9) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “reports required pursuant to section 105(d)(3) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

1982—Subsec. (a)(3)(C). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted “elected officials” for “executive officers”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 effective Dec. 12, 1991, except that requirements imposed by amendment applicable to plan or report filed or reviewed for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1992, see section 12 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1514 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 100–418 effective for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1989, except as otherwise provided, see section 6305 of Pub. L. 100–418, formerly set out as an Effective Date; Transition Provisions note under section 1651 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 49j, 1602, 1642, 1733 of this title; title 20 section 2322.

1 See References in Text note below.

3 So in original. Probably should be “Vocational and Applied Technology”.

The Secretary shall allot to the Governor for allocation to any State education agency the sums made available to carry out this section under sections 1602(c)(1)(C) and 1642(c)(1)(C) of this title to pay for the Federal share of carrying out the projects described in paragraph (2). In allocating such funds to the State education agency, the Governor shall not establish requirements governing the geographic distribution of funds under this section.

Funds allocated under paragraph (1) may be used to pay for the Federal share of carrying out projects (in accordance with agreements under subsection (b) of this section) that—

(A) provide school-to-work transition services of demonstrated effectiveness that increase the rate of graduation from high school, or completion of the recognized equivalent thereof, including services that increase the rate at which school dropouts return to regular or alternative schooling and obtain a high school degree or its equivalent, and, which may include, services to support multiyear dropout prevention programs of demonstrated effectiveness;

(B) provide literacy and lifelong learning opportunities and services of demonstrated effectiveness that—

(i) enhance the knowledge and skills of educationally and economically disadvantaged individuals; and

(ii) result in increasing the employment and earnings of such individuals;

(C) provide statewide coordinated approaches, including model programs, to train, place, and retain women in nontraditional employment; and

(D)(i) facilitate coordination of education and training services for eligible participants in projects described in subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C); or

(ii)(I) support activities pertaining to a State human resources investment council that meets the requirements of subchapter VI of this chapter and includes each of the programs described in clauses (i) through (vii) of section 1792(b)(2)(A) of this title; or

(II) support activities pertaining to a State council, which carries out functions similar to the functions of the State human resource investment council described in subchapter VI of this chapter, if such State council was established prior to July 1, 1992.

The Federal share of the cost of carrying out the projects described in paragraph (2) shall be 50 percent.

The projects described in subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be conducted within a State in accordance with agreements that—

(A) reflect the goals and services described in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) of subsection (c) of this section; and

(B) are developed between the State education agency, administrative entities in service delivery areas in the State, and other entities, such as other State agencies, local educational agencies, and alternative service providers (such as community-based and other nonprofit or for-profit organizations).

The agreements described in paragraph (1) shall provide for the contribution by the State, from funds other than the funds made available under this chapter, of a total amount equal to the funds allotted under this section.

Such amount may include the direct cost of employment or training services—

(i) provided by State or local programs or agencies; or

(ii) provided by other Federal programs or agencies in accordance with applicable Federal law.

The State education agency shall submit for inclusion in the Governor's coordination and special services plan a description developed jointly by the State education agency and the Governor of—

(1) the goals to be achieved and services to be provided by the school-to-work transition programs specified in subsection (a)(2)(A) of this section that will receive the assistance, which description shall, at a minimum, include information regarding—

(A) the activities and services that will result in increasing the number of youth staying in or returning to school and graduating from high school or the equivalent;

(B) the work-based curriculum that will link classroom learning to work site experience and address the practical and theoretical aspects of work;

(C) the opportunities that will be made available to participants to obtain career-path employment and postsecondary education;

(D) the integration to be achieved, in appropriate circumstances, in the delivery of services between State and local educational agencies and alternative service providers, such as community-based and nonprofit organizations; and

(E) the linkages that will be established, where feasible, to avoid duplication and enhance the delivery of services, with programs under—

(i) subchapter II of this chapter and part B of subchapter IV of this chapter;

(ii) the Elementary and Secondary Education Act [20 U.S.C. 6301 et seq.];

(iii) the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.);

(iv) the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.);

(v) the Adult Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.);

(vi) Repealed. Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(4)(A), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174;

(vii) the Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act (Public Law 100–77; 101 Stat. 482) [42 U.S.C. 11301 et seq.]; and

(viii) the National and Community Service Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12501 et seq.);

(2) the goals to be achieved and services to be provided by literacy and lifelong learning programs specified in subsection (a)(2)(B) of this section that will receive the assistance, which description shall, at a minimum, include information regarding—

(A) the activities and services that will increase the knowledge and skills of educationally and economically disadvantaged individuals, and result in increased employment and earnings for such individuals;

(B) the integration to be achieved between projects assisted under this section and the 4-year State plan (and related needs assessment carried out for the plan) developed in accordance with section 342 of the Adult Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1206a);

(C) the variety of settings, including workplace settings, in which literacy training and learning opportunities will be provided; and

(D) the linkages that will be established, where feasible, to avoid duplication and enhance the delivery of services, with programs under—

(i) subchapters II and III of this chapter;

(ii) the Adult Education Act [20 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.];

(iii) the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.];

(iv) the Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act [42 U.S.C. 11301 et seq.];

(v) Repealed. Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(4)(B), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174;

(vi) the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.);

(vii) the National Literacy Act of 1991 (Public Law 102–73);

(viii) the Emergency Immigrant Education Act of 1984 1 (20 U.S.C. 3121 et seq.); and

(ix) the National and Community Service Act of 1990 [42 U.S.C. 12501 et seq.];

(3) the goals to be achieved and services to be provided by the nontraditional employment for women programs specified in subsection (a)(2)(C) of this section that will receive the assistance; and

(4) the proportion of funds received under this section that will be used to achieve the goals, and provide the services, described in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3).

Services funded under this section to carry out the projects described in subsection (a)(2) of this section may include education and training, vocational education services, and related services, provided to participants under subchapter II of this chapter. In addition, services funded under this section may include services for offenders, veterans, and other individuals who the Governor determines require special assistance.

Not more than 20 percent of the funds allocated under this section may be expended to pay for the Federal share of projects described in subsection (a)(2)(D) of this section at the State and local levels.

Not less than 80 percent of the funds allocated under this section shall be expended to pay for the Federal share of projects conducted in accordance with subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) of subsection (a)(2) of this section.

Not less than 75 percent of the funds allocated for projects under subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) of subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be expended for projects for economically disadvantaged individuals who experience barriers to employment. Priority for funds not expended for the economically disadvantaged shall be given to subchapter III participants and persons with barriers to employment.

If no agreement is reached in accordance with subsection (b) of this section on the use of funds under this section, the funds shall be available to the Governor to achieve the goals and provide the services described in paragraph (1), (2), or (3) of subsection (c) of this section.

The Governor shall prepare reports on the projects funded under this section, including such information as the Secretary may require to determine the extent to which the projects supported under this section result in achieving the goals specified in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3) of subsection (c) of this section. The Governor shall submit the reports to the Secretary at such intervals as shall be determined by the Secretary.

Each direct or indirect recipient of funds under this section shall keep records that are sufficient to permit the preparation of reports. Each recipient shall submit such reports to the Secretary, at such intervals as shall be determined by the Secretary.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §123, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1341; Pub. L. 99–496, §§3, 15(e), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1261, 1266; Pub. L. 101–392, §5(a)(1), Sept. 25, 1990, 104 Stat. 758; Pub. L. 102–235, §7, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1808; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §122, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1038; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(4), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Elementary and Secondary Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(ii), probably means the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965, Pub. L. 89–10, Apr. 11, 1965, 79 Stat. 27, as amended generally by Pub. L. 103–382, title I, §101, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3519, which is classified generally to chapter 70 (§6301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(iii), (2)(D)(iii), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(iv), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1400 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Adult Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(v), (2)(D)(ii), is title III of Pub. L. 89–750, Nov. 3, 1966, 80 Stat. 1216, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 30 (§1201 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1201 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(vii), (2)(D)(iv), is Pub. L. 100–77, July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 482, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 119 (§11301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 11301 of Title 42 and Tables.

The National and Community Service Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(E)(viii), (2)(D)(ix), is Pub. L. 101–610, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3127, which is classified principally to chapter 129 (§12501 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12501 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(D)(vi), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 16 (§701 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

The National Literacy Act of 1991, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(D)(vii), is Pub. L. 102–73, July 25, 1991, 105 Stat. 333, as amended. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1991 Amendment note set out under section 1201 of Title 20, Education, and Tables.

The Emergency Immigrant Education Act of 1984, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(D)(viii), is part D of title IV of Pub. L. 89–10, as added by Pub. L. 100–297, title I, §1001, Apr. 28, 1988, 102 Stat. 242, which was classified generally to part D (§3121 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 47 of Title 20, prior to the general amendment of Pub. L. 89–10 by Pub. L. 103–382, title I, §101, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3519. For provisions relating to emergency immigrant education, see section 7541 et seq. of Title 20.

1996—Subsec. (c)(1)(E)(vi). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(4)(A), struck out cl. (vi) which read as follows: “the JOBS program;”.

Subsec. (c)(2)(D)(v). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(4)(B), struck out cl. (v) which read as follows: “the JOBS program;”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section related to State education coordination and grants, and provided for allotments for financial assistance to State education agencies for services through cooperative agreements in subsec. (a), provided for matching contributions for cooperative agreements in subsec. (b), required certain proportions for use of funds in subsec. (c), provided alternatives for State governors where no cooperative agreements on use of funds was reached in subsec. (d), and authorized joint funding in subsec. (e).

1991—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 102–235, §7(a), added par. (4).

Subsec. (c)(2)(B), (3). Pub. L. 102–235, §7(b), substituted “(1), (3), and (4)” for “(1) and (3)”.

1990—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 101–392 added subsec. (e).

1986—Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 99–496, §3(1), added par. (3).

Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 99–496, §15(e), inserted reference to veterans.

Subsec. (c)(2)(B). Pub. L. 99–496, §3(2)(A), amended first sentence generally, substituting references to clauses (1) and (3) for references to clause (1).

Subsec. (c)(3). Pub. L. 99–496, §3(2)(B), substituted “clauses (1) and (3)” for “clause (1)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–392 effective July 1, 1991, see section 702(a) of Pub. L. 101–392, set out as a note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–235 not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 49f, 1532, 1602, 1642, 1792b of this title; title 20 section 2468.

1 See References in Text note below.

If a State or service delivery area imposes a requirement, including a rule, regulation, policy, or performance standard, relating to the administration and operation of programs funded by this chapter (including requirements based on State or service delivery area interpretation of any Federal law, regulation, or guideline) the State or area shall identify the requirement as a State- or service delivery area-imposed requirement.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §124, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1341; Pub. L. 99–496, §15(f), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1266; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §123, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1041.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section consisted of subsecs. (a) to (d) relating to training programs for older individuals.

1986—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–496 inserted “, including veterans organizations” after “organizations”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1602 of this title; title 42 section 3056.

In order to be eligible for Federal financial assistance for State labor market information programs under this chapter from funds made available under section 1751(b) of this title, the Governor shall designate the State occupational information coordinating committee or other organizational unit to be responsible for oversight and management of a statewide comprehensive labor market and occupational supply and demand information system, which shall—

(1) design a comprehensive cost-efficient labor market and occupational supply and demand information system which—

(A) is responsive to the economic demand and education and training supply support needs of the State and areas within the State, and

(B) meets the Federal standards under chapter 35 of title 44 and other appropriate Federal standards established by the Bureau of Labor Statistics;

(2) standardize available Federal and State multi-agency administrative records and direct survey data sources to produce an employment and economic analysis with a published set of projections for the State and designated areas within the State which, at the minimum, includes—

(A) identification of geographic and occupational areas of potential growth or decline; and

(B) an assessment of the potential impact of such growth or decline on individuals, industries, and communities, including occupational supply and demand characteristics data;

(3) assure, to the extent feasible, that—

(A) automated technology will be used by the State;

(B) administrative records have been designed to reduce paperwork; and

(C) multiple survey burdens on the employers of the State have been reduced;

(4) publish and disseminate labor market and occupational supply and demand information and individualized career information to State agencies, area public agencies, libraries, and private not-for-profit users, and individuals who are in the process of making career decision choices;

(5) conduct research and demonstration projects designed to improve any aspect of the statewide information system; and

(6) provide training and technical assistance to support comprehensive career guidance and participant activities for local programs assisted under this chapter.

(1) The analysis required under clause (2) of subsection (a) of this section shall be used to contribute in carrying out the provisions of this chapter, the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], and the Act of June 6, 1933, known as the Wagner-Peyser Act [29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.].

(2) The assurance required by clause (3) of subsection (a) of this section shall also include that the State will, to the maximum extent possible, assure consolidation of available administrative data and surveys to reduce duplication of recordkeeping of State and local agencies, including secondary and postsecondary educational institutions.

(3) If any Federal funds are used to carry out clause (5) of subsection (a) of this section, access to and information on the results will remain in the public domain.

The Secretary through the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee shall reimburse the States the costs of carrying out the provisions of this section but the aggregate reimbursements in any fiscal year shall not exceed the amount available under part E of subchapter IV of this chapter for this section.

No provision of this part or any other provision of Federal law shall be construed to prohibit any State from combining or consolidating Federal administrative management information reporting requirements relating to employment, productivity, or training, if notice is transmitted by the Governor to the head of each appropriate Federal and State agency responsible for the laws governing the Federal reporting requirements. The notice shall specify the intent to combine or consolidate such requirements. The head of each appropriate Federal agency shall approve the combination or consolidation unless, within sixty days after receiving the notice, the Federal agency can demonstrate that the combination or consolidation will not meet the essential purposes of the affected Federal law.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §125, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1342; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(e), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(3), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2487; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §124, title VII, §702(a)(6), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1041, 1112.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, known as the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(6), struck out “section 1602(b)(4) of this title and” before “section 1751(b) of this title”.

Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 102–367, §124, added par. (6).

1984—Subsec. (b)(1). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

1982—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted “section” for “subsection” after “of this chapter for this”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 1751, 1753, 1754 of this title.

Nothing in this chapter shall be interpreted to preclude the enactment of State legislation providing for the implementation, consistent with the provisions of this chapter, of the programs assisted under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §126, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1343.)

In the event that compliance with provisions of this chapter would be enhanced by cooperative agreements between States, the consent of Congress is hereby given to such States to enter into such compacts and agreements to facilitate such compliance, subject to the approval of the Secretary.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §127, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1343.)

This part is referred to in section 1661a of this title.

Except as otherwise provided, the following conditions are applicable to all programs under this chapter:

Each job training plan shall provide employment and training opportunities to those who can benefit from, and who are most in need of, such opportunities and shall make efforts to provide equitable services among substantial segments of the eligible population.

Funds provided under this chapter shall only be used for activities which are in addition to those which would otherwise be available in the area in the absence of such funds.

(1) No funds provided under this chapter shall be used or proposed for use to encourage or induce the relocation, of an establishment or part thereof, that results in a loss of employment for any employee of such establishment at the original location.

(2) No funds provided under this chapter shall be used for customized or skill training, on-the-job training, or company specific assessments of job applicants or employees, for any establishment or part thereof, that has relocated, until 120 days after the date on which such establishment commences operations at the new location, if the relocation of such establishment or part thereof, results in a loss of employment for any employee of such establishment at the original location.

(3) If a violation of paragraph (1) or (2) is alleged, the Secretary shall conduct an investigation to determine whether a violation has occurred.

(4) If the Secretary determines that a violation of paragraph (1) or (2) has occurred, the Secretary shall require the State, service delivery area, or substate grantee that has violated paragraph (1) or (2) to—

(A) repay to the United States an amount equal to the amount expended in violation of paragraph (1) or (2), in accordance with subsection (d) or (e) of section 1574 of this title; and

(B) pay an additional amount equal to the amount required to be repaid under subparagraph (A), unless the State, service delivery area, or substate grantee demonstrates to the Secretary that it neither knew nor reasonably could have known (after an inquiry undertaken with due diligence) that it provided funds in violation of paragraph (1) or (2).

(5) Amounts received under paragraph (4)(B) shall be deposited in a special account in the Treasury for use by the Secretary for carrying out subchapter III of this chapter.

(1) Training provided with funds made available under this chapter shall be only for occupations for which there is a demand in the area served or in another area to which the participant is willing to relocate, and consideration in the selection of training programs may be given to training in occupations determined to be in sectors of the economy which have a high potential for sustained demand or growth.

(2) Efforts shall be made to develop programs which contribute to occupational development, upward mobility, development of new careers, and overcoming sex-stereotyping in occupations traditional for the other sex.

(3)(A) Commercially available training packages, including advanced learning technology, may be purchased for off-the-shelf prices and without requiring a breakdown of the cost components of the package if such packages are purchased competitively and include performance criteria.

(B) Tuition charges for training or education provided by an institution of higher education (as defined in section 1141(a) of title 20) or a proprietary institution of higher education (as defined in section 1088(b) of title 20), that are not more than the charges for such training or education made available to the general public, do not require a breakdown of cost components.

(C) With respect to funds provided from the allocation to a service delivery area for any program year that are expended by any community-based organization or nonprofit organization for the cost of administration under part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter, the service delivery area shall not be subject to the limitation contained in section 1518(b)(4)(A) of this title if—

(i) such funds are expended pursuant to an agreement under which not less than 90 percent of the funds provided to the community-based organization or nonprofit organization are to be expended for the costs of direct training and training-related and supportive services;

(ii) the expenditures of such funds are charged by the service delivery area to the appropriate cost category;

(iii) the expenditure of such funds does not result in the service delivery area exceeding the limitation contained in section 1518(b)(4)(A) of this title by more than 25 percent of such limitation; and

(iv) the service delivery area is in compliance with the limitation contained in section 1518(b)(4)(B) of this title for such program year, except that such limitation shall be reduced by a percentage equal to one-half of the percentage by which the expenditures of the service delivery area under this subparagraph exceed the limitation under section 1518(b)(4)(A) of this title.

(4) Placements made in unsubsidized employment shall be, to the extent practicable, in occupational areas related to the training provided to the participant.

(1) Only eligible individuals residing in the service delivery area may be served by employment and training activities funded under subchapter II of this chapter, except that the job training plan may provide for limited exceptions to this requirement, including exceptions necessary to permit services to homeless individuals who cannot prove residence within the service delivery area.

(2) Any service delivery area may enter into an agreement or contract with another service delivery area (including a service delivery area that is a city or county within the same labor market) to pay or share the cost of educating, training, or placing individuals participating in programs assisted under this chapter, including the provision of supportive services. Such agreement or contract shall be approved by each private industry council providing guidance to the service delivery area and shall be described in the job training plan under section 1514 of this title.

No member of any council under this chapter shall cast a vote on the provision of services by that member (or any organization which that member directly represents) or vote on any matter which would provide direct financial benefit to that member.

(1) Payments to employers for on-the-job training shall not, during the period of such training, average more than 50 percent of the wages paid by the employer to such participants, and payments in such amount shall be deemed to be in compensation for the extraordinary costs associated with training participants under this chapter and in compensation for the costs associated with the lower productivity of such participants.

(2) On-the-job training authorized under the 1 chapter for a participant shall be limited in duration to a period not in excess of that generally required for acquisition of skills needed for the position within a particular occupation, but in no event shall exceed 6 months, unless the total number of hours of such training is less than 500 hours. In determining the period generally required for acquisition of the skills, consideration shall be given to recognized reference material (such as the Dictionary of Occupational Titles), the content of the training of the participant, the prior work experience of the participant, and the service strategy of the participant.

(3)(A) Each on-the-job training contract shall—

(i) specify the types and duration of on-the-job training and the other services to be provided in sufficient detail to allow for a fair analysis of the reasonableness of proposed costs; and

(ii) comply with the applicable requirements of section 1574 of this title.

(B) Each on-the-job training contract that is not directly contracted by a service delivery area with an employer (but instead is contracted through an intermediary brokering contractor) shall, in addition to meeting the requirements of subparagraph (A), specify the outreach, recruitment, participant training, counseling, placement, monitoring, followup, and other services to be provided directly by the brokering contractor within its own organization, the services to be provided by the employers conducting the on-the-job training, and the services to be provided, with or without cost, by other agencies and subcontractors.

(C) If a brokering contractor enters into a contract with a subcontractor to provide training or other services, the brokering contractor shall ensure, through on-site monitoring, compliance with subcontract terms prior to making payment to the subcontractor.

(4) In accordance with regulations issued by the Secretary, on-the-job training contracts under this chapter shall not be entered into with employers who have received payments under previous contracts and have exhibited a pattern of failing to provide on-the-job training participants with continued long-term employment as regular employees with wages and employment benefits (including health benefits) and working conditions at the same level and to the same extent as other employees working a similar length of time and doing the same type of work.

Funds provided under this chapter shall not be used to duplicate facilities or services available in the area (with or without reimbursement) from Federal, State, or local sources, unless the plan establishes that alternative services or facilities would be more effective or more likely to achieve performance goals.

Each administrative entity shall be responsible for the allocation of funds and the eligibility of those enrolled in its programs and shall have responsibility to take action against its subcontractors, subgrantees, and other recipients to eliminate abuses in the programs they are carrying out, and to prevent any misuse of funds by such subcontractors, subgrantees, and other recipients. Administrative entities may delegate the responsibility for determination of eligibility under reasonable safeguards, including provisions for reimbursement of cost incurred because of erroneous determinations made with insufficient care, if such an arrangement is included in an approved job training plan.

No person or organization may charge an individual a fee for the placement or referral of such individual in or to a training program under this chapter.

No funds may be provided under this chapter for any subsidized employment with any private for-profit employer unless the individual employed is a youth aged 16 to 21, inclusive, who is economically disadvantaged and the employment is provided in accordance with subparagraphs (F) and (H) of section 1644(c)(1) of this title.

The Secretary shall not provide financial assistance for any program under this chapter which involves political activities.

(1) Income under any program administered by a public or private nonprofit entity may be retained by such entity only if used to continue to carry out the program.

(2) Income subject to the requirements of paragraph (1) shall include—

(A) receipts from goods or services (including conferences) provided as a result of activities funded under the 2 chapter;

(B) funds provided to a service provider under the 2 chapter that are in excess of the costs associated with the services provided; and

(C) interest income earned on funds received under this chapter.

(3) For the purposes of this subsection, each entity receiving financial assistance under this chapter shall maintain records sufficient to determine the amount of income received and the purposes for which such income is expended.

The Secretary shall notify the Governor and the appropriate private industry councils and chief elected officials of, and consult with the Governor and such councils and officials concerning, any activity to be funded by the Secretary under this chapter within the State or service delivery area; and the Governor shall notify the appropriate private industry councils and chief elected officials of, and consult with such concerning, any activity to be funded by the Governor under this chapter within the service delivery area.

(1) All education programs for youth supported with funds provided under subchapter II of this chapter shall be consistent with applicable State and local educational standards.

(2) Standards and procedures with respect to the awarding of academic credit and certifying educational attainment in programs conducted under subchapter II of this chapter shall be consistent with the requirements of applicable State and local law and regulation.

No funds available under part B of this subchapter or part A or C of subchapter II of this chapter may be used for public service employment.

No funds available under this chapter shall be used for employment generating activities, economic development activities, investment in revolving loan funds, capitalization of businesses, investment in contract bidding resource centers, and similar activities. No funds under subchapter II or III of this chapter shall be used for foreign travel.

The Federal requirements governing the title, use, and disposition of real property, equipment, and supplies purchased with funds provided under this chapter shall be the Federal requirements generally applicable to Federal grants to States and local governments.

(1) Notwithstanding title II of the Federal Property and Administrative Services Act of 1949 (40 U.S.C. 481 et seq.) and any other provision of law, the Secretary and the Secretary of Education shall receive priority by the Secretary of Defense for the direct transfer, on a nonreimbursable basis, of the property described in paragraph (2) for use in carrying out programs under this chapter or under any other Act.

(2) The property described in this paragraph is both real and personal property under the control of the Department of Defense that is not used by such Department, including property that the Secretary of Defense determines is in excess of current and projected requirements of such Department.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §141, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1343; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(f), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 100–77, title VII, §740(b), July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 531; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §131, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1042; Pub. L. 102–484, div. D, title XLIV, §4467(f), Oct. 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 2751; Pub. L. 103–160, div. A, title XIII, §1336, Nov. 30, 1993, 107 Stat. 1805.)

The Federal Property and Administrative Services Act of 1949, referred to in subsec. (s), is act June 30, 1949, ch. 288, 63 Stat. 377, as amended. Title II of that Act, is classified principally to subchapter II (§481 et seq.) of chapter 10 of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 471 of Title 40 and Tables.

1993—Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 103–160 amended subsec. (s) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (s) read as follows: “Notwithstanding any other provision of law, a job training program under this chapter or an education program shall receive priority consideration for the transfer of Federal property and equipment that the Secretary of Defense determines are in excess of current and projected requirements of the Department of Defense. Such property and equipment shall be transferred at no cost to such program.”

1992—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(a), amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) read as follows: “No funds may be used to assist in relocating establishments, or parts thereof, from one area to another unless the Secretary determines that such relocation will not result in an increase in unemployment in the area of original location or in any other area.”

Subsec. (d)(3). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(b), designated existing provisions as subpar. (A) and added subpars. (B) and (C).

Subsec. (d)(4). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(c), added par. (4).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(d), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(e), designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added pars. (2) to (4).

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(f), substituted “subparagraphs (F) and (H) of section 1644(c)(1)” for “section 1605(d)(3)(B)”.

Subsec. (m). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(g), amended subsec. (m) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (m) read as follows: “Pursuant to regulations of the Secretary, income generated under any program may be retained by the recipient to continue to carry out the program, notwithstanding the expiration of financial assistance for that program.”

Subsec. (p). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(h), substituted “part A or C of subchapter II” for “part A of subchapter II”.

Subsecs. (q), (r). Pub. L. 102–367, §131(i), as amended by Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(f)(2), added subsecs. (q) and (r).

Subsec. (s). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(f)(1), added subsec. (s).

1987—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 100–77 inserted before period at end “, including exceptions necessary to permit services to homeless individuals who cannot prove residence within the service delivery area”.

1982—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 97–404, §1(f)(1), inserted “the Secretary determines that” after “unless”.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 97–404, §1(f)(2), struck out “which” after “on-the-job training” and substituted reference to this chapter for reference to this subchapter.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section 7 of Pub. L. 98–524, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2491, provided that: “Notwithstanding section 629.38(e)(2)(iii) of title 20 of the Code of Federal Regulations, relating to allowable training costs under the Job Training Partnership Act [this chapter], payment for training packages purchased competitively pursuant to section 141(d)(3) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1536(d)(3)] in the case of youth shall include payment for the full unit price if the training results in either placement in unsubsidized employment or the attainment of an outcome specified in section 106(b)(2) of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1516(b)(2)].”

This section is referred to in sections 1514, 1518, 1576, 1604, 1644, 1733, 1783 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “this”.

2 So in original. Probably should be “this”.

Except as otherwise provided in this chapter, the following provisions shall apply to all activities financed under this chapter:

(1) A trainee shall receive no payments for training activities in which the trainee fails to participate without good cause.

(2) Individuals in on-the-job training shall be compensated by the employer at the same rates, including periodic increases, as similarly situated employees or trainees and in accordance with applicable law, but in no event less than the higher of the rate specified in section 6(a)(1) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 206(a)(1)] or the applicable State or local minimum wage law.

(3) Individuals employed in activities authorized under this chapter shall be paid wages which shall not be less than the highest of (A) the minimum wage under section 6(a)(1) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 206(a)(1)], (B) the minimum wage under the applicable State or local minimum wage law, or (C) the prevailing rates of pay for individuals employed in similar occupations by the same employer.

(4) References in paragraphs (2) and (3) to section 6(a)(1) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 206(a)(1))—

(A) shall be deemed to be references to section 6(c) 1 of that Act [29 U.S.C. 206(c)] for individuals in the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico;

(B) shall be deemed to be references to section 6(a)(3) of that Act [29 U.S.C. 206(a)(3)] for individuals in American Samoa; and

(C) shall not be applicable for individuals in other territorial jurisdictions in which section 6 of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 [29 U.S.C. 206] does not apply.

Allowances, earnings and payments to individuals participating in programs under this chapter shall not be considered as income for the purposes of determining eligibility for and the amount of income transfer and in-kind aid furnished under any Federal or federally assisted program based on need, other than as provided under the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 301 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §142, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1345; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(g), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §132, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1045.)

Section 6(c) of the Fair Labor Standards Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(4)(A), is section 6(c) of act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, which was classified to section 206(c) of this title, and was repealed by Pub. L. 104–188, [title II], §2104(c), Aug. 20, 1996, 110 Stat. 1929.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 7 (§301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 102–367, §132(1), added par. (4).

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §132(2), substituted “other than as provided” for “other than programs”.

1982—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 97–404 inserted “furnished under any Federal or federally assisted program based on need” after “aid”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 7 section 2014; title 42 sections 12637, 12899e.

1 See References in Text note below.

(1) Conditions of employment and training shall be appropriate and reasonable in light of such factors as the type of work, geographical region, and proficiency of the participant.

(2) Health and safety standards established under State and Federal law, otherwise applicable to working conditions of employees, shall be equally applicable to working conditions of participants. With respect to any participant in a program conducted under this chapter who is engaged in activities which are not covered by health and safety standards under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 [29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.], the Secretary shall prescribe, by regulation, such standards as may be necessary to protect the health and safety of such participants.

(3) To the extent that a State workers’ compensation law is applicable, workers’ compensation benefits in accordance with such law shall be available with respect to injuries suffered by participants. To the extent that such law is not applicable, each recipient of funds under this chapter shall secure insurance coverage for injuries suffered by such participants, in accordance with regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(4) All individuals employed in subsidized jobs shall be provided benefits and working conditions at the same level and to the same extent as other employees working a similar length of time and doing the same type of work.

(5) No funds available under this chapter may be used for contributions on behalf of any participant to retirement systems or plans.

(1) No currently employed worker shall be displaced by any participant (including partial displacement such as a reduction in the hours of nonovertime work, wages, or employment benefits).

(2) No program under this chapter shall impair—

(A) existing contracts for services; or

(B) existing collective bargaining agreements, unless the employer and the labor organization concur in writing with respect to any elements of the proposed activities which affect such agreement, or either such party fails to respond to written notification requesting its concurrence within 30 days of receipt thereof.

(3) No participant shall be employed or job opening filled (A) when any other individual is on layoff from the same or any substantially equivalent job, or (B) when the employer has terminated the employment of any regular employee or otherwise reduced its workforce with the intention of filling the vacancy so created by hiring a participant whose wages are subsidized under this chapter.

(4) No jobs shall be created in a promotional line that will infringe in any way upon the promotional opportunities of currently employed individuals.

(1) Each recipient of funds under this chapter shall provide to the Secretary assurances that none of such funds will be used to assist, promote, or deter union organizing.

(2) Where a labor organization represents a substantial number of employees who are engaged in similar work or training in the same area as that proposed to be funded under this chapter, an opportunity shall be provided for such organization to submit comments with respect to such proposal.

All laborers and mechanics employed by contractors or subcontractors in any construction, alteration, or repair, including painting and decorating, of projects, buildings, and works which are federally assisted under this chapter, shall be paid wages at rates not less than those prevailing on similar construction in the locality as determined by the Secretary in accordance with the Act of March 3, 1931 (40 U.S.C. 276a—276a–5), popularly known as the Davis-Bacon Act. The Secretary shall have, with respect to such labor standards, the authority and functions set forth in Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950 (15 F.R. 3176; 64 Stat. 1267) and section 276c of title 40. The provisions of this subsection shall not apply to a bona fide trainee in a training program under this chapter. The provisions of section 1577(a)(4) of this title shall apply to such trainees.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §143, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1345; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(h), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §133, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1045.)

The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 91–596, Dec. 29, 1970, 84 Stat. 1590, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 15 (§651 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 651 of this title and Tables.

Act of March 3, 1931, known as the Davis-Bacon Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is act Mar. 3, 1931, ch. 411, 46 Stat. 1494, as amended, which is classified generally to sections 276a to 276a–5 of Title 40, Public Buildings, Property, and Works. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 276a of Title 40 and Tables.

Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950, referred to in subsec. (d), is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1992—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367 amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “No program shall impair existing contracts for services or collective bargaining agreements, except that no program under this chapter which would be inconsistent with the terms of a collective bargaining agreement shall be undertaken without the written concurrence of the labor organization and employer concerned.”

1982—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted “1931” for “1921”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1516, 1554 of this title; title 42 section 12899e.

Each administrative entity, contractor, and grantee under this chapter shall establish and maintain a grievance procedure for grievances or complaints about its programs and activities from participants, subgrantees, subcontractors, and other interested persons. Hearings on any grievance shall be conducted within 30 days of filing of a grievance and decisions shall be made not later than 60 days after the filing of a grievance. Except for complaints alleging fraud or criminal activity, complaints shall be made within one year of the alleged occurrence.

Each recipient of financial assistance under this chapter which is an employer of participants under this chapter shall continue to operate or establish and maintain a grievance procedure relating to the terms and conditions of employment.

Upon exhaustion of a recipient's grievance procedure without decision, or where the Secretary has reason to believe that the recipient is failing to comply with the requirements of this chapter or the terms of the job training plan, the Secretary shall investigate the allegation or belief and determine within 120 days after receiving the complaint whether such allegation or complaint is true.

(1) If a person alleges a violation of section 1553 of this title and such person exhausts the recipient's grievance procedure or the 60-day time period described in subsection (a) of this section has elapsed without a decision, either party to such procedure may submit the grievance to the Secretary. The Secretary shall investigate the allegations contained in the grievance and make a determination as to whether a violation of section 1553 of this title has occurred.

(2) If the results of the investigation conducted pursuant to paragraph (1) indicate that a modification or reversal of the decision issued pursuant to the recipient's grievance procedure is warranted, or the 60-day time period described in subsection (a) of this section has elapsed without a decision, the Secretary may modify or reverse the decision, or issue a decision if no decision has been issued, as the case may be, after an opportunity for a hearing in accordance with the procedures under section 1576 of this title.

(3) If the Secretary determines that the decision issued pursuant to the recipient's grievance procedure is appropriate, the determination shall become the final decision of the Secretary.

(1) A person alleging a violation of section 1553 of this title may, as an alternative to the procedures described in this section, submit the grievance involving such violation to a binding grievance procedure if a collective bargaining agreement covering the parties to the grievance so provides.

(2) The remedies available under paragraph (1) shall be limited to the remedies available under subsection (f)(1)(C) of this section and subsection (f)(2) of this section.

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), remedies available to grievants under this section for violations of section 1553 of this title shall be limited to—

(A) suspension or termination of payments under this chapter;

(B) prohibition of placement of a participant, for an appropriate period of time, in a program under this chapter with an employer that has violated section 1553 of this title, as determined under subsection (d) or (e) of this section; and

(C) appropriate equitable relief (other than back pay).

(2) In addition to the remedies available under paragraph (1), remedies available under this section for violations of subsection (a)(4) of this section, paragraphs (1) and (3) of subsection (b) of this section, and subsection (d) of section 1553 of this title may include—

(A) reinstatement of the grievant to the position held by such grievant prior to displacement;

(B) payment of lost wages and benefits; and

(C) reestablishment of other relevant terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.

Nothing in subsection (f) of this section shall be construed to prohibit a grievant from pursuing a remedy authorized under another Federal, State, or local law for a violation of section 1553 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §144, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1346; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §134(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1045.)

1992—Subsecs. (d) to (g). Pub. L. 102–367 added subsecs. (d) to (g).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1576 of this title.

No provision of this chapter shall be construed to authorize any department, agency, officer, or employee of the United States to exercise any direction, supervision, or control over the curriculum, program of instruction, administration, or personnel of any educational institution, school, or school system, or over the selection of library resources, textbooks, or other printed or published instructional materials by any educational institution or school system.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §145, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1347.)

Programs administered by Secretary of Education, prohibition of Federal control of education, see section 1232a of Title 20, Education.

This part is referred to in section 1661a of this title.

Beginning with fiscal year 1985 and thereafter, appropriations for any fiscal year for programs and activities under this chapter shall be available for obligation only on the basis of a program year. The program year shall begin on July 1 in the fiscal year for which the appropriation is made.

(1) Funds obligated for any program year may be expended by each recipient during that program year and the two succeeding program years and no amount shall be deobligated on account of a rate of expenditure which is consistent with the job training plan.

(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (1), funds obligated for any program year for programs authorized by section 1732 of this title shall remain available until expended.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §161, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1347; Pub. L. 100–495, §1, Oct. 17, 1988, 102 Stat. 2454; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(7), (8), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

1992—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(7), substituted “section 1732” for “sections 1732 through 1735”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(8), struck out subsec. (c) which read as follows:

“(1) Appropriations for fiscal year 1984 shall be available both to fund activities for the period between October 1, 1983, and July 1, 1984, and for the program year beginning July 1, 1984.

“(2) There are authorized to be appropriated such additional sums as may be necessary to carry out the provisions of this subsection for the transition to program year funding.”

1988—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 100–495 designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section 2 of Pub. L. 100–495 provided that: “The amendments made by this Act [amending this section] shall apply with respect to funds available for expenditure on or after June 30, 1988.”

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1572 of this title.

All allotments and allocations under this chapter shall be based on the latest available data and estimates satisfactory to the Secretary. All data relating to economically disadvantaged and low-income persons shall be based on 1980 Census or later data.

Whenever the Secretary allots and allocates funds required to be allotted or allocated by formula under this chapter, the Secretary shall publish in a timely fashion in the Federal Register the proposed amount to be distributed to each recipient.

All funds required to be distributed by formula under this chapter shall be allotted within 45 days after enactment of the appropriations, except that, if such funds are appropriated in advance as authorized by section 1571 of this title, such funds shall be allotted not later than the March 31 preceding the program year for which such funds are to be available for obligation.

Whenever the Secretary utilizes a formula to allot or allocate funds made available for distribution at the Secretary's discretion under this chapter, the Secretary shall, not later than 30 days prior to such allotment or allocation, publish such formula in the Federal Register for comments along with the rationale for the formula and the proposed amounts to be distributed to each State and area. After consideration of any comments received, the Secretary shall publish final allotments and allocations in the Federal Register.

Funds shall be made available to the grant recipient for the service delivery area not later than 30 days after the date they are made available to the Governor or 7 days after the date the plan is approved, whichever is later.

When contracting with nonprofit organizations of demonstrated effectiveness, the Secretary, States, substate areas, and service delivery areas may make advance payments, provided that such payments are based on the financial need of such organization and are not in excess of 20 percent of the total contract amount.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §162, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1347; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §141, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1046.)

1992—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–367 added subsec. (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1602, 1642 of this title.

The Secretary is authorized to monitor all recipients of financial assistance under this chapter to determine whether they are complying with the provisions of this chapter and the regulations issued under this chapter.

The Secretary may investigate any matter the Secretary deems necessary to determine compliance with this chapter and regulations issued under this chapter. The investigations authorized by this subsection may include examining records (including making certified copies thereof), questioning employees, and entering any premises or onto any site in which any part of a program of a recipient is conducted or in which any of the records of the recipient are kept.

For the purpose of any investigation or hearing under this chapter, the provisions of section 9 of the Federal Trade Commission Act (15 U.S.C. 49) (relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, papers, and documents) are made applicable to the Secretary.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §163, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1348.)

(1) Each State shall establish such fiscal control and fund accounting procedures as may be necessary to assure the proper disbursal of, and accounting for, Federal funds paid to the recipient under subchapters II and III of this chapter. Such procedures shall ensure that all financial transactions are conducted and records maintained in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles applicable in each State.

(2) The Secretary shall prescribe regulations establishing uniform cost principles substantially equivalent to such principles generally applicable to recipients of Federal grants funds. At a minimum, such standards shall provide that, to be allowable, costs must—

(A) be necessary and reasonable for proper and efficient administration of the program under this chapter;

(B) be allocable to the program under this chapter; and

(C) not be a general expense required to carry out the overall responsibilities of State, local, or federally recognized Indian tribal governments except as specifically provided by this chapter.

(3) The Governor, in accordance with minimum requirements established by the Secretary in regulations, shall prescribe and implement procurement standards to ensure fiscal accountability and prevent fraud and abuse in programs administered under this chapter. The Secretary, in establishing such minimum requirements, shall consult with the Inspector General of the Department of Labor and take into consideration relevant aspects of the circulars issued by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget. Such minimum requirements shall include provisions to ensure that for States, substate areas, and service delivery areas—

(A) procurements shall be conducted in a manner providing full and open competition;

(B) the use of sole source procurements shall be minimized to the extent practicable, but in every case shall be justified;

(C) procurements shall include an appropriate analysis of the reasonableness of costs and prices;

(D) procurements shall not provide excess program income (for nonprofit and governmental entities) or excess profit (for private for-profit entities), and that appropriate factors shall be utilized in determining whether such income or profit is excessive, such as—

(i) the complexity of the work to be performed;

(ii) the risk borne by the contractor; and

(iii) market conditions in the surrounding geographical area;

(E) procurements shall clearly specify deliverables and the basis for payment;

(F) written procedures shall be established for procurement transactions;

(G) no grantee, contractor, subgrantee, or subcontractor shall engage in any conflict of interest, actual or apparent, in the selection, award, or administration of a contract or grant under this chapter;

(H) all grantees and subgrantees shall conduct oversight to ensure compliance with procurement standards; and

(I) procurement transactions between units of State or local governments, and any other entities organized principally as the administrative entity for service delivery areas, shall be conducted on a cost reimbursable basis.

(4) The Governor shall annually conduct on-site monitoring of each service delivery area and substate area within the State to ensure compliance with the procurement standards established pursuant to paragraph (3).

(5) If the Governor determines that a service delivery area or substate area is not in compliance with the procurement standards established pursuant to paragraph (3), the Governor shall—

(A) require corrective action to secure prompt compliance; and

(B) impose the sanctions provided under subsection (b) of this section in the event of failure to take the required corrective action.

(6) The Governor shall biennially certify to the Secretary that—

(A) the State has implemented the procurement standards established under paragraph (3);

(B) the State has monitored substate areas and service delivery areas to ensure compliance with the procurement standards as required under paragraph (4); and

(C) the State has taken appropriate action to secure compliance pursuant to paragraph (5).

(7) If the Secretary determines that the Governor has not fulfilled the requirements of this subsection, the Secretary shall—

(A) require corrective action to secure prompt compliance; and

(B) impose the sanctions provided under subsection (f) of this section in the event of failure of the Governor to take the required corrective action.

(8) The Secretary, in consultation with the Inspector General, shall review the implementation of this subsection and submit a report to the appropriate committees of the Congress, not later than October 1, 1995, evaluating the effectiveness of this subsection in ensuring fiscal accountability and containing such recommendations as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

(1) If, as a result of financial and compliance audits or otherwise, the Governor determines that there is a substantial violation of a specific provision of this chapter or the regulations under this chapter, and corrective action has not been taken, the Governor shall—

(A) issue a notice of intent to revoke approval of all or part of the plan affected; or

(B) impose a reorganization plan, which may include—

(i) restructuring the private industry council involved;

(ii) prohibiting the use of designated service providers;

(iii) selecting an alternative entity to administer the program for the service delivery area involved;

(iv) merging the service delivery area into 1 or more other existing service delivery areas; or

(v) other such changes as the Secretary or Governor determines necessary to secure compliance.

(2)(A) The actions taken by the Governor pursuant to paragraph (1)(A) may be appealed to the Secretary under the same terms and conditions as the disapproval of the plan and shall not become effective until—

(i) the time for appeal has expired; or

(ii) the Secretary has issued a decision.

(B) The actions taken by the Governor pursuant to paragraph (1)(B) may be appealed to the Secretary, who shall make a final decision not later than 60 days of the receipt of the appeal.

(3) If the Governor fails to promptly take the actions required under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall take such actions.

(1) The Comptroller General of the United States shall, on a selective basis, evaluate the expenditures by the recipients of grants under this chapter in order to assure that expenditures are consistent with the provisions of this chapter and to determine the effectiveness of each recipient in accomplishing the purposes of this chapter. The Comptroller General shall conduct the evaluations whenever he determines it necessary and he shall periodically report to the Congress on the findings of such evaluations.

(2) Nothing in this chapter shall be deemed to relieve the Inspector General of the Department of Labor of his responsibilities under the Inspector General Act.

(3) For the purpose of evaluating and reviewing programs established or provided for by this chapter, the Comptroller General shall have access to and the right to copy any books, accounts, records, correspondence, or other documents pertinent to such programs that are in the possession, custody, or control of the State, a private industry council established under section 1512 of this title, any recipient of funds under this chapter, or any subgrantee or contractor of such recipients.

Every recipient shall repay to the United States amounts found not to have been expended in accordance with this chapter. The Secretary may offset such amounts against any other amount to which the recipient is or may be entitled under this chapter unless he determines that such recipient should be held liable pursuant to subsection (e) of this section. No such action shall be taken except after notice and opportunity for a hearing have been given to the recipient.

(1) Each recipient shall be liable to repay such amounts, from funds other than funds received under this chapter, upon a determination that the misexpenditure of funds was due to willful disregard of the requirements of this chapter, gross negligence, or failure to observe accepted standards of administration. No such finding shall be made except after notice and opportunity for a fair hearing.

(2) In determining whether to impose any sanction authorized by this section against a recipient for violations by a subgrantee of such recipient under this chapter or the regulations under this chapter, the Secretary shall first determine whether such recipient has adequately demonstrated that it has—

(A) established and adhered to an appropriate system for the award and monitoring of contracts with subgrantees which contains acceptable standards for ensuring accountability;

(B) entered into a written contract with such subgrantee which established clear goals and obligations in unambiguous terms;

(C) acted with due diligence to monitor the implementation of the subgrantee contract, including the carrying out of the appropriate monitoring activities (including audits) at reasonable intervals; and

(D) taken prompt and appropriate corrective action upon becoming aware of any evidence of a violation of this chapter or the regulations under this chapter by such subgrantee.

(3) If the Secretary determines that the recipient has demonstrated substantial compliance with the requirements of paragraph (2), the Secretary may waive the imposition of sanctions authorized by this section upon such recipient. The Secretary is authorized to impose any sanction consistent with the provisions of this chapter and any applicable Federal or State law directly against any subgrantee for violation of this chapter or the regulations under this chapter.

In emergency situations, if the Secretary determines it is necessary to protect the integrity of the funds or ensure the proper operation of the program, the Secretary may immediately terminate or suspend financial assistance, in whole or in part, if the recipient is given prompt notice and the opportunity for a subsequent hearing within 30 days after such termination or suspension. The Secretary shall not delegate any of the functions or authority specified in this subsection, other than to an officer whose appointment was required to be made by and with the advice and consent of the Senate.

If the Secretary determines that any recipient under this chapter has discharged or in any other manner discriminated against a participant or against any individual in connection with the administration of the program involved, or against any individual because such individual has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding under or related to this chapter, or has testified or is about to testify in any such proceeding or investigation under or related to this chapter, or otherwise unlawfully denied to any individual a benefit to which that individual is entitled under the provisions of this chapter or the Secretary's regulations, the Secretary shall, within thirty days, take such action or order such corrective measures, as necessary, with respect to the recipient or the aggrieved individual, or both.

The remedies under this section shall not be construed to be exclusive remedies.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §164, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1348; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §142, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1046.)

The Inspector General Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(2), probably means the Inspector General Act of 1978, Pub. L. 95–452, Oct. 12, 1978, 92 Stat. 1101, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §142(a), amended subsec. (a) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (a) consisted of pars. (1) to (3) relating to State fiscal controls and fund accounting procedures, biennial audits, and Federal audit standards.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §142(b), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows:

“(1) Whenever, as a result of financial and compliance audits or otherwise, the Governor determines that there is a substantial violation of a specific provision of this chapter or the regulations, and corrective action has not been taken, the Governor may issue a notice of intent to revoke approval of all or part of the plan affected. Such notice may be appealed to the Secretary under the same terms and conditions as the disapproval of the plan and shall not become effective until (A) the time for appeal has expired or (B) the Secretary has issued a decision.

“(2) The Governor shall withdraw the notice if the appropriate corrective action has been taken.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1511, 1514, 1517, 1551, 1578 of this title.

(1) Recipients shall keep records that are sufficient to permit the preparation of reports required by this chapter and to permit the tracing of funds to a level of expenditure adequate to insure that the funds have not been spent unlawfully.

(2) Every recipient shall maintain such records and submit such reports, in such form and containing such information, as the Secretary requires regarding the performance of its programs. Such records and reports shall be submitted to the Secretary but shall not be required to be submitted more than once each quarter unless specifically requested by the Congress or a committee thereof.

(3) In order to allow for the preparation of national estimates necessary to meet the requirements of subsection (c) of this section, recipients shall maintain standardized records for all individual participants and provide to the Secretary a sufficient number of such records to provide for an adequate analysis.

(4)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), records maintained by recipients pursuant to this subsection shall be made available to the public upon request.

(B) Subparagraph (A) shall not apply to—

(i) information, the disclosure of which would constitute a clearly unwarranted invasion of personal privacy; and

(ii) trade secrets, or commercial or financial information, obtained from a person and privileged or confidential.

(C) Recipients may charge fees sufficient to recover costs applicable to the processing of requests for records under subparagraph (A).

(1)(A) In order to evaluate compliance with the provisions of this chapter, the Secretary shall conduct, in several States, in each fiscal year investigations of the use of funds received by recipients under this chapter.

(B) In order to insure compliance with the provisions of this chapter, the Comptroller General of the United States may conduct investigations of the use of funds received under this chapter by any recipient.

(2) In conducting any investigation under this chapter, the Secretary or the Comptroller General of the United States may not request the compilation of any new information not readily available to such recipient.

(3)(A) In carrying out any audit under this chapter (other than any initial audit survey or any audit investigating possible criminal or fraudulent conduct), either directly or through grant or contract, the Secretary, the Inspector General, or the Comptroller General shall furnish to the State, administrative entity, recipient, or other entity to be audited, advance notification of the overall objectives and purposes of the audit, and any extensive recordkeeping or data requirements to be met, not fewer than 14 days (or as soon as practicable), prior to the commencement of the audit.

(B) If the scope, objectives, or purposes of the audit change substantially during the course of the audit, the entity being audited shall be notified of the change as soon as practicable.

(C) The reports on the results of such audits shall cite the law, regulation, policy, or other criteria applicable to any finding.

(D) Nothing contained in this chapter shall be construed so as to be inconsistent with the Inspector General Act of 1978 (5 U.S.C. App.) or government auditing standards issued by the Comptroller General.

Each State, each administrative entity, and each recipient (other than a subrecipient, grantee or contractor of a recipient) receiving funds under this chapter shall—

(1) make readily accessible reports concerning its operations and expenditures as shall be prescribed by the Secretary;

(2) prescribe and maintain comparable management information systems, in accordance with guidelines that shall be prescribed by the Secretary, designed to facilitate the uniform compilation, cross tabulation, and analysis of programmatic, participant, and financial data, on statewide and service delivery area bases, necessary for reporting, monitoring, and evaluating purposes, including data necessary to comply with section 1577 of this title; and

(3) monitor the performance of service providers in complying with the terms of grants, contracts, or other agreements made pursuant to this chapter.

(1) The reports required in subsection (c) of this section shall include information pertaining to—

(A) the relevant demographic characteristics (including race, ethnicity, sex, and age) and other related information regarding participants;

(B) the activities in which participants are enrolled, and the length of time that participants are engaged in such activities;

(C) program outcomes, including occupations, for participants;

(D) specified program costs; and

(E) information necessary to prepare reports to comply with section 1577 of this title.

(2) The Secretary shall ensure that all elements of the information required for the reports described in paragraph (1) are defined and reported uniformly.

The Governor shall ensure that requirements are established for retention of all records pertinent to all grants awarded, and contracts and agreements entered into, under this chapter, including financial, statistical, property and participant records and supporting documentation. For funds allotted to a State for any program year, records shall be retained for 2 years following the date on which the annual expenditure report containing the final expenditures charged to such program year's allotment is submitted to the Secretary. Records for nonexpendable property shall be retained for a period of 3 years after final disposition of the property.

(1) Each substate grantee and service delivery area shall submit quarterly financial reports to the Governor with respect to programs under this chapter. Such reports shall include information identifying all program costs by cost category in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and by year of the appropriation.

(2) Each State shall submit a summary of the reports submitted pursuant to paragraph (1) to the Secretary on a quarterly basis.

Each State, substate grantee, and service delivery area shall maintain records with respect to programs under this chapter that identify—

(1) any program income or profits earned, including such income or profits earned by subrecipients; and

(2) any costs incurred (such as stand-in costs) that are otherwise allowable except for funding limitations.

(1) The Secretary shall conduct a biennial study on the provision of supportive services under programs conducted pursuant to subchapter II of this chapter. Such study shall identify—

(A) the amount and proportion of funds expended for supportive services under subchapter II of this chapter;

(B) the types of supportive services provided;

(C) the relative share of funds expended for each type of supportive service;

(D) the characteristics of the participants receiving supportive services; and

(E) such other factors as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

(2) The Secretary shall submit a report to the Congress containing the results of each study conducted pursuant to paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §165, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1350; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §143, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1048.)

The Inspector General Act of 1978, referred to in subsec. (b)(3)(D), is Pub. L. 95–452, Oct. 12, 1978, 92 Stat. 1101, as amended, which is set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

1992—Subsec. (a)(3), (4). Pub. L. 102–367, §143(a), added pars. (3) and (4).

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 102–367, §143(b), added par. (3).

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §143(c), amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) read as follows: “Each State, each administrative entity designated under this subchapter, and each recipient (other than a subrecipient, grantee or contractor of a recipient) receiving funds under this chapter shall—

“(1) make such reports concerning its operations and expenditures as shall be prescribed by the Secretary, and

“(2) prescribe and maintain a management information system, in accordance with guidelines prescribed by the Secretary, designed to facilitate the uniform compilation and analysis of programmatic and financial data, on statewide and service delivery area bases, necessary for reporting, monitoring, and evaluating purposes.”

Subsecs. (d) to (h). Pub. L. 102–367, §143(d), added subsecs. (d) to (h).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Whenever any applicant for financial assistance under this chapter is dissatisfied because the Secretary has made a determination not to award financial assistance in whole or in part to such applicant, the applicant may request a hearing before an administrative law judge of the Department of Labor. A similar hearing may also be requested by any recipient upon whom a corrective action or a sanction has been imposed by the Secretary. Except to the extent provided for in section 1551(c) of this title, subsections (d) and (e) of section 1554 of this title, or section 1577 of this title, all other disputes arising under this chapter shall be adjudicated under grievance procedures established by the recipient or under applicable law other than this chapter.

The decision of the administrative law judge shall constitute final action by the Secretary unless, within 20 days after receipt of the decision of the administrative law judge, a party dissatisfied with the decision or any part thereof has filed exceptions with the Secretary specifically identifying the procedure, fact, law, or policy to which exception is taken. Any exception not specifically urged shall be deemed to have been waived. Thereafter the decision of the administrative law judge shall become the final decision of the Secretary unless the Secretary, within 30 days of such filing, has notified the parties that the case has been accepted for review.

Any case accepted for review by the Secretary shall be decided within one hundred and eighty days of such acceptance. If not so decided, the decision of the administrative law judge shall become the final decision of the Secretary.

The provisions of section 1578 of this title shall apply to any final action of the Secretary under this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §166, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1351; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §134(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1046.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367 inserted “section 1551(c) of this title, subsections (d) and (e) of section 1554 of this title, or” after “Except to the extent provided for in”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1554, 1578, 1791c of this title; title 20 section 6104.

(1) For the purpose of applying the prohibitions against discrimination on the basis of age under the Age Discrimination Act of 1975 [42 U.S.C. 6101 et seq.], on the basis of handicap under section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act [29 U.S.C. 794], on the basis of sex under title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 [20 U.S.C. 1681 et seq.], or on the basis of race, color, or national origin under title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.], programs and activities funded or otherwise financially assisted in whole or in part under this chapter are considered to be programs and activities receiving Federal financial assistance.

(2) No individual shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, subjected to discrimination under, or denied employment in the administration of or in connection with any such program because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability, or political affiliation or belief.

(3) Participants shall not be employed on the construction, operation, or maintenance of so much of any facility as is used or to be used for sectarian instruction or as a place for religious worship.

(4) With respect to terms and conditions affecting, or rights provided to, individuals who are participants in activities supported by funds provided under this chapter, such individuals shall not be discriminated against solely because of their status as such participants.

(5) Participation in programs and activities financially assisted in whole or in part under this chapter shall be open to citizens and nationals of the United States, lawfully admitted permanent resident aliens, lawfully admitted refugees and parolees, and other individuals authorized by the Attorney General to work in the United States.

Whenever the Secretary finds that a State or other recipient has failed to comply with a provision of law referred to in subsection (a)(1) of this section, with paragraph (2), (3), (4), or (5) of subsection (a) of this section, or with an applicable regulation prescribed to carry out such paragraphs, the Secretary shall notify such State or recipient and shall request it to comply. If within a reasonable period of time, not to exceed sixty days, the State or recipient fails or refuses to comply, the Secretary may—

(1) refer the matter to the Attorney General with a recommendation that an appropriate civil action be instituted;

(2) exercise the powers and functions provided by title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 [42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.], the Age Discrimination Act of 1975 [42 U.S.C. 6101 et seq.], or section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act [29 U.S.C. 794], as may be applicable; or

(3) take such other action as may be provided by law.

When a matter is referred to the Attorney General pursuant to subsection (b)(1) of this section, or whenever the Attorney General has reason to believe that a State or other recipient is engaged in a pattern or practice in violation of a provision of law referred to in subsection (a)(1) of this section or in violation of paragraph (2), (3), (4), or (5) of subsection (a) of this section, the Attorney General may bring a civil action in any appropriate district court of the United States for such relief as may be appropriate, including injunctive relief.

For purposes of this section, Job Corps members shall be considered as the ultimate beneficiaries of Federal financial assistance.

(1) The head of the office of the Department of Labor referred to as the “Directorate for Civil Rights” shall annually prepare a report on the administration and enforcement of this section.

(2) The report required by paragraph (1) shall include—

(A) an identification of the service delivery areas and States that have been determined, during the preceding program year, not to be in compliance with this section;

(B) for each such identification, the date on which the inquiry was begun and whether the inquiry was initiated on the basis of a complaint or at the initiative of the Department;

(C) an identification of the service delivery areas and States awaiting findings by the Directorate;

(D) the number of service delivery areas and States that, during the preceding year, were determined not to be in compliance with this section, and the number for which insufficient data prevented the making of such a determination, identifying the type of data which is missing or inadequate;

(E) a statistical summary, broken down by race, sex, national origin, disability, or age, of the number of inquiries undertaken and their outcomes;

(F) an identification of any service delivery area or State that has been determined, during the preceding year, to have failed to conduct objective assessments as required by sections 1604 and 1644 of this title on a nondiscriminatory basis;

(G) the amount expended by the Directorate for the administration and enforcement of this section, and the number and percentage of full-time employees, and the full-time equivalent of the part-time employees, engaged in such administration and enforcement;

(H) the number of onsite visits conducted each year, and whether the visits were initiated by the Department or by complaint;

(I) the number of cases referred to the Attorney General, and for such cases—

(i) the civil actions taken by the Attorney General thereon; and

(ii) the use, by the Secretary, of the authority of title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.), the Age Discrimination Act of 1975 [42 U.S.C. 6101 et seq.], or section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 794); and

(J) a description of any other actions taken by the Secretary under or related to the administration and enforcement of this section.

(3) The report required by this subsection shall be submitted to the Congress as part of the Secretary's annual report under section 1579(d) of this title.

In addition to any other sums authorized to be appropriated under Federal law, there are authorized to be appropriated for the operations and expenses of the Directorate such sums as may be necessary for the purpose of increasing the number of full-time equivalent personnel available to the Directorate in order to comply with the requirements of this section.

The Secretary shall issue final regulations implementing this section not later than 90 days after September 7, 1992.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §167, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1352; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §§103(b)(2), 144, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1026, 1051.)

The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1), (b)(2), and (e)(2)(I)(ii), is title III of Pub. L. 94–135, Nov. 28, 1975, 89 Stat. 728, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 76 (§6101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Education Amendments of 1972, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), is Pub. L. 92–318, June 23, 1972, 86 Stat. 235, as amended. Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972 is classified principally to chapter 38 (§1681 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1972 Amendment note set out under section 1001 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Civil Rights Act of 1964, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1), (b)(2), and (e)(2)(I)(ii), is Pub. L. 88–352, July 2, 1964, 78 Stat. 241, as amended. Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 is classified generally to subchapter V (§2000d et seq.) of chapter 21 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2000a of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(b)(2), substituted “disability” for “handicap”.

Subsecs. (e) to (g). Pub. L. 102–367, §144, added subsecs. (e) to (g).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1553, 1575, 1576 of this title; title 42 section 12899e.

(1) With respect to any final order by the Secretary under section 1576 of this title whereby the Secretary determines to award, to not award, or to only conditionally award, financial assistance, with respect to any final order of the Secretary under section 1576 of this title with respect to a corrective action or sanction imposed under section 1574 of this title, and with respect to a denial of an appeal under section 1511(4)(C) of this title or 1515(b)(2) of this title, any party to a proceeding which resulted in such final order may obtain review of such final order in the United States Court of Appeals having jurisdiction over the applicant or recipient of funds, by filing a review petition within 30 days of such final order.

(2) The clerk of the court shall transmit a copy of the review petition to the Secretary who shall file the record upon which the final order was entered as provided in section 2112 of title 28. Review petitions unless ordered by the court, shall not stay the Secretary's order. Petitions under this chapter shall be heard expeditiously, if possible within ten days of the filing of a reply brief.

(3) No objection to the order of the Secretary shall be considered by the court unless the objection shall have been specifically and timely urged before the Secretary. Review shall be limited to questions of law and the Secretary's findings of fact shall be conclusive if supported by substantial evidence.

The court shall have jurisdiction to make and enter a decree affirming, modifying, or setting aside the order of the Secretary in whole or in part. The court's judgment shall be final, subject to certiorari review by the Supreme Court of the United States as provided in section 1254(1) of title 28.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §168, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1353.)

This section is referred to in section 1576 of this title.

The Secretary may, in accordance with chapter 5 of title 5, prescribe such rules and regulations (including performance standards) as the Secretary deems necessary. Such rules and regulations may include adjustments authorized by section 6504 of title 31. All such rules and regulations shall be published in the Federal Register at least thirty days prior to their effective date. Copies of all such rules and regulations shall be transmitted to the appropriate committees of the Congress at the same time and shall contain, with respect to each material provision of such rules and regulations, citations to the particular substantive section of law which is the basis therefor.

The Secretary is authorized, in carrying out this chapter, to accept, purchase, or lease in the name of the department, and employ or dispose of in furtherance of the purposes of this chapter, any money or property, real, personal, or mixed, tangible or intangible, received by gift, devise, bequest, or otherwise, and to accept voluntary and uncompensated services notwithstanding the provisions of section 1342 of title 31.

The Secretary may make such grants, contracts, or agreements, establish such procedures and make such payments, in installments and in advance or by way of reimbursement, or otherwise allocate or expend funds under this chapter as necessary to carry out this chapter, including (without regard to the provisions of section 4774(d) 1 of title 10) expenditures for construction, repairs, and capital improvements, and including necessary adjustments in payments on account of overpayments or underpayments.

The Secretary shall prepare and submit to the Congress an annual report for employment and training programs. The Secretary shall include in such report—

(1) a summary of the achievements, failures, and problems of the programs authorized in this chapter in meeting the objective of this chapter;

(2) a summary of major findings from research, evaluation, pilot projects, and experiments conducted in the previous fiscal year;

(3) recommendations for program modifications based upon analysis of such findings; and

(4) such other recommendations for legislative or administrative action as the Secretary deems appropriate.

The Secretary shall develop methods to ascertain, and shall ascertain annually, energy development and conservation employment impact data by type and scale of energy technologies used. The Secretary shall present the best available data to the Secretary of Energy, the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, and the Director of the Office of Management and Budget as part of the budgetary process and to the appropriate Committees of Congress annually.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §169, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1353.)

Section 4774(d) of title 10, referred to in subsec. (c), was redesignated as entire section 4774 by Pub. L. 93–166, title V, §509(c), Nov. 29, 1973, 87 Stat. 677, and subsequently was repealed by Pub. L. 97–214, §7(1), July 12, 1982, 96 Stat. 173.

In subsecs. (a) and (b), “section 6504 of title 31” substituted for “section 204 of the Intergovernmental Cooperation Act of 1968 [42 U.S.C. 4214]” and “section 1342 of title 31” substituted for “section 3679(b) of the Revised Statutes of the United States [31 U.S.C. 665(b)]”, respectively, on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

This section is referred to in sections 1577, 1580 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

The Secretary is authorized, in carrying out this chapter, under the same conditions applicable under section 1579(c) of this title or to the extent permitted by law other than this chapter, to accept and use the services and facilities of departments, agencies, and establishments of the United States. The Secretary is also authorized to accept and use the services and facilities of the agencies of any State or political subdivision of a State, with its consent.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §170, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1354; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §145, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “under the same conditions applicable under section 1579(c) of this title or to the extent” for “and to the extent”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, no authority to enter into contracts or financial assistance agreements under this chapter shall be effective except to such extent or in such amount as are provided in advance in appropriation Acts.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §171, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1354.)

(a)(1)(A) The President is authorized to make Presidential awards for outstanding achievement by the private sector in the job training partnership program authorized by this chapter. The President is authorized to make such awards to individuals who, and organizations which, have demonstrated outstanding achievement in planning and administering job training partnership programs or in contributing to the success of the job training partnership program.

(B) In making the awards pursuant to subparagraph (A) of this paragraph, the President shall consider the effectiveness of the program for which the award is made.

(2) The President is authorized to make Presidential awards for model programs in the job training partnership program authorized by this chapter which demonstrate effectiveness in addressing the job training needs of groups of individuals with multiple barriers to employment.

(b)(1) Each year the President is authorized to make such awards under subsection (a) of this section as the President determines will carry out the objectives of this chapter.

(2) The President shall establish such selection procedures, after consultation with the Secretary and the Governors of the States, as may be necessary.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §172, as added Pub. L. 99–496, §4, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1261.)

Another section 172 of Pub. L. 97–300 was redesignated section 173 and is classified to section 1583 of this title.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to limit the right of persons to remain eligible for assistance under title XIX of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1396 et seq.], relating to Medicaid pursuant to section 1619(b) of such Act [42 U.S.C. 1382h(b)].

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to authorize the use of funds under this chapter for the ongoing support services provided to individuals with disabilities placed in supported employment, as such term is defined in section 706(18) of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §173, formerly §172, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §714(e)(1), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3256; renumbered §173 and amended Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §103(b)(3), title VII, §702(a)(9), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1026, 1112.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title XIX of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter XIX (§1396 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of that Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §103(b)(3), substituted “individuals with disabilities” for “handicapped individuals”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §181, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1354; Pub. L. 97–404, §1(i), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026, related to transition between the Comprehensive Employment Training Act and this chapter.

Repeal effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Effective on October 13, 1982, all references in any other statute other than this chapter, and other than in section 665 of title 18, to the Comprehensive Employment and Training Act [29 U.S.C. 801 et seq.] shall be deemed to refer to the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 97–300, title I, §183, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1357.)

The Comprehensive Employment and Training Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 93–203, Dec. 28, 1973, 87 Stat. 839, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 17 (§801 et seq.) of this title, and was repealed by section 184(a)(1), of the Job Training Partnership Act, Pub. L. 97–300, title I, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1357.

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended. See note above.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 49f, 1514, 1516, 1531, 1533, 1551, 1574, 1575, 1694, 1696, 1735 of this title; title 20 section 2468; title 31 section 6703; title 42 section 11421.

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1503, 1516, 1518, 1519, 1531, 1551, 1634, 1642, 1644, 1645, 1646, 1652, 1734, 1791a, 1791g of this title.

It is the purpose of this part to establish programs to prepare adults for participation in the labor force by increasing their occupational and educational skills, resulting in improved long-term employability, increased employment and earnings, and reduced welfare dependency.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §201, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.)

A prior section 1601, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §201, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1358, related to allotment of funds under adult and youth programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1602, 1642 of this title.

Not more than $5,000,000 of the amount appropriated pursuant to section 1502(a)(1) of this title for each fiscal year and available for this part shall be allotted among Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau.

Subject to the provisions of paragraph (3), of the remainder of the amount available for this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment in each State as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in all the States;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals who reside in each State as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all the States; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged adults within each State compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged adults in all States, except that, for the allotment for any State in which there is any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the allotment shall be based on the higher of the number of adults in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged adults in such area.

No State shall receive less than one-quarter of 1 percent of the amounts available for allotment to the States under this subsection from the remainder described in paragraph (2) for each fiscal year.

No State shall be allotted less than 90 percent of its allotment percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraph (B), the allotment percentage of a State for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allotted to the State under this subsection.

For purposes of subparagraph (B), the allocation percentage of a State for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allotted to the State under section 1601 of this title, as in effect on the day before September 7, 1992.

The Governor shall, in accordance with section 1572 of this title, allocate 77 percent of the allotment of the State under subsection (a) of this section for each fiscal year among service delivery areas within the State, and shall ensure that, subject to the provisions of paragraph (3), of the amount allocated under this subsection—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment in each service delivery area as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in the State;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals who reside in each service delivery area as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all service delivery areas in the State; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged adults within each service delivery area compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged adults in the State, except that the allocation for any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title shall be based on the higher of the number of adults in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged adults in such area.

No service delivery area within any State shall be allocated an amount equal to less than 90 percent of the average of its allocation percentage for the 2 preceding fiscal years preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made. If the amounts appropriated pursuant to section 1502(a)(1) of this title for a fiscal year and available to carry out this part are not sufficient to provide an amount equal to at least 90 percent of such allocation percentage to each such area, the amounts allocated to each area shall be ratably reduced.

Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraph (A), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this subsection.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this part.

Of the remaining 23 percent of the allotment of the State under subsection (a) of this section for each fiscal year—

(A) 5 percent of such allotment of the State for each fiscal year shall be available to the Governor of the State to be used for overall administration, management, and auditing activities relating to programs under this subchapter and for activities described in sections 1531 and 1532 of this title;

(B) 5 percent of such allotment of each State for each fiscal year shall be available to provide incentive grants authorized under section 1516(b)(7) of this title, in accordance with paragraph (2);

(C) 8 percent of the allotment of each State for each fiscal year shall be available to carry out section 1533 of this title; and

(D) 5 percent of such allotment of each State for each fiscal year shall be available to carry out section 1604(d) of this title.

The Governor may use up to 33 percent of the amount allotted under paragraph (1)(B) for providing capacity building and technical assistance to service delivery areas and service providers. Such use of funds may include the development and training of service delivery area and service provider staff and the development of exemplary program activities.

Funds used under subparagraph (A)—

(i) may not be used to duplicate the activities of the Capacity Building and Information and Dissemination Network established under section 1733(b) of this title; and

(ii) shall, to the extent practicable, be used to coordinate the activities under subparagraph (A) with the activities of the Network under section 1733(b) of this title.

As used in this section:

The term “economically disadvantaged adult” means an individual who is age 22 through 72 and who has, or is a member of a family that has, received a total family income (exclusive of unemployment compensation, child support payments, and welfare payments) that, in relation to family size, was not in excess of the higher of—

(i) the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42; 1 or

(ii) 70 percent of the lower living standard income level.

The term “excess number” means—

(i) with respect to the excess number of unemployed individuals within a State—

(I) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the State; or

(II) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in areas of substantial unemployment in such State; and

(ii) with respect to the excess number of unemployed individuals within a service delivery area—

(I) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the service delivery area; or

(II) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in areas of substantial unemployment in such service delivery area.

The term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.

For the purposes of this section, the Secretary shall, as appropriate and to the extent practicable, exclude college students and members of the Armed Forces from the determination of the number of economically disadvantaged adults.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §202, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §701(c)(1), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1104.)

Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §202, title VII, §701(d), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1107, provided that, subject to the condition specified in section 701(d) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out below, this subchapter (as amended by section 201 of Pub. L. 102–367) is amended by adding at the end the following:

Of the amount appropriated under section 1502(a)(1) of this title for each fiscal year and available to carry out this part, not more than one-quarter of 1 percent shall be allotted among Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau.

After determining the amounts to be allotted under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall allot 77 percent of the remainder to the States for allocation to service delivery areas within each State. Each State shall allocate to each service delivery area within the State the amount determined by the Secretary for such service delivery area pursuant to the formula contained in subsection (b) of this section. The remaining 23 percent shall be allotted in accordance with subsection (c) of this section.

Subject to the provisions of paragraph (2), of the amounts allocated to service delivery areas for this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment within each service delivery area as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in all service delivery areas in all States;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals within each service delivery area as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all service delivery areas in all States; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged adults within each service delivery area as compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged adults in all service delivery areas in all States, except that for any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the allocation shall be based on the higher of the number of adults in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged adults in such area.

No service delivery area shall be allocated less than 90 percent of its allocation percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

No service delivery area shall be allocated more than 130 percent of its allocation percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

Notwithstanding subparagraphs (A) and (B), the total allocation for all service delivery areas within any one State shall not be less than one-quarter of 1 percent of the total allocated to all service delivery areas in all States.

*Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (B), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this subsection.*

*For purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (B), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this part.*

Of the remaining 23 percent of funds available for allotment to States under this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 5 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2), for overall administration, management, and auditing activities relating to programs under this subchapter and for activities described in sections 1531 and 1532 of this title;

(B) 5 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2), to provide incentive grants authorized under section 1516(b)(7) of this title, in accordance with paragraph (3);

(C) 8 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2) to carry out section 1533 of this title; and

(D) 5 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to carry out section 1604(d) of this title.

The allotments to each State described in paragraph (1) shall be based on the relative amount of funds allocated to all service delivery areas within such State under subsection (b) of this section as compared to the amount of funds allocated to all service delivery areas in all States under subsection (b) of this section.

The Governor may use up to 33 percent of the amount allotted under paragraph (1)(B) for providing capacity building and technical assistance to service delivery areas and service providers. Such use of funds may include the development and training of service delivery area and service provider staff and the development of exemplary program activities.

Funds used under subparagraph (A)—

*(i) may not be used to duplicate the activities of the Capacity Building and Information and Dissemination Network established under section 1733(b) of this title; and*

*(ii) shall, to the extent practicable, be used to coordinate the activities under subparagraph (A) with the activities of the Network under section 1733(b) of this title.*

As used in this section:

The term “economically disadvantaged adult” means an individual who is age 22 through 72 and who has, or is a member of a family that has, received a total family income that, in relation to family size, was not in excess of the higher of—

*(i) the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42; 2* or

*(ii) 70 percent of the lower living standard income level.*

The term “excess number” means, with respect to the excess number of unemployed individuals within a service delivery area, the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the service delivery area, or the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in areas of substantial unemployment in such service delivery area.

The term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.

For the purposes of this section, the Secretary shall, as appropriate and to the extent practicable, exclude college students and members of the Armed Forces from the determination of the number of economically disadvantaged adults.

This section is based on the text of section 202 of Pub. L. 97–300 (the Job Training Partnership Act), as set forth in section 701(c)(1) of Pub. L. 102–367. Section 701(c)(1), which directed the general amendment of section 202 of Pub. L. 97–300, was executed by adding this section. See section 701 of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

A prior section 1602, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §202, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1359; Pub. L. 99–496, §§5(a), 6, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1262; Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §713(a), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3255, related to allocation within States of funds under this subchapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

Section 701(c) and (d) of Pub. L. 102–367 provided that:

“(c)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 202 of this Act [enacting this section] shall not take effect on July 1, 1993 [Amendment by section 202 did not take effect July 1, 1993, because the appropriations for fiscal year 1993 were less than the sum referred to above.], and section 202 of the Job Training Partnership Act [this section] shall be amended to read as follows: [See text of section above.]

“(2)

“(d)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 202 of this Act [enacting this section] shall take effect. [Amendment by section 202 did not take effect because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1998 were less than the sum referred to above.]

“(2)

This section is referred to in sections 1516, 1532, 1533, 1606, 1642, 1733, 1791a of this title; title 20 section 6215.

1 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

2 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, an individual shall be eligible to participate in the program under this part only if such individual is—

(1) 22 years of age or older; and

(2) economically disadvantaged.

Not less than 65 percent of the participants in the program under this part, other than participants served under section 1604(d) of this title, in each service delivery area shall be individuals who are included in 1 or more of the following categories:

(1) Individuals who are basic skills deficient.

(2) Individuals who are school dropouts.

(3) Individuals who are recipients of cash welfare payments.

(4) Individuals who are offenders.

(5) Individuals with disabilities.

(6) Individuals who are homeless.

(7) Individuals who are in a category established under subsection (d) of this section.

Not more than 10 percent of participants in a program assisted under this part, other than participants served under section 1604(d) of this title, in each service delivery area may be individuals who are not economically disadvantaged if such individuals are age 22 or older and within 1 or more categories of individuals who face serious barriers to employment. Such categories may include the categories described in subsection (b) of this section, or categories such as displaced homemakers, veterans, alcoholics, or addicts.

A service delivery area conducting a program assisted under this part may add one category of individuals who face serious barriers to employment to the categories of eligible individuals described in subsection (b) of this section if—

(1) the service delivery area submits a request to the Governor identifying the additional category of individuals and justifying the inclusion of such category;

(2) the additional category of individuals is not solely comprised of—

(A) individuals with a poor work history; or

(B) individuals who are unemployed; and

(3) the Governor approves the request submitted under paragraph (1) and transmits a description of the approved request to the Secretary, as part of the Governor's coordination and special services plan under section 1531 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §203, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §203, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1055; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(5), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

A prior section 1603, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §203, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1360; Pub. L. 97–404, §2, Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 99–496, §7, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1263; Pub. L. 99–570, title XI, §11004(b), Oct. 27, 1986, 100 Stat. 3207–169, related to eligibility for training services for the disadvantaged, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

1996—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “, including recipients under the JOBS program” after “recipients of cash welfare payments”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1531, 1604, 1734, 1781 of this title; title 42 section 3056h.

The programs under this part shall include—

(A) an objective assessment of the skill levels and service needs of each participant, which shall include a review of basic skills, occupational skills, prior work experience, employability, interests, aptitudes (including interests and aptitudes for nontraditional jobs), and supportive service needs, except that a new assessment of a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent assessment of the participant conducted pursuant to another education or training program;

(B) development of service strategies that shall identify the employment goal (including, in appropriate circumstances, nontraditional employment), appropriate achievement objectives, and appropriate services for participants taking into account the assessments conducted pursuant to subparagraph (A), except that a new service strategy for a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent service strategy developed for the participant under another education or training program;

(C) a review of the progress of each participant in meeting the objectives of the service strategy; and

(D) each of the following services, which shall be provided either directly or through arrangement with other programs to a participant where the assessment and the service strategy indicate such services are appropriate:

(i) Basic skills training.

(ii) Occupational skills training.

(iii) Supportive services.

Each service delivery area shall ensure that each participant or applicant who meets the minimum income eligibility criteria shall be provided—

(i) information on the full array of applicable or appropriate services that are available through the service delivery area or other service providers, including those receiving funds under this chapter; and

(ii) referral to appropriate training and educational programs that have the capacity to serve the participant or applicant either on a sequential or concurrent basis.

Each service provider shall ensure that an eligible applicant who does not meet the enrollment requirements of its particular program or who cannot be served shall be referred to the service delivery area for further assessment, as necessary, and referral to appropriate programs in accordance with subparagraph (A) to meet the basic skills and training needs of the applicant.

The service delivery area shall ensure that appropriate referrals are made pursuant to clause (i), and shall maintain appropriate records of such referrals and the basis for such referrals.

Subject to the limitations contained in subsection (c) of this section, services that may be made available to each participant under this part may include—

(1) direct training services, including—

(A) basic skills training, including remedial education, literacy training, and English-as-a-second-language instruction;

(B) institutional skills training;

(C) on-the-job training;

(D) assessment of the skill levels and service needs of participants;

(E) counseling, such as job counseling and career counseling;

(F) case management services;

(G) education-to-work transition activities;

(H) programs that combine workplace training with related instruction;

(I) work experience;

(J) programs of advanced career training that provide a formal combination of on-the-job and institutional training and internship assignments that prepare individuals for career employment;

(K) training programs operated by the private sector, including programs operated by labor organizations or by consortia of private sector employers utilizing private sector facilities, equipment, and personnel to train workers in occupations for which demand exceeds supply;

(L) skill upgrading and retraining;

(M) bilingual training;

(N) entrepreneurial training;

(O) vocational exploration;

(P) training programs to develop work habits to help individuals obtain and retain employment;

(Q) attainment of certificates of high school equivalency;

(R) preapprenticeship programs;

(S) on-site, industry-specific training programs supportive of industrial and economic development;

(T) customized training conducted with a commitment by an employer or group of employers to employ an individual upon successful completion of the training; and

(U) use of advanced learning technology for education, job preparation, and skills training; and

(2) training-related and supportive services, including—

(A) job search assistance;

(B) outreach to make individuals aware of, and encourage the use of, employment and training services, including efforts to expand awareness of training and placement opportunities for limited-English proficient individuals and individuals with disabilities;

(C) outreach, to develop awareness of, and encourage participation in, education, training services, and work experience programs to assist women in obtaining nontraditional employment, and to facilitate the retention of women in nontraditional employment, including services at the site of training or employment;

(D) specialized surveys not available through other labor market information sources;

(E) dissemination of information on program activities to employers;

(F) development of job openings;

(G) programs coordinated with other Federal employment-related activities;

(H) supportive services, as defined in section 1503(24) of this title, necessary to enable individuals to participate in the program;

(I) needs-based payments and financial assistance;

(J) followup services with participants placed in unsubsidized employment; and

(K) services to obtain job placements for individual participants.

Basic skills training provided under this part shall, in appropriate circumstances, have a workplace context and be integrated with occupational skills training.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), work experience, job search assistance, job search skills training, and job club activities provided under this part shall be accompanied by additional services designed to increase the basic education or occupational skills of a participant.

Each program assisted under this part may only provide job search assistance, job search skills training, and job club activities to a participant without the additional services described in subparagraph (A) if—

(i) the assessment and service strategy of a participant indicate that the additional services are not appropriate; and

(ii) the activities are not available to the participant through the employment service or other public agencies.

Needs-based payments and financial assistance provided under this part shall be limited to payments necessary for participation in the program assisted under this part in accordance with a locally developed formula or procedure.

Counseling and supportive services provided under this part may be provided to a participant for a period up to 1 year after the date on which the participant completes the program.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to establish a right for a participant to bring an action to obtain services described in the assessment or service strategy developed under subsection (a)(1) of this section.

The service delivery area shall make opportunities available for individuals who have successfully participated in programs under this part to volunteer assistance to participants in the form of mentoring, tutoring, and other activities.

The Governor is authorized to provide for job training programs that are developed in conjunction with service delivery areas within the State and that are consistent with the plan for the service delivery area prepared and submitted in accordance with section 1514 of this title, and designed to ensure the training and placement of older individuals in employment opportunities with private business concerns. The Governor shall ensure that the program under this subsection provides services throughout the State to older individuals on an equitable basis, taking into account the relative share of the population of older individuals described in paragraph (6)(A) within the State, residing in each service delivery area.

In carrying out this subsection, the Governor shall, after consultation with appropriate private industry councils and chief elected officials, enter into agreements with public agencies, nonprofit private organizations (including veterans organizations), private industry councils, service delivery areas, and private business concerns.

In entering into the agreements described in subparagraph (A), the Governor shall give priority to national, State, and local agencies and organizations that have a record of demonstrated effectiveness in providing training and employment services to such older individuals.

The Governor shall give consideration to assisting programs involving training for jobs in growth industries and jobs reflecting the use of new technological skills.

In providing the services required by this subsection, the Governor shall make efforts to coordinate the delivery of such services with the delivery of services under title V of the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3056 et seq.).

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), an individual shall be eligible to participate in a job training program under this subsection only if the individual is economically disadvantaged and is an older individual.

An individual who is not economically disadvantaged as described in subparagraph (A) shall be eligible to participate in a job training program under this subsection if the individual faces serious barriers to employment, is an older individual, and meets income eligibility requirements under title V of the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3056 et seq.) subject to clause (ii).

Not more than 10 percent of all participants in a program assisted under this subsection shall be individuals who are not economically disadvantaged.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the requirements of this chapter applicable to programs conducted under this subsection shall be the same requirements applicable to the other programs conducted under this part.

The provisions of section 1514 of this title, subsections (b)(7) and (j) of section 1516 of this title, section 1519 of this title, section 1603 of this title, and subsection (a)(2) of this section shall not be applicable to programs conducted under this subsection.

With respect to the application of sections 1516(b), 1518(b), 1551(d)(3)(C), and 1605 of this title to programs conducted under this subsection, the term “service delivery area”, as used in such provisions, means the Governor.

As used in this subsection, the term “older individual” means an individual age 55 or older.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §204, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §203, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1055; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(6), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (d)(4), (5)(B)(i), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended. Title V of the Act, known as the “Older Americans Community Services Employment Act”, is classified generally to subchapter IX (§3056 et seq.) of chapter 35 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 1604, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §204, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1361; Pub. L. 101–392, §5(a)(2), Sept. 25, 1990, 104 Stat. 758; Pub. L. 102–235, §8, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1809, related to use of funds for training services for the disadvantaged, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

1996—Subsec. (a)(1)(A), (B). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “(such as the JOBS program)” after “another education or training program”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1516, 1518, 1519, 1577, 1602, 1603, 1644, 1791c of this title; title 7 section 2014; title 42 sections 3056h, 11444.

In conducting the program assisted under this part, service delivery areas shall establish appropriate linkages with other Federal programs. Such programs shall include, where feasible, programs assisted under—

(1) the Adult Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.);

(2) the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.);

(3) the Wagner-Peyser Act (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.);

(4) the portions of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] relating to work activities;

(5) the employment program established under section 6(d)(4) of the Food Stamp Act of 1977 (7 U.S.C. 2015(d)(4));

(6) the National Apprenticeship Act (29 U.S.C. 50 et seq.);

(7) the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.);

(8) title V of the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3056 et seq.);

(9) chapter 2 of title II of the Trade Act of 1974 (19 U.S.C. 2271 et seq.);

(10) the Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act (Public Law 100–77; 101 Stat. 482) [42 U.S.C. 11301 et seq.];

(11) the United States Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1437 et seq.);

(12) the National Literacy Act of 1991 (Public Law 102–73);

(13) the Head Start Act (42 U.S.C. 9831 et seq.) (for purposes of child care services); and

(14) any other provisions of this chapter.

In addition to the linkages required under subsection (a) of this section, each service delivery area receiving financial assistance under this part shall establish other appropriate linkages to enhance the provision of services under this part. Such linkages may be established with local educational agencies, local service agencies, public housing agencies, community-based organizations, business and labor organizations, volunteer groups working with disadvantaged adults, and other training, education, employment, economic development, and social service programs.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §205, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §203, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1060; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(7), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Adult Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), is title III of Pub. L. 89–750, Nov. 3, 1966, 80 Stat. 1216, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 30 (§1201 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1201 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(3), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(4), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title IV of the Act is classified generally to subchapter IV (§601 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The National Apprenticeship Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(6), is act Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, 50 Stat. 664, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4C (§50 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 50 of this title and Tables.

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (a)(7), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 357, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 16 (§701 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (a)(8), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended. Title V of the Act, known as the “Older Americans Community Services Employment Act”, is classified generally to subchapter IX (§3056 et seq.) of chapter 35 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Trade Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (a)(9), is Pub. L. 93–618, Jan. 3, 1975, 88 Stat. 1978, as amended. Chapter 2 of title II of the Act is classified generally to part 2 (§2271 et seq.) of subchapter II of chapter 12 of Title 19, Customs Duties. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 2101 of Title 19 and Tables.

The Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(10), is Pub. L. 100–77, July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 482, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 119 (§11301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 11301 of Title 42 and Tables.

The United States Housing Act of 1937, referred to in subsec. (a)(11), is act Sept. 1, 1937, ch. 896, as restated generally by Pub. L. 93–383, title II, §201(a), Aug. 22, 1974, 88 Stat. 653, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§1437 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1437 of Title 42 and Tables.

The National Literacy Act of 1991, referred to in subsec. (a)(12), is Pub. L. 102–73, July 25, 1991, 105 Stat. 333, as amended. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1991 Amendment note set out under section 1201 of Title 20, Education, and Tables.

The Head Start Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(13), is subchapter B (§§635 to 657) of chapter 8 of subtitle A of title VI of Pub. L. 97–35, Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 499, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§9831 et seq.) of chapter 105 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 9801 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 1605, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §205, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1362, related to exemplary youth programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

1996—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 104–193 added par. (4) and struck out former par. (4) which read as follows: “part F of title IV of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 681 et seq.);”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1514, 1515, 1604 of this title.

A service delivery area may transfer up to 10 percent of the amounts allocated to the service delivery area under section 1602(b) of this title to the program under part C of this subchapter if such transfer is—

(1) described in the job training plan; and

(2) approved by the Governor.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §206, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §203, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1061.)

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1518 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1734 of this title.

It is the purpose of programs assisted under this part—

(1) to enhance the basic educational skills of youth;

(2) to encourage school completion or enrollment in supplementary or alternative school programs;

(3) to provide eligible youth with exposure to the world of work; and

(4) to enhance the citizenship skills of youth.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §251, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §204, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1061.)

A prior section 1630, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §251, as added Pub. L. 99–496, §8(a)(2), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1263, stated purpose of summer youth employment and training programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

A prior section 251 of Pub. L. 97–300 was renumbered section 252 and classified to section 1631 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

From the funds appropriated under section 1502(a)(2) of this title, the Secretary shall first allocate to Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, Palau, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and entities eligible under section 1671 of this title the same percentage of funds as were available to such areas and entities for the summer youth program in the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

The remainder of funds appropriated under section 1502(a)(2) of this title shall, for each fiscal year, be allotted among States and allocated among service delivery areas in accordance with section 1642 of this title, except that no portion of such funds shall be reserved to carry out subsection (a)(1) or (c) of such section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §252, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §204, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1061.)

A prior section 1631, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §252, formerly §251, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1364; renumbered §252 and amended Pub. L. 99–496, §§5(b), 8(a)(1), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1262, 1263, related to allotment of funding for summer youth employment and training programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

A prior section 252 of Pub. L. 97–300 was renumbered section 253 and classified to section 1632 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Funds available under this part may be used for—

(1) basic and remedial education, academic enrichment 1 institutional and on-the-job training, work experience programs, youth corps programs, employment counseling, occupational training, preparation for work, outreach and enrollment activities, employability assessment, job referral and placement, job search assistance and job club activities, activities under programs described in section 1645(b) of this title, and any other employment or job training activity designed to give employment to eligible individuals or prepare the individuals for, and place the individuals in, employment;

(2) supportive services necessary to enable such individuals to participate in the program; and

(3) administrative costs, not to exceed 15 percent of the funds available under this part.

A service delivery area shall expend funds (available under this chapter or otherwise available to the service delivery area) for basic and remedial education and training as described in the job training plan under section 1514 of this title.

The education and training authorized by paragraph (1) may be provided by—

(A) the year-round program under part C of this subchapter;

(B) the Job Corps;

(C) Repealed. Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(8)(A), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174;

(D) youth corps programs;

(E) alternative or secondary schools; or

(F) other education and training programs.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the programs under this part shall include an objective assessment of the basic skills and supportive services needs of each participant, which may include a review of occupational skills, prior work experience, employability, interests, and aptitudes.

A new assessment, or a factor of such assessment, of a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent assessment of the participant conducted pursuant to another education or training program (such as a regular high school academic program).

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the programs under this part shall include a service strategy for participants, which may identify achievement objectives, appropriate employment goals, and appropriate services for participants, taking into account the assessments conducted under paragraph (1).

A new service strategy for a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent service strategy developed for the participant under another education or training program (such as a regular high school academic program).

The programs under this part shall provide, either directly or through arrangements with other programs, each of the following services to a participant where the assessment and the service strategy indicate such services are appropriate:

(A) Basic and Remedial Education.

(B) Preemployment and Work Maturity Skills Training.

Work experience provided under this part, to the extent feasible, shall include contextual learning opportunities which integrate the development of general competencies with the development of academic skills.

Classroom training provided under this part shall, to the extent feasible, include opportunities to apply knowledge and skills relating to academic subjects to the world of work.

Service delivery areas shall make followup services available for participants if the service strategy indicates such services are appropriate.

In conducting the program assisted under this part, service delivery areas shall establish linkages with the appropriate educational agencies responsible for service to participants. Such linkages shall include arrangements to ensure that there is a regular exchange of information relating to the progress, problems and needs of participants, including the results of assessments of the skill levels of participants.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §253, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §204, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1061; amended Pub. L. 103–227, title X, §1016(a)(1)–(2)(B), Mar. 31, 1994, 108 Stat. 267; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(8), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

A prior section 1632, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §253, formerly §252, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1364; renumbered §253 and amended Pub. L. 99–496, §8(a)(1), (b), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1263, related to use of funds for summer youth employment and training programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

A prior section 253 of Pub. L. 97–300 was renumbered section 254 and classified to section 1633 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.

1996—Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(8)(A), struck out subpar. (C) which read as follows: “the JOBS program;”.

Subsec. (c)(1)(B), (2)(B). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(8)(B), struck out “the JOBS program or” before “a regular high school academic program).”

1994—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–227, §1016(a)(1), inserted “academic enrichment” after “remedial education,”.

Subsec. (c)(3), (4). Pub. L. 103–227, §1016(a)(2)(A), added pars. (3) and (4).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–227, §1016(a)(2)(B), added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1633 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a comma.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), programs under this part shall be conducted during the summer months.

A service delivery area may, within the jurisdiction of any local educational agency that operates schools on a year-round, full-time basis, offer the programs under this part to participants during a vacation period treated as the equivalent of a summer vacation.

An individual shall be eligible to participate in the program assisted under this part if such individual—

(1) is age 14 through 21; and

(2)(A) is economically disadvantaged; or

(B) has been determined to meet the eligibility requirements for free meals under the National School Lunch Act (42 U.S.C. 1751 et seq.) during the most recent school year.

An eligible individual participating in a program assisted under this part may concurrently be enrolled in programs under part C of this subchapter. Appropriate adjustment to the youth performance standards (regarding attainment of competencies) under paragraphs (4)(A)(i) and (5) of section 1516(b) of this title shall be made to reflect the limited period of participation.

Youth being served under this part or part C youth programs are not required to be terminated from participation in one program in order to enroll in the other. The Secretary shall provide guidance to service delivery areas on simplified procedures for concurrent enrollment and transfers for youth from one program to the other.

Nothing in this part shall be construed to establish a right for a participant to bring an action to obtain services described in the assessment or service strategy developed under section 1632(c) of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §254, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §204, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1062; amended Pub. L. 103–227, title X, §1016(a)(2)(C), Mar. 31, 1994, 108 Stat. 268.)

The National School Lunch Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), is act June 4, 1946, ch. 281, 60 Stat. 230, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 13 (§1751 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1751 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 1633, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §254, formerly §253, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1364; renumbered §254 and amended Pub. L. 99–496, §§8(a)(1), 9, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1263, 1264, related to limitations on summer youth employment and training programs, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

A prior section 254 of Pub. L. 97–300 was renumbered section 255 and classified to section 1634 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052.

1994—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–227 added subsec. (c) relating to prohibition on private actions.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “(d)”.

Private industry councils established under subchapter I of this chapter, chief elected officials, State job training coordinating councils, and Governors shall have the same authority, duties, and responsibilities with respect to planning and administration of funds available under this part as the private industry councils, chief elected officials, State job training coordinating councils, and Governors have with respect to funds available under parts A and C of this subchapter.

Each service delivery area shall establish written program goals and objectives that shall be used for evaluating the effectiveness of programs conducted under this part. Such goals and objectives may include—

(1) improvement in school retention and completion;

(2) improvement in academic performance, including mathematics and reading comprehension;

(3) improvement in employability skills; and

(4) demonstrated coordination with other community service organizations such as local educational agencies, law enforcement agencies, and drug and alcohol abuse prevention and treatment programs.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §255, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §204, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1063.)

A prior section 1634, Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §255, formerly §254, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1364; renumbered §255 and amended Pub. L. 99–496, §8(a)(1), (c), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1263, related to private industry councils and service delivery areas, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §201, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1052, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

A service delivery area may transfer up to 20 percent of the funds provided under this part to the program under part C of this subchapter if such transfer is approved by the Governor.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §256, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §205, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1063; amended Pub. L. 103–227, title X, §1016(b), Mar. 31, 1994, 108 Stat. 268.)

1994—Pub. L. 103–227 substituted “20 percent” for “10 percent”.

Section effective September 7, 1992, see section 701(e)(1) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out in an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

For provisions authorizing a service delivery area to transfer up to 10 percent of amounts allocated for such area for summer of 1992 under this part for program year 1992 to provide services to youth pursuant to program under part A of this subchapter, to provide services to youth under such part A, see section 701(e)(2) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out in an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1518 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1503, 1516, 1518, 1519, 1551, 1606, 1631, 1632, 1633, 1634, 1635, 1734 of this title.

It is the purpose of the programs assisted under this part to improve the long-term employability of youth, enhance the educational, occupational, and citizenship skills of youth, encourage school completion or enrollment in alternative school programs, increase the employment and earnings of youth, reduce welfare dependency, and assist youth in addressing problems that impair the ability of youth to make successful transitions from school to work, apprenticeship, the military, or postsecondary education and training.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §261, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §206, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1063.)

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Not more than $5,000,000 of the amount appropriated pursuant to section 1502(a)(1) of this title for each fiscal year and available for this part shall be allotted among Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau.

Subject to the provisions of paragraph (3), of the remainder of the amount available for this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment in each State as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in all the States;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals who reside in each State as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all the States; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allotted on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged youth within each State compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged youth in all States, except that, for the allotment for any State in which there is any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the allotment shall be based on the higher of the number of youth in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged youth in such area.

No State shall receive less than one-quarter of 1 percent of the amounts available for allotment to the States under this subsection from the remainder described in paragraph (2) for each fiscal year.

No State shall be allotted less than 90 percent of its allotment percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraph (B), the allotment percentage of a State for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allotted to the State under this subsection.

For purposes of subparagraph (B), the allocation percentage of a State for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allotted to the State under section 1601 of this title, as in effect on the day before September 7, 1992.

The Governor shall, in accordance with section 1572 of this title, allocate 82 percent of the allotment of the State under subsection (a) of this section for each fiscal year among service delivery areas within the State, and shall ensure that, subject to the provisions of paragraph (3), of the amount allocated under this subsection—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment in each service delivery area as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in the State;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals who reside in each service delivery area as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all service delivery areas in the State; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged youth within each service delivery area compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged youth in the State, except that the allocation for any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title shall be based on the higher of the number of youth in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged youth in such area.

No service delivery area within any State shall be allocated an amount equal to less than 90 percent of the average of its allocation percentage for the 2 preceding fiscal years preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made. If the amounts appropriated pursuant to section 1502(a)(1) of this title for a fiscal year and available to carry out this part are not sufficient to provide an amount equal to at least 90 percent of such allocation percentage to each such area, the amounts allocated to each area shall be ratably reduced.

Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraph (A), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this subsection.

For purposes of subparagraph (A), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under part A of this subchapter.

Of the remaining 18 percent of the allotment of the State under subsection (a) of this section for each fiscal year—

(A) 5 percent of such allotment of the State for each fiscal year shall be available to the Governor of the State to be used for overall administration, management, and auditing activities relating to programs under this subchapter and for activities described in sections 1531 and 1532 of this title;

(B) 5 percent of such allotment of each State for each fiscal year shall be available to provide incentive grants authorized under section 1516(b)(7) of this title, in accordance with paragraph (2); and

(C) 8 percent of the allotment of each State for each fiscal year shall be available to carry out section 1533 of this title.

The Governor may use up to 33 percent of the amount allotted under paragraph (1)(B) for providing capacity building and technical assistance to service delivery areas and service providers. Such use of funds may include the development and training of service delivery area and service provider staff and the development of exemplary program activities.

Funds used under subparagraph (A)—

(i) may not be used to duplicate the activities of the Capacity Building and Information and Dissemination Network established under section 1733(b) of this title; and

(ii) shall, to the extent practicable, be used to coordinate the activities under subparagraph (A) with the activities of the Network under section 1733(b) of this title.

As used in this section:

The term “economically disadvantaged youth” means an individual who is age 16 through 21 and who has, or is a member of a family that has, received a total family income (exclusive of unemployment compensation, child support payments, and welfare payments) that, in relation to family size, was not in excess of the higher of—

(i) the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42; 1 or

(ii) 70 percent of the lower living standard income level.

The term “excess number” means—

(i) with respect to the excess number of unemployed individuals within a State—

(I) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the State; or

(II) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in areas of substantial unemployment in such State; and

(ii) with respect to the excess number of unemployed individuals within a service delivery area—

(I) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the service delivery area; or

(II) the number that represents the number of unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in areas of substantial unemployment in such service delivery area.

The term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.

For the purposes of this section, the Secretary shall, as appropriate and to the extent practicable, exclude college students and members of the Armed Forces from the determination of the number of economically disadvantaged youth.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §262, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §701(f)(1), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1107.)

Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §207, title VII, §701(g), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1064, 1111, provided that, subject to the condition specified in section 701(g) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out below, this subchapter (as amended by section 201 to 206 of Pub. L. 102–367) is amended by adding at the end the following:

Of the amount appropriated under section 1502(a)(1) of this title for each fiscal year and available to carry out this part, not more than one-quarter of 1 percent shall be allotted among Guam, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, the Federated States of Micronesia, the Republic of the Marshall Islands, and Palau.

After determining the amounts to be allotted under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall allot 82 percent of the remainder to the States for allocation to service delivery areas within each State. Each State shall allocate to each service delivery area within the State the amount determined by the Secretary for such service delivery area pursuant to the formula contained in subsection (b) of this section. The remaining 18 percent shall be allotted in accordance with subsection (c) of this section.

Subject to the provisions of paragraph (2), of the amounts allocated to service delivery areas for this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals residing in areas of substantial unemployment within each service delivery area as compared to the total number of such unemployed individuals in all such areas of substantial unemployment in all service delivery areas in all States;

(B) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals within each service delivery area as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all service delivery areas in all States; and

(C) 331/3 percent shall be allocated on the basis of the relative number of economically disadvantaged youth within each service delivery area as compared to the total number of economically disadvantaged youth in all service delivery areas in all States except that, for any service delivery area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title, the allocation shall be based on the higher of the number of youth in families with an income below the low-income level in such area or the number of economically disadvantaged youth in such area.

No service delivery area shall be allocated less than 90 percent of its allocation percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

No service delivery area shall be allocated more than 130 percent of its allocation percentage for the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year for which the determination is made.

Notwithstanding subparagraphs (A) and (B), the total allocation for all service delivery areas within any one State shall not be less than one-quarter of 1 percent of the total allocated to all service delivery areas in all States.

*Except as provided in clause (ii), for purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (B), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for a fiscal year shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under this subsection.*

*For purposes of subparagraphs (A) and (B), the allocation percentage of a service delivery area for fiscal year 1992 shall be the percentage of funds allocated to the service delivery area under part A of this subchapter.*

Of the remaining 18 percent of funds available for allotment to States under this part for each fiscal year—

(A) 5 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2), for overall administration, management, and auditing activities relating to programs under this subchapter and for activities described in sections 1531 and 1532 of this title;

(B) 5 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2), to provide incentive grants authorized under section 1516(b)(7) of this title, in accordance with paragraph (3); and

(C) 8 percent of the funds available for such allotment under this part shall be allotted to the States in accordance with paragraph (2) to carry out section 1533 of this title.

The allotments to each State described in paragraph (1) shall be based on the relative amount of funds allocated to all service delivery areas within such State under subsection (b) of this section as compared to the amount of funds allocated to all service delivery areas in all States under subsection (b) of this section.

The Governor may use up to 33 percent of the amount allotted under paragraph (1)(B) for providing capacity building and technical assistance to service delivery areas and service providers. Such use of funds may include the development and training of service delivery area and service provider staff and the development of exemplary program activities.

Funds used under subparagraph (A)—

*(i) may not be used to duplicate the activities of the Capacity Building and Information and Dissemination Network established under section 1733(b) of this title; and*

*(ii) shall, to the extent practicable, be used to coordinate the activities under subparagraph (A) with the activities of the Network under section 1733(b) of this title.*

As used in this section:

The term “economically disadvantaged youth” means an individual who is age 16 through 21 and who has, or is a member of a family that has, received a total family income that, in relation to family size, was not in excess of the higher of—

*(i) the official poverty line (as defined by the Office of Management and Budget, and revised annually in accordance with section 9902(2) of title 42; 2* or

*(ii) 70 percent of the lower living standard income level.*

The terms “excess number” and “State” shall have the meanings given the terms in subparagraphs (B) and (C), respectively, of section 1602(d)(1) of this title.

For the purposes of this section, the Secretary shall, as appropriate and to the extent practicable, exclude college students and members of the Armed Forces from the determination of the number of economically disadvantaged youth.

This section is based on the text of section 262 of Pub. L. 97–300 (the Job Training Partnership Act), as set forth in section 701(f)(1) of Pub. L. 102–367. See section 701 of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section 701(f) and (g) of Pub. L. 102–367 provided that:

“(f)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 207 of this Act [enacting this section] shall not take effect on July 1, 1993 [Amendment by section 207 did not take effect July 1, 1993, because the appropriations for fiscal year 1993 were less than the sum referred to above.], and title II of the Job Training Partnership Act [this subchapter] shall be amended by inserting after section 261 of such Act [29 U.S.C. 1641] the following: [See text of section above.]

“(2)

“(g)

“(1)

“(A) $25,000,000; and

“(B) the amount appropriated to carry out part A of title II of such Act, as in effect on the day before the date of enactment of this Act [Sept. 7, 1992], for fiscal year 1992,

the amendment made by section 207 of this Act [enacting this section] shall take effect. [Amendment by section 207 did not take effect because the appropriations referred to above for fiscal year 1998 were less than the sum referred to above.]

“(2)

This section is referred to in sections 1516, 1532, 1533, 1631, 1646 of this title; title 20 section 6215.

1 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

2 So in original. A closing parenthesis probably should precede the semicolon.

Except as provided in subsections (e) and (g) of this section, an individual who is in school shall be eligible to participate in the program under this part if such individual—

(1)(A) is age 16 through 21; or

(B) if provided in the job training plan, is age 14 through 21; and

(2)(A) is economically disadvantaged;

(B) is participating in a compensatory education program under title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 6301 et seq.]; or

(C) has been determined to meet the eligibility requirements for free meals under the National School Lunch Act (42 U.S.C. 1751 et seq.) during the most recent school year.

Not less than 65 percent of the in-school individuals who participate in a program under this part shall be individuals who are included in one or more of the following categories:

(1) Individuals who are basic skills deficient.

(2) Individuals with educational attainment that is 1 or more grade levels below the grade level appropriate to the age of the individuals.

(3) Individuals who are pregnant or parenting.

(4) Individuals with disabilities, including a learning disability.

(5) Individuals who are homeless or run-away youth.

(6) Individuals who are offenders.

(7) Individuals within a category established under subsection (h) of this section.

Except as provided in subsection (e) of this section, an individual who is out of school shall be eligible to participate in the program under this part if such individual is—

(1) age 16 through 21; and

(2) economically disadvantaged.

Not less than 65 percent of the out-of-school individuals who participate in a program under this part shall be individuals who are included in 1 or more of the following categories:

(1) Individuals who are basic skills deficient.

(2) Individuals who are school dropouts (subject to the conditions described in section 1644(d)(2) of this title).

(3) Individuals who are pregnant or parenting.

(4) Individuals with disabilities, including a learning disability.

(5) Individuals who are homeless or run-away youth.

(6) Individuals who are offenders.

(7) Individuals in a category established under subsection (h) of this section.

Not more than 10 percent of participants in a program assisted under this part in each service delivery area may be individuals who do not meet the requirements of subsection (a)(2) or (c)(2) of this section, if such individuals are within one or more categories of individuals who face serious barriers to employment. Such categories may include the categories described in subsections (b) and (d) of this section, or categories such as individuals with limited-English language proficiency, alcoholics, or drug addicts.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), not less than 50 percent of the participants in the program under this part in each service delivery area shall be out-of-school individuals who meet the requirements of subsection (c), (d), or (e) of this section.

In-school individuals served as a part of a schoolwide project under subsection (g) of this section shall not be counted as a part of the ratio of in-school individuals to out-of-school individuals.

In addition to the individuals described in subsection (e) of this section, an individual who does not meet the requirements of subsection (a)(2) of this section may participate in the programs assisted under this part if such individual is enrolled in a public school—

(A) that is located in a poverty area;

(B) that is served by a local educational agency that is eligible for assistance under title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 6301 et seq.];

(C) in which not less than 70 percent of the students enrolled are included in the categories described in subsection (b) of this section; and

(D) that conducts a program under a cooperative arrangement that meets the requirements of section 1645(d) of this title.

For the purposes of paragraph (1), the term “poverty area” means an urban census tract or a nonmetropolitan county with a poverty rate of 30 percent or more, as determined by the Bureau of the Census.

A service delivery area conducting a program assisted under this part may add one category of youth who face serious barriers to employment to the categories of eligible individuals specified in subsection (b) of this section and one category to the categories of eligible individuals described in subsection (d) of this section if—

(1) the service delivery area submits a request to the Governor identifying the additional category of individuals and justifying the inclusion of such category;

(2) the additional category of individuals is not solely comprised of—

(A) individuals with a poor work history; or

(B) individuals who are unemployed; and

(3) the Governor approves the request submitted under paragraph (1) and transmits a description of the approved request to the Secretary, as part of the Governor's coordination and special services plan under section 1531 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §263, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §208, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1066; amended Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(n)(2), (3), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4024.)

The Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965, referred to in subsecs. (a)(2)(B) and (g)(1)(B), is Pub. L. 89–10, Apr. 11, 1965, 79 Stat. 27, as amended generally by Pub. L. 103–382, title I, §101, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3519. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§6301 et seq.) of chapter 70 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The National School Lunch Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(C), is act June 4, 1946, ch. 281, 60 Stat. 230, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 13 (§1751 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1751 of Title 42 and Tables.

1994—Subsecs. (a)(2)(B), (g)(1)(B). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “title I” for “chapter I of title I”.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1516, 1531, 1645, 1734, 1781 of this title; title 20 section 6214.

The programs under this part shall be conducted on a year-round basis. Services shall be made available on a multiyear basis as appropriate.

The programs under this part shall include—

(A) an objective assessment of the skill levels and service needs of each participant, which assessment shall include a review of basic skills, occupational skills, prior work experience, employability, interests, aptitudes (including interests and aptitudes for nontraditional jobs), and supportive service needs, except that a new assessment of a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent assessment of the participant conducted under another education or training program;

(B) development of service strategies that shall identify the employment goal (including, in appropriate circumstances, nontraditional employment), appropriate achievement objectives, and appropriate services for participants taking into account the assessments conducted pursuant to subparagraph (A), except that a new service strategy for a participant is not required if the program determines it is appropriate to use a recent service strategy developed for the participant under another education or training program;

(C) a review of the progress of each participant in meeting the objectives of the service strategy; and

(D) each of the following services, which shall be provided either directly or through arrangement with other programs to a participant where the assessment and the service strategy indicate such services are appropriate:

(i) Basic skills training.

(ii) Occupational skills training.

(iii) Preemployment and work maturity skills training.

(iv) Work experience combined with skills training.

(v) Supportive services.

Each service delivery area shall ensure that each participant or applicant who meets the minimum income eligibility criteria shall be provided—

(i) information on the full array of applicable or appropriate services that are available through the service delivery area or other service providers, including those receiving funds under this chapter; and

(ii) referral to appropriate training and educational programs that have the capacity to serve the participant or applicant either on a sequential or concurrent basis.

Each service provider shall ensure that an eligible applicant who does not meet the enrollment requirements of its particular program or who cannot be served shall be referred to the service delivery area for further assessment, as necessary, and referral to appropriate programs in accordance with subparagraph (A) to meet the basic skills and training needs of the applicant.

The service delivery area shall ensure that appropriate referrals are made pursuant to clause (i), and shall maintain appropriate records of such referrals and the basis for such referrals.

Subject to the limitations contained in subsection (d) of this section, services which may be made available to youth with funds provided under this part may include—

(1) direct training services, including—

(A) the services described in section 1604(b)(1) of this title;

(B) tutoring and study skills training;

(C) alternative high school services within programs that meet the requirements of section 1551(*o*)(1) of this title;

(D) instruction leading to high school completion or the equivalent;

(E) mentoring;

(F) limited internships in the private sector;

(G) training or education that is combined with community and youth service opportunities in public agencies, nonprofit agencies, and other appropriate agencies, institutions, and organizations, including youth corps programs;

(H) entry employment experience programs;

(I) school-to-work transition services;

(J) school-to-postsecondary education transition services;

(K) school-to-apprenticeship transition services; and

(L) preemployment and work maturity skills training; and

(2) training-related and supportive services, including—

(A) the services described in section 1604(b)(2) of this title;

(B) drug and alcohol abuse counseling and referral;

(C) services encouraging parental, spousal, and other significant adult involvement in the program of the participant; and

(D) cash incentives and bonuses based on attendance and performance in a program.

In developing service strategies and designing services for the program under this part, the service delivery area and private industry council shall take into consideration exemplary program strategies and practices, including the strategies and practices of model programs selected for replication under section 1733(c) of this title.

In order to participate in a program assisted under this part, except for interim periods, an individual who is under the age of 18 and a school dropout shall enroll in and attend a school, course, or program described in clause (ii) or (iii) of subparagraph (B).

Each service delivery area shall make available, in accordance with this subparagraph, to each participant in the program who is under the age of 18 and is a school dropout, at least 2 options for school attendance. Such options shall be provided concurrently or sequentially with other services provided under this part to each such participant as a part of the training of such participant.

Each service delivery area shall provide, as one of the options for school attendance, an option for each such participant to enroll in and attend a high school equivalency program.

Each service delivery area shall provide, as a second option for school attendance for each such participant—

(I) an option to reenroll in and attend school;

(II) an option to enroll in and attend an alternative high school; or

(III) an option to enroll in and attend an alternative course of study approved by the local educational agency.

Preemployment and work maturity skills training authorized by this part shall be accompanied by either work experience or other additional services designed to increase the basic education or occupational skills of a participant. The additional services may be provided, concurrently or sequentially, under other education and training programs, including the Job Corps.

Work experience, job search assistance, job search skills training, and job club activities provided under this part shall be accompanied by additional services designed to increase the basic education or occupational skills of a participant. The additional services may be provided, concurrently or sequentially, under other education and training programs, including the Job Corps.

On-the-job training authorized under this part shall only be available in positions that—

(I) pay the participant a wage that equals or exceeds the average wage at placement in the service delivery area for participants under part A of this subchapter; and

(II) have career advancement potential.

On-the-job training authorized under this part shall include a formal program of structured job training that will provide participants with an orderly sequence of instruction in work maturity skills, general employment competencies, and occupationally specific skills.

In order to participate in on-the-job training authorized under this part, except for interim periods, an individual who has not attained a high school diploma or its equivalent shall concurrently enroll in and attend a school, course, or program described in clause (ii) or (iii) of paragraph (2)(B).

Needs-based payments and financial assistance provided under this part shall be limited to payments necessary for participation in the program assisted under this part in accordance with a locally developed formula or procedure.

Counseling and supportive services provided under this part may be provided to a participant for a period of up to 1 year after the date on which the participant completes the program.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to establish a right for a participant to bring an action to obtain services described in the assessment or service strategy developed under subsection (b)(1) of this section.

The service delivery area shall make opportunities available for successful individuals who have previously participated in programs under this part to volunteer assistance to participants in the form of mentoring, tutoring, and other activities.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §264, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §208, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1068; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(9), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

1996—Subsec. (b)(1)(A), (B). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(9)(A), struck out “(such as the JOBS program)” after “another education or training program”.

Subsec. (d)(3)(A), (B). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(9)(B), struck out “and the JOBS program” after “, including the Job Corps”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1503, 1518, 1551, 1577, 1643, 1791c of this title; title 7 section 2014.

In conducting the program assisted under this part, service delivery areas shall establish linkages with the appropriate educational agencies responsible for service to participants. Such linkages shall include—

(1) formal agreements with local educational agencies that will identify—

(A) the procedures for referring and serving in-school youth;

(B) the methods of assessment of in-school youth; and

(C) procedures for notifying the program when a youth drops out of the school system;

(2) arrangements to ensure that the program under this part supplements existing programs provided by local educational agencies to in-school youth;

(3) arrangements to ensure that the program under this part utilizes, to the extent possible, existing services provided by local educational agencies to out-of-school youth; and

(4) arrangements to ensure that for in-school participants there is a regular exchange of information between the program and the educational agency relating to participant progress, problems, and needs, including, in appropriate circumstances, interim assessment results.

In conducting the program assisted under this part, service delivery areas shall establish appropriate linkages with other education and training programs authorized under Federal law. Such programs shall include, where feasible, programs assisted under—

(1) part B of subchapter IV of this chapter (the Job Corps);

(2) parts A through C of title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 [20 U.S.C. 6311 et seq.];

(3) the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.);

(4) the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.);

(5) the Wagner-Peyser Act (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.);

(6) the portion of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] relating to work activities;

(7) the Food Stamp Act 1 (7 U.S.C. 2011 et seq.);

(8) the National Apprenticeship Act (29 U.S.C. 50 et seq.);

(9) the Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act (Public Law 100–77; 101 Stat. 482) [42 U.S.C. 11301 et seq.]; and

(10) any other provisions of this chapter.

In addition to the linkages required under subsections (a) and (b) of this section, service delivery areas receiving financial assistance under this part shall establish other appropriate linkages to enhance the provision of services under this part. Such linkages may be established with State and local service agencies, public housing agencies, community-based organizations, business and labor organizations, volunteer groups working with at-risk youth, parents and family members, juvenile justice systems, and other training, education, employment and social service programs, including programs conducted under part A of this subchapter.

In conducting a program serving individuals specified in section 1643(g) of this title, the service delivery area shall establish a cooperative arrangement with the appropriate local educational agency that shall, in addition to the other requirements of this section, include—

(1) a description of the ways in which the program will supplement the educational program of the school;

(2) identification of measurable goals to be achieved by the program and provision for assessing the extent to which such goals are met;

(3) a description of the ways in which the program will use resources provided under this part and resources provided under other education programs to achieve the goals identified in paragraph (2);

(4) a description of the number of individuals to be served; and

(5) assurances that the resources provided under this part shall be used to supplement and not supplant existing sources of funds.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §265, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §208, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1071; amended Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(n)(4), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4024; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(10), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 89–10, Apr. 11, 1965, 79 Stat. 27, as amended generally by Pub. L. 103–382, title I, §101, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3519. Parts A through C of title I of the Act are classified generally to parts A through C (§6311 et seq.), respectively, of subchapter I of chapter 70 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(3), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(4), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1400 et seq.) of Title 20. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(5), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(6), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title IV of the Act is classified generally to subchapter IV (§601 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Food Stamp Act of 1977, referred to in subsec. (b)(7), is Pub. L. 88–525, Aug. 31, 1964, 78 Stat. 703, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 51 (§2011 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2011 of Title 7 and Tables.

The National Apprenticeship Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(8), is act Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, 50 Stat. 664, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4C (§50 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 50 of this title and Tables.

The Stewart B. McKinney Homeless Assistance Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(9), is Pub. L. 100–77, July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 482, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 119 (§11301 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 11301 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b)(6). Pub. L. 104–193 added par. (6) and struck out former par. (6) which read as follows: “part F of title IV of the Social Security Act (JOBS) (42 U.S.C. 681 et seq.);”.

1994—Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “parts A through C” for “parts A through D of chapter 1”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1514, 1515, 1632, 1643 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “Act of 1977”.

A service delivery area may transfer up to 10 percent of the amounts allocated to the service delivery area under section 1642(b) of this title to the program under part A of this subchapter if such transfer is—

(1) described in the job training plan; and

(2) approved by the Governor.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title II, §266, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title II, §208, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1073.)

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1518 of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 49f, 1502, 1516, 1518, 1531, 1533, 1551, 1574, 1735, 1784a, 2102 of this title; title 19 section 2311; title 20 sections 2420a, 2468.

(1) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “eligible dislocated workers” means individuals who—

(A) have been terminated or laid off or who have received a notice of termination or layoff from employment, are eligible for or have exhausted their entitlement to unemployment compensation, and are unlikely to return to their previous industry or occupation;

(B) have been terminated or have received a notice of termination of employment, as a result of any permanent closure of or any substantial layoff at a plant, facility, or enterprise;

(C) are long-term unemployed and have limited opportunities for employment or reemployment in the same or a similar occupation in the area in which such individuals reside, including older individuals who may have substantial barriers to employment by reason of age; or

(D) were self-employed (including farmers and ranchers) and are unemployed as a result of general economic conditions in the community in which they reside or because of natural disasters, subject to regulations prescribed by the Secretary.

(2) For purposes of this subchapter, the term “additional dislocated worker” means a displaced homemaker as that term is defined in section 1503(29) of this title.

(3) The Secretary shall establish categories of self-employed individuals and of economic conditions and natural disasters to which paragraph (1)(D) applies.

For the purposes of this subchapter—

(1) The term “labor-management committees” means committees voluntarily established to respond to actual or prospective worker dislocation, which ordinarily include (but are not limited to) the following—

(A) shared and equal participation by workers and management;

(B) shared financial participation between the company and the State, using funds provided under this subchapter, in paying for the operating expenses of the committee;

(C) a chairperson, to oversee and guide the activities of the committee, (i) who shall be jointly selected by the labor and management members of the committee, (ii) who is not employed by or under contract with labor or management at the site, and (iii) who shall provide advice and leadership to the committee and prepare a report on its activities;

(D) the ability to respond flexibly to the needs of affected workers by devising and implementing a strategy for assessing the employment and training needs of each dislocated worker and for obtaining the services and assistance necessary to meet those needs;

(E) a formal agreement, terminable at will by the workers or the company management, and terminable for cause by the Governor; and

(F) local job identification activities by the chairman and members of the committee on behalf of the affected workers.

(2) The term “local elected official” means the chief elected executive officer of a unit of general local government in a substate area.

(3) The term “service provider” means a public agency, private nonprofit organization, or private-for-profit entity that delivers educational, training, or employment services.

(4) The term “substate area” means that geographic area in a State established pursuant to section 1661a(a) of this title.

(5) The term “substate grantee” means that agency or organization selected to administer programs pursuant to section 1661a(b) of this title.

(6) The term “State” means any of the several States, the District of Columbia, and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §301, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1524.)

A prior section 1651, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §301, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1364; Pub. L. 99–496, §10, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1264, related to allocation of funds, prior to the general revision of this subchapter by Pub. L. 100–418.

Section 6305 of Pub. L. 100–418 provided (a) that the amendments made by sections 6302 and 6304 of Pub. L. 100–418, amending this subchapter and sections 1516 and 1532 of this title, were to be effective for program years beginning on or after July 1, 1989, (b) that the Secretary of Labor and Governors were, during the program year beginning July 1, 1988, to continue to administer this subchapter in the same manner as such subchapter was administered during prior program years, except to the extent necessary to provide for an orderly transition to and implementation of the amendments made by subtitle D (§§6301–6307) of title VI of Pub. L. 100–418, enacting sections 565 and 1505 of this title, amending this subchapter and sections 1502, 1516, 1532, and 1752 of this title, and enacting provisions formerly set out below, that the Secretary and Governors could, for such purposes, use funds appropriated for fiscal year 1989 or any preceding fiscal year to carry out appropriate transition and implementation activities, (c) that a State job training coordinating council was to comply with the changes in membership required by the amendment made by section 6304(b) of Pub. L. 100–418, amending section 1532 of this title, not later than Jan. 1, 1989, (d) that the designation of substate areas and substate grantees required by the amendment to this subchapter was to be completed not later than Mar. 1, 1989, (e) that provisions of section 1653 of this title were to apply to the program year beginning July 1, 1988, except that, for such program year subsection (b)(1) of such section was to be applied by substituting “30 percent” for “20 percent”, and subsection (e) of such section was to be applied by substituting “70 percent” for “80 percent”, and (f) that the Secretary of Labor was to prescribe such regulations as may be required to implement the amendments made by subtitle D not later than Nov. 1, 1988, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(i), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4023.

Section 6306(c) of Pub. L. 100–418 directed National Commission for Employment Policy to conduct research related to the provisions of title VI, probably meaning subtitle D (§§6301–6307) of title VI of Pub. L. 100–418, and submit a report on that research to Congress not later than 18 months after Aug. 23, 1988, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §391(i), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4023.

This section is referred to in sections 1661, 1661e, 1662d, 1662d–1, 1662e of this title.

From the funds appropriated pursuant to section 1502(b) of this title for any fiscal year, the Secretary shall—

(1) allot 80 percent of such funds in accordance with the provisions of subsection (b) of this section; and

(2) reserve 20 percent for use under part B of this subchapter, subject to the reservation required by subsection (e) of this section.

(1) Subject to the provisions of paragraph (2), the Secretary shall allot the amount available in each fiscal year under subsection (a)(1) of this section on the basis of the following factors:

(A) One-third of such amount shall be allotted among the States on the basis of the relative number of unemployed individuals who reside in each State as compared to the total number of unemployed individuals in all the States.

(B) One-third of such amount shall be allotted among the States on the basis of the relative excess number of unemployed individuals who reside in each State as compared to the total excess number of unemployed individuals in all the States. For purposes of this paragraph, the term “excess number” means the number which represents unemployed individuals in excess of 4.5 percent of the civilian labor force in the State.

(C) One-third of such amount shall be allotted among the States on the basis of the relative number of individuals who have been unemployed for 15 weeks or more and who reside in each State as compared to the total number of such individuals in all the States.

(2) As soon as satisfactory data are available under section 1752(e) of this title, the Secretary shall allot amounts appropriated to carry out part A of this subchapter for any fiscal year to each State so that—

(A) 25 percent of such amount shall be allotted on the basis of each of the factors described in subparagraphs (A), (B), and (C) of paragraph (1), respectively, for a total of 75 percent of the amount allotted; and

(B) 25 percent of such amount shall be allotted among the States on the basis of the relative number of dislocated workers in such State in the most recent period for which satisfactory data are available under section 1752(e) of this title and, when available, under section 1752(f) of this title.

(1) The Governor may reserve not more than 40 percent of the amount allotted to the State under subsection (a)(1) of this section for—

(A) State administration, technical assistance, and coordination of the programs authorized under this subchapter;

(B) statewide, regional, or industrywide projects;

(C) rapid response activities as described in section 1661c(b) of this title;

(D) establishment of coordination between the unemployment compensation system and the worker adjustment program system; and

(E) discretionary allocation for basic readjustment and retraining services to provide additional assistance to areas that experience substantial increases in the number of dislocated workers, to be expended in accordance with the substate plan or modification thereof.

(2) In addition, the Governor may reserve not more than 10 percent of the amount allotted to the State under subsection (a)(1) of this section for allocation among substate grantees. The amount so reserved shall be allocated on the basis of need and distributed to such grantees not later than 9 months after the beginning of the program year for which the allotment was made.

The Governor shall allocate the remainder of the amount allotted to the State under this part to substate areas for services authorized in this part, based on an allocation formula prescribed by the Governor. Such formula may be amended by the Governor not more than once for each program year. Such formula shall utilize the most appropriate information available to the Governor to distribute amounts to address the State's worker readjustment assistance needs. Such information shall include (but is not limited to)—

(1) insured unemployment data;

(2) unemployment concentrations;

(3) plant closing and mass layoff data;

(4) declining industries data;

(5) farmer-rancher economic hardship data; and

(6) long-term unemployment data.

Not more than 0.3 percent of the amounts appropriated pursuant to section 1502(b) of this title and available under subsection (a)(2) of this section for any fiscal year shall be allocated among the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands and the other territories and possessions of the United States.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §302, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1525; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §102(b), title VII, §702(a)(11), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1024, 1112.)

A prior section 1652, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §302, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1365; Pub. L. 99–496, §11, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1264, related to identification of dislocated workers, prior to the general revision of this subchapter by Pub. L. 100–418.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(b), substituted “1502(b)” for “1502(c)” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(11), substituted “part A of this subchapter” for “part B of this subchapter and this part”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §102(b), substituted “1502(b)” for “1502(c)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1653, 1661, 1661c, 1661f, 1662a, 1662b, 1662c of this title.

For program years beginning July 1, 1989, and thereafter, the Secretary shall, in accordance with the requirements of this section, reallot to eligible States the funds allotted to States from funds appropriated for such program year that are available for reallotment.

The amount available for reallotment is equal to—

(1) the amount by which the unexpended balance of the State allotment at the end of the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this section is made exceeds 20 percent of such allotment for that prior program year; plus

(2) the unexpended balance of the State allotment from any program year prior to the program year in which there is such excess.

(1) The Secretary shall determine the amount that would be allotted to each eligible State by using the factors described in section 1652(b) of this title to allocate among eligible States the amount available pursuant to subsection (b) of this section.

(2) The Secretary shall allot to each eligible high unemployment State the amount determined for that State under the procedure in paragraph (1) of this subsection.

(3) The Secretary shall, by using the factors described in section 1652(b) of this title, allot to eligible States the amount available that remains after the allotment required by paragraph (2) of this subsection.

The Governor of each State shall prescribe uniform procedures for the expenditure of funds by substate grantees in order to avoid the requirement that funds be made available for reallotment under subsection (b) of this section. The Governor shall further prescribe equitable procedures for making funds available from the State and substate grantees in the event that a State is required to make funds available for reallotment under such subsection.

(1) For the purpose of this section, an eligible State means a State which has expended at least 80 percent of its allotment for the program year prior to the program year for which the determination under this section is made.

(2) For the purpose of this section, an eligible high unemployment State means a State—

(A) which meets the requirement in subsection (c)(1) of this section, and

(B) which is among the States which has an unemployment rate greater than the national average unemployment for the most recent 12 months for which satisfactory data are available.

(3) For purposes of this section, funds awarded from discretionary funds of the Secretary shall not be included in calculating any of the reallotments described in this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §303, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1527.)

Prior sections 1653 to 1658 were omitted in the general revision of this subchapter by Pub. L. 100–418.

Section 1653, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §303, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1366, authorized activities under provisions of former subchapter. For applicability to program year beginning July 1, 1988, see section 6305(e) of Pub. L. 100–418, set out as an Effective Date; Transition Provisions note under section 1651 of this title.

Section 1654, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §304, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1366, related to matching requirements for funds.

Section 1655, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §305, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1367, related to program review.

Section 1656, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §306, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1367, related to consultation with labor organizations.

Section 1657, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §307, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1367, related to limitations on availability of funds.

Section 1658, Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §308, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1367; Pub. L. 97–404, §3, Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026, related to State plans and coordination with other programs.

This section is referred to in sections 1661d, 1661f of this title; title 19 section 2296.

This part is referred to in section 1662b of this title.

In order to receive an allotment of funds under section 1652(b) of this title, the Governor of a State shall submit to the Secretary, on a biennial basis, a State plan describing in detail the programs and activities that will be assisted with funds provided under this subchapter. The State plan shall be submitted on or before the first day of May immediately preceding the program year for which funds are first to be made available under this subchapter. Such plan shall include incentives to provide training of greater duration for those who require it, consistent with section 1516(c) of this title.

Each State plan shall contain provisions demonstrating to the satisfaction of the Secretary that the State will comply with the requirements of this subchapter and that—

(1) services under this subchapter—

(A) will, except as provided in paragraph (4), only be provided to eligible dislocated workers;

(B) will not be denied to an eligible dislocated worker displaced by a permanent closure or substantial layoff within the State, regardless of the State of residence of such worker; and

(C) may be provided to other eligible dislocated workers regardless of the State of residence of such worker;

(2) the State will designate or create an identifiable State dislocated worker unit or office with the capability to respond rapidly, on site, to permanent closures and substantial layoffs throughout the State in order to assess the need for, and initially to provide for, appropriate basic readjustment services;

(3) the State unit will—

(A) make appropriate retraining and basic readjustment services available to eligible dislocated workers through the use of rapid response teams, substate grantees, and other appropriate organizations;

(B) work with employers and labor organizations in promoting labor-management cooperation to achieve the goals of this subchapter;

(C) operate a monitoring, reporting, and management system which provides an adequate information base for effective program management, review, and evaluation; and

(D) provide technical assistance and advice to substate grantees, including immediate notification to substate grantees of current or projected permanent closures or substantial layoffs in the substate area of such grantee to continue and expand the services initiated by the rapid response teams;

(4) the State will provide to additional dislocated workers (as defined in section 1651(a)(2) of this title) the services available under this subchapter to eligible dislocated workers only if the Governor of such State determines that such services may be provided to additional dislocated workers without adversely affecting the delivery of such services to eligible dislocated workers;

(5) the State unit will exchange information and coordinate programs with—

(A) the appropriate economic development agency, for the purpose of developing strategies to avert plant closings or mass layoffs and to accelerate the reemployment of affected individuals;

(B) State education, training, and social services programs; and

(C) all other programs available to assist dislocated workers (including the Job Service and the unemployment insurance system);

(6) the State unit will disseminate throughout the State information on the availability of services and activities under this subchapter;

(7) any program conducted with funds made available under this subchapter which will provide services to a substantial number of members of a labor organization will be established only after full consultation with such labor organization;

(8) the State will not prescribe any standard for the operation of programs under this part that is inconsistent with section 1516(c) of this title;

(9) the State job training coordinating council has reviewed and commented in writing on the plan;

(10) the delivery of services with funds made available under this subchapter will be integrated or coordinated with services or payments made available under chapter 2 of title II of the Trade Act of 1974 [19 U.S.C. 2271 et seq.] and provided by any State or local agencies designated under section 239 of the Trade Act of 1974 [19 U.S.C. 2311];

(11) the State unit will provide the Secretary with a cost breakdown of all funds made available under this subchapter used by such unit for administrative expenditures; and

(12) the State will not transfer the responsibility for the rapid response assistance functions of the State unit under section 1661c(b) of this title to another entity, but the State may contract with another entity to perform rapid response assistance services.

The Secretary shall review any plan submitted under subsection (a) of this section, and any comments thereon submitted by the State job training coordinating council pursuant to subsection (b)(9) of this section, and shall notify a State as to any deficiencies in such plan within 30 days after submission. Unless a State has been so notified, the Secretary shall approve the plan within 45 days after submission. The Secretary shall not finally disapprove the plan of any State except after notice and opportunity for a hearing.

Any plan submitted under subsection (a) of this section may be modified to describe changes in or additions to the programs and activities set forth in the plan, except that no such modification shall be effective unless reviewed and approved in accordance with subsection (c) of this section.

(1) Whenever the Secretary receives a complaint or a report from an aggrieved party or a public official that a State is not complying with the provisions of the State plan required by this section, the Secretary shall investigate such report or complaint.

(2)(A) Whenever the Secretary determines that there has been such a failure to comply and that other remedies under this chapter are not available or are not adequate to achieve compliance, the Secretary may withhold an amount not to exceed 10 percent of the allotment of the State for the fiscal year in which the determination is made for each such violation.

(B) No determination may be made under this paragraph until the State affected is afforded adequate notice and opportunity for a hearing.

The provisions of sections 1512(h) and 1515(d) of this title, relating to cases in which a service delivery area is a State, shall apply to this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §311, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1527; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §115(b), title VII, §702(a)(12), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1034, 1112; Pub. L. 102–484, div. D, title XLIV, §4467(a), Oct. 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 2750.)

The Trade Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (b)(10), is Pub. L. 93–618, Jan. 3, 1975, 88 Stat. 1978, as amended. Chapter 2 of title II of the Trade Act of 1974 is classified generally to part 2 (§2271 et seq.) of subchapter II of chapter 12 of Title 19, Customs Duties. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 2101 of Title 19 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, §115(b), substituted “1516(c)” for “1516(g)”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(D). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(a)(1), inserted before semicolon at end “, including immediate notification to substate grantees of current or projected permanent closures or substantial layoffs in the substate area of such grantee to continue and expand the services initiated by the rapid response teams”.

Subsec. (b)(8). Pub. L. 102–367, §115(b), substituted “1516(c)” for “1516(g)”.

Subsec. (b)(11), (12). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(a)(2)–(4), added pars. (11) and (12).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(12), substituted “sections” for “section”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, with provisions relating to issuance of revised performance standards under amendments by section 115 of Pub. L. 102–367, see section 701(a) and (b) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1661a, 1661b, 1661c, 1661f, 1662, 1662d–1 of this title; title 5 section 3502.

(1) The Governor of each State shall, after receiving any recommendations from the State job training coordinating council, designate substate areas for the State.

(2) Each service delivery area within a State shall be included within a substate area and no service delivery area shall be divided among two or more substate areas.

(3) In making designations of substate areas, the Governor shall consider—

(A) the availability of services throughout the State;

(B) the capability to coordinate the delivery of services with other human services and economic development programs; and

(C) the geographic boundaries of labor market areas within the State.

(4) Subject to paragraphs (2) and (3), the Governor—

(A) shall designate as a substate area any single service delivery area that has a population of 200,000 or more;

(B) shall designate as a substate area any two or more contiguous service delivery areas—

(i) that in the aggregate have a population of 200,000 or more; and

(ii) that request such designation; and

(C) shall designate as a substate area any concentrated employment program grantee for a rural area described in section 1511(a)(4)(A)(iii) of this title.

(5) The Governor may deny a request for designation under paragraph (4)(B) if the Governor determines that such designation would not be consistent with the effective delivery of services to eligible dislocated workers in various labor market areas (including urban and rural areas) within the State, or would not otherwise be appropriate to carry out the purposes of this subchapter.

(6) The designations made under this section may not be revised more than once each two years, in accordance with the requirements of this section.

A substate grantee shall be designated, on a biennial basis, for each substate area. Such substate grantee shall be designated in accordance with an agreement among the Governor, the local elected official or officials of such area, and the private industry council or councils of such area. Whenever a substate area is represented by more than one such official or council, the respective officials and councils shall each designate representatives, in accordance with procedures established by the Governor (after consultation with the State job training coordinating council), to negotiate such agreement. In the event agreement cannot be reached on the selection of a substate grantee, the Governor shall select the substate grantee.

Entities eligible for designation as substate grantees include—

(1) private industry councils in the substate area;

(2) service delivery area grant recipients or administrative entities;

(3) private nonprofit organizations;

(4) units of general local government in the substate area, or agencies thereof;

(5) local offices of State agencies; and

(6) other public agencies, such as community colleges and area vocational schools.

The substate grantee shall be responsible for providing, within such substate area, services described in section 1661c(c), (d), and (e) of this title pursuant to an agreement with the Governor and in accordance with the State plan under section 1661 of this title and the substate plan under section 1661b of this title. The substate grantee may provide such services directly or through contract, grant, or agreement with service providers.

The requirements of parts C and D of subchapter I of this chapter that apply to an administrative entity or a recipient of financial assistance under this chapter shall also apply to substate grantees under this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §312, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1529.)

This section is referred to in sections 1651, 1661b, 1661f, 1662e of this title.

No amounts appropriated for any fiscal year may be provided to a substate grantee unless the Governor (after considering the recommendations of the State job training coordinating council) has approved a substate plan, or modification thereof, submitted by the substate grantee describing the manner in which activities will be conducted within the substate area. Prior to the submission to the Governor, the plan shall be submitted for review and comment to the other parties to the agreement described in section 1661a(b) of this title.

The substate plan shall contain a statement of—

(1) the means for delivering services described in section 1661c of this title to eligible dislocated workers;

(2) the means to be used to identify, select, and verify the eligibility of program participants;

(3) the means for implementing the requirements of section 1661c(f) of this title;

(4) the means for involving labor organizations in the development and implementation of services;

(5) the performance goals to be achieved consistent with the performance goals contained in the State plan pursuant to section 1661(b)(8) of this title;

(6) procedures, consistent with section 1517 of this title, for selecting service providers which take into account past performance in job training or related activities, fiscal accountability, and ability to meet performance standards;

(7) a description of the methods by which the substate grantee will respond expeditiously to worker dislocation where the rapid response assistance required by section 1661c(b) of this title is inappropriate, including worker dislocation in sparsely populated areas, which methods may include (but are not limited to)—

(A) development and delivery of widespread outreach mechanisms;

(B) provision of financial evaluation and counseling (where appropriate) to assist in determining eligibility for services and the type of services needed;

(C) initial assessment and referral for further basic adjustment and training services; and

(D) establishment of regional centers for the purpose of providing such outreach, assessment, and early readjustment assistance;

(8) a description of the methods by which the other parties to the agreement described in section 1661a(b) of this title may be involved in activities of the substate grantee;

(9) a description of training services to be provided, including—

(A) procedures to assess participants’ current education skill levels and occupational abilities;

(B) procedures to assess participants’ needs, including educational, training, employment, and social services;

(C) methods for allocating resources to provide the services recommended by rapid response teams for eligible dislocated workers within the substate area; and

(D) a description of services and activities to be provided in the substate area;

(10) the means whereby coordination with other appropriate programs, services, and systems will be effected, particularly where such coordination is intended to provide access to the services of such other systems for program participants at no cost to the worker readjustment program; and

(11) a detailed budget, as required by the State.

The Governor shall approve or disapprove the plan of a substate grantee in the manner required by section 1515(b)(1), (2), and (3) of this title. If a substate grantee fails to submit a plan, or submits a plan that is not approved by the Governor in accordance with such section, the Governor may direct the expenditure of funds allocated to the substate area until such time as a plan is submitted and approved or a new substate grantee is designated under section 1661a of this title.

If a substate grantee fails to expend funds allocated to it in accordance with its plan, the Governor may, subject to appropriate notice and opportunity for comment in the manner required by section 1515(b)(1), (2), and (3) of this title, direct the expenditure of funds in accordance with the substate plan until—

(1) the substate grantee corrects the failure,

(2) the substate grantee submits an acceptable modification to its plan pursuant to subsection (a) of this section, or

(3) a new substate grantee is designated under section 1661a of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §313, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1531.)

This section is referred to in sections 1661a, 1661c, 1661f of this title.

Funds allotted under section 1652 of this title may be used—

(1) to provide rapid response assistance in accordance with subsection (b) of this section;

(2) to deliver, coordinate, and integrate basic readjustment services and support services in accordance with subsection (c) of this section;

(3) to provide retraining services in accordance with subsection (d) of this section;

(4) to provide needs-related payments in accordance with subsection (e) of this section; and

(5) to provide for coordination with the unemployment compensation system in accordance with subsection (f) of this section.

(1) The dislocated worker unit required by section 1661(b)(2) of this title shall include specialists who may use funds available under this subchapter—

(A) to establish on-site contact with employer and employee representatives within a short period of time (preferably 48 hours or less) after becoming aware of a current or projected permanent closure or substantial layoff in order to—

(i) provide information on and facilitate access to available public programs and services; and

(ii) provide emergency assistance adapted to the particular closure or layoff;

(B) to promote the formation of labor-management committees, by providing—

(i) immediate assistance in the establishment of the labor-management committee, including providing immediate financial assistance to cover the start-up costs of the committee;

(ii) a list of individuals from which the chairperson of the committee may be selected;

(iii) technical advice as well as information on sources of assistance, and liaison with other public and private services and programs; and

(iv) assistance in the selection of worker representatives in the event no union is present;

(C) to collect information related to—

(i) economic dislocation (including potential closings or layoffs); and

(ii) all available resources within the State for displaced workers,

which information shall be made available on a regular basis to the Governor and the State job training coordinating council to assist in providing an adequate information base for effective program management, review, and evaluation;

(D) to provide or obtain appropriate financial and technical advice and liaison with economic development agencies and other organizations to assist in efforts to avert worker dislocations;

(E) to disseminate information throughout the State on the availability of services and activities carried out by the dislocated worker unit or office; and

(F) to assist the local community in developing its own coordinated response and in obtaining access to State economic development assistance.

(2) In a situation involving an impending permanent closure or substantial layoff, a State may provide funds, where other public or private resources are not expeditiously available, for a preliminary assessment of the advisability of conducting a comprehensive study exploring the feasibility of having a company or group, including the workers, purchase the plant and continue it in operation.

(3) The Secretary shall oversee the administration by each State of the rapid response assistance services provided in such State and the effectiveness, efficiency, and timeliness of the delivery of such services. If the Secretary determines that such services are not being performed adequately, the Secretary shall implement appropriate corrective action, including, where necessary, the selection of a new rapid response assistance service provider.

(4) For purposes of rapid response assistance provided by a State dislocated worker unit, the term “substantial layoff” means a layoff of 50 or more individuals.

Funds allotted under section 1652 of this title may be used to provide basic readjustment services to eligible dislocated workers. Subject to limitations set forth in subsection (e) of this section and section 1661d(a) of this title, the services may include (but are not limited to)—

(1) development of individual readjustment plans for participants in programs under this subchapter;

(2) outreach and intake;

(3) early readjustment assistance;

(4) job or career counseling;

(5) testing;

(6) orientation;

(7) assessment, including evaluation of educational attainment and participant interests and aptitudes;

(8) determination of occupational skills;

(9) provision of future world-of-work and occupational information;

(10) job placement assistance;

(11) labor market information;

(12) job clubs;

(13) job search;

(14) job development;

(15) supportive services, including child care, commuting assistance, and financial and personal counseling which shall terminate not later than the 90th day after the participant has completed other services under this part, except that counseling necessary to assist participants to retain employment shall terminate not later than 6 months following the completion of training;

(16) prelayoff assistance;

(17) relocation assistance; and

(18) programs conducted in cooperation with employers or labor organizations to provide early intervention in the event of closures of plants or facilities.

(1) Funds allotted under section 1652 of this title may be used to provide training services under this part to eligible dislocated workers. Such services may include (but are not limited to)—

(A) classroom training;

(B) occupational skill training;

(C) on-the-job training;

(D) out-of-area job search;

(E) relocation;

(F) basic and remedial education;

(G) literacy and English for non-English speakers training;

(H) entrepreneurial training; and

(I) other appropriate training activities directly related to appropriate employment opportunities in the substate area.

(2) No funds under this part may be expended to provide wages for public service employment.

(1) Funds allocated to a substate grantee under section 1652(d) of this title may be used pursuant to a substate plan under section 1661b of this title to provide needs-related payments to an eligible dislocated worker who is unemployed and does not qualify or has ceased to qualify for unemployment compensation, in order to enable such worker to participate in training or education programs under this subchapter. To be eligible for such payments, an eligible dislocated worker who has ceased to qualify for unemployment compensation must have been enrolled in training by the end of the 13th week of the worker's initial unemployment compensation benefit period, or, if later, the end of the 8th week after an employee is informed that a short-term layoff will in fact exceed 6 months.

(2) The level of needs-related payments shall be made available at a level not greater than the higher of—

(A) the applicable level of unemployment compensation; or

(B) the poverty level determined in accordance with criteria established by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget.

(1) Funds allocated to a State under section 1652 of this title may be used for coordination of worker readjustment programs and the unemployment compensation system, consistent with the limitation on administrative expenses in section 1661d of this title. Each State shall be responsible for coordinating the unemployment compensation system and worker readjustment programs within such State.

(2) An eligible dislocated worker participating in training (except for on-the-job training) under this subchapter shall be deemed to be in training with the approval of the State agency for purposes of section 3304(a)(8) of title 26.

(1) Funds allotted under section 1652 of this title may be used to provide additional funds under an applicable program if—

(A) such program otherwise meets the requirements of this chapter and the requirements of the applicable program;

(B) such program serves the same individuals that are served under this subchapter;

(C) such program provides services in a coordinated manner with services provided under this subchapter; and

(D) such funds would be used to supplement, and not supplant, funds provided from non-Federal sources.

(2) For purposes of this subsection, the term “applicable program” means any program under any of the following provisions of law:

(A) The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.].

(B) The Wagner-Peyser Act [29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.].

(1) The term “eligible dislocated workers” includes individuals who have not received specific notice of termination or lay off and work at a facility at which the employer has made a public announcement that such facility will close (except those individuals likely to remain employed with the same employer or likely to retire instead of seeking new employment)—

(A) with respect to basic readjustment services provided under paragraphs (1) through (14), (16), and (18) of subsection (c) of this section; and

(B) with respect to services provided under this section beginning 180 days before the date on which the facility is scheduled to close.

(2) Services described in paragraph (1)(A) and provided to the individuals described in paragraph (1) shall, to the extent practicable, be funded under section 1652(c)(1) of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §314, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1532; amended Pub. L. 101–392, §5(a)(3), Sept. 25, 1990, 104 Stat. 759; Pub. L. 102–367, title III, §301, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1073; Pub. L. 102–484, div. D, title XLIV, §4467(b)–(d), Oct. 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 2750.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(2)(A), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (g)(2)(B), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (b)(3), (4). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(b), (c), added pars. (3) and (4).

Subsec. (e)(1). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(d)(1), inserted “is unemployed and” before “does not qualify”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–367 designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 102–484, §4467(d)(2), added subsec. (h).

1990—Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 101–392 added subsec. (g).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–392 effective July 1, 1991, see section 702(a) of Pub. L. 101–392, set out as a note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 1516, 1652, 1661, 1661a, 1661b, 1661d, 1661e, 1662b, 1662d, 1662d–1, 1662e of this title.

(1) Of the funds allocated to a substate grantee under this part for any program year, not less than 50 percent shall be expended for retraining services specified under section 1661c(d) of this title.

(2) A substate grantee may apply to the Governor for a waiver of the requirement in paragraph (1). Such waiver may not permit less than 30 percent of the funds to be spent for such retraining services. The waiver may be granted in whole or in part if the substate grantee demonstrates that the worker readjustment program in the area will be consistent with the principle that dislocated workers be prepared for occupations or industries with long-term potential. The Governor shall prescribe criteria for the demonstration required by the previous sentence.

(3) An application for such a waiver shall be submitted at such time and in such form as the Governor may prescribe. The Governor shall provide an opportunity for public comment on the application.

Of the funds allocated to a substate grantee or to the Governor under this part for any program year, not more than 25 percent may be expended to provide needs-related payments and other supportive services.

Of the funds allocated to a substate grantee or to the Governor under this part for any program year, not more than 15 percent may be expended to cover the administrative cost of programs. For purposes of this subsection, administrative cost does not include the cost of activities under section 1661c(b) of this title.

Substate grantees within a State may combine funds under this subchapter for the provision of services to eligible dislocated workers from 2 or more substate areas.

As used in this section, the term “allocated”,1 means allocated for a program year, as adjusted for reallocations between substate areas, and for reallotments in accordance with section 1653 of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §315, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1535; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title III, §302, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1073.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–367, §302(a), amended par. (1) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (1) read as follows: “Not less than 50 percent of the funds expended under this subchapter by any substate grantee shall be expended for retraining services specified under section 1661c(d) of this title.”

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 102–367, §302(b), amended subsec. (b) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (b) read as follows: “Not more than 25 percent of the funds expended under this subchapter by any substate grantee or by the Governor may be used to provide needs-related payments and other supportive services.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §302(c), amended first sentence generally. Prior to amendment, first sentence read as follows: “Not more than 15 percent of the funds expended under this subchapter by any substate grantee or by the Governor may be expended to cover the administrative cost of programs under this subchapter.”

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–367, §302(d), added subsec. (d).

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §302(e), added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1518, 1661c of this title.

1 So in original. The comma probably should not appear.

A substate grantee may provide retraining services described in section 1661c(d) of this title to an eligible dislocated worker—

(1) by beginning such services promptly upon the worker's application for the program under this subchapter;

(2) by deferring the beginning of such services and providing the worker with a certificate of continuing eligibility in accordance with subsection (b)(1) and (2) of this section; or

(3) by permitting the worker to obtain such services from a service provider using such certificate in accordance with subsection (b)(3) of this section.

(1) A substate grantee may issue to any eligible dislocated worker who has applied for the program authorized in this part a certificate of continuing eligibility. Such a certificate of continuing eligibility may be effective for periods not to exceed 104 weeks. No such certificate shall include any reference to any specific amount of funds. Any such certificate shall state that it is subject to the availability of funds at the time that any such training services are to be provided. Acceptance of such a certificate shall not be deemed to be enrollment in training.

(2) Any individual to whom a certificate of continuing eligibility has been issued under paragraph (1) of this subsection shall remain eligible for the program authorized under this part for the period specified in the certificate, notwithstanding section 1651(a) of this title, and may use the certificate in order to receive the retraining services, subject to the limitations contained in the certificate.

(3) A substate grantee may provide training services through systems that permit eligible dislocated workers to use certificates of continuing eligibility to seek out and arrange their own retraining with service providers approved by that substate grantee. Retraining provided pursuant to the certificate shall be conducted under a grant, contract, or other arrangement between the substate grantee and the service provider.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §316, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1535.)

For purposes of this subchapter, the State job training coordinating council shall—

(1) provide advice to the Governor regarding the use of funds under this subchapter, including advice on—

(A) the designation of substate areas and substate grantees, and the procedures for the selection of representatives within such areas under section 1661a of this title; and

(B) the methods for allocation and reallocation of funds, including the method for distribution of funds reserved under section 1652(c)(2) of this title and funds subject to reallocation under section 1653(d) of this title;

(2) submit comments to the Governor and the Secretary on the basis of review of the State and substate programs under this subchapter;

(3) review, and submit written comments on, the State plan (and any modification thereof) before its submission under section 1661 of this title;

(4) review, and submit written comments on, each substate plan submitted to the Governor under section 1661b of this title; and

(5) provide advice to the Governor regarding performance standards.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §317, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1536.)

This part is referred to in section 1652 of this title.

The Secretary shall promulgate standards for the conduct and evaluation of programs under this subchapter.

In the event that any State fails to submit a plan that is approved under section 1661 of this title, the Secretary shall use the amount that would be allotted to that State to provide for the delivery in that State of the programs, activities, and services authorized by this subchapter until the State plan is submitted and approved under that section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §321, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1536.)

The Secretary shall, with respect to programs required by this subchapter—

(1) distribute funds to States in accordance with the requirements of section 1652 of this title;

(2) provide funds to exemplary and demonstration programs on plant closings and worker dislocation;

(3) otherwise allocate discretionary funds to projects serving workers affected by multi-State or industry-wide dislocations and to areas of special need in a manner that efficiently targets resources to areas of most need, encourages a rapid response to economic dislocations, and promotes the effective use of funds;

(4) monitor performance and expenditures and annually certify compliance with standards prescribed by the Secretary under section 1516(c) of this title;

(5) conduct research and serve as a national clearinghouse for gathering and disseminating information on plant closings and worker dislocation; and

(6) provide technical assistance and staff training services to States, communities, businesses, and unions, as appropriate.

The Secretary shall designate or create an identifiable dislocated workers unit or office to coordinate the functions of the Secretary under this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §322, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1536; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §115(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1034.)

1992—Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “1516(c)” for “1516(g)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, with provisions relating to issuance of revised performance standards under amendments by section 115 of Pub. L. 102–367, see section 701(a) and (b) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amounts reserved for this part under section 1652(a)(2) of this title may be used to provide services of the type described in section 1661c of this title in the following circumstances:

(1) mass layoffs, including mass layoffs caused by natural disasters or Federal actions (such as relocations of Federal facilities) when the workers are not expected to return to their previous occupations;

(2) industrywide projects;

(3) multistate projects;

(4) special projects carried out through agreements with Indian tribal entities;

(5) special projects to address national or regional concerns;

(6) demonstration projects, including the projects described in section 1662c of this title;

(7) to provide additional financial assistance to programs and activities provided by States and substate grantees under part A of this subchapter; and

(8) to provide additional assistance under proposals for financial assistance that are submitted to the Secretary and approved by the Secretary after consultation with the Governor of the State in which the project is to operate.

Amounts reserved for this part under section 1652(a)(2) of this title may also be used to provide services of the type described in section 1661c of this title whenever the Secretary (with agreement of the Governor) determines that an emergency exists with respect to any particular distressed industry or any particularly distressed area to provide emergency financial assistance to dislocated workers. The Secretary may make arrangements for the immediate provision of such emergency financial assistance for the purposes of this section with any necessary supportive documentation to be submitted at a date agreed to by the Governor and the Secretary.

(1) Amounts reserved for this part under section 1652(a)(2) of this title may be used to provide staff training and technical assistance services to States, communities, businesses and labor organizations, and other entities involved in providing adjustment assistance to workers. Applications for technical assistance funds shall be submitted in accordance with procedures issued by the Secretary.

(2) Not more than 5 percent of the funds reserved for this part in any fiscal year shall be used for the purpose of this subsection.

Amounts reserved for this part under section 1652(a)(2) of this title shall be used to provide training of staff, including specialists, providing rapid response services. Such training shall include instruction in proven methods of promoting, establishing, and assisting labor-management committees.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §323, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1537.)

From the amount reserved for this part under section 1652(a)(2) of this title for the fiscal years 1992 through 1996, not less than 10 percent of such amount shall be used for demonstration programs. Such demonstration programs may be up to three years in length, and shall include (but need not be limited to) at least two of the following demonstration programs:

(1) self-employment opportunity demonstration program;

(2) public works employment demonstration program;

(3) dislocated farmer demonstration program; and

(4) job creation demonstration program.

The Secretary shall conduct or provide for an evaluation of the success of each demonstration program, and shall prepare and submit to the Congress a report of the evaluation not later than October 1, 1992, together with such recommendations, including recommendations for legislation, as the Secretary deems appropriate.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §324, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6302(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1538; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title III, §303, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1074.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “1992 through 1996” for “1989, 1990, and 1991”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1662b of this title.

From funds made available to carry out this section, the Secretary may make grants to States, substate grantees, employers, employer associations, and representatives of employees to provide training, adjustment assistance, and employment services to eligible employees adversely affected by reductions in expenditures by the United States for defense, by closures of United States military facilities, or by reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements. For purposes of this section, an eligible employee is an eligible dislocated worker as defined in section 1651(a) of this title who has been terminated or laid off, or has received a notice of termination or lay off, as a consequence of reductions in expenditures by the United States for defense, by closures of United States military facilities, or by reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements as determined in accordance with regulations of the Secretary.

In reviewing applications for grants under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall give priority to applications from areas which have the greatest number of eligible employees.

Grants under subsection (a) of this section may be used for any purpose for which funds may be used under section 1661c of this title or this part.

In carrying out the grant program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary may make grants to entities referred to in that subsection for the purpose of developing demonstration projects to encourage and promote innovative responses to the dislocation resulting from reductions in expenditures by the United States for defense, by closures of United States military facilities, or by reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements. Such demonstration projects may include—

(1) projects to facilitate the placement of eligible employees in occupations experiencing skill shortages that will make use of the skills acquired by the eligible employees during their employment;

(2) projects to assist in retraining and reorganization efforts designed to avert layoffs that would otherwise occur as a result of such reductions or closures; and

(3) projects to assist communities in addressing and reducing the impact of such economic dislocation.

A civilian employee of the Department of Defense employed at a military installation being closed or realigned under the laws referred to in paragraph (2) shall be eligible for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services under subsection (a) of this section beginning on the date on which such employee receives actual notice of termination, or the date determined by the Secretary of Defense under paragraph (3), whichever occurs earlier.

The laws referred to in this paragraph are—

(A) the Defense Base Closure and Realignment Act of 1990 (part A of title XXIX of Public Law 101–510; 10 U.S.C. 2687 note); and

(B) title II of the Defense Authorization Amendments and Base Closure and Realignment Act (Public Law 100–526; 10 U.S.C. 2687 note).

The date determined under this paragraph is the date that is 24 months before the date on which the military installation is to be closed or the realignment of the installation is to be completed, as the case may be.

For purposes of this section, the term “defense articles and defense services” means defense articles, defense services, or design and construction services under the Arms Export Control Act (22 U.S.C. 2751 et seq.), including defense articles and defense services licensed or approved for export under section 38 of that Act (22 U.S.C. 2778).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §325, as added Pub. L. 101–510, div. D, title XLII, §4202, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1852; amended Pub. L. 102–484, div. D, title XLIV, §4467(e), Oct. 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 2751; Pub. L. 103–337, div. A, title XI, §§1136(b), 1137(a), Oct. 5, 1994, 108 Stat. 2878.)

The Defense Base Closure and Realignment Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (e)(2)(A), is part A of title XXIX of div. B of Pub. L. 101–510, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1808, as amended, which is set out as a note under section 2687 of Title 10, Armed Forces. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

The Defense Authorization Amendments and Base Closure and Realignment Act, referred to in subsec. (e)(2)(B), is Pub. L. 100–526, Oct. 24, 1988, 102 Stat. 2623, as amended. Title II of the Act is set out as a note under section 2687 of Title 10. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1988 Amendment note set out under section 2687 of Title 10 and Tables.

The Arms Export Control Act, referred to in subsec. (f), is Pub. L. 90–629, Oct. 22, 1968, 82 Stat. 1320, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 39 (§2751 et seq.) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2751 of Title 22 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(a)(1), substituted “, by closures of United States military facilities, or by reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements” for “or by closures of United States military facilities” in two places.

Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(b), substituted “From funds made available to carry out this section,” for “From the amount appropriated pursuant to section 4203 of the Defense Economic Adjustment, Diversification, Conversion, and Stabilization Act of 1990,”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(a)(2), substituted “, by closures of United States military facilities, or by reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements” for “or by the closure of United States military installations”.

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(a)(3), added subsec. (f).

1992—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–484 added subsec. (e).

This section is referred to in title 42 section 12653c.

From funds made available to carry out this section, the Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense, may make grants to States, substate grantees, employers, representatives of employees, labor-management committees, and other employer-employee entities to provide for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services to eligible individuals described in subsection (b) of this section and to develop plans for defense diversification or conversion assistance to affected facilities located within an area directly affected by reductions in expenditures by the United States for defense or by closures of United States military facilities.

A member of the Armed Forces shall be eligible for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services under this section if the member—

(A) was on active duty or full-time National Guard duty on September 30, 1990;

(B) during the 5-year period beginning on that date—

(i) is involuntarily separated (as defined in section 1141 of title 10) from active duty or full-time National Guard duty; or

(ii) is separated from active duty or full-time National Guard duty pursuant to a special separation benefits program under section 1174a of title 10 or the voluntary separation incentive program under section 1175 of that title;

(C) is not entitled to retired or retainer pay incident to that separation; and

(D) applies for such training, adjustment assistance, or employment services before the end of the 180-day period beginning on the date of that separation.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), a civilian employee of the Department of Defense or the Department of Energy shall be eligible for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services under this section if the employee—

(i) during the 5-year period beginning on October 1, 1992, is terminated or laid off (or receives a notice of termination or lay off) from such employment as a result of reductions in defense spending, as determined by the Secretary of Defense or the Secretary of Energy, except that, in the case of a notice of termination or lay off, the eligibility of the employee shall not begin until 180 days before the projected date of the termination or lay off; and

(ii) is not entitled to retired or retainer pay incident to that termination or lay off.

A civilian employee of the Department of Defense employed at a military installation being closed or realigned under the laws referred to in clause (ii) shall be eligible for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services under this section beginning on the date on which such employee receives actual notice of termination, or the date determined by the Secretary of Defense under clause (iii), whichever occurs earlier.

The laws referred to in this clause are—

(I) the Defense Base Closure and Realignment Act of 1990 (part A of title XXIX of Public Law 101–510; 10 U.S.C. 2687 note);

(II) title II of the Defense Authorization Amendments and Base Closure and Realignment Act (Public Law 100–526; 10 U.S.C. 2687 note);

(III) section 2687 of title 10; and

(IV) any other similar law enacted after November 30, 1993.

The date determined under this clause is the date that is 24 months before the date on which the military installation is to be closed or the realignment of the installation is to be completed, as the case may be.

An employee of a private defense contractor shall be eligible for training, adjustment assistance, and employment services under this section if the employee—

(A) during the 5-year period beginning on October 1, 1992, is terminated or laid off (or receives a notice of termination or lay off) from such employment as a result of reductions in defense spending, the closure or realignment of a military installation, or reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements, as determined by the Secretary of Defense, except that, in the case of a notice of termination or lay off, the eligibility of the employee shall not begin until 180 days before the projected date of the termination or lay off; and

(B) is not entitled to retired or retainer pay incident to that termination.

To receive a grant under subsection (a) of this section, an applicant shall submit to the Secretary an application which contains such information as the Secretary may require and which meets the following requirements:

(I) In the case of an applicant other than a State, such applicant shall submit an application to the Secretary developed in consultation with the State, and, where appropriate, in consultation with the labor-management committee or other employer-employee entity established pursuant to subparagraph (C)(ii) at the affected facility and in consultation with representatives from the Department of Defense.

(II) Prior to the submission of an application under subclause (I) to the Secretary, the applicant shall submit the application to the State for review. The State shall have 30 calendar days to review the application. The applicant may submit the application to the Secretary after the date on which the State completes its review of the application or upon expiration of the 30 calendar days, whichever occurs first.

In the case of an applicant that is a State, such State shall submit an application to the Secretary developed in consultation with appropriate substate grantees, and, where appropriate, in consultation with the labor-management committee or other employer-employee entity established pursuant to subparagraph (C)(ii) at the affected facility and in consultation with representatives from the Department of Defense.

An application shall contain a local labor market analysis, a general assessment of basic skills, career interests, income needs, and strategies necessary for the training and placement of the population that may be served, and, where appropriate—

(i) a preliminary outline of a program to convert the affected defense base or facility;

(ii) preliminary plant or military base conversion proposals, and proposals for the effective use or conversion of surplus Federal property; and

(iii) assurances that the applicant will coordinate the activities and services provided under this section with the Office of Economic Adjustment and other relevant agencies.

The applicant shall provide verification that the State dislocated worker unit has provided, or is in the process of providing, in addition to the services described in section 1661(b)(3) and 1661c(b) of this title, the following activities and services:

(i) The State dislocated worker unit, in conjunction with the substate grantee (and where appropriate, representatives from the Department of Defense), has established on-site contact with employers and employee representatives affected by a dislocation or potential dislocation of eligible individuals, preferably not later than 2 business days after notification of such dislocation.

(ii) The State dislocated worker unit has promoted the formation of a labor-management committee or other employer-employee entity in the case of a facility affected by an employee dislocation or potential dislocation in accordance with section 1661c(b)(1)(B) of this title, including the provision of technical assistance and, where appropriate, financial assistance to cover the start-up costs of such committee.

(iii) The State dislocated worker unit has provided, in conjunction with the labor-management committee or other employer-employee entity established pursuant to clause (ii), the following services:

(I) An initial survey of potential eligible individuals to determine the approximate number of such individuals interested in receiving services under this section, orientation sessions, counseling services, and early intervention services for eligible individuals and management. Such services may be provided in coordination with representatives from the United States Employment Service, the Interstate Job Bank, the Department of Defense, and the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee.

(II) Initial basic readjustment services in conjunction with such services provided by substate grantees.

The applicant shall provide assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that if the applicant uses amounts from a grant under subsection (a) of this section for skills upgrading at defense facilities pursuant to subsection (f)(2) of this section, the applicant will maintain its expenditures from all other sources for skills upgrading at or above the average level of such expenditures in the fiscal year preceding October 23, 1992.

The Secretary may provide technical assistance to an applicant for the purpose of assisting the applicant to meet the application requirements under paragraph (1).

The Secretary shall make a determination with regard to an application received under paragraph (1) not later than 30 calendar days after the date on which the Secretary receives the application.

The Secretary shall provide timely written notification to an applicant upon determination by the Secretary that the applicant has not satisfied the requirements under paragraph (1).

In reviewing applications for grants under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary—

(A) shall not approve an application for a grant unless the application contains assurances that the applicant will use amounts from a grant to provide needs-related payments in accordance with subsection (i) of this section;

(B) shall select applications from areas most severely impacted by the reduction in defense expenditures and base closures, particularly areas with existing high poverty levels or existing high unemployment levels; and

(C) shall select applications from areas which have the greatest number of eligible individuals, taking into account the ratio of eligible individuals in the affected community to the population of such community.

In reviewing applications for grants under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall give priority to each of the following:

(A) Applications received from substate grantees.

(B) Applications received from any applicant on behalf of affected employers in a similar defense-related industry or on behalf of a single employer with multiple bases or plants within a State.

(C) Applications demonstrating employer-employee cooperation, including the participation of labor-management committees or other employer-employee entities.

Subject to paragraph (2), the Secretary shall retain 25 percent of the amount of a grant awarded under subsection (a) of this section and shall disburse the amount to the applicant not later than 90 days after the date on which the Secretary determines that the applicant is satisfactorily implementing the plans and strategies described in subsection (c)(1)(B) of this section.

The Secretary shall retain up to 20 percent of the amount retained under paragraph (1) (not to exceed $50,000) and shall disburse the amount to the State dislocated worker unit not later than 90 days after the date on which the Secretary determines that the applicant has provided verification that such unit has satisfactorily provided the activities and services described in subsection (c)(1)(C) of this section. The amount disbursed under the preceding sentence shall be used to reimburse such unit for expenses incurred in providing such activities and services.

Subject to the requirements of subsections (g), (h), (i), and (j) of this section, grants under subsection (a) of this section may be used only for the following purposes:

(1) Any purpose for which funds may be used under section 1661c of this title or this section.

(2) Skills upgrading, which may be provided to—

(A) individuals who are employed in non-managerial positions, including individuals in such positions who have received notice of termination or lay off, if such upgrading—

(i) is integral to the conversion of a defense facility and necessary to prevent a closure or mass layoff which would result in the termination or layoff of such individuals; and

(ii) is to replace or update obsolete skills of such individuals with marketable skills; and

(B) individuals who have received notice of termination or lay off from non-managerial positions, including individuals who have been terminated or laid off from such positions, if such upgrading is to replace or update obsolete skills of such individuals with marketable skills, without which reemployment in a high demand occupation or industry would be unlikely.

(3) The development and introduction of high performance workplace systems, employee and participative management systems, and workforce participation in the evaluation, selection, and implementation of new production technologies.

Not more than 20 percent of amounts received from a grant under subsection (a) of this section shall be used for administration, conversion planning activities, and the activities described in subsection (f)(3) of this section.

The adjustment assistance requirements described in section 1662e(e) of this title shall apply for purposes of grants made under subsection (a) of this section for adjustment assistance.

The Secretary shall prescribe regulations with respect to the use of funds from grants under subsection (a) of this section for needs-related payments in accordance with the requirements described in section 1662e(f) of this title in order to enable eligible individuals to complete training or education programs. Priority for needs-related payments shall be given to eligible individuals participating in certificate or degree awarding vocational training or education programs of 1 year or more.

The Secretary of Defense, in consultation with the Secretary of Labor, shall prescribe regulations to ensure that student financial assistance authorized under programs for employees of the Department of Defense and veterans is provided prior to adjustment assistance under subsection (h) of this section, needs-related payments under subsection (i) of this section, and any other student financial assistance provided under Federal law.

In carrying out the grant program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense, may make grants to the entities referred to in that subsection for the purpose of developing demonstration projects to encourage and promote innovative responses to the dislocation resulting from reductions in expenditures by the United States for defense, the closure of United States military installations, or reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements. Such demonstration projects may include—

(A) projects to assist in retraining efforts designed to address the needs of individuals who have received notice of termination or lay off and individuals who have been terminated or laid off in communities affected by such reductions or closures;

(B) projects to assist in retraining and reorganization efforts designed to avert layoffs that would otherwise occur as a result of such reductions or closures;

(C) projects to assist communities in addressing and reducing the impact of such economic dislocation;

(D) projects involving teams of transition assistance specialists from Federal, State, and local agencies to provide onsite services, including assisting affected communities in short-term and long-term planning and assisting affected individuals through counseling and referrals to appropriate services, at the site of such reductions or closures within 60 days of the announcement of such reductions or closures;

(E) projects to assist in establishing transition assistance centers at the installations where large dislocations occur to provide comprehensive services to individuals affected by such dislocations;

(F) projects involving the joint efforts of Federal agencies, such as the Department of Labor, the Department of Defense, the Department of Commerce, and the Small Business Administration, to assist communities affected by such reductions or closures in developing integrated community planning processes to facilitate the retraining of affected individuals and the conversion of installations to commercial uses;

(G) projects to develop new information and data systems to assist individuals and communities affected by such reductions or closures, including the development of data bases with the capability to provide an affected individual with a civilian economy skills profile which takes into account the skills acquired while working on defense-related matters; and

(H) projects to assist small and medium-sized firms affected by such reductions or closures in the formation of learning consortia, which will promote joint efforts for staff training, human resource development, product development, and the marketing of products.

Not more than 10 percent of the funds available to the Secretary to carry out this section for any fiscal year may be used to carry out the projects established under paragraph (1).

In carrying out the grant program established under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary may provide staff training and technical assistance services to States, communities, businesses, and labor organizations, and other entities involved in providing adjustment assistance to workers.

Not more than 2 percent of the funds available to the Secretary to carry out this section for any fiscal year may be retained by the Secretary for the administration of activities authorized under this section.

The Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense, shall ensure that activities carried out under this section are coordinated with relevant activities carried out pursuant to title IV of the Department of Defense Appropriations Act, 1993 (Public Law 102–396; 106 Stat. 1890).

For purposes of this section, the following definitions apply:

The term “labor-management committee”

(A) has the meaning given such term in section 1651(b)(1) of this title; and

(B) includes a committee established at a military installation to assist members of the Armed Forces who are being separated and civilian employees of the Department of Defense and the Department of Energy who are being terminated.

The term “defense contractor” means a private person producing goods or services pursuant to—

(A) one or more defense contracts which have a total amount not less than $500,000 entered into with the Department of Defense; or

(B) one or more subcontracts entered into in connection with a defense contract and which have a total amount not less than $500,000.

The term “defense articles and defense services” means defense articles, defense services, or design and construction services under the Arms Export Control Act (22 U.S.C. 2751 et seq.), including defense articles and defense services licensed or approved for export under section 38 of that Act (22 U.S.C. 2778).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §325A, as added Pub. L. 102–484, div. D, title XLIV, §4465(a), Oct. 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 2742; amended Pub. L. 103–160, div. A, title XIII, §1339, Nov. 30, 1993, 107 Stat. 1807; Pub. L. 103–337, div. A, title XI, §§1136(a), 1137(b), Oct. 5, 1994, 108 Stat. 2878, 2879.)

The Defense Base Closure and Realignment Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B)(ii)(I), is part A of title XXIX of div. B of Pub. L. 101–510, Nov. 5, 1990, 104 Stat. 1808, as amended, which is set out as a note under section 2687 of Title 10, Armed Forces. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

The Defense Authorization Amendments and Base Closure and Realignment Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B)(ii)(II), is Pub. L. 100–526, Oct. 24, 1988, 102 Stat. 2623, as amended. Title II of the Act is set out as a note under section 2687 of Title 10. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1988 Amendment note set out under section 2687 of Title 10 and Tables.

The Department of Defense Appropriations Act, 1993, referred to in subsec. (n), is Pub. L. 102–396, Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1876. Title IV of the Act is not classified to the Code. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Tables.

The Arms Export Control Act, referred to in subsec. (*o*)(3), is Pub. L. 90–629, Oct. 22, 1968, 82 Stat. 1320, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 39 (§2751 et seq.) of Title 22, Foreign Relations and Intercourse. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2751 of Title 22 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(1), substituted “From funds made available to carry out this section, the Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense,” for “From the amount made available under section 4465(c) of the Defense Conversion, Reinvestment, and Transition Assistance Act of 1992, the Secretary of Defense, in consultation with the Secretary of Labor,”.

Subsec. (b)(3)(A). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(b)(1), substituted “, the closure or realignment of a military installation, or reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements” for “or the closure or realignment of a military installation”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(2), in par. (1), substituted “Secretary an” for “Secretary of Defense an” in introductory provisions, “Secretary” for “Secretary of Defense” in subpar. (A)(i)(I), “Secretary, the” for “Secretary of Defense, the” in subpar. (A)(i)(II), and “Secretary” for “Secretary of Defense” in subpars. (A)(ii) and (D), and in pars. (2) to (4), substituted “The Secretary” for “The Secretary of Defense”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(2), substituted “Secretary” for “Secretary of Defense” in pars. (1) and (2).

Subsec. (d)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(3), struck out “in consultation with the Secretary of Labor,” before “shall not approve”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(2), (4), struck out “by Secretary of Defense” after “grant amount” in heading and substituted “Secretary shall” for “Secretary of Defense shall” in pars. (1) and (2).

Subsec. (i). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(2), substituted “Secretary” for “Secretary of Defense”.

Subsec. (k)(1). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(b)(2), substituted “, the closure of United States military installations, or reductions in the export of defense articles and defense services as a result of United States policy, including reductions in the amount of defense articles and defense services under agreements to provide such articles or services or through termination or completion of any such agreements” for “or by the closure of United States military installations” in introductory provisions.

Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(5), substituted “Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense” for “Secretary of Defense, in consultation with the Secretary of Labor” in introductory provisions.

Subsecs. (k)(2), (*l*), (m). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(2), substituted “Secretary” for “Secretary of Defense” wherever appearing.

Subsec. (n). Pub. L. 103–337, §1136(a)(6), substituted “Secretary, in consultation with the Secretary of Defense” for “Secretary of Defense, in consultation with the Secretary of Labor”.

Subsec. (*o*)(3). Pub. L. 103–337, §1137(b)(3), added par. (3).

1993—Subsec. (b)(2)(B)(ii)(III), (IV). Pub. L. 103–160, §1339(a), added subcls. (III) and (IV).

Subsec. (k)(1)(D) to (H). Pub. L. 103–160, §1339(b), added subpars. (D) to (H).

Subsecs. (*l*) to (*o*). Pub. L. 103–160, §1339(c), added subsecs. (*l*) to (n) and redesignated former subsec. (*l*) as (*o*).

Section 1373 of Pub. L. 103–160 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1) Members of the Armed Forces who are discharged or released from active duty.

“(2) Civilian employees of the Department of Defense who are terminated from such employment as a result of reductions in defense spending or the closure or realignment of a military installation, as determined by the Secretary of Defense.

“(3) Employees of defense contractors who are terminated or laid off (or receive a notice of termination or lay off) as a result of the completion or termination of a defense contract or program or reductions in defense spending, as determined by the Secretary of Defense.

“(c)

“(1) collect educational materials that have been prepared for the purpose of providing information regarding available retraining programs, in particular those programs dealing with critical skills needed in advanced manufacturing and skill areas in which shortages of skilled employees exist;

“(2) establish and maintain a data base for the purpose of storing and categorizing such materials based on the different needs of eligible persons; and

“(3) furnish such materials, upon request, to educational institutions and other interested persons.

“(d)

Section 4465(b) of Pub. L. 102–484 provided that: “The Secretary of Defense may transfer any function of such Secretary under the amendment made by subsection (a) [enacting this section] to the Secretary of Labor. Whenever such a transfer is made, any funds available to the Secretary of Defense for the performance of such function shall be transferred to the appropriate accounts of the Department of Labor.”

Section 4465(c) of Pub. L. 102–484 provided that: “Of the amount authorized to be appropriated in section 301 [106 Stat. 2360] for Defense Agencies, $75,000,000 shall be available to carry out section 325A of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1662d–1], as added by subsection (a).”

Section 4468 of Pub. L. 102–484 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1) A phone bank reachable by a toll-free number, staffed by an international ‘help desk’ of individuals familiar with the services provided under section 1144 of title 10, United States Code, and related transition programs under chapter 58 of such title (in the case of members of the Armed Forces, priority shall be given to recently-discharged veterans, members of the Armed Forces who have been separated from active duty, and their spouses).

“(2) Interstate Job Bank satellite offices or systems at defense contractor plants by State employment security agencies and at all military bases for direct access and self service to job listings.

“(3) Specialized job banks to integrate with the Interstate Job Bank for specialized listings or services such as the Defense Outplacement Referral System (DORS) of resumes, National Academy of Sciences Network, commercial systems, and the outplacement of defense-related personnel in high-tech occupations through the expansion and coordination of existing networks to ensure that resources are available at all service locations.

“(4) A system by which individuals and public and private organizations may access the Interstate Job Bank using individual modems or related automated employment systems.

“(c)

Section 4473 of Pub. L. 102–484 provided that:

“(a)

“(1)

“(2)

“(B) The amount described in this subparagraph is the amount provided under subsection (c) of section 4468 [set out above] for the program under such section.

“(b)

For purposes of this section, the term “eligible individual” means an individual who—

(A) is an eligible dislocated worker, as that term is defined in section 1651(a) of this title, and

(B) has been terminated or laid off, or has received a notice of termination or lay off, as a consequence of compliance with the Clean Air Act [42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.].

The determination of eligibility under paragraph (1)(B) of this subsection shall be made by the Secretary of Labor, pursuant to criteria established by the Secretary, in consultation with the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency.

The Secretary may make grants to States, substate grantees (as defined in section 1661a(c) of this title), employers, employer associations, and representatives of employees—

(1) to provide training, adjustment assistance, and employment services to eligible individuals adversely affected by compliance with the Clean Air Act [42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.]; and

(2) to make needs-related payments to such individuals in accordance with subsection (f) of this section.

In reviewing applications for grants under subsection (b) of this section, the Secretary shall give priority to applications proposing to provide training, adjustment assistance, and services in areas which have the greatest number of eligible individuals.

The Secretary shall not approve an application for a grant under subsection (b) of this section unless the application contains assurances that the applicant will use grant funds to provide needs-related payments in accordance with subsection (f) of this section.

Subject to the requirements of subsections (e) and (f) of this section, grants under subsection (b) of this section may be used for any purpose for which funds may be used under section 1661c of this title.

Grants under subsection (b) of this section for adjustment assistance may be used to provide job search allowances to eligible individuals. Such allowance, if granted, shall provide reimbursement to the individual of not more than 90 percent of the cost of necessary job search expenses, as prescribed by regulations of the Secretary, but may not exceed $800 unless the need for a greater amount is justified in the application and approved by the Secretary.

A job search allowance may be granted only—

(i) to assist an eligible individual who has been totally separated in securing a job within the United States; and

(ii) where the Secretary determines that such employee cannot reasonably be expected to secure suitable employment in the commuting area in which the worker resides.

Grants under subsection (b) of this section for adjustment assistance may be used to provide relocation allowances to eligible individuals. Such an allowance may only be granted to assist an eligible individual in relocating within the United States and only if the Secretary determines that—

(i) such employee cannot reasonably be expected to secure suitable employment in the commuting area in which the employee resides; and

(ii) such employee—

(I) has obtained suitable employment affording a reasonable expectation of long-term duration in the area in which the employee wishes to relocate, or has obtained a bona fide offer of such employment, and

(II) is totally separated from employment at the time relocation commences.

The amount of any relocation allowance for any eligible individual may not exceed the amount which is equal to the sum of—

(i) 90 percent of the reasonable and necessary expenses, specified in regulations prescribed by the Secretary, incurred in transporting an individual and the individual's family, if any, and household effects, and

(ii) a lump sum equivalent to 3 times the employee's average weekly wage, up to a maximum payment of $800, unless the need for a greater amount is justified in the application and approved by the Secretary.

The Secretary shall prescribe regulations with respect to the use of funds from grants under subsection (b) of this section for needs-related payments in order to enable eligible individuals to complete training or education programs under this section. Such regulations shall—

(1) require that such payments shall be provided to an eligible individual only if such individual—

(A) does not qualify or has ceased to qualify for unemployment compensation;

(B) has been enrolled in training by the end of the 13th week of the individual's initial unemployment compensation benefit period, or, if later, the end of the 8th week after an individual is informed that a short-term layoff will in fact exceed 6 months; and

(C) is participating in training or education programs under this section, except that such regulations shall protect an individual from being disqualified pursuant to this clause for a failure to participate that is not the fault of the individual;

(2) provide that to qualify for such payments the individual currently receives, or is a member of a family which currently receives, a total family income (exclusive of unemployment compensation, child support payments, and welfare payments) which, in relation to family size, is not in excess of the lower living standard income level;

(3) provide that the levels of such payments shall be equal to the higher of—

(A) the applicable level of unemployment compensation; or

(B) the poverty level determined in accordance with criteria established by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget;

(4) provide for the adjustment of payments to reflect changes in total family income; and

(5) provide that the grantee shall obtain information with respect to such income, and changes therein, from the eligible individual.

The Secretary of Labor may reserve not more than 5 percent of the funds appropriated under this section for the administration of activities authorized under this section, including the provision of technical assistance for the preparation of grant applications.

In addition to amounts authorized to be appropriated by section 1502(b) of this title, there are authorized to be appropriated $50,000,000 for fiscal year 1991, and such sums as may be necessary for each of fiscal years 1992, 1993, 1994, and 1995 to carry out this section. The total amount appropriated for all 5 such fiscal years shall not exceed $250,000,000. Amounts appropriated pursuant to this subsection shall remain available until expended.

The Secretary shall prescribe regulations to carry out this section not later than 180 days after November 15, 1990.

The Comptroller General of the United States shall—

(1) identify and assess, to the extent possible, the effects on employment that are attributable to compliance with the provisions of the Clean Air Act [42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.]; and

(2) submit to the Congress on the 4th anniversary of November 15, 1990, a written report on the assessments required under paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title III, §326, as added Pub. L. 101–549, title XI, §1101(a), Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2709; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §102(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1024.)

The Clean Air Act, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1)(B), (b)(1), and (j)(1), is act July 14, 1955, ch. 360, 69 Stat. 322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 85 (§7401 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 7401 of Title 42 and Tables.

November 15, 1990, referred to in subsec. (j)(2), was in the original “the date of the enactment of this subtitle”, and was translated as meaning the date of the enactment of Pub. L. 101–549 which enacted this section, to reflect the probable intent of Congress because the Job Training Partnership Act which is classified to this chapter does not contain subtitles.

1992—Subsec. (h). Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “1502(b)” for “1502(c)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1662d–1 of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in title 31 section 6703; title 42 section 4368a.

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1516 of this title.

The Congress finds that (1) serious unemployment and economic disadvantages exist among members of Indian, Alaskan Native, and Hawaiian Native communities; (2) there is a compelling need for the establishment of comprehensive training and employment programs for members of those communities; and (3) such programs are essential to the reduction of economic disadvantages among individual members of those communities and to the advancement of economic and social development in the communities consistent with their goals and lifestyles.

The Congress therefore declares that, because of the special relationship between the Federal Government and most of the individuals to be served by the provisions of this section, (1) such programs shall be administered at the national level; (2) such programs shall be available to federally recognized Indian tribes, bands, and groups and to other groups and individuals of Native American descent; and (3) such programs shall be administered in such a manner as to maximize the Federal commitment to support growth and development as determined by representatives of the communities and groups served by this section.

(1)(A) In carrying out responsibilities under this section, the Secretary shall, wherever possible, utilize Indian tribes, bands, or groups on Federal or State reservations, Oklahoma Indians, and including for the purpose of this chapter, Alaska Native villages or groups as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act [43 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.], having a governing body for the provision of employment and training services under this section. When the Secretary determines that such tribe, band, or group has demonstrated the capability to effectively administer a comprehensive employment and training program, the Secretary shall require such tribe, band, or group to submit a comprehensive plan meeting such requirements as the Secretary prescribes.

(B) The Secretary shall arrange for programs to meet the employment and training needs of Hawaiian natives through such organizations as the Secretary determines will best meet their needs.

(2) In carrying out responsibilities under this section, the Secretary shall make arrangements with organizations (meeting requirements prescribed by the Secretary) serving nonreservation Native Americans for programs and projects designed to meet the needs of such Native Americans for employment and training and related services.

Whenever the Secretary determines not to utilize Indian tribes, bands, or groups for the provision of employment and training services under this section, the Secretary shall, to the maximum extent feasible, enter into arrangements for the provision of such services with organizations which meet with the approval of the tribes, bands, or groups to be served.

The Secretary is directed to take appropriate action to establish administrative procedures and machinery (including personnel having particular competence in this field) for the selection, administration, monitoring, and evaluation of Native American employment and training programs authorized under this chapter.

Funds available for this section shall be expended for programs and activities consistent with the purposes of this section including but not limited to such programs and activities carried out by recipients under other provisions of this chapter.

No provision of this section shall abrogate in any way the trust responsibilities of the Federal Government to Native American bands, tribes, or groups.

(1) The Secretary shall, after consultation with representatives of Indians and other Native Americans, prescribe such rules, regulations, and performance standards pursuant to section 1516 of this title relating to Native American programs under this section as may be required to meet the special circumstances under which such programs operate.

(2) Recipients of funds under this section shall establish performance goals, which shall, to the extent required by the Secretary, comply with performance standards established by the Secretary pursuant to section 1516 of this title.

The Secretary shall provide technical assistance as necessary to tribes, bands, and groups eligible for assistance under this section.

(1) The Secretary shall designate a single organizational unit that shall have as its primary responsibility the administration of all Native American programs authorized under this chapter.

(2) Such organizational unit shall—

(A) be responsible for administering the provisions of the Native American programs authorized under this chapter, including monitoring such programs and making recommendations regarding the selection of the recipients of financial assistance;

(B) be responsible for the development of the policies and procedures related to the implementation of such programs; and

(C) coordinate the development of policy and procedures for the employment and training programs within the Department relating to services for Native American workers.

(3) In the hiring and promotion of the professional staff for the organizational unit designated under paragraph (1), special consideration shall be given to individuals who have field experience in the daily operation of service and training programs for Native Americans, and individuals who are Indians or Alaskan Natives. The Secretary shall take such additional actions as may be necessary to promote the recruitment and promotion of Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Hawaiian Natives to positions in such unit.

(1) There is hereby established a Native American Employment and Training Council (referred to in this subsection as the “Council”), which shall consist of not fewer than 17 Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Hawaiian Natives appointed by the Secretary from among individuals nominated by Indian tribes or Indian, Alaskan Native, or Hawaiian Native organizations. The membership of the Council shall represent all geographic areas of the United States with a substantial Indian, Alaskan Native, or Hawaiian Native population and shall include representatives of tribal governments and of nonreservation Native American organizations who are service providers under this chapter. A majority of the members of the Council shall have field experience in the daily operation of the program authorized under this section.

(2) The Council shall select a chairperson from among its members by a majority vote. The Council shall meet not less often than twice each program year.

(3) Members of the Native American Programs Advisory Committee that existed before September 7, 1992—

(A) shall serve as members of the Council until their successors are appointed; and

(B) may be appointed as members of the Council, if such appointment is consistent with the provisions of this subsection.

(4) Each member of the Council shall serve for a term of 2 years, except that—

(A) one-half of the members initially appointed (as designated by the Secretary) shall serve for terms of 1 year;

(B) any vacancy occurring in the membership of the Council shall be filled in the same manner as the original appointment, and shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Council;

(C) any member appointed to such a vacancy shall serve for the remainder of the term for which the predecessor of the member was appointed; and

(D) members may be reappointed.

(5) The initial membership of the Council shall be appointed not later than the beginning of program year 1993.

(6) The Council shall—

(A) solicit the views of a wide variety of Indian tribes and Native American groups, including groups operating employment and training programs funded under this section, on issues affecting the operation and administration of such programs;

(B) advise the Secretary with respect to the implementation of programs under this section and other programs providing services to Native American youth and adults under this chapter;

(C) advise and make recommendations to the Secretary with respect to the design and implementation of performance standards developed under section 1516(f) of this title;

(D) advise and make recommendations to the Secretary with respect to the services obtained or to be obtained by the Department of Labor through contracts or arrangements with non-Federal agencies or entities that involve the program authorized by this section;

(E) evaluate the effectiveness of Native American job training programs and make recommendations with respect to the improvement of such programs;

(F) advise the Secretary with respect to individuals to be considered to fill the position of the official in charge of the organizational unit designated under subsection (j)(1) of this section whenever a vacancy in such position occurs; and

(G) prepare and submit directly to the Secretary and to the Congress, not later than January 1 of each even numbered year, a report containing information on the progress of Native American job training programs and recommendations for improving their administration and effectiveness.

(7) Members of the Council shall serve without compensation. Each member of the Council shall receive travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, at rates authorized for employees of agencies under subchapter I of chapter 57 of title 5 for each day the member is engaged in the performance of duties away from the home or regular place of business of the member.

(8) The Secretary shall provide the Council with such administrative support as may be necessary to perform its functions.

The competition for grants under this section shall be conducted every 2 years, except that if a recipient of such a grant has performed satisfactorily under the terms of the existing grant agreement, the Secretary may waive the requirement for such competition on receipt from the recipient of a satisfactory 2-year program plan for the succeeding 2-year grant period.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §401, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1368; Pub. L. 97–404, §4(a), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §401(a)–(d), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1074–1076.)

The Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(A), is Pub. L. 92–203, Dec. 18, 1971, 85 Stat. 688, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1601 et seq.) of Title 43, Public Lands. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1601 of Title 43 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (h)(1). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(a), inserted “pursuant to section 1516 of this title” after “performance standards”.

Subsec. (j). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(b), amended subsec. (j) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (j) read as follows: “For the purpose of carrying out this section, the Secretary shall reserve, from funds available for this subchapter (other than part B of this subchapter) for any fiscal year, an amount equal to 3.3 percent of the amount available for part A of subchapter II of this chapter for such fiscal year.”

Subsec. (k). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(c), added subsec. (k).

Subsec. (*l*). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(d), added subsec. (*l*).

1982—Subsec. (h)(2). Pub. L. 97–404 substituted reference to section 1516 of this title for reference to section 1513 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Advisory councils established after Jan. 5, 1973, to terminate not later than the expiration of the 2-year period beginning on the date of their establishment, unless, in the case of a council established by the President or an officer of the Federal Government, such council is renewed by appropriate action prior to the expiration of such 2-year period, or in the case of a council established by Congress, its duration is otherwise provided by law. See sections 3(2) and 14 of Pub. L. 92–463, Oct. 6, 1972, 86 Stat. 770, 776, set out in the Appendix to Title 5, Government Organization and Employees.

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1631, 1673, 1781, 1782a, 1782h, 1783, 1784a, 1784b of this title.

The Congress finds and declares that—

(1) chronic seasonal unemployment and underemployment in the agricultural industry, aggravated by continual advancements in technology and mechanization resulting in displacement, constitute a substantial portion of the Nation's rural employment problem and substantially affect the entire national economy; and

(2) because of the special nature of farmworker employment and training problems, such programs shall be centrally administered at the national level.

The Secretary is directed to take appropriate action to establish administrative procedures and machinery (including personnel having particular competence in this field) for the selection, administration, monitoring, and evaluation of migrant and seasonal employment and training programs authorized under this chapter.

(1) The Secretary shall provide services to meet the employment and training needs of migrant and seasonal farmworkers through such public agencies and private nonprofit organizations as the Secretary determines to have an understanding of the problems of migrant and seasonal farmworkers, a familiarity with the area to be served, and a previously demonstrated capability to administer effectively a diversified employability development program for migrant and seasonal farmworkers. In awarding any grant or contract for services under this section, the Secretary shall use procedures consistent with standard competitive Government procurement policies.

(2) The competition for grants under this section shall be conducted every 2 years, except that if a recipient of such a grant has performed satisfactorily under the terms of the existing grant agreement, the Secretary may waive the requirement for such competition upon receipt from the recipient of a satisfactory 2-year program plan for the succeeding 2-year grant period.

(3) Programs and activities supported under this section, including those carried out under other provisions of this chapter, shall enable farmworkers and their dependents to obtain or retain employment, to participate in other program activities leading to their eventual placement in unsubsidized agricultural or nonagricultural employment, and to participate in activities leading to stabilization in agricultural employment, and shall include related assistance and supportive services.

(4) Recipients of funds under this section shall establish performance goals, which shall, to the extent required by the Secretary, comply with performance standards established by the Secretary pursuant to section 1516 of this title.

(5) No programs and activities supported under this section shall preclude assistance to farmworkers under any other provision of this chapter.

In administering programs under this section, the Secretary shall consult with appropriate State and local officials.

The Secretary is directed to take appropriate action to establish administrative procedures and machinery (including personnel having particular competence in this field) for the selection, administration, monitoring, and evaluation of migrant and seasonal farmworker's employment and training programs authorized under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §402, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1369; Pub. L. 97–404, §4(b), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §401(e), (f), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1076.)

1992—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(e), amended par. (2) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (2) read as follows: “The Secretary may approve the designation of grantees under this section for a period of two years.”

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 102–367, §401(f), struck out subsec. (f) which read as follows: “For the purpose of carrying out this section, the Secretary shall reserve, from funds available for this subchapter (other than part B of this subchapter) for any fiscal year, an amount equal to 3.2 percent of the amount available for part A of subchapter II of this chapter for such fiscal year.”

1982—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(b)(1), inserted “the special nature of” after “because of”.

Subsec. (c)(4). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(b)(2), substituted reference to section 1516 of this title for reference to section 1513 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Pub. L. 100–387, title V, §503, Aug. 11, 1988, 102 Stat. 960, provided that: “Notwithstanding any other provision of law, for necessary services to be provided by agencies that have received funds under the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.] to low-income agricultural workers who have been adversely affected by the drought of 1988, not to exceed $5,000,000 shall be made available to be derived by transfer from the Disaster Relief Program of the Federal Emergency Management Agency. The funds shall be distributed by the Secretary of Labor within 30 days after the date of the enactment of this Act [Aug. 11, 1988] based on an assessment of the number of low-income agricultural workers in each grantee's service delivery area who have lost income or are unable to work due to the drought, including those workers who have stayed at home in anticipation of work shortages. Emergency services to be provided under this section may include all types of assistance that the Secretary determines to be necessary. For the purposes of this section, a low-income agricultural worker receiving assistance must meet the income eligibility requirements of the section 402 [29 U.S.C. 1672] program under the Job Training Partnership Act.”

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1673, 1781, 1782a, 1782h, 1783, 1784a, 1784b of this title; title 20 section 1070d–2.

Grants under sections 1671 and 1672 of this title shall be subject to the Single Audit Act of 1984 (31 U.S.C. 7501 et seq.) and charging of costs under such sections shall be subject to appropriate circulars issued by the Office of Management and Budget.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §403, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §401(g), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1076.)

The Single Audit Act of 1984, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 98–502, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2327, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§7501 et seq.) of Title 31, Money and Finance. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 7501 of Title 31 and Tables.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1516, 1533, 1645, 1791c of this title; title 20 section 6103; title 42 section 3796ee.

This part maintains a Job Corps for economically disadvantaged young men and women which shall operate exclusively as a distinct national program, sets forth standards and procedures for selecting individuals as enrollees in the Job Corps, authorizes the establishment of residential and nonresidential centers in which enrollees will participate in intensive programs of education, vocational training, work experience, counseling and other activities, and prescribes various other powers, duties, and responsibilities incident to the operation and continuing development of the Job Corps. The purpose of this part is to assist young individuals who need and can benefit from an unusually intensive program, operated in a group setting, to become more responsible, employable, and productive citizens; and to do so in a way that contributes, where feasible, to the development of national, State, and community resources, and to the development and dissemination of techniques for working with the disadvantaged that can be widely utilized by public and private institutions and agencies.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §421, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1370.)

There shall be within the Department of Labor a “Job Corps”.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §422, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1370.)

To become an enrollee in the Job Corps, a young man or woman must be an eligible youth who—

(1) has attained age 14 but not attained age 22 at the time of enrollment, except that not more than 20 percent of the individuals enrolled may be age 22 through 24, and that either such maximum age limitation may be waived, in accordance with regulations of the Secretary, in the case of any individual with a disability;

(2) is economically disadvantaged or is a member of a family which is economically disadvantaged, and who requires additional education, training, or intensive counseling and related assistance in order to secure and hold meaningful employment, participate successfully in regular school work, qualify for other suitable training programs, or satisfy Armed Forces requirements;

(3) is currently living in an environment so characterized by cultural deprivation, a disruptive homelife, or other disorienting conditions as to substantially impair prospects for successful participation in other programs providing needed training, education, or assistance;

(4) is determined, after careful screening as provided for in sections 1694 and 1695 of this title to have the present capabilities and aspirations needed to complete and secure the full benefit of the Job Corps and to be free of medical and behavioral problems so serious that the individual could not adjust to the standards of conduct, discipline, work, and training which the Job Corps involves; and

(5) meets such other standards for enrollment as the Secretary may prescribe and agrees to comply with all applicable Job Corps rules and regulations.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §423, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1370; Pub. L. 102–367, title I, §103(b)(4), title IV, §402(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1026, 1076.)

1992—Par. (1). Pub. L. 102–367 inserted “not more than 20 percent of the individuals enrolled may be age 22 through 24, and that either” after “except that” and substituted “individual with a disability” for “handicapped individual”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1703a of this title; title 42 section 12653c.

The Secretary shall prescribe specific standards and procedures for the screening and selection of applicants for the Job Corps. To the extent practicable, these rules shall be implemented through arrangements with agencies and organizations such as community action agencies, public employment offices, entities administering programs under subchapter II of this chapter, professional groups, labor organizations, and agencies and individuals having contact with youth over substantial periods of time and able to offer reliable information as to their needs and problems. The rules shall provide for necessary consultation with other individuals and organizations, including court, probation, parole, law enforcement, education, welfare, and medical authorities and advisers. The rules shall also provide for the interviewing of each applicant for the purpose of—

(1) determining whether the applicant's educational and vocational needs can best be met through the Job Corps or an alternative program in the applicant's home community;

(2) obtaining from the applicant pertinent data relating to background, needs, and interests for determining eligibility and potential assignment; and

(3) giving the applicant a full understanding of the Job Corps and what will be expected of an enrollee in the event of acceptance.

The Secretary is authorized to make payments to individuals and organizations for the cost of the recruitment, screening, and selection of candidates, as provided for in this part. The Secretary shall make no payments to any individual or organization solely as compensation for referring the names of candidates for Job Corps.

The Secretary shall assure that Job Corps enrollees include an appropriate number of candidates selected from rural areas, taking into account the proportions of eligible youth who reside in rural areas and the need to provide residential facilities for such youth.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §424, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1371.)

This section is referred to in sections 1693, 1703a of this title.

No individual shall be selected as an enrollee unless there is reasonable expectation that the individual can participate successfully in group situations and activities, is not likely to engage in behavior that would prevent other enrollees from receiving the benefit of the program or be incompatible with the maintenance of sound discipline and satisfactory relationships between the center to which the individual might be assigned and surrounding communities, and unless the individual manifests a basic understanding of both the rules to which the individual will be subject and of the consequences of failure to observe those rules.

An individual on probation, parole, or supervised release may be selected only if release from the supervision of the probation or parole officials is satisfactory to those officials and the Secretary and does not violate applicable laws or regulations. No individual shall be denied a position in the Job Corps solely on the basis of that individual's contact with the criminal justice system.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §425, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1372; Pub. L. 98–473, title II, §231, Oct. 12, 1984, 98 Stat. 2031.)

1984—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–473 substituted “, parole, or supervised release” for first reference to “or parole”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–473 effective Nov. 1, 1987, and applicable only to offenses committed after the taking effect of such amendment, see section 235(a)(1) of Pub. L. 98–473, set out as an Effective Date note under section 3551 of Title 18, Crimes and Criminal Procedure.

This section is referred to in sections 1693, 1703a of this title.

No individual may be enrolled in the Job Corps for more than two years, except in any case in which completion of an advanced career program under section 1698 of this title would require an individual to participate in excess of two years, or except as the Secretary may authorize in special cases.

Enrollment in the Job Corps shall not relieve any individual of obligations under the Military Selective Service Act (50 U.S.C. App. 451 et seq.).

After the Secretary has determined that an enrollee is to be assigned to a Job Corps center, the enrollee shall be assigned to the center which is closest to the enrollee's home, except that the Secretary may waive this requirement for good cause, including to ensure an equitable opportunity for youth from various sections of the Nation to participate in the program, to prevent undue delays in assignment, to adequately meet the educational or other needs of an enrollee, and for efficiency and economy in the operation of the program.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit an individual who has been a participant in the Job Corps from concurrently or subsequently participating in programs under subchapter II of this chapter, or to prohibit an individual who has been a participant in programs under subchapter II of this chapter from concurrently or subsequently participating in the Job Corps.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §426, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1372; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §402(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1076.)

The Military Selective Service Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act June 24, 1948, ch. 625, 62 Stat. 604, as amended, which is classified principally to section 451 et seq. of Title 50, Appendix, War and National Defense. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see References in Text note set out under section 451 of Title 50, Appendix, and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–367 added subsec. (d).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

(1) The Secretary may make agreements with Federal, State, or local agencies, including a State board or agency designated pursuant to section 111(a)(1) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2321(a)(1)] which operates or wishes to develop area vocational education school facilities or residential vocational schools (or both) as authorized by such Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], or private organizations for the establishment and operation of Job Corps centers. Job Corps centers may, subject to paragraph (2), be residential or nonresidential in character, or both, and shall be designed and operated so as to provide enrollees, in a well-supervised setting, with education, vocational training, work experience (either in direct program activities or through arrangements with employers), counseling, and other services appropriate to their needs. The centers shall include Civilian Conservation Centers, located primarily in rural areas, which shall provide, in addition to other training and assistance, programs of work experience to conserve, develop, or manage public natural resources or public recreational areas or to develop community projects in the public interest. The centers shall also include training centers located in either urban or rural areas which shall provide activities including training and other services for specific types of skilled or semiskilled employment.

(2) In any year, not more than 20 percent of the individuals enrolled in the Job Corps may be nonresidential participants. In enrolling individuals who are to be nonresidential participants, priority shall be given to those eligible individuals who are single parents with dependent children. The Secretary shall not reduce the number of residential participants in Job Corps programs under this part during any program year below the number of residential participants during program year 1991 in order to increase the number of individuals who are nonresidential participants in the Job Corps.

To the extent feasible, Job Corps centers shall offer education and vocational training opportunities, together with supportive services, on a nonresidential basis to participants in other programs under this chapter. Such opportunities may be offered on a reimbursable basis or through such other arrangements as the Secretary may specify.

No funds appropriated to the Department of Labor for any fiscal year may be used to carry out any contract with a nongovernmental entity to administer or manage a Civilian Conservation Center of the Job Corps.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §427, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1372; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(4), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2487; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §402(c), (d), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1076, 1077.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, known as the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

1992—Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §402(c), substituted “20 percent” for “10 percent” and inserted at end “In enrolling individuals who are to be nonresidential participants, priority shall be given to those eligible individuals who are single parents with dependent children. The Secretary shall not reduce the number of residential participants in Job Corps programs under this part during any program year below the number of residential participants during program year 1991 in order to increase the number of individuals who are nonresidential participants in the Job Corps.”

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 102–367, §402(d), added subsec. (c).

1984—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “section 111(a)(1) of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 104(a)(1) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

Pub. L. 99–349, title I, July 2, 1986, 100 Stat. 741, provided that: “No Job Corps Center operating under part B of title IV of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1691 et seq.] shall be closed prior to July 1, 1987.”

This section is referred to in section 1703a of this title.

Each Job Corps center shall provide enrollees with an intensive, well-organized, and fully supervised program of education, vocational training, work experience, planned vocational and recreational activities, physical rehabilitation and development, and counseling. To the fullest extent feasible, the required program shall include activities to assist enrollees in choosing realistic career goals, coping with problems they may encounter in home communities, or in adjusting to new communities, and planning and managing their daily affairs in a manner that will best contribute to long-term upward mobility. Center programs shall include required participation in center maintenance work to assist enrollees in increasing their sense of contribution, responsibility, and discipline.

The Secretary may arrange for enrollee education and vocational training through local public or private educational agencies, vocational educational institutions, or technical institutes, whenever such institutions provide training substantially equivalent in cost and quality to that which the Secretary could provide through other means.

To the extent feasible, arrangements for education, both at the center and at other locations, shall provide opportunities for qualified enrollees to obtain the equivalent of a certificate of graduation from high school. The Secretary, with the concurrence of the Secretary of Education, shall develop certificates to be issued to each enrollee who satisfactorily completes service in the Job Corps and which will reflect the enrollee's level of educational attainment.

(1) The Secretary may arrange for programs of advanced career training for selected Corps enrollees in which they may continue to participate for a period not to exceed one year in addition to the period of participation to which Corps enrollees would otherwise be limited.

(2) Advanced career training may be provided for in postsecondary institutions for Corps enrollees who have attained a high school diploma or its equivalent, have demonstrated commitment and capacity in their previous Job Corps participation, and have an identified occupational goal.

(3) The Secretary may contract with private for-profit businesses and labor unions to provide intensive training in company-sponsored training programs, combined with internships in work settings.

(4) During the period of participation in advanced career training programs, Corps enrollees shall be eligible for full Job Corps benefits or a monthly stipend equal to the average value of residential support, food, allowances, and other benefits in residential Job Corps centers, except that the total amount for which an enrollee shall be eligible shall be reduced by the amount of any scholarship or other educational grant assistance received by such enrollee.

(5) After an initial period of time, determined to be reasonable by the Secretary, any Job Corps center seeking to enroll new Corps enrollees in any advanced career training program shall demonstrate that such program has achieved a reasonable rate of completion and placement in training-related jobs before such new enrollments may occur.

The Secretary shall, to the extent practicable, provide child care at or near Job Corps centers, for individuals who require child care for their children in order to participate in the Job Corps.

Each Job Corps center shall provide to enrollees who are dependent on, or who have a history of abuse of, alcohol or drugs, with counseling and referral to related services necessary to prevent the continuance or recurrence of such dependency or abuse.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §428, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1373; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §402(e), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1077.)

1992—Subsecs. (e), (f). Pub. L. 102–367 added subsecs. (e) and (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1696, 1699, 1703a of this title.

The Secretary shall provide enrollees with such personal, travel, and leave allowances, and such quarters, subsistence, transportation, equipment, clothing, recreational services, and other expenses as he may deem necessary or appropriate to their needs. For the fiscal year ending September 30, 1983, personal allowances shall be established at a rate not to exceed $65 per month during the first six months of an enrollee's participation in the program and not to exceed $110 per month thereafter, except that allowances in excess of $65 per month, but not exceeding $110 per month, may be provided from the beginning of an enrollee's participation if it is expected to be of less than six months’ duration and the Secretary is authorized to pay personal allowances in excess of the rates specified in this subsection in unusual circumstances as determined by him. Such allowances shall be graduated up to the maximum so as to encourage continued participation in the program, achievement and the best use by the enrollee of the funds so provided and shall be subject to reduction in appropriate cases as a disciplinary measure. To the degree reasonable, enrollees shall be required to meet or contribute to costs associated with their individual comfort and enjoyment from their personal allowances.

The Secretary shall prescribe rules governing the accrual of leave by enrollees. Except in the case of emergency, he shall in no event assume transportation costs connected with leave of any enrollee who has not completed at least six months’ service in the Job Corps.

The Secretary may provide each former enrollee upon termination, a readjustment allowance at a rate not to exceed, for the fiscal year ending September 30, 1983, $110 for each month of satisfactory participation in the Job Corps. No enrollee shall be entitled to a readjustment allowance unless he has remained in the program at least 90 days, except in unusual circumstances as determined by the Secretary. The Secretary may, from time to time, advance to or on behalf of an enrollee such portions of his readjustment allowances as the Secretary deems necessary to meet extraordinary financial obligations incurred by that enrollee. The Secretary is authorized, pursuant to rules or regulations, to reduce the amount of an enrollee's readjustment allowance as a penalty for misconduct during participation in the Job Corps. In the event of an enrollee's death during his period of service, the amount of any unpaid readjustment allowance shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of section 5582 of title 5.

Such portion of the readjustment allowance as prescribed by the Secretary may be paid monthly during the period of service of the enrollee directly to a spouse or child of an enrollee, or to any other relative who draws substantial support from the enrollee, and any amount so paid shall be supplemented by the payment of an equal amount by the Secretary.

In addition to child care assistance provided under section 1698(e) of this title, the Secretary shall provide enrollees who otherwise could not participate in the Job Corps with allowances to pay for child care costs, such as food, clothing, and health care for the child. Allowances under this subsection may only be provided during the first 2 months of an enrollee's participation in the program.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §429, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1374; Pub. L. 103–239, title VII, §731, May 4, 1994, 108 Stat. 607; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(11), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

1996—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “and shall be in an amount that does not exceed the maximum amount that may be provided by the State pursuant to section 602(g)(1)(C) of title 42” before period at end.

1994—Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 103–239 added subsec. (e).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Within Job Corps centers standards of conduct shall be provided and stringently enforced. If violations are committed by enrollees, dismissal from the Corps or transfers to other locations shall be made if it is determined that their retention in the Corps, or in the particular center, will jeopardize the enforcement of such standards or diminish the opportunities of other enrollees.

To promote the proper moral and disciplinary conditions in the Job Corps, the directors of Job Corps centers shall take appropriate disciplinary measures against enrollees, including dismissal from the Job Corps, subject to expeditious appeal to the Secretary.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §430, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1375.)

The Secretary shall encourage and cooperate in activities to establish a mutually beneficial relationship between Job Corps centers and nearby communities. These activities shall include the establishment of community advisory councils to provide a mechanism for joint discussion of common problems and for planning programs of mutual interest. Youth shall be represented on the advisory council and separate youth councils may be established composed of enrollees and young people from the communities. The Secretary shall assure that each center is operated with a view to achieving, so far as possible, objectives which shall include—

(1) giving community officials appropriate advance notice of changes in center rules, procedures, or activities that may affect or be of interest to the community;

(2) affording the community a meaningful voice in center affairs of direct concern to it, including policies governing the issuance and terms of passes to enrollees;

(3) providing center officials with full and rapid access to relevant community groups and agencies, including law enforcement agencies and agencies which work with young people in the community;

(4) encouraging the fullest practicable participation of enrollees in programs for community improvement or betterment, with appropriate advance consultation with business, labor, professional, and other interested community groups;

(5) arranging recreational, athletic, or similar events in which enrollees and local residents may participate together;

(6) providing community residents with opportunities to work with enrollees directly as part-time instructors, tutors, or advisers, either in the center or in the community;

(7) developing, where feasible, job or career opportunities for enrollees in the community; and

(8) promoting interchanges of information and techniques among, and cooperative projects involving, the center and community schools and libraries, educational institutions, agencies serving young people and recipients of funds under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §431, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1375.)

This section is referred to in section 1703 of this title.

The Secretary shall counsel and test each enrollee at regular intervals to measure progress in educational and vocational programs.

The Secretary shall counsel and test enrollees prior to their scheduled terminations to determine their capabilities and shall make every effort to place them in jobs in the vocation for which they are trained or to assist them in attaining further training or education. In placing enrollees in jobs, the Secretary shall utilize the public employment service system to the fullest extent possible.

The Secretary shall determine the status and progress of enrollees scheduled for termination and make every effort to assure that their needs for further education, training, and counseling are met.

The Secretary shall arrange for the readjustment allowance to be paid to former enrollees (who have not already found employment) at the State employment service office nearest the home of any such former enrollee who is returning home, or at the nearest such office where the former enrollee has indicated an intent to reside. If the Secretary uses any other public agency or private organization in lieu of the public employment service system, the Secretary shall arrange for that organization or agency to pay the readjustment allowance.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §432, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1376.)

(1) The Secretary is authorized to undertake experimental, research, or demonstration projects to develop or test ways of better using facilities, encouraging a more rapid adjustment of enrollees to community life that will permit a reduction in their period of enrollment, reducing transportation and support costs, or otherwise promoting greater efficiency and effectiveness in the program. These projects shall include one or more projects providing youth with education, training, and other supportive services on a combined residential and nonresidential basis.

(2) The Secretary is authorized to undertake one or more pilot projects designed to determine the value of Job Corps participation for young adults aged 22 to 24, inclusive.

(3) The Secretary is authorized to undertake one or more pilot projects designed to involve youth who have a history of serious and violent behavior against persons or property, repetitive delinquent acts, narcotics addiction, or other behavioral aberrations.

(4) Projects under this subsection shall be developed after appropriate consultation with other Federal or State agencies conducting similar or related programs or projects and with the administrative entity in the communities where the projects will be carried out. They may be undertaken jointly with other Federal or federally assisted programs, and funds otherwise available for activities under those programs shall, with the consent of the head of any agency concerned, be available for projects under this section to the extent they include the same or substantially similar activities. The Secretary is authorized to waive any provision of this part which the Secretary finds would prevent the carrying out of elements of projects under this subsection essential to a determination of their feasibility and usefulness. The Secretary shall, in the annual report of the Secretary, report to the Congress concerning the actions taken under this section, including a full description of progress made in connection with combined residential and nonresidential projects.

In order to determine whether upgraded vocational education schools could eliminate or substantially reduce the school dropout problem, and to demonstrate how communities could make maximum use of existing educational and training facilities, the Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Education, is authorized to enter into one or more agreements with State educational agencies to pay the cost of establishing and operating model community vocational education schools and skill centers.

(1) The Secretary, through the Job Corps and activities authorized under sections 1732 and 1733 of this title, shall develop and implement activities designed to disseminate information gained from Job Corps program experience which may be of use in the innovation and improvement of related programs. To carry out this purpose, the Secretary may enter into appropriate arrangements with any Federal or State agency.

(2) The Secretary is authorized to develop Job Corps programs to test at various centers the efficacy of selected education or training activities authorized under this chapter or any other Act and to appropriately disseminate the results of such tests. To carry out this purpose, the Secretary may enter into appropriate arrangements with any Federal or State agency.

The Secretary is authorized to enter into appropriate arrangements with the Secretary of Defense for the development of pilot projects at Job Corps centers to prepare youth to qualify for military service. In the event that the Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of Defense agree that such pilot projects should be expanded into permanent programs, the Secretary may establish such permanent programs within the Job Corps, if the Secretary of Defense agrees (1) to provide 50 percent of the costs attributable to such permanent programs, and (2) to reimburse the Secretary of Labor for an additional amount if more than 50 percent of the enrollees in such programs become members of the Armed Forces. Such additional amount shall be equal to a percentage of such costs which is the percentage by which more than 50 percent of such enrollees become such members. In addition to the provision of funds, such reimbursement may include the provision of equipment, materials, transportation, technical assistance, or other assistance, as specified by the Secretary.

In order to determine whether community participation as required under section 1701 of this title can be improved through the closer involvement of community-based organizations, the Secretary is authorized to undertake one or more pilot projects utilizing community-based organizations of demonstrated effectiveness for Job Corps center operation. For purposes of such pilot projects, the term “community-based organizations” may include nonprofit educational foundations organized on a State or local basis.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §433, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1376; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(13), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

1992—Subsec. (c)(1). Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “sections 1732 and 1733” for “sections 1732 and 1735”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Subject to the availability of appropriations therefor, the Secretary is authorized, in accordance with section 1697 of this title, to provide services and facilities in accordance with this section to eligible homeless individuals and their families at Job Corps centers. Job Corps centers serving homeless individuals and their families shall—

(1) be residential;

(2) be operated under a project agreement with one or more State or local agencies that complies with subsection (b) of this section;

(3) provide room and board for enrollees and their dependents and child care to the extent practicable for dependent children of enrollees; and

(4) provide enrollees—

(A) program activities that include both activities to sustain the operation of the center and regular Job Corps activities required under section 1698 of this title; and

(B) the benefits and services given to any other enrollee under this part.

Each Job Corps center providing services and facilities to homeless individuals under this section shall provide such services and facilities under a project agreement with one or more State or local agencies that—

(1) requires such State and local agencies to provide, in the aggregate, not less than 50 percent of the cost of such services and facilities;

(2) contains provisions to ensure that enrollees and their families are effectively assisted in obtaining all necessary health, education, and social services provided by existing Federal, State, and local programs in such State or locality;

(3) require such State and local agencies to provide such transitional assistance, including housing, necessary to effect successful job placements for enrollees; and

(4) contains or is accompanied by such other information and assurances as the Secretary may require.

To become an enrollee in the Job Corps at a center established providing services and facilities to homeless individuals under this section, an individual—

(1) shall qualify as a homeless individual under section 11302 of title 42;

(2) shall have not attained the age of 25 at the time of enrollment; and

(3) shall meet the requirements of paragraphs (2) through (5) of section 1693 of this title.

The Secretary shall prescribe special screening standards under sections 1694 and 1695 of this title to identify and select enrollees for purposes of this section.

The Secretary shall, pursuant to section 1732(d) of this title, conduct evaluations of the centers providing services and facilities to homeless individuals under this section. The Secretary shall submit to the Congress a report on the results of such evaluations, together with the Secretary's recommendations concerning such centers, not later than 3 years after November 29, 1990.

As used in the 1 section, the term “family” may include, at a minimum, dependent children, and the brothers, sisters and parents of those dependent children.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §433A, as added Pub. L. 101–645, title VI, §622, Nov. 29, 1990, 104 Stat. 4744; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(14), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

1992—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(14)(A), struck out “may be over the maximum age permitted by section 1693(1) of this title, but” before “shall have not attained”.

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(14)(B), substituted “section 1732(d)” for “section 1734”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “this”.

The Secretary is authorized to make use of advisory committees in connection with the operation of the Job Corps, and the operation of Job Corps centers, whenever the Secretary determines that the availability of outside advice and counsel on a regular basis would be of substantial benefit in identifying and overcoming problems, in planning program or center development, or in strengthening relationships between the Job Corps and agencies, institutions, or groups engaged in related activities.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §434, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1378.)

The Secretary shall take action to facilitate the effective participation of States in the Job Corps programs, including consultation with appropriate State agencies on matters pertaining to the enforcement of applicable State laws, standards of enrollee conduct and discipline, development of meaningful work experience and other activities for enrollees, and coordination with State-operated programs.

The Secretary is authorized to enter into agreements with States to assist in the operation or administration of State-operated programs which carry out the purpose of this part. The Secretary is authorized, pursuant to regulations, to pay part or all of the costs of such programs to the extent such costs are attributable to carrying out the purpose of this part.

No Job Corps center or other similar facility designed to carry out the purpose of this part shall be established within a State unless a notice setting forth such proposed establishment has been submitted to the Governor, and the establishment has not been disapproved by the Governor within thirty days of such submission.

All property which would otherwise be under exclusive Federal legislative jurisdiction shall be under concurrent jurisdiction with the appropriate State and locality with respect to criminal law enforcement as long as a Job Corps center is operated on such property.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §435, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1378.)

Except as otherwise provided in this subsection and in section 8143(a) of title 5, enrollees in the Job Corps shall not be considered Federal employees and shall not be subject to the provisions of law relating to Federal employment, including those regarding hours of work, rates of compensation, leave, unemployment compensation, and Federal employee benefits:

(1) For purposes of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 1 et seq.) and title II of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 401 et seq.) enrollees shall be deemed employees of the United States and any service performed by an individual as an enrollee shall be deemed to be performed in the employ of the United States.

(2) For purposes of subchapter I of chapter 81 of title 5 (relating to compensation to Federal employees for work injuries), enrollees shall be deemed civil employees of the United States within the meaning of the term “employee” as defined in section 8101 of title 5 and the provisions of that subchapter shall apply except—

(A) the term “performance of duty” shall not include any act of an enrollee while absent from the assigned post of duty of such enrollee, except while participating in an activity (including an activity while on pass or during travel to or from such post or duty) authorized by or under the direction and supervision of the Job Corps;

(B) in computing compensation benefits for disability or death, the monthly pay of an enrollee shall be deemed that received under the entrance salary for a grade GS–2 employee, and sections 1 8113(a) and (b) of title 5 shall apply to enrollees; and

(C) compensation for disability shall not begin to accrue until the day following the date on which the injured enrollee is terminated.

(3) For purposes of the Federal tort claims provisions in title 28, enrollees shall be considered employees of the Government.

Whenever the Secretary finds a claim for damages to persons or property resulting from the operation of the Job Corps to be a proper charge against the United States, and it is not cognizable under section 2672 of title 28, the Secretary is authorized to adjust and settle it in an amount not exceeding $1,500.

Personnel of the uniformed services who are detailed or assigned to duty in the performance of agreements made by the Secretary for the support of the Corps shall not be counted in computing strength under any law limiting the strength of such services or in computing the percentage authorized by law for any grade in such services.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §436, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1378; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(15), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(1), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title II of the Social Security Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§401 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Federal tort claim provisions in title 28, referred to in subsec. (a)(3), are the provisions of the Federal Tort Claims Act, which is classified generally to section 1346(b) and to chapter 171 (§2671 et seq.) of Title 28, Judiciary and Judicial Procedure.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–367 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “section”.

The Secretary shall immediately take steps to achieve an enrollment of 50 percent women in the Job Corps consistent with (1) efficiency and economy in the operation of the program, (2) sound administrative practice, and (3) the socioeconomic, educational, and training needs of the population to be served.

The Secretary shall assure that all studies, evaluations, proposals, and data produced or developed with Federal funds in the course of the Job Corps program shall become the property of the United States.

Transactions conducted by a private for-profit contractor or a nonprofit contractor in connection with the contractor's operation of a Job Corps Center, program, or activity shall not be considered as generating gross receipts. Such contractors shall not be liable, directly or indirectly, to any State or subdivision thereof (nor to any person acting on behalf thereof) for any gross receipts taxes, business privilege taxes measured by gross receipts, or any similar taxes imposed on, or measured by, gross receipts in connection with any payments made to or by such contractor for operating a Job Corps Center, program, or activity. Such contractors shall not be liable to any State or subdivision thereof to collect or pay any sales, excise, use, or similar tax imposed upon the sale to or use by such contractors of any property, service, or other item in connection with the operation of a Job Corps Center, program, or activity.

The Secretary shall provide all Job Corps contractors with an equitable and negotiated management fee of not less than 1 percent of the contract amount.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §437, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1379; Pub. L. 99–496, §12, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1264; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §402(f), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1077.)

1992—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–367 added subsec. (d).

1986—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 99–496 amended subsec. (c) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (c) read as follows: “Transactions conducted by private for-profit contractors for Job Corps centers which they are operating on behalf of the Secretary shall not be considered as generating gross receipts.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

The Secretary is authorized to—

(1) disseminate, with regard to the provisions of section 3204 of title 39, data and information in such forms as the Secretary shall deem appropriate, to public agencies, private organizations, and the general public;

(2) collect or compromise all obligations to or held by the Secretary and all legal or equitable rights accruing to the Secretary in connection with the payment of obligations until such time as such obligations may be referred to the Attorney General for suit or collection; and

(3) expend funds made available for purposes of this part—

(A) for printing and binding, in accordance with applicable law and regulation; and

(B) without regard to any other law or regulation, for rent of buildings and space in buildings and for repair, alteration, and improvement of buildings and space in buildings rented by the Secretary, except that the Secretary shall not utilize the authority contained in this subparagraph—

(i) except when necessary to obtain an item, service, or facility, which is required in the proper administration of this part, and which otherwise could not be obtained, or could not be obtained in the quantity or quality needed, or at the time, in the form or under the conditions in which it is needed; and

(ii) prior to having given written notification to the Administrator of General Services (if the exercise of such authority would affect an activity which otherwise would be under the jurisdiction of the General Services Administration) of the Secretary's intention to exercise such authority, the item, service, or facility with respect to which such authority is proposed to be exercised, and the reasons and justifications for the exercise of such authority.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §438, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1379.)

The Secretary is authorized to accept on behalf of the Job Corps or individual Job Corps centers charitable donations of cash or other assistance, including but not limited to, equipment and materials, if such donations are available for appropriate use for the purposes set forth in this part.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §439, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1380.)

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title; title 38 section 4103A.

(1) The Secretary shall conduct, directly or through grant or contract, programs to meet the employment and training needs of service-connected disabled veterans, veterans of the Vietnam era, and veterans who are recently separated from military service.

(2) Programs supported under this part may be conducted through public agencies and private nonprofit organizations, including recipients under other provisions of this chapter that the Secretary determines have an understanding of the unemployment problems of such veterans, familiarity with the area to be served, and the capability to administer effectively a program of employment and training assistance for such veterans.

(3) Programs supported under this part shall include, but not be limited to—

(A) activities to enhance services provided veterans by other providers of employment and training services funded by Federal, State, or local government;

(B) activities to provide employment and training services to such veterans not adequately provided by other public employment and training service providers; and

(C) outreach and public information activities to develop and promote maximum job and job training opportunities for such veterans and to inform such veterans about employment, jobtraining, on-the-job training and educational opportunities under this chapter, under title 38, and under other provisions of law.

(1) The Secretary shall administer programs supported under this part through the Assistant Secretary for Veterans’ Employment and Training.

(2) In carrying out responsibilities under this part, the Assistant Secretary for Veterans’ Employment and Training shall—

(A) be responsible for the awarding of grants and the distribution of funds under this part and for the establishment of appropriate fiscal controls, accountability, and program-performance standards for grant recipients under this part; and

(B) consult with the Secretary of Veterans Affairs and take steps to ensure that programs supported under this part are coordinated, to the maximum extent feasible, with related programs and activities conducted under title 38, including programs and activities conducted under subchapter II of chapter 77 of such title, chapters 31 and 34 of such title, and sections 1712A, 1720A, 3687, and 4103A of such title.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §441, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1380; Pub. L. 99–619, §2(b)(3), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3491; Pub. L. 102–54, §13(k)(2)(C), June 13, 1991, 105 Stat. 277; Pub. L. 103–446, title XII, §1203(c)(2), Nov. 2, 1994, 108 Stat. 4690.)

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 103–446 substituted “subchapter II of chapter 77” for “subchapter IV of chapter 3” and “sections 1712A, 1720A, 3687, and 4103A of such title” for “sections 612A, 620A, 1787, and 2003A of such title”.

1991—Subsec. (b)(2)(B). Pub. L. 102–54 substituted “Secretary of Veterans Affairs” for “Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs”.

1986—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–619 substituted “Assistant Secretary for Veterans’ Employment and Training” for “Assistant Secretary for Veterans’ Employment”.

Pub. L. 100–689, title IV, §402, Nov. 18, 1988, 100 Stat. 4178, provided that:

“(a)

“(1) to apply for services and benefits for which they are eligible as veterans, dislocated workers, or unemployed persons;

“(2) to obtain resolution of questions and problems relating to such services and benefit[s]; and

“(3) to initiate any authorized administrative appeals of determinations or other actions relating to such services and benefits.

“(b)

“(A) Information on services and benefits referred to in subsection (d).

“(B) All application forms and related forms necessary for individuals to apply for such services and to claim such benefits.

“(C) Assistance in resolving questions and problems relating to receipt of such services and benefits.

“(D) Assistance in contacting other Federal Government offices and State offices where such services or benefits are provided or administered.

“(2) The memorandum of understanding entered into pursuant to paragraph (1) shall include a provision for the periodic evaluation, by the Secretary of Labor and the Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs, of the implementation of their respective responsibilities under such memorandum.

“(c)

“(d)

“(1) Employment assistance under—

“(A) part C of title IV of the Job Training Partnership Act (96 Stat. 1380; 29 U.S.C. 1721 et seq.); and

“(B) the Veterans’ Job Training Act (97 Stat. 443; 29 U.S.C. 1721 note).

“(2) Employment and training assistance for dislocated workers under title III of the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1651 et seq.).

“(3) Employment assistance and unemployment compensation under the trade adjustment assistance program provided in chapter 2 of title II of the Trade Act of 1974 (29 U.S.C. 2271 et seq.) [19 U.S.C. 2271 et seq.] and under any other program administered by the Employment and Training Administration of the Department of Labor.

“(4) Educational assistance under—

“(A) the Adult Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.); and

“(B) chapters 30, 31, 32, 34, and 35 of title 38, United States Code, and chapter 106 of title 10, United States Code.

“(5) Certification of a veteran as a member of a targeted group eligible for the targeted jobs credit determined under section 51 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 [26 U.S.C. 51].

“(e)

Pub. L. 100–323, §12, May 20, 1988, 102 Stat. 570, provided that: “The Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs shall provide for a study, based on valid statistical samplings, of the implementation of the Veterans’ Job Training Act [Pub. L. 98–77, set out as a note below] and shall transmit, not later than one year after the date of the enactment of this Act [May 20, 1988], a report to the Committees on Veterans’ Affairs of the Senate and the House of Representatives containing the findings and conclusions of such study, including, to the extent feasible—

“(1) a listing, by regional office and by State, of the number of veterans placed in a program of job training under the Veterans’ Job Training Act and the percentage that this number represents of the total number of veterans certified (not including renewal of certifications), by regional office and by State, as eligible for participation under such Act;

“(2) a description, by regional office and by State, of the demographic nature (including race, sex, age, educational level, service-connected disability status, income before placement, and income after placement) of veterans placed in a program of job training under such Act;

“(3) a description, by regional office and by State, of the demographic nature (including, race, sex, age, educational level, service-connected disability status, and income) of veterans certified as eligible for participation under such Act but not placed in a job training program;

“(4) an analysis of the reasons that veterans certified as eligible for participation have not been placed in a program of job training under such Act;

“(5) a listing, by regional office and by State, of the number of veterans who were certified as eligible for participation under such Act and were not placed in a program of job training under such Act but were later placed in another job training program or employment;

“(6) a description, by regional office and by State, of the rate at which veterans have discontinued participation in, without completing, a program of job training under such Act, with a separate rate stated for those who discontinued within 3 months after beginning such a program, those who discontinued within 3 to 6 months after such beginning, and those who discontinued within 6 to 9 months after such beginning;

“(7) an analysis of the major reasons for veterans failing to complete such a training program;

“(8) a ranking of the twenty-five categories of employment (by types of business or industry and trade) for which programs of job training have most frequently been denied approval under such Act, with such ranking being made on the basis of the number of denials for each such category; and

“(9) a ranking of the twenty-five categories of employment (by types of business or industry and trade) for which veterans have most frequently received employment as a result of a program of job training under such Act, with such ranking being made on the basis of the number of jobs provided in each such category.”

Pub. L. 98–77, Aug. 15, 1983, 97 Stat. 443, as amended by Pub. L. 98–160, title VII, §704, Nov. 21, 1983, 97 Stat. 1011; Pub. L. 98–543, title II, §212, Oct. 24, 1984, 98 Stat. 2744; Pub. L. 99–108, §4, Sept. 30, 1985, 99 Stat. 481; Pub. L. 99–238, title II, §201(a)(1), (b)–(e), Jan. 13, 1986, 99 Stat. 1767, 1768; Pub. L. 100–77, title IX, §901, July 22, 1987, 101 Stat. 538; Pub. L. 100–227, title II, §201, Dec. 31, 1987, 101 Stat. 1555; Pub. L. 100–323, §§11(a)(1), (2), (3)(B), (4), (b)–(f), 15(b)(2), (c)(2), May 20, 1988, 102 Stat. 567–570, 574; Pub. L. 102–40, title IV, §402(d)(2), May 7, 1991, 105 Stat. 239; Pub. L. 102–83, §5(c)(2), Aug. 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 406, provided that:

“(1) The term ‘Administrator’ means the Administrator of Veterans’ Affairs.

“(2) The term ‘Secretary’ means the Secretary of Labor.

“(3) The terms ‘veteran’, ‘Korean conflict’, ‘compensation’, ‘service-connected’, ‘State’, ‘active military, naval, or air service’, and ‘Vietnam era’, have the meanings given such terms in paragraphs (2), (9), (13), (16), (20), (24), and (29), respectively, of section 101 of title 38, United States Code.

“(b) The Secretary shall carry out the Secretary's responsibilities under this Act through the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Veterans’ Employment and Training established under section 4102A of title 38, United States Code.

“(A) is unemployed at the time of applying for participation in a program under this Act; and

“(B) has been unemployed for at least 10 of the 15 weeks immediately preceding the date of such veteran's application for participation in a program under this Act.

“(2) For purposes of paragraph (1), the term ‘Korean conflict or Vietnam-era veteran’ means a veteran—

“(A) who served in the active military, naval, or air service for a period of more than one hundred and eighty days, any part of which was during the Korean conflict or the Vietnam era; or

“(B) who served in the active military, naval, or air service during the Korean conflict or the Vietnam era and—

“(i) was discharged or released therefrom for a service-connected disability; or

“(ii) is entitled to compensation (or but for the receipt of retirement pay would be entitled to compensation).

“(3) For purposes of paragraph (1), a veteran shall be considered to be unemployed during any period the veteran is without a job and wants and is available for work.

“(b)(1) A veteran who desires to participate in a program of job training under this Act shall submit to the Administrator an application for participation in such a program. Such an application—

“(A) shall include a certification by the veteran that the veteran is unemployed and meets the other criteria for eligibility prescribed by subsection (a); and

“(B) shall be in such form and contain such additional information as the Administrator may prescribe.

“(2)(A) Subject to subparagraph (B), the Administrator shall approve an application by a veteran for participation in a program of job training under this Act unless the Administrator finds that the veteran is not eligible to participate in a program of job training under this Act.

“(B) The Administrator may withhold approval of an application of a veteran under this Act if the Administrator determines that, because of limited funds available for the purpose of making payments to employers under this Act, it is necessary to limit the number of participants in programs under this Act.

“(3)(A) Subject to section 14(c), the Administrator shall certify as eligible for participation under this Act a veteran whose application is approved under this subsection and shall furnish the veteran with a certificate of that veteran's eligibility for presentation to an employer offering a program of job training under this Act. Any such certificate shall expire 90 days after it is furnished to the veteran. The date on which a certificate is furnished to a veteran under this paragraph shall be stated on the certificate.

“(B) A certificate furnished under this paragraph may, upon the veteran's application, be renewed in accordance with the terms and conditions of subparagraph (A).

“(c) The maximum period of training for which assistance may be provided on behalf of a veteran under this Act is—

“(1) fifteen months in the case of—

“(A) a veteran with a service-connected disability rated at 30 percent or more; or

“(B) a veteran with a service-connected disability rated at 10 percent or 20 percent who has been determined under section 3106 of title 38, United States Code, to have a serious employment handicap; and

“(2) nine months in the case of any other veteran.

“(2) A program of job training providing training for a period of at least three but less than six months may be approved if the Administrator determines (in accordance with standards which the Administrator shall prescribe) that the purpose of this Act would be met through that program.

“(b) Subject to section 10 and the other provisions of this Act, a veteran who has been approved for participation in a program of job training under this Act and has a current certificate of eligibility for such participation may enter a program of job training that has been approved under section 7 and that is offered to the veteran by the employer.

“(2) Except as provided in subsection (b), the Administrator shall approve a proposed program of job training of an employer unless the Administrator determines that the application does not contain a certification and other information meeting the requirements established under this Act or that withholding of approval is warranted under subsection (g).

“(b) The Administrator may not approve a program of job training—

“(1) for employment which consists of seasonal, intermittent, or temporary jobs;

“(2) for employment under which commissions are the primary source of income;

“(3) for employment which involves political or religious activities;

“(4) for employment with any department, agency, instrumentality, or branch of the Federal Government (including the United States Postal Service and the Postal Rate Commission); or

“(5) if the training will not be carried out in a State.

“(c) An employer offering a program of job training that the employer desires to have approved for the purposes of this Act shall submit to the Administrator a written application for such approval. Such application shall be in such form as the Administrator shall prescribe.

“(d) An application under subsection (c) shall include a certification by the employer of the following:

“(1) That the employer is planning that, upon a veteran's completion of the program of job training, the employer will employ the veteran in a position for which the veteran has been trained and that the employer expects that such a position will be available on a stable and permanent basis to the veteran at the end of the training period.

“(2) That the wages and benefits to be paid to a veteran participating in the employer's program of job training will be not less than the wages and benefits normally paid to other employees participating in a comparable program of job training.

“(3) That the employment of a veteran under the program—

“(A) will not result in the displacement of currently employed workers (including partial displacement such as a reduction in the hours of nonovertime work, wages, or employment benefits); and

“(B) will not be in a job (i) while any other individual is on layoff from the same or any substantially equivalent job, or (ii) the opening for which was created as a result of the employer having terminated the employment of any regular employee or otherwise having reduced its work force with the intention of hiring a veteran in such job under this Act.

“(4) That the employer will not employ in the program of job training a veteran who is already qualified by training and experience for the job for which training is to be provided.

“(5) That the job which is the objective of the training program is one that involves significant training.

“(6) That the training content of the program is adequate, in light of the nature of the occupation for which training is to be provided and of comparable training opportunities in such occupation, to accomplish the training objective certified under clause (2) of subsection (e).

“(7) That each participating veteran will be employed full time in the program of job training.

“(8) That the training period under the proposed program is not longer than the training periods that employers in the community customarily require new employees to complete in order to become competent in the occupation or job for which training is to be provided.

“(9) That there are in the training establishment or place of employment such space, equipment, instructional material, and instructor personnel as needed to accomplish the training objective certified under clause (2) of subsection (e).

“(10) That the employer will keep records adequate to show the progress made by each veteran participating in the program and otherwise to demonstrate compliance with the requirements established under this Act.

“(11) That the employer will furnish each participating veteran, before the veteran's entry into training, with a copy of the employer's certification under this subsection and will obtain and retain the veteran's signed acknowledgment of having received such certification.

“(12) That, as applicable, the employer will provide each participating veteran with the full opportunity to participate in a personal interview pursuant to section 14(b)(1)(A) during the veteran's normal workday.

“(13) That the program meets such other criteria as the Administrator may determine are essential for the effective implementation of the program established by this Act.

“(e) A certification under subsection (d) shall include—

“(1) a statement indicating (A) the total number of hours of participation in the program of job training to be offered a veteran, (B) the length of the program of job training, and (C) the starting rate of wages to be paid to a participant in the program; and

“(2) a description of the training content of the program (including any agreement the employer has entered into with an educational institution under section 10) and of the objective of the training.

“(f)(1) Except as specified in paragraph (2), each matter required to be certified to in paragraphs (1) through (11) of subsection (d) shall be considered to be a requirement established under this Act.

“(2)(A) For the purposes of section 8(c), only matters required to be certified in paragraphs (1) through (10) of subsection (d) shall be so considered.

“(B) For the purposes of section 11, a matter required to be certified under paragraph (12) of subsection (d) shall also be so considered.

“(g) In accordance with regulations which the Administrator shall prescribe, the Administrator may withhold approval of an employer's proposed program of job training pending the outcome of an investigation under section 12 and, based on the outcome of such an investigation, may disapprove such program.

“(h) For the purposes of this section, approval of a program of apprenticeship or other on-job training for the purposes of section 3687 of title 38, United States Code, shall be considered to meet all requirements established under the provisions of this Act (other than subsections (b) and (d)(3)) for approval of a program of job training.

“(2) The total amount that may be paid to an employer on behalf of a veteran participating in a program of job training under this Act is $10,000.

“(3) In order to relieve financial burdens on business enterprises with relatively few numbers of employees, the Administrator may make payments under this Act on a monthly, rather than quarterly, basis to an employer with a number of employees less than a number which shall be specified in regulations which the Administrator shall prescribe for the purposes of this paragraph.

“(b) Payment may not be made to an employer for a period of training under this Act on behalf of a veteran until the Administrator has received—

“(1) from the veteran, a certification that the veteran was employed full time by the employer in a program of job training during such period; and

“(2) from the employer, a certification—

“(A) that the veteran was employed by the employer during that period and that the veteran's performance and progress during such period were satisfactory; and

“(B) of the number of hours worked by the veteran during that period.

With respect to the first such certification by an employer with respect to a veteran, the certification shall indicate the date on which the employment of the veteran began and the starting hourly rate of wages paid to the veteran (without regard to overtime or premium pay).

“(c)(1)(A) Whenever the Administrator finds that an overpayment under this Act has been made to an employer on behalf of a veteran as a result of a certification, or information contained in an application, submitted by an employer which was false in any material respect, the amount of such overpayment shall constitute a liability of the employer to the United States.

“(B) Whenever the Administrator finds that an employer has failed in any substantial respect to comply for a period of time with a requirement established under this Act (unless the employer's failure is the result of false or incomplete information provided by the veteran), each amount paid to the employer on behalf of a veteran for that period shall be considered to be an overpayment under this Act, and the amount of such overpayment shall constitute a liability of the employer to the United States.

“(2) Whenever the Administrator finds that an overpayment under this Act has been made to an employer on behalf of a veteran as a result of a certification by the veteran, or as a result of information provided to an employer or contained in an application submitted by the veteran, which was willfully or negligently false in any material respect, the amount of such overpayment shall constitute a liability of the veteran to the United States.

“(3) Any overpayment referred to in paragraph (1) or (2) may be recovered in the same manner as any other debt due the United States. Any overpayment recovered shall be credited to funds available to make payments under this Act. If there are no such funds, any overpayment recovered shall be deposited into the Treasury.

“(4) Any overpayment referred to in paragraph (1) or (2) may be waived, in whole or in part, in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in section 5302 of title 38, United States Code.

“(b)(1) If the Administrator determines that the rate of veterans’ successful completion of an employer's programs of job training previously approved by the Administrator for the purposes of this Act is disproportionately low because of deficiencies in the quality of such programs, the Administrator shall disapprove participation in such programs on the part of veterans who had not begun such participation on the date that the employer is notified of the disapproval. In determining whether any such rate is disproportionately low because of such deficiencies, the Administrator shall take into account appropriate data, including—

“(A) the quarterly data provided by the Secretary with respect to the number of veterans who receive counseling in connection with training under this Act, are referred to employers under this Act, participate in job training under this Act, complete such training or do not complete such training, and the reasons for noncompletion; and

“(B) data compiled through the particular employer's compliance surveys.

“(2) With respect to a disapproval under paragraph (1), the Administrator shall provide to the employer concerned the kind of statement, opportunity for hearing, and notice described in subsection (a).

“(3) A disapproval under paragraph (1) shall remain in effect until such time as the Administrator determines that adequate remedial action has been taken.

“(b) The Administrator may monitor employers and veterans participating in programs of job training under this Act to determine compliance with the requirements established under this Act.

“(c) The Administrator may investigate any matter the Administrator considers necessary to determine compliance with the requirements established under this Act. The investigations authorized by this subsection may include examining records (including making certified copies of records), questioning employees, and entering into any premises or onto any site where any part of a program of job training is conducted under this Act, or where any of the records of the employer offering or providing such program are kept.

“(d) The Administrator may administer functions under subsections (b) and (c) in accordance with an agreement between the Administrator and the Secretary providing for the administration of such subsections (or any portion of such subsections) by the Department of Labor. Under such an agreement, any entity of the Department of Labor specified in the agreement may administer such subsections, notwithstanding section 4(b).

“(2) A period of time referred to in paragraph (1) is the period of time beginning on the date on which the veteran enters into an approved program of job training of an employer for purposes of assistance under this Act and ending on the last date for which such assistance is payable.

“(b) Assistance may not be paid under this Act to an employer on behalf of an eligible veteran for any period if the employer receives for that period any other form of assistance on account of the training or employment of the veteran, including assistance under the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.) or a credit under section 44B of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 (26 U.S.C. 44B) (relating to credit for employment of certain new employees).

“(c) Assistance may not be paid under this Act on behalf of a veteran who has completed a program of job training under this Act.

“(2) The Administrator shall, after consultation with the Secretary, provide a program of job-readiness skills development and counseling services designed to assist veterans in need of such assistance in finding, applying for, and successfully participating in a suitable program of job training under this Act. As part of providing such services, the Administrator shall coordinate activities, to the extent practicable, with the readjustment counseling program described in section 1712A of title 38, United States Code. The Administrator shall advise veterans participating under this Act of the availability of such services and encourage them to request such services whenever appropriate.

“(b)(1) The Secretary shall provide for a program under which—

“(A) except as provided in paragraph (2), a disabled veteran's outreach program specialist appointed under section 4103A(a) of title 38, United States Code, is assigned as a case manager for each veteran participating in a program of job training under this Act;

“(B) the veteran has an in-person interview with the case manager not later than 60 days after entering into a program of training under this Act; and

“(C) periodic (not less frequent than monthly) contact is maintained with each such veteran for the purpose of (i) avoiding unnecessary termination of employment, (ii) referring the veteran to appropriate counseling, if necessary, (iii) facilitating the veteran's successful completion of such program, and (iv) following up with the employer and the veteran in order to determine the veteran's progress in the program and the outcome regarding the veteran's participation in and successful completion of the program.

“(2) No case manager shall be assigned pursuant to paragraph (1)(A)—

“(A) for a veteran if, on the basis of a recommendation made by a disabled veterans’ outreach program specialist, the Secretary determines that there is no need for a case manager for such veteran; or

“(B) in the case of the employees of an employer, if the Secretary determines that—

“(i) the employer has an appropriate and effective employee assistance program that is available to all veterans participating in the employer's programs of job training under this Act; or

“(ii) the rate of veterans’ successful completion of the employer's programs of job training under this Act, either cumulatively or during the previous program year, is 60 percent or higher.

“(3) The Secretary and the Administrator shall jointly provide, to the extent feasible—

“(A) a program of counseling or other services (to be provided pursuant to subchapter IV of chapter 3 [now subchapter II of chapter 77] of title 38, United States Code, and sections 1712A, 4103A, and 4104 of such title) designed to resolve difficulties that may be encountered by veterans during their training under this Act; and

“(B) a program of information services under which—

“(i) each veteran who enters into a program of job training under this Act and each employer participating under this Act is informed of the supportive services and resources available to the veteran (I) under clauses (A) and (B), (II) through Veterans’ Administration counseling and career-development activities (especially, in the case of a Vietnam-era veteran, readjustment counseling services under section 1712A of such title) and under part C of title IV [29 U.S.C. 1721 et seq.] of the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.), and (III) through other appropriate agencies in the community; and

“(ii) veterans and employers are encouraged to request such services whenever appropriate.

“(c) Before a veteran who voluntarily terminates from a program of job training under this Act or is involuntarily terminated from such program by the employer may be eligible to be provided with a further certificate, or renewal of certification, of eligibility for participation under this Act, such veteran must be provided by the Secretary, after consultation with the Administrator, with a case manager.

“(d) Payments made under this Act pursuant to contracts entered into for the provision of job-readiness skills development and counseling services under subsection (a)(2) may only be paid out of the same account used to make payments under section 3104(a)(7) of title 38, United States Code, and the amount paid out of such account in any fiscal year for such services shall not exceed an amount equal to 5 percent of the amount obligated to carry out this Act for such fiscal year, except that for fiscal year 1988 the amount shall not exceed 5 percent of the amount available to carry out this Act on October 1, 1987.

“(A) to inform veterans about the employment and job training opportunities available under this Act, under chapters 31, 34, 36, 41, and 42 of title 38, United States Code, and under other provisions of law; and

“(B) to inform private industry and business concerns (including small business concerns), public agencies and organizations, educational institutions, trade associations, and labor unions about the job training opportunities available under, and the advantages of participating in, the program established by this Act.

“(2) The Secretary, in consultation with the Administrator, shall promote the development of employment and job training opportunities for veterans by encouraging potential employers to make programs of job training under this Act available for eligible veterans, by advising other appropriate Federal departments and agencies of the program established by this Act, and by advising employers of applicable responsibilities under chapters 41 and 42 of title 38, United States Code, with respect to veterans.

“(b) The Administrator and the Secretary shall coordinate the outreach and public information program under subsection (a)(1), and job development activities under subsection (a)(2), with job counseling, placement, job development, and other services provided for under chapters 41 and 42 of title 38, United States Code, and with other similar services offered by other public agencies and organizations.

“(c)(1) The Administrator and the Secretary shall make available in regional and local offices of the Veterans’ Administration and the Department of Labor such personnel as are necessary to facilitate the effective implementation of this Act.

“(2) In carrying out the responsibilities of the Secretary under this Act, the Secretary shall make maximum use of the services of Directors and Assistant Directors for Veterans’ Employment and Training, disabled veterans’ outreach program specialists, and employees of local offices appointed pursuant to sections 4103, 4103A, and 4104 of title 38, United States Code. The Secretary shall also use such resources as are available under part C of title IV [29 U.S.C. 1721 et seq.] of the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.). To the extent that the Administrator withholds approval of veterans’ applications under this Act pursuant to section 5(b)(2)(B), the Secretary shall take steps to assist such veterans in taking advantage of opportunities that may be available to them under title III of that Act [29 U.S.C. 1651 et seq.] or under any other program carried out with funds provided by the Secretary.

“(d) The Secretary shall request and obtain from the Administrator of the Small Business Administration a list of small business concerns and shall, on a regular basis, update such list. Such list shall be used to identify and promote possible training and employment opportunities for veterans.

“(e) The Administrator and the Secretary shall assist veterans and employers desiring to participate under this Act in making application and completing necessary certifications.

“(f) The Secretary shall, on a not less frequent than quarterly basis, collect and compile from the heads of State employment services and Directors for Veterans’ Employment and Training for each State information available to such heads and Directors, and derived from programs carried out in their respective States, with respect to the numbers of veterans who receive counseling services pursuant to section 14, who are referred to employers participating under this Act, who participate in programs of job training under this Act, and who complete such programs, and the reasons for veterans’ noncompletion.

“(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, any funds appropriated under subsection (a) for any fiscal year which are obligated for the purpose of making payments under section 8 on behalf of a veteran (including funds so obligated which previously had been obligated for such purpose on behalf of another veteran and were thereafter deobligated) and are later deobligated shall immediately upon deobligation become available to the Administrator for obligation for such purpose. The further obligation of such funds by the Administrator for such purpose shall not be delayed, directly or indirectly, in any manner by any officer or employee in the executive branch.

“

“(1) on behalf of a veteran who initially applies for a program of job training under this Act after September 30, 1989; or

“(2) for any such program which begins after March 31, 1990.

“(b) Funds for the purpose of carrying out subsection (a) shall be derived only from amounts appropriated pursuant to the authorizations of appropriations in section 16. Not more than a total of $25,000,000 of amounts so appropriated for fiscal years 1984 and 1985 shall be available for that purpose.

[Amendment of Pub. L. 98–77, set out above, by Pub. L. 100–323 effective on 60th day after May 20, 1988, see section 16(b)(2) of Pub. L. 100–323, set out as a note under section 3104 of Title 38, Veterans’ Benefits.]

[Section 201(f) of Pub. L. 99–238 provided that:

[“(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), the amendments made by this section [amending Pub. L. 98–77 above] shall take effect on the date of the enactment of this Act [Jan. 13, 1986].

[“(2) The amendment made by subsection (e)(2) [amending section 17(a)(1) of Pub. L. 98–77 above] shall take effect on February 1, 1986.”]

For provisions requiring coordination of programs under section 3116(b) of Title 38, Veterans’ Benefits, with programs under the Veterans’ Job Training Act, Pub. L. 98–77, set out above, see section 202 of Pub. L. 99–238, set out as a note under section 3116 of Title 38.

Employment, training, and counseling programs for veterans, see sections 4100 et seq. and 4211 et seq. of Title 38, Veterans’ Benefits.

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title.

It is the purpose of this section to—

(1) improve access to employment and training opportunities for individuals with special needs;

(2) help alleviate skill shortages and enhance the competitiveness of the labor force;

(3) meet special training needs that are best addressed on a multistate or industry-wide basis; and

(4) encourage the participation and support of all segments of society to further the purposes of this chapter.

The Secretary may establish a system of, and award, special grants to eligible entities to carry out programs that are most appropriately administered at the national level.

Programs that are most appropriately administered at the national level include—

(1) partnership programs with national organizations with special expertise in developing, organizing, and administering employment and training programs at the national, State, and local levels, such as industry and labor associations, public interest groups, community-based organizations representative of groups that encounter special difficulties in the labor market, and other organizations with special knowledge or capabilities in education and training;

(2) programs that—

(A) address industry-wide skill shortages;

(B) meet training needs that are best addressed on a multistate basis; and

(C) further the goals of increasing the competitiveness of the United States labor force; and

(3) programs that require technical expertise available at the national level to serve specialized needs of particular client groups, including at-risk youth, offenders, individuals of limited-English language proficiency, individuals with disabilities, women, immigrants, single parents, substance abusers, displaced homemakers, youth, older individuals, veterans, school dropouts, public assistance recipients, and other individuals who the Secretary determines require special assistance.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §451, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1381; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(1), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1077.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to national partnership and special training programs for provisions relating to administration of multistate job training programs at the national level.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

It is the purpose of this section to assist the United States in expanding employment opportunities and ensuring access to such opportunities for all who desire such opportunities.

The Secretary shall establish a comprehensive program of training and employment research, utilizing the methods, techniques, and knowledge of the behavioral and social sciences and such other methods, techniques, and knowledge as will aid in the solution of the employment and training problems of the United States.

The program established under this section may include studies concerning—

(A) the development or improvement of Federal, State, local, and privately supported employment and training programs;

(B) labor market processes and outcomes, including improving workplace literacy;

(C) policies and programs to reduce unemployment and the relationships of the policies and programs with price stability and other national goals;

(D) productivity of labor;

(E) improved means of using projections of labor supply and demand, including occupational and skill requirements and areas of labor shortages at the national and subnational levels;

(F) methods of improving the wages and employment opportunities of low-skilled, disadvantaged, and dislocated workers, and workers with obsolete skills;

(G) methods of addressing the needs of at-risk populations, such as youth, homeless individuals and other dependent populations, older individuals, and other groups with multiple barriers to employment;

(H) methods of developing information on immigration, international trade and competition, technological change, and labor shortages; and

(I) methods of easing the transition from school to work, from transfer payment receipt to self-sufficiency, from one job to another, and from work to retirement.

The Secretary shall establish a program of pilot and demonstration programs for the purpose of developing and improving techniques and demonstrating the effectiveness of specialized methods in addressing employment and training needs. The Secretary may award grants and enter into contracts with entities to carry out the programs.

Such programs may include projects in such areas as—

(i) school-to-work transition;

(ii) new methods of imparting literacy skills and basic education;

(iii) new training techniques (including projects undertaken with the private sector);

(iv) methods to eliminate artificial barriers to employment;

(v) approaches that foster participation of groups that encounter special problems in the labor market (such as displaced homemakers, teen parents, welfare recipients, and older individuals);

(vi) processes that demonstrate effective methods for alleviating the adverse effects of dislocations and plant closings on workers and their communities; and

(vii) cooperative ventures among business, industry, labor, trade associations, community-based organizations or nonprofit organizations to develop new and cost-effective approaches to improving work force literacy.

Demonstration programs assisted under this subsection shall include a formal, rigorous evaluation component. Pilot programs assisted under this subsection shall include an appropriate evaluation component.

No demonstration program under this subsection shall be assisted under this section for a period of more than 7 years. No pilot program under this subsection shall be assisted under this section for a period of more than 3 years.

The Secretary shall provide for the continuing evaluation of programs conducted under this chapter, including the cost effectiveness of the program in achieving the purposes of this chapter.

The Secretary may conduct evaluations of other federally funded employment-related activities including programs administered under—

(i) the Wagner-Peyser Act (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.);

(ii) the National Apprenticeship Act (29 U.S.C. 50 et seq.);

(iii) the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3001 et seq.);

(iv) chapter 2 of title II of the Trade Act of 1974 (19 U.S.C. 2271 et seq.); and

(v) the Federal unemployment insurance program under titles III, IX, and XII of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 501 et seq., 1101 et seq., and 1321 et seq.).

Evaluations conducted under paragraph (1) shall utilize sound statistical methods and techniques of the behavioral and social sciences, including random assignment methodologies if feasible.

Such evaluations may include cost-benefit analysis of programs, the impact of the programs on community and participants, the extent to which programs meet the needs of various demographic groups, and the effectiveness of the delivery systems used by various programs.

The Secretary shall evaluate the effectiveness of programs authorized under this chapter with respect to—

(i) the statutory goals;

(ii) the performance standards established by the Secretary; and

(iii) the extent to which such programs enhance the employment and earnings of participants, reduce income support costs, improve the employment competencies of participants in comparison to comparable persons who did not participate in such programs, and, to the extent feasible, increase the level of total employment over the level that would have existed in the absence of such programs.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §452, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1381; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(2), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1078.)

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(B)(i), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

The National Apprenticeship Act, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(B)(ii), is act Aug. 16, 1937, ch. 663, 50 Stat. 664, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4C (§50 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 50 of this title and Tables.

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(B)(iii), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 35 (§3001 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Trade Act of 1974, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(B)(iv), is Pub. L. 93–618, Jan. 3, 1975, 88 Stat. 1978, as amended. Chapter 2 of title II of the Act is classified principally to part 2 (§2271 et seq.) of subchapter II of chapter 12 of Title 19, Customs Duties. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see References in Text note set out under section 2101 of Title 19 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (d)(1)(B)(v), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles III, IX, and XII of the Act are classified generally to subchapters III (§501 et seq.), IX (§1101 et seq.), and XII (§1321 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section related to employment and training research, including experimental, developmental, and demonstration projects to improve effectiveness of methods for meeting employment and training problems.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Pub. L. 105–78, title I, Nov. 13, 1997, 111 Stat. 1469, provided in part: “That the Secretary of Labor shall establish a workforce flexibility (work-flex) partnership demonstration program under which the Secretary shall authorize not more than six States, of which at least three States shall each have populations not in excess of 3,500,000, with a preference given to those States that have been designated Ed-Flex Partnership States under section 311(e) of Public Law 103–227 [20 U.S.C. 5891(e)], to waive any statutory or regulatory requirement applicable to service delivery areas or substate areas within the State under titles I–III of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1511 et seq., 1601 et seq., 1651 et seq.] (except for requirements relating to wage and labor standards, grievance procedures and judicial review, nondiscrimination, allotment of funds, and eligibility), and any of the statutory or regulatory requirements of sections 8–10 of the Wagner-Peyser Act [29 U.S.C. 49g–49i] (except for requirements relating to the provision of services to unemployment insurance claimants and veterans, and to universal access to basic labor exchange services without cost to job seekers), for a duration not to exceed the waiver period authorized under section 311(e) of Public Law 103–227, pursuant to a plan submitted by such States and approved by the Secretary for the provision of workforce employment and training activities in the States, which includes a description of the process by which service delivery areas and substate areas may apply for and have waivers approved by the State, the requirements of the Wagner-Peyser Act [29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.] to be waived, the outcomes to be achieved and other measures to be taken to ensure appropriate accountability for Federal funds.”

Similar provisions were contained in the following prior appropriations act:

Pub. L. 104–208, div. A, title I, §101(e) [title I], Sept. 30, 1996, 110 Stat. 3009–233, 3009–234.

This section is referred to in sections 1516, 1571, 1703, 1703a of this title.

The Secretary shall develop a national strategy for carrying out the activities described in subsection (b)(2) of this section and the replication of programs described in subsection (c) of this section, and shall ensure the implementation of the national strategy.

The Secretary shall establish a Capacity Building and Information and Dissemination Network (referred to in this section as the “Network”) to enhance the effectiveness of and to strengthen the caliber of services provided through programs authorized under this chapter and other Federal, State, and local employment and training programs.

The Secretary shall establish and maintain such Network—

(i) directly;

(ii) under an interagency agreement; or

(iii) through a grant or contract awarded on a competitive basis to a single entity, or to a system of entities coordinated by the Secretary, with appropriate expertise.

The Network shall—

(A) provide, coordinate, and support the development of, appropriate training, technical assistance, staff development, and other activities that will—

(i) enhance the skills, knowledge, and expertise of the personnel who staff employment and training and other closely related human service systems, including service providers;

(ii) improve the quality of services provided to individuals served under this chapter and other Federal employment and training programs and encourage integrated service delivery under such programs using—

(I) where cost effective, interactive communication systems and satellite technology; and

(II) where possible, staff trained in a variety of Federal human resource programs;

(iii) improve the planning, procurement, and contracting practices pursuant to this chapter; and

(iv) provide broad human services policy and planning training to—

(I) private industry council volunteers; and

(II) where appropriate, members of State human resource investment councils and other State councils;

(B) prepare and disseminate staff training curricula and materials, primarily using computer-based technologies, for employment and training professionals and support staff, that focus on enhancing staff competencies and professionalism, including instruction on the administrative requirements of this chapter, such as procurement and contracting standards and regulations; and

(C)(i) identify, develop, disseminate, and provide training in the techniques learned from, innovative and successful program models, materials, methods, and information, by using computer-based technologies for organizing a data base and dissemination and communication system for the Network, and establishing a computer-based communications and dissemination methodology to share information among employment and training personnel and institutions; and

(ii) in identifying such program models, ensure that consideration shall be given to—

(I) the size and scope of the program;

(II) the length of time that the program has been operating;

(III) the nature and reliability of measurable outcomes for the program;

(IV) the capacity of the sponsoring organization to provide the technical assistance necessary for States and service delivery areas to replicate the program; and

(V) the likelihood that the program will be successful in diverse economic, geographic, and cultural environments.

The Network may require cost-sharing to offset the actual costs of institute training, materials acquisition, or information dissemination. Any resulting income shall be used in accordance with section 1551(m) of this title.

The Secretary shall consult with the Secretaries of Education and Health and Human Services, as appropriate, to coordinate the activities of the Network with other relevant institutes, centers, laboratories, clearinghouses, or dissemination networks, such as the National Diffusion Network.

To the extent possible, the Network shall coordinate the activities of the Network with activities assisted under the replication grant program conducted under subsection (c) of this section.

The Secretary shall make competitive grants to public or private nonprofit organizations for technical assistance, and to States and service delivery areas for planning and program development, to promote the replication of employment and training programs that are successful in improving the employment prospects of populations served under this chapter and that are replicable on a large scale. In making such grants, the Secretary shall consider the recommendations described in paragraph (2)(B) of the review panel established under paragraph (2)(A) regarding such programs.

The Secretary shall establish a review panel comprised of not more than 6 individuals appointed by the Secretary who are recognized experts in the operation and evaluation of employment and training programs for economically disadvantaged youth and adults, and dislocated workers.

The review panel shall make recommendations to the Secretary regarding model programs that the panel considers likely to be successful in improving such employment prospects of populations served under this chapter and to be replicable on a large scale.

In recommending such programs the review panel shall use the considerations described in subsection (b)(2)(C)(ii) of this section.

The review panel shall meet not more than once each year to carry out the responsibilities described in this paragraph.

No member of such panel shall have a direct financial interest in or affiliation with a potential recipient of funds under the program authorized by this section.

Any public or private nonprofit organization desiring to receive such a grant to provide the technical assistance necessary for program replication may submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing or accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require.

Any State or service delivery area desiring to receive such a grant for planning and program development associated with a replication effort shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing or accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require.

Each application described in subparagraph (A) or (B) shall contain—

(i) a description of the program proposed for replication and available evidence of the success of the program in improving the employment prospects of economically disadvantaged youth and adults, and dislocated workers, within each such service delivery area; and

(ii) in the case of applications described in subparagraph (A), an assurance that the organization will enter into an agreement with the service delivery areas in which the program is to be replicated, to participate in the replication program.

In any 3-year period the Secretary shall not approve grants for the same replication activities in more than 10 States or communities. During such 3-year period, the results of such limited replication efforts shall be carefully evaluated and examined by the Secretary regarding the advisability of replicating the model program in more than 10 States or communities or for longer than 3 years.

The Secretary may waive the limitation set forth in subparagraph (A) for a program if immediate replication efforts on a larger scale are warranted by extensive evaluation of the program prior to designation as a model program under this subsection.

To the extent possible, the Secretary shall coordinate the activities assisted under the replication grant program conducted under this subsection with the activities of the Network under subsection (b) of this section. The Secretary shall ensure that information on the programs replicated under this subsection shall be available through the Network.

From the amounts reserved under section 1502(c)(2)(B)(ii)(III) of this title for each fiscal year to carry out this subsection, the Secretary may award grants to States for the purpose of assisting the States in carrying out the activities described in section 1602(c)(1)(A) of this title.

A State that receives an amount under section 1602(c)(1)(A) of this title for a fiscal year that is less than $500,000 shall be eligible to receive a grant under this subsection for the fiscal year.

The amount of a grant awarded to a State for a fiscal year under paragraph (1) shall not exceed the lesser of—

(A) $100,000; or

(B) the difference obtained by subtracting from $500,000 the amount received by the State for the fiscal year under section 1602(c)(1)(A) of this title.

In determining whether to award a grant to a State under paragraph (1), and in determining the amount of such a grant, the Secretary shall take into account the demonstrated need of the State to receive such a grant, as indicated by—

(A) the number of service delivery areas in the State; and

(B) the demonstrated insufficiency of resources of the State to administer State responsibilities under sections 1531 and 1532 of this title.

To be eligible to receive a grant under this subsection for a fiscal year, a State shall submit an application at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Secretary may require, including sufficient information to enable the Secretary to make the determinations described in paragraph (4).

The Secretary shall make available to carry out subsections (b) and (c) of this section any amounts reserved under section 1502(c)(2)(B)(ii)(III) of this title for a fiscal year and not expended to make grants under paragraph (1) for such year.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §453, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1382; Pub. L. 99–496, §13, Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1265; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(3), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1080.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to capacity building, information, dissemination, and replication activities for provisions relating to pilot projects meeting the employment needs of people.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–496 designated existing provisions as par. (1) and added par. (2).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1602, 1642, 1644, 1703 of this title; title 20 sections 5934, 6194.

The Secretary shall provide guidance and technical assistance, to States and service delivery areas, relating to the documentation required to verify the eligibility of participants under parts A, B, and C of subchapter II of this chapter, particularly the hard-to-serve individuals specified in section 1603(b) of this title and subsections (b) and (d) of section 1643 of this title. Such documentation shall, to the extent practicable, be uniform and standard.

The guidance provided pursuant to subsection (a) of this section, while maintaining program integrity, shall—

(1) limit the documentation burden to the minimum necessary to adequately verify such eligibility; and

(2) ensure, to the extent practicable, that the documentation requirements shall not discourage the participation of eligible individuals.

The guidance provided pursuant to subsection (a) of this section shall specifically address income eligibility, assessment, the determination regarding whether an individual is a hard-to-serve individual, and specific uniform or standardized documentation forms or procedures (including simplified standardized forms, automated intake procedures, and self-certification documents) and other documentation proxies (such as Job Corps eligibility forms).

The Secretary shall provide the guidance described in subsection (a) of this section not later than December 18, 1992.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §454, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(12), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

A prior section 1734, Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §454, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1383; Pub. L. 97–404, §4(c), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2026, related to evaluation of effectiveness of programs, activities, and projects authorized by this chapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(4), title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

1996—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “JOBS and” before “Job Corps eligibility forms).”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367 set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Congress finds that closer coordination and more effective use of resources among a variety of employment and training programs can be facilitated if the programs have common data elements and definitions.

The Secretaries of Labor, Education, and Health and Human Services, in consultation with other appropriate departments and with the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee, shall identify a core set of consistently defined data elements for employment and training programs, including those funded under this subchapter and subchapters II and III of this chapter, the Wagner-Peyser Act (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.), the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.), and title V of the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3056 et seq.).

The Secretary shall prepare and submit to Congress not later than January 1, 1994, a report listing recommended data elements and their definitions, and containing an analysis of the benefits of the adoption of the data elements and definitions.

The Secretary shall consult with experts and practitioners, at the Federal, State, and local levels and in the various program areas, in fulfilling the requirements of this section. The Secretary shall also consult with the General Accounting Office in fulfilling the requirements of this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §455, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §404(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(13), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of this Title 20 and Tables.

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended. Title V of the Act, known as the “Older Americans Community Services Employment Act”, is classified generally to subchapter IX (§3056 et seq.) of chapter 35 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 1735, Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §455, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1383, related to personnel training and technical assistance with respect to programs under this chapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(4), title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

1996—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 104–193 struck out “the JOBS program,” before “and title V”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Section effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §456, as added Pub. L. 99–496, §14(a), Oct. 16, 1986, 100 Stat. 1265, related to projects designed to serve populations with multiple barriers to employment.

Repeal effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

(1) From funds available under this part for each of the fiscal years 1992, 1993, 1994, and 1995, the Secretary shall use $1,500,000 in each such fiscal year to make grants to States to develop demonstration and exemplary programs to train and place women in nontraditional employment.

(2) The Secretary may award no more than 6 grants in each fiscal year.

In awarding grants pursuant to subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall consider—

(1) the level of coordination between this chapter and other resources available for training women in nontraditional employment;

(2) the extent of private sector involvement in the development and implementation of training programs under this chapter;

(3) the extent to which the initiatives proposed by a State supplement or build upon existing efforts in a State to train and place women in nontraditional employment;

(4) whether the proposed grant amount is sufficient to accomplish measurable goals;

(5) the extent to which a State is prepared to disseminate information on its demonstration training programs; and

(6) the extent to which a State is prepared to produce materials that allow for replication of such State's demonstration training programs.

(1) Each State receiving financial assistance pursuant to this section may use such funds to—

(A) award grants to service providers in the State to train and otherwise prepare women for nontraditional employment;

(B) award grants to service delivery areas that plan and demonstrate the ability to train, place, and retain women in nontraditional employment; and

(C) award grants to service delivery areas on the basis of exceptional performance in training, placing, and retaining women in nontraditional employment.

(2) Each State receiving financial assistance pursuant to subsection (c)(1)(A) of this section may only award grants to—

(A) community based organizations,

(B) educational institutions, or

(C) other service providers,

that have demonstrated success in occupational skills training.

(3) Each State receiving financial assistance under this section shall ensure, to the extent possible, that grants are awarded for training, placing, and retaining women in growth occupations with increased wage potential.

(4) Each State receiving financial assistance pursuant to subsection (c)(1)(B) or (c)(1)(C) of this section may only award grants to service delivery areas that have demonstrated ability or exceptional performance in training, placing, and retaining women in nontraditional employment that is not attributable or related to the activities of any service provider awarded funds under subsection (c)(1)(A) of this section.

In any fiscal year in which a State receives a grant pursuant to this section such State may retain an amount not to exceed 10 percent of such grant to—

(1) pay administrative costs,

(2) facilitate the coordination of statewide approaches to training and placing women in nontraditional employment, or

(3) provide technical assistance to service providers.

The Secretary shall provide for evaluation of the demonstration programs carried out pursuant to this section, including evaluation of the demonstration programs’ effectiveness in—

(1) preparing women for nontraditional employment, and

(2) developing and replicating approaches to train and place women in nontraditional employment.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §456, formerly §457, as added Pub. L. 102–235, §9, Dec. 12, 1991, 105 Stat. 1809; renumbered §456 and amended Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(5), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084.)

A prior section 456 of Pub. L. 97–300 was classified to section 1736 of this title, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §403(a)(4), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1084.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367, §403(a)(5)(B), substituted “Nontraditional employment demonstration program” for prior section catchline.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Section not to be construed to require, sanction, or authorize discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or age, see section 11 of Pub. L. 102–235, set out as a Construction of 1991 Amendment note under section 1501 of this title.

Section 10 of Pub. L. 102–235 provided that:

“(a)

“(1) the extent to which States and service delivery areas have succeeded in training, placing, and retaining women in nontraditional employment, together with a description of the efforts made and the results of such efforts; and

“(2) the effectiveness of the demonstration programs established by section 457 [now 456] of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1737] in developing and replicating approaches to train and place women in nontraditional employment, including a summary of activities performed by grant recipients under the demonstration programs authorized by section 457 [now 456] of the Job Training Partnership Act.

“(b)

This part is referred to in sections 1502, 1535 of this title.

The Secretary shall set aside, out of sums available to the Department for any fiscal year including sums available for this subchapter, such sums as may be necessary to maintain a comprehensive system of labor market information on a national, regional, State, local, or other appropriate basis, which shall be made publicly available in a timely fashion.

Funds available for purposes of this part shall also be available for purposes of section 1535 of this title (relating to State labor market information).

Notwithstanding any other provision of law, funds available to other Federal agencies for carrying out chapter 35 of title 44, the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], and the Act of June 6, 1933 (popularly known as the Wagner-Peyser Act) [29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.], may be made available by the head of each such agency to assist in carrying out the provisions of this part.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §461, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1383; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(5), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2488.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, known as the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

Act of June 6, 1933 (popularly known as the Wagner-Peyser Act), referred to in subsec. (c), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

1984—Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in section 1535 of this title.

The Secretary shall develop and maintain for the Nation, State, and local areas, current employment data by occupation and industry, based on the occupational employment statistics program, including selected sample surveys, and projections by the Bureau of Labor Statistics of employment and openings by occupation.

The Secretary shall maintain descriptions of job duties, training and education requirements, working conditions, and characteristics of occupations.

In carrying out the provisions of this section, the Secretary shall assure that—

(1) departmental data collecting and processing systems are consolidated to eliminate overlap and duplication;

(2) the criteria of chapter 35 of title 44 are met; and

(3) standards of statistical reliability and national standardized definitions of employment, unemployment, and industrial and occupational definitions are used.

(1) The Secretary is authorized to develop data for an annual statistical measure of labor market related economic hardship in the Nation. Among the factors to be considered in developing such a measure are unemployment, labor force participation, involuntary part-time employment, and full-time employment at wages less than the poverty level.

(2) The Secretary is authorized to develop and maintain, on national, State, local, and other appropriate bases, household budget data at different levels of living, including a level of adequacy, to reflect the differences of household living costs in regions and localities, both urban and rural.

(3) The Secretary shall publish, at least annually, a report relating labor force status to earnings and income.

The Secretary shall develop and maintain statistical data relating to permanent lay-offs and plant closings. The Secretary shall publish a report based upon such data, as soon as practicable, after the end of each calendar year. Among the data to be included are—

(1) the number of such closings;

(2) the number of workers displaced;

(3) the location of the affected facilities; and

(4) the types of industries involved.

(1) The Secretary shall develop, in coordination with the Secretary of Agriculture, statistical data relating to permanent dislocation of farmers and ranchers due to farm and ranch failures. Among the data to be included are—

(A) the number of such farm and ranch failures;

(B) the number of farmers and ranchers displaced;

(C) the location of the affected farms and ranches;

(D) the types of farms and ranches involved; and

(E) the identification of farm family members, including spouses, and farm workers working the equivalent of a full-time job on the farm who are dislocated by such farm and ranch failures.

(2) The Secretary shall publish a report based upon such data as soon as practicable after the end of each calendar year. Such report shall include a comparison of data contained therein with data currently used by the Bureau of Labor Statistics in determining the Nation's annual employment and unemployment rates and an analysis of whether farmers and ranchers are being adequately counted in such employment statistics. Such report shall also include an analysis of alternative methods for reducing the adverse effects of displacements of farmers and ranchers, not only on the individual farmer or rancher, but on the surrounding community.

(1) Taking into consideration research previously conducted by the National Commission for Employment Policy and other entities, the Commissioner of Labor Statistics, in cooperation with the States, shall determine appropriate procedures for establishing a nationwide database containing information on the quarterly earnings, establishment and industry affiliation, and geographic location of employment, for all individuals for whom such information is collected by the States.

(2) The Commissioner of Labor Statistics shall determine appropriate procedures for maintaining such information in a longitudinal manner and for making such information available for policy research or program evaluation purposes or both, while ensuring the confidentiality of information and the privacy of individuals.

(3) The Secretary shall prepare and submit to the Congress, not later than 12 months after September 7, 1992, a report that shall describe the costs and benefits, including savings on program followup surveys, of a nationwide database containing the information described in paragraph (1) and a schedule that would allow for the establishment of such a database.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §462, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1384; Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6306(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1540; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §405(a), title VII, §702(a)(16), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1085, 1112.)

1992—Subsec. (f)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §702(a)(16), inserted period at end.

Subsec. (g). Pub. L. 102–367, §405(a), added subsec. (g).

1988—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 100–418 added subsec. (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1502, 1652 of this title.

The Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Commerce, the Secretary of Defense, the Secretary of the Treasury, the Secretary of Education, the Secretary of Health and Human Services, and the Director of the Office of Management and Budget, through the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee established under section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2422], shall—

(1) review the need for and the application of all operating national data collection and processing systems related to labor market information in order to identify gaps, overlap, and duplications, and integrate at the national level currently available data sources in order to improve the management of information systems;

(2) maintain, assure timely review, and implement national standardized definitions with respect to terms, geographic areas, timing of collection, and coding measures related to labor market information, to the maximum extent feasible; and

(3) provide technical assistance to the States in the development, maintenance, and utilization of labor market/occupational supply and demand information systems and projections of supply and demand as described in section 1535 of this title, with special emphasis on assistance in the utilization of cost-efficient automated systems and improving access of individuals to career opportunities information in local and State labor markets.

The Secretary, in cooperation with the Secretary of Defense, shall assure the development of an integrated occupational supply and demand information system to be used by States and, in particular, in secondary and postsecondary educational institutions in order to assure young persons adequate information on career opportunities in the Armed Forces.

The Secretary and the Director of the Office of Management and Budget shall assure that, from the funds reserved for this part, sufficient funds are available to provide staff at the Federal level to assure the coordination functions described in this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §463, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1384; Pub. L. 97–404, §4(d), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2027; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(A), (D), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2488; Pub. L. 99–159, title VII, §713(b)(2), Nov. 22, 1985, 99 Stat. 907; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §405(b), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1085.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a), as amended is known as the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367 inserted “the Secretary of Health and Human Services,” after “the Secretary of Education,”.

1985—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–159 repealed Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(D). See 1984 Amendment note below.

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(A), substituted “section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 161(b) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(D), which substituted “section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 161(b) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”, was repealed by Pub. L. 99–159.

1982—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(d)(1), inserted “related to labor market information” after “processing systems”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(d)(2), inserted “related to labor market information” after “coding measures”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–159 effective July 1, 1985, see section 714(a) of Pub. L. 99–159, set out as a note under section 2311 of Title 20, Education.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in section 1754 of this title; title 20 section 2421.

(1) Of the amounts available for this part for each fiscal year, $6,000,000 is authorized to be reserved for the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee (established pursuant to section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2422]).

(2) In addition to the members required by such Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], the Committee shall include the Assistant Secretary of Commerce for Economic Development and the Assistant Secretary of Defense 1 Force Management and Personnel.

(3) Not less than 75 percent of the funds transferred by the Secretary to the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee shall be used to support State occupational information coordinating committees and other organizational units designated under section 1535 of this title for carrying out State labor market information programs.

In addition to its responsibilities under the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.], the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee shall—

(1) carry out the provisions of section 1753 of this title;

(2) give special attention to the career development and labor market information needs of youth and adults, including activities such as (A) assisting and encouraging States to adopt methods of translating national occupational outlook information into State and local terms; (B) assisting and encouraging the development of State occupational information systems, including career information delivery systems and the provision of technical assistance for programs of on-line computer systems and other facilities to provide career information at sites such as local schools, public employment service offices, and job training programs authorized under this chapter; (C) in cooperation with educational agencies and institutions, encouraging programs providing career information, counseling, and employment services for postsecondary youth; and (D) in cooperation with State and local correctional agencies, encouraging programs of counseling and employment services for youth and adults in correctional institutions;

(3) provide training and technical assistance, and continuing support to State occupational information coordinating committees, in the development, maintenance, and use of occupational supply and demand information systems, with special emphasis on the use of cost efficient automated systems for delivering occupational information to planners and administrators of education and training programs and on improving the access of such planners and administrators to occupational information systems;

(4) publish at least annually a report on the status of occupational information capabilities at the State and national levels, which may include recommendations for improvement of occupational information production and dissemination capabilities;

(5) conduct research and demonstration projects designed to improve any aspect of occupational and career information systems and coordination and compatibility of human resources data systems operated by Federal agencies or the States, including systems to assist economic development activities and, where appropriate, provide support to States in the implementation of such system improvements.; 2

(6) provide technical assistance for programs designed to encourage public and private employers to list all available job opportunities with occupational information and career counseling programs conducted by administrative entities and with local public employment service offices and to encourage cooperation and contact among such employers and such administrative entities and public employment service offices; and

(7) provide assistance to units of general local government and private industry councils to familiarize them with labor market information resources available to meet their needs.

All funds available to the National Occupational Information Coordinating Committee under this chapter, under section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2422], and under section 12 of the Career Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2611] 3 may be used by the Committee to carry out any of its functions and responsibilities authorized by law.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §464, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1385; Pub. L. 97–404, §4(e), Dec. 31, 1982, 96 Stat. 2027; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(B), (C), (E), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2488; Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §405(c), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1085.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act, referred to in subsecs. (a)(1), (2) and (b), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, known as the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

Section 12 of the Career Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2611], referred to in subsec. (c), was repealed by Pub. L. 97–35, title V, §587(a)(4), Aug. 13, 1981, 95 Stat. 480.

1992—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 102–367, §405(c)(1)(A), substituted “$6,000,000” for “not more than $5,000,000”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §405(c)(1)(B), substituted “Force Management and Personnel” for “for Manpower, Reserve Affairs, and Logistics”.

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 102–367, §405(c)(2)(A), inserted “career development and” after “give special attention to the”.

Subsec. (b)(5). Pub. L. 102–367, §405(c)(2)(B), inserted “and coordination and compatibility of human resources data systems operated by Federal agencies or the States, including systems to assist economic development activities and, where appropriate, provide support to States in the implementation of such system improvements.” after “career information systems”.

1984—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(B), substituted “section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 161(b) of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(E), substituted “the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(6)(C), substituted “section 422 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 161 of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

1982—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(e)(1), inserted “for each fiscal year” after “part”.

Subsec. (b)(7). Pub. L. 97–404, §4(e)(2), substituted “provide” for “providing”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by “for”.

3 See References in Text note below.

The Secretary is authorized to establish and carry out a nationwide computerized job bank and matching program (including the listing of all suitable employment openings with local offices of the State employment service agencies by Federal contractors and subcontractors and providing for the affirmative action as required by section 4212(a) of title 38 1 on a regional, State, and local basis, using electronic data processing and telecommunications systems to the maximum extent possible for the purpose of identifying sources of available individuals and job vacancies, providing an expeditious means of matching the qualifications of unemployed, underemployed, and economically disadvantaged individuals with employer requirements and job opportunities, and referring and placing such individuals in jobs. An occupational information file may be developed, containing occupational projections of the numbers and types of jobs on regional, State, local, and other appropriate bases, as well as labor supply information by occupation.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §465, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1386; Pub. L. 102–83, §5(c)(2), Aug. 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 406.)

1991—Pub. L. 102–83 substituted “section 4212(a) of title 38” for “section 2012(a) of title 38”.

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be followed by a closing parenthesis.

The purpose of this part is to establish a National Commission for Employment Policy which shall have the responsibility for examining broad issues of development, coordination, and administration of employment and training programs, and for advising the President and the Congress on national employment and training issues. For the purpose of providing funds for the Commission, the Secretary shall reserve $2,000,000 of the sums appropriated for this subchapter for each fiscal year.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §471, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1387.)

There is established a National Commission for Employment Policy (hereinafter in this part referred to as the “Commission”). The Commission shall be composed of 15 members, appointed by the President. The members of the Commission shall be individuals who are nationally prominent and the Commission shall be broadly representative of agriculture, business, labor, commerce, education (including elementary, secondary, postsecondary, and vocational and technical education), veterans, current State and local elected officials, community-based organizations, assistance programs, and members of the general public with expertise in human resource development or employment and training policy. The membership of the Commission shall be generally representative of significant segments of the labor force, including women and minority groups.

The term of office of each member of the Commission appointed by the President under subsection (a) of this section shall be three years, except that—

(1) any such member appointed to fill a vacancy shall serve for the remainder of the term for which his predecessor was appointed, and

(2) of such members first taking office—

(A) five shall serve for terms of one year;

(B) five shall serve for terms of two years; and

(C) five shall serve for terms of three years;

as designated by the President at the time of appointment.

(1) The Chairman shall be selected by the President.

(2) The Commission shall meet not fewer than three times each year at the call of the Chairman.

(3) A majority of the members of the Commission shall constitute a quorum, but a lesser number may conduct hearings. Any recommendation may be passed only by a majority of the members present. Any vacancy in the Commission shall not affect its powers but shall be filled in the same manner in which the original appointment was made.

The Chairman (with the concurrence of the Commission) shall appoint a Director, who shall be chief executive officer of the Commission and shall perform such duties as are prescribed by the Chairman.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §472, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1387; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(7), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2488; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(17), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367 struck out after third sentence “One of the members shall be a representative of the National Council on Vocational Education (established under section 431 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act).”

1984—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “National Council on Vocational Education (established under section 431 of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act)” for “National Advisory Council on Vocational Education (established under section 162 of the Vocational Education Act of 1963)”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

The Commission shall—

(1) identify the employment goals and needs of the Nation, and assess the extent to which employment and training, vocational education, institutional training, vocational rehabilitation, economic opportunity programs, public assistance policies, employment-related tax policies, labor exchange policies, and other policies and programs under this chapter and related Acts represent a consistent, integrated, and coordinated approach to meeting such needs and achieving such goals;

(2) develop and make appropriate recommendations designed to meet the needs and goals described in clause (1);

(3) examine and evaluate the effectiveness of federally assisted employment and training programs (including programs assisted under this chapter), with particular reference to the contributions of such programs to the achievement of objectives sought by the recommendations made under clause (2);

(4) advise the Secretary on the development of national performance standards and the parameters of variations of such standards for programs conducted pursuant to this chapter;

(5) evaluate the impact of tax policies on employment and training opportunities;

(6) examine and evaluate major Federal programs which are intended to, or potentially could, contribute to achieving major objectives of existing employment and training and related legislation or the objectives set forth in the recommendations of the Commission, and particular attention shall be given to the programs which are designed, or could be designed, to develop information and knowledge about employment and training problems through research and demonstration projects or to train personnel in fields (such as occupational counseling, guidance, and placement) which are vital to the success of employment and training programs;

(7) identify the employment and training and vocational education needs of the Nation and assess the extent to which employment and training, vocational education, rehabilitation, and other programs assisted under this chapter and related Acts represent a consistent, integrated, and coordinated approach to meeting such needs.1

(8) study and make recommendations on how, through policies and actions in the public and private sectors, the Nation can attain and maintain full employment, with special emphasis on the employment difficulties faced by the segments of the labor force that experience differentially high rates of unemployment;

(9) identify and assess the goals and needs of the Nation with respect to economic growth and work improvements, including conditions of employment, organizational effectiveness and efficiency, alternative working arrangements, and technological changes;

(10) evaluate the effectiveness of training provided with Federal funds in meeting emerging skill needs; and

(11) study and make recommendations on the use of advanced technology in the management and delivery of services and activities conducted under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §473, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1388; Pub. L. 98–524, §4(a)(8), Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2488; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(18), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

1992—Par. (7). Pub. L. 102–367 redesignated subpar. (A) as entire par., struck out “, after consultation with the National Council on Vocational Education,” after “identify”, substituted a period for “; and” after “meeting such needs”, and struck out subpar. (B) which read as follows: “comment, at least once annually, on the reports of the National Council on Vocational Education, which comments shall be included in one of the reports submitted by the National Commission pursuant to this subchapter and in one of the reports submitted by the National Council on Vocational Education pursuant to part D of subchapter IV of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act;”.

1984—Par. (7). Pub. L. 98–524 substituted “National Council on Vocational Education” for “National Advisory Council on Vocational Education”, wherever appearing, and “part D of subchapter IV of the Carl D. Perkins Vocational Education Act” for “section 162 of the Vocational Education Act of 1963”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 98–524 effective for fiscal years beginning on or after Oct. 1, 1984, except as otherwise provided, see section 2 of Pub. L. 98–524, set out as an Effective Date note under section 2301 of Title 20, Education.

1 So in original. Probably should be a semicolon.

Subject to such rules and regulations as may be adopted by the Commission, the Chairman is authorized to—

(1) prescribe such rules and regulations as may be necessary;

(2) appoint and fix the compensation of such staff personnel as the Chairman deems necessary, and without regard to the provisions of title 5 governing appointments in the competitive service, and without regard to the provisions of chapter 51 and subchapter III of chapter 53 of such title, relating to classification and the General Schedule pay rates, appoint not to exceed five additional professional personnel;

(3) procure the services of experts and consultants in accordance with section 3109 of title 5;

(4) accept voluntary and uncompensated services of professional personnel, consultants, and experts, notwithstanding any other provision of law;

(5) accept in the name of the United States and employ or dispose of gifts or bequests to carry out the functions of the Commission under this subchapter;

(6) enter into contracts and make such other arrangements and modifications, as may be necessary;

(7) conduct such studies, hearings, research activities, demonstration projects, and other similar activities as the Commission deems necessary to enable the Commission to carry out its functions under this subchapter;

(8) use the services, personnel, facilities, and information of any department, agency, and instrumentality of the executive branch of the Federal Government and the services, personnel, facilities, and information of State and local public agencies and private research agencies, with the consent of such agencies, with or without reimbursement therefor; and

(9) make advances, progress, and other payments necessary under this chapter without regard to the provisions of section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31.

Upon request made by the Chairman of the Commission, each department, agency, and instrumentality of the executive branch of the Federal Government is authorized and directed to make its services, personnel, facilities, and information (including computer-time, estimates, and statistics) available to the greatest practicable extent to the Commission in the performance of its functions under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §474, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1389.)

In subsec. (a)(9) “section 3324(a) and (b) of title 31” substituted for “section 3648 of the Revised Statutes (31 U.S.C. 529)” on authority of Pub. L. 97–258, §4(b), Sept. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1067, the first section of which enacted Title 31, Money and Finance.

The Commission shall make at least annually a report of its findings and recommendations to the President and to the Congress. The Commission may make such interim reports or recommendations to the Congress, the President, the Secretary, or to the heads of other Federal departments and agencies, and in such form, as it may deem desirable. The Commission shall include in any report made under this section any minority or dissenting views submitted by any member of the Commission.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §475, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1389.)

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title.

A contractor subject to the affirmative action obligations of Executive Order 11246, as amended, issued September 24, 1965, may establish or participate in training programs pursuant to this section for individuals meeting the eligibility criteria established in section 1 1603, 1643, 1671, and 1672 of this title, which are designed to assist such contractors in meeting the affirmative action obligations of such Executive order. To qualify under this section, such a training program shall contain—

(1) a description of the jobs in the contractor's work force or in the service delivery area, for which the contractor has determined there is a need for training;

(2) a description of the recruiting, training, or other functions that the contractor, or the organization that will be engaged to perform the training, will perform and the steps that will be taken to insure that eligible individuals will—

(A) be selected for participation in training,

(B) be trained in necessary skills, and

(C) be referred for job openings,

in accordance with the objectives of such Executive order;

(3) whenever an organization other than the contractor will perform the training, a description of the demonstrated effectiveness of the organization as a provider of employment and training services;

(4) a description of how the contractor will monitor the program to keep an accurate accounting of all trainees, including (A) whether the trainees successfully complete the training program, and (B) whether the trainees are or are not placed; and

(5) an estimation of the cost of the program and an assurance that the contractor will assume all costs of the program or the pro rata share of costs to the contractor of the program.

(1)(A) If the training proposal is designed to meet the needs of the community rather than, or in addition to, the employment needs of the contractor, and has not been approved by another Federal agency, the program shall be submitted to the private industry council established under section 1512 of this title for a determination that there is a need for such training in the community.

(B) Individuals trained under any program satisfying the requirements of this section may be included by the private industry council in its performance accomplishments and the wage gains of such individuals shall be included in determining the compliance of the job training program of the private industry council with applicable standards.

(2) The Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Department of Labor, shall promulgate regulations setting forth how the Office will determine, during a compliance review, the degree to which a training program will satisfy the contractor's affirmative action obligations. The training and placement of trainees with employers other than the contractor may be considered in evaluating such contractor's overall good faith efforts, but in no event may placement of trainees with employers other than the contractor be permitted to affect that contractor's affirmative action obligations respecting its work force. The content of the training program will not be subject to review or regulation by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. If during a compliance review the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs determines that a training program does not comply with its regulations, the Director shall—

(A) notify the contractor of the disapproval,

(B) set forth the reasons for the disapproval, and

(C) provide a list of recommendations which, if accepted, will qualify the training program under this section.

(3) A contractor who has a training program which contains the criteria set forth in subsection (a) of this section and which is in accordance with regulations promulgated under paragraph (2) of this subsection shall continue to meet the affirmative action obligations of Executive Order 11246, as amended, but the contractors required to maintain a written affirmative action program need only maintain an abbreviated affirmative action program, the content and length of which shall be determined by the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, to satisfy the written affirmative action program portion of their obligations under Executive Order 11246, as amended. Successful performance or operation of a training program meeting the criteria set forth in subsection (a) of this section shall create a presumption that the contractor has made a good faith effort to meet its affirmative action obligations to the degree specified by the Director under paragraph (2) of this subsection, but that presumption shall not be applicable to the satisfaction of other affirmative action obligations not directly related to the training and hiring requirements of this section, or other affirmative action obligations not affected by this section. For the purpose of the preceding sentence, “successful performance or operation” means training and placing in jobs a number of individuals which bears a reasonable relationship to the number of job openings in the contractors's 2 facilities or in the relevant labor market area.

Nothing in this section may be interpreted—

(1) to compel contractor involvement in such programs,

(2) to establish the exclusive criteria by which a contractor can be found to have fulfilled its affirmative action obligations,

(3) to provide authority for imposing any additional obligations on contractors not participating in such training activities,

(4) to permit the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs to intervene or interfere with the authority and responsibilities of the private industry councils,

(5) to restrict or limit the authority of the Secretary to investigate the employment practices of any Government contractor, to initiate such investigation by the Director, to determine whether any nondiscrimination contractual provisions have been violated, or to enforce Executive Order 11246, or

(6) to prohibit the Secretary or the Director, or other authorized officers of the United States, from requesting or compelling any contractor preparing and maintaining a short form affirmative action plan under subsection (b) of this section to provide information necessary to conduct a compliance review or to provide data necessary to determine whether any violation of Executive Order 11246 has occurred.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §481, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1390; Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(19), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1112.)

Executive Order 11246, as amended, referred to in subsecs. (a), (b)(3), and (c)(5), (6), is Ex. Ord. No. 11246, Sept. 24, 1965, 30 F.R. 12319, which is set out as a note under section 2000e of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–367, which directed the substitution of “section 1603, 1643” for “section 1603(a)(1)”, was executed by making the substitution for “sections 1603(a)(1)” to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title; title 20 section 6235; title 42 section 11421.

1 So in original. Probably should be “sections”.

It is the purpose of the Youth Fair Chance program under this part to—

(1) ensure access to education and job training assistance for youth residing in high poverty areas of urban and rural communities;

(2) provide a comprehensive range of education, training, and employment services to disadvantaged youth who are not currently served or are underserved by Federal education and job training programs;

(3) enable communities with high concentrations of poverty to establish and meet goals for improving the opportunities available to youth within the community; and

(4) facilitate the coordination of comprehensive services to serve youth in such communities.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §491, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1086.)

Part effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

The Secretary is authorized to establish a national program of Youth Fair Chance grants to pay the Federal share attributable to this part of providing comprehensive services to youth living in high poverty areas in the cities and rural areas of the Nation.

The Secretary may only award grants under this part to—

(A) the service delivery area (on behalf of the participating community) in which a target area is located;

(B) in the case of a grant involving a target area located in an Indian reservation or Alaska Native village, the grantee designated under subsection (c) or (d) of section 1671 of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State; or

(C) in the case of a grant involving a target area located in a migrant or seasonal farmworker community, the grantee designated under section 1672(c) of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State.

The Secretary may award not more than 25 grants during the first fiscal year that the program is authorized.

In awarding grants under this part during the first 5 fiscal years that the program is assisted, the Secretary shall award—

(i) at least 1 grant to a grantee or consortium described in paragraph (1)(B); and

(ii) at least 1 grant to a grantee or consortium described in paragraph (1)(C).

Grants awarded under this part shall be for a 1-year period. Such a grant shall be renewable for each of the 2 succeeding fiscal years if the Secretary determines the grant recipient complied with conditions of the grant during the previous fiscal year.

The Secretary may extend the renewal period set forth in paragraph (1) for an additional 2 fiscal years on reapplication.

In awarding grants under this part, the Secretary shall consider the quality of the proposed project, the goals to be achieved, the likelihood of successful implementation, the extent of community support, other Federal and non-Federal funds available for similar purposes, and additional State, local, or private resources that will be provided. The Secretary shall give priority to participating communities with the highest poverty rates.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §492, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1086.)

This section is referred to in sections 1782b, 1782e of this title.

Participating communities that have the highest concentrations of poverty, as determined by the Secretary based on the latest Bureau of the Census estimates, shall be eligible to apply for a Youth Fair Chance grant.

Each participating community desiring a grant under this part shall, through the individuals set forth in subsection (c) of this section, submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require.

Each such application shall—

(A) include a comprehensive plan for the Youth Fair Chance initiative designed to achieve identifiable goals for youth in the target area;

(B) set forth measurable program goals and outcomes, which may include increasing the proportion of—

(i) youth completing high school or its equivalent;

(ii) youth entering into postsecondary institutions, apprenticeships, or other advanced training programs;

(iii) youth placed in jobs; or

(iv) youth participating in education, training, and employment services;

(C) include supporting goals for the target area such as increasing security and safety, or reducing the number of drug-related arrests;

(D) provide assurances that the applicant will comply with the terms of the agreement described in section 1782c of this title;

(E) demonstrate how the participating community will make use of the resources, expertise, and commitment of institutions of higher education, educational agencies, and vocational and technical schools and institutes;

(F) provide an assurance that all youth in the target areas will have access to a coordinated and comprehensive range of education and training opportunities that serve the broadest range of youth interests and needs and simultaneously mobilizes the diverse range of education and training providers in the participating community;

(G) provide assurances that the youth in the target area will have access to supportive services necessary for successful participation, including such services as child care, transportation, and assistance in resolving personal or family crises, such as crises related to substance abuse, homelessness, migration, and family violence;

(H) include a description of a system of common intake procedures or sites, individualized assessment, and case management to be used by the program;

(I) demonstrate how the participating community will make use of the resources, expertise, and commitment of such programs and service providers as—

(i) community-based organizations providing vocational skills, literacy skills, remedial education, and general equivalency preparation, including community-based organizations serving youth with limited-English proficiency;

(ii) youth corps programs, including youth conservation and human service corps;

(iii) Job Corps centers;

(iv) apprenticeship programs; and

(v) other projects and programs funded under this chapter;

(J) include an estimate of the expected number of youth in the target area to be served;

(K) include a description of the resources available in the participating community from private, local government, State, and Federal sources that will be used to achieve the goals of the program;

(L) include an estimate of funds required to ensure access to appropriate education, training, and support services for all youth in the target area who seek such opportunities; and

(M) provide evidence of support for accomplishing the stated goals of the participating community from—

(i) local elected officials;

(ii) the local school system;

(iii) appropriate postsecondary education and training institutions;

(iv) the applicable private industry council;

(v) local community leaders;

(vi) business;

(vii) labor organizations; and

(viii) other appropriate organizations.

The application for funds described in subsection (b) of this section may only be submitted to the Secretary on behalf of a participating community by—

(1) the mayor of a city or the chief elected official in a metropolitan statistical area, after the Governor of the State has had an opportunity to comment on the application;

(2) the chief elected official of a nonmetropolitan county or the designated chief elected official of contiguous nonmetropolitan counties, after the Governor of the State has had an opportunity to comment on the application; or

(3) a grantee or consortium described in subparagraph (B) or (C) of section 1782a(b)(1) of this title in applications for Native American or migrant or seasonal farmworker communities, respectively.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §493, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1087.)

Each grant recipient receiving a grant under this part on behalf of a participating community shall enter into an agreement with the Secretary.

Each such agreement shall—

(1) designate a target area that—

(A) will be the focus of the demonstration project; and

(B) shall have a population of—

(i) not more than 25,000; or

(ii) in an appropriate case, not more than 50,000,

except that in the event that the population of an area from which a high school draws a substantial portion of its enrollment exceeds either limit, the target area may encompass such boundary;

(2) contain assurances that funds provided under this part will be used to support education, training, and supportive activities selected from a set of youth program models designated by the Secretary or from alternative models described in the application and approved by the Secretary, such as—

(A) nonresidential learning centers;

(B) alternative schools;

(C) combined activities including summer remediation, work experience and work readiness training, and school-to-work, apprenticeship, or postsecondary education programs;

(D) teen parent programs;

(E) special programs administered by community colleges;

(F) youth centers;

(G) initiatives aimed at increased rural student enrollment in postsecondary institutions;

(H) public-private collaborations to assure private sector employment and continued learning opportunities for youth; and

(I) initiatives, such as youth corps programs, that combine community and youth service opportunities with education and training activities;

(3) provide that funds received under this part will be used for services to youth ages 14 through 30 at the time of enrollment;

(4) contain assurances that the local educational agency and any other educational agency that operates secondary schools in the target area shall provide such activities and resources as are necessary to achieve the educational goals specified in the application;

(5) contain assurances that the participating community will provide such activities and local resources as are necessary to achieve the goals specified in the application;

(6) contain assurances that the participating community will undertake outreach and recruitment efforts in the target area to encourage, to the maximum extent possible, participation by the disadvantaged youth who are currently unserved, or underserved, by education and training programs, including targeted measures specifically designed to enlist the participation of youth, particularly males, under the jurisdiction of the child welfare, juvenile justice, and criminal justice systems;

(7) provide that the participating community will carry out special efforts to establish coordination with Federal, State, or local programs that serve the target population;

(8) provide assurances that funds provided under this part for a fiscal year will be used only to pay the Federal share attributable to this part of the cost of programs and services not otherwise available in the target area and will supplement, and not supplant, funding from other local, State, and Federal sources available to youth in the target area during the previous year; and

(9) permit funds provided under this part to be used to support paid work experience programs if such programs are combined with other education and training activities.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §494, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1089; amended Pub. L. 103–50, ch. V, §502, July 2, 1993, 107 Stat. 254.)

1993—Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 103–50 substituted “30” for “21”.

This section is referred to in section 1782b of this title.

The Secretary shall permit a reasonable number of the grant recipients under this part to enter into an agreement to provide, in accordance with this section, a job guarantee program to youths meeting prior school attendance and performance standards.

A grant recipient providing such a job guarantee program shall enter into an agreement with the Secretary, which agreement shall—

(1) provide that the program be available to youth age 16 to 19 who undertake a commitment to continue and complete their high school education;

(2) require the grant recipient to guarantee employment to each youth undertaking the commitment if such youth meets school attendance and performance standards for the previous school semester, as established by the Secretary in consultation with the Secretary of Education;

(3) provide that the grant recipient will make additional services available to support the undertaking of any such youth, which shall include counseling, job development and placement, and supportive services (including child care and transportation);

(4) specify the conditions under which funds provided under this part may be used to provide wage subsidies of up to 50 percent through employers, which conditions shall—

(A) encourage subsidies to employers who provide advanced or specialized training, or who provide a structured and integrated learning experience involving the school and employer; and

(B) limit the duration of such subsidies to not more than 1 year;

(5) require that the employment provided to any such youth shall not exceed 15 hours per week during the school year;

(6) permit employment to continue through the summer following high school graduation, or until the youth reaches age 19, whichever is later; and

(7) contain such other terms and conditions as the Secretary requires by regulation.

In determining which grant recipients to permit to enter an agreement under this section, the Secretary shall seek to target funds to areas with the highest poverty rates.

All youth, regardless of income, residing in an eligible high poverty area shall be eligible to participate in the job guarantee program.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to prohibit the grant recipient from raising funds to augment such grant if such funds are utilized under the conditions of the grant, except that such funds shall not be used for administration.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §495, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1090.)

In any fiscal year, the amount of a grant awarded under this part shall be based on the size of the target area and the extent of the poverty in such area, and shall be of sufficient size and scope to carry out an effective program under this part.

The Federal share attributable to this part of the cost of providing comprehensive services as provided in section 1782a(a) of this title shall be not less than 70 percent for each fiscal year a grant recipient receives assistance under this chapter.

In providing for the remaining share of such cost, each grant recipient may provide not more than 20 percent of such cost from Federal sources other than funds received pursuant to this part.

A grant recipient shall provide non-Federal funds in an amount not less than 10 percent of such cost, an in-kind contribution equivalent to such percent (as determined by the Secretary), or a combination thereof.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §496, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1091.)

The Secretary is authorized to establish such reporting procedures as are necessary to carry out the purposes of this part.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §497, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1091.)

The Secretary shall provide assistance to participating communities in implementing the projects assisted under this part.

The Secretary shall provide for a thorough, independent evaluation of the Youth Fair Chance program to assess the outcomes of youth participating in programs assisted under this part.

In conducting the evaluation described in paragraph (1) the Secretary shall include an assessment of—

(A) the impact on youth residing in target areas, including the rates of school completion, enrollment in advanced education or training, and employment of the youth;

(B) the extent to which participating communities fulfilled the goal of guaranteed access to appropriate education, training, and supportive services to all eligible youth residing in target areas who seek to participate;

(C) the effectiveness of guaranteed access to comprehensive services combined with outreach and recruitment efforts in enlisting the participation of previously unserved or underserved youth residing in target areas;

(D) the effectiveness of efforts to integrate service delivery in target areas, including systems of common intake, assessment, and case management; and

(E) the feasibility of extending guaranteed access to comprehensive education, training and support services for youth in all areas of the United States, including possible approaches to incremental extension of such access over time.

The Secretary shall prepare a report detailing the results of the independent evaluation described in subsection (b) of this section and shall submit such report to the Congress not later than December 31, 1996, along with an analysis of expenditures made, results achieved, and problems in the operations and coordination of programs assisted under this part.

The Secretary may reserve not more than 5 percent of the amount appropriated under this part in each fiscal year to carry out the provisions of this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §498, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1091.)

For the purposes of this part—

The term “participating community”—

(A) in the case of a community conducting a project in an urban area, means a city in a metropolitan statistical area;

(B) in the case of a community conducting a project in a rural area, means a nonmetropolitan county or contiguous nonmetropolitan counties;

(C) in the case of a community conducting a project in an Indian reservation or Alaska Native village, the 1 grantee designated under subsection (c) or (d) of section 1671 of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State; or

(D) in the case of a community conducting a project in a migrant or seasonal farmworker community, the 1 grantee designated under section 1672(c) of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State.

The term “high poverty area” means an urban census tract, a nonmetropolitan county, a Native American Indian reservation, or an Alaska Native village, with a poverty rate of 30 percent or more, as determined by the Bureau of the Census, or a migrant or seasonal farmworker community.

The term “target area” means a high poverty area or set of contiguous high poverty areas that will be the focus of the program in each participating community.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §498A, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §406, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1092.)

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title.

1 So in original. Probably should be “means the”.

From the amount appropriated to carry out this section for fiscal years 1993 through 1997, the Secretary of Labor shall make grants of not more than $500,000 per year to not more than 10 States per year to implement and enhance community-based microenterprise activities. Such grants shall be an amount adequate to ensure that the activities will be of sufficient size and scope to produce substantial benefits. Such activities shall be for the benefit of economically disadvantaged persons.

Such funds shall be used, notwithstanding section 1551(q) of this title—

(1) to train program staff in such entrepreneurial activities as business plan development, business management, resource inventory design, and marketing approaches, and other activities necessary to provide effective entry level training to persons developing a microenterprise;

(2) to provide to owners or potential owners of a microenterprise such technical assistance (including technical assistance with respect to business planning, securing funding, marketing, and production of marketing materials) and other assistance as may be necessary to develop microenterprise activities; and

(3) to provide microenterprise support (such as peer support programs and counseling).

The Secretary shall award grants competitively under this section on the basis of—

(1) the State commitment, as evidenced by existing or proposed related programs and support;

(2) evidence of ability to conduct and monitor the microenterprise activities;

(3) evidence of linkage to private, community-based credit and technical assistance providers; and

(4) size of the non-Federal match.

Not later than April 1 of any fiscal year, a State may submit to the Secretary an application. Not later than the following June 1, the Secretary shall approve not more than 10 of the applications. Not later than the following July 1, the Secretary shall authorize the applicant to begin the programs. The Secretary may consider making multiyear grants.

No State shall receive a grant under this section unless the State agrees to provide, to carry out the microenterprise programs, non-Federal contributions in an amount equal to 100 percent of Federal funds provided under such grant.

The non-Federal contribution may be in cash or in-kind, fairly evaluated, including plant, equipment, or services.

Each State receiving a grant under this section shall, for each fiscal year for which funds are received, submit to the Secretary a report that describes—

(1) the programs that have been established and developed with such funds, including a description of the persons participating and the microenterprises developed;

(2) the quantitative and qualitative benefits of such programs; and

(3) the contributions of such programs to economic self-sufficiency and economic development.

As used in this section:

The term “microenterprise” means a commercial enterprise if—

(A) the enterprise has 5 or fewer employees, 1 or more of whom owns the enterprise; and

(B) each of the owners of the enterprise is economically disadvantaged.

The term “State” includes—

(A) in the case of a community conducting a project in an Indian reservation or Alaska Native village, the grantee designated under subsection (c) or (d) of section 1671 of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State; and

(B) in the case of a community conducting a project in a migrant or seasonal farmworker community, the grantee designated under section 1672(c) of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §499, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §407, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1093.)

Part effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This part is referred to in section 1502 of this title.

Funds appropriated to carry out this part shall be made available in a timely manner by the Secretary to the Governor of any State within which is located an area that has suffered an emergency or a major disaster as defined in paragraphs (1) and (2), respectively, of section 102 of the Disaster Relief Act of 1974 1 (42 U.S.C. 5122(1) and (2)) (referred to in this part as the “disaster area”).

Not less than 80 percent of the funds made available to any Governor under subsection (a) of this section shall be allocated by the Governor to units of general local government located, in whole or in part, within such disaster areas. The remainder of such funds may be reserved by the Governor for use, in concert with State agencies, in cleanup, rescue, repair, renovation, and rebuilding activities associated with such major disaster.

Funds made available under this part to Governors and units of general local government shall be expended in consultation with—

(1) agencies administering programs for disaster relief provided under the Disaster Relief Act of 1974 1 [42 U.S.C. 5121 et seq.]; and

(2) the administrative entity and the private industry council in each service delivery area within which disaster employment programs will be conducted under this part.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §499A, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §408, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1094.)

The Disaster Relief Act of 1974, referred to in subsecs. (a) and (c)(1), is Pub. L. 93–288, May 22, 1974, 88 Stat. 143, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 68 (§5121 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. The 1974 Act was renamed the Robert T. Stafford Disaster Relief and Emergency Assistance Act, and was substantially revised by Pub. L. 100–707, Nov. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 4689. Section 102(b) of Pub. L. 100–707 provided that a reference in any other law to a provision of the Disaster Relief Act of 1974 shall be deemed to be a reference to such provision of the Robert T. Stafford Disaster Relief and Emergency Assistance Act. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short title note set out under section 5121 of Title 42 and Tables.

Part effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

Funds made available under this part to any unit of general local government in a disaster area—

(1) shall be used exclusively to provide employment on projects to provide food, clothing, shelter, and other humanitarian assistance for disaster victims and on projects regarding demolition, cleanup, repair, renovation, and reconstruction of damaged and destroyed structures, facilities, and lands located within the disaster area; and

(2) may be expended through public and private agencies and organizations engaged in such projects.

An individual shall be eligible to be offered disaster employment under this part if such individual is—

(1)(A) eligible to participate or enroll, or is a participant or enrolled, under subchapter III of this chapter, other than an individual who is actively engaged in a training program; or

(B) eligible to participate in programs or activities assisted under section 1671 or 1672 of this title; and

(2) unemployed as a consequence of the disaster.

No individual shall be employed under this part for more than 6 months for work related to recovery from a single natural disaster.

The Secretary shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to promote the fiscal integrity of programs conducted with funds made available under this part.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §499B, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §408, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1095.)

As used in this part, the term “unit of general local government” includes—

(1) in the case of a community conducting a project in an Indian reservation or Alaska Native village, the grantee designated under subsection (c) or (d) of section 1671 of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State; and

(2) in the case of a community conducting a project in a migrant or seasonal farmworker community, the grantee designated under section 1672(c) of this title, or a consortium of such grantees and the State.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title IV, §499C, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title IV, §408, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1095.)

This subchapter is referred to in sections 1502, 1514, 1531 of this title.

It is the purpose of this subchapter to provide incentives to reduce welfare dependency, promote self-sufficiency, increase child support payments, and increase employment and earnings of individuals by providing to each participating State a bonus for providing job training to—

(1) absent parents of children receiving assistance under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.], who subsequent to such training pay child support for their children; and

(2) blind or disabled individuals receiving supplemental security income under title XVI of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1381 et seq.), who subsequent to such training are successfully placed in and retain employment.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §501, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1096; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(14), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in text, is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title XVI of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XVI (§1381 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 501 of Pub. L. 97–300, which enacted sections 49e, 49f, 49*l*, and 49*l*–1 of this title, amended sections 49 to 49b, 49d, and 49g to 49j of this title, and enacted provisions set out as a note under section 49 of this title, was renumbered section 601 of Pub. L. 97–300.

1996—Par. (1). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “assistance under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act” for “aid to families with dependent children under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.)”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows: “It is the purpose of this subchapter to entitle each State to the payment of a bonus for the successful job placement of certain employable dependent individuals.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

For each program year for which funds are appropriated to carry out this subchapter, the Secretary shall pay to each participating State the amount that State is eligible to receive under this subchapter.

If the amount so appropriated is not sufficient to pay each State the amount each State is eligible to receive, the Secretary shall ratably reduce the amount paid to each State.

If any additional amount is made available for carrying out this subchapter for any program year after the application of subsection (b) of this section, such additional amount shall be allocated among the States by increasing such payments in the same manner as they were reduced, except that no such State shall be paid an amount that exceeds the amount that the State is eligible to receive under this subchapter.

If the amount appropriated for a program year is in excess of the amount necessary to pay each State the amount each State is eligible to receive, the Secretary shall allot the excess amount to the States for allocation to the service delivery areas in accordance with section 1602 of this title to carry out part A of subchapter II of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §502, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3248; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1096.)

A prior section 502 of Pub. L. 97–300, which amended sections 632 and 633 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, was renumbered section 602 of Pub. L. 97–300.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to payments under this subchapter for provisions defining terms used in this subchapter.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

The amount of the incentive bonus paid to each State shall be the sum of—

(1) an amount equal to the total of the amounts of child support paid by each individual eligible under section 1791e(1) of this title within the State, for up to 2 years after the termination of the individual from activities provided under this chapter; and

(2) an amount equal to the total reduction in the Federal contribution to the amounts received under title XVI of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1381 et seq.) by each individual eligible under section 1791e(2) of this title within the State, for up to 2 years after the termination of the individual from activities provided under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §503, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3249; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1096.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in par. (2), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Title XVI of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XVI (§1381 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 503 of Pub. L. 97–300, which amended section 602 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, was renumbered section 603 of Pub. L. 97–300.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to amount of incentive bonus for provisions relating to eligibility for incentive bonuses. See section 1791e of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1791d of this title.

During any program year, the Governor may use an amount not to exceed 5 percent of the total bonus payments of a State for administrative costs incurred under this subchapter, including data and information collection and compilation, recordkeeping, or the preparation of applications for incentive bonuses.

The amount of incentive bonus payments that remains after the deduction of administrative costs under subparagraph (A) shall be distributed to service delivery areas and Job Corps centers within the State in accordance with an agreement between the Governor and representatives of such areas and centers. Such agreement shall reflect an equitable method of distribution that is based on the degree to which the efforts of such area or center contributed to the qualification of the State for an incentive bonus payment under this subchapter.

Not more than 10 percent of the amounts received under this subchapter in any program year by each service delivery area and Job Corps center may be used for the administrative costs of establishing and maintaining systems necessary for operation of programs under this subchapter, including the costs of providing incentive payments described in subsection (b) of this section, technical assistance, data and information collection and compilation, management information systems, post-program followup activities, and research and evaluation activities. The balance of funds not so expended shall be used by each service delivery area for activities described in sections 1604 and 1644 of this title, and by each Job Corps center for activities authorized under part B of subchapter IV of this chapter.

Each service delivery area or Job Corps center may make incentive payments to service providers, including participating State and local agencies, and community-based organizations, that demonstrate effectiveness in delivering employment and training services to individuals such as those described in section 1791e of this title.

Section 1576 of this title (relating to administrative adjudication) shall apply to the distribution of incentive bonus payments under this section.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §504, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3249; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1097.)

A prior section 504 of Pub. L. 97–300 was renumbered section 604 and is classified to section 1504 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to the use of incentive bonus funds for provisions relating to additional eligibility requirements to receive incentive bonuses.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Any State seeking to participate in the incentive bonus program established under this subchapter shall notify the Secretary of the intent of the State to participate not later than 30 days before the beginning of the first program year of participation.

Any State seeking to receive an incentive bonus under this subchapter shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing or accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require in order to ensure compliance with this subchapter.

Each such application shall contain, at a minimum—

(A) a list of the eligible individuals in the State who satisfied the requirements of section 1791e of this title during the program year;

(B) the amount of the incentive bonus attributable to each eligible individual and due the State under section 1791b of this title; and

(C) certification that documentation is available to verify the eligibility of participants and the amount of the incentive bonus claimed by the State.

The Secretary shall promptly inform a State after receipt of the application as to whether or not the application of the State has been approved.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §505, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3250; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1097.)

A section 505 of title VI of Pub. L. 97–300, as added Pub. L. 100–418, title VI, §6307(a), Aug. 23, 1988, 102 Stat. 1541, and amended, was renumbered section 605 of title VI of Pub. L. 97–300 by Pub. L. 102–367, title VII, §702(a)(20), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1113, and is classified to section 1505 of this title.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to notice and application requirements for State participation in incentive bonus program for provisions relating to amount of incentive bonus. See section 1791b of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

An individual shall be eligible to participate in a program established under this subchapter if—

(1) the individual—

(A) was an absent parent of any child receiving assistance under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] at the time such individual was determined to be eligible to participate in activities provided under this chapter;

(B) has participated in education, training or other activities (including the Job Corps) provided under this chapter; and

(C) pays child support for a child specified in subparagraph (A) following termination from activities provided under this chapter; or

(2) the individual—

(A) is blind or disabled;

(B) was receiving benefits under title XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1381 et seq.] (relating to supplemental security income) at the time such individual was determined to be eligible to participate in activities under this chapter;

(C) has participated in education, training, or other activities (including the Job Corps) provided under this chapter; and

(D) earns from employment a wage or income.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §506, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3251; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1098; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(15), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2174.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in pars. (1)(A) and (2)(B), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title XVI of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XVI (§1381 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Par. (1)(A). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “assistance under the State program funded” for “aid to families with dependent children”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to eligibility for incentive bonuses for provisions relating to State application and verification requirements for participation in the incentive bonus program.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in sections 1791b, 1791c, 1791d of this title.

In order to facilitate the collection, exchange, and compilation of data and information required by this subchapter, the Secretary is authorized to provide technical assistance to the States. Such assistance may include cost-effective methods for using State and Federal records to which the Secretary has lawful access.

The Secretary and the Secretary of Health and Human Services shall jointly issue regulations regarding the sharing, among public agencies participating in the programs assisted under this subchapter, of the data and information necessary to fulfill the requirements of this subchapter.

Such regulations shall ensure—

(A) the availability of information necessary to verify the eligibility of participants and the amount of the incentive bonus payable; and

(B) the maintenance of confidentiality of the information so shared in accordance with Federal and State privacy laws.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §507, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3252; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1098.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to information and data collection for provisions relating to payments to participating States.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

The Secretary shall conduct or provide for an evaluation of the incentive bonus program assisted under this subchapter.

The Secretary shall consider—

(A) whether the program results in increased service under this chapter to absent parents of children receiving assistance under the State program funded under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.] and to recipients of supplemental security income under title XVI of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 1381 et seq.];

(B) whether the program results in increased child support payments;

(C) whether the program is administratively feasible and cost effective;

(D) whether the services provided to other eligible participants under part A of subchapter II of this chapter are affected by the implementation and operation of the incentive bonus program; and

(E) such other factors as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

Not later than January 1, 1997, the Secretary shall submit a report to the appropriate committees of the Congress on the effectiveness of the incentive bonus program assisted under this subchapter. Such report shall include an analysis of the costs of such program and the results of program activities.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §508, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3252; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1099; Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(16), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2175.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2)(A), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. Title XVI of the Act is classified generally to subchapter XVI (§1381 et seq.) of chapter 7 of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (a)(2)(A). Pub. L. 104–193 substituted “assistance under the State program funded” for “aid to families with dependent children”.

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions requiring an evaluation and report on the incentive bonus program for provisions relating to the use of incentive bonus funds. See section 1791c of this title.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

The Secretary shall promulgate regulations implementing this subchapter not later than January 31, 1993.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §509, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3253; amended Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1099.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–367 amended section generally, substituting provisions relating to implementing regulations for provisions relating to information and data collection.

Amendment by Pub. L. 102–367 effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

Sections 1791i and 1791j of this title were omitted in the general revision of this subchapter by Pub. L. 102–367, title V, §501, title VII, §701(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1099, 1103, effective July 1, 1993.

Section 1791i, Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §510, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3253, related to awards to States for start-up costs for participation in the incentive bonus program.

Section 1791j, Pub. L. 97–300, title V, §511, as added Pub. L. 100–628, title VII, §712(a)(3), Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3254, related to evaluation and performance standards for the incentive bonus program.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 1532, 1533 of this title; title 20 sections 1205a, 2322, 6123, 6143.

Each State may, in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter, establish a single State human resource investment council (in this subchapter referred to as the “State Council”) that—

(1) shall review the provision of services and the use of funds and resources under applicable Federal human resource programs and advise the Governor on methods of coordinating such provision of services and use of funds and resources consistent with the laws and regulations governing such programs;

(2) shall advise the Governor on the development and implementation of State and local standards and measures relating to applicable Federal human resource programs and coordination of such standards and measures;

(3) shall carry out the duties and functions prescribed for existing State councils described under the laws relating to the applicable Federal human resource programs;

(4) may identify the human investment needs in the State and recommend to the Governor goals for meeting such needs;

(5) may recommend to the Governor goals for the development and coordination of the human resource system in the State;

(6) may prepare and recommend to the Governor a strategic plan to accomplish the goals developed pursuant to paragraphs (4) and (5); and

(7) may monitor the implementation of and evaluate the effectiveness of the strategic plan prepared pursuant to paragraph (6).

(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), for purposes of this subchapter, the term “applicable Federal human resource program” includes any program authorized under the provisions of law described under paragraph (2)(A) that the Governor and the head of the State agency responsible for the administration of such program jointly agree to include within the jurisdiction of the State Council.

(B) With respect to a program authorized under the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.) under paragraph (2)(A)(ii), the term “applicable Federal human resource program” shall only apply to such program if, in addition to meeting the requirements of subparagraph (A), the State council on vocational education agrees to include such program under the jurisdiction of the State Council.

In accordance with the requirements of paragraph (1), applicable Federal human resource programs—

(A) may include the programs authorized under—

(i) this chapter;

(ii) the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.);

(iii) the National and Community Service Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12501 et seq.);

(iv) the Adult Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1201 et seq.);

(v) the Wagner-Peyser Act (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.); and

(vi) Repealed. Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(17)(B), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2175;

(vii) the employment program established under section 6(d)(4) of the Food Stamp Act of 1977 (7 U.S.C. 2015(d)(4)); and

(B) may not include programs authorized under the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 701 et seq.).

(Pub. L. 97–300, title VII, §701, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title VI, §601(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1099; amended Pub. L. 104–193, title I, §110(n)(17), Aug. 22, 1996, 110 Stat. 2175.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(1)(B), (2)(A)(ii), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

The National and Community Service Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(A)(iii), is Pub. L. 101–610, Nov. 16, 1990, 104 Stat. 3127, which is classified principally to chapter 129 (§12501 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12501 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Adult Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(A)(iv), is title III of Pub. L. 89–750, Nov. 3, 1966, 80 Stat. 1216, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 30 (§1201 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1201 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(A)(v), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 16 (§701 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

1996—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(v). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(17)(A), inserted “and” at end.

Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(vi). Pub. L. 104–193, §110(n)(17)(B), struck out cl. (vi) which read as follows: “part F of title IV of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 681 et seq.); and”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–193 effective July 1, 1997, with transition rules relating to State options to accelerate such date, rules relating to claims, actions, and proceedings commenced before such date, rules relating to closing out of accounts for terminated or substantially modified programs and continuance in office of Assistant Secretary for Family Support, and provisions relating to termination of entitlement under AFDC program, see section 116 of Pub. L. 104–193, as amended, set out as an Effective Date note under section 601 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare.

Subchapter effective July 1, 1993, see section 701(a) of Pub. L. 102–367, set out as an Effective Date of 1992 Amendment; Transition Provisions note under section 1501 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1533 of this title.

Each State Council shall be composed as follows:

(1) Each State Council shall include the head of each State agency responsible for the administration of an applicable Federal human resource program.

(2)(A) Each State Council shall include one or more representatives, appointed by the Governor to the State Council for a minimum of 2 years, from each of the following:

(i) Local public education.

(ii) A postsecondary institution.

(iii) A secondary or postsecondary vocational educational institution.

(iv) A community-based organization.

(B) The total number of representatives appointed under clause 1 (i), (ii), and (iii) of subparagraph (A) shall constitute not less than 15 percent of the membership of the State Council.

(3)(A) Each State Council shall include individuals, appointed by the Governor to the State Council for a minimum of 2 years, from among the following:

(i) Representatives of business and industry, who shall constitute not less than 15 percent of the membership of the State Council, including individuals who are representatives of business and industry on private industry councils established within the State under section 1512 of this title.

(ii) Representatives of organized labor who—

(I) shall be selected from among individuals nominated by recognized State labor federations; and

(II) shall constitute not less than 15 percent of the membership of the State Council.

(B) If the State labor federation fails to nominate a sufficient number of individuals under subclause (I) of subparagraph (A)(ii) to satisfy the requirement under subclause (II) of such subparagraph, individual workers may be included on the State Council to satisfy such requirement.

Each State Council may also include additional qualified members, who may be selected from—

(1) representatives from local welfare agencies;

(2) representatives from public housing agencies;

(3) representatives from units of general local government or consortia of such units, appointed from nominations made by the chief elected officials of such units or consortia;

(4) representatives from the State legislature;

(5) representatives from any State or local program that receives funding under an applicable Federal human resource program that the Governor determines to have a direct interest in the utilization of human resources within the State; and

(6) individuals who have special knowledge and qualifications with respect to special education and career development needs of hard-to-serve individuals.

None of the following categories of individuals may constitute more than 60 percent of the membership of each State Council:

(A) Individuals selected under subsection (a)(1) of this section.

(B) Individuals appointed under subsection (a)(2) of this section.

(C) Individuals appointed under subsection (a)(3)(A)(i) of this section.

(D) Individuals appointed under subsection (a)(3)(A)(ii) of this section.

(E) Individuals selected under subsection (b) of this section.

The Governor shall ensure that both the State Council and the staff of the State Council have sufficient expertise to effectively carry out the duties and functions of existing State councils described under the laws relating to the applicable Federal human resource programs. Such expertise shall include, where appropriate, knowledge of—

(A) the long-term needs of individuals preparing to enter the workforce;

(B) the needs of local, State, and regional labor markets; and

(C) the methods for evaluating the effectiveness of vocational training programs in serving varying populations.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title VII, §702, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title VI, §601(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1101.)

1 So in original. Probably should be “clauses”.

In order to carry out the functions of the State Council, each State establishing a State Council that meets the requirements of this subchapter may—

(1) use funds otherwise available for State councils under the applicable Federal human resource programs;

(2) use funds otherwise available under the applicable Federal human resource programs, consistent with the laws and regulations governing such programs, including funds available to carry out section 1533(a)(2)(D) of this title, except that, with respect to the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act (20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.), such State may use funds only to the extent provided under section 112(g) of such Act [20 U.S.C. 2322(g)]; and

(3) use funds, services, personnel, facilities and information provided by State and local public agencies, with the consent of such agencies.

Each State Council may obtain the services of such professional, technical, and clerical personnel as may be necessary to carry out its functions.

Each State shall certify to the Secretary the establishment and membership of the State Council at least 90 days before the beginning of each period of 2 program years for which a job training plan is submitted under this chapter.

Each State agency participating in a State Council under this subchapter is encouraged to provide funds to support such Council in a manner consistent with its representation on such Council.

(Pub. L. 97–300, title VII, §703, as added Pub. L. 102–367, title VI, §601(a), Sept. 7, 1992, 106 Stat. 1102.)

The Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.









This chapter is referred to in title 26 section 3306.

It is the purpose of this chapter to remove the restraints on commerce caused by activities detrimental to migrant and seasonal agricultural workers; to require farm labor contractors to register under this chapter; and to assure necessary protections for migrant and seasonal agricultural workers, agricultural associations, and agricultural employers.

(Pub. L. 97–470, §2, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2584.)

Section 524 of Pub. L. 97–470 provided in part that: “The provisions of this Act [enacting this chapter and repealing chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture] shall take effect ninety days from the date of enactment [Jan. 14, 1983].”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 97–470 provided in part that this Act [enacting this chapter and repealing chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture] may be cited as the “Migrant and Seasonal Agricultural Worker Protection Act”.

As used in this chapter—

(1) The term “agricultural association” means any nonprofit or cooperative association of farmers, growers, or ranchers, incorporated or qualified under applicable State law, which recruits, solicits, hires, employs, furnishes, or transports any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker.

(2) The term “agricultural employer” means any person who owns or operates a farm, ranch, processing establishment, cannery, gin, packing shed or nursery, or who produces or conditions seed, and who either recruits, solicits, hires, employs, furnishes, or transports any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker.

(3) The term “agricultural employment” means employment in any service or activity included within the provisions of section 3(f) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 203(f)), or section 3121(g) of title 26 and the handling, planting, drying, packing, packaging, processing, freezing, or grading prior to delivery for storage of any agricultural or horticultural commodity in its unmanufactured state.

(4) The term “day-haul operation” means the assembly of workers at a pick-up point waiting to be hired and employed, transportation of such workers to agricultural employment, and the return of such workers to a drop-off point on the same day.

(5) The term “employ” has the meaning given such term under section 3(g) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 (29 U.S.C. 203(g)) for the purposes of implementing the requirements of that Act [29 U.S.C. 201 et seq.].

(6) The term “farm labor contracting activity” means recruiting, soliciting, hiring, employing, furnishing, or transporting any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker.

(7) The term “farm labor contractor” means any person, other than an agricultural employer, an agricultural association, or an employee of an agricultural employer or agricultural association, who, for any money or other valuable consideration paid or promised to be paid, performs any farm labor contracting activity.

(8)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the term “migrant agricultural worker” means an individual who is employed in agricultural employment of a seasonal or other temporary nature, and who is required to be absent overnight from his permanent place of residence.

(B) The term “migrant agricultural worker” does not include—

(i) any immediate family member of an agricultural employer or a farm labor contractor; or

(ii) any temporary nonimmigrant alien who is authorized to work in agricultural employment in the United States under sections 1101(a)(15)(H)(ii)(a) and 1184(c) of title 8.

(9) The term “person” means any individual, partnership, association, joint stock company, trust, cooperative, or corporation.

(10)(A) Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the term “seasonal agricultural worker” means an individual who is employed in agricultural employment of a seasonal or other temporary nature and is not required to be absent overnight from his permanent place of residence—

(i) when employed on a farm or ranch performing field work related to planting, cultivating, or harvesting operations; or

(ii) when employed in canning, packing, ginning, seed conditioning or related research, or processing operations, and transported, or caused to be transported, to or from the place of employment by means of a day-haul operation.

(B) The term “seasonal agricultural worker” does not include—

(i) any migrant agricultural worker;

(ii) any immediate family member of an agricultural employer or a farm labor contractor; or

(iii) any temporary nonimmigrant alien who is authorized to work in agricultural employment in the United States under sections 1101(a)(15)(H)(ii)(a) and 1184(c) of title 8.

(11) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor or the Secretary's authorized representative.

(12) The term “State” means any of the States of the United States, the District of Columbia, the Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and Guam.

(Pub. L. 97–470, §3, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2584; Pub. L. 99–514, §2, Oct. 22, 1986, 100 Stat. 2095; Pub. L. 99–603, title I, §101(b)(1)(A), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3372.)

That Act, referred to in par. (5), is act June 25, 1938, ch. 676, 52 Stat. 1060, as amended, known as the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, which is classified generally to chapter 8 (§201 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 201 of this title and Tables.

1986—Par. (3). Pub. L. 99–514 substituted “Internal Revenue Code of 1986” for “Internal Revenue Code of 1954”, which for purposes of codification was translated as “title 26” thus requiring no change in text.

Pars. (8)(B)(ii), (10)(B)(iii). Pub. L. 99–603 substituted “1101(a)(15)(H)(ii)(a)” for “1101(a)(15)(H)(ii)”.

Section 101(b)(2) of Pub. L. 99–603, as amended by Pub. L. 100–525, §2(a)(2), Oct. 24, 1988, 102 Stat. 2610, provided that: “The amendments made by paragraph (1) [amending this section and sections 1813 and 1851 of this title and repealing section 1816 of this title] shall apply to the employment, recruitment, referral, or utilization of the services of an individual occurring on or after the first day of the seventh month beginning after the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 6, 1986]; except that if the provisions of section 274A of the Immigration and Nationality Act [8 U.S.C. 1324a] are terminated as of a date under [former] subsection (*l*) of such section, then such amendments shall no longer apply as of such date.” [The provisions of section 1324a of Title 8, Aliens and Nationality, were not terminated under subsection (*l*) of section 1324a, and that subsection was repealed by Pub. L. 104–208.]

This section is referred to in section 1831 of this title; title 8 section 1324a.

(a) The following persons are not subject to this chapter:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(B) Any labor organization, as defined in section 2(5) of the Labor Management Relations Act (29 U.S.C. 152(5)) (without regard to the exclusion of agricultural employees in that Act [29 U.S.C. 141 et seq.]) or as defined under applicable State labor relations law.

(C) Any nonprofit charitable organization or public or private nonprofit educational institution.

(D) Any person who engages in any farm labor contracting activity solely within a twenty-five mile intrastate radius of such person's permanent place of residence and for not more than thirteen weeks per year.

(E) Any custom combine, hay harvesting, or sheep shearing operation.

(F) Any custom poultry harvesting, breeding, debeaking, desexing, or health service operation provided the employees of the operation are not regularly required to be away from their permanent place of residence other than during their normal working hours.

(G)(i) Any person whose principal occupation or business is not agricultural employment, when supplying full-time students or other individuals whose principal occupation is not agricultural employment to detassel, rogue, or otherwise engage in the production of seed and to engage in related and incidental agricultural employment, unless such full-time students or other individuals are required to be away from their permanent place of residence overnight or there are individuals under eighteen years of age who are providing transportation on behalf of such person.

(ii) Any person to the extent he is supplied with students or other individuals for agricultural employment in accordance with clause (i) of this subparagraph by a person who is exempt under such clause.

(H)(i) Any person whose principal occupation or business is not agricultural employment, when supplying full-time students or other individuals whose principal occupation is not agricultural employment to string or harvest shade grown tobacco and to engage in related and incidental agricultural employment, unless there are individuals under eighteen years of age who are providing transportation on behalf of such person.

(ii) Any person to the extent he is supplied with students or other individuals for agricultural employment in accordance with clause (i) of this subparagraph by a person who is exempt under such clause.

(I) Any employee of any person described in subparagraphs (A) through (H) when performing farm labor contracting activities exclusively for such person.

(b) Subchapter I of this chapter does not apply to any agricultural employer or agricultural association or to any employee of such an employer or association.

(Pub. L. 97–470, §4, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2585.)

That Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(3)(B), is act June 23, 1947, ch. 120, 61 Stat. 136, as amended, known as the Labor Management Relations Act, 1947, which is classified principally to chapter 7 (§141 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 141 of this title and Tables.

This subchapter is referred to in section 1803 of this title.

No person shall engage in any farm labor contracting activity, unless such person has a certificate of registration from the Secretary specifying which farm labor contracting activities such person is authorized to perform.

A farm labor contractor shall not hire, employ, or use any individual to perform farm labor contracting activities unless such individual has a certificate of registration, or a certificate of registration as an employee of the farm labor contractor employer, which authorizes the activity for which such individual is hired, employed, or used. The farm labor contractor shall be held responsible for violations of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter by any employee regardless of whether the employee possesses a certificate of registration based on the contractor's certificate of registration.

Each registered farm labor contractor and registered farm labor contractor employee shall carry at all times while engaging in farm labor contracting activities a certificate of registration and, upon request, shall exhibit that certificate to all persons with whom they intend to deal as a farm labor contractor or farm labor contractor employee.

The facilities and the services authorized by the Act of June 6, 1933 (29 U.S.C. 49 et seq.), known as the Wagner-Peyser Act, shall be denied to any farm labor contractor upon refusal or failure to produce, when asked, a certificate of registration.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §101, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2587.)

The Wagner-Peyser Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is act June 6, 1933, ch. 49, 48 Stat. 113, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 4B (§49 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 49 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in section 1854 of this title.

The Secretary, after appropriate investigation and approval, shall issue a certificate of registration (including a certificate of registration as an employee of a farm labor contractor) to any person who has filed with the Secretary a written application containing the following:

(1) a declaration, subscribed and sworn to by the applicant, stating the applicant's permanent place of residence, the farm labor contracting activities for which the certificate is requested, and such other relevant information as the Secretary may require;

(2) a statement identifying each vehicle to be used to transport any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker and, if the vehicle is or will be owned or controlled by the applicant, documentation showing that the applicant is in compliance with the requirements of section 1841 of this title with respect to each such vehicle;

(3) a statement identifying each facility or real property to be used to house any migrant agricultural worker and, if the facility or real property is or will be owned or controlled by the applicant, documentation showing that the applicant is in compliance with section 1823 of this title with respect to each such facility or real property;

(4) a set of fingerprints of the applicant; and

(5) a declaration, subscribed and sworn to by the applicant, consenting to the designation by a court of the Secretary as an agent available to accept service of summons in any action against the applicant, if the applicant has left the jurisdiction in which the action is commenced or otherwise has become unavailable to accept service.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §102, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2587.)

In accordance with regulations, the Secretary may refuse to issue or renew, or may suspend or revoke, a certificate of registration (including a certificate of registration as an employee of a farm labor contractor) if the applicant or holder—

(1) has knowingly made any misrepresentation in the application for such certificate;

(2) is not the real party in interest in the application or certificate of registration and the real party in interest is a person who has been refused issuance or renewal of a certificate, has had a certificate suspended or revoked, or does not qualify under this section for a certificate;

(3) has failed to comply with this chapter or any regulation under this chapter;

(4) has failed—

(A) to pay any court judgment obtained by the Secretary or any other person under this chapter or any regulation under this chapter or under the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 [7 U.S.C. 2041 et seq.] or any regulation under such Act, or

(B) to comply with any final order issued by the Secretary as a result of a violation of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter or a violation of the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 or any regulation under such Act;

(5) has been convicted within the preceding five years—

(A) of any crime under State or Federal law relating to gambling, or to the sale, distribution or possession of alcoholic beverages, in connection with or incident to any farm labor contracting activities; or

(B) of any felony under State or Federal law involving robbery, bribery, extortion, embezzlement, grand larceny, burglary, arson, violation of narcotics laws, murder, rape, assault with intent to kill, assault which inflicts grievous bodily injury, prostitution, peonage, or smuggling or harboring individuals who have entered the United States illegally; or

(6) has been found to have violated paragraph (1) or (2) of section 1324a(a) of title 8.

(1) The person who is refused the issuance or renewal of a certificate or whose certificate is suspended or revoked under subsection (a) of this section shall be afforded an opportunity for agency hearing, upon request made within thirty days after the date of issuance of the notice of the refusal, suspension, or revocation. In such hearing, all issues shall be determined on the record pursuant to section 554 of title 5. If no hearing is requested as herein provided, the refusal, suspension, or revocation shall constitute a final and unappealable order.

(2) If a hearing is requested, the initial agency decision shall be made by an administrative law judge, and such decision shall become the final order unless the Secretary modifies or vacates the decision. Notice of intent to modify or vacate the decision of the administrative law judge shall be issued to the parties within thirty days after the decision of the administrative law judge. A final order which takes effect under this paragraph shall be subject to review only as provided under subsection (c) of this section.

Any person against whom an order has been entered after an agency hearing under this section may obtain review by the United States district court for any district in which he is located or the United States District Court for the District of Columbia by filing a notice of appeal in such court within thirty days from the date of such order, and simultaneously sending a copy of such notice by registered mail to the Secretary. The Secretary shall promptly certify and file in such court the record upon which the order was based. The findings of the Secretary shall be set aside only if found to be unsupported by substantial evidence as provided by section 706(2)(E) of title 5. Any final decision, order, or judgment of such District Court concerning such review shall be subject to appeal as provided in chapter 83 of title 28.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §103, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2588; Pub. L. 99–603, title I, §101(b)(1)(B), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3372.)

The Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963, referred to in subsec. (a)(4), is Pub. L. 88–582, Sept. 7, 1964, 78 Stat. 920, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture, and was repealed by Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §523, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2600. See section 1801 et seq. of this title.

1986—Subsec. (a)(6). Pub. L. 99–603 added par. (6).

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–603 applicable to employment, recruitment, referral, or utilization of services of an individual occurring on or after first day of seventh month beginning after Nov. 6, 1986, see section 101(b)(2) of Pub. L. 99–603, as amended, set out as a note under section 1802 of this title.

A certificate of registration may not be transferred or assigned.

(1) Unless earlier suspended or revoked, a certificate shall expire twelve months from the date of issuance, except that (A) certificates issued under this chapter during the period beginning December 1, 1982, and ending November 30, 1983, may be issued for a period of up to twenty-four months for the purpose of an orderly transition to registration under this chapter, (B) a certificate may be temporarily extended by the filing of an application with the Secretary at least thirty days prior to its expiration date, and (C) the Secretary may renew a certificate for additional twelve-month periods or for periods in excess of twelve months but not in excess of twenty-four months.

(2) Eligibility for renewals for periods of more than twelve months shall be limited to farm labor contractors who have not been cited for a violation of this chapter, or any regulation under this chapter, or the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 [7 U.S.C. 2041 et seq.], or any regulation under such Act, during the preceding five years.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §104, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2589.)

The Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963, referred to in subsec. (b)(2), is Pub. L. 88–582, Sept. 7, 1964, 78 Stat. 920, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture, and was repealed by Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §523, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2600. See section 1801 et seq. of this title.

During the period for which the certificate of registration is in effect, each farm labor contractor shall—

(1) provide to the Secretary within thirty days a notice of each change of permanent place of residence; and

(2) apply to the Secretary to amend the certificate of registration whenever the farm labor contractor intends to—

(A) engage in another farm labor contracting activity,

(B) use, or cause to be used, another vehicle than that covered by the certificate to transport any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker, or

(C) use, or cause to be used, another real property or facility to house any migrant agricultural worker than that covered by the certificate.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §105, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2589.)

Section, Pub. L. 97–470, title I, §106, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2589, prohibited employment of illegal aliens.

Repeal applicable to employment, recruitment, referral, or utilization of services of an individual occurring on or after first day of seventh month beginning after Nov. 6, 1986, see section 101(b)(2) of Pub. L. 99–603, as amended, set out as an Effective Date of 1986 Amendment note under section 1802 of this title.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which recruits any migrant agricultural worker shall ascertain and disclose in writing to each such worker who is recruited for employment the following information at the time of the worker's recruitment:

(1) the place of employment;

(2) the wage rates to be paid;

(3) the crops and kinds of activities on which the worker may be employed;

(4) the period of employment;

(5) the transportation, housing, and any other employee benefit to be provided, if any, and any costs to be charged for each of them;

(6) the existence of any strike or other concerted work stoppage, slowdown, or interruption of operations by employees at the place of employment;

(7) the existence of any arrangements with any owner or agent of any establishment in the area of employment under which the farm labor contractor, the agricultural employer, or the agricultural association is to receive a commission or any other benefit resulting from any sales by such establishment to the workers; and

(8) whether State workers’ compensation insurance is provided, and, if so, the name of the State workers’ compensation insurance carrier, the name of the policyholder of such insurance, the name and the telephone number of each person who must be notified of an injury or death, and the time period within which such notice must be given.

Compliance with the disclosure requirement of paragraph (8) for a migrant agricultural worker may be met if such worker is given a photocopy of any notice regarding workers’ compensation insurance required by law of the State in which such worker is employed. Such worker shall be given such disclosure regarding workers’ compensation at the time of recruitment or if sufficient information is unavailable at that time, at the earliest practicable time but in no event later than the commencement of work.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any migrant agricultural worker shall, at the place of employment, post in a conspicuous place a poster provided by the Secretary setting forth the rights and protections afforded such workers under this chapter, including the right of a migrant agricultural worker to have, upon request, a written statement provided by the farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association, of the information described in subsection (a) of this section. Such employer shall provide upon request, a written statement of the information described in subsection (a) of this section.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which provides housing for any migrant agricultural worker shall post in a conspicuous place or present to such worker a statement of the terms and conditions, if any, of occupancy of such housing.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any migrant agricultural worker shall—

(1) with respect to each such worker, make, keep, and preserve records for three years of the following information:

(A) the basis on which wages are paid;

(B) the number of piecework units earned, if paid on a piecework basis;

(C) the number of hours worked;

(D) the total pay period earnings;

(E) the specific sums withheld and the purpose of each sum withheld; and

(F) the net pay; and

(2) provide to each such worker for each pay period, an itemized written statement of the information required by paragraph (1) of this subsection.

Each farm labor contractor shall provide to any other farm labor contractor, and to any agricultural employer and agricultural association to which such farm labor contractor has furnished migrant agricultural workers, copies of all records with respect to each such worker which such farm labor contractor is required to retain by subsection (d)(1) of this section. The recipient of such records shall keep them for a period of three years from the end of the period of employment.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall knowingly provide false or misleading information to any migrant agricultural worker concerning the terms, conditions, or existence of agricultural employment required to be disclosed by subsection (a), (b), (c), or (d) of this section.

The information required to be disclosed by subsections (a) through (c) of this section to migrant agricultural workers shall be provided in written form. Such information shall be provided in English or, as necessary and reasonable, in Spanish or other language common to migrant agricultural workers who are not fluent or literate in English. The Department of Labor shall make forms available in English, Spanish, and other languages, as necessary, which may be used in providing workers with information required under this section.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title II, §201, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2590; Pub. L. 104–49, §4(a), Nov. 15, 1995, 109 Stat. 434.)

1995—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 104–49 added par. (8) and concluding provisions.

Section 4(c) of Pub. L. 104–49 provided that: “The amendments made by subsections (a) and (b) [amending this section and section 1831 of this title] shall take effect upon the expiration of 90 days after the date final regulations are issued by the Secretary of Labor to implement such amendments.” [Final regulations implementing Pub. L. 104–49 were signed May 13, 1996, published May 16, 1996, 61 F.R. 24858, and effective the same day.]

This section is referred to in section 1843 of this title.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any migrant agricultural worker shall pay the wages owed to such worker when due.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall require any migrant agricultural worker to purchase any goods or services solely from such farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall, without justification, violate the terms of any working arrangement made by that contractor, employer, or association with any migrant agricultural worker.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title II, §202, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2591.)

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, each person who owns or controls a facility or real property which is used as housing for migrant agricultural workers shall be responsible for ensuring that the facility or real property complies with substantive Federal and State safety and health standards applicable to that housing.

(1) Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section and paragraph (2) of this subsection, no facility or real property may be occupied by any migrant agricultural worker unless either a State or local health authority or other appropriate agency has certified that the facility or property meets applicable safety and health standards. No person who owns or controls any such facility or property shall permit it to be occupied by any migrant agricultural worker unless a copy of the certification of occupancy is posted at the site. The receipt and posting of a certificate of occupancy does not relieve any person of responsibilities under subsection (a) of this section. Each such person shall retain the original certification for three years and shall make it available for inspection and review in accordance with section 1862 of this title.

(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (1) of this subsection, if a request for the inspection of a facility or real property is made to the appropriate State or local agency at least forty-five days prior to the date on which it is occupied by migrant agricultural workers and such agency has not conducted an inspection by such date, the facility or property may be so occupied.

This section does not apply to any person who, in the ordinary course of that person's business, regularly provides housing on a commercial basis to the general public and who provides housing to migrant agricultural workers of the same character and on the same or comparable terms and conditions as is provided to the general public.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title II, §203, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2591.)

This section is referred to in section 1812 of this title.

(1) Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which recruits any seasonal agricultural worker (other than day-haul workers described in section 1802(10)(A)(ii) of this title) shall ascertain and, upon request, disclose in writing the following information when an offer of employment is made to such worker:

(A) the place of employment;

(B) the wage rates to be paid;

(C) the crops and kinds of activities on which the worker may be employed;

(D) the period of employment;

(E) the transportation and any other employee benefit to be provided, if any, and any costs to be charged for each of them;

(F) the existence of any strike or other concerted work stoppage, slowdown, or interruption of operations by employees at the place of employment;

(G) the existence of any arrangements with any owner or agent of any establishment in the area of employment under which the farm labor contractor, the agricultural employer, or the agricultural association is to receive a commission or any other benefit resulting from any sales by such establishment to the workers; and

(H) whether State workers’ compensation insurance is provided, and, if so, the name of the State workers’ compensation insurance carrier, the name of the policyholder of such insurance, the name and the telephone number of each person who must be notified of an injury or death, and the time period within which such notice must be given.

Compliance with the disclosure requirement of subparagraph (H) may be met if such worker is given, upon request, a photocopy of any notice regarding workers’ compensation insurance required by law of the State in which such worker is employed.

(2) Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which recruits seasonal agricultural workers through use of a day-haul operation described in section 1802(10)(A)(ii) of this title shall ascertain and disclose in writing to the worker at the place of recruitment the information described in paragraph (1).

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any seasonal agricultural worker shall, at the place of employment, post in a conspicuous place a poster provided by the Secretary setting forth the rights and protections afforded such workers under this chapter, including the right of a seasonal agricultural worker to have, upon request, a written statement provided by the farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association, of the information described in subsection (a) of this section. Such employer shall provide, upon request, a written statement of the information described in subsection (a) of this section.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any seasonal agricultural worker shall—

(1) with respect to each such worker, make, keep, and preserve records for three years of the following information:

(A) the basis on which wages are paid;

(B) the number of piecework units earned, if paid on a piecework basis;

(C) the number of hours worked;

(D) the total pay period earnings;

(E) the specific sums withheld and the purpose of each sum withheld; and

(F) the net pay; and

(2) provide to each such worker for each pay period, an itemized written statement of the information required by paragraph (1) of this subsection.

(1) 1 Each farm labor contractor shall provide to any other farm labor contractor and to any agricultural employer and agricultural association to which such farm labor contractor has furnished seasonal agricultural workers, copies of all records with respect to each such worker which such farm labor contractor is required to retain by subsection (c)(1) of this section. The recipient of these records shall keep them for a period of three years from the end of the period of employment.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall knowingly provide false or misleading information to any seasonal agricultural worker concerning the terms, conditions, or existence of agricultural employment required to be disclosed by subsection (a), (b), or (c) of this section.

The information required to be disclosed by subsections (a) and (b) of this section to seasonal agricultural workers shall be provided in written form. Such information shall be provided in English or, as necessary and reasonable, in Spanish or other language common to seasonal agricultural workers who are not fluent or literate in English. The Department of Labor shall make forms available in English, Spanish, and other languages, as necessary, which may be used in providing workers with information required under this section.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title III, §301, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2592; Pub. L. 104–49, §4(b), Nov. 15, 1995, 109 Stat. 434.)

1995—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 104–49 added subpar. (H) and concluding provisions.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–49 effective upon expiration of 90 days after the date final regulations are issued by Secretary of Labor to implement such amendment, see section 4(c) of Pub. L. 104–49, set out as a note under section 1821 of this title.

This section is referred to in section 1843 of this title.

1 So in original. No par. (2) has been enacted.

Each farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, and agricultural association which employs any seasonal agricultural worker shall pay the wages owed to such worker when due.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall require any seasonal agricultural worker to purchase any goods or services solely from such farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association.

No farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, or agricultural association shall, without justification, violate the terms of any working arrangement made by that contractor, employer, or association with any seasonal agricultural worker.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title III, §302, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2593.)

(1) Except as provided in paragraph (2), this section applies to the transportation of any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker.

(2) This section does not apply to the transportation of any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker on a tractor, combine, harvester, picker, or other similar machinery and equipment while such worker is actually engaged in the planting, cultivating, or harvesting of any agricultural commodity or the care of livestock or poultry.

(1) When using, or causing to be used, any vehicle for providing transportation to which this section applies, each agricultural employer, agricultural association, and farm labor contractor shall—

(A) ensure that such vehicle conforms to the standards prescribed by the Secretary under paragraph (2) of this subsection and other applicable Federal and State safety standards,

(B) ensure that each driver has a valid and appropriate license, as provided by State law, to operate the vehicle, and

(C) have an insurance policy or a liability bond that is in effect which insures the agricultural employer, the agricultural association, or the farm labor contractor against liability for damage to persons or property arising from the ownership, operation, or the causing to be operated, of any vehicle used to transport any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker.

(2)(A) For purposes of paragraph (1)(A), the Secretary shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to protect the health and safety of migrant and seasonal agricultural workers.

(B) To the extent consistent with the protection of the health and safety of migrant and seasonal agricultural workers, the Secretary shall, in promulgating regulations under subparagraph (A), consider, among other factors—

(i) the type of vehicle used,

(ii) the passenger capacity of the vehicle,

(iii) the distance which such workers will be carried in the vehicle,

(iv) the type of roads and highways on which such workers will be carried in the vehicle,

(v) the extent to which a proposed standard would cause an undue burden on agricultural employers, agricultural associations, or farm labor contractors.

(C) Standards prescribed by the Secretary under subparagraph (A) shall be in addition to, and shall not supersede or modify, any standard under part B of subtitle IV of title 49, or regulations issued thereunder, which is independently applicable to transportation to which this section applies. A violation of any such standard shall also constitute a violation under this chapter.

(D) In the event that the Secretary fails for any reason to prescribe standards under subparagraph (A) by the effective date of this chapter, the standards prescribed under section 31502 of title 49, relating to the transportation of migrant workers, shall, for purposes of paragraph (1)(A), be deemed to be the standards prescribed by the Secretary under this paragraph, and shall, as appropriate and reasonable in the circumstances, apply (i) without regard to the mileage and boundary line limitations contained in such section, and (ii) until superseded by standards actually prescribed by the Secretary in accordance with this paragraph.

(3) The level of insurance required under paragraph (1)(C) shall be determined by the Secretary considering at least the factors set forth in paragraph (2)(B) and similar farmworker transportation requirements under State law.

If an agricultural employer, agricultural association, or farm labor contractor is the employer of any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker for purposes of a State workers’ compensation law and such employer provides workers’ compensation coverage for such worker in the case of bodily injury or death as provided by such State law, the following adjustments in the requirements of subsection (b)(1)(C) of this section relating to having an insurance policy or liability bond apply:

(1) No insurance policy or liability bond shall be required of the employer, if such workers are transported only under circumstances for which there is coverage under such State law.

(2) An insurance policy or liability bond shall be required of the employer for circumstances under which coverage for the transportation of such workers is not provided under such State law.

The Secretary shall, by regulations promulgated in accordance with section 1861 of this title not later than the effective date of this chapter, prescribe the standards required for the purposes of implementing this section. Any subsequent revision of such standards shall also be accomplished by regulation promulgated in accordance with such section.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title IV, §401, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2594; Pub. L. 104–49, §5(a), Nov. 15, 1995, 109 Stat. 434; Pub. L. 104–88, title III, §333, Dec. 29, 1995, 109 Stat. 953.)

The effective date of this chapter, referred to in subsecs. (b)(2)(D) and (d), is the effective date of Pub. L. 97–470, which is ninety days from the date of enactment of Pub. L. 97–470, which was approved Jan. 14, 1983.

In subsec. (b)(2)(D), “section 31502 of title 49” substituted for “section 3102 of title 49” on authority of Pub. L. 103–272, §§1(c), (e), 6(b), July 5, 1994, 108 Stat. 745, 862, 1029, 1378. Previously, “section 3102 of title 49” substituted for “section 204(a)(3a) of the Interstate Commerce Act (49 U.S.C. 304(a)(3a))” on authority of Pub. L. 97–449, §6(b), Jan. 12, 1983, 96 Stat. 2443, the first section of which enacted subtitle I (§101 et seq.) and chapter 31 (§3101 et seq.) of subtitle II of Title 49, Transportation.

1995—Subsec. (b)(2)(C). Pub. L. 104–88 substituted “part B of subtitle IV of title 49” for “part II of the Interstate Commerce Act, or any successor provision of subtitle IV of title 49”.

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 104–49 amended par. (3) generally. Prior to amendment, par. (3) read as follows: “The level of the insurance required by paragraph (1)(C) shall be at least the amount currently required for common carriers of passengers under part II of the Interstate Commerce Act, and any successor provision of subtitle IV of title 49, and regulations prescribed thereunder.”

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–88 effective Jan. 1, 1996, see section 2 of Pub. L. 104–88, set out as an Effective Date note under section 701 of Title 49, Transportation.

Section 5(c) of Pub. L. 104–49 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] takes effect upon the expiration of 180 days after the date of enactment of this Act [Nov. 15, 1995] or upon the issuance of final regulations under subsection (b) [set out below], whichever occurs first.”

Section 5(b) of Pub. L. 104–49 provided that: “Within 180 days of the date of the enactment of this Act [Nov. 15, 1995], the Secretary of Labor shall promulgate regulations establishing insurance levels under section 401(b)(3) of the Migrant and Seasonal Agricultural Worker Protection Act (29 U.S.C. 1841(b)(3)) as amended by subsection (a).” [Final regulations implementing Pub. L. 104–49 were signed May 13, 1996, published May 16, 1996, 61 F.R. 24858, and effective the same day.]

This section is referred to in sections 1812, 1854 of this title.

No person shall utilize the services of any farm labor contractor to supply any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker unless the person first takes reasonable steps to determine that the farm labor contractor possesses a certificate of registration which is valid and which authorizes the activity for which the contractor is utilized. In making that determination, the person may rely upon either possession of a certificate of registration, or confirmation of such registration by the Department of Labor. The Secretary shall maintain a central public registry of all persons issued a certificate of registration.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title IV, §402, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2595.)

Each farm labor contractor, without regard to any other provisions of this chapter, shall obtain at each place of employment and make available for inspection to every worker he furnishes for employment, a written statement of the conditions of such employment as described in sections 1821(b) and 1831(b) of this title.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title IV, §403, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2595.)

No farm labor contractor shall violate, without justification, the terms of any written agreements made with an agricultural employer or an agricultural association pertaining to any contracting activity or worker protection under this chapter.

Written agreements under this section do not relieve a person of any responsibility that such person would otherwise have under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title IV, §404, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2596.)

Any person who willfully and knowingly violates this chapter or any regulation under this chapter shall be fined not more than $1,000 or sentenced to prison for a term not to exceed one year, or both. Upon conviction for any subsequent violation of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter, the defendant shall be fined not more than $10,000 or sentenced to prison for a term not to exceed three years, or both.

If a farm labor contractor who commits a violation of paragraph (1) or (2) of section 1324a(a) of title 8 has been refused issuance or renewal of, or has failed to obtain, a certificate of registration or is a farm labor contractor whose certificate has been suspended or revoked, the contractor shall, upon conviction, be fined not more than $10,000 or sentenced to prison for a term not to exceed three years, or both.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §501, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2596; Pub. L. 99–603, title I, §101(b)(1)(D), Nov. 6, 1986, 100 Stat. 3372.)

1986—Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 99–603 substituted “paragraph (1) or (2) of section 1324a(a) of title 8” for “section 1816 of this title”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 99–603 applicable to employment, recruitment, referral, or utilization of services of an individual occurring on or after first day of seventh month beginning after Nov. 6, 1986, see section 101(b)(2) of Pub. L. 99–603, as amended, set out as a note under section 1802 of this title.

The Secretary may petition any appropriate district court of the United States for temporary or permanent injunctive relief if the Secretary determines that this chapter, or any regulation under this chapter, has been violated.

Except as provided in section 518(a) of title 28, relating to litigation before the Supreme Court, the Solicitor of Labor may appear for and represent the Secretary in any civil litigation brought under this chapter, but all such litigation shall be subject to the direction and control of the Attorney General.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §502, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2596.)

(1) Subject to paragraph (2), any person who commits a violation of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter, may be assessed a civil money penalty of not more than $1,000 for each violation.

(2) In determining the amount of any penalty to be assessed under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall take into account (A) the previous record of the person in terms of compliance with this chapter and with comparable requirements of the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 [7 U.S.C. 2041 et seq.], and with regulations promulgated under this chapter and such Act, and (B) the gravity of the violation.

(1) The person assessed shall be afforded an opportunity for agency hearing, upon request made within thirty days after the date of issuance of the notice of assessment. In such hearing, all issues shall be determined on the record pursuant to section 554 of title 5. If no hearing is requested as herein provided, the assessment shall constitute a final and unappealable order.

(2) If a hearing is requested, the initial agency decision shall be made by an administrative law judge, and such decision shall become the final order unless the Secretary modifies or vacates the decision. Notice of intent to modify or vacate the decision of the administrative law judge shall be issued to the parties within thirty days after the decision of the administrative law judge. A final order which takes effect under this paragraph shall be subject to review only as provided under subsection (c) of this section.

Any person against whom an order imposing a civil money penalty has been entered after an agency hearing under this section may obtain review by the United States district court for any district in which he is located or the United States District Court for the District of Columbia by filing a notice of appeal in such court within thirty days from the date of such order, and simultaneously sending a copy of such notice by registered mail to the Secretary. The Secretary shall promptly certify and file in such court the record upon which the penalty was imposed. The findings of the Secretary shall be set aside only if found to be unsupported by substantial evidence as provided by section 706(2)(E) of title 5. Any final decision, order, or judgment of such District Court concerning such review shall be subject to appeal as provided in chapter 83 of title 28.

If any person fails to pay an assessment after it has become a final and unappealable order, or after the court has entered final judgment in favor of the agency, the Secretary shall refer the matter to the Attorney General, who shall recover the amount assessed by action in the appropriate United States district court. In such action the validity and appropriateness of the final order imposing the penalty shall not be subject to review.

All penalties collected under authority of this section shall be paid into the Treasury of the United States.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §503, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2596.)

The Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 88–582, Sept. 7, 1964, 78 Stat. 920, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture, and was repealed by Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §523, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2600. See section 1801 et seq. of this title.

This section is referred to in section 2005 of this title.

Any person aggrieved by a violation of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter by a farm labor contractor, agricultural employer, agricultural association, or other person may file suit in any district court of the United States having jurisdiction of the parties, without respect to the amount in controversy and without regard to the citizenship of the parties and without regard to exhaustion of any alternative administrative remedies provided herein.

Upon application by a complainant and in such circumstances as the court may deem just, the court may appoint an attorney for such complainant and may authorize the commencement of the action.

(1) If the court finds that the respondent has intentionally violated any provision of this chapter or any regulation under this chapter, it may award damages up to and including an amount equal to the amount of actual damages, or statutory damages of up to $500 per plaintiff per violation, or other equitable relief, except that (A) multiple infractions of a single provision of this chapter or of regulations under this chapter shall constitute only one violation for purposes of determining the amount of statutory damages due a plaintiff; and (B) if such complaint is certified as a class action, the court shall award no more than the lesser of up to $500 per plaintiff per violation, or up to $500,000 or other equitable relief.

(2) In determining the amount of damages to be awarded under paragraph (1), the court is authorized to consider whether an attempt was made to resolve the issues in dispute before the resort to litigation.

(3) Any civil action brought under this section shall be subject to appeal as provided in chapter 83 of title 28.

(1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, where a State workers’ compensation law is applicable and coverage is provided for a migrant or seasonal agricultural worker, the workers’ compensation benefits shall be the exclusive remedy for loss of such worker under this chapter in the case of bodily injury or death in accordance with such State's workers’ compensation law.

(2) The exclusive remedy prescribed by paragraph (1) precludes the recovery under subsection (c) of this section of actual damages for loss from an injury or death but does not preclude recovery under subsection (c) of this section for statutory damages or equitable relief, except that such relief shall not include back or front pay or in any manner, directly or indirectly, expand or otherwise alter or affect (A) a recovery under a State workers’ compensation law or (B) rights conferred under a State workers’ compensation law.

If the court finds in an action which is brought by or for a worker under subsection (a) of this section in which a claim for actual damages is precluded because the worker's injury is covered by a State workers’ compensation law as provided by subsection (d) of this section that—

(1)(A) the defendant in the action violated section 1841(b) of this title by knowingly requiring or permitting a driver to drive a vehicle for the transportation of migrant or seasonal agricultural workers while under the influence of alcohol or a controlled substance (as defined in section 802 of title 21) and the defendant had actual knowledge of the driver's condition, and

(B) such violation resulted in injury to or death of the migrant or seasonal worker by or for whom the action was brought and such injury or death arose out of and in the course of employment as determined under the State workers’ compensation law,

(2)(A) the defendant violated a safety standard prescribed by the Secretary under section 1841(b) of this title which the defendant was determined in a previous judicial or administrative proceeding to have violated, and

(B) such safety violation resulted in an injury or death described in paragraph (1)(B),

(3)(A)(i) the defendant willfully disabled or removed a safety device prescribed by the Secretary under section 1841(b) of this title, or

(ii) the defendant in conscious disregard of the requirements of section 1841(b) of this title failed to provide a safety device required under such section, and

(B) such disablement, removal, or failure to provide a safety device resulted in an injury or death described in paragraph (1)(B), or

(4)(A) the defendant violated a safety standard prescribed by the Secretary under section 1841(b) of this title,

(B) such safety violation resulted in an injury or death described in paragraph (1)(B), and

(C) the defendant at the time of the violation of section 1841(b) of this title also was—

(i) an unregistered farm labor contractor in violation of section 1811(a) of this title, or

(ii) a person who utilized the services of a farm labor contractor of the type specified in clause (i) without taking reasonable steps to determine that the farm labor contractor possessed a valid certificate of registration authorizing the performance of the farm labor contracting activities which the contractor was requested or permitted to perform with the knowledge of such person,

the court shall award not more than $10,000 per plaintiff per violation with respect to whom the court made the finding described in paragraph (1), (2), (3), or (4), except that multiple infractions of a single provision of this chapter shall constitute only one violation for purposes of determining the amount of statutory damages due to a plaintiff under this subsection and in the case of a class action, the court shall award not more than the lesser of up to $10,000 per plaintiff or up to $500,000 for all plaintiffs in such class action.

If it is determined under a State workers’ compensation law that the workers’ compensation law is not applicable to a claim for bodily injury or death of a migrant or seasonal agricultural worker, the statute of limitations for bringing an action for actual damages for such injury or death under subsection (a) of this section shall be tolled for the period during which the claim for such injury or death under such State workers’ compensation law was pending. The statute of limitations for an action for other actual damages, statutory damages, or equitable relief arising out of the same transaction or occurrence as the injury or death of the migrant or seasonal agricultural worker shall be tolled for the period during which the claim for such injury or death was pending under the State workers’ compensation law.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §504, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2597; Pub. L. 102–392, title III, §325(a), Oct. 6, 1992, 106 Stat. 1728; Pub. L. 104–49, §§1(a)(2), 2(a), 3, Nov. 15, 1995, 109 Stat. 432, 433.)

1995—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 104–49, §1(a)(2), amended subsec. (d) generally. Prior to amendment, subsec. (d) read as follows:

“(d)(1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, where a State workers’ compensation law is applicable and coverage is provided for a migrant or seasonal agricultural worker, the workers’ compensation benefits shall be the exclusive remedy for loss of such worker under this chapter in the case of bodily injury or death.

“(2) The exclusive remedy prescribed by paragraph (1) precludes the recovery under subsection (c) of this section of actual damages for loss from an injury or death but does not preclude recovery under subsection (c) of this section for statutory damages or an injunction.”

Subsec. (e). Pub. L. 104–49, §2(a), added subsec. (e).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 104–49, §3, added subsec. (f).

1992—Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 102–392 added subsec. (d).

Section 1(b) of Pub. L. 104–49 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a)(2) [amending this section] shall apply to all cases in which a final judgment has not been entered.”

Section 2(b) of Pub. L. 104–49 provided that: “The amendment made by subsection (a) [amending this section] shall apply to all cases in which a final judgment has not been entered.”

Section 325(c) of Pub. L. 102–392 provided that the amendment of this section by section 325(a) of Pub. L. 102–392 would apply to actions commenced after Oct. 6, 1992, but not after the expiration of 9 months after such date, with waiver and extension provisions for certain actions, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 104–49, §1(a)(1), Nov. 15, 1995, 109 Stat. 432.

No person shall intimidate, threaten, restrain, coerce, blacklist, discharge, or in any manner discriminate against any migrant or seasonal agricultural worker because such worker has, with just cause, filed any complaint or instituted, or caused to be instituted, any proceeding under or related to this chapter, or has testified or is about to testify in any such proceedings, or because of the exercise, with just cause, by such worker on behalf of himself or others of any right or protection afforded by this chapter.

A migrant or seasonal agricultural worker who believes, with just cause, that he has been discriminated against by any person in violation of this section may, within 180 days after such violation occurs, file a complaint with the Secretary alleging such discrimination. Upon receipt of such complaint, the Secretary shall cause such investigation to be made as he deems appropriate. If upon such investigation, the Secretary determines that the provisions of this section have been violated, the Secretary shall bring an action in any appropriate United States district court against such person. In any such action the United States district courts shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown, to restrain violation of subsection (a) of this section and order all appropriate relief, including rehiring or reinstatement of the worker, with back pay, or damages.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §505, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2598.)

Agreements by employees purporting to waive or to modify their rights under this chapter shall be void as contrary to public policy, except that a waiver or modification of rights in favor of the Secretary shall be valid for purposes of enforcement of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §506, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2598.)

The Secretary may issue such rules and regulations as are necessary to carry out this chapter, consistent with the requirements of chapter 5 of title 5.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §511, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2598.)

This section is referred to in section 1841 of this title.

To carry out this chapter the Secretary, either pursuant to a complaint or otherwise, shall, as may be appropriate, investigate, and in connection therewith, enter and inspect such places (including housing and vehicles) and such records (and make transcriptions thereof), question such persons and gather such information to determine compliance with this chapter, or regulations prescribed under this chapter.

The Secretary may issue subpenas requiring the attendance and testimony of witnesses or the production of any evidence in connection with such investigations. The Secretary may administer oaths, examine witnesses, and receive evidence. For the purpose of any hearing or investigation provided for in this chapter, the authority contained in sections 49 and 50 of title 15, relating to the attendance of witnesses and the production of books, papers, and documents, shall be available to the Secretary. The Secretary shall conduct investigations in a manner which protects the confidentiality of any complainant or other party who provides information to the Secretary in good faith.

It shall be a violation of this chapter for any person to unlawfully resist, oppose, impede, intimidate, or interfere with any official of the Department of Labor assigned to perform an investigation, inspection, or law enforcement function pursuant to this chapter during the performance of such duties.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §512, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2598.)

This section is referred to in section 1823 of this title.

The Secretary may enter into agreements with Federal and State agencies (1) to use their facilities and services, (2) to delegate, subject to subsection (b) of this section, to Federal and State agencies such authority, other than rulemaking, as may be useful in carrying out this chapter, and (3) to allocate or transfer funds to, or otherwise pay or reimburse, such agencies for expenses incurred pursuant to agreements under clause (1) or (2) of this section.

Any delegation to a State agency pursuant to subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be made only pursuant to a written State plan which—

(1) shall include a description of the functions to be performed, the methods of performing such functions, and the resources to be devoted to the performance of such functions; and

(2) provides assurances satisfactory to the Secretary that the State agency will comply with its description under paragraph (1) and that the State agency's performance of functions so delegated will be at least comparable to the performance of such functions by the Department of Labor.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §513, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2599.)

This chapter is intended to supplement State law, and compliance with this chapter shall not excuse any person from compliance with appropriate State law and regulation.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §521, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2599.)

The Secretary may deny a certificate of registration to any farm labor contractor, as defined in this chapter, who has a judgment outstanding against him under the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 (7 U.S.C. 2041 et seq.), or is subject to a final order of the Secretary under that Act assessing a civil money penalty which has not been paid. Any findings under the Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963 may also be applicable to determinations of willful and knowing violations under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §522, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2599.)

The Farm Labor Contractor Registration Act of 1963, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 88–582, Sept. 7, 1964, 78 Stat. 920, as amended, which was classified generally to chapter 52 (§2041 et seq.) of Title 7, Agriculture, and was repealed by Pub. L. 97–470, title V, §523, Jan. 14, 1983, 96 Stat. 2600. See section 1801 et seq. of this title.


The Congress finds that—

(1) deaf-blindness is among the most severe of all forms of disabilities, and there is a great and continuing need for services and training to help individuals who are deaf-blind attain the highest possible level of development;

(2) due to the rubella epidemic of the 1960's, the rapidly increasing number of older persons many of whom are experiencing significant losses of both vision and hearing, and recent advances in medical technology that have sustained the lives of many severely disabled individuals, including individuals who are deaf-blind, who might not otherwise have survived, the need for services for individuals who are deaf-blind is even more pressing now than in the past;

(3) helping individuals who are deaf-blind to become self-sufficient, independent, and employable by providing the services and training necessary to accomplish that end will benefit the Nation, both economically and socially;

(4) the Helen Keller National Center for Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind is a vital national resource for meeting the needs of individuals who are deaf-blind and no State currently has the facilities or personnel to meet such needs;

(5) the Federal Government has made a substantial investment in capital, equipment, and operating funds for such Center since it was established; and

(6) it is in the national interest to continue to provide support for the Center, and it is a proper function of the Federal Government to be the primary source of such support.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §202, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 32; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §§901, 908(a), (c)(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4482, 4485, 4486.)

Provisions for the establishment, operation, and funding of the Helen Keller National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults, similar to those comprising this chapter, were contained in section 777c of this title prior to the repeal of that section and the enactment of this chapter by Pub. L. 98–221. Prior thereto provisions similar to those comprising this chapter and authorizing appropriations for fiscal years ending June 30, 1974, June 30, 1975, June 30, 1976, Sept. 30, 1977, and Sept. 30, 1978, for the establishment of the Helen Keller National Center for Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults were contained in former section 305 of Pub. L. 93–112, title III, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 383, as amended by Pub. L. 93–516, title I, §107, Dec. 7, 1974, 88 Stat. 1619; Pub. L. 93–651, title I, §107, Nov. 21, 1974, 89 Stat. 2–4; Pub. L. 94–230, §§7, 11(b)(10), Mar. 15, 1976, 90 Stat. 212, 213; Pub. L. 94–288, §§1, 2, May 21, 1976, 90 Stat. 520, which was classified to section 775 of this title. Section 109(1) of Pub. L. 95–602 redesignated former section 305 as section 313 of Pub. L. 93–112. Section 313 of Pub. L. 93–112, as amended generally by section 116(2) of Pub. L. 95–602, was classified to section 777c of this title.

Prior similar provisions were also contained in former section 42a of this title.

1992—Par. (1). Pub. L. 102–569, §908(a), substituted “individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individuals”.

Par. (2). Pub. L. 102–569, §§901(1), 908(a), inserted “, the rapidly increasing number of older persons many of whom are experiencing significant losses of both vision and hearing,” after “1960's” and substituted “individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individuals” in two places.

Par. (3). Pub. L. 102–569, §908(a), substituted “individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individuals”.

Par. (4). Pub. L. 102–569, §908(a), (c)(1), substituted “Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind” for “Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults” and “individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individuals”.

Par. (5). Pub. L. 102–569, §901(2), substituted “made a substantial investment” for “invested approximately $10,000,000”.

Section 201 of Pub. L. 98–221 provided that: “This title [enacting this chapter, amending section 777 of this title, and repealing section 777c of this title] may be cited as the ‘Helen Keller National Center Act’.”

The Secretary of Education shall continue to administer and support the Helen Keller National Center for Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind in the same manner as such Center was administered prior to February 22, 1984, to the extent such manner of administration is not inconsistent with any purpose described in subsection (b) of this section or any other requirement of this chapter.

The purposes of the Center are to—

(1) provide specialized intensive services, or any other services, at the Center or anywhere else in the United States, which are necessary to encourage the maximum personal development of any individual who is deaf-blind;

(2) train family members of individuals who are deaf-blind at the Center or anywhere else in the United States, in order to assist family members in providing and obtaining appropriate services for the individual who is deaf-blind;

(3) train professionals and allied personnel at the Center or anywhere else in the United States to provide services to individuals who are deaf-blind; and

(4) conduct applied research, development programs, and demonstrations with respect to communication techniques, teaching methods, aids and devices, and delivery of services.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §203, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 33; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §§902, 908, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4482, 4485.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (a), was in the original “this title”, meaning title II of Pub. L. 98–221, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 32, which is classified generally to this chapter (§1901 et seq.). For complete classification of this title to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1901 of this title and Tables. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title of 1984 Amendment note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

1992—Pub. L. 102–569, §908(c)(2), amended section catchline.

Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569, §§902(1)–(3), 908(c)(1), redesignated subsec. (b) as (a), substituted “Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind” for “Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults”, “prior to February 22, 1984” for “pursuant to section 313 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973”, and “subsection (b)” for “subsection (c)”, and struck out former subsec. (a) which repealed section 777c of this title.

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 102–569, §§902(2), (4), 908(a), (b), redesignated subsec. (c) as (b), substituted “individual who is deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individual” in par. (1), added par. (2), redesignated former par. (2) as (3) and substituted “individuals who are deaf-blind” for “deaf-blind individuals”, and redesignated former par. (3) as (4). Former subsec. (b) redesignated (a).

(a) The books and accounts of the Center shall be audited annually by an independent auditor in the manner prescribed by the Secretary and a report on each such audit shall be submitted by the auditor to the Secretary within 15 days following the completion of the audit and acceptance of the audit by the Center.

(b)(1) The Secretary shall establish procedures for monitoring, on a regular basis, the services performed and the training conducted by the Center.

(2) The Secretary shall, in addition to the regular monitoring required under paragraph (1), conduct an evaluation of the operation of the Center at the end of each fiscal year. A written report of such evaluation shall be submitted to the President, the Clerk of the House of Representatives, and the Secretary of the Senate within one hundred and eighty days after the end of the fiscal year for which such evaluation was conducted. The first such report shall be submitted for fiscal year 1983.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §204, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 33; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §903, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4482.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “within 15 days following the completion of the audit and acceptance of the audit by the Center” for “at such time as the Secretary shall prescribe”.

This section is referred to in section 1907 of this title.

(a) There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out the provisions of this chapter such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997. Such sums shall remain available until expended.

(b) Any appropriation Act containing any appropriation authorized by subsection (a) of this section shall contain a statement of the specific amount being made available to the Center.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §205, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 33; Pub. L. 99–506, title IX, §901, Oct. 21, 1986, 100 Stat. 1840; Pub. L. 100–630, title V, §501, Nov. 7, 1988, 102 Stat. 3317; Pub. L. 102–52, §9(a), June 6, 1991, 105 Stat. 263; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §904, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4482.)

1992—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “1993 through 1997” for “1987 through 1992”.

1991—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 102–52 substituted “1992” for “1991”.

1988—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 100–630 substituted “1991” for “1990”.

1986—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 99–506 amended first sentence generally. Prior to amendment, first sentence read as follows: “There are authorized to be appropriated $4,000,000 for the fiscal year 1984, $4,200,000 for the fiscal year 1985, and $4,300,000 for the fiscal year 1986 to carry out the provisions of this chapter.”

For purposes of this chapter—

(1) the terms “Helen Keller National Center for Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind” and “Center” mean the Helen Keller National Center for Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind, and its affiliated network, operated pursuant to this chapter;

(2) the term “individual who is deaf-blind” means any individual—

(A)(i) who has a central visual acuity of 20/200 or less in the better eye with corrective lenses, or a field defect such that the peripheral diameter of visual field subtends an angular distance no greater than 20 degrees, or a progressive visual loss having a prognosis leading to one or both these conditions;

(ii) who has a chronic hearing impairment so severe that most speech cannot be understood with optimum amplification, or a progressive hearing loss having a prognosis leading to this condition; and

(iii) for whom the combination of impairments described in clauses (i) and (ii) cause extreme difficulty in attaining independence in daily life activities, achieving psychosocial adjustment, or obtaining a vocation;

(B) who despite the inability to be measured accurately for hearing and vision loss due to cognitive or behavioral constraints, or both, can be determined through functional and performance assessment to have severe hearing and visual disabilities that cause extreme difficulty in attaining independence in daily life activities, achieving psychosocial adjustment, or obtaining vocational objectives; or

(C) meets such other requirements as the Secretary may prescribe by regulation; and

(3) the term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Education.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §206, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 34; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §§905, 908(c)(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4482, 4486.)

1992—Par. (1). Pub. L. 102–569, §§905(1), 908(c)(1), substituted “Youths and Adults who are Deaf-Blind” for “Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults” in two places and struck out “section 313 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and continued under” after “operated pursuant to”.

Par. (2). Pub. L. 102–569, §905(2), amended par. (2) generally, substituting present provisions for provisions defining “deaf-blind individual”.

This chapter shall not be construed as modifying or affecting any agreement between the Department of Education or any other department or agency of the United States and the Helen Keller Services for the Blind, Incorporated, or any successor to or assignee of such corporation, with respect to the Center.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §207, Feb. 22, 1984, 98 Stat. 34; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §906, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4483.)

1992—Pub. L. 102–569 substituted “Helen Keller Services for the Blind, Incorporated” for “Industrial Home for the Blind, Incorporated”.

The Secretary and the Board of Directors of the Helen Keller National Center are authorized to establish the Helen Keller National Center Federal Endowment Fund (hereafter in this section referred to as the “Endowment Fund”) in accordance with the provisions of this section, to promote the financial independence of the Helen Keller National Center. The Secretary and the Board may enter into such agreements as may be necessary to carry out the purposes of this section.

The Secretary shall make payments to the Endowment Fund from amounts appropriated pursuant to subsection (h) of this section, consistent with the provisions of this section.

Subject to the availability of appropriations, the Secretary shall make payments to the Endowment Fund in amounts equal to sums contributed to the Endowment Fund from non-Federal sources (excluding transfers from other endowment funds of the Center).

The Center, in investing the Endowment Fund corpus and income, shall exercise the judgment and care, under the prevailing circumstances, which a person of prudence, discretion, and intelligence would exercise in the management of that person's own business affairs.

The Endowment Fund corpus and income shall be invested in federally insured bank savings accounts or comparable interest bearing accounts, certificates of deposit, money market funds, mutual funds, obligations of the United States, or other low-risk instruments and securities in which a regulated insurance company may invest under the laws of the State of New York.

The Endowment Fund corpus and income may not be invested in real estate.

The Endowment Fund corpus or income may not be invested in instruments or securities issued by an organization in which an executive officer is a controlling shareholder, director, or owner within the meaning of Federal securities laws and other applicable laws.

The Center may not assign, hypothecate, encumber, or create a lien on the Endowment Fund corpus without specific written authorization of the Secretary.

For a 20-year period following the receipt of a payment under this section, the Center shall not withdraw or expend the Federal payment or matching contribution made to the Endowment Fund corpus. On the expiration of such period, the Center may use the Endowment Fund corpus plus any of the Endowment Fund income for any purpose that benefits individuals who are deaf-blind.

The Helen Keller National Center may withdraw or expend the Endowment Fund income for any expenses necessary for the operation of the Center, including expenses of operations and maintenance, administration, academic and support personnel, construction and renovation, community and client services programs, technical assistance, and research.

The Center may not withdraw or expend the Endowment Fund income for any commercial purpose.

Except as provided in subparagraph (B), the Center shall not withdraw or expend more than 50 percent of the total aggregate Endowment Fund income earned prior to the time of withdrawal or expenditure.

The Secretary may permit the Center to withdraw or expend more than 50 percent of its total aggregate endowment income where the Center demonstrates to the Secretary's satisfaction that such withdrawal or expenditure is necessary because of—

(i) a financial emergency, such as a pending insolvency or temporary liquidity problem;

(ii) a life-threatening situation occasioned by a natural disaster or arson; or

(iii) another unusual occurrence or exigent circumstance.

The Helen Keller National Center shall keep accurate financial records relating to the operation of the Endowment Fund.

The Center shall arrange for the conduct of an annual financial and compliance audit of the Endowment Fund in the manner prescribed by the Secretary pursuant to section 1903(a) of this title.

The Center shall submit a copy of the report on the audit required under subparagraph (A) to the Secretary within 15 days after completion of the audit and acceptance of the audit by the Center.

Not later than 60 days after the end of each fiscal year, the Center shall provide to the Secretary an annual report on the uses of funds provided by the Federal endowment program authorized under this section. Such report shall contain such information, and be in such form as the Secretary may require.

After notice and an opportunity for a hearing, the Secretary is authorized to recover any Federal payments made under this section if the Helen Keller National Center—

(1) makes a withdrawal or expenditure from the Endowment Fund corpus or income which is not consistent with the provisions of this section;

(2) fails to comply with the investment standards and limitations under this section; or

(3) fails to account properly to the Secretary concerning the investment of or expenditures from the Endowment Fund corpus or income.

For the purposes of this section:

The term “endowment fund” means a fund, or a tax-exempt foundation, established and maintained by the Helen Keller National Center for the purpose of generating income for the support of the Center.

The term “Endowment Fund corpus” means an amount equal to the Federal payments made to the Endowment Fund and amounts contributed to the Endowment Fund from non-Federal sources.

The term “Endowment Fund income” means an amount equal to the total market value of the Endowment Fund minus the Endowment Fund corpus.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this section, such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1993 through 1997. Such sums shall remain available until expended.

(Pub. L. 98–221, title II, §208, as added Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §907, Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4483.)


This chapter is referred to in title 2 sections 1302, 1314, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 414.

As used in this chapter:

The term “commerce” has the meaning provided by section 203(b) of this title.

The term “employer” includes any person acting directly or indirectly in the interest of an employer in relation to an employee or prospective employee.

The term “lie detector” includes a polygraph, deceptograph, voice stress analyzer, psychological stress evaluator, or any other similar device (whether mechanical or electrical) that is used, or the results of which are used, for the purpose of rendering a diagnostic opinion regarding the honesty or dishonesty of an individual.

The term “polygraph” means an instrument that—

(A) records continuously, visually, permanently, and simultaneously changes in cardiovascular, respiratory, and electrodermal patterns as minimum instrumentation standards; and

(B) is used, or the results of which are used, for the purpose of rendering a diagnostic opinion regarding the honesty or dishonesty of an individual.

The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §2, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 646.)

Section 11 of Pub. L. 100–347 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

Section 1 of Pub. L. 100–347 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Employee Polygraph Protection Act of 1988’.”

Except as provided in sections 2006 and 2007 of this title, it shall be unlawful for any employer engaged in or affecting commerce or in the production of goods for commerce—

(1) directly or indirectly, to require, request, suggest, or cause any employee or prospective employee to take or submit to any lie detector test;

(2) to use, accept, refer to, or inquire concerning the results of any lie detector test of any employee or prospective employee;

(3) to discharge, discipline, discriminate against in any manner, or deny employment or promotion to, or threaten to take any such action against—

(A) any employee or prospective employee who refuses, declines, or fails to take or submit to any lie detector test, or

(B) any employee or prospective employee on the basis of the results of any lie detector test; or

(4) to discharge, discipline, discriminate against in any manner, or deny employment or promotion to, or threaten to take any such action against, any employee or prospective employee because—

(A) such employee or prospective employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding under or related to this chapter,

(B) such employee or prospective employee has testified or is about to testify in any such proceeding, or

(C) of the exercise by such employee or prospective employee, on behalf of such employee or another person, of any right afforded by this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §3, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 646.)

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1314; title 3 section 414.

The Secretary shall prepare, have printed, and distribute a notice setting forth excerpts from, or summaries of, the pertinent provisions of this chapter. Each employer shall post and maintain such notice in conspicuous places on its premises where notices to employees and applicants to employment are customarily posted.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §4, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 647.)

The Secretary shall—

(1) issue such rules and regulations as may be necessary or appropriate to carry out this chapter;

(2) cooperate with regional, State, local, and other agencies, and cooperate with and furnish technical assistance to employers, labor organizations, and employment agencies to aid in effectuating the purposes of this chapter; and

(3) make investigations and inspections and require the keeping of records necessary or appropriate for the administration of this chapter.

For the purpose of any hearing or investigation under this chapter, the Secretary shall have the authority contained in sections 49 and 50 of title 15.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §5, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 647.)

Subject to paragraph (2), any employer who violates any provision of this chapter may be assessed a civil penalty of not more than $10,000.

In determining the amount of any penalty under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall take into account the previous record of the person in terms of compliance with this chapter and the gravity of the violation.

Any civil penalty assessed under this subsection shall be collected in the same manner as is required by subsections (b) through (e) of section 1853 of this title with respect to civil penalties assessed under subsection (a) of such section.

The Secretary may bring an action under this section to restrain violations of this chapter. The Solicitor of Labor may appear for and represent the Secretary in any litigation brought under this chapter. In any action brought under this section, the district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown, to issue temporary or permanent restraining orders and injunctions to require compliance with this chapter, including such legal or equitable relief incident thereto as may be appropriate, including, but not limited to, employment, reinstatement, promotion, and the payment of lost wages and benefits.

An employer who violates this chapter shall be liable to the employee or prospective employee affected by such violation. Such employer shall be liable for such legal or equitable relief as may be appropriate, including, but not limited to, employment, reinstatement, promotion, and the payment of lost wages and benefits.

An action to recover the liability prescribed in paragraph (1) may be maintained against the employer in any Federal or State court of competent jurisdiction by an employee or prospective employee for or on behalf of such employee, prospective employee, and other employees or prospective employees similarly situated. No such action may be commenced more than 3 years after the date of the alleged violation.

The court, in its discretion, may allow the prevailing party (other than the United States) reasonable costs, including attorney's fees.

The rights and procedures provided by this chapter may not be waived by contract or otherwise, unless such waiver is part of a written settlement agreed to and signed by the parties to the pending action or complaint under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §6, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 647.)

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1314; title 3 section 414.

This chapter shall not apply with respect to the United States Government, any State or local government, or any political subdivision of a State or local government.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the administration, by the Federal Government, in the performance of any counterintelligence function, of any lie detector test to—

(A) any expert or consultant under contract to the Department of Defense or any employee of any contractor of such Department; or

(B) any expert or consultant under contract with the Department of Energy in connection with the atomic energy defense activities of such Department or any employee of any contractor of such Department in connection with such activities.

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the administration, by the Federal Government, in the performance of any intelligence or counterintelligence function, of any lie detector test to—

(A)(i) any individual employed by, assigned to, or detailed to, the National Security Agency, the Defense Intelligence Agency, the National Imagery and Mapping Agency, or the Central Intelligence Agency,

(ii) any expert or consultant under contract to any such agency,

(iii) any employee of a contractor to any such agency,

(iv) any individual applying for a position in any such agency, or

(v) any individual assigned to a space where sensitive cryptologic information is produced, processed, or stored for any such agency; or

(B) any expert, or consultant (or employee of such expert or consultant) under contract with any Federal Government department, agency, or program whose duties involve access to information that has been classified at the level of top secret or designated as being within a special access program under section 4.2(a) of Executive Order 12356 (or a successor Executive order).

Nothing in this chapter shall be construed to prohibit the administration, by the Federal Government, in the performance of any counterintelligence function, of any lie detector test to an employee of a contractor of the Federal Bureau of Investigation of the Department of Justice who is engaged in the performance of any work under the contract with such Bureau.

Subject to sections 2007 and 2009 of this title, this chapter shall not prohibit an employer from requesting an employee to submit to a polygraph test if—

(1) the test is administered in connection with an ongoing investigation involving economic loss or injury to the employer's business, such as theft, embezzlement, misappropriation, or an act of unlawful industrial espionage or sabotage;

(2) the employee had access to the property that is the subject of the investigation;

(3) the employer has a reasonable suspicion that the employee was involved in the incident or activity under investigation; and

(4) the employer executes a statement, provided to the examinee before the test, that—

(A) sets forth with particularity the specific incident or activity being investigated and the basis for testing particular employees,

(B) is signed by a person (other than a polygraph examiner) authorized to legally bind the employer,

(C) is retained by the employer for at least 3 years, and

(D) contains at a minimum—

(i) an identification of the specific economic loss or injury to the business of the employer,

(ii) a statement indicating that the employee had access to the property that is the subject of the investigation, and

(iii) a statement describing the basis of the employer's reasonable suspicion that the employee was involved in the incident or activity under investigation.

Subject to paragraph (2) and sections 2007 and 2009 of this title, this chapter shall not prohibit the use of polygraph tests on prospective employees by any private employer whose primary business purpose consists of providing armored car personnel, personnel engaged in the design, installation, and maintenance of security alarm systems, or other uniformed or plainclothes security personnel and whose function includes protection of—

(A) facilities, materials, or operations having a significant impact on the health or safety of any State or political subdivision thereof, or the national security of the United States, as determined under rules and regulations issued by the Secretary within 90 days after June 27, 1988, including—

(i) facilities engaged in the production, transmission, or distribution of electric or nuclear power,

(ii) public water supply facilities,

(iii) shipments or storage of radioactive or other toxic waste materials, and

(iv) public transportation, or

(B) currency, negotiable securities, precious commodities or instruments, or proprietary information.

The exemption provided under this subsection shall not apply if the test is administered to a prospective employee who would not be employed to protect facilities, materials, operations, or assets referred to in paragraph (1).

Subject to paragraph (2) and sections 2007 and 2009 of this title, this chapter shall not prohibit the use of a polygraph test by any employer authorized to manufacture, distribute, or dispense a controlled substance listed in schedule I, II, III, or IV of section 812 of title 21.

The exemption provided under this subsection shall apply—

(A) if the test is administered to a prospective employee who would have direct access to the manufacture, storage, distribution, or sale of any such controlled substance; or

(B) in the case of a test administered to a current employee, if—

(i) the test is administered in connection with an ongoing investigation of criminal or other misconduct involving, or potentially involving, loss or injury to the manufacture, distribution, or dispensing of any such controlled substance by such employer, and

(ii) the employee had access to the person or property that is the subject of the investigation.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §7, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 648; Pub. L. 103–359, title V, §501(n), Oct. 14, 1994, 108 Stat. 3430; Pub. L. 104–201, div. A, title XI, §1122(b)(3), Sept. 23, 1996, 110 Stat. 2687.)

Executive Order 12356, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), was Ex. Ord. No. 12356, Apr. 2, 1982, 47 F.R. 14874, 15557, which was set out as a note under section 435 of Title 50, War and National Defense, prior to revocation by Ex. Ord. No. 12958, §6.1(d), Apr. 17, 1995, 60 F.R. 19843, set out as a note under section 435 of Title 50. For provisions relating to special access programs, see section 4.4 of Ex. Ord. No. 12958.

1996—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 104–201 substituted “National Imagery and Mapping Agency” for “Central Imagery Office”.

1994—Subsec. (b)(2)(A)(i). Pub. L. 103–359 inserted “the Central Imagery Office,” after “Defense Intelligence Agency,”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–201 effective Oct. 1, 1996, see section 1124 of Pub. L. 104–201, set out as a note under section 193 of Title 10, Armed Forces.

This section is referred to in sections 2002, 2007, 2008, 2009 of this title.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), the exemption under subsection (d) of section 2006 of this title shall not apply if an employee is discharged, disciplined, denied employment or promotion, or otherwise discriminated against in any manner on the basis of the analysis of a polygraph test chart or the refusal to take a polygraph test, without additional supporting evidence. The evidence required by such subsection may serve as additional supporting evidence.

In the case of an exemption described in subsection (e) or (f) of such section, the exemption shall not apply if the results of an analysis of a polygraph test chart are used, or the refusal to take a polygraph test is used, as the sole basis upon which an adverse employment action described in paragraph (1) is taken against an employee or prospective employee.

The exemptions provided under subsections (d), (e), and (f) of section 2006 of this title shall not apply unless the requirements described in the following paragraphs are met:

Throughout all phases of the test—

(A) the examinee shall be permitted to terminate the test at any time;

(B) the examinee is not asked questions in a manner designed to degrade, or needlessly intrude on, such examinee;

(C) the examinee is not asked any question concerning—

(i) religious beliefs or affiliations,

(ii) beliefs or opinions regarding racial matters,

(iii) political beliefs or affiliations,

(iv) any matter relating to sexual behavior; and

(v) beliefs, affiliations, opinions, or lawful activities regarding unions or labor organizations; and

(D) the examiner does not conduct the test if there is sufficient written evidence by a physician that the examinee is suffering from a medical or psychological condition or undergoing treatment that might cause abnormal responses during the actual testing phase.

During the pretest phase, the prospective examinee—

(A) is provided with reasonable written notice of the date, time, and location of the test, and of such examinee's right to obtain and consult with legal counsel or an employee representative before each phase of the test;

(B) is informed in writing of the nature and characteristics of the tests and of the instruments involved;

(C) is informed, in writing—

(i) whether the testing area contains a two-way mirror, a camera, or any other device through which the test can be observed,

(ii) whether any other device, including any device for recording or monitoring the test, will be used, or

(iii) that the employer or the examinee may (with mutual knowledge) make a recording of the test;

(D) is read and signs a written notice informing such examinee—

(i) that the examinee cannot be required to take the test as a condition of employment,

(ii) that any statement made during the test may constitute additional supporting evidence for the purposes of an adverse employment action described in subsection (a) of this section,

(iii) of the limitations imposed under this section,

(iv) of the legal rights and remedies available to the examinee if the polygraph test is not conducted in accordance with this chapter, and

(v) of the legal rights and remedies of the employer under this chapter (including the rights of the employer under section 2008(c)(2) of this title); and

(E) is provided an opportunity to review all questions to be asked during the test and is informed of the right to terminate the test at any time.

During the actual testing phase, the examiner does not ask such examinee any question relevant during the test that was not presented in writing for review to such examinee before the test.

Before any adverse employment action, the employer shall—

(A) further interview the examinee on the basis of the results of the test; and

(B) provide the examinee with—

(i) a written copy of any opinion or conclusion rendered as a result of the test, and

(ii) a copy of the questions asked during the test along with the corresponding charted responses.

The examiner shall not conduct and complete more than five polygraph tests on a calendar day on which the test is given, and shall not conduct any such test for less than a 90-minute duration.

The exemptions provided under subsections (d), (e), and (f) of section 2006 of this title shall not apply unless the individual who conducts the polygraph test satisfies the requirements under the following paragraphs:

The examiner—

(A) has a valid and current license granted by licensing and regulatory authorities in the State in which the test is to be conducted, if so required by the State; and

(B) maintains a minimum of a $50,000 bond or an equivalent amount of professional liability coverage.

The examiner—

(A) renders any opinion or conclusion regarding the test—

(i) in writing and solely on the basis of an analysis of polygraph test charts,

(ii) that does not contain information other than admissions, information, case facts, and interpretation of the charts relevant to the purpose and stated objectives of the test, and

(iii) that does not include any recommendation concerning the employment of the examinee; and

(B) maintains all opinions, reports, charts, written questions, lists, and other records relating to the test for a minimum period of 3 years after administration of the test.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §8, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 650.)

This section is referred to in sections 2002, 2006 of this title.

A person, other than the examinee, may not disclose information obtained during a polygraph test, except as provided in this section.

A polygraph examiner may disclose information acquired from a polygraph test only to—

(1) the examinee or any other person specifically designated in writing by the examinee;

(2) the employer that requested the test; or

(3) any court, governmental agency, arbitrator, or mediator, in accordance with due process of law, pursuant to an order from a court of competent jurisdiction.

An employer (other than an employer described in subsection (a), (b), or (c) of section 2006 of this title) for whom a polygraph test is conducted may disclose information from the test only to—

(1) a person in accordance with subsection (b) of this section; or

(2) a governmental agency, but only insofar as the disclosed information is an admission of criminal conduct.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §9, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 652.)

This section is referred to in section 2007 of this title.

Except as provided in subsections (a), (b), and (c) of section 2006 of this title, this chapter shall not preempt any provision of any State or local law or of any negotiated collective bargaining agreement that prohibits lie detector tests or is more restrictive with respect to lie detector tests than any provision of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–347, §10, June 27, 1988, 102 Stat. 653.)

This section is referred to in section 2006 of this title.


This chapter is referred to in title 2 sections 1302, 1315, 1361, 1371, 1434; title 3 sections 402, 415.

As used in this chapter—

(1) the term “employer” means any business enterprise that employs—

(A) 100 or more employees, excluding part-time employees; or

(B) 100 or more employees who in the aggregate work at least 4,000 hours per week (exclusive of hours of overtime);

(2) the term “plant closing” means the permanent or temporary shutdown of a single site of employment, or one or more facilities or operating units within a single site of employment, if the shutdown results in an employment loss at the single site of employment during any 30-day period for 50 or more employees excluding any part-time employees;

(3) the term “mass layoff” means a reduction in force which—

(A) is not the result of a plant closing; and

(B) results in an employment loss at the single site of employment during any 30-day period for—

(i)(I) at least 33 percent of the employees (excluding any part-time employees); and

(II) at least 50 employees (excluding any part-time employees); or

(ii) at least 500 employees (excluding any part-time employees);

(4) the term “representative” means an exclusive representative of employees within the meaning of section 159(a) or 158(f) of this title or section 152 of title 45;

(5) the term “affected employees” means employees who may reasonably be expected to experience an employment loss as a consequence of a proposed plant closing or mass layoff by their employer;

(6) subject to subsection (b) of this section, the term “employment loss” means (A) an employment termination, other than a discharge for cause, voluntary departure, or retirement, (B) a layoff exceeding 6 months, or (C) a reduction in hours of work of more than 50 percent during each month of any 6-month period;

(7) the term “unit of local government” means any general purpose political subdivision of a State which has the power to levy taxes and spend funds, as well as general corporate and police powers; and

(8) the term “part-time employee” means an employee who is employed for an average of fewer than 20 hours per week or who has been employed for fewer than 6 of the 12 months preceding the date on which notice is required.

(1) In the case of a sale of part or all of an employer's business, the seller shall be responsible for providing notice for any plant closing or mass layoff in accordance with section 2102 of this title, up to and including the effective date of the sale. After the effective date of the sale of part or all of an employer's business, the purchaser shall be responsible for providing notice for any plant closing or mass layoff in accordance with section 2102 of this title. Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, any person who is an employee of the seller (other than a part-time employee) as of the effective date of the sale shall be considered an employee of the purchaser immediately after the effective date of the sale.

(2) Notwithstanding subsection (a)(6) of this section, an employee may not be considered to have experienced an employment loss if the closing or layoff is the result of the relocation or consolidation of part or all of the employer's business and, prior to the closing or layoff—

(A) the employer offers to transfer the employee to a different site of employment within a reasonable commuting distance with no more than a 6-month break in employment; or

(B) the employer offers to transfer the employee to any other site of employment regardless of distance with no more than a 6-month break in employment, and the employee accepts within 30 days of the offer or of the closing or layoff, whichever is later.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §2, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 890.)

Section 11 of Pub. L. 100–379 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] shall take effect on the date which is 6 months after the date of enactment of this Act [Aug. 4, 1988], except that the authority of the Secretary of Labor under section 8 [section 2107 of this title] is effective upon enactment.”

Section 1(a) of Pub. L. 100–379 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act’.”

This section is referred to in section 2102 of this title; title 3 section 435; title 42 section 2297h–8.

An employer shall not order a plant closing or mass layoff until the end of a 60-day period after the employer serves written notice of such an order—

(1) to each representative of the affected employees as of the time of the notice or, if there is no such representative at that time, to each affected employee; and

(2) to the State dislocated worker unit (designated or created under title III of the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1651 et seq.]) and the chief elected official of the unit of local government within which such closing or layoff is to occur.

If there is more than one such unit, the unit of local government which the employer shall notify is the unit of local government to which the employer pays the highest taxes for the year preceding the year for which the determination is made.

(1) An employer may order the shutdown of a single site of employment before the conclusion of the 60-day period if as of the time that notice would have been required the employer was actively seeking capital or business which, if obtained, would have enabled the employer to avoid or postpone the shutdown and the employer reasonably and in good faith believed that giving the notice required would have precluded the employer from obtaining the needed capital or business.

(2)(A) An employer may order a plant closing or mass layoff before the conclusion of the 60-day period if the closing or mass layoff is caused by business circumstances that were not reasonably foreseeable as of the time that notice would have been required.

(B) No notice under this chapter shall be required if the plant closing or mass layoff is due to any form of natural disaster, such as a flood, earthquake, or the drought currently ravaging the farmlands of the United States.

(3) An employer relying on this subsection shall give as much notice as is practicable and at that time shall give a brief statement of the basis for reducing the notification period.

A layoff of more than 6 months which, at its outset, was announced to be a layoff of 6 months or less, shall be treated as an employment loss under this chapter unless—

(1) the extension beyond 6 months is caused by business circumstances (including unforeseeable changes in price or cost) not reasonably foreseeable at the time of the initial layoff; and

(2) notice is given at the time it becomes reasonably foreseeable that the extension beyond 6 months will be required.

For purposes of this section, in determining whether a plant closing or mass layoff has occurred or will occur, employment losses for 2 or more groups at a single site of employment, each of which is less than the minimum number of employees specified in section 2101(a)(2) or (3) of this title but which in the aggregate exceed that minimum number, and which occur within any 90-day period shall be considered to be a plant closing or mass layoff unless the employer demonstrates that the employment losses are the result of separate and distinct actions and causes and are not an attempt by the employer to evade the requirements of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §3, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 891.)

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended. Title III of the Act is classified generally to subchapter III (§1651 et seq.) of chapter 19 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in sections 2101, 2103, 2104, 2106 of this title; title 2 section 1315; title 3 section 415.

This chapter shall not apply to a plant closing or mass layoff if—

(1) the closing is of a temporary facility or the closing or layoff is the result of the completion of a particular project or undertaking, and the affected employees were hired with the understanding that their employment was limited to the duration of the facility or the project or undertaking; or

(2) the closing or layoff constitutes a strike or constitutes a lockout not intended to evade the requirements of this chapter. Nothing in this chapter shall require an employer to serve written notice pursuant to section 2102(a) of this title when permanently replacing a person who is deemed to be an economic striker under the National Labor Relations Act [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.]: *Provided*, That nothing in this chapter shall be deemed to validate or invalidate any judicial or administrative ruling relating to the hiring of permanent replacements for economic strikers under the National Labor Relations Act.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §4, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 892.)

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in par. (2), is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 452, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

(1) Any employer who orders a plant closing or mass layoff in violation of section 2102 of this title shall be liable to each aggrieved employee who suffers an employment loss as a result of such closing or layoff for—

(A) back pay for each day of violation at a rate of compensation not less than the higher of—

(i) the average regular rate received by such employee during the last 3 years of the employee's employment; or

(ii) the final regular rate received by such employee; and

(B) benefits under an employee benefit plan described in section 1002(3) of this title, including the cost of medical expenses incurred during the employment loss which would have been covered under an employee benefit plan if the employment loss had not occurred.

Such liability shall be calculated for the period of the violation, up to a maximum of 60 days, but in no event for more than one-half the number of days the employee was employed by the employer.

(2) The amount for which an employer is liable under paragraph (1) shall be reduced by—

(A) any wages paid by the employer to the employee for the period of the violation;

(B) any voluntary and unconditional payment by the employer to the employee that is not required by any legal obligation; and

(C) any payment by the employer to a third party or trustee (such as premiums for health benefits or payments to a defined contribution pension plan) on behalf of and attributable to the employee for the period of the violation.

In addition, any liability incurred under paragraph (1) with respect to a defined benefit pension plan may be reduced by crediting the employee with service for all purposes under such a plan for the period of the violation.

(3) Any employer who violates the provisions of section 2102 of this title with respect to a unit of local government shall be subject to a civil penalty of not more than $500 for each day of such violation, except that such penalty shall not apply if the employer pays to each aggrieved employee the amount for which the employer is liable to that employee within 3 weeks from the date the employer orders the shutdown or layoff.

(4) If an employer which has violated this chapter proves to the satisfaction of the court that the act or omission that violated this chapter was in good faith and that the employer had reasonable grounds for believing that the act or omission was not a violation of this chapter the court may, in its discretion, reduce the amount of the liability or penalty provided for in this section.

(5) A person seeking to enforce such liability, including a representative of employees or a unit of local government aggrieved under paragraph (1) or (3), may sue either for such person or for other persons similarly situated, or both, in any district court of the United States for any district in which the violation is alleged to have occurred, or in which the employer transacts business.

(6) In any such suit, the court, in its discretion, may allow the prevailing party a reasonable attorney's fee as part of the costs.

(7) For purposes of this subsection, the term,1 “aggrieved employee” means an employee who has worked for the employer ordering the plant closing or mass layoff and who, as a result of the failure by the employer to comply with section 2102 of this title, did not receive timely notice either directly or through his or her representative as required by section 2102 of this title.

The remedies provided for in this section shall be the exclusive remedies for any violation of this chapter. Under this chapter, a Federal court shall not have authority to enjoin a plant closing or mass layoff.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §5, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 893.)

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1315; title 3 section 415.

1 So in original. The comma probably should not appear.

The rights and remedies provided to employees by this chapter are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other contractual or statutory rights and remedies of the employees, and are not intended to alter or affect such rights and remedies, except that the period of notification required by this chapter shall run concurrently with any period of notification required by contract or by any other statute.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §6, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 894.)

It is the sense of Congress that an employer who is not required to comply with the notice requirements of section 2102 of this title should, to the extent possible, provide notice to its employees about a proposal to close a plant or permanently reduce its workforce.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §7, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 894.)

(a) The Secretary of Labor shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to carry out this chapter. Such regulations shall, at a minimum, include interpretative regulations describing the methods by which employers may provide for appropriate service of notice as required by this chapter.

(b) The mailing of notice to an employee's last known address or inclusion of notice in the employee's paycheck will be considered acceptable methods for fulfillment of the employer's obligation to give notice to each affected employee under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §8, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 894.)

The giving of notice pursuant to this chapter, if done in good faith compliance with this chapter, shall not constitute a violation of the National Labor Relations Act [29 U.S.C. 151 et seq.] or the Railway Labor Act [45 U.S.C. 151 et seq.].

(Pub. L. 100–379, §9, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 894.)

The National Labor Relations Act, referred to in text, is act July 5, 1935, ch. 372, 49 Stat. 452, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter II (§151 et seq.) of chapter 7 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 167 of this title and Tables.

The Railway Labor Act, referred to in text, is act May 20, 1926, ch. 347, 44 Stat. 577, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 8 (§151 et seq.) of Title 45, Railroads. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 151 of Title 45 and Tables.

Two years after August 4, 1988, the Comptroller General shall submit to the Committee on Small Business of both the House and Senate, the Committee on Labor and Human Resources, and the Committee on Education and Labor a report containing a detailed and objective analysis of the effect of this chapter on employers (especially small- and medium-sized businesses), the economy (international competitiveness), and employees (in terms of levels and conditions of employment). The Comptroller General shall assess both costs and benefits, including the effect on productivity, competitiveness, unemployment rates and compensation, and worker retraining and readjustment.

(Pub. L. 100–379, §10, Aug. 4, 1988, 102 Stat. 894.)

Committee on Education and Labor of House of Representatives treated as referring to Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives by section 1(a) of Pub. L. 104–14, set out as a note preceding section 21 of Title 2, The Congress. Committee on Economic and Educational Opportunities of House of Representatives changed to Committee on Education and the Workforce of House of Representatives by House Resolution No. 5, One Hundred Fifth Congress, Jan. 7, 1997.







This chapter is referred to in section 762 of this title.

The Congress finds as follows:

(1) Disability is a natural part of the human experience and in no way diminishes the right of individuals to—

(A) live independently;

(B) enjoy self-determination;

(C) make choices;

(D) pursue meaningful careers; and

(E) enjoy full inclusion and integration in the economic, political, social, cultural, and educational mainstream of American society.

(2) During the past decade, there have been major advances in modern technology. Technology is now a powerful force in the lives of all residents of the United States. Technology can provide important tools for making the performance of tasks quicker and easier.

(3) For some individuals with disabilities, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services are necessary to enable the individuals—

(A) to have greater control over their lives;

(B) to participate in, and contribute more fully to, activities in their home, school, and work environments, and in their communities;

(C) to interact to a greater extent with individuals who do not have disabilities; and

(D) to otherwise benefit from opportunities that are taken for granted by individuals who do not have disabilities.

(4) Substantial progress has been made in the development of assistive technology devices, including adaptations to existing equipment, that significantly benefit individuals with disabilities of all ages. Such devices can be used to increase the involvement of such individuals in, and reduce expenditures associated with, programs and activities such as early intervention, education, rehabilitation and training, employment, residential living, independent living, recreation, and other aspects of daily living.

(5) Most States have technology-related assistance programs carried out under this chapter. In spite of the efforts made by such programs, there remains a need to support systems change and advocacy activities in order to assist States to develop and implement consumer-responsive, comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance for individuals with disabilities of all ages.

(6) Notwithstanding the efforts of such State technology-related assistance programs, there is still a lack of—

(A) resources to pay for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(B) trained personnel to assist individuals with disabilities to use such devices and services;

(C) information among individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities, educators and related service personnel, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals about the availability and potential of technology for individuals with disabilities;

(D) aggressive outreach to underrepresented populations and rural populations;

(E) systems that ensure timely acquisition and delivery of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, particularly with respect to children;

(F) coordination among State human services programs, and between such programs and private entities, particularly with respect to transitions between such programs and entities; and

(G) capacity in such programs to provide the necessary technology-related assistance.

(7) Many individuals with disabilities cannot access existing telecommunications and information technologies and are at risk of not being able to access developing technologies. The failure of Federal and State governments, hardware manufacturers, software designers, information systems managers, and telecommunications service providers to account for the specific needs of individuals with disabilities results in the exclusion of such individuals from the use of telecommunications and information technologies and results in unnecessary costs associated with the retrofitting of devices and product systems.

(8) There are insufficient incentives for the commercial pursuit of the application of technology devices to meet the needs of individuals with disabilities, because of the perception that such individuals constitute a limited market.

(9) At the Federal level, there is a lack of coordination among agencies that provide or pay for the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services. In addition, the Federal Government does not provide adequate assistance and information with respect to the use of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities, educators and related services personnel, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals.

The purposes of this chapter are as follows:

(1) To provide financial assistance to the States to support systems change and advocacy activities designed to assist each State in developing and implementing a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, for individuals with disabilities of all ages, that is designed to—

(A) increase the availability of, funding for, access to, and provision of, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(B) increase the active involvement of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, in the planning, development, implementation, and evaluation of such a program;

(C) increase the involvement of individuals with disabilities and, if appropriate, their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, in decisions related to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(D) increase the provision of outreach to underrepresented populations and rural populations, to enable the two populations to enjoy the benefits of programs carried out to accomplish purposes described in this paragraph to the same extent as other populations;

(E) increase and promote coordination among State agencies, and between State agencies and private entities, that are involved in carrying out activities under this title,1 particularly providing assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, that accomplish a purpose described in another subparagraph of this paragraph;

(F)(i) increase the awareness of laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures, that facilitate the availability or provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(ii) facilitate the change of laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures, that impede the availability or provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(G) increase the probability that individuals with disabilities of all ages will, to the extent appropriate, be able to secure and maintain possession of assistive technology devices as such individuals make the transition between services offered by human service agencies or between settings of daily living;

(H) enhance the skills and competencies of individuals involved in providing assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(I) increase awareness and knowledge of the efficacy of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services among—

(i) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives;

(ii) individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities;

(iii) educators and related services personnel;

(iv) technology experts (including engineers);

(v) employers; and

(vi) other appropriate individuals;

(J) increase the capacity of public agencies and private entities to provide and pay for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services on a statewide basis for individuals with disabilities of all ages; and

(K) increase the awareness of the needs of individuals with disabilities for assistive technology devices and for assistive technology services.

(2) To identify Federal policies that facilitate payment for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, to identify Federal policies that impede such payment, and to eliminate inappropriate barriers to such payment.

(3) To enhance the ability of the Federal Government to provide States with—

(A) technical assistance, information, training, and public awareness programs relating to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(B) funding for demonstration projects.

It is the policy of the United States that all programs, projects, and activities receiving assistance under this chapter shall be consumer-responsive and shall be carried out in a manner consistent with the principles of—

(1) respect for individual dignity, personal responsibility, self-determination, and pursuit of meaningful careers, based on informed choice, of individuals with disabilities;

(2) respect for the privacy, rights, and equal access (including the use of accessible formats), of such individuals;

(3) inclusion, integration, and full participation of such individuals;

(4) support for the involvement of a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative, if an individual with a disability requests, desires, or needs such support; and

(5) support for individual and systems advocacy and community involvement.

(Pub. L. 100–407, §2, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1044; Pub. L. 103–218, §3, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 51.)

This title, referred to in subsec. (b)(1)(E), probably should be a reference to title I of Pub. L. 100–407, as amended, which is classified generally to subchapter I (§2211 et seq.) of this chapter.

1994—Pub. L. 103–218 substituted “Findings, purposes, and policy” for “Findings and purposes” in section catchline, amended subsecs. (a) and (b) generally, and added subsec. (c). Prior to amendment, subsecs. (a) and (b) related to Congressional findings and purposes of chapter, respectively.

Section 501 of Pub. L. 103–218 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1) as soon as practicable after the date of the enactment of this Act, consistent with the effective and efficient administration of the Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act of 1988; but

“(2) not later than—

“(A) the next date on which the State receives an award through a grant under section 102 or 103 of such Act [42 U.S.C. 2212, 2213]; or

“(B) October 1, 1994,

whichever is sooner.”

Section 1(a) of Pub. L. 103–218 provided that: “This Act [enacting sections 2231, 2241 to 2246, 2251, and 2281 to 2288 of this title, amending this section, sections 706, 761a, 771a, 2202, and 2211 to 2216 of this title, section 1431 of Title 20, Education, and section 9839 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare, repealing sections 2217, 2231, 2241 to 2244, 2251 to 2253, and 2261 of this title, and enacting provisions set out as a note above] may be cited as the ‘Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act Amendments of 1994’.”

Section 1 of Pub. L. 100–407 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Technology-Related Assistance for Individuals With Disabilities Act of 1988’.”

This section is referred to in sections 2202, 2211, 2212, 2213, 2214, 2215 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

For purposes of this chapter:

The term “advocacy services”, except as used as part of the term “protection and advocacy services”, means services—

(A) provided to assist individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives in accessing assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(B) provided through—

(i) individual case management for individuals with disabilities;

(ii) representation of individuals with disabilities (other than representation within the definition of protection and advocacy services);

(iii) training of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives to successfully conduct advocacy for themselves; or

(iv) dissemination of information.

The term “assistive technology device” means any item, piece of equipment, or product system, whether acquired commercially off the shelf, modified, or customized, that is used to increase, maintain, or improve functional capabilities of individuals with disabilities.

The term “assistive technology service” means any service that directly assists an individual with a disability in the selection, acquisition, or use of an assistive technology device. Such term includes—

(A) the evaluation of the needs of an individual with a disability, including a functional evaluation of the individual in the individual's customary environment;

(B) purchasing, leasing, or otherwise providing for the acquisition of assistive technology devices by individuals with disabilities;

(C) selecting, designing, fitting, customizing, adapting, applying, maintaining, repairing, or replacing of assistive technology devices;

(D) coordinating and using other therapies, interventions, or services with assistive technology devices, such as those associated with existing education and rehabilitation plans and programs;

(E) training or technical assistance for an individual with disabilities, or, where appropriate, the the 1 family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such an individual; and

(F) training or technical assistance for professionals (including individuals providing education and rehabilitation services), employers, or other individuals who provide services to, employ, or are otherwise substantially involved in the major life functions of individuals with disabilities.

The term “comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance” means a statewide program of technology-related assistance developed and implemented by a State under subchapter I of this chapter that—

(A) addresses the needs of all individuals with disabilities, including members of underrepresented populations and members of rural populations;

(B) addresses such needs without regard to the age, type of disability, race, ethnicity, or gender of such individuals, or the particular major life activity for which such individuals need the assistance; and

(C) addresses such needs without requiring that the assistance be provided through any particular agency or service delivery system.

The term “consumer-responsive” means, with respect to an entity, program, or activity, that the entity, program, or activity—

(A) is easily accessible to, and usable by, individuals with disabilities and, when appropriate, their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives;

(B) responds to the needs of individuals with disabilities in a timely and appropriate manner; and

(C) facilitates the full and meaningful participation of individuals with disabilities (including individuals from underrepresented populations and rural populations) and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, in—

(i) decisions relating to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(ii) the planning, development, implementation, and evaluation of the comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

The term “disability” means a condition of an individual that is considered to be a disability or handicap for the purposes of any Federal law other than this chapter or for the purposes of the law of the State in which the individual resides.

The term “individual with a disability” means any individual—

(i) who has a disability; and

(ii) who is or would be enabled by an assistive technology device or an assistive technology service to minimize deterioration in functioning, to maintain a level of functioning, or to achieve a greater level of functioning in any major life activity.

The term “individuals with disabilities” means more than one individual with a disability.

The term “institution of higher education” has the meaning given such term in section 1141(a) of title 20, and includes community colleges receiving funding under the Tribally Controlled Community College Assistance Act of 1978 (25 U.S.C. 1801 et seq.).

The term “protection and advocacy services” means services that—

(A) are described in part C of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6041 et seq.), the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act (42 U.S.C. 10801 et seq.), or section 794e of this title; and

(B) assist individuals with disabilities with respect to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Education.

Except as otherwise provided, the term “State” means each of the several States of the United States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the United States Virgin Islands, Guam, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect).

The term “systems change and advocacy activities” means efforts that result in laws, regulations, policies, practices, or organizational structures that promote consumer-responsive programs or entities and that facilitate and increase access to, provision of, and funding for, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services on a permanent basis, in order to empower individuals with disabilities to achieve greater independence, productivity, and integration and inclusion within the community and the work force.

The term “technology-related assistance” means assistance provided through systems change and advocacy activities that accomplish the purposes described in any of subparagraphs (A) through (K) of section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

The term “underrepresented population” includes a population such as minorities, the poor, and persons with limited-English proficiency.

(Pub. L. 100–407, §3, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1046; Pub. L. 103–218, §4, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 54.)

The Tribally Controlled Community College Assistance Act of 1978, referred to in par. (8), is Pub. L. 95–471, Oct. 17, 1978, 92 Stat. 1325, as amended, which is classified principally to chapter 20 (§1801 et seq.) of Title 25, Indians. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1801 of Title 25 and Tables.

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in par. (9)(A), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, as amended. Part C of the Act is classified generally to subchapter III (§6041 et seq.) of chapter 75 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act, referred to in par. (9)(A), probably means the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–319, May 23, 1986, 100 Stat. 478, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 114 (§10801 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 10801 of Title 42 and Tables.

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in par. (11), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

1994—Pars. (1), (2). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), (2), added par. (1) and redesignated former par. (1) as (2). Former par. (2) redesignated (3).

Par. (3). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (2) as (3). Former par. (3) redesignated (7).

Par. (3)(E). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(3), substituted “the family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives of such an individual; and” for “family of an individual with disabilities; and”.

Pars. (4) to (6). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), (4), added pars. (4) to (6) and redesignated former pars. (4), (5), and (6) as (8), (10), and (11), respectively.

Par. (7). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(5), added par. (7) and struck out heading and text of former par. (7) which defined “individual with disabilities”.

Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (3) as (7). Former par. (7) redesignated (13).

Par. (8). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(6), substituted “section 1141(a) of title 20” for “section 1085(b) of title 20”.

Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (4) as (8). Former par. (8) redesignated (14).

Par. (9). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(7), added par. (9).

Par. (10). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (5) as (10).

Par. (11). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(8), substituted “several States of the United States” for “several States”, “United States Virgin Islands” for “Virgin Islands”, and “the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect)” for “the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (6) as (11).

Par. (12). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(9), added par. (12).

Par. (13). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(10), substituted “assistance provided through systems change and advocacy activities” for “functions performed and activities carried out under section 2211 of this title” and inserted “any of subparagraphs (A) through (K) of” before “section 2201(b)(1) of this title”.

Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (7) as (13).

Par. (14). Pub. L. 103–218, §4(11), amended heading and text of par. (14) generally. Prior to amendment, text read as follows: “The term ‘underserved group’ means any group of individuals with disabilities who, because of disability, place of residence, geographic location, age, race, sex, or socioeconomic status, have not historically sought, been eligible for, or received technology-related assistance.”

Pub. L. 103–218, §4(1), redesignated par. (8) as (14).

This section is referred to in sections 706, 771a of this title.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 2202, 2246, 2281 of this title.

The Secretary of Education shall make grants to States in accordance with the provisions of this subchapter to support systems change and advocacy activities designed to assist States in developing and implementing consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance that accomplish the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

Any State that receives a grant under section 2212 or 2213 of this title shall use the funds made available through the grant to accomplish the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title and, in accomplishing such purposes, may carry out any of the following systems change and advocacy activities:

The State may support activities to increase access to, and funding for, assistive technology, including—

(A) the development, and evaluation of the efficacy, of model delivery systems that provide assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to individuals with disabilities, that pay for such devices and services, and that, if successful, could be replicated or generally applied, such as—

(i) the development of systems for the purchase, lease, other acquisition, or payment for the provision, of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; or

(ii) the establishment of alternative State or privately financed systems of subsidies for the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, such as—

(I) a loan system for assistive technology devices;

(II) an income-contingent loan fund;

(III) a low-interest loan fund;

(IV) a revolving loan fund;

(V) a loan insurance program; or

(VI) a partnership with private entities for the purchase, lease, or other acquisition of assistive technology devices and the provision of assistive technology services;

(B) the demonstration of assistive technology devices, including—

(i) the provision of a location or locations within the State where—

(I) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives;

(II) education, rehabilitation, health care, and other service providers;

(III) individuals who work for Federal, State, or local government entities; and

(IV) employers,

can see and touch assistive technology devices, and learn about the devices from personnel who are familiar with such devices and their applications;

(ii) the provision of counseling and assistance to individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives to determine individual needs for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(iii) the demonstration or short-term loan of assistive technology devices to individuals, employers, public agencies, or public accommodations seeking strategies to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) and section 794 of this title; and

(C) the establishment of information systems about, and recycling centers for, the redistribution of assistive technology devices and equipment that may include device and equipment loans, rentals, or gifts.

The State may support activities—

(A) to identify and coordinate Federal and State policies, resources, and services, relating to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, including entering into interagency agreements;

(B) to convene interagency work groups to enhance public funding options and coordinate access to funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services for individuals with disabilities of all ages, with special attention to the issues of transition (such as transition from school to work, and transition from participation in programs under part H of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1471 et seq.), to participation in programs under part B of such Act (20 U.S.C. 1411 et seq.)) home use, and individual involvement in the identification, planning, use, delivery, and evaluation of such devices and services; or

(C) to document and disseminate information about interagency activities that promote coordination with respect to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, including evidence of increased participation of State and local special education, vocational rehabilitation, and State medical assistance agencies and departments.

The State may carry out activities to encourage the creation or maintenance of, support, or provide assistance to, statewide and community-based organizations, or systems, that provide assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to individuals with disabilities or that assist individuals with disabilities in using assistive technology devices and assistive technology services. Such activities may include outreach to consumer organizations and groups in the State to coordinate the activities of the organizations and groups with efforts (including self-help, support groups, and peer mentoring) to assist individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, to obtain funding for, and access to, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The State may pay for expenses, including travel expenses, and services, including services of qualified interpreters, readers, and personal care assistants, that may be necessary to ensure access to the comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance by individuals with disabilities who are determined by the State to be in financial need.

The State may conduct a statewide needs assessment that may be based on data in existence on the date on which the assessment is initiated and may include—

(A) estimates of the numbers of individuals with disabilities within the State, categorized by residence, type and extent of disabilities, age, race, gender, and ethnicity;

(B) in the case of an assessment carried out under a development grant, a description of efforts, during the fiscal year preceding the first fiscal year for which the State received such a grant, to provide assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to individuals with disabilities within the State, including—

(i) the number of individuals with disabilities who received appropriate assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(ii) a description of the devices and services provided;

(C) information on the number of individuals with disabilities who are in need of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, and a description of the devices and services needed;

(D) information on the cost of providing assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to all individuals with disabilities within the State who need such devices and services;

(E) a description of State and local public resources and private resources (including insurance) that are available to establish a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance;

(F) information identifying Federal and State laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures, that facilitate or interfere with the operation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance;

(G) a description of the procurement policies of the State and the extent to which such policies will ensure, to the extent practicable, that assistive technology devices purchased, leased, or otherwise acquired with assistance made available through a grant made under section 2212 or 2213 of this title are compatible with other technology devices, including technology devices designed primarily for use by—

(i) individuals who are not individuals with disabilities;

(ii) individuals who are elderly; or

(iii) individuals with particular disabilities; and

(H) information resulting from an inquiry about whether a State agency or task force (composed of individuals representing the State and individuals representing the private sector) should study the practices of private insurance companies holding licenses within the State that offer health or disability insurance policies under which an individual may obtain reimbursement for—

(i) the purchase, lease, or other acquisition of assistive technology devices; or

(ii) the use of assistive technology services.

The State may—

(i) support a public awareness program designed to provide information relating to the availability and efficacy of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services for—

(I) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives;

(II) individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities;

(III) educators and related services personnel;

(IV) technology experts (including engineers);

(V) employers; and

(VI) other appropriate individuals and entities; or

(ii) establish and support such a program if no such program exists.

Such a public awareness program may include—

(i) the development and dissemination of information relating to—

(I) the nature of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(II) the appropriateness, cost, and availability of, and access to, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(III) the efficacy of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services with respect to enhancing the capacity of individuals with disabilities;

(ii) the development of procedures for providing direct communication among public providers of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services and between public providers and private providers of such devices and services (including employers); and

(iii) the development and dissemination of information relating to the use of the program by individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, professionals who work in a field related to an activity described in this section, and other appropriate individuals.

The State may carry out directly, or may provide support to a public or private entity to carry out, training and technical assistance activities—

(A) that—

(i) are provided for individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, and other appropriate individuals; and

(ii) may include—

(I) training in the use of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(II) the development of written materials, training, and technical assistance describing the means by which agencies consider the needs of an individual with a disability for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services in developing, for the individual, any individualized education program described in section 614(a)(5) of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1414(a)(5)), any individualized written rehabilitation program described in section 722 of this title, any individualized family service plan described in section 677 of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1477), and any other individualized plans or programs;

(III) training regarding the rights of the persons described in clause (i) to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services under any law other than this chapter, to promote fuller independence, productivity, and inclusion in and integration into society of such persons; and

(IV) training to increase consumer participation in the identification, planning, use, delivery, and evaluation of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(B) that—

(i) enhance the assistive technology skills and competencies of—

(I) individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities;

(II) educators and related services personnel;

(III) technology experts (including engineers);

(IV) employers; and

(V) other appropriate personnel; and

(ii) include taking actions to facilitate the development of standards, or, when appropriate, the application of such standards, to ensure the availability of qualified personnel.

The State may support the compilation and evaluation of appropriate data related to a program described in subsection (a) of this section.

The State may develop, operate, or expand a system for public access to information concerning an activity carried out under another paragraph of this subsection, including information about assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, funding sources and costs of such assistance, and individuals, organizations, and agencies capable of carrying out such an activity for individuals with disabilities.

Access to the system may be provided through community-based entities, including public libraries, centers for independent living (as defined in section 796a(1) of this title), and community rehabilitation programs (as defined in section 706(25) of this title).

In developing, operating, or expanding a system described in subparagraph (A), the State may—

(i) develop, compile, and categorize print, large print, braille, audio, and video materials, computer disks, compact discs (including compact discs formatted with read-only memory), information that can be used in telephone-based information systems, and such other media as technological innovation may make appropriate;

(ii) identify and classify existing funding sources, and the conditions of and criteria for access to such sources, including any funding mechanisms or strategies developed by the State;

(iii) identify existing support groups and systems designed to help individuals with disabilities make effective use of an activity carried out under another paragraph of this subsection; and

(iv) maintain a record of the extent to which citizens of the State use or make inquiries of the system established in subparagraph (A), and of the nature of such inquiries.

The information system may be organized on an interstate basis or as part of a regional consortium of States in order to facilitate the establishment of compatible, linked information systems.

The State may enter into cooperative agreements with other States to expand the capacity of the States involved to assist individuals with disabilities of all ages to learn about, acquire, use, maintain, adapt, and upgrade assistive technology devices and assistive technology services that such individuals need at home, at school, at work, or in other environments that are part of daily living.

The State may operate or participate in a computer system through which the State may electronically communicate with other States to gain technical assistance in a timely fashion and to avoid the duplication of efforts already undertaken in other States.

The State may support the establishment or continuation of partnerships and cooperative initiatives between the public sector and the private sector to promote greater participation by business and industry in—

(A) the development, demonstration, and dissemination of assistive technology devices; and

(B) the ongoing provision of information about new products to assist individuals with disabilities.

The State may provide advocacy services.

The State may utilize amounts made available through grants made under section 2212 or 2213 of this title for any systems change and advocacy activities, other than the activities described in another paragraph of this subsection, that are necessary for developing, implementing, or evaluating the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

In carrying out systems change and advocacy activities under this subchapter, the State shall ensure that the activities supplement, and not supplant, similar activities that have been carried out pursuant to other Federal or State law.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §101, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1047; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §101, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 57.)

The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, referred to in subsec. (b)(1)(B)(iii), is Pub. L. 101–336, July 26, 1990, 104 Stat. 327, which is classified principally to chapter 126 (§12101 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 12101 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(2)(B), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended. Parts B and H of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§1411 et seq.) and VIII (§1471 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 33 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–218, §101(a), inserted “to support systems change and advocacy activities designed” after “provisions of this subchapter” and substituted “in developing and implementing” for “to develop and implement”.

Subsecs. (b), (c). Pub. L. 103–218, §101(b), added subsecs. (b) and (c) and struck out former subsecs. (b) and (c), which related to functions of programs and authorized activities.

This section is referred to in sections 2212, 2213, 2214 of this title.

The Secretary shall award to States 3-year grants to support systems change and advocacy activities described in section 2211(b) of this title (including activities described in subsection (e)(7) of this section) to assist States in developing and implementing consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance for individuals with disabilities in accordance with the provisions of section 2211 of this title.

From amounts appropriated under section 2216 of this title, the Secretary shall pay to each State that receives a grant under this section—

(A) for each of the first 2 years of the grant period, an amount that is not less than $500,000 and not more than $1,000,000; and

(B) for the third year of the grant period, an amount that is not less than $500,000 and not more than $1,500,000.

From amounts appropriated under section 2216 of this title for any fiscal year, the Secretary shall pay to each territory that receives a grant under this section not more than $150,000.

The Secretary shall calculate the amounts described in paragraphs (1) and (2) on the basis of—

(A) amounts available for making grants under this section;

(B) the population of the State or territory concerned; and

(C) the types of activities proposed by the State relating to the development of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

Amounts appropriated for purposes of carrying out the provisions of this section in each of the 2 fiscal years succeeding the fiscal year in which amounts are first appropriated for such purposes shall first be made available to States that received grants under this section during the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year concerned.

For purposes of this subsection:

The term “State” does not include the United States Virgin Islands, Guam, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, or the Republic of Palau.

The term “territory” means the United States Virgin Islands, Guam, American Samoa, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, and the Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association takes effect).

To the extent practicable, the Secretary shall award grants to States under this section in a manner that—

(1) is geographically equitable; and

(2) distributes the grants among States that have differing levels of development of consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance.

The Governor of any State that desires to receive a grant under this section shall designate the office, agency, entity, or individual (referred to in this chapter as the “lead agency”) responsible for—

(A) submitting the application described in subsection (e) of this section on behalf of the State;

(B) administering and supervising the use of amounts made available under the grant;

(C)(i) coordinating efforts related to, and supervising the preparation of, the application;

(ii) coordinating the planning, development, implementation, and evaluation of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance among public agencies and between public agencies and private agencies, including coordinating efforts related to entering into interagency agreements; and

(iii) coordinating efforts related to, and supervising, the active, timely, and meaningful participation by individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, and other appropriate individuals, with respect to activities carried out under the grant; and

(D) the delegation, in whole or in part, of any responsibilities described in subparagraph (A), (B), or (C) to one or more appropriate offices, agencies, entities, or individuals.

In designating the lead agency, the Governor may designate—

(A) a commission appointed by the Governor;

(B) a public-private partnership or consortium;

(C) a university-affiliated program;

(D) a public agency;

(E) a council established under Federal or State law; or

(F) another appropriate office, agency, entity, or individual.

The State shall provide, in accordance with subsection (e)(1) of this section, evidence that the lead agency has the ability—

(A) to respond to assistive technology needs across disabilities and ages;

(B) to promote the availability throughout the State of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(C) to promote and implement systems change and advocacy activities;

(D) to promote and develop public-private partnerships;

(E) to exercise leadership in identifying and responding to the technology needs of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives;

(F) to promote consumer confidence, responsiveness, and advocacy; and

(G) to exercise leadership in implementing effective strategies for capacity building, staff and consumer training, and enhancement of access to funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services across agencies.

Any State that desires to receive a grant under this section shall submit an application that contains the following information and assurances:

Information identifying the lead agency designated by the Governor under subsection (d)(1) of this section, and the evidence described in subsection (d)(3) of this section.

A description of the nature and extent of involvement of various State agencies, including the State insurance department, in the preparation of the application and the continuing role of each agency in the development and implementation of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, including the identification of the available resources and financial responsibility of each agency for paying for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

A description of procedures that provide for—

(i)(I) the active involvement of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, and other appropriate individuals, in the development, implementation, and evaluation of the program; and

(II) the active involvement, to the maximum extent appropriate, of individuals with disabilities who use assistive technology devices or assistive technology services, in decisions relating to such devices and services; and

(ii) mechanisms for determining consumer satisfaction and participation of individuals with disabilities who represent a variety of ages and types of disabilities, in the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

A description of the nature and extent of—

(i) the involvement, in the designation of the lead agency under subsection (d) of this section, and in the development of the application, of—

(I) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives;

(II) other appropriate individuals who are not employed by a State agency; and

(III) organizations, providers, and interested parties, in the private sector; and

(ii) the continuing role of the individuals and entities described in clause (i) in the program.

A tentative assessment of the extent of the need of individuals with disabilities in the State, including individuals from underrepresented populations or rural populations, for a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance and a description of previous efforts and efforts continuing on the date of the application to develop a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

A description of State resources and other resources (to the extent such information is available) that are available to commit to the development of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

Information on the program with respect to—

(A) the goals and objectives of the State for the program;

(B) the systems change and advocacy activities that the State plans to carry out under the program; and

(C) the expected outcomes of the State for the program, consistent with the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

An assurance that the State will use funds made available under this section or section 2213 of this title to accomplish the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title and the goals, objectives, and outcomes described in paragraph (6), and to carry out the systems change and advocacy activities described in paragraph (6)(B), in a manner that is consumer-responsive.

An assurance that the State, in carrying out such systems change and advocacy activities, shall carry out activities regarding—

(i) the development, implementation, and monitoring of State, regional, and local laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures, that will improve access to, provision of, funding for, and timely acquisition and delivery of, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(ii) the development and implementation of strategies to overcome barriers regarding access to, provision of, and funding for, such devices and services, with priority for identification of barriers to funding through State education (including special education) services, vocational rehabilitation services, and medical assistance services or, as appropriate, other health and human services, and with particular emphasis on overcoming barriers for underrepresented populations and rural populations;

(iii) coordination of activities among State agencies, in order to facilitate access to, provision of, and funding for, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(iv) the development and implementation of strategies to empower individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, to successfully advocate for increased access to, funding for, and provision of, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, and to increase the participation, choice, and control of such individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives in the selection and procurement of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(v) the provision of outreach to underrepresented populations and rural populations, including identifying and assessing the needs of such populations, providing activities to increase the accessibility of services to such populations, training representatives of such populations to become service providers, and training staff of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance to work with such populations; and

(vi) the development and implementation of strategies to ensure timely acquisition and delivery of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, particularly for children,

unless the State demonstrates through the progress reports required under section 2214 of this title that significant progress has been made in the development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, and that other systems change and advocacy activities will increase the likelihood that the program will accomplish the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

An assurance that the State will conduct an annual assessment of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, in order to determine—

(A) the extent to which the State's goals and objectives for systems change and advocacy activities, as identified in the State plan under paragraph (6), have been achieved; and

(B) the areas of need that require attention in the next year.

A description of—

(A) the data collection system used for compiling information on the program, consistent with such requirements as the Secretary may establish for such systems, and, when a national classification system is developed pursuant to section 2231 of this title, consistent with such classification system; and

(B) procedures that will be used to conduct evaluations of the program.

An assurance that amounts received under the grant will be expended in accordance with the provisions of this subchapter.

An assurance that amounts received under the grant—

(A) will be used to supplement amounts available from other sources that are expended for technology-related assistance, including the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(B) will not be used to pay a financial obligation for technology-related assistance (including the provision of assistive technology devices or assistive technology services) that would have been paid with amounts available from other sources if amounts under the grant had not been available, unless—

(i) such payment is made only to prevent a delay in the receipt of appropriate technology-related assistance (including the provision of assistive technology devices or assistive technology services) by an individual with a disability; and

(ii) the entity or agency responsible subsequently reimburses the appropriate account with respect to programs and activities under the grant in an amount equal to the amount of the payment.

An assurance that—

(A) a public agency shall control and administer amounts received under the grant; and

(B) a public agency or an individual with a disability shall—

(i) hold title to property purchased with such amounts; and

(ii) administer such property.

An assurance that the State will—

(A) prepare reports to the Secretary in such form and containing such information as the Secretary may require to carry out the Secretary's functions under this subchapter; and

(B) keep such records and allow access to such records as the Secretary may require to ensure the correctness and verification of information provided to the Secretary under this paragraph.

An assurance that amounts received under the grant will not be commingled with State or other funds.

An assurance that the State will adopt such fiscal control and accounting procedures as may be necessary to ensure proper disbursement of and accounting for amounts received under the grant.

An assurance that the State will—

(A) make available to individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives information concerning technology-related assistance in a form that will allow such individuals to effectively use such information; and

(B) in preparing such information for dissemination, consider the media-related needs of individuals with disabilities who have sensory and cognitive limitations and consider the use of auditory materials, including audio cassettes, visual materials, including video cassettes and video discs, and braille materials.

A description of the policies governing contracts, grants, and other arrangements with public agencies, private nonprofit organizations, and other entities or individuals for the purpose of providing assistive technology devices and assistive technology services consistent with the provisions of this subchapter.

An assurance that, to the extent practicable, technology-related assistance made available with amounts received under the grant will be equitably distributed among all geographical areas of the State.

An assurance that the lead agency will have the authority to use funds made available through a grant made under this section or section 2213 of this title to comply with the requirements of this section or section 2213 of this title, respectively, including the ability to hire qualified staff necessary to carry out activities under the program.

Either—

(A) an assurance that the State will annually provide, from the funds made available to the State through a grant made under this section or section 2213 of this title, an amount calculated in accordance with subsection (f)(4) of this section, in order to make a grant to, or enter into a contract with, an entity to support protection and advocacy services through the systems established to provide protection and advocacy under the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.), the Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act (42 U.S.C. 10801 et seq.), and section 794e of this title; or

(B) at the discretion of the State, a request that the Secretary annually reserve, from the funds made available to the State through a grant made under this section or section 2213 of this title, an amount calculated in accordance with subsection (f)(4) of this section, in order for the Secretary to make a grant to or enter into a contract with such a system to support protection and advocacy services.

An assurance that the State—

(A) will develop and implement strategies for including personnel training regarding assistive technology within existing Federal- and State-funded training initiatives, in order to enhance assistive technology skills and competencies; and

(B) will document such training.

An assurance that the percentage of the funds received under the grant that is used for indirect costs shall not exceed 10 percent.

An assurance that the lead agency will coordinate the activities funded through a grant made under this section or section 2213 of this title with the activities carried out by other councils within the State, including—

(A) any council or commission specified in the assurance provided by the State in accordance with section 721(a)(36) of this title;

(B) the Statewide Independent Living Council established under section 796d of this title;

(C) the advisory panel established under section 1413(a)(12) of title 20;

(D) the State Interagency Coordinating Council established under section 1482 of title 20;

(E) the State Planning Council described in section 124 of the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6024);

(F) the State mental health planning council established under section 300x–3 of title 42; and

(G) any council established under section 3015, 3017(g)(2)(A), or 3058g(a)(3)(H) of title 42.

An assurance that there will be coordination between the activities funded through the grant and other related systems change and advocacy activities funded by either Federal or State sources.

Such other information and assurances as the Secretary may reasonably require.

A State that, as of June 30, 1993, has provided for protection and advocacy services through an entity that—

(A) is capable of performing the functions that would otherwise be performed under subsection (e)(20) of this section by the system described in subsection (e)(20) of this section; and

(B) is not a system described in such subsection,

shall be considered to meet the requirements of such subsection. Such entity shall receive funding to provide such protection and advocacy services in accordance with paragraph (4), and shall comply with the same requirements of this subchapter (other than the requirements of such subsection) as a system that receives funding under such subsection.

A system that receives funds under subsection (e)(20) of this section to carry out the protection and advocacy services described in subsection (e)(20)(A) of this section in a State, or an entity described in paragraph (1) that carries out such services in the State, shall prepare reports that contain such information as the Secretary may require, including the following:

(i) A description of the activities carried out by the system or entity with such funds.

(ii) Documentation of significant progress, in providing protection and advocacy services, in each of the following areas:

(I) Conducting activities that are consumer-responsive, including activities that will lead to increased access to funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

(II) Executing legal, administrative, and other appropriate means of representation to implement systems change and advocacy activities.

(III) Developing and implementing strategies designed to enhance the long-term abilities of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives to successfully advocate for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services to which the individuals with disabilities are entitled under law other than this chapter.

(IV) Coordinating activities with protection and advocacy services funded through sources other than this chapter, and coordinating activities with the systems change and advocacy activities carried out by the State lead agency.

The system or entity shall submit the reports to the program described in subsection (a) of this section in the State not less often than every 6 months.

The system or entity shall provide monthly updates to the program described in subsection (a) of this section concerning the activities and information described in subparagraph (A).

Before making a grant or entering into a contract under subsection (e)(20)(B) of this section to support the protection and advocacy services described in subsection (e)(20)(A) of this section in a State, the Secretary shall solicit and consider the opinions of the lead agency in the State with respect to the terms of the grant or contract.

For each fiscal year, for each State receiving a grant under this section or section 2213 of this title, the Secretary shall specify a minimum amount that the State shall use to provide protection and advocacy services.

Except as provided in subparagraph (C) or (D)—

(i) the Secretary shall calculate such minimum amount for a State based on the size of the grant, the needs of individuals with disabilities within the State, the population of the State, and the geographic size of the State; and

(ii) such minimum amount shall be not less than $40,000 and not more than $100,000.

If a State receives a second extension grant under section 2213(a)(2) of this title, the Secretary shall specify a minimum amount under subparagraph (A) for the fourth year (if any) of the grant period that shall equal 75 percent of the minimum amount specified for the State under such subparagraph for the third year of the second extension grant of the State.

If a State receives a second extension grant under section 2213(a)(2) of this title, the Secretary shall specify a minimum amount under subparagraph (A) for the fifth year (if any) of the grant period that shall equal 50 percent of the minimum amount specified for the State under such subparagraph for the third year of the second extension grant of the State.

After the fifth year (if any) of the grant period, no Federal funds may be made available under this subchapter by the State to a system described in subsection (e)(20) of this section or an entity described in paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §102, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1052; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §102, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 63.)

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (b)(5)(B), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsec. (e)(20)(A), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, and amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Protection and Advocacy for Mentally Ill Individuals Act, referred to in subsec. (e)(20)(A), probably means the Protection and Advocary for Mentally Ill Individuals Act of 1986, Pub. L. 99–319, May 23, 1986, 100 Stat. 478, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 114 (§10801 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 10801 of Title 42 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(1), substituted “3-year grants to support systems change and advocacy activities described in section 2211(b) of this title (including activities described in subsection (e)(7) of this section)” for “3-year grants” and “in developing and implementing consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs” for “to develop and implement statewide programs”.

Subsec. (b). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(2), (3), redesignated subsec. (c) as (b) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (b). Text read as follows: “From amounts appropriated under section 2216 of this title, the Secretary shall award under this section, to the extent appropriate applications are submitted—

“(1) in the first fiscal year for which amounts are appropriated, not more than 10 grants on a competitive basis;

“(2) in the second fiscal year for which amounts are appropriated, not more than 20 grants on a competitive basis; and

“(3) in the third fiscal year for which amounts are appropriated, any number of grants on a competitive basis.”

Subsec. (b)(3)(C). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(4)(A), substituted “consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program” for “statewide program”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(A). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(4)(B)(i), inserted heading after “(A)” and “United States” before “Virgin Islands” and substituted “Republic of Palau” for “Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Subsec. (b)(5)(B). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(4)(B)(ii), inserted heading after “(B)” and “United States” before “Virgin Islands” and substituted “Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association takes effect)” for “Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(3), redesignated subsec. (d) as (c). Former subsec. (c) redesignated (b).

Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(5), substituted “consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs” for “statewide programs”.

Subsec. (d). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(3), (6), added subsec. (d) and redesignated former subsec. (d) as (c).

Subsec. (e)(1) to (3). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(A), added pars. (1) to (3) and struck out former pars. (1) to (3), which read as follows:

“(1)

“(A) preparing the application;

“(B) administering and supervising the use of amounts made available under the grant;

“(C) planning and developing the statewide program of technology-related assistance;

“(D) coordination between public and private agencies, including the entering into of interagency agreements;

“(E) ensuring active, timely, and meaningful participation by individuals with disabilities, the families or representatives of such individuals, and other appropriate individuals with respect to performing functions and carrying out activities under the grant; and

“(F) the delegation of any responsibilities described above, in whole or in part, to one or more appropriate offices, agencies, entities, or individuals.

“(2)

“(3)

Subsec. (e)(4). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(B), (C), substituted “consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program” for “statewide program” in two places and “underrepresented populations or rural populations” for “underserved groups”.

Subsec. (e)(5). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(C), substituted “consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program” for “statewide program”.

Subsec. (e)(6). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(D), (F), added subpar. (6) and struck out heading and text of former subpar. (6). Text read as follows: “The State's goals, objectives, functions, and activities planned under the grant, and the expected outcomes at the end of the grant period with respect to a consumer-responsive statewide program of technology-related assistance, consistent with the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title.”

Subsec. (e)(7). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(D), (F), added par. (7) and struck out heading and text of former par. (7). Text read as follows: “A description of—

“(A) procedures used for compiling information; and

“(B) procedures that will be used to conduct evaluations.”

Subsec. (e)(8), (9). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(E), (F) added pars. (8) and (9) and redesignated former pars. (8) and (9) as (17) and (18), respectively.

Subsec. (e)(11)(B)(i), (12)(B). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(G), substituted “individual with a disability” for “individual with disabilities”.

Subsec. (e)(16)(A). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(H), substituted “their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives” for “the families or representatives of individuals with disabilities”.

Subsec. (e)(17). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(D), (E), redesignated par. (8) as (17) and struck out heading and text of former par. (17). Text read as follows: “Such other information and assurances as the Secretary may reasonably require.”

Subsec. (e)(18). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(E), redesignated par. (9) as (18).

Subsec. (e)(19) to (25). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(7)(I), added pars. (19) to (25).

Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 103–218, §102(8), added subsec. (f).

This section is referred to in sections 2211, 2213, 2214, 2215, 2282 of this title.

The Secretary may award an initial extension grant, for a period of 2 years, to any State that meets the standards specified in subsection (b)(1) of this section.

The Secretary may award a second extension grant, for a period of not more than 5 years, to any State that meets the standards specified in subsection (b)(2) of this section.

In order for a State to receive an initial extension grant under this section, the designated lead agency of the State shall—

(A) provide the evidence described in section 2212(d)(3) of this title; and

(B) demonstrate that the State has made significant progress, and has carried out systems change and advocacy activities that have resulted in significant progress, toward the development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, consistent with sections 2201(b)(1), 2211, and 2212 of this title.

In order for a State to receive a second extension grant under this section, the designated lead agency shall—

(i) provide the evidence and make the demonstration described in paragraph (1);

(ii) describe the steps the State has taken or will take to continue on a permanent basis the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance with the ability to maintain, at a minimum, the outcomes achieved by the systems change and advocacy activities; and

(iii) identify future funding options and commitments for the program from the public and private sector and the key individuals, agencies, and organizations to be involved in, and to direct future efforts of, the program.

In making any award to a State for a second extension grant, the Secretary shall (except as provided in section 2215(a)(2)(A)(iii) of this title) make such award contingent on a determination, based on the onsite visit required under section 2215(a)(2)(A)(ii) of this title, that the State is making significant progress toward development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance. If the Secretary determines that the State is not making such progress, the Secretary may take an action described in section 2215(b)(2) of this title, in accordance with the applicable procedures described in section 2215 of this title.

From amounts appropriated under section 2216 of this title for any fiscal year, the Secretary shall pay an amount that is not less than $500,000 and not greater than $1,500,000 to each State (other than a State described in clause (ii)) that receives an initial extension grant under subsection (a)(1) of this section.

From amounts appropriated under section 2216 of this title for any fiscal year, the Secretary shall pay an amount that is not greater than $150,000 to any of the following States that receives an initial extension grant under subsection (a)(1) of this section:

(I) The United States Virgin Islands.

(II) Guam.

(III) American Samoa.

(IV) The Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands.

(V) The Republic of Palau (until the Compact of Free Association takes effect).

The Secretary shall calculate the amount described in clause (i) or (ii) of subparagraph (A) with respect to a State on the basis of—

(i) amounts available for making grants pursuant to subsection (a)(1) of this section;

(ii) the population of the State;

(iii) the types of assistance to be provided in the State; and

(iv) the amount of resources committed by the State and available to the State from other sources.

Amounts appropriated in any fiscal year for purposes of carrying out subsection (a)(1) of this section shall first be made available to States that received assistance under this section during the fiscal year preceding the fiscal year concerned.

In providing any increases in initial extension grants under subsection (a)(1) of this section above the amounts provided to States under this section for fiscal year 1993, the Secretary may give priority to—

(i) the States (other than the States described in subparagraph (A)(ii)) that have the largest populations, based on the most recent census data; and

(ii) the States (other than the States described in subparagraph (A)(ii)) that are sparsely populated, with a wide geographic spread,

where such characteristics have impeded the development of a consumer-responsive, comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

The amounts of, and the priority of applicants for, the second extension grants awarded under subsection (a)(2) of this section shall be determined by the Secretary, except that—

(i) the amount paid to a State for the fourth year (if any) of the grant period shall be 75 percent of the amount paid to the State for the third year of the grant period;

(ii) the amount paid to a State for the fifth year (if any) of the grant period shall be 50 percent of the amount paid to the State for the third year of the grant period; and

(iii) after the fifth year of the grant period, no Federal funds may be made available to the State under this subchapter.

In providing any increases in second extension grants under subsection (a)(2) of this section above the amounts provided to States under this section for fiscal year 1993, the Secretary may give priority to States described in paragraph (1)(D).

A State that desires to receive an extension grant under this section shall submit an application to the Secretary that contains the following information and assurances with respect to the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance in the State:

The information and assurances described in section 2212(e) of this title, except the preliminary needs assessment described in section 2212(e)(4) of this title.

A description of needs relating to technology-related assistance of individuals with disabilities (including individuals from underrepresented populations or rural populations) and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, and other appropriate individuals within the State.

A description of any problems or gaps that remain with the development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance in the State.

A description of the strategies that the State will pursue during the grant period to remedy the problems or gaps with the development and implementation of such a program.

A description of outreach activities to be conducted by the State, including dissemination of information to eligible populations, with special attention to underrepresented populations and rural populations.

A description of—

(A) the specific systems change and advocacy activities described in section 2211(b) of this title (including the activities described in section 2212(e)(7) 1 of this title) carried out under the development grant received by the State under section 2212 of this title, or, in the case of an application for a grant under subsection (a)(2) of this section, under an initial extension grant received by the State under this section, including—

(i) a description of systems change and advocacy activities that were undertaken to produce change on a permanent basis for individuals with disabilities of all ages;

(ii) a description of activities undertaken to improve the involvement of individuals with disabilities in the program, including training and technical assistance efforts to improve individual access to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services as mandated under other laws and regulations as in effect on the date of the application, and including actions undertaken to improve the participation of underrepresented populations and rural populations, such as outreach efforts; and

(iii) an evaluation of the impact and results of the activities described in clauses (i) and (ii);

(B) the relationship of such systems change and advocacy activities to the development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance; and

(C) the progress made toward the development and implementation of such a program.

In the case of an application for a grant under subsection (a)(1) of this section, a report on the hearing described in subsection (e)(1) of this section or, in the case of an application for a grant under subsection (a)(2) of this section, a report on the hearing described in subsection (e)(2) of this section.

A description of State actions, other than such a hearing, designed to determine the degree of satisfaction of individuals with disabilities, and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, public service providers and private service providers, educators and related services providers, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals and entities with—

(i) the degree of their ongoing involvement in the development and implementation of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance;

(ii) the specific systems change and advocacy activities described in section 2211(b) of this title (including the activities described in section 2212(e)(7) of this title) carried out by the State under the development grant or the initial extension grant;

(iii) progress made toward the development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance; and

(iv) the ability of the lead agency to carry out the activities described in section 2212(d)(3) of this title.

A summary of any comments received concerning the issues described in paragraph (4) and response of the State to such comments, solicited through a public hearing referred to in paragraph (4) or through other means, from individuals affected by the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, including—

(A) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives;

(B) public service providers and private service providers;

(C) educators and related services personnel;

(D) technology experts (including engineers);

(E) employers; and

(F) other appropriate individuals and entities.

An assurance that the State, or any recipient of funds made available to the State under section 2212 of this title, will comply with guidelines established under section 794d of this title.

To be eligible to receive a grant under subsection (a)(1) of this section, a State shall hold a public hearing in the third year of a program carried out under a grant made under section 2212 of this title, after providing appropriate and sufficient notice to allow interested groups and organizations and all segments of the public an opportunity to comment on the program.

To be eligible to receive a grant under subsection (a)(2) of this section, a State shall hold a public hearing in the second year of a program carried out under a grant made under subsection (a)(1) of this section, after providing the notice described in paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §103, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1055; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §103, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 70.)

For Oct. 1, 1994, as the date the Compact of Free Association with Palau takes effect, referred to in subsec. (c)(1)(A)(ii)(V), see Proc. No. 6726, Sept. 27, 1994, 59 F.R. 49777, set out as a note under section 1931 of Title 48, Territories and Insular Possessions.

Section 2212(e)(7) of this title, referred to in subsec. (d)(3)(A), was in the original “section 1012(e)(7)”, and was translated as reading “section 102(e)(7)”, meaning section 102(e)(7) of Pub. L. 100–407, to reflect the probable intent of Congress, because Pub. L. 100–407 does not contain a section 1012.

1994—Pub. L. 103–218 amended section generally, substituting subsecs. (a) to (e) which set up a two-tiered extension grant system and set out standards of eligibility, calculation of amounts of grants, application procedure, and public hearing requirement for former subsecs. (a) to (c) which authorized an extension grant and set out calculations of amounts of such grant, priority for States which received grants in preceding year, application and comment procedure, and directed compatibility and accessibility of electronic equipment.

This section is referred to in sections 2211, 2212, 2214, 2215, 2282 of this title.

1 See References in Text note below.

The Secretary shall develop guidelines to be used in assessing the extent to which a State that received a grant under section 2212 or 2213 of this title is making significant progress in developing and implementing a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance consistent with section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

Each State that receives a grant under section 2212 or 2213 of this title to carry out such a program shall submit annually to the Secretary a report that documents significant progress in developing and implementing a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, consistent with sections 2201(b)(1), 2211, and 2212(e) of this title, and that documents the following:

(1) The progress the State has made, as determined in the State's annual assessment described in section 2212(e)(8) of this title (consistent with the guidelines established by the Secretary under subsection (a) of this section), in achieving the State's goals, objectives, and outcomes as identified in the State's application as described in section 2212(e)(6) of this title, and areas of need that require attention in the next year, including unanticipated problems with the achievement of the goals, objectives, and outcomes described in the application, and the activities the State has undertaken to rectify these problems.

(2) The systems change and advocacy activities carried out by the State including—

(A) an analysis of the laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures that the State has changed, has attempted to change, or will attempt to change during the next year, to facilitate and increase timely access to, provision of, or funding for, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(B) a description of any written policies and procedures that the State has developed and implemented regarding access to, provision of, and funding for, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, particularly policies and procedures regarding access to, provision of, and funding for, such devices and services under education (including special education), vocational rehabilitation, and medical assistance programs.

(3) The degree of involvement of various State agencies, including the State insurance department, in the development, implementation, and evaluation of the program, including any interagency agreements that the State has developed and implemented regarding access to, provision of, and funding for, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services such as agreements that identify available resources for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services and the responsibility of each agency for paying for such devices and services.

(4) The activities undertaken to collect and disseminate information about the documents or activities analyzed or described in paragraphs (1) through (3), including outreach activities to underrepresented populations and rural populations and efforts to disseminate information by means of electronic communication.

(5) The involvement of individuals with disabilities who represent a variety of ages and types of disabilities in the planning, development, implementation, and assessment of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance, including activities undertaken to improve such involvement, such as consumer training and outreach activities to underrepresented populations and rural populations.

(6) The degree of consumer satisfaction with the program, including satisfaction by underrepresented populations and rural populations.

(7) Efforts to train personnel as well as consumers.

(8) Efforts to reduce the service delivery time for receiving assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

(9) Significant progress in the provision of protection and advocacy services, in each of the areas described in section 2212(f)(2)(A)(ii) of this title.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §104, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1056; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §104, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 75.)

1994—Pub. L. 103–218 amended section generally, substituting provisions directing Secretary to develop guidelines to assess the progress of States receiving grants under section 2212 or 2213 of this title in developing and implementing consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance and directing such States to submit annual report to Secretary documenting such progress for provisions directing States receiving grants under this subchapter or section 2212 or 2213 of this title to submit annual report to Secretary describing activities carried out under grants and their impact.

This section is referred to in sections 2212, 2215 of this title.

The Secretary shall establish a system to assess the extent to which States that receive grants pursuant to this subchapter are making significant progress in achieving the purposes of this subchapter, consistent with the guidelines established under section 2214(a) of this title.

The Secretary shall conduct an onsite visit during the final year of each State's participation in the development grant program.

Except as provided in clause (iii), the Secretary shall conduct an additional onsite visit to any State that applies for a second extension grant under section 2213(a)(2) of this title and whose initial onsite visit occurred prior to March 9, 1994. The Secretary shall conduct any such visit to the State not later than 12 months after the date on which the Secretary awards the second extension grant.

The Secretary shall not be required to conduct a visit described in clause (ii) if the Secretary determines that the visit is not necessary to assess whether the State is making significant progress toward development and implementation of a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance.

Two-thirds of the onsite monitoring team in each case shall be qualified peer reviewers, who—

(i) shall not be lead agency personnel;

(ii) shall be from States other than the State being monitored; and

(iii) shall include an individual with a disability, or a family member, a guardian, an advocate, or an authorized representative of such an individual.

Members of any onsite monitoring team who are officers or full-time employees of the United States shall serve without compensation in addition to that received for their services as officers or employees of the United States, but may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5702 of title 5 for individuals in the Government service traveling on official business.

Members of any onsite monitoring team who are not officers or full-time employees of the United States shall receive compensation at a rate not to exceed the daily equivalent of the rate of pay for level IV of the Executive Schedule under section 5315 of title 5 for each day (including traveltime) during which such members are engaged in the actual performance of their duties as members of an onsite monitoring team. In addition, such members may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5 for individuals in the Government service employed intermittently.

The Secretary shall prepare a report of findings from the onsite visit. The Secretary shall consider the findings in determining whether to continue funding the program either with or without changes. The report shall be available to the public.

The Secretary shall provide advance public notice of the onsite visit and solicit public comment through such notice from individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, public service providers and private service providers, educators and related services personnel, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals and entities, regarding the State program funded through a grant made under section 2212 or 2213 of this title. The public comment solicitation notice shall be included in the onsite visit report described in paragraph (2).

At a minimum the visits shall allow the Secretary to determine the extent to which the State is making significant progress in developing a consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance consistent with the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title.

To assist the Secretary in carrying out the responsibilities of the Secretary under this section, the Secretary may require States to provide relevant information.

Any State that fails to comply with the requirements of this subchapter shall be subject to a corrective action plan.

A State that fails to comply with the requirements of this subchapter may be subject to corrective actions such as—

(A) partial or complete fund termination;

(B) ineligibility to participate in the grant program in the following year;

(C) reduction in funding for the following year; or

(D) required redesignation of the lead agency, in accordance with subsection (c) of this section.

The Secretary shall establish appeals procedures for States that are found in noncompliance with the provisions of this subchapter as the result of an onsite visit or failure to supply information required under subsection (a)(5) of this section.

Once a State becomes subject to a corrective action plan pursuant to subsection (b) of this section, the Governor of the State, subject to approval by the Secretary, shall appoint, within 30 days after the submission of the plan to the Secretary, a monitoring panel consisting of the following representatives:

(i) The head of the lead agency designated by the Governor.

(ii) 2 representatives from different public or private nonprofit organizations that represent the interests of individuals with disabilities.

(iii) 2 consumers who are users of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services and who are not—

(I) members of the advisory council, if any, of the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance; or

(II) employees of the State lead agency.

(iv) 2 service providers with knowledge and expertise in assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The monitoring panel shall be ethnically diverse. The panel shall select a chairperson from among the members of the panel.

The panel shall receive periodic reports from the State regarding progress in implementing the corrective action plan and shall have the authority to request additional information necessary to determine compliance.

The meetings of the panel to determine compliance shall be open to the public (subject to confidentiality concerns) and held at locations that are accessible to individuals with disabilities.

The panel shall carry out the duties of the panel for the entire period of the corrective action plan, as determined by the Secretary.

The panel shall be funded by a portion of the funds received by the State under this subchapter, as directed by the Secretary.

A failure by a Governor of a State to comply with the requirements of paragraph (1) shall result in the termination of funding for the State under this subchapter.

Based on its findings, a monitoring panel may determine that a lead agency designated by a Governor has not accomplished the purposes described in section 2201(b)(1) of this title and that there is good cause for redesignation of the agency and the temporary loss of funds by the State under this subchapter.

In this paragraph, the term “good cause” includes—

(i) lack of progress with employment of qualified staff;

(ii) lack of consumer-responsive activities;

(iii) lack of resource allocation to systems change and advocacy activities;

(iv) lack of progress with meeting the assurances in section 2212(e) of this title; or

(v) inadequate fiscal management.

If a monitoring panel makes such a determination, the panel shall recommend to the Secretary that further remedial action be taken or that the Secretary order the Governor to redesignate the lead agency within 90 days or lose funds under this subchapter. The Secretary, based on the findings and recommendations of the monitoring panel, and after providing to the public notice and an opportunity for comment, shall make a final determination regarding whether to order the Governor to redesignate the lead agency. The Governor shall make any such redesignation in accordance with the requirements that apply to designations under section 2212(d) of this title.

The Governor of a State, based on input from individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, may determine that the entity providing protection and advocacy services required by section 2212(e)(20) of this title (referred to in this subsection as the “first entity”) has not met the protection and advocacy service needs of the individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, for securing funding for and access to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, and that there is good cause to provide the protection and advocacy services for the State through a contract with a second entity.

On making such a determination, the Governor may not enter into a contract with a second entity to provide the protection and advocacy services unless good cause exists and unless—

(A) the Governor has given the first entity 30 days notice of the intention to enter into such contract, including specification of the good cause, and an opportunity to respond to the assertion that good cause has been shown;

(B) individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, have timely notice of the determination and opportunity for public comment; and

(C) the first entity has the opportunity to appeal the determination to the Secretary within 30 days of the determination on the basis that there is not good cause to enter into the contract.

When the Governor of a State determines that there is good cause to enter into a contract with a second entity to provide the protection and advocacy services, the Governor shall hold an open competition within the State and issue a request for proposals by entities desiring to provide the services.

The Governor shall not issue such request until the first entity has been given notice and an opportunity to respond. If the first entity appeals the determination to the Secretary in accordance with paragraph (2)(C), the Governor shall issue such request only if the Secretary decides not to overturn the determination of the Governor. The Governor shall issue such request within 30 days after the end of the period during which the first entity has the opportunity to respond, or after the decision of the Secretary, as appropriate.

Such competition shall be open to entities with the same expertise and ability to provide legal services as a system referred to in section 2212(e)(20) of this title. The competition shall ensure public involvement, including a public hearing and adequate opportunity for public comment.

Not later than December 31 of each year, the Secretary shall prepare, and submit to the President and to the Congress, a report on Federal initiatives, including the initiatives funded under this chapter, to improve the access of individuals with disabilities to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

Such report shall include information on—

(A) the demonstrated successes of such Federal initiatives at the Federal and State levels in improving interagency coordination, streamlining access to funding for assistive technology, and producing beneficial outcomes for users of assistive technology;

(B) the demonstration activities carried out through the Federal initiatives to—

(i) promote access to such funding in public programs that were in existence on the date of the initiation of the demonstration activities; and

(ii) establish additional options for obtaining such funding;

(C) the education and training activities carried out through the Federal initiatives to promote such access in public programs and the health care system and the efforts carried out through such activities to train professionals in a variety of relevant disciplines, and increase the competencies of the professionals with respect to technology-related assistance;

(D) the education and training activities carried out through the Federal initiatives to train individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities, educators and related services personnel, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals, about technology-related assistance;

(E) the education and training activities carried out through Federal initiatives to promote awareness of available funding in public programs;

(F) the research activities carried out through the Federal initiatives to improve understanding of the costs and benefits of access to assistive technology for individuals with disabilities who represent a variety of ages and types of disabilities;

(G) the program outreach activities to rural and inner-city areas that are carried out through the Federal initiatives;

(H) the activities carried out through the Federal initiatives that are targeted to reach underrepresented populations and rural populations; and

(I) the consumer involvement activities in the programs carried out under this chapter.

As soon as practicable, the Secretary shall include in the annual report required by this subsection information on the availability of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services. When a national classification system for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services is developed pursuant to section 2231 of this title, the Secretary shall report such information in a manner consistent with such national classification system.

On or before October 1, 1995, the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council established under section 794c of this title shall prepare and submit to the President and to the Congress a report containing—

(A) the response of the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council to—

(i) the findings of the National Council on Disability resulting from the study entitled “Study on the Financing of Assistive Technology Devices and Services for Individuals with Disabilities”, carried out in accordance with section 2231 of this title, as in effect on the day before March 9, 1994; and

(ii) the recommendations of the National Council on Disability for legislative and administrative change, resulting from such study; and

(B) information on any other activities of the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council that facilitate the accomplishment of section 2201(b)(1) of this title with respect to the Federal Government.

The report shall include any comments submitted by the National Council on Disability as to the appropriateness of the response described in paragraph (1)(A) and the effectiveness of the activities described in paragraph (1)(B) in meeting the needs of individuals with disabilities for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

This subchapter may not be construed as authorizing a Federal or a State agency to reduce medical or other assistance available or to alter eligibility under any other Federal law.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §105, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1057; Pub. L. 101–476, title IX, §901(a)(2), Oct. 30, 1990, 104 Stat. 1142; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §105, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 76.)

1994—Subsec. (a)(1). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(1), inserted before period at end “, consistent with the guidelines established under section 2214(a) of this title”.

Subsec. (a)(2). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(2), added par. (2) and struck out heading and text of former par. (2). Text read as follows:

“(A) The Secretary shall conduct an onsite visit during the final year of each State's participation in the development grant program. Two-thirds of the onsite monitoring team in each case shall be qualified peer reviewers from other participating States.

“(B)(i) Members of any onsite monitoring team who are officers or full-time employees of the United States shall serve without compensation in addition to that received for their services as officers or employees of the United States, but they may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5702 of title 5 for individuals in the Government service traveling on official business.

“(ii) Members of any onsite monitoring team who are not officers or full-time employees of the United States shall receive compensation at a rate not to exceed the daily equivalent of the pay rate specified for GS–18 of the General Schedule under section 5332 of title 5 for each day (including traveltime) during which such members are engaged in the actual performance of their duties as members of an onsite monitoring team. In addition, such members may be allowed travel expenses, including per diem in lieu of subsistence, as authorized by section 5703 of title 5 for individuals in the Government service employed intermittently.”

Subsec. (a)(3). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(4), added par. (3). Former par. (3) redesignated (4).

Subsec. (a)(4). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(5), substituted “consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program” for “statewide program”.

Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(3), redesignated par. (3) as (4). Former par. (4) redesignated (5).

Subsec. (a)(5). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(a)(3), redesignated par. (4) as (5).

Subsec. (b)(2). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(b)(1)(A), (B), substituted “Corrective actions” for “Penalties” in heading and “corrective actions” for “penalties” in introductory provisions.

Subsec. (b)(2)(D). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(b)(1)(C)–(E), added subpar. (D).

Subsec. (b)(3). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(b)(2), substituted “subsection (a)(5) of this section” for “subsection (a)(4) of this section”.

Subsec. (c). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(c), added subsec. (c) and struck out heading and text of former subsec. (c). Text read as follows: “Nothing in this subchapter shall be construed to permit the State or any Federal agency to reduce medical or other assistance available or to alter eligibility under—

“(1) title II, V, XVI, XVIII, XIX, or XX of the Social Security Act;

“(2) the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act;

“(3) the Rehabilitation Act of 1973; or

“(4) laws relating to veterans’ benefits.”

Subsecs. (d) to (g). Pub. L. 103–218, §105(c)(2), added subsecs. (d) to (g).

1990—Subsec. (c)(2). Pub. L. 101–476 substituted “Individuals with Disabilities Education Act” for “Education of the Handicapped Act”.

Amendment by Pub. L. 101–476 effective Oct. 1, 1990, see section 1001 of Pub. L. 101–476, set out as a note under section 1087ee of Title 20, Education.

This section is referred to in sections 2213, 2216 of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subchapter $50,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 1998.

Of the funds appropriated for any fiscal year under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall reserve at least 2 percent or $1,500,000, whichever is greater, of such funds, for the purpose of providing information and technical assistance as described in subparagraphs (B) and (C) to States, individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, community-based organizations, and protection and advocacy agencies.

In providing such information and technical assistance to States, the Secretary shall consider the input of the directors of consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance, shall provide a clearinghouse for activities that have been developed and implemented through programs funded under this subchapter, and shall provide information and technical assistance that—

(i) facilitate service delivery capacity building, training of personnel from a variety of disciplines, and improvement of evaluation strategies, research, and data collection;

(ii) foster the development and replication of effective approaches to information referral, interagency coordination of training and service delivery, outreach to underrepresented populations and rural populations, and public awareness activities;

(iii) improve the awareness and adoption of successful approaches to increasing the availability of public and private funding for and access to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services by appropriate State agencies;

(iv) assist in planning, developing, implementing, and evaluating appropriate activities to further extend consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance;

(v) promote effective approaches to the development of consumer-controlled systems that increase access to, funding for, and awareness of, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services;

(vi) provide technical assistance and training to the entities carrying out activities funded pursuant to this subchapter, to establish or participate in electronic communication activities with other States; and

(vii) provide any other appropriate information and technical assistance to assist the States in accomplishing the purposes of this chapter.

The Secretary shall provide information and technical assistance to individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, or authorized representatives, community-based organizations, and protection and advocacy agencies, on a nationwide basis, to—

(i) disseminate information about, and foster awareness and understanding of, Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, policies, practices, procedures, and organizational structures, that facilitate, and overcome barriers to, funding for, and access to, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, to promote fuller independence, productivity, and inclusion for individuals with disabilities of all ages;

(ii) identify, collect, and disseminate information, and provide technical assistance, on effective systems change and advocacy activities;

(iii) improve the understanding and use of assistive technology funding decisions made as a result of policies, practices, and procedures, or through regulations, administrative hearings, or legal actions, that enhance access to funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services for individuals with disabilities;

(iv) promote effective approaches to Federal-State coordination of programs for individuals with disabilities, through information dissemination and technical assistance activities in response to funding policy issues identified on a nationwide basis by organizations, and individuals, that improve funding for or access to assistive technology devices and assistive technology services for individuals with disabilities of all ages; and

(v) promote effective approaches to the development of consumer-controlled systems that increase access to, funding for, and awareness of, assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, including the identification and description of mechanisms and means that successfully support self-help and peer mentoring groups for individuals with disabilities.

The Secretary shall coordinate the information and technical assistance activities carried out under subparagraph (B) or (C) with other activities funded under this chapter.

The Secretary shall provide the technical assistance and information described in subparagraphs (B) and (C) through grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements with public or private agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, with documented experience, expertise, and capacity to carry out identified activities related to the provision of such technical assistance and information.

For the purpose of achieving the objectives described in paragraph (1)(B), the Secretary shall reserve not less than 45 percent and not more than 55 percent of the funds reserved under subparagraph (A) for each fiscal year for grants to, or contracts or cooperative agreements with, public or private agencies or organizations with documented experience with and expertise in assistive technology service delivery, interagency coordination, and systems change and advocacy activities.

For the purpose of achieving the objectives described in paragraph (1)(C), the Secretary shall reserve not less than 45 percent and not more than 55 percent of the funds reserved under subparagraph (A) for each fiscal year for grants to, or contracts or cooperative agreements with, public or private agencies or organizations with documented experience with and expertise in—

(I) assistive technology systems change and advocacy activities;

(II) public funding options; and

(III) services to increase nationwide the availability of funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The Secretary shall make any grants, and enter into any contracts or cooperative agreements, under this subsection on a competitive basis. To be eligible to receive funds under this subsection an agency, organization, or institution shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing such information, as the Secretary may require.

The Secretary may reserve, from amounts appropriated for any fiscal year under subsection (a) of this section, such sums as the Secretary considers to be necessary for the purposes of conducting onsite visits as required by section 2215(a)(2) of this title.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §106, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1058; Pub. L. 103–218, title I, §106, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 82.)

1994—Pub. L. 103–218 amended section generally. Prior to amendment, section read as follows:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1)

“(2)

This section is referred to in sections 2212, 2213, 2231 of this title.

Section, Pub. L. 100–407, title I, §107, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1058, directed Secretary of Education to conduct national evaluation of program of grants to States authorized by this subchapter and to report to Congress on results not later than Oct. 1, 1992.

In fiscal year 1995, the Secretary shall initiate a system development project, based on a plan developed in consultation and coordination with other appropriate Federal and State agencies, to develop a national classification system for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, with the goal of obtaining uniform data through such a system on such devices and services across public programs and information and referral networks.

In developing a plan for the system development project, the Secretary shall consult with, and coordinate activities with—

(i) representatives of Federal agencies, including agencies that are headed by members of the Interagency Disability Coordinating Council established under section 507 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 794c); and

(ii) as determined by the Secretary, representatives of State agencies and other appropriate organizations that have responsibility for or are involved in the development and modification of assistive technology devices, the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, or the dissemination of information about assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, including recipients of grants or contracts for the provision of technical assistance to State assistive technology projects under section 2216(b) of this title, assistive technology reimbursement specialists, representatives of the State assistive technology projects, and representatives of organizations involved in information and referral activities.

The Secretary shall conduct such consultation, and such coordination of activities, with respect to the following:

(i) The costs and benefits, on an agency-by-agency basis, of obtaining uniform data through a national classification system for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services across public programs and information and referral networks.

(ii) The types of data that should be collected, including data regarding funding, across a range of programs, including the programs listed in subsection (c)(2) of this section, as appropriate.

(iii) A methodology for developing a single taxonomy and nomenclature for both assistive technology devices and assistive technology services across a range of programs, including the programs listed in subsection (c)(2) of this section, as appropriate.

(iv) The process for developing an appropriate data collection instrument or instruments.

(v) A methodology for collecting data across a range of programs, including the programs listed in subsection (c)(2) of this section, as appropriate.

(vi) The use of a national classification system by the Internal Revenue Service and State finance agencies to determine whether devices and services are assistive technology devices or assistive technology services for the purpose of determining whether a deduction or credit is allowable under title 26 or State tax law.

The Secretary may carry out this section directly, or, if necessary, by entering into contracts or cooperative agreements with appropriate entities.

In conducting the system development project, the Secretary shall develop a national classification system that includes a single taxonomy and nomenclature for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

In conducting the system development project, the Secretary shall develop a data collection instrument to—

(1) collect data regarding funding for assistive technology devices and assistive technology services; and

(2) collect such data from public programs, including, at a minimum—

(A) programs carried out under title I, VI, or VII of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 720 et seq., 795 et seq., or 796 et seq.);

(B) programs carried out under part B or H of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1411 et seq. or 1471 et seq.);

(C) programs carried out under title V or XIX of the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 701 et seq. or 1396 et seq.);

(D) programs carried out under the Older Americans Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3001 et seq.); and

(E) programs carried out under the Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act (42 U.S.C. 6000 et seq.).

The Secretary shall conduct the system development project in consultation with the Federal agencies that were consulted in developing the project plan.

Not later than July 1, 1997, the Secretary shall prepare and submit to the President and the appropriate committees of Congress a report containing—

(1) the results of the system development project; and

(2) the recommendations of the Secretary concerning implementation of a national classification system, including uniform data collection.

From the amounts appropriated under part C of this subchapter for fiscal year 1995, the Secretary shall reserve up to $200,000 to carry out this part.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §201, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §201, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 85.)

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(A), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended. Titles I, VI, and VII are classified generally to subchapters I (§720 et seq.), VI (§795 et seq.), and VII (§796 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 16 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(B), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended. Parts B and H of the Act are classified generally to subchapters II (§1411 et seq.) and VIII (§1471 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 33 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Social Security Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(C), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Titles V and XIX of the Act are classified generally to subchapters V (§701 et seq.) and XIX (§1396 et seq.), respectively, of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Older Americans Act of 1965, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(D), is Pub. L. 89–73, July 14, 1965, 79 Stat. 218, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 35 (§3001 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 3001 of Title 42 and Tables.

The Developmental Disabilities Assistance and Bill of Rights Act, referred to in subsec. (c)(2)(E), is title I of Pub. L. 88–164, as added by Pub. L. 98–527, §2, Oct. 19, 1984, 98 Stat. 2662, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 75 (§6000 et seq.) of Title 42. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 6000 of Title 42 and Tables.

A prior section 2231, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §201, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1059, directed National Council on the Handicapped to study implementation, acquisition or financing assistive technology devices and services for individuals with disabilities, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–218, §201.

This section is referred to in sections 2212, 2215 of this title.

The Secretary shall make grants to, or enter into contracts or cooperative agreements with, appropriate public or private agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education and community-based organizations, for the purposes of—

(A) conducting training sessions;

(B) developing, demonstrating, disseminating, and evaluating curricula, materials, and methods used to train individuals regarding the provision of technology-related assistance, to enhance opportunities for independence, productivity, and inclusion of individuals with disabilities; and

(C) providing training to develop awareness, skills, and competencies of service providers, consumers, and volunteers, who are located in rural areas, to increase the availability of technology-related assistance in community-based settings for rural residents who are individuals with disabilities.

Activities conducted under grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements described in paragraph (1) may address the training needs of individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives, individuals who work for public agencies, or for private entities (including insurers), that have contact with individuals with disabilities, educators and related services personnel, technology experts (including engineers), employers, and other appropriate individuals.

An agency or organization that receives a grant or enters into a contract or cooperative agreement under paragraph (1) may use amounts made available through the grant, contract, or agreement to—

(A) pay for a portion of the cost of courses of training or study related to technology-related assistance; and

(B) establish and maintain scholarships related to such courses of training or study, with such stipends and allowances as the Secretary may determine to be appropriate.

To be eligible to receive a grant or enter into a contract or cooperative agreement under paragraph (1), an agency or organization shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Secretary may require.

At a minimum, any such application shall include a detailed description of the strategies that the agency or organization will use to recruit and train persons to provide technology-related assistance, in order to—

(i) increase the extent to which such persons reflect the diverse populations of the United States; and

(ii) increase the number of individuals with disabilities, and individuals who are members of minority groups, who are available to provide such assistance.

Beginning in fiscal year 1994, the Secretary shall—

(i) establish priorities for activities carried out with assistance under this subsection;

(ii) publish such priorities in the Federal Register for the purpose of receiving public comment; and

(iii) publish such priorities in the Federal Register in final form not later than the date on which the Secretary publishes announcements for assistance provided under this subsection.

Concurrent with the publications required by subparagraph (A), the Secretary shall publish in the Federal Register an explanation of the manner in which the priorities were determined.

The Secretary shall make grants to assist public or private agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, to prepare students and faculty working in specific fields for careers relating to the provision of assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The specific fields described in subparagraph (A) may include—

(i) engineering;

(ii) industrial technology;

(iii) computer science;

(iv) communication disorders;

(v) special education and related services;

(vi) rehabilitation; and

(vii) social work.

In awarding grants under paragraph (1), the Secretary shall give priority to the interdisciplinary preparation of personnel who provide or who will provide technical assistance, who administer programs, or who prepare other personnel, in order to—

(A) support the development and implementation of consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide programs of technology-related assistance to individuals with disabilities; and

(B) enhance the skills and competencies of individuals involved in the provision of technology-related assistance, including assistive technology devices and assistive technology services, to individuals with disabilities.

An agency or organization that receives a grant under paragraph (1) may use amounts made available through the grant to—

(A) pay for a portion of the cost of courses of training or study related to technology-related assistance; and

(B) establish and maintain scholarships related to such courses of training or study, with such stipends and allowances as the Secretary may determine to be appropriate.

To be eligible to receive a grant under this section, an agency or organization shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Secretary may require.

At a minimum, any such application shall include a detailed description of the strategies that the agency or organization will use to recruit and train persons to provide technology-related assistance, in order to—

(i) increase the extent to which such persons reflect the diverse populations of the United States; and

(ii) increase the number of individuals with disabilities, and individuals who are members of minority groups, who are available to provide such assistance.

In exercising the authority granted in subsections (a) and (b) of this section, the Secretary shall reserve an adequate amount for grants to historically black colleges and universities and other institutions of higher education whose minority student enrollment is at least 50 percent.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §211, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 87.)

A prior section 2241, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §211, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1060, related to establishment of national information and program referral network, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–218, §202.

The Secretary shall enter into an agreement with an organization whose primary function is to promote technology transfer from, and cooperation among, Federal laboratories (as defined in section 3703(6) of title 15), under which funds shall be provided to promote technology transfer that will spur the development of assistive technology devices.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §212, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 89.)

A prior section 2242, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §212, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1060, related to feasibility studies undertaken by Secretary of Labor concerning the national information and program referral network, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–218, §202.

The Secretary shall make grants to, or enter into contracts or cooperative agreements with, public agencies, private entities, or institutions of higher education for the purpose of developing and establishing recycling projects.

Such recycling projects may include—

(1) a system for accepting, on an unconditional gift basis, assistive technology devices, including a process for valuing the devices and evaluating their use and potential;

(2) a system for storing and caring for such devices;

(3) an information system (including computer databases) by which local educational agencies, rehabilitation entities, local community-based organizations, independent living centers, and other entities, would be informed, on a periodic and timely basis, about the availability and nature of the devices currently held; and

(4) a system that makes such devices available to consumers and the entities listed in paragraph (3), and provides for tracking each device throughout the useful life of the device.

With respect to activities funded under this section, an agency, entity, or institution may utilize a single service provider or may establish a system of service providers.

If an agency, entity, or institution uses multiple providers, the agency, entity, or institution shall assure that—

(A) all consumers within a State will receive equal access to services, regardless of the geographic location or socioeconomic status of the consumers; and

(B) all activities of the providers will be coordinated and monitored by the agency, entity, or institution.

Nothing in this section shall affect the provision of services or devices pursuant to title I of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 720 et seq.) or part B of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1411 et seq.).

Public agencies, private entities, or institutions of higher education that have established recycling programs prior to receiving assistance under this section may use funds made available under this section to extend and strengthen such programs through grants, contracts, or agreements under this section.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §213, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 89.)

The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, referred to in subsec. (d), is Pub. L. 93–112, Sept. 26, 1973, 87 Stat. 355, as amended. Title I of the Act is classified generally to subchapter I (§720 et seq.) of chapter 16 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 701 of this title and Tables.

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (d), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended. Part B of the Act is classified generally to subchapter II (§1411 et seq.) of chapter 33 of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

A prior section 2243, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §213, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1060, prescribed contents of study conducted by Secretary of Labor concerning the national information and program referral network, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–218, §202.

The Secretary may make grants to individuals with disabilities to enable the individuals to establish or operate commercial or other enterprises that develop or market assistive technology devices or assistive technology services.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §214, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 90.)

A prior section 2244, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §214, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1062, prescribed timetable for study conducted by Secretary of Labor concerning the national information and program referral network, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–218, §202.

The Secretary may make grants to commercial or other enterprises and institutions of higher education for the research and development of products of universal design. In awarding such grants, the Secretary shall give preference to enterprises that are owned or operated by individuals with disabilities.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §215, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 90.)

Persons and entities that carry out activities pursuant to this part shall—

(1) be held to the same consumer-responsive standards as the persons and entities carrying out programs under subchapter I of this chapter;

(2) make available to individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, advocates, and authorized representatives information concerning technology-related assistance in a form that will allow such individuals with disabilities to effectively use such information;

(3) in preparing such information for dissemination, consider the media-related needs of individuals with disabilities who have sensory and cognitive limitations and consider the use of auditory materials, including audio cassettes, visual materials, including video cassettes and video discs, and braille materials; and

(4) coordinate their efforts with the consumer-responsive comprehensive statewide program of technology-related assistance for individuals with disabilities in any State in which the activities are carried out.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §216, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 90.)

This part is referred to in section 2231 of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subchapter $10,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 1998.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §221, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 91.)

Prior sections 2251 to 2253 and 2261 were repealed by Pub. L. 103–218, title II, §202, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 87.

Section 2251, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §221, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1062; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §913(1), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4487, related to training programs for those in need of technologically-related assistance.

Section 2252, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §222, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1063; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §913(2), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4487, related to grants or contracts for technologically-related assistance public awareness projects.

Section 2253, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §223, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1063, related to establishment by Secretary of Labor of program priorities implementing technologically-related assistance.

Section 2261, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §231, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1063; Pub. L. 102–569, title IX, §913(3), Oct. 29, 1992, 106 Stat. 4487, which comprised part D of this subchapter, authorized demonstration and innovation projects relating to technology-related assistance.

Section 2271, Pub. L. 100–407, title II, §241, Aug. 19, 1988, 102 Stat. 1064, which comprised part E of this subchapter, authorized appropriations to carry out this subchapter, prior to repeal by Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §366, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 3975, effective as if included in Pub. L. 103–218.

The Secretary shall award grants to States to pay for the Federal share of the cost of the establishment and administration of, or the expansion and administration of, alternative financing mechanisms (referred to individually in this subchapter as an “alternative financing mechanism”) to allow individuals with disabilities and their family members, guardians, and authorized representatives to purchase assistive technology devices and assistive technology services.

The alternative financing mechanisms may include—

(1) a low-interest loan fund;

(2) a revolving fund;

(3) a loan insurance program;

(4) a partnership with private entities for the purchase, lease, or other acquisition of assistive technology devices or the provision of assistive technology services; and

(5) other alternative financing mechanisms that meet the requirements of this chapter and are approved by the Secretary.

Nothing in this section shall be construed as affecting the authority of a State to establish alternative financing mechanisms under subchapter I of this chapter.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §301, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 91.)

This section is referred to in sections 2282, 2283, 2284, 2285, 2286, 2287 of this title.

States that receive or have received grants under section 2212 or 2213 of this title shall be eligible to compete for grants under section 2281 of this title.

The Secretary shall make grants under section 2281 of this title under such conditions as the Secretary shall, by regulation, determine, except that—

(1) a State may receive only 1 grant under section 2281 of this title and may only receive such a grant for 1 year under this subchapter;

(2) a State that desires to receive a grant under section 2281 of this title shall submit an application to the Secretary, at such time and in such manner as the Secretary may require, containing—

(A) an assurance that the State will provide at least 50 percent of the cost described in section 2281(a) of this title, as set forth in section 2284 of this title, for the purpose of supporting the alternative financing mechanisms that are covered by the grant;

(B) an assurance that an alternative financing mechanism will continue on a permanent basis; and

(C) a description of the degree to which the alternative financing mechanisms to be funded under section 2281 of this title will expand and emphasize consumer choice and control;

(3) a State that receives a grant under section 2281 of this title—

(A) shall enter into a contract, with a community-based organization (or a consortia of such organizations) that has individuals with disabilities involved at all organizational levels, for the administration of the alternative financing mechanisms that are supported under section 2281 of this title; and

(B) shall require that such community-based organization enter into a contract, for the purpose of expanding opportunities under section 2281 of this title and facilitating the administration of the alternative financing mechanisms, with—

(i) commercial lending institutions or organizations; or

(ii) State financing agencies; and

(4) a contract between a State that receives a grant under section 2281 of this title and a community-based organization described in paragraph (3)—

(A) shall include a provision regarding the administration of the Federal and the non-Federal shares in a manner consistent with the provisions of this subchapter; and

(B) shall include any provision required by the Secretary dealing with oversight and evaluation as may be necessary to protect the financial interests of the United States.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §302, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 92.)

This section is referred to in sections 2284, 2285 of this title.

A State that receives a grant under section 2281 of this title, together with any community-based organization that enters into a contract with the State to administer an alternative financing mechanism that is supported under section 2281 of this title, shall develop and submit to the Secretary, pursuant to a timeline that the Secretary may establish or, if the Secretary does not establish a timeline, within the 12-month period beginning on the date that the State receives the grant, the following policies or procedures for administration of the mechanism:

(1) A procedure to review and process in a timely fashion requests for financial assistance for both immediate and potential technology needs, including consideration of methods to reduce paperwork and duplication of effort, particularly relating to need, eligibility, and determination of the specific device or service to be provided.

(2) A policy and procedure to assure that access to the alternative financing mechanism shall be given to consumers regardless of type of disability, age, location of residence in the State, or type of assistive technology device or assistive technology service requested and shall be made available to applicants of all income levels.

(3) A procedure to assure consumer-controlled oversight.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §303, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 93.)

The Federal share of the costs described in section 2281(a) of this title shall be not more than 50 percent.

A State that desires to receive a grant under section 2281 of this title shall include in the application submitted under section 2282 of this title assurances that the State will meet the following requirements regarding funds supporting an alternative funding mechanism assisted under section 2281 of this title:

(1) The State shall make available the funds necessary to provide the non-Federal share of the costs described in section 2281(a) of this title, in cash, from State, local, or private sources.

(2) Funds that support an alternative financing mechanism assisted under section 2281 of this title—

(A) shall be used to supplement and not supplant other Federal, State, and local public funds expended to provide public funding options; and

(B) may only be distributed through the entity carrying out the alternative financing mechanism as a payer of last resort for assistance that is not available in a reasonable or timely fashion from any other Federal, State, or local source.

(3) All funds that support an alternative financing mechanism assisted under section 2281 of this title, including funds repaid during the life of the mechanism, shall be placed in a permanent separate account and identified and accounted for separately from any other fund. Funds within this account may be invested in low-risk securities in which a regulated insurance company may invest under the law of the State for which the grant is provided and shall be administered with the same judgment and care that a person of prudence, discretion, and intelligence would exercise in the management of the financial affairs of such person.

(4) Funds comprised of the principal and interest from an account described in paragraph (3) shall be available to support an alternative financing mechanism assisted under section 2281 of this title. Any interest or investment income that accrues on such funds after such funds have been placed under the control of the entity administering the mechanism, but before such funds are distributed for purposes of supporting the mechanism, shall be the property of the entity administering the mechanism and shall not be taken into account by any officer or employee of the Federal Government for any purpose.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §304, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 93.)

This section is referred to in section 2282 of this title.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), a grant under section 2281 of this title shall be for an amount that is not more than $500,000.

Such a grant may be increased by any additional funds made available under subsection (b) of this section.

If funds appropriated under section 2288 of this title for a fiscal year exceed the amount necessary to fund the activities described in acceptable applications submitted under section 2282 of this title for such year, the Secretary shall make such excess amount available, on a competitive basis, to States receiving grants under section 2281 of this title for such year. A State that desires to receive additional funds under this subsection shall amend and resubmit to the Secretary the application submitted under section 2282 of this title. Such amended application shall contain an assurance that the State will provide an additional amount for the purpose of supporting the alternative financing mechanisms covered by the grant that is not less than the amount of any additional funds paid to the State by the Secretary under this subsection.

If funds appropriated under section 2288 of this title for a fiscal year are not sufficient to fund each of the activities described in the acceptable applications for such year, a State whose application was approved as acceptable for such year but that did not receive a grant under section 2281 of this title, may update such application for the succeeding fiscal year. Priority shall be given in such succeeding fiscal year to such updated applications, if acceptable.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §305, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 94.)

The Secretary shall provide information and technical assistance to States under this subchapter, and the information and technical assistance shall include—

(1) assisting States in the preparation of applications for grants under section 2281 of this title;

(2) assisting States that receive such grants in developing and implementing alternative financing mechanisms; and

(3) providing any other information and technical assistance to assist States in accomplishing the objectives of this subchapter.

The Secretary shall provide the information and technical assistance described in subsection (a) of this section through grants, contracts, or cooperative agreements with public or private agencies and organizations, including institutions of higher education, with documented experience, expertise, and capacity to assist States in the development and implementation of the alternative financing mechanisms described in section 2281 of this title.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §306, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 94.)

This section is referred to in section 2288 of this title.

Not later than December 31 of each year, the Secretary shall submit a report to the Congress stating whether each State program to provide alternative financing mechanisms that was supported under section 2281 of this title during the year is making significant progress in achieving the objectives of this subchapter.

The report shall include information on—

(1) the number of applications for grants under section 2281 of this title that were received by the Secretary;

(2) the number of grants made and the amounts of such grants;

(3) the ratio of the amount of funds provided by each State for a State program to provide alternative financing mechanisms to the amount of Federal funds provided for such program;

(4) the type of program to provide alternative financing mechanisms that was adopted in each State and the community-based organization (or consortia of such organizations) with which each State has entered into a contract; and

(5) the amount of assistance given to consumers (who shall be classified by age, type of disability, type of assistive technology device or assistive technology service received, geographic distribution within the State, gender, and whether the consumers are part of an underrepresented population or a rural population).

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §307, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 95.)

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this subchapter $8,000,000 for fiscal year 1994, and such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 1998.

Amounts appropriated under subsection (a) of this section shall remain available for obligation for the fiscal year immediately following the fiscal year for which such amounts were appropriated.

Of the amounts appropriated under subsection (a) of this section, the Secretary shall reserve $250,000 for the purpose of providing information and technical assistance to States under section 2286 of this title.

(Pub. L. 100–407, title III, §308, as added Pub. L. 103–218, title III, §301, Mar. 9, 1994, 108 Stat. 95.)

This section is referred to in section 2285 of this title.


The Congress finds that—

(1) the Nation has a vested interest in building a quality and productive workforce that will enable the United States to compete effectively in the global marketplace;

(2) two in every three new entrants to the workforce during the 1990's will be women, and such women need appropriate basic and occupational skills to fill jobs requiring much higher skill levels than the jobs of today;

(3) there are approximately 15,600,000 displaced homemakers in the United States, the majority of whom are women not in the labor force, who live in poverty and who require educational, vocational, training and other services to obtain financial independence and economic security; and

(4) Federal, State, and local programs addressing the training and employment needs of displaced homemakers have been fragmented and insufficient to serve displaced homemakers effectively.

It is the purpose of this chapter to provide assistance to States to provide coordination and referral services, support service assistance, and program and technical assistance to displaced homemakers and displaced homemaker service providers. Such assistance will enable public and private entities to better meet the needs of displaced homemakers and will expand the employment and self-sufficiency options of displaced homemakers.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §2, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2751.)

Section 1 of Pub. L. 101–554 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Displaced Homemakers Self-Sufficiency Assistance Act’.”

As used in this chapter:

(1) The term “adult population” includes individuals aged 22 through 64.

(2) The term “community-based organization” has the same meaning given that term in section 1503 of this title.

(3) The term “displaced homemaker” means an individual who has been providing unpaid services to family members in the home and who—

(A) has been dependent either—

(i) on public assistance and whose youngest child is within 2 years of losing eligibility under part A of title IV of the Social Security Act [42 U.S.C. 601 et seq.], or

(ii) on the income of another family member but is no longer supported by that income, and

(B) is unemployed or underemployed and is experiencing difficulty in obtaining or upgrading employment.

(4) The term “eligible service provider” means—

(A) a community-based organization;

(B) a local educational agency (as such term is defined in section 1503 of this title);

(C) a postsecondary school (as such term is defined in such section);

(D) an institution of higher education (as such term is defined in such section);

(E) an area vocational education school (as such term is defined in such section); or

(F) other entities designated by the Governor that have the demonstrated ability to meet the needs of displaced homemakers.

(5) The term “eligible statewide public agency or statewide nonprofit organization” means agencies and organizations with demonstrated experience administering programs that serve displaced homemakers.

(6) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(7) The term “State” includes any of the several States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands.

(8) The term “supportive services assistance” means assistance which is necessary to enable an individual eligible for services under this chapter to participate in programs funded under this chapter. Such services may include transportation, health care, special services and materials for the handicapped, child care, adult dependent care, meals, temporary shelter, financial counseling and other reasonable expenses required for participation in the program and may be provided in-kind or through cash assistance.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §3, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2751.)

The Social Security Act, referred to in par. (3)(A)(i), is act Aug. 14, 1935, ch. 531, 49 Stat. 620, as amended. Part A of title IV of the Act is classified generally to part A (§601 et seq.) of subchapter IV of chapter 7 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1305 of Title 42 and Tables.

Except as provided in subsections (b) and (c) of this section, for any fiscal year for which the appropriation for this chapter is less than $25,000,000, the Secretary shall make the funds available as grants to eligible State agencies and statewide nonprofit organizations on a competitive award basis.

Except as provided in subsection (c) of this section, for any fiscal year for which the appropriation for this chapter equals or exceeds $25,000,000, and for any fiscal year thereafter the Secretary shall use the available funds to make grants to States from allocations under section 2306 of this title.

The Secretary shall reserve such amounts as are necessary, not to exceed 5 percent of the funds appropriated pursuant to this chapter, for training and technical assistance under section 2313(b) of this title, and for administration and evaluation of the programs funded under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §4, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2752.)

This section is referred to in sections 2304, 2305, 2306, 2307, 2308, 2309, 2310, 2312 of this title.

Each eligible statewide public agency or statewide nonprofit organization desiring to receive a competitive grant under section 2303(a) of this title shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require. Each such application shall contain assurances that the State Job Training Coordinating Council and the Governor have had an opportunity to review and comment on the application. Each applicant shall include the comments received by the applicant pursuant to such review.

In awarding grants under section 2303(a) of this title, the Secretary shall give priority to applications from statewide public agencies and statewide nonprofit organizations which—

(1) demonstrate that employment and training related services will be provided to displaced homemakers who are economically disadvantaged;

(2) provide access to a comprehensive referral system so that participants will be directed to appropriate services based on their assessed needs;

(3) demonstrate that employment and training related funds and services to be provided will be coordinated with other Federal and non-Federal programs providing education, training, or other human services;

(4) demonstrate the ability to provide appropriate transition for participants into other related programs such as adult basic education, remedial education, vocational education, and the Job Training Partnership Act [29 U.S.C. 1501 et seq.]; and

(5) demonstrate experience in providing services to displaced homemakers.

The Secretary shall not award more than 1 competitive grant per State. The competition for such grants shall be conducted annually, except that when a grantee has performed satisfactorily under the terms of an existing grant agreement and the immediately preceding grant agreement, the Secretary may waive the requirement for such competition upon receipt from the grantee of a satisfactory program plan for the succeeding grant period.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §5, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2753.)

The Job Training Partnership Act, referred to in subsec. (b)(4), is Pub. L. 97–300, Oct. 13, 1982, 96 Stat. 1322, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 19 (§1501 et seq.) of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 1501 of this title and Tables.

This section is referred to in section 2306 of this title.

Funds awarded under section 2303(a) of this title may be used for any purpose described in section 2309 of this title and for statewide model and demonstration projects that provide special services for rural displaced homemakers, minority displaced homemakers, women age 40 and older, and for nontraditional training or self-employment training.

Each eligible service provider receiving assistance under this chapter may use no more than 20 percent of the funds awarded to such service provider for administrative costs.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §6, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2753.)

Except as provided in paragraph (2), financial assistance to States under section 2303(b) of this title shall be allotted based on the ratio of the adult population of the State to the total adult population of the United States.

No State shall receive an allotment for any fiscal year described in section 2303(b) of this title that is less than 0.5 percent of the total funds appropriated for such fiscal year.

(A) All allotments and allocations under this chapter shall be based on the latest available data and estimates satisfactory to the Secretary.

(B) Whenever the Secretary allots and allocates funds required to be allotted or allocated by formula or otherwise under this chapter, the Secretary shall publish in a timely fashion in the Federal Register the proposed amount to be distributed to each recipient.

(C) All funds required to be distributed by formula under this chapter shall be allotted within 45 days after the enactment of the appropriations therefor.

(D) All funds required to be distributed through competitive grants under section 2304 of this title shall be allotted within 30 days after the completion of the competition and the approval of grants.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), a State is entitled to receive its full allocation of funds under section 2303(b) of this title for any fiscal year if the Secretary finds that the aggregate expenditures of public funds within the State with respect to the provision of services for displaced homemakers for the preceding fiscal year was not less than 90 percent of such aggregate expenditures of public funds for the fiscal year preceding the first fiscal year for which an allocation of funds is made under section 2303(b) of this title.

The Secretary shall reduce the amount of the allocation of funds under section 2303(b) of this title in any fiscal year in the exact proportion to which the State fails to meet the requirements of paragraph (1) by falling below 90 percent of the aggregate expenditures of public funds.

The Secretary may waive, for any fiscal year, the requirements of this subsection if the Secretary determines that such a waiver would be equitable due to exceptional or uncontrollable circumstances such as a natural disaster or a precipitous and unforeseen decline in the financial resources of the State.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §7, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2753.)

This section is referred to in section 2303 of this title.

In order to receive funds under section 2303(b) of this title, the Governor of each State shall develop and submit to the Secretary for review and approval an annual State plan, describing the programs, assessment, and counseling activities, coordination and referral activities, and services for displaced homemakers to be assisted with funds provided. Such plan shall be submitted at such time and in such form as the Secretary shall require by regulation.

Each State plan submitted under subsection (a) of this section shall—

(1) contain assurances that funds provided under this chapter will be used to supplement and not supplant Federal, State, and local public funds expended to provide services for displaced homemakers;

(2) contain assurances that displaced homemakers with the greatest financial need will be given priority for services under this chapter;

(3) contain assurances that displaced homemakers 40 years of age or older and minority displaced homemakers will be given special consideration for services under this chapter;

(4) provide a description of the State's administration of the program funded under this chapter;

(5) demonstrate that funds and services, including supportive services, under this chapter will be coordinated with other existing Federal and non-Federal programs providing education, training, or other human services; and

(6) contain assurances that the State Job Training Coordinating Council and any significant State organization representing displaced homemakers have had the opportunity to review and comment on the State plan, and include such comments when it is submitted for approval.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §8, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2754.)

The Governor of each State receiving an allotment under section 2303(b) of this title shall designate either—

(1) the existing State displaced homemaker unit, or

(2) the State unit administering displaced homemaker/single parent programs as authorized by the Carl Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act [20 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.],

as the administrative entity for programs funded under this chapter.

Each State administrative entity for displaced homemaker services in a State receiving financial assistance under section 2303(b) of this title shall—

(1) make appropriate services available to displaced homemakers through the use of eligible service providers;

(2) develop an annual plan for the use of all funds available under this chapter for displaced homemaker programs, manage and coordinate the distribution of these funds, and monitor the use of funds distributed to eligible service providers;

(3) set forth the criteria to be used in approving applications from eligible service providers;

(4) provide appropriate pre-service and in-service training, technical assistance, and advice to individuals providing services to displaced homemakers; and

(5) gather, analyze, and disseminate data on the adequacy and effectiveness of the State in meeting the training and employment needs of displaced homemakers.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §9, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2755.)

The Carl Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, referred to in subsec. (a)(2), probably means the Carl D. Perkins Vocational and Applied Technology Education Act, which is Pub. L. 88–210, Dec. 18, 1963, 77 Stat. 403, as amended, and which is classified generally to chapter 44 (§2301 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2301 of Title 20 and Tables.

This section is referred to in section 2310 of this title.

Funds allocated to States pursuant to section 2303(b) of this title shall be used to provide services to displaced homemakers, including (but not limited to) the following: referral services, supportive service assistance, career counseling, assessment, testing and evaluation, pre-employment services, basic skills, literacy and bilingual training, recruitment and outreach, job development and placement, follow-up services and life skills development.

Funds provided under this chapter shall be used to supplement and not to supplant Federal, State, and local public funds expended to provide services to displaced homemakers.

Not more than 5 percent of the funds made available to any eligible service provider for any fiscal year may be used to provide health care, meals, and temporary shelter.

Funds used under this chapter to provide supportive services shall not be used to duplicate services provided by any other public or private source that are available to participants without cost.

Each eligible service provider receiving assistance under this chapter may use no more than 20 percent of the funds awarded to such service provider for administrative costs.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §10, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2755.)

This section is referred to in section 2305 of this title.

Subject to subsection (e) 1 of this section, from amounts allotted to each State pursuant to section 2303(b) of this title, the designated administrative entity of each State shall make grants to eligible service providers to provide education, training related, and supportive services to displaced homemakers.

The administrative entity of each State receiving assistance under this chapter shall award grants to eligible service providers only on a competitive basis. The competition for such grants shall be conducted annually, except that when a grantee has performed satisfactorily under the terms of an existing grant agreement and the immediately preceding grant agreement, the administrative entity may waive the requirement for such competition upon receipt from the grantee of a satisfactory program plan for the succeeding grant period.

Each service provider receiving a grant shall provide assurances that the services offered under this chapter are of sufficient size, scope, and quality to reasonably meet the education and training related needs of the displaced homemakers being served.

The Governor of each State shall reserve no more than 5 percent of funds allotted under section 2303(b) of this title for the costs of State administration pursuant to section 2308 of this title.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §11, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2756.)

1 So in original. No subsec. (e) has been enacted.

The designated administrative entity of each State receiving assistance shall select eligible service providers that demonstrate the ability to effectively deliver training, education, and supportive services to displaced homemakers.

Each State receiving financial assistance under this chapter shall give priority in awarding grants to eligible service providers which have experience in providing services to displaced homemakers.

Community-based organizations shall be given the opportunity to compete on an equitable basis with other eligible service providers for grants under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §12, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2756.)

From amounts available under section 2303(c) of this title, the Secretary shall implement a uniform data collection system to collect information from the States. The information to be collected shall include—

(1) the number of displaced homemakers served,

(2) the race, age, and sex of displaced homemakers,

(3) the number of dependents of displaced homemakers,

(4) the amount of income of displaced homemakers,

(5) the range of services identified during the assessment process as necessary for displaced homemakers, and

(6) the services received by displaced homemakers and appropriate outcomes, including type of training and education received, and type of job and wage-at-placement for displaced homemakers placed.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §13, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2756.)

1 So in original. No subsec. (b) has been enacted.

The Secretary shall take appropriate action to establish administrative procedures for the selection, administration, monitoring, and evaluation of displaced homemaker programs authorized under this chapter.

The Secretary may provide, where appropriate, through grants or contracts, training and technical assistance to statewide public agencies or statewide nonprofit organizations serving displaced homemakers.

The Secretary shall biennially report to the Congress on the funds and services provided to displaced homemakers and the results of any evaluations under this chapter.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §14, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2757.)

This section is referred to in section 2303 of this title.

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this chapter $35,000,000 for fiscal year 1991 and such sums as may be necessary for each succeeding fiscal year. Funds appropriated pursuant to this section are authorized to remain available for two fiscal years succeeding the fiscal year for which appropriated.

(Pub. L. 101–554, §15, Nov. 15, 1990, 104 Stat. 2757.)


It is the purpose of this chapter to address the problems created by the simultaneous convergence of broad economic, social, cultural, political, and technological changes in the workplace through a national center administered by the Department of Labor that will join together workplace experts from America's best institutions of higher education with experts from the public and private sectors to conduct research, share information, and propose remedies.

(Pub. L. 102–325, title XV, §1511, July 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 831.)

There is authorized to be established the National Center for the Workplace (hereafter in this chapter referred to as the “Center”) through competitive grant or contract between the Secretary of Labor and an eligible recipient.

In order to receive the grant described in paragraph (1) an eligible entity shall provide matching funds from non-Federal sources equal to 25 percent of the funds received pursuant to such grant.

An eligible recipient shall be a consortium of institutions of higher education in the United States. The consortium shall represent a diversity of views on and an expertise in the field of employment policy, and shall be represented and coordinated by a host institution of higher education that meets all of the following criteria:

(1) Broad collective knowledge of and demonstrable experience in the wide range of employment and workplace issues.

(2) A faculty that, collectively, demonstrates a nonpartisan research and policy perspective joining the several relevant workplace disciplines (labor economics, industrial relations, collective bargaining, human resource management, sociology, psychology, and law) in a multidisciplinary approach to workplace issues.

(3) Established credibility and working relationships with employers, unions, and government agencies on a national scale, and established means of providing education and technical assistance to each of the above groups that include publications, state-of-the-art electronic and video technology, and distinguished extension/outreach programs operating on a national and international level.

The Center shall annually report to the Congress, the Secretary of Education, and the Secretary of Labor on the activities of the Center.

(Pub. L. 102–325, title XV, §1512, July 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 831.)

This section is referred to in section 2404 of this title.

Payments made under this chapter may be used to establish and operate the Center, to bring together major independent researchers from the Center's member-institutions focused on the most significant workplace problems with the aim of analysis and synthesis of policy implications and dissemination of findings, and to support the following activities:

(1) The coordination and funding of research activities of the Center's member-institutions for collaborative collection and evaluation of data on changes and trends in the workplace and in the labor force, on established and emerging public policy issues, on the economic and occupational structures, and on work organizations and employment conditions.

(2) The analysis of the public policy implications of social and demographic changes in the United States as they relate to the workplace.

(3) The conduct of seminars for Federal and State policymakers on policy implications of the Center's findings. Such seminars shall be held not more frequently than once each year. In addition, the Center shall utilize electronic technology, such as computer networks and video conferencing, to convey the cumulative value of the Center's activities from year to year and to foster continuous exchange of ideas and information.

(4) The conduct of a National Conference on employment policy not more frequently than once each year for the leaders of business and organized labor in the United States designed to convey the cumulative value of the Center's activities and to foster an exchange of ideas and information.

(5) The nonpartisan evaluation of the economic and social implications of national and international workplace and employment issues.

(6) The provision of ready access to the Center's collective expertise for policy officials in the Federal and State governments and representatives of private and public sector organizations through meetings, publications, special reports, video conferences, electronic mail and computer networks, and other means to share up-to-date information on workplace and employment issues, practices, and innovations, the most promising options, and guidance in management of the change process.

(7) The development of programs, curricula, and instructional materials for colleges, universities, and other educational institutions designed to impart the knowledge and skills required to promote innovations in the design of work and employment conditions that enhance organizational performance and meet worker needs.

(8) The development and administration of a national repository of information on key workplace issues that can be readily accessed by the public and private sector.

Grant funds awarded under this chapter 1 may also be used to provide graduate assistantships and fellowships at the Center to encourage graduate study of the field of employment policy and to encourage graduate research in areas that are seen as critical to national competitiveness.

(Pub. L. 102–325, title XV, §1513, July 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 832.)

This chapter, referred to in subsec. (b), was in the original “this title”, meaning title XV of Pub. L. 102–325, which has been translated as reading this part to reflect the probable intent of Congress.

1 See References in Text note below.

The Center is authorized to receive money and other property donated, bequeathed, or devised to the Center with or without a condition of restriction, for the purpose of furthering the activities of the Center. All funds or property given, devised, or bequeathed shall be retained in a separate account, and an accounting of those funds and property shall be included in the annual report submitted pursuant to section 2402(c) of this title.

(Pub. L. 102–325, title XV, §1514, July 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 833.)

There are authorized to be appropriated $2,500,000 for fiscal year 1993 and such sums as may be necessary for each of the 4 succeeding fiscal years to carry out this chapter.

Funds appropriated pursuant to the authority of subsection (a) of this section shall remain available until expended.

(Pub. L. 102–325, title XV, §1515, July 23, 1992, 106 Stat. 833.)


The Congress finds that—

(1) American businesses now and for the remainder of the 20th century will face a dramatically different labor market than the one to which they have become accustomed;

(2) two in every three new entrants to the work force will be women, and to meet labor needs such women must work in all occupational areas including in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(3) women face significant barriers to their full and effective participation in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(4) the business community must be prepared to address the barriers that women have to such jobs, in order to successfully integrate them into the work force; and

(5) few resources are available to employers and unions who need assistance in recruiting, training, and retaining women in apprenticeable occupations and other nontraditional occupations.

It is the purpose of this chapter to provide technical assistance to employers and labor unions to encourage employment of women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations. Such assistance will enable business to meet the challenge of Workforce 2000 by preparing employers to successfully recruit, train, and retain women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations and will expand the employment and self-sufficiency options of women. This purpose will be achieved by—

(1) promoting the program to employers and labor unions to inform them of the availability of technical assistance which will assist them in preparing the workplace to employ women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(2) providing grants to community-based organizations to deliver technical assistance to employers and labor unions to prepare them to recruit, train, and employ women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(3) authorizing the Department of Labor to serve as a liaison between employers, labor, and the community-based organizations providing technical assistance, through its national office and its regional administrators; and

(4) conducting a comprehensive study to examine the barriers to the participation of women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations and to develop recommendations for the workplace to eliminate such barriers.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §2, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3465.)

Section 1 of Pub. L. 102–530 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter] shall be cited as the ‘Women in Apprenticeship and Nontraditional Occupations Act’.”

With funds available to the Secretary of Labor to carry out the operations of the Department of Labor in fiscal year 1994 and subsequent fiscal years, the Secretary shall carry out an outreach program to inform employers of technical assistance available under section 2503(a) of this title to assist employers to prepare the workplace to employ women in apprenticeable occupations and other nontraditional occupations.

(1) Under such program the Secretary shall provide outreach to employers through, but not limited to, the private industry councils in each service delivery area.

(2) The Secretary shall provide outreach to labor unions through, but not limited to, the building trade councils, joint apprenticeable occupations councils, and individual labor unions.

The Secretary shall give priority to providing outreach to employers located in areas that have nontraditional employment and training programs specifically targeted to women.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §3, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3466.)

With funds appropriated to carry out this section, the Secretary shall make grants to community-based organizations to provide technical assistance to employers and labor unions selected under subsection (b) of this section. Such technical assistance may include—

(1) developing outreach and orientation sessions to recruit women into the employers’ apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(2) developing preapprenticeable occupations or nontraditional skills training to prepare women for apprenticeable occupations or nontraditional occupations;

(3) providing ongoing orientations for employers, unions, and workers on creating a successful environment for women in apprenticeable occupations or nontraditional occupations;

(4) setting up support groups and facilitating networks for women in nontraditional occupations on or off the job site to improve their retention;

(5) setting up a local computerized data base referral system to maintain a current list of tradeswomen who are available for work;

(6) serving as a liaison between tradeswomen and employers and tradeswomen and labor unions to address workplace issues related to gender; and

(7) conducting exit interviews with tradeswomen to evaluate their on-the-job experience and to assess the effectiveness of the program.

The Secretary shall select a total of 50 employers or labor unions to receive technical assistance provided with grants made under subsection (a) of this section.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §4, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3466.)

This section is referred to in sections 2502, 2504, 2505, 2506, 2509 of this title.

Each community-based organization that desires to receive a grant to provide technical assistance under section 2503(a) of this title to employers and labor unions shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner, and accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require.

In awarding grants under section 2503(a) of this title, the Secretary shall give priority to applications from community-based organizations that—

(1) demonstrate experience preparing women to gain employment in apprenticeable occupations or other nontraditional occupations;

(2) demonstrate experience working with the business community to prepare them to place women in apprenticeable occupations or other nontraditional occupations;

(3) have tradeswomen or women in nontraditional occupations as active members of the organization, as either employed staff or board members; and

(4) have experience delivering technical assistance.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §5, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3467.)

To be eligible to be selected under section 2503(b) of this title to receive technical assistance provided with grants made under section 2503(a) of this title, an employer or labor union shall submit an application to the Secretary at such time, in such manner and containing or accompanied by such information as the Secretary may reasonably require. At a minimum, the application should include—

(1) a description of the need for technical assistance;

(2) a description of the types of apprenticeable occupations or nontraditional occupations in which the employer or labor union would like to train or employ women;

(3) assurances that there are or will be suitable and appropriate positions available in the apprenticeable occupations program or in the nontraditional occupations being targeted; and

(4) commitments that reasonable efforts shall be made to place qualified women in apprenticeable occupations or nontraditional occupations.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §6, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3467.)

The Department of Labor shall serve as a liaison among employers, labor unions, and community-based organizations. The liaison role may include—

(1) coordination of employers, labor unions, and community-based organizations with respect to technical assistance provided under section 2503(a) of this title;

(2) conducting regular assessment meetings with representatives of employers, labor unions, and community-based organizations with respect to such technical assistance; and

(3) seeking the input of employers and labor unions with respect to strategies and recommendations for improving such technical assistance.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §7, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3467.)

With funds available to the Secretary to carry out the operations of the Department of Labor in fiscal years 1994 and 1995, the Secretary shall conduct a study of the participation of women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations. The study shall examine—

(1) the barriers to participation of women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(2) strategies for overcoming such barriers;

(3) the retention rates for women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(4) strategies for retaining women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations;

(5) the effectiveness of the technical assistance provided by the community-based organizations; and

(6) other relevant issues affecting the participation of women in apprenticeable occupations and nontraditional occupations.

Not later than 2 years after October 27, 1992, the Secretary shall submit to the Congress a report containing a summary of the results of the study described in subsection (a) of this section and such recommendations as the Secretary determines to be appropriate.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §8, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3467.)

For purposes of this chapter:

(1) The term “community-based organization” means a community-based organization as defined in section 1503(5) of this title, that has demonstrated experience administering programs that train women for apprenticeable occupations or other nontraditional occupations.

(2) The term “nontraditional occupation” means jobs in which women make up 25 percent or less of the total number of workers in that occupation.

(3) The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §9, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3468.)

There is authorized to be appropriated $1,000,000 to carry out section 2503 of this title.

(Pub. L. 102–530, §10, Oct. 27, 1992, 106 Stat. 3468.)





This chapter is referred to in title 3 sections 412, 415.

Congress finds that—

(1) the number of single-parent households and two-parent households in which the single parent or both parents work is increasing significantly;

(2) it is important for the development of children and the family unit that fathers and mothers be able to participate in early childrearing and the care of family members who have serious health conditions;

(3) the lack of employment policies to accommodate working parents can force individuals to choose between job security and parenting;

(4) there is inadequate job security for employees who have serious health conditions that prevent them from working for temporary periods;

(5) due to the nature of the roles of men and women in our society, the primary responsibility for family caretaking often falls on women, and such responsibility affects the working lives of women more than it affects the working lives of men; and

(6) employment standards that apply to one gender only have serious potential for encouraging employers to discriminate against employees and applicants for employment who are of that gender.

It is the purpose of this Act—

(1) to balance the demands of the workplace with the needs of families, to promote the stability and economic security of families, and to promote national interests in preserving family integrity;

(2) to entitle employees to take reasonable leave for medical reasons, for the birth or adoption of a child, and for the care of a child, spouse, or parent who has a serious health condition;

(3) to accomplish the purposes described in paragraphs (1) and (2) in a manner that accommodates the legitimate interests of employers;

(4) to accomplish the purposes described in paragraphs (1) and (2) in a manner that, consistent with the Equal Protection Clause of the Fourteenth Amendment, minimizes the potential for employment discrimination on the basis of sex by ensuring generally that leave is available for eligible medical reasons (including maternity-related disability) and for compelling family reasons, on a gender-neutral basis; and

(5) to promote the goal of equal employment opportunity for women and men, pursuant to such clause.

(Pub. L. 103–3, §2, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6.)

This Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 103–3, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6, known as the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, which enacted this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amended section 2105 of Title 5, and enacted provisions set out as notes below. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out below and Tables.

Section 405 title IV of Pub. L. 103–3 provided that:

“(a)

“(b)

“(1)

“(2)

“(A) the date of the termination of such agreement; or

“(B) the date that occurs 12 months after the date of the enactment of this Act.”

Section 1(a) of Pub. L. 103–3 provided that: “This Act [enacting this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amending section 2105 of Title 5, and enacting provisions set out above] may be cited as the ‘Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993’.”

The Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 is referred to in title 2 sections 1302, 1312, 1371, 1434; title 3 section 402; title 40 section 207b.

This subchapter is referred to in sections 2632, 2654 of this title; title 42 section 12631.

As used in this subchapter:

The terms “commerce” and “industry or activity affecting commerce” mean any activity, business, or industry in commerce or in which a labor dispute would hinder or obstruct commerce or the free flow of commerce, and include “commerce” and any “industry affecting commerce”, as defined in paragraphs (1) and (3) of section 142 of this title.

The term “eligible employee” means an employee who has been employed—

(i) for at least 12 months by the employer with respect to whom leave is requested under section 2612 of this title; and

(ii) for at least 1,250 hours of service with such employer during the previous 12-month period.

The term “eligible employee” does not include—

(i) any Federal officer or employee covered under subchapter V of chapter 63 of title 5; or

(ii) any employee of an employer who is employed at a worksite at which such employer employs less than 50 employees if the total number of employees employed by that employer within 75 miles of that worksite is less than 50.

For purposes of determining whether an employee meets the hours of service requirement specified in subparagraph (A)(ii), the legal standards established under section 207 of this title shall apply.

The terms “employ”, “employee”, and “State” have the same meanings given such terms in subsections (c), (e), and (g) of section 203 of this title.

The term “employer”—

(i) means any person engaged in commerce or in any industry or activity affecting commerce who employs 50 or more employees for each working day during each of 20 or more calendar workweeks in the current or preceding calendar year;

(ii) includes—

(I) any person who acts, directly or indirectly, in the interest of an employer to any of the employees of such employer; and

(II) any successor in interest of an employer;

(iii) includes any “public agency”, as defined in section 203(x) of this title; and

(iv) includes the General Accounting Office and the Library of Congress.

For purposes of subparagraph (A)(iii), a public agency shall be considered to be a person engaged in commerce or in an industry or activity affecting commerce.

The term “employment benefits” means all benefits provided or made available to employees by an employer, including group life insurance, health insurance, disability insurance, sick leave, annual leave, educational benefits, and pensions, regardless of whether such benefits are provided by a practice or written policy of an employer or through an “employee benefit plan”, as defined in section 1002(3) of this title.

The term “health care provider” means—

(A) a doctor of medicine or osteopathy who is authorized to practice medicine or surgery (as appropriate) by the State in which the doctor practices; or

(B) any other person determined by the Secretary to be capable of providing health care services.

The term “parent” means the biological parent of an employee or an individual who stood in loco parentis to an employee when the employee was a son or daughter.

The term “person” has the same meaning given such term in section 203(a) of this title.

The term “reduced leave schedule” means a leave schedule that reduces the usual number of hours per workweek, or hours per workday, of an employee.

The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

The term “serious health condition” means an illness, injury, impairment, or physical or mental condition that involves—

(A) inpatient care in a hospital, hospice, or residential medical care facility; or

(B) continuing treatment by a health care provider.

The term “son or daughter” means a biological, adopted, or foster child, a stepchild, a legal ward, or a child of a person standing in loco parentis, who is—

(A) under 18 years of age; or

(B) 18 years of age or older and incapable of self-care because of a mental or physical disability.

The term “spouse” means a husband or wife, as the case may be.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §101, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 7; Pub. L. 104–1, title II, §202(c)(1)(A), Jan. 23, 1995, 109 Stat. 9.)

1995—Par. (4)(A)(iv). Pub. L. 104–1 added cl. (iv).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–1 effective one year after transmission to Congress of the study under section 1371 of Title 2, The Congress, see section 1312(e)(2) of Title 2. The study required under section 1371 of Title 2, dated Dec. 31, 1996, was transmitted to Congress by the Board of Directors of the Office of Compliance on Dec. 30, 1996.

Subchapter effective 6 months after Feb. 5, 1993, except that, in the case of collective bargaining agreements in effect on that effective date, subchapter applicable on the earlier of (1) the date of termination of such agreement, or (2) the date that occurs 12 months after Feb. 5, 1993, see section 405(b) of Pub. L. 103–3, set out as a note under section 2601 of this title.

This section is referred to in title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412; title 42 section 12631.

Subject to section 2613 of this title, an eligible employee shall be entitled to a total of 12 workweeks of leave during any 12-month period for one or more of the following:

(A) Because of the birth of a son or daughter of the employee and in order to care for such son or daughter.

(B) Because of the placement of a son or daughter with the employee for adoption or foster care.

(C) In order to care for the spouse, or a son, daughter, or parent, of the employee, if such spouse, son, daughter, or parent has a serious health condition.

(D) Because of a serious health condition that makes the employee unable to perform the functions of the position of such employee.

The entitlement to leave under subparagraphs (A) and (B) of paragraph (1) for a birth or placement of a son or daughter shall expire at the end of the 12-month period beginning on the date of such birth or placement.

Leave under subparagraph (A) or (B) of subsection (a)(1) of this section shall not be taken by an employee intermittently or on a reduced leave schedule unless the employee and the employer of the employee agree otherwise. Subject to paragraph (2), subsection (e)(2) of this section, and section 2613(b)(5) of this title, leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of subsection (a)(1) of this section may be taken intermittently or on a reduced leave schedule when medically necessary. The taking of leave intermittently or on a reduced leave schedule pursuant to this paragraph shall not result in a reduction in the total amount of leave to which the employee is entitled under subsection (a) of this section beyond the amount of leave actually taken.

If an employee requests intermittent leave, or leave on a reduced leave schedule, under subparagraph (C) or (D) of subsection (a)(1) of this section, that is foreseeable based on planned medical treatment, the employer may require such employee to transfer temporarily to an available alternative position offered by the employer for which the employee is qualified and that—

(A) has equivalent pay and benefits; and

(B) better accommodates recurring periods of leave than the regular employment position of the employee.

Except as provided in subsection (d) of this section, leave granted under subsection (a) may consist of unpaid leave. Where an employee is otherwise exempt under regulations issued by the Secretary pursuant to section 213(a)(1) of this title, the compliance of an employer with this subchapter by providing unpaid leave shall not affect the exempt status of the employee under such section.

If an employer provides paid leave for fewer than 12 workweeks, the additional weeks of leave necessary to attain the 12 workweeks of leave required under this subchapter may be provided without compensation.

An eligible employee may elect, or an employer may require the employee, to substitute any of the accrued paid vacation leave, personal leave, or family leave of the employee for leave provided under subparagraph (A), (B), or (C) of subsection (a)(1) of this section for any part of the 12-week period of such leave under such subsection.

An eligible employee may elect, or an employer may require the employee, to substitute any of the accrued paid vacation leave, personal leave, or medical or sick leave of the employee for leave provided under subparagraph (C) or (D) of subsection (a)(1) of this section for any part of the 12-week period of such leave under such subsection, except that nothing in this subchapter shall require an employer to provide paid sick leave or paid medical leave in any situation in which such employer would not normally provide any such paid leave.

In any case in which the necessity for leave under subparagraph (A) or (B) of subsection (a)(1) of this section is foreseeable based on an expected birth or placement, the employee shall provide the employer with not less than 30 days’ notice, before the date the leave is to begin, of the employee's intention to take leave under such subparagraph, except that if the date of the birth or placement requires leave to begin in less than 30 days, the employee shall provide such notice as is practicable.

In any case in which the necessity for leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of subsection (a)(1) of this section is foreseeable based on planned medical treatment, the employee—

(A) shall make a reasonable effort to schedule the treatment so as not to disrupt unduly the operations of the employer, subject to the approval of the health care provider of the employee or the health care provider of the son, daughter, spouse, or parent of the employee, as appropriate; and

(B) shall provide the employer with not less than 30 days’ notice, before the date the leave is to begin, of the employee's intention to take leave under such subparagraph, except that if the date of the treatment requires leave to begin in less than 30 days, the employee shall provide such notice as is practicable.

In any case in which a husband and wife entitled to leave under subsection (a) of this section are employed by the same employer, the aggregate number of workweeks of leave to which both may be entitled may be limited to 12 workweeks during any 12-month period, if such leave is taken—

(1) under subparagraph (A) or (B) of subsection (a)(1) of this section; or

(2) to care for a sick parent under subparagraph (C) of such subsection.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §102, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 9.)

This section is referred to in sections 2611, 2613, 2614, 2618 of this title; title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412.

An employer may require that a request for leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title be supported by a certification issued by the health care provider of the eligible employee or of the son, daughter, spouse, or parent of the employee, as appropriate. The employee shall provide, in a timely manner, a copy of such certification to the employer.

Certification provided under subsection (a) of this section shall be sufficient if it states—

(1) the date on which the serious health condition commenced;

(2) the probable duration of the condition;

(3) the appropriate medical facts within the knowledge of the health care provider regarding the condition;

(4)(A) for purposes of leave under section 2612(a)(1)(C) of this title, a statement that the eligible employee is needed to care for the son, daughter, spouse, or parent and an estimate of the amount of time that such employee is needed to care for the son, daughter, spouse, or parent; and

(B) for purposes of leave under section 2612(a)(1)(D) of this title, a statement that the employee is unable to perform the functions of the position of the employee;

(5) in the case of certification for intermittent leave, or leave on a reduced leave schedule, for planned medical treatment, the dates on which such treatment is expected to be given and the duration of such treatment;

(6) in the case of certification for intermittent leave, or leave on a reduced leave schedule, under section 2612(a)(1)(D) of this title, a statement of the medical necessity for the intermittent leave or leave on a reduced leave schedule, and the expected duration of the intermittent leave or reduced leave schedule; and

(7) in the case of certification for intermittent leave, or leave on a reduced leave schedule, under section 2612(a)(1)(C) of this title, a statement that the employee's intermittent leave or leave on a reduced leave schedule is necessary for the care of the son, daughter, parent, or spouse who has a serious health condition, or will assist in their recovery, and the expected duration and schedule of the intermittent leave or reduced leave schedule.

In any case in which the employer has reason to doubt the validity of the certification provided under subsection (a) of this section for leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title, the employer may require, at the expense of the employer, that the eligible employee obtain the opinion of a second health care provider designated or approved by the employer concerning any information certified under subsection (b) of this section for such leave.

A health care provider designated or approved under paragraph (1) shall not be employed on a regular basis by the employer.

In any case in which the second opinion described in subsection (c) of this section differs from the opinion in the original certification provided under subsection (a) of this section, the employer may require, at the expense of the employer, that the employee obtain the opinion of a third health care provider designated or approved jointly by the employer and the employee concerning the information certified under subsection (b) of this section.

The opinion of the third health care provider concerning the information certified under subsection (b) of this section shall be considered to be final and shall be binding on the employer and the employee.

The employer may require that the eligible employee obtain subsequent recertifications on a reasonable basis.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §103, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 11.)

This section is referred to in section 2612 of this title; title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412.

Except as provided in subsection (b) of this section, any eligible employee who takes leave under section 2612 of this title for the intended purpose of the leave shall be entitled, on return from such leave—

(A) to be restored by the employer to the position of employment held by the employee when the leave commenced; or

(B) to be restored to an equivalent position with equivalent employment benefits, pay, and other terms and conditions of employment.

The taking of leave under section 2612 of this title shall not result in the loss of any employment benefit accrued prior to the date on which the leave commenced.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to entitle any restored employee to—

(A) the accrual of any seniority or employment benefits during any period of leave; or

(B) any right, benefit, or position of employment other than any right, benefit, or position to which the employee would have been entitled had the employee not taken the leave.

As a condition of restoration under paragraph (1) for an employee who has taken leave under section 2612(a)(1)(D) of this title, the employer may have a uniformly applied practice or policy that requires each such employee to receive certification from the health care provider of the employee that the employee is able to resume work, except that nothing in this paragraph shall supersede a valid State or local law or a collective bargaining agreement that governs the return to work of such employees.

Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to prohibit an employer from requiring an employee on leave under section 2612 of this title to report periodically to the employer on the status and intention of the employee to return to work.

An employer may deny restoration under subsection (a) of this section to any eligible employee described in paragraph (2) if—

(A) such denial is necessary to prevent substantial and grievous economic injury to the operations of the employer;

(B) the employer notifies the employee of the intent of the employer to deny restoration on such basis at the time the employer determines that such injury would occur; and

(C) in any case in which the leave has commenced, the employee elects not to return to employment after receiving such notice.

An eligible employee described in paragraph (1) is a salaried eligible employee who is among the highest paid 10 percent of the employees employed by the employer within 75 miles of the facility at which the employee is employed.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), during any period that an eligible employee takes leave under section 2612 of this title, the employer shall maintain coverage under any “group health plan” (as defined in section 5000(b)(1) of title 26) for the duration of such leave at the level and under the conditions coverage would have been provided if the employee had continued in employment continuously for the duration of such leave.

The employer may recover the premium that the employer paid for maintaining coverage for the employee under such group health plan during any period of unpaid leave under section 2612 of this title if—

(A) the employee fails to return from leave under section 2612 of this title after the period of leave to which the employee is entitled has expired; and

(B) the employee fails to return to work for a reason other than—

(i) the continuation, recurrence, or onset of a serious health condition that entitles the employee to leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title; or

(ii) other circumstances beyond the control of the employee.

An employer may require that a claim that an employee is unable to return to work because of the continuation, recurrence, or onset of the serious health condition described in paragraph (2)(B)(i) be supported by—

(i) a certification issued by the health care provider of the son, daughter, spouse, or parent of the employee, as appropriate, in the case of an employee unable to return to work because of a condition specified in section 2612(a)(1)(C) of this title; or

(ii) a certification issued by the health care provider of the eligible employee, in the case of an employee unable to return to work because of a condition specified in section 2612(a)(1)(D) of this title.

The employee shall provide, in a timely manner, a copy of such certification to the employer.

The certification described in subparagraph (A)(ii) shall be sufficient if the certification states that a serious health condition prevented the employee from being able to perform the functions of the position of the employee on the date that the leave of the employee expired.

The certification described in subparagraph (A)(i) shall be sufficient if the certification states that the employee is needed to care for the son, daughter, spouse, or parent who has a serious health condition on the date that the leave of the employee expired.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §104, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 12.)

This section is referred to in sections 2618, 2632 of this title; title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412.

It shall be unlawful for any employer to interfere with, restrain, or deny the exercise of or the attempt to exercise, any right provided under this subchapter.

It shall be unlawful for any employer to discharge or in any other manner discriminate against any individual for opposing any practice made unlawful by this subchapter.

It shall be unlawful for any person to discharge or in any other manner discriminate against any individual because such individual—

(1) has filed any charge, or has instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding, under or related to this subchapter;

(2) has given, or is about to give, any information in connection with any inquiry or proceeding relating to any right provided under this subchapter; or

(3) has testified, or is about to testify, in any inquiry or proceeding relating to any right provided under this subchapter.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §105, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 14.)

This section is referred to in section 2617 of this title; title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412.

To ensure compliance with the provisions of this subchapter, or any regulation or order issued under this subchapter, the Secretary shall have, subject to subsection (c) of this section, the investigative authority provided under section 211(a) of this title.

Any employer shall make, keep, and preserve records pertaining to compliance with this subchapter in accordance with section 211(c) of this title and in accordance with regulations issued by the Secretary.

The Secretary shall not under the authority of this section require any employer or any plan, fund, or program to submit to the Secretary any books or records more than once during any 12-month period, unless the Secretary has reasonable cause to believe there may exist a violation of this subchapter or any regulation or order issued pursuant to this subchapter, or is investigating a charge pursuant to section 2617(b) of this title.

For the purposes of any investigation provided for in this section, the Secretary shall have the subpoena authority provided for under section 209 of this title.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §106, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 15.)

Any employer who violates section 2615 of this title shall be liable to any eligible employee affected—

(A) for damages equal to—

(i) the amount of—

(I) any wages, salary, employment benefits, or other compensation denied or lost to such employee by reason of the violation; or

(II) in a case in which wages, salary, employment benefits, or other compensation have not been denied or lost to the employee, any actual monetary losses sustained by the employee as a direct result of the violation, such as the cost of providing care, up to a sum equal to 12 weeks of wages or salary for the employee;

(ii) the interest on the amount described in clause (i) calculated at the prevailing rate; and

(iii) an additional amount as liquidated damages equal to the sum of the amount described in clause (i) and the interest described in clause (ii), except that if an employer who has violated section 2615 of this title proves to the satisfaction of the court that the act or omission which violated section 2615 of this title was in good faith and that the employer had reasonable grounds for believing that the act or omission was not a violation of section 2615 of this title, such court may, in the discretion of the court, reduce the amount of the liability to the amount and interest determined under clauses (i) and (ii), respectively; and

(B) for such equitable relief as may be appropriate, including employment, reinstatement, and promotion.

An action to recover the damages or equitable relief prescribed in paragraph (1) may be maintained against any employer (including a public agency) in any Federal or State court of competent jurisdiction by any one or more employees for and in behalf of—

(A) the employees; or

(B) the employees and other employees similarly situated.

The court in such an action shall, in addition to any judgment awarded to the plaintiff, allow a reasonable attorney's fee, reasonable expert witness fees, and other costs of the action to be paid by the defendant.

The right provided by paragraph (2) to bring an action by or on behalf of any employee shall terminate—

(A) on the filing of a complaint by the Secretary in an action under subsection (d) of this section in which restraint is sought of any further delay in the payment of the amount described in paragraph (1)(A) to such employee by an employer responsible under paragraph (1) for the payment; or

(B) on the filing of a complaint by the Secretary in an action under subsection (b) of this section in which a recovery is sought of the damages described in paragraph (1)(A) owing to an eligible employee by an employer liable under paragraph (1),

unless the action described in subparagraph (A) or (B) is dismissed without prejudice on motion of the Secretary.

The Secretary shall receive, investigate, and attempt to resolve complaints of violations of section 2615 of this title in the same manner that the Secretary receives, investigates, and attempts to resolve complaints of violations of sections 206 and 207 of this title.

The Secretary may bring an action in any court of competent jurisdiction to recover the damages described in subsection (a)(1)(A) of this section.

Any sums recovered by the Secretary pursuant to paragraph (2) shall be held in a special deposit account and shall be paid, on order of the Secretary, directly to each employee affected. Any such sums not paid to an employee because of inability to do so within a period of 3 years shall be deposited into the Treasury of the United States as miscellaneous receipts.

Except as provided in paragraph (2), an action may be brought under this section not later than 2 years after the date of the last event constituting the alleged violation for which the action is brought.

In the case of such action brought for a willful violation of section 2615 of this title, such action may be brought within 3 years of the date of the last event constituting the alleged violation for which such action is brought.

In determining when an action is commenced by the Secretary under this section for the purposes of this subsection, it shall be considered to be commenced on the date when the complaint is filed.

The district courts of the United States shall have jurisdiction, for cause shown, in an action brought by the Secretary—

(1) to restrain violations of section 2615 of this title, including the restraint of any withholding of payment of wages, salary, employment benefits, or other compensation, plus interest, found by the court to be due to eligible employees; or

(2) to award such other equitable relief as may be appropriate, including employment, reinstatement, and promotion.

The Solicitor of Labor may appear for and represent the Secretary on any litigation brought under this section.

In the case of the General Accounting Office and the Library of Congress, the authority of the Secretary of Labor under this subchapter shall be exercised respectively by the Comptroller General of the United States and the Librarian of Congress.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §107, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 15; Pub. L. 104–1, title II, §202(c)(1)(B), Jan. 23, 1995, 109 Stat. 9.)

1995—Subsec. (f). Pub. L. 104–1 added subsec. (f).

Amendment by Pub. L. 104–1 effective one year after transmission to Congress of the study under section 1371 of Title 2, The Congress, see section 1312(e)(2) of Title 2. The study required under section 1371 of Title 2, dated Dec. 31, 1996, was transmitted to Congress by the Board of Directors of the Office of Compliance on Dec. 30, 1996.

This section is referred to in sections 2616, 2618 of this title; title 2 section 1312; title 3 section 412.

Except as otherwise provided in this section, the rights (including the rights under section 2614 of this title, which shall extend throughout the period of leave of any employee under this section), remedies, and procedures under this subchapter shall apply to—

(A) any “local educational agency” (as defined in section 8801 of title 20) and an eligible employee of the agency; and

(B) any private elementary or secondary school and an eligible employee of the school.

For purposes of the application described in paragraph (1):

The term “eligible employee” means an eligible employee of an agency or school described in paragraph (1).

The term “employer” means an agency or school described in paragraph (1).

A local educational agency and a private elementary or secondary school shall not be in violation of the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (20 U.S.C. 1400 et seq.), section 794 of this title), or title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 2000d et seq.), solely as a result of an eligible employee of such agency or school exercising the rights of such employee under this subchapter.

Subject to paragraph (2), in any case in which an eligible employee employed principally in an instructional capacity by any such educational agency or school requests leave under subparagraph (C) or (D) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title that is foreseeable based on planned medical treatment and the employee would be on leave for greater than 20 percent of the total number of working days in the period during which the leave would extend, the agency or school may require that such employee elect either—

(A) to take leave for periods of a particular duration, not to exceed the duration of the planned medical treatment; or

(B) to transfer temporarily to an available alternative position offered by the employer for which the employee is qualified, and that—

(i) has equivalent pay and benefits; and

(ii) better accommodates recurring periods of leave than the regular employment position of the employee.

The elections described in subparagraphs (A) and (B) of paragraph (1) shall apply only with respect to an eligible employee who complies with section 2612(e)(2) of this title.

The following rules shall apply with respect to periods of leave near the conclusion of an academic term in the case of any eligible employee employed principally in an instructional capacity by any such educational agency or school:

If the eligible employee begins leave under section 2612 of this title more than 5 weeks prior to the end of the academic term, the agency or school may require the employee to continue taking leave until the end of such term, if—

(A) the leave is of at least 3 weeks duration; and

(B) the return to employment would occur during the 3-week period before the end of such term.

If the eligible employee begins leave under subparagraph (A), (B), or (C) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title during the period that commences 5 weeks prior to the end of the academic term, the agency or school may require the employee to continue taking leave until the end of such term, if—

(A) the leave is of greater than 2 weeks duration; and

(B) the return to employment would occur during the 2-week period before the end of such term.

If the eligible employee begins leave under subparagraph (A), (B), or (C) of section 2612(a)(1) of this title during the period that commences 3 weeks prior to the end of the academic term and the duration of the leave is greater than 5 working days, the agency or school may require the employee to continue to take leave until the end of such term.

For purposes of determinations under section 2614(a)(1)(B) of this title (relating to the restoration of an eligible employee to an equivalent position), in the case of a local educational agency or a private elementary or secondary school, such determination shall be made on the basis of established school board policies and practices, private school policies and practices, and collective bargaining agreements.

If a local educational agency or a private elementary or secondary school that has violated this subchapter proves to the satisfaction of the court that the agency, school, or department had reasonable grounds for believing that the underlying act or omission was not a violation of this subchapter, such court may, in the discretion of the court, reduce the amount of the liability provided for under section 2617(a)(1)(A) of this title to the amount and interest determined under clauses (i) and (ii), respectively, of such section.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §108, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 17; Pub. L. 103–382, title III, §394(e), Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4027.)

The Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, referred to in subsec. (b), is title VI of Pub. L. 91–230, Apr. 13, 1970, 84 Stat. 175, as amended, which is classified generally to chapter 33 (§1400 et seq.) of Title 20, Education. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see section 1400 of Title 20 and Tables.

The Civil Rights Act of 1964, referred to in subsec. (b), is Pub. L. 88–352, July 2, 1964, 78 Stat. 241, as amended. Title VI of the Act is classified generally to subchapter V (§2000d et seq.) of chapter 21 of Title 42, The Public Health and Welfare. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2000a of Title 42 and Tables.

1994—Subsec. (a)(1)(A). Pub. L. 103–382 substituted “section 8801 of title 20” for “section 2891(12) of title 20”.

This section is referred to in section 2632 of this title.

Each employer shall post and keep posted, in conspicuous places on the premises of the employer where notices to employees and applicants for employment are customarily posted, a notice, to be prepared or approved by the Secretary, setting forth excerpts from, or summaries of, the pertinent provisions of this subchapter and information pertaining to the filing of a charge.

Any employer that willfully violates this section may be assessed a civil money penalty not to exceed $100 for each separate offense.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title I, §109, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 19.)

There is established a commission to be known as the Commission on Leave (referred to in this subchapter as the “Commission”).

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §301, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 23.)

The Commission shall—

(1) conduct a comprehensive study of—

(A) existing and proposed mandatory and voluntary policies relating to family and temporary medical leave, including policies provided by employers not covered under this Act;

(B) the potential costs, benefits, and impact on productivity, job creation and business growth of such policies on employers and employees;

(C) possible differences in costs, benefits, and impact on productivity, job creation and business growth of such policies on employers based on business type and size;

(D) the impact of family and medical leave policies on the availability of employee benefits provided by employers, including employers not covered under this Act;

(E) alternate and equivalent State enforcement of subchapter I of this chapter with respect to employees described in section 2618(a) of this title;

(F) methods used by employers to reduce administrative costs of implementing family and medical leave policies;

(G) the ability of the employers to recover, under section 2614(c)(2) of this title, the premiums described in such section; and

(H) the impact on employers and employees of policies that provide temporary wage replacement during periods of family and medical leave.

(2) not later than 2 years after the date on which the Commission first meets, prepare and submit, to the appropriate Committees of Congress, a report concerning the subjects listed in paragraph (1).

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §302, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 23.)

This Act, referred to in par. (1)(A), (D), is Pub. L. 103–3, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6, known as the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, which enacted this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amended section 2105 of Title 5, and enacted provisions set out as notes under section 2601 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2601 of this title and Tables.

The Commission shall be composed of 12 voting members and 4 ex officio members to be appointed not later than 60 days after February 5, 1993, as follows:

One Senator shall be appointed by the Majority Leader of the Senate, and one Senator shall be appointed by the Minority Leader of the Senate.

One Member of the House of Representatives shall be appointed by the Speaker of the House of Representatives, and one Member of the House of Representatives shall be appointed by the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives.

Two members each shall be appointed by—

(I) the Speaker of the House of Representatives;

(II) the Majority Leader of the Senate;

(III) the Minority Leader of the House of Representatives; and

(IV) the Minority Leader of the Senate.

Such members shall be appointed by virtue of demonstrated expertise in relevant family, temporary disability, and labor management issues. Such members shall include representatives of employers, including employers from large businesses and from small businesses.

The Secretary of Health and Human Services, the Secretary of Labor, the Secretary of Commerce, and the Administrator of the Small Business Administration shall serve on the Commission as nonvoting ex officio members.

Any vacancy on the Commission shall be filled in the manner in which the original appointment was made. The vacancy shall not affect the power of the remaining members to execute the duties of the Commission.

The Commission shall elect a chairperson and a vice chairperson from among the members of the Commission.

Eight members of the Commission shall constitute a quorum for all purposes, except that a lesser number may constitute a quorum for the purpose of holding hearings.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §303, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 24.)

Members of the Commission shall serve without compensation.

Members of the Commission shall be allowed reasonable travel expenses, including a per diem allowance, in accordance with section 5703 of title 5 when performing duties of the Commission.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §304, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 25.)

The Commission shall first meet not later than 30 days after the date on which all members are appointed, and the Commission shall meet thereafter on the call of the chairperson or a majority of the members.

The Commission may hold such hearings, sit and act at such times and places, take such testimony, and receive such evidence as the Commission considers appropriate. The Commission may administer oaths or affirmations to witnesses appearing before it.

The Commission may secure directly from any Federal agency information necessary to enable it to carry out this subchapter, if the information may be disclosed under section 552 of title 5. Subject to the previous sentence, on the request of the chairperson or vice chairperson of the Commission, the head of such agency shall furnish such information to the Commission.

Upon the request of the Commission, the head of any Federal agency may make available to the Commission any of the facilities and services of such agency.

On the request of the Commission, the head of any Federal agency may detail any of the personnel of such agency to serve as an Executive Director of the Commission or assist the Commission in carrying out the duties of the Commission. Any detail shall not interrupt or otherwise affect the civil service status or privileges of the Federal employee.

Notwithstanding section 1342 of title 31, the chairperson of the Commission may accept for the Commission voluntary services provided by a member of the Commission.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §305, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 25.)

The Commission shall terminate 30 days after the date of the submission of the report of the Commission to Congress.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title III, §306, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 25.)

Nothing in this Act or any amendment made by this Act shall be construed to modify or affect any Federal or State law prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, religion, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability.

Nothing in this Act or any amendment made by this Act shall be construed to supersede any provision of any State or local law that provides greater family or medical leave rights than the rights established under this Act or any amendment made by this Act.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title IV, §401, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 26.)

This Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 103–3, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6, known as the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, which enacted this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amended section 2105 of Title 5, and enacted provisions set out as notes under section 2601 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2601 of this title and Tables.

Subchapter effective 6 months after Feb. 5, 1993, see section 405(b)(1) of Pub. L. 103–3, set out as a note under section 2601 of this title.

Nothing in this Act or any amendment made by this Act shall be construed to diminish the obligation of an employer to comply with any collective bargaining agreement or any employment benefit program or plan that provides greater family or medical leave rights to employees than the rights established under this Act or any amendment made by this Act.

The rights established for employees under this Act or any amendment made by this Act shall not be diminished by any collective bargaining agreement or any employment benefit program or plan.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title IV, §402, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 26.)

This Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 103–3, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6, known as the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, which enacted this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amended section 2105 of Title 5, and enacted provisions set out as notes under section 2601 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2601 of this title and Tables.

Nothing in this Act or any amendment made by this Act shall be construed to discourage employers from adopting or retaining leave policies more generous than any policies that comply with the requirements under this Act or any amendment made by this Act.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title IV, §403, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 26.)

This Act, referred to in text, is Pub. L. 103–3, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 6, known as the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, which enacted this chapter, sections 60m and 60n of Title 2, The Congress, and sections 6381 to 6387 of Title 5, Government Organization and Employees, amended section 2105 of Title 5, and enacted provisions set out as notes under section 2601 of this title. For complete classification of this Act to the Code, see Short Title note set out under section 2601 of this title and Tables.

The Secretary of Labor shall prescribe such regulations as are necessary to carry out subchapter I of this chapter and this subchapter not later than 120 days after February 5, 1993.

(Pub. L. 103–3, title IV, §404, Feb. 5, 1993, 107 Stat. 26.)


The Congress finds and declares the following:

(1) In an increasingly competitive world economy, the companies and nations that lead in the rapid development, commercialization, and application of new and advanced technologies, and in the high-quality, competitively priced production of goods and services, will lead in economic growth, employment, and high living standards.

(2) While the United States remains the world leader in science and invention, it has not done well in rapidly making the transition from achievement in its research laboratories to high-quality, competitively priced production of goods and services. This lag and the unprecedented competitive challenge that the United States has faced from abroad have contributed to a drop in real wages and living standards.

(3) Companies that are successfully competitive in the rapid development, commercialization, application, and implementation of advanced technologies, and in the successful delivery of goods and services, recognize that worker participation and labor-management cooperation in the deployment, application, and implementation of advanced workplace technologies make an important contribution to high-quality, competitively priced production of goods and services and in maintaining and improving real wages for workers.

(4) The Federal Government has an important role in encouraging and augmenting private sector efforts relating to the development, application, manufacture, and deployment of new and advanced technologies. The role should be to—

(A) work with private companies, States, worker organizations, nonprofit organizations, and institutions of higher education to ensure the development, application, production, and implementation of new and advanced technologies to promote the improvement of workers’ skills, wages, job security, and working conditions, and a healthy environment;

(B) encourage worker and worker organization participation in the development, commercialization, evaluation, selection, application, and implementation of new and advanced technologies in the workplace; and

(C) promote the use and integration of new and advanced technologies in the workplace that enhance workers’ skills.

(5) In working with the private sector to promote the technological leadership and economic growth of the United States, the Federal Government has a responsibility to ensure that Federal technology programs help the United States to remain competitive and to maintain and improve living standards and to create and retain secure jobs in economically stable communities.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §542, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4051.)

Section 541 of Pub. L. 103–382 provided that: “This part [part D (§§541–547) of title V of Pub. L. 103–382, enacting this chapter] may be cited as the ‘Workers Technology Skill Development Act’.”

The purposes of this chapter are to—

(1) improve the ability of workers and worker organizations to recognize, develop, assess, and improve strategies for successfully integrating workers and worker organizations into the process of evaluating, selecting, and implementing advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices in a manner that creates and maintains stable well-paying jobs for workers; and

(2) assist workers and worker organizations in developing the expertise necessary for effective participation with employers in the development of strategies and programs for the successful evaluation, selection, and implementation of advanced workplace technologies and advanced workplace practices through the provision of a range of education, training, and related services.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §543, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4052.)

This section is referred to in section 2704 of this title.

As used in this chapter:

The term “advanced workplace practices” means innovations in work organization and performance, including high-performance workplace systems, flexible production techniques, quality programs, continuous improvement, concurrent engineering, close relationships between suppliers and customers, widely diffused decisionmaking and work teams, and effective integration of production technology, worker skills and training, and workplace organization, and such other characteristics as determined appropriate by the Secretary of Labor, in consultation with the Secretary of Commerce.

The term “advanced workplace technologies” includes—

(A) numerically controlled machine tools, robots, automated process control equipment, computerized flexible manufacturing systems, associated computer software, and other technology for improving the manufacturing and industrial production of goods and commercial services, which advance the state-of-the-art; or

(B) novel industrial and commercial techniques and processes not previously generally available that improve quality, productivity, and practices, including engineering design, quality assurance, concurrent engineering, continuous process production technology, inventory management, upgraded worker skills, communications with customers and suppliers, and promotion of sustainable economic growth.

The term “Department” means the Department of Labor.

The term “nonprofit organization” means a tax-exempt organization, as described in paragraph (3), (4), or (5) of section 501(c) of title 26.

The term “Secretary” means the Secretary of Labor.

The term “worker organization” means a labor organization within the meaning of section 501(c)(5) of title 26.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §544, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4053.)

The Secretary of Labor, after consultation with the Secretary of Commerce, shall, to the extent appropriations are available, award grants to eligible entities to carry out the purposes described in section 2702 of this title.

To be eligible to receive a grant under this section, an entity shall—

(1) be a nonprofit organization, or a partnership consortium of such organizations;

(2) prepare and submit to the Secretary an application at such time, in such manner, and containing such information as the Secretary may require, including a description of the activities that the entity will carry out using amounts received under the grant; and

(3) agree to make available (directly or through donations from public or private entities) non-Federal contributions toward the costs of the activities to be conducted with grant funds, in an amount equal to the amount required under subsection (d) of this section.

An entity shall use amounts received under a grant awarded under this section to carry out the purposes described in section 2702 of this title through activities such as—

(1) the provision of technical assistance to workers, worker organizations, employers, State economic development agencies, State industrial extension programs, Advanced Technology Centers, and National Manufacturing Technology Centers to identify advanced workplace practices and strategies that enhance the effective evaluation, selection, and implementation of advanced workplace technologies;

(2) the researching and identification of new and advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices that promote the improvement of workers’ skills, wages, working conditions, and job security, that research the link between advanced workplace practices and long-term corporate performance, and which are consistent with the needs of local communities and the need for a healthy environment; and

(3) the development and dissemination of training programs and materials to be used for and by workers, worker organizations, employers, State economic development agencies, State industrial extension programs, Advanced Technology Centers, and National Manufacturing Technology Centers relating to the activities and services provided pursuant to paragraphs (1) and (2), and regarding successful practices including practices which address labor-management cooperation and the involvement of workers in the design, development, and implementation of workplace practices and technologies.

Grants awarded under this section shall be for a term not to exceed six years.

Amounts required to be contributed by an entity under subsection (b)(3) of this section shall equal—

(A) an amount equal to 15 percent of the amount provided under the grant in the first year for which the grant is awarded;

(B) an amount equal to 20 percent of the amount provided under the grant in the second year for which the grant is awarded;

(C) an amount equal to 33 percent of the amount provided under the grant in the third year for which the grant is awarded;

(D) an amount equal to 40 percent of the amount provided under the grant in the fourth year for which the grant is awarded; and

(E) an amount equal to 50 percent of the amount provided under the grant in the fifth and sixth years for which the grant is awarded.

The Department shall develop mechanisms for evaluating the effectiveness of the use of a grant awarded under this section in carrying out the purposes under section 2702 of this title and, not later than two years after October 20, 1994, and every two years thereafter, prepare and submit a report to Congress concerning such evaluation.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §545, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4053.)

The Secretary, in cooperation and after consultation with the Secretary of Commerce, shall assist workers, worker organizations, and employers in successfully adopting advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices by identifying, collecting, and disseminating information on best workplace practices and workplace assessment tools, including—

(A) methods, techniques, and successful models of labor-management cooperation and of worker and worker organization participation in the development, evaluation, selection, and implementation of new and advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices;

(B) methods, techniques, and successful models for the design and implementation of new and advanced workplace practices;

(C) methods, techniques, and successful models for the design and implementation of advanced forms of work organization; and

(D) methods, techniques, and successful models for the assessment of worker skills and training needs relating to the effective development, evaluation, selection, and implementation of advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices.

Such information on best workplace practices shall include—

(A) summaries and analyses of best practice cases;

(B) criteria for assessment of current workplace practices; and

(C) information on the best available education and training materials and services relating to the development, implementation, and operation of systems utilizing new and advanced workplace technologies, and advanced workplace practices.

The information and materials developed under this section shall be distributed through an appropriate entity designated by the Secretary of Commerce to the Regional Centers for the Transfer of Manufacturing Technology, to the Manufacturing Outreach Center, to other technology training entities, and directly to others as determined appropriate by the Secretary of Labor and the Secretary of Commerce.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §546, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4055.)

There are authorized to be appropriated to carry out this chapter such sums as may be necessary for each of the fiscal years 1995 through 1997.

Amounts appropriated under subsection (a) of this section shall remain available until expended.

(Pub. L. 103–382, title V, §547, Oct. 20, 1994, 108 Stat. 4055.)